LIBRARY: & BS 


OF THE ᾿ 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


: Cr LA ORE: 


| Received SWVOU  — , 18. 


Accessions No.A 33 “253. Class No. LY 


ΚΝ 


"ἢν 
4 


zed y the internet Archive 


a 


Genk Gramma 


‘HIGH SCHOOLS “AND UNIVERSITIES _ 


ease ay, PHILIP BUTTMANN. eae βς 
a ν ἢ: : 3 ᾿ ἘῸΝ “ By, * .— Ἂ : 


ΩΣ io 
BY EDWARD qe ee 


ie BLISHED, me vince, couLp, ax 


- 


SOG Teas. 
EP cae eS Te 
Ὁ 4 Υ ΐ 


Epwarp Rostxson, 
” “ims the Clerk 8 Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 


\ 


: Φ “4 
: 


Gd Αννα τὸ 
a ἢ ἘΝ μὺ i we © he 


PREFACE. 


Tue following biographical hints respecting the author of 
this work, will not perhaps be unacceptable to those who may 
make use of it; while they may help to form a juster estimate 
of the nature and relative character of the present Grammar, 
as compared with the other writings of the same author, and 
with the works of contemporary Grammarians. ‘The life of a schol- 
ar, and especially of a German scholar, is usually barren of in- 
cidents ; and it is chiefly the character and progress of his intellect- 
ual development, as exhibited in the various productions of ,his 
pen, that furnish the subjects and mark the epochs of his biography. 

Philip Charles Buttmann was born at Frankfort on the Maine, 
Oct. 5, 1764. After the usual preparation, he pursued his studies at 
the University of Gottingen ; not without distinction, it would seem, 
for we soon afterwards find him as, an instructor and governor in the 
family of the Prince of Anhalt Dessau. But he appears early to 
have preferred a life of private study ; avoiding in this way the re- 
sponsibilities and absorbing duties of a public teacher, and devoting 
himself without the abstractions of public obligation, to philological 
pursuits and investigations. With this view he fixed his’ residence 
at Berlin, where he lived for many years as a private citizen; and 
where, in the free use of the treasures of the royal library, and in 
social intercourse and interchange of views with Heindorf and Spal- 
ding, at that time distinguished professors in the Gymnasia of Berlin, 
he arrived at those results and adopted those principles, which he has 
spread before the world in his various grammatical and philological 
. treatises. The first edition of his Grammar appeared at Berlin in 
1792. In 1800 he was appointed a Secretary of the Royal Libra- 
ry, and became at a later period one of the principal Librarians. 
At the same time he accepted the appointment of Professor in one 
of the principal Gymnasia of Berlin, that of Joachimsthal. He be- 
came also an active member of the philological class in the Royal 
Academy of Sciences; and to this source we owe many of his smaller 
essays and treatises. On the establishment of the University of Berlin 
in 1809, he seems by choice not to have taken part in it as a reg- 


4 PREFACE. 


ular professor; but the excitement inspired by the establishment of 
so noble an institution, and daily intercourse with the corps of dis- 
tinguished scholars thus collected,—as Wolf, Niebuhr, Savigny, 
Schleiermacher, and at alater period Bekker, Bockh, etc.—impart-- 
ed new vigour to his exertions, and led him, if not to a wider range 

of study, yet. to the exhibition of greater-productive power, and to 

a more extensive communication of the results of his researches. 

As member of the Academy of Sciences, he enjoyed the privilege of 
delivering lectures or of otherwise imparting instruction in the Uni- 

versity ; and of this he availed himself in respect to the private phi- 

lological classes. With Wolf he engaged in the publication of the 

Museum Antiquitatis ; and several of the most solid articles of that 

work are from his pen. In 1816 he completed the edition of Quicn- 

tilian commenced by his friend Spalding, and left imperfect at his 
decease. In 1821 he gave to the public a new and enlarged edi- 

tion of the Scholia on the Odyssey, discovered by Angelo Maio. 

Several of his smaller treatises were afterwards collected and revised 

by himself, and published ‘in two volumes, entitled ‘‘ Mythologus,” 

Berlin 1827-29. 

But the great labour of his life lies before the world in his 
grammatical works; which, from a narrow beginning, have grown 
up into a wide and comprehensive system. His first work appear- 
ed, as mentioned above, in 1792, and was little more than an outline 
of the Greek accidence. In the subsequent editions he continued 
to interweave the results of his investigations; until the fourth 
edition assumed the character of a more complete and scientific 
treatise of Greek grammar. In this form it remained without any 
essential change of plan, but. not without important additions and 
improvements, until the publication of the twelfth edition in 1826. 
In the mean time he had published at an early period an abstract of 
this work, made from the sixth edition, for the use of lower schools 
and younger pupils, under the title of Schul-Grammatik. This small- 
er Grammar reached its eighth edition in 1826, during the author’s 
life-time ; and the ninth edition of it was issued in 1831, since his 
decease. ‘This is the work formerly translated and published in 
this country, under the name of Buttmann’s Grammar; of which it 
is not too much to say, that it disappointed the expectations of our 
more advanced scholars by its incompleteness and want of detail; 
while it was found not to answer among us the purposes of early 


\ PREFACE. 5 


instruction, because it already presupposes a certain amount of. el- 
ementary philological knowledge on the part of the pupil. The 
truth is, that the work was adapted to a mode of instruction entirely 
different from that prevalent in this country ; and was intended rath- 
er as a manual to guide the oral instructions and explanations of school- 
teachers in Germany, than as a book from which the pupil should him- 
self derive an acquaintance with the elements of Greek grammar. 

But the larger Grammar, in the course of its successive editions 
and enlargements, had become, to use the language of the author 
himself, ‘an intermediate thing between a school-book and a 
work of a higher scientific character.” In support of the views 
and principles embodied in it, the author had often felt it necessary 
to introduce critical discussions, which were foreign to the nature 
of such a work; and which contributed to swell its size, without 
adding to its value for those for whom it was more particularly de- 
signed. Hence, so early as the year 1816, he had entered upon 
the compilation of a more extensive and scientific grammatical work, 
a complete grammatical index or Thesaurus of the Greek language, 
which should embody the results of the labours of his life in a form 
adapted to the use of more advanced scholars. This is the Aus- 
fihrliche Sprachlehre, the “ Copious or Complete Greek Grammar,” 
so often referred to in the following pages. The first volume ap- 
peared in 1819; the second, in two parts, in 1825 and 1627. The 
second volume contains also a supplement of large additions and cor- 
rections to the first ; and a new edition of the first volume, including 
these corrections, was commenced during the author’s life, and fin- 
ished in 1830 after his decease. ‘This work, extensive as it is, em- 
braces only the part of grammar relating to the Forms of Words; 
the Syntax Buttmann did not live to Gomplete in the same full and 
‘scientific manner. | 

This Thesaurus everywhere exhibits, of course, critical discus- 
sions and investigations, which could not have place in the preced- 
ing work. Other similar discussions, which ‘did not properly fall 
within the plan even of the Thesaurus,—particularly those relating 
to the signification of words,—the author collected and published in 
᾿ a separate treatise entitled: ‘* Lexilogus, or Illustrations of Greek 
words, chiefly in Homer and Hesiod.” 'The first volume was pub- 
lished in 18183; and again, together with a second, in 1825. © This 
is often referred to in the following pages. 


6 PREFACE. 


The publication of these works afforded an appropriate occasion 
. for some change in the plan of the earliest, now become the interme- 
diate Grammar. Accordingly, in the twelfth edition, 1826, most of 
the merely critical discussions were omitted, while many additional 
results were introduced. In this way, too, room was gained for an 
extension of the Syntax. In the thirteenth and latest edition, 1829, 
these objects were further pursued and completed; and the work 
has thus become in form, that which it now professes to be in 
fact, viz. a body of results respecting the grammar of the Greek 
language, arranged with strict attention to philosophical system, as 
well as to accuracy, neatness, and perspicuity. Whoever consults 
this work, cannot fail to perceive, that its statements rest on the pro- 
found investigations of a penetrating, practical, and philosophic mind ; 
while the reasonings and documents by which these statements are 
supported, must in general be sought in the more copious works re- 
ferred to above. In the Syntax, however, this last remark applies 
with less force. ‘This part of grammar has not elsewhere been treat- 
ed of by Buttmann; and, as he himself remarks, would require a 
separate volume to do it justice. The Syntax-of the present work 
is a collection of general principles, perspicuously and philosophical- 
ly arranged, and accompanied in some parts with a sufficient copi- 
ousness of details ; while in other portions much is left to the judg- 
_ ment and discretion of the learner. The Syntax of Buttmann must 
not be estimated by that which has already appeared in this country 
under that name. In the following pages, the Syntax occupies more 
than double the space devoted to it in the smaller work. 

Buttmann was not a mere recluse,—a scholar acquainted only 
with books, and deriving his views and principles merely by way of 
inference from untried theories. Himself a teacher, and living in the 
midst of a great capital, in daily and social intercourse with eminent 
scholars and practical instructors, every thing he has written bears 
the impress of practical application and practical utility. His works 
everywhere exhibit comprehensive learning, united with perspi- 
cuity and terseness, and with that practical sagacity and tact which 
are essential to the success of every teacher. In this respect he 
differs widely from Matthiae ; whose Grammar is a vast mass of 
excellent materials, which the author has not known how to reduce 
to order and philosophic method. In another respect Buttmann dif- 
fers as widely from Thiersch, viz. in that he treats of the Greek lan- 


PREFACE. 7 


guage as it is found in the great body of Greek writers, with appro- 
_ priate reference to the historical changes which have taken place in 
it; while Thiersch has developed a theory of what he supposes the 
Greek must have been in the beginning, and strives to exhibit the 
subsequent language in conformity with this theory. Buttmann too 
has engrafted his own views and principles upon the general system 
and technical language of former Grammarians; while Thiersch has 
in a measure discarded former names and systems, and introdu- 
ces the pupil to a new nomenclature, if not to a new system of 
things. It may be matter of question with some, which of these 
methods is the most appropriate ; but there are probably few among 
practical scholars, who will not regard it asa merit in Buttmann, 
that he pursued such acourse. In Germany, the public voice would 
seem to have decided this and other like questions ; for while the 
Grammar of Buttmann has passed through thirteen large editions, the 
corresponding ones of Thiersch and Matthiae have as yet reached 
only the second. Of the similar work of Rost, three editions have 
appeared. It is a popular and useful compend of. Greek grammar, 
luminous in its arrangement and generally correct in its details ; but 
its statements are obviously the result of a less extensive and pro- 
tracted course of personal observation, than those of Buttmann. 
The latter years of Buttmann’s life were embittered by severe 
physical suffering. His body was racked by rheumatic affections, 
which deprived him in a great measure of the use of his limbs, and 
finally terminated his days, Jan. 21, 1829. For several preceding 
winters he had been confined to his house. The writer of these 
lines had the pleasure of an interview with him about a year before 
hisdeath. He was seated before a table in a large armed chair, bol- 
stered up with cushions, and with his feet on pillows ; before him was 
a book, the leaves of which his swollen and torpid hands were just 
able to turn over ; while amember of his family acted as amanuensis. 
_ That book was his earliest work, the intermediate Grammar. He 
was in this way preparing the thirteenth edition, which he lived just 
long enough to complete. It is this work, with these his last cor- 
rections, which is here presented to the American public. 


| In making this work accessible to his countrymen generally, the 
Translator hopes and believes, that he is doing service to the cause 
of Greek literature among us. This Grammar will go far to sup- 


8 PREFACE. ὦ 


ply a want, which has long been felt by those who have thirsted for 
deeper draughts of Grecian learning. Riper and more critical schol-. 
ars will indeed ever find the Thesaurus of Buttmann highly useful, 
85 also the voluminous Syntax of Matthiae ; but to all who need on- 
ly scientific results, without the processes of investigation, the pres- 
ent work cannot but prove amply satisfactory. The preceding ex- 
planations will show, in what sense this may be appropriately termed 
the Larger Grammar of Buttmann. 

The ‘Translator can ‘lay claim to no higher merit, than that of 
having endeavoured to give a faithful transcript of the original. A 
few additions have been silently made from the author’s other works ; 
and occasionally a note or explanation which seemed necessary, has 
been subjoined, to which the signature of the Translator is affixed. 
It must not, however, be imagined, that the translation of such 
a work from the German is without its peculiar difficulties. A 
Greek phrase or particle may often be happily illustrated by a 
German idiom, to which there is no corresponding one in English ; 
while not unfrequently that may be exemplified by a single word or 
phrase in English, which requires a circumlocution in German. 
In all such cases, the Translator has endeavoured to exercise his 
best judgment ; and it is hoped, that the learner will not have occa- 
sion for complaint in this respect. 

The correction of the proofs has also required great labour. 
In this much assistance has been rendered by several young gen- 
tlemen connected with the Theological Seminary ; particularly by 
Mr H. B. Hackett, late Tutor in Amherst College, and Mr D. 
Crosby, Professor elect of Languages in Dartmouth College; from 
both of whom the public have a right to expect much in future, for 
the advancement both of classical and of sacred learning in our coun- 
try. 

It may be proper to add, that the following translation was com- 
pleted in the year 1829, during the residence of the Translator in 


Germany. 


: EDWARD ROBINSON. 
Theol. Sem. Andover, 
May, 1833. 


“CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Srcr. 


1. Generar View or THE GREEK LaneuaGeE ‘AND 118 DiaLEctTs 
> 


Paces 
13 


PART I. 


ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 


PaaeE. | Sect. 
Letters anp PrRonvunNcIATION. 15. Marks or InrerpuncTion, Etc. 44 
2. Greek Alphabet 16. Mutations or THE Consonants 45 
3. Pronunciation .. 17. Aspirates 47 
4. Division of the Letters. —Vowels, 18, Laws of Aspirates 47 
Consonants 19. Accumulation of Consonants 48 
5. Diphthongs 26 | 20. Juxtaposition of Mutes 49 
“6, Breathings, (Spiritus asper ‘et 21. Doubling of Consonants 50 
lenis,) 27 | 92. Double Letters 50 
7. Prosopy .. : 29 | 23. Consonants pare ὠ 51 
8. Accents. 36 | 24. Linguals 51 
9. Kinds of Accents 37 |25. The Consonant » 51 
10. Words named from the Accents 38 | 26. Moveable final Letters 52 
11. Place of the Accents : 38.197. MuraTions,or THE VOWELS 54 
12. Changes of the Accents 40 | 28. Contraction ν᾿ ; μ 57 
15: do. do. a 41 | 29. Hiatus.—Crasis 60 
14. Enclitics . . 42 1830. Apostrophe . 62 
PART II. 
GRAMMATICAL FORMS AND FLEXION OF WORDS. 
31. Parts or Sprxcu. 64 | 36. Contracted’Form of Dec. II. 71 
37. Attic Dec. II. 72 
NOUNS. 38. Turrp Ducrension. “a eveaidis 73 
32. GenDER 64 +39. Flexion ὃ , : 74 
33.- DEcLENSION 65 | 40. Saeeee ae Root Ἧ ΩΝ 
π 41. Changes before Case-en ings 7 
: 34. First ΠΕΟΙΈΝΘΙΟΝ 67 42. do. do. do. continued 17 
, 35. Szconp Decixension 70 | 43. Flexion : ἶ : ; 78 


10 CONTENTS. 
Srcr. Pace | Secr. Pace 
44, Accusative Singular 80 VERBS. 
45. Vocative . κ 81 81. M ap 
46 Dative Plaral 82 - Moops anv Tensrs.—Divis- 
47. Syncope of Words in 10: 83 sion of the Tenses - 198 
48, Contracted Third Declension. 82.. Avement.—Syllabic 129 
—Gen. in -o¢ pure 85. 83. Syllabic Augment, continued 131’ 
49. First Form of Contraction— | 84. Temporal Augment 132 
Words in 7s, ete. 84] 85. Attic Reduplication - 435 
50. Second Form of Caritkation: "ἜΣ 86. Augment of Compound Verbs 136 
Words in vg, etc. . 85] 87. Consugation. By Number 
51. Attic Genitive, etc. 86 and Person 137 
52. Third Form of Contraction.- - 88. —— by Moods and Partici- 
Words in évg | ; Te ΚΟΥ, ples 139 
53. Attic contracted Forms 88] 89. —— by Active, Passive, 
54. Fourth Form of Contraction.— and Middle - 41 
Neutersinas . | 89} 90 by Tenses 144 
55. Contracted Form of Compara- 91. Characteristic 144 
tives in wy, ov 90} 92. Double Themes 145 
56. Anomatovus DECLENSION . 99| 93. Formation or tHe Tenses 150 
57. Nouns Defective and Andecli- 94. General Rules of Formation 151 - 
nable 94} 95. Future Active 152 " 
δα. et Contre ὧν Avom aoa 96. Fuss and Second Aopat ‘Ac- ‘ie 
- ive 5 
poene : ; 96 97. First and Second Perfect. ‘Ac- 
tive : 162 
dtl stay 98. Perfect Passive . “S166 
59. Terminations 102] 99. Third Future ’ 169 
60. Reade os, of three and 102| 100. First and Second Aorist Pas- 
61 οὐδ τ Ἷε hap isp 104 sive . 169 
62. Other Adjentvep of three End- 101. Verzsin ὁ wv 9 171 
ings 104} 102. Verspatsin tréog and τὸς 175 
63. Adjectives of two Endings, and 103. Parapiems or BARYTONE 
of one Ending 105 VERBS 176 
64. Anomalous and Defective ‘Aa- Paradigm of tells ‘vPéolion: 
. jectives , 107 ~ inary Notes ΓΕ ef 
65. Danes OF ὀπῶν 108 Synoptical Table 178 
. Particular Forms of Comparison 109 Active 180 
67. Comparison by wy,coros . 110 Passive 182 
68. Anomalous Comparison 110 Middle 184 
69. Defective Comparison 112 Paradigms of other Barytone 
70. Nomerats.—Cardinal Numbers 113 Verbs. 186 
71. Ordinals and other Numerals 115 Paradigm of Verbs 2 μ » ¢ 194 
| Notes onallthe Paradigms 196 
PRONOUNS. 104. Usual and Unusual Tenses 201 
72. Susstantive anp Possessive 116] 105. Conrracrzp Consucation 205 
73. The Pronoun δεῖνα 119 Paradigm 206 
74. Ansrctive Pronouns 119 Notes 212 
75. The Articles 190 | 106. InreeuLaR οὐ δυ λεῖον. -- 
76. Demonstrative Pronouns 122 VERBS IN we 9210 
77. Interrogative Pronouns 123 | 107. Paradigms of Verbs in pore 
78. Correlative Pronouns ‘om Ad- Notes . ‘ 220 
jectives . 124 | 108. Anomalous Verbs in μὲ 230 
79. SpecialCorrelatives 125 I. mut, cast 230 
80. Paragogic Particles 127 II. sion, nua, sit 232 


CONTENTS. 11 
Sxcr. Pace | Srcr. Pace 
III. has clothe 232 
IV. « cr am 933 PARTICLES. 
V. εἶμι, ΗΠ re See hae 234 | 115. Prepositions and Adverbs 309 
109. Other Irregular Verbs 238 | 116. Correlative Particles mts ἧς ORD 
I. φημί, 1 say 238 117. Mutations of some Particles. 
' I. xstuos, 1 recline 239 —Anastrophe 317 
III. οἶδα, 1 know 239 
4 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
Anomaty or VERBS. 118. D 
110. tae and Metathesis 242 119- ce G Endi 319 
111. New Themes from the Tenses 249 ee ψ:}:8 ings. 320 
112. Changes of the Theme BOE Te ae cannes, μη ὦ a 
113. ANoMALY oF SIGNIFICATION. 
: Σ III. Adjectives ‘ 330 
Causative and Immediate 256 IV. Adverbs : 339 
114. Caratocusr or [RREGULAR 120. Derivation by Composition 333 
VERBS — 261 | 121. Species of SPDR TT 
areca Notes 261 Accents 336 
atalogue 263 
PART III. 
SYNTAX. 
122. Definition 341{ 138. Third Future ὁ 7 383 
NOUN AS INDEPENDENT. 139. Moons .—Optative and Sub- 
123. General Principles 341 serene ries 
140. Tue InFinitive. —Goneral 
124. Preposirive ARTICLE 342 Clonetrdetion 391 
soe The Art hea ceoet 344 | 141. Infinitive with its Subject + 393 
. The Art. 0, 7, τό, as Demon- 142. with Cases.—A ttraction 394 
strative.—The μόνο μας ἢ Art. . 
ὅς, ts ἢ 4 346 | 143. ConsrRucTION WITH THE Re- 
127. Pronouns. κοὐ oat πᾶς 349 LATIV RAS nds 
128. Neuter Adjectives 352. 144, ὰ with THE ParticipLe 400 
NOUN IN CONSTRUCTION. YA: Onan chpepe ene ie 
129. Sussect anp PrepicaTE 353 τ τς PARTICLES. 
130. Ossect.—Oxstieue Cases 357 | 146. Adverbs, ete. 407 
131. Accusative y : 359 | 147. Prepositions 3 4 409 
132.. Genitive ‘ : 362 | 148. Negative Particles, ov ὦ and μη. 415 
133. Dative war ‘ 367 | 149. Other Particles. Expletives, ἘΝ 
etc. ὶ 
VERBS. 
: 4 
134. Tue Passtve—Verbals i in τέος ss hci ΒΉΒΑΙΝΝ bs 
151. Ip1iomatic Forms or Con- 
and τός F : 370 SP κεδωως 443 
135. Tas Mippie oF 373 I. Attraction Ἷ Σ 443 
136. Perfect and Aorist Passive as 446 
II. Anacoluthon 
Middle . 376 III. Inversion ‘ ‘ 443 
137. Tue Taxszs:—Aotlat 377 IV. Ellipsis . τον" 448 


12 CONTENTS. 
: ; PAGE. 
APPENDIX A. Versiricatrion . , , : τ ἃ πρὶ Ghee 451 
i B. History or tHE Greek ALPHABET ᾿ 3 4 459 


Z ; ‘ 
ae C.-Tasies or Worps ror Deciension AnD ConsuaaTion 468 


— D. CataLocux or Recurar Verss ἡ . ‘ ; : 468 

{. Barytone Verbs ; re ee ae a . - 469 

" : II. Contracted Verbs ; ; . : : 473 

—— ο Ε΄ Tecunican Grammaticat Expressions. . : 475 

I. Greek ᾿ - 5 : * j " . 475 

II. English Se ieee τὰ x are ‘eee me. 

— Ἐς CuHaracters AND ABBREVIATIONS IN WRITING . ; 478 
GREEK INDEX ὰ A 5 Fa AS il é 480 ᾿ 

\ ‘ 
ENGLISH INDEX e 


e ν᾿ Φ © a 489 


INTRODUCTION. 


/ 


§ 1. GENERAL View of THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITs DIALECTs. 


1. The Greek language (φωνὴ “ZiAnvixy) was anciently spread 
abroad not only over Greece, but also over a large portion of Asia 
. Minor, Southern Italy, Sicily, and still other regions, where there were 
Greek colonies. Like all other languages, it had its various dialects 
(διάλεκτοιν, all of which however may be referred back to two principal 
ones, viz. the Doric (7) “ωρική, Δωρίς) and the Donic (ἡ ᾿]ωνική, 
᾿ς), which belonged to the two great Grecian tribes of the like names. 

2. The Doric tribe was the largest, and sent abroad the most colonies. 
Hence the Doric dialect prevailed in the whole interior of Greece, in 
Italy, and in Sicily. It was harsher, and made upon the ear, in conse- 
quence of the predominant long α, an impression which the Greeks call 
πλατειάσμός, broad pronunciation.* It was on the whole a less culti- 
vated dialect. A’ branch of it was the Aeolic (ἡ Aiodcxn, Aiodis) ; 
which, particularly in the Aeolic colonies of Asia Minor and the neigh- 
bouring islands (Lesbos, etc.) arrived early at a considerable degree of 
refinement. This however did not probably extend beyond the limits 
of poetry. . 

3. The Ionic tribe in the earlier ages chiefly inhabited Attica, and 
sent out from thence colonies to the coasts of Asia Minor. These colo- 
nies took the lead both of the mother tribe and of all the other Greeks 
in general improvement ; and hence the names Ionians and Ionic came 
to be applied chiefly, and at last exclusively, to them and their dialect ; 
while the original Ionians in Attica were now called Attics and Athe- 
nians.—The Ionic’ dialect is the softest of all, in consequence of its 
many vowels. The Attic (ἡ Artexn, Aris) which also was after- 
wards cultivated, soon surpassed in refinement all the other dialects ; 
avoiding with Attic elegance and address both the harshness of the Do- 
ric and the softness of the Ionic. But although the Attic tribe was the 


* See § 27. note 5. 
. 3° - 


14 § 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


real mother-tribe, yet the Ionic dialect of these Asiatic colonies is 
_ regarded as the mother of the Attic dialect ; inasmuch as it was culti- 
vated at the period when it varied least from the old Ionic, the common 
source of both. 


Nore 1. The elegance and address of the Attie dialect is most visible 
in the Syntax, where it is distinguished, not only above all the other dia- 
lects, but also above all other languages, by an appropriate conciseness, by 
a most effective arrangement of the constituent parts, and by a certain . 
moderation in asserting and judging, which passed over from the polite 
tone of social intercourse into the language itself. 

Nore 2. Another source of the charm of the Attic language lies, where 
very few look for it, in its individuality ; and in the feeling of affection for 
this and for nationality in general, which the Attic writers possessed. 
However well adapted for the-understanding, and for the internal and ex- 
ternal sense of beauty a language may be, which every where exhibits a 
correct logic, follows a regular and fixed analogy, and employs pleasing 
sounds, still all these advantages are lifeless without the charm of indi- 
viduality. This however consists wholly in occasional sacrifices of these 
fundamental laws, especially of logic and general analogy, in favour of 
idioms or modes of speech which have their source partly in certain traits 
of national character, and partly also incontestibly in an apprehension of 
those ground rules, not exactly conformed to the usage of the schools. 
In this way anomalous forms of expression had arisen in the Attic, as in 
every other language; and these the cultivated writers did not wish to 
change, out of respect to antiquity and for the ear of the people, which had 
now become accustomed to such forms and turns of expression; and also, 
as above remarked, out of a cherished regard to individuality. When in 
other languages irregularities of style occur, we see at once that they 
result from inaccuracy or want of skill; while among the Attics, who are 
80 distinguished for address and skill, we perceive that they did not wish 
to make the correction. Indeed they felt, that by removing anomalies 
they should deprive their language of the stamp of a production of nature, 
which every language really is ; and thus give it the appearance of a work 
of art, which a language never can become. It follows here of course, 
that intentional anomalies, by which a language is made to assume the 
appearance of a mere plaything, can never be taken into the account ; 
however ready the older grammarians often were with this convenient 
mode of explanation. | 

Nore 3. Other minor branches of these dialects, such as the Boeotic, 
Laconic, Thessalian, etc. ‘are known only from single words and forms, 
and through scattered notices, inscriptions, ete. 


4. As the common source of all the dialects, we must assume an 
ancient original Greek language ; of which, however, it is only through 
philosophical investigation, that any definite forms of words can be 
made out, or, to speak more correctly, presupposed. Each dialect 
naturally retained more or less out of this ancient language; and, with- 
out doubt, each for itself must have continued to possess from it much 
that was by degrees lost in the others. In this single consideration we 


Νὰ, i 


§ 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 15. 


have at once an easy explanation, how the Grammarians can talk of 
Doricisms, Aeolicisms, and even Atticisms, in the old Ionic Greek of 
Homer. Generally, however, it was customary to call that which was 
usual or frequent in any one dialect, by the name of that dialect ; even 
when it happened to occur in the others. In this way must be ex- 
plained, e. g. the so called Doricisms in Attic writers, and the Attic 
forms in writers who otherwise did not employ the Attic dialect.* 

5. To the same ancient language belong also, for the most part, the 
so called poetic forms and licenses. It is indeed true that the poet 
contributes to the formation of a language; and that through him a 
language first becomes cultivated, i. 6. is formed to a melodious, expres- 
sive, copious whole. Nevertheless, the poet does not derive the innova- 
tions, which he finds necessary, simply from himself; for this would be 
the surest way to displease. The earliest Greek bards merely selected 
according to their wants from the variety of actual forms, which they 
found already existing. _Many of these forms became obsolete in com- 
mon usage; but the later poet, who had these old bards before his eyes, 
was not disposed to yield his right to these treasures. In this way, that 
which was originally a real idiom of the language, came to be poetic 
license, and is therefore properly to be reckoned among the dialects. 

Nore 4. This is however not to be so understood, as if every single word 
which occurs in the older poets, was also once used in common life. The 
privilege, which also the modern poet even in the most copious language 
retains, of forming new words and of remodelling old ones, must have . 
belonged in a still wider extent to the ancient bard in those times of 
poverty. His only restriction was, that the material from which, and the 
form in which, he modelled his innovations, must be drawn not from him- 
self, but from the existing stores and analogies of the language. Of course 
also the right of softening down the usual forms, which belongs even to 
the man of common life, cannot be denied to him in whom melody is a 
duty, and who is moreover fettered by metre. 


6. In all cultivated nations, some one of their dialects usually 
becomes the foundation of the common written language, and of the 
language of good society. Among the Greeks this was not at first the , 
case. ‘They began to improve in culture, while they were yet divided 
into several different states, separated both by geographical position and 
by political relations. Hence, until about the time of Alexander, each 
writer employed the dialect in which he had been educated, or that 
which he preferred; and thus were formed Ionic, Aeolic, Doric, and 
Attic poets and prose writers, of whose productions more or less are 
still extant. 


* E. g. The Doric future in σοῦμαι, ξοῦμαι ; the Attic form of declension in 
ὡς etc. the ‘ Attic’ ξέν for σύν, and the like. See notes 10, 13, below. 


- 


16 § 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


Nore 5. Only the great works of poetic art, which excited universal 
attention, such as epic and dramatic poetry, constitute here an exception. 
The first authors in these walks, it is true, made use of the dialect of their 
own country ; but still, an imitation of them in any other dialect,—not to 
say that this would have required an almost equal degree of creative 
talent,—would not have been successful; because the Greeks of all the 
tribes were now familiarized to these sounds i in this species of composition, 
and were no longer able to separate the one from the other. That dialect, 
therefore, in which the first master-pieces of any particular species were 
written, remained the dialect of that species. See Text 10, 11. 


Note 6. To the Ionic dialect belong the earliest poets, Homer, Hesiod, 
Theognis, etc. whose language nevertheless has more of that apparently 
mixed character, which approaches nearest to the ancient language, and 
which afterwards continued to mark the language of poetry in most of its 
species. The proper though later Ionic is found in the prose writers, of 
whom Herodotus and ‘Hippocrates are the principal ; though both were 
of Doric origin. ‘The Ionic dialect had already in their time acquired, in 
consequence gf its peculiar softness and early culture, a certain degree of 
universality, especially in Asia Minor, even beyond the limits of poetry. 


Nore 7. Among the poets of that period, the lyric writers were at home 
in all the dialects. The earliest and most celebrated were the Aeolic lyric 
poets; and of these the chief were Sappho and Alcaeus; from whom, 
however, only a few fragments have come down to us. Anacreon sung in 
Ionic; of him also we have only a few remains, and these partly mere 
fragments, and partly of doubtful authenticity. The other lyric writers 
were mostly Doric; and each created at will, as it were, his own lan- 
guage, out of the copious variety of forms in this widely extended dialect. 
Of these last, Pindar is the only one from whom any thing entire has come 
down to us. 

Nore 8. Of Doric prose there is very little still extant, and that chiefly 
relating to mathematics and philosophy.—For the Altic writers, see the 
following notes, 


7. In the mean time, Athens had raised herself to such a pitch of 
political importance, that for a while’she exercised a sort of sovereignty 
(ἡγεμονία) in Greece; and at the same time became the centre of all 
literary and scientific culture. ‘The democratic constitution, which was 
no where else so pure, secured to the popular eloquence of Athens, and 
to the Attic stage, entire freedom; and this it was, in connexion with 
other advantages, which raised to the highest point of perfection not 
only these two branches of literature, but also the sister ones of history 
and philosophy; and at the same time gave to the Attic language a 


completeness and a comprehensiveness, to which no other dialect 
attained. 


Nore 9. The principal prose writers of this golden period of Attic lite- 
rature are Thucydides, Xenophon, Lysias, Isocrates, Demosthenes, and the 
other Orators. For the Attic poets, see 10 and note 14. 


§ 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 17 


8. Greeks from all the tribes repaired now to Athens to obtain an 
education; and even in those parts of literature which were most culti- 
vated, the Athenian master-pieces were yet considered as models. The 
consequence was, that the Attic dialect, which now took rank of all the 
others, became, in those kingdoms which arose out of the Macedonian 
monarchy, both the court language and the general language of books ; 
and was henceforth almost exclusively employed by the prose writers of 
all the Grecian tribes and countries. This language was now also 
taught in the schools; and the Grammarians decided, according to 
those Attic models, what was pure Attic, and what was not. The cen- 
tral point of this later Greek literature, however, formed itself under the 
Ptolemies at Alexandria in Egypt. 

9. Along with this universality of the Attic dialect, began also the 
period of its gradual decay. On the one hand, writers mingled with 
the Attic much that was derived from the dialect of their own country ; 
on the other, instead of anomalies peculiar to the Athenians and expres- 
sions which seemed far-fetched, they employed the natural and regular 
formation ; or, instead of a simple primitive word which had fallen more 
or less into disuse in common life, they introduced a derived one which 
was now more usual.*, This the Grammarians (this class of whom are 
called Afticistst) sought to hinder, often indeed with pedantry and 
“exaggeration ; and proposed in their books, over against those expres- 
sions which they censured or accounted less elegant, others selected 
from the older Attic writers. And thus arose the usage, that the term 
Attic was understood to include only that which was sanctioned by the 
authority of those early classic writers, and, in a stricter sense, that 
which was peculiar to them; while, on the other hand, the ordinary 
language of cultivated society, derived as it was from the Attic, was now 
called xovv7, common, or ᾿ λληνική, Greek, i. 6. common Greek; and r 
even the writers of? this later period were now called οὗ xovvoi or oi 
“Ἕλληνες, in opposition to the genuine Attics. Here however we are 
never to imagine a peculiar dialect; for this xovvn διάλεκτος, in all its 
principal characteristics, was and continued to be the Attic ; and conse- 
quently every ordinary Greek grammar has the Attic language for its 
chief object. 


Nore 10. It ‘is easy to conceive, that under these circumstances the 
appellation xowdc, κοινόν, became a term of censure ; and that although it 
strictly signifies that which was common to all the Greeks, the genuine 
‘Attics themselves included, yet in the mouth of the Grammarians it desig- 
nated that which was not pure Altic. On the other hand, however, that 


* EB. g. νήχεσϑαι for νεῖν to swim, ἀροτριᾷν for ἀροῦν to plough. 
| E.g. Phrynichus, Moeris, Thomas Magister. 


18 § 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


which was called Attic, was not all for that reason exclusively. of the pure 
Attic form, not even among the genuine Attics themselves. Many an 
Attic idiom was not entirely usual even in Athens, but alternated with 
other forms in general use, e.g. qidoiy with φιλοῖ, ξύν with σύν. Many 
Tonic forms were also not unusual among the Attics, (6. g. uncontracted 
forms instead of contracted ones,) of which therefore the writers, who 
every where consulted their ear, could avail themsélves: Nevertheless, 
this approach to the Ionic furnishes the chief criterion of the earlier Attic 
in the strictest sense ; in which e. g. Thucydides wrote ; while Demosthe- 
nes belongs to the later Attic, which forms the transition to the χοινοί. 


Nore 11. To draw an exact and appropriate line of division, we must 
make the later period, or the zowo/, begin with the earliest of those au- 
thors who wrote Attic without being themselves Athenians. Here belong 
Aristotle, Theophrastus, Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch, and the other later 
writers ; among whom nevertheless were many who ‘strove with great 
diligence to make the earlier Attic language their own; as was the case 
particularly with Lucian, Aelian, and Arrian. 

Nore 12. Among the dialects of the provinces, which mingled them- 
selves to a considerable degree with the later Greek, the Macedonian. is 
particularly conspicuous. ‘The Macedonians were a nation related to the 
Greeks, and reckoned themselves to the Doric tribe. As conquerors, they 
therefore introduced the Greek culture into the barbarous countries which 
they ruled. Here also the Greek language was now spoken and written; 
but not without peculiarities, which the Grammarians designate as Mace- 
donic forms ; and as the principal seat of this later Greek culture was in 
Egypt, and in Alexandria its capital, the same forms are included also un- 
der the name of the Alexandrine dialect.—Moreover the other inhabitants 
of such conquered countries, who were not Greeks by birth, began now 
also to speak Greek (“EAAnvigewv) ; and hence an Asiatic, a Syrian, etc. who 
thus spoke Greek, was called “Ἑλληγιστής. From this circumstance. has 
arisen the modern usage, according to which the language of such writers, 
mixed as it is with many forms that are not Greek and with many ori- 
ental idioms, is called the Hellenistic language: It is easy to conceive, 
that the chief seat of this language is to be found in the Greek works of 
Jews and Christians of that age, viz. in the version of the Old 'Testament 
by the Seventy, and in the New Testament ; whence it passed more or 
less into the works of the Fathers.—New barbarisms of every kind were 
introduced in the middle ages, when Constantinople, the ancient Byzan- 
tium, became the capital of the Greek empire and the centre of the con- 
temporary literature; and hence arose the language of the Byzantine 
writers, and finally the present modern Greek. 

Nore 13. In reading the ancient Grammarians, and also many of the 
modern ones, who have built only upon the authority of the former, it is 
necessary to bear in, mind, in order to prevent misapprehension, that they 
very frequently employ the names of the dialects in general, and especially 
the term xo.vdc, without any regard to their true historical meaning. This 
takes place particularly, where they undertake to develope etymologically 
and grammatically the peculiar forms of words and of inflexion which 
occur. In such cases they give to the simple and natural ground-form, 
(or what appears so to them,) the name κοινός ; but to every form arising 


§ 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 19 


out of this by any variation, be it used lay no matter what tribe, or be it 
merely assumed, they give the name of that dialect to which such varia- 
tion in general is usually ascribed. Thus they call every contraction At- 
tic ; every change of α into ἡ, Ionic; and the like. So from πόλις, the 
Gen. πόλιος they call κοινῶς, although this form was never in common use ; 
the Gen. πόλεος they call Ionic, because the Ionics also elsewhere insérted 
é instead of other vowels ; and the Gen. πόλεως they referred to the Attic, 
because of the tain ator ὡς, which is indeed a form more usual with the 
Attics ;—while the historic truth is, that πόλιος belonged to the Ionics and 
Dorics, πόλεος only to the poets, and πόλεως not only to the Attics, but also 
to all the χοιγοί, And thus often in the case of a form which is derived 
from another more simple one, they deduce it through several other inter- 
mediate forms, each of which they assign to ‘some dialect, although very 
frequently not one of them was ever in actual use. 

10. In this general prevalence of the Attic dialect, however, poetry 
formed an important exception. Here the Attics were models only in 
one department, viz. the dramatic. Since now dramatic poetry in its 
very nature, eyen in tragedy, can only be the elevated language of real 
life, it was natural that on the Attic stage only the Attic dialect should 
be admitted ; and this was afterwards retained by all the other Greek 
theatres.* The dramatic poets moreover, in those parts of the drama 
which consisted of dialogue, and especially in those composed of trime- 
ters or senarii, allowed themselves, with the exception of a freer use of 
apostrophe and contraction, only a very few of the so called ‘poetic 
licenses and exchanges of forms. 


Nore 14. The comic poets did this least of all, as one would easily 
suppose. On the other hand, the tragic senarius readily adopted many 
Homeric forms.—It is however to be remarked, that in the department of 
the drama, only the works of genuine and early Attic writers have come 
down to us; viz. the tragedians Aschylus, Sophocles, Euripides; and the 
comic writer Aristophanes. 


11. For the remaining species of poetry, especially those which were 
composed in hexameters, as the epic, didactic, and elegiac, Homer and 
the other old Ionic poets who were read in the schools, continued to be 
the models; and along with them, the old Ionic or Homeric language 
continued also in vogue, with most of its peculiarities and obsolete 
forms. This became therefore, (just as the Attic for prose,) the pre- 
vailing dialect or universal language for these species of poetry; and 
remained current even in the Alexandrine and later ages, when it was 
no longer understood by the common people, but a learned education 
was necessary to the full understanding and enjoyment of such poetry. 
All that belongs under this head may be best included under the name 
of epic language; since it took its rise wholly from epic poetry. 


* See note 5, above. 


20 § 1. GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


Nore 15. The most celebrated poets of this class are, in the Alexan- 
drine period, Apollonius, Callimachus, Aratus; and later, Nicander, Op- 
pian, Quintus, etc. 

12. In the mean time, the Doric dialect was not entirely excluded 
from poetry, even in the later periods. It maintained itself in some of 
the minor species, especially in rural] and sportive poems; partly be- 
catse there were even here certain earlier models; and partly also 
because, in many of these poems, it was essential to imitate the tone 
and language of the countryman and of the lower classes, whose dialect 
was almost every where the Doric, in consequence of the very general 
spread of the Doric tribe. Comp. 2 above. 

Note 16. Hence the works of the idyllic writers, Theocritus, Bion, and 
Moschus, are Doric ; but their later Doric differs much from that of Pin- 
dar. The ancient epigrams were partly Ionic, partly Doric ; but the Do- 
ric was here far more simple and dignified, and confined itself to a small 
number of characteristic Doric forms, which were familiar to the educated 
poets of every tribe. . 

13. It remains to observe, that the language employed in the lyric - 
parts of the drama, as the choruses and passages of deep emotion, is 
also generally called Doric. This Doric however consists of little more 
than the prevalence of the long @, especially for ἡ, which belonged 
generally. to the old language, and was retained in solemn poetry on 
account of its dignity, while in common life it remained current only 
among the Dorians.* In other respects this lyric dialect approached 
‘also, in many particulars, to the epic language above described. 


* See 2 above. Besides the long α for 7, this is true only of genitives in a, 
as ΠΠηλείδα, * Aide, and also those in ἄν, as Νυμφᾶν, Movoay, ete. Doricisms 
in the strict sense, however, are not to be found in these theatrical choruses; 
viz. infinitives in ev and ἡ», accusatives plur. in ὡς and og, and the like. 


PART I. 


ee ‘ 


ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 
Lerrers anp PronunciaTion. 


§ 2. Alphabet. 


The Greeks received their alphabet mostly from the Phenicians, 
as 1s evident from the oriental names of the letters; see Appendix B. 
The following is the Greek alphabet. : 


Pronounced. " ‘Name. Numeral Value. 
A α ain far Αἴλφα alpha peel 
B BO δ ἢ Byre beta 2 
δ yf ghard 7}Ἶὲθἅμμα gamma 3 
A ὃ α Aghta delta 4 
Ε é e in met "E ψιλόν epsilon* 5 $6 
Z ¢ ds. Ζῆτα zeta a f 
wR ig einthyt+ τα eta 8 
Θ 0,0 th sharp Θῆτα theta 9 
71 b ὦ in machine "lore iota 10 
K κ k Kenna kappat 20 
A a I “Ἰἀμβδα lambda i 30 
IN Ψ n Nu nu 50 
po E apt Be aga 60 
O 0° o short Ὃ μικρὸν omicron,i.e. short ου 70 
Tt anw.p ‘ Ws pi 80 490 
Ys) 0p. oe ‘Po rho " 100 
=,C σις. ssharp Siyuo sigma 200 
i ΔῸΣ cine Tov tau 300 
Lr υ uFrench ΤΥ ψιλόν upsilon* 400 
Φ φ Ua Di phi 500 
X 4 \chguttural Xz chi 600, 
Ὁ ον Ἧι Pi psi 700 
§2 ω o long ΟἾΩ μέγα oméga, i.e. long ο. 800,7 900. 


“E ψιλόν and*Y ψιλόν have the epithet ψιλόν, i.e. lene, not aspirated, 
because in the earlier forms of the Greek alphabet, the figure of the ¢ was at the 
same time one of the marks-to denote the rough breathing (h) ; and the v was at 
the same time one of the modes of writing the digamma (or Lat. v, see § 6. n.3). 
In order to distinguish them as vowels from these two aspirates, this epithet was 
always subjoined. Comp. Appendix B. ᾿ 

t The sound of 7 is strictly that of the long continental 6, like the English 
in hate.—Tr. 

{ In Greek writers the name Sey is often found for 2, and also Kéaze for K, 
although both these were originally different letters ; see on the next page, note 3 
and ref ¢; also Appendix B. : 


22 | δ 2. ALPHABET. 


Nore 1. The double forms of some of the letters given above, are used 
without distinction, excepting o and ¢ of the small alphabet: o is used 
only at the beginning and in the middle of words, and ¢ only at the end of 
words.* The latter is not to be confounded with ¢; see the next note, 


Nore 2. From these letters have been formed a multitude of abbreviations. 
and combinations ; some of which occupy more space than the original letters 
themselves. In modern times, the use of these has been much diminished ; 
and in recent editions few are used beyond the following, viz. 


εἰ ὧν δἰ.  & for ov — GS for og ς΄ for ott 
oo for ob ον for σχ ὃ for yao % for xa, 


In several the letters are scarcely altered; e.g. ay for av, M for AA, etc. 
For'a full exhibition of other abbreviations, see Appendix F. 


Nore 3. The Greeks employed the letters of their alphabet also as 
numeral figures ; but in order to have enough, they added still three other 
figures or Episema (ἐπίσημα), viz. after « the ς΄, here called Bav, Vau, and 
not ot; after πὶ the Κόππα, D, or \, or L; and after ὦ the Σαμπὶ, 7. 


The first eight letters with the Bat denoted the units; the next eight with 
the Kozma, the tens ; and the last eight with the Seuzi, the hundreds. When 
used as figures, the letters are marked by a stroke above, thus: o 1, β' 2, 
ς΄ 6; 0 10, wo 11, v 19, .κ' 20, xs 26; ρ΄ 100, σ΄ 200, olf’ 282, etc. 
The thousands commence again with «, but with a stroke beneath the let- 
ter, as α 1000, 6 2000, Bod’ 2232. | 

Note 4. There was still another ancient mode of writing numerals, cor- 
responding to the Latin method. In this J was assumed as unity, and then 
the first letters of the numerals Πέντε ἤνυε, Ζέκα ten, Hexortoy (the old form 
of ἑκατόν) hundred, Χίλιον thousand, Muguos ten thousand, were put for 
these numbers respectively ; thus JZ denoted 5, 4 10, H 100, X 1000, ΠΗ͂ 
10,000. ‘These letters were then combined to express different numbers, 
just like the Roman numerals; except that whenever a 4, H, X, or M, 
was to be repeated five times, instead’ of this it was put only once, but en- 


closed in a large Z. Thus ff 50, /7 41 61, 28:7 500, 415000, etc. 
—This was the old Attic system; and is often found in inscriptions. 


* In some modern editions also at the end of syllables. This usage, however, 
if extended beyond the more common composite words, viz. those with the en- 
clitics and with πρός, εἰς, ἔς, and perhaps δὺς», presents great difficulties. [It is 
not found in any manuscript, and was first introduced partially by Henry Ste- 
phens, more fully by F. A. Wolf.—Tr. 

t This mark is commonly called Sé, and also Stigma.’ Its coincidence in form 
with the Bav (see note 3) is only accidental. 

{ These three Episema were originally letters of the alphabet, which after- 
wards became obsolete. The resemblance of the ¢ to the later abbreviation for or 
is only accidental ; as a numeral it is called Bav, and is merely another form of 
the digamma, F or §, as its place in the numeral system shews, where it corre- 


sponds to the oriental Vav. The ιν» originally @, is called Αόππα, and was 


derived from the oriental Koph, (Lat. Q;) which occupies the same place in the 
alphabet. The Sawzz is strictly an abbreviation for 07; originally, however, it 


§ 3. PRONUNCIATION. 23 


§ 9. Pronunciation. 


1. The ancient pronunciation can no longer be determined with cer- 
tainty. Among the various ‘ways in which Greek is pronounced in 
modern times, there are two which are most distinguished, called the 
Reuchlinian and the Erasmian, after their respective advocates in the 
16th century. We follow the latter, because it is best supported by the 
internal evidence, and also by the manner in which Greek names are 
written by the Latins, and Latin ones by the Greeks; see note 1. The 
Reuchlinian method follows chiefly that of the modern Greeks, which 
they continue warmly to defend as the ancient and true pronunciation. 


_ Nore 1. The Latin mode of writing Greek words may be seen above 
in the Latin names of the letters, in the following part of the present sec- 
tion, and in §§ 5 and 6.—The common usage of the Reuchlinian pronun- 
ciation is the following: ἡ is pronounced like 1; the diphthong αὖ like ὁ 
in there ; the sounds εἰ, ot, v, and vw, are all not to be distinguished from 1; 
and finally, the v in the other diphthongs (except ov) is pronounced like 
v or f, 6. 5. αὐτός avtos, Ζεύς Zefs.* There are indeed many traces, that 
this method, in its chief points, is really founded on an ancient pronuncia- 
tion ; but this could not have been the usual one in the predominant dia- 
‘lects. This appears incontestably from the manner in which the Latins 
- wrote Greek words and names, and the Greeks Latin ones, even after the 
Christian era, 6. 5. Θήβη Thebe ; Pompaus Πομπήϊος; ; Claudius Κλαύδιος. 
Were the modern Greek pronunciation of οὐ as 7 correct, neither the Latins 
could have made from “Ποίας Poeas ; nor the Greeks from Cloelia Κλοιλία; 
and even Καικίλιος, Καῖσαρ, for Caecilius, Caesar, does not decide for the 
pronunciation of as like ae (e in there), since we are by no means certain 
in respect to the pronunciation of this Latin diphthong. 


2. In respect to particular letters, the following is to be remarked : 

β and ὃ are sounded like our ὃ and " —The modern Greeks give to β 
the sound of our v. 

y before another y and the other palatal letters (x, 7, ξ) is sounded like 
ng. E. g. ἐγγύς eng-gus, or like the Lat. angustus; ovyxovovs syncrisis, 
" Ayyions Anchises, Spiyé Sphinz. t 

¢ must be pronounced like ds, i.e. with the soft s, like dz.f ‘Tn the 
earlier periods it was sounded like sd. 


was simply the old letter Sov already mentioned, derived from the oriental alpha- 
bet. See Appendix B. 

* This mode of pronunciation is sometimes called Jotactsm or Itacism (4 as in ma- 
chine), because it gives to so many vowels the sound of Jota; the Erasmian is also 
called Etacism (e like ὦ in-hate). 

+ In all these cases the Latin m has the sound of our ng, and it is usually so 
pronounced in Sphinz ; that we commonly say 4n-chises instead of Ang-chises is 
an error. 

¢ This sound also passed over into the yet softer one of z, which is still the 
common one among the modern Greeks. 


24 | δῷ 3, 4. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. © ᾿ 


Ἢ is by some every where pronounced like e in a there. We only know, 
however, that it is a prolonged δ. ; 

ὁ is usually not distinguished from t on the continent of Europe ; an- 
ciently, however, it belonged to the aspirates, i.e. those letters which 
were pronounced with a breathing, or aspiration ; and it is also still pro- 
nounced by the modern Greeks like the English th sharp, as in think. 

is simply the vowel ἢ, (i.e. the continental 7 as in machine,) and not ~ 
the consonant j ;* hence ἴαμβος, ‘/ovia, must be pronounced i-ambos, 
I-onia. Nevertheless the Greeks employed this letter in foreign names 
instead of 7; e.g. Jovdcog Julius, Πομπήϊος Pompgus. 

% is always expressed in Latin by c, even before e and z; and the Latin c 

is also expressed in Greek by x; e.g. Kiuwy Cimon, Cicero Κικέρων. 

This shows that the Romans pronounced their c like & before all the 

vowels, _ : 

at the end of words, see in § 25, n. 4. 

becomes in certain cases aspirated (rh) ; see ὃ 6. 3. 

is to be pronounced like s sharp, or ss. 

before ὁ followed by another vowel, is not to be pronounced sh, 

as in English, but retains its simple sound; thus 7Ζλατία Galati-a, 

not Gala-sha, Κριτίας Kriti-as, Βυξάντιον Buzanti-on, Παναίτιος 

Panaiti-os, Lat. Panaetius ; so also in 7ερέντιος Terentius. 

υ is often employed in Latin names to express the short τ, which was 
‘wanting in Greek; e.g. Ῥωμύλος Romulus. Comp. § 5. ἡ. 3.— 
The modern Greeks pronounce it like ὁ. . 

ΟΦ and ¥ are still somewhat indefinite in respect to the exact pronuncia-. 
tion. The Greeks always expressed the Latin f by their φ, as Fabius 
Φάβιος ; the Latins, however, never reversed this, but always wrote 

ph for g. Consequently, we pronounce either the Latin f or the 
Greek g in a manner not exactly accurate; and if the latter, the 
same holds good of y. Compare the next section. 


% ὦ. © Ὁ 


§ 4. Division of the Letters. 
1. The letters are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels . 
are subdivided only according to their quantity, for which see ᾧ 7. 
2. From the consonants must first be separated the three double letters 
BSW Sip 
each of which is strictly two letters, for which however only a single 
figure is employed. For these letters, see ὃ 22, and on ¢ see also the 
preceding section. 


ἕ ree | in Latin, as also on the continent of Europe, has the consonant power 
of y.—TR 


” § 4. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. 25 


3. The simple consonants are divided 
a) according to the organ with which they are pronounced, viz. 


labials . . : eins : é β,π,φ,μ 
linguals ~ ; ὰ , . δ, Ὁ) Othe δ, ἃ 
palatals . Σ : ΤῊ» : ΨΩ 


b) according to their power,* 
1) semivowels, viz. 


liquids ; ’ si ΤῊΝ ; ᾿ - A, μον, 9 
the simple sibilant . : : ; : σ 

2) mutes, viz. 
aspirates iS erat : : : : : φ. %, ϑ 
τ 6... 3 R E ᾿ 4 5 β,γ, ὃ 
smooth 3 : : Tl, % τ 


Hence it appears that three mutes belong to each organ, and that these - 
letters thus arranged 


pgp x 8 
sede: abe 
IS that “a i 


are related to each other when taken in either direction ; the first per- 
pendicular column being labials ; the second, palatals; and the third, 
linguals. | 

3. Of the liquids, μι and ν are nasal sounds, and belong to the first 
two organs, or the labials and linguals; and the y having before the 
palatals a nasal sound (§ 3. 2) holds the same place for the third organ ; 
as is apparent from comparing such syllables as the following : 

τς ἐμπα- ἔντα- ἐἔγκα-. 

Nore. Hence to each organ belong four letters, which correspond to 
each other. ‘The tongue only has a few letters more ; because of its 
greater mobility and its striking against the teeth. In Greek these are 
A, Q, 9. ' 

4. No genuine Greek word can end in any other consonant than one 
- of these three semivowels, © 

0, ¥, 0, 
for those which terminate in ἕ and wend really in κῷ and πῷ. Only 
é% and οὐκ form here an exception; and this never at the end of a 


_* The ancients found in the humming and hissing sounds of the letters /, m, 
n, T, 8, a sort of transition to the full sounding vowels, and called them therefore 
half vowels : the four first on account of their mobility and the ease with which 
they could be joined to other letters, were also called liquids. All the other con- 
sonants, by way of contrast to the. vowels, were called mutes. Of these again, 
those three which were accompanied by a breathing or aspiration, were supposed 
thereby to become thick or rough (δασέα) ; this was entirely wanting in three oth- 
ers, which were therefore called thin or smooth (ψιλά) ; while between these two 
classes the mediae (μέσα) hold the middle place. See Appendix E. 


26 ὃ ὃ piIrpHTHONGs, ὁ 4 


phrase, but only before other words with which they are connected in 
pronunciation ; see § 26. 5. : 


§ 5. Diphthongs. 


1. The ancient pronunciation of the diphthongs is least of all certain ; 
and it is therefore better in most of them to articulate each letter dis- 
tinctly, but yet to make but one syllable: The manner in which the 
Romans expressed them will appear from the examples. 

αὖ pron. ai (as in aisle), (Φαῖδρος Phaidros, Lat. Phaedrus. 


ἕν — et (asin height), Netlog Neilos, Lat. Nilus. “υκεῖον Lu- 


keion, Lycéum. 

Οὐ — ot. «Βοιωτία Boiotia, Boeotia. 

ve — wt (like the French wi or'uy in lui, tuyau). Εἰλείϑυινα Ei- 
leithuia, Tlithyia. © 

av — au. Τλαῦκος Glaukos, Glaucus. 

ευ — Εὖρος Euros, Eurus.* 

ἣν — ᾿ ” { nvéov (from αὔξω) euxon. 

ov — ou (asin you). Movoa Mousa, Lat. Misa. 

wu is solely Ionic; e. g. ωὐτὸς outos. 


Nore 1. The Latin usage is not however entirely fixed, especially in 


regard to the diphthong ει. This is shewn by the different modes of writ- 
ing the words Ἰφιγένεια Iphigenia, Myjdeva Medea, Ἡράκλειτος Heraclitus, 
Πολύκλειτος Polycletus, etc—Some few words in ove, ov, remain in Latin 
unchanged, except that the v probably passed over into the sound of 7 (or 
- 3); as Muia Maia, Τροία Troja. 

2. From these are to be distinguished the improper diphthongs, which 
are formed by the so called Lota subscriptum, or Lota written under the 
following letters : | 

O, 1; 4. ΄ 
At present the Iota subscriptum does not change the sound of these 
vowels, and serves merely to mark the derivation; originally however 
it was heard in the pronunciation. The ancients wrote this Iota also in 
a line with the other letters; and with capital letters this is still the case ; 
e.g. THI SODILAL, τῇ σοφίᾳ, τῷ “Avy or ἄδη. 

Nore 2. The ancient native Greek grammarians reckon also nu, wv, 
vt, among the improper diphthongs; of which their definition is, that they 
are composed of a long and a ‘short vowel, while all the others contain 


merely two short vowels. Hence it results in regard to the pronunciation, 


that in order to distinguish yu from ev, the sound of ἡ must be’ made to 
. ‘ 


* That αὖ and ev before a vowel are still written and pronounced in Latin with 
v, e.g. Ayain Agave, Evdy Evan, is an error which has resulted from the 
“Reuchlinian pronunciation; only Agaue, Euan, ete, are correct, av and εὺ in 
such cases being always diphthongs. 


«- 


᾽ § 6. BREATHINGS. : 97 


predominate ; so also in the case of ὧν and w. It is moreover apparent, 
that the case was the,same with ¢, ἢ» @, so long as the « continued to be 
heard, i. e. probably during the whole strictly classic period; as is proved 
by the Latin mode of writing tragoedus, comoedus, for τρακῳδός κωμῳδός. 
But it is also no less evident from the later words prosodia, ode or oda, for 
προσῳδία, ᾧδή, that at the period when these words were adopted into the 
Latin, the difference between » and w was no longer regarded ; and this 
is throughout the case at the present day. 


Nore 3. The ov is every where sounded only as a single vowel, and is 
therefore strictly no proper diphthong. We leave it however in posses- 
sion of its ancient place, inasmuch as it differs essentially from the other 
improper diphthongs. In each of these only one of the two vowels is 
heard; while in ov there is a mixed sound as it were of both o and v.— 
The short u existed also in the more ancient language, and was retained 
in the A£olic dialect and in the Latin, which is nearest related to that dia- 
“lect. To mark it they employed the letters o and v, which are nearly ~ 

related. 'The Homeric βόλεσϑε belongs here; see ὁ 114, Tab. of anom. 
Verbs, βούλομαι. 


§ 6. Breathings.’ 


1. With the letters are connected the two following signs, which are 
_ set over every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of a word, viz. 

«ἡ Spiritus lenis, πνεῦμα ψιλόν, the smooth breathing. 

— Spiritus asper, πνεῦμα δασύ, the rough breathing. 

_ The Spiritus asper is our h. 'The lenis stands where in other languages 
a word begins simply with a vowel. E. σ. Ὅμηρος Homerus, ἐγώ ego. 
Both these classes of words, however, are considered in prosody and 
grammar simply as beginning with a vowel, no regard being had in 
__ these respects to the breathing. So in the case of the apostrophe ( ; 30) 
‘and the moveable final ν (§ 26). 

_ 2. In the proper diphthongs, the Spiritus, as also the accents, are 
always placed over the second vowel; e:g. Zvgenidns, οἷος. In the 
improper diphthongs this is not the case; e. g. “40dn¢ (ᾷδης). 

3. The Spiritus asper stands also over every 9 at the beginning of a 
word or syllable.* When 9 is doubled in the middle of a word, the 
first-one takes the lenis, the second the asper, thus: Οὗ. This is 
founded on a peculiarity of the ancient pronunciation, which the Latins 
also did not neglect in Greek words, 6, g. 

énrwe, Τ[ύὐῤδος, rhetor, Pyrrhus. 

Note 1. Both these breathings exist in other languages as distinct 

letters. e asper is the h of both ancient and modern languages; the 


lenis is t lef or Elif of the orientals. Nor is this latter a mere empty 
sign. Every vowel which is distinctly uttered without the aid of a 


* In the common language all words beginning with v have also the asper. 


28 § 6. BREATHINGs. * 


᾿ 


preceding consonant, and consequently every one which is so uttered as 
to be heard entirely separate from the preceding letter,* is actually intro- 
duced by an audible breathing or gentle impulse; and the ancients had 
more occasion to mark this impulse, masmuch as they did not separate 
the words in writing. 

Note 2. The A®olics very frequently exchanged the rough breathing 
for the smooth, as did also sometimes the Tonics. Hence in the epic lan- 
guage occur such forms as ὕμμιν for ὑμῖν, ἄλτο from ὅλλομαι, ἠέλιος for 
ἥλιος, ete. 


Note 3. Along with these two breathings the earliest language had 
still another aspirate, which was longest retained by the A®olics. 'This is 
commonly called Digamma, from its shape F,i.e..a double 1. It was 
strictly a real consonant with the sound of v, and was prefixed to ma- 
ny words which in the other dialects have partly the asper and partly 
the lenis.tj—In regard to the Homeric digamma, which has been so much 
discussed in modern times, the whole subject rests on the following 
remarkable fact. A certain number of words beginning with a vowel, 
especially the pronoun οὗ, oi, ἕ, and also εἴδω, ἔοικα, εἰπεῖν, ἄναξ, Ἴλιος, 
οἶνος, οἶκος, ἔργον, ἶσος, ἕκαστος, With their derivatives, have in Homer so 
often the hiatus (§ 29) before them, that, leaving these words out of the 
account, the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Homer, becomes ex- 
tremely rare, and in most of the remaining cases can be easily and natur- 
ally accounted for. ‘These same words have also, in comparison with 
others, extremely seldom an apostrophe before them; and moreover, the 
immediately preceding long vowels and diphthongs are far less frequently 
rendered short, than before other words (ὃ 7. ἢ. 19). Hence one must 
conclude, that there was something at the beginning of these words, which 
produced both these effects, and prevented the hiatus. And since short 
syllables, terminating in a consonant(e. g. ος, ov), are also often rendered long 


. before these words, just as if they were in position,——and that too in cases 


where they are not affected by the caesura,— it follows that all these words in 
Homer’s mouth had this breathing (v) with the power of a consonant before 
them ; but had lost it in the far later period when Homer’s songs were reduc- 
ed to writing. Moreover, since during this time, and even later, these poems 
underwent many changes and received many additions, as is now generally 
acknowledged, we can hence very naturally account for the circumstance, 
that the traces of the digamma in Homer should have been thus obliterated. 
It is also to be considered, that the gradual disappearance of the digamma 
may very probably have already commenced in the time of Homer, and 
that many words therefore may have been sometimes pronounced with it, 
and sometimes without it—These remarks are applicable also to Hesiod 
and the other remains of the most ancient Greek poetry ; but the later epic 
writers were obviously no longer acquainted with the digamma. 


perfectly articulate the second vowel in co-operate, pre-eminent, etc 


* E.g. if one would clearly distinguish ab-ortion from a-bortion; or would 
-t See ὃ 2. ἡ. 3. and ref. |. Also Appendix B. 4 


| § 7. pRosopy. 29 


§ 7. Prosopy. 


1. The term Prosody, according to present usage, includes only the 
doctrine of quantity, i.e. the length (productio) or shortness (correp- 
tio) of syllables.* 

2. Every word and every grammatical form had, for every syllable, — 
with few exceptions, a constant quantity, which the pronunciation of — 
common life followed; and which must therefore be known in order to 
pronounce correctly. 

Note 1. We hence perceive, that it is an error to consider prosody 
as something entirely separate from grammar, and as belonging solely to 
a knowledge of poetry.. This error has arisen from the fact, that we are 
able in general to ascertain the quantity of syllables only fromm the works 
of the poets; since the ancient pronunciation is no longer heard. The 
poets however had also on this point their peculiarities and licenses; and 
hence there is, in many instances, along with the fixed quantity, also a 
poetical one; respecting which we shall subjoin what is most important in, 
the notes. ὔ 

8. The quantity is denoted by the two following marks over a vowel, 
() long, (7) short; e.g. | 

ἃ short a, ἃ long a, 
ἃ variable or doubtful. 

4. Every syllable, which cannot be certainly proved to be long, must 
be assumed as short. 

5. A syllable is long, either I. by Nature, or 11. by Position. 

6. A syllable is long (I.) by nature, when its vowel is long; as in Latin 
the middle syllable of amare, docere. In Greek this is in part deter- 
mined by the vowels themselves; for of the simple vowels 

ἢ and ὦ are always long, 
é and o are always short. 
These therefore require no further rules. The three others, on the 


contrary, 

if a, ἔν, υ, 
can all be, as in Latin, either long or short; and are therefore called 
variable or doubtful, Lat. ancipites. 


Nore 9. We must however guard ourselves from supposing, that in 
the nature of the sounds «, 1, v, generally, there was any thing indefinite 
or fluctuating between long and short. All the simple vowels are in cer- 
tain words constantly long; in certain others, constantly short; but it was 
only in the sounds of e and 0, that the Greek language had for each of 
these cases a distinct mark or letter. As to the three other vowels, we 


* The ancient Greek grammarians included also under the name προσῳδία 
every thing by which the sound of a syllable was affected ; consequently also 
the accents and breathings. - 


’ 


‘ 


30 | § 7. Prosopy. 


a 


can learn their quantity’in particular words, only as we learn it in Latin 
in respect to all the vowels. “When however one of these vowels, which 
are only apparently thus doubtful, is found to be really doubtful or variable 


in some particular words, 6. g. the α in καλός, the v in ἀνέα, this is only the 


same that occurs also in the sounds of e and ὁ with their double characters ; 
6. g. in τροχάω and τρωχάω, σόος and σῶος, νέας and νῆας; all which.in- 
stances, in the most ancient mode of writing, were in like manner not 
distinguished. 

7. In regard to syllables which are long by nature, there is the 
following general rule: Two vowels flowing together into one. sound 
form along syllable. Consequently the following are long : 


1) All diphthongs without exception ; e.g. the penult in Pasiiecos, | 


ἐπᾷδω. | 

2) All contracted syllables ; and in this case the doubtful vowels are 
᾿ consequently always long; e.g. the α in ἄκων for ἀέκων, the ὁ in ἵρορ 
for ἱερός, the v in Accus. βότρυς for βότρυας; see § 28. 


Nore 3. From these contractions, however, we must carefully distin- 
guish the cases of simple elision, 6. g. axuyw for axo-aya; see δ 28-30. 


8. Avsyllable, even with a short vowel, is long (II.) by position, i.e. 
when it is followed by two or more consonants, or by a double consonant ; 
e.g. the penult in λέγεσϑαι, μέγιστος, 9g βέλεμνον, awoogos, 
καϑέξω, νομίζω. 


Nore 4, Very often, also, a vowel already long occurs in position. In 
this case, it is a very common error to rest satisfied with the length by 
position, ‘without prolonging the vowel in pronunciation. It must how- 
ever be prolonged, not only in Ajuv0¢(pron. Lemnos), ὁρπηξ, Χαρώνδας, etc.— 
and also where the circumflex stands ( ($1 1. 1), asin μᾶλλον, πρᾶξις, ---- θὰϊ also 
in πράττω, πράξ w, Where the ἃ is proved ? be long by the derived forms 
(πρᾶξις, 'πρᾶγμα) which take the circumflex. On the other hand, TUTTO, 
τάξω, have the ἃ short, like τάξις, So also one must distinguish between 
the last syllable of ϑώραξ where the ἃ is long (Gen. ϑώρακος), and that of 
αὔλαξ where it is short (Gen. αὔλᾶκος) ; just as between the final syllables 
of Κύχλωψ and Κέκροψ. It is necessary therefore to know the real quan- 
tity of the doubtful vowels in position, in order to pronounce them accu- 
rately ; and this is learned by observing the accents, according to § 11, 
and by a comparison of kindred forms, in the manner above indicated. 


9. A mute before a liquid (ὃ 4) forms regularly no position : hence 
the penult is short in ἄτεκνος, δίδραχμος, γενέϑλη, δύσποτμος, etc. 
By the poets, however, these syllables are sometimes uséd as if long: 
hence the common assertion, that a mute before a liquid makes a doubt- 
ful syllable, 

Nore 5. Hence it cannot be sufficiently impressed upon the learner, 
that it must be distinctly known, whether the vowel in such a syllable is, 


or is not, long by nature; for then of course it remains long ; e.g. in στἕγ-- 
ταϑλος, Which is derives from ἄϑλος (contr. from ἄεϑλος) and consequently 


§ 7. PRosopy. 31 


has the « long ;. and in ψυχρός, which has the v long, as coming from ψύχω 
(see note 8). Nothing is more common, than for learners to suppose, that 
the juxta-position of a mute before a liquid has the power to render even 
a long vowel doubtful. 

10. To the’preceding rule, however, the ‘middle mutes (8, γ, 0) form 
an exception, and make a real position when they stand before the three 
liquids 4, μ, v. Consequently, in the following words the penult is 
long, though they are not to be pronounced as with a long vowel : 
πέπλεγμαι, τετραάβιβλος, evoduog. In the following words with @ the 
penult is short: χαράδρα, Méheayoos, μολοβρός. 

11. The preceding rules determine the quantity of all syllables, ex- 
cept those with the simple vowels α, ὁ, v, without valid position. These 
latter syllables can be determined only by usage; and since this can be 
best learned from the poets, and best supported by passages from their 
works, this mode of determining the quantity is said to be “ ex auctori- 
— tate,” by authority. In doubtful cases again, the authority of the Attic 
poets decides for the common language. So far now as it regards the 
root or ground-syllable of words, the quantity must be learned by obser- 
vation from the lexicon; and therefore only some general precepts will 
be given in the following notes, in respect to that which is most indis- 
pensable. ‘The quantity of such syllables, however, as are employed 
for the formation and flexion of words, and the cases where the root it- 
. self in the course of flexion or formation changes its quantity, will be 
every where pointed out in the grammar in the proper place. 

Nore 6. In regard to the quantity of the syllables which serve for 
formation and flexion, it will only be necessary in general to specify the 
instances where the doubtful vowels are long; and every syllable on which 
no remark is made, and where the contrary does not follow from the 
general rules, 1 is to be regarded as short (see 4 above); e.g. the penult in 
πράγματος, ἐτυψάμην, and so also in the formative endings, as in ξύλενος, © 


δικαιοσύνη. ‘There remain therefore, for the following notes, only the roots 
and some few examples of derivation, which cannot well be included in 


grammatical rules. 

Nore 7. In the present mode of pronunciation, it is for the most part 
only the quantity of the penult in words of three or more syllables, that 
we can render distinctly perceptible ; and since it is important to become 

‘early accustomed to the correct pronunciation of such words, before one 
is already familiar with the poets, we give here a table of those which are 
most essential; but only such as have the penult long. 


ὃ φλύαρος idle talk ὁπαδός follower γεανίς girl 
ἀνιαρός afflictive αὐϑάδης haughty σίναπι mustard 
_ τιάρα turban χόβαλος rogue ἡ σιαγών jaw-bone 


ἄκρατος unmixed 
as also all words in -αγός derived from ἄγω and ἄγνυμι; as λοχαγός captains 
yavayos one shipwrecked ; 


82 ὁ 7. prosopy. 


ἢ κάμινος fire-place δωτίνη gift πέδιλον sandal © 
ὃ χαλινός bridle ἀξίνη axe ὃ χελιδών swallow 
σέλινον parsley πυτίνη flask ἔρυϑος labourer 
κύμινον cumin δητίνη resin ἀκριβής exact 
συκάμιγον mulberry ὃ ὕμιλος multitude ἀκόνιτον aconite 
κυχλάμιγνον (a plant)  ὃὅ ὼστρόβιλος cone of a pine τὸ τάριχος stockfish 
ὃ κίνδυνος danger ὃ ψίμυϑ ος white lead πίτυρον bran 
ὃ βόϑυνος ditch τὸ κέλυφος shell, pod ἄγκυρα anchor 
εὐϑύγη account 7] πάπυρος papyrus γέφυρα bridge 
πρεσβύτης old man λάφυρον booty ὄλυρα oe 
κολλύρα sort of loaf. . 


So also ἰσχυρός strong, from t ἰσχύω. On the contrary, ἐχυρός and ὀχυρός 
secure, from ἔχω, as also the remaining adjectives in -vgdc, have the v short. 
—The following words are 8:80 best Πεομριβδοα long, though they also 
occur as short : 
μυρίκη ΤΡΩ͂Ν κορύγη club 
πλημμυρίς flood-tide τορύνη stirring-stick. 
The following proper names are also long: 
Στύμφαλος, Φάρσαλος, Πρίαπος," ᾿Αρατος, “Τημάρατος, ° Ayutng, «Δευκάτης, 
Εὐφράτης, ἸΝιφάτης, Θεαγώ, ᾿Ιάσων, "μασις, Σάραπις (Serapis).* 
Εὔριπος, " Ἐνιπεύς, Σέριφος, Τ' φάγικος, Καΐκος, Φοινίκη," ‘Oovgrs, Βούσιρις, 
᾿Αγχίσης, Aiywa, Καμάρινα, ᾿Αφροδίτη, " Ἀμφιτρίτη. 
Διόνυσος, ᾿Αμφρυσός, Καμβύσης," Αρχύτας, ἹΚωκυτός, Βηρυτός, ” ABvdos, 
Βυϑυνός, Πάχυνον, Κέρκυρα or Κόρκυρα. 
For a list of the words of the third declension, which have the penult long 
in the Gen..and other oblique cases, see Appendix C, Declension 3. 


Nore 8. Not unfrequently, however, the first syllable of words, by 
some change or by composition, comes to stand in the distinctive place 
(note 7). As such, the following deserve particular notice, and have the 
first syllable long: 


ἄτη destruction φράτωρ class-fellow τράχύς rough 
ὃ δαλός firebrand ἢ σφραγίς seal 
ψιλὸς bald ~ ἢ δινός hide vinn victory 
ὃ χιλός fodder λιτός little κλίνη bed 
ὃ λιμός hunger μικρός small δίνη whirlpool 
τιμή honour 

ὃ ϑυμός mind ὃ πυρός wheat + φυλή tribe 

ὃ ῥυμός shaft ὃ χρυσός gold ὕλη forest, stuff 
ὃ χυμός fluid, sap ξυνὸς common λύπη grief 
ὃ χυλός ) juice κυφός crooked muyn postertors 
ὃ τυρός cheese ψυχή soul ° 


_In the barytone verbs, ending i ina simple ὦ appended to the root, ὁ and v 
are always long (except in γλύφω carve) § e.g. τρίβω, σύρω, ψύχω, etc. 
The a on the other hand is short, 6. δ. ἄγω, yoap~a.—For verbs in ἄνω, 
iv, vyw, see ὃ 112. n.8.—Of the contracted verbs, the following deserve’ 
particular notice, as having the first syllable long : 


* The Ionic forms often furnish here a help to the memory in respect to ἃ; 
having 7 instead of &; e. δ' “Ζτύμφηλος, Πρίηπος. 


t On the other hand πὺρός, Gen. of τὸ πῦρ fire. 


§ 7. pRosopy. 33 


κιγέω Move σιγάω be silent συλάω plunder 
διγέω shudder ΄ διφάω ἀρ φυσάω blow. 
διγόω freeze 


The knowledge of all these words is useful, not only in respect to ordinary 
derivatives, as ἄτιμος, ἄψυχος, ἔτριβον, διδάιϑίβω, ἐμβριϑής, ἄσυλον, etc. but 
also for many proper names, as Hermotimus, Demonicus, Eriphyle, ete. 

Nore 9. All words nearly and clearly related to another word, or de- 
rived from it, have regularly the same quantity as the root; and hence we 
have adduced. in every instance ‘only the simplest form of a word. In 
verbal nouns, however, there are some forms which adopt, not the long 
vowel of the present, but the short one of the Aor. 2. This takes place 

"ΑἹ in some nouns in η: T0131, διατρίβή, avowuyn, παραψύχή. On the 
_ other hand, ψυχή soul. 
_b) in some adjectives in ἧς, G. ἕος : ais ἀτριβής, παλιντριβής, and 
subst. παιδοτρίβης. 

Nore-10. The rule that one vowel before ἌΝ is short, which in 
Latin is uncertain, is even less applicable in Greek. Still, a long vowel be- 
fore another vowel is far more rare, than before a simple consonant; and 
especially the forms of nouns in 10¢, Loy, and va, are always short, with the 
exception of ; 

node nest, αἰκία insult, ἀνία grief, κονία dust, 

and even of these the two last occur in the epic poets as short. Gen- 
erally speaking, one vowel before another was. probably in many cases 
doubtful, even in common usage; and such instances were treated by the 
poets, and especially the epic poets, with still greater freedom.* But as 
we can learn the quantity of syllables only from the poets, we are unable 
to decide on many cases of this kind from the want of sufficient examples. 
This applies especially to the ending of the present of verbs in ὕω and ἕω, 
which we must leave for the most part to the. learner’s own observation. 
We remark only that in the senarius, many of those which have a long vowel 
in the future, are always employed i in the present also as long, viz. δακρύω, 
μηνύω, ἰσχύω, aliw, δύω, io, pia, iw, ὕω, πρίω, χρίω. In the other 
kinds of verse, many of ‘these and also of the others are doubtful.—The 
following words deserve notice as having the ἃ long: 


ὃ λαός people | ὃ ναός temple 

xo) (for xaiw) burn κλάω (for κλαίω) weep. 
Further, the penult in °Eyiw, Bellona; and of those in 9 and ἄων, all 
which take o in the Genitive, consequently the comparatives (6 . g. βελτίων) 
and. many proper names, as ᾿Αμφίων, “Tregiwyv, Παχάων, ᾿Αμυϑάων, G. ονος. 
On the contrary ΖΙευκαλίων, Φορμίων, G. wvos, have the + short.—As to 
proper names in aos, those of which λαύς is a component part, have the α 
of course long ; besides these we have 


᾿Αμφιάραος long, Οἰνόμαος short.’ ἢ 


—The particular exceptions, by which even the long vowels are made 
short in verse, see in note 19. 


Nore 11. Much of what belongs to the prosody of the ancient language, 


ΟΝ For the sake of the metre the epic poets could lengthen the « even in Aoxdn- 
mov, Ihiov, ἀτεμίη, etc. See note 1d. 


34 sd Ὁ Ὰ § 7, PRosoDY. | ; 


is perceptible, in our mouths, only in the artificial pronunciation or scan- 
ning of verse. Much also was really mere peculiarity and license of the 
poets ; as has been above remarked. ‘This may therefore properly be in- 
cluded under the term poetic usage ; and we subjoin here and in the fol- 
lowing notes what is necessary to be said under this head. It must how- 
ever be premised, that among the Greeks the different species of poetry 
and of verse had a great influence on the prosody. There was especially 
the greatest difference in the laws of prosody, between the herameter of - 
the Ionic epopee, and the iambic trimeter or senarius which was the prin- 
cipal verse of the Attic drama, and according to which also the iambic and 
trochaic measures of this species of poetry generally regulated themselves. 
This Attic poetry had fewer poetic licenses; and regulated itself essen- 
tially according to the’actual pronunciation of the Athenian people. The 
hexameter on the contrary, which followed originally the old Ionic pro- 
nunciation, allowed the poet in particular cases great freedom. The 
other kinds of poetry occupied the middle ground between these two ; 
and hence, even in the drama, those parts which in the expression of pas- 
sion departed most from the language of ordinary conversation, especially 
the lyric passages and choruses, employed more or less not only the forms 
but also the licenses of the epic language. Even the tragic senarius 
differed in such passages from that of comedy, which every where followed 
closely the language of ordinary life.. Comp. § 1. 10, 11. 

Nore 12. This difference is particularly conspicuous in respect to posi- 
tion. In the softer Ionic dialect the junction of a mute before a liquid is 
of itself sufficiently harsh ; and hence in the epic poets, especially the 
older ones, this case forms almost every where a position. Among the 
_ Attics, on the contrary, the rules above given (‘Text 9, 10) for short sylla- 
bles, hold every where good in the comic senarius, while the tragic poets 
often follow also the epic usage. 

Nore 13. The position is also valid in the contact of two successive 
words ; and that without exception, when the two consonants are divided 
between the two words, as φίλον téxog. When however the two conso- 
nants begin the second word, the position is indeed regular, (e. g. Homer: 
ἼἜνϑα] σφιν κατὰ---, Χαῖρε] ξεῖν" ---, Il. ¢. 78. αὐτε] Τρῶες,) but not fre- 
quent, except when the ictus comes to its aid; see note 16. Still less 
frequent however is the case, where the vowel in such circumstances re- 
mains short; which nevertheless sometimes occurs. The Attics observed 
this position more accurately ; except that in this case also a mute before 
a liquid commonly makes no position; e.g. Eurip. Iph. Taur. 1817, πῶς 
φής; τὲ πνεῦ--Ἰ μα. 

Note 14. To the peculiarities of the hexameter belong also some dif- 
ferences in respect to the quantity by nature (Text 6. 7). .Thus the fol- 
lowing words especially, which in the Attic language are every where 
employed as short, ; 
καλὸς beautiful, ἴσος like, 
are in the epic language long, and the latter is therefore written icoc.* 
‘Others again have in the epic poets a quantity entirely doubtful, especially 


_, * It is also to be specially noted, that cod, épic 07}, curse, is in the Attic poets 
short, and in the epic, long ; while ἀρή misfortune is also short in the epic poets. 


§ 7. PRosopy. 35 


| : ο΄ ἀγήρ man, "άρης Mars, 
of which the first syllable is elsewhere always short. Hence in the ex- 


clamation ‘Ages, “Ages, which occurs several times in Homer, the first α is 
long, the second short. 


Note 15. In other cases it is more apparent, that a word had its fixed 
and usual quantity, and that the rhythmus alone occasioned the deviation. 
Still we are not to suppose that this license was without restraints, any 
more than the others; for this would have destroyed the charm of the 
versification, Those old bards were limited by their feelings and taste in 
such a manner, as to admit of these rhythmic licenses only in certain 
words and forms, and in particular cases. So especially: . 

1) In proper names: ᾿Απόλλωνος with o prolonged, ᾿Ελευσινίδαο wit 
the first ὁ shortened, Hymn. Cer. 105. cf. 95. . 

2) In words which have too many short vowels, as in ἀπογέεσϑαι, 
ἀϑάνατος, where the ἃ of the first syllable was prolonged: hence 
this rhythmus of ἀϑάγνατος became afterwards usual among all 
poets. 

3) At the beginning of an hexameter, where Homer even writes “Eze- 
| dj—, and Φίλε xa- | σίγνη-- | te—. 

Nore 16. Another rhythmical prolongation is occasioned by the cae- 
sura. In metre, the arsis is that part of a foot on which the stress of the 
rhythm, or the ictus (beat) falls; the other part is called thesis. In the 
' hexameter the arsis is always at the beginning of the foot, (comp. Appen- 
dix A. 21 sq.) where this species of verse necessarily has a long syllable, 
which can never be resolved into two short ones. When now the last 
syllable of a word falls into this place, (thus forming the masculine cae- 
sura,) this syllable must of itself fill out the arsis. Here now the epic 
rhythmus allows, that a short syllable falling into this place may be ren- 

dered long by the mere power of the rhythmus. E. g. Il. ε, 859 Φίλε xa- 
‘| σίγνη-- | τὲ χόμι-- | σαι. So α. 51 Bé-| hog ἐχε-- | πευκχὲς ἐ- | φιείς. This 
mode of prolonging a syllable however is not always, nor even often, so 
simple as in these examples. More frequently it is supported by a position 
at the beginning of the next word; which, as is remarked above (note 13), 
without this ictus, is likewise not frequent; 6. g. ὅτι 6a ϑνήσκοντας δρᾶτο. 
Note 17. Another support of this prolongation is, when the following 
word begins with a liquid; because such a letter can be easily doubled 
in pronunciation ; 6. g. I. ε, 748 “Hon | δὲ μά- 1 στιγι---. 6.274 ἅμα | δὲ 
γέφος | εἵπετο---, pron. demmastigi, dennephos. The ο especially can be so . 
easily doubled in such cases, that even in the Attic poetry, in the thesis as 
well as in the arsis, a short vowel before @ is very commonly made long; 
e.g. in the arsis of the senarius,—zov [προσώ-- | που ta- | ῥάκη, Aristoph. 
Plut. 1065; and the thesis of the spondee among anapaests, — αὗται | δὲ 
Gi- | νὰς ἔχου-- | ow, id. Nub. 343. Indeed, where a short syllable was 
necessary, the @ was even avoided. 


Nove 18. The prolongation of a short vowel in the caesura was fur- 
ther promoted, when this short vowel was immediately followed by one 
of those words, which (according to § 6. n.3) had the digamma; the 
aspiration of which could in like manner easily be increased, Hence the 
verses of Homer so often close with the possessive ὅς (from @) in this 
manner: ϑυγατέ- | oo ἥν, --- πόσε- 1 ὃ ᾧ. 


36 § 8. accents. 


᾿ Nore 19. A rule without exception for dactylic and anapaestic verse, 

and especially for the hexameter, is, that a long vowel or diphthong at the 
end of a word becomes short when followed by another vowel; 6. g.:?/ev 
ἄ-- [ριστος, — ἔσσεται | ἄλγος, --- σο-- | φωτέρη | ἄλλων. When how- 
ever this case coincides with the arsis, the syllable remains long; in other. 
instances, rarely ; except before the digamma, as has been already re- 
marked, §6.n.3. On the other hand, in the Attic senarius this mode of 
shortening a long syllable was unknown; the case being always avoided, 
as hiatus.—The shortening of a long vowel or diphthong before a vowel 
in the middle of a word also occurs ; but only in certain words and forms, 
which must have had some such vaitdoncst in their pronunciation 5 as 
in ποιεῖν (often written stoety), πτοῖος and its correlatives, οἷος, τοιοῦτος, ete. 
Every such long sound however is always shortened before « demonstra- 
tivum (§ 80), e.g. τουτουΐ, αὑτηί, witait etc.—The epic and other poets 
were also accustomed to shorten the vowel in like manner in several 
other words; 6. g. always in és for ἐπειδή, and according to the neces- 
sities of the metre in πρώην, ἥρωος (G. of ἥρως), vids, ὄνειαρ (Hymn. Cer. 
269), in several words in oog, and others. 

For the case of Synizesis, or the combining of two short vowels in pro- 

nunciation into one long one, see § 28. n. 6. § 29. n. 11. 


§ 8. Accents. 


1. ΕΝ with the quantity of syllables, the Greek Satigetaiie paid re- 
gard also to the Zone, or what we call the Accent; the expression of 
which has for us many difficulties, in consequence of the habits ‘and 
ideas which we derive from our modern languages. ~The Greek ac- 
cent, for instance, falls just as often on a short, as on a long syllable; 
and hence, if we express this accent in our modern way, it must often 
injure the quantity; e. g. τέϑημι, “Σωκράτης. 

2. It is however historically placed beyond all doubt, and especially by 
the express testimony of the ancients,* that this accent or tone is as old as 
the language 1561 The marking of the tone-syllable was naturally 
introduced later by the Grammarians, to counteract the pronunciation of 
words with a false accent, which was creeping more and more into the 
language of common life; and at a far later period still, the marks or 
accents which we now learn at school, came into general use, and have 
thus transplanted at least the theory of the Greek accent to our times.{ 

3. Reflection and practice have already been able, in a great measure, 
to remove the apparent contradiction between the quantity and the ac- 


* Particularly Plato, Cratyl. 35. and Aristotle, Soph. El. 4, 8. Poet. 25. 

+ Of course, this is to be taken generally. In particular cases the tone, like 
all other parts of the language, was subject to change. The received accent- 
uation marks chiefly the tone as it was in the most flourishing Attic period: 

{ According to credible testimony, the present mode of accentuation was in- 
troduced by Aristophanes of Byzantium, | about 200 years before the Christian era. 
See Villois. Epistol. Vinar. p. 115 sq. 


§ 9. accenTs. 37 


cent ; and it is worthy of scientific effort, to endeavour to restore and 
render audible this essential part of the euphony of the Greek language ; 
which however is impossible, without a thorough acquaintance with the 
present system of accentuation. 

4. In other respects also, the Greek accents are not without practical 
utility. Very often the quantity of syllables is indicated by the position of 
‘them; many words and forms, which otherwise would have the same — 
sound, are distinguished only by the accents; and even when they teach 
us nothing directly, they yet serve to point out to us the general laws of 
the tone, without which we could not form a judgment in other more 
important cases. 

Nore. Nothing is more injurious, than the early habit of reading 
merely according to the accents, in such a manner as to change the true 
quantity of the syllables; see §9 note. -So long as one is unable by study 
and effort to remedy this evil, and render both quantity and tone properly 


. audible, it is better to let the quantity predominate, as being for us more 
important. 


§ 9. Kinds of Accents. 


1. Every Greek word has regularly the tone upon one of its vowels; 
and this is strictly only of one kind, viz. the acute, ὀξεῖα (sc. προσῳδία 
accent), i. 6. the sharp or clear tone, denoted by the mark —, 

2. On every syllable, which in our mode of speaking has not the 
tone, there rested according to the theory of the ancients the grave, 
i. e. falling tone, βαρεῖα, Lat. gravis. For this the Grammarians ap- 
propriated the mark «ἡ ; which however is commonly not written over 
such syllables; comp. § 13. 2. 

3. A long vowel however can also have the circumflex, περισπωμένη, 
i.e, the winding or prolonged tone, donoted by the mark =. Accord- 
ing to the Grammarians, a long vowel with this accent is to be considered 
as composed of two short ones which flow together in pronunciation, of 
which the first has the acute accent and the other the grave; e.g. ὦ 
comes from 00. On the contrary, when two short vowels accented 
thus, 00, pass over into a long one, this latter takes only the acute, ὦ. 

Nore. The audible expression of this difference in pronunciation is 
for us difficult. It will therefore be sufficient here, to warn the learner 
against two principal errors. On the one hand, let him accustom himself 
to distinguish every accented long vowel (ὦ or ὦ) from an unaccented one 


(ὦ), 6. g. in ἄνϑρωπος, in such a manner, however, as not to read the latter 
as short o.* On the other hand, let him avoid also the. opposite error, 


* Thus one can accent the first. syllable in ἄνϑρωπος, and yet prolong the 
second. Something like this occurs also in English, in the words grandfather, 
dlms-basket, etc. ; 6 


38 §§ 10, 11. accents. 


and not prolong the accented short vowels; e.g. not pronounce ὅπερ like 
co δ" * a 
O)TTEQ. 


‘ 


§ 10. Words named according to the Accent. 


1. The proper tone or accent, acute and circumflex, can stand only 
on one of the three last syllables; the acute upon either of them, the 
circumflex only on one of the two last. 

That ᾧτινι and the like, are only apparent exceptions, is evident from 
§ 14. n. 2. 

2. In relation to the accents, the condition of the Jast¢ syllable gives : 
to the whole word its grammatical name. According as the last sylla- 
ble has (1) the acute, (2) the circumflex,-or (3) no tone at all (conse- 
quently the grave § 9. 2), the word is called 

Oxytonon (oxytone),—e. g. ὀργή, ϑεός, ὅς, τετυφώς 
Perispomenon (circumflexed),—qsAw, vous 
Barytonon (barytone),—zinrw, πρᾶγμα, πράγματα. 

3. All barytones of two or more syllables are again subdivided,— 
according as they have (1) the acute on the penult, or (2) on the ante- 
pénult, or (3) the ctreumfex on the penult,—into 

Paroxytona—zuarw, τετυμμένος . 
Proparoxytona—runtomevos, ἄνϑρωπος : 
Properispomena—zoayuc, φιλοῦσα. 

For the apparent barytones, e. g. like ὀργὴ, terugas, etc. and for the 

atona, see § 13. 


§ 11. Place of the Accents. 


The place of the tone in every word is learned by observation and 
practice, better than by all rules and exceptions; and at first the lexicon 
will be sufficient. Still, the following fundamental rules may be laid 
down,.in regard to the distinction between the two species of tone. 


* So soon as one eadeavours to accent a short syllable, there arises the tone 
which we are accustomed to mark in English by doubling the following conso- 
nant. Hence comes a difficulty; since we must presume that the ancients dis- 
tinguished between ὅτε and orri, βάλε and βάλλε. But in the first place, this 
slight change of the tone is by no means so frequent nor so unpleasant, as if one 
should pronounce e.g. ovos, βέλος, like ὦνος, βῆλος, etc. and in the next place, 
persevering effort will at length succeed in at least diminishing the difficulty. 
We give here only the following. In order to pronounce Swxgdérys, we must 
compare this word with the three similar English monosyllables sd hdd théy, of 
which the middle one is short and yet can have the tone. This is manifestly 
very different from sd ddne’d they.—lt seems more difficult to pronounce copie, 
without lengthening the 2. But the short French monosyllable fi! can have the 


tone ; and it requires only practice, in order to pronounce this accented shost 
‘vowel immediately before another..- 


§.11. accents. . 39 


1 The circumflex requires a syllable which is long by nature, i. e. 
from the vowel itself, and not solely from position (Ὁ 7. 8). E.g. 
κῆδος, φῶς, τεῖχος, οὗτος, σμῆγμα. 

Further Paes OS ts 

τίματε, ἡμῖν, πῦρ, | 
because in these-words the doubtful vowels (ὃ 7.6) @, +, v are long. 
Consequently a short vowel, when it has the tone, can take only the 
acute; e.g. ἕτερος, μένος, ἵνα, πρός, πολύ, πλέγμα. 

Nore 1. Hence σμῆγμα has the circumflex only because of the ἡ, and 
not because of the position yu. Since now 6. g. πρᾶγμα and μᾶλλον have 
also the circumflex, we hence know that the ἃ is here long in itself, and 
not on account of the yu and dA. 

2. The acute can however stand also upon a long vowel ; e. g σοφω- 
τέρος, δεύτερος, φεύγω, τιμή, βασιλεύς, φώρ. 

3. When a final syllable, which is long by nature, has the tone, it 
can have the circumflex; and in contracted final syllables this is almost 
always the case (§ 28. n. 9); e.g. ἀληϑέος ἀληθοῦς, novew ποιώ. In 
other cases it is, generally speaking, more rare. Many monosyllables 
have the circumflex; 6. g. πῦρ, βοῦς, πᾶς, οὖν, νῦν. But among words 
of more than one syllable, which have the tone on the last, with the 
exception of the contracts, only the following take the circumflex : 

a) The adverbial ending ὡς, ὃ 115. 3. 
b) The Gen. and Dative endings, § 33. n. 9. 
c) The vocative endings εὖ and οἵ, ᾧ 45. 

4. When however a penult syllable, which is long by nature, has the 
tone, it must have the circumflex, whenever the final syllable is short, 
or long only by position; e.g. 

ῥῆμα, οἶνος, ψῦχος, βώλαξ, (G. axos). 

Note 2. This rule does not apply to words to which enelitics are ap- 

pended; hence εὖτε, οὔτε, ὥσπερ, ἥτις, τούσδε, ete. § 14. n. 2. —The only real 


exceptions are the particles εἴϑε and γαΐχι, prolonged from «and voi. The 
accentuation yvauzi is false. 


5. On the contrary, when the final syllable is long by nature, the 
circumflex cannot stand upon the penulé; hence 

ῥήτωρ, οἴνη, ψύχω, ϑωραξ (G. axos). 

6: The antepenult syllable can have only the acute (§ 10. 1). When 
however the final syllable is long, either by nature or from position, the 
antepenult cannot have the tone ; hence 

“Σωκράτης, συλλέγω, ἐριβῶλαξ. 
Ἴ. The terminations αὐ and οὐ, although*in themselves long, have. 


᾿ 


40. ’ § 12. accents. 


nevertheless in respect to the two last preceding rules only the power 
of a short vowel; hence 
τρίαιναι, προφῆται, πῶλοι, ἄνϑρωπου, Plurals of τρίαινα, προφή- 
της, πῶλος, ἄνϑρωπος. 
τύπτομαι, τὐπτεέται, τύυπτεέσϑαι, τέτυψαι, Passive forms. 
ποιῆσαι, στῆσαι, ϑεῖναι, Infinitives. 
ποΐησαι, στῆσαι, Imperatives Mid. 


Nore 3. The following are exceptions : 

1) The third person of the optative in ov and a, 6. δ: φεύγοι, ποιήσαι. 

2) The adverb οἴκου at home (the Plur. ὀἶκον houses is short). 

8) Words to which enclitics (§ 14) i in ov are appended, as οἴμοι, woe ἐδ, πηι ! 
ἤτοι, whether from 7 truly, or from 7 or. 


8. The ὦ ἴῃ the terminations of the so called Attic declension also 
permits the tone to be on the antepenult; e. g. πόλεως, πόλεων (δ 51), 
and N. and A. Sing. and G. Plur. ἀνώγεων (δ 37). 


Nore 4. So also the ὦ in the Ionic Gen. in ew of the first Declension ; 
e.g. δεσπότεω for δεσπότου, ὃ 34. 1V. 5. 


Nore 5. It is now easy to see how the learner, who uses correct edi- 
tions, can readily ascertain the quantity of many words by means of the 
accents. - It is at once known 

1) from the circumflex, that the syllable on which it stands, is long ; 

2) from the acute in such words as καρκέγος, βάϑρον, etc. that the pe- 
nult is short (‘Text 4) ; | 

3) from the accent of such words as πεῖρα, oy that the last syllable 
is short (Text 4, 6); and 

4) from the acute in χώρα, .«Δήδα, that the last syllable is long (‘Text 4, 5). 

Moreover even those words and forms, from whose accent no definite 
conclusion can be drawn, may still perhaps be determined, if one has read 
much with attention, and calls to mind a kindred or similar form, whose 
accent is decisive. ‘Thus one pronounces the z in ἄσιτος long, and in &e- 
ὄφιλος short, because σἵτος has the circumflex, and φίλος the acute. So 
also in Sisen, ἄδικος, one recognises the short ὁ, because the plural δίκαι 
occurs sufficiently often for him to recollect, that he has never seen it with 
the circumflex (‘Text 4, 7)—But the circhniflox in monosyllables decides 
nothing for the longer forms, since the monosyllabic nominatives of the 
third Decl. are always long (§ 41. n. 3. ὁ 42. n. 3); e.g. πῦρ, μῦς, Gen. 
πῦρός, μὺῦός. 


§ 12. Changes of the Accents. 
When a word is changed by declination, conjugation, or in any other 
way, this change has in very many cases. an influence on the accent ; 
viz. : 
1) A necessary influence, when the change is such, that the accent 


of the ground-form, according to the preceding rules, can no longer be 
retained ; in such cases 


§ 13. accents. | 41 


The circumflex is exchanged for an acute, e. g. οἶνος Gen. οἴνου 
(δ 11. by; énus Gen. ῥήματος (ὃ 10. 1); ; 

The acute for a circumflex, 6. g. reun G. τιμῆς (δ 11. 8.2); φεύγω 
Imperat. φεῦγε (δ 11. 4); 

Or the accent is.removed from the antepenult to the penult; e. g. 
ἄνϑρωπος G. ἀνθρώπου, ἄρουρα G. ἀρούρᾶς (δ 11. 6). 

2) But even in cases where according to the preceding rules it would 
not be necessary, the accent is often, not indeed changed, but removed 
from its former place; viz. 

a) The accent is drawn back ; chiefly (1) when the word receives 
in any way an addition at the beginning; e.g. τύπτω, τὐπτε---ἔτυπτε ; 
ὁδὸς--- σύνοδος ; παιδευτος--- ἀπαίδευτος ; (2) when the cause, which 
bound the accent in the ground-form to the penult (§ 11. 6), falls away ; 
e.g. παιδεύω, Imperat. waideve. More exact details and the exceptions 
are given in the notes under no. I, at the end of § 103, and in the rules 
for the composition of words § 121. 

b) The accent is moved forwards, but for the most part only when 
the word receives one of those terminations, which either always have 
the tone, e.g. the Part. Perf. in ὡς, as τέτυφα Part. terugws;* or 


which take the tone under particular circumstances, as Ono, On008, 
δ 43. n. 4. 


Note. For the shifting of the tone in Anastrophe, see §117.3; in 


Apostrophe, see § 30. n. 1; when the Augment is dropped, see no. I, at the 
end of § 103. 


§ 13. Changes of the Accents continued. 


1. Hitherto we have considered the tone, only as it is determined 
by every word and every form for itself alone. But the connexion of 
words has also an influence on the tone. So far however as it regards 
the grammar, this takes place only in two principal cases; viz. the regu- 
_lar tone of a word is modified by its dependence either upon the follow- 
ing or the preceding parts of a sentence. This we call I. Tendency of 
the tone towards the following word or words, as shewn (1) by a de- 
pression of the acute, (2) by casting off theione; II. Tendency of the 
tone towards the preceding word, or Inclination. We treat here (1.) of 
- the tendency towards the following word or words. 
2. When an oxytone (δ 10.2) stands in connexion before other 
_ words, the acute tone or accent is depressed, i.e. it passed in the ancient 
pronunciation more or 1688 into the grave. This 2 acute is 


My So also certain terminations ‘in the formation of words; e.g. verbal nouns » 
in μός (λογιομός), adjectives in κόρ, ψός, TOS, τέος, etc. 


42 ὃ 14. accents. 


therefore in such cases marked as grave — ; while, as we have seen 
above (§ 9. 2), the strictly unaccented syllables (Lat. graves) do not 
take this mark. At the end of a period, however, and consequently 
before a point or colon,* the acute remains unchanged. E. g. 
᾿Οργὴ δὲ πολλὰ δρᾷν ἀναγκάζει κακά. 

Nore 1. Hence we must take care not to consider words which end 
with the grave accent —, as barytones. On the contrary, all such words 
are always called in grammar oxytones ; because their acute accent merely 


rests, and the grammatical theory regards every word simply by itself, 
even when it stands in the midst of a sentence. 


Nore 2. The interrogative pronoun tig, τί, (δ 77,) isthe only exception 
from this rule. For the acute on final syllables before enclitics, see § 14. 

3. The following monosyllables, all beginning with a vowel, 

ov (οὐκ, οὐχ) not, ὡς as, é if, 
: ἐν in, εἰς (ἐς) into, ἐξ (ἔχ) out of, 
and the terminations of the prepositive article (ᾧ 75) 
0, ἡ, Ol, αἱ, 
appear commonly wholly wnaccented, because of their close connexion 
with the following word; hence they are called atona, words without 
tone. Εἰ σ΄. 
ὁ vous’ ἦλθεν ἐξ “Aoias’ ὡς ἐν παρόδῳ" οὐ γὰρ παρῆν. 

4. So soon however as such words are no longer in connexion with 
the following words, whether they stand alone, or at the end of a sen- 
tence, or after the words on which they depend, they ἸΒΗΕΠΉΝΤΕΙΣ take 
their tone. E. δ. Οὔ πο, πὼς γὰρ οὔ; why not? ses ὡς ἐτίετο as a 
god; οὐδὲ κακῶν ἔξ, for ἐκ κακῶν. 

' Nore 3. These words stand, in respect to the tone, nearly in the same 


‘yelation to the following word, as the enclitics do to the preceding one ; 
hence they are now often called, after Hermann’s suggestion, proclitics. 


§ 14. Enclitics. 


1. The tendency of the tone (II.) towards the preceding word, con- 
sists in the so called Inclination. of the tone (éyxdsovg). There is in 
Greek a number of words, of one and two syllables, which can connect 
themselves both in sense and pronunciation so closely with the preceding 
word, as to throw back their tone upon it; which then sometimes re- 
mains upon that word along with its proper tone, or sometimes is united 
with the latter. Since now these words, in respect to their tone, as it 
were lean or support themselves (ἐγκλίνεσϑαι) upon the foregoing word, 


* Through misunderstanding of the ancient Sage the acute is now placed 
by most editors also before a comma. 


§ 14. accents. 43 


_ they are therefore called encliticae (enclitics). On the other hand, ev- ° 
ery accented word, and these enclitics themselves when they retain 
their tone, are called orthotone, ὁρϑοτονούμενα, with upright tone, 1. 6. 
not inclined. 

2. Such enclitics are : 

1) The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὲ, through all the cases, as also the 
forms tov, τῷ, which belong to it (§ 77). 

2) The following oblique cases of personal pronouns: pov, μοί, 
μέ" σοῦ, σοί, σέ" ov, οἷ, & piv, viv, and those beginning 
with og with certain exceptions (ὃ 72. ἢ. 2). 

3) The Pres. Indic. of εἰμί and φημί, except the monosyllabic 2 

, pers. sing. (ὃ 108. IV. § 109. I.) 

4) The indefinite adverbs πώς, 17, ποί, πού, nodi, ποϑέν, ποτέ, 
which are distinguished solely by their enclitic tone from the 
interrogative particles πῶς; wove; etc. (§ 116.) . 

5) The particles πώ, τέ, rol, ϑήν, γέ, κέν or κέ, νύν or VU,* πέρ, 
δά, and the inseparable particle δὲ (see note 2). 

3. Whenever now the inclination takes place (comp. 7 below), if the 
word which immediately precedes the enclitic be a proparoxytonon 
(6. g. ἄνϑρωπος) or a properispomenon (e.g. σῶμα), the enclitic al- 
ways throws back upon it its accent, but always as an acute upon the 
final syllable; e.g. re Aig 

ανϑοωπος EOTL, σωμα μου, 
and when.an atonon or unaccented word, 6. g. δὲ, precedes, this word 
receives the accent; e.g. εἴ τές. 

4, When however the preceding word has alrcady an accent of its 
own upon the final syllable, or has simply an acute' upon the penult syl- 
lable, this accent of its own serves also for the enclitic; but in such 
cases the acute on the final syllable is not, as elsewhere, depressed into 
the grave (ὃ 13. 2); e.g. 

ἀνήρ Teg’ καί σοι" 
φιλῶ σε γυναικῶν τινων" ἄνδρα τε. λέγεις τιιΐ 


5. When one enclitic follows another, the first, after having thrown 
back its tone upon the preceding word, receives itself the tone of the 
second enclitic, but always as an acute; and so on, when several fol- 
low one andities to the last, which alone remains unaccented; 6. g. εἴ 
τίς τινά φησὶ μοι παρεῖναι. 


* This particle (now, well, indeed) is “a ee by its enclitic form from 
the adverb of time viv now. 


t The instances γυναικῶν τίνων, ὧντινων (note 2), and some others, which 
seem to contradict the general rules of accent, are by recent Grammarians not 
marked as enclitic. Comp. the author's 4usf. ’ Sprachlehre. 


% 


“\ 


44 § 15. MARKS OF INTERPUNCTION. 


6. The enclitics retain their tone, i.e. become orthotone, (Text 1,) 
when the inclination is prevented. 'This takes place: 

1) When an enclitic of two ΕΥ̓ ΒΒΙδ9 follows ἃ paroxytone ; 6. g. 
λόγος ποτὲ ἐχώρει" ἐναντίος σφίσιν. 

2) When the syllable upon which the tone of the enclitic would 
regularly have been thrown back, has been cut off by apostro- 
phe ; e.g. πολλοὶ δ᾽ εἰσίν. 

7. Besides these cases, an enclitic can regularly remain orthotone, 
only at the beginning of a clause or sentence, or when some emphasis 
in the thought falls upon it, especially in an antithesis. Many of these 
words, however, (especially those under 2 and 5,) are in their nature 
such, that they can never come into these circumstances, and are 
therefore always enclitic. 


Nore 1. More exact details respecting the inclination ete. of the per- 
sonal pronouns, as also of μοῦ and ἐμοῦ etc. see in §72.n.,2,3. So also for 
εἰμί, ἐστίν, and ἔστιν, § 108. IV. 3. 

Nore 2. An enclitic becomes so closely united with the Ἰμοῥαβοι 
word, as to constitute with it almost one word. Hence many words, 
which are often connected with an enclitic 1 in some particular sense, are 
also written with it in one word; e.g. ὥστε, οὔτε, μέντοι, ὅστις, ὧντινων 
(δ 77).—The enclitic δὲ (different from δέ but) occurs only in this shape (as 
inseparable) in ὅδε, τοσόσδε, ὧδε, δόμονδε, ete. (δ 76. 79. § 116. 2,7.) Such 
an enclitic takes the tone of another following one, only in cases where 
the general rules require it, as οἵτινές εἶσιν, ὧδέ te: otherwise usually not, 
as οὔτε t.—Still, in most of the cases which belong under this note, there 
is little uniformity in the editions; particularly, where the*first word in - 
such a compound (according to Text 3) must receive two accents. In 
this case we find sometimes e. g. ᾿Ἐρεβόσδε, οἷόστε, fully written ; and 
sometimes only the second accent, ᾿Ερεβόσδε, oidots.—For ἤτοι see § 11. 
n. 3. 

Nore 3. The demonstratives, whenever pay are strengthened by δὲ 
(§ 79. § 116. 7), move forward in all cases their own tone upon their final 
syllable; 6. g. τόσος, τοῖος---τοσόσδε, τοιόσδε" τηλίκος---τηλικόσδε" ἔνϑας--- 
ἐνθάδε" τοῖσι---τοισίδε. Since this now becomes the regular accent of the 
principal word, the Gen. and Dat. of these compounds take also the 
circumflex upon their long. vowels, according to §33. n. 9. E.g. τοσοῦδε, 
τοσῆδε, τοιοῖσδε; on the other hand, Nom. and Acc. τοσήδε, τοιούσδε." 


, 


§ 15. Marxs or InrERPUNCTION AND OTHER SIGNs. 


1. The Greek written language has the point (period) and comma, 
like our own. The colon is marked by a point above the line, e. g. 
οὐκ ἦλθεν" adda—. The note of interrogation ( ;) is like our semi- 
colon. : 


Nore. The note of exclamation (/) has been only very recently 
introduced by a few editors. 


§ 16. MUTATIONS OF THE CONSONANTS. 45 


2. From the comma must be distinguished the Diastole or Hypodi- 
astole ( , )}—which serves more clearly to separate some short words con- 
nected with enclitics, in order that they may not bé confounded with 
other similar words; 6. g. 0,74 (epic 0,rr¢) neut. of ὅστες, and τό,τε (and 
that), in order to distinguish them from the particles ὅτι (epic ὅττι) and 
τοτὲ." 

3. The following marks have reference only to letters and syllables : 

_ the Apostrophe, see ὃ 80. 
the Coronis or mark of crasis, see §:29. 
ὩΣ the mark of Diaeresis (French trema), placed over the last of 
two vowels, to show that they are to be pronounced separately, 
and not as a diphthong; e. g. ΟἿ o-is, πραῦς pra-us. 
_ For the iota subscript, in ¢, 7, ᾧ, see § 9. 2. For the marks of quantity, 
ae nity BOOS a: ὡς 


δ 16. Mutations or THE CoNsONANTS. 


1. In the formation of words and derivation of forms, there occur in 
the Greek language many changes of the letters, especially for the sake 
of euphony and easier pronunciation. ‘These often make the root very 
difficult to be recognised; while they yet almost always proceed from 
acknowledged fundamental principles. 

2. In regard to the consonants it is in general to be observed, that 
letters of the same organ, or those which in different organs have the 
same power (ᾧ 4.3), are also most inclined to pass over into each other, or 
be exchanged for one another, whenever’a change takes place in a word. 

3. This circumstance is also the foundation of the difference of dia- 
lects; as the sketch in the following notes will show. 


Nore 1. The dialects exchange most frequently for one another: 

a. The aspirates ; e.g. ϑλᾷν crush, Att. φλᾷν. “So the name φήρ for 
a centaur (man and beast) is only an ancient form for ϑήρ beast ; 
ovis, G. ὄρνυϑος, Dor. ὄρνιχος. 

ὃ. The middle ; 6. g. γλήχων penny-royal, Att. βλήχων" γῆ, old Dor. 

. d&* OBshog spit, Dor. ὁδελός. 

c. The smooth; thus the interrogative particles and their kindred 
forms, instead of the! usual π, (ποῦ, πῶς, ποῖος, ὅποῖος, πώ, etc.) 
have among the Ionics always x, (κοῦ, κῶς, κοῖος, ὁκοῖος, κώ, etc.)— 
So also πότε when, Dor. πόκα "---πέντε five, Mol. πέμπε. 

d. The liquids ; thus the Dorics say, for ἤλϑον, βέλτιστος, φίλτατος,--- 
nvdov, βέντιστος, pivtatos; the Tonics and Attics for πρεύμων 
lungs, πλεύμων ; for κλέβανος oven, there exists an Attic form κρί- 
Bavoc.—For μέν and νέν see § 72. n. 6, 12. ; 

e. The letters of the same organ; e.g. the Attics say γναφεύς fuller 
rather than κναφεύς ; and τάπις carpet was equally good with δάπις. 
The Ionics sometimes also exchange the aspirates for the corre- 

t 


46 § 16. MUTATIONS OF THE CONSONANTS. 


sponding smooth mutes; 6. g. δέκομαι for δέχομαι take; αὖτις for 
αὖϑις again; Att. ἃ ἀσφάραγος, Ion. ἃ ἀσπάραγος, asparagus. 

J. The o especially with the other linguals, viz. 

with t,—as for ov, πλησίον near, Ποσειδῶν, Dor. τύ, πλατίον, 
“Ποτειδάν. 

with @ in the Laconic dialect always; for ϑεός God, ϑεῖος di- 
wine, Lac. σιός, σεῖος, ete. ; 

with y,—in the ending μὲν, Dor. μὲς, 6. g. τύπτομεν, τύπτομες. 

with @,—thus many of the Doric tribes, instead of the ter- 
minations ας, ἧς», 0s, ὡς, employed in all cases the endings 
00, NO, 00, wg. 

δ. The double letters with the kindred simple ones, especially ¢ with 
d,—e. g. ζόρξ a form of δόρξ roe; μάζα dough, Dor. waddo.—In 
many words, the old language and the AMolic dialect, instead of & 
and y, transposed the two corresponding simple letters, e..g. σχέ- 
γος for ξένος strange, onudhic for ψαλίς shears. And especially the 
Dorians, instead of ζ in the middle of a word, employed commonly 
od, 6. δ. sy for συρίζω, μέσδων for usta or μείζων, etc. 
Comp. § 3. 2 


Nore 2. iP al gaia of the commutation of letters which are not in the 
above manner related to each other, are exceedingly rare, and must be 
noted singly; e. g. μόγις and μόλις hardly, xosty an Ionic form for γοεῖν to 
think ; κελαινός, κελαινή, poetic for μέλας, μέλαινα, black.* 


Norte 85. Most of the commutations above cited, are brought forward 
both by ancient and modern grammarians under more general propositions, 
as “the Attics change 3 into m; the Ionics change πὶ into x, etc.” We must 
however be upon our guard, not to assume such a commutation in a dia- 
lect as general. Very often the examples adduced are the only ones in 
which the change occurs; and only in some instances has this or that dia- 
lect a propensity to some certain commutation ; which can therefore aid us 
only in reducing the cases which occur, to an analogy. Not unfrequently 
there is only a single instance of exchange; 6, g. ξύν for σύν, which occurs 
in no other word beginning with o. 

Nore 4. ‘Two exchanges of letters, founded on what is above adduced, 
are nevertheless so frequent, that they deserve to be particularly marked, 
viz. 

ττ and oo 

Οὗ and go. 
The first of these takes place in most words, where these letters occur ; 
and the latter in very many. The forms tr and ὁῤ belong chiefly to the 
Attics, oo and go mostly to the Ionics; 6. g. 


Att. Ion. Att. Ton. 
τάττειν --- τάσσειν, arrange ἄῤῥην ---- ἄρσην, male 
γλῶττα --- γλῶσσα, tongue κόῤῥη --- κόρση, cheek. 


Still, the Ionic forms are also found in the best Attic writers, and in the 
earlier ones even by preference ; ; see § 1. n. 10. 


* For this and similar instances, see the author’s Lexilogus, II. 109. 


§§ 17,18. aspirates. 47 


§ 17. The Aspirates. 


i. Every aspirate is to be considered as having arisen from the cor- 
responding smooth mute (tenuis) in connexion with the Spiritus asper. 
Hence the Latin mode of writing the aspirates, ph, th, ch. 

2. When therefore in composition a smooth mute and the rough breath- 
ing meet together, there arises from this junction an aspirate. E.g. the 
words ἐπί, δέκα, αὐτός, compounded with ἡμέρα day, after dropping 
their respective final vowels, give 

| ἐφήμερος, δεχήμερος, αὐθϑήμερος. 

3. The same takes place also in separate words; e.g. (οὐκ) οὐχ 
ὁσίως, and also with an apostrophe (§ 30). E.g. 

ἀπὸ, at --- ἀφ᾽ ov. ἀντί, ἀντ᾽ —ave ay. 
5 Nore 1. The Ionics retain in both cases the smooth mutes; 6. g. ἐπὶ 
ὅσον, οὐκ ὧς, ἱστάναι---μετιστάναι, κατάπερ for καϑάπερ, from καϑ' ἅπερ. 
Comp. §.16. note 1. 6. 


Nore 2. A singular case of this change of a smooth mute, is, when 
another letter stands between it and the rough breathing, as in τέϑριππον, 
a four-horse chariot, from τετρα- and ἵππος ; and in some Attic contrac- 
tions, as ϑοιμάτιον for τὸ ἱμάτιον (ὃ 29. n. 4), φροῦδος from πρό and ὁδός." 


§ 18. Laws of Aspirates. 


1. It is a law of the Greek language, that when two successive sylla- 
bles would regularly. begin each with a rough mute, one of these, and 
usually the first, passes over into the corresponding smooth of the same 
organ. This rule is without exception in all reduplications ; e.g. 

πεφίληκα, κεχώρηκα, τίϑημι, --- instead of peg. yey. O19. 
Elsewhere, however, in flexion and derivation, this law is observed only 
in some few cases; among which the Imperative ending @v has this 
peculiarity, that it does not act upon the preceding syllable, but itself 
passes over into τύ, 6. g. τύφϑητι Imper. Aor. 1. Pass. 3 

2. Some few words have already in their roots strictly two aspirates, 
of which consequently the first has been exchanged for a smooth. So 
soon, however, as in the course of formation or flexion the second aspirate 
is in any way changed, the first immediately re-appears, e. g. 

Root OPE@: Pres. τρέφω nourish, Fut. ϑρέψω, Derivatives τρο-- 

on, ϑρεπτήριον, ϑρέμμα. 1 
Similar causes may also already have operated upon the ground-form, 


* Meanwhile the form φροίμεον (for προοίμιον) from πρό and oiuy, compared 
with ϑράσσω abridged from ταράσσω; shows that even in the absence of the rough 
breathing the tenues readily became aspirated before ρ. 


48 _ § 19. AccUMULATION OF CONSONANTS: 


which stands in the lexicon (the Nominative or Present), and not upon 
those forms derived from it; hence arises the case apparently opposite 
to the former one (τρέφω, ϑρέψω, ---- ϑρίξ, τριχός) which however is at 
bottom the same : 
Root OPJX: Nom. ϑροίξ hair, Gen. τριχός, Dat. Pl. ϑριξίν, De- 
rivative τρυχόω. © 


To these two cases belong also the adjective ταχύς, Compar. ϑάσσων 
(§ 67), and several more verbs ; see in the Table of anom. Verbs, 
Panto, OAD-, ϑρύπτω, τρέχω, τύφω. 


Nore 1. In some words the Ionics change the first aspirate, the Attics 
the second, and vice versa; e.g. χιτών tunic, Ion. κυϑών ; ἐντεῦϑεν, ἐνταῦ- 
Sa, lon. ἐνθεῦτεν, ἐνθαῦτα. (ὃ 116. 7.) ᾿ 

Notre 2. The Passive ending ny, and the forms derived from it, act 
only upon the preceding & of the verbs 


ϑύειν burn incense, Piva place, 


as ἐτύϑην, ἐτέϑην, τεϑείς. In all other verbs no such change occurs, 6. g. 
ἐχύϑην, ὠρϑώϑην from ὀρϑόω, ϑαφϑείς, ἐθρέφϑην, ἐθέλχϑην. --- Of the 
Imperative ending 3: — τι, (see 1 above,) the Imp. Aor. 1. Pass. is the only 
certain case; see in the verb τέϑημι § 107. n. 1,5. The Imperative φα- 
Fi from φημί, and the Homeric τέϑγναϑι (see ϑγνήσκω), deviate from this 
law. — No other termination affords examples for the general rule of this 
section ; for we find ϑέσϑε, Κορινϑόϑι, πανταχόϑεν, ete. 

Nore 3. Among, composite words, the rule is followed only i in ἐχεχειρία 
truce, from ἔχειν and χείρ ; ἀμπέχω (see the anom. verb ἔχω), ἐπαφή, ἀπε- 
φϑύς, where the necessary aspiration of the 2 before the rough breathings 
ἁφή, Epos, (ὃ 17. 2,) is omitted. In all other composite words no change 
occurs; as ἐφυφαΐνω, ἀμφιχυϑείς, ἀνθοφόρος; etc. 


Nore 4. This law, strictly speaking, extended itself also over the Spiritus 
asper, which it changed into the lenis. 'The clearest example of this is in 
the following verb: 


Root ‘EX: Pres. ἔχω have Fut. ἕξω, Deriv. ἑχτικός. 


Generally however the breathing remains unchanged, 6. g. ἁφή, Upaiva, 
ἦχι, ϑεν. 


§ 19. Accumulation of Consonants. 


1. From the immediate juxtaposition of consonants, there often arises 
a harshness, which the Greek language endeavours to avoid. 

2. In general three consonants, or one consonant and a double letter, 
cannot stand together, unless either the first or the last of them is a Liquid, 
or y before a palatal; e.g. neuqdels, σκληρός, τέγξω. In composition, 
however, x and σ at the end of the first word can remain before two 
other consonants; as δύσφϑαρτος, ἕκπτῳσις, ἐκψύχω. In all other 
cases, such a concurrence is either avoided, or one letter is dropped; as 
ἐσφάλϑαι for ἐσφάλσϑαι in the Perf. Tinea: ᾧ 98. 2 


ἀφ 19, 20. accuMULATION OF CONSONANTS. 49 


3. But the concurrence of even ¢wo consonants can occasion harsh- 
ness ; for avoiding which there are certain θυβηϊα rules, that will be 
given in the following sections. 


' Nore 1. In some rare cases the insertion of a third consonant serves 
to ease the pronunciation! When e.g. the liquid mu or », after drop- 
ping a vowel, comes.to stand immediately before the liquid Δ or @, the 
middle mute (8, 5) corresponding to the first, is inserted ; 6. g. from ἡμέρα 
comes μεσημβρία mid-day ; from μεμέληταν came the epic μέμβλεται; and 
ἀνήρ has Gen. ἀνδρός. 

Nore 2. Sometimes, but equally seldom, a consonant is transposed by 
metathesis, to a more convenient place. So arose thé Nom. πγύξ, from the 
root ΠΥ͂ΚΙΝ, which re-appears in the oblique cases πυχγός, πυκχγί, etc. . (See 
the Table of anom. Nouns § 58.) But even without any strong motive of 
euphony, such transpositions, especially of the liquids, creep more or less 
into all languages ; of some of which the cultivated language naturally 
avails itself, e.g. in Greek the formation of the Aor. 2, 299, ἔπραϑον; ; 
or on account of the metre, κραδέα for xagdia ; and also the reverse, atag- 
mos for ἀτραπός, βάρδιστος for βράδιστος, etc. 

Nore 3. In the ancient-language two consonants more frequently stood 
‘together; one of which was afterwards dropped in the ordinary language, 
but was often retained by the poets, for the sake of the metre or of the 
more energetic sound; 6. g. πτόλεμος, πτόλις, and their compounds, for 
πόλεμος, πόλις. Hence we also see how χαμαΐ on the ground and χϑαμα-- 
λός low are connected. 

Nore 4. On the other hand the o has a great propensity to introduce 
itself before other consonants; e.g. the lonic-Attic σμικρός for μικρός ; 
and thus arose the forms σμίλαξ, σκεδάω, μίσγω, ὕπισϑεν, and others, from 
the more ancient sisi κεδάω, MIT (whence μιγείς, etc.) ὄπυϑεν, ete. 


§ 20. Juxtaposition of Mutes. 


1. Two mutes of different organs can stand together in Greek, only 
when the latter is.a ingual, i.e. τ, 0, or 0, and the following general 
rule is without exception : 

A smooth mute admits before it only a smooth; i.e. t only a, %. 

A middle - - - - τ - = only a middle; — δ only β, 7 

A rough - = - - - - - only arough; —-only φ, x. 
E. g. ἑπτά, νυκτος᾽ βδελυρὸς, ὄγδοος " aydos, piven. — 

2. Hence, when in the course of formation or flexion two unlike letters 
come together, the first generally assumes the character of the ‘second. 
E.g. by appending the terminations τὸς, δὴν, Mees, are formed 

from γράφω write — γραπτός, γράβδην 
from πλέκω braid — πλεχϑείς. 

3. When two mutes of the same kind stand together, if one of them 
be changed, the other must also be changed. Thus from ἑπτά, ὀχτώ, 
come ἕβδομος, ὄγδοος; and when of two smooth mutes the second 


50 δῷ 20, 21. povBLine oF coNnsoNANTS. 


passes over into the rough in consequence of the accession of the Spir. 
asp. (§ 17. 2, 8), the first also follows it; e.g. 
ἕπτα, ἡμέρα — ἑφϑήμερος, of seven days, 
νύχτα — νύχϑ'᾽ ὅλην, all night. 
4. The x of the preposition ἐκ alone can stand before all the other 
mutes, and remains unchanged before them all; e.g. ἐκϑεῖναι, ἐκδοῦ-- 
ναι, ἐκβάλλειν, ἐκχγενέσϑαι, ἐκφεύγειν. See § 26. 6. 


§ 21. Doubling of Consonants. 


1. Consonants doubled are not so frequent in the Greek as in English. 
The semivowels, viz. 4, u,v, 0, 0, are oftenest doubled, and after them the τ. 

2; The 9 at the beginning of a word, is always doubled in the com- 
mon language, whenever in formation or composition a simple vowel 
comes to stand before it; e. δ. 

ἔῤῥεπον, ἀῤῥεπής --- from δέπω with ἐ and ν᾿ 

περίρῥοος ---- from περὶ and ῥέξω, 
see § 83. ᾧ 120. 6. With diphthongs this does not take place; e.g. 
εὔρωστος, from εὖ and ῥώννυμι. 

3. The rough mutes can never be doubled ; but take before them the 
corresponding smooth, e.g. 

Sango, Banyos, Πιτϑεύς. 

Note 1. The poets, with the exception of the Attics, often double a 
consonant for the sake of the metre; e.g. ὅσσον, ὅττι, Onmote, ἔννεπε, for 
ὅσον, etc. So also oxzos, σκύπφος, for ὕχος, σκύφος. This however does 
not take place arbitrarily, but in certain words often, in others never 
(6. g. ἔτι, ἕτερος, ἅμα, ἄνεμος) ; most frequently with the semivowels. See 
- more on this subject § 27. ἢ. 14 sq. 

Nore 2. On the other hand, the same poets avail themselves, though 
far more rarely, of a simple consonant, when the common usage employs 
a double one; e.g. Aytevc, ᾿Οδυσεύς, for ᾿Αχιλλεύς, ᾿Οδυσσεύς. In like 
manner they omit to double the 9 ; 6. g. ἔρεξε from ῥέζω. 


§ 22. The Double Letters. 
1. When the leiters β, 1, g, and γ, %, y, come to stand before o, 
they pass over with it into the kindred Aeulie letters αν} or ξ- E. g. by 
appending the future ending ow are formed from 
λείπω λείψω, γράφω γράψω 
λέγω λέξω, στείχω στείξω, 
and with the ending of the Dat. Plur. ov, σὸν, are formed from 
"Aoupes” Aouwe, κόρακες κύραξιν. 
2. Here also the preposition ἐκ constitutes an exception; e.g. éxow fw, 
see § 26. 6. 


_ Nore 1. We must by no means suppose, that the y when it thus stands 
for βσ and go, and the & when it stands for yo and yo, are always to be 


δὴ 23—25. consonants. 51 


pronounced the first like bs or fs, and.the latter like gs or chs. If this 
were so, the double letters were but a poor invention. The true state of 
the case is, that before o, the letters y and y were changed into χ, and 6 
and into x; and then were written together with the σ in and y. An 
evident proof of this is ἃ comparison. of the Lat. scribo, scripsi. 

Nore 2. The ¢ is also a double letter, and stands originally for σδ (§ 3); 
but in the ordinary course of flexion and formation, the cases where it is 
written instead of these letters, occur for the most part only in some local 
adverbs, which are formed by appending the syllable de, as ᾿4ϑήναζε for 
~aods. (δ 116.) » 


§ 23. Consonants before μι. 

1. Before μ in the middle of words, the labials (6, 2, Φ) are always 

changed into μι; e.g. in the Perf. Pass. and in derivative words : 
λείπω λέλειμ-τμαυ 
τρίβω τρίμ-μα, γράφω γραμ-μή. 

2. The palatals and linguals are often changed before μι, viz. x and χὶ 
into 7, e.g. | 
πλέκω πλέγ-μα, τεύχω τέτυγ-μαυ, 
and ὃ, ὃ, τ, ¢, into σ, e.g. 

ἄδω ᾧσ-μα, πείϑω πέπεισ-μαι, ψηφίζω ψήφισ-μα. 

Nore. Inthe formation of words generally, the palatals and linguals are 

nevertheless sometimes found unchanged before μ, e.g. ἀκμή, tuo, Duar, 


κευϑμών, πότμος; ; other exainples are peculiar to the dialects, 6. 5. from 
o6w (O42) comes the Ion. ὀδμή, commonly ὀσμή. 


§ 24. The Linguals. 


1. The linguals 0, 3, τ, ¢, can stand only before the liquids 4, ν, @. 
Before u they are commonly changed into σ (ᾧ 29). 

2. Before other linguals they are changed into 6, e. g. 

now yo-Onv, πείϑω πεισ-τέον. 
3. Before o they are dropped, e.g. 
gow ᾧ-σω, πείϑω πεί-σω, σώματα σώμα-σι, 
᾿ φράζω φρά-σις. 
Nore. For the changes of τ in the abbreviations of κατά, see § 117. n. 2. 


§ 25. The Consonant v. 

1, The ν generally remains unchanged before 0, ὃ, and τ. Before 
the labials (8, 7, p,m) it is changed into mw; and before the palatals 
(y, %, χ), into y with the sound of ng. E.g. in compounds with σύν 
and ἐν, 

συμπάσχω, ἐμβαίνω, συμφέρω, ἔμψυχος 
ἐγκαλῶ, συγγενής, ἐγχειρίζω, ἐγξέω.. 
Nore 1, In appending the enclitics (δ 14. n. 2) an exception is made 
for the sake of distinction, but only in writing; 6. g. toys, ὅνπερ. 


52 δ 26. MOVEABLE FINAL LETTERS. 


2. Before the liquids A, μι, 0, the v is assimilated, i. 6. changed into the 
same letter, 6. δ΄. : 
| συλλέγω, ἐλλείπω, ἐμμένω, συῤῥαπτω. 
But the preposition ἐν remains commonly unchanged before 9, -as év- 
ράπτω. , 
3. Before σ and ¢ the ν in composition is sometimes retained, some- 
times changed into o, and sometimes dropped (see note 2); in flexion 
v is commonly dropped before σ, e. g. in the Dat. Plur. 
δαίμον-ες daiuo-o4' μῆν-ἐς μη-σίν. 
4. When after the ν a 0, ϑι, or t has also been dropped before the o 
(§ 24), the short vowel becomes long, 8. g. ς 
᾿ πᾶντ-ες πᾶσι, τύψαντες" τὐψᾶσε (ᾧ 46) ; 


in order to which, € passes over into δύ, and ὁ into ov, e.g. 
onévd-w, Fut. σπεί-σω" ἑκχόντ-ες, Dat. ἑκοῦ-σιν. 

Nore 2. Exceptions to these rules, such as πέφανσαν (2 Perf. Pass. 
from φαΐνω), πέπανσις, ἕλμιγς, are uncommon, and are easily learned in 
practice. ι 

Nore 9. Before σ and ¢ the preposition ἐν remains always unchanged ; 
e.g. évosiw. — Σύν and πάλιν before σ alone, change their y into o, as 
συσσιτία, παλίσσυτος ; When, however, σ is followed by another consonant, 
and also before ζ, σύν drops its y, as σύστημα, συσκιάζω, συζυγίᾳ ; but πάλιν 
commonly retains it, as παλίνσκιος. - "Ayo, except where a doubling or, 
assimilation takes place (as ἀγάνγιφος, ἀγαάῤῥοος), every where drops the », 
as ἀγασϑενής, ἀγάκλυτος. 

Nore 4. By the ancients, the ν at the end of words was also pro- 
nounced according to the principles of this section, when the following 
word began with a consonant ; especially in the article and in preposi- 
tions. E.g. τὸν βωμόν, ἐν πυρί, σὺν καρπῷ, Were pronounced thus: tou- 
βωμόν, ἐμπυρί, συγκαρπῷ. In old inscriptions, which-do not separate the 
words, such instances are also thus written. 


§ 26. Moveable Final Letters.* 


1. Certain words and terminations have a double form, with and 
without a final consonant. The first is commonly used before a vowel, 
the latter before a consonant. 

2. Here belongs particularly the 

moveable v 
called in Greek -v ἐφελκυστικὸν t 


* These are called moveable, not because they are simply audible, as the term 
implies in Hebrew grammar; but because they may be added to certain"words, 
or removed from them, at pleasure, i in certain circumstances ; and in distinction 
from fixed letters; which cannot be thus removed. Comp. § 87. n.2and5.b.—Tr. 


ο΄ ἢ So called because it was supposed that this » did not strictly belong to the 
termination, but was appended to the final vowel merely to avoid a hiatus; see n. 2. 


§ 26. MOVEABLE FINAL LETTERS. 53 


which the Dat. Plur. in σεν; and in verbs all third persons in ὃν and wy, 
can cast off or retain ; 6. 5. 


πᾶσιν εἶπεν αὐτό, πᾶσι γὰρ εἶπε τοῦτο 
ἔτυψεν ἐμέ, ἔτυψε σέ 

λέγουσιν αὐτό, λέγουσι τοῦτο 

τίϑησιν ὑπὸ---, τίϑησι κατά--. 


3. A anita ν is also found in the following words and forms, viz. 
the local ending σὸν (derived from the Dat. Plur.), e.g. ‘Ohumainon 
(δ 116. 3); the epic termination φὸν (§ 56. n. 9); the numeral εἴκοσεν, 
where, however, the form without ν᾽ can also stand before vowels; the 
adverbs πέρυσιν and νόσφον ; the enclitic particles κέν and νύν (§ 14); 

‘and sometimes the ὁ demonstrative (δ 80. n. 3). 

4, Of the same character is the ¢ in οὕτως, οὕτω; and also in μέ- 
χρις, ἄχρις ; except that the two last often stand without ¢ before a 
vowel. 


Nore 1. The Tonics omit the » also before a vowel. On the other 
hand, it is used not only by the poets even before a consonant in order to 
make a position, but it was also frequently employed in this manner in the 
Attic prose, in order to give energy to the tone. Besides these cases, it 
stands also in correct editions, without reference to any following word, 
at the end of sections and books; in short everywhere, wherever the dis- 
course is not immediately connected with something following.* 


Nore 2. This last circumstance shews clearly, that this y is not, as is 
“generally supposed, merely an invention for the sake of euphony ; but that 
this, as well as the other final letters of the kind, certainly belonged to the 
ancient formation, and was first dropped before consonants, as the language 
became softer. Hence there are also other forms, which cast off their fi- 
nal letters among the Ionics, or for the sake of metre; as the adver- 
bial terminations Oe and uc, 6. g. ἄλλοϑε for ἄλλοϑεν, πολλάκι for πολλά-- 
HUG, ἀτρέμα and ἀτρέμας. .—Exactly similar to the moveable » is also the ν 
in composition with ἃ privative, 6. g. ἀγαΐτιος (§ 120, δ). 


5. The particle ov not, no, takes before a consonant a final χ, and 
consequently, before the rough breathing, a final 7, e.g. 
οὐ πάρεστιν, οὐκ ἔνεστιν, οὐχ ὕπεστιν. 
- When however this particle stands at the end of a clause, or where 
there is a pause in the sense, he x falls away ; e.g. τοῦτο δ᾽ ov, “ but 
this not.” Ov. ᾿ἀλλ᾽ a ‘no: but when—.” 


6. The preposition ἐξ out of, has this form only before vewreld and 
before a pause ; e.g. 


\ 


ἐξ ὑρκὸὶς. ἐξ ὅτου, κακῶν ἐξ. 


* For metrical reasons the v is also written at the end of most kinds of verse, 
although the next verse begins with a consonant. 


aoa 


54 § 27. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 


Before all consonants the ¢ of the double letter § (xs) falls away, and 
the x remains ; 6. g. | 
é% τούτου, ἔκ ϑαλάσσης, ἐκ γῆς. 

This x remains unchanged, at least in the written language, also ir 
composition; where it forms the exceptions mentioned in ᾧ 20. 4. 
§ 22. 2. 

Nore 3. That the two words οὔκ and ἐκ terminate in x, forms no real 
exception to the rule in § 4. 4. Both these words belong, as their being 
without tone shews, to those particles which connect themselves so closely 
with the following word, as to be separated from it only by the under- 


standing, and not by the ear. Hence before a pause, the one casts off its 4, 
and the other assumes the fuller form in & 


§ 27. Murarions or THE VowELs. 


1. The vowels are changed in Greek, as in all other languages, with- 
out these changes being subject to any fixed universal law. In flexion 
and in the nearest derivatives, when the original vowel or diphthong is ex- 
changed for another, this latter may be called the cognate vowel or sound, 
(Germ. Umlaut); meaning simply the corresponding vowel or diphthong, 
into which that of the ground-form is changed. E. g. τρέπω I turn, 
éroanov F turned, τρόπος turn, trope, where the ἃ and o in the latter 
words are the cognates of ¢ in the first word. 

2. To the change of vowels belongs also the lengthening and short- 
ening of a sound; which, however, are generally connected with some 
other change. Thus, when from any cause the sounds ¢ and 0 are 
lengthened, they seldom pass into ἢ and o, but are changed as follows: 


δ into δέ, 0, into av. 


Comp. § 25. 4. § 28. 3. ὃ. 

3. All these changes and differences of the vowels constitute another 
principal part of the peculiarities of the dialects ; of which the following 
notes give a general view. Comp. § 16. 3. 


NoTeEs. 


1. The Ionics are particularly wont to prolong in the above manner the 
sand o of the other dialects, chiefly however when these sounds are fol- 
lowed by the semi-vowels ; e. g. ξεῖνος, εἵνεκα, ὑπεὶρ, for ξένος strange, ἕ ἕνεκα 
on account of, ὑπὲρ over ; νοῦσος, οὔνομα, πουλύς, κούρη, for γόσος disease, 
ὕγομα name, πολύς much, κόρη maid ;—or else when the « is followed by 
another vowel, 6. g. Asiwy for λέων, σπεῖος for σπέος cave, χρύσειος for χρύ- 
σεος golden. Of these licenses the poets also availed themselves, especial y 
the epic. But here too the same caution holds good, as above in the 
doubling of consonants (ᾧ 21. ἢ, 1); for the change in question Was never 
admitted in many words, e. g. in πόλις, ὄνος, μένος, περί; etc. 


§ 27. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 55 


2. When ¢ ἃ and o before a vowel are lengthened by the Jonics, they 
pass over into αὐ and οἱ, 6. g. ἀετός eagle, ust always, lon. αἰετός, αἰεί" πόα 
grass, Ion. xoin.—From this usage are to be explained the epic forms 
᾿Αχαιικός for ᾿Αχαϊκός, δμοίιος for ὁμοῖος, and the Duals in owy for ow. In 
the two latter forms, the probable ancient form oi became sometimes ow, 
more commonly ov. 


3. In other instances the Dorics, Ionics, and poets take the directly op- 
posite course, and write e. g. ἔδεξε for ἔδειξε (from δείκνυμι), μέζων, κρέσσων, 
χερός (G. of χείρ), for μείζων, ete.—For βούλεσθαι stands the antique βόλεσ- 
Sou (§ 4. n. 3); and for the Acc. in ovs, the Dor. ος (see Dec. 2). 


4, Elsewhere the Ionics and Molics often have w for o and ov, and be- 
fore o also o for ov. E.g. κῶρος for κόρος ΟΥ̓ χοῦρος boy, δῶλος for 
δοῦλος slave, ὧν (also Ion.) for οὖν, Mace and Μοῖσα for Moiou, ἀκοίσω 
for ἀκούσω from ἀκούω. 


5. The ἡ in Greek words has arisen in most cases from the α, which 
predominated in the more ancient language, and remained afterwards 
the characteristic vowel of the Dorics; who instead of 7 commonly had « 
_ long; e.g. ἁμέρα for ἡμέρα day, φάμα for φήμη rumor, στᾶναι for στῆναι. 
The same takes place also in the solemn poetiy of the choruses. Comp. 
§ 1. 2, 13. 


6. When, on the contrary, the Tonics i in some single instances change n 
into «, this ἃ is short, as in ἀραρυῖα for ἀρηρυῖα, τεϑαλυῖα, etc. Hence in 
the Ionic forms λέλασμαν from λήϑω, μεσαμβρία for μεσημβρία, the « must 
not be lengthened in pronunciation, as in the Doric. 


7. Otherwise the Tonics prefer throughout the Ty and commonly use it 
instead of long ας; 8. δ. ἡμέρη, σοφίη, for -α, γήρ, négos for ano, ἀέρος; ἴη- 
τρός, ϑώρηξ, for ἰατρός. physician, ϑώραξ Gen. ἄκος breast-plate ; ; πρήσσω, 
πρῆγμα, for πράσσω, mouywo.—Hence also νηῦς, γρηῦς, for ναῦς, γραῦς ; and 
even ῃ for αὖ in the Dat. Plur. (in 4, nov) of Dec. I. 

8. For « the Ionics employ ἡ only in some cases of flexion (as βασιλῆα), 
and in the diphthong él, which they often resolve into i; e. g. κληΐς for 
κλείς, ἀγγήϊον for ἀγγεῖον, βασιληΐη for βασιλεία (§ 28. π. 3).—The Dorics 
for εν before a vowel have 7; 6. g. σαμῇον for σημεῖον. 


9. In other instances the Jonics change α before a liquid or a vowel 
into #3; e.g. τέσσερες for τέσσαρες four, ἔρσην for ὁ ἄρσην male, ὕελος for ὕαλος 
glass, μνέα for μνάα mina, and in the verbs in ia) (§ 105. n. 8). In other 
instances, on the contrary, 8 is exchanged for a, as τράπω, τάμνω, for τρέπω, 
TEUYOD 5 μέγαϑος for μέγεϑος. 

10. A particular Tonic-Attic usage is, that when long « stands before o, 
the former is changed into ¢, and the latter into ὦ; 6. g. for λαός people, 
γαός temple, we find Att. λεώς, νεώς ; for χράομαι (I tise) Jon. χρέωμαι; and 
thus is explained the Ionic Genitive in ew, from the antique form.~in “ao, 
see Dec. I.*- - . 

11. The Ionics change αὖ into wv (not ov) i in the compounds with αὐτός, 
and in the words ϑαῦμα wonder (ϑαυμάζω etc.) and τραῦμα wound ; as 


* This change takes place also in the adj. ἵλεως, wv, for tAdog, ov ; in the Gen. 
véws for νᾶός from ναῦς; and in several proper names. in dog, as Μενέλαος, *A- 
φιάραος, or -ew¢; but not in those in aos, as Οἰνόμαος. 


56 § 27. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 


\ 


ἐμεωυτόν, ἑωυτόν (ἢ 74. 3), ϑωῦμα, τρωῦμα. The simple αὐτός remains 
unchanged among the genuine Ionics; and ωὗτός stands merely for 6 av- 
τός. (§ 29. n. 6.) 


12. Examples of other vowel-changes are : ik tions Dor. schohitak’s "-- 
ὄνομα, ABol. ὄνυμα ---ἰστίη Lon. for ἑστέα hearth. 


Nores on the Lengthening of Syllables generally.. 
(With reference to §§ 21 and 27.) 


13. The mere poetic lengthening of ες and ὁ takes place commonly in 
the Ionic manner by means of εὐ and ov (note 1); very rarely is o changed 
to w, as δύω, ΖΔιώνυσος, for δύο, Jioyvcog.—Whenever α, 1, v, are short in 
the ordinary language, but-are long i in the old or poetic dialect, (6. g. "Ἰλίου 
with the middle syllable long, ἀνήρ with long α, etc.) this does not appear 
in the written language ; except sometimes ini the accent, as in ἶσος for ἴσος. 


14. In the ancient written language, moreover, no mode of prolonging ἃ 
syllable was made visible ; inasmuch as on the one hand, the letters ¢ and ὁ 
stood also for ἡ and εἰ, w and ov; and on the other, the consonants were 
not written double (ὃ 21. 1). In later times also the usage remained vari- 
able ; till at last the Grammarians by degrees settled it, at least for the or- 
dinary language. 

15. The Grammarians also introduced into the works of the ancient poets, 
' the mode of marking the metrical prolongation of a syllable, by doubling the 
consonants, or by long vowels and diphthongs. But here also the usage 
was never entirely settled. Very often such words were written wholly 
in the former usual manner ; and the correct metrical pronunciation was 
left to the intelligent reader.* Of this there are still in the poets, as they 
have ‘come down to us, many remains; thus ὁλοῇσι (Il. α, 342. χ, 5) has 
the second syllable long, and also διεμοιρᾶτο (Od. &, 434); just as we some- 
times find written e. g. ἔμμαϑεν. And when the epic poets make the 
first syllable long in ᾿“πόλλωνος, ἀπογέεσϑαι, συνεχές, ὕφις, it is doubtful 
whether this was done by lengthening the vowel, or by doubling the 
consonant. 


16. In modern times, many have endeavoured to restore the ancient 
usage of not doubling the consonants in writing. This has been done 
however in a very unsettled and indefinite manner; and hence the learner 
must be put upon his guard, in order that he may not. be Jed into error, 
when he finds sometimes ἀπολλήγειν and sometimes ἀπολήγειν with the 
same quantity ; and sees, in many sitions, the consonant in some words 
doubled, in others not. 


17. Not unfr requently however a consonant is doubled even after a long 
vowel, e. g . μᾶλλον, ἡ ἥσσων, ἥττων, Kywoods, Tunttos, λεύσσω, κρείσσων, κρεΐτ- 
των; and the same is also the case'in πράσσω (Ion. πρήσσω), Παρνασσός (fon. 
Παρνησσός), κνίσσα, Κηφισσός, in which the vowel is to be pronounced 
long. Here also several editors prefer in the proper names the ancient 
orthography, and write Kywods, Παρνησός, κγῖσα, Κηφισός, ete. The 
names of places in -οὔσσα have arisen out of -όεσσα; thus Sxototcca, 


7 


* The same usage as to ah ehoasinae in the opposite case of shortening a 


long vowel, see in ὃ 7. ἢ. 


δ 28. conTRACTION. 57 


πυϑηκοῦσσαι, ᾿Αργιγοῦσσαι, etc. But Συράκουσαι, -ovovos, With the short 
form Συρακόσιος, were already used in the ancient language. See Ausf. 
Sprachl. Zus. zu § 21. A. 9. 


§ 28. Contraction. 


1. A vowel immediately preceded by another vowel in the same stead, 
is called pure, and is said to have a pure sound, i.e. a sound ‘not ush- 
ered in by a consonant. More particularly, the endings which begin 
with a vowel, as α, ος, ὦ, etc. are called pure, whenever they are pre- 
ceded by a-vowel; as in σοφία, διτίλόος, φιλέω. 

2. The characteristic difference between the Ionic and Attic dialeets 

s, that the former prefers in most cases the concurrence of vowels ; 
while the latter mostly avoids it. (See however notes 1 and 5.) 

3. The usual methods of avoiding a concurrence are: 

1) Elision, where one vowel is dropped and the other remains 
unchanged. This takes place chiefly in the contact of two separate 
words, and in composition; see δὲ 29 and 120. 

2) Contraction, where two or more vowels are drawn together 
into one combined long sound. This takes place according to the 
following principles : 

a. Two vowels form in themselves a okthoke. In this. way arise 


ev and ov out of εἴ and οἵ, e.g. relyéi τείχει, αἰδοὶ αἰδοῖ. (§ 49.) 


The other proper diphthongs cannot well be formed in this 
manner ; but the zmproper ones readily, as 
ᾧ, ἢ, @, out of αἵ, xi, wi, e.g. γήραϊ γήρᾳ (δ 54), Θρήϊασα 
Θρῇσσα, tuliorng Leloeos (§ 68). 
δ. Two vowels pass over into a kindred long sound, commonly 
so that there arise the following, viz. 


ῃ Out of sa — τείχεα τείχη, κέαρ κὴρ heart 
εὖ out Of es — ποΐεε ποΐει, ῥέεθρον δεῦϑρον stream 
wo and αου --- τιμάομεν τιμῶμεν, 
τιμάου τιμῶ 
3 γ' > ~ 
ow and on — αἰδόα αἰδῶ, 
/ “ 
μισϑόητε μισϑῶτε 
ω 


ω out of 


00 — shoo πλοῦς, 
: μισϑόομεν μισϑοῦμεν 
ov out of 4 0s — ἐμέσϑοε ἐμίσϑου 
ie — τείχεος τείχους, 
ποιέομεν ποιοῦμεν. 
c. The doubtful vowels α, ἐ, v, when short, swallow up the follow- 
ing vowel, and thereby become long, e. δ. 
lon. ἄεϑλος (α short) Att. ἄϑλος, struggle ; ; τίμαε τίμα 
Plur. Xivog Χῖος (one from Χίος); Dat. Ἴφιι "qe 
ἰχϑύες and ἰχϑύας (υ short) ἰχϑῦς, from Sing. ἰχϑύς. 


58 δ 28. conTRACTION. - 4 


d. A long sound swallows up a vowel either before or after it, 
without further change. This takes place particularly with 
a, ἘΠῚ π 
before and after every kindred long sound, and before the a; e.g. 


φιλέω φιλῶ, τιμήεντος τιμῆντος, τιμάω τιμῶ, Ποσειδάων (long «) 
Ποσειδῶν, λᾶας λᾶς stone, μισϑόουσι μισϑοῦσι, πλόουι πλοῖ. 


4. When a diphthong with « (the improper ones included) is to be 
contracted with a preceding vowel, the contraction of the two first vow- 
els takes place according to the above rules, and the ¢ is either sub- 
scribed, e. g. 

τύπτ-εαι τύπτ-η (δ 103. n. 111.) 
ἀεί- δὼ ᾷ-δω, ἀοι-δή ᾧ-δή. 
τιμ-ἄει and τιμ-ἀῃ — τιμ- 
or else falls away, if the new sound does not admit the ὁ subscript, 


6. g. 7 ; 
μισϑ-όειν piod-ory, ᾿Οπόεις "Οποῦς. (δ 41. n. 5.) 


Note 1. What is said above includes only regular and analogical 
contraction. Various exceptions and peculiarities occur below under the 
declensions and conjugations; and for the contraction of two words, or 
crasis, sec ὁ 29.—Moreover contraction does not take place even among 
the Attics, in all cases, where according to the preceding rules it could 
occur ; as will be seen below and also from observation. 


Nore 2. On the other hand the Ionics, as above remarked, commonly 
neglect the contraction, and often resolve a long sound into its constituent 
parts, which had long fallen out of use among the other Greeks; e. g. 
2 pers. Pass. τύπτεαι for τύπτῃ; so even φιλέεαι, ἐπαινέξαι, etc. for φιλέη, 
etc. which is commonly again contracted, φιλῇ. (Att. τύπτει, φιλεῖ, accord- 
ing to §103. n. 171. 3.\—The Doric dialect has many of these resolved 
forms, in common with the Ionic. 


Nore 3. , From the same propensity of the lonics, comes also in the 
epic language the so frequent resolution or. separation of the diphthongs in 
certain words; 6. g. παϊς for παῖς, ὀΐομαι, ἐΐτροχος, as also ἀγγήϊον for ay- 
γεῖον, etc.—likewise the resolution into a double sound, or rather the doub- 
ling of a vowel sound (ὃ 105. n. 10); e.g. φάανϑεν, κρήηνον, for φάνϑεν, 
πρῆγον ; and the Tonic insertion of ε; e.g. ἠέ for ἤ, ἠέλιος for ἥλιος, ἐείκοσι 
for εἴκοσι, and so ἀδελφεός, τουτέου, etc.* 

Nore 4. Sometimes the Ionics even promote the concurrence of vow- 
els by dropping a consonant; 6. g. τέραος for tégatos (§54). Comp. τύπ- 
teas ete. in § 103. n. ITT. 


_ ™ Here it must be borne in mind, that although grammatical theory is wont to 

represent this as separation and insertion, in reference to the common form, yet 
that this common form itself may just as well be only a form originally con- 
tracted from the separate form, and in most cases actually is so. This can be 
shown in many instances, e.g. in δὖ-- for év- from év¢, since éd¢ does not exist ; 
and it.is especially probable in respect to the cases of resolution, because these 
are found only in a very limited number of forms. 


§ 28. conrracrion. 59 


Note 5. There are also cases where the Ionics contract, and the Attics 
do not ; e.g. Ion. igog with long 1, for isgdc. The Ionics have also in com- 
mon with the Dorics a peculiar contraction of £0 into ev, 6. g. πλεῦνες for 
πλέονες, ποι--εὔμενος from ποι--εόμεγος, for which the common contraction is 
-otmsvoc.—Finally it is to be observed, that the Ionic of the ancient epic, 
employs contraction much oftener than the later [onic prose. 


Nore 6. The ancients often wrote out the vowels in full, and left the 
contraction to the pronunciation, This usage, called Synizesis (συνίζησις), 
has in many cases been retained in the works of the ancient poets, espe- 
cially the epic; e.g. Il. 2, 282 άφρεον δὲ στήϑεα, where the two endings 
φθεον and ϑεὰ are to be pronounced as one syllable, thus, ἄφρευν δὲ στή- 
dn: so J, 763 χάλκεον (pron. ovy) δέ of nt09.* 'ΤῊΘ same occurs among 
the Attics very often in ϑεός, ϑεόν, which otherwise is never contracted, 
and in some proper names, as Nsomtodsuos. For ἑώραχα, see ὅράω in the 
Tab. of anom. Verbs.—For the Synizesis between two words, see § 29. 
n. 11. 


Notre 7. ‘The contraction above pointed out in ὦ, (φιλέω φιλῶ ete.) 
could. be considered as elision, or merely a dropping of the «. But it is 
more correct to include under this name only those instances, where this 
is done without any purpose of forming a new combined sound. In the 
middle of words, a vowel is thus dropped (except in compounds, as ἐπάγω 
for ἐπι-ἀγω) mostly only in some Ionic elisions, as φοβέο for φοβέεο (ὃ 105. 
n. 7). In the cases first in question, however, there was evidently a pur- 
pose of producing a new combined sound, as is proved by the analogy of 
other examples, (φιλεῖς, φιλοῦμεν.) and by the circumflex wherever it is 
written ; only the long sound already existing was adopted, or rather was 
retained, to represent this new sound. 


Nores on Accent anp Quanrtiry. 


Nore 8. When neither of the two syllables to be contracted has the 
tone, the contracted one does not take it, e. g. περέπλοος, ἐτέμαον, contr. 
περίπλους, ἐτίμων. 

Nore 9. If however one of the original syllables has the tone, it then 
remains also upon the contracted one; and if this be a penult or an ante- 
penult syllable, the accent is determined according to the general rules 
(§§ 10, 11). . If it be a final syllable, it takes the circumflex, as γόος vovc, 
φιλέω φιλῶ ; unless the original form had the acute upon the last syllable, 
which seldom occurs, and then the acute remains; 6. g. gay — ἤν, ἑσταύς 
— ἑστώς, δαΐς ---- δᾷάς. Both these cases are founded on the theory in § 9. . 
3; and exceptions to either are rare; see 6. g. the Ace. in ὦ, § 49. 

Nore 10. In some few contractions usage has shifted the accent; 6. g- 
ἄεργος --- ἀργός (δ 120. n. 10), δελέατος ---- δέλητος ete. (ὃ 41. n. 7), χρύσεος ---- 
χρυσοῦς etc. (§ 60.. 6). See also the oblique cases of περέπλους, etc. ὃ 36. 
note. 

Nore 11. Although every contracted syllable is in its very nature long, 
yet in some forms of declension which end in a contracted ἃ or 4, the 


* So also the Gen. in ews, 6. g. Θησέως in two syllables ; the Ion. Gen. in ew, 
e.g. Πηλείδεω in three syllables—Tr. 


60 ᾧ 29. HIATUS.—CRASIS. 


pronunciation has so obscured these long sounds, that they are sometimes 
found short. So especially the Neut. Pl. in a, e. g. τὰ γέρα (δ 54. n. 3) and 
some Datives, as Κλέοβι from Κλέοβις, G. 10s, (in Herodotus,) with which 
also δαΐ (1) and some similar epic forms are to be compared (§ 56. n. 5). 
That however some of these cases may be considered as an elision of the 
first vowel, is apparent from § 53. ἢ. 2, 3. 


§ 29. Hiatus.—Crasis. 


1. When of two successive words the first ends, and the second be- 
gins, with a vowel, the breathing (spiritus) which is heard between 
them, whether rough or smooth, produces an effect called Hiatus. This 
hiatus between two words was more unpleasant to the ear, at least to 
the Attic ear, than a concurrence of vowels in the middle of a word. It 
was therefore rarely allowed in poetry; in Attic poets almost never. In 
prose also, the Ionic excepted, its frequent recurrence was avoided. 


Nore 1. The Attic verse permitted the hiatus for the most part only 
after the interrogative ti, the particles ors and περί, and in the phrases 
οὐδὲ sic, μηδὲ εἷς (δ 70. 1), εὖ οἶδα, ete. 


2. The natural means of avoiding the hiatus is by uniting both syl- 
lables into one.* This takes place in two ways: (1) by eléston with the 
apostrophe (§30); and (2) by contracting both syllables into one com- — 
bined sound, or Crasis. ‘This last is found, especially in prose, only in a 
small number of examples, which are given in the following notes. 


Nore 2. In crasis there are three things to be particularly observed. 
a) Every crasis makes a long syllable (§7. 7). In this way several 
cases of crasis are distinguished from an elision by apostrophe; e. g. ταλη- 
ϑές, καρετή, for τὸ GA. καὶ ἀρ. with short a. Hence such instances as 
τἀνδρός must be pronounced long; and τἄλλα (for τὰ ἄλλα) must be written 
with the circumflex; which however is denied by some, who therefore 
write τἄλλα. For the sake of uniformity, other instances like ταῦτό, ταῦτά, 
(for τὸ αὐτό, τὰ αὐτά,) must also be referred to crasis; comp. § 28. n. 7. 
δὴ) The iota subscript is written in a crasis, only ‘when i in the original 
syllables an ὁ occupied the last place ; thus in κάτα from καὶ εἶτα, but not 
in κἄν for καὶ ἂν. 
c) Over ἃ crasis is - commonly written the sign “_, called coronis 
(κορωνΐς). 
‘Nore 3. The crasis occurs most frequently i in the article, e. 5. 
οὗχ, οὑπὶ, for ὃ 9 ἐχ, ὃ ἐπὶ 
τοὐναντίον, τοῦπος, for τὸ ἐναντίον, τὸ ἔπος 
τοὔνομα for τὸ ὄνομα 


* That the moveable Ψ is not to be regarded as a means of avoiding the hiatus, 
‘ appears from ὃ 26.'n. 2. 


t Some however unnecessarily deviate from this rule, for the sake of avoiding 
ambiguity, and write κᾷν, κᾷπειτα, etc. 


§ 29. orasis. 61 


ἈΠ ἐν 3... 1 ΄ 1 \ 
Toe, Ton, for τὰ ἐμὰ, τὰ ἐπὶ 
3 , 3 7 3 ? . - 
τὰἀγαϑά, τἄλλα, for τὰ ἀγαϑά, τὰ ἄλλα > with long ἄ, see a above. 
Ρ] ’ τ 3 " , 
τἀληϑές, τἄδικον, for τὸ ah. τὸ ἀδ. 
« - ε La € «3 - c 3 , 
ὠπαυτῶν, ὠνήρ, for ὁ ἀπαιτῶν, ὁ ἀνὴρ." 
Similar to these are the less frequent cases of crasis in the neut. of the 
postpositive article or relative pronoun (§ 75), e. g. 
ἄδοξε for ἃ ἔδοξε, ἅν for ἃ ἂν, ete: 


Nore 4. Less easy to be distinguished are such cases ΟΥ̓ crasis, when 
the contraction swallows up the diphthongs; e. g. 
ouuoé for οἵ ἐμοί | 
ὡπαντῶντες for οὗ ἀπαντῶντες 
> Γ 3 2 2 
τἀνδρός, τἀνδρὶ, for τοῦ ἀνδρός, τῷ ἀνδρέ (see note 2. a); and so also 
3 - > ὦ 3 A 2 
ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτῷ (ὃ 74), ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου, etc. 
or which assume a ϑ' because of the rough breathing (§ 17. n. 2), 6. g. 
ϑοϊμάτιον Pl. ϑαϊμάτια, for τὸ iv. τὰ iu. 
2 - 
ϑημετέρου for τοῦ ἡμετέρου. 

Note 5. With ἕτερος the vowels of the article are commonly con- 
tracted into ἃ ; which comes from the antique and Doric form ἅτερος (ἃ) 
for ἕτερος ; thus 

cr co ce ce 
ἅτερος, ατεροῦ, for ὁ ἕτερος, Ob ἕτερον 

ϑατέρου, ϑατέρῳ, ϑάτερα, for τοῦ, τῷ, τὰ ἕτ. 

Norte 6. The Ionics also have the crasis, but always contract o and « 
΄ Pu 3 
into ὦ; 6. 5. τὠγαλμα, τὠληϑές, τὠπὸ τούτου for τὸ ἀπὸ τούτου. They 
change also the spiritus asper into the lenvs, 6. g. 

ὥριστος for ὃ ἄριστος --- wAdos for οἵ ἄλλοι. 
So also ωὐτός, τωὐτό, for ὃ αὐτός, τὸ αὐτό (ταὐτό). | ἣ 

Nore 7. The conjunction xaé also makes often a crasis, e. g. 

κἂν for καὶ ἐν, --- κἂν for καὶ ἄν and καὶ ἐάν 
” 3 ~ 3 , ἃ 5", 
κἄπειτα, κἀκεῖνος, κἀγώ, for καὶ ἔπειτα etc. (see note 2. δ.) 
κάτα for καὶ εἶτα ; 
ov > > 7 » 
καρετή, κῖσος, for καὶ ἀρετή, καὶ ἴσος. 
κῷνος, κῷκία, for καὶ οἶνος, καὶ οἰκέα 
2 ¢ 
χἄτερος for καὶ ἕτερος, ---- χω for καὶ ὁ ---. 
Other long syllables remain unchanged, as 
3 > 3 ἀ Ὁ 3 3 > Ψ MOE. 5 
κεῖ, κοῦ, κεῦ--; for καὶ εἶ, OV, EU-, κεῖχον for καὶ εἶχον. 
. 5 - ” 
The Ionics and Dorics use ἡ for ἃ, e. g. κἢν, κἤπειτα. 


Nore 8. The particles tol, μέντοι, ἤτοι, also make with ἄν and ἄρα a 
, . , 2 » 
long α, and must therefore be written as crasis, τὰν, tage, μεντᾶν. Very 


* According to a critical theory which is not to be rejected, the only ordinary 
contraction of 6 with aamong the Attics was into long @, 6. g. ὧνηρ (pron. hdnér) ; 
at least in the’more common instances, as ἀνήρ, ἄνθρωπος, ἀδελφός, etc. It is as- 
sumed, that in all cases, where in our copies only ἀνήρ stands, and the sense 
secms to require the article, it should be written ἁνήρ ; and this is done in most 
of the recent editions. But this rule is not entirely certain, because the article is- 
often omitted before ἀνήρ, ἄνδρα; see Heindorf ad Plat. Phaedo. 108. 


62 δ 30. APosTROPHE. 


often however we find τ΄ ἄν, τ΄ ἄρα or τ΄ ἄρα etc. where ‘the τού (rT) 
must not be confounded with té. 

Nore 9. Among the many other cases of crasis, which must for the 
most part be left to observation, we adduce only the following: 

ἐγώμαι, ἐγῷδα, for ἐγὼ οἶμαι, οἶδα 
povutiy, μοὔύδωχεν, etc. for wot ἐστιν, ἔδωκεν 
προύργου, προὐλίγου, for πρὸ ἔργου, ὀλίγου. 

Note 10. Τὸ crasis must also be referred all those instances, where 
the initial vowel of a word is swallowed up by a preceding long vowel 
or diphthong, e. g. 

τ΄ οὕνεκα for ov Evexoe 
δϑούνεκα for ὅτου ἕνεκα (comp. note 4), which is very often incor- 
rectly written 09° otvexe 
” > > > τῶν, * > ” 
avIoumns:, wvso, aves, for ὦ ἄνϑρωπε, ἄνερ, ἀναξ. 
To avoid ambiguity, however, most cases of this kind are written as elis- 
ions, and marked with the apostrophe, e. g. 
ὦ ᾿γαϑέ (ἀγαϑὲ) --- τῇ ᾿ρημίᾳ (ἐρημίᾳ) 
ποῦ στιν (ἐστιν) --- ἐγὼ “y τοῖς (ἐν). 

Norte 11. Many other contractions were ‘never expressed in writing, but 
left, as cases of synizesis (δ 28. n. 6), to the pronunciation, which however 
it is not always easy for us to determine; e. g. ἐπεὶ ov as an iambus (Soph. 
Philoct, 446); μὴ οὐ in Attic poetry always as one syllable. So also in 
Homer, I, ε, 446 ἢ εἰσόκεν as a Dactyl; Il. 9, 89 — ἀσβέ- ] atm οὐδ᾽ vi- | 
ov —. 


§ 30. Apostrophe. 


1. In Greek, as in other languages, a short vowel at the end of a 
word is removed by eliston before another vowel, and then an apostro- 
phe — is set over the empty place, e. g. } 

ἐπ᾿ ἐμοῦ for ἐπὶ ἐμοῦ. 
When the following word has the rough breathing, and the elided vowel 
was preceded by a smooth mute, this latter becomes rough (§ 17.3) ; e.g. 
agp οὗ ἴον ἀπὸ ov. : 

2. In prose there are certain words of frequent occurrence, which 
most commonly suffer elision, especially ἀλλὰ, ἄρα and ἄρα, ἀνὰ, διὰ, 
κατὰ, μετὰ, παρὰ, ἀπὸ, ὑπὸ, ἀμφὶ, ἀντὶ, ἐπὶ, δέ, τέ, yé ; also frequent 
combinations like νὴ Ala (νὴ Al’), nave av for πάντα ἄν, and the 


_ * That all these are real cases of crasis, just as φιλέω φιλῶ is a real contraction, 
is shewn by the analogy of many acknowledged instances, as ἅδοξε, tant, ϑητέρᾳ 
(τῇ δτέρᾳ) ; and by the circumstance that such an elision is never found after a 
short vowel.—This plainer mode of writing such instances of crasis often has 
difficulty ; especially when the syllable that has been swallowed up, had the 
accent, which we then often find written over the empty place, e. g. δὲ sur) “youue 
(ἔχοιμι). All such cases, as well as those above, must be regarded as if written 
μηχοιμ, τηρημιᾳ, etc. ; 


§ 30. apostropHe. 63 


like. In other cases elision occurs less frequently ; least of all in Ionic 
prose. The poets, on the other hand, avail themselves of this freedom 
in respect to most of the short vowels. The only limitation is, that short 
v, monosyllables in αν, ¢, 0, (the epic ῥά excepted,) and the preposition 
περί, are never elided. ᾿ 


Norte 1. In prepositions and conjunctions, if the elided vowel had the 
accent, this is also cast off with the vowel; e.g. am from ἀπό, ἀλλ᾽ from 
ἀλλά, οὐδ᾽ from οὐδέ. In all other words, the accent is thrown back, al- 
ways as an acute, upon the preceding syllable; e. g. 

ἷ (κακά) κάκ᾽ ἔπη, (δεινα)δείν᾽ ἔπαϑον, (qyut) φήμ᾽ ἐγώ, 


(τὰγαϑα) τὰγάϑ'᾽ αὔξεται, (ἑπτά) ἕπτ᾽ ἔσαν. 


Nore 2. The rules for the employment of elision in prose, it is very 
difficult to determine ; since δέ, ἀπό, etc. which are most commonly elided, 
are also often found without apostrophe. The investigation is so much 
the more difficult, since it is proved, that the ancients very often wrote ἃ 
vowel which was elided in speaking. 


Nove 3. The Dative Sing. in » and the particle ὅτι are never elided 
by the Attics; and by the epic writers, for the most part, only when no 
confusion can thereby occur ‘With the more frequently elided Acc. in @ 
and the particle ozs; 6. g. ἐν duit” —, ἀστέρ᾽ ὑπωρινῷ —, γιγνώσκων, ὅτ᾽ 
ἄναλκις. : 

Note 4. The third persons of verbs, which have the moveable y, can 
be elided by the poets according to the, necessities of the metre. So 
the Dative Plural; except that the forms of Dec. I and II, in cucu, you, oor, 
which in the old language are the most common ones, coincide then with 
those in eg, ἧς, οἷς, and therefore take no apostrophe even before a vowel. 
‘The elision of the Dat. Pl. of Dec. TI, was avoided ; because this case 
would then almost always be like the other cases which terminate in ¢. 
The strengthened epic form in σσι; e. g. χείρεσσι, moot, sometimes ad- 
mits it. é 

Note 5. The poets elided, though seldom, the diphthong αὐ; but only 
in the passive endings wor, σαι, ται, σϑαι, 6. g. Bother’ ἔφη, ἔρχομ᾽ ἔχων." 
Whether the Datives poi, cod, were elided, is still very doubtful; see the’ 
Ausf. Sprachl. with the additions.—To crasis, and not here, belongs all 
that is elsewhere adduced as instances of the elision of long syllables, viz. 
καί and toé (§ 29. n. 7, 8). So also the apparent elision of τά, τό (ib. πῃ, 2. 
a), and of initial vowels (ib. n. 10). 

- For the apocope in ἂρ, πὰρ, ἂν (for ava) before consonants, see ὁ 117. n. 2. 


* As to the αὐ of the Inf- Aor. 1. Act. it never falls away before a short vowel 
in such a manner that the syllable remains short ; but in every instance the me- 
tre requires or admits a long syllable. According to the rule in the preceding 
section then, (comp. ὃ 29. n. 2. a,) all such instances are to be regarded as cases 
of crasis; where however, for the sake of clearness, the apostrophe must be used ; 
in the one case thus, γεῦσ᾽ ἱμᾶς for γεῦσαι ὑμᾶς (long v) ; in the other thus, γήμαε 
᾿πῆρε (ἐπῆρε); unless one choose to write the syllables in full, as a case of 
Synizesis. 


PART II. 


GRAMMATICAL FORMS AND FLEXION OF WORDS. 


δ 31. Parts or ΞΡΕΈΟΘΗ. 


1. Strictly speaking, there are are only three principal parts of speech. 


. Every word which names or denotes any subject or object is a Noun 


(nomen); the word by which something i is predicated of any subject or 
object is called a Vers ; and all other words, by which the discourse 
thus constituted is rendered more definite, connected, and animated, are 
called ParTicLEs. 

2. It is however customary to make several important subdivisions of 
these principal parts; and hence in most languages it is common to 
assume eight parts of speech. Namely, from (I.) the Noun, which 
has its own subdivision of Substantive and Adjective, are separated (II. ) 
the Pronoun, which includes also the Article,* and (IIT:) the Parrict- 
PLE, which as to Syntax belongs tothe Verb. (IV.) The Vers remains 
without subdivision; but the Particles are subdivided into (V.) the Ap- 
vers, (VI.) the Prerosition, (VII.) the Consuncrtion, and (VIII.) the 
INTERJECTION ; of which, however, the last is commonly reckoned by 
the Greek Grammarians among the Adverbs. 


THE NOUN AND ITS DECLENSION. 


§32. GrnpeER. f 


1. The gender of nouns, whether masculine, feminine, or neuter, is 
commonly known from the terminations; as will be pointed out under 
the several declensions. To mark the gender in grammar, the ar- 
ticle is usually employed, viz. 0 masc. ἡ fem. ro neut. (For the de- 
, clension.of the article, see § 75.) : 

2. The names of persons, (man, woman, god, goddess, etc.) have 
their gender according to the sex, let the termination be what it 
may; e.g. ἢ ϑυγάτηρ daughter, ἡ νυὸς daughter-in-law. But diminu- 
tives in ον are always neuter; e.g. 70 γύναιον from γυνή woman, τὸ 
μειράκιον from μεῖραξ a youth. 


* For the cause, see § 75. n. 3. 


δ 32, 33. NouNS.—GENDER, DECLENSION,. 65 


N OTE 1, Inthe same class with these diminutives belong also the follow- 
ing: τὸ téxvoy or τὸ τέκος child, and the Plur. τὰ παιδικά darling, used instead 
of the Sing.—Nevertheless, in construction, all words whieh do not stand 
in immediate contact with such personal neuters, are immediately referred 
to the true gender and number; thus Homer even says téxvoy gile.— 
The word τὸ ἀνδράποδον slave is also neuter, because the slave was not 
regarded as a person, but only as an article of property. 


Nore 2, It follows from the above, that every personal appellative 
which is common to the two Sexes, is in grammar also of the common 
gender; e.g. ὃ ἄνϑρωπος man, ἢ ἄνϑρωπος woman. So also 6 and A ϑεός 
god and goddess, ὃ and 4 τροφός male and female nurse, ὃ and 4 φύλαξ 
male and female watcher, etc, although in many such cases there are spe- 
cial feminine forms, as ἢ Pec βύνσενν: ; which however were less employed 
by the Attics, 


Nore 3. Many names of animals are in the same manner common; 
6. δ. 0 and ἡ βοῦς ox and cow, ὃ and ἢ ἵππος horse and mare—In most 
instances one gender serves for both sexes, and this is called, if mascu- 
line or feminine, epicene, Genus Epicoenum (énixowos) ; 6. g. ὃ λύκος wolf, 
ἢ ἀλώπηξ fox. But in nouns of common gender also, one of the genders is 
that of the species, e. g. 6 ἵππος horse generally and indefinitely, at αἶγες 
goats, i.e. the whole species. In general the fem. has here the preference ; 
thus αἵ βόες is very often (but only in the Plur.) cattle generally. “Agutos 
bear and κάμηλος camel, when the marking of the sex is not essential, are 
commonly feminine (7 ἄρκτος, ἢ καμηλος), even when used of the male 
animals ; and the same is very often the case with ἔλαφος deer and χύων 
dog.—The fem. ἢ ios has moreover the special signification cavalry. 

3. The names of trees, cities, and countries, are with few exceptions 
feminine; 6. g. ἢ φηγός the beech, ἡ πίτυς the pine; ἡ Kogu dos, ἡ 
Atyuntos, ἡ «Δακεδαίμων, ete. . 

Nore 4. The following names of trees are masculine: 6 φοίένιξ palm, ὃ 
κέρασος cherry-tree, ὃ 0 ἐρινεός wild fig-tree, ὃ κότινος wild olive tree ; also some 
names of cities in ος, viz. ᾿Ορχομενός always, Πύλος, ᾿Επίδαυρος, «Αλίαρτος, 
᾿Οχχηστός commonly ; and some others occasionally. ΕΠ 6, the names 
of cities with the Plur. ending ino, as Φίλιπποι; and the usually mascu- 
line endings evs, ους G. ovytos, ας G. αντος, 6. 5. ὃ Φανοτεύς, ὃ “Σελινοῦς, 
ὃ Τάρας. Nevertheless, those in ove and ας are sometimes found as fem- 
inines. Those in wy are doubtful; but the most common ones are fem- 
inine, as Βαβυλών always, and Zigwily generally. Those with the neuter 
endings oy and ος G. ove, are of course neuter, e. g. τὸ “Δουλίχιον, τὸ "4ργος. 


§ 33. Deciension. 


1, The Greek mode of declension has the five ordinary cases of other 
languages. It has no distinct form corresponding to the Latin ablative, 
but gives the signification of this case partly to the Genitive and partly 
to the Dative. | 

2. In declension, as well as in conjugation, the Greeks have one 
number more than our occidental languages, viz. the Dual, where only 


66 § 33. DECLENSION. 


two are spoken of. This however is not always inp by some 
writers never; most frequently by the Attics. 
3. The Dual has never more than two endings; of which one is 
common to the Nom. Acc. and Voc. the other to the Gen. and Dative. 
4. The Greek has three Declensions; corresponding to the three first 


in Latin. Their case-endings, or terminations in the different cases, are 
arranged together in the following Table. 

Sing. Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. 
Nom. να |S, ἂς ] ος Neut. ον | — 
Gen. ῃης---ῶς 1 ov ου ς (ως) 
Dat. ny—@ * |q@ ἢ : : 
Acc. nv—av ov .| aor ν. Neut. like the Nom. 
Voc. ῃ---ὰ é Neut. ον | — 

Dual. 
N. A.V. | @ lo é 
G. D. al |, Ou οὖν 

Plur. 
Nom. aL ot Neut.a@ | eo Neut. « 
Gen. wy wy wy 
Dat. als ous σὸν or σὺ 
Acc. ἂς ους Neut. a | ἃς Neut. a 
Voc. αν oc Neut.a ἐς Neut. ἃ 

In this Table the form called the Aitic Dec. 11, is omitted for the 


sake of perspicuity ; see § 37. 

5. When these endings are pure (δ 28. 1), and admit of contraction 
(§ 28), there arises the contracted mode of declension, which is specified 
below under each of the three declensions. The words which retain 
this contraction through all the cases and numbers, are called ὁλοπαϑῆ, 
affected throughout. 'This is always true of the contracts of the two 
first declensions; in the third, strictly speaking, never. ᾧ 48, n.2. 


Nore 1. The Gen. Plur. ends in all the declensions in wy. 


᾿ς Nore 2. The Dat. Sing. has in all the declensions 1; in the two first 
however the » is subscript. 

Nore 3. The Dat. Plur. has strictly in all the declensions ov or ot; 
since αἷς, oc, of the two first, is only an abbreviation from the ancient forms 
αἰσιν, OLY, OY HCL, οὐσι. (§ 30. n. 4.) 

Nore 4. The Vocative is mostly like the Nominative. And-even 
when it has a particular form, the form of the Nominative is neverthe- 
less often put for it, especially by the Attics.. 

Nore 5. All neuters have, as in Latin, three cases alike, viz. Nom. 
Ace, aud Vocative ; and in the Plur. these cases always end in a. 

Nore 6. The three Greek declensions correspond nearly to the three 
first in Latin; except that o¢ in the Nom. becomes in Latin us, and in the 
Gen. is ; while ον and wy are there um; and most generally » becomes m. 


§ 34. FIRST DECLENSION. 67 


Nore 7. In the two first declensions, the Nom. has its appropriate 
case-ending, which in the other cases is simply changed. In the third 
declension, the endings of the other cases are appended to the last syllable 

of the Nom. which however usually undergoes some previous change. 


Note 8. The Dual is strictly only an ancient abridged form of the 
Plural, which usage afterwards limited to the number of two; compare 
the Plural forms ἄμμε, ὕμμε (ὃ 72. n. 6, 10) with the Dual of Dee. III. 
Hence we still find, especially in the epic language, undoubted instances 
where the Dual stands for the Plural. They are however limited mostly 
to the verbs (§ 87. n. 6), and among substantive forms occur solely in parti- 
ciples. (Il. ε, 487. Hymn. Apoll. 487, etc.) 


Nore 9. In respect to the accent, the rule is universal, that the ter- 
minations of the Gen. and Dat. when they are long and have the tone, 
take the circumflex; those of the Nom. Acc. and Voc. in the same cir- 
cumstances take the acute. Here however it is to be remembered, 
that in the third declension the termination of the Nom. and Voc. Sing. 
is not a case-ending (§ 39). 


§ 34. First DecLEnsion. 


1. All words in ἧς and ας are masculine, and all in ἢ and a feminine. 

2. Words ending in α pure ($28. 1) or ea, have the Gen. in ας, and 
retain their « through all the cases of the Singular; as σοφία, ἡμέρα. 
The «@ is also retained by the contracts, e.g. μνὰ (note 1); further by 
ἀλαλὰ Gen. ἃς war-cry, and by some proper names, viz. 70a, Av- 
δρομέδα, Φιλομήλα, Ika, Διοτίμα, which have also long α in the 
Nominative. : 

3. All other words in o have the Gen. in 4¢, and Dat. in 4; butin the 
Acc. and Voc. they resume their α ; see Movoc. 

4. In the Dual and Plural all the four terminations coincide. The 
several forms may be learned from the following examples; in which 
also the regular changes of the accent are marked. 


Sing. (honour) ἡ ] (wisdom) ἡ (Muse) ὁ (citizen) ὃ (youth) 
Nom. τιμή σοφία ἹΗοῦσα πολίτης νεανίας 
Gen. τιμῆς σοφίας Movons πολίτου | νεανίου 
Dat. τιμῇ σοφίᾳ Movon | πολίτῃ | νεανίᾳ 
Acc. τιμήν σοφίαν Μοῦσαν | πολίτην νεανίαν 
Voc. τιμή σοφία Movou | πολῖτα νεανία 

Dual. | . 

N. A. V. | rope σοφία Movou πολίτα νεανία 

G. Ὁ. τιμαῖν coglaty | Πούσαιν  πολίταιν | veaviae 

Plur. ‘ 

Nom. τιμαί σοφίαν Movour | πολῖταν | νεανίαν 
Gen. τιμῶν σοφιῶν Μουσῶν | πολιτῶν | νεανιῶν 
- Dat. τιμαῖς συφίαις Τούσαις πολίταις 1 νεανίαις 

Acc. τιμάς σοφίας | ούσας | πολίτας | νεανίας 

γοο. τιμαί σοφίαν Μοῦσαν | πολῖταν | νεανίαι 


68 § 34. FIRST DECLENSION. 


Sing. ἡ (justice) ἡ (opinion) 7. (trident) ) ἡ (dagger) ὁ (Atrides) 


Nom. δίκη γνώμη! τρίαινα μάχαιρα͵ ᾿Αἰτρείδης 
Gen. δίκης γνώμης τριαίνης μαχαίρας ᾿“τρείδου 
Dat. δίκῃ γνώμῃ τριαίνῃ μαχαίρᾳ | “τρείδῃ 
Acc. δίκην γνώμην τρίαιναν μάχαιραν ᾿“τρείδην 
γοο. δίκη. || γνωμὴη τρίαινα | μάχαιρα Argeidn 
Dual. 
N. A. V. | δίκα γνώμα | τριαίνα |Ιμαχαίρα |: Argsida 
G. D. δίκαιν γνώμαιν | τριαίναιν. μαχαίραυν} Arosa 
Plur. 
Nom. δίκαν | γνῶμαν | τρίαιναν {μάχαιραν [᾿.“4τρεῖδαι 
Gen. δικῶν γνωμῶν | τριαινὼν | μαχαιρῶν | Argedorv 
Dat. δίκαις γνώμαις | τριαίναις μαχαίραις [Γ᾽ Ατρείδαις 
Acc. δίκας γνώμας | tovaivas | μαχαίρας “Argeidas 
Voc. δίκαν γνώμαν | τριαίναν ᾿μαάχαιραν | ΑἸτρεῖδαν 


Examples for practice see in Appendix C. 


5. Ofthe masculines in ἧς the following have the Vocative in ἃ, viz. 
all in τῆς ; many compound verbal nouns, which merely append 7¢ to 
the consonant of the verb, as γεωμέτρης, μυροπώλης, παιδοτρίβης ; 
and all national appellations, as ΠῚ ρσης, Σχύϑης. All others, which 
however are by far the smaller number, have 7; especially the patro- 
nymics in δης, 6. g. «“τρείδης, q.v. 


; Noves. 

I. The contracts of this declension are all δλοπαϑὴ (§ 33. 5), They all 
contract the Nominative into one of the usual terminations, and are then 
declined regularly ; except that contracts in ἃ retain this vowel through- 
out, as being originally pure ; and those in ἃς all take the Doric Genitive 
in @ (note [V.4). They are all distinguishable by the circumflex on the 
termination. 'The uncontracted forms. of such words are for the most 
part unusual, or have been retained with some changes by the Ionics; e. g. 

λεοντέα — λεοντῆ, G. ἧς, etc. Pl. N. λεονταῖ, A. λεοντᾶς (Ion. λεοντέη, λεον-- 
TEN) 
Ἕρμέας — Ἑρμῆς, G. ov. PI. Loui etc. (epic “Eousias) 
μνάα ---- μνᾶ, G. μνᾶς, Pl. μναῖ ete. (lon. μνέα) 
βορέας --- αἰδο βοῤῥᾶς, G. βοῤῥᾶ etc. The doubling of the g is mere- 
ly an accidental peculiarity. 
So also AS vi (orig. -αα, Lon, “A9qvain);, γῆ the earth from 1.4.4, Ion. γαῖα, 
seldom yéu.—For the fem. of the contracted adjectives, see § 60. 

If. Quantity. 1. The Nom. in @ which has the Gen. ys, is always 

short. : 
2. The Nom. in « which has the Gen. ας, is for the most. part long ; 
but in many words short. The accent is here a sure guidé ; since not 
only all proparoxytones and properispomena (as μάχαιρα, μοῖρα) have of 
course the ἃ short (δ 12. 4,5); but also for this declension there exists the 
fixed rule, that oxytones ‘and parorytones which have the Gen. ας, are 
long in the Nominative, as στοά, χαρά, πέτρα, ἡμέρα, σοφία, etc. The 
only exceptions are the numeral μέὰ, and the proper names πύῤῥὰ, Kigé «. 


| 
ὃ 34. rirsT DECLENSION. | 69 


3. The quantity of the final syllable must however be known, in order 
to the proper accentuation of a word; but since this cannot always be re- 
ferred to simple general rules, we subjoin here only the two following, as 
sufficient for the present. 

a) Dissyllables in sa have the « long, as χρεία ; words of more 
than two syllables have it short, as ἀλήϑεια from ἀληϑής, Mydae, 
γλυκεῖα fem. from γλυκύς. Exeeptions are, abstract nouns from verbs 
in evo, e.g. δουλεία from δουλεύω, βασιλεία kingdom from βασιλεύω. 
But βασίλεια queen from βασιλεύς. See § 119. n. 6. 

b) All words of three or more syllables, that are female ap- 
pellatives, are short, 6. g. ψάλτρια, δότειρα, Ὄμπνια, etc, So also the 
adjective πότνια ; but all other feminine adjectives which fall under 
this head are long, as κύριος, κυρία, etc. 

4, The Vocative in « from masculines in ἧς is short ; from those in ας, 
long. The Dual ending ἃ is always long. 


5. The ending ας is long in all the cases in which it occurs ; and the Ace. 
Plur. is thereby distinguished from that of Dec. III, where it is short. The 
Dorics alone make also the Acc. Plur. of Dec. I, shark 


6. The Acc. Sing. in ay always follows the quantity of the Nominative. 


1Π. Accent. 1. It is characteristic of this declension that the Gen. 
Plur. almost always has the tone (the circumflex) upon its ending, let the | 
tone in the other cases be where it may; as Movca Movowy, ἄκανθα ἄκαν-- 
ay. The cause lies in the contraction of this Genitive from the more 
ancient form ἄων, see IV. 3. Exceptions are: (a) The feminines of adjec- 
tives and barytone participles in ος, as ξένος, ξένη ---- ξένων " αἴτιος, αἰτία ---- 
αἰτίων * τυπτόμενος, Y — τυπτομένων. (0) The substantives χρήστης usurer, 
of ἐτησίαι trade-winds, ἀφύη anchovy. 

2. In the other cases the tone always remains, so far as the general rules 
permit, upon the same syllable as in the Nominative ; e.g. Nom. Plur. co- 
giar, Voc. πολῖτα, Nom. Plur. πολῖται, etc. The only exception is- Voc. 
δέσποτα from δεσπότης master ; since the Homeric μητίετα for μητιέτης, εὑρύο-- 
mo, etc. are already so accented 3 in the antique Nominatives; comp. IV. 
2.—The feminines of adjectives in og throw the tone, so soon as the final 
syllable permits, upon the syllable where the masculine has it; e.g. ἄξιος 
F. ἀξία, Pl. ἄξιοι, ἄξιαι. 

3. That all Genitives and Datives, which have the tone on the termina- 
tion, mark it with the circumflex, appears from § 33. n. 9. Comp. τιμή above. 

IV. Drarecrs. 1. The Dorics put in all the terminations long « for ἡ, 
as τιμά, ἃς, &, ay; the Tonics commonly put ἡ for long ἃ, as coin, x, ῇ, 
ny * μάχαιρα, NS, ἢ; αν" ὃ νεηνίης, ete. the Ace. Pl. excepted .—But the epic 
writers retain the o in Sea, ϑεᾶς, etc. in Ἰγαυσικάα, coc, and in some proper 
names in ας, as Aiysioc. Another epic peculiarity i is ἡ instead of short a 
in χγίσση, Σκύλλη, commonly xvioow, Σαύλλα; and vice versa we find the 
Homeric γύμφα for νύμφη. 

2. The old language has some masculines in «, which remained in some 
dialects, and therefore also in Latin. ‘Thus Homer and the other epic 
writers have often in the Nominative ἱππότα instead of ἱππότης ; so μητίετα, 
εὐρύοπα, ἀκάκετα. 

3. The most ancient form of the Genitive Sing. of the masculines, is in 

10 


70 § 35. SECOND DECLENSION. 
0, aha of the Gen. Plur. of all the ‘terminations, in ay. 
“Atosidao, ἸΠουσάων, ete. ᾿ 

4. The Dorics contracted these Genitives into ἃ ; 6. g. τοῦ ᾿Ατρείδα, τῶν 
ἹΠοισᾶν for Mover, τῶν ᾿Δτρειδᾶν. This Doric Genitive has remained in 
the common language in the Sing. of some few words, especially proper 
names, 6. g. 


So the epic 


᾿Αννίβας Hannibal, τοῦ ᾿Αννίβα 
τοῦ ὀρνυϑοϑήρα the bird-catcher’s. 

5. The Ionics on the other hand converted the ao into ew (ὃ 27. n. 10), 
where however the ὦ has no influence on the accent; so πολέτεω (ὃ 12. n. 4); 
and from ἄων they made gay; thus μουσέωνγ.---- Here too the common lan- 
guage retained this Gen. Sing. in some names of Ionic men, as Θάλεω, 
- Aécysw.—When this ending is preceded by a vowel, the ¢ can in verse be 
dropped, e. g. ἐὐμμελέω from ἐϊμμελίης, Bogéw from Βορέης. 

6. The ancient form of the Dat. Pl. αὐσι, cow (δ 33. n. 3), e. g. τιμαῖσι, 
ἹΜούσαισιν, etc. occurs not only in the more ancient dialects, but also in 
the Attic poets, and sometimes even in the earlier Attic prose, e. g. in Plato. 
So also in Dec. II, the Dat. Pl. in οὖσι, ovaw.—The Ionic dialect has in 
Dec. I, ῃσιν, nov and ἧς. . In the epic writers, however, the usage in respect 
to the shortest form is variable between. og and yg. These Tonic forms 
are also sometimes employed in the Attic drama. 

7. The lonic Accusatives δεσπότεα, and -ξας, are Heteroclites, ὃ 56. n. 4. 


§ 35. Seconp Decienston. 

All words in ον are neuter; those in 0¢ are commonly masculine. 
Many in o¢ however are feminine; not merely among the names of 
persons, animals, trees, and cities (ὃ 32); but also many others. See 
the catalogue of such words in Appendix C. | 

Besides these there are also several feminines in o¢, which are properly 
adjectives, where a feminine substantive is omitted ; e. g. Wi διάλεκτος 
dialect (scil. φωνή), ἢ διάμετρος diameter (sc. γραμμή), ἢ ἄτομος atom 
(sc. οὐσία), ἡ ἀνυδρος desert, ἡ χέρσος and ἡ ἤπειρος continent (sc. 
χώρα), ἡ σύγκλητος (sc. βουλή) senate; and many others. 


Sing. δ. ore) ἡ (beech) ὁ (people) 6 (man) τὸ (fig) 
Nom. λόγος φηγὸς ἥμος ἄνϑρωπος σῦκον 
Gen λόγου φηγου δήμου ἀνθρώπου σύχου 
Dat. λόγῳ φηγῷ δήμῳ. ἀνθρώπῳ σύχῳ 
Acc λόγον φηγὸν ~ | δῆμον ἄνϑρωπον | σῦκον 
Voc. hove φηγέ δῆμε ἄνϑρωπε σῦκον 

Dual. 

N.A. V. | λόγω gnyo δήμω | ἀνϑρώπω | ovxm 
G. D. hoyou 1 φηγοῖν δήμοιν ἀνθρώποιν | σύκοιν 

Plur 
Nom. λόγου φηγοὶ δῆμοι avdqumoe σῦκα 
Gen λόγων φηγῶν | δήμων ἀνθρώπων σύκων 
Dat. λόγοις | φηγοῖς | δήμοις | ἀνθρώποις | σύκοις 
Acc Aoyous φηγοὺς | δήμους ἀνθρώπους | σὕκα 
Voc λόγου pnyot δῆμου ἄνθρωπον | ouxe 


Examples for practice see in Appendix ©. 


§ 36. SECOND DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 71 


Nore 1. The neuters in 0, as ἄλλο, ἐκεῖνο, etc, which in other respects 
conform entirely to this declension, see under the Pronouns, § 74. 


Nore 2. The Vocative is sometimes like the Nominative, for the sake 
of euphony, as in ϑεός ; sometimes without any such cause, as ὦ φίλος, 
Aristoph. Nub. 1167. 


Nore 3. The quantity and accent require here no particular remarks ; 
the ending ἃ is short, as in Latin; ‘the circumflex on the Genitives and 
Datives (see φηγός) has already been noted in § 33. n. 9. 


Nore 4. Diatecrs. a) The Genitive in ov-was in the ancient language 
probably the ‘uncontracted 00; hence the so called T'hessalian Genitive 
in o10, of which the epic and lyric language availed itself; as λόγοιο, 
φηγ οἷο. ᾿ 

b) The Dorics have in the Gen. ὠ, and in the Acc. Ρ]. ὡς, 6. 5. 6 νόμος, 
G. τῶ νόμω, Acc. Pl. τὼς νύμως. More rarely they have in the Acc. Pl. 
o¢; e.g. from ὃ λύκος Theocritus has τὼς λύκος for τοὺς λύκους. 

c) In the ancient language the neut. Ρ]. in « appears to have had the 
Gen. in ἄων; as Hesiod. Scut. 7, βλεφάρων---υναεάων. Hence the Ho- 
meric ἐάων from τὰ EA goods; see Anom. ἐς, ὃ 58. 

d) For the Dat. Plur. in οὖσι, οὖσιν, as λόγοισι, φηγοῖσιν, see § 34.n. IV. 
6.—The epic language prolongs the ow of the Gen. and Dat. Dual into 
ouy, as inouy; see ὃ 27. n. 2. ὁ 28. n. 8. ‘, 


ᾧ 36. Contracted Form of the Second Declension. 


Many words in 00¢ and oov, δος and «ov, are generally. contracted 
throughout, i.e. as ὁλοπαϑή, § 33.5. This takes place according to the 
general rules (ᾧ 28); except that the « of the neuter swallows up the 
preceding ¢ or 0, and becomes long; as ὀστέα core, ἁπλόα ἁπλᾶ. 
Comp. under adjectives, § 59. 


Sing. ὁ (sailing) Plur. Sing. τὸ (bone) _, Plur. 
Nom.! πλόος πλοὺς πλόον πλοῖ [ὀστέον ὀστοῦν | coréa Gora 
Gen. | πλόου πλοῦ |πλόων πλὼν | ὀστέου ὀστοῦ | ὁστέων ὀστῶν 
Dat. | πλόῳ πλῷ | πλόοις πλοῖς | ὁστέῳ ὁσεῷ | ὀστέοις ὀστοῖς 
Acc. | πλόον πλοῦν | πλόους πλοὺς | ὁστέον ὀστοῦν ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 
Voc. | πλόε πλοὺ Ἐ πλόον πλοὶ |ooreov ὀστοῦν ὀστέα ὀστὰ 


Dual. Ν. A. πλόω πλώ 
G. D. πλόοιν πλοὶν 


» , > ͵ 
OOTEWM Οοστωΐ 
3 > ~ 
οστέοιν OOTOLY 


\ 


Nore. The compounds of the monosyllables πλοῦς, νοῦς, etc. have, 
even inthe uncontracted forms, the accent on the next preceding syllable, 
according to the general rule (§ 12. 2. a), 6. g. περέπλοος περίπλους. And 
they retain it upon this syllable in the contracted form through all the 
cases, even where the uncontracted form must move it forwards, (e. g. 
περίπλου, uncontr, περιπλόου,) contrary to the general rule § 28. n. 8. 


* This regular Vocative is placed here on account of some proper names, as 
Πάνϑους Voc. Πάνϑου.--- τοί δορυξόος, -ovs, spear-sharpener, occurs the Voc. 
δορυξέ, with o elided, Aristoph. Pac..1260. Compare the note on the next page. 
Besides these a proper Vocative will hardly be found. 


t The accent of this Dual is contrary to the rule in ὃ 28.n.9. Comp. ὃ 49. n.7. 


72 § 37. ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. - 


This syllable, when Jong by nature, also takes the circumflex before the 
contracted οἱ, e. g. evvor from εὔνους, uncontr. εὔγοος, εὔνοοι. But in such 
instances the tone cannot fall back upon the antepenult ; hence περίπλοιυ, 
κακόγοι from κακόγους evil minded.* 


§ 37. Attic Second Declension. 


To the second declension is commonly annexed the declension of 
several words in ὡς masc. and fem. and in wy neuter, under the name of 
the Attic declension. It takes through all the cases w, instead of the 
usual vowels and diphthongs of the common second declension; and 
with ὁ subscript, where the latter has οὐ or ῳᾧ. The Vocative is always 
like the Nominative. 


Sing. ὁ (temple) τὸ (hall) _ Dual. Plur. , 
Nom. | νεώς ἀνώγεων | veo | ἀνώγεω vEw ἀνώγξω 
Gen. | ve ανώγεω i veqy | ἀνώγεῳν | νεῶν | ἀνωώγξων 
Dat. | vew ἀνώγεῳ νεῷς ἀνώγεῳς 
Acc. | vewy ἀνώγεων νεώς ἀνώγεω 
Voc. | νεώς ἀνώγεων νεῷ ἀνώγεω 


Nore 1. The expression δέξο declension must not be understood, as im- 
plying that the Attics were accustomed to decline words in o¢ in this man- 
_ner. It is rather a peculiar and ancient mode of declining a very limited 
number of words; some of which indeed have forms corresponding to 
those of Dec. II, but still for the most part differing i in other respects, 6. g. 
ὃ λαός people, γαός,---λεώς, νεώς ; ὃ λαγώς hare, lon. ὃ λαγωός and λαγός. 
Others have also secondary forms according to Dec. III, as Mivws G. 
Miva and Miywosg; others conform only partially, sometitnes to one mode 
of flexion, and sometimes to another ; see for all this § ὅθ. n, 6.—This mode 
of declension is called ttic, because when two forms are current, that one 
which belongs here is employed particularly by the Attics. 

Note 2. The words of this declension have also a peculiar , 

Accus. in a, 
sometimes together withthe regular one, 6. g. toy λαγών and λαγώ; in 
other words seldom; in others again exclusively, or almost so. This is 
the case in these names of places: Kas, Kéws, Τέως, "Adws, and in ἢ ἕως 
aurora, Acc. τὴν ἕω, which is the Attic form for the Tonic ἡώς Gen. ἤόος, 
οὗς (ὃ 49) -—The neuters of some adjectives also have ω in the Nom. and 
Acc. I a ἀγήρως not growing old, Neut. ἀγήρω. ' 

Nore 3. The Gen. in qo in this declension corresponds to the epic 
Gen in 010; e. g. Πετεώς G. Πετεῶο, Homer, 

Nore 4. For the anomalous accent of this declension, see § 11. 8.— 
It is also an exception, that the Gen, Sing. when it has the tone upon the 
ending, is oxytone, as τοῦ yew ; contrary to§ 33. n. 9. 


* Jn the language of common life these contractions in ovg degenerated into 
mere abridged forms in og. Hence proper names in —voo0¢ -νοὺς have also anoth- 
er form in -vos, which however by way of compensation always lengthens the 
preceding syllable ; e.g. Εὐϑύνους and Evdvvoc,’ Apyivous and Aezivos, Καλλῖ- 
vog properly Καλλίνοος. 


§ 38. THIRD DECLENSION.—GENDER. 73 


: Tuirp DEcLENSION. 


‘§ 38. Gender. 


1. In the variety of terminations which belong to this declension, any 
general rules for ascertaining the gender from the termination must 
be very imperfect; and observation and practice will ever remain the 
best teachers. Nevertheless, there are certain endings, of which the gen- 
der may be more accurately determined ; see the note. 

2. In general, final ¢ belongs more to masculines and feminines; a 
short vowel in the final syllable, more to the neuters —There i is no neuter 


in ἕ or w. 

Norte. We adduce here the terminations of which the gender can be spe- 
cified with some exactness. In the exceptions no reference is had to those 
appellations of persons, like ἢ μήτηρ mother, ἢ δάμαρ spouse, the gender 
of which is known of course (§ 32. 2); but whenever a form is marked as 
without exception, there also no personal form occurs of any other gender. 


Waascitenes: 


All in eve, as ὃ ogevs mule, ἄμφορεύς amphora. No exceptions. 
P Substantives which have the Gen. in ytog, as ὃ τένων, ovtog tendon ; 
ὃ ὁδούς, όντος, tooth; ὃ ἱμάς, ἄντος, thong ; here names of cities only 
make some exceptions (§ 32. ἡ. 4). 
Those in 719, aS ζωστήρ. Exceptions ; fem. ἡ γαστήρ belly, ἣ ἢ κήρ fate, 
and in the poets 7 ἀήρ and ἢ αὐϑήρ. Also the contracted 
neuters, of which below. 


Feminines. 

All in ὦ, as ja. No exceptions. 

Those in ας G. «dos, as ἢ λαμπάς torch; with the exception of some 
adjectives common, as λογάς, σπορᾶς, 4 63. 5 

Those in ες, as ῇ πόλις, ἢ χάρις. Exceptions ; masc. ὕφις serpent, 
ἔχις adder, χόρις bed-bug, ὄρχις testicle, κύρβις law-tablet, μάρις 
a liquid measure, —Gen. EOS § κἱὶς wood-worm, hig lion, G. ιός, 
δελφίς α. ios. Further, 0, ἢ ὄρνις G. γιϑος ; ἣ, ὃ τίγρις G. 1085 ἢ, 
ὃ dic G. woe heap, bank. 

Abstract nouns in τῆς (Lat. tas), as ἢ μικρότης parvitas. No exceptions. 


Neuter. hia 

Allin o, ἡ; 4, v, as τὸ σῶμα body, κάρη head, μέλυ honey, ἄστυ city. 
No exceptions, 

_ All final syllables made short by « and 0, as τὸ τεῖχος, τὸ ἦτορ, and the 
neuter adjectives i in δῷ, ἕν, Ov. No exceptions. 

Those in ag, as τὸ ἧπαρ, τὸ γέχταρ. So also those in 79 contracted 
from -s09, as τὸ ἔαρ 70 spring, τὸ κέαρ κἣρ heart, τὸ στέαρ στὴρ 
tallow. The only exception is ὃ wee starling. 

Those in we which are not personal appellations, as τὸ ὕδωρ, TO τέκ- 

* woe, οἴο. Except 6 ἰχώρ lymph and ὃ ἀχώρ scab. 

Those in ας with Gen. atoc and aoc, as τὸ τέρας G. ατος wonder, τὸ 
δέπας G. wos goblet, Except ὃ λᾶς stone and ὃ or τὸ ΚΡΑ͂Σ head. 


74 δ 39. THIRD DECLENSION.—FLEXION. 


Besides these the only neuter substantives in this declension are τὸ 

πῦρ fire, τὸ φῶς light, τὸ οὖς ear, τὸ σταῖς dough. 
Nouns in ας consequently, according to the above rules, with the Gen. 
in aytosc, are masculine ;—Gen. αδος, feminine ;—Gen. tog and wos, neuter. 


§ 39. Flexion. 


1. In every declinable word, it is necessary to distinguish between the 
root and the case-ending, which alone is changed. In the two first de- 
- clensions the Nominative has also such a case-ending ; in the third, this 
is first appended in the oblique cases, 6. g. 

Dec. II. λόγ-ος, Aoy-ov, λόγ-ῳ 
Dec. 1II. O70, One-0¢, ϑηρ-ί. 

2. But in the third declension, the Nominative seldom suffers so little 
change as in ϑήρ. In most instances the final syllable undergoes some 
alteration, either by addition, as 

Gen. βότρυ-ος (root βοτρυ) Nom. βότρυς, 
or by rejection, as 

Gen. σώματ-ος (root owuar) Nom. σώμα, 
or by substitution, as 

Gen. κανόν-ος (root κανον) Nom. κανών." 

Nore. In order to decline a word rightly in the third declension, it is 
consequently necessary to know the JVominative and one of the oblique 
cases; for which purpose the Genitive is commonly taken. When how- 
ever only one of these two is known, the rules are far simpler for finding 
the Nominative from the Genitive, than for the reverse; because in the 
Genitive the root, on which all depends, is commonly unchanged ; and in 
the Nominative commonly not. Moreover, the Genitive can and should 
always be learned with the Nominative from the lexicons; while in 
reading, it is most frequently the Genitive, Dative, etc. of an unknown 
word, that we meet with. In order now to find such a word in the lexi- 
cons, we must be able to deduce the Nominative from the Genitive; and 
for this purpose rules are given in the following sections. 


* It is here to be particularly noted, that the ground-form or root of a word in 
respect to flexion, is very different from the proper root in respect to etymology. 
Whoever does not accurately make this distinction, would naturally be led in ap- 
plying the above principle, to assume 6. g. ow as the root, and @, arog, as ending. 
But a part of this ending, the « at least, belongs already to the formation, and not 
to declension, with which alone we are here concerned. In the two first de- 
clensions, it is true, the formative endings and those of declension, often flow 

- together, and cannot be methodically separated, e. g. Ady-os, Ady-ov. Butin the 
third declension, the ending of declension, or the case-endings, can be entirely 
separated, as above in Oyo, viz. in the oblique cases; and this alone is what 
must here take place. Comp. ὃ 91 note.—[According to this view, the etymolo- 
gical root of a word contains only the essential and usually invariable letters of 
that word. The ground-form, as distinguished from the root, is the simplest 
actual form derived from it, and is the basis of all the other forms. It is that 
form under which a word is cited in lexicons and grammars; in nouns the Nom- 
ua τὸ, and in verbs the 1 pers. Pres. Indic. or theme ; comp. § 91 note. § 92. 

.-- Τα. 


δῷ 40, 41. THIRD DECLENSION.—CHANGES. 75 


oo 


ᾧ 40. Changes of the Root. 


1. The most common changes which the root undergoes in the Nomi- 
mative, are the following :* 

1) It assumes ¢, 6. g. βότρυς Borev-og, ads ἀλ-ός. ᾿ 

2) The short vowels ¢ and ὁ of the root, in masculines and femi- 

nines, become 7 and w, e.g. εἰκὼν εἰκόν-ος, ἀληϑής ἀληϑέοςος. 

2. For the more exact application of both these, and indeed of all oth- 

er precepts, we must here distinguish two principal cases, viz. when 
the. case-ending is preceded (1) by a consonant, and (2) by a vowel. 


$41. Changes before Case-endings. 


1. When the case-ending is preceded by a consonant, and the Nomi- 
native assumes ¢, this ¢, with the letters y, x, 7, of course passes over 
into €,—and with β, π, g, into w, (§ 22,) e.g. 

n00aE κόρακ-ος, ὄνυξ ὄνυχ-ος 
ow ὠπ-ὄς, χάλυψ χαλυβ-ος. 

2. These Nominatives in § and w never change the ¢ and o of the 
root; e.g. φλέψ φλεβός, φλὸξ φλογός, αἰϑίοῳψ aidionos. Except ἡ 
ἀλωπηξ ἀλώπεκος fox. ἱ 

3. When however the consonant before the case-ending is either ὃ, 
τ, or &, this of course falls away in the Nom. before the ¢ (§ 24. 3), e.g. 

λαμπάς λαμπάδος, Δωρίς Aweidos, κηλίς κηλῖδος 
ὄρνις ὄρν᾽ϑος, κόρυς κόρυϑος, ἡ Πάρνης Πάρνηϑος 
τέρας τέρατος, χάρις χαρἵτος. : 

4. So too ν and vr fall away before the ¢, but then the short vowel is 
prolonged; in the case of vz always, in that of ν usually, in the manner 
specified in §25.4. E.g. : 

ylyas γίγαντος, χαρίεις χαρίεντος, ὁδούς ὀδόντος 
δελφίς (long 2) δέλφῖνος,, Φόρκῦς Φορκῦνος 
μέλας μέλανος, κτείς κτενός ἢ | 

5. When the Nominative does not assume ¢, the consonants y and @ 
are the only ones which can remain at the end of the Nominative; as. 


* In the following examples the learner must take notice, that 6. σ΄. the citation 
βότρυς, βότρυ--ος, is to be thus understood, viz. ““ From the root βοτρυ, which ap- 
pears in the Gen. βότρυ--ος, comes the Nom. βότρυς. And so of all the rest. 

t In the lexicons and grammars the Nom. of the Gen. in «voc is also given in 
tv; but in the earlier writers we always find δελφίς, ἀκτίς, dis, etc. 


t The only other similar instance is εἷς, for which see § 70. 1. 


76 § 41. THIRD DECLENSION.—CHANGES. 


αἰὼν αἰῶν-ος, ϑήρ Ono-dg. All other consonants must be cast off; 
though this actually occurs with z alone.* E. g. 
σῶμα σώματ-ος, Sevopayv Ξενοφώντ-ος. ) 
In both instances, ¢ and o in masculines and feminines are always 
changed into 7 and w; e.g. 
λιμήν λεμέν-ος, ῥήτωρ ῥήτορ-ος, γέρων γέροντ-ος. 
6. Some neuters which have the Gen. ατος, take @ in the Nominative 
instead of ¢; e.g. ἧπαρ ἥπατ-ος. Comp. ὃ 16. η. 1. Καὶ 
7. In accordance with the above rules we subjoin here the ordinary 
instances in which the case-ending is preceded by a consonant, viz. 
. (γος, κο 0 : AOE, etc. 
The Gen. in i , 10 a ὡς : Ἂν from Nom. in { ἢ ie Wy, oe 
— — — δος, τος, ϑὸος from Nom. in ¢, as λαμπάς, λαμπάδος. 
particularly 
α (σώμα, ato) 
— ατος from Nom. in ας (τέρας, ατος) 
ἀρ (ἧπαρ, ατος) 
ν (Πᾶν, Πανὸς) 
ς (Gis, δεινὸς) 
‘ particularly 
— ενος and ονος from Nom. in ἦν and wy 
(λεμήν λιμένος, εἰκὼν εἰκόνος) 


— — — vo¢g from Nom. in | 


ας, εἰς, ous, υς 
(φας φαντος, ϑείς ϑέντος) 
(δους δοντος, φύς φυντος) 
wy (γέρων, οντος) 
— — — ρος from Nom. in 9, ϑήρ ϑηρός, etc. 
particularly 
— ἐρος and ορος from Nom. in. yo and we 
| (αἰϑήρ αἰϑέρος, ῥήτωρ ῥήτορος) 
and from two neuters in 00 
ἄορ sword, ἦτορ breast. 
8. The following examples are better noted singly : 
0, ἡ adc ἁλὸς salt, sea 
‘ ’ , Ὰ U4 ’ 
TO μέλι μέλιτος honey, to κάρη καρητος head 
ἡ vv νυχτὸς night, ὁ avak ἄνακτος king 
ἡ δάμαρ δάμαρτος spouse 
6 ποῦς (or πούς) ποδὸς foot, 


— — — ‘yro¢ from Nom. in 


* Hence however γάλα G. γάλακτος may be explained; see in ὃ 58. All the 
other letters (i.e. except + and in this instance x) assume the ¢ (§, y,) in the 
Nominative. The letters « and o however do not occur at all before a case-end- 
ing in this declension; and of 4 the only example is ἅλς G. adds. 


4 § 42. THIRD DECLENSION. 77 


— ee - elite ἘῺῸΒΕΝ ᾿ς θυ 


οὐδὲ some elves, which may be found | aniong the δϑοβιλμόνο nouns 
(ὃ 58); see there especially γάλα, ϑέμες, μάρτυς, οὖς, χείρ. 


Note 1. When the penult of the Genitive has a, 1, or v, the quantity 
can be determined only by authority ; just as in the Nominative of other 
words. (See the list of those words where this penult is long, in Appen- 
dix C.) We here subjoin only the rule, that all substantives, whose Geni- 
tive terminates in 

͵ ανος, ὑνος, υνος 
have these penults long ; e.g. Πάν Πᾶνός, παιάν παιᾶνος, bis givos, δελφίς 
δελφῖνος, μόσυν μόσῦνος. 


Nore 2. The endings of the Nominative, of which the quantity has 
not been determined above, usually conform in this respect to the penult 
of the Genitive. Hence, with a few exceptions in the poets, δρνὶς -ἶἴϑος, 
κηλὲς (long ι) -ἶδος, παιάν (long «) -ἅνος. So also before & and ψ in simi- 
lar instances, the long sound must be rendered audible in pronunciation, and 
not unfrequently it is apparent from the accent; Θ. g. ϑώραξ, -axog (Lon. 
ϑώρηξ, -ηχος) ; further, in pois —lx0S, κήρυξ -ῦκος, in later writers φοῖνιξ, 
κῆρυξ. On the contrary, αὖλαξ -ἀκος, etc. 

Nore 3. All monosyllabic Nominatives, the pronoun τές excepted, are 
long; so πῦρ πὺρός. 

Nore 4. The few words which have γϑος in the Gen. drop only the 9 
before ¢ of the Nom. and retain the v, contrary to the usual custom of the 
Greek language ; 6. g. ἕλμινς ἕλμινϑος worm, Tiguys Tiguy Fos. 

Nore 5. When the termination εἰς, evtog, is preceded by ἢ or 0, a con- 
traction usually takes place; 6. g. τιμήεις τιμήεντος, Contr. τιμῆς τιμῆντος ; 
μελυτόεις όεντος, contr. μελιτοῦς οὔντος. Here belong the names of cities in 
οὖς, OVYTOS, as "Οποῦς, ete. 

Note 6. The contractions which take place i in the ᾿ participles of the 
contracted conjugation, as φιλῶν φιλοῦντος, . τιμῶν τιμῶντος, etc. may be 
better seen in the paradigms of this conjugation (ὃ 105). We only re- 
mark here, that such proper names as Ξεροφῶν, ὥντος, are derived from 
this mode of contraction. 

Nore 7. Another contraction arises, when the ending ag is preceded . 
by 8; e.g. κέαρ κῆρ heart, G. κέαρος κῆρος. So also ἔαρ 79 spring ; of 
which in prose the uncontracted form is most, usual in the Nom. and the 
contracted one in the Gen. and Dat. i. 6. ἕαρ, ἦρος. ‘The same contraction 
takes place also in some words which have τ in the Gen. but in these the 
accent does not follow the usual rules. of contraction, but takes the most 
convenient place ; e. g. στέαρ στέατος tallow, contr. στὴρ στητός; φρέαρ well 
G. φρέατος φρητός ; ὍΡΟΝ bait G. δελέατος δέλητος. Comp. § 28. n. 9, 10, 
with § 43. n. 4. 


§ 42. Changes etc. continued. 


1. Those words which have a vowel before the case-ending, i. 6. which 
have og pure in the Genitive (ᾧ 28. 1), almost universally assume ¢ 


* Il. 2. 605, according to Wolf’s reading, which is the only eee one. 


Al 


78 | § 43. THIRD DECLENSION.—FLEXION. 


᾿ 


in the Nominative, The only exceptions are some neuters in ὁ and v, 
and feminines in ὦ. 

2. Only neuters can have the short vowels, ¢ and 0, in the termina- 
tion of the Nominative (ὃ 38 note). Hence in masculines and femi- 
nines, the ¢ of the Gen. becomes in the Nom. 7 or ev, and o becomes 
@ or ου. 


3. Thus we have particularly the following : 
The Gen. in og from neuters in ας, as σέλας σέλαος 


— — -- ιος and vog from Nom. in ἐς, ὁ, and vs, v 
nig κιὸς, δάκρυ υος 
— — ---ωὧος from Nom. in ὡς, as Ows ϑωὸς 


Nom, in ovg, as βοῦς βοός 
— — — οος from < the feminines in ὦ and ὡς 
as ἠχώ 609, αἰδώς ὅος 
᾿ Nom. in ἧς and ἐς, 
— — — ες (ews) rom | as ἀληϑῆς, Neut. ἀληϑές, 6, ἕος 
the masculines in év¢, as ἱππεύς ἱππέως. 
Here is also singly to be noted 
ἡ γραῦς γρὰός old woman. 
For ναῦς see Anom. Nouns ὃ 58. 
4. aa, the above instances, the Genitives in 
é0¢ and ¢we¢ 
arise also, through a change of the vowel, 
1) from the numerous neuters in 0¢, 6. g. τεῖχος, τείχεος 
2) from most of the Nominatives in vg and ὁ, and from some in ὃς 
and v, as πόλις πόλεως, ἄστυ ἄστεος. 
Note 1. The more particular details respecting these endings, and also 
on the Gen. in we, are given below under the head of contracted declension, 


to the laws of which all these terminations are more or less subject; 
see § 49. 


Nore 2. The Gen. in ηος belongs to the dialects ; see under words in 
ave and EUG, and under πόλις, ὃ 50—52. See also the Anom. “Aong, ἐύς, 
πρέσβυς, υἱός, § 58; and some contracts ὃ 53. n. 5. 

Nore 3. The eorvals a, Ll, VU; before the ending of the Genitive, are 
short in all these words, except in γρᾶός ; hence they are also short in 
Nominatives of more than one syllable in as, ἐς, vc. In regard to mono- 
syllabic Nominatives, the same rule holds here as in the foregoing section, 
that they are always long ; thus pis pds. 


§ 43. Flexion. 


The following will serve as general examples of the ordinary flexion 
of words in this deelension. 


§ 43. THIRD DECLENSION.—fLEXION. 79 


Sing. (beast), o(age) 0, ἡ (divinity) ὁ (lion) ὁ (giant) 
; , λ ¢ ΒΩ 


Nom 10, αἰὼν δαίμων ἕων γίγας 
Gen. | Onoos αἰωνος | δαίμονος | λέοντος | yiyavtos 
Dat ϑηρὶ αἰῶνι δαίμονι λέοντε ἰγίγαντι 
Ace. |ϑῆρα αἰῶνα δαίμονα λέοντα [γίγαντα 
Voc. ᾿ϑήρ αἰὼν δαῖμον λέον γίγαν ΄ 
Dual. 5 
N. A.V.| ϑῆρε | αἰῶνε δαίμονε λέοντε =| γίγαντε 
α. D. |ϑηροῖν αἰώνοιν | δαιμόνοιν | λεόντοιν | γιγάντοιν 
Plur. 
Nom. [ϑῆρες αἰῶνες δαίμονες λέοντες γίγαντες 
Gen. | Onoor αἰώνων | δαιμόνων | λεόντων γιγάντων 
Dat. “ϑηρσὶ (ν) αἰῶσι (v) | δαίμοσι (ν) | λέουσε (v)| γίγᾶσι (ν) 
Acc. |ϑῆρας αἰῶνας δαίμονας λέοντας | γίγαντας 
Voc. ἰϑῆρες αἰῶνες δαίμονες λέοντες γίγαντες 
Sing. ὁ (raven) ὃ, ἡ (child) 6 (jackal) ὁ (wood-worm) τὸ (thing) 
Nom. [κοραξ παῖς ws | κίς πρᾶγμα ’ 
Gen. [κόρακος παιδὸς | ϑωὸς κιὸς πῤαγματος 
Dat. ἰχόρακε παιδὶ Got “ub MOGY MATL 
Acc. | x0oaxa παῖδα Iona κίν πρᾶγμα. 
Voc. ἰχόραξ παῖ ϑὼς κἱς πρᾶγμα 
Dual. 
N. A.V.| κόραχε | παῖδε | Owe | κίε πράγματε 
6 Ὁ. | xogaxow | παίδοιν | ϑώοιν κιοῖν ΗΠ ρ των 
Plur. 
Nom. | xdgaxeo [παῖδες Ones κίες πράγματα 
Gen. ἰχοράκων | παίδων | ϑώων κῶν πραγμάτων 
Dat. | κόραξι (ν) | παισέ (ν) | ϑωσί (ν) κεσί (ν) [πραγμασι(ν) 
Acc. [χόραχας | παῖδας Hous κίας πράγματα 
Voc. | x0gaxes παῖδες Owe κίες πράγματα 


Examples for practice see in Appendix C. 


Nore 1. These examples are fully sufficient; for so soon as one 
knows the Nom. and Gen. of a word from the lexicon or from the pre- 
ceding rules, his own reflection will easily teach him the rest, viz. that 
like χόραξ are to be declined all those words which end in ἕ and y ; like 
mote παιδός, all which have in the Gen. δος, ϑὸς and toc; like δαήμων 
δαίμονος, also χιών χιόνος, ποιμήν ποιμένος; like λέων λέοντος, also ὁδούς 
ὀδόντος and even sic ϑέντος; and finally like πρᾶγμα, ατος, also ἧπαρ 

᾿ ἥπατος. Only the Acc. and Voc. Sing. and Dat. Plur. require some par- 
ticular explanations, which are given in the following sections.—For the 
Gen. in ὡς, see δὲ 51, 52. a ht 


Nore 2. Driarects. Besides what will be adduced in the following 
sections, we remark here only: (1) That the Dual ending ow is here 
resolved into οἷν by the epic writers, just as in Dec. II, (§ 35. n. 4. d,) 6. g. 
‘ ποδοῖν for ποδοῖν ; (2) That the Ionics sometimes insert « before in the 
Gen. Plur. when it has the circumflex ;.e. g. Herod. χηγέων for χηνῶν, from 
χήν χηνός ; and so ἀνδρέων for ἀνδρῶν from ἀνήρ, Herod. 7. 187. Comp. 
§ 28. n. 3. 


80 § 44. THIRD DECLENSION.—ACCUS. SING. 


Nore 3. Quantity. The case-endings t, ας and ας, are here always 
short ; comp. § 34. n. II. 5, and see in § 52 the exceptions to words in svg.— 
. For the quantity of the final syllable of the Nominative, and of the penult 
of the Genitive, see § 41 notes. 

Note 4. Accent. The following rules are here valid : 

1) In words of two or more syllables, the accent remains, so long as its . 
nature admits, upon the same syllable as in the Nominative ; see eueve 
in κόραξ, αἰών. 

2) Monosyllables throw the accent in the Gen. and Dat. of all the num- 
bers upon the case-endings; and upon the ending wy, this is always a cir- 
cumflex (ὃ 33, n. 9). See above ϑήρ, xic. See the exceptions below. 

8) The Accusatives, Nominatives, and Vocatives, on the contrary, never 
have the tone on the case-ending.* 

From the second rule are earented : 

. The participles} as ϑείς ϑέντος, ὧν Ὄντος, etc. 

. The Plural of the adjective πᾶς, πᾶν, (παντός, παντί, G. Pl. πάντων 
D. πᾶσιν. 

Some words which have become monosyllables by contraction, 6. g. 
λᾶας λὰς G. λᾶος (see § 58) ; ἔαρ 0, κέαρ κῆρ, G. ρος, κῆρος. But 
not all such ; see in § 41. n. 7, and also οἷς, § 50. n. 6. 

d. The Gen. Pi; _and Dual of the following ten words : παῖς, Fac, ὃ 
δι μώς slave, ὃ Τρώς Trojan, τὸ φῶς hght, 7 pars brand, ἢ δᾷς torch, 
τὸ KPA head, and the anomalous τὸ οὖς ear, ὃ ong moth ; con- 
sequently, παίδων, Four, δμώων, Τρώων, φώτων, φῴδων, ἄτῆυν, 
κράτων, ὥτων, σέων : and so in the Dual παίδοιν, etc.t 


The lengthened epic Dat. Pl. ἐσι, ἐσσι, § 46. n, 2. 


R 


a 


“es 


Ἐν 


§ 44. Accusative Singular. 


1.. The principal ending of the Accusative in this declension is in a. 
But words in ἐς, vg, avs, ovg, have also an 
Accusative in », 
which is formed as in the other declensions, by simply changing the ¢ 
of the Nominative into v, and retaining the quantity. In those words 
which have a vowel before the case-ending, this is the only form; 6. g 
βοῦς Gi βούς --- βοῦν" δρῦς G. δρυός - δοῦν. So also ἐχϑύν, πόλιν, 
γραῦν, etc. 
2. Those words on the other hand which assume a consonant in the 
Genitive, have always «, when the. last syllable of the Nominative is 
ἀξρρίοᾳ e.g. ἐλπίς, ido — ἐλπίδα" ποῦς, ποδὸς ---- πόδα. If the last 


* Tt must not be overlooked, that in this declension the ending of the weet ΩΝ 
-710), 3 is always to be distinguished from the ending of the case (σωτῆρ--α), ὃ 39.1. 

‘+ In several of these words, this accentuation is a trace of contraction from 
the more ancient forms wie, gwit, duis, KP_AAX, oveg ; in the others, it prob- 
ably proceeds from an endeavour to distinguish them from the similar Genitives 
of the words αἱ Toewal, Suwal, ϑωη damage, ὁ φώς man, etc. 


§ 45. THIRD DECLENSION.—VOCATIVE. 81 


syllable of the Nominative is wnaccented, they commonly have v, but 
often also a; e.g. ἔρος, 000g — éouy and ἔριδα" κόρυς, υϑὸς --- κόρυν 
and χόρυϑα᾽ εὔελπις, ἐδὸς ---- evehney and εὐέλπιδα" πολύπους, οδος 
— πολύπουν and πολύποδα. ἡ 

Nore 1. So too λᾶας contr. λᾶς stone, Gen. (λάασος) λᾶος, has in Ace. 


λᾶαν contr. div. — See also the Anom. χλείς ( (δ 58); and for words in ὦ 
and we, see § 49. n. 7. 


Nore 2. From the ancient language, the poets (not Attic) retained 
βόα for βοῦν, evesa for εὑρύν, ἰχϑύα for ἰχϑύν, and some others. 


§ 45. The Vocative. 


1. In this declension the instances are particularly frequent, where a 
word can indeed form its Vocative regularly, but nevertheless makes it 
commonly, or at least among the Attics, like the Nominative. We 
subjoin therefore the rules, according to which nouns of certain termi- 
nations can thus form their own Vocative ; leaving it to observation to 
determine in what words this regular Vocative actually occurs. 

2. The endings δὺς, ἐς, vg, as also the words παῖς, γραῦς, βοῦς, cast ᾿ 
off their ¢ to form the Vocative; and ee in δὺς then assume the 
circumflex (δ 11.3); 6. σ. βασιλεύς Voc. ὦ βασιλεῦ. ---- Πάρι, Ζωρί,. 
Tndv, ἡδύ, etc. — παῖ, γραῦ, βοῦ. 

3. Words in ας and ἑἐς, before which ν has fallen away, also cast off 
their ¢ to form the Vocative, and then for the most part resume the 1 ; 
e.g. τάλᾶς, ἄνυς, ὦ ταλὰν " Aias, αντος, ὦ Aiav* χαρίεις, evtos, ὦ 
χαρίεν. But several proper names in ἂς, αντος, have in the Voc. only 
the long a; e.g. “4τλας, avtos, ὦ ” Arla. 

4. Words which have 7 or ὦ in the termination of the Nomi- 
native, simply take ¢ or o in the Vocative; regularly however only 
when the other cases have ὃ or 0; see in the examples δαίμων and 
λέων (ὃ 43). So also μήτηρ, ἐρος, ὦ μῆτερ * OyTwE, ορος, ὦ δῆτορ᾽ 
Σωκράτης, εος, ὦ «Σώκρατες. 

5. Feminines in ὦ and ὡς form the Vocative in οἱ (§ 11. 3); 6. σ. 
Sango, ὦ Σαπφοῖ" “Hus, ὦ Hoi. 

Nore 1. From the rule in no. 4, are excepted those which have the 
accent on the last syllable, e. g. ποιμήν, ἕνος, ὦ ποιμήν, shepherd ; but only 
substantives, not adjectives ; e.g. ὦ xehouepés.. The following three accord 
with the general rule, only drawing back the accent, viz. πάτερ, ἄνερ, δᾶερ, 
from πατήρ, ἀνήρ, δαήρ brother-in-law, G. ἐρος. 

Nore 2. Words which retain the long vowel in the other cases, re- 
main in the Voc. - unchanged : fonsequently ὦ Πλάτων (G. wyvos), ἃ Ξενο- 


φῶν (ὥντος), ὦ ἰητήρ (ρος), ὦ Κράτης (ητος). But the following three 
make the vowel short i in the Vocative ; viz. AxoAAwy ὠνος, Ποσειδῶν ὥνος 


δῷ ᾧ 40. THIRD DECLENSION.—DATIVE PLURAL. 


Neptune, σωτήρ -ἦρος saviour; Voc. ὦ “Anodiov, Πόσειδον, coteo. Here 
also the drawing back of the accent must not be overlooked. 


Nore 3. When the accent in the Nominative stands upon the penult, 
it can in the Voc. be thrown farther back, by shortening the last syllable. 
(δ 12. 2. a. ) This however actually takes place only in certain words, as 
Σώκρατες, “Anoddoy ; in others not, e. g. χαρίεν, δαΐφρον, Παλαΐμον. 


Nore 4, It is easy to conceive, that those objects which are seldom 
directly addressed, should retain rather the form of the Nominative when-, 
ever this did occur; as ὦ ποῦς, ὦ πόλις, and the like. This often takes 
place also, especially among the Attics, in such words and names as 
Κρέων, Αἴας, τάλας, σωτήρ, ete. 


Nore 5. The word ἄναξ king,, when employed to invoke a 1 god, has 
its own form of the Vocative, ὦ ἄνα, by crasis wa; elsewhere ὦ ἄναξ, by 
crasis wyak. 


§ 46. Dative Pe 


1. When the ending σὸν, ov, of the Dative Plural, is preceded by a 
consonant, the same general rules are applicable as for the ¢ of the 
Nominative (ὃ 41). See above, κόραξ, παῖς, aiwy. So also 4oaw 
" doupos —" ἄραψιν, ἧπαρ ἥπατος ---- ἥπασιν, etc. 

2. When in such words the vowel of the oblique cases differs from 
that of the Nominative, it remains also in the Dat. Plural; as δαίμων, 
ονος ---- δαίμοσι" ποῦς, ποδὸς --- ποσίν" ἀλωπηξ, exog— ἀλωπεξιν. 
But when vz has been dropped, the necessary prolongation (§ 25. 4) 
takes place ; see above, λέων, γίγας, and also ὁδούς, ὄντος ---- ὁδοῦσι᾽" 
τυπείς, ἕντος —tuneiowv. If only v has been dropped, the short vowel 
remains; as χτείς “revog — κτεσίν. 

Nove 1. The adjectives also (not participles) i in εἰς, £906, have only «, 
as φωγήεις, ἐντὸς --- φωγήξσιν. 

8. When the ending σύν, ov,-is preceded by a vowel, i.e. when the 
word has 0¢ pure.in the Genitive, this vowel remains in the Dat. Pl. un- 
changed, as in the other oblique cases; e.g. ἀληϑής, og — ἀληϑέσε" 
τεῖχος, E09 — τείχεσι ᾿ δρῦς, δουὸς --- δρῦσίν. When however the 
Nom. Sing. has ἃ diphthong, the Dat. Pl. takes it also, 6. g. 

βασιλεύς, Ewe — βασιλεῦσι 
γραῦς γραὸς — γραυσί 
βοῦς Boog — βουσίν. 

Nore 2. The ancient and epic language has --σσι (»), and more rarely 
-eot (v), instead of σι (ν vy), in all words ; and this ending, inasmuch as it 
begins with a vowel, is appended just as ‘in the other cases; 6. g. ἰχϑύ-εσσι, 
κοράκεσσι, σαύδεσσι, Beiter: βασιλέεσσιν, ἀνάκτεσι. This ΡΝ of the Dative, 
when it comes from monosyllables, retains the tone upon the first syllable, 


or root; e.g. παύδεσσιν, ivect, from παῖς, i¢.—The Dat. in dor see in § 47. 
See also § 52. π.. 8, and the Anom. υἷός and χεέρ, § 58. 


§§ 47, 48. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 83 


§ 47. Syncope of some Words in no. 


1. Some words in yo, G. ἐρος, drop the ¢ in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. 
and also in the Dat. Pl. and then insert ἃ after the @ in this Dative ; thus 

πατήρ father, Gen.(naréoog) πατρός, Dat. (πατέρι) πατρί, A. πατέ- 

oa, V. πάτερ. Pl. πατέρες, G. πατέρων, D. πατράσι, A. πατέρας. 

2. In the same manner are declined, with some anomalies of accent, 
the following : 

μήτηρ (μητέρος) μητρὸς mother 

ἡ γαστήρ (γαστέρος) γαστρὸς stomach 

ϑυγάτηρ (ϑυγατέρος) ϑυγατρός daughter 

Anuntno (Δημήτερος) Anunteos Ceres, 
which last forms also the Accus. in the same manner, Ζήμητρα. — For 
ἀνήρ, see Anom. Nouns § 58. 

Nore 1. The poets sometimes neglect this syncope, and write e. g. 
πατέρος, ϑυγατέρεσσι ; Sometimes also they employ the syncope where it is 
not usually found, as ϑύγατρες, ϑυγατρῶν, etc. πατρῶν Hom. 

Notre 2. The accent of these forms is very anomalous. (1) It stands 
in the full forms (except in the compound Ζ4ημήτηρ) always upon the ε, 
and therefore in the forms of μήτηρ, ϑυγάτηρ, i is first shifted to that place. 
(2) After the « is dropped, the accent is thrown in the Gen. and Dat. of 
most of them, upon the ending, as μητρός, ϑυγατρῶν, ϑυγατράσι 3; which 
elsewhere occurs only in forms from monosyllabic Nominatives. (3) 4y- 
μήτηρ on the contrary draws the tone back in all the syncopated forms, as 
Δήμητρος, etc. and ϑυγάτηρ does the same, but only i in the Nom. and Ace. 
when syncopated by the paee, as ϑύγατρα, ϑύγατρες, ϑύγατρας. 

Notre 3. The sword γαστήρ has in the Dat. Pl. γαστράσιν and yaotije- 


ow. So also 6 ἀστήρ, ἐρος, star, which otherwise is not syncopated, has the 
Dat. Pl. ἀστράσιν. 


Contracted Third Declension. 


ὃ 48, Contraction of Words with Gen. in og pure. 


1. Of words which have o¢ pure in the Genitive (§ 42), there are 
few which are not in some of their forms contracted; although this is 
far from taking place in all those forms, where the general rules would 
permit it. 

2. In some instances the mode of contraction deviates from the 
general rules ; and one instance of this deviation lies in the following 
special rule : 


The contracted Accusative Plural of the third declension is 
always formed like the contracted Nominative Plural. 


ὯΔ 


ἢ 49. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 


Nore 1. Thus 6, g. the Nom, Plurals ἀληϑέες, Bibag are reaualacly.¢ con- 
tracted into ἀληϑεῖς, βοῦς; ; and then the Acc. Plural, contrary to the gen- 
eral rules, assumes precisely the same form; e. g. aac, βόας, contr. 
ἀληϑεῖς, βοῦς ; and that too even in words which usually neglect the con- 
traction of the Nom. Plur. The only exception to this special tule, 
(ἀγυιᾶς and the like), see in ὁ 53. 2 

Norte 2, In the third declension ‘hide can be strictly no ὁλοπαϑῆ (ὃ 33. 5) ; 
because the Nominative has no case-ending of its own, like the other cases. 
But the formative ending of the Nom. can also be pure, and consequently 
subject to contraction. ‘This however must then be regarded as taking 
place in the root, and therefore as something apart from declension ; as 
HELO κῆρ, Ὁπόεις "ποῦς; and when we know the contracted form of ‘the 
Genitive (κἣρ κῆρος, ᾿Οποῦς "Οποῦντος), all the other cases follow in the 
ordinary manner. For this reason, this contraction has been already 
treated of above in § 41. n. 5—7. It is only when both the formative 
ending and the case-ending are pure, and consequently a double power of 
contraction exists, that this mode cannot be separated from the ordinary 
contracted declension ; see § 53. 3. Comp. § 91. n. 1, 2. 

Examples for practice in all the following i instances of contraction, 
see in Appendix C. 


§ 49. First Form of Contraction.— Words in nS, etc. 


Words in ἧς and ες, G. ἐος, (all of them properly adjectives,) neu- 
ters in og, G. 0c, and feminines in ὦ and ὡς, G. 00¢, are contracted in 
all the cases where two vowels come together. 


Sing. 7 (galley) τὸ (wall) ἢ (echo) 
Nom. TOLNONS © τεῖχος ἤχω 
Gen. τριήρεος τριήρους | τείχεος τείχους ἤχοος ηἠχοὺς 
Dat. τριήρεϊ τριήρεν | τείχεν τείχεν | ἡχοὶ ἡχοῖ 
Acc. τριήρξα τριήρη τεῖχος Nyon ἡχώ 
Voc. TOLNOES TELYOS nyo 
Dual. ΩΣ 
N. A. V. TOUNOEE τριήρη | velyse τείχη | nyo 
G. D. τριηρέοιν τριηροῖν | τειχέουν τειχοῖν as Dec. II. 
Plur. : 
Nom. TQLNOEES roenoecs | τείχεα τείχη | ηχοί 
Gen. τριηρέων τριηρῶν | τειχέων τειχῶν as Dec. II. 
Dat. » τριηρεσι(")) τεἰχεσι(ν) 
Acc. τρίηρξας τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη 
Voc. τριήρεες τριήρεις | τείχεα τείχη 


—Neuter adjectives in ὃς are declined, with the exception of this ending 
itself, entirely like the neuters in 0¢; thus from ἀληϑής, Neut. ἀληϑές, 
Pl. τὰ ἀληϑέα ἀληϑή. 

Nore 1, The feminines in ὦ .and ὡς are usually found only in the 
Singular. When the Dual and Plural are necessary, they are formed 
according to Dec. If.—The mase. ἥρως see in the anom. Nouns § 58. 


ᾧ 50. THIRD DECLENSION.— CONTRACTION. δ 


Notre 2. The Duns in 7, (e.g. Aristoph. Thesm. 282 ὦ rebut Θεσ-- 
μοφόρω,) deviates from the general rule, as being contracted from εε (§28. 3). 
The Attics employ the uncontracted form; e.g. τῶ γέγεε, Plato Polit. 260. b. 


Nore 3. The Attics never neglect the contraction in these words, ex- 
cept in the Gen. Plur. where we very commonly find ἀνϑέων, κερδέο)ν, 
τριηρέων, etc. and so in “Ageos, Gen. of “dons Mars.—The uncontracted 
forms of words in ὦ and ὡς occur nowhere, not even in the Ionie dialect. 


Norte 4. Several paroxytone adjectives in ἧς, remain paroxytone in the 
contracted Gen. Plur. e.g. συγήϑης (from 7909), τῶν συνήϑων (uncontr. 
συνηϑέων), αὐτάρκης αὐτάρκων,. etc. Comp. adverbs in ὡς § 115. π, 1.--- 
Also the Gen. PI. τριηρῶν, which is given above as regular, is commonly 
accented 

ἤ τριήρων, 
as coming.from an adjective τριήρης three-oared. 

Nore 5.. The irregular contraction of such words as have still another 
vowel before the usual contraction, see in § 53. 

Nore 6. The Dorics and the epic writers contract the Gen. in δος into’ 
sug (ὃ 28. n. 5); e.g. τοῦ γέγνευς from τὸ γένος. 

Note 7. The accent of the Accus. of words in ὦ (τὴν ἤχῶ) is con- 
trary to the rule in § 28. n. 9.. In words in ὡς, (of which there are but 
two, ἠώς and αἰδώς,) the Accus. is accented regularly ; τὴν ἢ 700, 70. — The 
Tonics often form the Aceus. from both these terminations in ov», 6. g. “Le 
"Tour, nas ἠοῦν. 


§ 50. Second Form of Contraction.— Words in vs, etc. 


1. All other words admit of contraction only in the Nominative, Accu- 
sative, and Vocative Plural; except a few which are contracted in the 
Dative Singular also. We adduce first those in us, G. vog, 6. σ. 0 ἰχ- 
dus fish. 
Sing. N. ἐχϑύς G. ἰχϑύος D. ἰχϑυὶ.Α. ἰχϑὺν 

Plur, N. ἰχϑυε ¢ contr. ἐχϑὺς G. ἰχϑύων D. ἰχϑύσιν 
Α. ἐχϑύας contr. ἐχϑῦς. 

Nore 1. The epic language contracts also the Dat. in vi, as ἐχϑυῖ, 
(νέκυς, νέκυϊ) νέκυι. 

2. In the same manner are contracted words in v¢, when they have 
the Ionic and Doric form of the Gen. in cog; e.g. in Herodotus zodce, 
6. πόλιος, Plur. πόλιες and πόλιας, contr. πόλις. ‘These also contract 
the Dat. Sing. πόλιν into πόλι. See note 5. ῥ᾽, 

‘For the short vowel in some Datives, as Κλέοβι, see § 28. n. 11. . 

3. Here belong also βοῦς ox, cow, G. Boos D. βοΐ A. βοῦν V. Bou, 
Plur. βόες contr. βοῦς G: βοῶν D. βουσίν A. βόας contr. βοῦς. 

Nore 2. The Dorics wrote fas, Bay; and the word has this Accusa- 
tive in Homer (Il. 7, 238) when it stands as fem. for ox-hide; comp. Il. μὲ 


105 βόεσσιν. 
12 | 


ri | Me 
86 § 51. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 


4. Here belongs likewise yoavg old woman, G. γραὸς D. Youd A. 
γραῦν V. youn, Plur. youes contr. γραῦς G. youcr Ὁ. youvow A. γρᾶας 
contr. γραῦς. The unusual contraction of γρᾶες into γραῦς is to be not- 
ed. The Ionics have yonvs, yenog, etc. without’ contraction.—For 
vaus, which partly follows this model, see Anom. Nouns § 58. 

Note 8. In all the above words the contraction is often neglected by 
Attic writers; most frequently in the Nom. Plur. and especially in forms 
from monosyllables, as κέες, μύες, δρύες, votes, βόες; often also ἐχϑύες, 
etc. , ἶ : 

Nore 4. It is somewhat remarkable, that by this contraction the Plur- 
al becomes again like the Nom. Sing. Even where the quantity is 
different, this is not always apparent front the accent, e.g. in ὃ βότρῦς 
and τοὺς βότρυς. a 

Nore 5. ‘In the common language, the flexion in ες, G. sos, etc. is — 
exhibited (besides in xis) only by single forms from τίγρις tiger, πόρτις 
heifer, πόσις husband, ἢ μῆνις wrath, ἢ τρόπις keel, (all which however 
sometimes take ὃ in the Gen. § 56. n. 5); and farther by some proper 
names, as "Tepes, and by adjectives i in Ug, ὦ § 63. 1. The multitude of oth- 


er words in ἐς, Which assume no consonant in the Genitive, follow the mo- 
del in the following section. 


Nore 6. The word δὲς sheep conforms to the above mode of declension 
(Text 2); and has Gen. oioc, Nom, and Acc. Plur. δὲς (longs). + Com- 
monly however the- Nom. Sing. is contracted (ois), and the word is 
then thus declined: N. 7 οἷς, α. οἷός, D. oii, A. οἷν, Plur. οἷες, oiac, both 
contr. οἷς, consequently ἡ ἢ; αἵ, τὰς oic.—But in the Dat. Pl. Homer has 
δεσσιν, for osov according to the following section. 


' . oe: 
Notre 7, Most words in οὖς belong to the contracted second declen- 
sion, as πλοῦς, δοῦς, νοῦς. Like βοῦς are declined only χοῦς (Anom. § 58) 
and ῥοῦς when it signifies swnac ; but these are never contracted. 


§51. Contraction with the Attic Genitive, etc. 


1. Most words in ¢g and ¢, and some few in v¢ and v, retain in the 
common language, the vowel of the Nominative only in the Nom. Acc. 
and Voc. Singular. In all the other terminations they change it into ¢, 
᾿ς and then contract the Dat. εξ into δἰ, the Plur. e¢¢ and ea¢ into ecg, and 
Neut. ea into 7. Other endings are not contracted. . 

2. Substantives in ἐς and ὃς then assume also the so called Ὁ 


Attic Genitive, 
i.e. they form the Gen. Sing. in ὡς instead of o¢, and the Gen. Dual in 


@v* instead of ov; but they accent all three Genitives as if the last syl- 
lable were short (ὃ 11. 5,8.) 


7 The Grarmmarians call this Attic ; but in the manuscripts and editions of At- 
tic writers we find e. g. γενεσέοιν, κινησέοιν, etc. The form in wy rests only on ' 


the authority ofthe ancient Grammarians and on analogy, as no examples of it 
‘are known. 


& ᾿ 
§$ 51, 52. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION, 87 


3. Neuters in v and ὁ have the common Genitive; 6. g. ἄστυ, ἄστεος, 
ἀστέων᾽ πέπερι, πεπέρεος. 

4. Hence arises for substantives the following usual mode of de- 
clension : 


Sing. 4 (state) ὁ (ell) τὸ (city) | Plur. 
N. | πόλις [πῆχυς | ἄστυ [πόλεις πήχεις ἄστη 
G. πόλεως πήχεως ἄστεος πολέων πήχεων ἀστέων 
D. [|πόλεν | πῆχευ ἄστεν [πολεσι(ν) | πήχεσι (ν) | ἀστεσι(ν) 
A. | aol | πῆχυν ἄστυ Ἰπολεις πήχεις ἄστη 
V. | mode πήχυ ἄστυ ἱ{πολεις πήχεις ἄστη 

Dual. Ν. A. | πόλεε | πῆχεξ ἄστεξ 

G.D. | πόλεῳν | πήχεῳν | ἀστέοιν 


5. Adjectives in υς, Neut. Ὁ have the common Genitive, and do not 
contract the neuter Plural; e. 


ἡδὺς Neut. ἡδύ ea: ἤδέος Dat. ἡδεῖ 
Pl. ἡδεῖς Neut. ἡδέα ΟΕ. ἡδέων. 


Nore 1. The greater part of words in vg are declined according to the 
preceding section. Like πῆχυς are declined only πέλεχυς, and in part 
ἔγχελυς and πρέσβυς, see anom. Nouns § 58. Like ἄστυ are declined (be- 
sides zwv which does not occur contracted) a number of names of plants 
and minerals in 1, as σίγᾶπι, κιγνάβαρι, etc. 

Nore 2. The Attic poets have, for the sake of the metre, the Gen. ἄσ- 
tewe, Which later writers use also in prose. 


Nore 3. The Ionics always - decline words in ἐς Genii ιος ΠΣ πό- 
λιος, ete.) according to ὁ 50.—There exists also a Genitive in εος, but only 
among the Attics, when they shorten that in sw¢ en account of the metre, 
6. g. πόλεος, ὕβρεος, etc.—The epic poets have the Ionic flexion; except 
that in the Dat. they make é in order to avoid the cacophony of w, e. g. 
πόσις, πόσιος, πόσεϊ. Hence, when they contract this Dative, they often 
make it in εν (πόλει), instead of i (πόλι), which is peculiar to. Ionic and 
Doric prose.—On the other hand, of the words in vg which belong here 
(except ἔγχελυς), the Ionic form is δος, εἴ, as πῆχυς, πήχεος, πηχεϊ, etc. 

Nore 4. The word πόλις alone has in the epic language a Gen. πό- 
Anos, and then the Accus. is πόληα. 

Nore 5. Contractions like πηχῶν, and G. ἡμέσους, Pl. τὰ ἡμίση, from the 
neut. adject. ἥμισυ, belong to the later and less pure Attic dialect. 


§52. Third Form of Contraction.— Words in vs. 


Words in év¢ have likewise the Attic Genitive, but only that of the 
Sing. in ὡς, and without any peculiarity in the Accent ; inasmuch as the 
tone in the Nom. is always on evs, and therefore remains in the other 
cases on the penult (ᾧ 43. n. 4,1). In these words also, only the Dat. 
Sing. and Nom. and Accus. Plur. are contracted ; but in the last case 

the uncontracted sag is the more usual form. 


88 ss 52, 53. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 


Sing, ὁ (king) Dual. Plur. 
Nom. | βασιλεύς βασιλέε βασιλεῖς 
Gen. βασιλέως βασιλέοεν | βασιλέων 
Dat. βασιλεῖ βασιλεῦσι (νὴ 
Acc. βασιλέα βασιλέας and Page 
Voc. βασιλεῦ βασιλεῖς 


Note 1. The long α in the Acc. Sing. and Plur. is an Attic peculiarity. 
—The Accus. in εἰς is employed by writers not Attic, i.e. those called 
οἵ xowvot (δ 1.9). The Aceus. Sing. in ga is sometimes contracted into 7 by 
the Attic as well as other poets: Il. 0, 339. Aristoph. Acharn, 1151. 


Note 2. The earlier Attic writers, 6. g. Thucydides, Aristophanes, ¢on- 
tract the Nom. PI. into ἧς, 6. g. οἵ ἱππῆς, οὗ Maytwi¢. This contraction is 
sometimes marked with ἡ subscript, but incorrectly, because it comes from 
the ancient es ; ; see the next note. 


Nore 3. The Ionics decline throughout βασιλῆος, βασιλῆϊ, 7a, ie, Has, 
etc.—The form in ἕος, é, on the contrary, is here very rare, and peculiar to 
the poets.—For the Dat. PI. . βασιλέεσσι and ἱππήεσσι from ἱππεύς, see ὃ 46. 
n. 2. 


§ 53. Attic Contracted Forms. 


1. Some deviations in the contractions of the third declension oc- 
cur occasionally through the influence of the Attic dialect; especially 
when ὁ is both preceded and followed by a vowel. In such instances _ 
the ending ¢« is contracted into a, instead of into ἡ; 6. g. vying healthy, 
Acc. Sing. and Neut. Pl. vyvea contr. ὑγεᾶ, and so εὐφυᾶ, ἐνδεᾶ ; κλέος 
Pl. κλέεα---κλέα. " 

2. Even those endings of words in εὐς which are not usually con- 
tracted, swallow up in some words in like manner the ¢ before a, ας, 
and ὡς; thus yosvs a measure (see Anom. χοῦς § 58), Gen. yous for 
yotws, Acc. you, Acc. Pl. yous’ Πειραιεύς G. Πειραιῶς A. Πειραιᾶ: 
ἀγυιεύς altar before the door, τοὺς ἀγυιᾶς, and some others. 

3. In proper names in -χλέης contr. χλῆς, there arises a double con- 
traction, which however is usual only in the Dative, e. g. 


N. , Περικλέης, ν — ᾿ς Περικλῆς ' vik 
G. Περικλέεος contr. Περικλέους ᾿ 

D. Περικλέει --- ἹΠερικλέεν — Περικλεῖ 

A. Περικλέα ---- Περικλέα 

iF Tlegizhess -- ΄“Περίκλεις. 


So also “Hoang Hercules, and some others. 

Norell. The doubly contracted Accusative is rarely found, 6. g. Ἥρα- 
κλῆ, Plat. Phaedo. ῥ. 89.c.—The form Ἣρ ακλὴῆν in later writers is ex- 
plained from ὃ 56. n. 4. 

Nore 2.. Sometimes instead of contraction, there was an elision of one 
of the vowels ; e. g. γος “Ἥρακλες, as an exclamation in the later prose; and 


§54. THIRD DECLENSION.—CONTRACTION. 89 
in the poets, Gen. Zopouleos, D. “Ἡρακλέϊ; Hom. ὑὕπερδέα (instead of -86.) 
for ὑπερδεέα from --εής ; σπέσσι for σπέεσσι. 

Nore 3. By means of this elision we can explain the instances, where 
the unaccented ending a, @.g.in τὰ Hh 0, which from the contraction 
should be long, is nevertheless in the epic writers short. Comp. § 28. 
ee 

Nore 4. ΑΒ to the rest, the learner should observe for himself, what 
words and what endings in each word have the ordinary form, or this pe- 
culiar contraction. Thus we find always ἁλιέα, ἁλιέας, from ἁλιεύς, and 
from ὑγιής the Acc. Pl. ὑγιεῖς, never -ἃᾶς. Comp. Text 1. 

Nore 5. The Ionics always have ὑγιέα, “Hoouléen, ἐνδεέες, ete. The 
early poets contract the first es into εἰ or ἢ; e. g. from κλέος, σπέος, we find 
G. χλεῖος Pl. χλεῖα; D. σπεῖν and σπῆϊ; also Ἡρακλῆος, ji, jo.—For χρέος, 
χρέως, see § 58. 


~ 


§ 54. Fourth Form of Contraction.—Neuters in ας. 


1. Of the neuters in ας the following two, κέρας horn and τέρας won- 
der, have the Gen. in ato¢, from which the [onics drop the τ, 
κέρατος κέραος, τέρατος τέραος, 
and the following three, γῆρας age, γέρας honour, and χρέας meat, 
have every where only aoc. 
2. Hence arises the following contraction : 


. Sing. Dual. Plur. 

N. A.V: κέρας | κέραε κέρα κέραα κέρα 
G. κέραος κέρως᾽ HEQUOLY κερῷν κεράων χέρων 
D. χκέραϊ κέρᾳ κερασι(ν) 


Nore 1. The word τέρας admits the contraction only in the Plural, as 
τέρα τερῶν ; in the Singular tégatog alone is usual among the Attics. So 
also in χέρας, the form in etog remained current along with the contracted 
one. The three other words commonly occur only in the contracted 
form. The form in «og is consequently, in all these words, merely Ionic. 


3. Other neuters in ας, αος, take of the contracted forms only 
those 1 in @ and «; e.g. σέλας light, δέπας goblet, τῷ ) ozhy, dene, Pl. 
‘ra σέλα, δέπα. So also δέρας, σφέλας, etc. 


Nore 2. The middle syllable ga in the forms from κέρας 15. originally 
long; as κέρᾶτα Anacr. 2. Eurip. Bacch. 919. Hence, in the later epic 
writers, the resolution of the long vowel, as χεράατα, and in like manner 
also τεράαστα. 

Nore 3. On the other hand, the final ayllahle. e.g. in τὰ γέρα, κρέα, is 
sometimes used as short (§ 28, n.11).—In Homer,.xgéa is also made mono- 
syllabic, § 28. n. 6. 

Nore 4. The Ionics in flexion often change the « of these words into 
z, and decline them as if from a Nom. in o¢; 6. g. κέρεος, τὰ γέρεα, κρέεσ-- 
σιν, etc. Some old words have only this form; see the Anom. βρέτας, 
ovdac, and in part χγέφας, § 58. 


90 δῷ 55, 56. conTRACTION.—ANOMALOUS DECLENSION. 


ᾧ 55. Contracted Form of Comparatives in wv, ov. 
1. Comparatives in wy, Neut. ον, G. ovog, (δ 67, 68,) drop the 
ν in the Accusative Singular, and in the Nom. Accus. and Voc. Plural, 
and then contract the vowels. But unless this contraction takes place, 
the v is never dropped, even by the Ionics. E. g. 


Sing. Plur. 
Nom. μείζων greater μείζονες contr. μείξους 
Gen. μείζονος : μειζόνων 
Dat. pellove μείζοσι(ν) 


Acc. μείζονα contr. μείζω | μείζονας contr. μείζους 
Voc. μεῖζον μείζονες contr. μείζους 
Neut. Plur. τὰ μείζονα contt. μείζω 
The Dual remains unchanged. 


The Attics employ the forms μείζονα and μείζονας not less readily Ὁ 
than they do the contracted ones; but μείζονες seldom occurs. 

2. Similar, but less simple, is the usual Attic contraction of the Ac- 
cusative in the two proper names Andddwy, ὠνος, and Ποσειδῶν, wvos, 
Neptune, 

Acc. ᾿“πολλωνα ’ Anolio, Ποσειδῶνα Ποσειδῶ. 


Nore. So also in the poets χυκεών ἃ mixed drink, Ace. χυχεῶνα---κυ- 
κεῶ, epic xvxe_w.—Compare on this contraction and some similar ones 
from εἰκών, ἀηδών, etc. § 56. n. 6. d. and n. 7. 


δ ὅθ. Anomatous Deciension. 


_ 1. What is properly called anomaly in declension, is when from any 

Nominative one or more of the oblique cases are actually formed in an 
irregular and peculiar manner, i.e. not according to the general rules ; 
see in the list of Anomalous Nouns, ᾧ 58, 6. g. ἀνήρ, κύων, γάλα. 

Nore 1. 'To these mere deviations in flexion, may be referred the sim- 
pler declension of some foreign and later proper names in ¢, with a long 
vowel, e. g. 

Φιλῆς G. Φιλὴῆ D. Φιλλ A. Φιλὴν Υ. Φιλῆ - 
᾿Ιησοῦς ΕΟ. Ἰησοῦ =D. Ἰησοῦ Δ. ᾿ἸΙησοῦν Υ Ἰησοῦ. 

2. But the greater part of the actual deviations from regular declension, 
consist in what may be called the commutation or interchange of forms. 
In Greek it was very often the case, especially in the more ancient Jan- 
guage, that a word had two or more terminations and modes of flexion, 
with only one and the same signification. As the language became 
more cultivated, only one of these forms was for the most part retained 
as the current form; but still the other often maintained its place, some- 
times for the sake of well sounding alternation, sometimes acciden- 


ᾧ ὅθ. ANOMALOUS DECLENSION. 91 


tally, and most frequently in the poets.. E.g. Ζημήτηρ, more seldom 
Anuntoa, Ceres; δάκρυον, older form δάκρυ, vos, tears. 

Note 2. Here belong the instances where a masc. in ος of Dee. II, is at 
the same time a neut. in og of Dec. III; like 6 and τὸ σκότος darkness, σκύφος 
cup, ozos chariot. Further, some prolongation of the feminine endings 
of Dec. I, e. g. σελήνη, ἀνάγκη, lon. σεληναίη, ἀγαγκαίη 5 Αιϑηνᾶ Minerva, 
epic ΡΟΝ Ion. .29ϑηναίη; and many female names in ἢ with the epic 
secondary form in sia, as “Πηνελόπη and “Πηνελόπεια, Περσεφόνεια, Τερψι-- 
χόρειας. And in general, many proper names have even in the Nom. 
a double form; e.g. -xAjg and -χλος, Ιφικλῆς and Ἴφικλος ; and the poets 
therefore, according to the necessities of the metre, could follow some- 
times one form, sometimes the other. ‘Thus Homer has always in the 
Nom. Πάτροκλος, but in the Acc. both Πάτροκλον and Πατροκλῆα, Voc. 
Πάτροκλε and Πατρόκλεις, without its being necessary to consider this as 
a case of Metaplasm ; see 5 below. 

3. Such double forms had their origin, of course, at a time when as 
yet there was no trace and no idea of scientific grammar, and when ev- 
ery form and every ending was regarded only by itself, without refer- 
ence to any other form. Hence it was the natural consequence, that 
often, of two modes of flexion in a word, one became usual in one 
oblique case, and the other in another; and thus the word became 
truly anomalous. E.g. γυνή would regularly follow the first declen- 
sion, but actually has the Gen. yuvaexds, etc. from the obsolete Nom. 
I'YNAIE. So ναῦς has-in the Acc. ναῦν, but in the Dat. νηΐ, from the 
Tonic form νηῦς. See these words in § 58, and compare there also 
Ζεύς, ὕδωρ, γόνυ, δένδρον, πῦρ. 

4. Not unfrequently the two forms remained more or less in com- 
mon use by the side of each other, in, the same case; e.g. υἱὸς, G. 
υἱοῦ and also υἱέος from a Nom. of the third declension; see in the Catal. 
§ 58, and comp. there ϑέμες, κοινωνός, ὄρνις, yous. A word of this 
sort is called Abundans.* 

5. When both forms presuppose but one and the same Nominative, 
from which they are only declined in a different manner, the word is 
called a 

Hetéroelite 


e.g. Οἰδίπους, Gen. Οἰδίποδος and Οἰδίπου after the contracted second 
declension. When however one of the forms presupposes an unusual 
or obsolete Nominative, this is called a 

Metaplasm, 
6. 8. Oe ov, ‘Dat. Pl. δένδροις and also δένδρεσιν from a Nom. 
τὸ δένδρος, 


* Many such words however are abundantia only for us in grammar ; because 
we must observe and arrange os what was current at different periods or 
in different dialects and writers ; as 6. σ΄. the variations in ϑέμες. 


92 § 56. ANOMALOUS DECLENSION. 


6. It is also an instance of Metaplasm, when from a masculine in ος 
is formed a Neut. Pl. in «©; this occursin prose particularly with 

| τὰ δεσμά, σταϑμα, σῖτα, 
which forms, especially in certain connexions, are used for οἱ δεσμοί, ete. 


Note 3. Most of the common and poetical anomalies of declension 
consist of Heteroclites and Metaplasms, or a mixture of both. ‘Those 
which require to be treated of singly are given in alphabetical order in 
§58. Here, however, we must first bring into one view several classes of 
anomalous nouns, under which are included many of those particular ex- 
amples. 


Nore 4. To the Heteroclites belong those words in ἧς which are declin- 
ed after both Dec. I, and III. Some throughout; e. g. μύκης mushroom, G. ov 
and ytos; especially proper names like Ζάρης, G. ov and ros; see the 
Anom. Θαλῆς, § 58. Others in part; thusall contracted proper names in ἧς 
which have Gen. δος, form the Acc. both in ἡ and yy; e.g. Σωχράτης G. 
(soc) ovs, Acc. Swxoaty Plat. and Σωχράτην Xenoph. Of those in χλῆς, the 
Acc. in κλῆν, though used by later writers, is wholly rejected by the Atticists. 
—The Ionics invert this, and in words in ἧς which are usually declined 
after Dec. I, they form the Acc. Sing. and Plur. after Dec. III; e.g. 


A ‘4 A g 4 
τὸν δεσπότεα Pl. τοὺς δεσπότεας, from δεσπότης, ov 
Ἱχιλτιάδεα from Midtiadye, ov.* 


Nore 5. Another class of Heteroclites consists of some nouns in ἐς, which 
in flexion sometimes assume a 6, and sometimes not; e.g. μῆνις wrath Εἰ. 
μήνιος and μήνυδος ; and several proper names, as -Avayaoars, wos Aristot. 
and ewe Plutarch. So also feminines in ἐς, wos, 6. g. πανήγυρις, μῆτις, 
Ἴσις, Θέτις, etc. are declined by the Ionics and Dorics very commonly with 
G. voc.—Here belong also some epic Datives with a shortened 1(§ 28. n. 11), 
as Oat for δαΐδι. 


Nore 6. |The Nominative endings in ὡς, wy, we, give occasion also to 
very many anomalies; where however it is sometimes difficult to decide, 
whether one of the forms ought not to be referred to contraction. Here 
belong : 

a. Nom. ὡς and og. Even ἔρως, wos, desire, love, which most clearly 
belongs to Dec. III, has also a secondary poetic forne ἔρος, Acc. 
ἔρον. It is therefore less.surprising, when in some words which 
belong to the Attic Dec. II, there occur single forms from the 
common Dee. II; 6. g. ταώς, Nom. Pl. ta and tool. See also the 
Anom. χάλως and γέλως § 58. . 

b. Nom. ὡς, G. ὦ and wos. So Mivaes, πάτρως, μήτρως ; but still in 
Plur. more commonly πάτρωες, etc. See also the Anom. χάλως, 
and comp. ἥρως, ὃ 58. 

c. Nom. ws, G. wtos. These words sometimes drop theirt. The 
word δ᾽ ἱδρώς sweat, ἱδρῶτι, ἱδρῶτα, has also an Attic secondary 


* All proper names which are formed like patronymics, as MsAriddns, Εὐρε-- 
πίδης etc. and the most of those which are not (like “Σωκράτης) compounded, 
e.g. «Αἱσχίνης, Ξέρξης, Γύγης, etc. are declined in Greek, with the exception of 
this Ionic anomaly, entirely after Dec. 1; while the Latins form them wholly 
after Dec. III, as Gen. Miltiadis, Xerzis, etc. 


§56. ANOMALOUS DECLENSION. 93 


form τῷ idg@, τὸν ἱδρῶ, which indeed is usually considered as 
contraction (like κέρατι, κέρᾳ), but which also coincides with the 
forms of the Attic Dec. II ; as does also yowri, χρῷ, from the Anom. 
χρώς. A more evident transition to the Att. Dec, IT, see in Anom. 
γέλως (ὃ 58) and in some adjectives, as εὐρύκερως, etc. 69, n. 5. 

d. Nom. ὡς and wr. Here the anomaly sometimes occurs even in 
_ the Nominative ; 9. δ. ὃ ταώς G. ὦ, and ὃ ταών G. ὥνος, peacock; ὃ 
τυφώς G. ὦ, sind τυφών G. ὦνος, whirlwind ; ἢ ἅλως G. ὦ and wos, 
and ἢ ἅλων G. wyos, threshing floor. In the Plur. of all these words, 
the forms of Dec. III, are the most usual.—With these may also 
be compared the Actusatives ᾿Δπόλλω, Ποσειδῶ, κυκεῶ, ὃ 55. 2. 

6. Nom. ὡς and we. This is adduced only because of the Homeric 
Accus. iyo for ἰχῶρα from ὁ ἰχώρ, ὥρος, lymph.* 

Note 7. Some feminines in wy have also a secondary form inw αὶ. 
ous; as γλήχων, ὠνος, pennyroyal, --γληχώ, οὕς" Τοργών, όγος, in earlier 
writers Τοργώ, οὕς. In this way we can explain the instances where e. g. 

from εἰκών, ὄνος, image, we find also G. sizotc A. sizo) Acc. PI. 


εἰχούς. 
from ἀηδών, ὁ ὄνος, ἜΤ ἘΣ — G. ἀηδοῦς Voc. andor. 
from χελιδών, ovog, swallow — Voc. yehidoi. 


In some of these examples however a contraction vs that of μείζων ete. 
can be assumed. § 55. 1. 


Nore 8. Finally, in the epic and lyric poets, instead of the ordinary 
forms of certain words, there are found single cases of a shorter or more 
simple form, of which however the analagous Nominative does not occur. 
So especially forms in Dec. III, with the case-endings ος, 1, a, ες, eo, in- 
stead of the usual ones in Dec. I and II. 

E. g. for ἀλκὴ from ἀλκή strength — ἀλκὶ from 447, Hom. 

for κρόκην from κρόκη woof — κρόκα from KPOZ, Hesiod. 
for aidov, adn, ἀΐδην from 6 ἀΐδης Hades—iidos, aids, Hida, from 


ΑἿΣ. 

for χλάδῳ from ὃ κλάδος βοιιᾳ7,--αλαδὶ and in Plur. κλάδεσι from 
KAAS. ° 

for ἀνδροπόδοις from τὸ ἀνδράποδον slave—orvdoanddecar as if from 
AN APAIOPS, Hom. 


for ὑσμίνῃ from ἢ ὕσμίνη batile—vopin from “TIMIZ. 
And so of some others. Here belong also 

αἵ στάγες for σταγόνες drops 

ϑέραπα, ϑέραπες, for ϑεράποντα, ἕξ», servant 

woot, μάστιν, for μάστίγι, α, from ἢ μάστιξ scourge. 
Some such forms cannot well be considered as Metaplasms of any ‘known 
word, but merely as single cases of an obsolete word. So 


τὴν νίφα snow, from NIP, 


* All these appearances become perfectly plain, so soon as we have a correct 
idea of the original oneness of all the declensions, and perceive that the first and 
second, with their subordinate forms, are only ancient contractions and abridge- 
ments froin the third. In this way, the Acc. in ὦ of the Attic Dec. II, stands 
in connexion with the contr. Acc. in w of Dec. III; the Acc. in » of Dec. ΠῚ, 
with those of Dec. land II; the Ionic δεσπότεα appears less irregular ; and so 
of all the rest. See aaa Sprachl. § 33. n. 3. 


94 § 57. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


for the common word for snow is χιών, and γιφάς has ony a derived sig- 
nification, snowflake. Further, the cases 

τῆς στιχός, Pl. στίχες, ας, from ΣΤῚΞ 
eannot be referred to the prosaic 6 otizos row, on account of the difference 
of gender. 


Nore 9, A very peculiar anomaly in declension is occasioned by the 
paragogic ending 
gly or ge 

which is so very common in epic poetry, and is used instead of the 
Dative or Genitive Sing. and Plur. being appended to words for the most 
part after the following analogy : 

--ogw in words of Dec. IT, 6. g. στρατός στρατόφιν. | 

-ngw in words of Dec. I, 6. g. κεφαλή κεφαλῆφι, βία Binge.* 

-eogiy in neuters in o¢ G. £06, 8. 2. O08, στῆϑος --ὄχεσφι, στήϑεσφιν. 
The few peculiarities and deviations which occur, like χράτεσφι from 
KPA χρατός, may safely be left to the learner’s observation. — But thus 
much, it would seem, we may assume with certainty, viz. (1) That this 
form had originally merely an adverbial and for the most part local signi- 
fication; precisely like the similar syllables 9, Sev ; hence ¢ ὄρεσφιν in the 
mountains, κεραλῆφι (λαβεῖν) by the head, ϑύρηφι before the door; (2) That 
this signification however was often rendered more definite by the aid of 
a preposition, e.g. ἐπ΄ ἰχριόφιν upon the deck, διὰ στήϑεσφι through the 
breast; (3) That it hence became not unusual to subjoin this form after 
all those prepositions which govern the Dative or Genitive, instead of 
the ordinary forms of these cases. 'This last continued to be by far the 
most common usage; and the instances are few where this form stands 
for a case, without a preposition; e.g. ἀγλαΐηφι πεπουϑώς confiding in 
valour, Pings with force ; most rarely of all for the simple Genitive alone, 
as ootsogiy Fic a pile of bones. Still this form approaches to the nature 
of a true case in this, that it is often grammatically connected with regular 
cases, 6. δ. ἀπὸ πλατέος πτυόφιν ; and even stands double, being repeated 
in the substantive and adjective, as xeatsojge βίηφι. ‘This however occurs 
also with the undisputed local ending de, in ὅνδε δόμονδε. 


§ 57. Nouns Defective and Indeclinable. 


1. Defective nouns are such as from their very nature cannot occur 
in more than one number; e.g. aie, and the following Plurals: za 
ἔγκατα (Dec. IIT) bowels, οἱ ἐτησίαν trade-winds, ai δυσμαί the ocet- 
dent, west, and the names of festivals, as τὸ Acovvove, etc. 

2. Further, some words which are commonly used only in certain 
connexions; mostly the following, viz. 


* The Grammarians assume, that this syllable is in all instances a mere ap- 
pendage to that actual case, which under the circumstances is required. Hence, 
when it stands for the Dative of Dec. I, they put ¢ subscript under the 7, in or- 
~ der to distinguish it from the Genitive. This is manifestly incorrect; as appears 
by comparing the Datives of the other declensions, ete. See 4usfithrl. Sprachl. 


δ 56. n. 2 


§57. NoUNS INDECLINABLE. 95 


τὸ vag dream, τὸ ὕπαρ waking vision, only as Nom. and Acc. 

τὸ ὄφελος and τὸ ἦδος, advantage, only as Nom. e.g. τί dv ἡμῖν 
ὄφελος εἴης ; what wouldst thou profit us ? 

μάλη (old form for μασχάλη shoulder) only in the phrase ὑπὸ μάλης 
under the arm. 


See also ὦ μέλε and ὦ τὰν in the Catal. §58. Here belong also many, 
which from being originally nouns, have become adverbs; as the Acc. 
ἐπίκλην, and ἐξαίφνης properly ἐξ αἴφνης, ete. (§115. n. 3, 4.) 
Finally, all those in which certain cases are wanting; see the Anom. 
"Aovos, Πρέσβυς, ἴΟσσε. 

3. Indeclinable nouns in Greek are mostly some foreign words, as 
τὸ πάσχα; and among these the names of the letters, ἄλφα, pv, etc. 
Of genuine Greek words, the only ones indeclinable are the cardinal 
numbers (ᾧ 70).—We must further reckon as indeclinable, in a cer- 
tain measure, the Particip. neut. τὸ χρεών, from the Impers. χρή, on 
account of the construction τοῦ χρεών, Eurip. Hipp. 1256. Joseph. Ant. 
VIII. 284. See Ausfihri. Sprachl. § 57. n. 4. — 


Nore 1. The name of the letter σίγμα is found declined, te σίγματα 
etc. This could be easily explained, since the form is entirely Greek ; but 
the reading is not certain. 


Norte 2, It is not an entirely correct proceeding, when Grammarians 
reckon among the defective nouns many old and. poetic words, which oc- 
curred but seldom in the early poetry, and have accidentally therefore 
been preserved only in this or that case; as 6. g. via, already mentioned 
in § 56. n.8.. See also the Anom, 4duti, ndé, § 58. So too when they 
reckon as indeclinable, words of a similar kind, which accidentally have 
been preserved only in the Nominative ; or if neuters, in the Nom. and 
Accusative; 6. g. ἢ dws gift, to δέμας shine Among these last there 
may indeed be many, which the ancients really never used in the Genitive 
or Dative, as e. g δέμας; but then they are defective. They could be in- 
declinable only when they actually occurred e.g. in the Genitive without 
changing the form, like tov πάσχα. For Aiwa see the Catal. § 58. 


Nore 3. Some shorter secondary forms of usual words, such as those 
which we have seen (§ 56. n. 8) in the oblique cases, are found also in the 
Nom. alone 5 and are therefore sometimes reckoned among nouns inde- 
clinable, in the manner above censured. Still more incorrect is it, to re- 
gard them as arbitrary abridgments by the ancient poets ΠΝ usual 
forms; since they are rather remains of the ancient uncultivated language, 
whose place was afterwards supplied by fuller forms. Such are: - 

τὸ. δῶ Ἐ house; full form τὸ δῶμα 
τὸ xot barley; full form ἢ κρυϑή, from which however the former can 
be no abridgment, since the gender is different. 


* The Plural, form χρύσεα 00 i in Hesiod can be regarded as a contraction, like 
the Plural κάρα; see Anom. μάρῶ § 58. 


96 § 58. ANOMALOUS NOUNS.—CATALOGUE. 


τὸ ἄλφι meal ; full form ἄλφιτον. The short form was probably de- 
clined like μέλι, υτος. 
τὸ γλάφυ cave; manifestly Neut. of an adject. ΓΔΑΦΥΙ͂Σ, for which 
γλαφυρός excavated was afterwards used. 
See also the Anom. κάρα, κάρη (§ 58), which is sometimes regarded as an 
abridgment of κάρηαρ or κάρηνον: also some adjectives in § 64, n. 8. 5. 


ὃ ὅδ, Catalogue of Anomalous Nouns. 


Preuim. Nore. For the arrangement and mode of using this Catalogue, 
see the preliminary notes to the Catalogue of Anomalous Verbs, ὁ 114. What 
is there said of unusual or obsolete themes, which are merely presupposed 
in order to explain actual forms, applies here also to the unusual or obso- 
lete Nominatives. ‘These are here, as there, and indeed throughout this 
work, distinguished by being printed in capitals. All that belongs to or- 
dinary prose is here printed large, either wholly or in part; that which is 
poetical or rare, small. 


᾿Δηδών § 56. n. 7. 


&idog etc. ὃ 56. n. 8. 
ἀλκί § 56. n. 8. 


age § 57. n. 8. 

ἅλως and ἅλων § 56. π, 6. d. ἄμφω etc. § 78, 4. 

ἄνα Voc. § 45. n. ὅ. | ἀνδραπόδεσσι § 56. n. 8. 

ἀνήρ man, belongs to the same class of words as πατήρ (δ 47), but 
admits the syncope in al/ the cases which increase, and then inserts 
ὃ (δ 19. π. 1). Thus: ἀνδρός, ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα, ὦ ἄνερ. Pl. ἄνδρες, 
ἀνδρῶν, ἀνδοάσιν, ἄνδρας. 


In the epic language also regularly, ἀνέρος etc. and in Dat. Pl. ἄν- 
δρεσσιν. : 


᾿Απόλλων, Acc. § ὅσ. 2. Voc. § 45. n. 2. 

ἀργέτος, -τι, epic instead of Gen. ἀργῆτος Dat. ἥτι from ἀργής white. 

” Aons Mars, G. “Ages, does not contract the Gen. but contracts the 
» Dat. ” Ageu—Ace. “don and “Ἄρην, § 56. n. 4. 

In the epic language ° “Ἄρηος, “Agni, "Aone. A Gen. “Agswg often oc- 

σωδ, which however is doubtful; see Ausf. Sprachl. § 58. . 

ἀρνὸς tov, τῆς, the lamb’s, ἀρνί, ἄρνα, Pl. ἄρνες D. ἀρνάσι. The 
Nom. ing: is supplied BF ἀμνός. 


These are cases from an obsolete Nom. APHN or APPHN, G. svos, 
whence ἀργός ete. by Syncope, as in ἀνήρ. 


ἀστράσι § 47. n. 8. 


---.-.-... 
--.-..ὕ-..... 


Βάττος has the metaplastic Gen. Battew of Dec. I. Herodotus. 

Bostuc τὸ, image, G. βρέτεος, Pl. βρέτη, see § δ4. πῃ. 4. 

Bay, Acc. § ὅ0, n. 2. . 

γάλα τὸ, milk, has G. γάλακτος Dat. γάλακτι, ete. Gains ᾧ 41. 5 and 
the marginal note. 


yahoos sister-in-law, G. γάλω ; Ion. Nom. γαλόως G. γαλόω. 

γαστήρ ὁ 47. 2. and n. 3. 

γέλως 0, laughter, G. ὠτος, Acc. ian and γέλων after the Att. Dec. 
“IT. ᾧ 56. n. 6. c. 


ὃ ὅδ. ANOMALOUS NOUNS.—CATALOGUE. 97 


Homer has also the Dat. γέλῳ, and in Od. v. 346 stands the Acc. 
γέλον, but with the various reading γέλω, ὃ 37. n. 2. § 56. n. 6. a. 
γλάφυ § 57. ἡ. 3. | | γλήχων § 56. n. 7. 
γόνυ τὸ, knee, G. γόνατος etc. Dat. Pl. γόνασιν, as from TON AS. 
Comp. δόρυ, δόρατος. ᾿ 
‘Tonic youvetog ete. and in the poets youves, youri, Pl. γοῦνα, γούνων. 
Comp. δόρυ. 
Γοργών § ὅθ. n. 7. 
γυνή woman, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, ὦ γύναι. Pl. γυναῖχες, ας, 
γυναικῶν, γυναιξίν, all from ΓῪΝ ALE. 
For the Voc. γύναι, comp. ἄνα § 45. n. 5.—The accent of γυναικός 
etc. forms an exception to § 43. n. 4. 
Oot § 56. n. 5. || δεῖνα § 79. 


δένδρον τὸ, tree, in Dat. Pl. commonly δένδρεσι from τὸ δένδοος, 
which occurs in Ionic. Comp. zeévov.—From another Ionic form δέν- 
dosoy came the plurals δένδρεα, δενδρέοις, which are also not unknown 
in the common prose. 

Διός, Avi, see Ζεύς. 

δόρυ τὸ, spear, G. δόρατος etc. Dat. Pl. δόρασι, from AOP_AS. 
Comp. γόνυ, γόνατος. 

Ionic δούρατος etc. From another still more simple form came the 

(more poetic) cases δορός, δορί, Ion. δουρός, δουρί, Pl. δοῦρα, δούρων, 
δούρεσσιν. Comp. γόνυ. 


δορυξὲ Voc. see ὁ 86 marg. note. || δῶ §57. n. 8. 
ἔαρ, ἦρος, see § 41. n. 7. || ἐάων see eve. 


ἔγχελυς ἡ, eel, G. vos, has in the Plur. Ion. éyyédveg ete. Att. ἐγχέλεις, 
ἐγχέλεων, §51.n. 1. 

εἰκών § 56. n. 7. | 

ἐύς good, an epic word, from which come Gen. éjos* Acc. éty.—Also jis, 
Ace. ἠῦν, Neut. 70%.—From another form EO, a, ον, and its Neut. Pl. 
τὰ EA, comes the epic Gen. Pl. ἐάων goods, ὃ 35. n. 4. ¢. 

ἕως § 37. n. 2. : 


Ζεύς Jupiter, G. Διὸς D. Aut A. Ala, as if from 4/2, and also a less 
common form Ζηνός, Ζηνί, Ζῆνα, from ZHN.—Voc. Ζεῦ. 
ζώς, see in § 64, n. 2. 


ἠλέ, Il. 0, 128 φρένας ἠλέ, madman! a Vocative formed by apocope from 
the infrequent ἤλεός ; Od. 8. 243 φρένας Hes. 


* From this Genitive there has usually been distinguished in Homer, a Gen. 
‘énog, marked with the rough breathing, where the sense seemed to require the 
possessive thine, e.g. σπταιδὸς ἑῆος of thy son. This was considered as the Gen. 
of an old form “EYS for ἑός his, which, like other forms of the third person, 
stood for the second person (Synt. ὃ 127. n. 5). But the form é7o¢ only is cor- 
rect. The pronoun is not expressed, and the adjective evs takes in some measure 
its place ; just as the commendatory ἐσϑλός sometimes stands with a stronger 
meaning, where otherwise the possessive could stand; e.g. Il. ες, 469. a, 573. 
Comp. particularly Od. y, 379 with Il. ὦ, 422. See the author’s Lezilogus I. 23. 


98 § 58. ANOMALOUS NOUNS:—CATALOGUE. 


ἦρα a defective Accus. in the epic writers: ἦρα φέρειν, gratify, help. 
nows, hero, G. wog, contracts among the Attics the Accusatives ἥρωα, 
ἥρωας, into ἥρω, ἥρως. - 
For the sake of the metre, the other endings are sometimes contract- 
ed and the short vowel swallowed up, as Dat. ἥρῳ for ἥρωϊ, Nom. PI. 
ἥρως for 4 ἥρωες. Comp. § 56. n. 6. ὃ. 
nus, see ἐὔς. 


Θαλῆς, G. Θάλεω D. Θαλῇ A. Θαλῆν. With this accent, drawn back 
only 1 in the Genitive, and with this Ionic Genitive (δ 34. ἡ. ᾽δ), this name 
is found in the earliest and best writers, as Herodotus, Plato, etc. The 
Gen. Θαλοῦ and the form Θάλης, Θάλητος, ἡτι, nro, are later. 'The forms 
after Dec. I, ‘with the accent on the penult, (except Θάλεω,) are inad- 

“missible. 
ϑέμις ἡ, Themis, Ια, has the old epic form’G. ϑέμεστος etc. Dor. ϑέμι- 
τος (Plato also has @éuctog for the goddess); commonly Θέμεδος, 
‘Ton. Geucos. 
ϑέραπα, ϑέραπες, § 56. n. 8. 
ϑοίξ ἡ, hair, G. τριχὸς etc. Dat. Pl. ϑριξί, according to § 18. 


ἱδρώς § 56. n. 6. ¢. || “Inoots § 56. n. 1. 
izoo ὃ 56. n. 6. 6. 


κάλως ὁ, cable, α. ὦ, Acc. ὧν. Plur. κάλωες and κάλοι, Acc. xa- 
λους, all from KAAOZ; see § 56. n. 6. α. ὃ. 

κάρα Att. κάρη Ion. τὸ, head. From the first form, although it occurs so 
often in the Attic writers, there is found no other case, except Dat. κάρᾳ. 
To χάρη we have above assigned the cases κάρητος, ητι (§ 41. 8); along 
with which there exists in the epic writers a fuller form καρήατος from 
the same Nominative κάρηαρ. Comp. § 41. . 7.—In Hom. Hymn. Cer. 
12, occurs the Plur. κάρα, for -wa or -ηα. 

Herewith are to be connected the forms of KPAA and ΚΡΑ͂Σ, like- 
wise poetic, whose Nominative Singular does hot occur. The first is 
epic and neuter, Pl. τὰ κράατα; the other, κρατός, χρατί, is common to all 
the poets and usually masculine ; Acc. Sing. τὸν κρᾶτα Hom.—Peculiar 
to Sophocles is a third form, Nom. and Acc. Sing. τὸ κρᾶτα, Philoct. 1457. 

κέρας ὃ 54. ᾿ || κλαδὲ ὃ 56.n. 8. © 

κλείς ἡ, key, G. κλειδὸς, has in Acc. κλεῖδα, comm. κλεῖν, and in 
Plur. χλεῖδες, κλεῖδας contr. κλεῖς. 

χγέφας, darkness, prefers in the Gen. the form --δος, (κνέφους Aristoph. Eccl. 
290 ») and in the Dative the form at, α, ὃ 54. η. 4. 

κοιγωγός, partaker ; instead of the regular plural, Xenophon employs zoi- 
γῶνες and -ac. Comp. ὃ 56. n. 8. 

KPAAZ, KPA, see κάρα. 

ugeas § 54, | xot § 57. ἡ. 3. 

κρίνον τὸ, lily, has a secondary form in the Plur. τὰ χρένεα (Herodotus), xgé- 
veo, as from KPINOS. Comp. δένδρον. 

κρόκα § 56. n. 8. || xuxewy § 55 note. 

κύων, dog, κυνός, κυνί, κύνα, εὐ κύον, Pl. κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσὶ, κύνας. 

κῶας τὸ, fleece, G. κώεος, Pl. κώεα. § 54. π. 4. 


δ ὅ8.. ANOMALOUS ΝΟΌΝΒ.-- CATALOGUE. 99 


λᾶας contr. λᾶς 0, stone, G. λᾶος Ὁ. λὰϊ (§ 43..n. 4. c) Ace. λᾶαν hay (ξ 44. n. 1) 
Ὁ. Pl. λάεσσιν. The Gen. Acov is also found, as if from λάᾶς of Dec. I. 
λέπα an old subst. neut. (oil, fat, Hippocr.) for which also we find λέπας. The 
Dat. λίπαὶ, λέπᾳ, was shortened in pronunciation and sounded like λίπα, 
especially in the phrase λέπα ἀλείφεσϑαι to anoint one’s self with oil. 
Here belongs also the Homeric λέπ᾽ ἐλαίῳ, which is to be considered as 
the Dat. of Aina ἕλαιον olive-oil. 

hig 0, lion, Acc. λὲν. No other form occurs in the earlier writers. 

ic, Adj. see in ὁ 64. ἢ. 3. 5. 

᾿λυτί, Lita, Dat. and Accus. linen. 'The Nom. is wanting. 

μάλη, ὃ 57, 2. : 

. μάρτυς witness, forms μάρτυρος, etc. Acc. μάρτυρα and μάρτυν, 
Ὁ. Pl. μάρτυσιν. 

μάστι, ἐν, § 56. n. 8, l| μέγας, § 64. 

psig is the lon. Nom. instead of ὃ μήν month, G. μηνός, etc. 

μέλε, a Vocative found only in the familiar phrase ὦ μέλε, in both gen- 
ders.* 


μήτρως and Mivwe § 56. n. 6. ὃ. 


ναὺς ἡ, ship. The Attic mode of declension is the following : 
Sing. N.vatg G.vews ὭὮ. νηΐ Α. ναῦν 
Plur. Ν. νῆὲς ΑΕ νεών D.vavol A. ναῦς. 

The old and Doric form is G. γὰός (whence ψεώς ὃ 27. n. 10) ete. Tonic, 
γηῦς, νηός, etc. Acc. γῆα and γηῦν. From this comes a second Tonic 
form, G.vs0¢ A. véu, Pl. νέες, véog.—The Dat. Dual is written yveoiy by 
Thucydides. 

vipa, § 56. n. 8. 

Οἰδίπους, G. Οἰδίποδος and Οἰδίπου, Ὁ. οδὲ, A. oda and ουν, V. ov. 
An epic and lyric subordinate form (as if from Nom. Οἰὐδιπόδῃς) 
is G. Οἰδιπόδαυ, Dor. -a, Ion. ew, D. ῃ, Δ. nv, V. Οἰδιπόδα. 

0c, οἷς, § 50. n. 6. 

ὄνειρον dream, forms as Neut. ὀνείρατος, etc. Plur. ὀνείρατα. Comp: 
πρόσωπον. But it is also found as Mase. ὁ dvesgos, ov. 

ὄρνις ὁ, ἡ, bird, G. Gevidoc, etc. It has in the Plur. a secondary form 
(declined like πόλις), ὄρνεις, ὄρνεων ; comp. ὃ ὅθ. ἡ. 5. 

In the Attic poets occurs also the Acc. PI. dovic (ὃ 50. 2. § 56. n. δ). 
The Dorics wrote Ogviz0s, covizo, ete. ( 16. ἡ. 1. a,) without how- 
ever forming the Nom. in &. 

ὄσσε N. and A. Dual, eyes, forms the Gen. and Dat. only in the Plur. and 
after Dec. II, ὄσσων, docorc, Ὀσσοισιν. ; 

οὗδας τὸ, floor, οὔδεος, οὔδεϊ, § 54. n. 4. 

* This has been regarded as formed by apostrophe for μέλεε from μέλεος unhappy, 

like 72 above. But it often occurs in an entirely good and even commendatory 


sense, as Plat. Theaet. 90. cf. Schol. Consequently, like the expression “ my 
good friend, ”’ it\is to be taken as a mode of address in either sense. 


100 § 58. ANOMALOUS NOUNS.—CATALOGUE. 
ὡ» a 
οὖς τὸ, ear, G. ὠτὸς, etc. Gen. Pl. ὥτων, ὃ 43. n. 4. d. 
Ὁ. Pl. ὠσίν. Contr. from ovus, ατος; Dor. Nom. we. 
nas, child, boy, παιδός, has in the dissyllabic epic form πάϊς, the Acc. πάϊΐν. 


πάτρως § ὅθ. n. 6. ὃ. || πειρανῶς Gen. ὃ 53. 2. 
᾿πλέες see in § 68. 6 


πνυξ ἡ, pnyx (a place of meeting in Athens), has in the earlier writers 
muxvos, πυχνί, πύκνα ; later mvuxos, etc. 


πολύς, see ᾧ 64.~ 
ἸΠοσειδῶν, avog, Acc. Ποσειδῶ, Voc. ΤΠοσειδον, ὃ 45. π. 2.,§ 55. 2. 


Ancient form, Ποσειδάων, ovog and ὡγνος. Dor. Ποσειδάν or Mote- 
Say, ἅνος. Ton. Ποσειδέων, ογος. 


πόσις § 50. n. 5. § 51. De ch 

πρᾷος, πραΐς, see ᾧ 64,2. 

πρέσβυς ὁ, in the signif. old man, elder, μὰ further only Acc. πρέσβυν, 
Υ. dbdoBy: In the signif, ambassador, it has only the Plur. of πρέσ-- 
Bec, D. πρέσβεσι, in common use. The other cases were supplied 
from πρεσβύτης elder, and πρεσβευτής ambassador. 


Single poetic examples like G, πρέσβεως of an ambassador, Aris- 
toph. Acharn. 93, and πρέσβηες elders, Scut. Herc. 245, prove nothing 
against the common usage, 


/ 


ὃ 


πρόσωπον τὺ, countenance, Pl. epic προσώπατα, προσώπασιν. Comp. ὄνει-- 
60». 

πρόχοος 7, water-pot, Att. πρόχους, Gen. πρόχου, (§ 86 note,) passes 
over into Dec. III; as Dat. Pl. πρόχουσιν, Aristoph. Nub. 272. Eurip. 
Ton. 434, like oie’ βουσίν. 

πῦρ τὸ, fire, forms its Plural (e.g. watch-fires) after Dec. II, τὰ πυρᾶ, 
Dat. πυροῖς, Xen. Anab, 7. 2. 

σάος, σῶς, see § 64. 3. 


σής 0, moth, G. σεός, Pl. σεές, σέας, Genit. σέων, § 43. n. 4. d. In 
later writers 07709, etc. 
σκώρ τὸ, filth, G. oxaros, etc. See ὕδωρ. 


σμῶδιξ 7 ἢ, induration, weal, forms ὁμωδιγγθῖ; etc. 
σπέος § 53. n. 2, 5. 


στάγες § 56. ἡ. 8. "|| στέαρ, στῆρ, G. στητός, § 41. n. 7. 
στιχύς (Gen.) Pl. στίχες § 56. π. 8. 
σῶς, see ὃ 64.3. ‘|| σωτήρ, Voc. § 45. n, 2. 


tay, only as Voc. ὦ τᾶν, a mode of address in common life, O thou ! 
more seldom O ye /* 

THOS ὃ 56. ἡ. 6. a, d. 

τριχός, etc. see ϑρίξ.  τυφώς ὃ 56. ἡ. 6. ὃ, d. 


* The mode of writing this phrase ὦ *ray rests on the incorrect derivation 
from ἔτης friend, ὦ ἔτα. 


_ § ὅδ. ANOMALOUS NOUNS.—CATALOGUE. 101 


ὑδωὺ τὸ, water, G. ὕδατος, etc. D. Pl. ὕδασιν. 
_ See above oxwe, σκατός. The old Nom. is “74.43, from the con- 
founding of which with vdog (comp. ¢ 54. n. 4) the epic Dat. We can 
be explained. 


υἱός, son, is declined regularly ; but we also find very often, especially 
among the Attics, the following forms after Dec. III; G. υἱέος 
Ὁ. viet (A. viea). Dual vies, vigow. Pl. υἱεῖς, υἱέων, υἱέσιν, υἱέας 
(υἱεῖς). ε 
Of these last, the most usual are the Gen. Sing. and all the Plural 
cases, and these are even preferred to the regular forms. The Acc. 
visa is rejected by the Atticists, as also the form of the Gen. υἱέως. 
The Ionics form G. vinjog, etc. All these are prolongations of the 
' eases derived. by epic writers from the ancient form ‘fT, in 
which the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing. seems to indicate a con- 
traction from vi-; G. υἷος, Ὁ. vis, A. via, Pl. vieg, Ὁ. υἱάσι, with α 
inserted (as in πατράσιν, ἀρνάσι), because the diphthong vw: does not 
usually stand before a consonant. - 
ὑσμῖνι § ὅθ. n. 8. 
φάρυγξ ἡ, gullet, G. φάρυγγος, poetic, puguyos, ete. 
φρέαρ, Gen. φρέατος and atos, contr. φρητός, etc. see ὃ 41. n. 7. 
χείρ ἡ, hand, G. χειρὸς, has in Gen. and Dat. Dual χεροῖν, and in Dat. 
Pl. χερσί. In the poets also G. χερός, χερί ; Dual χειροῖν. 
χελιδών δ 56. n. 7. 
χέρηϊ, etc. and χέρεια, see in ᾧ 68. 2. 


yous 0, (a measure, congius,) is in part declined regularly (like βοῦς), 
χοός, you, χοῦν, Pl. χόες, yous. But since it is strictly contracted from 
χοεύς (Hippocrat.) it therefore has also (§ 53. 2) the better Attic forms 
G. yous, A. you, A. Pl. yous.* — But ὃ χοῦς heap of earth, has only G. 
yoos, A. χοῦν, etc. — For πρόχους see above. 

χρέων ὃ 57. 3. 


χρέως τὸ, debt, Gen. also χρέως, Ionic-Attic form for the common and 
less approved χρέος, G. χρέους. --- Pl. χρέα, § 53. n. 2. The Dat. is 
wanting in both numbers:—The epic writers have also Nom. χρεῖος and 


χθείως.ἢ : 
χρώς 6, skin, G. χρωτός, etc. Ionic χροῦς, χροΐ, χρόα. The Attic 
Dat. χρῷ occurs only in the phrase ἐν χρῷ, ᾧ 56. n. 6. 6. 


Ἐν: , 311 4 3 
ὦ THY, SCC τὰν. || ὠτός, see ous. 


* Not to be confounded with χοάς, from αὐ youd libation. 

t The form χρέως occurs often in the earlier editions as Nom. and Accusative ; 
more recently it has been restored from the manuscripts as Genitive also ; e.g. 
Demosth. c. Timoth. p. 1189, 25. 1203,.16. — The form is to be explained from the 
verb yodw. The oldest form of the noun was XPAOZ » Gen. XPAOTS ; 
and hence arose Nom. and Gen. χρέως ; just as from λαός and λαούς — Asnis. 
Xoéoc was afterwards formed by shortening the ὦ. } 


14 


102 §§ 59,69. apsecrives. , ; 


ADJECTIVES. 


§ ὅθ. Terminations. 


1. The Greek language, in consequence of its distinction of the 
genders (motio), has several classes of adjectives of three and of two 
endings ; in which last, as in Latin, the masculine and feminine have 
a common form, i. e. are generis communis. 

2. The Feminine of adjectives of three endings always follows Dec. I. 

3. The Neuter has always in the Nominative, and consequently in 
the three like cases (ὃ 99. n. 5), a form of its own; in all the other 
cases it is like the masculine. ὶ ᾿ 

Nore. In order therefore to decline adjectives correctly, it is only 


necessary to know the Nominative of each gender, and the Genitive of the 
masculine. 


§ 60. Adjectives in og. 
1. The largest class of adjectives are those in 0¢, corresponding to 
the Latin in ws, and either (like these) of three endings, 
| pM Masc. 09, Fem. or ἃ, Neut. ov, 
or of éwo endings, - 
Comm, os, Neut. ov. 
For the few which have the Neut. ο, see § 74. 


2. Those of three endings are the most numerous, and have the Fem. 
always in 9; except when preceded by a vowel or by ¢, where the Fem. 
has a, Gen. ag. Ἐπ. hye 

κοῦφος, κούφη, κοῦφον, light 
φίλος, φίλη, φίλον, dear, α friend 
δεινός, δεινή, δεινόν, frightful: 
but 
νέος, νέας νέον, Young 
φίλειος, φιλίας φίλιον, friendly 
ἐλεύϑερος, ἕρα, Egor, free 
πυρός, a, ὄν, fiery-red. 

Nore 1. But those in οος have the Fem. in ἡ, 6. g. ὄγδοος ὀγδόη, 
ϑοός Fox; yet when g precedes, these also have a, as ἀϑρόος ἀϑρόα. ---- 
The Fem. in @ is always long, except in dios, δῖα, δῖον, divine, and some 
few adjectives in «vos. So also πότνια (§ 64. ἢ, 3) which has no mascu- 
line in og.—For the Accents see ὃ 34. IIT. 1, 2. | ; 

3. Of two endings are the following ; some always, others commonly ; 
viz. ὁ and 7 βάρβαρος, ον" ἥσυχος, τεϑασός, ἄρτιος, καίριος, πάτριος, 
βασίλειος, γνώριμος, ὠφέλιμος, etc. In Attic writers and in the poets, 


§ 60. apsrcrives. 103 


many other adjectives, which commonly have three endings, are found 
with only two; as ἐλεύϑερος, κόσμιος, etc. 

4. More especially all compound adjectives are of the common gender, 
i.e. have only two endings ; as 0, ἡ βαϑύκολπος, εὔφωνος, ἄλογος, ἀρ- 
. γός (for ἄεργος), ἀπόκληρος, ἐγκύκλιος, διάλευκος (although the sim- 

ple Adj. is λευκός, ἡ, Ov), πολυγράφος, and also those derived from com- 
pound verbs, as διάφορος, ὑπήκοος, ἐξαίρετος. But those which are 
derived by appending the syllable κός, have always three endings; as 
ἐπιδεικτικός, ἡ, OV (from ἐπιδείκνυμιε), evdatmovexos, ἡ, ov (from εὖ- 
δαϊμων). 

Note 2. Adjectives which are clearly derived from other words by 
appending ἊΝ terminations 

x06, hos, γος, QOS, TOS, £06, 
as μαντικός, δἰλὸς δεινός, φανερός, πλεκτός, χρύσεος, have always, in prose 
at least, the three endings. On the contrary, those with the endings 
μος, τος, 40S, αἰος, 
are more or less of the common gender. But the poets sometimes allow 
themselves, for the sake of the verse, to write " λαμπρός, φανερός, κλυ- 
τός, etc. 

Nore 3. Another rule of general application is, that those adjectives,which 
in forming a feminine in ἢ or α would make it like the abstract substantive, 
have the feminine in ος ; some always, others often; 6. 5. ἢ σωτήριος, ἐλευ-- 
ϑέριος, βασίλειος, because of the substantives ἣ eurqoie, ἐλευϑερία, βασιλεία. 
So φίλιος with the fem. φιλία, has also ἢ φίλιος, because of the substan- 
tive ἢ φιλία. 

Note 4. Comparatives and eer (in ος) of the common gender 
are exceedingly rare, and among the Attics perhaps never occur ; except 

‘sometimes from words which are of common gender in the positive ; 8. g. 
Thucyd. 3. 101, δυσεσβολώτατος ἡ Aoxoit. Homer has also ὀλοώτατος ὀδμή. 

Nore 5. On the other hand, the poets employ a feminine form even 
in such compounds as are usually of the common gender ; e.g. ἀϑανάτη, 
ἀμφιλύκη Hom. ἀδμήτη Soph. And several adjectives in tog, (ov0¢, ete.) 
when compounded with « privative, retain the fem. ending even in prose, 
6. g. ἡ ἀναξία. 


Examples of Adjectives in ος for practice, see in Appendix C. 


5. Some adjectives in 00¢ are contracted; viz. 

a. Those of common gender, as evvous, εὔνουν, well disposed, 
Gen. sUvou,etc. These all come by composition from contracted 
forms of Dec. II, like νοῦς, πλοῦς, etc. and conform (in the neuter 

also) to the rules there given for the accents. The Neut. Plur. 
in θὰ remains uncontracted in. these compounds; as τὰ ἄνοα 
from ἄνους senseless. ' 

b. The multiple numerals ἁπλόος, διπλόος, ἡ, ov, ete. eh 
double, etc. They have this peculiarity, that they everywhere 


104 $$ 61, 62. apsecTives. 


contract 67 and da into ἢ and ἃ; thus διπλοῦς, διπλῆ, ἀπ οῖν. 

Pl. διπλοῖ, διπλαῖ, Oumhe..* 
Ὁ. Some adjectives in ¢0¢, which denote a ΞΜ are also con- 
tracted and the accent shifted ; 6. σ. yovoeos golden, χρυσέα, χρύσεον, 
contr. χρυσοῦς, χρυσῆ, χρυσοῦν, Gen. ov, ἧς, ov, etc. When the ter- 
mination is preceded by another vowel or by @, the Fem. is contracted 
not into 7, but into @; as ἐρέεος woollen, contr. égeous, ἐρεᾶ, ἐρεοῦν" 
ἀργύρεος of silver, contr. ἀργυροῦς, ἀργυρᾶ, ἀργυροῦν. The Neut. Pl. 
has always &; thus τὰ χρυσᾶ, like ὀστέα vora, § 36. 


ᾧ 61. Adjectives in ὡς. 
Adjectives in ὡς of the Attic Dec. II, (ἢ 37,) are sionally of common 
gender ; e.g. ὁ and ἡ ἵλεως, τὸ ἵλεων, gracious. They form in part 
the Neut. in ὦ; e.g. ἀγήρως, Neut. ἀγήρων and ἀγήρω, ᾧ 87. n. 2. 


Nore. For those in -γελὼς and —xsowe, see § 69. n. 5. —Of three endings | 
is only the simple πλέως, πλέα, πλέων, full, Neut. Pl. τὰ πλέα ; but its com- 
pounds all conform to the above rule.—For ows see ὁ 64. 3. 


§ 62. Other Adjectives of ihree Endings. 
Other classes of adjectives of three endings are the following, viz. 
, 1. υς, eta, v, Gen. és, declined as in § 51. 
E. g. γλυκὺς, γλυκεῖα, γλυχύ, sweet, Gen. Masc. and Neut. yhu- 
κέος᾽ Indus, ϑήλεια, ϑήλυ, female, Gen. ϑήλεος. 
Examples: βαρύς heavy, βραδύς slow, βραχύς short, evgus broad, 
ἡδύς pleasant, ξύς sharp, ὠκύς swift. 

2. εἰς, eooa, ev, Gen. ἐντος, declined after § 43. n. 1. § 46. n. 1. 
E. g. χαρίεις, χαρίεσσα, γαρίεν, graceful, Gen. χαρίεντος. 
Examples : αἱματόεις bloody, ὑλήεις woody, φωγήεις resounding. 

3. as, avva, av, Gen. avos. 

E. g. μέλας, μέλαινα, μέλαν, black, Gen. μέλανος. 
The only other example is τάλας unpitanaie 

4. The following single examples: 

|. tony, τέρεινα, τέρεν, G. Evo, tender. 
ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα, ἑκόν, G. ὄντος, willing. 
πᾶς, πᾶσα, nav, G. παντός, every, all. 

To the above classes must also be added all Active Participles, § 88. 8. 


Norte 1. Adjectives in vg are also of common gender in the poets ; 6. g. 
ἡδὺς ἃ ἀὐτμή Hom. ϑῆλυς γεολαΐα 'Theocr.—Instead of the Fem. εἶα the’ Io- 


* With these numerals must not be confounded the compounds with πλοῦς 
sailing, which are of common gender ; as 0, ἡ ἄπλους, εὔπλους, etc. Neut. ovr, 
Neut. Pl. oa. 


§ 63. apsecTivzs. 105 


nics have go and éy, as. ὠχέα, βαϑέη Hom. Instead of ἡμέσεια, from ἥμι-- 
aug half, the old Attic also had ἡμίσεα ; see the note on Plat. Meno. 17. and 
Ausf. Sprachl. p. 252. Ed. 1. 


Nore 2. From éxoyv comes the,compound «éxciy, contr. ἄκων, ουσα, 
ἄκον, unwilling. —The Neut. πᾶν is long only as a monosyllable ; : in com- 
position it is made short, according to the general analogy ; 5 aS Was, ἅπα- 


σα, uray, all together, the whole. For the accent in πάντων, πᾶσι, See ὃ 43. 
n. 4, b. 


Note 3. Some adjectives in εἰς are also contracted ; viz. the endings 
nels, ἤεσσα, HEY, are contracted into HS, NOOK, ἣν; — and οξις, οεσσα, OFY, 
into ous, αὔσσα, OUY 5 9. 5. 

τιμῇς, τιμῆσσα, τιμῆν, G. τιμῆντος --- from τιμήεις honoured 
, μελιτοῦς, μελιτοῦσσα, μελιτοῦν, G. μελιτοῦντος ---- from μελιτόεις full of 

honey. 


‘See for this contraction § 41. ἢ. 5 


§ 63. Adjectives of two Endings, and of one Ending. 


_ 1. Other adjectives of two terminations, are the following, all de- 
clined after Dec. ITI. $ 
1. M.andF. ης, Ν. ες, Gen. eos contr. ous. E.g. σαφής, σαφές, 
evident, Gen. σαφοῦς. 3 


Examples: ἀληϑής true, ἀγεννής degenerate, ἀκριβής exact, αὐϑάδης 
(long «) proud, ϑηριώδης brutal, πλήρης" μι, πρηγής inclining 
JSorwards, ψευδής Salse, ἀλής collected. “Ty is see in § 53. 1. 


2. M. and F. wy, N. ov,Gen.ovog. E. g. πέπων, πέπον, ripe, Gen. 
πέπονος. 
Examples: ἀμύμων (long v) blameless, ἀπράγμων unoccupied, εὐγνώ- 
μὼν well meaning. 
3. M.andF. ἐς, Ν. ¢,Gen. τος. E. g. ἔδρις, ἔδρι, knowing, Gen. 
ἔδοιος. 
‘There are very few examples. 
4. The following single adjective : 
ἄῤῥδην or ἄρσην, Neut. ἄῤῥεν, ἄρσεν, G. ἄῤῥενος, ἄρσενος. 

2. But besides all these classes of adjectives, others are often 
formed by composition from a substantive, retaining as much as possible 
the termination and declension of the substantive ; as may be best seen 
in the examples. All such adjectives are of common sigs μὲ and have 
a neuter, when it can be formed after the same analogy. E.g 

εὔχαρις, εὔχαρι, graceful, G. eros, from ἡ χάρες, “ToS 
adaxous, ἄδακρυ, tearless, G. vog, from τὸ δάκρυ, vos. — 
Sometimes, in the termination, ἢ is changed to ὦ, and é to 0, 6. g. 


106 § 63. ADJECTIVES. 


from πατήρ, ἕρος, comes ἀπάτωρ, 00, fatherless, G. οροὸς 
from φρήν, φρενός, comes σώφρων, ον, intelligent, G. ovos. 

3. When no neuter can be analogically formed, the adjective re- 
mains of one termination, but is only of common gender, 1. 8. only mas- 
culine and feminine, and not generis omnis; e.g.0 and ἡ ἄπαις, G. 
ἄπαιδος, childless, and 0, ἡ μακρόχειρ long-handed. - - 

4. Of common panae: and of one termination, are also some adjec- 
tives in ἧς, ἡτῦς, as ἀργής, ἡμιϑνής ;—in ὡς, ὠτὸς, as ἀγνώς ;—and 
in & and w, as ἡλιξ, x0g* παραπλήξ, ἤγος" μῶνυξ, χος' αἰγίλεψ, πος. 

5. Further, of common gender and one ending are several in ας, G. 
ados, as Aoyas selected, φυγάς, νομάς, σπορᾶς; and some in ἐς and vs, 
G. wos, vdos, as ἄναλκις, ἔπηλυς, σύγκλυς. More commonly however 
those in ας and ἐς are only feminine, and become, by the omission of a 
substantive, themselves substantives; e.g. ἡ μαινάς (sc."yuv7) Bac- 
chante, ἡ πατρίς (sc. γῆ) native-land. 

6. Many adjectives are only masculine; so especially γέρων, οντος, 
old, πρέσβυς old, πένης, nros, poor ; and of Dec. I, ἐθελοντής volunta- 
ry, γεννάδας well-born, and many in iag, as τροπίας, μονίας. See 
note 7. 

Nore 1. In many adjectives of common gender, there is also a secon- 


dary feminine form, but for the most part only poetic ; as μουγογένεια, 
ἡδυέπεια, from masculines in yg ; see also § 64. n. 3. 

Nore 2. Since according to § 58. 3, the Neut. is always declined like 
the masculine, the Gen. and Dat. of such words as have no neuter in the 
Nom. are sometimes employed as neuter, and then these cases are actually 
generis omnis. Still, this is done only by the poets; 6. δ. Eurip. Or. 834 
δρομάσι βλεφάροις, Nicand. Ther. 631 ἀργῆὴτι ἄνϑει. 

Nore 3. In other instances, when the neuter is wanting, it is supplied 
by ἃ derived form in ον, e.g. βλακικόν, ἁρπακτικόν, μώνυχον, as Neut. of 
βλάξ, ἅρπαξ, wavs. 

Norse 4. Compounds of ποῦς, ποδός, foot, are declined regularly after 
the analogy of this substantive ; ; e.g. δίπους, οδος, etc. In the Neut. 
they have ovy, (as εὔνους, εὔνουν, like the contracted Dec. II,) but decline 
it nevertheless, according to the general rule (ᾧ 53. 3), like the masce. as - 
τὸ δίπουν, τοῦ δίποδος, ete. ; 

Nore 5. Compounds of γέλως, ὠτος, laughter, forsake commonly the 
declension of their substantive and follow the Att. Dec. IT. (δ 61.) So al- 
so those compounded with κέρας, ατος, horn, which likewise change the ἃ 
into ὦ. But both kinds have also the Gen. ὠτὸς ; and the Neut. in wy has 
the same anomaly as in the compounds of ποῦς ; 6. g. φιλόγελως, δίκερως, 
Neut. ων, G. ὦ and wrog. The compounds of ἔρως conform to the Att. 
Dec. II, only in the accent of the Nom. 6. g. δύσερως G. wros. 

Note 6. The compounds of πόλις assume δ᾽ in declension ; 6. g. φι- 
λόπολις, 1, G. dos. 


§ 64. apsecrives. 107 
Nore 7. Finally, the Greek adjectives and substantives stand in such 
intimate relation to each other, both in form and syntax, and so readily 
pass over one into the other, that not only many of the above adjectives 
(as πρέσβυς, πένης) may equally well be regarded as substantives; but al-. 
so acknowledged substantive forms can often be considered as adjec- 
tives (6. g. ἐπγέτης, ἄρτος) ; and when masculine, they are even made of 
common gender by the poets; see ὃ 123, n. 1. 


§ 64. Anomalous and Defective Adjectives. 


1. The two adjectives, μέγας great and πολύς much, have from these 
ground-forms only the Nom. and Acc. Singular; viz. Mase. μέγας, μέ- 
Yar ; πολύς, πολύν; Neut. μέγα, πολύ. All the other cases, as well 
as the whole of the feminine, come from the unusual ground-forms 
MET'‘A' AOS, ἡ, ON, and πολλός, ἡ, ov; thus: 

N. μέγας μεγάλη wey a modus πολλή πολυ 
α. μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου | πολλοὺ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
D. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ | πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 
Α. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολὺν πολλήν πολύ 

The Dual and Plural are declined regularly like adjectives in ος ; 6. g. 
᾿ μεγάλω, α, 0° μεγάλου, αὐ, α' πολλοί, αἱ, a, ete. 

Note 1. The forms πολλός; πολλὸν belong to the [onics; and the re- 
gular forms from πολύς are found in the epic language ; 6. g. πολέος, πο-- 
λέες, -sic, etc. The epic writers have also πουλύς, πουλύ; and use the 
~ mase. formas fem. 6. g. Il. x. 27. 

2. ITogos gentle is usual, in this form, only in the Masc. and Neut. 
Singular. The whole of the feminine and the Neut. Plur. are borrowed 
from the form πραῦς (Ion. menus), which occurs in the dialects. Thus 
Fem. πραεῖα, Neut. Pl. πραέα. We find also in the Masc. Nom. Pl. 
mogoe and πραεῖς, Gen. only πραέων, Dat. πρᾷοις and πραέσιν. 

3. 20¢ sound, salvus, contr. from *&4OX, has from this form only 
comm. gend. Nom. ows, Acc.'and Neut. σῶν, Acc. Pl. σῶς. Rarely 
Fem. Sing. and Neut. Pl. σᾶ. All the rest is borrowed from σῶος, ἃ 
ov, Ion. σόος. ; 

Nore 2. The Acc. Pl. σῶς is readily explained, as contracted from 
ZAOTS. _But the Nom. Pl. σῶς, which also occurs, is a transition to 
Dec. III, σῶς, o@e¢.—In the same manner as σῶς from AO, arose also 
the Homeric ζώς from ΖΑ͂ΟΣ ; and hence the common ζωός. Comp. the 
verbs σαόω σώω, ἕζαον ἕζων. 

4. Defectives are chiefly the gillowine : 

a. ἀλλήλων, see ᾧ 74. 4. 

ὃ. ἄμφω, see § 78. 4. 

c. φροῦδος gone, fled, which is used only in the Nominative of 
all genders and numbers, § 150. 


108 : ᾧ 65. ADJECTIVES.—COMPARISON. 
Nore 3. We adduce here some rare and poetic examples : 
1. πότνια, epic πότνα, venerable, only feminine, 
2. μάκαρ blessed is of comm. gender; but has also in the fem. μάκαι-- 
ga. The Neut. does not occur. 
3. Some masculine adjectives have a less common derived form for 
4 


we 


the fem. 6. g. πένης, fem. πένησσδι ; πρέσβυς, fem. πρέσβειρα. 

. Some also of common gender have such secondary forms of the 
fem. (comp. 8 63. n. 1,) 6. 5. πέειρα from 0, ἢ πέων fat; πρόφρασσα 
from 6, ἢ πρόφρων favourably inclined. 

5. πρέσβα for πρέσβειρα, hic for λισσή smooth, are old and simple 
forms used by the poets, such as we have seen among the sub- 
stantives (ὃ 56. n. 8. ὃ 57. n. 3), and are in like manner erroneous- 
ly explained as abridged forms. 

6. For ἐΐς and mvs, see "the catal. of Anom. Nouns, § 58, 

7. From the ease with which adjectives can be formed by composi- 
tion from substantives (§ 63. 2), the poets are accustomed, whenev- 

- er they find it convenient, to form single cases, to which the Nom. 
Sing. sometimes cannot be analogically even presupposed; as 

| ἐρυσάρματες ἵπποι, from ἅρμα, ατος ; πολύαρνι Θυέστῃ, from Gen. 
ἀρνός, etc. 


§ 65. Decrees or CompARIsONn. 


1. The Greeks, like the Latins and English, have the three degrees 
of comparison, Positive, Comparative, and Superlative, as in the words 
long, longer, longest ; and for each of these they have particular forms. 
These forms are the same for all the three genders; and are distinguish- 
ed among themselves only by the terminations of the different genders. 

2> The most common forms of comparison are made by the endings 

1 -τερος, a, ov, for the Comparative, 
-ratos, ἡ, ov, for the Superlative. 

3. Adjectives in o¢ cast off their ¢ before these terminations, and re- 
tain the o unchanged, when it is preceded by a long syllable; e.g. βέ- 
βαιος βεβαιότερος, ἰσχυρότερος, πιστότατος. So also generally after 
the concurrence of a mute before a liquid, e.g. σφοδοῦς σφοδρότατος, 
πυχνὸς πυκχνότερος. 

4. When however the 0 is preceded by a short syllable, it is changed 
into @; 6.5. σοφός σοφώτερος, καίριος καιριώτατος, ἐχυρώτερος, 
Wiel iaicatoe. 

-Nore 1. The poets make here exceptions, and the ὦ stands in epic 
writers after really long syllables, as oi{vewtatos, κακοξεινώτερος Hom. and 
in Attic poetry after the concurrence of a mute before a liquid, e.g. δυσ-- 
ποτμώτατος Eurip. 

Nore 2. Some adjectives in og, especially among the Attics, insert in- 


stead of this o or ὦ more commonly az ΟΥ̓ Ἐσ or wo, 6. 5. μέσος μεσαΐτατος, 
ἐῤῥωμένος ἐῤδωμενέστερος, λάλος λαλέίστερος. The first form is particular- 


ᾧ 66. ADJECTIVES.—COMPARISON. 109 


ly used by the Attics; the second by the Ionics; the third is the most 
rare. ‘The common form also is partially in use along with these. 

Nore 3. Some in aos, viz. γεραιός old, παλαιός ancient, σχολαῖος slow, 
commonly drop the o before the ending ; e. δ. γεραίτερος, παλαΐίτατος. 

Nore 4. Φίλος dear, a friend, commonly either drops the ο, or substi- 
tutes ov; 6. g. φίλτερος, φίλτατος, or φιλαΐτερος, τατος. The Dor. φίντερος 
see in § 16, n. 1. d. 

Nore 5. Those contracted in δὸς -ovg change ew to ὦ, i.e. the e is 
swallowed up; e. g. πορφυρεώτατος πορφυρώτατος. Those in οος -ove on 
the contrary, most commonly assume ἐσ in the uncontracted form, (as in 
note 2,) as ἁπλόος ἁπλοέστατος, and hence contr. ἁπλοῦς ἁπλούστατος. 

Nore 6. That the comparative and superlative in og are sometimes of 
common gender, has been already remarked, § 60, n. 4. 


§ 66. Particular Forms of Comparison. 


‘1. Of other adjectives, those in vg merely cast off the ¢; e.g. εὐρύς 

εὐρύτερος, τατος. ὄνον 
2. These in ας, G. ανος, do the same, and then resume the ν which 
_ had been dropped; e.g. μέλας G. μέλανος --- μελάντερος. 

3. Those in ἧς and εἰς shorten these endings into ἐς ; e.g. ἀληϑής 
6. εος---ἀληϑέστατος᾽ πένης G. ἡτος ---- πενέστατος " χαρίεις χαριέο- 
τατος. ᾿ 

4. All other adjectives take the forms ἕστερος, ἔστατος ; more rarely 
ἰστερος, ἰστατος ; and are changed before them, just as before the case- 
endings; e.g. ἄφρων (ἄφρονος) apoov-eoregos: ἅρπαξ (aenayos) ag- 
παγ-ίστατος.Ἐ 


Nore 1. Since the substantive ending ἧς of Dec. I, is often expployed 
in an adjective sense (comp. ᾧ 63. n. 7), it admits also the degrees Of com- 
parison ; but always with the form ἔστερος, totatos, e. δ. κλεπτίστατος from 
κλέπτης thief, thievish. But ὑβριστής α violent person, has for the sake of 
euphony ὕβριστότερος. i 

Nore 2. The word ψευδής, G. sos, false, has also πίστερος ; 50 too 
according to the Grammarians ἀκρατής incontinent, because ἀχρατέστερος 
belongs to ἄκρατος unmixed. But in one edition, at least, ἀχρατέστερος is 
found also from the former word, e.g. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 12; just as éy- 
κρατέστερος from ἐγκρατής continent. 


Nore 8. The simple mode of formation is found in μάκαρ μακχάρ- 
- τατος, ἄχαρις ἀχαρίστερος. ὃ 65. 2. 


* In Xenophon we find twice (Mem. III. 13. 4. IV. 2. 20) βλακὥώτερος, ὦτατος, 

. from βλάξ ; without doubt false, as is shown by the ὦ; since the @ in βλάξ, βλακός, 

is long. ‘The true reading is most probably βλακικίτερος, τατος ; since when 

the degrees of comparison could not be formed from a word with entire ease, it 
was usual to make them from the derived form in exes. Comp. ὃ 63. n. 3. 


15 


110 δῷ 67, 68. ADJECTIVES.—COMPARISON. 


§ 67. Comparison by των, ἐστος. 
1. Another form of comparison, of less frequent occurrence, is: 


πίων, Neut. -2ov, for the Comparative, 
-toros, ἡ, ov, for the Superlative. 
, The declension of this comparative, see above in § 55. 
2. This form of comparison is assumed : 
1) By some adjectives in ug, e.g. ἡδύς, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος 
2) By some adjectives in gos, after dropping the 0, e.g. αἰσχρὸς, 
αἰσχίων, αἴσχεστιος. 

8. In some comparatives of this form (cwv), the preceding consonant, 
together with the z, is changed into oo or tr (see note 7). The word 
ταχὺς swift, Sup. τάχέστος, takes in this, its usual form of the compara- 
tive, an initial @ : | 

ϑάσσων Neut. Pacoor; Att. ϑάττων, ϑᾶττον, 
whence it appears that the τ in ταχύς was originally 9. (ἢ 18. 2.) 
Nore 1. This form of comparison always has the accent on the ante- 


penult, when the quantity of the last syllable permits it; e.g. ἡδύς, ἡδίων 
Neut. ἥδιον, ἥδιστος. 

Nore 2. The ¢ of this form of the doniparative is sometimes made 
short by the poets, especially the epic writers. 

Nore 8. Of adjectives in vg, only 7dv¢ and ταχύς have usually this 
form ; the most are formed regularly in ὕτερος, vtatog. A few have the 
above form occurring along: with the regular one, we Siam in the poets. 

- Note 4. Of those in ρός belong here 

αἰσχρός, ἐχϑρός, οἰκτρός, κυδρός. 
And in these the regular form is more or less usual at the same time ; 
while οἰκτρός never has the comparative in twy.—The form ἕω», ὑστος ap- 
pears, in these words, to have come from an old positive in υς. (δ 69. n. 1.) 

Nore 5. To the same class belongs μακρός long, on account of the 
forms μάσσων (for μακίων), μήκιστος, where the new vowel of the super- 
_ lative is found also in the subst. τὸ μῆκος length, and 1 in other derivatives. 

More usual however are the forms μακρότερος, μακρότατος. 

Norz 6. Some other words which take this form, see among the 
anomalous examples in the following sections. In some, this form is 
used only by the poets, e.g. φιλέων, φίλιστος, from φίλος. 

Nore 7. Comparatives in cowy, ττῶν, except ϑάσσων and some words 
adduced in the next sections, are rare and poetic ; e.g. πάσσων from παχύς 
Hom. βάσσων from βαϑύς, etc. 


ᾧ 68. Anomalous Comparison. ΕἾ 
Several adjectives are entirely anomalous in their comparison ; mostly _ 
from the circumstance that they borrow their degrees of comparison 


from obsolete positives. When several forms of comparison belong 


§ 68. apsJEcTIVES.—comPaRISON. 111 


to one positive, (see ἀγαϑόὸς and κακός,)} each of them is usually em- 
ployed in some one of the special meanings of the positive; or at least 
each is used by preference in certain connexions; the details of which 


are left to observation. ie 
: Comp. | Sup. 

l. ayados good ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον, better ἄριστος best 
βελτίων βέλτιστος 
κρείσσων or κρείττων κράτιστος 
λωΐων comm. λῴων λωΐστος or 

: λῴστος 


In the earlier poets we find the proper comparative of ἄριστος, 
viz. ἀρείων," and even the positive of κράτιστος, viz. xgatts.—F or χρείσ- 
σων the Ionics have κρέσσων, the Dorics χάῤῥων (for KAPYLN) from 
another form of the positive ; whence also the adverb χάρτα very, and 
the poetic superlative κάρτιστος.---ΕὌΥ βελτέων, λωΐων, the epic lan- 
guage has βέλτερος, Awitegos.—The Dor. βέντιστος see in § 16. η. 1. d. 


Ἢ ‘ ͵ 
2. κακὸς bad, καχίων . κακπίστος 
wicked χείρων χείριστος 
ἥσσων OF ἥττων ἥκιστος 


The poets use the regular form καχώτερος. For χείρων the Ionics 
have χερείων, the Dorics χερήων. In epic writers are found the forms 
Ὁ. zéoni A. χέρηα Pl. χέρηες, τὰ χέρεια, which are used instead of this 
comparative, although they are strictly cases of an obsolete positive.} 

The comparative ἥσσων, Ion. ἕσσων, has only the signification 
worse, i. 6. less useful, weaker, etc. and stands everywhere opposed to 
zosicowy. ‘The corresponding superlative is rare as an adjective; 
but the Neut. ἥκιστα is very common as an adverb. § 115. 7.4 


3. μέγας great μείζων, Ion. μέζων μέγιστος 
4, μικρὸς small ' ἐλάσσων, ττων ἐλάχιστος 
5. ολίγος little, few μείων oAlytoros 


Since these two words (uixgos and odiyog) are so nearly related in 
meaning, the forms ἐλάσσων, ἐλάχιστος, and μείων, are employed both 
for the idea of smallness, and for that of fewness. The ancient positive 
ἐλαχύς is still found in the poets. The regular form μικρότερος, τατος, 
is also used. The poets too have a Compar. ὀλέζων, and a Superl. μεῖστος. 


* The ancient positive is indicated,in the name of the war-god ” Aons, Mars, 
which was probably identical with it ; also in the abstract noun ἀρετή. 

+ They are commonly explained as syncopated forms of the comparative, as 
also πλέες (see the next page); but a comparison with the old German word bass 
(the obsolete positive of besser, beste, Eng. better, best,) which is used not only as 
positive but also as comparative, (Gen. 12: 13. 19: 9,) supports the view above 
given. : 

¢ This superlative stands as an adjective I]. w. 531, according to the only correct © 
reading ; see Lezilogus 1. 4.—From an error of the ancient Grammarians, this 
whole form of comparison has commonly been placed in grammar under μπρός, 
because the adverbial form could be translated by minus, minime. The sense 
of the positive of ἥττων lies only in κακός. 


112 § 69. ADJECTIVES.—COMPARISON. 


6. πολὺς much πλείων or πλεῖστος 
πλέων more most 


The Attics use also πλεῖν for the Neut. πλεῖον, but only in such 
connexions as πλεῖν ἢ wvovor.—The Tonics and Dorics contract thus: 
πλέον πλεῦν, πλέονες wAevysc.—Homer uses also in the Plur. πλέες, 
πλέας, a positive form instead of the comparative.* 

7. καλὸς beautiful καλλίων κάλλιστος 
8. ῥᾷδιος easy ὅᾳφων ὅᾷᾳστος 

The Tonics have in the positive ῥηΐδιος, and then form ῥηΐων, δήϊσ- 
tos; the epic has ῥηΐτερος, τατος ; all from P4i=, PHiz, from the 
Neut. Pl. of which, PHi.A, comes thé adverb ῥεῖα, ῥέα, easy. 

9, ἀλγεινὸς painful ἀλγίων ἄλγιστος 

The regular form ἀλγεινότερος, τατος, δ nevertheless more usual 
in the masculine and feminine. 

10. πέπων ripe πεπαίτερος πεπαίτατος 
11. πίων fat πιότερος πιότατος. 


Note. To the peculiarities of the poets belongs the ancient superlative 
in ατος ; as μέσατος middlemost from μέσος, and véatos, νείατος, latest, from 
γέος new, young. ‘The contracted feminine of this last, viz. γήτη (sc. χορδή), 
is used in prose for the last or lowest string of an instrument : with us, the 
highest. 


§ 69. Defective Comparison. 


1. There are also defective forms of comparison, i.e. without a posi- 
tive; see the notes. Among these may be reckoned several of the 
above anomalous forms, as ἥττων, χρείττων, Awortos, etc. - 

2. To these belong also such forms of comparison as are derived from 
particles, and such as denote a series; 6. g. mAnovaitegos, τατος, from 
πλησίον near; asin Lat. prope, propior, prozimus ;—@0tegos prior, 
πρῶτος first, from πρό before ;---ὑπέρτερος, ὑπέρτατος and ὕπατος, 
higher, highest, from ὑπέρ above ;—éoyor0¢ uttermost, last, from ἐξ out 
of ;—voregos, τατος, later, latest, etc.t 

3. Sometimes the degrees of comparison are formed from a substan- 
tive, which can be taken in an adjective sense; e.g. ἑταῖρος friend, 
ἑταυρότατος ; κλέπτης thief, κλεπτίστος most thievish, etc. (ᾧ 66. n. 1.) 


Nore 1. In consequence of an erroneous system, it was formerly 
usual to refer to degrees of comparison formed from substantives, sev- 


* Compare the marginal note on χέρηϊ, etc. on the preceding page. The form 
στλέες is just as clearly syncopated from πολέες, as the comparative πλεῖων is 
formed by the same syncope from σολύς. 


t We find also ἀνώτερος, ἐνδότατος, etc. from ἄνω, ἔνδον, etc. but in many 


passages these are manifestly corrupted from the adverbial form ὁ ἀνωτέρω, ὃ 
ἐνδοτέρω, etc. See δὲ 115, 125. 


§ 70; NUMERALS. 113 


eral defectives in ἰὼν, ἐστος, to which there existed a kindred abstract sub- 
Stantive in 0G 5 9. 8. διγίων more terrible, xigdtatos slyest, ὕψιστος highest ; 
Subst. τὸ ῥῖγος shuddering, κέρδος artifice, ὕψος height. In the same manner 
were explained several of the deviations above given (§§ 67, 68), as ἔχϑιστος ᾿ 
from τὸ ἔχϑος hatred, μήκιστος from τὸ μήκος length, κάλλιστος from κάλλος 
beauty, ete. But it is undeniable, that these substantives and these degrees 
of comparison presuppose rather the corresponding positive forms; and 
this is the more certain, because a few of these forms have been preserved 
in the earliest poetry ; 6. g. χρατύς, whence κράτιστος and τὸ κράτος ; ἐλεγ- 
χέες infamous, whence ἐλέγχιστος and τὸ ἔλεγχος. (Comp. § 119. 3. e, and 
10. d. 

Note 2. In the poets, and especially the epic poets, occur many forms 
of comparison which belong under this section; 6. g. φέρτερος, φέρτατος 
and φέριστος, braver, most excellent, which can δὰ referred to ἀγαϑός; :- 
κύγτερος΄ more shameless, from κύων, κυνός, dog ;---βασιλεύτερος mightier, 
from βασιλεύς :--πύματος, μύχατος, ὁπλύτερος, etc. which are sufficiently 
explained in the lexicons. 

Nore 3. In a few very rare instances, we find a new degree of compari- 
son formed, for the sake of emphasis, from a word which i is already in the 
comparative or superlative degree, 6. g. ἐσχατώτατος, πρώτιστος, from ἔσχα- 
τος, πρῶτος. Such instances occur mostly in later writers, at least in those 
not Attic—When the epic poets sometimes combine both forms of the 
comparative in one, e.g. χειρότερος, μειότερος, this is done for the sake of 
the verse, and not to produce an emphatic sense., 


NvuMERALS. 


§ 70. Cardinal Numbers. 
1. εἷς, μία, ἕν, G. Eves, μιᾶς, ἑνὸς, one. 
Observe the anomalous shifting of the accent in ia, μιᾶς, μιᾷ, μέαν.---: 
Instead of this Fem. epic writers have also ἴα, G. ἑῆς. 
Hence, by composition with the negatives οὐδὲ and μηδέ, come the 
negative adjectives 
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, and 
μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, πο One, none. 
In declension they retain the accent of the simple word, as οὔδενος, 
οὐδεμιᾶς, etc. 

_ The mode of writing these compounds separately, οὐδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ ἕν, ete. 
where there is always a hiatus (δ 29. n. 1), serves for emphasis: not 
even one, not the least——Several writers, mostly later ones, write 
οὐϑείς, Neut. --ϑέν, for οὐδείς - but employ the usual feminine. 

2. δύο Nom. Acc. δυοῖν Gen. Dat. two. 


The Attics write also δυεῖν, but only in the Genitive. They likewise 
use δύο as indeclinable for Gen. and Dative-—Forms not Attic are, 
N. A. δύω G. δυῶν D. δυσί, Svoiv.—Ion. dvotow.—Epie δοιώ and 
δοιοί, which are declined throughout. —The word which expresses 
the idea of both hic see in § 78. 4. 


oie 
>a 


114 i § 70. NUMERALS. 


3. τρεῖς M. and F. τρία Neut. three, G. τριῶν, Ὁ. revol(v), Acc. like 
the Nom. 


4. τέσσαρὲς ΟΥ̓ τέτταρες, Neut. ἃ , four, G. wv, Ὁ. τέσσαρσι, rérraget 
(poet. τέτρασι), Acc. ας, a 
Ion. τέσσερες, Dor. τέττορες, tétoges, ancient and AXol. πέσυρες. 
The remaining units or simple numbers up to ten, and the tens or 
round numbers up to one hundred, are not declined. 


5. πέντε 7. ἑπτά 9. ἐννέα 

6. & 8. ὀχτὼ 10. δέκα 
20. εἴκοσι or -σὶν 50. πεντήκοντα 80. ὀγδοήκοντα ᾿ 
90. τριάκοντα 00. ἑξήκοντα 90. ἐνενήκοντα 


40. τεσσαράκοντα 70. ἑβδομήκοντα 100. ἑκατὸν. 

Not only the long α in τριάκοντα, but also the short « in τεσσαράκον- 
ται, etc. passes over into ἢ among the Ionics; as τριήκοντα, τεσσερή- 
κοντα. Other Ionic and epic forms are ἐείκοσι, ὀγδώκοντα, ἐννήκον- 
τα ; Doric, 5 πέμπε, 90 εἴκατι. 

The numbers compounded with ¢en, i. 6. the numbers 11—19, have 
commonly the following forms: 11 Fodend, 12 δώδεκα, 13 τρισκαίδεκα, 
τεσσαρεσκαίδεκα, πεντεκαίδεκα, ἑκκαίδεκα, ἑπτακαίδεκα, ὁκτωκαίδε- | 
κα, ἐννεακαίδεκα.---ἰ,655 frequent are δεκατρεῖς, δεκαπέντε, ete.— Teets ) 
and τέσσαρες are declined in the compounds also, e.g. τεσσαρακαί- 
δεχα, τεσσαρσικαίδεκα, δεκατριῶν, etc. 

Ζυώδεκα and δυοκαίδεκα are Tonic and poetic.—The forms τρισκαΐδε- 
κα, ἑχκαΐδεκα, Shew that the other numbers connected by καί up to 
19 are not to be written separately.—Teoosgsoxaidexa is with the 
Tonics indeclinable ; 6. g. Herodot. I. 86 bis. Γ 

Other compound numbers are usually written separately. When the 
smaller number stands first, they are connected by χαΐ; otherwise not; 
6. g. πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν, OF εἴκοσι πέντε. 

The round numbers above one hundred, i. 6. the hundreds, thousands, 
etc. are regularly declined : 200 dvaxoocor, αὐ, α, 800 τρεὰᾶκόσιοι, τετ- 
ρακόσιοι, MEVTAXOGLOL, ἑξακόσιοι, ἑπτακόσιοι, OxTAXOOLOL, ἐννακόσιον. 
{without ¢)—1000 χίλιοι, δισχίλιοι, τρισχίλιοι, τετρακισχίλιοι, πεντα- 
κοσχίλιοι, etc.—10,000 μύρεοι," δισμύριοι, etc. Comp. ᾧ 71. 9. 

The α in the two first of these numbers is long; Ion. διηκόσιοι, ete.— 

᾿ς Old Homeric forms are ἐγγνεαχίλιοι, dexazilvo.—These larger num- 
bers can also stand, as collectives, in the Singular; e. δ. διακοσία 
ἵππος (ἢ ἵππος cavalry). 


Nore 1. . Instead of the numbers compounded with Ὀχτώ 8 and ἐ ey VEO 
9, a circumlocution is often used ; e. g. for 49 we find the phrase ἑνὸς δέ- 
ovtos (or μιᾶς δεούσης) πεντήκοντα, i.e. 50 less one; and so δυοῖν δεόντοιν 
ἡ τήκοντα, 50 less two, for 48. We find also the construction ἑγὸς or 


* Distinguished from μυρίοι many, innumerable, by the accent. 


§ 71. NUMERALS. 115 


δυοῖν δέοντες, -ta; the word δεῖν being used to express the sense both of 
to want and to be wanting. 

Nore 2. When other parts of speech are to be compounded with 
numerals, the four first numerals have a particular form, viz. unity is 
expressed by μονο-(μόγνος alone), two by d-, three by τρι-, and four by 
τετρα-- ; e.g. μονόχερως, δίκερως, δισύλλαβος, διετής (from ἔτος), διώβολον 
(from ὀβολός), τρέπους, τετράπους, etc.* The other numerals either retain 
in such compounds their usual form, with a few necessary changes for 
the sake of euphony, 6. g. πεντεγαΐα, ἑκατόμπυλος, ἕχπηχυς from ἕξ, etc. or 
they are likewise formed with ἃ or 0; 6. g. πεντά-μετρος, ἑξά-γωνον, εἶκο- 
σά-εδρος, πεντηκοντό-γυος, ἑκατοντα--μναῖος, χιλιο- τάλαντος. An Ionic form 
from évvée is εἰγάπηχυς, etc.—The « in such compounds sometimes remains 
before vowels, and sometimes not; the o is dropped, or in compounds with 
ἔτος year is contracted. We find therefore ἑπταἕτης of seven years, better 
ἑπτέτης ; τριακονταἕτης OY τριακοντούτης for -ostys.t Observe also ἐνγαέτης 
of nine years, ἐννῆμαρ nine days long. 


§ 71. Ordinal Numbers and other Numerals. 


1. The two first ordinal numbers are two defective forms of compar- 
ison, viz. πρῶτος primus, the first, or when only two are spoken of, πρό- 
τέρος prior, the former; and δεύτερος the second.t The other ordinals are 
the following : τρίτος, τέταρτος, πέμπτος, ἕκτος, ἕβδομος, ὄγδοος, ἔνα- 
τος or ἔννατος, δέκατος, ἑνδέχατος, δωδέκατος, τρισκαιδέκατος, τεσ- 
σαρακαιδέκατος, etc. εἰκοστὸς (20), τριακοστὸς (30), τεσσαρακοστός, 
etc. éxarooros (100), διακοσιοστός, etc. χιλιοστός, μυριοστός. Here 
also in compound numbers, the smaller numeral is either placed first, 
with καὶ ; or more commonly last, without καὶ ; e.g. τρεακοστὸς πρῶώ- 
τος, or πρῶτος καὶ τριακοστος.--- ΤῸ these ordinal numbers corresponds 
the interrogative correlative noorog; (§79.n.1,) quotus? the how- 
many-eth 74] Ἂ 


* Composition with δὲσ--, τρισ--, takes place only where the proper signi- 
fication of dis, τρίς, twice, thrice, must be expressed ; as in δισϑανης Hom. δὲσ- 
μύριοι, δίσεφϑος, τριοάϑλιος, etc. : 

+ These words have the Gen. in δος» ovs, and are of common gender. They 
however admit a separate feminine in vg, e. g. τρεαπκοντούτεδες σπονδαί. 

t A corresponding superlative, δεύτατος the last of two, is only poetic. 

Ἵ So also πολλοστός one among many, ὀλιγοστός one of a few. Hence τὸ πολ- 
λοστὸν μέρος one part among many, i.e. a very small part.—[To express numbers 
with the fraction one half, in money, weight, measure, etc. the Greeks employ 
words compounded from 7uz half and the name of the weight or measure, with the 


adjective ending, ov, cov, or aiov, and then set before them the ordinal number of © 


which the half is meant; e.g. τέτρατον ἡμιτάλαντον the Ath half-talent, i.e. 38 
talents; ἕβδομον ἡμιτάλαντον, 64 talents, Herod. 1.50, and often; τρέτον 7uc- 
δραχμον, 24 drachmae ; τρίτον ἡμεμναῖον, 24 minae. Compare the German drit- 
tehalb, viertehalb, etc. for 24, 34, etc —When however the words stand in the 
Plural, they denote simply so many half-talents, etc. e.g. τρία jucrddavra three 
half-talents, or 14 talent, Herod. 1.50; πέντε ἡμιτάλαντα, 24 talents, Demosth. 
pro Phorm. 956. 18.—Tr. 


: ae 


116 § 72: PRONOUNS. 


For τέταρτος we find on account of the metre τέτρατος ; for ἔνατος we 
find évvatog, Ion. stvarog.—Epic forms are teitatos, ἑβδόματος, oy- 
ddatog.—The Dorics have πρᾶτος for πρῶτος. 

2. The numeral adverbs, which answer to the question how many 
times, are: ἅπαξ once, δίς, τρίς, τετράκις, πεντάκις, ὁχτάκιες, ἐννεάκες 
or ἐννάκιες, ἑκατοντάκες, χιλεάκις, etc. (poet. -xc). ‘The interrogative 
is ποσάκις; 

3. The numeral adjectives which answer to the question how many 
fold, are: ἁπλοὺς simple, διπλοῦς double, τριπλυῦς, τετραπλοὺς four- 
fold, πενταπλοῦς,οίο. ( § 60. 5. b)—or also διπλάσιος ete. 

4. The numeral substantives are all formed in ag,G. ἄδος ; as ἡ μο- 
vac monad, unity, δυᾶς, τριᾶς, τετρᾶς, MEVTUS (also πέμπτας and πέμ- 
nas), é&us, ἑβδομάς, ὀγδοᾶς, ἐννεάς, δεκᾶς, etc. ἑκατοντάς, χιλιᾶς, 
μυριάς. 


Ἧ THE ARTICLE 
See § 75. 


PRONOUNS. 
§ 72. Pronouns SussTANTIVE AND PossEssive. 


1. The substantive or personal pronouns of the first and second 
persons are ἐγὼ I, ἡμεῖς we; ov thou, ὑμεῖς (long v) ye. 

2. In the pronoun of the third person, the Nom. Sing. ἵ is wanting 
in the common dialect ;* just as in the Lat. se, to which this pronoun, 
among the Attics, corresponds also in its reflexive sense. In the 
Plural it has a particular form for the: neuter, which however is also 
unfrequent. 


͵ 


Nore 1. This pronoun throughout is unfrequent in the Attic language ; 
for in the reflexive sense (self) the compound éavroy (ὃ 74. 3) is more 
commonly used; and in the direct sense (him, her, it) the oblique cases of 
the pronoun αὐτός (ὃ 74. 2) are employed. In Ionic and epic writers, on 
the contrary, who employ it indiscriminately for him and for himself, it 
occurs more frequently.—For all that concerns the use and misuse of 
the reflexive pronoun, see Synt. § 127. 


3. These pronouns are declined as follows: 


* On this very rare Nominative, and its actual] use by the Attics, see the author’s 
Ausfihrl. Sprachlehre with the note to p. 290 and the additions at the end. (Ed. 2. 
p- 284.) The proofs of its existence and use are drawn from Apollonius de Pro- 

-nom.p. 242. p. 329. and de Synt. p. 167. Draco p. 106. and above all Priscian. 
p. 957, 967. (Krehl. I. 563, 574.) Comp. also Bekker’s notes to Plato. Symp. 
375, 11. 469, 7. | 


§ 72. pronouns. =, ee 


Sing, I thou he (himself) 
Nom. | ἐγώ͵ συ ἵ 
Gen. | ἐμοῦ and μοῦ | σοῦ οὗ 
_Dat. | ἐμοὶ and μοί | σοί οἵ 
Acc. ἐμέ and me σέ é 
Dual. τὸ two _ you two they two 
N. Α. | νῶϊ, νὼ ‘| σφώϊ, σφώ, σφωΐξ 
α. Ὁ. | νῶϊν, νῷν | σφῶϊν, σφῶν Ι σφωΐν 
Plur. we ye or you they 
Nom. | ἡμεῖς | ὑμεῖς | σφεῖς Ν. σφέα 
Gen. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι(ν) 
Acc. ἡμᾶς, υον ὑμᾶς σφᾶς Ν. σφέα 


Note 2. The oblique cases of the second and third pérsons are enclit- ! 
ic ; but in such a way that they may also become orthotone, as pointed 
out in ὁ 14,7. Of the two forms in the same case from ἐγώ, the monosyl- 
lable is always enclitic; and only the dissyllable can become orthotone as 
above.—Of the forms which begin with og, only the oblique cases of the 


third person are enclitic, including the forms of the dialects given in note, © 


‘6; and even here, σφῶν and σφᾶς in this circumflexed form are excepted ; 
but when resolved into σφέων, σφέας (note 6. 8), or when sometimes the 
latter is shortened by the poets to σφάς, these also are enclitic. 


Nore 85. When one of these pronouns is governed by a preposition, it 
regularly retains its accent, or is orthotone, as περὲ σοῦ, ἐν ool, παρὰ σφί- 
ow; and so from ἐγώ---κατ᾽ ἐμέ, ἐξ éuov.—Some Grammarians except πρός 
we; and it is thus actually found in Attic writers in most instances. See 
Ausfihrl. Sprachl. and Jacob’s Pref. ad Anthol. p. xxxii. 


Nore 4. For the sake of emphasis, the particle γὲ is often appended to 
these pronouns (δ 149.2). In such instances, ἐγώ, ἐμοί, and ἐμέ draw 
back the accent, as ἔγωγε (equidem), ἔμοιγε, ἔμεγε, σύγε, etc. 

Nore 5. The cases ἡμεῖς, ὑμεῖς, etc. according to the ancient Grafama- 
rians, are also capable of inclination; inasmuch as in all instances where 
the forms above specified are enclitic, these, though they do not throw 
their tone upon the preceding word, draw it back; as ἥμων, ἥμιν, ete. 
This however is not commonly observed in our editions. 


Nore 6. « Diauects. 1) For ἐγώ, an old Doric and epic form i is evar. 
2) The Dorics have tv for σύ, and in the enclitic Accus. also tv. The 
Accus. τό is rare and only orthotone, Theocr. I. 5. In place of it the 
fMolics and even Dorics have elsewhere retained o¢.—An old epic form of 
the Nom. is τύνη. 
3) In the Dative, the Ionies and Dorics have τοί for σοί,. but only as 
an enclitic. 
4) The Genitive in ov of these pronouns came from so; hence the 
epic forms Pi 
ἐμέο, σέο, ἕο 
οὐ ἐμεῖο, σεῖο, tio. The-lonics and Dorics have thence ἐμεῦ, μεῦ, σεῦ, εὖ 
($28. n. 5); the Dories for σεῦ have also τεῦ and τεῦς. Wholly anomalous 
is the Gen. T8000 for σέο, σεῖο. Il. ὃ, 37. | 


16 


118 : § 72. pRoNouNs. 


5) The poets employ a peculiar Genitive, formed by appending the 

syllable Dev (comp. ὃ 116): ° 

ἐμέϑεν, σέϑεν, ϑεν. ᾿ 
Of these, ἔϑεν in the direct sense (note 1) is capable of inclination, 6. g. Il. 
a, 114. 

6) Orthotone Doric Datives (§ 14) are ἐμέν, τίν or τεΐν, iy (lenis), for 
ἐμοί, col, ot. But τίν is also sometimes Accus. Theocr. 11. 

7) The old Ionic of the epic writers augments the pronoun of the 
third person by a prosthesis of s, as G. ésio D. ἑοῦ A. &. These forms 
are always orthotone, like ἐμοῦ. 

8) The Tonics resolve the contraction in the Plural, and write ἡμέες, 
ὑμέες, σφέες, G. ἡμέων etc. (epic justo etc.) Acc. ἡμέας ete. 
4s 9) The poets make the endings ἐν and ag short, 6. g. july, ὑμίν, ἡμᾶς, 
ὑμᾶς, σφᾶς. When these shortened forms then_ come in the place of en- 
clitics (comp. note 5), they are accented thus: ἦμι» etc. 

10) The Dorics shorten the ending of the Nom. as ἁμές, ὑμές ; ᾽ and 
in the Accus. they assume the otherwise Dual ending 8, as as, ὑμέ, for 
ἡμᾶς, ὑμᾶς; all with long @ and v. Hence arise, through a change of 
the pronunciation and of the: tone, the following old Afolic forms, which 
have been retained in the epic language 

Nom. ἄμμες, Tues 
Dat. ἄμμϊν, ὕμμὶν, or ἄμμϊ, Vapi 
Acc. ἄμμε, ὕμμε. 
— Whenever ous or ἄμμε occurs for ἐμέ (‘Theocr. XI. 42), this is the same 
figure by which ἡμεῖς often stands for é ἐγώ. Comp. note 7. 2. 
11) In the third person also there is a similar apocope of the Plural: 
| Dat. ope or ogiy 
Acc. σφὲ 
both enclitic.—'The Accus. σφέ is likewise employed by the Attics, but in 
all genders and numbers ; consequently for αὑτόν; ἤν, 0, and αὐτούς, ἄς, ἅ 
Very rarely σφέν also stands for the Singular. Comp. Levilog.1. 17, 14. 
12) Finally, there is still another encliti¢ Accusative of the third 


erson : 
P Ion. wiv, Dor. and Att. viv 


which in like manner stands for all genders and numbers, but te in the 
direct sense (note 1), i.e. for him, her, it, Pl. they. The Attics employ 
their γύν only in poetry. 


4. To the flexion of these pronouns may properly be subjoined that 
of the possessives derived from them. These are regular adjectives of 
three terminations. Their common form is derived from the Gen. 
Sing. as follows : | 

Gen. ἐμοῦ -ο- ἐμός, ἐμή, ἐμόν, mine 

Gen. σοῦ — δός, σή, σόν, thine 

Gén. οὗ --- ὃς, 7, Ov, his, her, 
and from the Nom. Plur. thus : 

ἡμεῖς — ἡμέτερος, Oo; OY, our 

ὑμεῖς --- ὑμέτερος, a, Ov, your 

σφεῖς ---- σφέτερος, a, ov, their. 


§§ 73, 74. Pronouns. 119 
Note 7. Diatects. 1) For σός the Dorics and Ionics have τεύς, ἅ a(n), 
ὄν, and for ὅς they have &0c, ἀ(ή), 6v.—For the supposed form éjog see 
the note to the Anom. év¢ ὃ 58. 
2) For the Plural posteny there is an old and shorter form: 


᾿ἃμός, ή, Ov” Upos, ή, ὄν" THOS, ή, Ov 
which is used by Doric and by epic writers; except that the last pro- 
nounce the first person with the smooth breathing: 


ass, ή, ὄν. 
In this form it is used by the Attic poets, but only with the significa- 
tion of the Sing. (for ἐμός, comp. note 6, 10,) 6. 5. Eurip. Electr. 555. 
Soph. Electr. 558, . 
Norte 8. The poets form also a possessive of the first and second per- 
sons from the Dual : 
vat --ο νωΐτερος our, i. 6. of us two 
σφῶϊ ---- σφωΐτερος your, i.e. of you two. 


$73. The Pronoun δεῖνα. 


To the substantive pronouns belongs also 
} ὃ, ἡ, TO δεῖνα, 
some one, such an one, French un tel. This is declined as follows: 
N. and A. δεῖνα Ε΄. δεῖνος D, δεῖνι, Plur. οἱ dsives, ete. 


Note. Sometimes, though very rarely, δεῖνα is found indeclinable ; 
8. 5. τὸν δεῖνα τὸν τοῦ δεῖνα (υἱόν), Arist. Thesm. 622. 


§ 74. Apsective Pronouns. 


1. The four following adjective pronouns are regularly declined, exe 

cept that they have the Neut. Nom. and Acc. in 0. 
QUTOS, αὐτή, αὐτὸ, self 
ἐκεῖνος, ἐχείνη, ἐκεῖνο, that 
ὅς, ἤ, 6, for which see $75. 

Nove 1. The Ionics often insert 8 in some of the forms of αὐτός, 6. g. 
αὐτέη, αὐτέων, § 28. n. 8. 

Nore 2. ᾿Ἐκεῖνος comes from ἐκεῖ there. The Ionic form is xééyvos, ή, 
o, and the Doric τῆνος, α, 0. ‘The A®olics had the intermediate form xj- 
vo¢.—For ὦλλοι instead of of ἄλλοι, see ὃ 29. n. 6. 

2. The pronoun αὐτὸς has three significations: (1) self; (2) in the 
oblique cases, him, her, it; (3) with the article, the same. The details 
are given in the Syntax, § 127.2. We merely remark here, that in the 
last signification, it is often contracted with the article (§ 29. n. 4), as 
ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτῷ, ταὐτῇ, for τοῦ αὐτοῦ etc. where it is to be observed, 
that the neuter in such instances ends i in ον as well 850: 

ταὐτό and ταὐτόν, for τὸ αὐτό. 
One must take care not to confound the for ms TOHUTH and ταῦτά, 


(especially when the coronis . is omitted .} with ταὐτῃ and ταῦτα from 
οὗτος (ὃ 76). For the Ionic forms witds, τωὐτό, see § 29. n. 6. 


120 § 75. PRONOUNS.—THE ARTICLES. 


3. From αὐτὸς are formed the common 
Reflexive Pronouns * 

by compounding with αὐτοῦ the Accusatives of the substantive pronouns, 
ἐμέ, σέ, ἕξ. They are then declined in the three oblique cases thus : 

G. ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς, D. ἐμαυτῷ, ἢ, Α. ἐμαυτόν, nv, of myself, to 

myself, myself . 

G. σεαυτοῦ or σαυτοῦ, etc: of thyself 

G. ἑαυτοῦ or αὐτοῦ, etc. of himself. ἢ 
This last has also an Acc. Neut. ἑαυτό, αὐτὸ, and is declined in the 
Plural, e.g. ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτούς, etc. The first and second persons sepa- 
rate the words in the Plural, 6. g. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, etc. 


, 


Nore 3. The Singular also was originally used: in the separate form.. 
And since Homer has still cot αὐτῷ and οἵ αὐτῷ, so too the forms ὃ αὐτήν, 
ἐμ᾽ αὐτόν etc. are at present written separately in his poems, Il. «, 271. ξ, 
162 ;—and in Od. & 185. Il. ζ. 490, τὰ σ᾽ αὐτοῦ, σ᾽ αὐτῆς, (or σαὑτοῦ, σαῦ- 
τῆς.) is regarded as an elision of τὰ σά. | 

Nore 4. The Ionics have in this compound ov instead of αὖ (ὃ 27. ἢ. 
11), and omit to elide the « in the first person; e. g. ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτόν, 
ἑωυτόν etc.—For δωυτέην, see note 1. ν 

“4. From ἄλλος is formed the common 

' ‘Reciprocal Pronoun 

strictly so called ;+ which of course is not found in the Singular, viz. 
G. ἀλλήλων D. ἀλλήλοις, acs, A. ἀλλήλους, ας, a, Dual ἀλλήλω, α΄ 
οὖν, atv,t—one another, * 


§ 75. The. Articles. 


1. The Greek Grammarians denominate as articles (ca co Goa joints), 
the two most simple adjuncts of ἃ substantive, which have a mutual ref- 
erence to cach,other in two connected clauses of a complete sentence ; 
and of which in modern languages the one is called the DEFINITE ARTI- 
cE, the; and the other the RELATIVE PRONOUN, who, which, what. 


* See the next marginal note. 


t The reflexive pronouns are so called, because they refer the action back upon 
the subject itself. E.g. in the phrase ‘‘ he supports me,” me is an ordinary pro- 
noun; in “I support myself,’’. myself is reflexive. When however an action is 
expressed as mutual,—e. g. “ they support one another,”’—this is called reciprocal. 
It is however to be observed, that this latter name is often used to include both 
ideas; and therefore in-many grammars, that is called reciprocal, which we 
here name reflexive. 

+ This Dual has reference to a mutual action between two; where however 
the Plural may stand just as well. 

| Such a complete sentence, in which both the (Greek) articles appear, is 
é.g. “This is the man, who will deliver us,” οὗτος ἐστιν ὃ ἀνὴρ ὃς σώσει ἡμᾶς. 
It was because these two words refer so intimately to.each other, and as it were 
lock into one another like joints, and thus connect the two clauses as members 


Π 


§ 75. ARTICLES. ) 121 


2. Of these two articles, the one is called the 
Prepositive Article 
0, ἡ, τὸ, hic, héec, hoc, the. . 
This coincides in flexion with the adjective pronouns, ὃ 74; except that — 

1) The Masc. and Fem. in the Nom. Sing. and Plur. are atona, 
unaccented (§13. 3), and have the Spir. asper; while all the 
other forms have an initial 7; 

2) Not only the neuter, as in the adjective pronouns, but also the 
Masc. in the Nom. Sing. ends in ὁ (0). . 


The other is called the , 
Postpositive Article 


ὅς, 7, ὃ, qui, que, quod, who, which, what. 
This is declined precisely like the adjective pronouns, § 74. 1. 


Prepos. Art. Postpos. Art. 
Sing. hic hec hoc qui gue quod 
_ Nom. 0 - ἡ τὸ ὃς H ὃ 
Gen. | tov. ς τή, τ τοῦ οὗ ἧς οὗ 
Dat. | τῷ τη τῳ ῳ ῇ ᾧῷ 
Acc. τὸν τὴν τὸ Ov ἥν ὃ 
- Dual. 
N. A. | τ τά τῶ w ἄ, -o 
G. D. τοῖν ταῖν τοῖν oiv αἷν οἷν 
᾿ Plur. 
Nom. οἷ αἷ τὰ οἵ al ἃ 
Gen. τῶν — τῶν — τῶν ὧν --- ὧν — ὧν 
Dat. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς οἷς αἷς οἷς 
Acc. τοὺς τάς τὰ ος ἃς ἃ 


or limbs of one sentence, that the Greeks called them τὰ dodo, articuli, joints. 
The first of these, however, 0, 7/, τό; the, stands very commonly with its own 
simple clause alone; and is therefore, strictly speaking, in such instances no 
longer an article or joint. But this arises from the circumstance, that in very. 
many such instances, the second clause or apodosis is not expressed in words, 
but is left to be mentally supplied ; such as “‘ who is spoken of,”’ or “ who is here 
concerned,” or ‘“‘ whom you know,” etc. Hence it became by degrees a usage 
of the language, to annex the prepositive article, 6, 7, τό, by itself, to every 
object which is to be represented as definite, either by means of the language 
itself or from the circumstances. The grammar of modern languages has re- 
tained the name article only for this prepositive article, without any reference to 
the cause of the appellation; and has given to the postpositive article the name 
of relative pronoun, which in itself considered is also correct. And since in the 
modern languages another pronoun, a, an, (one), which however is nothing more 
than a feebler zis, ti, aliquis, marks an object as indefinite, just as the designates 
it as definite, the latter has received the name of the definite, the former that of 
the indefinite article; although they have nothing of the nature of jocnts in 
respect to each other, and no mutual relation like that of the two Greek articles. 
In the Greek grammar, however, we may properly retain the ancient appella- 
tions ; since they are in themselves so well grounded. But it is unnecessary, in 
any language, to regard the articles as a distinct part of speech; which from an 
erroneous theory, is so commonly done; since in their whole nature they are 
adjective pronouns. 


122 § 76. PRONOUNS.—DEMONSTRATIVES. 


Nore 1. The variations in the dialects, are the same as in the termina- 
tions of Dec. I, and II; e.g. toto for tov, ἃ for ἢ, τᾶς for τῆς, ete.—For 
the Gen. of the postpos, ov, there is an unfrequent Homeric form dov. 


Nore 2. In the earlier language the two articles were alike in form; 
(just as the German der, die, das can still stand for both ;) and were dis- 
tinguished only by position and tone, as has ever continued to be the case 
with the forms %, οἵ αἵ The epic writers have still the form ὃ (inac- 
curately 0) for ὃς ; and all the’cases of the prepositive article which begin 
with t, are used by the Ionics and Dorics for the corresponding forms of 
the postpositive ; thus 

, is] , ao 
to for ὁ, τὴν for ἢν, ete. 
The Dorics have tod, ταί, for both οἵ, αὖ, and οἵ, αἵ, 

Nore 3. Strictly speaking, both articles are nothing more than the 
ancient simple demonstrative pronoun, this;-and were used (as will be 
shown in the Syntax) for this pronoun in many connexions even in 
prose; as is the case with the German der, die, das. 'The common de- 
monstratives, which have sprung from this form, see in § 76. 

3. The postpositive article, or simple relative pronoun, is in many 
connexions strengthened, by receiving an accession for the sake of em- 
phasis ; sometimes by the enclitic particle még, as ὅσπερ, ᾧπερ, ἥπερ, 
etc. and sometimes by composition with the pronoun τὶς, as ὅστες, etc. 
See § 77. 3. 

Nore 4. For the enclitic τέ, which is appended in the epic language 
to ὅς, aS ὅς TE or ὅστε for ὃς, ὄντε ΟΥ̓ torts for ov, see § 149.1, under τέ. 


§ 76. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
1. For the common demonstrative pronoun this, the Greeks have a 
double form. ‘The one is made from the prepositive article, Ὁ merely, 
- appending the enclitic δὲ (ἢ 14. η. 8); 6. g. 

ὅδε, ἦδε, τόδε, G. τοῦδε, τῆσδε, etc. Pl. οἵδε, αἵδε, τάδε, τούσδε, ete. 
2. The other, οὗτος, comes from the same article; and hence it fol- 
lows that article in its very anomalous flexion. Where the article has 
the rough breathing or the initial τ, this pronoun has the same; where 
the article has 0 or ὦ, this pronoun has ov in its first syllable ; where 
the former has nO a, the latter has au ; 6. σ᾿. ὁ--ορῦτος, οἱ---οὗτου, 

τῶν---τούτων, ἡ---αὕτη, τά---καῦτα, etc, 


Sing. Plur. 
“‘Masc. Fem. Neut. ~Masc. Fem, Neut. 
N. οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο οὗτοι αὗταν ταῦτα 


α. τούτου ταύτης τούτου τούτων---τούτων --- τούτων 
' ' 
D. TOUT) ταύτῃ τούτῳ τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
a ' 
A. τοῦτον ταυτὴν τοῦτο τουτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


Masc. Fem. Neut. 


͵ ‘ , 
αὶ Dual. N. A. | τούτω ταῦτα τούτω 
‘ 
G.D. | rovrow ταὐυταῖν rovroty 


δ 77. PRONOUNS.—INTERROGATIVES. 123 


Note 1. As the prepositive article was the only demonstrative in 
the ancient language (ὃ 126), but by degrees lost that power ; it is appa- 
rent that both the above forms are only a strengthening of this article ; and 
that οὗτος especially is in a certain measure the superlative of 6. —The 
further strengthening by appending ὁ to both, see in § 80. 


Nore 2. In the dialects there is no special peculiarity, except the 
Tonic ¢ in τουτέου, τοιυτέης, etc. (§ 74, n. 1,) and the very anomalous epic 
form 

Dat. 70100800; τοϊσδεσσι, for τοῖσδε. 


Note 8. The Nom. οὗτος, oven, is often used as a kind of Vocative or 
exclamation, like the Lat. heus ! you there! hear! 


§ 77. Interrogative Pronouns. 


1, The simple inéerrogative pronoun 


tig; Neut. ri; Gen. τίνος ;. 
quis, quae, jad: ? who? what? 


always has the accent on the ὁ, as τένες, D. Pl. réov, etc. and has the 
accent of the Nom. Sing. always acute (Ὁ 18. π. 2). By these two cir- 
cumstances it is distinguished from the simple indefinite pronoun 


es . ὁ . 
τὶς Neut. τὶ, Gen. τόνος, aliquis, a, id ; 
one, some one, a certain one, 


which moreover, as an enclitic, most commonly ἀμμὲ without accent. 
The flexion of both these pronouns regularly follows Dec. III, every- 
where with short ὁ. 

Nore 1. In the unfrequent instances where the monosyllabic form 
τὶς, τὺ, receives an acute accent on account of another following enclitic, it 


is to be distinguished from the interrogative either by the connexion, or 
by the accent of the preceding word, e.g. ἀνήρ τίς ποτε. 


Nore 2. For the interrogative τό used as an adverb, the poets and 
the Attic comic writers have an emphatic paragogic form, τιή ; wherefore 
then? how 80 3 ‘ 

2. For the Gen. and Dat. of both these pronouns we often find the 
following forms: 

τού, τῷ, for all genders; orthotone for τίνος, rive; and enclitic 
for τινός, tive; e.g. τῷ τεχμαίρεν τοῦτο; by what dost thou 
prove this ?—yuvacnos tov of acertain am er τῳ to 
use something. : 
For the Neut. Pl. of the indefinite form, we find 


ἄττα, lon. ἄσσα, for teva, 


but always orthotone; e.g. δεινὰ ἄττα for dewa tuva. Od. τ, 218 not 
ἄσσα. 


124 § 78. PRONOUNS.—CORRELATIVES. 


3. The compound relative ὅστις, who, whoever, which is only a 
strengthening of ὅς (ὃ 75. 8), is doubly declined, i. e. both the ὅς and 
τὶς are inflected at the same time: 

Nom. ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι, (§ 15. 2.) 
Gen. ovrives, ἥστενος, D. ari, HTLV, etc. 
There is also a form compounded with the secondary form of τὶς men- 
tioned above in no. 2, : 
, ὅτου, ὅτῳ, --- for οὕτενος, ᾧτενε, but not for the feminine. 
ἅττα, lon. ἄσσα, ---- for ἅτινα. 

Nore 3. This secondary form τοῦ, τῷ, must never be confounded with 

the article, from which it is fundamentally distinct, as the three genders 


and the dialects shew. The τοῦ of the article is by epic writers resolved 
into toto; the τοῦ for τίνος, τινός, on the contrary, into τέο, whence Ion. 


and Dor. tev. — Ion. Dat. τέῳ. So too in the compound relative, oto, 


ὅττεο, ὅτευ, OTEO). 

Nore 4. The Ionics have likewise the secondary form in the Gen. and 
Dat. Plur. τέων, τέοισι, for τυνῶγ, τισίν. And in the compound relative we 
find among the Attics, though very rarely, ὅτων, ὕτοισι, Xen. Anab. 7. 
6. 24. Oec. 3. 2. v. Schneid. Soph. Oed. T. 414. Aristoph, Kiq. 758. The 
Ionics write dtswy, ὁτέοισιν, and also in the Fem. δτέῃσιν. 


Nore. ὅ. Epic writers had the license of forming the compound . 
relative with the first syllable indeclinable ; as ὅτις, oto (for ὅντινα and 
ἅτινα), ὅτινας. -— They write the Neut. when the τ is doubled, thus: 0,TTL. 
—For ὁστισοῦν, ὁτῳοῦν, etc. see § 80. | 

4. From rig are formed, by composition with ov and μή, the negative 
pronouns οὔτις, mates, ¢, no one, none; which are declined like the 


simple τὶς, § 78. 1. 


§ 78. Correlative Pronouns and Adjectives.* 


1. Correlatives are certain words having such a relation to each other, 
that when one implies a certain question, the others contain the simplest 
answers to that question. ‘Those correlatives which are wholly of a 
general nature, have already been given above; viz. the 


_ Interrogative τίς ; who? 
᾿ Demonstrative 0, ὅδε, οὗτος, this 
Indefinite τὲς, one, some one : ἴ 
Relative ὅς, compound ὅστις, who, whoever 
Negative οὔτις, μήτις, (§ 77. 4,) or οὐδείς, μηδείς, (δ 70. 1,) 
no one, none; ᾿ 
each of course with its Fem. and Neuter. 


* The idea of the pronoun cannot be so accurately and systematically defined, 
as not to include much, which may in ponere be considered as belonging like- 
wise to the adjective. 


§ 79. PRONOUNS.—CORRELATIVES. : 125 


2. When these correlative ideas are limited to two objects or parts, 
they are thus expressed : ) 

Interrogative πότερος, a, ὃν ; which of the two? 
Demonstrative, as,above in no. 1. 

Indefinite 0 ἕτερος, ἡ ἑτέρα, etc. one of the two 
Relative ὁπότερος, which of the two 

Negative οὐδέτερος, μηδέτερος, neither of the two. 

Note 1. ὋὉ ἕτερος corresponds exactly to the Lat. alter ; and like alter, 
when one of the two objects has already been mentioned, 6 ἕτερος becomes 
definite and is to be translated the other ; see below in no. 4.—For the 
crasis ἅτερος, ϑατέρου, etc. see ὃ 29. n. 5. 

3. To the questions τίς and πότερος can also be answered every, each. 
In Greek this has the form of a comparative and superlative : 

ἑκάτερος, ας ον, each of two, 
ἕχαστος, ἡ; OV, each (of many), every. 

4. Other general answers to the question τίς are : 
ἄλλος another, § 74. 1. 

ο΄ πᾶς, πᾶντες, all, § 62, 4 

To these correspond, when the ΠΩΣ is made by- maeegee, 
ὁ ἕτερος the other (see note 1) 
ἀμφότερος, α, OV, ἀμφότεροι, αὖ, αι, both. 
For this last is used, in certain connexions, the Dual 
N. A. ἄμφω, G. Ὁ. ἀμφοῖν 
(the latter with the accent moved forwards,) which stands for all genders. 
Nore 2. By the poets ἄμφω is sometimes used as indeclinable, i. e. alsd 


for the Gen. and Dative, without change.—See more on ἄλλος and ἕτερος 
in § 127.5 


§ 79. Special Correlatiwes. 


1. Besides these general correlatives, there are also some special dis- 
tinctive ones, which refer more particularly to the qualities and relations — 
of an object; as how constituted? where situated? etc. These are 
formed in Greek after a very clear analogy; and have partly the form 
of adjectives, partly that of adverbs. For the latter, see § 116. 

_ 3. Every series or set of such special correlatives, has its root and 
formative-ending in common ; but the several words of each set are dis- 
tinguished among themselves by their initial letters. The interrogative 
begins with 2, e.g. πόσος; quantus? how much? how great? etc. — 
The indefinite has usually the same form, but with a change of the tone, 
e. g. 10006, aliquantus, of a certain size or number.—T he demonstrative 
has τ instead of 1, e.g. τόσος, tantus, so great, so much.—T he relative, 
instead of this initial consonant, begins the word with the rough breath- 

‘ 17 pcan 


126 § 79. PRONOUNS.—CORRELATIVES. 


ing; e.g. ὅσος, quantus, so great as, so much as.—A particular nega- 
tive for these special correlatives, does not occur in the common lan- 
guage. 

4. Besides this simple relative, there exists also a compound one, 
which is preferred in certain connexions. It corresponds to dore¢, ὅτου, 
among the general correlatives; and is formed by prefixing the syllableo 
to the interrogative : 

πόσος; Relat. ὅσος and ὁπόσος, poet. ὁππόσος. 

5. The simple demonstrative, τόσος, occurs in the full sense of a 
demonstrative, for the most part only in the poets; in prose only occa- 
sionally, i in instances where the idea of quantity, (or of quality, i in τοῖος,) 
is not made emphatic or predominant. E,g. ὅσῳ βελτίων ἐστὶ, τόσῳ 
μᾶλλον φυλάττεται, Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 26. So τόσος καὶ τόσος, De- 
mosth. in Phorm. p. 4. More commonly a strengthened form (ἢ 75. 3) 
is employed. And as we have seen above, that the article ὁ (the an- 
cient and afterwards feebler demonstrative) is strengthened either by 
annexing to it the enclitic δὲ (ὅδε), or by being changed into οὗτος; 
precisely so here, in one form the demonstrative is strengthened by de, 
and in another -o¢ is changed into -ovz06, e.g. 

τῦσος — τοσῦσδε OF τοσοῦτος. 
The first form is declined in the middle syllable, 

ο΄ τοσόσδε, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε, G. τοσοῦδε, etc. : 
(For the accent, see ὃ 14. π. 8.) The other form coincides in respect 
to the diphthongs ov and av wets with οὗτος, and has in the Neut. 
both ον and 0; thus ' 

τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτον and τοσοῦτο 
G. τὸσούτου, τοσαύτης, etc. 
Plur. τοσοῦτοι, τοσαῦται, τοσαῦτα, etc. 
6. The following are the three complete sets or series of correlatives : 


Interrog. ᾿ς Indefin. Demonstr. _ Kelat. 
πόσος; 0006 τόσος ὅσος 
quantus ? how great? | τοσόσδε, ὁπόσος 
how many ? τοσοῦτος 
ποῖος; ποιὸς τοῖος οἷος 
qualis? how? | : τοιόσδε ὁποῖος 
how constituted ? | TOLOUTOS 
πηλίκος; πηλίχος τηλίκος ἡλίκος 
how old? how large? τηλικοσδε ὁπηλίκος 
τηλικοῦτος 


For the-Ionic forms κόσος, κοῖος, ὁκόσος, etc. see § 16. n, 1. 6. 


Nore 1. There are some other incomplete sets of correlatives, which, 
(like πότερος, δπότερος, § 78. 2,) besides the interrogative, have only the com- 


§ 80. PRONOUNS.—PARAGOGIC PARTICLES. 127 


pound relative; so especially ποδαπός ; ὅποδαπός ; where born? and the 
derivatives from 7000¢, as πόστος, ποσταῖος, ποσαπλάσιος, ---- ὅπόστος, etc. 
— To the correlatives belongs also the demonstrative τύγγος, τυνγοῦτος, 
tantillus, so small. 


Note 2, In the same manner as the root of these sets of words re- 
ceives its correlative power through the letters 2, τ, etc. so likewise some of 
the correlatives themselves acquire still other significations and relations 
by composition, viz. with the general correlatives ἕτερος, ἄλλος, πᾶς, § 78, 
E. g. to the question ποῖος, answers also ἑτεροῖος, ἀλλοῖος, of another kind, 
παντοῖος of every kind. So too from ποδαπός --- ἀλλοδαπός, mavcodanb6, 
ἡμεδαπός our countryman, etc. 


.Nore 3, It is incorrect to regard τοσοῦτος ete. as compounds from 
οὗτος. That the ending -οὗτος both here and in οὕτος itself, is nothing 
but a sort of superlative strengthening of the ending ος, is apparent, and 
becomes still more evident in the particles ἐγταῦϑα, ἐντεῦϑεν. See ὃ 116.7, 
and marg. note. , 


ᾧ 80. Paragogic Particles. 


1. The compound and strengthened relatives, ὅστις, ὅτου, ὅσπερ, 
ὁπόσος, etc. annex to all their forms the particle οὖν, which retains 
the tone upon itself; and which in this connexion corresponds exactly 
to the Latin cunque, and marks the sense as full and complete; 6. g. ὃσ- 
τὸς who, ὁστισοῦν quicunque, whoever, whosoever it may be, ἡτισοῦν, 
ὁτιοῦν, ὁτῳοῦν, Acc. ὁντιναοῦν or OvrtLVOLY, οἰο.---Οοσπεροῦν, ὁποσοσ- 
our, ὁπηλικουοῦν, etc. - 

Norte 1. For a still greater strengthening of this sense, serves also the 
particle δήποτε, 6. g. ὁστισδήποτέ ἐστιν, whoever then it can be ; δσονδήποτε, 
etc. Such forms however are often written separate. 

2. In like manner demonstrative words assume among the Attics, 
but only in the tone of social intercourse, the 

demonstrative ὁ 
‘upon all their forms, in order to strengthen their demonstrative power. 
This suffix likewise always draws’the tone upon itself, is always long, 
and swallows up all short final vowels, e. g. 
οὗτος — οὑτοσί this here, Lat. hicce, French celui-ct 
αὑτηΐ from αὕτη, τουτὶ from τοῦτο, éxeevool that one there, éxet- 
vovi,ete.—tooovtori, τοσονδὶ, i.e. so much, so great as you there see, etc. 


For the shortening of the long vowels and, diphthongs before this 1, 
see § 7. n. 19. 


Nore 2. When the demonstratives already have the enclitic particle γέ, 
this ν stands after it, e.g, τοῦτό γε, τουτογί. 

Nore 3. When this ὁ is preceded by o, it sometimes takes after it the 
moveable γ; 6. 2. οὕτοσίν, τουτουσίν. So too among the adverbs, οὕτωσίν 
from οὕτως. , 


128 § 81. verss. 


VERBS. 


§ 81. Moods and Tenses. 


1. We may here assume the parts of the Greek verb, the moods, 
tenses, etc. as being known from other languages. In this respect the 
Greek language is richer than the Latin or English; inasmuch as it 
definitely distinguishes the Middle form as a particular genus, separates 
the Optative from the Subjunctive as a distinct mood, makes the Aorist 
‘a distinct tense, the Dual a distinct number, and distinguishes also the 
various moods and participles‘in all the different tenses. But we must 
here remark on the very threshold, that it is by no means the fact, that 
all which can be formed, is actually formed and usual in every verb; al- 
though in grammar it is customary to exhibit some one verb as complete 
in all its parts, in order to serve as a model for the rest. 

2. Another preliminary remark is, that in Greek, far more frequently 
than in other languages, a certain mode of formation, which according 
to the prevailing analogy is connected with a particular signification, may 
also have another and often the contrary signification ; e. g. the Passive 
form has often an Active sense. We must therefore first of all become 
- acquainted with the different forms in and by themselves; in doing which, 
however, the sense which attaches to each form according to the general 
analogy, and from which it is named, must serve as the foundation. 

3. The signification attached to the different forms, however, can be 
fundamentally and fully developed only in the Syntax. Butso muchas 
is necessary for understanding the doctrine of forms, we may assume as 
sufficiently known from other languages, e. g. the idea of Passive, Sub- 
junctive, Imperative, Present, etc. For the Optative, the necessary pre- 
liminary information is given in § 88.2; and for the Middle, in ὃ 89. 
The Greek tenses alone require here a particular classification, in order 
to facilitate an acquaintance with their forms. 

4. The simplest division of the tenses is into past, present, and future. © 
The past, however, has in ordinary language a greater variety of modi- 

fications, than both the others. In the tenses of the past, which are all 
included under the general name of Preterites, there is this essential 
distinction, viz. in one of them I remain with my thoughts in the present 
time, and only speak of a thing as done and past; this is the Perfect. 
. In the others, my thoughts are transported back into the past, and I 
relate what then took place.* This narrative species of tense has again 
subdivisions ; in Latin and English the Imperfect and Pluperfect ; in 


* In animated narration, this transposition of the thoughts into the past occa 
sions not unfrequently the v use of the Present tense. 


§ 82. vERBS.—AveMENT. 129 


Greek, besides these, the Aorist ; of which the complete signification 
can be developed only in the Syntax. (§ 137.) 

5. The Greek language distinguishes these two kinds of past tenses in 
the form also, more clearly than most other languages. The Perfect, 
as we shall see, remains in one principal respect entirely in the analogy 
of the Present and Future; while the narrative class follows an analogy 
of its own. On this difference we found, especially for the grammar 
of the Greek language, a second division of all the tenses, and include 
under the name of 

'. Primary Tenses 
the Present, Perfect, and Future; and under the name οὔ" 
Secondary or Historical Tenses 


the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

6. The difference of form in the Greek tenses, is of two kinds: 
(1) All the tenses are distinguished from one another by their endings ; 
(2) All the Preterites are further distinguished by an addition at the . 
beginning, called the Augment.—Besides these general distinctions, the 
historical tenses are again distinguished from the other tenses, and con- 
sequently from the Perfect, by a particular augment of their own, and 
by a particular manner of inflecting the endings through the different - 
numbers and persons.* — We treat first of the augment; and then of 
the endings and their inflection. (ὃ 87.) 


§ 82. AuamEnT. - 


—1.-The Augment is a change at the beginning of ἃ verb, which in 
most instances consists in a real addition, or, when this is not the case, 
has its origin in such an addition. . 

2. The augment is of two kinds. When the verb begins with a con- 
sonant, the augment forms.a syllable of itself, and is therefore called the 
syllabic augment. When the verb begins with a vowel, this vowel is 


* The division of the Greek tenses given above, is most clearly founded in the 
language itself, and is radically and essentially fixed there by the augment and 
endings. A Present, one Preterite, and a (perhaps periphrastic) Future, are the 
three most indispensable tenses; and it can be assumed, that the more limited 
ancient language remained satisfied with these. They are therefore rightly 
named primary tenses. This Perfect, it is true, must have narrated ; for the first 
object and necessity of language is narration; but nevertheless it was at the same 
‘time a Perfect; just as at the present day the common man often carries on a 
relation by means of our unwieldy Perfect. As the language became more 
developed and cultivated, it separated by degrees from this Preterite the purely 
historical tenses and their modifications, and left the former as a simple Perfect 
in the series of primary tenses. The observation of the analogy by which the 
Greek language distinguishes these two classes so clearly, is very attractive ; 
and the learner will therefore pay particular attention, in the following sections, 
to the syllabic augment, and to the endings exhibited in § 87. 3. 


‘ 


130 - § 82. verBs.—avemenr. 


commonly changed in such a way, that a short vowel becomes long ; 
and this is therefore called the temporal augment, αὔξησις yoovexn; 
since the word χρόνος signifies also the quantity of syllables. 

3. In each single verb again there are two species of augment, viz. 
that of the Perfect, and that of the historic tenses. We first exhibit 
both of these as they appear in the. 

Syllabic Augment, 
because this, as we shall’see, is the foundation of the other.* 

4. In verbs beginning with a consonant, the augment of the Perfect is 

formed by prefixing this first consonant with é to the root of the verb, e.g. _ 


τύπτω, Perf. τέ τυφα 


Where of course, if the first letter be an aspirate, the corresponding 
smooth mute is prefixed instead of it (§ 18), 6. g. 


φιλέω πεφίληκα, ϑύω τέϑυκα. 


This augment is also called Reduplication, because it repeats the first 
letter of the verb.—The Future 3, which includes in itself the sense of 
the Perfect, retains also this augment (§ 99). 

5. The historical tenses, on the other hand, prefix simply an ¢; e. g. 


τύπτω, Imperf. é-cumroy, Aor. é-ruwa 


and the Pluperfect, which unites the historic quality with the sense of 
the Perfect, takes this ¢ before the Perera of the Perfect, e. 8: 


τύπτω, Perf. τέτυφα — Pluperf. ἐ-τετύφειν. 


6. The augments all occur not only in the Active, but likewise in the 
Passive and Middle. In regard to the moods and participles, since the 
Imperfect and Pluperfect exist only in the Indicative, the question con- 
cerns, among the historic tenses, only the Aorist; and we have the fol- 
lowing general rule: 


The augment of the Perfect is fetaitiea through all the moods 
and participles; the augment of the Aorist occurs‘only in the 
Indicative. 


Thus from τύπτω 
PERF. τέτυφα Inf. τετυφέναν Part. τετυφὼς 
AOR, ἔτυψα — τύψαι  — τύψας. 
The Fut. 3 conforms here also to the Perfect ; see 4 above. 


Nore. . This rule may be expressed more exactly thus: All that is 
REDUPLICATION, or which stands in the place of reduplication, is retained 
through all the moods and participles ; all that is stmPLE AUGMENT occurs 


* We unite here the rules for the reduplication of the Perfect with those for 
the simple augment, and even commence with the former; because from this 
union it appears more clearly, in what respects ‘these augments agree, and in 
what they essentially differ. 


# ᾧ 89. VERBS.— AUGMENT. 191 


΄ - 


only in the Indicative. Hence, according to the former part of this 
rule, we have the irregular reduplication of the Aorist λέλαϑον, Part. λελα- 
Soar, etc. §83.n.7; while in accordance with the latter part, the irreg. 
Aor. ἤγαγον casts off in the Infin. only the temporal augment, as ἀγαγεῖν, 
etc. § 85. n. 2.—What can here be adduced by way of exception, whether 
with or without ground, see in the Anom. ἄγνυμι and εἰπεῖν, 114, 


88. Syllabic Augment, continued. 
‘ δ᾽ 


1. The preceding paragraph (§ 82. 6) exhibits the syllabic augment 
in its proper and regular shape; the present section treats of its devia- 
tions and peculiarities. ὯΝ" 

2. When a verb begins with 9, this letter is doubled after the ¢, 6. g. 

7 ὅαπτω, Imperf. ἔθδαπτον. 
See 921. 2, and the exceptions inn. 3. This form of the augment is 
then employed in the Perfect and Pluperfect, instead of the reduplica- 
tion, 6. g. | 
| Perf. ἔθῥαφα, Pluperf. ἐῤῥάφειν. 

3. When a verb begins with a double consonant, (ψ, ἕ, ¢,) the « 
alone is prefixed instead of the reduplication; and then remains un- 
changed in the Pluperfect also; 6. g. ψάλλω Pf, ἔψαλκα Plupf. ἐψαλκειν᾽ 
ζητέω, ew, Pf. Pass. ἐζήτημαι, é€eouoe—The same takes place in 
most instances, where a verb begins with two consonants; e.g. Perf. 
ἔφϑορα from φϑείρω, Perf. Pass. ἔσπαρμαν from σπείρω, ἔχτισμαι 
from κτίζω, ἔπτυγμαν from πεύσσω. 


Norte 1. The following are exceptions to this last remark, and accord 
with the general rule: . haag ; 

a) 'Two consonants, of which the first is a mute and the other a 
liquid, i.e. a mute before a liquid; e.g. γράφω γέ-γραφα; so χό-κλι- 
μαι, πέ-πνευκα, τέ-ϑλακα, etc. Yet yy assumes only g, and yd, Gare . 

variable; 6. g. γγωρίζω---ἐγνώρισμαι" κατ-εγλωττισμένος, δι-ἐγλυπται 
and δια-γέγλυπται" βλάπτω βέβλαμμαι, βλαστάνω ἐβλάστηκα.Σ 

6) The Perfects μέμγημαν ἃπά κέκτημαιν from μγάω and χτάο- 
pot. But the Ionics (and the Attics often, e.g. Plato. Meno. 39) 
write ἔχτημαι. All other verbs beginning with uy and xt take through- 
out only ¢; 6. g. ἐμνγημόνευχα, ἐχτεάτισμαι, Extove. 

c) The Perfects πέπταμαι, πέπτωκα, πεπτῆ ὡς (see the 
Anom. πετάγγυμι, πέτομαι, πίπτω, πτήσσω) :; all which however have 
arisen rather by syncope out of old verbs from the root ZET2. All 
Perfects immediately and regularly derived from mt, have simply 
δ; thus the usual Perf. from πτήσσω is txtyya; and so ἐπτόημαι, 
ἔπτισμαι. 


* It is to be observed, that γν, yA, 62, belong to those instances of a mute be- . 
fore a liquid, which form also in prosody an exception to the general rule (ὃ 7. - 
9.10). The other exceptions there adduced, do not here occur ; for dédunua is 
an instance of syncope; see the Anom. δέμω, $114: 


132 7 § 84. vERRS.—AUGMENT. 


Note 2: ‘The same kind of augment which is now peculiar to verbs 
beginning with eg, may have occurred in the ancient language in verbs 
beginning with other semivowels ; hence the two Perfects ἕμμορα and ἔσ- 
cuuor; see the Anom. μεέρομαν and csvw.—The epic poets, for the sake 
of the metre, double all the liquids; but only in the Imperf. and Aorist ; 
as ἔλλαβεν, guuot:e.—For ἔδδεισε, see the Anom. δεῖσαι. 

Note 3. Some few words beginning with a liquid, take even in the 
common language, instead of the reduplication, the syllable s or si; 6. g. 
εἴληφα. See the Anom. λαμβάνω, λαγχάνω, λέγω, μείρομαι, and PER under 
εἰπεῖν. 

Note 4. Of the ancient reduplication before 9, the only instance re- 
tained is the Homeric ῥερυπωμένα. | : 

Nore 5. In the three verbs βούλομαι will, δύναμαν can, μέλλω about to 
do, the Attics very commonly increase the syllabic augment by super- 
adding the temporal augment; 6. g. ἡδυνάμην instead of ἐδυνάμην. See the 
same in ἀπολαύω, § 86. n. 2.—For the syllabic augment before a vowel, see 
§ 84. n. 5 sq. 

Nore 6. The augment of the historic tenses is very often omitted in 
poetry by writers not Attic ; 6. g. βάλε for ἔβαλε, 67 for ἔβη, γένοντο for ἐγένον- 
to, etc.* See for the accent, § 103. n. 1. 2.—In the Pluperfect this omission 
is also very common in prose; 6. g. τετύφεισαν, τέτυπτο, for ἐτετύφεισαν, 
ἐτέτυπτο᾽ δεδίει (Plat. Pheedr. p. 251. a) for édsdéev ete.—The omission of 
the reduplication on the other hand is very rare and doubtful. For dsxto 
and the like, see § 110. 8!; and for the epic reduplication δὲν instead of de, 
see the Anom. δεῖσαν and δείκνυμι, ὃ 114. 

Nore 7. In the epic poets the Aor. 2 (Act. and Mid.) often takes the 
reduplication, which is then retained through all the moods (ὃ 82. 6, and 
note); e.g. πέπληγον, λελαϑών, πεπυϑεῖν, λελαβέσϑαι, etc. In some few 
verbs they prefix, in the Indicative, still further the, simple augment, as 
φράζω ἐπέφραδον ; see the Anom. geatw, and comp. κέλομοαν and PEN R2.— 
The Present and Future Act. have such a reduplication in a few forms 
derived from reduplicated tenses, but mostly poetical; see § 111. 


§84. Temporal Augment. 

1. When a verb begins with a vowel, with either the rough or smooth 
breathing, the augment unites itself with this vowel, and thus forms with it 
one long vowel ; and this kind of augment, which is called temporal (§ 82. 
1), is then the same in all the Preterites. In this way, initial ἃ or ¢ is 
generally changed into 7, and ὁ into ὦ ; e. g. 

ἀνύω Impf. ἤνυον Pf. ἤνυκα  Plupf. ἠνύκειν 


ἀἁρμόζω — ἤρμοζον --- ἥρμοκα -- ἡρμόκειν 
ἐλπίζω. — ἤλπιζον — ἤλπικὰα --- ἠλπίκειν 
ὁμιλέω — ὠμίλεον --- ὡμίληκα --- ὠμιλήκειυν. 


* In Attic writers seldom, and only for the sake of the metre ; see Hermann 
ad Eurip. Hecub. p. xxxii. In prose never in the Imperf. and Aorist, not even 
among the [onics. The only exception is in χρῆν» see the Anom. χράω, χρή 


§84. verBs.—avemeENT. 133 


2. The following verbs, viz. 


ἔχω have ἕρπω ἑστιάω entertain 

ἑαὼ permit ἑρπύζω οὐ. ἕπω 1 

ἕλκω draw (see § 16 ἐϑίζω accustom ἕπομαι follow (see § 14) 
ἑλίσσω wind ἐργάζομαι: work, 


change the ¢ into é, instead of into ἡ ; e.g. Imperf. εἶχον, Perf. εἴργα- 
Ouat, etc. (See note 4.) | 
- Nore 1. See also εἷλον, ἑλεῖν, in the Anom. αἱρέω,--εἴωϑα in the Anom. 
_£9e,—and the verbs derived from the root ἝΩ, § 108.* 

3. The vowels ὁ and v can be augmented only when they are short, 
and then only by being lengthened; e. g. ‘ixerevw (Eurip. Med.971) Aor. 
‘tnérevon. (ib. 338). And even where the syllable is already long by po- 
sition, the augment must be made audible in the pronunciation; e. g. 
ἐσχύω “toyvov, ὑμνέω Ὅμνουν. 

4. Of vowels which are already long in themselves, ἃ usually be- 
comes 7 (Text 1); the others, 7, ὦ, 7, v, are wholly incapable of being 
augmented ; e. g. ἡττάομαι, 

Impf. ἡττώμην Pf. ἥττημαν Plupf. ἡττήμην, 
except sometimes by a change of accent, for which see note 4. 

5. Verbs beginning with a diphthong admit the augment, when the 
first vowel of the diphthong can be changed in the manner above spe- 
cified ; and then if the second vowel be ὁ, it is subscribed; e. g. 


a, ? 4 4 3 U 
aview — ηυλουν EVYOMAL — ηυχομὴν 
αἰτέω — ἤτουν ἄδω --- ἦδον 

οἰκέω — ᾧκουν. 


But many verbs neglect this augment note 2); and those in ov never 
take it, e.g. ουταάζω---οὕταζον. 


Norte 2, It is true, in general, that very many verbs remain unchang- 
ed, in which the augment might produce cacophony or ambiguity. So 
especially some beginning with a, aU, OL, with another vowel immediately 
following, as ato, ἄημι, ἀηδίξομαι" αὐαίνω, οἰακίζω, οἱόω, and some others ; 
except that short «, as in aw, is prolonged; 6. g. Imperf. ἀΐον (long 
a), αὐάένετο, οἰάκιζεν, etc. But ἀείδω follows the general rule, ἤειδον. 
Some others beginning with οὐ have no augment, as οἰγίζω, οἰκουρέω, 
οἰστρέω. So too all beginning with εἰ, 6. g. εἴκω, εἶχον, εἶξα ; with the sin- 
gle exception of εἰκάζω, which is sometimes, though rarely, augmented by 
the Attics; 6. g. εἴκασα, εἴκασμαι, Att. Hones, qxoowor.—In verbs beginning 
with sv, the augment yu is employed by the Attics, though the usage is - 
variable, as ηὐχόμην and evyouny ; svgéIny and very rarely nigéIyv. For 
compounds with ev see ὃ 86. 2. 


‘ 


* The following verbs are sometimes incorrectly | referred hither, viz. ἔπω and 
ἐρέω, see the Anom. εἰπεῖν ,---ἕζω, on account of sica, see ὁ 108. 11,--ἐρύω and 
ἐρωτάω « on account of sigvon, εἰρώτων; which forms however belong ‘to the Jonic 
εἰρύως εἰρωτάω. 


; ἐδ ὦ ἢν 


ee. 


134 § 84. verBs.—AUGMENT. 


Nore 3. The Ionics, and the poets not Attic, often omit this augment 
in all verbs, as well as the syllabic augment (Ὁ 89. n. 6); 6. g. ἀμείβετο for 
, ἡμεΐβετο, ἕων for εἴων from é ἐάω, etc. and sometimes even in the Perf. and 
Pluperf. Pass. e. g. ἅμμαι, οἴκημαι, from ἅπτω, οἰκέω, in Herodotus.—In 
verbs beginning with « the Dorics merely prolong the quantity into #, and 
never change the vowel into ἡ. 

Nore 4, The temporal augment unquestionably arose from the con- | 
traction of the syllabic augment ε with the vowel of the verb, e. g. ἄγω 
ἔ-αγον ἢγον. Here however the contraction of se into 7, and of εὸ 
into , deviates from the common rule (δ 28. 3.5); while that of sa into ἡ; 
and of ee into εν (ἔχω, &-syor, εἶχον) follows that rule-——From this contrac- 
tion may be explained the accent of some compounds. For since’ else- 
where the tone, whenever it is possible, always rests on the antepenult 
(103. n. 1. 1), such a contraction is probably the cause why, 6. g. in ἀνῆπτον 
from ἀγάπτω, the penult takes the circumflex. And in this manner the 
augment is sometimes visible only i in the accent ; 8.8. προσήχω (from ἥκω) 
Impf. προσῆκον ; and from ἀπείργω the form ἄπειργε is Imperat. but 
ἀπεῖργε is 3 pers. Impf. 


Note 5. The syllabic augment is in many instances still actually pre- 
served before a vowel. Besides several epic forms, this is found in the 
common language in the following verbs, which according to the general 
rule above are not susceptible of the temporal augment: 

ὠϑέω, ὠνέομαι, οὐρέω 
Impertf. ἐώϑουν, ἐωνούμην, ἐούρουν. 
The same takes place in the verb AT2, Anom. ἄγνυμι, break, Aor. take, 
etc. to distinguish it from ἄγω lead. 


Nore 6, In the Perfect likewise the temporal augment has arisen from 
the «. For since the common reduplication (§ 82) consisted 4 in repeating the 
initial consonant with ¢, of course, when the re began with a vowel, this 
could not occur, and only the 8 could be prefixed, which then passed over 
with the initial vowel in like manner into the temporal augment. And 
this ¢ also i is still preserved unchanged in the verbs already quoted (note 
5), as Favor, ἕωσμαι, ἐώνημαι, ἐούρηκα, and besides these in 

ἔοικα; ξολπα, ἕοργα 
from exw, ἔλπεω, ἔργω. The o in these Perfects comes from changing the 
vowel of the root (δ 97. 4. c), and the ἐ is reduplication; thus ἔργω 
ἔ-οργα, like δέρκω δέδορκα. 

Note 7. In verbs which have the rough breathing, the temporal aug- 
ment takes it also ; e.g. ἑάλων, ἑάλωκα from “4402, see Anom. ἁλίσκομαι ; 
also ἅνδαάνγω, ἕ Eyes: 

Nore 8. We have seen above (§ 83. n. 5), that the syllabic augment is 
sometimes increased by the temporal ; ; in the same manner the temporal 
augment in the verb δὁράω see is commonly increased by the syllabic, 
which retains the same breathing, e. g - Impf. ἑώρων. For the Perf. ἑώρα- 
xo, see the Anom. δράω §114; and also οἴγω, ἀγοίγω.--- Τὴ the epic poets 
this takes place with some other verbs; 6. g. ἐῳνοχόει from οἰνοχοέω, ξήγ- 
dave from évdave. ; 

Note 9. When a verb or verbal form begins with so, the second vowel 
takes the augment. This occurs in the verb ἑορτάζω, Impf. ἑώρταζον, and 
with the three Perfects mentioned in note 6 when in the Pluperf. 

ἐῴκειν, ἐώλπειν, ἐώργειν. 


ᾧ 85. vERBS.—AUGMENT. 135 


ὃ 85. Aitic Reduplication. 


1. A reduplication like that in verbs with the syllabic augment, 
cannot of course take place in verbs with the temporal augment. But 
several of these latter, all of them radical words, have in the Perfect the 
Attic Reduplication, as it is called; which however is far from being 
peculiar to the Attics, since most of the verbs which have it, never take 
the simple and regular form. The Attic reduplication consists in this, 
that in the Perfect, the two first letters of the root are repeated before 
the temporal augment, the initial vowel remaining unchanged; e. g. 

ἀγείρω (ἤγερκα) ἀγ-ήγερκα, ἀγήγερμαι 
ἐμέω (ἤμεκα) ἐμτ-ήμεκα 

ὀρύττω (ὠρυχα) ὀρ-ὠρυχα, ὀρώρυγμαι 
ὄζω (δα) ὄδ-ωδα. ὦ 

2. This form prefers a short vowel in the third syllable (from the be- 
ginning), end therefore often exchanges the long vowels for short ones; 
e.g. in ἀλείφω Perf. ἀλήλεφα, ἀλήλιμμαν" ἀκούω Pf. ἀκήκοα. 

Nore 1. Even from ἐρεέδω, which commonly makes ἐρήρεισμαι, Homer 
could form égngédatos by such a change; see δ 108. η. 1V. 4.—It follows of 
course, that in such instances it is the short vowel of the root which reip- 
pears; see § 92. 4, 9.—The temporal augment of the second syllable some- 
times falls away in the epic poets on account of the metre, e. g. ἐρέριπτο, 
ἀρᾶρυϊα, from ἐρείπω, AP.—Other peculiarities in this reduplication see 
in the Anom. αἱρέω, ἐγείρω, ἡμύω, ἔχω, οἴχομαι. 

3. The Pluperfect sometimes prefixes to this reduplication a new 
temporal augment; most commonly in axnxoa ἠκηκύειν. In most 
other instances, however, this is omitted ; comp. § 83. n. 6. 

Note 2. In some verbs which fall under this section (comp. § 83. 
n. 7), the Aorist 2 has in the poets a reduplication which corresponds to 
that of the Perfect ; except that here the temporal augment has the first 
place, e. g. 

; APS. Pf. ἄρηρα Aor. ἤραρον. 


So also ἤκαχον, ὥρορεν, and some other forms (see the marginal note). In 
the common language the verb ἄγω has this Aorist, ἤγαγον ; see in § 114. 
This reduplication remains in the other moods, which then cast off only 
the temporal augment; 6. g. ἀράρῃ, ἀκαχεῖν, ἀγαγών. See § 82note.* 


* The Grammarians have been accustomed to explain the epic forms ἤραρεν, 
ὥρορε; as Perfects, formed) by metathesis for ἄρηρα, dowea. But Ἄγ or other 
forms of the Perfect of this kind nowhere occur in the genuine earlier poets ; 
these third persons have every where an Aorist signification; and moreover 
other Aorist forms, as ἄραρον for ἤραρον, Part. ἀραρών, occur in Homer and 
other poets. With this view coincide too the other similar Aorists, ἀγαγεῖν, 
ἀκαχεῖν, ἀπαφεῖν, ἀλαλκεῖν, ἐνεγκεῖν, (all which see in the Anom. verbs ὃ 114,) 
as also πεπυιϑεῖν, deladeiy, etc. which begin with a consonant. § 83. n.7. 


136 ᾧ 86. VERBS.—AUGMENT. 


Note 3. A very peculiar reduplication of the Aorist at the end of 
the word, occurs in the epic poets in 
éovxw Aor. ἠρύκακον, ἐρυκακέειν for -siy, 
and in the same manner in ἐνίπτω, ἡνίπαπε ; see Anom. in ὃ 114. 


$86. Augment of Compound Verbs. 


1. In compound verbs the following is the general rule for the aug- 
ment: When the verb is compounded with a preposition, the latter 
stands before the augment, e. g. 

᾿ς προσφέρω, προσ-έφερον 
ἀποδύω, ἀπ-έδυσα, ἀπο-δέδυκα 
συλλέγω, συν-ἔλεγον . 
ἀπαλλάττω, ἀπ-ήλαττον. 
In verbs compounded with near words, the augment usually stands 


᾿ first, 6. g. 
μελοποιέω, a Sadie μεμελοποίηκα 


πλημμέλέω, πεπλημμέληκα 
ἀφρονέω, ἡφρόνουν᾽ οἰκοδομέω, ᾿κοδόμησα. 

2. Verbs compounded with the adverb εὖ, and the inseparable particle 
dvo-, take the temporal augment in the middle, when these particles . 
are followed by a vowel which can be changed, e.g. 

εὐεργετέω, εὐηργέτουν * δυσαρεστέω, δυσηρέστουν. 
When however these particles are followed by an immutable vowel or 
by a consonant, they take the augment at the beginning, e. g. 
δυσωπέω, ἐδυσώωπουν 
δυστυχέω, ἐδυστύχησα, δεδυστύχηκα 
εὐδοκιμέω, ηὐδοκίμουν. 
But in compounds with εὖ, the augment in such cases is more com- 
monly omitted (§ 84. n. 2); as εὐφραίνετο, εὐωχούμην (εὐωχεῖσϑαι). 

Nove 1. The preposition πρό often makes with the syllabic augment 
a crasis, 6. g. προέπεμψα προύπεμψα, see ὃ 120. n. 7. 

Note 2. Some compound verbs, which were current in common life, 
and of which the simple forms are to be found only in the dialects or in 
the poets, take the augment before the preposition, e.g. ἐκάϑευδον, ἐκάϑι-- 
Cov, ἤφίουν (from ἀφίημι). Still we find in most writers also χαϑηῦδον, 
etc. and from ἀπολαύω we find always ἀπέλαυον, sometimes with the 
double augment, ἀπήλαυνον, (ἢ 83. n. 5); although the simple verb is no- 
where extant. See also ἀμπέχω under the Anom. ἔχω ὃ 114, and ἄμφε- 
ἐγνυμυ § 108, ΠΙ. For ἐμπολὰν see note 5. 


Nore 3. Strictly speaking, all those verbs have the augment at the 
beginning, which are not so much themselves compounded with another 
word, as derived from a compound word, e.g. δειγνοπαϑέω, ἐδεινοπάϑουν 
from ᾿δεινοπαϑής, οἰκοδομέω from οἰκοδόμος. Of this kind, however, as we 
shall see in § 121. 3, are all compound verbs except those campounded 


§ 87. VERBS.—FLEXION BY NUMBER AND PERSON. 137 


With a preposition; even when their second part is just the same as the 
simple verb; 6. g. μελοποιέω, ἀφρογέω, etc. 


Nore 4. In accordance with this principle, s some verbs apparently 
compounded with prepositions take the augment at the beginning ; e. g. 
ἐναντιοῦμαν ἡναντιούμην " ἀντιβολῶ ἡντιβόλουν. But here the former verb 
is derived from ἐναντίος ; and the latter first arises in composition, since 

no simple verb of the kind exists. 

Nore 5. It is however most common even in such verbs, that the 
augment stands after the preposition. So in Homer, ἀντεβόλησεΣ Among 
the Attics we find throughout ἐξεκλησίασαν, ἐνεκωμέίαζον, προεφήτευσα, συν-- 
ἤργουν, ἐπιτετήδευκα, ἐνεχείρουν, and the like; although in all these 
verbs (ἐκχλησιάζω, ἐγκωμιάζω, προφητεύω, συνεργέω, ἐπιτηδεύω, ἐγχειρέω) ΠΟ 
simple forms exist, but they are derived from ἐκκλησία, ἐγκώμιον, προφήτης, 
συνεργός, ἐπέτηδες, ‘and from ἐν and χείρ. From κατήγορος. accuser, comes 
κατηγορεῖν to accuse ; for there i is no such simple verb as ἠγορέω; never- 
theless we do not find é ἐκατηγόρουν, but κατηγόρουν Perf. κατηγόρηκα ; where 
the augment entirely disappears because of the ἡ which makes part of the 
word itself. ᾿Εμπολὰν to trade, from guscohn wares, though it has com- 
monly ἢμπόλησα, -ηκα, has in Lucian ἐμπεπόληκα. --- Indeed, even verbs 
which are compounded with a substantive, and which admit no percep- 
tible augment at the beginning, take in some rare instances the reduplica- 
tion in the middle ; e. g. ἱπποτετρόφηκα from ἱπποτροφέω. 

Nore 6. The following verbs commonly take the augment in both 
places at once, viz. ἀνορϑόω ἡνώρϑουν, ἐνοχλέω ἡνώχλησα, ἀνέχομαι ἠνειχό-- 
μήν, “παροινεῖν πεπαρῴγηκα. Still more anomalous is this in the verbs δια-- 
novelty, διαιτᾷν,---δεδιηκόνηκα, κατεδιήτησα, since these come from διάκογος, 
δίαυτα, where the « begins no new word. In these words common usage 
has been led astray by the mere semblance of composition. 


ConsJUGATION BY TERMINATIONS. 


§ 87. Inflection by Number and Person. 


1. All the terminations, throughout the whole Greek verb, are divided. 
according to the character of their final syllable or letter and the fies 
tion of these by numbers and persons, into two principal classes, which 
are clearly distinguished from each other. In regard to signification, 
the one class has chiefly an Active, the other chiefly a Passive sense. 
Hence, without regarding the deviations in single tenses, one class is 
called the Active, and the other the Passive Form. 

2. In each of these two forms, the primary tenses again observe 
among themselves in certain respects an analogy of their own, by which 
they are distinguished from the historical tenses. 

3. All this will best appear from the following Table, which contains 
the flexible final syllables and letters, that are common to the termina- 
tions of both the primary and the historical tenses, and their inflection 


ΟΝ Sée however the author's Lexilogus, 63, 13. 


. 


138 § 87. VERBS.—FLEXION BY NUMBER AND PERSON. 


through the three persons and three numbers. In its present shape, as 
here given, the Table is applicable only to the Indicative ; the manner 
in which it is to be applied to the Subjunctive and Optative may be 

seen in the next section. 3 


Active Form. Passive Form. 
ne: Primary Tenses, 
1 2 3 1 2 — oS 
Sing. | — ᾷ τς μαι (σαι) ταῦ 
Dual. | wanting τὸν τον μέϑον σϑον σϑον 
Plur. μὲν τὲἪὲ σύν, σύ μεϑα σϑε νταῦ 
' Historical Tenses. 
Sing. | sd ς ἕξ: μην (oo) το 
Dual. ! wanting τὸν τὴν μέεϑον σϑον σϑην 
Plur. | μὲν τὲ voroay | μέεϑα ode ντο 


Thus e.g. λύομαε, λέλυμαι, λύσομαι, λυϑήσομαι, are all first persons 
of primary tenses, in the Passive form of the verb Avw ; and whatever is 
between the flexible ending woe and the radical syllable λυ, or if nothing 
is between them,—+hat is the peculiarity of the respective tense-endings; 
of which we shall treat further in § 90 sq.* 


Nore 1. The flexible endings in the above Table begin each with that 
consonant, before which the rest of the word in the same tense is essen- 
tially the same. A part of the verbal formation annexes this’ con- 
sonant immediately to the root of the tense (see below the Perf. Pass. and 
the Conjug. in μι); by far the greater part however assumes between them 
a vowel called the wnion-vowel, as λύτο-μεν, 10-8-18, Av-81-¢. Since now 
this vowel is mutable, the more particular rules for annexing these flexible 
endings must be deferred till we can give examples in full, (§ 93 sq.) and 
the above table only serves to bring together in one view, all that the dif- 
ferent kinds of tenses have in common. , 


Nore 2. The flexible endings of the 1 and 3 pers. Sing. Act. are not 
given in the above table; because in most instances these have no conso- 
nant in the termination, but only the union-vowel ;+ which moreover is very 
different in the different tenses. Compare e. g. 1. λύ-ω 3. λύ-εν with λύ-ο- 
μεν, or ἕλυσ-α ἕλυσ-- with ἐλύσ-α- μεν. Nevertheless in the greater part of 
the forms of the historical tenses, the first person has a fixed ν, as &v-o-y, 
᾿ ἐλελύχ--ει-»ν, and the third person, when its vowel is δ, takes the moveable y, 
as ἔλυ-δν or «. In the less frequent conjugation in jw, both these persons 
have in the Present an ending wholly peculiar, viz. pu, ov. (δ 106.) 


* It is necessary to bear constantly in mind this distinction between the termz- 
nations of the tenses or tense-endings, and the flexible endings of those terminations; ᾿ 
the former mark the distinctions of tense, the latter those of person and number; the 
former comprehend the latter, the latter only serve to inflect the former.—TR. 

+ Although in such instances: there is strictly nothing to unite, yet this 
is essentially the same with the union-vowel, and therefore falls away in such 
formations as have no union-vowel; compare e.g. évi0y with ἐτίϑη-»ν and 
ἐτίϑε- μεν, where € or 7 belongs to the ground-form. 


§ 88. VERBS.—CONJUGATION BY MOODS. 139 


_N ote 3. The 3 pers. Plur. in the primary tenses of the Active is given 
in the table according to the common language. It is however proper to 
note here, that in the Doric dialect this person ends in ytu; and that the 
vowel before the ov of the common form is always made long, because an Ψν 
has been dropped ; e. g. τύπτουσι Dor. τύπτοντι, τετύφασν Dor. τετύφαντι. 


See § 103. n. V. 4. 


Nore 4, The flexible endings σὰν and oo of the 2 pers. Pass. are to be 
noted, only as being the original forms; since the instances are few in 
which they have remained unchanged. 'The manner in which they flow 
together with what precedes them, and thus become difficult to be recog- 
nized, will be pointed out in § 103. n. III. 


Nore 5. In regard to the peculiarities by which the historical tenses 
are distinguished from the primary ones, we must take care not to over- 
look in the above table the following points especially :* 

a. One characteristic, which runs through the whole of the Active and 
‘Passive forms, is, that the 3 pers. Dual, which in the primary tenses 
is always of the same form as the 2 person (6. g. Pres. τύπτετον, τύπ- 
τετον, Pass. τύπτεσϑον, τύπτεσϑο»,) in the historical tenses always ends 
in mv; e.g. Imperf. 2 ἐτύπτετον, 3 ἐτυπτέτην, Pass. 2 ἐτύπτεσϑον, 
3 étuntéecdyy. — In the early poetry however there are some excep- 
tions; as διώκετον Il. x, 364. ἐτεύχετον 1]. », 346. λαφύσσετον 1]. a, 
583. etc. See Ausfiihrl. Sprachl. and the additions; see also § 103. V. 3. 


b. Inthe Active form the only other characteristic difference is in the 
3 pers. Plur. which in the primary tenses always ends in ov with the 
moveable y (ovcw aow, or —ov), but in the historical tenses_always 
terminates in a fixed ν, as ov, ay, εἰσαν, nou. © 


c. In the Passive form, on the contrary, the two classes of tenses are 
distinguished throughout the Singular also and in all third persons 
Plural. Instead of the ending jou in the primary tenses, the his- 
torical ones have always μὴν; and for ταν (Sing. and Plur.) in the 
former, the latter have always το. There is the same fixed difference 
also in the endings which arise from cau and go; see ἢ. 4. 


Note 6. The jirst person Dual is wanting throughout the whole of the 
Active form, i.e. it is not distinguished from the Plural.—That the Dual, 
as being an ancient Plural, has sometimes in the poets, and particularly in 
verbs, a plural signification, has been already mentioned, ὃ 33. n. 8. See 
especially Od. ϑ, 49. Hymn. Apoll. 487, 501. ᾿ 


§ 88. Conjugation by Moods and Participles. 


1. The Imperfect and Pluperfect exist only in the Indicative. The 
remaining tenses admit the other moods and participles to be formed 
from them. But the Future is always wanting in the Subjunctive and 
Imperative ; and in the Perfect, the Subjunctive, Optative, and Im- 
perative are seldom used. See in § 137. n. 11. 


* All these distinctions are of particular use in the epic poets, where it is often 
. the case, when the augment has been omitted (δ ὃ 83, 84, notes), that they alone 
serve to point out the tense. 


Cee ee ee’ ee 
he! 


140 § 88. VERBS.—CONJUGATION BY MOODS. 


2. The Optative is so called because it expresses in general a desire, 
wish, etc. but it is used nevertheless in very many other senses. The 
details are given in the Syntax; and we only remark here, that its signi- 
fication corresponds almost wholly to that of the Latin Imperfect of the 
Subjunctive, a tense which is wanting in Greek ; or to that of the Eng- 
lish Potential mood. 

3. This remark has a close connexion with the following general 
rule, respecting the inflection of the Subjunctive and Optative: 


The Subjunctive of all tenses follows the inflection of the primary 
tenses; the Optative always follows that of the historical tenses.* 


Hence, in the preceding table (§ 87), the upper division serves likewise 
to exhibit the flexible endings of all Subjunctives; and the lower one, 
those of all Optatives. What is peculiar in each mood, therefore, lies 
in the modifications of the union-vowel ; or, where this does not exist, in 
those of the vowel of the theme. 

4. The Subjunctive always connects with the flexible endings of the 
primary tenses the vowels and 7), instead of the appropriate vowel of 
each tense in the Indicative. We have therefore only to learn the 
Subjunctive of the Present (Act. and Pass.) in the ordinary conjugation 
(see τύπτω) according to the following rule : | 

Where the Indicative has 0, ov, ὦ, the Subjunctive has ὦ. 

Where the Indicative has ¢, ev, ἢ, the Subjunctive has or 7. 


Thus: Ind. τύπτω, oper, ovorr, ομαν, etc. 
Subj. τύπτω, μὲν, wou, woe, ete. 
Ind. τὐπτέτε, evar, ete. 
Subj. τύπτητε, nrae, ete. 
Ind. τύπτεις, εὐ, ἢ, ete. 
Subj. τύπτης, ἡ, 7, ete. 
To this Subjunctive of the Present in the ordinary conjugation, all the 
Subjunctives of the different tenses and conjugations conform without 
exception. 
_ §. The characteristic vowel of the Optative is +, which unites itself in- 
to a diphthong with the preceding vowel, whether union-vowel or the vow- 
el of the root; and this diphthong then remains through all the numbers 
and persons. ‘The flexible ending of the first person Sing. in the Active 
form, is either we or nv; e.g. τύπτοιμι, τυϑείην ; and in the latter case 
this ἢ remains in all the other flexible endings next to the diphthong ; 


* So 6. g. the Optative, even in the primary tenses, always has the 3 pers. Dual 
in 7, and the 3 pers. Sing. and Plur. in the Pass. always in ro. ὃ 87. ἢ. 5. 


‘ 


Φ 
§ 89. VERBS.—CONJUGATION BY ACTIVE, PASSIVE, ETC. 14] 


hence owe, 01g, οὐ, etc. — einy, sing, ein, εἰησαν, etc.—In the Passive 
form, this diphthong always stands immediately before the historic 
flexible endings, as τυπτοί-μην, τυϑεί-το, etc. 
6. The Imperative has a second and third person in all the numbers. 
Its flexible endings in all the tenses are as follows : 
2 ὃ Bets Rricdi we 


Act. Form. S..., τῷ Ὁ. tov, τῶν P. τέ, twouy or ντῶν. 
Pass. Form. S. (60), σϑὼ D.cdov, oO wv P. σϑε, σϑωσαν or oF wy, 


7. The Infinitive has the following endings: 
Act. Form, ξύν or vae or oo 
Pass. Form, o@ae. 


8. All Participles are declined as adjectives of three terminations; the 
feminine therefore always follows Dec. I. (§ 59. 2.) The masculine of 
the Active form has in the Gen. νεὸς, whence in the Nom. comes ¢ or 7, 
and in the Fem. oa, thus: 


ὧν οἵ 0US, OVOE, ον ἂς, σα, ἂν 
G. οντος G. αντος 
ELC, ELGG, EV US, ὕσα, UY 

ο΄ ΕΛΚ ἐντὸς G. υντος. 


From these forms the Participle of the Perfect Active deviates entirely ; 
and has always sich Naat 
ὡς, UIA, OS 
; G. ozos. 
—The Participles of the Passive all terminate in 
μένος, ἡ, OV. 
Nore. Among the modifications which many of the above endings 
receive in their application, we must particularly not overlook their con- 
traction; not only in the proper contract verbs, but more especially in cer- 


tain parts of the ordinary conjugation, where a contraction lies at the foun- 
dation ; see § 95. 7 sq. and 103. n. 1. 9, 


§ 89. Conjugation by Active, Passive, and Middle. 


1. The idea of Passive includes in itself the case, where the ac- 
tion which I suffer proceeds from myself. ‘This can therefore be 
expressed by means of the Passive form; as in Latin, e. g. versor means 
not only I am turned around, but likewise I turn myself around, I move 
about. This sense of the Passive is called reflexive ;* but the Greek 
language goes further, and employs the Passive form also in connexions, 
where the verb has only an indirect reference to the subject; 6. σ. I 
prepare (for) myself a house. All these instances, which are more fully 


* See the marginal note to § 74. 4. 
19 


142 § 89. VERES.— CONJUGATION BY ACTIVE, PASSIVE, ETC. 


exhibited in the Syntax, make out the significatio media, as it is called ; 
and the Passive form, when it has this sense, is called the Middle. 

2. In regard to form, we have exhibited the difference of the . 
Passive from the Active in § 87. In accordance with this representa- 
tion, every Active tense may be changed into its natural Passive ; as is 
seen in the following table, where for the sake of perspicuity only the 
first person of the Indicative is given. 


Active Passive Active Passive 
Form. Form... Form. Form. 
Pres. ω -- ομαὲ | Imperf. ον -- ony 
Perf. O40 — wal Pluperf. εὀν,κεν -- μην 
ow — σομαῦ 2” Gee — σαμηὴν 
Bat. ; ω — ovat aks: ov — ony. 


3. Of this natural Passive the : 
Present and Imperfect, | Perfect and Pluperfect, 


‘include in themselves the Middle signification also, wherever this has 


place ; so that it is only from the connexion, that we can know whether 
they are Passive or Middle. But in the Aorist and Future, the above 
naturally Passive form is regularly only Middle; while for the real Pas- 
sive these two tenses have a special form, in which there is this pecu- 
liarity, viz. that the Aorist, notwithstanding its Passive signification, 
assumes in its flexion of numbers and persons the Active form ; while 
the Future, although formed from this Aorist, returns again to the Pas- 
sive form. 


Aor. Pass. ; nek Fut. Pass. ; ϑησομᾶν 
ue NOOMaL 


In distinction from these forms, the above natural Passive of the Future 
and Aorist is called in grammar, Future and Aorist Middle. ‘Thus, 
Fut, Mid.» 3 jot Aor. Mid. § ge? 

The four first tenses above mentioned, which have the natural Passive 
form for both significations, and which therefore should properly be called 
Passive-Middle, have in grammar the name of Passive, and can be 
called Middle only when they stand in connexion and have the Middle 
signification. They can therefore be designated as Middle only in the 
Syntax. 


Nove. We remark here meanwhile, that not only is the Middle form of 
the Aorist wanting in_all verbs where the Middle signification has no 
place; but that in many verbs the Aor. Pass. in Ony or ἣν has assumed the 
Middle signification (ὃ 136). Hence the Aorist Middle occurs only in a 
limited, although considerable number of verbs. For the present, how- 
ever, we assume every verb as complete ; and refer for the specification of 


§ 89. VERBS.—CONJUGATION BY ACTIVE, PASSER TC. , 143 


what actually does or does not occur, to the more minute details t to is 
hereafter given, § 114. 


4. The system of Greek grammar which has come down to us from 
the native Grammarians, exhibits a complete Middle form; which com- 
mences with repeating, as Middle, the Present and Imperfect of the 
Passive. But instead of subjoining to these the Perfect and Pluperfect 
Passive, in which the same double signification hag place, they added 
an entirely distinct 


Perfect and Pluperfect Middle, 


of which the circumstances are as follows. / 

5. The Perfect Active has two different forms, both of which (in the 
first person) terminate in a. The more usual form, which will be more 
fully treated of below, either aspirates the last consonant of the root, or 
inserts %, as λέγω λέλε χα, φύω πέφυκα; the less frequent form does neither 
_ of these, as φεύγω πέφευγα, δαίω δέδηα. Now in most instances, this 
latter dvi which differs so little from the former, is in common usage 
areal Perfect Active, conforming in sense to the regular Present Active 
from which it is derived; and there are only a very few verbs, in which 
the Present has a transitive, while this takes an intransitive significa- 
tion (ὃ 113). This circumstance, a mere anomaly in asmall number of 
_ verbs, ought never to have had any influence on the general theory of the 
Greek verb. Nevertheless, because in some instances this intransitive 
meaning is equivalent to the reflexive sense of the Middle; (e.g. I have 
Frightened myself, or I am frightened;) and in some verbs also, although 
very few, both forms of the Perfect exist together; the ancient Gram- 
marians placed this less usual Perfect, with its corresponding Pluper- 
fect, in their Middle form; although, in all the cases where a verb can 
‘have the Middle sense, 


only the Perrect and PLuPERFECT Bissix have the true Mrp- 
DLE signification together with that of the Passive ; see 186. 


6. Modern Grammarians have therefore abandoned this erroneous 
method, which serves only to mislead. And since in other tenses, 
the double form of one and the same tense is denoted by numerals 
(δ 90. 1); this less frequent Perf. and Plupf. are now in like manner 
called the 

Second Perfect and Pluperfect, 
which however are found only in the Active; inasmuch as the Perf. 
Pass. can be formed from both these Perfects Active only in one and 
the same manner. 


- of the first person in each tense are given. 


144 | § 90.—VERBS.—CONJUGATION BY TENSES. 


δ 90. Conjugation by Tenses. 


1: The forms of the tenses, in their principal features, have been 
given in the preceding sections. It only remains toobserve here, that 
some of them appear in a twofold form, distinguished in grammar by 
the numbers I and 2; but without having any difference of signifi- 
cation. The twofold form of the Perfect is found only in the. Active 
(§ 89. 6); that of the Future and Aorist in the Active, Passive, and 
Middle. . 

2. Besides these, the Passive has still a Third Future, called also the 
Paulopost-future, which takes the reduplication of the Perfect (ὃ 99), 
and whose signification will be treated of in the Syntax (ἢ 138). 

3. We now distribute all these ordinary Greek tenses under the three 
forms, called, according to the division in the preceding section, the 
Active, Passive, and Middle Forms. 


Nore. In the following table, only the augments and the endings 
The longer stroke or dash 
stands for the proper root of the tense; the smaller one or hyphen at the 
beginning, for the first letter repeated in the augment. The rough breath- 


ing over the termination, signifies that the preceding consonant is to be 


aspirated. 


Active. Passive. Middle. 
| nee —o Oma like 
mpf. é— ov E— ὁμὴν ri 
Perf. 1. πὲ --- α OF χὰ —E— μαι : 
᾿ ς > ¥ Passive 
Pluperf. 1. | é-s — ἐὸν or κξὺν | é-E — pny 
Perf. 2. -E— Ot 
Pluperf. 2. | é-e— εὲν 
Fut. 1. — σὼ — ϑήσομαι | ---σομαν 
Aor. 1. —é— σὰ ἐ--- ϑὴν E— σάμὴν 
Fut. 2. --ὧὦ. --- ἡσομαν - οὔμαι 
Aor. 2. | é— ov é— HY E—ounv 
Fut. ὃ. wanting τὲ — OOMaL wanting 


4. The connecting of these tense-endings with the root of the dif 
ferent verbs, or what is called the Formation of the Tenses, requires 
a particular illustration. We must first, however, give some explana- 
tions respecting what-are called in grammar the Characteristic, and 


Themes. 


§ 91. Characteristic. 


1. That letter which immediately precedes the principal vowel of the 
tense-ending, is called the Characteristic, the distinguishing letter, of 
that tense. Thus 6. g. according to the preceding table, o is the char- 
acteristic of the Fut. 1, and of the Aor. 1, Act. and Middle. 


δ 92. VERBS.—DOUBLE THEMES. 145 


2. More especially, that letter which stands at the end of the root 


of the verb, after casting off all that belongs merely to conjugation and 
inflection, is called the Characteristic of the Verb. It is therefore only 
necessary to cast off the ὦ of the Present, and then the last letter, or 
sometimes the two last, is the characteristic ; e.g. in A¢y-w the 7, in 
govev-w the év. 


Note 1. We do not of course here speak of the ultimate etymological 
root, which in φογεύω is the syllable pov; but of the secondary or forma- 
tive root of the verb in respect to znflection, to which the ev also belongs. 
Comp. the marginal note to §39. In the same manner, e.g. in φιλέω, τι- 
pow, the 8 and α, not 2 and μ, are the characteristics.x—Verbs which 
have a vowel for their characteristic, are called pure verbs, verba pura; 
see § 28. ] 


[Note 2. It is here proper to point out more diseilonty the difference 
between the primitive etymological root gov, and the secondary root 
govev. ‘The former, go», is the essential or radical part, not only of φο- 
γεύω, but also of the verbs φογάω, φογόω ; the nouns gory, φόνος, φονεύς, 
φόνευμα ; the adjectives φόνιος, ~orixos, etc. in short of the whole family 
of words which are thus related to each other. ‘The latter, movev, belongs 
only to the verb φογεύω, and is the basis on which the forms of that par- 
ticular verb are built. In distinction then from the general root gor, 
which is common to verbs, nouns, adjectives, etc. this longer form qgoyvsv 
may be called the verbal root, as belonging only to verbs. Or with more 
propriety still, it may be called the stem of the verb (Germ. Stamm), as 
being already increased from the proper root, and being also the body or 
trunk from which the other branches of the verb, the persons, tenses, 
moods, etc. take their rise. Thus the verbs φογεύω, qovew, φονόω, all 
have the etymological root poy in common; while each has its own sepa- 
rate verbal root or stem, φογευ, pore, povo. In very many verbs, of course, 
the two roots coincide as to form; in many others, not. Compare the 
marginal notes to ὃ 99, and § 92. 6.—Tr. 


§ 92. Double Themes. 


1. In Greek, as in other languages, the Present is assumed as the 
principal or ground-form, 1. 6. as the tense by which the whole verb is 
represented in grammar, and from which Grammarians set out in order 
to form the other tenses, etc. In much the greater number of verbs, this 
mode of proceeding is also the easiest ; because after casting off the ὦ 
in the manner above pointed out (91.2), the verbal root or.stem, and 
the characteristic of the verb, appear at once, and then serve as the 
foundation for building up all the other forms. 

2. In many verbs, however, that which remains in the Present after 
casting off the w, is not to be regarded, at once, as the simple stem 
of the verb. It is often the case, that when we in like manner strip 
other tenses in the same verb of the augments and endings peculiar to 


146 § 92. VERBS.—DOUBLE THEMES, 


them, there remains a stem more or less different from that of the Pres- 
ent. So that it is then a matter of question, which of the forms of this 
stem or verbal root, is to be regarded as the primitive one. 

3. In a portion of these verbs, this difference consists simply in the 
vowel; and chiefly in the commutation of the three short vowels ὃ, ἃ, 0. 
Now there is in the nature of these simple vowel sounds, considered in 
themselves, no reason why one should be regarded as the appropriate 
vowel of the root or stem, more than another ; and therefore, for the 
sake of uniformity (comp. no. 1), the vowel of the Present is assumed 
as the radical vowel, and those of the other forms are then regarded 
as its cognates (ὃ 27.1); e.g. in τρέφω, ἐτράφην, τέτροφα. Comp. 
in English, beget, begat, begotten. ς 

4. In many other verbs, the stem of the Present is longer and 
fuller ; sometimes because of long vowels and diphthongs, where other 
tenses have a short vowel; sometimes because it has more or different 
consonants; 6. g. λεέπω élinoy, τήκω ἐτάχην, βάλλω ἔβαλον, τύπτω 
ἐτύπην, τάσσω ἐτάγην. Indeed there is quite a number of verbs, in 
which the Present exhibits a still greater difference, and has even an- 
other syllable ; 6. g. λαμβάνω, where the stem is λαμβαν; while other 
tenses, as ἔλαβον, λήψομαι, contain only the stem λαβ, ληβ. Hence 
there results the principle, that the Present, in distinction from the other 
tenses, often appears in a strengthened form. Comp. ὃ 7. 3. 

5. Since now it is more natural and easy to assume the simpler form 
of the stem as the primitive one ; and yet the uniformity of grammatical 
procedure would be interrupted, if the Present in such verbs were 
formed from other tenses; Grammarians have introduced the _fol- 
lowing expedient. ‘There are several verbs, which actually have in the 
Present two different forms in use, the one simpler and the other 
strengthened ; 6. g. λείπω and λιμπάνω, ἔδω and ἐσϑίω ; and one of 
these different forms is commonly less usual, or indeed als obso- 
lete. Now in this same manner it is customary to assume, for any form 
which does not stand in the common analogical relation to‘the Present, 
another form of the verb as old or obsolete; and in order to treat of 
this in a grammatical manner, the form of an ordinary Present is 
assigned to it. Thus e.g. for ἔλαβον, the form λάβω or λήβω is as- 
sumed as an obsolete Present; and in order to mark such forms as 
obsolete, they are printed in this work with capitals and without accent ; 
as AHBS&. See ὁ 114. Prelim. note 2. 

6. Every form of the Present, whether usual or not, which is thus 
made the foundation upon which the other parts of a verb are built, 


§ 92. verBs.—DOoUBLE THEMES. 147 


is called a Theme, ϑέμα, i.e. something placed.* A verb in which an- 
other Present must be assumed along with the usual one, is said to have 
a double or sometimes a threefold theme. The characteristic of the 
simplest theme is called the simple characteristic, in distinction from 
other forms in which it is less easy to be recognized; e.g. the y in the 
theme 7472, in comparison with the oo in racow.t 

7. This plurality of forms in one and the same verb, is strictly an 
anomaly; and hence the catalogue of anomalous verbs given below 
(ὃ 114), consists mostly of verbs of this sort. When however the differ- 
ence between the usual theme and the old or assumed one, is either not 
great, or is common to several verbs which have the same characteristic 
in the usual Present, this is more properly regarded as a variety of or- 
.dinary conjugation, in order to avoid extending too far the limits of 
anomalous conjugation. 

8. To such varieties of ordinary conjugation belong chiefly those 
verbs, whose simple characteristic is obscured in the Present by the 
insertion of a letter, or by some change. ‘These are of three kinds: 

1) In verbs with the characteristic mz, the t is an addition for 
strength, and the simple characteristic is one of the labials β, 
m, φ (comp. § 20); e.g. 
πρύπτω τύπτω éanto 
KP TBR TTO2 PAOD, 
2) Most verbs in oo or zz have as the simple characteristic one of 
the palatals, γ, x, y; e. g. ' 
πράσσω φοίσσω βήσσω 
-MPAT& OPIKS BHX®. 
But some have also the linguals; see notes 2—4. 
3) Most verbs in ¢, Dor. od, have 0 as the simple characteristic ; 6. g, 
φραζὼ — DPAAQ, ὄξω — OAR. 
But several have γι; e.g. 
κράζω — KPAIQ. 
All these verbs retain the fuller form and the mixed characteristic, only 
in the Present and Imperfect of the Active and Passive ; while all the other 


* In order to avoid too great an accumulation of such themes, we often give 


in this work, instead of an obsolete theme in 2, merely the root; as TY, 1᾽41, 
etc. 


+ Thus, as compared with ὃ 39 marg. note, and ὃ 91. n. 2, we have in every 
verb three fundamental parts or bases, ‘viz. the etymological root, the verbal root 
. or stem, and the ground-form or theme. E.g. in gov-st-w, the first syllable, 
gov, is the root, not only of this verb, but of a whole family of words; the two’ 
first syllables, povev, constitute the stem, from which all the forms of this par- 
ticular verb arise ; while the appending of the flexible personal ending ὦ, gives 
to the verb its most simple actual form, as it is cited in the lexicons and gram- 
mars, and this is its ground-form or theme.—Tr. 


148 § 92. VERBS.—DOUBLE THEMEs. 


tenses come from the simpler theme. For the sake of brevity and uni- 
formity, the difference of the two themes in these verbs, as we have 
said above, is regarded in grammar as a consequence of ordinary inflec- 
tion ; and this is commonly expressed, as if e.g. in τύψω, τυπείς, and’ 
the like, the τ of the Present τύπτω were dropped ; or as if before the 
cin φράσω (Fut. of φραζω), not the simple characteristic 0, but ¢ had 
fallen away. 

9. To the above verbs may be added those, whose strengthening in 
the Present consists almost wholly in the quantity, viz. where either the 
simple characteristic is doubled in the Present; (which in the common 
language occurs only with 1, e.g. βάλλω ἔβαλον, στέλλω credo ἐστά- 
Anv;) or where the Present has ἃ Mpiehong or long vowel instead of the 
short vowel of other tenses ; e.g.galvo φανῶ πέφαγκα, τήκω τήξω 
ἐτάκην, φεύγω φεύξω ἔφυγον, λείπω λείψω ἔλιπον. For these also it 
is easy to assume a simple theme, as B412, 1Π.22, ΦΎΓΩ (Lat. 
fugio), etc. But differences so slight, do not suffice to remove these 
verbs out of the common grammatical method, which assumes the Pres-. 
ent as the foundation of the other tenses; and therefore these varieties 
are exhibited below among the ordinary modes of inflection, simply 
as a manner of shortening the stem of the verb, as it appears in the 
Present. 


| Nore 1. Those Verbs in % which have ὃ for their simple character- 
istic, are numerous; but less so among primitives, like χάζω, χέζω, ἕζομαι, 
σχίζω, than in the multitude of derivatives in ζω and «fw which follow the 
same analogy.—To the characteristic v belong all those which mark a 
tone or cry, as χράζω, στεγάζω, τρίζω, οἰμώξω, etc. with some others, of 
which the following occur in prose, 


στάζω, στίζω, στηρίζω, σφύζω, μαστίζω, 


and some which fluctuate between the two modes of formation ; see the 
Anom. ἁρπάζω, παίζω, βαστάζω, vvotc fw (§ 114).*—In a few verbs the 
simple characteristic is even yy, see the Anom. πλάζω, κλάζω, σαλπέίζω,.--- 
Fut. πλάγξω, etc. 

Nore 2. On the other hand, some verbs with oo or tt have as their 
simple characteristic, not the palatals, but the linguals, and follow there- 
fore the analogy of those with ¢ Such are the following : : 

πλάσσω, πάσσω, πτίσσω, βλέττω, βράσσω, iucoow, ἐρέσσω, κορύσσῶω, 
λίσσομαι, 
Fut. πλάσω, ete. Two verbs fluctuate between these two formations ; 
see the Anom. ἀφύσσω, νάσσω. 


* It is evident that in the most of these verbs, an actual original characteristic . 
y is not to be thought of; but that the endeavour to avoid a repetition of the a, 
(6. g. στισϑείς, βαστασϑεῖς,) caused several verbs in ctw, he; to pass over into 
the other formation. See note 6. 


§ 92. vERBs.—DOUBLE THEMES. 149 


Norte 8. Some verbs in common use have in the Present both ¢ and 
tt, but follow in the other tenses only one of these two modes of forma- 
tion; so especially σφάττω or σφάζω slaughter, F. σφάξω, ete.—and ἄρ-- 
μόζω or ἁρμόττω adapt, F. ἁρμόσω, ete. ) 

Nore 4. The Dorie dialect, in verbs which commonly have a lingual 
for their characteristic, assumes in some tenses a palatal. This is more 
fully exhibited in ὃ 95. ἢ. 2. | 


Note 5. We have said above in general (Text 8), that in the charac- 
teristic 21, we are always to look for one of the three lingual mutes as the 
simple characteristic ; and so too in oo or 71, either for a palatal or (accord- 
ing to note 2) for a lingual. Which particular letter, however, it should 
in every case be, is for the most part indifferent; since, as we shall see 
’ further on, most verbs are usual only in those tenses (Fut. 1, Aor. 1, 
Perf. 1), where, according to the general rules (ὃ 16sq.) this simple charac- 
teristic must be again changed ; and the three mutes, indeed, (x, 7, z,) every 
where changed in one and the same manner. E.g. from the Fut. βήξω 
it appears only, that the simple characteristic of the verb βήσσω is a pala- 
tal; but not which. We can indeed in such cases sometimes infer the 
radical consonant from the analogy of other kindred words ;* but since 
this is a matter of indifference for the flexion, we may with propriety, 
in all verbs whose simple characteristic does not of itself become evident 
in conjugation, reckon those in at as belonging to the simple characteris- 
tic m, and those in go, tt, either to the characteristic y, or (in those in 
note 2) to the characteristic 0, which lies at the foundation of the kindred 
ending ¢ We have then only to mark the few remaining verbs in at 
and oo, which exhibit in some of their tenses a different letter from those 
specified, as their simple characteristic ; these are 

a) in πτ, ; 
βλάπτω, κρύπτω, simp. char. 8 
Bento, ῥάπτω, ϑάπτω, σκάπτω, ϑρύπτω, simp. char. φ 
b) in oo, tt, only the Anom. φρίσσω, simp. char. x, Anom. λέσσομαιν᾽ 
—t, and κορύσσω---ϑ.. (δ 98. n. 5.) | | 

Nore 6. Finally, it cannot be too often repeated, that all which we 
have hitherto said, regards not etymological verity, but only grammat- 
ical analogy. When, for instance, on the one hand, it would be diffi- 
cult to explain such formations as πράσσω πέπραγα, κλάζω κλάγξω, with- 
out assuming ἃ more ancient theme; it would be absurd, on the other 


* Thus in the example of βήσσω I cough, the radical consonant χ (Text 8. 2) 
can be determined from the subst. 67/§, G. βηχός, cough; so too in πλάσσω I 
form, the radical & can be inferred from such substantives as ἐπγροπλάϑος an 
“oven-maker. Nevertheless, such inferences are not always certain, inasmuch 
as the radical letter often varies in derivatives without any visible cause ; ἡ 
e.g. Aor. Pass. ἐκρύβην, Adv. κρύφα, Adj. κρύφιος. We see from these and 
similar instances, what might naturally be expected, that the radical character- 
istic letter was by no means every where so definitely fixed, as not sometimes to 
fluctuate between several kindred sounds ; as also in English, e.g. in youngster, 
younker ; cleave, cleft; rive, rift; rend, rent ; speak, speech, etc. In most instan- 
ces, however, there prevails a uniformity between verbal and substantive forms ; 
and for the doubtful cases, the grammar at least is authorized to assume the sim- 
ple consonant of the verb, as the radical sound or simple characteristic. 


20 


150 § 93. VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


hand, to assume in respect to such derived verbs as ἀλλάσσω, χωρίξω, that 
an actual ancient form in yo, dw, had really existed; although in the 
former we find the Aor. 2 Pass. ἀλλαγῆναι, and in the latter the Ion. 3 Pl. 
Perf. Pass. κεχωρέδαται. It is manifest rather, that after an analogy had 
once became current in the language, in respect to certain verbs, it was 
again followed in the formation of other verbs. But it is here impossible 
to draw the proper limits; at least this would only serve to render the 
grammar more complex, without any corresponding advantage. It is 
better, therefore, to bring all verbs which agree in such modes of form- 
ation under one view, as in § 114. We must then regard these 
simpler themes in this light, viz. that many of them have formerly 
really existed; which -is confirmed by those still actually found in the 
poets, as βλάβω, λίτομαι, δρύφω for δρύπτω, deizw for ὀρύσσω, etc. but 
that in other verbs an analogous radical letter’ floated before the mind of 
those by whom the language was fixed, and led them to adopt a corres- 
ponding formation. 


Nore 7. All the methods of strengthening the present, which are not 
included in this section, (such as the lengthening of some verbs by -ἕω and 
-ἄω,) belong properly to the anomalies of the verb, and as such are brought 
under one view in § 112. 


\ 
§93. Formation or THE TENSES. 


1. The appending of the tense-endings, as given in § 90, cannot 
be at once effected ; inasmuch as in accordance with the general rules 
of euphony, the characteristic of every verb occasions variations and 
changes, wherever it is not in itself adapted to receive the termina- 
tion; and there are, besides, many peculiarities arising from usage. 


2. The process however is greatly facilitated, by observing what ten- 
ses are derived one from another as to form, viz. the Imperfect from 
‘the Present throughout, and the Pluperfect and Future 3 from the 
Perfect. 3 

3. Of the other tenses it cannot be strictly asserted, that they are 
derived one from another. Nevertheless, inasmuch as they coincide 
‘more or less as to the manner in which they are derived from the com- 
mon root, some are for the sake of convenience treated in grammar as if 
derived one from another, 6. 5. the Aor. 1 in ow from the Fut. in ow; 
while in respect to others, one tense is assumed as a model, under which 
to exhibit, once for all, that which otherwise must have been repeated 
under several. 


4. In this manner, all the tenses divide themselves into the three fol- 
lowing series. In these the,tenses are arranged, as they are derived 
from one another in most verbs; or are formed from one another in 
the grammar. 


§ 94. VERBS.—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. | 15k 


I. Present and nahi Act. and Pass. 
Il. Fut. and Aor. 1, Act. and Mid. 
Perf. and Lats J, Act. with Perf. and # lepery Pass. 
and Fut. 3. 
Aor. and Fut. 1, ‘Pass. 
Ill. Fut. and Aor. 2, Act. and Mid. 
Aor. and Fut. 2, Pass. 
Perf. and Pluperf. 2. 


If now in a particular verb, any one of these tenses is not in use, it is 
nevertheless commonly assumed in grammar,in order to make it, in 
the ordinary way, the basis of others which are actually in use. 

5. Every change which a verb undergoes, in either of the tenses 
which stand first in each of the above series, holds good also for the 
tenses which follow it; unless counteracted by particular rules and ex- 
ceptions. 

Nore. In order to bring into one general view much of what occurs 
in the following sections, we remark here, that the chief points of coinci- 
dence among the tenses in each of the above series, are the follow- 
ing : 

The tenses of Series I, never change the root or stem of the actual . 
Present Active in common use. When the Pres. Active has a strength- 
ened form, this remains also through the whole of the series; while the 
second series in most instances, and the third 1 in all, are derived from the 
simpler theme. 

Series. II includes all those terminations which usually occasion a 
change in the characteristic of the verb, chiefly through the accession of ¢ a 
consonant in the termination. 

Series III, on the contrary, always has the characteristic of the verb 
unchanged, and only changes sometimes the radical vowel. Consequently, 
when the first series has a strengthened form, it is only in the third that the 
simple characteristic of the verb is to be recognized ; since in the second, 


we can only distinguish that it is e.g. a palatal, but not which. Comp. 
§ 92. n. 5. 


§ 94. General Rules of Formation. 


1. The formation of the tenses, and their respective dilcrendes: 
are usually exhibited for each tense in one of its persons only ; and for 
this purpose the first person of the Indicative is always adopted. So 
soon as this first person is determined, all the other forms of persons and 
moods are inflected and conjugated in the manner exhibited below in 
the Paradigms; with which however §§ 87 and 88 are to be compared. 

Nore. The terminations of the Perf. Pass. alone, are of such a nature, 
that the formation of this tense must be learned in several of its personal 
and mood-endings, at the same time ; see ὃ 98. 


, 


152 § 95. VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 


2. Several tenses are formed in a manner so simple and so entirely uni- 
form, that they are sufficiently known from the following examples. In 
order to present them in a single view, we exhibit them here as found 
In the ordinary conjugation in ὦ. They are thus derived : ' 

1) From the Present in ὦ, the Imperfect in ον ---- τύπτω, ἔτυπτον. 

2) From every tense in ὦ a Passive form in oe, viz. from the Pres- 
ent, the Pres. α55. ---- τύπτω, τύὐπτομαν; and from the Future, 
the Fut. Mid. — τύψω, εὐψομαι. So also from the Fut. 2 or 
circumflexed Fut. in ὦ, the Fut. 2 Mid. in ova, as appears 
from § 95.7 54. ! δὲ 

3) From every tense in ον, a Passive form in ouny, viz. from the Im- 
perf. the Imperf. Pass. — ἔτυπτον, écuntouny; and from the 
Aor. 2, the Aor. 2 Mid. — ἔτυπον, ἐτυπόμην. 

4) From the Aor. 1, the Aor. 1 Mid. by appending the syllable μην, 
as éruwa, ἐτυψάμην. 

5) From every Perfect the Pluperfect, viz. in the Active by changing 
a into εἰν — τέτυφα, ἐτετύφειν ; and in the Passive by chang- 
ing mae into μὴν — τέτυμμαι, ἐτετύμμην. For the other per- 
sons of the Plupf. Pass. see particularly § 98. 

6) From each of the two forms of the Aor. Pass. the Fut. Pass. by 
changing ἦν into ἤσομαι; as ἐτύφϑην and ἐτύπην ---τυφϑήσο- 

τ μαι, τυπήσομαι. 

All the other tenses require particular rules. 


. § 95. Future Active. 

1. The primary form of the Greek Future is the termination ow. This 
form is actually found in much the greater number of verbs, and is 
therefore called Future 1. E. g. 

παύω Fut. παύσω. 

2. When the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, the changes 

which are usual with o, take place here; e. g. 


, Ul te ’ ᾿ς 
λέγω, πλέχω, τεύχω -- Ἐν, λέξω, πλέξω, τευξω 
, 
ϑλίβω, λείπω, γράφω —F. ϑλίψω, λείψω, γραψω. 
σπεύδω, πείϑω, πέρϑω —F. σπεύσω, πείσω, πέρσω. 


Nore 1. When the characteristic of the verb is a lingual preceded 
by ¥, the vowel is lengthened before o of the Fut. according to ᾧ 25. 3, 4. 
The case occurs but seldom ; most clearly in σπένδω F. σπείσω. See also 
the Anom. πύσχω, χανδάνω, § 114. 

3. In verbs in 27, in σσ or 77, and in ¢, the simple characteristic re- 
appears (ὃ 92. 8); consequently from az comes Ψ, from oo or tz — &, 


and from ¢ — 0; e.g. 


é 


§ 95. VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 153 


τύπτω (7'YTR2) --- τὐύψω 

ὅάπτω (ΖΦ) — ayo 

raoow.(TATR2) --- τάξω 

φράζω (DPAARQ) — φράσω 
and in the less frequent instances (ὃ 92. 8 and notes), from ζ comes ἕ, 
and from 06 or Tt — 0; 6. σ΄. 

κράζω (KPAT2) — κράξω 

' πλάσσω (ILTAAOQ) — πλάσω. 

4. When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel (Verba pura, §9L. 
n. 1), the syllable before the ending ow of the Fut. is regularly long, 
whatever its quantity may be in the Present ;* e.g. © 

ες δακρύω (Ὁ) -- δακρύσω (Ὁ) 

τί (ὃ --τίσω a 
Hence, ¢ and o are changed into 7 and w; e.g. 
φίλέω, δηλόω — φιλήσω, δηλώσω. 

For the exceptions, see notes 3, 4. 

5. The characteristic ἃ is changed in the Future into ἡ, except when 
it is preceded by ὃ, 4, or @; in which case the Future has long α ;} e. g. 

τίμάω, ἄπαταω --- τιμήσω, ἀπατήσω 


βοάω, ἐγγυάω — βοήσω, ἐγγυήσω . 
éaw, μειδιάω — ἐάσω, μειδιάσω (long «) 
doaw, gwoaw — δράσω, φωράσω (long a). 


The exceptions see in notes 6, 7. 

6. On the other hand, the penult of the Futures in cow, /ow, vow, is 
always short, when they come from verbs in ¢, or in 00,77; e.g. φράσω, 
δικάσω, voulow, κλύσω, from φράζω, δικάζω, νομίζω, κλύξζω; and in 
πλάσω, πτίσω, from πλάσσω, πτίσσω.}} 


Note 2. The Dorics assume ἕξ instead of o in the Fut. and Aor. 1, 
not only in most verbs in ζ, 6. g. κομέξω, δικάξω, from κομίζω, δικάζω ; but 
also in such verbs as have a vowel before the w of the Present; chiefly 
however where the vowel of the common Future is short; 6. g. ἐγέλαξε 
(see note 3). Along with this form they retain also the one in common 
use, and employ the two in verse alternately, according to the necessities 
of the metre.4] ~ ᾿ 


* The probable cause of this see in note 15. 

+ Tim is here taken in its usual quantity, although Homer makes it also long. 

} Compare the similar rules under Dec. I, (ὃ 34. 2,) and for the Fem. of the 
Adj. § 60. 2. 

|| That is to say, the vowel in all these verbs is already in itself short, and in 
the Future it does not become long. Were it long in itself, it might just as well 
remain long, as in χρήζω χρήσω. Whether such verbs as xvwoow, viooouer or 
vetooowor, really have a Future xvo'ow, vicower, as is commonly assumed, can- 
not with certainty be determined. See the 4usfithrl. Sprachl. ὦ 

Ἵ The instances are more rare, where this form (1) occurs with a long 
vowel, e.g. vexdé§n; and (2) where it likewise passes over into other forms; 


΄ 


᾽ ae) Ἄν. ν Ba a le 


154 § 95. VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 


Nore 3. Several verbs which have a short vowel as their characteristic, 

retain it unchanged in the Future ; so particularly 

γελάω, χαλάω, ϑλάω, κλάω break, σπάω, Fut. γελάσω ete. 

ἀλέω, ἀρκέω, ἐμέω, καλέω, τελέω, ζέω, ξέω, τρέω, αἰδέομαι, ἀκέομαι, 

Fut. ἀλέσω, αἰδέσομαι, ete. 

ἀρόω Fut. ἀρόσω 

ἀνύω, Kova,* μεϑύω, πτύω, Fut. ἀνύσω ete. 
together with some poetical verbs, as χοτέω, νεικέω, ἐρύω, τανύω; and also 
several unfrequent and obsolete themes, from which the tenses of some 
anomalous verbs are derived, as χορέσω, κρεμάσω, ἐλάσω, etc.—In the verbs 
in ὕω which belong here, however, the quantity of the Present requires 
still to be more accurately determined ; although they are in general to be 
assumed as short in that tense. All verbs which have v long in the Fut. 
vow, are in the Present either long or doubtful ; see § 7. n. 10. 


Nore 4. Some verbs fluctuate between the two formations, (i. e. a long 
or short vowel in the Fut.) partly in the Fut. itself, partly in the tenses 
derived from the Future (ὃ 93. 4). It is therefore proper to exhibit them 
here together : 

αἰνέω praise, F. αἰνέσω Aor. ἤνεσα Perf. Pass. ἤγημαν Aor. 1 P. avé- 
Iny (epic αἰνήσω, ἤνησαὶ) 
ποϑέω desire, F. cod iow and yow Perf. πεπόϑηκα Pass. nuov Aor. 1 
P. ἐποϑέσϑην a 
déoPbind, F. δήσω Perf. δέδεκα Pass. quae Aor. 1 P. ἐδέϑην 
aigéw take, F. αἱρήσω Perf. Pass. ἥρημαν Aor. 1 P. ἠρέϑην.. 
See also the anomalous γαμέω, στερέω, svoioxw, νέμω, and PES under 
εἰπεῖν. --- Besides these there are some dissyllables, δύω, iw, λύω, 
which shorten the v in the Perf. and Aor. 1 Pass. the two last also in the 
Perf. Act. although they all have long v in the Present, even among the 
- Attics ; thus : 
Perf. Pass. λέλῦμαι Aor. 1 Pass. ἐλύϑην, ἐδύϑην, ἐτύϑην, with short v. 
Perf. Act. λέλύκα, τέϑύυκα, but δέδυκα.ἢ 

Nore 5. Verbs which retain in the Future the short vowel of the - 
Present, can double the ¢ as a compensation in all poetry except Attic, 
both in the Future and Aorist; e.g. τελέσσω, ἐκόμισσε, δικάσσω, ἐγέλασσε, 
καλεσσάμενος, avioous.t 


e.g. ἐλυγέχϑην for --ἰσϑην from λυγίζω in Theocritus. It is indeed evident, that 
this Doric form was merely a partial usage, which, on account of some seeming 
analogy, had been introduced by degrees from verbs where the palatal is radical, 
into other verbs. We have an entirely similar and undeniable case in the Dor. ὦ 
in note 8. 

* The verbs ἀνύω complete, and ἀρύω draw water, have in the Present an Attic 
secondary form, ἀνύτω, ἀρύτω. ' 

t Compare also some verbal nouns from dissyllables in cw and dw, as φύσις, 
τίσις, ἄτίτος, Odrys; see ὃ 119. n. 2,5, 7. 

t When verbs which never have a short vowel in the Future, are sometimes 
written (especially in the older editions) with a double o to mark the length, it 
is an offence against correctness. Still, there are some verbs as to which the 
question has always been and is still agitated ; e.g. ἐρύομαι deliver, μητίσσατο 
or μητίσατο. 


§ 95. VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 155 


ΝΟΤῈ 6. The verb ἄκροάομαι hegr, has F. ἀκροῦσομαι, contrary to the 
analogy of βοάω, ἁλοάω F. 70m. On the other hand χράω, χράομαι, has 
χρήσω etc. contrary to the analogy of δράω, cow. 


Note 7. The Ionics, in such verbs as commonly form their tenses 
with long a, have ἡ instead of a, 6. δ: ϑεήσομαι, περήσω. On the other 
hand the Doris, instead of 7 in verbs in ἄω, have long «, as τιμάσω, ἐβο-- 
aoa. . This follows indeed from the general principles in § 27. n. 5, 7.— 
The verb ἐάω has in all the dialects ἐάσω. 


Nore 8. The Dorics, in many instances, likewise carried their long « 
into the flexion of verbs in ἕω; 6. g. φιλάσω, δάσας, ἐπονάϑη, from φιλέω, 
δέω, πονέω. 'ΤῊΪΒ occurs most frequently in the later Doric. 


Nore 9. The following six verbs, viz. 


πλέω sail, πνέω blow, véw swim 
ϑέω run, ῥέω flow, χέω pour, 


take sv in the Future, or at least in forms which come from the Butuers* : 
8. g. πλεύσομαι, ἔπνευσα, χεῦμα, etc. The two following, viz. 

καίω burn, κλαίω weep, 
whose original forms, κάω, χλάω, with long «, became peculiar to the At- 
tics, assume in the Fut. αὖ, as καύσω, ἔκλαυσα, etc. See Anom. Verbs. 


Nore 10. That many verbs in ὦ without another vowel preceding, 
also make the Fut. in #0, will be shewn in § 112. 8, 


7. Futures of three or more syllables, which have before the ending 
6w a short vowel, viz. &, ξ, t, are capable of taking a secondary form, 
called the 

Attic Future, 
because used more particularly by the Attics. The difference of the 
form consists in this, that the o falls away, and then the ending is if 
possible contracted, and receives the circumflex. This takes place in 
two ways. oa 

8. In Futures in aow and ἔσω, after the o is dropped, the vowels 
aw and ἕω are-contracted according to the general rules ; so that there, 
arises for this Future the same form of flexion, which we shall see be- 
low in the Present of contract verbs in ew and ἕω (δ 105). Τὸ 15 
to be noted, that the Ionics leave here the forte. ἕω, ἕεις, etc. uncon- 
tracted. E.g.. 

βιβάζω F. βιβάσω (βιβάω, βιβάεις, etc. unus.) Fut. Att. Pepa, 
GS, ᾧ, Pl. ὦμεν, ἅτε, ὥσι(ν) 

τελέω EF. τελέσω, Ton. again τελέω, τελέεις, etc. Fut. Att. τελῶ, 
εἴς, εἴ, Pl. οὔμεν, εἴτε, οὐσι(ν). 


* It is worthy of remark, that all these six verbs signify a flowing, stream-like 
motion, or one which takes place in a finid. See them all in the catalogue 
of Anom. Verbs (§ 114) ; where it appears, that the forms in év are in δέω not 
Attic, and in χέω are not in use. 


Ce Sha ee ee 


.15θ6 δ 95. VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 


With these forms coincides also the Fut. Middle, pac, ᾷ, οἰο.--οῦμαι, 
él, etc. Compare passim the Present of the contract verbs in the Act. 
and Passive, § 105 and notes at the end. | 

9. In Futures in ow, where after dropping the o the vowels vw 
cannot be contracted, the takes the circumflex by itself, and is then 
inflected as if contracted from ἕω ; e.g. 


κομίζω EF. κομίσω, Fut. Att. κωμιῶ, wérg, ἕξι, PI. Louper, ἐεῖτε, 
covor(v), Mid. κομιοῦμαι, cet, εεἴται, etc. 


Norte 11, This Attic Future, as it is called, has its origin in the Ionic 
dialect ; for the dropping of o between two vowels is a peculiarity of the 
Tonic ; see §28. n. 4. and comp. § 103. n. IIT. 2. The two vowels were 
then contracted, where possible, in the manner of the Attics; while in 
the Futures in iow an analogous expedient was introduced. 


Nore 12, Examples of the Future in ἕω, in this uncontracted shape, 
are τελέεν 1]. ὃ, 415. χορέεις 1]. ν, 831, for χορέσεις, see Anom. χορένγυμι. 
But those in ὦ, ἃς, are as seldom resolved by the Ionics, as the correspond- 
ing forms of the Present in contract verbs (Herodot. δικᾷν, ἐλᾷς, ἐλῶ»); while 
in the epic writers they are only capable of being resolved, or rather pro- 
longed into the double sound (Hom. zosudw, ἐλάᾳ, περάᾳ»), like the Pres- 
ent of contract verbs; see §28. n. 3. §105. n. 10.—On the whole, the 
examples which belong here, both in the contracted and uncontracted form, 
are not very frequent. The least frequent are those in which the usual 
Present likewise ends in ἕω and ow; as τελέω, τελῶ, Fut. τελέεν Hom. 
tekst. Plat. ‘Protag. p. 591. ὃ; καλέω, καλῶ, Fut. καλεῖσϑε Demosth. Lep- 
tin. 5, καλοῦντας Xen. Hell. 6. 3, 2, for καλέσοντας. See also the Anom. 
χέω. But most of the instances are such that no confusion can take place, 
viz. either the Fut. in ow comes from a Present in afm, 6. g. δικᾷν for 
δικάσειν from δικάξω, βιβᾷ Plat. Pheedr. 7, for βιβάσει, etc. or the sim- 
ple Present in ἕω and ἄω is not in use, e.g. ἀμφιῶ, ἀμφιεῖτε, for ἀμ- 
φιέσω, etc. from AM®@IER (see ἕγγυμι § 108. IIL); so also χορέεις (see 
above), σκεδᾷ for σκεδάσει, see Anom. σχεδάγγυμι, etc.—Here belongs like- 
wise the remark, that the Future of some verbs in ὕω is like Hie Present ; 
see the Anom. ἐρύω, ταγύω. 

Nore 13. Very rarely, a long vowel in the Future, eg. the ὦ in the 
Fut. ὥσω, is shortened and so admits of this contraction ; 6. g. ἐρημοῦτε for 
ἐρημώσετε, οἰκειοῦντας for οἰκειώσοντας Thuc. 3. 58. 6. 93, See on these 
and some other doubtful examples in ἡ and ἃ the Ausfiihrl. Sprachl. § 95. 
n. 16 and the marginal note. 

' Nore 14. In verbs in é¢w the form of the Fut. in ἐῶ is actually more 
in use than the regular one in ἔσω. It occurs also among the Ionics, and 
that without being resolved, e. g. ἀγλαϊεῖσϑαι, ϑεσπιεῖν, νομιοῦμεν, etc. in 
Herodotus and Hippocrates. 


10. The Future which is called in grammar ΤῊ 
Second Future, - 


after shortening the syllable of the verbal root or stem, appends to 
the simple characteristic of the verb the Ionic ending ἕω, and con- 


§ 95. vERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. 157 


tracts this in the common language into ὦ. The inflection then 
proceeds in the Active and Middle according to the general rules of 
contraction. 

11. This Future is found in the common language only in verbs 
which have the characteristics 4, μι, v, @; in which verbs, on the other 
hand, the Fut. in ow never regularly occurs. 'These verbs are treated 
of separately in § 101. But in order to use older grammars, it is ne- 
cessary to know that this Fut..2 was formerly assumed in all verbs, 
merely in order to derive from it the Aor. 2; the formation of which we 
shall exhibit by itself in the following section.—The case is entirely 
different with the Future 2 Passive; for since this is derived from the 
Aor. 2. Pass. not only in grammar, but in the very structure of the lan- 
guage (§ 89.3), it is actually found in all verbs where the latter occurs; 
see § 100. | 


Nove 15. In order to bring into one view all that has been said above, 
we may make the following supposition, as presenting the nearest analogy. 
We place as basis the ending ow, Fut. 1. This was appended to the stem 
partly with and partly withowt the union-vowel s. ‘The shorter form re- 
mained the most common one. The form ἔσω admitted of being shortened 
into ew, ὦ, the Fut. 2; and this form remained common, with a few ex- 
ceptions (see the next note), only in verbs whose characteristic is A, μη, 7, ρ. 
Further, when the vowel of the root or stem came immediately before the 
ending éow, the two vowels, the radical and union-vowel, flowed together, 
and thus produced the long vowel of the Fut. as φιλήσω, tiow. (Text 4, 
5.) But when the radical or stem-vowel came before the ending ow, as 
τελέ-σω, νομί-σω, these forms sometimes remained unchanged ; and some- 
times the same tendency which produced the Fut. 2, produced here also 
the different forms of the Attic Future. | ‘¢ 


. Nore 16. In sdme few instances, the form-of the’ Fut. 2 has been pre- 
served in verbs not having the characteristics 2 u v @ ;* just as in verbs 
with Δ μιν 9, there are some exceptions where the Fut. 1 in ow is found. 
These instances are the following, all of them in the Middle form: + 
μαχοῦμαι, along with which the fuller form μαχέσομαν has been pre- 
served ; see the Anom. μάχομαι. 


* Precisely as in other verbs the Aorists ἔχεα, εἶπα, etc. which correspond to 
the Aorists in A wy @, as ἔστειλα, ἔφηνα. It is very probable, that as this 
form of the Aorist. was actually more common in the Alexandrine dialect (see 
marg. note to ὃ 96. n. 1); so likewise Futures of the above kind may have been 
common in certain dialects, without ever being adopted into the more cultivated 
ones. Hence the ancient method of placing a Fut. 2 τυπῷ in the paradigm. 

+ We might indeed consider these two Futures as the regular and the Attic 
form from the Present wayéouc, which is actually used by the Ionics; but it is 
more in accordance with analogy. to assume, that this Ionic Present was first 
occasioned by the above Future forms, which are so seemingly derived from it. 
That the case is the same with χαλέω is shewn below in ὃ 110. 11. 2; but since 
this is the only form of the Present in use, it is necessary in grammar to make 
the Fut. καλέσω from it. : 


ΟἹ 


158 $96. vVERBS.—AORIST ACTIVE. 


ἐδοῦμαι, μμϑδυδοῦμάν see Anom. ἕζομαι. 
πιοῦμαι, a form censured by the ancient critics, instead of the still 
more anomalous πίομαι (see note 18) from HID; see the Anom. 
πένω. » 
So a few poetical examples: τεχεῖσϑαν Hom. Hymn. Ven. 127, from TEK2 
(Anom. τίκτω) --- μαϑεῦμαι (Dor. for τοὗμαι) Theocr. 2. 60, from MHOM . 
(Anom. μανϑάνω). — In relation to the epic forms κείω, δύας see the mar- 
ginal note on δήω in the catalogue of Anom. Verbs under 44-, δαίω, § 114. 
Nore 17. The Dorics, in all circumflexed Futures, as generally in 
contractions, have εὖ instead of ov; and this contraction is common to 
them and the Ionics (§28.n. 5), when the latter contract; e.g. βάλλω 
Fut. βαλῶ Pl. βαλέομεν, βαλεῦμεν, comp. § 105. n. 13.—The Dorics how- 
ever circumflex also the common Future 1 in ow, and then decline it 
as if contracted from ἕω ; 6. g. τυψῶ, τυψεῦμεν (for -οὔμεν), τυψεῖτε, τυψεῦ- 
μαι (for -οὔμαι), ete. ‘This form, under the grammatical name of the 
Doric Future, 
is found more or less in use in some words in Attic and dther writers ; 
but only in the form of the Fut, Middle (comp. § 113. 4), and with the 
Attic diphthong of contraction ov; e.g. φεύγω, Fut. comm. φευξοῦμαι. 
See also the Anom. Verbs παΐζω, vixen χλαίω, πλέω, ϑέω, νέω, πίπτω. 
Nore 18. An entirely irregular form of the Future occurs in the two 
words πίομαι I will drink, ἔδομαι I will eat. The form is precisely that of 
the Pres. Pass. of the simple themes to which they belong. See the 
Anom. πίνω and ἐσϑίω, § 114. 


ᾧ 96. First and Second Aorist Active. 


1. The form of the Aorist in @ is called the Aorist 1. This is formed 
in a twofold manner, viz. partly in ow, and partly in a. In all the cases 
where the Future regularly ends in oo, i.e. everywhere except in verbs 
with 4 w v o, the Aor. 1 has -oa; and the same changes of the o take 
place here, as in the Fut. in ow; e.g. 

τύπτω, τύψω — ἔτυψα 

κομίζω, κομίσω — ἐκόμισα 

φιλέω, φιλήσω — ἐφίλησα 

πνέω, πνεύσω --- ἔπνευσα (ᾧ 95. n. 9). 
—In verbs with 4 « v @, on the contrary, where the Future ends not in 
ow, but in ὦ, the Aor. 1 also does not end in σα, but simply ina. The 
particular rules are given in ὃ 101. 

Nore 1. A few anomalous verbs form the Aor. 1 in « instead of 
oa, Without being themselves verbs in Apy 03 eg. χέω, ἔχεα. See 
also the Anom. zai, εἰπεῖν, ‘asia, ἁλέομαι, δατέομαι, and ἤνεγκα under 


géow.*—For the Aor. 1 in xa of some verbs in μι, 6. g. ἔδωκα, see under 
those were ὁ 106. 10. ° 


! 


* The Alexandrine dialect (§ 1. n. 10), from paversl verbs which in the com- 
mon language had only the Aor. 2 in ov, formed also such an Aorist in @; 6. g. 


§ 96. vERBS.—AORIST ACTIVE. 159 


2. The form of the Aorist in ν is called the Aorist ἢ. In the 
ordinary conjugation its full termination is ov, which is appended 
immediately to the characteristic of the verb, with the following con- 
ditions : . le: 

1) The Aor. 2 is always formed from the simple theme, and retains 
the simple characteristic of the verb when the Present has a 
strengthened form (ᾧ 92); 

2) It commonly shortens the penult:syllable of the Present. 

3) It sometimes changes 8 in the stem-syllable into a. 


3. By means of these changes alone, is the Aor. 2 distinguished in its 
form from the Imperfect ; and verbs in which none of these differences 
can have place (6. g. ἄρύω, γράφω, etc.) or where the only difference 
would be in the quantity of the vowel (as in κλίνω), form no Aor. 2 
Active.* 

4. This tense is never found in those classes of derivative verbs, 
which are formed from other verbs by means of particular endings, like 
ato, iw, αἰνω, vv, εύω, Ow, aw, ἕω. 

5. Of other verbs, the greater part have the Aor. 1; and a far smaller 
number have the Aor. 2. | But this latter is often assumed in grammar, 
in verbs which do not actually have it; because many verbs form, not 
indeed the Aor. 2 Active, but the Aor. 2 Passive upon the same 
principles. Hence Grammarians prefer to exhibit this formation once 
for all under the Aor. 2 Active, and then derive from it the Aor. 2 
Passive.t 

6. Accordingly, the changes of the characteristic and vowel of the 
Present, which take place in order to form the Aor. 2, and which have 
been generally specified above (no. 2), may be presented more in detail, 
as follows : : 


. 


εἶδα for εἶδον, ἔλιπαν 3 Pl. for Zuzwov,ete. See the marginal ref. under note 9.— 
Here also belongs the remark, that in writers not Attic, some forms of the Aor. 2 
Mid. fluctuate between o and a; 6. g. svgayto for evgorto. 


* They can however readily form an Aor. 2 Passive, e.g. ἐγράφην ; see ὃ 100. 


t Thus in regard to the Aorists used as examples in Text 6, the learner must 
bear in mind, that the forms érumor, ἔκρυβον, ἔῤῥαφον, ἔταγον, never occur at all, 
or at least only in single passages, which are for that very reason suspected of 
being corrupted ; but.instead of them, éruwa, ἔταξα, ete. They stand here only 
on account of the Aor.2 Passive, ἐτύπην, ἐκρύβην, etc. which are actually in 
use. 


160 § 96. VERBS.—AORIST ACTIVE. 


Characteristic. 


Pres. λ΄ Aor.2 2 — βάλλω ἔβαλον 


π —tuntw *érvmov 
— πτ — δ, — χρύπτω Ἐἔκρυβον 
φ -- ὁάπτω Ἐξθόαφον 
— σσ,ττ --- yt— TOO) *ero. ov 
BLE ty ie — goat .*epgadov 
y -- κράξω ἔἕχραγον 
Vowel. ‘ 
— ob — ἃ -- πταίρω ἔπταρον 
πεν ἢ -- a -- λήϑθω ἔλαϑον 
bedi shige in ἵ 5 — λείπω ἔλιπον ᾿ 
: €or ἃ in verbs 4 uw @ (§101) 
: — & _—' YU — gevyn  Epvyov 
— ἐ -- & --,τρέπω ἕτραπον. 


Nore 2, The Aor. 2 stands in the same relation to the simple theme, 
as to form, that the Imperfect does to the usual Present. It is distinguished, 
however, from the Imperfect, partly by the Aorist signification (for which 
see in the Syntax, § 137,) and partly by the circumstance that it has moods 
and participles of its own, formed after the manner of those of the Present. 
The analogy holds here throughout, that the real Imperfect of a verb al- 
ways conforms precisely to the Present in actual use ; and consequently, 
in the Indicative, that only can be a real Aorist which differs as to form 
from the usual Imperfect; and in the other moods, only that, which in like 
manner differs from the Present. Thus e.g. ἔγραφον can be only Im- 
perfect, and γράφης only Present Subjunctive, etc. 


Note 3. From this rule, a few Imperfects seem, at first view, to 
form an exception, and to be at the same time Aorists. But closer ob- 
servation shews, that all these, at least-so far as usage is concerned, are 
mere Aorists; so ἔφην (see ὃ 105 gnu), and ἐπριάμην, ἠρόμην (from ἔρομαι), 
for which see the Anom. Verbs. In the Homeric usage, there belongs here 
especially χλύω hear, whose Present is in use, but from which the form 
ἔχλυον has always the Aorist signification. In other verbs too Homer often 
uses, for the sake of the metre, the Imperfect as Aorist ; but it would be 
incorrect to reckon among such instances ior, ἕτετμον, ἔχραισμον, and 
some others, whose Present never occurs, and which are therefore never 
used but as Aorists. That such forms as ἥπάφον, ἄλαλκεν, etc. are still 
more incorrectly assigned to the Imperfect, appears from § 85. n. 2 and 
the marginal note.t - : 


* The forms thus marked with a star are not in use; see the second mar- 
ginal note on the preceding page. 

+ Of all those verbs in which oo stands for another letter, as y (δ 92. 8), which 
must consequently reappear in the Aor. 2, there is not one which actually forms 


such an Aorist, except the poetical λίσομαι, ἐλιτόμην ; see the catalogue of 
_Anom. Verbs ὃ 114. Comp. ὃ 92. n. 2. 


{ The separation of the Aor. 2 from the Imperfect, may perhaps be historically 
illustrated somewhat in this manner. Originally the Greek language probably 
distinguished the signification of the Aorist from that of the Imperfect, just as 
little as the English does ; and both species of the historical Preterite; in a and 
v, (ἔτυψα and ἔτυπον or ἔτυπττον,) were formed probably in like manner to express 


- 


AS 96. VERBS.—AORIST ACTIVE. ᾿ 161 


Nore 4. ,The same analogy in the distinction of the Aor. 2 from the 
Imperfect, prevails also in those verbs from double themes, which from 
their greater irregularity can be exhibited only in the catalogue of anoma- 
lous verbs; 6. g. λαμβάνω, ἁμαρτάνω, etc. In these likewise the Aor. 2 
is every where only the Imperfect of the obsolete form ; e. g. ἔλαβον, ἥμαρ-- 
toy, from 4418. (AHBL?), “AMAPT2. 


Note 5., To the same class must be referred the Aorist of several verbs 
in éw and aw. These endings, in some verbs, are not derivative endings 
(§ 119.2), but merely a prolongation of the simple form (ᾧ 92. n. 7. ὁ 112. 
8). Hence, just as in some of these verbs other tenses from this simple 
form have been preserved (comp. the Perf. 2, § 97. ἢ. 4." and the Aor, 1 
in the Anom. γαμέω); so also in others the Aor. 2 is still found; 6. g. 
χτυπέω ἔχτυπον, γοάω ἕγοον, from KTTMR, FOL.* . 


Nore 6. The shortening of the penult syllablé (λήϑω ἔλαϑον, φεύγω 
ἔφυγον») can also be properly regarded as a return to the ancient form 
of the verb, which (as we have seen in § 92) was often. merely length- 
ened in the Present. And even the change of ¢ into o can be regarded in 
- the same manner ; since among the Ionics we find ἃ in the Present of 
some of these words, as τράπω, τάμνω. But on this subject it is impos- 
sible to arrive at any definite certainty in general, let particular cases be 
ever so probable ; for the kindred words, 6. g. φυγή, and the Lat. fugio, 
together with ἔφυγον, can be just as well considered as having been short- 
ened from φεύγω ; and the Ion. τράπω, together with ἕτραπον, can just ag 
well have come bya change of vowel from τρέπω. ‘This being the case, and 


indifferently that mixed signification ; justas with us in some verbs there is a 
double form of the Imperfect, one in ed and the other irregular; e.g. awake, 
Impf. awaked and awoke; dig,Impf. digged and dug ; hang, Impf. hanged and 
hung, etc.—Hence, in the earlier Greek writers, the signification of the Aorist and 
Imperfect was not yet entirely separated (§ 137.n.4). When however the signifi- 
cation of the Aorist began visibly to distinguish itself from that of the Imperfect, 
the latter attached itself by degrees exclusively to the form in , while the Aorist 
on the other hand did notattach itselfexclusively tothe formin a. This latter form, 
as we may conjecture, was in many verbs just as unusual among the Greeks, as 
a form in ed from break, run, etc. would be among us. When therefore a double 
form of the Preterite in oy was introduced,—which from the flexibility of the 
Greek verbal forms was a thing of very easy occurrence,—whether this was 
formed from the same Present in different ways (éAsuor, ἔλιπον), or came from 
a double theme of the verb (ἔλαβον, ἐλάμβανον) ; it was quite natural that the sig- 
nification of the Aorist should in like manner by degrees attach itse!f to one of 
these two forms. Here however the tendency to analogy had so much influence, 
that the Aorist sense passed every where only to that form in v, which deviated . 
most from the usual form of the Present. When at a later period, necessity 
required in like manner the separation of the moods and participles,—which 
originally were probably, ina single form, common to the Present and Preterite,— 

_ these were formed for the Aorist, partly (for the form in @) in a manner analo- 
gous to those of the Present; and partly (for the form in ov) out of the moods 
and participle of the same unusual Present, from which the Indicative was de- 
rived. These were assumed for the Aorist without change, except slight devia- 
tions from the ascent of the Present, which the ear demanded particularly in the 
Infinitive and participle (Auzety, λιπέοσϑαει, λιπών), because these ordinarily have 
the signification of the Preterite, while their terminations ev, ἐσϑαν, wy, naturally 
suggest the idea of the Present. 


* See also the Anom. aervéw, orvyéw, τορέω, μηκάομαι, μυκάομαι and com: 
pare ληκέω and ϑορέω in λάσκω, ϑρώσκω. § 114. ἥ ‘ 


162 § 97. VERBS.—PERFECT ACTIVE. 


since moreover there are so many verbs which change nothing but the 
vowel ; it is better not to increase the number of verbs with double forms, 
and consequently anomalous, by reckoning these among them; especially 
since changes of the vowel in the Preterite are likewise so common in 
other languages. It is extremely probable, that in a portion of such 
verbs, the originally short root was prolonged and strengthened in the 
Present ; while in another portion, the original long root was in the 
Aorist and other forms actually shortened.* 


Nore 7. In some words nevertheless the Aor. 2 has the syllable be- 
fore the ending long, and rests satisfied with the difference of the simpler 
form, or with the change of ε into a; e. g. εὗρον, ἔβλαστον, ἕπαρδον ; see 
the Anom. εὑρίσκω, βλαστάνω, πέρδω, ete.—In a few poetical forms, the 
long vowel by position is made short by transposition ; e. g. δέρκω ἕδρα-- 
zov; see also the Anom. πέρϑω, δαρϑάνω, τέρπω. 

Nore 8. For the Aor. 2 in yy, wy, vy, and for the syncopated Aorists 
of both the Active and Passive form, see the Verbs in μι, and ὁ 110.— 
For o instead of o in some Middle forms, 6. g. εὑράμην, in writers not 
Attic, see the marginal note to note 1 above.—For some anomalous verbs, 
whose Aor. 2 has a neuter sense, while their Aor. 1 has a transitive mean- 
ing, see § 113. n. 2. 


Notre 9. We have seen above in note 1, that some verbs form their 
Aor. 1 with the characteristic of the Aor.2. In like manner, the reverse 
of this sometimes occurs, viz. the Aorist in ον is formed with σ᾽; of which 
a plain example is the common Aorist of πίπτω, formed from IZET2, 
Viz. ἔπεσον, πεσεῖν; to which may be added the epic ἷξον, ἐθήσετο, ἐδύσε-- 
to, see Anom. ixvéouo, βαίνω, δύω; and further some Imperatives, e. g. 
οἷσε compared with the Fut. οἴσω, see the Anom. φέρω; and the epic oséte 
from. ἄγω, λέξεο, Ὀρσεο, (see Anom. λέγω, ὕρνυμι,) compared with the Im- 
peratives βήσεο, δύσεο from the Indicatives just mentioned.+ 


§ 97. First.and Second Perfect Active. 


1. The Perfect Active has, in both its forms, the same flexible endings, , 
Viz. @, ας, ἕν or δ, etc. but it distinguishes the two forms by means 


* It is an incontestable fact, that the greater part, if not all the analogies in a 
language, are produced by the operation of such mutual causes. It was natural, 
that in consequence of the more frequent use of the narrative form (the Preter- 
ite), the exhibiting or descriptive form (the Present) should be made conspicu- 
eus by an emphasis laid upon its chief or radical syllable; but it was also nat- 
ural, that for the sake of contrast with the Present, an emphasis or the accent 
should in like manner be laid upon the distinguishing syllables of the Preterite,. 
and thus the radical syllable of the word be obscured in pronunciation ; not to 
mention, that in the animation of narrative, words are naturally uttered with 
greater rapidity. 

t It. was formerly the custom to regard all these as forms derived from the 
Future, contrary to the analogy of the language. The above is sufficient to show, 
that just as the language could form both Aorists in oy and α without o, as εἶπον 
and εἶπα, εἶδον and εἶδα (see note 1 with the marg. note) ; so also it could form 
both with o in σὸν and oa, as ἔπεσα (see πέπτω) and ἔπεσον, ἐδυσάμην and ἐδὺυ-- 
σόμην. The general usage became fixed in oa and ον ; but remnants were also 
preserved of the formation in a and σον. See the Ausfihrl. Sprachl. § 96. n. 10. 


§97. vERBS.—PERFECT ACTIVE. 163 


of the characteristic. ‘The Perf. 1 has a characteristic of its own; sve 
Perf, 2 has always the simple characteristic of the verb. 

2. The Perfect 1 has several variations in respect to its characteris- 

tic, viz. 

a. When the characteristic of the verb is 2,7, φ, or 7, %, 7, this char- 
acteristic becomes (or remains) aspirated in the Perfect, and then 
a is appended ; 6. g. 

τρίβω, λέπω, γθάφω — τέτρίῖφα, λέλεφα, γέγραφα 
λέγω, αχώιω τεύχω --- λέλεχα, πέπλεχα, τέτευχα. 
If the characteristic of the verb has been changed in the Present 
(δ 92. 8), this can always be known from the Future; and 
since the same letters, which in the Future give rise to § and wy, 
pass over in the Perfect into χ or gq, it is only necessary to 
change those double letters of the Future into these aspirates ; 
τάσσω (ταξω) --- τέταχα 
τύπτω (τύψω) --- τέτυφα. 

ὃ. In all other cases the Perf. 1 ends in χα. In those verbs which 
have ow in the Future, this ending κὰ is appended in the Perfect 
with the same changes of the vowel and of the characteristic, as 
occur in the Future ; e. g. 


τίω - (ziow, long 2) — τέτῆχα 

φιλέω (φιλησὼ) — πεφίληκα 

Tynan (τιμήσω) — τετίμηκα 

ἐρυϑριάω (ἐρυϑριάσω, long α) --- ἠουϑρίᾶκα 

σπάω (σπάσω, short α) -- ἔσπακα᾽ 

πνέω (πνεύσω) --- πέπνευχα, 
So also when a lingual is dropped : 

πείϑω (πείσω) — — πέπευκα 

κομίζω (xoutow) — — κεχομέκα, 


but with the liquids retained; see the verbs 4 u v ρ, ὃ 101. 
3. The Perfect 2, or the Perfect Middle as it was formerly called 
(ὃ 89. 4—6), appends the same flexible endings to the characteristic of 
the verb without any change; e.g. 
λήϑω λέληθα onnw σέσηπα᾽ φεύγω jpdesivel 
4, Here however there are three things to be observed, viz. 


a. When the characteristic of the Present is not simple (§ 92. 6), the 
simple stem and simple characteristic reappear in the Perf. 2, 
precisely as in the Aor. 2; e.g. | 

πλήσσω (ILTAHT2) — πέπληγα 
φρίσσω (DPIKR) — néqoina 
ζω (OAS) — ὄδωδα. 


- 


164 § 97. VERBS.—PERFECT ACTIVE. 


x 


δ. In general this form prefers a long vowel in the radical syllable, 

even when the other tenses derived from the simple theme have 
a short vowel. Hence the long sound of the Present appears 
again in the above examples, e. g. 

φεύγω A. 2 ἔφυγυν ---- πέφευγα 

Anta A. 2 ἔλαϑον --- λέληϑα 

σήπω <A. 2 Pass. ἐσάπην ---- σέσηπα. 
But the vowel 7 is assumed de novo in this Perfect, only when 

‘ the strengthening of the Present consists either in the diphthong 
at, or in a position; e.g. 

δαίω A. 2 ἔδαον ---- dédnau* 
ϑαάλλω Fut. ϑαλῶ — τέϑηλα. ἡ 
After @ and after vowels, the Perf. 2 takes « and not 7; 6. g. 
κράζω, ἔκραγον — κέχρᾶγα 
éaya, ἕαδα, in Anom. ἄγνυμε, ἀνδάνω. 

c. This Perfect prefers especially the vowel 0; and therefore this 
vowel not only remains unprolonged, as in χόπτω (ΚΟ ΠΏ) 
χέχοπα Hom. but is also assumed as the cognate vowel in- 

stead of ε (ὃ 27. 1); 6.5... ; 

φέρβω — πέφορβα 

TEKQ — τέτοκα (see Anom. στίχτω). . 
This change of < into o has a twofold operation upon the diph- 
thong ¢¢ in the Present, according as ὃ or ¢ is the radical sound; 
a circumstance which is likewise to be recognized in those tenses 
which shorten their vowel. Where ¢is the radical sound, (which 
however is the case only in the verbs 4 « ν @,) the δὸ is changed 
into 0; when ὁ is the radical sound, the ev passes over into ov; 
6.5... 

σπείρω (Ε΄. σπερῶ) --- ἔσπορα 

λείπω (A. 2 ἔλιπον) ---- λέλουπα. 

5. Finally, by far the greater number of verbs, and especially all de- 

rivatives, have only the Perf. 1. The Perf. 2 therefore, like the Aor. 2 

(§ 96. 4), never occurs except from primitives. It is to be noted, that 

the Perf. 2 generally prefers the intransitive signification. See note 5. 


ΜῊΝ 


Note 1. Some Perfects 1 also change the radical « into the cognate o. 


* The mode of writing δέδηα, — and also σσέφῃνα; σέσῃρα; etc. —is incorrect ; 
as also in the corresponding case of the Aor. 1 from-A wv e. The Perf. 2 ἃ]: 
ways has the simple or shortened stem of the verb (here 74, PAN, etc.) as its 
foundation, whose short vowel however it again lengthens. Now it could in- 
deed, after the analogy of φεύγω πέφευγα, recur again tothe αὐ of the Present; 
but there is no ground whatever for a further change into 7. 


§ 97. VERBS.—PERFECT ACTIVE. 165 


Such are πέμπω send, πέπομφα ; κλέπτω steal, κέχλοφα ;* τρέπω turn and 
τρέφω nourish, τέτροφα 3} see also the Anom. λέγω, συνείλοχα. Here too 
belongs the change of εν into οὐ in δέδοικα from JEIN; see the Anom. 
δεῖσαι. 


Nore 9. To the change of 8 into Ὁ corresponds that of 7 into in the 
Perfect of the Anom. ῥήγνυμι (PHT) %dwyo:t And kindred to both 
these changes, is the insertion of ὦ and o in some Perfects, which of 
themselves would be dissyllables; where too the o is placed after the 
Attic reduplication. E. g. ἔϑω ---(Ἕεἶϑα) εἴωθα - ἄγω --- ἦχα, ἀγήοχα. See 
also in the catalogue of Anom. Verbs ἐδήδοκα under ἐσθίω, ἐνήνοχα under 
φέρω, ἀνήνοϑα and ἐνήνοϑα by themselves ; and the Passive forms ἄωρτο 
under αἴρω, ἕωνται in a marginal note to inus, § 108, 1. 


Nore 3. It has already been remarked (§ 85. 2), that after the Attic 
reduplication the vowel is shortened ; 6. g. ἀκούω ἀκήκοα, ἀλείφω adnlica, 
EAETON ἐλήλυϑα.---ΕῸν the sake of the metre, the epic poetry could 
also shorten the ἡ of this Perfect into ἃ in the Fem. of the participles ; 
6. 5. σεσαρυῖα, τεϑαλυΐῖα, ἀραρυῖα. 

Nore 4. In the few examples of the Perf. 2 from verbs ἕω and ἄω, as 
ὁϊγέω ἔῤῥιγα, μυχάομαι (Aor. ἔμῦκον) μέμυκα, the case is the same as with 
the Aor. 2 in § 96n.5. They come from simple forms PIT2, MrKN. 
See also the Anom. γηϑέω, δουπέω; μηκάομαι. 


Nore 5, That the examples of the Perf. 2, even including those which 
occur only in the poets, amount in all to avery limited number, is to 
be presumed from Text 5. Of those which belong to transitive verbs, we 
name here particularly] ἀκήκοα, λέλοιπα, τέτοκα, ἕχτονα, πέπονθα, οἶδα, 
ἔσπορα, ἔστοργα, ὕπωπα, δέδορκα ; and from éntransitives, κέχραγα, λέλᾶκα, 
τέτργα, πέφρῖκα, ἔῤῥ᾽γα, ἔοικα, εἴωθα, ἕαδα, ὕδωδα, ἐλήλυϑα, σέσηρα, τέ- 
ϑηλα, τέϑηπα, μέμηνα, κέχηνα, γέγονα, κέχοδα,᾿ πέπορδα, μέμυκα (μυκαομαι). 
There are, some others, which, though strictly intransitive, yet become 
transitive in certain connexions, as λέληθα, πέφευγα, δέδια. To these are 
still to be added those in § 113. n. 3, 4, which belong to verbs whose forms 
present a mixture of transitive and intransitive meaning, in which the 
Perf. 2 belongs to the intransitive signification. 


* That the simple characteristic is not g, (in which case κέκλοφω could just as 
well be Perf. 2,) but 7, is shown by the usual Aor. 2 Pass. ἐχλάπην. 


t The form τέτροφο from τρέφω is rare, and can be regarded as Perf. 2. It 
occurs Od, w, 237 as intransitive; Soph. Oed. Col. 186 as transitive. As Perf. 
from teérw it stands in the earlier writers without variation of form, e.g. Soph. 
Trach. 1009. In writers somewhat later is found the peculiar form τέτραφα. 


{ Compare πέπτωκοα in the Anom. σίπτω. 


|| A more minute investigation of these forms see in the author’s Lezilogus I, 
at the end. é , 


{| We exhibit here simply the Perfects themselves, with the remark, that they 
are all formed from their respective themes according to the preceding rules ; 
but that the greater part of them belong to verbs, whose whole formation is 
anomalous, and which are therefore given in the catalogue below (§ 114). On 
this account, one must already be somewhat familiar with this catalogue, in order 
at once to refer each of these Perfects to its proper verb. 


22 


166 § 98. vERBS.—PrERFECT PASSIVE. 


Nore 6. It is further to be noted, that since from the copiousness 
of the Greek language, the Perfect is by no means so necessary as in other 
languages, the»Perfect Act. of many verbs which have no Perf. 2, and 
whose Perf. 1 would have a harsh or unusual sound, either does not occur 
at all, or at most very rarely ; and its place is supplied by the Aorist, or by 
circumlocution through the Perf. Passive; see § 134. π, 1.* 

For the Subjunctive, Optative, and Imperative of the Perfect, see § 137. 
ΠΕ Onaga 

Note 7. In the Ionic dialect the x of the Perf. 1 in xe from verbs pure, 
sometimes falls away ; and thus the Perf. 1 passes over into the form of the 
Perf. 2. Here belong the Homeric participles 

χεχαφηώς, τετιηώς, τετληώς, etc. for -ηκώς. 

The same takes place (with a shortening of the vowel) in the 3 pers. Plur. 
and in the participle of some verbs; as 

βεβάασι, βεβαώς, for βεβήκασι, βεβηκώς, from BAN (Anom. βαίνω) 

πεφύασι, πεφυώς, for πεφύκασι, πεφυκώς, from φύω. : 
From some old Perfects, only these forms occur, and none at all in χα, 85. 
μεμάασι, μεμαώς ; δεδάασι, δεδαώς; see Anom. MAN, JAN.” From the 
Anom. JZEI2 δεῖσαι, however, both forms — δέδοικα and δέδζχα --- are in- 
flected throughout and are in common use... Hence the 1 pers. Sing. is 
likewise assumed for the above forms of the 3 pers. Plur. although it is no- 
where found; as πέφυα, μέμαα, δέδαα, βέβαα ; and so also ἕσταα (for 
ἕστηκα OF ἕστακα, See ἵστημι), γέγαα, τέϑναα, τέτλαα, See Anom. γίγνο--: 
μαι, ϑγήσκω, τλῆναι; and from these come certain syncopated forms, as 
βέβαμεν, τεϑνάναι, for βεβάαμεν, τεϑναέναν, which will be treated of along 
with other syncopated forms of the Perfect in § 110. 10. 


ᾧ 98. Perfect Passive. 


1. The Perfect Passive assumes the endings pac, oat, Tat, etc. — 
and so the Pluperfect, μὴν, 00, to, etc.—not by means of a union-vowel 
(ομαι, erat, ete. ᾧ 87. n. 1), as is the case in the other Passive forms; 
but it annexes them immediately to the characteristic of the verb, as 
this appears before the endings ἃ or xa of the regular Perf. 1 Active. 
Hence, for the sake of uniformity, it is customary to form the Perfect 
Passive from this latter tense. ' 

Nore 1. When therefore ἃ verb has no Perf. 1 Active in use, this tense 


is nevertheless assumed in grammar, in order to form the Perf. Passive ; 
e. g. in Asim (λέλοιπα), assumed Perf. 1 λέλειφα, Perf. Pass. λέλειμμα. 


* Generally speaking, it is a fundamental principle throughout the Greek 
language, that whenever any form of any verb would sound unpleasantly or un- 
usually to the Greek ear, or would produce any confusion or ambiguity, it was 
never employed, however necessary and important it might be in a gram- 
matical view. The Greeks preferred in such eases to adopt some other form 
or mode of expression. In treating of grammatical forms, the grammar can 
of course pay little regard to this circumstance ; but must exhibit what analogy 
requires,.and leave it to observation to ascertain the actual usage. 


§ 98. vERBS.—PERFECT PASSIVE. 167 


2. When now (I.) the Perf. 1 has @ ory, these letters are changed 
before 4; 6, τ according to the general rules (δῷ 20, 22, 23). Thus 
e.g. from τέτυφα and πέπλεχα are formed 

τέτυτμμαι, TECU-Wal, τέτυτπταιν, for -ῴμαι, YOu, Prat 

πέπλε-γμαι, πέπλε-ξαι, πέπλετ-κται, for -χμαις your, χται. 
In order to avoid the concurrence of three consonants (δ 19. 2), in 
the further flexion of this Perfect and of the Pluperfect, the o of the 
endings σϑὲ, σθαι, of, etc. is dropped, e.g. 

2 pers. Pl. τέτυτῳφϑε, for -pode or woe 

Inf. πεπλέχϑαι for -χσϑαι or -ὅϑαι. 
Instead of the 3 pers. Plur. in ytas and ντο, a circumlocution with the 
verb εἶναν to be is commonly used; 6. g. τετυμμένου (- αι) εἰσίν, and 
in the Pluperf. τετυμμένον (- αὐ) ἦσαν. 

Nore 2. For the Ionics, however, this circumlocution is not neces- 
sary, since instead of -ytas -yto, they can put -αταν -ατὸ ; in which the 
Attics sometimes follow them in these tenses.. For the details, see ὁ 103. 
n. LV. 3. 

3. When however (II.) the Perfect 1 has χα, this ending is simply 
changed in the Perf. Passive into was, etc. viz. 

a. When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, there is usually no 

farther change; e. g. 

TEOLEW, πεποίηκα — πεποίημαι, σαν, ται, etc. 

(νέω, vevow) νένευκα --- νένευμαι, etc. 
and no difficulties occur in the further flexion ; except in the 
Subjunctive and Optative, which see below in no. 4. 

6. When however a lingual has been dropped before κα, (as also be- 
fore ow of the Future,) there is assumed instead of this a o, 
before those endings of the Perf. Pass. which begin with wu and τ; 
e. g. 

πείϑω (πέπεικα) — πέπεισμαι, σμεϑα, πέπεισταν 

ᾷδω (gow, ἦκα) --- ἥσμαι, ἧσται 

φράζξω (πέφρακα) — πέφρασμαι, ora. 
Before another σ, this σ is not inserted; e.g. 2 Sing. πέπει- 
σαι, 2 Pl. πέπει-σϑε. The 8 Pl. as above in no. 2. 


c. For the verbs 2 w v ρ, see $ 101. 


Note 8. The cognate ὁ which comes from ¢, does not pass over into 
the Perf. Pass. e.g. χλέπτω (κέχλοφα) κέκλεμμαι. The three verbs τρέπω 
turn, τρέφω nourish, στρέφω turn, have in the Perf. Pass. a peculiar cognate 
vowel «; thus τέτραμμαι, τέτραψαν etc. τέϑραμμαι (from τρέφω, Foswo), 
ἔστραμμαι. (ὃ 27. 1.) 


* The Homeric πέπυσσαι is only a metrical doubling of the o instead of πέπι-- 
σαι, Plat. Protag. p. 310. b. 


168 § 98. VERBS.—PERFECT PASSIVE. 


fh. 


Nore 4. Some verbs change the dipthong sv, which they have in 
the Present or assume in the Future, into v in the Perf. Pass. e. g. τεύχω 
. {τέτευχα) τέτυγμαι. So also φεύγω and πγέω (πνεύσω, πέπνευχα) πέπνῦμαι. 
In χέω (χεύσω) this takes place even in the Perf. Act. χέχύκα, κέχύμαι.---- 
For the variable quantity of some verbs in ἕω and ὕω, see § 95. n. 4. 

Nore 5. The o in the Perf. Pass. comes strictly from a lingual per- 
taining to the root itself, which before uw is changed into o according to 
§23; but which has nevertheless been preserved unchanged in some few 
forms in the epic writers; as χέκαδμαι, πέφραδμαι, from KAAJN (see the 
Anom. καίνυμαι), poate ; κεχόρυϑμαι from KOPTOR* κορύσσω. 

Nore 6. The σ is however assumed by many verbs which have no lin- 
gual, but a vowel as their characteristic ; 6. g. 
ἀκούω ἤκουσμαι, κελεύω κεκέλευσμαι. 

So also πρέω, zolw, παλαίω, πταίω, δαίω, ϑραύω; ὕω, βύω, ξύω ; further yoo 
κέχωσμαι. Regularly too it is assumed by all those verbs which do not 
change the short vowels} 6, g. τελέω (τελέσω) τετέλεσμαι ; 50 also ξέω, axéo- 
μαι, σπάω, Thaw, ἀνύω. But the usage here must in part be left to obser- 
vation..—F or χλείω and tiw see the Anom. verbs. 

Nore 7. When vy would come to stand before mu, one y falls away ; 
e. g. ἐλέγχω Perf. ἐλήλεγχα Pass. ἐλήλεγμαι, σφίγγω--- ἔσφιγμαιὁ The oth- 
er endings commonly remain unchanged, 6. g. ἐλήλεγξαι, γκται, etc. 
ἔσφιγξαι, etc. : 

Nore 8. So when the Perf. Pass. must have wu, and there comes in 
addition another mw from the root, one of them of course falls away; e.g. 

᾿κάμπτω---χέκαμμαι, κέκαμψαι, etc. 

4. The Subjunctive and Optative are in general not formed at all ; 
partly on account of the difficulty of their formation, and partly because 
they are so little needed. Instead of them a circumlocution with etvae 
is employed ; e.g. τετυμμένος (7, ov) ὦ and εἴην. 

Note 9. ‘That is to say, these moods are formed only when there is a 
vowel before the ending, which readily passes over into the endings of the 
Subjunctive, and likewise unites itself with the characteristic ὁ of the Op- 

_ tative; e.g. 
κτάομαι, κέκτημαι 

Subj. χέχτωμαι, η, ται, ete. 

Opt. κεχτήμην, κέκτῃο, κέχτῃτο, etc. 
All the examples of such a formation, however, which are now extant, 
consist of a few single forms of Perfects of three syllables, all belonging to 
anomalous verbs. 'Thus’Plato has Subj. éxtétuyjoDoy from τέμνω τέτμη-- 
poo; Andocides has διαβέβλησϑε from βάλλω βέβλημαι. See also χέχλη-- 
μαι and μέμνημαν under the Anom. χαλέω and μιμγήσχω.---ϑὸόο when the 
stem-vowel is « or v, the Optative may be formed by swallowing up the 


| * That this ϑ' is a radical letter, is confirmed by the substantive κόρυς, Gen. 
πυϑὸς ; otherwise it might be regarded as inserted in the ancient manner instead 
of 6, as xAavduds, ὀρχηϑμός, § 119. n. 3: 


t There can be no doubt, that this single y then retains the nasal sound ng; 
comp. § 4.3. . 


ἰὴ 99, 100. verss.—ruT. 3 AND Aor. PASSIVE. 169 


characteristic 1, by which means the radical vowel becomes long; but the 
Homeric λελῦτο Od. σ, 238 from λύω λέλυμαι ( 95. n. 4), is probably the 
only example extant.*—There is also another Optative form from κέχτημαι, 
νἱΖ. κεκτῴ μην, as also from μέμνημαν--μεμν μην, Ion. μεμγεῴμην, 
of which the following examples occur; Eurtp. Heracl. 283 χεχτῴμεϑα, 
Xen. Cyr. 1. 6. 3 μεμνῷτο, Il. ψ, 361 μεμγέῳτο. These are formed in a 
peculiar manner, viz. by appending to the syllables zexry, weurn, of the 
Perf. the termination ouyy of the Opt. Present, χεχτηοίμην, wsurnotuny ; 
hence Ion. χεχτεῴμην, μεμνεῴμην, and Att. xextouyy, μεμνῴμην. See the 
Anom. χτάω, μιμνήσχω; and comp. the Ausf. Sprachl. §98.n.17. Fi- 
scher ad Weller 111, 185. Heyne ad Il. y, 361. 


§ 99. Third Future. 


The Future 3 or Paulopost-future of the Passive, is derived from the 
‘Perfect Pass. both as to its form and signification (ὃ 138). It retains 
the augment of the Perfect, and substitutes the ending σομαν instead of the 
ending of the Perfect. From the 2 pers. of the Perf. in ous, (was, ξαι,) 
therefore, it is only necessary to change αὐ into omas, in order to form 
the Fut. 3; 6. ¢. 

τέτυμμαν (τέτυψαι!) — τετύψομαι. 
τέτραμμαν (τέτραψαι) ---- τετράψομαι 
πεφίλημαν (πεφίλησαι) ---- πεφιλήσομαι 
MEMELO MEL (πέπεισαν) — πεπείσομαιυ. 


Norte 1. In those verbs where the vowel of the Fut. 1 is shortened in 
the Perfect, the Fut. 3 assumes again the long vowel; 6, g. δεδήσομαι, λε-- 
λύσομαι, see ὃ 95. n. 4.4 


Nore 2. The Fut.3 is never found in the verbs 4uyvo; and very 
rarely in verbs which have the temporal augment. 
§ 100. First and Second Aorist Passive. 


1. All verbs form the Aorist of,the Passive either in. ϑὴν, or simply 
in Ἦν ; many have both forms at once. ‘The former is called Aorist 1, 
the latter Aorist 2. (§ 89. 3.) ) 


2. The Aor. 1 Passive appends ϑὴν to the characteristic of the 


verb; e.g. | 
, ΄ 5 7 
παίδευὼ — ἑπαιδευϑὴν 
’ > ’ 
στέφω — ἐστεφϑην. 


* T remark further, that while some have preferred to write xexr7rac, λελῦ-- 
ro etc.with the circumflex, I have adopted that accentuation which is found in 
a portion of the manuscripts, and which alone is supported by analogy. Thus 
κέκτωμαι and χέκτητο must have the same relation to χέχτημαε, and also λέλῦτο 
to λέλυμαι, that τύπτωμαν and τύπτοιτο have to τύπτομαι. See the Ausfihrl. 
Sprachl. with the additions. 

+ It must not be inferred from this, that the Fut. 3 is formed from the Fut. 1 with 
the reduplication; for whether the teteéwoua above given really occurs, is / 
more than I know; but the forms which are actually found, βεβλήσομαι, κεκλήσο-- 
μαι, (see the Anom. βάλλω, καλέω,) must be referred to the Perfect. 


170 § 100. VERBS.—AORIST PASSIVE. 


It follows here of course from § 20, that when the characteristic of the 
verb is a smooth or middle mute, it is exchanged for the corresponding 
rough mute ; e.g. 
λείπω, ἀμείβω --- ἐλείφϑην, ἠμείφϑην 
λέγω, ve — ἐλέχϑην, ἐπλέχϑην 
τύπτω (ΤΎΠΛ --- ἐτύφϑην 
ὲ τάσσω (TAT) --- ἐταχϑην. 


3. As to other changes of the root or stem, which have place in the se- 
ries of the Fut. 1, (or Series IT in αὶ 93. 4 δ the Aor. 1 Pass. conforms 
chiefly to the Perf. Passive. Thus, in the same circumstances, it as- 
sumes 0; e.g. 

feel Bi (πέπεισμαι) — ἐπείσϑην- 

κομίζω (κεκόμεσμαι) — ἐκομίσϑην 

τελέω (τετέλεσμαι) — ἐτελέσϑην. 
In most instances, it'also changes the vowel of the preceding syllable in 
the same manner as the Perf. Passive; 6. g. 

ποίξω (πεποίημαι) ---- ἐποιήϑην 

τιμαὼ (τετίμημαιδ) --- ἐτιμηϑην 

τεύχω (τέτυγμαι) --- ἐτύχϑην. 

Nore 1. A few verbs which have a vowel for the characteristic, assume 
o in the Aorist 1 Passive, although they do not have it in the Perfect 
Passive ; e.g. παύω, πέπαυμαι --- A. 1 ἐπαύϑην and ᾿ἐπαύσϑην' μνάομαι, 
πἰδινη μαι ϑανήσθηνς ; see also the Anom. aw, χράω, πετάννυμι. —That 
on the other hand ἐσώϑην from σώζω does not take the σ, arises from ἃ 
double form; see σώζω in § 114. 


Nove 2, For those verbs in ἕω, which in the Perf. Pass. have ἡ, 58 
in the Aor. 1 Pass. again take s, see § 95. n. 4. 


Nore 3. Those which without being verbs 2 mu » 9, change in the 
Perf. Pass. their ¢ into « (ὃ 98, n. 3), retain here their 8 ; e.g. στρέφω 
(ἔστραμμαι)--ἐστρέφϑην" τρέπω, ἐτρέφϑην" τρέφω, ἐθρέφϑην.---Βαΐ the 1ο- 
nics and Dorics have ἐτράφϑην, ἐστράφϑην. 

4. The Aorist 2 Passive appends ἣν to the simple characteristic of 
the verb; and follows in this respect all the rules given above under the 
Aor. 2 Active. Hence it is only necessary to form this latter tense, 
whether in actual use or not, and then change ov into 7v; 6. g. 

τύπτω, ἔτυπον — ἐτύπην 
τρέπω, ἔτραπον --- ἐτράπην. 

Note 4. The Jor. 2 Passive is in reality nothing more than a softer 
form of the Aor. 1 Passive. , Hence it comes, that this tense so very 
commonly (yet for the most part only in primitive verbs) exists along with 
the Aor. 1; and that in most verbs whose Aor. 1 ends in χϑὴν or φϑὴν, 
it is even more used than that tense. In such cases the Aor. 1 is em- 
ployed for the most part enly by the poets, when they need a long sylla- 


ble; or by the tragedians, who prefer full and antique sounding words. 
Still, in many verbs, even in prose writers, these two Aorists are used 


§ 101. verss 1n A μιν ρ. wa 


alternately ; and the usage seems to have been regulated in a great meas- 
ure by a regard to euphony. 


Note 5, Although the formation of the Aor. 2 Pass. corresponds so 
exactly with that of the Aor, 2 Act. that the former is in grammar deriyed 
from the latter; yet the Aor. 2 Pass. is in fact entirely independent of the 
other; inasmuch as in almost all verbs which have the Aor, 2 Pass. the 
Aor. 2 Active is not in use ; as in ἐχλάπην from χλέπτω" ἐκρύβην, ἐτύπην, 
ἐβλάβην, ἐῤῥίφην, from κρύπτω, τύπτω, βλάπτω, δίπτω" ἐτράφην from τρέφω. 
The verb τρέπω alone prefers the Aor. 2, (in the forms given above in no. 
4,) both in the Active and Passive. 

Nore 6. In the Passive, it is impossible to confound the Aor. 2 and 
the Imperfect, which is so easily done in the Active. Hence, therefore, 
such verbs as cannot for this reason form an Aor. 2 Active (§ 96. 3), have 
nevertheless the Aor. 2 Passive. In such instances, this tense can be 
formed from the Imperfect Active, just as elsewhere from the Aor. 2 
Active; except that according to the rule, the long vowel becomes short 
in the Aor. 9, E. g. 

γράφω (Imperf. ἔγραφον) --- ἐγράφην 
τρίβω (Imperf. éreiSov) --- ἐτρίβην (short 1). 

Nore 7. It is for this reason, that some verbs whose stem-vowel is 
¢, form the Aor. 2. Pass. without changing the ¢ into α ; 6. g. φλέγω---ἐφλέ- 
γὴν ; S80 also λέγω (see ὁ 114), βλέπω, ete.—For the retaining of the long 
vowel in ἐπλήγην, see the Anom. πλήσσω. 

Nore 8. The verb ψύχω commonly assumes y in the Aor. 2 Pass. as 
ἐψύγην, ψυγῆναι. See the Ausfiihrl. Sprachl. 

‘Nore 9. The characteristics δ, %, τ, are not found in the Aor. 2 
Passive. There are also no examples of a vowel before the ending, ex- 
cept ἐχκάην from καέω, and these three, which have an Active signification, 
viz. ἐδάην, ἐῤδύην, ἐφύην ; see the Anom. 44-, ῥέω, piw. All other verbs 
in ὦ pure and contracted, and all verbs in 0w, Fw, ζω, have only the first 
Aor. Passive. . 

Nore 10.. Finally, there is an obvious coincidence, both in form and 
flexion, between the two Aorists Passive, and the Active forms of Verbs in 
μι. Compare the Aorists Pass. in the Paradigm of τύπτω, with the Imper- 
fect and subordinate moods of the Present of τύϑημι. 


§ 101. Vers tn ὁ mv θ. 


1. Verbs whose characteristic is one of the letters 4, u, v, @, deviate 
so often from other verbs in the formation of their tenses, that it is here 
necessary to bring the whole together into one view. 

2. These verbs do not commonly form the Future in ow, or Fut. 1 ; 
but always take the Future 2. (§ 95.11.) Thus 

νέμω — Fut. Ion. νεμέξω, comm. νεμῶ. 

μένω ---- Fut. Ion. μενέω, comm. μενῶ. 
The further flexion is, νεμῶ εἴς εἶ" οὔμεν εἴτε οὖσιν. ‘Mid. οὗμαι εἴ 
εἴται, οἰο. See the Paradigm of ἀγγέλλω. This whole form of flexion 
is also to be compared with that of contract verbs in ἕω, § 105. 


172 δ 101. verss In A mu ν ρ. 


3. The syllable before the ending, if long in the Present, is in this 

Future made short,’e. g. | ' 
ψάλλω, στέλλω —F. ψαλῶ, στελῶ. 
κρίνω, ἀμύνω --- F. κρινῶ, ἀμυνώ. 

The diphthong αὐ is changed into ἃ, and εὐ into ¢; e.g. 
σαίρω, κτείνω --- F. σαρῶ, xtevw.* 

Nore 1. The Ionic forms, 6. g. ἀγγέλλω F. ἀγγελέω ; κρίνέω, κτενέω, 
gavéw from φαένω, xhivéw from πλύνω, etc. Plur. gousy etc. are explained 
from § 95.8, 10. For the Doric-Ionic forms with the contraction ¢o into 
sv, 6. 5. βαλεῦμεν, βαλεῦμαι, see ὃ 95. n. 17.—For the forms of Futures in 
-ow in these verbs, see note 3, 

_ 4, These verbs form the Aorisé 1 in like manner without 6, and sim- 
ply in α. They retain in this tense the characteristic as it is found in 
the Future; but make the syllable before the ending again Jong. This 
is done however independently of the Present; either by simply length- 
ening the vowel of the Future, e. g. 
τίλλω (tido) — ἐτῖλα 
κρίνω (xoiva) — ἔκρῖνα 
ἀμύνω (αμυνῶ) --- ἤμῦνα, 
or by changing ¢ of the Fut. into δύ, and α commonly into 7; 6. g. 
μένω, στέλλω, τείνω, 
(μενῶ, στελῶ, τενῶ) --- ἔμεινα, ἔστειλα, ἔτεινα 
ψάλλω, φαίνω, . 
(ψαλῶ, φανῶ) ---- ἔψηλα, ἔφηνα. 
Several verbs however which have αὐ in the Present, take long ἃ in the 
Aor. 1; e.g. ; 
᾿περαίνω, περανῶ — ἐπέρανα Inf. περᾶναι. 

Nore 9. The long @ is assumed by verbs in -gadyw and -ταἕνω, 6. g. 
εὐφρᾶναι, μαθᾶναι,---πιαίνω πιᾶναι. Exceptions are τετρῆγαν and μιῆναι. 
Most other verbs in αἷνω and afew are always found among the Attics 

‘with 3 6. g. σημαίνω σημῆναι,---χαλεπῆναι, λυμήνασϑαι, ete.—éyFaign 
ἐχϑῆραι,--καϑῆραι, etc.—Exceptions nevertheless are χοιλᾶγαι, Asuxiyon, — 
πεπᾶναι, κερδᾶναι, ὁργᾶναι, ἰσχνᾶναι. Later writers, or the κοιροί (δ 1. 9), 
form also many others with long a, as σημαίνω, μιαίνω, ἐχϑαίρω, etc. The 
Dorics of course always do the same; while the Ionics almost everywhere 
have their 7.—The verbs αἴρω take up and ἄλλομαι leap, with initial ἃ, 

- have ἃ in the Aor. 1; which in the Indicative only, because of the aug- 

ment, passes over it into 7; thus ἦρα, ἄραι, ἄρας, etc. ἡλάμην, ἅλασϑαι, etc. 


* Other instances where this shortening would be requisite, e.g. in verbs in 
evo, dum, ow, or with the vowels 7, ov, etc. never occur in the common lan- 
guage ; and the old poetical verbs, whence come the forms ἔπετνον, ϑέρμετο, 
etc. are entirely defective; while the similar ones in the common language, 
δάχνω, τέμνω, κάμνω, βούλομαι, are anomalous. ᾿ 

t It is here necessary to caution the learner against two errors. First, nothing is 
more common, than to find ἦρα, ἄραι, guinva, etc. written with ¢ subscript ; which 


§ 101. verbs IN A μὶ ν ρ. 173 


Nore 3. The old language and the Molics formed the future 1 and 
Aorist 1 from these verbs with o; Hom. ἔχερσα, Theocr. ἕτερσα, from xet- 
ew, τείρω. This remained the sole form in some verbs even in the com- . 
mon language, ἃ5. κέλλω land, ἔκελσα ; φύρω knead, φύρσω. See also the 
Anom. ἀραρίσκω, κυρέω, ὄρνυμι. 

5. The Aorist 2 retains the vowel as it is in the Future, 6. g. 

βάλλω (Badlw) — ἔβαλον. ’ 
φαίνω (φανῶ) --- A. 2 Pass. ἐφάνην 
κλίνω (xdivw) — A. 2 Pass. ἐκλίνην (short +) 
excepting that ὁ in the Fut. of dissyllabic verbs, passes over into α, 
comp. § 96.6. E. g. Pies 
κτείνω (reve) — éxrovoy - 
στέλλω (στελῶ) A.2 Pass. ἐστάλην. 

Verbs of more than two, syllables retain the ¢; 6. g. ἀγγέλω — ἤγγελον, 

ἡγγέλην. | | 

Nore 4. The Aor. 2 Act. is in use only in the smaller number of these 
verbs ; and where both Aorists are found, the Aor. 2 is chiefly poetical ; 
thus éxtayoyr is less frequent than éxtevyo.*—In the Passive on the contrary,’ ~ 
the Aor. 1, when it retains the consonant before the 3, is commonly pecu- 
liar to the poets (comp. ὃ 100. n. 4); and the or. 2 is here the most usual ; 
6.5. φαίνω ἐφάνην, στέλλω ἐστάλην, σφάλλω ἐσφάλην, πείρω éxogny.—Still 
αἴρω and all verbs of more than two syllables, have only the Aor. 1 Pas- 
sive; except ἀγχγέλω, from which come ἡγγέλϑην and ἠγγέλην. 

6. The Perfect 2 of these verbs is already included in the rules 
above given, §97.2,3. E.g. ie 

ϑαλλω — τέϑηλα φαίνω --- πέφηνα. 
These verbs have the peculiarity, that the diphthong e+ of the Present 
_ passes over in the Perf. 2, not into οὐ, but into 0; because, as appears 
᾿ς from the Future, this diphthong ¢¢ arises not from a radical vowel ὁ, 
but from ¢ (Ὁ 97 4.c); e.g. . 
κτείνω (κτενὼ) — ἔκτονα 
᾿φϑείρω (φϑερῶ) --- ἔφϑορα. 

7%. The'Perfect 1 Active, the Perf. Pass. and the Aorist 1 Passive, 
follow in like manner the general rules, and annex the endings xa, uae, 
ϑην, etc. to the characteristic, retaining the changes of the Future ; e. g. 

σφαάλλω (σφαλὼ) ---- ἔσφαλκα, ἔσφαλμαυ 

φαίνω (φανῶ) --- πέφαγκα, ἐφάνϑην 

αἴρω (ἀρῶ) --- ἦρκα, ἤρμαι, Part. ἡρμένος 
' ἤρϑην, Part. ἀρϑείς. 


is incorrect on the same grounds as above in the Perf. 2 (δ 97. 4. marg. note). 
Secondly, we often find in otherwise good editions the accentuation wéewavar, 
φημάναι, etc. the incorrectness of which is sufficiently apparent from the above, 
and from ὃ 1]. \ ΄ 


νυ * So also of ἀγγέλω, whose Aor. 2 Act. is even doubted; because it only 


114 § 101. veRBS IN 4 uv ρ. 


Here too the Perf. Pass. drops the o of the endings odo, oe, etc, as 
in ᾧ 98. 2; 6. δ. 

ἔσφαλμαι, 2 Pl. ἔσφαλϑε 

φύρω, πέφυρμαν, Inf. πεφύρϑαι. 
These tenses have here further the following peculiarities. 

8. When the Future has δ, these tenses in dissyllabic verbs take 
a; e, . 

στέλλω (στελῶ) — ἔσταλκα, ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλϑην 
(A. 2 Pass. ἐσταλην) 
‘ neiow {(περώ) — πέπαρκα, πέπαρμαν 
(A. 2 Pass. ἐπαρην). 

Norte 5. Verbs of more than two syllables regularly retain the « un- 
changed ; e.g. ἀγέλλω---ἤγγελκα, ἡγγέλϑην. And those dissyllables which 
begin with ε retain it; thus wou, ἕερμαι, from Anom. sido, εἴρω. 

9. The following verbs in ivw, εἰνω, ve, viz. 

“κρίνω, κλίνω, τείνω, κτείνω, πλύνω, 
drop the ν in these tenses, and assume the short vowel of the Future ; 
but in such a way, that those in ξένω change the 8 into «, as in the 
preceding rule; 68. δ. | 


ve ἼΝ ? ν . ν 
κρίνω (κρνώ) — κέχρήκα, κέχρίμαι, ExoiOny 
~ ν » υ 
τείνω (τενὼ) --- τέτακα, τέταμαι, ἐταϑην Ἐ 


, ~ τ " "Ὅν vv 
πλύυνὼ (πλυνὼ) --- πέπλυκα, πέπλυμαι, ἐπλύϑην. 


Nove 6. In the for. 1 Pass..the ν is often retained in poetry, in order 
to form a position 5 e.g. χταγϑείς, διακρινϑ εἴς, salt ἐπλύνϑη. The 
same occurs in the prose of later writers. 


Notre 7. Verbs which retain the » occasion some difficulty in the 
Perfect Passive. 'They retain it however unchanged : 
a) In the 2 pers. Sing. where it remains even before o; 6. ὃ: φαίνω---- 
σπέφανσαι. 

b) Before the endings which begin with σϑ'; where however (‘Text 7) 
the σ gives way before the » and is dropped j 6, g. Inf. πεφάνθαι" 
τραχύνω, Inf. τετραχύνϑαι. 

c) In the 3 pers. Sing. e. g. ἜΦΘΗ he has appeared, παρώξυνται he has 
become angry. 

Whether the 3 pers. Plur. was also formed in this latter manner is doubt- ἢ 
ful; e.g. χέχρανταν Eurip. Hipp. 1255 from χραίνω, where consequently 
the v must have fallen away; comp. note 8, 

Nore 8. Before the endings beginning with yw, there is a threefold 

usage in regard to the v: 
a) The vis regularly changed into u; 6. g. 
ἤσχυμμαι Hom. Il. σ, 180. from αἰσχύγω 
ἐξήραμμαν Athen. 3. p. 80. d. from ξηραίγω. 


᾿ς needed the casual omission of an ὁ or A in copying, to produce this form. See the 
Ausf. Sprachl. in the catalogue of Anom. Verbs. 


* Compare alsothe Anom. PENQ πέφαμαι. It is not necessary to have re- 
course to obsolete themes, as 7.42, KT AQ, PAX. 


§102. VERBALS IN τέος AND τός. 175 


δὴ Most commonly, o is assumed instead of the v; 6. g. 
paiva, waive (φανῶ, μιαγῶ) ---- πέφασμαι, μεμίασμαι. 
c) Less frequently the v is dropped and the vowel made long; 6. g. 
τετραχυμένος Arist. H. A, 4. 9. 

These two last modes may also be explained from the circumstance, that 
the endings aiyw and ὕγω are originally lengthened forms from éw and ὕω." 

Note 9. The few verbs in uw (νέμω, δέμω, βρέμω, τρέμω) can ‘follow 
the general analogy only in the Fut. and Aorist ; they are therefore partly 
defective, and partly they pass over, as also μένω, for the sake of euphony, 
into the form in ἕω ; thus μεμένηκα, νενέμηκα, ἐνεμήϑην, δέδμηκα, ete. See 
in Anom. Verbs, and comp. § 112. 8. | 


§ 102. Verpats IN τέος AND TOS. 


1. With the formation of the tenses, it is necessary to connect that 
of the two Verbal Adjectives in τέος and τός; which, in signification and 
use, approach very near to the participles. See note 2. . 

2. Both these endings’always have the tone, and are appended imme- 
diately to the characteristic of the verb; which therefore must be 
changed according to the general rules. At the same time, the radical 
vowel is in many cases changed. All these changes coincide with 
those in the formation of the Aorist 1 Passive; except that where the 
Aorist has g@, 43, these forms of course have mr, xr. We can there- 
fore everywhere compare the 3 Sing. Perf. Pass. which likewise has r ; 
except that this differs, in many verbs, both from the Aor. 1 and from 
these verbals, in regard to the radical or stem-syllable. 

3. Thus there is formed from Ξ 
πλέκω (πέπλεκται, ἐπλέχϑην) — πλεχτέος, πλεκτός 
λέγω (λέλεκται, ἐλέχϑην) ἈἈ----λεκτὸς 
γράφω (γέγραπται, ἐγραφϑην) — γραπτὸς 
στρέφω (ἔστραπται, ἐστρέφϑη»ν) ---στρεπτός 


᾿φώραω (πεφώραται, éepwoadny) — φωρατέος 
φιλέω (πεφίληται, ἐφιλήϑην) ᾿ — φιλητέος 
αἱρέω (ἥρηται, ἠρέϑη νὴ — αἱρετὸς 
παύω (πέπαυται, ἐπαύσϑην) --- παυστέος 
στέλλω (ἔσταλται, ἐσταλϑην) — - σταλτέος 
τείνω (τέταται, ἐταϑην) — τατέος 

᾿χέω (κέχυται, ἐχύϑην) — χυτὸς 
πνέω (πέπνυται, ἐπνεύσϑην) --- πνευστός. 


* The Perfect 1 Active also fluctuates between the two modes of formation, in 
yuo. and xo; because it was so seldom required (ὃ 97. n. 6), that writers probably 
formed it mostly according to the ear. We find, though not in the earlier 
writers, πέφαγκα, μεμίαγκα, and ἐβεβραδύκει, κεκέρδακα or -ηκα. See the cata- 
logue of Anom. Verbs, § 114 


176 § 103. verBs.—BAaRYTONEs. | 


Nore 1. In the earlier Tonic and Attic, the o in many verbals in τός 
is sometimes dropped; especially in compounds like ἀδάματος, πάγκλαυ- 
tog. The poets could even form ϑαυματός, from ϑαυμάζω. 


Nore 2. As to the signification of these verbals, e. δ. στρεπτός turned 
about and one who can be turned about ; στρεπτέος one who must be turned 
about, Neut. στρεπτέον corresponding to the Lat. vertendum est ; and also 
as to the other peculiarities of usage ;—the full discussion of them can have 
place only in the Syntax. See § 134. 8 sq. 


§ 103. Parapiem or BaryToNE VERBS. 


1. The conjugation of all the above verbs, and likewise the details 
of the inflection by persons and moods, will now be brought together 
and exemplified, first, in a general example of an ordinary barytone 
verb, viz. τύπτω. Then follow some particular examples, in order to 
render conspicuous the difference of usage in different verbs ;-and last 
ofall, an example from the class in 4 w v 0, viz. ἀγγέλλω. 

2. A Barytone Verb is properly the verb in its natural state (ᾧ 10. 2) ; 
since in this the ending of the Present is always unaccented. It stands 
in opposition to those verbs which contract the two last syllables, and 
whose ending therefore has the circumflex, viz. Contract Verbs ( Verba 
Contracta or Perispomena), for which see § 105. 


‘ 


- ' ' 
§ 103. vERBS.—PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 177 


PARADIGM 


of the Barytone Verb τύπτω. 


PRELIMINARY Novres. 


jf The verb τύπτω, which, we Sines for a paradigm, is not so ill 
adapted to this purpose as many suppose. As it is necessary in Greek to 
exhibit the, whole system of conjugation in one verb, it would be difficult 
to find one more convenient for this purpose than τύπτω ; since it is 
only in a verb, which like this has a fuller form in the Present, that the 
appropriate nature of the Aor. 2 is specified above in 96, 2) can ‘be ful- 
ly exhibited. 


2. It must be inculcated on the learner, that τύπτω appears here merely 
as Paradigm, i.e. as a model to exhibit in one view all that occurs in the 
different verbs of this sort. It must be remembered too, that neither in 
τύπτω nor in any other single verb, are all those forms in use, whose 
models are here exhibited together. See § 104.* 


3. In order however not to carry this principle too far, we have inserted 
in the paradigm of τύπτω, only those forms which are justified by the anal- 
ogy ΟΥ̓ similar verbs; as the Aor. 2 Act. and Perf. 2. In the systems of 
earlier Grammarians the 

Future 2 Active and Middle 


stood also in the paradigm, But since this belongs only to verbs 4 u ν 9, 
we omit it here, and insert it rather in the paradigm of these verbs, ἀγχέλλω, 
where it is inflected throughout. 

͵ 


4, In order to embrace the whole at a single view, we give first a Synop- 
tical Table, which exhibits the first person of the inflected moods, the 
second person of the Imperative, the Infinitive, and the Masculine of the 
Participles, through all the tenses of the. Active, Passive, and Middle. 
Then follows the verb τύπτω, inflected throughout. 


5. The notes on the Accent of the verb, and on the peculiarities of the 
Dialects, follow at the end of all the paradigms in this section. 


* Those forms from τύπτω which are in actual use, see in the catalogue of 
Anom. verbs; to which τύπτω belongs on account of the Attic form of the 
Future, τυπτήσω, which is not given in the paradigm. 


178 § 103. veRBS.—PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 
Synoptical 
ACT- 
4 
Indicative. Suljunctive. 
Present τύπτω τύπτω 
Imperfect ἔτυπτον 
Perfect 1 τἕτυφα τετύφω 
Pluperfect 1 ἐτετυφειν , 
Perfect 2 τέτυπα τετύπω' 
Pluperfect 2 ἐτετύπειν 
Future 1 τύψω - 
Aorist 1 ἔτυψα τύψω 
Future 2 (See in Parad. of pclae 
Aorist 2 ἕτυπον | τύπω 
PAS- 
Present τύπτομαν TURTO MOL 
Imperfect ἐτυπτόμην 
Perfect. TETUMM CLL — * 
Pluperfect ἐτετύμμην 
Future 1 τυφϑήσομαι -- 
Aorist 1 ἐτύφϑην tugda 
Future 2 ! τυπήσομαι a 
Aorist 2 ἐτύπην TUN 
Future 3 TETUWOMAL -ο 
ι bikes MID- 
Present and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. see in the Passive. 
Future 1 | τύψομαι -- 
Aorist 1 ἐτυψάμην τύψωμαι 
Future 2 (See in Parad. of ἀγγέλλω) 
Aorist 2 ἐτυπόμην | τύπωμαῦ 


* This Subjunctive and Optative can be formed in only a very few verbs ; ; see 
junctive and Optative of the verb ejui; as τετυμμένος (η» ov) ὦ and εἴην; ; see 


' 


δ 103. veRBS.—PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 179 
Table. 
IVE. 

Optative. _ Imperative. Infinitive. Partic iples. 
TUNTOLML τύπτε TUNTEW τύπτων 
TETUPOUML TELUYE τετυφέναι τετυφὼς 
τετυποίμι τέτυπε τετυπέναν τετυπώς 

’ ’ 
Tuporue ae Tupe τύψων 
TUWOLUL τυψον TUWaL τύψας 
τύποιμι TUNE TUNEL τυπὼν 
SIVE. 
τυπτοίμην τύπτου τὐπτεσϑαι τυπτόμενος 
ὃς ’ f : , 

- TETUWO TEetvgoas TETUMMEVOS 
τυφϑησοίμην = τυφϑήσεσϑαι τυφϑησόμενος 
τυφϑείην τυφϑητι τυφϑῆναν τυφϑείς 
τυπησοίμην ne τυπήσεσϑαν ; τυπησόμενος 
τυπείην τυπηϑὺ τυπῆναυ TUNES 

, ᾽ Υ͂ 
τετυψοίμην — τετυψέσϑαν TETUWOMEVOS 
DLE. 
τυψοίμην — τύψεσϑαι τυψόμενος 

, 
TUWOLUNY — TUWaL tUpacdae TUWOMEVOS 
τυποίμην | τυποῦ τυπέσϑαυ τυπόμενος 


.n.9. In most cases they are ene by a circumlocution with the Sub- 
8, 4. § 108. IV. 


4 


i ae Rh Wiebke Calm ame 
ane iy bs i Ἢ [ 
| me 
180 § 103. veRBS.—PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 
ACT- 
li Indicative. Subjunctive. ~ | Optative. 

Pres- S. τύπτω I strike : τύπτω I strike TUNTOLUL 1 would 
ent. τύπτεις thou'strikest | τύπτῃς τύπτοις [strike 
τύπτει he, she, it strikes | tunty τύυπτοῦ 

ἱ τύπτετον ye two strike | τύπτητον TUMTOLTOY 
TUMTETOY they two strike τυπτήτον τυπτοίτην 
P. TUMTOMED we strike TUNTO MED τὐπτοιμὲν 
τύπτετὲ ye strike τυπτητὲ TUNTOLTE 
: τύπτουσι (v) they strike | τὐπτωσε (ν) TUNTOLEY 
Im-_ Κ΄. ἔτυπτον D — Pp. ἐτύπτομεν 
per- ἕτυπτες ἐτύπτετον ἐτύπτετε I struck, thou 
fect. ἔτυπτε (ν.)) ἐἔτυπτέτην ἔτυπτον 
Ρει- 8. τέτυφα Τλαῦε struck, οἰο. |. τετύφω TETUPOLME 
fect τέτυφας like the like the 
1 τέτυφε (vr) : Present. Present. 
TETUPATOY 
TETUPATOY 
εν τετυφαμὲν 
τετυφατὲ 
τεευφασὶ (ν) 
ΡΙυρὲ S. ἐτετύφειν Di r; ἐτετύφειμεν . 
1 ἐτετύφεις ἐτετυφειτον ἐτετύφειτε I had 
ἐτετύφει ἐτετυφείτην  ἐτετύφεισαν οἵ ἔσαν 
Perf. ὦ τέτυπα, through all the moods like the hin 1, 
Plupf. 2 ἐτετύπειν, like the Plupf. 1. 
ἜδΕ 1. S. τύψω Iwill strike ~ Subjunctive | rupouue 
_ like the Present. wanting like the Present. 
Aor. 1. 8. ἔτυψα 1 strike, or have τύψω τύψαιμι 
ἔτυψας  [struck, οἷο. | like the τύψαις Or 
Present. ᾿ τυψειας Ἐ 
ἔτυψε (v) τύψαν oF 
| τυψεῖε (v) 
Ὦ. " — a 
ἐτύψατον τυψαιτον 
ἐτυψάτην | τυψαίτην 
my , τὰ ἐτύψαμεν τυψαιμὲν 
ἐτύψατε ᾿ τυψαυτὲ 
ἕτυψαν ᾿ | TUWaLEey OF 
} ruwecay™ 
Aor. 2. étumoy τύπω | τύποιμιὲ 
like the Imperfect. like the Present. 


* See below, note II. 4. 


ὁ σὰς ον ihe 3 


δ 103. veRBs.—PARADIGM OF TUTTO. 181 


iVE. 
Imperative. 


τύπτε strike 
τυπτέτω let him, her, it strike 


τύπτετον strike (both) 
τυπτέτων let them (both) strike 


TUNTETE strike ye 


, Infinit. 
TUNTELW 
_ to strike 


τυπτέτωσαν OF τυπτόντων let them strike 


Particip. 
TUNT OY 
τύπτουσα 
τύπτον 

striking 
. G. τύπτοντος 


didst strike, etc. 


| τετυφέναν τετυφὼς 
TETUGE τετυφυῖα 
wale ‘ 
like the Present. TETUPOS 
Gen. 
Ul 
TETUMPOTOS 
struck, etc. 
. 7 
Imperat. wanting TUWEw τύψων 
like the Pres. 
͵ 
TUWaL τὐψᾶς 
ae . τύὐψᾶσα 
τυψον strike τύψαν. 

, Gen. 
TUWATO TUWAYTOS 
τύψατον a 
τυψάτων 
τύψατε 
τυψάτωσαν OY τυψάντων 
TUNE τυπεῖν τυπών, "οὖσα, ὃν 


like the Present. 


G. ὄντος 


182 


δ 103. verBs.—PaRapiem oF τύπτω. 


PAS- 
Indicative. Subjunct. Optat. 
Pres-° S. TURTOMOL TUNTO MCL τυπτοίμην 
ent. τὐπτῃ or é (see below, | τύπτῃ τύπτοιο 
τὐπτέταν _ note III. 3) TUMENT OL τὐπτούτο 
D. τυπτόμεϑον τυπτώμεϑον τυπτοίμεϑον 
τύπτεσϑον τύυπτησϑον TUnTOLO DOV 
τὐπτεσϑον τύπτησϑον τυπτοίσϑην 
P: τυπτόμεϑα τυπτώμεϑα τυπτοίμεϑα 
τύπτεσϑε τὐπτησϑὲ τύπτοισϑε 
τυπτονταῦ TUNTOVTUL TUNTOLYTO 
Im- ΚΝ, ἐτυπτόμην D. ἐτυπτόμεϑον ce ἐτυπτόμεϑα 
per- ἐτύπτου ἐτύπτεσϑον ἐτύπτεσϑε 
fect. ELUNTETO ἐτυπτέσϑην ἐτύπτοντο 
Per-_ S. τέ Tum mae See note to the Table on p. 178. 
fect. rervwou 
τέτυπται 
D. τετύμμεϑον 
τέτυφϑον 
τέτυφϑον 
Pr. τετύμμεϑα 
τέτυφϑε 
3 pers. wanting; for it τέτυμμένου (αι) εἰσίν 
Plupf. S. ἐτετύμμην D. ἐτετύμμεϑον P, ἐτετύμμεϑα 
ἐτέτυψο ἐτέτυφϑον ἐτέτυφϑε 
ἐτέτυπτο ἐτετύφϑην ᾿ 3 pers. wanting ; for it τέὲ- 
Fat. 1. τυφϑήσομαυ Subjunct. want- τυφϑησοίμην 
τυφϑήσῃ or ét, etc. like ing. τυφϑησοιῦ ete. 
the Present. like the Pres. 
Aor. 1. 5. ἐτύφϑην τυφϑὼ τυφϑείην 
ἐτύφϑης τυφϑῆς τυφϑείης 
ἐτύφϑη τυφϑῇ ἘΦΘΕΘΙ 
dD - 
ἐτύφϑητον τυφϑῆτον τυφϑείητον 
ἐτυφϑήτην τυφϑῆτον τυφϑειήτην 
P. érupOnuev τυφϑῶμεν τυφϑείημεν 
4 τυφϑεῖμεν 
ἐτύφϑητε τυφϑητε τυφϑείητε 
τυφϑεῖτε 
ἐτύυφϑησαν τυφϑώσι(νυ) τυφϑείησαν 
τυφϑεῖεν 
Fut. 3. τυπήσομαν through all the moods 
Aor. 3. runny through all the moods 
Fut. 3. τετύψομαι through all the moods 


* The syncopated form is more commonly used in the 1 and 2 person; in the 


§ 103. verss.—Parapiem or τύπτω. 183 


SIVE. To be struck. 


Imperative. Infinitive. Participles. 
τύπτεσϑαν τυπτόμενος, 


; 
τυπτου N, Ov 
τυπτέεσϑω 


’ 
τυπτεσϑον 
τυπτέσϑων 


τὐύπτεσϑε 
, eZ 
TUNTECOWORY οἵ τυπτέσϑων 


τετύφϑαι. τς | τετυμμένος, 
τέτυψο “ ῃ, ον 
τετύφϑω 
τέτυφϑον 
τετυφϑων 
τέτυφϑε 
τετύφϑωσαν OF εἰ δον 
τυμμένου (αν) ἦσαν 
Imperat. wanting = τυφϑήσεσϑαν | τυφϑησόμενος, 
7 , ον 
τυφϑῆναι τυφϑείς 
τύφϑητι τυφϑεισα 
τυφϑήτω τυφϑεν 
' Gen. 
τυφϑήτον τυφϑέντος. 
τυφϑήτων 
τύφϑητε 
τυφϑήτωσαν 
like Fut. 1. 
like Aor. 1 
like Fut. 1. 


3 pers. almost always. 


184 


ts 
§ 103. vERBS.—PARADIGM OF τυήτω. 


Present and Imperfect, 


MID- 


To strike 


Perfect and Pluperfect, 


Indicative. Subjunct. Optat. 
Fut. 1 τύψομαι wanting τυψοίμην 
like the Pres. Pass. like the 
: Pres. Pass. 
Aor. 1. S. ἐτυψάμην τύψωμαν τυψαίμην 
ἐτύψω τυψῇῃ TUWALO 
ἐτύψατο τύψηται τύψαιτο 
D. ἐτυψάμεϑον τυψώμεϑον τυψαίμεϑον 
ἐτύψασϑον τύψησϑον τύψαισϑον 
ἐτυψάσϑην τύψησϑον τυψαίσϑην 
RP: ἐτυψάμεϑα τυψωώμεϑα τυψαίμεϑα 
«ἐτύψασϑε τύψησϑε τύψαισϑε 
ἐτύψαντο ave TUWOLYTO ¥ 
Aor. 2. ἐτυπόμην | ετὐπωμαᾶν | τυποίμην 
like the Imperf. Pass. these two moods as in the 
Pres. Pass. 


Verbal Adjectives (ὃ 102) 


- 


§ 103. vERBS.—PARADIGM OF τύπτω.᾿, 185 


DLE. 


one’s self.* 


‘are the same as in the Passive. 


’ 


Imperative. Infinit. Particip. 
‘wanting | : τυψεσϑαι TUWOMEVOS, ἡ, ον 


τύψασϑαι TUWOMEVOS, ἡ, OV 
τυψοῦ 
τυψασϑω 


τύψασϑον 
La 
tupaod wy 


τύψασϑε ; 
τυψασϑῶωσαν or τυψασϑῶὼν 


ms f 
TUILOV τυπέσϑαν τυπομένος, ἡ, OY 
τυπέσϑω 
τυπεσϑον 
τυπέσϑων 
' 
TUMEOVE 
; , 
τυπέσϑωσαν or τυπεσϑῶὼν 


͵ , 
TUNTOS, τυπτέος,. 


* See Herodot. ii. 40. extr. 


186 / ὁ 103. verns.—PaRAD. or παιδεύω. 


Examples of other Barytone Verbs, as they are actu- 
ally in use. 


nawevw bring up (a child). Middle, cause to bring up. 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. Νὰ. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
παιδεύω παιδεύω παιδεύουμε παίδευε 
παιδεύεις παύῤδεύῃς παιδεύοις παυιδευέτω 
παιδεύει παιδεύῃ etc. παιδεύου ete. etc. 
etc. Inf. Part. 
παιδεύειν παιδεύων 
παιδεύουσα 
παιδεῦον 
. Imperf. 
ἐπαίδευον, ἐς, ε(ν), etc. 
Perf. Ind. Subj. πεπαιδεύκω Opt. πεπαιδεύκοιμυ 
πεπαίδευκα, Imp. ποῖ in use. | Inf. πεπαιδευκέναν 
ας, é(v), ete. Part. πεπαιδευκώς, via, ὃς 
-Pluperf. 
EMETLALOEUKELY, EUG, ἕν, etc. 
Fut. 3 | Opt. παιδεύσουμνυ Inf. παιδεύσειν 
παιδεύσω Part. παιδεύσων 
Aorist. Subp. Opt. Imp. 
ἐπαίδευσα, παιδεύσω παιδεύσαυμε παίδευσον 
ας, ξ(ν), etc. ῃς, ἢ», etc. παιδεύσας" παιδευσάτω, etc. 
παιδεύσαι, ete. 
Inf. Part. 
παιδεῦσαι παιδεύσας 
παιδεύσασα 
παιδεῦσαν 


* The three forms παιδεύσειας, evs, ειαν, are of course understood here, as also 
in the following paradigms. 


| δ 103. verBs.—PaRAD, OF παιδεύω. 187 


PASSIVE. 
Pres. Ind. Suly. Opt. Imp. 
παιδεύομαι παιδεύωμαν παιδευοίμην παιδεύου 
παιδεύῃ or ἐν | παϊδεύη παιδεύοιο παιδευέσϑω, 
παιδεύεται, παιδεύηται, etc. παιδεύοιτο, ete. etc. 
etc. Inf. Part. 
’ 
παιδευεσϑαι παιδευόμενος, ἡ, OV 
Imperf. 
ἐπαιδευόμην, ἐπαιδεύου, ἐπαιδεύετο, etc. 
Perf. Ind. he aris 
πεπαίδευμαι D. πεπαιδευμεϑον Ῥ. πεπαιδευμεϑα 
᾿πεπαίδευσαν πεπαίδευσϑον πεὲεπαίδευσϑε 
πεπαίδευταν πεπαίδευσϑον “πεπαίδευνται 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. πεπαίδευσο 
πεπαιδεύσϑω, etc. 
Inf. πεπαιδεῦσϑαι Part. πεπαιδευμένος 


Pluperf. 
ἐπεπαιδεύμην D. ἐπεπαϊδεύμεϑον P. ἐπεπαιδεύμεϑα 
ἐπεπαίδευσο ἐπεπαίΐδευσϑον ἐπεπαίδευσϑε 
ἐπεπαίδευτο ἐπεπαιδευσϑὴν ἐπεπαίδευντο 
Fut. Ind. Opt. παυδευϑησοίμην Inf. παιδευϑήσεσϑαν 
παιδευϑήσομαιυ Part. παιδευϑησομένος 
Aor. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. 
ἑπαιδευϑὴν παιδευϑῶ παιδευϑείην - παιδευϑήητι 
Inf. Part. 
παιδευϑῆναν παιδευϑείς 
Fut. 3. Ind. Opt. nenawdevooiuny Inf. πεπαιδεύσεσϑαν 
πεπαιδευσομαν Part. πεπαιδευσομένος 
MIDDLE. 
Fut. Ind. Opt. παιδευσοίμην Inf. παιδεύσεσϑαι 
παιδευσομαν Part. παιδευσόμενος 
Aor. Ind. Suly. Opt. Imp. 
ἐπαιδευσαάμην, παιδεύσωμαν παϊδευσαίμην παίδευσον 
σῶς σατο, etc. N, HTL, CLC. Ob0, αὐτο, etC. παιδευσασϑω, etc. 
Inf. . Part. 
παιδεύσασϑαν παυδευσαμένος 


Verbal Adjectives: παῤδευτέος, masdevtos. 


188 § 103. verss.—Parap. or σείω, λείπω. 


σείω shake; Mid. move myself violently. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. σείω Subj. σείω Opt. σείουμι, σείους, σείου, etc. 
Imp. σεῖε, OELETOD, etc. Inf. oetew 
Part. σείων, σείουσα; Oslov 


Τρ ἕσειον Pf. σέσευκα Plupf. ἐσεσείκευν Fut. σείσω 
Aor. ἔσεεσα Subj. σείσω Opt. σείσαυμε, σείσαις, σείσαιν, etc. 
Imper. σεῖσον, άτω, etc. Inf. σεῖσαι 
| Part. σείσας, σείσασα, σεῖσαν 


PASSIVE. 
Pres. σείομαι Imperf. éoecouny 
r 
Perf. oeoevcouee Ὦ. σεσείσμεϑον P. σεσείσμεϑα 
Ul , - 
σέσεισαν σέσεισϑον σέσεισϑε 
΄ ’ 
σέσεισταν σεσεισϑον 3 pers. wanting. 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. σέσεισο, σεσείσϑω, etc. 
| Inf. σεσεῖσϑαν Part. 80s εσμένος 
Plupf. ἐσεσείσμην D. ἐσεσείσμεϑον is ἐσεσείσμεϑα. 


ἐσέσεισο ἐσέσεισϑον ἐσέσεισϑε 
ἐσέσειστο ἐσεσείσϑην 3 pers. wanting. 
Fut..cscoO7oouae Aor. ἐσείσϑην Fut. 3 σεσείσομαν 
MIDDLE. 


Fut. σείσομαν Aor. ἐσεισάμην (Imperat. osioae) 
Verbal Adjectives: oevoreog, σειστός. 


λείπω leave; Mid. poetical, remain behind. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. λείπυ Subj. λείπω Οί. λείποιμε, λείποις, λείποι, etc. 
Imp. λεῖπε =Inf. λείπειν Ῥανγί. λείπων 
Imperf. ἔλειπον 
Perf. (2) λέλουπα _ Plupf. ἐλελοίπειν 
Fut. λείψω 
Aor. (2) ἔλυπον ἘΝ λίπω Opt. λίποιμν Imp. λίπε 
Inf. λιπεῖν Ῥαγί. λιπών, οὖσα, ov 


PASSIVE. 
Pres, λείπομαν Imperf. ἐλειπόμην 
Perf. λέλειμμαι Subj. and Opt. wanting. 
λέλευψαι Imp. λέλευψψο, λελείφϑω, etc. 


λέλειπται, etc. Inf. λελεῖφϑαν Part. λελειμμένος 
Plupf. ἐλελείμμην, wo, πτο, etc. — 
Fut. λειφϑήσομαι Aor. ἐλείφϑην 
Fut. 3 λελείιμομαν 


§ 103. verBs.—PaRaD. oF γράφω, “ozo. 


189 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. λείψομαε 

Aor. (2) ἐλυπόμην Subj. λίπωμανι Opt. λιποίμην 
Imp. λιποῦ, ete. Plur. λίπεσϑε, etc. 
Inf. λιπέσϑαν Part. λιπόμενος 


Verbal Adj. λειπτέος, λευπτος. 


γράφω write; Mid. write for myself, sue at law. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. γράφω Imperf. ἔγραφον 

Perf. γέγραφα Plupf. ἐγεγράφειν 

Fut. γράψω : 

Aor. ἔγραψα Subj. γράψω Opt. γράψαιμι, γ γράψαις, γράψαι, etc. 
Imp. γράψον, ar, etc. Inf. γοράψαν Part. γράψας 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. γράφομαι Impf. ἐγραφόμην 

Perf. γέγραμμαι, γέγραψαιν," γέγραπταῦν, etc. 
Plupf. ἐγεγράμμην, wo, πτο, etc. 

Fut. 1 and Aor. 1 (ἐγράφϑην) are rare. 
Fut. 2 γραφήσομαν Aor. 2 ἐγράφην 

Fut. 3 γεγράψομαυ 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. γράψομαν Aor. ἐγραψάμην (Imperat. γράψαι) 
Verbal Adjectives: γραπτέος, γραπτός. 


ἄρχω lead on, rule ; Mid. begin. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. ἄρχω Imperf. ἤρχον 
Perf. (ἦρχα) and Plupf. scarcely occur. 
Fut. ἄρξω 
Aor. ἦρξα Subj. ἄρξω Opt. ΓΚ ἄρξαις, Sotas, etc. 
Imp. ἄρξον, ἀρξάτω, etc. 
Inf. ἄρξαν Part. ἄρξας 
25 


190 | § 103. verBs.—parAD. or ἄρχω, σκευάζω. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. ἄρχομαν Imperf. ἠρχόμην 
Perf. ἤργμαν Ὦ. ἤργμεϑον Ῥὶ ἤργμεϑα 
ἦρξαι ἦρχϑον ἤρχϑὲ 
ἤρκταν ἤρχϑον 3 pers. wanting. 
Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. nok0, ἤρχϑω, ete. 
Inf. joy9ae Part. ἠργμένος 
Pluperf. ἤργμην D. ἤργμεϑον P. ἤργμεϑα 
7050 nox Pov ἦρχϑε ᾿ 
᾿ ἦρχτο ἤρχϑν — 8pers. wanting. 
Fut. ἀρχϑήσομαι᾽ 
Aor. ἤρχϑην Subj. ἀρχϑὼ Opt. ἀρχϑείην Imp. ἄρχϑητι 
Inf. ἀρχϑῆναι Part. ἀρχϑείς 
Fut..3 wanting, see ᾧ 99. n. 2. 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. ἀρξομαι 
Aor. ἠρξάμην Subj. ἄρξωμαι Opt ἀρξαΐίμην Imp. ἄρξαι, ἄσϑω, etc. 
᾿ς Inf. ἀρξασϑαν Part. ἀρξάμενος 
Verbal Adj. (in the sense of both Act. and Mid.) 
ἀρκτέος, HOXTOS. 


’ 
σκευαζὼ prepare. 


_ ACTIVE. 


Pres. σκευάξω Tmpert ἐσκεύαξζον 


Perf. ἐσχεύακὰ Subj. ἐσκευάκω Opt. ἐσκευάχκοιμι Imp. not in use. 
Inf. ἐσκευακέναν Part. ἐσκευακὼς 

Pluperf. ἐσκευάκευν 

Fut. oxevaow 

Aor. ἐσκεύασα Subj. σκευάσω Opt. σχευάσαιμε, alg, σκευάσαι, etc. 
Imp. σκεύασον 
Inf. σκευάσαν Part. σχευάσας 


§ 103. verBS.—PARAD. or σχευάζω, κομίζω. 191 


PASSIVE. μι 


Pres. σχκευάζομαν  Imperf. ἐσκευαζόμην 
Perf. ἐσχευάσμαν D. ἐσκευάσμεϑον Ῥ. ἐσχευάσμεϑα 

ἐσκεύασαι ἐσκεύασϑον ἐσχεύασϑε 

ἐσκεύαστανι ἐσκεύασϑον 3 pers. wanting. 

Subj. and Opt. wanting. mp. ἐσκεύασο, ἐσκευάσϑω, etc. 
Inf. ἐσκευάσϑαν Part. ἐσκευασμένος 

Pluperf. ἐσκευάσμην, ασο, αἀστο, etc. 
Fut. σχευασϑήσομαν 
Aor. ἐσκευάσϑην 
Fut. 8 (ἐσκευάσομαι) does not occur. 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. σχευάσομαιν 

Aor. ἐσχευασάμην Subj. σκευάσωμαν Opt. σκευασαίμην 
Imp. σκεύασαι, σκευασάσϑω, etc. 
Inf. σχευάσασϑαι Part. σκευασάμενος 


Verb. Adj. σκευαστέος, σχκευαστος. 


κομίζω bring ; Mid. receive. 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. κομίζω Imperf. ἐκόμιξον 
Perf. χεχόμικα Pluperf. ἐκεκομίκειν 
Fut. κομίσω ἷ 
Fut. Att. \ 
κομιῶ Ὁ. -- Ῥ, χομιοὺμεν 
κομιεῖς κομιεῖτον  κομιεῖτε 
κομιεῖ ᾿ κομιεῖτον κομιοῦσι(ν) 


Opt. κομιοῖμι, οἷς, ete. Inf. κομιεῖν 
Part. κομιῶν, οὖσα, οὖν G. οὔντος 
Aor. ἐκόμισα Subj. κομίσω Opt. κομίσαιμι, κομίσαις, κομίσαι, etc. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres. κομίζομοιν Imperf. ἐκομιζόμην 
Perf. χεκόμισμαν (comp. ἐσκεύασμαι 
Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. HELO MLO, ἰσϑω, ete. 
Anf. κεχομίσϑαι Part. κεκομισμένος 
Pluperf. éxexouiouny 
Fut. κομεσϑήσομαι 
Aor. ἐχομίσϑην 
Fut. 3 trout oopat) does not occur. 


102 § 108. vERBS.—PARAD. oF φυλάσσω. 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. xouioouce 
Fut. Att. 
κομιοῦμαν D. κομιούμεϑον P. κομιούμεϑα 

κομιξὶ! Ὁ. αομιεῖσϑον κομιεῖσϑε 
κομιξεῖταν κομιεῖσϑον κομιοῦνται 
Opt. κομιοίμην, κομιοῖο, οἷο. 
Inf. κομιεῖσϑαν Part. κομιουμένος 
Aor. ἐκομεσάμην Subj. κομίσωμαν Opt. κομισαίμην Imp. κόμεσαν 
Inf. κομίσασϑαν Part. κομισαμένος 
Verb. Adj. κομιστέος, κομιστός. 


φυλάσσω guard ; Mid. guard myself. 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. φυλάσσω ὁ Impf. ἐφύλασσον 
φυλάττω ἐφύλαττον 
Perf. πεφύλαχα Pluperf. ἐπεφυλάχειν 
Fut. φυλαξω Aor. ἐφυλαξα 
PASSIVE. 

Pres. φυλάσσομαν Imperf. ἐφυλασσόμην 
φυλαττομαν ἐφυλαττόμην 
Perf. πεφύλαγμαν D. πεφυλάγμεϑον Ῥ. πεφυλάγμεϑα 

πεφύλαξαν πεφύλαχϑον πεφύλαχϑε 
πεφύλαχταν πεφύλαχϑον 3 pers. wanting. 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. πεφύλαξο, πεφυλάχϑω, etc. 
Inf. πεφυλαχϑαν Part. πεφυλαγμένος 
Pluperf. ἐπεφυλάγμην D. ἐπεφυλάγμεϑον P. ἐπεφυλάγμεϑα 


ἐπεφύλαξο ἐπεφύλαχϑον ἐπεφύλαχϑε 
ἑπεφύλακτο ἐπεφυλάχϑην 8 pers. wanting. 
Fut. φυλαχϑήσομαι Aor. ἐφυλάχϑην 


Fut. 8 πεφυλάξομαι 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. φυλάξομαι Aor. ἐφυλαξάμην 
Verb. Adj. φυλακτέος, φυλακτός. 


* See note III. 3. below. 


§ 103. veRBs.—PARAD. oF ὁρύσσω. 193 


Ι 


ὀρύσσω dig. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. ὀρύσσω, ὀρύττω mperf. ὥρυσσον, ὥρυττον 
Perf. ὀρώρυχα Subj. ᾿ὁρωρύχω Opt. ὀρωρύχοιμε Imp. not in use 
' Inf. ὁρωρυχέναν Part. ὀρωρυχὼς 


Plupf. ὀρωρύχειν 

Fut. ὀρύξω Ἷ 

Aor. ὥρυξα Subj. ὀρύξω Opt. ὀρύξαιμι, ὀὁρύξαις, ὀρύξαι, etc. 
Imp. ὄρυξον Inf. ὁούξαν Part. ὀρύξας. 


PASSIVE. 
Pres. ὀρύσσομαι Impf. ὠρυσσόμην 
Η ὀρύττομαι ὠρυττόμην. 

Perf. ὀρώρυγμαν Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. ὁρώρυξο, ὀρωρύχϑω, 

- Inf. ὁρωρύχϑαν Part. oowevypévos [etc. 
Plupf. oowovyuny ; 
Fut. 1 ὀρυχϑήσομαι Fut. 2. ὀρυγήσομαι 
Aor. 1 ὠρύχϑην, Aor. 2. ὠρύγην, 

ὀρυχϑῆήναι, etc. ὀρυγῆναυ, etc. 


Fut. 3 wanting, see § 99. n. 2. 


MIDDLE. 


Fut. ὀρύξομαι 
Aor. ὠρυξάμην Subj. ὀρύξωμαν Opt. oguéaiuny Imp. ὄρυξαν 
“Inf. ogvéacdae Part. ὀρυξάμενος 


Verbal Adjectives: ὀρυκτέος, ὀρυκτός. 


194 ~ § 108. verss.—Prarapiem or ἀγγέλλω. 


Example of Verbs 4 u ν ρ. 


ee ee 


ἀγγέλλω I announce. 


ACTIVE. 
Pres. Ind. | Subj. ἀγγέλλω Opt. ἀγγέλλουμι Imp. ἄγγελλε 
ἀγγέλλω 1 Inf. ἀγγέλλειν Part. ἀγγέλλων 
Imperfect 
ἤγγελλον 
Perf. Ind. | Subj. ἡγγέλκω Opt. ἡγγέλκοιμν Imp. not in use 
ἤγγελκα Inf. ἡγγελκέναι Part. ἠγγελκῶς 
Pluperfect 
nyyEhnew 
Future (2) Indic. 
ἀγγελῶ D. -- P. ἀγγελοῦμεν 
ἀγγελεῖς ἀγγελεῖτον ἀγγελεῖτε 
. ἀγγελεῖ ἀγγελεῖτον ἀγγελοῦσι (ν) 
Optat. 
S. ἀγγελοῖμι Ὁ. — P. ἀγγελοῖμεν 
ἀγγελοῖς ἀγγελοῖτον ᾿ ἀγγελοῖτε 
ἀγγελοῖ — ἀγγελοίτην ἀγγελοῖεν 


or Attic 
ἀγγελοίην, ong, oin* —, olntov, ounrnyy’ oinuer, οἰητε, οἰησαν 
see below, note II. 3. 
Inf. ἀγγελεῖν 


Part. ἀγγελῶν, ἀγγελοῦσα, ἀγγελοῦν Geni ἀγνέλοῦνευ 


Aor. 1. Ind. Subj. ἀγγείλω Opt. ἀγγείλαιμι Imp. ἄγγειλον 
ἤγγειλα οὐ ἀγγείλαις 
; ἀγγείλαι, etc. 
Inf. ἀγγεῖλυ. ΡΑανί. ayysihag 


Aor. 2. Ind. Subj. ἀγγέλω Opt. ἀγγέλοιμι Imp. ἄγγελε 
ἤγγελον 1 Inf. ἀγγελεῖν Part. ἀγγελῶν 


ἢ For the use of this tense in this particular verb, see the marg. note to § 101. 
n. 4. 


§ 103. verBs.—PARADIGM oF ἀγγέλλω. 195 


- PASSIVE. 


f 


1 am announced. 


Pres. Ind. Subj. ἀγγέλλωμαν Opt. ἀγγελλοίμην Imp. ἀγγέλλου 


ἀγγέλλομαν Inf. ἀγγέλλεσϑαν Part. ἀγγελλόμενος 
Imperfect 
ἡγγελλόμην 
Perf. Ind. 
᾿ ἥἤγγελμαυ D. ἠγγέλμεϑον P. ἡγγέλμεϑα 
ἤγγελσαν. ἤγγελϑον ἤγγελϑε 
ἤγγελται ἤγγελϑον 3 pers. wanting 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. 
Imp. ἤγγελσο, ἠγγέλϑω, eto. 
Inf. ἡγγέλϑαν Part. ἠγγελμένος 


Pluperfect ᾿ 
ἡγγέλμην Ὁ. ηγγέλμεϑον P. ἡγγέλμεϑα 
ἤγγελσο ἤγγελϑον ἤγγελϑε 
ἤγγελτο ᾿ἡγγέλϑην 3 pers. wanting 
Fut. 1. 


. ἀγγελϑήσομαι, etc. 


Aor. 1. Ind. Subj. ἀγγελϑὼώ Opt. eels Imp. ἀγγέλϑητε 
ἡγγέλϑην Inf. ἀγγελϑῆναν Part. ἀγγελϑείς 
Fut. 2. 


ἀγγελήσομαι, etc. 


Aor 2. Ind. Subj. ἀγγελῶ Opt. aynit Imp. ἀγγέληϑι 
ἠγγέλην Inf. ἀγγελῆναν “Part. ἀγγελείς 


Fut. 8. wanting, see ᾧ 99. n. 2. 


196 δ 103. verns.—parapicem or ἀγχγέλλω, etc. 


MIDDLE. 


I announce myself, i.e. promise for myself. 


Future Indic. 


ἀγγελοῦμαι D.. ἀγγελούμεϑον P. ἀγγελούμεϑα 
ἀγγελῇ or εἴ ἀγγελεῖσϑον ἀγγελεῖσϑε 
ἀγγελεῖται ἀγγελεῖσϑον ἀγγελοῦνταυ 

Optat. : 

S. ἀγγελοίμην | Ὁ. αγγελοίμεϑον P. ἀγγελοίμεϑα 
ἀγγελοῖο ἀγγελοῖσϑον ἀγγελοῖσϑε 
ἀγγελοῖτο ἀγγελοίσϑην ἀγγελοῖντο 


Inf. ἀγγελεῖσϑαν Part. ἀγγελούμενος, ἡ, ov 


Aor. 1. Ind. 
᾿᾿ηγγειλαμὴν 


τιμῶ). ἀγγείλωμαν Opt. ἀγγειλαίμην, ἀγγείλαιο, etc. 
Amp. ἄγγειλαι, aco, etc. 
Inf. ἀγγείλασϑαν Part. ἀγγειλάμενος 


Aor. 2. Ind. Subj. ἀγγέλωμαν Opt. ἀγγελοίμην, ἕλοιο, ete. 
ἡγγελόμην Imp. ἀγγελοὺ Inf. ἀγγελέσϑαι Part. ἀγγελόμενος. 


‘Verbal Adjectives: ἀγγελτέος, ἀγγελτός. 


An alphabetic Catalogue of the Barytone Verbs, partly for exercise, and 
partly with the specification of the particular usage under each, is con- 
tained in Appendix D. 


Notes ON ALL THE PARADIGMS. 


I. Accent.. 


1. As the foundation for all rules respecting the tone in verbs, it is to 
be assumed, that the tone is regularly thrown as far back as possible. 
Consequently, in forms of two Byilabies it is always on the first, 

τύπτω, τύπτε, λείπω, λεῖπε, 
and in those of three or more syllables, on the antepenult, when the nature 
of the final syllable permits, 
τύπτομεν, τύπτουσι, τετύφασι, τύπτομαι 
ἔτυπτε, ἔτυψα, ἐπαίδευον, ἐφύλαξα, 


§ 103. verBs.—NoTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 197 


and the Imperatives 

φύλαττε, φύλαξον, φύλαξαι. 
On the other hand we find παιδεύω, φυλάττειν, etc. on account of the long 
final syllable-—Hence, forms of two syllables in composition throw back 
the tone upon the preposition, whenever the final syllable permits it, e. g. 


~ 3 
φέρε, λεῖπε---πρόσφερε, ἀπόλειπε. 


2. When an accented augment falls away, the accent always passes in 
simple verbs to the next syllable of the verb; e. g. ἔβαλε, ἔφευγε----βάλε, 
φεῦγε; in compound verbs, it passes to the preposition; e.g. ἐνέβαλε, 
προσέβη---ἔμβαλε, πρόσβη. Here it is to be noted, that in the first case 
those monosyllabic forms whose vowel is long, always take the tone as 
circumflex ; 6. g. ἔβη---βῆ. 

3. Apparent exceptions to the above fundamental rule, are the in- 
stances where a contraction lies at the basis; consequently, besides the 
contract verbs which are hereafter to be exhibited, we must here reckon 
the following portions of the ordinary conjugation. 

1) The Fut. 2 and Attic Fut. of every kind, § 95. 7—11. 

2) The Subjunct. Aor. Pass. τυφϑῶ, τυπῶ.ἢ 

3) The temporal augment in trisyllabic compounds; e. g. avénto, 
ἀγῆπτον, § 84. n. 4. 

4, Real exceptions are the following: 

1) The Aor. 2, in order to distinguish it from the Present (§ 96. n. 

3. marg. note), takes the tone upon the ending, in the following forms: 
a. In the Inf. and Part. Act. and Inf. Mid. always ; 6. g. 
τυπεῖν" + τυπών, οὖσα, OY " τυπέσϑαι. 

ὃ. In the Sing. of the Imperat. Aor. 2 Mid. commonly ; 6. g. γεγοῦ, 
λαϑοῦ:; but Plur. γένεσϑε, λάϑεσϑε. 

ς. In the Sing. of the Imperat, Aor. 2 Act. only in the following: 
εἰπέ, ἐλϑὲέ, εὑρέ, and in the more accurate Attic pronunciation also 
λαβέ, tos 

The compound Imperatives follow the general rule, 6. g. ἐπιλάϑου, ἄπελ-- 
He, εἴσιδε. 

2) The Inf. and Part. of the Perfect Passive are distinguished from 
all the rest of the Passive form in respect to the tone, which they always 
have upon the penult : 


΄ 


τετύφϑαι, πεποιῆσϑαι 
τετυμμένος, πεποιημένος. 


* These Subjunctives, as well as the corresponding ones in Verbs in wz, are 
real contractions ; inasmuch as the 7 of the Indicative passed over inthe Sab- 
junctive into the lonic éw, ἕῃς, etc. and then this was contracted into W, ἧς 
etc. See below note V. 14, compared with ὃ 107. n. III. 2. 


t The Inf. Aor. 2 Act. might be reckoned among the apparent exceptions un- 
der 3 above ; because the Ionics formed this also, like the Fut. 2, in éew,e ο΄. 
haBésw for λαβεῖν. But here the process is unquestionably reversed. ‘ The tone 
was thrown upon δῖ» for the same reason as upon wy and éodas; and the Ionics, 
in their fondness for vowels, caused this accent to pass over into the prolonged 
double sound ; see the marg. note to ὃ 28. n: 3. ὃ 105. n. 10. 


26 


΄ 


1933 § 103. verBs.—NOTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 


3) All Infinitives in you, except the dialect-form in μεναι, (note V. 9), 
have the tone upon the - penult ; e.g, τετυφέναι, τυφϑῆναι, τυπῆναι: See 
also the Infinitives of Verbs in mu. 

4) The Inf. Aor. 1 Act. in a, and the 3 pers. Opt. Act. in ov and on, al- 

ways have the tone on the penult, even when they are polysyllables ; 6. g- 
Inf. φυλάξαι, παιδεῦσαι ; 
3. Opt. φυλάττοι, φυλάξαι, παιδεύσαι." 

5) All Participles in ὡς and εἰς have the acute upon the final sylla- 
ble; as τετυφώς, τυφϑείς, τυπείς:. So in Verbs in μὲ the participles in εἰς, 
ας, OVS, US. ᾿ 

6) When the masculine of a participle has the tone on ἃ particular 
syllable, the other genders retain it on the same, without further regard to 
the nature of the syllables; thus φυλάττω», φυλάττουσα, φυλάττον" 
τιμήσων; τιμήσουσα, τιμῆ σον" τετυφώς, τετυφυΐα, τετυφός. 

7) In compound verbs the accent can never go further back than the 
augment. ‘The few examples therefore, in which only one short syllable 
follows the augment, retain even in composition their accent on the aug- 
ment; e.g. ἀνέσχον, ἀνέσταν. But if the augment is dropped, the case 
falls under note 2 above, as πρόσβη. 


II. Jonte and Attic Peculiarities. 


1. The Ionics have in the Imperfect and both Aorists an 
Iterative form in --σχον, Pass. -σχόμην, 


which is used to denote a repeated action. These forms are found only 
in the Indicative, have usually no augment, and are to be made after the 
model of τύπτω, 6. g. 

TURTEGKOY, τυπτεσχόμην, from ἔτυπτον, ὀὁμὴν 

τύψασκον, τυψασκόμην, from ἔτυψα, ἄμην 

τύπεσχον, τυπεσκόμην, from ἔτυπον, ouny. 
See also the notes to the contract verbs and verbs in uu.—There are some 
remarkable epic forms of this kind, which unite the « of the Aor. 1, with 
the characteristic of the Present and Imperfect: ῥίπτασκον, κρύπτασκε, 
ῥοίζασκεν, ἀν ασσείασκε Hymn. Apoll. 403. See on these words and on 
this whole subject, the Ausf. Sprachl. § 94. 4 and notes. 

2. The Pluperfect 1 and 2 Active in sw, is formed by the Ionics in the 

1 pers. in ea, and in the 3 pers. in se or esy, as ἐτετύφεα, ἐτετύφεε or -ἕεν. 
From this there is-an Attic contracted form, of which the first person is 
in ἡ from ea, e. g. | 


* By this accentuation, and from the circumstance that the 3 pers. Opt. never 
takes the circumflex upon the penult (δ 11. n.3), are distinguished the three simi- 
lar forms of the Aor. 1; e.g. 

Infin. Act. 3 Opt. Act. Imperat. Mid. 
παιδεῦσαι σπαιδεύσαι σαΐδευσαι 


But since the number of syllables, or the nature of the penult, rarely permits this 
triple mode of accentuation, it is generally the case, that at most only two of 
these forms are distinguished ; and in such verbs as τύπτω, all the three are 
alike. See e. g. in σεέω, κομίζω, γράφω. 


§ 103. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 199 


ἐπεπόνϑη for ἐπεπόνϑειν,. 
and was the usual form among the earlier Attics. But the second person 
in ἧς from sac, and the third in εἰν (before a vowel) from ssy,—as πεποΐ-- 
Sew for ἐπεποίϑει Aristoph. Nub. 1347. ἑστήκειν 1]. y, 691 (comp. 3 Impf. 
ἤσκειν below in § 105. n. 3),—were perhaps less usual even among the At- . 
tics. Hitherto at least all the examples which have been brought forward 
of these forms, as well as of a third person in ἡ instead of δ, (except 
from the Plupf. 7s, see in οἶδα § 109. III. 2,) rest only on the authority 
of some single passages, and the somewhat indefinite assertions of the an- 
cient Grammarians. See the Ausf. Sprachl. § 97. n. 14 sq. ἰ 


' 3. Instead of the Opt. Act. in ow, there was a secondary form in oi, 
oins, oin, Pl. otnusy, ointe, οἷησαν, which is called the Attic form. It is 
found for the most part only in contract verbs (§ 105), and consequently 
in the circumflexed Future; e.g. ἐροέη for ἐροΐ from Fut. ἐρῶ, Xen. Cy- 
rop. 3.1.11. φανοίην Soph. Aj. 313. Besides these instances, it occurs 
in barytones only in the Perfect ; 6. g. mepevyoiny, ehyhuFoiny.* 

4, Instead of Opt. Aor. 1 Act. in ams, there was an Aolie form in ee, 
as τύψεια, εἰας, sey, etc. of which the three endings exhibited above in the 
paradigm of τύπτω, viz. 

Sing. 2 τύψειας 3 τύψειε (v), for -αἰς, -αἰ 
Plur. 3 τύψειαν for --οἰεν, 
were far more usual than the regular forms. 


5. The form of the 8 Plur. of the Imperative in -ytwy, Pass. -09-wy, is 
called Attic, because it was, among the Attics, the most usual form; 
although it is found in the other dialects. In the Active, this form is 
always like the Genitive Plur. of the Participle of the same tense, except 
in the Perfect; e. g. Perf. πεποιϑέτωσαν or πεπουϑόντων---αγί. πεπουϑότων͵ 


III. Second Person Sing. Passive. 


1. The original ending of the second person Sing. of the Passive, σαν 
and go (δ 87.3), has been retained only in the Perfect and Plupf. of 
the ordinary conjugation, and in Verbs in μὲ (δ 106. n. 2). The less 
cultivated dialects perhaps continued to say in the 2 pers. τύπτεσαι, 
ἐτύπτεσο, Imperat. τύπτεσο, Aor. 1 Mid. ἐτύψασο, --- Subj. tiatyoast 

2. The Ionics dropped the o from this old ending, and formed seu, not, 


so, ao. ‘The common language contracted these endings again into 1, ov, 
w; &.g. : 


Ion. Comm. Ion. Comm. 
2 Pres. Ind. τύπτεαν τύπτῃ. Imperat. τύπτεο τύπτου 
--- Subj. τύπτηαι τύπτη. 2 Impf. ἐτύπτεο ἐτύπτου 


2-pers. Aor, 1 Mid. Ion. ἐτύψαο, Comm. ἐτύψω. 


* Except in the above examples, this form occurs only in the anomalous Aorist 
ἔσχον from ἔχω, which in the Opt. always has σχοίην. 


+ The 2 pers. Present Pass. of the contracted verbs seems most frequently to 
have occurred in this form in the later common language; e.g. in the New 
Test. Rom. 2: 17, 23, καυχᾶσαε for καυχάεσαι, Comm, καυχᾷ contr. from καυχάῃ ; 
see τιμάω § 105. 


200 § 103. VERBS.—NOTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 


In the same manner in the Optative, instead of ovo is formed ovo, which 
remained as the common form, because it cannot be contracted. — In the 
Perf. and Plupf. on the contrary, the σ is never dropped; except in ἔσσυο, 
for which see the Anom. σεύω. 


3. The Attics had the further peculiarity, that instead of 7 contr. from 
eat, they wrote εν. This form, which is every where subjoined in the 
paradigms, was the usual one in the genuine Attic writers, the tragedians 
excepted ; and also in the common language. In the verbs βούλομαι, 
οἴομαι, and Fut. ὄψομαι (see the Anom. ooéw), this form of the 2 pers. be- 
came the only usual one, viz. 

θούλει, οἴει, ὕψει, 
so that βούλῃ and οἴῃ can be only Subjunctive.—This form in εὐ is also 
very common in the fitic or circumflexed Future, (e.g. ὀλεῖ, βαδιεῖ,) in 
accordance doubtless with a usage no less general. 


4, The Dorics and Ionics, instead of so or ov, have here ev, as ἐτύπτευ, 
Imperat. τύπτευ, see §28.n.5. The epic writers could in the Imperative 
prolong the « into εἰς which however rarely occurs; e. g. ἔρειο for ἔρεο 
from ἕρομαι, 1]. 4, 611, 


IV. Ionic Form of the 8. pers. Plur. Pass. in αται, oto. 


1. In the 3 Plur. Pass, of the Indic. and Opt. but never in the Sub- 
junctive, the Ionics changed the » into o, and wrote, 6. g. 
Opt. τυπτοίατο for τύπτοιντο 
Perf. πεπαιδεύαται for πεπαίδευνται 
— χκεχκλίαταιν for κέκλινται. 
This is sometimes imitated by the Attic poets, for the sake of the metre. 
See also below under verbs in ἕω and é&w, § 105. n. 9. 


2. The ending ovto is sometimes treated by the Ionics in the same 
manner, but with a change of the o into ¢; e.g. 
ἐβουλέατο for ἐβούλοντο. 
On the other hand, the ending ovtas (τύπτονται, τύψονται, etc.) and the 
ending ὠνται of the Subjunctive, are never changed. 


3. By the help of this Ionic ending, the 3 Plur. Perf. and Plupf. Pass. 
can be formed, when the characteristic of the verb is a consonant; and 
this is done sometimes even by Attic prose writers, as Thucydides, Plato, 
etc. (δ 98. 2 and n. 2.) E. g. 


τετύφαται for — φνταν 
ἐτετάχατο for — yyto 

2 4 

ἐστάλαται for --- λνται 


from τύπτω, τάττω, στέλλω, ete.—In ἀπίκαται, Ion. for ἀφέκαται (see the 
Anom. ἱχγρέομαι), instead of x, the characteristic of the verb remains un- 
changed. 


4. Instead of the σ which has been dropped before νται, ντο, the lingual 
letters in this case reappear, e.g. from πείϑω, πέπεισμαι, 
3 Pl. πεπείϑαται for πέπεινται, 
and from ἐρεύδω, ἐρήρεισμαι, 
ἐγηρέθατοῦ Hom. for ἐρήρεινται, 


5 ll a Sie 


δ 103. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 201 


where the diphthong is shortened because of the Attic reduplication, 
(δ 85. 2). So with a restoration of the δ which is contained in ¢ (§ 92. 8), 
ἐσκευάδαται, κεχωρίδαται, from σκευάζω, χωρίζω. 

5. In the editions of Homer we find some other verbs formed in the 
manner last mentioned, which have neither 0 nor ¢ in the Present. Of 
these the form ἐῤῥάδαται, from saivw, ξῤῥασμαι, (δ 101. n. 8.b,) can be 
derived from a subordinate form PAZ, from which also gaocuts occurs 
in Homer. The others however are too uncertain for any grammatical 
use.* 

V. Miscellaneous. 


1. Some of the less cultivated dialects, especially the Alexandrine (δ 1. 
n. 12) gave to the 3 pers. Plur. in all the historical tenses and in the Opt. 
the ending cay ; hence especially in the Greek version of the Old Testa- 
ment the frequent forms ἐφαίνοσαν, ἐφύγοσαν, λεέποισαν, for ἔφαινον, 
ἔφυγον, λείποιεν, etc. 

2. The Dorics and poets, on the other hand, have in some instances, 
instead of the flexible ending of the third person cay, a syncopated form 
in y with a short vowel. This takes place in barytone verbs only in the 
Aorists Passive : 

3 Pl. ἔτυφϑεν, ἔτυπεν, for -ἡσαν. 
Other instances belong to the conjugation of verbs in jus.—This syncope 
is never into -ν ; as to the Homeric μιάνϑην, see the Anom. waive. - 


3. The dialects mentioned above in 1, by a still greater anomaly, gave 
to the 3 pers. Plur. Perfect, instead of aot, the (historical) ending ay ; 
hence in the New Testament ἔγνωκαν, εἴρηκαν, Batrachom. 182 togyor.— 
For the confounding of forms in the 3 pers. Dual of the historical tenses, 
e. g. Il. x, 364 διώκετον instead of -ryy, see in ὃ 87. ἢ, 5. a. 


4, The 3 Plur. of the primary tenses, instead of σὺν or ov, has in the 
Doric dialect commonly yt, as we have already remarked above in ᾧ 87. 
n. 3, where we have also explained the long vowel before the o ; thus 


τύπτοντι, τετύφαντι, for τύπτουσι, τετύφασιν 
. , 
Subj. τύπτωντι for τύπτωσιν 
Fut. 2 μεγνέοντι, μενεῦντι, for (μενέουσι) μενοῦσιν. 


This form does not take the moveable y.—Another Doric form is - 
; τύπτοισι for τύπτουσι. 
5. Further, in the participial endings ουσαὰ and ἄς, aoa, the long sound 


_ arises from the dropping of ν or yt, which is found in the Gen. of the 


masculine. Instead of these long sounds, the Dorics employ always οὐ 
and a, 6. g. 

τύπτοισα for τύπτουσα 

Aor. 2 hoBoica} for λαβοῦσα 

τύψαις, τύψαισα, for τύψας, aoe. 


sn abl. @, 687 ἀκηχέδαται from ἀκηχεμαι (see Anom. ἀκαχίζω), and Od. 7, 86 
ἐληλάδατο from ἐλάω, ἐλήλοαμειαε;, both with various readings of sufficient author- 
ity to excite suspicion. See Ausf. Sprachl. § 98. n. 13. 


t Not λαβεῦσα, because there is here no contraction ; see § 105. n. 13. marg. 
note. 


202 δ 103. VERBS.—NOTES ON THE REG. PARADIGMS. 


6. The epic poets sometimes lengthen the accented o in the oblique 
cases of the Part. Perf. Act. 6. g. τετριγῶτας for -dtas.—For the Doric 
Part. Perf. in wy, ovow, see § 111. ἢ, 1. 


7. The Dorics introduced their long « into the endings ἐτυπτόμαν, 
ἐτετίμμαν, τυπτοίμαν, etc. for -μὴν ; and also into the ending of the or. 
Pass. 6. g. ἐτύπαν Theoer. 4, 53. This last however occurs seldom and 
only in the later Doric. 


8. The 1 Plur. Act. in μὲν is made by the Dorics in wes, as τύπτομες, 
ἐτύψαμες ; and in the 1 Plur. and Dual Pass. in μεϑα, μεϑον, the Dorics 
and poets insert o, 

τυπτόμεσϑα, τυπτόμεσϑον. 


9. The Infimitives in sy and vow had, in the ancient language and in 
the dialects, forms in wevow and μὲν ; thus 


τυπτέμεναι, τυπτέμεν --- for τύπτειν 
τετυφέμεναι, τετυφέμεν — for τετυφέναν 
τυπήμεναι, τυπῆμεν -- for τυπῆναι. 


Sometimes there was also a syncope of a preceding vowel, as ἔδμεναν for 
ἐδέμεναν from ἔδειν ; see the Anom. ἐσϑίω. —See also below under contract 
verbs and verbs in μι. 


10. The Dorics, in particular, form the Infinitive in ὃν or ny instead of 
ew, Without either drawing back or changing the acute accent; 6. g. 
μερίσδεν, εὕδεν, asidsy, for μερίζειν, εὕδειν, ἀείδειν, Aor. 2 ayayéy for ἀγαγεῖν 
—yaiony for χαΐρειν, not χαέρῃν. ) 

11. It is under the same analogy, that we find among the Dorics the 
second person of the Present Act. sometimes formed in ες instead of εἰς, 
without change of accent ; e. g. ἀμέλγες for ἀμέλγεις, Theocritus. 

12. The old language had in the second. person of the Active form, 
instead of ¢, the 

ending ota 


which in Homer and other poets is often appended in the Subjunctive, 
and sometimes in the Optative; e.g. ἐθέλῃσθα for ἐθέλῃς, κλαίοισϑα 
for χλαΐοις. In the common language, however, this has been preserved 
only in some anomalous verbs ; see below in δ 108, 109, εἰμὶ, εἰμι, φημΐ, 
and οἶδα. 


13. In the earliest language, the three endings which are now regarded 
as peculiarities of the conjugation in μὲ, viz. 1 Sing. μὲ, 3 Sing. σι, Imperat. 
It, probably belonged to the verb in general. Hence the Imperative in 
Sv, not only in the Aor. Pass. but also in the syncopated Perfects (δ 110). 
The first person in wu has been preserved in the ordinary conjugation only 
in the Optative ; but the earliest epic writers had it also in the Subjunc- 
tive; 6. δ. 

ἵκωμι, ἀγάγωμι, for ἵκω, ἀγάγω. 
Finally, the third person Singular in ov or ow is also in the epic language 
very common in the Subjunctive ; e. g. 
τύπτῃσιν, ἔχῃσι, for τύπτῃ, ἔχη. : 
For the 3 Sing. Indicat. in you instead of the usual form, see § 106. n. 10. 


§ 104. veRBS.—USUAL AND UNUSUAL TENSES. 203 


14, The circumflexed forms are by the Ionics either resolved, or pro- 
longed into the double sound (§ 105. n. 10). Thus the Inf. Aor, 2 Active in 
εν, into ἕξιν, 6. δ. “ἢ 

φυγέειν for φυγεῖν from ἔφυγον, 

see marg. note to note ἴ. 4. p. 197. So likewise the Subjunctive of both 
Aorists Pass. in @, into éw, epic siw, see the marg, note to ἢ. I. 3; thus 

Subj. A. 1 Pass. εὑρεϑέω for εὑρεϑῶ from εὑρέϑην 

Subj. A. 2 Pass. τυπέω, epic τυπείω, for τυπῶ. 
In those personal forms of this Subjunctive which have ἡ in the ending, 
the usage of the epic writers varies between this mode of lengthening the 
preceding s, and the doubling of the ἡ ; e.g. (ἐδάμην, δαμῶ, δαμείω,) δα-- 
using, δαμείῃ Il. γ, 436. χ, 246; (ἐσάπην, cond, σαπείω,) σαπήῃ 1]. τ, 27. 
Compare the forms of the dialects under verbs in μὲ, since these must 
here also be assumed as the basis of such changes.* 

15. The Subjunctive loses sometimes in the epic writers its long vowel, 
and takes ὁ and ε instead of w and ἡ: e.g. ἴομεν let us go, see in εἶμι 
Subj. ἴω, ὁ 108. V.—éysigouey for -ωμεν 1]. 8,440. ἐρύσσομεν for Subj. A.1 
ἐρύσωμεν 1]. α, 141. ἱμείρεται for -ηταν Od. α, 41. γαυτίλλεταν Od. ὃ, 672. 
See also εἴδομεν under οἶδα ὃ 109. III. 6. This occurs most frequently 
in the form just adduced of the Subjunct. Aor. Pass. 6. g. δαμείομεν, 
δαμείετε. + 


_§ 104, Usual and Unusual Tenses. 


1. The rules hitherto given, simply teach how the different tenses are 
formed. ‘To give definite rules, in all those instances where different 
modes of formation are admissible, so as in every instance to know 
which of these modes is followed by any particular verb, is a thing im- 
possible in any language. A great portion of this subject is a mere 
matter of memory; and as e.g. in Latin it is necessary to observe un- 
der every single verb, especially in the third Conjugation, how it forms 
the Perfect and Supine; so also in Greek, it is necessary to remark 
under every verb each one of those tenses for itself, the formation 
of which we have exhibited above in particular sections. 


* For a third difference of form, according to which in the passages quoted 
above, Il. γ, 436. y, 246, and elsewhere, (where it is clearly the Subjunctive,) the 


forms δαμείης δαμδίη are written without ὁ subscript, see the marginal note to 
δ 107. ν.17.9. 


+ This must not be regarded as an irregularity of Syntax, as if the Indicative in 
these cases stood for the Subjunctive. For since this change never occurs, 
except where the metre does not allow the Subjunctive, it is easy to see that 
these are nothing more than instances, where the pronunciation, in a language not 
yet fixed, has come in aid of the metre. This view is placed beyond all question 
by those instances where no Indicative exists, which would resemble the short- 
ened Subjunctive. This is the case in εἴδομεν, ϑείομεν for ϑέωμεν, ἴομεν, and 
all Subjunctives of the Aor. Passive. An Indicative sidw I know, ϑείω I place, 
iw I go, cannot be assumed in Homer ; for otherwise these forms might very 
well occur in him as real Indicatives, and also in the other persons, as dw, si— 
dover, etc. in the sense of know; which however is not the fact. 


204 § 104. vERBS.—USUAL AND UNUSUAL TENSES. 


2. The chief point to be noted is, whether in any verb the Aor. 2 
Act. the Perf. 2, and the Aor. 2 Pass. are in use. These tenses are 
indeed related to each other as to form; but it does not hence follow, 
(as we have already often said,) that a verb in which one of these 
tenses occurs, has therefore the other. On the contrary, we have seen 
that the Aor. 2 Act. and Pass. are very rarely found together in one 
verb. Each of these three tenses must therefore be learned from the 
lexicon, from the catalogues in § 114 and Appendix D, or from actual 
examples. But until the learner has been able to do this, he may gen- 
erally assume,—since this formation or series of tenses is on the whole 
less frequent,—that the verb has only the other principal formation or 
series of tenses, viz. the Aor. 1 Act. the Perf. 1, and the Aor. 1 Pas- 
sive.* 

3. We can indeed assume it as a rule, that all derived verbs of three 
or more syllables, which have the following very common derivative 
endings, - 
ἄξω, ἰξω, αἰνω, ύνω, EVM, OW, aw, ἕω," 
e.g. σχευάζω from σχευή, νομίζω from νόμος, 

σημαίνω from σῆμα, εὐϑύνω from εὐϑύς, 
παιδεύω from παῖς, δουλόω from δοῦλος, 
τίμάω from teuy, gedéw from φίλος, 


form throughout only the | 
Alor. 1 Active, Perf. 1 (in xa), and Aor. 1 Passive. 


Nore 1. Some of these terminations are nevertheless in certain verbs 
not derivative endings; but they serve merely to lengthen out a verb; 
i.e. the verb is not derived by their aid from a noun or adjective, but the 
root or stem of a verb is by means of them lengthened in the Present, and 
the whole becomes thereby anomalous (§ 92). Such verbs can then form 
e.g. an Aor. 2 from this simple stem; thus ἀλιταένω from 4.477 ὩὮ---ἤλιτον, 
δαμάω from JEM2—édouny ; all which instances are given in the cata- 
logue of Anomalous verbs. 


Nore 2. Under the same head belong those derived verbs, which 
are formed from nouns by means of such endings as cow, ato, λλω, etc. 
(8119. 4.) Ofthese ἀλλάσσω is the only one which forms the Aor. 2 
Pass. ἠλλάγην. 


τ 


* Precisely as in English, by far the greater number of verbs have the regular 
form of the Imperf. and of the past or Passive Participle in ed, as ask, asked, asked ; 
love, loved, loved; while comparatively few have the monosyllabic Imperf. and 
the Part. in en or x, as speak, spoke, spoken ; give, gave, given, etc. In English 
too, the regular form is the only usual one in all clearly derived verbs; just as 
in Greek the Aor. 1, ete. 


_ § 105.—conrracrEeD CONJUGATION. 205 


§ 105. Conrracrep Consucation. 


1. Verbs in ἕω, aw, and ow, correspond entirely, in their general 
formation, to the rules and examples given above ; and in the sections 
which treat of the formation of the tenses, we Bate everywhere had 
reference also to these verbs. But in the Present and Imperfect of the 
Active and Passive forms, where the vowels a, δ, 0, stand immediately 
before the vowels of the flexible endings, there arises in the Attic and 
common language a Contraction, which in the Ionic dialect is often 
neglected ; see note 1. 


2. This contraction conforms throughout to the general rules in § 28; 
except in some endings of verbs in ow. In these verbs, instead of 
contracting og¢ into ov, and 07 into @, according to the general rule, 
the ὁ of the second and third person becomes predominant, so that the 
endings ostg and oy¢ are contracted into oss, and the endings oe 
and oy into οὐ. Thus ! 


2 pers. Ind. Act. μισϑόεις 
— Subj. --- μεσϑόῃς 


‘ 


\ contr. μεσϑοῖς 


3 pers. Ind. Act. μεσϑόει 


— Subj. — μισϑόῃ } contr. μὐσϑοι 


and so likewise 


a ie subj = ᾿ μισϑόῃ contr. μέσϑοῖ. 


— Since now 00+ is also contracted into ov, the three moods, Indic. 
 Subjunct. and Opt. become in these two persons in the Active entirely 
alike. — The Infin. in ὁδὸν is regularly contracted, e.g. μεισϑοεὺν 
contr. μισϑοῦν. 


3. Verbs in ἄω, which everywhere “follow the general rules of 
contraction, have the whole Indicative and Subjunctive in both Active 
and Passive alike; inasmuch as both we and ay are contracted into a; 
aév and αῃ into @; and ao, aov, aw, into ὦ. 


s 


27 


Sozanogoml wy ‘an0.g ‘no0n0g ‘4mgoin Sozaonia “xy ‘10 ‘nom ‘ana 501420104 “xy ‘a0 “.0Q0 ‘Aono “1πο0 


So2aoo,g.om "Ky a00g Sacha pon sozaonmha x) ‘400 ΩΣ ΤΩΣ S01do0310a0 “xy “403 “ὍΘ ΠΟβ “ΑΩ3101: - 
a9d190.L0 7 
anogom a1z0g07N | anni arz0nI4 | 13701 M1327 016 
τῳ Α ~ ~ 
‘aanpuyuy 


‘Bou “G0gd veg , 


§ 105. VERBS.—CONTRACTED PARADIGMS. ὦ 


(4)29n20g97 (κ 2) 20n00g00n ; (4) 2071 (4) 29A200N02 (4) 20n010u (4) 20207701 
2200000 22? ogo 320172 gasionna 2212701 32237015 
aznaogom aanoogom agnona agnor aznao7041t agnoz10u "ἃ 
ao200g-0m 20220g.0901 4015})}}71 ao1z0n02 A0212708L 02337042 
aoznogom a0220g-000 401:)772 aorzonn. 0213704 40129701 
— —_ 2 —_ -- - ͵ ᾿ς Pe a ‘d 
10.g¢970 | 2208-07 naz 1370112 12701 1332701 
x 510g9701 S120g000 , sana Saz0n02 572701 5723701 
ogom mogom onr2. cone Ὡ701: M2701 ὋΣ 
a (τ “2,10 297) (unouoy) (aynue) ‘aarqoo pup 
"U9SO1 gq | Ἶ 
Ξ ‘MAI LOV 


207 


. § 105. verss.—conTRACTED PARADIGMS. 


~ 


‘anoljo “3110 = ‘azrilu10- 
alakr0 ‘a02k0- : 
‘jo ‘5lu10 ‘auogom 
ony 10 
azr0gor 2210090701 
3210g070 22700g0 
asniogom aanroogom 
akrj0gomm al2100g.00N1 
20210g.07 ao2n00.g.070 
20.g.070 700 975] 
810.6.927] δ᾽ 00 6 97ὴ 
γ710.915)] γ7]200ρογ5] 
ou "Gog "ὦ eog | 

(4) νοῦ 91) (4) 20m0G-0701 
220.090 ; 22kogom 
aaron gor , aanoogom 
a02mgom aologom 
2020.g-091 aozkogom 
10 917) iogom 
4 5170g.97n1 stiogom 
agom mogom 


Ἢ 9100 ‘MOTO 995 ΠῚ10} ONY SITY} 10,7 


anol ‘22a “αϑηϊιώ-- 
alurlicd ‘a02luco— 
ud ‘slut “αἱε υἹγ1 
͵ [ , 
ΟἹ 10, 
αϑὠγγ]71 az100N12 
91 γ]71 22000012 
aanionna agnionnes 
αἰετὠ 11 ἰ alajonns 
κοι γγ1 ao2rontra 
on 200012 
δ )γ]11 Sro0n2 
anton avons 


6 ‘ou ‘Gog “ἃ eeg , 


(2) 7900172 
217012 
asnona2 
202012 
401 771 
ana 
Sanaa 

Εν τς contra 


(a) 719070112 
2alonna 
agnannrs 
aoalion2 


͵ 


κοι) γ171 


linia. 


Sliiona2 


4 
mnn. 


| 


avoliio “31.170 
at2u10 <a02l10- 
ἰῴο 510 “αἰιγοτοῖν 


‘aanl10 


ΟΙΉ 10 
210701 A2703701 
22107014 229037016 
a3n10701 a3120370U “ἃ 
al210701L al1102701 
20210701 202702701 
od —_— ‘d 
10701 703701 
510701£ 57037012 
γ7]10101. 91032012 Ὡ 
"νΩ1)9240 
(4) τοῦτο (4) 19027018 
227016 921427012 
azn aznen37011 ‘7 
1021701 ao2li310u 
ao2ti101 A0243701 
ἜΣΗΙ: 4 Ἂν Ὁ 
wou uzr0u 
slir0u 543701 
07044 M270u “Ὁ 


‘aangountang 


/ 


VERBS.—CONTRACTED PARADIGMS. 


Ἂ. 


§ 105. 


208 


\ 


(0113 
mongol 
arzneo.g-omsna 


030 “Sex- ‘QD 


maznogoimnen ‘fur 


nx0o.gomen 


00} 12 
mona 
anznlini2922 


‘030 δωχ- "70g ἵ 


qmarnlennaz2 ‘fuy 


nxlon}132 


nolujour~ | ἼΟΥ 
- Mowiou 1 ny 
AI2%UI0 U3 12 


2 Jdnjig 


030 'δῶχ-- "UD 


4 


qoaznluousy ‘fur 


“κοι = "lag 


‘29ML 10 M21LAL JO SOSUAT, OILS OY} 91] poulpoop ore Sosa 7, 1Π0} SUTMOTIOF OUT, 3 


anogoms 
2200g.09n2 
aznaogom 
aurnogom 
40220. gore 
nogojne 
5a0gon? 
Ano g-oIN? 


am1anogom 
10 anom2n0gom 
2200g071 
am2ogom 
ao1a0gom 
1n0goml 
nogor 


a00g91N3 
2220g97N2 

i 
asvloog.om? 
au2z0g.0m? 
a0120g09m3 
20,g.91n2 
520g.0)"3 
a00G.9)113 


am1ag0gom 
10 σοί 220,071 
2220900 
am23209-09n 
40230g9001 
m2320goIn 
20g0) 


amnya2 a0nn} 23 
2201723 ga3nnia3 
agnionag Ἁ azvonna3 
alan 1713 aluazion23 
ao10n23 aoazann23 
7123 970723 
Sarna 539}}}13 
ΩΣ aonn)13 
“yoojJodwiy 

am1aMns.4 ama.aonn2 
10 anow2onn1 10 angm2130012 
φ1γ71 22390002 
am10n2 amazonte 
πολ» γ]71 aoazonra 
20212 (013 γ711 
ania 30 nj1 


“Π0}01:3 
911370113 
ΛΞ] ΟΊ01:3 
al2173101L2 
0021370113 
937012 
5131013 
ANQOI01U? 


am 1anor0u 
10 A092}370U 
3213701L 
A00.213701 
10213701 
9273701 

93104L 


A071013 
22227013 
a3nlo3201:3 7 | 
ale23370102 
002337012 
a 
33701? 
523701? 
20310112 * 


TR 


AM21A031701 
10. 0090233101 
2233701 "ἢ 
A(M13370 
10223101 Ἡ 
0032701 
32700 Ὃ 
ΕΣ 


209 


§ 105. veRBS.—CONTRACTED PARADIGMS. 


Ὁ 900 “d 996. 1 
102aMG-090 
φρο R001 

nganngor 
20g9mGg0I 
a0gomgom 
a0gsnagom 
ογ 1 β ΟἽ] 

4 Togo 
rvorin gor 


Soa2naogom 
m.g020g91 


12anogom 
2g020g07n 
ng2naogom 
aogonogom 
20 goa0goml 
aog2naogom 
mnogo 

4 “Ἰοροτη 
nao 


102A 0 0.01} 
φροίε ρον 
ορϑηϊωορογη 
aogokogom 
aogouogom 
aogsnuogom 


90 noogom 


Soasnoo gor | 


n ΄ 
1704-03007 | 


1120007 
290209001 
ngsnoogom 
20g930g00 
a0g020gor 
aog3noogom 


ronoogoml 


Ὃ (0 ᾿ἃ 90g 


79 1π0)γ]71 
2g00n12 
nganon. 
aogonnn 
aogonnt. 


aogenornna 


270270072 
On22 


x nconIL » 


Soasneons. 
910.G-0701172 


1702000172 
2g.00n12 

Ὁ 3") 114 
ΛΟ. gone 
a0gonnt. 
aogeno 171 
7.)4.}172 

‘ pron 
onions 


704 π00}}171 
960 bina 
ogenmnnn. 


AO, goons 


͵ 


ao golan. 
angen. 
morons 
liionlaa 

22], Ὁ171 


Soasnonna 
70. ,03}0}]71 


970 2000112 
ngovnna 
ngenonnr 
aogovon2 
aogozonra 
πο ρϑη) 0 121, 
2130012 
liorlaa 


aononnaa 


“‘JUOSOA 


“HAISSVd 


7 


10100070 
goto 
ng2nior01 
a0gouroa 
aogoleror 
aoganorou 
q02.101 
Won 

γ γ᾽ 701: 


Soazn10704¢ 
10. (,.013101: 


9702000101 
2.9.9737010 
70.g31107016 
A0G-01370U 
A0.6-01370L 
κορϑημοτοιι 
970212701 

13— 10 lino 
2) 701: 


70 24003101: 
ϑρο 310: 

Ὁ 63") 9701: "Ἐὶ 
ποροίμτοιι 
ὦ aogolz0u 

πο ρϑη 9101, ‘a 
1701143701 
"τοι, 

φ ἡ 3101: Ὁ 

*-ganjounlong 


Soaznoz201 "9120 47 


mm 9037101 
‘saunuyuy 


1701003101 
2.033701 
g-2n03701 “ἃ 
20.G-033701 
4 
A0G-923701 
A0G3N03701 Ἢ 
11013370 
933— 10 lizr0u 
novl037012 Ὁ 
‘aaunopuy 


a” 3 νά 


§ 105. vERBS.—CONTRACTED PARADIGMS. 


210 


o2an0gome - 


2g920g.093 
nganaogom 
alugono, geome 
20g-020R0IN3 
aogeniao gon? 
o2n0gorme 

Ao go> 
auninogom 


02400G-07n3 
29.020,g0m3 
ngenoogoms 
alt..030g0I3 
A0.g020g.0117 
aog2noogorme 
01320g073 
noogom 
aunoogoms 


amgon0gom amgo20gomn ‘10 


anowmgonogom 
2g.000g00n1 
awgonogom 
a0gonogom 
mpgonogor 
aogor 


02210g¢07 
29910207 
“neg2niogom 
alug.oj0g.or 
20¢:910¢-0711 

- A0g2N10g0m 
0210-97 
o10g97n 
auniogom 


anongo20g0m 
2902090701 
amgo20g0m 
a0go20g001 
mgo20gom 
aoogom 


020200g990 
29.0200.010 
ne2nioogrion 
au.g.ojo0gom 
40¢.:9700.g-970 
2092N)00-0901 
o2200g00n1 
o100gomm 
alnioogom 


- 


o1acon2? 
2g.00n23 
ngenioonna2 
alug.onnra3 
aogonnna? 
aogenanraz 
o2nv023 
connaz 
alunicoraas 


am gonnr 
anomgonnrs 
2gonnaa 
amgonnr 
aogonn. 
0) 6.071 
coin. 


02am 


OMn74a 


alnioniaa 


o2aonnn22 ; 


2goz0n43 
ngenonnra3 
alug.ozura7 
a0g-020n123 
aogeno'onn13 
o190n123 
ΔΟΊΗ 713 
alenonrnas 


"joojsod wy 


40§.930N12 IO 
A090 Q030N02 
2goz0nr2 
amgozona 
aogoronn 
mg020N12 
aonna 


041420 21. 
2g0700N02 
ngamonnna 
alug.ovonnna 
aogononnra 
angsnjonnes 
o2100002 
or00nna 
alinonn2 


020010162 
2..:0127012 
nge2naoroas 
alug-9)37019 
20.6-0127013 
a0g anlaon013 
021370113 
001013 
aluninorou? 


A.G-0127018 
AD00.4.97370U 
96 ΟΊ9101: 

AM G.91270 
10.G-012701L 
072701 
20201 


021410701 
2.4-070701L 
70.921707046 
al.g010701 
A06-910701L 
20631707016 
0210701 
070701 
aknjor0u 


΄ 


0120370113 

29.0927012 
ΠΥ “ 
- alug.o2320u7 
40..033101|3 


πο ρ 3 0910113 Ἢ 


02327013 
2037043 
alun0220113 “ὦ 
͵ ς 


a 039101: 10’ 
000 00..032701 


2.Q.02370L "ἃ 
A. G.9237016 
10,-032701 Π 
(0.022701 
Ω03101: *S 
‘sangosaduy 


024103701 
2.4-9702701L 
70.92N102701 "ἃ 
Al.g-9102701L 
ΛΟ ΟΊΟ3101, 
093702701 ‘a 
02703701 
“0703701 
alino2101u Ὁ 
να υγ) 


$105. vERBS.—CONTRACTED PARADIGMS. 


211 


᾿ς The following tenses suffer no contraction ; but we prefer to exhibit 
here the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive fully inflected, in order that 


the analogy of these forms, in comparison with the 
moacdevw, may be clearly seen. 


Perfect. 
Indic. 8S. πεποίημαι φετίμημαν 
πεὲποίησαυ τετίμησαν 
πεποίηται τετίμηται 
D. πεποιήμεϑον τετιμήμεϑον 
πὲποίησϑον τετίμησϑὸν 
πεὲποίησϑον τετίμησϑον 
Ρ. πεποιήμεϑα τετιμήμεϑα 
πεποίησϑε τετίμησϑε 
᾿ πποίηντοαυ τετίμηνταῦ 
Infinit. πεποιῆσϑαι | τέτιμῆσϑαι 
Partic. πεποιημένος τετιμημένος 


same tenses from 


μὲμ ἔσϑωμαν 
μεμίσϑωσαι 
μεμίσϑωτ αὐ 
μεμισϑώμεϑον 
μεμίσϑωσϑον 
μεμίσϑωσθϑον 
μεμισϑώμεϑα 
μεμίσϑωσθϑε 
μεμίσϑωνται 


μεμισϑώσϑαν 
μεμισϑωμένος 


Subjunct. and Optat. are wanting. For the few verbs which can form 


them, see § 98. n. 9. 
Imper. 8. nenoinoo | 


τετίμησο 
πεποϑῆ 103-0, etc. 


τετιμήσϑω, etc. 


Pluperfect. 

S. ἐπεποιήμην ἐτετιμήμην 
ἐπεποίησο ἐτετίμησο 
ἐπεποίητο ἐτετίμητο 

Ὁ. ἐπεποιήμεϑον ἐτετιμήμεϑον 
ἐπεποίησϑον ἐτετίμησϑον 
ἐπεποιήησϑην ἐτετιμήσϑην 

Ῥ, ἐπεποιήμεϑα ἐτετιμήμεϑα 
ἐπεποίησϑε ἐτετίμησϑε 
ἐπεποίηντο ἐτετίμηντο 

Fut. 1. ποιηϑήσομαν τιμηϑήσομαι 
Aor. 1. ἐποιήϑην ἐτιμήϑην 
Fut. 8. πεποιήσομαι τετιμήσομαν 
MIDDLE.* 
Fut. 1. ποιήσομαι | τιμήσομαι 
Aor. 1. ἐποιησάμην. ἐτιμησάμην 
Verbal Adjectives. 
ποιητέος τιμητέος 
πονητὸς | TLUNTOS 


μεμίσϑωσο | 
μεμισϑώσϑω, etc. 


ἐμεμισϑώμην 


ἐμεμίσϑωσο 
ἐμεμίσϑωτο 
ἐμεμισϑώμεϑον 
ἐμεμίσϑωσϑον 
ἐμεμισϑώσϑην 
ἐμεμεσϑώμεϑα 


1 ἐμεμίσϑωσϑε 


ἐμεμίσϑωντο 


μισϑωϑή σομαν 
ἐμισϑώϑην 
μεμισϑώσομαν 


μισϑώσομαν 
ἐμισϑωσάμην 


μισϑωτέος 
μισϑωτὸς 


* Ποιεῖσθαν to make for one’ s self ; τιμᾶσθαι to honour, as in the Active; 


μισϑοῦσϑαι to cause to let to one’s self, i.e. to hire. 


212 § 105. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONTR. PARADIGMS. 


Nore 1. The older Grammarians taught without any limitation, that 
the uncontracted forms of these verbs were Jonic forms. They may be 
‘more correctly called the old or the ground-forms ; and it is only in verbs 
in ἕω that they are in the proper sense Ionic, i.e. such as are used by all 
Tonic writers. ‘They belong however exclusively to the later Ionic prose ; 
for the epic writers very often used the contracted forms, and sometimes 
also employed the lengthened sw instead of ἕω; e.g. duvet, πλείξιν, 
γεικείεσκε, etc.—The uncontracted form of verbs in ἄω is only so far to be 
called Ionic, as the epic writers sometimes avail themselves of it ; although 
in only a few words and forms; e.g. ἀοιδιάει, πεινάοντα, ναιετάουσιν, etc. 
—Verbs in ow are found uncontracted only in the first pers. Singular ; else- 
where they are always either contracted, or take the double sound pecu- 
liar to the epic writers; see notes 10, 11, and § 28. n. 3. marg. note.—In the 
Ionic prose, verbs in ἀὼ and ‘i hover occur, except either in the usual 
contracted form, e.g. in Herodot. γικᾶν, ἐνίκων, νικῶεν, εἰρώτα, βιῶ for 
βιάου; ; — δηλοῖ, ἐμισϑοῦντο, ὃ ἑτεροιοῦτο, etc. or else with the peculiarities of 
formation and contraction which are given below, in note 7 sq. 


Nore 9. In the Attic and common language, none of the contractions 
which occur in this conjugation were ever neglected ; not even in Attic 
poetry, i.e. in the dramatic senarius. The only exceptions are the 
shorter verbs in ἕω, whose present Act. in the uncontracted form has only 
two syllables, as toéw. ‘These admit only the contraction in # ; 6. & τρεῖ, 
ἔτρει, πρεὺν ; in all other forms they remain uncontracted ; e.g. ῥέω, χέο-- 
μαι, τρέομεν, πνέουσι, πγέῃ, etc. excepting nevertheless day to bind, 6. 5. 
‘10 δοῦν, τῷ δοῦντι Plat. Craty]. (6) avaday Aristoph. Plut. 589. διαδοῦ- 
μαι, etc. On the contrary δεῖν to need, want, has commonly to δέον, 
δέομαι, etc.* 

Note 3. The moveable » is taken by the 3 pers. Sing. Impf. only in 
the uncontracted form, as Hom. ἔῤῥεεν, TERY 5 not’ in the contracted one. 
Still Homer has once ἤσκειν from aoxéw. Comp. the Plupf. in § 108. 
n, IL. 2. : , 

Notre 4. The form of the Optative, known by the name of the Aitic 
Optative, which is in a measure peculiar to contract verbs (ὃ 103. n. IT. 3), 
is fully given in the paradigm (p. 207), in order that the analogy of it may 
be clearly understood. It is however to be observed, that the Attic usage, 
which was governed only by a regard to euphony and perspicuity, prefer- 
red certain parts selected from each of the forms; viz. 

1) The Plural of the Attic form was less used, because of its length, 
especially in verbs in ἕω and 6; least of all the 3 pers. Plur. in 
οἷησαν, ῴησαν. The Attics said ‘almost always ποιοῖεν, τιμῷεν, 
μισϑοῖεν. 

2) In the Sing. however, the Opt. in οἷην from verbs in ἕω and ow, is 
far more usual than the other form. 


* But see the Anom. déw.—In the verb χέω we must take care not to con- 
found the 3 Sing. éyee from Aor. 1 ἔχεα (see the Anom.  χέω) with the same 
person of the Imperfect ;: the latter is contracted, ἔχεε ἔχει, the former not ; 
e.g. Aristoph. Nub. 75 κατέχεεν. ᾿ 


§ 105. veRBs.—NOTES ON THE CONTR. PARADIGMS, 213 


3) In verbs in ἄω the Attic Opt. (τιμῴην etc.) is in the Sing. used si 
most exclusively ; and also in the Plur. (with the exception of the 
3 pers.) far more frequently than in. the other two classes of verbs. 


Nore 5. Some verbs in ἄω are contracted in the Doric manner into ἡ 
instead of α (see note 15). ‘The most common of these are the four fol- 
lowing, viz. 

ζὴν to live, χρῆσϑαν to use, 
πεινῇν to hunger, διψὴν to thirst, 
from few, χράω, (see both in the Catal. ὁ 114,) weve, Supew,—which 
make (ic, ζῇ, ἔζη, χρῆται, etc. ~The following verbs also, so nearly 
related to each other in their signification, viz. 
κγάω scrape, σμάω stroke, wow rub, 
are contracted in the same manner, at least in the genuine Attic. 


Nore 6. The verb διγύόω I am cold has an irregular contraction, viz. 
ὦ and @ instead of ov and ov; e.g. Inf. ῥιγῶν, Opt. διγῴην. But this 
peculiarity i is not always observed, at least in our editions.—In the verb 
idgow I sweat, which in signification is opposed to the preceding, the 
same rule holds in the Tonic dialect; e.g. ἱδρῶσα 1]. δ, 27.. ἱδρῴη Hip- 
pocr. de Aér. Ag. Loc. 17. 


DIALECTS. 


Notre 7. Since the Ionics form the 2 pers. Pass. in the ordinary con- 
jugation in eae and so (§ 103. ΠῚ, 2), there arises in verbs in ἕω an accu- 
mulation of vowels in this person, which the Ionic prose writers retain, 
as ποιξεαι, ἐπταυνέξαι, etc. 'The epic writers contract sometimes the two 
first vowels, e.g. μυϑεῖαι, like μυϑέεταν μυϑεῖται. Sometimes one 8 
is elided, and in éso always; e.g. μυϑέαι from μυϑέομαν Od. β, 202; 
φοβέο from φοβέομαν. Herod. 9, 120; aivéo, ἐξηγέο, etc. The forms of this 
2 person in ἔῃ, @7, 043 gov, ἄου, dov, which we have placed in the para- 
digm for the sake of uniform analogy, never occur. 


Nore 8. Verbs in ἄω, as we have seen (note 1), are not commonly 
employed by the Ionics in their original uncontracted form; but many of 
them are so resolved that the ἃ passes over into 8: e.g. 

δρέω, Ogéousy, for ded, δράομεν. 

φοιτέοντες for φοιτάοντες 

χθέεται, μηχανέεσϑαι, for ἅται, ἄσϑαι 
and the like. Sometimes they change «o into ew (ὃ 27. π, 10); 6. g. μη- 
χανέωνται, χρέωμαι, etc. 


Nore 9. Inthe 3 pers. Plur. where the Ionics change y into o (§ 103. 
IV), and put --δατὸ for -ovto, they sometimes employ in these verbs 
the same ending for --ἔοντο, where of course there is an elision of the ¢; 
but this is done only in verbs in ἄω, as ἐμηχαγέατο for -ἄοντο, -gorto, 
comm. ἐμηχανῶντο. —In the Perf. and Plupt- they not only change ἡνταὺ 
and wyto into ἥἤαται, ὥαται, 8. δ. πεποτήαται, κεχολώατο, Homer; but 
likewise commonly shorten the ἡ into ε, e.g. 

οἰκέαται, ἐτετιμέατο, for ᾧκηνται, ἐτετίμηντο. 

Nore 10. ‘The old Ionic of the epic writers sometimes contracts the 

forms, and sometimes not. In verbs in ἄω however, which are seldom 


28 


214 § 105. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONTR. PARADIGMS. 


employed in their original uncontracted form (note 1), the Ionic allows 
these poets the peculiar license of again resolving the vowel or improper ἢ 
diphthong of contraction into a double sound, by repeating before it the 
same sound, either long or short, according to the necessities of the me- 
tre (δ 28. n.3). Thus α in 3 

(δράειν) ὃ ὁρᾷν — ὁράᾳν" 

(ἀσχαλάει) ἀσχαλᾷ --- ἀσχαλάᾳ 

2 pers. Pass. (μνάῃ) μνῷ τ μνάᾳ 

ἀγορᾶσϑε, μνᾶσϑαι --- ἀγοράασϑε, μνάασϑαι. 
Further, ὁ or in 

(ogaw) δρῶ — ὁρόω 

Imperat. Pass. (ἀλάου) ἀλῶ — ἀλόω 

(βοάουσι) βοῶσι --- βοόωσι exe 

Opt. (αἰτιάοιτο) αἰτιῷτο ---- αἰτιόῳτο 

(δραουσι) δρῶσι --- δρώωσι 

Part. Fem. (ἡβάουσα) ἡβῶσα ---- ἡβώωσα. 
In the Ionic prose this species of resolution occurs seldom; Herodot. 
ἡγορόωντο 6, 11. κομόωσι 4, 191. — Sometimes the ὁ is placed,after ὦ, 
6. g. 

ἡβώοντες, ἡβώοιμι, for ἡβῶντες, ἡβῷμι, from --ἄοντες, cout, + 

and for γελῶντες may stand either γελόωντες or γελώοντες, as the metre may 
require. — A peculiar” anomaly is the Homeric Particip. Fem. γαιετάωσα 
for -covow or -όωσα. 

Nore 11. All forms with the double sounds ow and wo are also 
common to verbs in 6#; though in these they can arise neither by regular 
resolution, nor by doubling the vowel of contraction ; e. g. ' 

(ἀρόουσι) ἀροῦσι, epic ἀρόωσι 
(δηϊόοντο, δηϊόοιεν,) δηϊοῦντο, δηϊοῖεν, epic δηϊόωντο, δηϊόφεν. 

Nore 19. The iterative Imperfect in oxoy (§ 103. II. 1) is more seldom 
employed by the Ionics in these verbs; e.g. φιλέεσκον Herodot. Bovzo- 
λέεσχες Homer. This form was never contracted ; but was sometimes 
syncopated i in the earlier poets by dropping 8; e.g. ἤχεσκε for ἤχέεσκε 
from ἠχέω ; ἔἕασκε from ἐάω; and so with a doubling of α, ναιετάασκον 
from yvotsetao. : 

Norte 13. That the Dorics contract ¢o into sv instead of ov, and that 
this is followed by the Ionics when they contract, has already been men- 
tioned, ὃ 28.n.5. Thus e.g. from ποιέω they make 


-Ὁ 
ποιεῦμεν, ποιεῦμαι, ποιεῦντες, ἐποίευν. 


But in verbs in ow likewise we often find in Herodotus and others εὑ, 
contrary to analogy, instead of ov contracted from 00; 6. g. 


ἐδικαίευν, ἐδικαίευ, πληρεῦντες, from δικαιόω, πληρόω. 


And this same contraction takes place, through the change of «@ into s 
(note 8), in verbs in ἄω, δ. δ. 


᾿εἰρώτευν, ἀγαπεῦντες, from εἰρωτάω, ἀγαπάω. 


* For the ὁ subscript see the marg. note to n. 15. 

t In some verbs this doubling of the sound by means of w, passed over into a 
peculiar formation, -αἴω, wevg, vier; see the simaaess téw, MA, and μνάω in 
μιμνήσκω. 


§ 105. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONTR. PARADIGMS. 215 


7 


Finally, sv stands not only for sov, and consequently for aov, but also 
for oov; e.g. 

ποιεῦσι, pidevoo,* for ποιέουσι, oor, φιλέουσα, οὖσα 

γελεῦσα for γελάουσα, dou 

δικαιεῦσι for δικαιόουσι, οὖσι. 
Closer observation must teach, which of these different forms occurs most 
frequently in each of the two dialects. But it follows of course, that 
the 3 Plur. ποιεῦσι, γελεῦσν can be only Ionic ; because the Dorics form 
᾿σεοριδῦντι, γελεῦντι. Comp. § 103. V. 4. 


Nore 14. In another mode of contraction, which is rather AZolic than 
Doric, ο is often swallowed up by a preceding αἉϑ, which thereby becomes 
long ; 8. 5. φυσᾶντες for φυσάοντες, 3 Pl. πεινῶντι or πεινᾶντι. 


Nore 15. When the Ionics sometimes change the contracted ἃ or ¢ in- 
to ἡ and 7, 8. 5. δρῆν, φοιτῇν, ἰῆσϑαι, etc. this coincides entirely with the 
nature of their dialect; but it is done only by a part of the Ionic writers, 
e.g. Hippocrates. Herodotus has δρᾷν, νικᾷν, and even from χράω --- 
χρᾶσϑαι, χρᾷ, etc. On the contrary, among the Dorics, who everywhere 
else employ long α instead of ἡ, this contraction into ἡ instead of @ isa 
peculiarity, (where too in the contraction from oe they omit the ὁ sub- 
script,t comp. § 103. V. 10,) 6. 5. δρῆν, ἐρὴ for ἐρᾷ, τολμῆτε for τολμᾶτε, 
etc. Nevertheless, in conjugation and flexion (not contracted), they 
say γικάσω, τολμᾶσαι, etc. They have the same contraction in the Infin. 
of verbs in ἕω, e.g. κοσμὴν for κοσμεῖν. | 

Notre 16. The epic writers avail themselves in like manner of ἡ 
as the vowel of contraction; but only in some forms from ow and ἕω, 
chiefly in the Dual in τὴν, 6. 5. προσαυδήτην, δμαρτήτην, from αὐδάω, 
ὁμαρτέω ; and in the lengthened Infinitive forms in ἥναι, ἤμεναι, instead 
of εἶν and ἂν ; 6. 5. φορῆναν from φορέω, φιλήμεναι, γοήμεναν for youy.t 

Note 17. From verbs in 6@ the epic Τηΐ. ἀρόμμεναν for ἀροῦν, is a 
solitary example. | 


A Catalogue of the Contract Verbs see in Appendix D. 


* The Doric govoa can be contracted only into δῦσα, and not into ozow, which 
occurs only in the Particip. Aor. 2 λαβοῖσα, where there is no contraction ; see 
§ 103. V.5. 


+ The omission of 4 subscript was anciently common in the Infinitive of verbs 
in dw, e.g. τιμᾶν, βοᾶν, ζῆν. Modern critics (e.g. Wolf) have endeavoured to 
introduce again this mode of writing, as being the ancient orthography ; and, as 
it would seem, not without ground. See Ausf. Sprachl. § 105. n. 17.—Some of 
the Grammarians always omitted it in the double sounds, e.g. ὁράαν, ὁράας. 


+ Here belongs dg7az, for which see the marg. note to ὃ 106.n.10; and ϑήσθαι, 
see the Anom. @42, Comp. also ἐϑηῆτο under the Anom. ϑάομαι, Both 
modes of contraction, (that into 7, and that into es and @,) which in the de- 
velopment of the language became the property of particular dialects, were 
unquestionably, in the earliest language, like so many other forms, in common 
fluctuating usage. Of the form in 7 some examples (C7, etc.) always remained 
common; and no wonder that we find in the epic language still more instances 
of this kind, which have been retained on account of some special euphony. 


216 § 106. vERBS IN μέ. 


IRREGULAR CONJUGATION. 


: § 106. Verzs ΙΝ μι. δ 


1. We commence our account of the Anomaly of the Greek verb, 
with that which is called, from the ending of the 1 pers. Pres. Indicative, 
the Conjugation in wt. This does not, like the two preceding forms of 
conjugation, contain a multitude of Greek verbs; but only a small num- 
ber of verbs and parts of verbs, which differ from the regular analogy of 
of the great mass of verbs in some essential points, while they yet have 
a common analogy among themselves. : 

Nore 1. Those verbs in μὲ which are exhibited in the grammars, and 
inflected throughout as examples of this conjugation, are almost the only 
ones which adopt this formation in all the parts where it is applicable. 
All the other examples that belong here, are merely single parts of certain 
anomalous or defective verbs, or epic forms. Besides, the more usual 
verbs in μὲ do not coincide with one another in all their parts; but each, 
on account of its peculiarities, must be noted by itself as an anomalous 
verb. 

2. All verbs in μὲ have one root or stem, which in the ordinary forma- 
tion would terminate in ὦ pure (§ 28.1); and chiefly in ἕω, aw, dw, vw. 


It is therefore usual in grammar, to trace back this less usual formation - 


to the other more familiar one; and to say e.g. that the verb — 
comes from a simpler form O22. 
3. The peculiarities of the conjugation in ws are confined to these 


three tenses, viz. . 
Present, Imperfect, Aorist 2. 


The essential feature in’ all these peculiarities is, that the flexible 
endings, e.g. μὲν, τὲ, ν, μαι, are not annexed by means of a union- 
vowel (ομὲν, été, ον, Omar), but are appended immediately to the 
radical or stem-vowel of the verb, e. g. 
τίϑετ-μεν, ἵστα-μαι, δίδο-τε, ἐδείκνυ-τε, ἔϑη-ν. 
See notes 6, 7. 
4, There are moreover some peculiar endings, viz. 

fue — in the 1 person Pres. Sing. 

ov or ovv — in the 3 person Pres. Sing. 

Ov — in the 2 person Imperat. Sing. 
In the Imperat. of the Aor. 2 Act. some verbs have nevertheless instead 
of Ov, simply ¢; as ϑές, δός, &; see τίϑημε, δίδωμι, ἵημε; and comp. 
σχές and φρές in the Anom. ἔχω and yoéw.—Further, the Infinitive of 
‘the above tenses always ends in vee; and the Mase. of the Participle of 
the Nom. ends, not in v, but in ς, before which vy has been dropped; on 


§ 106. verps IN we. 217 ° 


which account the radical vowel is lengthened before the ¢ in the 
usual manner, ἄς, δίς, ovs, us, Gen. vtog. These endings of the 
participle always have the tone, in the form of the acute accent. 

5. The Subjunctive and Optative unite the stem-vowel of the verb 
with the vowel of their endings into a mixed vowel or diphthong, upon 
which they regularly always have the tone. ‘The mixed vowel of the 
a i ον when the stem has either € or @, is ὦ or 1, 

ὦ, ἧς, ἢ, ὦμεν, ATE, ον: 
but ite the stem has 0, the  Subjunctive has always ὦ; 
ὦ, OS, M, ὦμεν, τε, ὥσι(ν). 
The mixed sound of the Optative is a diphthong with ¢, to which in the 


_ Active the flexible ending ἦν is always joined : 


τυϑ-είην, ἱστ-αίην, διδ-ιοίην. 
See § 107. III. 2 sq.— Verbs in vue form these two moods most com- 
monly from the ordinary conjugation in -ve. 

6. Several of the shorter radical forms receive a reduplication, which 
consists in repeating the initial consonant with 4 ; e.g. 

AOS2 δίδωμι, ΘΕ ridnue. 

But when the stem begins with oz, mz, or with an aspirated vowel, it 
merely prefixes the ¢ with the rough breathing: 
STA ἵστημι, ΠΊ 4.2 ἵπταμαιυ, “ER type. 
It is only in such words that the Aorist 2 is possible in this form of 
conjugation ; since it is chiefly by the want of this reduplication, that 
this tense is distinguished, in the Indicative, from the Imperfect; and 
in the other moods, from the Present ; see § 96. n. 2. E.g. 
riOnuc Impf. éciOnv Aor. ἔϑην. 

7. The stem-vowel, in its connexion with the endings of this formation 
in the Sing. of the Indic. Act. of all the three tenses, always becomes 
long ; viz. from the radical @ and ¢ comes ἡ (1 Pres. nz), from ὁ comes ὦ 
(1 Pres. we), and from v comes v (1 Pres. vue). In the other endings 


/ 


the radical vowel appears most frequently in its original short form, ξ, 


ἃ, 0, ὕ, e.g. τίϑημι — είϑεμεν, ἔϑεσαν, τυϑέναι, τίϑετε, τίϑεμαι, etc. 
There are however some exceptions, which are best learned under each 
particular verb; first of all in the Paradigms, and then others in the 
catalogue of Anomalous Verbs; e.g. xeynvas, δίξημαι. 


Nore 2, Since the ending of the 2 pers. Pass. in the ordinary conju- 
gation (7, ov) comes from ecw, sco (ὃ 103. III. 1, 2); and since in the con- 
jugation in μὲ this union-vowel (ε) falls away; the ending of this 2 pers. 
Pass. in these verbs is simply σαν, σο, 6. g. τύέϑε-σαι, ἐτέϑε-σο, ἵστα-σαι, etc. 
just as in the Perf. and Plup. of the ordinary conj ugation. Still a similar 
contraction occurs here with the radical vowel, in some verbs more, in 
others less frequently : 

tidy, ἐτύϑου" (tore), ἵστω, for ἵστασαι, ἵστασο. 


218 § 106. veRrBs IN me. 


See the marg. note on p. 223. And since the Tonics, after dropping the | 
0; change into ε (δ 107. IV. 2), there arises from ἵστασαν (tora) the Ionic 
form tory. In the Aor. 2, the contracted form ἔϑου, ἔδου, etc. is alone in 
use. 


8. All the remaining tenses are derived after the ordinary conjugation 
* from the simple theme, and without the reduplication; e. g. c’Omus 
(OEQ) Fut. ϑήσω. N evertheless, some of the verbs which belong here 
have, as anomalous verbs, peculiarities in these tenses also. These 
however must be separated from the peculiarities of the formation in 
pe; and, so far as they are common to several of these verbs, we pro- 
ceed to exhibit them here in one general view. 


9. The two verbs Yornus and δίδωμι shorten the vowel in those 
Passive tenses which belong to the ordinary conjugation : 
Act. στήσω Perf. ἕστηκα Pass. Perf. ἕσταμαὶ Aor. ἐστάϑην. 
᾿ δώσω ΄δεδῶκα — — δέδομαν — ἐδόϑην. 
The. verbs souls and ἕημν (δ 108. T) do the same, but only in a the Aor- 
ist Pass. and in the Future which depends on it: 


ἐτέϑην, for ἐϑέϑην, from OEQ, 
é0eig Part. Aor. 1 Pass. from “£22. 


In the Perfect of both Act. and Pass. these two verbs change the stem- 


vowel into év: 
’ } 
τέϑεικα, TED ELMAL ELKO, εἶμαι. : 


10. The three verbs riOnue, inut, δίδωμι, have a peculiar form of 


the Aor. 1 in κα, e.g. 
“/ ἔϑηκα, ἧκα, ἔδωκα, 
which must of course be distinguished from the Perfect. 

Nore 3. In the more usual dialects, no verbs in jus and wy are to 
be found, which, exclusive of the reduplication, have more than two sylla- 
bles; excepting perhaps é ἄημι, and some deponents i in yuo (instead of ἐμαι), 
oor, and ower (from -dw); which, as also ὁ > ἄημι, are to be sought under the 
anomalous verbs; 6. g. δίζημαι, ἀὐναναν ὁγομαι. 

Nore 4. Verbs in vu are further anomalous in this respect, viz. that 
they belong to the class of verbs in which the tenses come from different 
themes. ‘The ending vue or γυμι, etc. is itself only a strengthening of the 
Present and Imperfect (§ 112. 14); while the remaining tenses are formed 
from the simple theme, in which this v or vv is wanting; e.g. δείκνυμι 
from AEIKQ, Fut. δείξω ; σβέννυμι from SBEN, Fut. σβέσω. These verbs 
therefore appear here only as defectives. Besides these, only single parts 
of some anomalous verbs follow the formation vui.—In order to know at 
once, where the v is long or short, we have only to compare ἵστημι; for 
δείκνυμι is long like i ἵστημι; δείκνυμεν is short like ἵσταμεν : Aor. 2 ἔδυμεν 
(see the Anom. δύω) is long like ἔστημεν, ete. 


Note 5,. All verbs in μὺ increase their anomaly still more by the 
circumstance, that the Present and Imperf. in many single persons and 


§ 106. verss IN μι. 219 


moods, forsake the formation in μὲ, and are formed in the ordinary man- 
ner from ἕω, a, όω, i.e, like contract verbs, retaining nevertheless the 
reduplication ; consequently as if from TIOES, etc. ‘Those in ὑμὲ are also 
formed from vw. In the mean time, in order to have a full view of the 
whole analogy, it is necessary to inflect them throughout according to the 
formation in wv; and where the other formation predominates in common 
usage, we shall point it out in the notes. When no remark is made, it 
may be assumed that the formation from TIOEN, etc. occurs less fre- 
quently, or is not at all in use; as is the case with the 1 Sing. Pres. in 


Ὁ 


®. On the whole, the formation in ws belongs to the more genuine 
Attic. 


Nore 6. That the learner may form a correct judgment of the forma- 
tion in μύ, we premise further some general remarks. ‘There are, in most 
languages, two modes of appending the flexible endings in the inflection 
of the verb, viz. either with or without a union-vowel ; something as in 
English 6. g. in blessed or bless’d (blest). On general principles, it is diffi- 
cult to determine which of these two modes is the oldest in any language ; 
but in grammar it is more natural—when not opposed by a stronger anal- 
ες ogy—to assume the longer form as the original one, and then to consider 
the other as Syncope from it. In this view, the conjugation in wz, in ‘con- 
sequence of the peculiarity mentioned above (‘Text 3), is unquestionably a 
Syncope of the ordinary conjugation ; but we are not therefore entitled to 
assume, that these verbs actually had originally the fuller forms, and that 
these were afterwards abridged. 


Notre 7. The syncopated form is the most natural, when without it 
two vowels would come together in pronunciation. While now in the 
greatest number of Greek verbs the full form was preferred, which then 
passed over into the contracted form (φιλέο--μεν, φιλοῦμεν) ; in some others. 
the. syncopated form was retained (ϑέ- μεν). This syncope could not have 
had place in the endings of the ordinary conjugation, which consist only 
of the vowel-sound (3é-w, ϑέ-ει, Fé-s); and these are precisely the in- 
stances where another form of the ending, μὲ, σι, 3, has been retained 3 
by which means, in these persons also, a consonant.came to stand immedi- 
‘ately after the radical vowel. ‘This vowel too was in part lengthened; and 
thus arose e.g. from the root de the forms ϑήηςμι, ἔϑη-ν, Fe—usy, 9ε-ὅϑι, 
etc.—The reduplication probably only served to strengthen these shorter 
verbs in the Present ; and thus were distinguished (§ 96. n. 2, 4) ἃ shorter 
form (yy) for the Aorist, and a longer one for the Present and Imperfect 
(τέϑημι, éxiFny)—An anomalous reduplication see in ὀγέγημυ in the cata- 
logue § 114. 

Nore 8. From this view of the subject it is evident, that the formation 
which at present constitutes the essential character of verbs in μὲ, could just 
as well occur in the single parts of any verb ; and that therefore it is en- 
tirely unnecessary to assume an appropriate 1 pers. Present, for every single 
tense or form in which this flexion appears. Indeed, we shall find below 
(§ 110. 10) forms of the Perfect, whose Plural etc. is made in this manner ; 
and also (δ 110. 6) 4orists 2 of this kind from some verbs, which have 
in the Present either the ordinary form (810m, duw — A. 2 ἐβίων, ἔδυ»), 
or a form entirely different (βαένω, yuyywoxm — A. 2 ἔβην, ἔγνων). The 
following paradigms of the few complete verbs of this conjugation, serve 


220 § 107. veRBS.—PARADIGMS IN μέ. 


at the same time for most of the single anomalous forms of this kind; and 
therefore we shall refer from the latter to these paradigms. 

Nore 9. The forms of the moods and participles in this conjuga- 
tion, will also be found on close observation to be the same at bottom as 
the corresponding ones in the ordinary conjugation, only adapted to 
the analogy of the conjugation in μι. So much the less therefore, when 
similar moods elsewhere occur, can we presuppose old forms ,of the 
Present in μὲ; e.g. in the Aorists of the Passive, ἐτύφϑην, τυφϑείην, τυ-- 
φϑῆγαι, ete. § 100. n. 10; and in some single epic forms, as the before 
mentioned φορῆναι, ἀπ μεν, § 105. n. 16. Ὁ 

Norte 10. Some branches of the Doric dialect, however, actually form- 
ed the 1 pers. Pres. of many common verbs in μὲ instead of w ; 6. g. ὕρη- 
μι, φίλημι, instead of ὁράω, φιλέω ; and likewise the 3 pers. in ov, e. g. 
κρένησι for κρίνει. Of this there are still some traces extant in the early 
epic writers ; e. g. αἴνημι in Hesiod ; and hither the Grammarians refer 
some Homeric forms, viz. the 3 pers. in Ot, 6. 8. Il. ε, 6 παμφαίνησι;: 1]..» 
323 προφέρησι ;* and the 2 pers. Pass. ὅρηαν Od. ἕ, 343, as if from Pass. 
ὅρημαν (for -αμαι) from ὅράω, ὕρημι. + : 


§ 107. Paradigms of the Conjugation in με. 


ACTIVE. 
: Present. 
set, put ~ place t give shew. 
(from OZ2) (from 2742) (from ZO) (from δεικνύω) 
Indicative. 

S. τέϑημι ἵστημν δίδωμι δείκνυμι 
τίϑης ἵστης δίδως δείκνὺς 
τἰϑησι(ν) ἵστησι (ν) δίδωσι (ν) δείκνυσι (v) 

D. ar αἱ ᾿ ---- —- ἘΑΕΡΕΝ 
τίϑετον ἵστατον δίδοτον δείκνυτον 
τίϑετον ἵστατον δίδοτον δείκνυτον 

ἐδ αὶ τίϑεμὲν ἵσταμεν δίδομεν δείκνυμεν 
τίϑετε ἵστατε δίδοτε ; δείκνυτε 
τυϑέασι(ν) | ἱστᾶσι (ν) διδόασι (ν) δεικνύυασι (v) 
or or or | 
TUPELOL διδουσι δεικνυσν 
Nore 1,1... The 3 Plur. in ασὶ(») is alone usual-in good Attic; in the 


‘ancient Grammarians it is called Ionic, because it was erroneously consid- 
ered as the resolved form. In usage however it is so far from Ionic, that on 


* It is however to be considered, that this form occurs in Homer only after a 
relative (ὕστε, ὡς, etc.) and therefore ought everywhere to be written, as is now 
actually done in most of the instances, with ὁ subscript, you. It is then to be 
regarded as a freer use of the Subjunctive. 

t A part only of the ancient Grammarians accent the word thus, ὃ ὅρηαε ; others 
write ὁρῆαε, which is nothing more than a contraction of ὁράξαν into 7 instead 
of a, according to §105.n.15. In that case, the 7 is probably preferred here 
for the sake of euphony ; since Homer has elsewhere regularly ὁρᾶται, ὁρᾶτο, etc. 


t For the anomaly in the signification ofthis verb, see the notes under II, below. 


§ 107. verBs.—PARADIGMS IN μέ. 


221 


7 


the contrary only the circumflexed form, τυϑεῖσι, διδοῦσι, δεικνῦσι, is to be 
It was in the later writers, that this latter form first 


found in Herodotus. 


came into use in the common language. 


Norte I, 2. The contracted form tis, ἱστᾶς, etc. (ὃ 106. n. 5,) is in the 
Present least used by the Attics. From δίδωμι Herodotus uses the 3 Pres. 


διδοῖ. 
Infinitive. 
τυϑέγναιν | ἱστάναι | διδόναυ | δεικνύναι 
Participle. 
τυϑείς (ἐντος) ἱστὰς (ἀντὸς) | διδούς (ὄντος | δεικνύς (ύντος) 
τυϑεῖσα ἵστασα δοῦσα δεικνῦσα 
τυϑέν ioray διδὸν δεικνυν 
Subjunctive. 

8. τυϑώ iora διδῶ ᾿ 
τυϑης ἱστῃς. διδῶς from 
τυϑῆ : tory | διδῷ. δεικνυῶ 

Ὦ. --- ἡτον,ητον | -- ἤτον, ἤτον — ctor, ὦτον ' 

P. ὥμεν, ἥτε, Wor! ὥμεν, ἥτε, WOU! ὥμεν, WTE, MOL 

For these Subjunctives see notes ITI. 
Optative. | , 
S. τιϑείην iorainy διδοίην ῇ 
; ae en ot ’ ἢ rom 
| τυϑείης 3 ἱσταίης διδοίης Wicca 
τυϑείη | ἱσταίη διδοίη 

D. -- — — 

τυϑείητον ἱσταίητον διδοίητον 
τς φυϑειήτην ἱσταιήτην διδοιήτην' 

P. εὐϑείημεν ἱσταίημεν διδοίημεν 
τυϑείητε ἱσταίητε διδοίητε 
τυϑείησαν ἱσταίησαν διδοίησαν 


Nore I, 8, We find also διδιῴην ; but this is a corrupt orthography of 


the later writers ; as is also the Aor. 


2, δῴην. 

Nore I, 4. This is strictly the appropriate form of the Opt. in verbs in 
μι, with which the Aor. Pass. in the ordinary conjugation agrees. ‘There 
exists however here, as well as there, a syncopated form of the Dual and 


Plural, which especially in the 3 Plur. has almost entirely supplanted the 


longer form, viz. . 


or τυϑέντων 


or ἱστάντων 


or διδόντων 


D. τοϑεῖτον ἱσταϊτον διδοῖτον 
τυϑείτην ἱσταίτην διδοίτην 
P. τυϑεῖμεν ἱσταῖμεν διδοῖμεν 
τιϑεῖτε ἱσταῖτε διδοῖτε 
τυϑεῖεν | ἱσταῖεν διδοῖεν 
Imperative. 
τίϑετυ | ἵσταϑι, comm. | d/dodv Ssixvvu, comm. 
᾿ς ὅτῳ, ete. ἵστη, aro, etc. ὅτω, ete. δείκνυ, ὕτω, etc. 
SPI. red erwouv |! ἱστάτωσαν διδάξωμσαν δεικνύτωσαν 


29 


or Osexvuvtmy 


222 § 107. VERBS.—PARADIGMS IN μέ. 


Nore I, 5. For riders instead, of τύϑεϑι, see § 18. 1—The 2 Sing. in 
+ is little used, but instead of it the apocopated form, with the radical 


vowel lengthened, viz. 


τίϑει _ | ἵστη 1 δίδου | δείκνῦ 
Imperfect. 

S. ἐτίϑην ἵστην ἐδίδων ἐδείχνυν 
ΒΕ; « 3590) 3 U <p 
ἐτίϑης ἵστης ἐδίδως EOELKYUS 

- > 9 o >) 9 ! tar 
ἐτίϑη ‘ory ἐδίδω ἐδείκνυ 
iP aoa Le Rix ἘΣ 

τς ἐγίϑετον ἵστατον ᾿ ἐδίδοτον ἐδείκνυτον 
5 ’ t ~ 
ἐτιϑέτην. | ἵστατην ἐδιδοτην ἐδεικνύτην 
» « ν 

Ρ, ἐτίϑεμεν ἵσταμεν ἐδίδομεν ἐδείκνυμεν 
5 Ξ > ἱ 
ἐτίϑετε | ἵστατε | ἐδίδοτε ἐδείκνυτε 
3 , « 5 , > v 
ἐτίϑεσαν ἵστασαν ἐδίδοσαν ἐδείκνυσαν 


Nore I, 6. The Singular of this tense, except in ἵστημι, is most com- 
monly formed after the contracted conjugation, and from the form vw: 


ἐτίϑουν, εἰς, Eb ° 


ἐδίδουν, ovs, ov’ 


ἐδείκνυον, ες, ε(ν). 


Perf. τέϑεικχα ἕστηκα δέδωκα ᾿ from 
5 ε , > 
Plupf. éeGeizew | éorjxewy or | ἐδεδωκειν AEIKS2 
εἱστηκειν 


Nore I, 7. 


In this Perfect and Plupf. of ἵστημι, we have to remark : 


1) The Augment ; since contrary to the custom of other verbs (§ 83.3. 

§ 82.5), the « which stands here instead of the ordinary reduplica- ἢ 

tion of the Perfect, takes the rough breathing; and the Plupf. often 
increases this augment by the temporal augment δἰ. 

2) The syncopated forms ἕσταμεν etc. which are commonly used 


instead of the regular forms; see below note II. 3. 


3) The difference of signification, see notes IT. 1, 2. 


Fut. ϑήσω 


Aor. 1. ἔϑηκα 


στήσω 
» 
ἕστησα 


δωσω 
» 
ἔδωκα 


from 
AEIK 82 


Nore I, 8, This irregular Aorist in κα (ὃ 106. 10), in good writers, is 


used principally in the Singular; in the Plural, especially in the 1 and 2 
pers. the Attics generally preferred the Aor. 2.— 'The other moods and 
participles never occur from the form in χα; except the participle Mid- 
dle, which with its Indicative are found only in the dialects ; see under 


the Middle form below, n. I, 17. 


Aorist 2. 
Indicative 
S. ἔϑην ἕστην ἕδων wanting. 
like the ἕστης like the 
Impf. EOTN Impf. 
D. pe 
ἔστητον 
ἐστήτην 
P. 7 EOTNMEV 
ἕστητε 
ἔστησαν 


: ᾧ 107. VERBS.—PARADIGMS IN μέ. 1 τ 


Nore I, 9." The Aor. 2 ἔστην deviates from the analogy of the Impf. 
and of verbé in μὲ in general, by its long vowel in the Dual and Plural 
(δ 106. 7).—The 3 Plur. ἔστησαν has the same form with the 3 Plur. Aor. 1, 
and can therefore be distinguished only by the connexion; the twotenses 
having different significations ; see notes IT. . 

Nore 1, 10. Of the Aor. 2 ἔϑην and ἔδων, the Sing. Indic, Act. has 
not been votained 3 in actual use. The remaining parts, however, are usual ; 
some as the sole forms, and’ others on the ground of preference ; see ἢ. 8, 

Nore I, 11. Compare further here thé Aorists 2 of some anomalous 
verbs in § 110. 6. 


Inf. ϑεῖναι στῆναι δοῦναι 
Part. ϑείς, ϑεῖσα, Sev | στας, στᾶσα, στάν δούς, δοῦσα, δὸν 
Subj. Fo, ONS; etc. στῶ, στῆς, etc. dw, d0¢, Ow, ete. 
Opt. ϑείην σταίην δοίην 
τ The Subj. and Opt. are declined like the Present. 
Impe- (ete) ϑὲς orn oe fe) δὴν ae δός 
rat. ϑέτω στήτω δότω 
ϑέτον, wv ] στῆτον, στήτων 1 δότον, των 
ϑέτε, τωσαν or | στῆτε, στήτωσαν OF δότε, τωσαν oF 
ϑέντων στάντων δοντων 


ΟΝΟΤΕῈ I, 12. For the Subj. and Opt. the same holds good here, that 
was said of these moods in the Present. See p. 221. 

Nore I, 13. The monosyllabic Imperative, ϑές, δός, etc. (§ 106. 4,) 
throws back its accent in composition, but not further than the penult syl- 
lable; e.g. περίϑες, ἀπόδος. 

Nore [, 14. The Imperat. στῆϑι in composition sometimes suffers 
an.apocope, as παράστα. So also βῆϑι, see the Anom. βαΐνω. 


PASSIVE. 
Present. 
Indicative. 
S. τίϑεμαν ἵσταμαν | δίδομαυ δείκνυμαι 
τίϑεσαν PO ἵστασαν δίδοσαι dsinvucat 
et. con® / 
τίϑεταυ ἵσταται δίδοται δείκνυταν 
Ὁ. τυϑέμεϑον ἱστάμεϑον διδόμεϑον δεικνύμεϑον 
τίϑεσϑον | ἵστασϑον δίδοσϑον — | dsixvvodor 
τίϑεσϑον | ἵστασϑον δίδοσϑον δείχνυσϑον 
P. τυϑέμεϑα | ἰστάμεϑα διδόμεϑα δεικνύμεϑα 
τίϑεσϑε ἵστασϑὲ δίδοσϑεὲ δείκνυσϑε 
τίϑενταν ἵστανται 1 δίδονταῦ δείκνυνταυ 
Infin. τἰίϑεσϑαν | ἵστασϑαν, δίδοσϑαν δείκνυσϑαι 
Part. τεϑέμενος | ἱστάμενος διδόμενος δεικνύμενος 


* These contractions of the forms in --σαι, -aoas, into -7, τῷ» are in part 
doubtful, and in the earlier writers only poetical. 56. the Ausf. Sprachl, addi- 
tions to ὃ 107. 8. Edit. 2. p- 502. 


For some irregularity in the accentuation of this Subjunctive, see the 


, notes under no. III. 


- Optative. 
S. redelanv 


τυϑεῖο i 


τυϑεῖτο 
D. τεϑείμεϑον 
τυϑεῖσϑον 
τυϑείσϑην 
P. τιϑείμεϑα 
. φτιυϑεῖσϑε 
τυϑεῖντο 


For the Attic Optative τέϑοιτο, ἵσταιτο, δέδουτο, ete. 


Imperative. 
τίϑεσο οὐ 
εἰϑου 
τυϑέσϑω, etc. 


S. ἐτυϑέμην 
ἔτίϑεσο or 
ἐτίϑου 
' ἐτίϑετο 
Ὁ. ἐτυϑέμεϑον 
ἐτίϑεσϑον 
ἐτιυϑέσϑην 
ay ἐτιϑέμεϑα 
ἐτίϑεσϑε 
ἐτίϑεντο 


Perf. τέϑειμαν 


τέϑεισαιυ, etc. 


Plupf. ἐτεϑείμην 


ἱσταίμην. 
ἱσταῖο 
ἱσταῖτο 
ἱσταίμεϑον 
ἱσταῖσϑον 
ἱσταίσϑην 
ἱσταίμεϑα 
ἱσταῖσϑε 
ἱσταῖντο 


|] ἵστασο or 


ἵστω 
ε ! ; 
ἑστασϑω, etc. 


. 
ἃ 


διδοίμην 
διδοῖο 
διδοῖτο 
διδοίμεϑον 
διδοῖσϑον 
διδοίσϑην 
διδοίμεϑα 
διδοῖσϑε 
διδοῖντο 


--- 


δίδοσο or 


δίδου 


διδόσϑω, ete. 


Imperfect. 
ἱστάμην ἐδιδόμην 
ἵστασο or ἐδίδοσο or 

ἵστω ἐδίδου 
ἵστατο ἐδίδοτο 
ἱστάμεϑον ἐδιδόμεϑον 
ἵστασϑον ἐδίδοσϑον 

k ἱστασϑὴν ἐδιδόσϑην 

ἱστάμεϑα ἐδιδόμεϑα 
ἵστασϑεὲ ἐδίδοσϑε 
ἵσταντο. ἐδίδοντο 
ἕσταμαν δέδομαι 

ἕστασαι, etc. | δέδοσαι, ete. 
ἑστάμην ἐδεδόμην 


224 § 107. VERBS.—PARADIGMS IN wl. 

_ Subjunctive. 

» S. rePouce ἱστώμαν διδώμαι from 
τυϑῇ ἱστῇ διδῷ δεικνύω 
τυϑήται ἱστήται διδῶται 

Ὁ. τεϑωώμεϑον | ἱστώμεϑον᾽ διδώμεϑον 
τυϑῆσϑον ἱστῆσϑον διδώσϑον 
τυϑῆσϑον ἱσιήῆσϑον διδῶσϑον 

F, τυϑώμεϑα ἱστώμεϑα διδωμεϑα 
τυϑῆσϑε ἱστῆσϑε διδῶσϑε 
τυϑῶώνταν | ἱστῶνται διδῶνταν 


from 
δεικνυὼ 


see notes III. 


_| δείκνυσο 


δεικνύσϑω, etc. 


ἐδεικνύμην 
ἐδείκνυσο 


29) 
ἐδείκνυτο 
ἐδεικνύμεϑον 
ἐδείχνυσϑον 

͵ 
ἐδεικνυσϑὴν 
ἐδεικνύμεϑα 
ἐδείκνυσϑε 


-ἐδείκνυντο 


from 
“ΚΩ͂ 


ν᾿ 


§ 107. vERBS.—PARADIGMS IN [ll. 225 


Norte I, 15. As to the other moods etc. of the Perfect, it is easy to 
form the 7 


Inf. τεϑεῖσϑαι, δεδόσϑαν Part. τεϑειμένος Imper. ἕστασο, etc. 
‘The Subj. and Opt. do not occur. 


Fut. 1. τεϑήσομαι | σταϑήσομαν δοϑήσομαι 


from 
Aor. 1. ἐτέϑην ἐστάϑην ἐδοϑὴν 


AEIKS 


Nore I, 16. In ἐτέϑην, τεϑήσομαι, the syllable te must not be taken 
for a reduplication ; it is the radical syllable ds, which becomes τὲ be- 
cause of the ϑ' in the ending, according to § 18.n.2. The form is there- 
fore for ἐθέϑην, ϑεϑήσομαι. 


Fut. 2 and 3 — and Aor. 2 — are wanting.t 


MIDDLE. 
Fut. 1. ϑήσομαν | στήσομαυ δώσομαν from 
Aor. 1. ἐϑηκάμην | ἐστησάμην | ἐδωκάμην AEIK& 


Nore I, 17. The Aorists ἐθηκάμην, ἐδωκάμην, with their participles, 
belong solely to the Ionic and Doric dialects ; the other moods do not oc- 
cur. The Attic prose uses, from these verbs in the Middle, only the Aor. 2. 
Comp. the remarks on the Aor. Act. note 8 sq. above.—The Aor. 1 ἐστη-- 
σάμην is, on the contrary, very much used ; see notes II. 


Aorist 2. 
Indicative. 
ἐθέμην * ἐστάμην édounv _ | wanting. 
(ἔϑεσογέϑου (ἐδοσο) ἔδου | ° 
etc. 1} | etc. 
Declined like the Imperf. Passive. 

Infin. ϑέσϑαι * oracdae δόσϑαι 
Part. ϑέμενος * στάμενος δόμενος © 
Subj. ϑώμαι * στώμαν δῶμαυ 
Opt. ϑείμην | | * oraiuny Ooiuny 
Imper. (900) ov | * oraco, orm | (doce) dov | 


Norte 1, 18. All these are declined throughout like the corresponding 
forms of the Pres. Passive. — For the Attic forms of the Opt. and Subj. 
πρόσϑοιτο, πρόσϑωμαι, etc. see notes ILI. 


Nore I, 19. The Infinitive retains the accent when in composition, 
as ἀποϑέσϑαι, ἀποδόσϑαι. The Imperative retains it in the Singular in 
composition, only when the preposition has but one syllable; e.g. προσ-- 
Gov, προσδοῦ, ἀφοῦ from ijus; when the preposition has two syllables, 
the accent is thrown back upon it, e.g. περίδου, ἀπόδου. In the Plur. the 


t The or. 2 and Fut. 2 Pass. are not possible in this formation ; except that 
some verbs in yywe can form them from the simple theme; see the Anom. 
tedyvuus. The Fut. 3 does not directly occur from these verbs ; though the 
Anom. Fut. ἑστήξομαν (note II. 4) may perhaps be considered as such. 


226 ᾿ § 107. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONJUG. IN μέ. 


accent always comes upon the preposition; e.g. ἐπύίϑεσϑε, πρόδοσϑε, 
ἄφεσϑε. 

Note I, 90) The Aor. 2 Mid. of ἵἴστημν does not occur; and stands 
in the paradigm only for the sake of the analogy, or on account of other 
verbs; 6. 5. ἐπτάμην from intayor; see the Anom. πέτομαι. 


Verbal Adjectives. 
᾿ ϑετέος στατέος δοτέος 7 from 
ϑετὸς στατὸς δοτὸς AEFIK& 


_ II. Noves on ἵστημι. 


_ 1. The-verb ἵστημι is divided beeween. the transitive signification to 
place, cause to stand, and the intransitive to stand ane: § 113. 2). In the 
Active there belong to the signification 


to place: Pres. and Impf. 1 ἵστημι, ἵστην, Fut. στήσω, Aor. ἔστησα, 
and to the signification 
to stand: Perf. and Plupf. ἕστηκα, ἑστήκειν, Aor. ἔστην. 


The Passive ‘signifies throughout to be placed; but the Pres. and _{mpf. 
ἵσταμαι, ἱστάμην, as Middle, together with the Future Middle στήσομαι, 
have sometimes the signification to place one’s self, and sometimes that of 
to place, i. 6. set up, erect, e.g. ἃ monument. The Aor. 1 Mid. ΤΗΣ 
always has this latter signification. 

2. Besides this the Perfect Active, as to its signification, is here not Per- 
fect, but Present ; and the Pluperfect is consequently Imperfect ; comp. 
§ 113. noi, Thus 

ἕστηκα I stand, 

ἑστήκειν I stood ; ἑστηκώς standing, etc.* 


3. In the Perf. and Plupf. there is commonly used in the Dual and 
Plural of the Indicative, and throughout the other moods, a syncopated 
form, resembling the Present of verbs in μι. As this form is likewise found 
in other verbs, it will be illustrated below in § 110. 10; but in the mean time 
it is exhibited here, in order to render the inflection of ἵστημι complete. 

Perf. Plur. ἕστᾶμεν, ἕστᾶτε, ἑστᾶσι (ν) oF 
Du. ἕστᾶτον 
Plupf. Plur. ἕσταμεν, ἕστατε, ἕστασαν 
Du. ἕστατον, ἑστάτην 
Subjunct. ἑστῶ, ἧς, ἢ, etc. - Opt. ἑσταΐίην 
᾿ Imperat. ἕσταϑι, ἑστάτω, ete. . 
Infin. ἑστάναι 
. Particip. (ξσταώς) ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, ἑστώς, ἢ Gen. , ἑστῶτος 
‘Ton. ἑστεώς, εὥσα, EWG" εῶτος. 


* In some compounds, however, whee Middle passes over into the intransitive 
signification, the Perf. Act. can be translated in English as a real Perfect with 
the same 2 Reta e.g. dviornuc I set up, ἀνίσταμαι I rise up, ἀνέστηκα I have 
risen up.—In consequence of this usual Present signification, the later corrupt 
conan formed from this, tense a peculiar Present, στήκω, stand; hence 3 pers. 

om. 14: 4; Imper. στήκετε 1 Cor. 16: 13. al. . 

t There i is also an irregular form of the Nom. and Acc. of this Neuter, viz. 
ἑστὸς, which was probably Attic. The flexion is always ἑοτῶτος, etc. See 
the Aush: Sprachl. under é woryue in the Catal. of Anom. Verbs. 


$107. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONJUG. IN μὲ. 227 


Hence it appears, that this Perfect and Pluperfect have assumed, in the 
greater part of their flexion, both the form and the signification of the Pres- 
ent and Imperfect. 


4, In consequence of the Present signification of this Perfect, and be- 
cause the Fut. στήσω means I will place, and Fut. στήσομαι I will place 
myself or for myself, there has been formed from me Perf. ἕστηκα I stand, 
a special anomalous 


Future ἑστήξω or ἑστήξομαι, I will stand, 
with which is to be compared the similar Fut. in the Anom. ϑνήσκω. 
5. In like manner for the transitive signification, there is also a 
Perfect ἕστακα I have placed, | 


which nevertheless belongs to a ‘later period. The old Attic employed 
instead of the Perf.-in both significations, either the two Aorists, or a cir- 
cumlocution (§ 97. n. 6). 


6. In some’of the editions of Homer, the syncopated form of the Plu- 
perf. 3 Pl. ἕστασαν is found both in the transitive and intransitive sense. 
But the more correct orthography seems to be this, viz. ἕστασαν in its 
usual sense as Imperfect, they stood; and ἕστασαν shortened for ἔστησαν 
from Aor. 1 ἔστησα, they placed, as Aorist, Od. 0, 307; which then, like the 
Aorists, could also be used for the Pluperf. they had placed, 1]. μ, 56. 
Comp. the similar shortened form ἔπρεσε in the Anom. πέμπρημι. 

7. The form ἕστητε ye stand, Il. 5, 243, 246, is a Homeric syncope for 
ἕστηκατε or EoTUTE. 


Ill. Novres on THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 


1. The Subjwnctive and Optative of the conjugation in we, in their reg- 
ular form, have the accent constantly upon the termination; 6. g. τυϑῶ, 
-διδῶμεν, τυϑεῖεν, τυϑεῖντο, etc. In the ordinary conjugation these moods, 
wherever the final syllable permits it, throw the accent back upon the radi- 
cal syllable ; 6. g. τύπτῃς, τύπτωμεν, vbrctouie, τύπτωνται, etc. 


2. The cause of this accentuation is to be sought simply in the cireum- 
stance, that the syncope, which is so essential to the form in μὲ (ὃ 106. n. 
6, 7), cannot properly have place in these moods. That is to say, the ‘ 
essential characteristic of these two moods lies not in the endings μεν, τε, 
μαι, ete. which they have in common with the Indicative, but in the 
vowel before these endings. ‘This therefore they cannot drop, but cause 
it to flow together with the radical vowel into one long sound ; which 


pees ον according to the rule, takes the accent of a contraction 
(δ 28. n. 9). 


3. Nevertheless, this ee of forming a mixed sound i is a different thing 
from the ordinary contraction of these moods in verbs éw, éw, dw. The 
difference of the Optative in the two forms of conjugation is obvious to the 
eye. In the Subjunctive the verbs in aw, ἕω, όω, contract the vowels δὴν 
an, on, o7, in various ways; in the conjugation in μὲ, this mood is more 
simple. Those verbs which have ἡ in the Indicative, (τόϑημι, ἵ στημι,) 
retain always the ἡ and ῃ of the ordinary Subjunctive ; but those in 
instead of ῆ and Me, have always w and. @; see the Paradigms. —The 
Subjunct. ἱστᾷς, tote, which is also found, “belongs consequently to the 


228 § 107. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONJUG. IN ML. 


an 


form ἵστάω, and is less correct and less usual; see § 106. n. 5.—The Ionic 
resolution etc. of these forms, see in note IV. 8. 


4., But the tendency to render these moods conformable in their ac- 
cent to the general analogy,—according to which the accentuation of 
the conjugation in ws does not differ from that of ordinary barytone 
verbs,—has caused in the Passive several deviations from the above prin- 
ciple, which in some verbs were more, in others less usual. On this 
account, in the preceding paradigms, we have everywhere given the 
regular forms, both for the sake of uniformity, and in order to make the 
deviatidhs of usage more perceptible. In the two verbs τόέϑημν and 
in we (δ 108), the deviations are for the most part peculiar to the Attics, 
and consist in this, viz. that the radical or stem-vowel is dropped, and then 
the endings of both moods are assumed from the ordinary conjugation ; 
while the accent, when possible; is thrown back, so that these forms ap- 
pear just as if derived from an Indicative in owow. In the Subjunctive 
indeed, the accent constitutes the only distinction, e. g. 


τίϑωμαιν instead of τυϑῶμαιν 

Aor. 2. Mid. πρόσϑηται, πρόηται, ete. 
But in the Optative the diphthong ov is assumed, and serves also to mark 
these forms, e. g. 

τ τίϑοιτο, περέίϑοιντο, πρόοισϑε. 
Comp. κάϑημαν under ἦμαι (§ 108. Π. 8); and μέμνημαι under the Anom. 
μιμγνήσκω. 
5. From ἵσταμ αὖ the Optative alone assumes this accentuation, retain- 
ing its usual diphthong, and is thus used by all writers; e. g. 
ἵσταιο, ἵσταιτο, ἵσταισϑε, ἵσταιντο. 
. But the Subjunctive is always ἱστῶμαι, συνιστῆται, etc. From δέίδομαι 
however we find these moods sometimes accented as in no, 4, which also 
is regarded as Attic : 
Subj. δίδωταν Opt. onddovto0.* 


In. all other verbs which conform to ἵσταμαι and ᾿δίδομαι, these moods 
always have the accent on the antepenult; e. g. δύνωμαι, δύναιτο, ὄναιτο 
ἐπίστηται, from δύναμαι, ὀνίναμαι, ἐπίσταμαι (see in § 114); ὄγοιτο from 
Anom. ὄνομαν with radical o. We find too in verbs in awa, as well as 
in τύϑεμαι, examples of transition to the form -oiuny; see the Anom. 
μάρναμαν and κρέμαμαι. 

6. Verbs in yas commonly form both these moods from the theme in 
vo, as δεικνύῃς, δεικνύοιμι. Still there are some examples, which shew 
that they could be formed here after the analogy of other verbs in mw, 
by using simply long v instead of the usual mixed vowel or diphthong ; 
e.g. Opt. daivvto Il. ὦ, 665. πήγνυτο Plat. Phaed. extr. Subj. 3 Sing. 
σχεδαννῦσι ib. p. 77. d. like the old form τύπτῃσι, τυϑῇσι. (§ 103. V. 13.) + 


* Our knowledge of this supposed Atticism, (of which Fischer ad Weller. II. 
p. 469, 470, 472, 484, 485, has collected some examples even from Ionic writers,) 
is still very imperfect and uncertain ; and more accurate investigation has yet to 
_ determine and rectify much in the,above specifications. 

+ See below in ὃ 110.6, marg. note to φύην, and also ib. 7, pOiuyyv.—The above 
accentuation of the Passive forms δαίνῦτο, m7yviro, is founded on the analogy of 
the examples contained in the preceding notes. Comp. λέλῦτο ὃ 98. n. 9. 


§ 107. vERBS.—NOTES ON THE CONJUG. IN μὲ. 229 


IV. Dialects. 


1. Many of the deviations of the dialects in the ordinary conjugation, 
are also common to verbs in μὲ; as the wterative form in ozoy, which in 
these verbs always has the short radical vowel before this ending, e. g. 


Impf. τέϑεσκον, δίδοσκον, δείκνυσκον 

Aor. 2 στάσκον, δόσχον. 
Further the Infinitives τυϑέμεν, ἱστάμεν, ἱστάμεναν (for τυϑέναι, ἱστάναι), 
ϑέμεν, ϑέμεναι, δόμεναι (for ϑεῖναι, δοῦναι), στήμεναν for στῆναι, etc. Also 
the Ionic-ending of the 3 Plur. in ato, ato; e.g. τυϑέαται for Weta, 
ἐδιδόατο, ete.—The Dorics of course in those verbs whose stem-vowel is 
a, everywhere insert their long α instead of 9; 6. g. ἵσταμι, στᾶναι. 


2. For the sake of the metre the epic poets employ the Inf. τυϑήμεναὶ, 
Part. Pass. τυϑήμεγος ; and διδοῦναν instead of διδόναι. They sometimes 
retain the reduplication in forms where it is not customary, e.g. Fut. 
διδώσω instead of δώσω. 


3. The lonics, in verbs in nus from ἄω, change a before a vowel into «3 
«ες ’ ε ῇ ς - 
e. 5. ἱστέασι for ἵσταασι comm. ἱστᾶσι. Comp. § 105. n. 8—Hence they 
have in the 3 Plur. Pass. ἱστέαταν (instead of ἱστάαται) for ἵστανται ; see n. 
1 above. 


4, The Ionic dropping of the o in the endings oa and ao (ὃ 103. ΠῚ 
appears here less frequently ; Herodot. ἐπίστεαν (for --ααι) from ἐπίσταμαι, 
ἐπίστασαι" Hom. ϑέο for ϑέσο, μάρναο for μάρνασο, δαΐνυο for ἐδαίνυσο. 


5. The Dorics have τὶ for ov; in the “τὸ τέϑητι for τίϑησι:; and in 
the Plural, (the | y being also restored § 103. V. 4,) τιϑέντι, ἱστάντι, διδόντι, 
for --εἴσι, &ov, οὖσι. 


6. The 3 Plur. of the Imperf. and Aor. 2 Act. in σαν is made by the 
Dorics and the epic writers a syllable shorter, and ends simply in y with 
the preceding short or shortened vowel; i, e. instead of ecay, they put . 
&y 5 δὶ 

a ἔτυϑεν for dl Seats 
saad of acay, ησαν,---ῶν § e. g. 


ἔφὰν for é ἔφασαν (see nut below) 
ἔσταν, βάν, for ἔστησαν, ἔβησαν, 
instead of οσαν, υσαν --- ον, Uy, 6. g.. 
ἔδον, ἔδυν, for ἔδοσαν, ἔδυσαν. 

7. For the 1 Sing. Imperf. étidny, the Ionics say ἐτόύϑεα. 

8. Since the Subjunctive of this conjugation is formed by a species of 
contraction (see aboye, III. 2, 3), it receives in the Ionic dialect a sort of 
resolution ; viz. by inserting the accented radical or stem-vowel before 
the ordinary Subjunctive-ending, according to the following rules: 

a) Verbs whose radical or stem-vowel is 8 or «, adopt here 8 as the 
stem-vowel (see n.3 above); thus 
τυϑέω, τυϑέῃς, τυϑέητε, τυϑέωσι, τυϑέωμαι, ete. for τυϑῶ, ἧς, etc. 
ὥμαι, etc. — and ϑέω, ϑέῃς, ϑέωμαι, etc. for Fa, Iie, ete. 
ἱστέω, LOTENS, OTE, στέῃς, στέωμεν, Etc. — for ἱστῶ, στῶ, στῆς, etc. 
δὴ) Verbs whose original stem-vowel is 0, take w; thus διδώω, dow, 
Sains, δώῃ; etc. for διδῶ, δῶ, δῷς, δῷ. ete. 


90 


4 


230 § 108. verss.—inue. | 


9. The epic writers, have also this Ionic resolution; and can vary it 
in two different ways, according to the necessities of the metre: 

a) They prolong the «. According to the general rules, this can be 
done only by means of εὐ ; and thus we find ϑείω, ϑείης, ϑείωμεν, ete. 
for ϑῶ, ete. and so also otsiw for ot#. But where the original vowel 
of contraction is ἢ) only the doubling of the sound can have place (§ 105. 
n. 10. ὃ 28. n. 3, marg. note); where again 2) is put instead of « This 
occurs in those verbs whose stem-vowel is «, usually ; and for ota, 
στῆς, στῇ, ete. we accordingly find στείω, στήης, στήῃ. In those with 
the stem-yowel 8 the usage is variable; and we find both desing, Dein, 
ϑέίητε, and ϑήῃς, ϑήῃ, ete.* 

b) They shorten the peculiar vowel of the Subjunctive (ὃ 103. V. 
15); but for the most part only where the stem-vowel is prolonged as 
above ; thus 

ϑείομαι, στείομεν, for ϑέωμαι, στέωμεν 

στήετον for (στῆτον) στήητον 

δώομεν for δώωμεν. 
‘ 10. Since the epic writers make the 3 Sing. in all Subjunctives in ov 
(§ 103. V. 13), some forms arise here which must be carefully distin- 
guished both from the Indicative, and from the 3 pers. Plur. 6. g. ἱστῆσι 
for ioty, δῷσι for δῷ. 

11. The Optative is never resolved ; except that the Ionics say ϑεοίμην 

for ϑείμην, precisely as if from OEM. 


§ 108. Verbs in μὲ from EQ, EQ, ᾿1Ω, 

Among the anomalous verbs in we are several short ones, which are 
very liable to be confounded; especially in composition, where the 
breathing in many cases disappears. Thus g@ocstvoe can come from 
both εἶναι and εἶναι, while in ἀφεῖναν and ἀπεῖναν the breathing is dis- 
tinguished ; though not even here in Ionic writers, who in such words 
omit the aspirate. The theme “2 hab three principal significations, 
viz. (1) to send, (2) to set, place, (8) to clothe; — EQ has the signifi- 
cation to be;-—and 14), to go. 


I. in we, send, cast; from “ER. 

1. This verb may be compared throughout with τέϑημιυ, from which 
it deviates very little. 'The ὁ stands instead of the reduplication (§ 106. 
6); in the Attic dialect it is long. When a form begins with the short 
radical ¢, it is susceptible of the temporal augment, and δ passes over — 


into ἐν (§ 84. 2), 


* The ancient Grammarians themselves are not uniform on this point, and we 
find both modes of orthography in. the best editions ; and besides these a third, 
which drops the ¢ subscript in the 2 and 3 person (ϑείης, ϑείη), and thus makes 
them precisely like the Optative. Still, this last appears'to be the least correct 
form; and seems to be founded solely on the supposition, that the ehas passed 
over to the preceding vowel, ϑέῃ», ϑείη. See ὃ 103. V. 14; and compare the 


whole of notes 8, 9, above, with what is there said of the Subjunct. Aor. Pas- 
sive. 


-§ 108. verss. tinue. 231 


Nore. An actual comparison with τύϑημι is here Kei iipkioed: sd 
~ therefore in what follows, all the forms in actual use, are quoted without 
further remark. It must however be observed, that the simple verb occurs 
but seldom ; and that the greater part of the forms here adduced are found 
only in composition. | 
ACTIVE. Pres. ἵημι, ing, etc. 3 Plur. t#ou(y) or isiou (vy); the former contr. 
from ἕέασι, comp. τυϑέασι. 
Inf. ἱέναι Part. isig Subj. ia Opt. tsiny Imper. (ie9v) comm. te from 
‘TEQ, like τέϑει from TIOEN. 
Imperf. iny and (from TER) i iovy, in compos. “ἀφέουν or ἠφίέουν (see δ 86. 
note 2); 3 Plur. ἠφίεσαν 
Perf. sina. Ἐ Pluperf. εἵκειν 
Fut. 71000. Aor. 1 ἧκα (§ 106. 10), Ion. ἕηκα. 
Aor. 2 ἢ», etc. (not used in the Sing. but for it the Aor. 1,) Pl. ἕμεν, ἕτε, 
ἔσαν, comm. with the augment εἶμεν, site, εἷσαν, (καϑεῖμεν, 
ἀνεῖτε, ἀφεῖσαν) 


Inf. εἶναι Part. εἷς Subj. ὧ 
Opt. εἴην Pl. εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἶδν, for εἴημεν, etc. 
Imp. ἕς 
So especially the compounds, 6. 5. ἀφεῖναι, ἀφῶ, ἄφες, ete. 
Opt. Pl. ἀνεῖμεν for ἀνείημεν, etc. 
PASS. and MID. comp. tidnu, 6. g. Pres. teuou Perf. εἶμαι, μεϑεῖμαι, 
μεϑεῖσϑαι, μεϑείσϑω, ete. 
Aor. 1 Pass. ἔϑην, comm. with the augment εἴϑην, e.g. ἀφεΐίϑην Part. 
ἀφεϑείς, etc. 
Aor. 1 Mid. ἡκάμην, more used than the corresponding Aorist from 
τίϑημι, but only in the Indicative. 
Aor. 2-Mid. funy, comm. with the augment εἵμην, e. ΕΣ ἀφεῖτο, ἐφεῖντο.ἦ 
Hence ἔσϑαν ἕμενος͵ (προέσϑαι, ἀφέμενος) Subj. aos Opt. εἵμην, sio, 
etc. Imp. ov (ἀφοῦ, προοῦ, πρόεσϑε, etc. see p. 225.) 
Verbal Adject. ἑτέος, ἑτός (ἄφετος, ete.) 
2. For the Attic Subjunctive and Optative, 6. δ. , πρόωμαι, πρόηται' iovto, 
ἀφίοιντο, πρόοισϑε ;—and for the dialects, e.g. apéw, ἀφεέω for Subj. ἀφῶ ; 
ἧσι for 3 Sing. Subj. 7; see ὃ 107. ΠῚ, IV. 


3. Peculiar to this verb, however, is an Attic-Ionic form of the Imperf. 
in -sy instead of -ν in the compounds, 6. g. προΐευν Od. x, 100. apie 
Plat. Euthyd. 51. See the Ausf. Sprachl. 

4, Particularly to be noted are the Homeric forms of the Fut. and Aor. 
ἀγέσει, ἀνέσαιμι, etc. after another (more regular) formation ; but these occur 
only in composition with ayo, and as it would seem ‘only when this 
preposition has the sense of back, again. 


5. An old theme ‘72 has sometimes been assumed, especially in the com- 


* Like ré0eexa.—A less usual form was &wxa, with ὦ inserted (δ 97. n. 2); 
whence the Passive form ἀφέωνταε in the N. Test. Matt. 9: 2, 5, ete. See Lexilog. 
I. p. 296. 

| The accent is not drawn back because of the augment; see ὃ 84. n.4. 


232 § 108. verBs.—élou, ἦμαι, ἕννυμι. 


pounds ANI, MEOIN. But all the forms which are referred to it, 
are chiefly Ionic and poetical, and depend for the most part on the accent.* 
With more certainty may be referred thither the Homeric ξύγνιον, and the 
Ionic form μεμετυμένος from METI (Impf. ustisto or éustisto) Ion. for 
MEOIN, comm. μεϑέημι, usFisto, μεϑειμέγος. 


II. eioa did set, did place; nue sit. 


1. Εἶσα is a defective verb, from which in the transitive sense,—yet 
only in some special significations, as to lay the foundation of a building, 
erect, piace an ambush, etc,—the following for ‘ms occur : 

"Aor. 1. εἷσα, Mid. εἱσάμην, 

where the diphthong i is strictly the augment 5 hence Part. ἕσας Od. & 280; 

also for the sake of the metre Inf. ἕσσαι (ἐφέσσαι), ἕσσατο, and with the 
syllabic augment ἐέσσατο Od. & 295; which forms are liable to be con- 
founded with the similar ones from iyvys below. — The diphthong εὐ 
however, passed over as a strengthening into the other forms; e. g. Im- 
perat. εἷσον, Part. εἴσας εἱσάμενος.. The Fut. Mid. εἴσομαι is less usual. 
All the defective parts were supplied from ἱδρύω. 

2. The Perfect Passive has the following form, which most commonly 
has the force of an iniransitive Present, viz. 


nuae T sit. | 
Pres. ἦμαι, ἦσαι, ἧσται, etc. 3 Pl. ἧνται (Ion. ἕαται, epic εἵαται) 
Impf. ἥμην, ἧσο, ἧστο, etc. 3 Pl. ἦντο (Ion. ato, epic eiato) 
Inf. noo Part. ἥμενος Imper, ἧσο, ἥσϑω, ete. 
3. The compound κάϑημαιν isin more common use. This verb does 


not assume the σ in the 3 pers. except in the Impert. when it does not 
take the syllabic augment ; thus 
κάϑημαι, 9 κάϑηται og 
ἐχαϑήμην or καϑήμην, 3 ἐκάϑητο or χκαϑῆστο 
Inf. καϑῆσθϑαι! Part. καϑήμενος “Imp. κάϑησο Subj. κά- 
ϑώμαι, η, ηται, ete. Opt. καϑοίμην, 3 κάϑοιτο (comp. 
§ 107. n. III. 4.) 
Later writers employ also for the 2 pers. the form xan and in the Im- 
perat. χάϑου, for κάϑησαι, xo-Inoo. — The Ionics in their manner have τ 
instead of 3; as χκάτημαι, 3 Pl. κατέαται, etc. 
4, All the defective parts are supplied from seaabahag or eo Fos, and its 
compounds with κατά. 


TL. ἕννυμιυ, Ton. etvuue, I clothe. 


This verb is inflected like δείκνυμι, and forms its defective parts 
from the theme “#92. Comp. § 112. 14. 


Except in composition, this verb is only poetical. The following forms 
occur : 


* If we write e.g. 2 Sing. Pres. wedusts, it belongs to ΒΩ; but wediscs to 
“IQ. 

* We must not overlook in this compound the difference of accent between 
κάϑημαι and Kee which marks these as originally forms of the Perf. Pass. 
(Comp. ὃ 103, I. 1, and 4,2.) So also in κεῖμαι ὃ 109. IT. 


§ 108. verBs.—écui. 233 


Fut. iow, ἔσσω, Aor. ἕσσα Inf. ἕσαι, ἕσσαι, | Mid. ἑσσάμην 

Perf. Pass, siucs, εἶσαι, ELTON, etc. hence 3 Pl. Plupf. εἴατο Il. o, 
596, —and from a form ἕσμαι, Plupf. 2 pers. ἕσσο, 3 b per 
ἕστο, 

also with the syllabic augment, Aor. ἑέσσατο, Plupf. goto. 
In prose the compound ἀμφιέννυμι is usual: 
Fut. ἀμφιέσω Attic ἀμφιῶ.. Aor. 1 ἠμφίεσα, ἀμφιέσαι. 
Perf. Pass. ἠμφίέεσμαι, ἡμφίεσαι, ἠἡμφίεσται, etc. . Inf. ἠμφιέσϑαι. 


The compound with ἐπέ is likewise usual, commonly without elision 
of the ὁ; e.g. Aor. 1 Mid. ἐπιέσασϑαι. 


~ 


IV. εἰμί I am; from “EQ. 


1. The usual flexion of siué is the following: 


Present S. εἰμέ gic, COMM. εἰ ἐστίν, ἐστί 
νον ἐστόν ἐστόν, 
P. ἐσμέν ἐστέ εἰσίν, εἰσέ 


‘ 3 5 ’ 
Inf. sivon Part. ὧν (G. ὄντος), οὖσα, ὃν 
Subj. 0, ῇς, a : ἦτον, ἤτον" ὦμεν, ἦτε, ὦσι (») 
Opt. εἴην, εἴης, εἴη" εἴητον, εἰήτην OY εἴτην, εἴημεν or εἶμεν, εἴητε or 
εἶτε, εἴησαν comm. ley τ 
Uj ” 
Imp. ἴσϑιΐ, ἔστω" D. ἔστον, ἔστων :" P. tote, ἔστωσαν, or ἕστων 


Imperf. S. ἦν ἦσϑα | ἢν 
D..—- ἦτον or στον ἤτην or Ἦστην 
P, ἦμεν ἦτε OF ἦστε ἦσαν 


The Fut. is formed as Middle: 


ἔσομαν 2 ἔσῃ or ἔσει 3 ἔσεταν comm. ἔσταν 
Inf. ἔσεσϑαι, ete. 


Verbal Adjectives (Neut.) ἐστέον (συγνεστέον, etc.) 


2. There is further an Imperf. from the Middle, 
| 1 Sing. Imperf. ἤμην, 
which is equivalent to that of the Active, but less frequent in earlier 
writers. A form of the 3 Plur. stato for ἦντο Od. v, 106, is recognized by 
the ancient Grammarians,. but is doubtful; the ancient reading was 
εἵατο 5 see Ausf. Sprachl.—The Dorics and epic writers have the 2 Sing. 
Imperat. ἔσο, ἕσσο. 


3. The whole Present εἰμέ etc. is enclitic ; but actually takes the inclina- 
tion, only when it is merely the logical copula, connecting the subject and its 
predicate ; whenever it signifies actual existence, it retains the tone. The 
3 Sing. especially, then takes the tone on the first syllable; e. g. ϑεὸς ἔστιν " 
ἔστι μου δοῦλος.. Further, ἔστιν always stands after the unaccented parti- 
cles we, οὔκ, εἰ, and after τοῦτο and ἀλλά when these words have an apos- 
‘trophe: ovx ἔστι, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν. Elsewhere however, when the inclination 


* The particle εἶεν be it so, well, seems to have come from the 3 Sing. &iN ; 
for the Sing. is requisite, whether we supply τοῦτο or ταῦτα. 


t Not to be confounded with ἴσϑε know ; see ὃ 109 οἶδα. 
t A rare form is ἤτω, Plat. Rep. 2. p. 361. c. 
| In later writers ἧς. Comp. ὃ 103. V. 12. 


.- 


234 § 108. verBs.—eiul, εἶμ. 


is only prevented (δ 14. 6), the tone remains on the final syllable ; 6. g. λόγος 
ἐστὶ, ἀγαϑὸς δ᾽ ἐστίν. -- The 2 pers. εἶ or εἷς is never inclined, except in 
the dialect-form ἐσσί (4). : ; 

4, Inno verb are the dialects so various and multiplied as in this. We 
adduce here, for the most part, only such as do not follow of course from 
the general principles stated in ὁ 1038. 


Present. Doric, S. ἐμμέ, ἐσσί, ἐντί, which last stands also for the 3 Plur. 

siot.—lonic 2 Sing. also ἐσσί, 1 Plur. εἰμέν, 3 Plur. éao0(v).— 
_ A poetical form is ἐμέν for ἐσμέν. 

Imperf. Ion. sometimes jo and ἔα, 2 ἔας, 3 je or ἦεν, 2 Pl. ἔατε, etc. 
and sometimes Zoy (1 pers. in Hom.) and ἔσχον from the theme 
°ES{u.—F rom the form % comes the Attic form of the 

1 pers. ἢ for jy. 
For the 3 Sing, ἦν the epic writers have also the doubled 
sound ἤην and ἔην. The Dorics have for the same, by a 
peculiar anomaly, 7¢5 and for the 3 Plur. joey the Ion. and 
Dor. is foay.t 
Infin. Ancient and Tonic ἔμεν, ἔμεναι, ἔμμεν, ἔμμεναι 
Dor. ἡμὲν and ἡμες.} 
Finally, the Ionics form from the theme “E22 the participle ἐών with the 
accent on the final syllable, Subjunct. ἕω, Opt. gous. 


5. In composition the preposition, in all cases not contrary to the general 
rules (δ 103. I), takes the accent upon itself; e.g. πάρειμι, 2 pers. πάρει. 
But in παρὴν on account of the augment, πταρέσταν on account of the 
syncope, παρεῖναν (§ 103. I. 4,3) Subj. παρῶ, ἧς, ἢ» etc. and Opt. 3 PI. 
παρεῖεν on account of the formation in μὲ (ὃ 107. II), the accent remains 
upon the verb. The participle also retains the tone, παρών, --- For πάρα, 
ἔγι, etc. instead of πάρεστι, ἔνεστι, etc. see § 117. 


V. εἶμι I go; from “J2. 


1. The radical sound of this verb is 4, which when lengthened passes 
over into ει. With this change are connected many anomalies, both of 
form and of signification. 'The following are the forms in use. 


Pres. S. εἰμυ εἰς comm. εἰ εἰσι(ν) 
. πα τον ἴτον 
P. ἵμεν ἴτε ἴασι(ν) 


Inf. Ἱέναν 
Part. Ἰών, always with the accent on the ending, as in other verbs the 
Part. Aorist. 


1 


*In Il, 1, 762 ἔην stands for the first person, but is doubtful; see the Ausf. 
Sprachl. p. 551 marg. note. Ed. 2, p. 531. The more probable reading is éov. 


t That ἦν is sometimes adduced as being used for ἦσαν, rests solely on some 
poetical passages, where ἦν stands with the Plural, but so that it always precedes 
the subject, as Hes. 9, 321 τῆς δ᾽ ἦν τρεῖς κεφαλαί, It is therefore simply a pe- 
culiarity of Syntax ; see ὃ 129. n. 2. 


t Both these Doric forms are also 1 PI. Imperfect. 


$108. verBs.—étme. | 235 


\ 


Subj. to Opt. ἴοιμι or toiny 
Imperat. ἴϑι (in composition si, aS πρύσει, ἕξει, etc.) itw ete. 3 Pl. ἴτω-- 
σαν or ἰόντων. 


Imperf. S. ἤειν comm. jie or ἦα 
ἤεις or ἤεισϑα 
ἤει ΟΥ̓ ἤειν ἢ Ion. Hie or ἢϊεν 
P. 7 ἤδιμεν or ᾿ἥμεν 
ἤξυτε or 78 
, ἤεσαν Ion. ἤϊσαν, Hom. ἦσαν 
The Dual is formed after the analogy of the 2 pers. Plural. 
MID. with the signif. hasten, hasten away, is commonly used only in the 
Pres. and Impf. 
ἴεμαι, Ἰέμην, 
and is declined like tect | from 1 ἵημι. 
Verbal Adject. ἱτέος, its, or ἱτητέος, LTNTOS. 


4 


2. The compounds have the accent like those of siui ; and hence 6. g. 
πάρειμι, πάρει, are forms of the same persons of that verb; and 3 Sing. 
πάρεισιν is the same as the 8 Pl. of the compound of sid. 


3. This verb is the sole example of a form in ws which has ὁ for its 
radical or stem-vowel.+ And just as verbs whose radical vowel is ¢, 
retain this in the Plural, while in the Sing. they change it into ἡ, so here 
the « is prolonged into #; hence εἶμι, εἶσι, ἔμεν, ite, like τίϑημι, NOL, EMEY, 
ete. In the Infin. tévao and Mid. ἴεμαν etc. the 8 is therefore only an epen- 
thesis ; since it strictly would be tau, tuov, just as from τύϑ-ημι, --ἔναι, 
-euoo; and to this analogy correspond the ancient and epic Infinitives iuey, 
ἔμεναι, like τυϑέμεν for twPévou,—Entirely analogous, but with εν instead of 
u, is the Homeric Optative εἴην 1]. w, 1389. Od. ξ, 496, after the analogy of 
φῦην ; 566 § 107. III. 6 and marg. note. But likewise, after the literal 
analogy of ἱέναν (τυϑέναι), tradition has in one instance adopted the Opt. 
form isiny, like τυϑείην, in 1]. τ, 209.—Instead of εἷς or εἶ Homer has εἶσϑα. 


4, Besides the forms above adduced, there occurs nothing further in 
the common language ; and the verb is therefore to be considered as 


really defective. It must however here be noted, that the above forms of 


the Active belong also in common usage to the mixed anomalous verb 
ἔρχομαι, ἦχϑον (see the catalogue), and supply the place of some of its less 


usual forms. 


5. This verb has in its signification the peculiar anomaly, that 
the Present εἶμι has the signification of the Future, I will go. 


From this there is no real exception, except in the epic and later writers. 
This εἶμι therefore supplies the place of the Fut. ἐλεύσομαν (see the Anom. 
ἔρχομαι), Which form is less usual, especially in the compounds, where it 
becomes too unwieldy. { 


* This form occurs for the most part only before vowels. 


t Single syncopated forms, which follow the same analog By in other verbs 
(δ 106. n. 8), are the Plur. of the Perf. δέδια, and the Aor. 2 Mid. ἐφϑίμην ; see 
the Anom. δεῖσαι, φϑίω. 


¢ This usage is by no means limited to the Attics; see 6. g. Herod. II]. 72 


236 δ 108. verss.—elue. 


6. The other moods of εἶμι, when their nature permits it, can likewise 
take the signification of the Future ; although in the dependent clauses in 
which they usually stand, this is not at once so obvious. * It it most ap- 
parent in the participle; e.g. παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἀπιών, “he makes prepa- 
ration like one who will depart. ”+ But in most instances, the other 
moods and the participle appear in a present sense, and so stand for the 
same moods of ἔρχομαι, to which they are commonly preferred because of 
their shortness. 


4 The learner must take care not to be misled by the anomalous accent ᾿ 
on ἰών, so as to regard this participle as an Aorist. 'The same anomaly 
appears in the Ion. ἐών from siué, and in κιών from the Anom. xiw.t 


8. Instead of the Imperfect above given, the ancient Grammarians have 
another, viz. εἶν, εἷς, εἶ, ὑμεν, tte, ἴσαν; and likewise another /orist 2 ἴον, 
tec, etc..to which they erroneously refer the Part. iwy on account of its 
accent. All that is found of these forms belongs solely to the epic lan- 
guage; and varies in signification, like the ancient preterites, between we 
Imperfect and Aorist ; but except the third persons, 


te or ἴεν, ἵἴτην, ἴσαν, 


there is nothing to be found. || From these the Grammarians, and they 
alone, have supplied the other forms by analogy. 1. 


9. From these two simple preterite forms, however, : arose in actual usage 
two fuller forms ; viz. from ἴον, in the epic writers, ἤϊον or yoy; and 
from εἶν, in the common language, the 7 ¢vy given above. This latter form 
passed over at the same time into its Ionic shape ἤϊα or 70; just as in 
τίϑημι the Ion. ἐτέϑεα comes from ἐτέϑην, and in εἰμί am the Ion. ἦα from 
ἢν 3 except that here this ἤϊα, ἤα, remained in use in the Attic language 
along with ἤειν. _The ancient Grammarians very erroneously brought 
forward this 7 ἤϊα, ἦα, as Perfect, and jew as the corresponding Pluperfect ; 
although this is entirely contradicted by the signification,'and although no 
further forms from jjé% occur which are at all characteristic of the Perfect, 


πάριμεν. Hom. 1]. κ, 450. In Homer however there are some examples of this 
verb as Present, e.g. Od. #, 191; while among the Attics, at least in prose, there 
are no genuine ‘examples ; for all those are not genuine, where the Fut. can 
indeed be expressed by the Present in English, but the sense nevertheless unde- 
niably points to the Future; 6. g. J go home or am now going home, instead of ἢ 
will or am about to go home. 


* E. g. Thue. V. 7 ἐνόμιξεν ἀπιέναι ὁπόταν βούληται, “he thought he could 
depart when he pleased ;” where we can also say, “he thought to depart.”— 
So also after ὄμνυμι, 6. 9. ὥμοσεν ἀπιέναι juravit se abiturum, he swore to depart. 
See also Plato. Phaed. p. 103. d. 


tA very clear instance of the Fat. is é.g. Xen. Anab. ΤΙ. 3. sub fin. ἥξω συ-- 
σκευασαμενος, ὡς ἀπάξων ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν “μλλάδα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἀπιὼν ἐπὶ τὴν 
ἑμαυτοῦ ἀρχήν. 

t The form ταν can indeed be taken as preterite in such connexions as Θ. g. Il. 
a, 179 οἴκαδ᾽ ἰὼν --- — Mugudévecow ἄ ἄνασσε. But we shall hereafter shew (ὃ 144. 
n. 7), that other Presents stand in the same manner. The real Part. Aor. is 
élov ; see the Anom. ἔρχομαι.. 

|| When in the editions of prose writers, ἄπιμεν, πρόσισαν, etc. are occasion- 
ally found as Imperfect, such cases are either false readings, as Zwev for ἤμερ' 
or the correpted language of later writers. 


| That is, s/v has the same analogy to δἦμε and ἴσαν, as ΠΡ to τύϑημε and 
ἐτίϑεσαν. 


‘eu 


§108; verss.—eiue. 237 


neither in -oos, -ὄναν, nor Part. ὡς. Ὁ This Impf. ἦα, εις, etc. seems 
principally to have remained in use, in order to take the place of the Impf. 
jozouny from ἔρχομαι, Which was less used because of its ambiguity, it 
being also the Impf. of ἄρχομαι. + 

10. In the epic language we find another form of the Middle, which 
does not necessarily take the accessory idea of haste; viz. 


Fut. and Aor. 1 εἴσομαι, εἰσάμην, 
both of which are liable to be confounded with the similar forms from - 
si0w; especially since Homer makes also ἐείσατο, and does not elide the 
vowel of the preposition ; as χαταείσατο went down. Comp. εἴδω in § 114. 


_ * With this ze and ἴον, as protracted forms from ey and ἴον, compare the 
form ἠξίδειν for. ηδὲεν or sider, in ὃ 109 under οἶδα. The orthography jew with 


ὦ subscript was introduced only by the Grammarians, on account of this er- 


roneous derivation from 7%. The protraction itself arose simply from an 
effort to render the augment audible, without obscuring the sound of e. The 
forms ἤξιμεν, 7ete, ἤεσαν, however, which really occur, have without doubt 
crept into use from the seeming analogy of the Pluperfect; since at first only | 
ἤϊμεν, Hire, Zio, were used ; which last form (σαν) has actually been preserved 
in the [onic dialect; see in 1 above. 


t It is proper to bring forward here some examples, in support. of this use of 
7a as an Imperfect. Plato Rep. 5 init. where Socrates relates a conversation, and 
after mentioning the question of the other, “‘ What species of malice he meant?” 
proceeds: ual ἐγὼ μὲν ἦα τὰς ἐφεξῆς ἐρῶν ---, ὃ δὲ Πολέμαρχος ἐκτείνας --- — 
στροσηγάγετο --- καὶ ἔλεγεν ἄττα —. Here every language, which distinguishes 
the Aorist from the Imperfect, requires the Imperfect, in eo eram ut dicerem,’al- 
lois dire, Iwas going to say. ‘Xen. Cyr. V.4. 10, 11, where the conversation of two 
persons who meet each other is related: ὁ Kugos — εἶπεν, ᾿Εγὼ δὲ πρὸς σὲ, ἔφη, 
ἐπισκεψόμενος, ὅπως ἔχεις, ἐπορευόμην. ᾿Εγὼ δέ γ᾽, ἔφη ὁ Γαδάτας, ναὶ μὰ 
τοὺς ϑεδὺς, σὲ ἐπαναϑεασόμενος ἤ τα ---. Plat. Charmid. init. “Hxov μὲν τῇ προ-- 
τεραίᾳ --- ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατοπέδου" οἷον δὲ διὼ χρόνου ἀφιγμένος ἀσμένως 7 a ἐπὶ τὰς 
συνήϑεις διατριβὰς, καὶ δὴ καὶ εἰς τὴν Ταυρέου παλαίστραν --- εἰσῆλθον, καὶ 
αὐτόϑιυ κατέλαβον κι τ. Δ. Here the first words describe, as is usual at the begin- 
ning of the Platonic dialogues, the relation or situation of things at the time of 
the occurrence; and consequently the 7a ἐπὶ τὰς διατριβάς, as is also shown by 
the Plural, implies duration, and is therefore Imperfect ; while immediately with 
the simple action «. τ. 7’. π΄. εἰσῆλθον, the narrated fact begins with the Aorist.— 
Demosth. c. Steph. 1. p. 1106. Here the preceding ἔγνωσαν falls back into a 
time past, and the succeeding éyo' δὲ, εἴ τις ἡ δίκει με, ἐπὶ τοῦτον ἢ α, is the 
well known hypothetical proposition, where the Imperfect marks the present 
time (ὃ 139.9, 4); hence the 7a, as being necessarily Imperfect, cannot be 
changed by the ἵνα which there precedes it, and on which it is also dependent. 
Since however this ‘passage in its internal structure is somewhat involved, we 
adduce further Herodot. II. 42, where the conditional ἔγωγε Gy οὐκ ite — 7tod- 
λαχῆ τε ἂν ἴσχον ἐμεωυτόν, stands without any anterior clause, and as the context 


᾿ shews, can inno manner be thrown back into the past. These and other clear 


passages, where the natural succession of the thoughts and the known usage of 
language evidently mark the Imperfect, must be laid as the foundation; and 

then other instances, where the idea of the Aorist might perhaps appear to us 

more natural, must be judged of with reference to these: just as must be done 

in other passages of the ancient writers, in which regular Imperfects stand in- 
connexions where we should expect the Aorist. Indeed, an action which we 

conceive of as being rapidly accomplished, might often appear to the narrator 

as having duration, or as being contemporary with another action before men- 

tioned, and consequently in the Imperfect. Comp. ὃ 137. 3, 4. 


31 CF 


inp 
as 


238 : ᾧ 109. verss.—gnui. 


ὁ 109. Other irregular Verbs. 


| There remain the following verbs, which require to be separately. 
exhibited : 
T. φημί I say; from ὦ 4.22. 


Pres. S. φημὲ φῇς φησί (ν) 
. ἢ. -- φατόν φατόν ἥ 


_P. φαμέν φατέ φασί (ν) 
Inf. φάναι Part. pos . 
Subj. ga Opt. φαίην Imperat. podv 


Impf. S. ἔφην ἔφης comm. ἔφησϑα ἔφη 

Ὦ. -- ἔφατον. ἐφάτην 

Ῥ. ἔφαμεν ἔφατε τ ἔφασαν ροσί ἔφαν 
Fut. φήσω. Ὁ Aor. 1 ἔφησα." 


The MID. φάσϑαι, ἐφάμην (Imperat. φάο for φάσο in Homer), is also 
used ; and in the PASS. some forms of the Perfect are found, as πε- 
φάσϑω be it said, πεφρασμένος. 


Verbal Adjectives: φατέος, patos. 


1. The forms of the Pres. Indic. except PIS) are enclitic (δ. 14. 1.2) .—The 
compounds are accented like σύμφημι, συμφής " ἀντίφημι, ἀντιφῇς. 

2. In respect to the signification of this verb, we must distinguish, (1) 
the general one, to say; (2) the more definite ones, to affirm, declare, pre- 
tend, concede, etc. all of which belong to the Present φήμι. But in the gen- 
eral signification, to say, only the Pres. and Imperf. Act. in all the moods 
are in common use; while the other parts are everywhere supplied from 
the anomalous εἰπεῖν ete. q.v. On the other hand the Fut. and Aor. 
have by preference the more definite meanings; respecting which it is 
further to be observed, that in the Imperf. and in the Inf. and Part. Present, 
in order to avoid ambiguity, these. meanings are more commonly desig- 
nated. either by the Hate, or by the forms of φάσκειν, Which elsewhere 
is not used in prose. * 

3. We have arranged and named the single forms of this verb above, in 
the manner required by their derivation. In respect to usage, however, it 
must be, noted, that the Impf. ἔφην is commonly forist in sense, and i is 
used alternately with εἶπον, as synonymous with it. And with this ἔφην 
is connected the Inf. φάναι, which in the relation οἵ ἃ conversation is 
always preterite, viz. where in direct discourse we find e.g. ἔφη ὃ Περι- 
κλῆς, Pericles said, this in sermone obliquo is φάναι τὸν Περικλέα, that Peri- 
cles said, So soon however as the Inf. Pres. is requisite, we find either 
λέγειν or the above mentioned φάσκειν. 

4. By an aphaeresis we find in the language of familiar discourse the 
following forms from φημί: 


* EB. g. ἔφη omovddtew “he said he was in haste ;” ἔφασκε σπουδάζειν ‘he 
pretended to be in haste ; φάσκων alleging, affirming ; οὐ φάμενος denying, 
since οὔ φῆμι is just the opposite of φημί I affirm, . concede; see ὃ 148. n. 9." 


§ 109. VERBS.—zéifiat, οἶδα. 239 


: ἡμί say I, inquam, 
in animated repetition in discourse ; and so also the Imperf. ἦν, ἦ, for 
ἔφην, ἔφη ἘΠ φῆ) ; but only in the phrases 


ἦν δ᾽ a said I 


ἢ δὲ ὃς said he 
in relating a conver sation. Here also belongs the epic 
: he said, 
as a phrase of transition after quoting the words of a person. 


II. κεῖμαν IT lie, recline; from KEIR, KES. 


Pres, χεῦσαι, κεῖται, etc. 3 Pl. χεῖνται 
Inf. κεῖσϑαν Part. κείμενος Imp. κεῖσο, ete. 
Subj. κέωμαι, HEN; ete. Opt. xeoiuny 
Impf. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο, etc. . 
Fut. κείσομαι 
Compound, κατάκειμαι, κατάκεισο, etc. but Infin, καταχεῖσϑαι. 


1. To the theme KE belong further among the Ionics κέεται, κέογ-- 
ται, κέεσϑαι.᾿ Other Ionic forms are χεΐίαται, κέαται, for κεῖνται, and the 
iterative πέσκετο. 

2. The Homeric Active form κείω, xéw, has the signification of the - 
Future, Iwill lie down ; see the marg. note on δήω under the Anom. 4.4-. 

3. According to the assertion of some Grammarians, this verb had no 

Subjunctive form ; hence we find here and there ‘xsiuou, κεύται, in con- 
nexion with Subjunctives ; 8. g. διάκειμαι Plat. Phaed. p. 84, 6. So also 
κεῦταν in Homer, where other critics read χῆταιυ. 
_ 4, Besides its simple signification, this verb must also be regarded as 
a Perfect Passive of τίϑημι. _ Hence all its compounds correspond in 
their signification to the compounds of τύϑημι ; 6. g. Ra 1 conse- 
crate, ἀνάκειμαι Iam or have been consecrated.* 


- 


Ill. οἶδα 1 ἵποισ; from εἴδω. , 


1. The old verb εὔἴδω has for its proper signification, to see; and only 
some of its tenses have the signification to know. . No form which has the 
one signification, occurs in the other. But as the parts which- belong to 
the signification to know, have_many other anomalies, it will be useful 
to exhibit them here separately. ‘The forms which signify to see, are 
given in the Catalogue of Anom. verbs under sidw and ogae. 

2. Οἶδα is strictly the Perfect 2 from εἴδω, i.e. Ihave seen, perceived; like . 
ἔοικα, lon. οἶχα, from sixw. It acquires however, in the signification to 
know, the power of the Present ; and consequently the Pluperf. that of 
the Imperfect; see below ὃ 113. n. 10. Of the regular flexion of οἶδα, 
the 2 pers. οἶδας, and the whole Plural οὔδαμεν, οἴδατε, οἴδασι, are rarely 
found in Attic writers. In place of them are. used syncopated ΦΉΜΗ 
which will be explained below. 


* The difference between this and the real Perf. Pass. of τίϑημι consists 
Ierely in the circumstance, that κεῖμιαν denotes a continued passive state or 
situation ; and therefore does not so commonly as τέϑειμαν take after it the 
subject of the Active with ὑπό or πρός ; e. g. συντίϑημε I compose, συντέϑειται 
om αὐτοῦ it is composed BY HIM; σύγκειται it is composed, it consists of —. 
Comp. p. 232, marg. note f. 


240 ¥ : ᾧ 109. verss.—oida. 


Pres. S. οἷδα οἶσϑα * οἷδε (ν) 
ες Ὁ. -- στον ἵστον 
Ρ. ἴσμεν ᾿ ἦστε ἔσασι (») 
Inf. εἰδέναι ΡΡαγί, εἰδώς, υἷα, ός 
Subj., εἰδῶ Opt. εἰδείην 


Imper. ἴσϑι,Ἰ ἴστω, etc. 
Imperfect. 8." ἤδειν Attic ἤδη, I know. Comp. § 103. IT. 2. 
' ἤδεις comm, ἤδεισϑα Attic ἤδησϑα ' 
, ἤδεν Attic ἤδειν and ἤδη 
P. ἤδειμεν or ἤσμεν 
Sete or στε 


ἤδεσαν ΟΥ ἦσαν 4 
Future sicouce, more rarely εἰδήσω, I shall know, experience, etc. 
Verbal Adj. Neut. ἰστέον. ‘ 

The Aorist and the real Perfect are supplied from γιγνώσκω: see the 

Catalogue. 

8. The Tonics and Dorics have ἴδμεν for i Zopey ; the epic writers 
iOusvar and ἔδμεν for εἰδέναι ; and for the Pluperf. ἤδειν; these latter 
have a protracted form, e.g. 2 ἡείδεις, ἠείδης, 8 ἠείδει, ἠείδη, (Il. χ, 280. 
Od. 1, 206. Apollon. 2, 822.) and Herodotus has ἤειδε, with shortened 
ending, I. 45. See the first marg. note to’ δ 108. V. 9. — Instead of ἤσαν 
Homer has by a sort of aphaeresis ἴσαν, Od. ὃ, 772. 

4, It was formerly customary in grammar to introduce here a stale 
verb 

tonut 

to which all the above forms beginning with t were referred, and ex- 
plained by syncope ; while the forms οἶδα, εἰδέναι, ete. were given only 
in the anomalous Catalogue under εἴδω. There is indeed in the Do- 
ric dialect a verb ἴσαμι, ἴσης, tout, actually extant; but even if it be 
assumed that all those forms really come from this verb, it is neverthe- 
less certain, that usage has mingled the forms of the two themes ; and that 
in the earliest, as well as in the latest periods, the current language em- 
ployed throughout οἶδα in the Sing. and ἴσμεν in the Plural. So far 
therefore as usage is concerned, the above mixed paradigm is the only 
correct one. 

5. Meanwhile, whoever observes more accurately the analogy which 
prevails in the anomalies of Greek usage, will easily perceive, that those 
forms, after all, really belong to οἶδα or εἴδω. For in the /irst place it is 
obvious, that ue Ion. ἔδμεν did not arise from, ἴσμεν, but rather, according 
to the general analogy (§ 23. 2), the latter from the former. But ἔδμεν, as 
well as the Inf. ἔδμεναι, belong manifestly to sid, and not to ἴσημι. See- 
ondly, we have for this conclusion the most striking analogy, not only in 
the language generally, which so easily causes the forms of the Perfect to 
pass over by syncope into the forms of the Subjunctive in μι (δ 110. 9 sq.) 


* Syncopated for οἰδασϑα, 010-09. ; see δ 103. V. 12. — A manifestly erro- 
neous, but yet old and Attic form is o/odas, made by appending again the ¢ of 
the 2 person ; see Piers. ad Moer. 283. - 


‘t Not to be confounded with to0v from cud. 


109. verBs.—oida. Ι 241 
§ ! 


but also in this very verb itself; for no one can fail to perceive, that the 
Pluperf. forms ἤσμεν, ἤστε, differ only by this syncope from ἤδειμεν, ἤδειτε. 
But the forms ἴσμεν, ἴστε, stand in precisely the same relation to οἴδαμεν, 
οἴδατε ; for the difference of the vowel, which in.this and similar verbs is 
so fluctuating, cannot be taken into consideration. ‘To these forms was 
then joined the Imperat. to9v,—just as κέκραχϑι, ἄνωχϑι, to similar synco- 
pated forms (δ 110. 9),—and the 3 Pl. ἔσασι, (see the marg. note,) from 
which the secondary form ionuo.seems first to have been derived. * 

6. The sound « instead of ov in the other moods from οἶδα, accords 
with the analogy of ἔοικα (lon. οἶκα) Part. εἰκώς ; see the Anom. εἴκω, 
and see the marg. note below.—Here too a transition into the forma- 
tion in ws is not to be mistaken; for while the participle εἰδώς fol- 


* This question is entirely decided by some very clear analogies, which will he 
given in ὃ 110.9; especially ἐπέπυϑμεν and ξεστὴν. Still, here is the proper 
place to take a view of the analogy of all the forms which are derived from 
ἔοικα and οἷδα. Just as from στείϑω we find πέποιθα, so also from éixw and 
sido come ἔο ἐκ ὦ , and strictly speaking éozda, because the 8. takes the place of 
a reduplication (δ 84. n.6). A shorter form 
οἶχα, οἶδα 

was adopted in the first verb in thé Ionic dialect, and in the second in the com- 
mon language. But from the full forms ἔοικα, ἔξοιδα, arose likewise, by short- 
ening the oz intoz and by contraction, (consequently as if from εἶκα, εἶδα,) the 
forms r νὰ A 

Part. sino’s, εἰδοίς 
together wlth the moods «04, εἰδείην, for which see Text 6 above. A proof, how 
the usage of language sometimes retains several synonymous forms at once, and 
sometimes only one; is here afforded even by the written language; for the 
Part. of Zocxe occurs in all the three forms éocxuis, εἰκούς, οἰκώς, while that of οἶδα 
is found in only one, siduig¢.—The Pluperf. required a new augment ; Zouxe took 
it commonly after the analogy of ἑορτάξω ἑουΐρταζον, viz. ég κεν ; sometimes 
also regularly, except that οὐ was shortened into ἐν 

é 3 Sing. Pluperf. ἤζετο, without augm. éro, 
as if from Perf. é¢ywaz, Pluperf. ἡγμην. In the same manner arose from Zod 
the ; 


Pluperf. (Ἴδε) ἤδειν. 


‘ 
To all this was superadded the syncope, by means of which, as we shall see be- 
low in ὃ 110.9, was made, from ‘Zovxe (with a difference of vowel-sound) the 
forms ' 
1 Pl. Perf. ἔοιγμεν, 3 Dual Pluperf. é&xrnv, 
and from οἶδα (with the same difference) the forms 
. (020-08) οἶσϑα 
iduev and ἴομεν, iore, 
but in the Pluperf. from ἤδειν 
HOMEY, ἦστε; ἦσαν. 
From this ἦσαν (for ηδ-σαν) the Homeric ἴσαν (for i0-caw) differs only by leaving 
off the augment.—That ioaoc does not come from one, is apparent from the ac- 
cent, since from ionue the 3 Plur. must be written ἐσᾶσα (comp. corjue) ; and also 
from another analogy of the verb ἔοικα, 
ἔοικα --- (00 into ε, ἐὔο-σασι») εἴξασιν 
; οἶδα — (οὐ into 2, ἰδ--σασιν) ἴσασιν, 
both of them Attic forms, instead of the regular ἐοέκασα, οἴδασι; where the 
anomaly common to the two consists in the ending oaoz, instead of the otherwise’ 
exclusive Perfect-ending aov. 


͵ 
BN πάν ας 
nr ant womare Mes 
$4 ᾿ naa 
r “" -ὰλ 


᾿ γα _ P 
gee “Δ bee. > 
Ph yy ἃ - 


%.. 


242 Δ 110. verBs.—ANOoMALY. 

lows the common analogy, the Subjunctive and Optative take the termina- 
tions of the conjugation in μὲ, viz. εἰδῶ (with circumflex), εἰδεύην. Neverthe- 
less, the epic writers could disregard this accent and shorten the long vow- 
el of this Subjunctive, just as well as in other Subjunctives ; 6. g. ἵνα εἴδο-- 
μὲν for stO@usy.—Further, the radical or stem-vowel was here sometimes 
shortened into 4; e.g. Subj, ἰδέω, Part. ἰδυῖα Homer. * 


GENERAL VIEW oF THE ANOMALY OF VERBS. 


§ 110. Syncope and Metathesis. 


1. In all languages, every thing which deviates from the great 
mass of regular forms, follows even in this deviation a certain analogy. 
This analogy however is not always apparent, especially in a dead lan- 
guage ; because a multitude of instances in the diction of common 
life and in the variety of dialects, have never been adopted into the 


language of books. Those instances then, which to us appear to stand - 


entirely isolated, and which consequently can only be learned and re- 
tained singly, constitute in the strictest sense Anomaly. Such devia- 
tions, however, as are found in several examples, are strictly smaller 


. analogies, which would properly be annexed by means of separate rules 


and conjugations to the more comprehensive regular formation. ‘But this 
would only serve to render a general view of the regular conjugation more 
difficult ; and therefore these smaller analogies, as well as the single ex- 
amples, are separated from the regular formation, and regarded as 
Anomaly. In verbs especially this is of great extent. 

2. Of this anomaly, however, as thus defined, a part has already, on 
practical grounds, been exhibited in treating of the regular formation, 
and interwoven there as exceptions. The remaining anomalous forms 
will be given below in an alphabetical catalogue (§ 114), and thus 
left to the memory and diligence of the learner. In order to aid the 
learner’s observation, and lead him to avoid every thing merely me- 
chanical, we shall not only point out under each verb in the catalogue 
those smaller analogies, which are followed by its irregularities; but 
we here previously bring together, under one general view, certain 
classes of anomalous formation, which comprehend a greater number of 
examples. 

3. One principal class of deviations from the regular formation is 
caused-by Syncope. And since as we have seen above (ὃ 106. n. 6, 7), 
the Conjugation in μὲ arises from one species of syncope, we must like- — 


* Tn regard to most lexicons and indexes, it should be noted, that the preceding 


forms are usually distributed in them under the different Presents sid, εἰδέω, 
and ion. So also'of the compounds. 


§ 110. verps.— ANOMALY FROM SYNCOPE, 243 


wise refer to this kind of syncope those single parts of an ordinary verb, 


which agree with the forms of that conjugation ; comp. ὃ 106. n. 8. — ’ 


The most usual species of syncope, and that which we exclusively 


allude to here, is the omission of a vowel between two consonants. 
This occurs either (I.) in respect to the radical or stem-vowel of the 
verb; or (II.) in respect to the union-vowel of the endings. 


4. In many verbs (I.) the vowel of the root or stem is dropped by syn- 
cope; e.g. πέλω, 3 Impf. rede or ἔπλε; πέτομαι, F. πτήσομαι." 
Here are two principal cases to be noted: 
a) In some verbs the 4or. 2 is formed solely in this manner ; 
e.g. πέτομαυ (Impf.. ἐπετόμην) A.  ἐπτόμην; éysion, ἐγείρομαι, 
A. 2 ἠἡγρόμην awaked; aysiow Part. A. 2 Mid. ἀγρόμενοιυ 
assembled ; on the other hand Part. Pres. ἀγειρόμενοι those who 
assemble.—Here also belong ἔσχον and ἕἔσπον, see ἔχω and ἕπω: 
and also ἤλυϑον, nor, see ἔρχομαι, ὃ 114. 
b) This syncope occurs most naturally after a reduplication; 
. hence πιπράσχω from περάω, and xintw, μίμνω, from ETL, 
MEN. Further also in the Perfect; as δόμω Perf. (δεδέμηκα) 
δέδμηκα (but see other similar forms under metathesis in no. 11), 
πέπταμαν from ΠΕΤ 4.2, see πετάννυμι. See also μέμβλεταν in 
uélw.——Here belong also the Aorists ἐκεχλόμην and ἔπεφνον from 
κέλομαι and PEN, with a double augment according to § 83. n. 7. 
5. The more usual syncope is (II.) that of the union-vowel.t We 
divide the cases of this syncope into those of (A) Present and Im- 
perfect, (B) Aorist, (C) Perfect. : ᾿ 
(A) In the Present and Imperfect this syncope. occurs, (but so that the 
latter remains a real Imperfect as to its signification,) in οἶμαι, 
ᾧμην, for οἴομαι, ᾧφόμην ; and in the epic ῥῦσϑαι, ἔρυσϑαι, ἔρυτο, 
for ῥύεσϑαι, ἐρύεσϑαι, ἐρύετο, see ἐρύω ; and comp. in the Cata- 
logue ost, and ἔδμεναν from ἔδω. Here belong also the epic 
"στεῦται, στεῦτο, strive, threaten; and likewise all verbs in μι, see 


§ 106. n. 6 sq. 

6. Many verbs have by means of this syncope (B) an Aorist, which 
must be compared with the Aor. 2, or regarded as belonging to it. In 
the 1 pers. Active, there remains of course after the syncope only the 
letter v as ending; and since this can stand only after a vowel, 

-there arises a form which accords for the most part with the Aor. 2 of 
the conjugation in mw through all the moods and participles. But it 


., 4 


must be noted, that the vowel of this Aorist, whether long or short, 


whether ἃ or 4, usually conforms to the Perfect 1 of the same verb, 


* Many cases which seem to belong to this syncope, are more correctly refer- 
red to metathesis ; see no. 11, 2 below. . ; 

t That we give to the whole of the following mode of formation the name of 
syncope or syncopated formation, solely because the usual union-vowel does not 
appear — without pretending to assert that it was once there and has been drop- 
ped — follows of course from § 106. n. 6. 7. 


244 § 110. vERBS.—ANOMALY FROM SYNCOPE. 


and remains unchanged throughout the flexion of the other persons and 
moods; except that ἢ and ὦ are for the most part changed in the Op- 
tative into €, at, ov; and in the Participle into ev, a, ov. Thus 


σβέννυμι, BEN, ἔσβηκα --- ἔσβην, ἔσβημεν, σβῆναι, σβείην 

βαίνω, BAN, βέβηκα — ἔβην, ἔβημεν, βῆναι, βαίην, βάς 

διδράσκω, δέδρᾶκα — ἔδραν, ἔδραμεν, δρᾶναι, δραίην, δράς ἢ 

κτείνω, ἔχτακα --- ἔχταν, ἔχτάμεν, κτάναι, χταίην, κτάς 

γιγνώσκω, ἔγνωκα --- ἔγνων, ἔγνωμεν, γνῶναι, γνοίην, γνούς 

βιόω, βεβίωκα --- ἐβίων, ἐβίωμεν, βιῶναι, βιῴην, βιούς 

φύω, πέφυκα, --- ἔφυν, ἔφυμεν, φῦναι, puyyt for φυΐην, φύς. 

Other more complete Aorists of this kind see in ἁλέσκομαι, βιβρώσκω, 

«δύω, πέτομαι, σχέλλω, τλῆναι, φϑάνω; single and unusual forms see 
in βάλλω, γηράσκω, κλάω, οὐτάω, πλέω, πτήσσω. 


Nore 1. The Aor. ἔπλων from πλώω (for πλέω) is the only example 
which, since it is formed from πλώω (not 26m), retains the ὦ even in 
the participles: as πλ ὦς, 6. δ: ἐπιπλώς Π. 291. It therefore doubtless 
had the Gen. ὥντος ; 1. 6. πλώς G. --ὥγτος, for οὖς, όντος. ; 

Note 2. We have seen above (δ 106, 107) that the Imperative-ending 
3. belongs to the syncopated formation, i.e. is annexed immediately to 
the root ; “hence the Imperative of the above Aorists, so far as it occurs, is 
everywhere so formed; as βῆϑι, δρᾶϑι, γνῶϑι, δῦϑι, Pl. βῆτε, δῦτε, ete. 
Consequently the four following Imperatives in 9s and in the ¢ which 
stands for it (§ 106. 4), are to be ie reir under the Aorist forms above 
exhibited : 

MUI, κλῦϑι, σχές, Poss. 
See in the Catalogue, iva, κλύω, ἔχω, φρέω. ; 


7. With these Aorists Active is also connected a corresponding Pas- 
sive Aorist form in μήν, 00, TO, etc. which consequently corresponds to 
the Aor. 2 Mid. of the regular formation. It must however be noted, ( 1) 
that the far greater number of examples of this form have not the Mid- 
dle, but wholly a Passive signification ; (2) that in respect to the vowel 
they conform to the Perfect Passive ; (3) that they belong only to. the 
earlier poetical language. Some of these forms moreover really belong 
as Passive to some of the Aorists Act. above quoted, viz. 

ἐβλήμην Opt. βλείμην — from ἔβλην (ξυμβλήτην), see βάλλω 
ἐχτάμην, HT To Ot, κτάμεγος a from ὃ ἕχταν, see χτείγω. 
See too the forms συγγνοῖτο, οὑτάμενος, under γιγνώσκω, οὐτάω ; 


and see in reference to the Imperat. κλῦϑιυ above cited, the old 
participle κλύμενος. 


* The length of the ἃ in the forms of this verb is shewn by such examples as 
the ending of an anapestic verse of Aristophanes, in Herodian (Piers. p. 465), 
δεῦ-- | 90 δ᾽ ἂν οὐκ] ἀπέδρα-- | wsv—; and also by the Ionic form doy. 
Compare especially γηρᾶναι in the Anom. γηράσκω. It is observable that the @, 
which throughout the ἡνευῦνα has such a preference for long @ after it, is also 
in these instances predominant. 


+ Theocr. 15,94; where formerly φυῇ was erroneously written. Comp. § 
107. III. 6. 


§ 110. veRBs.—ANOMALY FROM SYNCOPE. 245 


ἴτ follows consequently, that all such forms, which exhibit the same 
analogy, even where no Aorist Active occurs, are to be regarded in the 
Same manner ; 6. g. Ἢ 
πνέω, πέπγυμαι ---- (ἐπνύμην) ἄμπνῦτο 
λύω, λέλῦμαι ---- (ἐλύμην) λύτο 
φϑίω, ἕῳφϑίμαι --- ἐφϑίμην, φϑίμενος Opt. φϑίμην (see in the Catal.) 
See also ἐπλήμην» in πέμπλημι, ἔνα σϑ'ε in ναίω, ἐσσύμην in 
σεύω, ἐχύμην in yéw; and the participles χτέμενος, πτάμενος (in 
πετάνγυμι), ϑύμενος, ἁρπάμενος. 


8. With these Aorist forms are closely connected those syncopated 
Aorists of the Passive, which have a consonant before the ending, as 
ἔλεκτο, δέχϑαι. These are formed from the simple theme of the verb ; 
and when this is.also the usual theme, they are distinguished solely 
by this syncope from the Imperfect and the moods of the Present. 
They coincide, therefore, with their Perf. and Pluperf. Passive with- 
out the reduplication ; precisely like the Aorists above mentioned. 
They may consequently be compared with these tenses; but not, as has 
often been the case, be regarded as identical with them. In significa- 
tion, Active, Passive, or Middle, they everywhere follow their Present 
in “ae; and they all belong exclusively to the earliest language. E. g. 


δέχομαι, ἐδεδέγμην, ἐδέδεξο, etc. δεδέχϑαι — Aor. syncop. (ἐδέγμη») 
ἔδεξο, ἔδεκτο Inf. δέχϑαν Imperat. δέξο : : 

μίγνυμι, MIT Ώ, — (ἐμίγμην) μίκτο 

λέξασϑαι ---- ἐλέγμην, λέξο, λέκτο, λέχϑαι is 

πάλλω --- (ἐπάλμην) πάλτο 

ὄρνυμι, ΟΡΩ — ὥρμην, ὦρτο Inf. ὄρϑαι Part. Ὀρμενος Πηρ. ὕρσο' 

and some. others like ἔγεντο for ἐγένετο, εὔκτο (see εὔχομαι), ἄλτο (see 
ἅἄλλομαι), ἐλέλικτο (see ἐλελέζω), ἵκμενος, ἄρμενος. 


᾿ 


Nore 3. The o in the endings beginning with σϑ' falls away here, 
just as in the Perf. Passive (§98. 2); hence δέχϑαι, 09901.—Here belongs 
consequently the Dual form uray ϑην (see wroivm), and the Inf. πέρ- 
9 ἃ 4, where two consonants are dropped ; see πέρϑω. * 


Nore 4. In all verbs whose reduplication passes over into the sim- 
ple augment, the Indicative of thesé Passive Aorists, when it retains 
its augment, is not to be distinguished, as to form, from the Pluperfect ; 
thus ὥρμην, ἐκτάμην, epdiuny, ἐσσύμην. 


* After the above exhibition (in nos. 6, 7, 8), the learner is in a situation to 
judge of the current representation, which reckons not only λέκτο, δέχϑαι, ete. 
(8) but also βλῆσϑαιε, κτέμενος, ete. (7) among those Perfects and Pluperf. which 
cast off their reduplication ; comp. ὃ 83. n.6. It is evident that λέκτο, δέγμενος, 
are circumstanced like λύτο, κτέμενος, (7) and these again like βλῆσθϑαε, κτάμε-- 
vos. ‘To separate these latter however from the Active forms βλήτην, ἔκταν, ᾿ 
(6) is contrary to all critical rules of grammar. Consequently all the above 

forms must be brought under the same law. They are Aorists, just as ἔκταν, 
ἔβην, are Aorists; and are to be explained by means of the syncopated for- 
mation,—the same which embraces as one part of its forms the conjugation 


in Me. 
32 


246 § 110. veERBS.—ANOMALY FROM SYNCOPE. 


9. Finally, (C) by means of this syncope, the longer forms of the 
Perfect and Pluperf. Active are sometimes shortened in such a manner, 
that all which stands between the root and the endings μέν, τὲ, ete. 


falls away. Some of these Perfects adopt the signification of the Pres- 


ent (§ 113. 6), and then take a 2 pers. Imperat. with the ending 90 
(Ὁ 106. 4, andn. 8). This takes place in 
κέχραγα --- χέχραγμεν ΡΙΌΡΕ ἐχέχραγμεν Imp. χέχραχϑι (see κράζω) 
ἄγωγα (see in Catal.) — ἄγωγμεν Inp. ἄνωχϑι 
εἰλήλουϑα --- εἰλήλουϑμεν, epic forms for ἐλήλυϑα (see ἔρχομαι). 


The cognate οὐ of the Perf. which comes from &l, passes over in this 


syncope for the most part into ὁ ; e. g. 

πέπουϑα from πείϑω --- Το: ἐπέπυιϑμεν᾽" 

ἔοικα from εἴκω---ἕοιγμεν, 3 Du. Perf. gixtoy, Plupf. ἔΐκτην, merely po- 
etical forms. 

Hence appears the correctness of the above derivation of ἔσμεν, etc. 
(§ 109. IIT.) viz. 

οἶδα from εἴδω---ἴδμεν or iouer, ἴστε, 3 Pl. Plupf. epic ἔσαν. Imper. 

iodt, Inf. epic ἔδμεναι for εἰδέμεναι (comm. εἰδέναι); with the Attic 

forms of the Pluperf. 
ἥσμεν, Hots, ἧσαν, for ἤδειμεν, ee ἤδεσαν. 


See for the forms of ἔοικα and οἶδα the marg. note to § 109. III. 5. 


Note 5. When by means of this syncope the consonant of the root 
comes to stand immediately before t in the ending, this t sometimes 
passes over into 4, on account of the similarity of sound with the Passive 
endings, τέτυφϑε, ἔφϑαρϑε, etc. Thus from the Imper. ἄνωχϑει are form- 
ed in the other persons, instead of 


avayers, ἀνωγέτω,--ἄνωχϑε, ἀνώχϑω; 
and thus also from 

Perf. ἐγρήγορα, éyonyoouts,—é y on yoo F 8, 
see ἐγεέρω ; and in the same manner is most naturally explained the epic 
πέποσϑ' ε (see πάσχω), 


᾿ πέπογνϑα, πεπόνϑατε--πέποσϑε: , 
that is, so soon as the ' came to stand before the τ, it passed over into σ 
(like tOusy, tors), and the y fell away (πέποστε) ; after which the transition 
was natural to the Passive form, πέποσϑε. ; 
10. This syncope is more natural, when the characteristic of the 
verb is a vowel. Such a vowel however appears pure before the ending 
a of the Perfect, only in a few verbs; as we haveseen in§ 97.n.7. Thus 


δέδια, (see δεῖσαι in Catal.) hence Perf. Pl. δέδιμεν, dédute, for δεδία-- 


μὲν, —OlTE | 
Plupf. 2dgdiuey, ἐδέδιετε, ἐδέδισαν, for ἐδεδίδιμεν, τε, ἐδεδίεσαν 
Imperat. δέδυϑι. 

Further, as some Perfects in κα, in their epic syncope, cause the radi- 
cal vowel («) to reappear before the ending, e. g. βέβηκα (βέβααν) βε- 


ap 


§ 110. verps.—ANOMALY FROM SYNCOPE. 947 


βάασι, BsBaws (§ 97. πη. 7); we can in the same manner explain—as 
coming from an older form ἃ by means of that syncope—some forms of 
the Dual and Plur. Indic. and of the Infin. which occur from such 
Perfects in the Attic and common language. E.g. from τέτληκα (see 
the Anom. τλῆναι) TETAAA—tétha-per, etc. Inf. τετλᾶάναν (for τε- 
tho-évoe). And as this coincides fully with the form of the Present of 
verbs in av, (ἵσταμεν, ioravae,) so most of the other parts of the forma- 
tion in we are likewise adopted in this Perfect; thus 


Perf. Plur. τέτλαμεν, τέτλατε, τετλᾶσι(ν) 
Dual τέτλατον 
Pluperf. Pl. ἐτέτλαμεν, ἐτέτλατε, ἐτέτλασαν , 
Dual ἐτέτλατον, ἐτετλάτην. 
Inf. τετλάναν (short α) 
Imperat. τέτλαϑι, τετλάτω, ete. 
Opt. τετλαΐην 


The Subjunctive of this verb is not used in this form; instead of it we 
subjoin that of βέβηκα, βέβαμεν, etc. 


Subj. βεβῶ, ἧς, 7, ete. 


The participle atone i is not formed after the conjugation in mw, but is con- 
tracted from ae into ὡς ; so that the Mase. and Neut. are alike (awe and adg 
G. αότος, contr. ὡς, τος) ; and this contracted form then takes a peculiar 
feminine in doa; 6. 5. from βόέβηκα Part. βεβηκώς, υἷα, ὅς 

βεβώς, βεβῶσα, βεβώς 
G. βεβῶτος. 

Of those Perfects which conform to the above model, only the Sing. Indic. 
of the Perf. and Pluperf. is usual in the regular form (τέτληκα, ας, s,—éte- 
τλήκειν, εἰς, év); all the other parts have the above secondary forms, which 
in general are more usual than the regu lar ones. See in the catalogue, 
besides τλῆναν and βαὲΐνω, also ϑνήσκω, τέϑγηκα, and the Perfect 
ἕστηκα under ἃ ἵστημι. (δ 107. 11. 2, 3.) "ἢ 


Norte 6. We remark further: 


a. That except in the 3 Plur. Perf. (τετλᾶσι, τεϑνᾶσιν, ἑστᾶσιν, etc.) 
the α inall these forms is short, inasmuch as the short vowel of 
the ending falls away by syncope, instead of being contracted with 
the radical vowel; and that scar gicansied it is incorrect to write 
τετλᾶγαι, τεϑνᾶναι, ὃ ἑστᾶναι, etc. * : 

b. That’ it is only in the contracted form of the participle that the 
| feminine in σὰ occurs; since ‘in the uncontracted form in the epic 
writers it regularly ends in vie; e. g. BeBawis βεβαῦϊα---βεβώς βε- 
βῶσα. 


ul 


* This however did not hinder the μι especially {Π6. earlier ones, as Auschy- 
lus, from employing the contracted form for the sake of the metre, e.g. Agam. 
558 τεϑνᾶναι. Thatit was short in the common language is shewn by the man- 
ner of using it in comedy; e.g. Aristoph. Ran. 1012 redvdévoe.—The epic Infini- 
tive forms τεϑνάμεναι, τεϑνάμεν, are explained by Snel areose § 107. IV. 1. 


sain “ὦ ὌΡΟΥΣ 


248 § 110. veRBs.—ANOMALY FROM METATHESIS. 


ce. That the participial ending «oc, Neut. «og, (according to § 27. n. 
10,) becomes among the Ionics ξώς ; see ἵστημι (ὃ 107. 11, 3), and 
in the Catal..9x7j0x0, in which verb this is the common Attic form. 
— Compare also πεπτώς, πεπτεώς, in the Anom. πέπτω. 


11. The Metathesis of the,radical. vowel with a quid (ᾧ 19. n. 2) 
sometimes changes the root or stem of a verb, especially in two cases: 


1) In the Aorist 2; see § 96. n. 7, and comp. the Anom. ἁμαρτάνω 
and τέρπω. ; 


2) In several verbs, whose simple theme has a liquid for its charac- 
teristic. E.g. in the root OAN, Aor. ἔϑανον, Fut. ϑανοῦμαι, there 
_takes place, for the sake of easier flexion, a transposition of the 
vowel, OWA; hence τέϑγηκα, τέϑναμεν, etc. In some verbs the 
new Present in actual use arises from such a transposition ; as in 
the above example, ϑνήσκω. The same takes place in the root 
MOA. But on account of the difficulty in pronouncing pd, the 
letter 8 was inserted between these two letters in the middle of a 
word (ὃ 19. n.1), as μέμβλωκα for μέμλωκα ; while at the beginning 
_of a word the μ itself was changed into β, as βλώσκω.Σ This being 
premised, the three following verbs have a complete and manifest 
analogy : 
ϑγήσχω, ϑανοῦμαι, ἔϑανον, τέϑνηκα (OAN, ONA) 

> ϑρώσκω, ϑοροῦμαι, ἔϑορον,. . . . (OOP, OPN). 

βλώσκω, μολοῦμαι, Fuoloy, μέμβλωκα (MOA, MAO) 

See all these in the Catalogue. In the same manner belong 
together the defective forms ἔπορον, πέπρωται; see πορεῖν in the 
Catalogue.} uly 

With entire certainty can be referred to this metathesis only 
those verbs, in which the transposed vowel is clearly to be recog- 
nized in some of the forms; as the @ in τεϑγάγαι, τεϑναίην, and 
the ὁ in μέμβλωχα. But where merely ἢ appears, it may be a 
matter of doubt, whether to assume a metathesis or only a syn- 
cope, 6. g. whetker δέμω (JEM, AME) δέδμηκα, or δέμω (δεδέμηκα) 
δέδμηκα, like véuw γνενέμηχα. Here belong the following verbs, 
whose Present is otherwise formed : 

τέμνω «6. teu A. ἔτεμον Pf. τέτμηκα 
καάμγω FE. χαμοῦμαν A. ἔχαμον PE. κέχμηκα. ; 
Still the analogy is clearer, which brings such verbs, with those 
above, under metathesis (TEM, TME; KAM, Κα 4). And this is 
still more certain in regard to the verb καλέω; although the forms 
καλέω, καλέσω, κέχληκα, seem to indicate merely a syncope. 
. That is to say, the Fut. xaiéow, or the more genuine Attic F. καλῶ, 
is unquestionably the Future of a simple theme KAA (§ 95. 
n. 12); while the usual Present καλέω has arisen from this Future ; 


* Precisely the same relation exists between βλάξ and μαλακός; βλέττω gath- 
er honey and μέλε; see Lexilog. IT. art. 108. A still more decisive analogy for 
μολεῖν, μέμβλωκα, βλώσκω, is afforded by the two following instances, viz. μό-- 
ρος death, φϑισίμωβροτος, βροτός; ἁμαρτεῖν, ἀμβροτεῖν, ἀβροτάξειν. 

t From βιβρώσκω. the corresponding radical form BOP has been preserved 
only in the verbal subst. fogd. 


§ 111. verBs.—ANOMALY FROM NEW ‘THEMES. 249 


, 
. ... ὦ... ὕβ. ..... -  σἈ-.Ψ..- 


just as the Ion. Present μαχέομαν from the Fut. μαχέσομαν -οὔμαι 
(δ 95. n. 16. marg. note +). From the theme KA42 came conse- 
quently the Perf. χκέχληκα by the same metathesis (KAA, KAA) 
as in the above Perfects; and thence too thé poets have’a Present 
κικλήσκω, corresponding to the form ϑγήσκω from OANR. Hence 
καλέω, κικλήσκω, EF. καλῶ Pf. κέκληχα (KAA, KAA), 


— See also in the Catalogue β ά of Lia βέβληκα, oxéda ω ἔσκληκα:; 
further πελάω, στορέννυμι, περάω, and the note to χεράγγυμι. 


§ 111. New Themes from the Tenses. 


1. Another, though not an extensive species of anomaly, is when 
some:one of the tenses other than the Present is converted into a new 
theme ; either because it can be taken in the sense of the Present, or 
because it is more agreeable to the ear than the Present. Such 
themes occur only from the Perfect and Aorist 2 Active and Passive. 
The instances which were formerly regarded as coming from the Fu- 
ture, on account of an irregular insertion of o, have already been 
referred to their proper place; see § 96. n. 9, and marg. note. 

2. As the Perfect not unfrequently takes the signification of “the 
Present (ἢ 113.6), it sometimes also passes over into the formation of the 
Present. Such instances belong for the most part to the Doric or the 
epic language. ἘΝ 

Thus we find in Theocrit, 15. 58, δεδοίκω for δέδοικα I fear, 
see Anom. δεῖσαι ; and in Homer κεκλήγοντες, see Anom. κλάζω. 
Hence the Imperfects in oy derived from Perfects; e.g. Hesiod . 
ἐπέφυκον from πέφυχα (as if from ZEOPK2). Here belong 
too the third persons like γέγωγε, ἀνήνοϑε, ἄνωγε, which in Ho- ; 
mer are not only Perfect, i.e. Present, but often also Imperfect or 
Aorist. — Finally, there belong here the Futures ἑστήξω (ὃ 107. 

ΤΙ. 4), and τεϑ'ν ἡ ἕω, see Anom. ϑγήσκω. 

Norte 1. The clear exhibition of this anomaly is rendered more ΑἸ 
ficult, by the circumstance of there being undoubted traces that a part of 
the Dorians gave to the real Perfect, in many of i its parts, the same endings 
as those of the Present. Thus Pindar, Inf. γεγάκειν, see Anom. γίγνομαι: ; 
Theocrit. δεδύκην (for χει») instead of δεδυκέναι ; also πεπόνϑης, πεφύκη 
(for Deg, xev) instead of --ϑας, -xe. So the Participle in wy, oven, in- 
stead of ὥς, υἷα, e.g. Pind. πεφρίκοντας ; Archimed. μεμενάκουσα from 
μεμένηκα. See the Ausf. Sprachl. § 88. n. 11, 14. ὃ 111. n. 2.—The redu- 
plicated a like sauna ἄραρον, etc. do not belong here ; see § 83. 
n. 7. § 85, n. 2 

Note 2. The Perfect Passive i in like manner exhibits a transition into. 
the form of the Present, in the accent of some epic Participles and Infini- 


tives; as ἀκηχέμενος and ἀκαχήμενος, ἀκάχησϑαι, under ἀκαχίζω, ἐληλά-- 
μενος under ἐλαύγω, ὃ 114. 


3. In some verbs the Aorist 2 occasions anew formation as if from 2a. 
This is found, in the Aor. 2 Active, derived from the Inf. in εἴν. 


! 


250 § 112: veRBSs.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. 


Thus it is not to be assumed that there are such verbs as εὕρέω, 
τυχέω, etc. but that from the Aorist 2 εὗρον εὖ ge Lv, ἔτυχον TU y εἕν, 
there arose the formation εὑρήσω, εὕρηκα, τετύχηκα, etc. for which a 
corresponding Present was later introduced; see εὑρίσκω, τυγχάνω, 
and also similar forms in μανϑάγω, βχαδέάγω; γίγνομαι, etc. § 114. 


In some other verbs, whose Aor. 2 Pass. has, as deponent, an Active 
signification, there is formed in like manner from nv, a Perfect in 
NRO 

ἐῤῥύηκα from ἐῤῥύην Jlowed ; see δέω 

κεχάρηκα and κεχάρημαι from ἐχάρην rejoiced ; see χαίρω 

δεδάηκα and δεδάημαι from ἐδάην learned ; see 4A-. 


- 


§ 112. Anomalous Changes of the Theme. 


1, The greater portion. of the anomaly of Greek verbs consists in 
the mixing together of forms from different themes ; so that several of 
the derived tenses, when traced back in the regular manner, presuppose 
a different Present from the usual one. Some of the cases which per- 
haps belong here, have for the sake of convenience been already exhib- 
ited in § 92, as belonging to the ordinary conjugation. We proceed to 
exhibit here, under one general view, those which present in several 
verbs too great a deviation, or too slight a uniformity, to admit of being 
disposed of in the same manner. 

2. This difference of themes is a difference of form in the stem of 
the same verb. These different forms of the stem very often exist - 
together, either throughout the whole verb, or in particular parts of 
it, and more especially in the Present. The kindred nature of certain 
letters, the desire of euphony, the efforts of the ancient bards to have at 
command a variety of forms ‘for the sake of versification, and finally 
other minor causes, which to us appear accidental, occasioned the crea- 
tion of such secondary forms of verbal roots, and their being joined in 
usage with the original ones. ‘The necessities of the every-day lan- 
guage decided indeed, in most cases, for one or the other of such forms. 
But in consequence of the multitude of parts in a verb, it was very 
natural, that the different parts, derived from different forms of the 
stem, should become mixed together. This then is the real anomaly ᾿ 


‘which is so frequent in the Greek verb. 


3. We must here assume it as a fundamental position; which has 
already been developed in ᾧ 92, that what is exhibited above as the 
regular formation or derivation of the parts of a verb, is by no means 
the original and natural one; that on the contrary the formation in a 
verb did not really commence from the Present; but, especially in those 
verbs which are most essential and founded on the necessary wants of — 


§ 112. VERBS.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. φἠ δ, 


man, the earliest and real stem is to be sought in other tenses, and in 
its most simple form in the Aorist 2, when this tense exists; while the 
Present is only ἃ derived form, in which the stem commonly appears 
longer, fuller, and more sonorous; ὁ. g. from AHB2 or AAB2R— 
λαμβάνω. This form of the stem, however, commonly extends no fur- 
ther than the Present and Imperfect ; and from this single circum- 
stance, such a verb, considered: as a whole, is anomalous; e.g. λαμ- 
βάνω, ἐλάμβανον, --- λήψομαι, ἔλαβον, ete. 

4. The case of two different forms of the Present in actual use at the 
same time, occurs even in common prose; and many such instances 
as λείπω and λιμπάνω, κτείνω and χτίννυμι, are found in the best 
prose writers. Not unfrequently, however, one of the forms belongs 
rather to some particular dialect; thus ἀγένέω for ἄγω, φυγγάνω for 
φεύγω, were more common among the Ionics. More particularly, the 
poets of every period, as was natural, held possession of such secondary 
forms, handed down as they were from the earliest times. It was often 
the case too, that the longer and fuller secondary: form became in the 
common language the more current form, with a complete flexion 
through the Aorist etc. while the equally complete formation from the 
original stem was laid aside in every-day usage; as πέρϑω, ἕπερσα, in 
comparison with πορϑέω, ἐπόρϑησα. 


Nore 1. With such modifications of the stem are very often connected 
differences of sense ; and then these instances do not properly belong here, 
but either to the lexicon, or under the section on the formation of words 
(ὃ 119). Meanwhile it is impossible here, as in other like cases, to draw 
a definite line of distinction. From the idea of duration, which, as the - 
opposite of the idea of the Aorist, ought to predominate in those fuller 
forms, are easily developed the modifications implying that which is re- 
peated, that which is frequent, and that which is usual; and thus it was 
very natural, that when two forms of the Present existed together, the one 
should assume such a modification in preference to the other. Thus e.g. 
φορέω from φέρω to bear in general, which is formed in entire analogy with 
the above mentioned πορϑέω and several other pure secondary forms, 
serves nevertheless to mark more definite relations ; as to wear (clothes), to 
have on usually, etc. But, on the one hand, it is impossible to arrive here 
at any fixed and definite results; while on the other, no writer, and least 
of all the poets, felt themselves so bound in this respect, as not to employ 
just as readily the fuller forms for the sake of euphony, metre, or empha- 
sis, without any difference of sense; so that qogéw could be used indis- 
criminately for φέρω. A hint, however, is all that we can here give upon 
this whole subject. — : 


Nore 2. In those instances in which, along with the more usual and (in 
relation to the other parts of the verb) regular forms, another form actually 
existed which deviated more widely in the Present, there arose indeed such 
an anomaly of usage as this, viz. that a writer, when he had expressed 


-" 


- 


ΩΝ στον ᾿ χω : δέν. ες. «ὦ 


252 § 112. vERBS.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. 


himself in the Present by means e.g. of λιμπάνω, so soon as he would 
express the same thing in the Future, must employ λείψω ; and thus far 
can it be said that λιμπιάνω has in the Fut. λείψω. In this case however 
there are not two different formations, each in itself defective, which make 
out together one anomalous whole; but there merely exists along with 
one regular whole (Asim, λείψω, etc.) a defective λιμπάνω, which orators 
and poets employ at their pleasure. ‘The grammar therefore leaves all 
such defective secondary forms of the Present for the most part to the 
lexicon, and only directs attention to the analogy, according to which in 
many similar cases the fuller forms are modelled. This is done in the 
following part of this section. 

5. In the mean time it is unnecessary to assume, that the different 
themes presupposed by the different forms of a verb, have therefore 
once existed in the shape of Presents in actual use. The simple stem” 
especially, which lies in the other tenses, may indeed possibly have 
formed an ancient Present (comp. ὃ 92.n.6); but in general this is not 
probable. Besides, the Greeks were accustomed to see different forma- 
tions united in one verb; and therefore,. in such tenses as are really 
derived from others, they not unfrequently preferred an easier and more 
convenient flexion ; for which it is not at all necessary to conceive of 
any corresponding theme as a Present. Here belongs, in addition to. 
other instances contained in the two preceding paragraphs (3, 4), the 
transition from verbs in ὦ into the formation (éw) now, etc. See no. 
8 below. 

6. Not unfrequently several of the above kinds of ‘anomaly occur to- 
gether ; so that one verb appears in its conjugation to be a mixture of 
three or more. Thus from the theme ILH@2 or ILAOSL2 there exists 
only the Aorist ἔπαϑὸν ; another form strengthened with v, TZNO2, 
is retained in the Perfect πέπονϑα ; while in the Pres. and Impf. both 
have yielded to the form πάσχω, which gives name to the whole 
verb, From the theme ZH7'42 comes πεέτάσω; ἴῃ the Perf. Pass. 
the syncope appears, πέπταμαν; while in the Pres. and Impf. only 
the lengthened form zeravyupe is usual. 

7. Many derived forms of the Present are of such a kind, that few or 
no other examples of a like change of the stem are at present extant gn 
the language ; ase. g. ἀγένέω from ἄγω, πάσχω from ITAOQ, ἐσϑίω 
‘from ἔδω, ἐλαύνω from ἐλάω. The most however stand in.a clear 
analogy with others; and this the learner must endeavour to embrace in 
one view, in order the more easily to impress upon his memory, not 
only the anomalies of conjugation which are exhibited below in the 
catalogue, but more particularly the secondary forms, either of the 
whole verb, or of the Present, which occur so often in the poets. 


§ 112. VERBS.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. 253 


Preratrory Remarx. In the following examples, when two forms are 
connected by and, it shews that both are in use ;—where from stands, the 
latter form is either entirely obsolete and is to be recognized only in the 
tenses derived from it,.or it belongs only to the early poets ;—and where 
for stands, the first form is peculiar to the poets. The forms which come 
under the first and last of these cases, are not further noted in the anom- 
alous catalogue, unless for some special reason. =~ 


8. One of the easiest changes was that of 
ὦ into ἕω, more rarely ew, contr. ὦ ; 


δίπτω and διπτέω" κτυπέω from KTTHR (hence étuzor) ; γαμέω from 
ΤΑ, (hence éynuc) ; — μυκάομαι from ΠΥ ΚΙ (hence ἔμυκον) ; 
δαμάω from ΔΈΠΜ (hence ἐδάμην). 


So often then as the regular flexion of ἃ verb had the least difficulty, 
or could occasion any ambiguity or want of euphony, it was inflected 
as if the Present ended in ἕω; see no. 5 above. 


Note 3. Here belong those verbs which have in the Present the 
characteristic & or y, as ἕψω Fut. ἑψήσω" αὔξω αὐξήσω. So also the Per- 
fects of verbs i in, uw 5 see § 10. n. 9. Further μένω μεμένηκα " τύπτω τύψω 
and τυπτήσω" μέλλω μελλήσω" ἔῤῥω ἐῤῥήσω" καϑεύδω καϑευδήσω, and oth- 
ers.— When the Future and other forms of such verbs have ¢, as ἄχϑομαν 
ἀχϑέσομαι, (see also μάχομαι, ἔδω, and &w n. 2, in the Catal.) this can indeed 
be explained in the same manner ; but it is more correct to refer such 
instances to the old formation mentioned in § 95. n. 15, which has here 
been retained for the same reasons, for which in other cases the Fut. in 

qjow has been formed. 


Nore 4, Although therefore both these forms of the Future (70, éoa) 
do not, or at least do not necessarily, presuppose an actual Present ; yet it 
was often the case that such a Present was afterwards actually formed, 
earlier or later, in consequence of these Futures. ‘Thus arose, in the 
early language, certainly χαλέω from the Fut. καλέσω (see in the Catal.) 
and thus most probably the usual ῥιπτέω, διπτῶ, came from the Fut. 6:- 
πτήσω. But it is easy to see the difficulty of making out such cases ; and 
therefore we are fully justified in deducing every Future in ἔσω and ow 

from a Present in éw, where such an one is in actual use. 


Note 5. 'The Ionics very often form single parts of the Present or 
Imperf. from ἕω, although the whole Present may not so occur; 6. g. 
ὥφλεε, Eyer, συμβαλλεόμενος, πειεζεύμενος Herod. πιέζευν for ἐπέεζον Hom. ete. 

9. Many barytones of two syllables, which have ¢ in the first syllable, 
form other secondary Presents, by changing ἃ into 0, and assuming the 
ending ἕω: 

φέρω and φορέω, τρέμω and τρομέω, δέμω and δομέω, πέρϑω and πορϑέω. 
Ν Here belong also the forms δεδοκημένος for δεδεγμένος" ἐκτόνηκα, 

μεμόρηται, ἐόλητο, see δέχομαι, κτείνω, μείρομαι, εἴλω. 
Or the radical syllable takes with the ending aw : 
33 


254 § 112. VERBS.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. 


τρωχάω, δωμάω ; so also βρωμάω, νωμάω, τρωπάω, στρωφάω, for 
βρέμω; νέμω, τρέπω, στρέφω. : 
The single verb πέτομαν forms, besides the Presents ποτέομαι and 
πωτάομαι, still another combined from the two, viz. ποτάομαι. 


10. Verbs in ὦ pure sometimes take the ending -σχω, se 
the radical vowel : 


γηράω and ,7γηράσκω, ἱλάομαν and ἱλάσκομαι, φάσχω from PAL 
(hence φήσω § 109. I. 2), δύομαι and δύσκομαι. --τ- So with the 
radical vowel lengthened, γιγνώσκω from TNO. 


But verbs in ἕω most commonly go over into /ozw: 

κυέω — κυΐσκω, στερέω — στερίσκω. 3 
And since the Infin. Aor. 2 ends in εἴν, there arose out of it sometimes 
a formation as if from ἕω (ὃ 111. 8) and ἃ Present in ἰσχω: 


from “ETP2, Aor. igor, εὑρεῖν, — εὑρίσκω F. εὑρήσω; see also 
ἀμπλακίσκω, ἀπαφίσκω, ἀραρίσκω, ἐπαυρίσκομαι. 


Nore 6. This form can indeed be compared with the Latin Verba 
inchoativa, inasmuch as many of these verbs imply in their significa- 
‘tion a beginning, increase, etc. But they are seldom so much distin- 
guished from the simple form as in Latin, e. g. rubescere from rubere. An 
example of this kind nevertheless is ἡβάω, ἡβάσκω, I am or become of ripe 
age. Commonly the simple form either had the same signification, 
or was wholly obsolete. On the other hand, the form in oz takes some- 
times the causative sense (ὃ 113. 2) to make or cause another, ete. e.g. με-- 
ϑύω I an drunk, μεϑύσκω I make drunk, (see in the Catal.) πιυπίσκω give 
to drink, from πέω, ἔπιον, I drink. For Prsweneins see βιόω. --- That the 
Ionic Imperfects and Aorists in oxoy are to be carefully distinguished 
from these verbs, follows of course; see § 103. II. 1. 


Note 7. Sometimes the x in the ending oxw is radical, and only 
the o is added; e.g. λάσκω from AAK2; ἔΐσκω compare from sixw am 
like ; τιτύσκω for τεύχω. With ἀλύσκω, διδάσκω, the case is different. 


11. Some verbs have Attic and poetic secondary forms in @w, pre- 
ceded by different vowels : 
φλεγέϑω for φλέγω, νεμέϑω for νέμω" φϑινύϑω for φϑίνω. 
Here belongs consequently the lengthening of a verb by means of the 
letters αϑ' before the ending, which occurs even in Attic prose; but is | 
found only as preterite—either Impf. or Aorist in - αϑὸν, and in the 
dependent moods. Of this kind the following occur : 7 
διωχάϑειν, ἐδιώκαϑον, from δὲ ὦ κα ω" εἰκάϑειν, εἰκάϑοιμι, from εἴκω" 


ἀμυνάϑειν, ἀμυναϑοίμην,. from ἃ μ ύνω"  εἰργάϑειν from εἴργω ~ 
and the epic μετεκέαϑον from xia. 
With these are to be compared the forms γήϑω, adj Iw, κνήϑω, which came 
into use at a later period instead of γέω spin, aléw, κνάω. See also 
πλήϑω and πρήϑω in πίμπλημν and πίμπρημι. 


§ 112. verBs.—ANOMALY FROM CHANGE OF THEME. = 255 


—— 


12. Sometimes the letter ν is inserted before the termination : 
'δάκνω from JAK (hence ἔδακον); see also τέμγω, κάμνω. 


, 
Thus from ἰὼ and vw come ἐνω and vw: 
πίνω from JI2, tio and τίνω, ϑύω and ϑύνω, ἐντύω and ἐγτύγνω, 
see also φϑίέω, δύω, ἱδρύω ; 
and from ἄω comes aivw, rarely ἄνω: 
βαΐνω from BAR, φϑάνω from DOAN. 


13. Verbs in ἄνω of three or more syllables, and some in αἶνω, 
have nevertheless as their ground-form a theme in ὦ ; which, at the” 
same time, (on account of the Aor. 2, see § 111. 3,) forms some of the 
tenses as if from ἕω: 


αὔξω and αὐξάνω: βλαστάνω from BAASTN, A. 2 ἔβλαστον Fut. 
βλαστήσω" ἀπέχϑομαι and ἀπεχϑάνομαι: see also, ἁμαρτάνω, αἷ-- 


σϑάνομαι ete. in § 114.— ὀλισϑάνω and ολισϑαΐνω, A. 2 ὥλισϑον 
Fut. ὀλισϑήσω. ' 


Those in ἄγω at the same time usually insert a nasal letter in the 
radical syllable, and shorten the long radical vowel or hoe 
thus 
λείπω and λιμπάνω, φεύγω and φυχγάγω, ἐρεύγω and ἐρυγγάνω,--- 
λήϑω and λανϑάνω. See also ἀἁνδάνω, ϑιγγάνω, λαμβάνω, λαγ- 
“ χάνω, μανϑάνω, πυνϑάνομαι, τυγχάνω, in the Catalogue. 


Nore 8. In respect to the quantity of the doubtful vowels before the 
ending vo, it is to be remarked in general, that iva and vyw-are long ; 
e.g. χρένω, ogiva, βραδύνω ; but the ending ἄνω, short. Yet, if we re- 
gard only the usage of epic writers, the following are' long, viz. 

φϑάνω, ἱκάνω, “yore. 
The Attics have likewise some deviations, inasmuch as they not only use 
τίνω, φϑίνω,. as short, but also bring 
φϑάνω, κιχάνω . under the analogy of other verbs in άγω, and 
make them in like manner short. 


14. A very common change (§ 106. n. 4) is that of 
ὦ into vue. 


οἴχω and , οἴγνυμι, δείκνυμι from JEIKM, (hence dsifw etc.) see 
- under ἄγνυμι, ὄρνυμι, ὀμόργνυμι, ζεύγνυμι, etc. So also πταΐρω 
and πτάργνυμαι, theme ΠΊΤΑ͂ΡΩΏ, comp. § 92. 9. 


. When a vowel precedes this ending, the ν is commonly doubled, and ὁ 
becomes @: | 


* In this Word, as a sort οὗ compensation, the long sound falls back into the 
syllable xz, which elsewhere, as being a reduplication, is short, and actually oc- 
curs so in κιχῆναι ete. The quantity of the other forms belonging to φϑίνω 
and φϑάνω» see in the Sees tt, 


‘ 


256 § 113. VERBS.—ANOMALY OF SIGNIFICATION. 


χρεμάω and χρεμάγγυμι ; see in Catal. κεράγγυμι, πετάννυμι, σχεδάννυμι ; 
--ζέω and ζέγνυμι ; see xogévyums, σβέγνυμι, στορέννυμυ ;--τίω and 
τίννυμι, χόω and χώνγυμι; see ζώγγυμι, δώννυμι, στρώννυμι, χρώννυμι. 

15. A change which belongs rather to the poets, is the insertion of 
v before the ending ao, Viz. 

: aw into νάω, νημέ. 

δαμάω and δαμνάω, δάμνημι ; περνάω, πέρνημι, from περάω ; and with — 
a change of ε into 1, κιργάω, κέρνημι, from κεράω (κεράγνυμι). So 
also πέλγημι, πίτνημι, σκίδνημι, from πελάω, ETAL, SKEAAN, 

16. Several verbs take a reduplication in the Present; not only 
verbs in pe, but several others : 

γιγνώσχω from INO, hence γνώσομαι; 50 also μιμνήσχω, πιπρά-- 
oxo, etc. Further μένω and μέμνω, πίπτω from TETL,* γίγνο-- 
μαι, from DENI, 

17. Finally, some verbs form single tenses from entirely different 
themes; just as in Latin, fero, ἐπὶ, latum. . Indeed, the corresponding 
verb in Greek presents itself as an example : 

φέρω, Fut. οἴσω, Aor. ἤνεγκον. 
The other most striking examples may be sought in the catalogue un- 
der αἱρέω, εἰπεῖν, ἔρχομαι, ἐσϑίω, ὁράω, τρέχω. Compare also what is 
subjoined to ἀλίσξομαι, ἐρέοϑαι, Sam, ϑέω, πλήσσω, τλῆναι, ὠνέομαυ. 


~§ 113. Anomaty or ΞἸΟΝΙΕΊΟΑΤΙΟΝ. 


1. Whatever relates to the segnification of verbal forms, belongs 
strictly io the Syntax; inasmuch as it cannot well be separated from 
the consideration of words in their connexion. But as we have already 
been obliged to exhibit the general principles respecting the significa- 
tion of forms, without which the system of conjugation could not be well 
understood ; so the deviations from those principles, so far as they have 
‘become more or less fixed in particular verbs, cannot well be separated 
from the account of the anomaly in their formation ; just as in the Lat- 
in words, odi, hortor, audeo, ausus sum. Instances of this kind in Greek 
‘are more frequent and various. he 

2. One subject, however, which in its full extent belongs only 
to the lexicon, must here be mentioned, inasmuch as it has an in- 
timate connexion with the anomaly of the Greek verb; viz. the 

Immediate and Causative Signification 


of verbs. In the first, the action or state belongs cmmediately to the 


* According to the Etymol. Mag. in voc. the cin πίπτω was pronounced 
long ; and in gov, tut, the length of the first syllable is acknowledged: For 
the effect of this in reference to these reduplications, see the 4usf. Sprachl. § 112. 
. 17. marg. note. 


§ 113. vERBS.—ANOMALY OF SIGNIFICATION. 257 


subject itself; in the other, the subject causes an action or state in some 
other object. The regular proceeding would be, that for each of these 
significations there should be an appropriate verb; but so that the caus- 

ative might be derived from the immediate. Thus e.g. in German and 

English the verbs fallen, to fall, are immediate; and from them are deriv- 
ed the causatives fillen, to fell, which express the state of falling, not in 

the subject, but in another object. On the other hand, it isan anomaly, 
when one verb, in one and the same form, unites both these significa- 
tions ;*—a thing which occurs in all languages. So in Greek, ἐλαύ- 

vetv, Imm. ἐο be driven, to move rapidly, Caus. to drive; καϑίξζειν 
to sit and to seat. In the earlier language this seems to have been the 
case in many other verbs; and hence we can account for the fact, that 
in several verbs, (whose anomaly consists partly in this circumstance, ) 
in some tenses the immediate, in other tenses the -causative significa- 
tion has remained the usual one, as we have seen above in foryue. 


Nove 1. Verbs causative are in their very nature transitive ; and since 
verbs wmmediate are at the same time in most cases intransitive, there has. 
hence arisen the very inaccurate and perplexing custom of treating this 
whole subject merely as the mixture and separation of the transitive and 
intransitive significations. ‘This mode of viewing the subject would not 
include those cases, where both the immediate and causative significations 
are transitive, as in Germ. trinken and trenken,, Engl. drink and cause to drink. 
Besides, the union of the transitive and intransitive senses in one verb can 
and does take place in a very different manner, viz. the verb does not 
change its appropriate signification, but this signification is either ex- 
pressed absolutely, or with reference to an object. Thus the usually tran- — 
sitive to see can also be absolute, i. 6. stand intransitively for the state of 
seeing; the intransitive φεύγειν to flee can also be transitive, φεύγειν τινά to 
jlee anyone. Such instances often resemble very nearly the immediate and 
causative senses, without however being entirely the same; as when 
σπεύδειν to make haste becomes transitive, e.g. σπεύδειν te to hasten some- 
thing ; but never σπεύδειν τινά for to cause to make haste—It is however 
a matter of course, that wherever the causative and immediate senses are 
at the same time actually distinguished as transitive and intransitive, we 
can just as well employ these latter appellations, provided the causative 
relation is first definitely fixed, or presupposed as known. , 


Nore 2. In several verbs, the Passive or Middle form is likewise em- 
ployed to express what we here call the immediate signification ; inasmuch 
as this immediate sense, so soon as we conceive a corresponding causative 
one, can be regarded as the Passive or Middle of that causative ; 6. g. to sit 
is’ i. q. to be seated or to seat one’s self. Hence from καϑέζειν to seat, the 
meaning to sit or more accurately to seat one’s self, belongs strictly to the 
Mid. καϑίζεσϑαι ; nevertheless the Act. καϑέζειν is used equally often in 


* E. g. BRENNEN, BURN, Immed. to be on fire, Caus. to set on fire ; SUPPEDITARE, 
Imm. to be ready at hand, Caus. to cause to be ready at hand, i.e. to present ; sor- 
Tir, Imm. to go out, Caus. to bring out ; τὸ prop, Imm. to fall, Caus. to let fall. 


\ i 
205. § 113. verps.—ANOMALY OF SIGNIFICATION, 


this sense. Many such Active forms with a double signification have 
arisen in all languages, through the omission or insertion of the reflexive 
idea self, se, ἑαυτόν ; and-especially in Latin, e.g. abstinere sc. se, to 
withhold one’s self, i.e. abstain. See further § 130. ἢ. 2.—In general, the 
particular cases where in Greek a verb actually unites both senses, belong 
solely to the lexicon. ‘To the grammar belong, besides the fixing of gen- 
eral principles, only those cases, where, through a distribution of the 
two significations among different forms of the same verb, the whole 
becomes anomalous. Thus in some primitive verbs, the Aorist 2 and 
Perfect Active (especially the Perf. 2) take in a special manner the imme- 
diate sense ; so ἵστημι, and see besides in the catalogue, ἀραρίσκω, βαΐνω, 
δύω, ἐρείκω, ἐρείπω, ὄρνυμι, αβέννυμι, σκέλλω, φύω. Comp. the following 
note. 


Nore 3. That the Perfect 2, as we have already aad (§ 97. 5 
and n. 5), belongs particularly to the intransitive signification, is sn 
- parent in those verbs in which the two significations are intermingled. 
To those instances in which the Present has both senses, belongs πράττω ; 
and in this verb the two Perfects, at least in the most ancient prose, * ac- 
tually divide themselves between the two significations; 6. g. πράττω do, 
make, Perf. πέπραχα; πράττω do or be well or ill (6. g. καλῶς), Perf. 
aéemouyo.—This seems to have been originally the case with all such | 
verbs, as OA, THT 2, σήπω, τήκω, etc. All of them had both significa- 
tions, and the Perf. 2 belonged to the intransitive. But in most of these 
verbs, the Passive or Middle took the intransitive signification (comp. 
§ 135. 3); and since the Perf. 2 has the same, this tense might at first 
seem, in the following verbs, (compare some of them in the anomalous 
catalogue,) naturally to belong to the Middle or Passive ; though it actually 
belongs there just as little as the Perfects 1 mépuxa, ἕστηκα, which are 
in precisely the same circumstances : 


ἄγνυμι ---- ἄγνυμαν break intrans. Perf. ἕαγα am broken in pieces. 
δαίω — δαίομαι and δέδηα bur n, intrans, 

ἐγείρω — éysigouc wake up, ἐγρήγορα am awake. 

ἕλπω cause to hope — ἕλπομαν and ξολπτα hope. 
κήδω, trouble — κήδομαν and κέκηδα, am.troubled, care for. 

μαΐίνω (ἐχμαίνω. make raving) — μαίνομαι and μέμηνα rave. 

οἴγω, ἀγοίγω, ἀγέῳχα --- ἀγνοίγομαι. become open, ἀγνέῳγα stand open. 
OAAUL, ὁλώλεκα --- ὄλλυμαι perish, Ὀλωλα am lost. 

teido, πέπεικοα ---- met Pomc believe, πέπονθα confide in. 

σήγνυμι — πήγνυμαν become fixed, πέπηγα stick fast. 

ῥήγνυμι ---- δήγνυμαι tear intrans. ἔῤῥωγα am torn in pieces. 
σήπω cause to rot — σήπομαν rot, σέσηπα am rotten. 

τήκω melt trans. — τήκομαν melt intrans. Perf. τέτηκα. 

φαΐνω shew — φαίνομαι appear, Perf. πέφηνα. 


For g3siow see the following note.—In the same manner are to be 
explained the Perfects of some deponents, as yiyyouow Perf. γέγονα. 


Nore 4. Every transitive verb can be considered as the causative 
of its Passive; and this latter consequently as immediate, Sometimes 


* See the Ausfuhrl. Sprachl. in the Catalogue. ; 


δ 119, verss.—ANOMALY OF SIGNIFICATION. 259 


also language actually gives to a Passive idea the Active form ; as in the 
Latin vapulo, am struck, which thus becomes an immediate whose causative 
is ferio. In the same manner are to be explained in Greek the few instances, 
where single tenses of a verb have in the Active form a Passive significa- 
tion; especially some Perfects 2 in the preceding note, as ἔθῥωγα, tuya, I 
am torn or broken in pieces ; and as a more perfect example, the Homeric 
τετευχώς (see the Anom. τεύχω) and the Perf. 1 ἑξάλωκα, see ἁλίσκομαι. 
The following fluctuate between the two significations, the transitive 
and this neuter-passive, viz. from φϑεύρω spoil trans. Perf.2 διέφϑορα 
have spoiled and am spoiled, ruined; πιὲπληγα have struck, in some 
writers have been struck ; and τέτροφα, see the Anom. τρέφω. 


3. Closely connected with the preceding subject are the instances, 
where the ‘ind of signification, Active, Passive, or Middle, does not 
accord with the form of the verb. The case where the Active form has 
a Passive signification is the most rare; see note 4. On the other hand | 
deponent verbs are very frequent, i. 6. in which the Passive or Middle 
form has an Active sense. This anomaly is in Greek very extensive and 
various. When the Active form of such a deponent is wanting, the verb 
is a proper or defective deponent; and is moreover, according as its 
Aorist is taken from the Passive or Middle (δ 89. 3), a deponent Passive 
or a deponent Middle; e. g. δύναμαν, ἐδυνήϑην, am able; ἀκέομαυ, 
ἠκεσάμην, heal; πυνϑάνομαι, ἐπυϑόμην, learn, hear. | 

Nore 5. The variety of the deponent verb in Greek arises from the 
circumstance, that the Middle, both in signification and form, is on the one 
hand so variously interwoven with the Passive, while on the other it 
passes over so variously, and as it were by-degrees, into the signification 
of the Active. It is therefore easy to see, that in every thing relating to 
this subject, the grammar can only point out the general principles (ὃ 135. 
n. 4, 8), while the application of them to particular verbs belongs to the 


lexicon ; especially in the case of the defective deponents, on account of 
the great number of them. 

Nore 6. Not unfrequently however the Greeks allow themselves to 
form, from a deponent verb, tenses with a Passive signification. This 
takes place: (1) In the Perfect, where however the construction generally 
determines, whether it is to be taken as Passive; e.g. Plat. Leg. 4. p. 
710. d, πάντα ἀπείργασται τῷ ϑεῷ (from ἀπεργάζομαι do, make, produce, 
etc.) where the Dative, according to the rule of Syntax (§ 134. 4), is to be 
rendered by or through, “all has been done by the divinity.” - (2) In the 
Aorist Passive, when the deponent, as such, forms an Aorist Middle ; e. g. 
βιάζομαι I force, ἐβιασάμην I forced, ἐδιάφϑην I was forced ; δεξάμενος 
having taken, δεχϑείς taken. Comp. δ 136. n. 2. 


4, It is a very frequent case, that in Active verbs the Fut. Act. is ei- 
ther not used at all, or very rarely; while the 
Future Middle 
takes the signification, transitive or intransitive, which is connected 
with the Active. In such instances the rest of the Middle form, with 


- 


260 § 113. vERBS.—ANOMALY OF SIGNIFICATION. | 


its peculiar signification, for the most part does not occur. This re- 
mark applies to a multitude of the most common verbs; e.g. axovw I 
hear, ἀκούσομαι I will hear, never ἀκούσω. 


N OTE 73 ‘We subjoin here some of the most usual Futures of this kind : 
ἀγνοήσομαι, ἄσομαι: from ἄδω, ὦ ἀπαντήσομαι; ἀπολαύσομαι, βαδιοῦμαι, βοήσο- 
μαι, γελάσομαι, γηράσομαι, ἐγκωμιάσομαι, ἐπαινέσομαι, ἐπιορκήσομαι, ϑαυμά- 
TOMML, ϑηράσομαι and ϑηρεύσομαι, κλέψομαι, κολάσομαι, οἰμώξομαι, οὐρήσο- 
μαι, τηδήσομαι, πνέξομαι, σιγήσομαι and σιωπήσομαι, σκώψομαι, σπουδάσομαν 
συρίξομαι," τωϑάσομαι, χωρήσομαι. ΤῸ these may be added the Futures of 
εἰμί and_oide (δὲ 108, 109). See further in the Catal. § 114, the verbs ἅμαρ- 
TOYO), βαίνω, βιόω, βλώσκω, γιγνώσκω, δάκνω, δαρϑάνω, δῆσαι, διδράσκω, 
Fo, ϑιγγάνω, ϑγήσκω, ϑρώσκω, κάμνω, χλαίω, λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, μανϑά- 
vo, VED (νεύσομαι), ὄμνυμι, ὅράω, σαΐίζω, πάσχω, πίπτω, πλέω, πγέω, ὑέω, 
τίχτω, τρέχω, τρώγω, φεύγω, χέζω. It must however be observed, that 
_here, as in other cases, usage was not entirely fixed; and we therefare 
still find many instances of Futures Act. where other writers have the 
Fut. Middle. In such instances however it is necessary to observe care- 
fully, (1) Whether the text may not be corrupted ;* and (2) Whether the 
writer does not belong to the later period; i. 6. to the esp who in this 
respect often varied from Attic usage.t 


5. The Future Middle was also used as Passive; but this usage 
never became so fixed in particular verbs, as that exhibited in the pre- 
ceding paragraph (no. 4). It depended for the most part on euphony ; 
and consequently, in the poets, on the metre. They strove to avoid by 
this means, in long verbs, the still longer form of the Fut. Passive ; e. g. 
wgéedjoorrar for ὠφεληϑήσονται, περιέψεσϑαν (Herod. 7. 149) for 
περιεφϑήσεσϑαι. So in like manner from ἀμφισβητεῖν, ὁμολογεῖν, 
ἀπαλλάττειν, φυλάττειν, γυμνάζειν, ἀδικεῖν, ζημιοῦν. Still, there are 
examples of this usage in shorter verbs, as ) βλάψεται, ϑρέψεται, 
οἴσεται. 


+ 


Nore 8. It is easy to conceive, that this usage should occur least fre- 
quently in verbs, whose Middle approaches nearest in signification to the 
transitive Active ; still less frequently however, and perhaps not at all, in 
verbs whose Fut. Mid. is employed for the signification of the Active : ὃ 
see Τοχί 4 above. 


Nore 9. The instances where the Aorist Middle occurs as Passive, are 
extremely rare; and are found mostly in the epic poetry. Yet some com- 
pounds of cyéo Dae are used by the Attics as Passive 5 as κατασχέσϑαι, 
ὄμενορ, Eurip. Hippol. 27. Plat. Phaedr. 49, συσχόμενος, id, Theaet. 58. 


* Nothing is easier or more common, than e. g. the confounding of the Attic 
form of the 2 pers. Mid. in e (for 7), with that of the Act. in eg. In many pas- 
sages, therefore, where e. g. φεύξεις stands, we must read φεύξει, which form of 
the 2. pers. was less familiar to the copyists, 


Τ But the learner must be upon, his guard not to mistake the Subj. Aor. 1 for 
the Future, 6. g. in Nov ἀκούσω αὖϑις, § 139. n. 7. 


δῷ 113, 114. verss.—anomacy. 261 


~ 


6. In respect to the anomalous signification of different tenses, we 


remark here only the instances where the Perfect takes the significa- 


tion of the Present. In order clearly to comprehend the transition from 
the former to the latter sense, it must be considered, that in employing 
the Perfect, we often think less of the past action than of the state . 
or situation which has resulted from that action. Thus τέϑνηκα signi- 
fies strictly I have died; but considered in respect to the resulting state, 
it means J am dead; and thus taken, it is a Present. In other verbs 
the original Perfect was left still more out of view; e.g. χτάομαν ἴ 
acquire, hence strictly κέχτημαν I have acquired; the consequence of 
acquiring is possession, and consequently κέχτημοαν came to mean sim- 
ply J possess, without reference to any past acquisition. In every such 
instance, of course, the Pluperfect becomes Imperfect. 


Nore 10. It is consequently incorrect, to assign to the verb εἴδω in the 
Present the two significations I see and I know. ἴδω means I see, per- 


ceive, comprehend; the Perf. οἶδα I have comprehended, and consequently, 
I know. 


Nore 11. It was very easy, in consequence of the near relation of the 
ideas, for the Present itself to pass over into the derived present significa- 
tion of the Perfect, and vice versa. Hence it arises, that in the poets 
especially, the Present and Perfect sometimes liave the same meaning; 
e. g. μέλει (strictly) goes to the heart, μέμηλε is laid to heart; hence both 


signify it grieves. So δέκρω catch a view of, δέδορκα have caught α view of ; 
hence both, 1 see. 


Nore 12. The application of these principles to the different cases 
which occur, (of which the most common are given below in the cata- 
logue,) must be left to the learner’s own observation ; and the more so, 
because different views are often equally admissible-—Some examples in 
the epic poets are particularly deserving of notice, where the Pluperfect 
takes the place of the Aorist or Imperfect, although the Perfect of the 
same verb does not occur as Present. See in the Catal. βαίνω and βάλλω. 


Nore 13. It is particularly frequent that the Perfect becomes Present 
in verbs which express a tone or cry; as χέχραγα I cry out; and so also 
λέλακα, γέγωνα, ἄνωγα, βέβρυχα, μέμυκα, μέμηκα, κέκλαγγα, τέτριγα. 


4114. Caratocur or Irrecunar VeERBs. 


Preliminary Notes. 


1. The following Catalogue comprises all those verbs which are anom- 
alous, either through a mixture of forms, or irregularity of formation; and 
which occur. partly in ordinary prose, and partly in the poets. A verb 
which occurs but seldom, or is only poetical, is printed small; and so too 
a verb which is inserted merely on account of some anomalous poetical 
form. 'That which belongs to the usage of prose, is everywhere printed 
large. 

94 


262 § 114. caTALoGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


na 


2. All such forms as are merely presupposed in order to explain actual 
forms, and which themselves never occur, are printed in capitals, as 
generally throughout the whole work; in order that the eye may not 
become accustomed, by means of the common letters, to a multitude of un- 
used and merely imaginary forms; and thus rendered less capable of 
detecting barbarisms at first sight. On the other hand, every theme which 
actually occurs, even though but once and in the early poets, is printed in 
the common type. Still, in such cases, it has not been regarded as neces- 
sary that precisely the 1 pers. Pres. should occur. Any form of the 
Present, and even the Imperf. can in most cases be taken as evidence for 
the existence of the whole of the Present. 


3. In regard to these merely supposed themes, (which are not in every 
case subjoined, inasmuch-as a little practice enables the learner to find 
them for himself,) it must be carefully observed, that they are formed 
solely by the Grammarians after the analogy of other verbs; while their 
actual existence can by no means be proved in a historical manner. Hence 
it arises, that in different grammars, the same form is often derived from 
different themes ; according as, in doubtful cases, one Grammarian judges 
of the origin of a form differently from another. 


4. Under every current verb which is inserted. in the Catalogue, 
there is given not only the strictly anomalous parts, but also all that 
is in use, so far as it is not necessarily implied of itself. Consequently it 
is always to be presupposed (§ 104. 2), that, in every verb where the Fu- 
ture, Aorist, and Perfect, are not expressly mentioned, the common Future, 
Aor. 1, and Perf. 1, are in use. But whenever an Aor. 2, or the Perf. 2, 
or the Future Middle instead of the Fut. Act. is in use, these forms are 
expressly subjoined ; and it is then implied that the other forms are not in 
use. The numbers 1 and 2 are seldom added to these tenses, because 
they are in themselves easily distinguished. Thus when 6. g. under 
ἁμαρτάνω there stands simply, Aor. ἥμαρτον, this indicates that this verb 
forms only the Aor. 2, and no Aor. 1.— The letters MID. standing alone, 
signify that the Middle is also in use. 


5. In general the single personal forms which are found in writers, are 


referred back to the 1 pers. Indic. of the same tense. Sometimes how- 
ever, single forms, e.g. a person of the Plural, ἃ. Subjunctive, etc. are 
given. ‘This is done for the sake of certainty in many rare epic and other 
forms ; because it is not always a valid conclusion, that when a single form 
occurs, the corresponding 1 pers. Indic. must therefore also have been in 
use. 


6. Whatever may be the signification of the Present, whether Active, 
Passive, Middle, or Intransitive, it belongs to every tense adduced, to 
which a peculiar signification is not expressly subjoined. Thus when 
e.g. under βούλομαι the Fut. Mid. βουλήσομαν and the Aor. Pass. ἐβουλή- 
ϑὴν are given, this shews that only these two forms occur in the signifi- 
cation of the Pres. βούλομαι ; and that consequently no Aor. ἐβουλησάμην 
and no Fut. βουληϑήσομαι are found. : 

7. In order to facilitate the use of the Catalogue, the unusual roots are 
also inserted, where it seemed necessary, in their alphabetical places ; and 
indeed not only those which are necessary to explain actual forms, but 


/ 


forte Taper vt Vie ae v eel ys ma Pe we Ῥ “ "Ὗ NE cel Fede ΡΥ 
" i) 
* A, ‘ 


§ 114. cATALOGUE oF IRREGULAR VERBS. 263 


S - _ 


also many which are merely apparent, i. e. when some change (as syncope) 

which does not belong to the regular flexion, may be referred back to an ap- 
parent theme. Assuming therefore that thé learner is able, in those forms 
of flexion which he meets with in reading, to ascertain the regular theme 
according to the general rules, he will find the root of it in its alphabetical 
place, with a reference to the theme in actual use; thus e.g. for ἐπράϑην 
he will find ZPA- see πιπράσκχω. 

8. In respect to the completeness of the Catalogue, it has been our 
main object, that nothing should be found in the ordinary prose writers 
and poets which is not here explained. Whatever occurs in authors sel- 
dom read, or in less known dialects, is here introduced (as throughout the 
whole work) only so far as it may serve to illustrate the relations of the 
dialects and forms, or add particularly to our knowledge of a dialect. 

9. In regard to the particular usage of the epic writers, it is to be ob- 
served, that the later writers of this class belonging to the Alexandrine and 
subsequent periods, as Callimachus, Apollonius, ete. are to be considered as 
learned poets, who drew their forms and the application of them by no means 
wholly from the actual language of life ; but often employed them as they 
found them in Homer and other older poets, or as they themselves formed 
them in imitation of those writers. Only that which is found in Homer and 
Hesiod and in some fragments of the same early period, can with certainty 
be regarded as belonging to the general analogy of the epic language ; 
while that which is peculiar to later writers, can indeed be of the same 
kind, inasmuch as they had before their eyes those earlier models which 
are now lost to us; but the historical certainty is wanting. Whenever 
therefore we have been able to make out the formation and usage of a verb 
with tolerable completeness and fulness from those earlier works, we 
have paid no regard to the peculiarities of later writers, or at most in im- 
portant cases have referred to them only by name. — It is understood of 
course (§ 1. 11), that what is here marked as Homeric (Hom.) does not 
therefore belong exclusively to the Homeric poems; but is likewise for 
' the most part found in later epic writers, who followed him as a model. 


10. Finally, we have omitted most of those secondary forms, which, 
being entirely synonymous with a more usual form, occasion no difficulty, 
because they are either themselves Presents, or are easily referred back to 
the Present; and consequently can be readily found in the lexicon. ‘The 
province of the grammar is only to direct the attention of the learner to 
some analogies in the formation of such secondary forms; and this has 
already been done in the preceding pages. § 112. 


A. 


daw injure. From this theme Homer has 3 Pres. Pass. ἀᾶται, Aor. 1 
Act. ἄασα contr. ἄσα (Od. λ, 61), Pass. and Mid. ἀάσϑην, cacopny* 


* We could also assume 42 as the primitive theme, and then derive the other 
forms from it by resolving « into the double sound (ὃ 105. π. 10). But, the 
doubling of a long sound which has not arisen from contraction (ἄω, dow, doa), 
would be contrary to analogy. On the other hand ééraz belongs actually to,éw 
satiate. In this manner also can the Homeric verbal adjectives ἀάατος and ἅτος 


(see dw) be most clearly distinguished. See Lexil. I. 56. 


264 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


Both «’s are sometimes long, and sometimes short. Verb. Adj. ἀα- 
tog; and hence with a privative ἀάαστος (ὁ — Ο ©) inviolable, 
Hom.—From this old form arose first the substantive ἄτη (long «), 
and thence with short « the new verbal form (ἀτάω) Pass. atapos 
in the Attic poets. 

Comp. also ἄω satiate. 


ἄγαμαι admire, Pres. and Imp. like ἵσταμαι, Fut. ἀγάσομαν, Aor. 
ἠγάσϑην, epic nyaoauny. 
The epic forms of the Present, ἀγάομαι, ἀγαίομαι, occur with the 
accessory idea of to envy, to be angry. 


aysiow assemble, Perf. Pass. ἀγήγερμαι, Aor. 2 Mid. Inf. epic ἀγερέσϑαι, 
Part. ἀγρόμενος ; see § 110. 4. a. . 


ayvuue break, Fut. ἄξω (ὃ 112. 14). The preterites have the syllabic 
augment (§ 84. n.5), Aor. gaa (Hom. ἤξα), Aor. Pass. ἐαγην 
(long a). The Perf. 2 gaya (Ion..éyya) has the Passive signi- 
fication, I am broken in pieces. (§ 113. n. 3.) 
The α of the Aor. 2 Pass. ἐάγην was also shortened in epie 
metre. Comp. ἐπλήγην and χατεπλὰγην. 
This syllabic augment is also found, even in such forms as accord- 
ing to their nature ought to have no augment, e.g. the compound 


Part. κατεάξαγτες Lys. p. 158, ed. Reiske.* —The form καυάξαις in 
Hesiod stands for the Opt. Aor. κατάξαις. 


~ 3 
ἀγορεύω, see εἰπεῖν. || ἀγρόμενος, see ἀγείρω. 


ἄγω lead, takes in the Aor. 2 ἃ reduplication, ἤγαγον, ἀγαγεῖν, etc. 
§ 85. n. 2. — Perf. ἦχα and ἀγήοχα (§ 97. n. 2), Perf. Pass. ἦγ- 
μαι. --- MID. 


The Aor. 1 ἦξα, ἄξαι, ἄξασϑαι is also found, though seldom in 
Attic writers.{—For the Homeric Imperat. ἄξετε see § 96. n. 9. 


* See Heindorf ad Plat. Gorg. 56. Phaedon. 79. The endeavour to distinguish 
this verb from κατάγω, it is likely, caused this striking anomaly,which was prob- 
ably further promoted by the circumstance, that this augment even in its usual 
place is irregular. 


t This strange form is most satisfactorily explained by means of the Digamma;__ 


since the verb AJ'Q, ἄγνυμιι, belongs to the class of words in which, according 
to § 6. n. 3, traces of the Digamma are perceptible in Homer. The word was 
therefore originally F472, and this F was a consonant (v). Through the com- 
persion with κατα arose consequently KAFFAT®, like καββάλλω from βαλ- 

a, etc. (ὃ 117. n. 2). No wonder, then, that the Digamma thus doubled and 
bound by the metre, maintained itself here, while it vanished in other cases. 
That it should pass over into v was very natural in the close relation (or 
rather in certain respects the identity) of the sounds Yand ἢ, Uand V; see p. 21 
marg. note. Comp. svadov in ἁνδάνω below. : 

t The learner must take care not to mistake for this Aorist the similar Aorist 
form of the Attic verb ἄττω for ἀΐσσω, which sometimes approximates to the 
former in signification also. i 


“ar io 
) 


~ 
§ 114. caTaLoGur or IRREGULAR VERBS. 26 


- Ad—. The forms ἄσω, ἄσαι, to satiate, which are commonly referred to 
this root, see under &» On the other hand Homer has ἀδῆσαι, 
ἀδηκέναι, to feel weariness, disgust, as if from AJEN; but these forms 
are commonly written ἀδδῆσαι, etc.*. 


ἁδεῖν see cvduve. 

ἀείρω see αἴρω. || AED see ἄημι and ἄω πο. 2. 

ἄημι blow; see ἄω 1. It retains the ἡ throughout, Inf. ἀῆναι, Pass. ἄη-- 
μαι; but Part. Act. asic, ἀέντος. ‘The Passive form has the Active 
signification ; except Od. ¢, 131, where it is Passive. 

αἰνέω see § 95. n. 4. 


aigew take, aionow — ἠἡρέϑην (ὁ 95. n. 4.) — Aor. Act. εἷλον, ἑλεῖν, 
etc. from “LHA2, — MID. 


A less frequent Future is ἑλῶ, e.g. Aristoph. Eq. 290. The Aor. 
2 Mid. was formed by writers not Attic in - μην, as ἀφείλατο in- 
stead of -sto, see § 96. n. 8. — In the Perfect the Ionics had a pe- 
culiar reduplication, &gadenxa, ἀραέρημαι, with the smooth breathing. 
— In the signification seize, capture, etc. the verb ἁλέσκομαν may be 
regarded as a real Passive of αἵρέω ; see below. 


αἴρω contr. from asiow, take up, raise, is declined regularly. For the 
poetical usage alone it is to be observed: (1) That the Attic poets 
employ the unaugmented moods of the Aor. 2 Mid. (e.g. ἀροίμην 
Soph. Electr. 34), when a short syllable is necessary, instead of the 
elsewhere usual Aor. 1, whose α is long according to’ § 101. n. 2. 
—(2) That Homer in the same circumstances avails himself of the 
Indic. Aor. 2 Mid. without augment (ἀρόμην) ; but elsewhere has 
throughout in the Indic. the Aor. 1, and in the other moods only the 
Aor. 2; as ἠράμην --- ἀρέσϑαι, ἀροίμην, ete.—(3) That the epic writ- 
ers use in the Pluperf. ἄωρτο (as Impf. hovered, hung) instead of ἦρτο 
or ἤερτο ; see §97.n.2.—(4) That the Attic poets make the α of 
the Fut. ἀρῶ long, as being contracted from ἀερῶ ; see the Ausf. 
Sprachl, It is short, Soph. Ajax 75. Aud. Col. 460.—See also ἄργυμαι. 


αἰσϑάνομαι perceive by the senses, Fut. αἰσϑήσομαι, ete.—Aor. 7000- 
μὴν (§ 112.13), from which comes the less frequent Present’ 
αἴσϑομαι. 


ἀκαχίζω trouble, afflict, has from the theme AX the Aor. ἤχκαχον, ἀκαχεῖν, 
Fut. ἀχαχήσω Aor. 1 ἠκάχησα (§111.n.2)—MID. ἄχομαι or ἄχνυμαι 
afflict myself, grieve, Aor. ἡκαχύμην. Perf. ἀκήχεμαν and unaugmented 
ἀχάχημαν am afflicted, grieve. For axnyédutoe see the marg. note, to 
§ 103. 1V.5; and for the tone of ἀκηχέμενος (Il. σ, 29), ἀκαχήμενος, 
ancynoFot,§111.n.2. ΤῸ the same intransitive signification belongs 
also the Part. Pres. Act. ἃ 7 é wv, ove, afflicted, sorrowing. 


* The Grammarians introduced this orthography, because the subst. ἄδος dis- 
gust is short, while Homer always makes the first syllable of the verb long. See 
exilog. II. 86. 


266 $114, caTaLoGuE oF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


ἀκαχμένος, sharpened, pointed, Part. Perf. Pass. from a theme AK2, (whence 
the substantives ἀχή and ἀκωχή, the point,) with the Attic reduplica- 
tion, the temporal augment being omitted and the χ retained before | 
μι; comp. § 98. 2, with § 23 note. 

ἄλάομαι rove, wander, has (according to § 111. 2) a Perfect which passes 
over into the form of the Present, ἀλάλημαι, ἀλάλησϑαι, ἀλαλήμενος, 
also with Present signification. 

ἀλέξω ward off; Fut. ἀλεξήσω (δ 112.8) and Aor. Mid. ἀλέξασϑαν from 
AAEKR2; comp. § 96. n. 9.—From the theme (AAEK®) AAKI 
comes also the poetic Aorist ἤλαλκον (ἄλαλκον), ἀλαλκεῖν, ἀλαλκών, 
etc. with the redupl. See § 85. ἢ. 2. 

ἀλέομαι shun, Aor. 1 ἀλέασϑαι, and ἠλευάμην, ἀλεύασϑαι (ὃ 96. n. 1)». Subj. 
Aor. 1 ἀλεύεται instead of -ηταῖ (Hom.) ἡ 


ἀλέω grind, Fut. aigow Att. ado, Perf. Pass. ἀλήλεσμαι. cheer 
form of the Pres. was ἀλήϑω (§ 112. 11.) 
ἀλῆναν or ἀλήμεναι, Ind. ἐάλην, see sido. 
ἁλίσκομαν am taken, captured, forms its tenses from “4402, viz. Fut. 
ἁλώσομαι, and (with Active form but Passive sense) the synco- 
pated Aor. ἥλων (ὃ 110.6) Att. ἑάλων Plur. ἑάλωμεν, etc. with 
long α ; but the regularly unaugmented forms with short «, Inf. 
hina Subj. ἁλῷ, ᾧς, etc. Opt. ἁλοίην (Ion. ἁλῴην) Part. 
ἁλούς. Perf. (also with Passive signification) ἥλωκα and ἑάλωκα 
with short α. 
Homer has also Part. ἁλόντε with long α, Il. ε, 487. 
The Active of this verb was not used, but always αἱρεῖν, of which 
consequently, so far as usage is concerned, ἁλέσχομαν is the Passive ; 


but only. in the special signification of cigéw, and not in its general 
one.—avehioxw see in its place. 


ἀλυταίνω am wanting, sin, F. ἀλιτήσω, Aor. ἤλιτον (δ 112. 18). Act. and 
Mid. are synonymous.—The adjective Part. ἀλιτήμενος (sinner, Od. 
δ, 807) can according to ὃ 111. n. 2, be po esaahes from the Perfect. 


AAK-, ἀλαλκεῖν, see ἀλέξω. 


ἅλλομαι leap, spring, is declined regularly, ἁλοῦμαι, etc. In the Aorist, 
usage is variable between the Aor. 1 ἡλάμην, ἅλασϑαν (long α, § 101. 
n. 2) and the Aor. 2 ἡλόμην, ἁλέσϑαι (short «)—Homer has only the 
syncopated Aorist (ᾧ 110.8) which takes the smooth breathing, and 
from which occur 2 and 8 pers. ἄλσο, ἄλτο, Part. ἄλμενος, ἐπάλμενος. : 
To this form of the Aor. is then reckoned also the Subj. in Homer ; 
which a part of the Grammarians therefore write, but incorrectly, 
with the lenis, ἄληται, and with a shortened vowel ἄλεται, ὃ 103. V. 15. 


“4.40.-, see ᾿ἁλίσκομαι and ἀναλέσκω. 


* For the lenis see §6.n.2, and comp. ἁμαρτάνω. The length of the a, 
which is indicated by the circumflex, arises from the anomalous augment; hence 
ἑπᾶλτο, not ἔπαλτο. 


Tin ey ae iv VEY S) | oa Ι ν “ἣν ΨΥ" Μ᾽ ΤΥ ok BUA Ah Be δ γ aoe 
΄ et yy ν᾽ 


ᾧ 114, CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 267 


ἀλύσκω᾽ shun, Fut. ἀλύξω, etc.*—A different verb is ἀλύω or ἀλύσσω am 
beside myself, Hom. 

ἁμαρτάνω miss, err, F. ἁμαρτήσομαι, Perf. ἡμάρτηκα ---- Aor. ἥμαρ- 
τον. (δ 112. 13.) : : 


For ἥμαρτον Homer has ἤμβροτον with the smooth breathing 
(comp. ἄλλομαι), by transposition (§96. n.7), and with # inserted, 
according to §19. n.1, comp. § 110. 11. 2. marg. note. 


ἀμβλίσκω suffer abortion, F. ἀμβλώσω ete. from ἀμιβλόω which occurs 
in the Present only in compounds, as ἐξαμβλοῦν, etc. 

ἀμπέχω and ἀμπισχνοῦμαι see under ἔχω. 

ἀμπλακίσκω miss, err, F. ἀμπλακήσω Aor. ἤμπλακον, ἀμπλακεῖν (δ 112. 10). 


Also ἀμβλακίσκω ; and sometimes ἀπλακεῖν with the first syllable 
short. 


ἀμφιέννυμι, see ἕγνυμι ὃ 108. IIL. 

ἀναίνομαι refuse, deny, Aor. ἠνηνάμην, ἀανήνασϑαι. This verb is not 
a compound (see Lexilogus I. 63, 10), and the Aor. is regularly 
formed, like ἐλυμηνάμην and the like. Nothing but the Aorist occurs. 


ἀναλίσκω consume, spend, Impf. ἀνήλεέσκον, forms its other tenses from 
the old and less frequent avadow, Impf. without augm. ἀνάλουν. 
The Aor. and Perf. were used with and without augment, ἀνήλω- 
σα, ἀνήλωκα, and also ἀνάλωσα, ἀνάλωκα. In double composi- 
tion, κατηνάλωσα. 


This verb is distinguished from ἁλίσκομαι by the quantity of the 

a, and by regularity of signification. An Aor. 2 is not found. 

ἁνδάνω please, Imperf. ἥνδανον, ἑάνδανον, ἑήνδανον, Fut. ἁδήσω, Aor. ἕαδον, 
ἅδον, Perf. ἕαδα (Dor. sada). See § 112. 13.— This Ionic and poetic 
verb may be regarded as entirely synonymous with the regular 7d 
delight, ἥδομαι delight myself, rejoice, which has merely a different 
construction. Comp. λανϑάνω and λήϑω, and the like——For the 
Aor. ἅδον Homer has also evadoy.t 

ἀνέσει, ἀνέσαιμι, see ὃ 108. 1. 4. 

ἀνήνοϑα, a Perfect with Present signification, press forward, forth, from a 
theme ANO2 or ANEO?R, whence ἄνϑος flower and ἀνϑέω to blos- 
som are derived. See §97. n. 2, and comp. ἐνήγοϑα below. 

ἀνοίγω or ἀνοίγνυμι see οἴγω. | 

ἄνωγα I command, an old Perfect; 1 Plur. ἄνωγμεν, Imperat. ἄνωχϑι, ἄνω- 


* This verb is manifestly derived from ἀλεύομαι; the o is therefore not in- 
serted in the Present (according to the analogy of § 112. n. 7), but is dropped in 
the Future ; comp. διδάσκω. : 


t This form also, like καυνάξαις under ἄγνυμε, may be explained from the epic 
Digamma ; for the verb ἀγδάνω belongs likewise to those mentioned in ὃ 6. n. 3. 
From this Digamma, i.e. from F-4A42, comes the syllabic augment in ade, and 
"also this evadov, which has arisen from doubling the Digamma after the augment 
(EFF AAON like éddaBov); for here, where this letter made a position, it could 
not fall away, as in other cases. The apparent significancy of this ev, well, as in 
English well-pleased, may have contributed to the preservation of this form. 


268 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


γέτω, ἀγώγετε, or irregular ἀνώχϑω, ὄνωχϑε, (δ 110. n. 5,) Pluperf. as 
Imperf. (ηγώγειν) Ion. ἡγώγεα. Since now this Perfect has the Pres- 
ent signification, it takes also sometimes the Present form, as 3 Pres. 
ἀνώγει (Herodot. VII. 104). Hence Impf. ἤνωγον, Fut. ἀνώξω, Aor. 
ἤνωξα. It is to be noted, that the Perf. ἄνωγα itself never takes the 
νὰν. aes 


aegis see ATP—. 


ἀπαφίσκω deceive, Aor. with redupl. ἤπαφον, ἀπαφών, etc. (§ 85. n. 2) from 
‘APN (whence also ἁφή and ἅπτομαι), strictly touch, feel, palpare ; 
from which Aorist the Present is formed according to ὁ 112.10. Fut. 
acagpnow.—Middle synonymous with the Active. 


ἀπολαύω, for the augment see § 86.n.2. || ἀπούρας see ATP. 


᾿ἄράομαι, Att. ᾿ἀράομαι, Depon. Mid. invoke, curse. From this there 
occurs once (Od. χ, 322) an Inf. Act. ἀρήμεναι ; or perhaps it is Inf. 
Aor. 2 Pass. from APOMALT; see the Ausf. Sprachl.—The isolated 
Homeric Part. Perf. Pass. ’ conpévos has a different signification, op- 
pressed, grieved, pained. ' 


ἀραρίσχω Jit, adapt, join. From the simple theme 4P2 come F. ἄρσω, 
Aor. 1 ἦρσα, ἄρσαι, ete. (δ 101. n. 3. )Aor. 2 ἤραρον (ὃ 85. n. 2); whence 
according to § 112. 10, the Present is formed ; and thence Impf. ἀρά- 
θισκα Od. ἕξ, 23.—With the causative sense (cause to suit, adapt) the 
theme AP unites also an immediate sense, viz. the intransitive to 
suit, fit close (§ 113. 2). This intransitive sense alone is found in 
the Perf. 2 as Present, ἄραρα Ton. ἄρηρα, * Part. Fem. epic ἀρὰρυῖα; 
and occasionally, though more seldom, in the Aor. ἤραρον. Sy- 
nonymous with ἄρηρα in sense, is the Perfect Pass. wejosuct,t formed 
Ἔ after the analogy’of the Fut. ἀρέσω. This Future itself however, as 
well as the forms derived from it (see ἀρέσκω), has taken the special 
signification to adapt one’s self, please; into which also some of the 
above forms occasionally pass over, as I]. α, 136. Soph. El. 147.—The 
Part. ἄρμενος suitable is the syncopated Aorist (ὃ 110. 8). 
ἀρέσκω gratify, please, Fut. agéow, Perf. ἤρεσμαι. --- MID. 
This verb comes from 4AP2, of which ἀρέσω is the old form of the: 
Future (ὃ 95. n. 15). This Future assumed exclusively this special 
signification, and then formed the other tenses and a new Present 
from itself. Comp. ἀραρίσκω. 


~ 


ἄρνυμαι, related to αἴρω as πτάρνυμαι to πταίρω, stands instead οἵ αἴρω 
ἴῃ certain special significations, earn, acquire by labour, sc. wages, 
booty, etc. ‘The other tenses, i.e. all but the Pres. and Impf. come 
from the radical theme.{ 

ἁρπάζω seize, rob, has in the Attic writers ἀρπάσω (agnaoouae), 70- 
παχα, ἡρπάσϑην, etc. In the xocvol, or later writers, it has 
aonakw, ἡρπάγην, etc. Homer has both formations. (Ὁ 92. n. 1.) 


* In Od. 8, 248 the trans. ἄρηρξ is a false reading for ἄρασσεν. 
, | In Apollonius, where ἀρηράμενος is a false reading. Comp. ἀκήχεμαι and 
Oovigstas. 


{ Comp. I]. ¢, 446 with o, 121; and x, 100 with z, 124. 


ὁ 1.14. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 269 


APN. see οἱ ati 


αὔξω and αὐξάνω augment, Fut. αὐξήσω (ὃ 112. 13).—Pass. with Fut. 
Mid. increase intrans. ξ 


ATP—. To this root, with the general signification take, belong the two 
following compounds : 
1) ἀπαυράω take away. From this verb occur in the poets solely the 
Impf. (with Aorist signification) ἀπηύρων, and Aor. 1 Mid. ἀπηυράμην 
(from AYP). Besides these are found the two following Partici- 
ples, formed by a peculiar anomaly of the vowels, and closely related 
in signification to the above forms, viz. Aor. 1 Act. ἀπούρας, and Mid. 
(with Passive sense) ἀπουράμενος. 


2) ἐπαυρίσκομαι have advantage or disadvantage, enjoy, see 

§112. 10; Fut. ἐπαυρήσομαι, Aor. ἐπηυρόμην, ἐπαυρέσϑαι, and in 
writers not Attic ἐπαύρασϑαι (§ 96, n. 8).—The earlier poetry em- 
ployed also the Active form; as Aor. ἐπαῦρον Pind. Pyth. IIL. 65. 
Subj. ἐπαύρω, Inf. ἐπαυρεῖν or "gravoduer, The Present ἐπαυρέω, de- 
rived from these, is found in Hesiod ε, 417. 

ἀφύσσω draw, as‘water, etc. F. ἀφύξω A. ἤφύσα ὃ 92. n. 2. 

AP— see ἑάφϑη and ἀπαφίσκω. 


aydouce am vexed, offended, ἀχϑέσομαι, ἠχϑέσϑην. ᾧ 112. n. 8, 


AXD see ἀκαχίζω. 


ao. This thenie appears under four different significations : 
1) blow, Impf. « coy (Apollon.) commonly Onur q.V. 
2) sleep, Aor. aoe and (by § 112. n. 8) ἄεσα Hom. 
3) satisfy, satiate, Fut. ἄσω, Aor, cow. Hence in Pres. Pass. état, 
and by doubling the vowel ἄασται (Hesiod α, LOL as Fut. see § 95. 

n. 12). Inf. Act. ἄμεναν Hom. contr. from ἀέμεναι for ἄειν. Verb. 

Adj. ἀτός, and hence with «@ priv. ἄατος (Hesiod), contr. ἅτος (Hom. ) 

insatiable. — See the-marg. note to «aw and comp. 4AJd—. 

4) injure ; in this signification it is exhibited above, as contracted from 

ἀάω 4. V. 
ἄωρτο see αἴρω. 

ν ; B. 
βαίνω go, Fut. βήσομαι Pf. βέβηκα. --- Aor. 2. ἔβην, like ἔστην ; thus, 
ἔβημεν, βῆναν" BHO βηήτω" βαίην, Po. — Some compounds 
have also a Passive; e.g. παραβαίνω transgress, Perf. Pass. πα- 
ραβέβαμαν Aor. Pass. παρεβαϑην. --- Verb. Adj. Batds., 

All these forms come from BA, and are declined throughout like 
iotnut, except in the Present; and Homer has this also with the 
reduplication, Part. βιβάς and βιβῶν. --- The Pluperf. ἐβεβήκειν has 
in the epic language the sense of the Imperf. or Aorist, e.g. Il. ¢ 
495, 513. comp. βάλλω ἐβεβλήκειν. —As to βέω, βείω, βήῃ, see the 
same Subjunctive forms from ἔστην, § 107. 1V. — The syncopated 
forms of the Perfect, e.g. βεβᾶσι, βεβάναι, βεβώς (ὃ 110, 10) are in 


* In composition also apocopated, e.g. κατάβα, as in ἵστημε. 


90 


270 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


this verb unfrequent, except in the dialects and poets.—In the Aor. Z 
Homer has the:short forms βάτην for ἐβήτην, ὑπέρβασαν for ὑπερέβησαν. 
The Aor. Mid. (as Act.) occurs also in the epic writers, but fluctuates 
in form: ἐβήσατο or (§ 96. n. 9) ἐβήσετο, Imperat. βήσεο. --- For Béo- 
pot, see below in its place. 

This verb has also the causative signification, cause to go, conduct, 
(§ 113. 2), but only among the Ionics and poets. The Fut. Act. βήσω 
and Aor. 1 ἔβησα belong solely to this signification. 


βάλλω throw, cast, Fut. βαλῶ and sometimes βαλλήσω (ὃ 112. 8) 
A. ἔβαλον, Pf. βέβληκα Pf. Pass. βέβλημαι ay. see § 98. n. 9) 
A. 1 Pass. ἐβλήϑηνὶ --- MID. 

From a syneopated Aorist (ἔβλην, see § 110. 6, 7) come the epic 
forms: Aor. ξυμβλήτην ( (3 Dual), Pass. ἔβλητο, βλῆσϑαι, Opt. βλείμην, 
βλεῖο, etc. Subj. βλήεται for βλήηται, ---- and thence again a Fu- 
ture συμβλήσομαι. — The Perf. Pass. takes also in epic writers the 
form βεβόλημαι, as if from BOAEN.* —The Pluperf. ἐβεβλήκειν has 
in epic writers the sense of the Aorist (did hal), ¢ e.g. Il. s, 66, 73 ; 
comp. βαίνω, ἐβεβήκειν. ; 


Baovtte carry, F. βαστάσω, etc. takes in the Passive the other aa. 
tion, e.g. ἐβαστάχϑην, § 92. n. 1. 

_ BA—, βίβημι, see βαίνω. 

᾿βέομαι or βείομαι, ἃ Homeric Future, I shall live, which may be regar ded 
either as a really irregular Future (like πίομαι, or like χέω, xsio), 
or as a Subjunctive used for the Future (ὃ 139. n. 8), instead of βέω-- 
μαι. It is also doubtful, whether it belongs to an old verb BELQ 
(whence perhaps βίος, βιόω); or whether the Passive form of the 
verb βαίνω assumed the secondary sense to walk, i. 6. live; in which 
case βείομαν corresponds to the Active form Beko Sulj. for Bo. 


βιβοώσκω eat, has its forms from BPO. 


The Part. Perf. βεβρωκώς is sometimes contracted, comp. ὃ 110.10; 
hence Soph. Antig. 1010 βεβρῶτες. --- Epic Aorist ἔβρων (ὃ 110. 6.)— 
The Homeric βεβρώϑοις belongs to a derived verb with an emphatic 
sense, viz. βεβρώϑω devour. 


βιόω live, Fut. βιώσομαι, Aor. ἐβίωσα and (Aor. 2) ἐβίων, βιῶναι, 

Part. Bioig Subj. Bio, ᾧς ete. Opt. βιῴην ( (§ 110. 6.) 
The forms βιώσχομαι and ἀναβιώσκομαι have both the intransitive 

and transitive signification, e.g. intrans. revive, Plat. Phaedo. p. 72. 
c. d.—trans. animate, vivify, id. Crito. 9. — In the latter signification 
only it has the Aor. 1 ἐβιωσάμην (Od. ϑ,, 468. Plat. Phaedo. p. 89. b) ; 
in the former, the Active ἀναβιῶναν is sas ni 

8 .4--- see βάλλω. 


* The old root of this verb had ¢, (comp. ΚΕΝ, τάμνω, τρέπω τράπω, and 
σκέλλω below,) as is shewn by the derivative βέλος and especially the verbal 
βελέτης in ἑκατηβελέτης. Hence BOAE® (§ 112.9); and also, by the meta- 
thesis BEA, B_AE, the forms βέβληκα, βλείμην, etc. (δ 110. 11.) 


; 


§ 114. caTALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 271 


βλαστάνω sprout, βλαστήσω, ἔβλαστον § 112. 13. 


βλώσκω go, has its forms as if from MOAN, Aor. ἔμολον, μολεῖν, μολών, 
Fut. μολοῦμαι, Perf. μέμβλωκα (by ὃ 19. n.1 for μέμλωκα) as if from 
MAO, from which the Present βλώσκω has arisen ; see ὃ 110. 11. 
The Present μολέω is doubtful. 


βοάω cry out, among the Ionics always contracts οἡ into w*, Fut. βώσομαν; 
it then draws back the accent, Aor. ἔβωσα ; and takes o in the Aor. 
Pass. ἐβώσϑην. 

BOA—see βάλλω and βούλομαι. 

Booxw pasture, Fut. βοσκήσω, etc. (δ 112. 8.)—MID. 

βούλομαν will, desire, Fut. βουλήσομαε, Perf. βεβούλημαι, Aor. ἐβου- 
λήϑην, ἡβουλήϑην. For the augment see ὃ 83. n. 5. 


Homer has also a Perf. 2 προβέβουλα prefer—In Homer and in 
the old language generally, the first syllable was also short; in 
which case it is written with 0, as βόλεσϑε, § 5. n. 3. 


BO— see βοάω. 


βραχεῖν, ἔβραχον, an epic Aorist, crash ; different from βρέχειν steep, Bos- 
χεσϑαι, βρεχϑῆναν and βραχῆναι, to be wet. 


BPO—see βιβρώσκω. 


βρυχάομαι roar, Depon. Passive. The Perf. Act. . βέβρυχα has in the poets 
the same Present signification ; comp. μηκάομαν and μυκάομαυ.---ΕὌ Υ 
the Perf. ἀναβέβρῦχα 1]. 9. 54, see Lexilog. If. 85. 


F i 


γαμέω marry, from LAMA, Fut. also γαμέω, yorum, Aor. ἔγημα; γῆμαι, 
etc. Perf. γεγάμηκα, etc.—Mid. enter into marriage, take as wife 
or husband. The form ἐγαμήϑην (whence Theocrit. has yopedet— 
σα) is purely Passive. 
TFA— see TEND, 
γέγωνα, a Perfect with Present signification, I call, proclaim. Most of 
the other forms, however, are made as if from a Present ih ὦ or 
‘é derived from this Perfect: Inf. γεγωνεῖν, Impf. ἐγεγώνευν (for 
—eov) 3 pers. éyeyaver, but also (ἐγέγωνε) γέγωνε; which form 
_ consequently occurs as Present, Impf. and Aorist; see ὃ 111. 2. 
I'EN—. 'This stem, which corresponds to the Latin gigno, genut, 
unites in Greek the causative signification beget, and the immedi- 
ate or intransitive be born. The forms are anomalously mixed. 
In the Active, only the Perfect γέγονα is in use ; all the other forms, 
in both significations, belong to the Middle-Passive. So far as 
usage is concerned, the whole may be referred to a two-fold form 
of the Present: 


* That this is the correct representation is shewn by a comparison of the Jon. 
verb βωϑεῖν for Bonde help Comp. νοέω below. 


272 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


1) γείνομαν refers only to literal birth. In the Present it is poeti- 
cal, be born and beget ; in the Aor. éyecvauny only transitive, 
beget, bear, both in prose and- poetry. In this last significa- 
tion the regular verb yevyaw is elsewhere used. 

2) γίγνομαι, old and Attic, common γίνομαι, F. γενήσομαι, 
Aor. ἐγενόμην; Perf. γεγένημαι, or with Active form, γέγονα; 
forms not Attic are ἐγενήϑην, γενηϑήσομαι. All these forms 
are throughout intransitive; not only in the literal sense 
be born, but also and more frequently in the general sense 
come into existence, fiert. With this connects itself the sig- 
nification to exist, to be, so that ἐγενόμην and γέγονα serve 

at the same time as preterites of efvae. Where however 
γέγονα can be translated as a Present, it has always the 
more special sense I am by birth, or I have become, etc. 

For γέγονα there is a poetical form (γέγαα) Pl. γέγαμεν---γεγάα-- 

σιν, Inf. γεγάμεν (for -άναι) Part. γεγαώς Attic γεγώς (see § 110. 10); 
as it seems, from I‘42; hence also the older form yeyaxew in Pindar 


for γεγηκέναι (ὃ 111. 2).*—The form ἔγεντο, γέντο, in Hesiod and 
Pindar is syncop. Aor. for ἐγένετο ; see also the following article. 


γέντο, he seized, an old verb in Homer, from which only this form occurs. 
It seems however to be a dialect for ἕλετο, as χέντο for χέλετο in Alc- 
mann ; comp. §16..n.1.d. The y instead of the rough breathing, is 

᾿ found in many glosses of Hesychius, etc.—In other poets this form 

stands simply for éyéveto, ἔγεντο ; seé the preceding article. 

γηϑέω rejoice, γηθήσω, ete. Perf. γέγηϑα synonymous with the Present 
and more usual. of 

ynoaw or γηράσκω, grow old, Fut. γηράσομαι, is conjugated regularly 
after the first form, except that the Attics prefer in the Inf. Aor. 
instead of γηρᾶσαν the form γηρθᾶναι. 

This γηρᾶναι is the Inf. of an old Aor. ἐγήραν (see the Ausf. 
Sprachl.yto which belongs also the epic Part. γηράς Il. 9, 197. γηράν-- 
tecow Hes. ε, 188. Τὸ this old form corresponds precisely the Aor. 
ἕδραν from διδράσκω. See ὃ 110. 6. 

γίγνομαι, γίνομαι, see T‘EN—. \ 

γιγνώσκω, old and Attic, common γινώσκω, know, from INO, ἘΝ. 
γνώσομαι, Aor. ἔγνων, Plur. ἔγνωμεν, etc. Inf. γνῶναι, Imper. 
γνῶϑι, γνώτω; etc. Opt. yroinr,t Part. γνούς. (§ 110. 6.)—Perf. 
ἔγνωκα, Pass. ἑγνωσμαΐ. 


* The anomalous γεγάᾶτε (Batrach. 149. Hom. Epigr. ult.) can be explained 
from the Present-Perfect yéyaa (-ἄατε for -ére; but see Lexilog. I. note or ad- 


dition to Art. 2,1); hence also éxyeydovtae Hymn. Ven. 198; this last by a new 
anomaly as Future. 


_ + The Passive form of this Aor. Opt. συγγνοῖτο Aschyl. Suppl. 231 (wholly 
synonymous with the Active) is no where else found. 


§ 114. caTaLoGuE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. , 273 


In the causative sense to persuade (§ 113. 2), which the com- 
pound ἀναγιγνώσκω takes particularly among the Ionics, it forms 
the Aor. 1 ἀνέγνωσα. 


youw bewail, A. 2 ἔγοον, 1]. ζ, 500. (ὃ 96. πη. 5.) 


γρηγορέω see ἐγείρω. 
Τ21Ν---- see γέγωνα. 


A, 


AA-, daiw. The forms which belong to this root, have four principal 
significations: divide, give to eat, burn, teach. 

1. daiw cut, divide, distribute, has in this form and signification only 

Pres. and Impf. and is solely poetic. ‘To the-same sense however 

belong, as Depon. Mid. the Fut. δάσομαι, Aor. ἐδασάμην, which are 

also used in prose ; and the Perf. δέδασμαν with Passive sense (am 

divided, cut), whose 3 Plur. follows, for the sake.of euphony, the root 

δαίω, viz. δεδαίαται. Comp. μαίομαν ἐμασάμην, vaio ἐνασάμην. --- 

_The Pres, δατέομαν (see below in its place) stands in the same 
relation to these forms, as πατέομαι to πάσασϑαι. 


2. δαίνυμι entertain, give to eat, Mid. δαίνυμαν feast, revel, con- 
sume, (2 pers. daiyvo, § 107. IV. 4,) forms, after the analogy of all 
verbs in yuu, its tenses from dai, which however never has this 
meaning in the Present. Fut. δαίσω, δαίσομαι, etc. 


3. δαίω has also in the Present the sense burn, kindle, set on fire.* 
In the Perf. δέδηα (ὃ 97. 4) it has the intransitive sense of the Mid. 
δαίομαι burn, be on fire, Aor. 2 (ἐδαόμην) 3 pers. Subj. δάηται. 


4, JAM unites the causative sense teach, with the immediate learn. 
In the first, only the Aor. 2 occurs, ἔδαον or δέδαον (§ 83. n. 7), to 
which the Homeric dédae belongs. But in the latter sense, learn, 
there is found, Perf. (δέδαα) δεδάασι, δεδαώς, Aor. Pass. ἐδάην 
(strictly was taught, i.e. learned); whence the new Perfect δεδάηκα 

_ ($111.3) or δεδάημαι, Fut. δαήσομαι. ---- From δέδαα, as from a Pres- 
ent, is derived (δεδᾶσϑαι) δεδάασϑαι become acquainted with, search 
into (Hom.) No other Present form occurs from this solely poetic 
verb, in either sense; but the usual διδάσκω is evidently derived 
from it; see below. 

To this root belongs also the epic δήω, δήεις, etc. an anomalous 
Future with the special signification I shall find.t 


δάκνω bite, from AHKR, F. δήξομαι Pf. δέδηχα, etc. Aor. ἔδακον, 
$112. 12. 


δαμάω see under δέμω. 


* The intransitive sense burn, flame, is assigned to this form merely from a 
misunderstanding of the passage II. 8, 4,7. Comp. 1]. σ; 206, 227. 

t Comp. elm under xsquae ὃ 109.11, Both are old Futures in the form of the 
Fut. 2, from 742, KEQ; and are consequently instead of daéw, κεέω, with 
a contraction of the two first vowels, asin the Gen. κλεῖος (from “Aéeog) for κλέους ; 
see ὃ 53.n.5. | 


274 . $114. caTALoGuE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


δαρϑάνω sleep, F. δαρϑήσομαι Pf. δεδάρϑηκα Aor. ἔδαρϑον, § 112. 
13. 


For ἔδαρϑον a poetic form is ἔδραϑον (ὃ 96. n. 7); and the com- 
pound with κατά, in the Aorist, passes over sometimes into the Aor. 
Pass. κατεδάρϑην, καταδαρϑείξ fallen asleep. 'This form may be 
considered as Aor. 1 for ἐδάρσϑην (comp. κεχάρϑαι for -σϑαι, and 
πέρϑαν in πέρϑων; or also as the sole example of an Aor. 2 Pass. 
‘with the characteristic 3. § 100. n. 9. 


δατέομαι (see δαέω 1), A. 1. Inf. δατέασϑαι Hesiod ε, 795. See ὃ 96. note 1. 
4A— see dain. 
δέαται see δόαται. || d& see δέω. || δείδω see δεῖσαι. 


δείκνυμι point out, F. δείξω (δ 107. § 112. 14.) — MID. 

_ The Ionics form Fut. δέξω, ἔδεξα, δέδεγμαυ (ἀποδεδέχϑαι), see 
§ 27. n. 8. 

The Mid. δείκνυμαν has in the epic writers (Il. 1, 196. Hymn. Apoll. 
11.) the signification salute, welcome, drink to; and consequently 
this signification belongs also to the Perfect with Present sense ὃ ¢é- 
dey woe (for δέδειγμαι) 8. Pl. δειδέχαται, 3 Sing. Pluperf. as Impf. 
deidexto. — Rarer forms, all of similar signification, are δεικαγάομαι, 
δειδίσκομαι and δεδίσκομαι." 


δεῖσαι fear, Aor. ἔδεισα, Fut. δείσομαι. " The Perfect takes the signi- 
fication of the Present, and has two forms, of which the alternate 
use depended on euphony, δέδοικα (ὃ 97. ἡ. 1), and δέδια (¢ short). 
From δέδια come syncopated forms: δέδιμεν, δέδιτε, 3 Pl. Plupf. 
ἐδέδισαν, and in the Imperat. δέδυϑε, § 110. 10. 


The epic writers have also δεέδοικα and δεέδια (comp. the preceding 
δείδεχτο) ; so also δείδιμεν etc. and the still more syncopated Part. 
δειδυῖα (in Apollon.) Hence arose a new Present δείδω, which 
occurs only in these poets; but to which all the above forms were 
formerly referred. 

». In Homer the Aorist is always found written ἔδδειίσα, which is the 
only example of a mute doubled after the augment.t 

The epic poets employ δίω, Impf. gdvoy (short 1), in the sense to 
fear, and also to flee Il. χ, 251. From this the causative signification 
(§ 113. 2) is cause to flee, frighten away. It is however singular that 
Homer expresses this idea only by means of the Passive form, δέδ- 
σϑαι, Subj. δίωμαι, ete. In another form δίημι, on the other hand, the 


* Many refer the form deidsxro to δέχομαι, because the meaning receive, 
welcome, is thought to come more easily from this. But the primitive idea is 
unquestionably that of offering the hand ; and dsixw probably signified originally 
simply to stretch out the hand; from which likewise δέχομαι, Θέχομαι, are very 
naturally derived. Comp. δείδοικα, δείδια, where the redupl. dsc occurs in like 
manner, while the radical syllable is also dev. ' 

+ Dawes, in Miscel. Crit. p. 163, has shewn that the true cause of the long 
syllable, by which this orthography was occasioned here.and in ὑποδδείσασα. 
ἀδδεές, lay in ἃ misapprehended Digamma after the 0 (dv). 


Pe 


Te Seer Ree ΨΥ ὙΠ Ney ids Δι el ae ee | a See PAS thre ee bh ΤΥ WE eT ee Δ] 
a ‘ 7 , ς Ἂ δέ, ἢ 
- 


§ 114. caATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 275 


Active signifies to hunt, chase (ἐνδίεσαν Il. o, 584); and the Pass. to 
flee, run (δίενταν Tl. ψ, 475). The Infin. δέίεσϑαι can belong to both 
these forms, and has also both significations ; II. u, 276, 304. 


\ 


M4EK— see δείκνυμι and δέχομαι. 

δέμω build, Aor. ἔδειμα Perf. δέδμηκα, ete. (ὁ 110, 4. and 11.) — The form 
δείμομεν in Homer is syncopated Subj. Aor. see § 103. V. 15. — MID. 

The same theme furnishes also the tenses of δαμάω subdue, tame ; 

Pf. δέδμηκα, Aor. Pass. ἐδμήϑην and ἐδάμην.---ΤῊΘ forms δαμᾷ and 
δαμάᾳ are both Present and Future. In prose the usual verb in this 
sense is the regular δαμάζω. 

δέρκομαι or δέδορκα see, catch a view of (δ 113. n. 11), Aor. ἔδρακον (§ 96. n. 
7), also ἐδράκην and ἐδέρχϑην, all Active. 

δέχομαν take, receive, Ton. δέχομαι. Here belongs also (see § 112. 9) the 
epic δεδοχημένος watching, lurking (Il. 0, 730), since δεδεγμένος is used 
in the same sense (II. δ, 107 etc.) and in like manner also the 3 Plur. 
δέχαται and Plupf. as Impf. ἐδέγμην. Nevertheless, ἔδεκτο, δέχϑαι, 
occur also as syne. Aor. in the sense of take-—For δεέδεγμαν see in 
δείκνυμι. 


δέω bind, see § 105. n. 2. δ 95. η. 4.—The Fut. 8 δεδήσομαι (§99.1 n. 1) 
takes the place of the Fut. 1 δεϑήσομαι, which is not Attic.—MID. 


δέω fail, be wanting, F. δεήσω etc. is usually impersonal: δεῖ it is 
necessary, one must, tl faut,—Subj. dén- Opt. δέον Inf. δεῖν Part. 
δέον. Fut. δεήσεν etc.—The Pass. δέομαι, δέῃ or δέεν, δεῖται, etc. 
is always personal, I need, δεήσομαι, ἐδεήϑην. 

The contraction into « in this verb was sometimes resolved, even 

by the Attics, in order to distinguish it from the preceding verb; e. g. 
Isocr. Busir. 2 τοσούτου δέεις, and in Xenophon often δέεται, δέε- 
o3ou—On the other hand Homer has δῆσεν Il. σ, 100; but also 
another peculiar form δεύομαι, δευήσομαι. 
- For δέαται see δόαται. 


AHK— see δάκνω. | || dj0, see ZA—. 


διδάσκω teach, loses the o in conjugation: διδάξω, δεδίδαχα, etc.—In 
the poets also dvdaoxnow.—MID, 
διδράσκω run away, occurs only in composition: ἀποδιδράσκω, διαδι- 
δράσχω. From 40.41.22 comes Fut. δράσομαι, Perf. δέδρακα--- 
Aor. ἐδρᾶν, ας, ἃ, ἄμεν, are, 3 Pl. ἔδρᾶσαν and ἐδροὰν (ὃ 107. n. 
IV. 6), Subj. dow, ἃς, ᾷ, etc. Opt. doainy Imp. δρᾶϑε Inf. doa- 
vot Part. doag. See § 110. 6, with the marg. note. 
The Ionics have ἡ throughout: διδρήσκω, δρήσομαι, ἔδρην, ete.— 
This verb must not be confounded with the regular dgaw do, to 


which belong the Fut. Act. δράσω and Aor. 1 ἔδρασα; the Perf. 
δέδρακα is common to both. 


δίζημαι seek, a Depon. Mid. of the conjugation in ws, which retains the ἡ 
in the Passive form ; § 106. n. 3. 


276 he 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


δικεῖν, Sino, cast, a defective Aorist. 
διψὴν see § 105. ἢ. 5. || δέω see δεῖσαι. || JME— see δέμω. 
δόαται or δέαται tt seems, Aor. δοάσσατο Subj. δοάσσεται (-ηται) Hom. 


δοκέω seem, appear, think, from AOK&, F. δόξω etc. The Perf. is 
from the Passive form, δέδογμαιν have appeared. 
The regular formation δοκήσω etc. is poetic.—The epic δεδοκημένος 
see under δέχομαι. | 
δουπέω give a heavy sound, fall, Perf. δέδουπα (§ 97. n. 4), Aor. ἐδούπησα 


and ἐγδούπησα from a form ΤΖΟΥΠ-- , Which stands in the same 
relation to δουπέω, as κτυπέω to τύπτω. 


AO—. see δίδωμι § 107. : . 

δραμεῖν, δέδρομα, See τρέχω. || 4PA— see διδράσκω. 

δύναμαι can, am able; Pres. and Impf. like ἵσταμαι; 2 pers. Pres. dv- 
vacat, poet. δύνῃ. For the Subj. and Opt. see § 107. III. 5; and 
for the augment, ὃ 83. n. 5.—Fut. δυνήσομαν Aor. ἡἠδυνήϑην (also 
ἐδυνασϑῆν) Perf. δεδύνημαι. Verb. Adj. δυνατὸς possible. 

In Homer this verb is commonly Depon. Mid. and has δυγήσατο 

instead of ἐδυνήϑη. 

δύω. This verb divides its forms between the immediate signification go 
in, enter, and the causative envelope, immerse (ὃ 113.2). The Pres. 
Act. δύω has the latter, envelope, immerse, etc. and retains it in the 
Fut. and Aor. | Act. δύσω, ἔδυσα, Pass. 200 0nv (ὃ 95.n. 4). The 
MID. δύομαι wrap myself up, δύσομαι, ἐδυσάμην, passed over 
into the intransitive (immediate) signification, go in, sink, go down, 
etc. which however again takes a transitive relation; e.g. to put 
on sc. clothes. ‘The significations thus belonging to the imme- 
diate sense, connect now with this Middle form the Active forms of 
the Perf. δέδυκα and Aor. 2 (§ 110. 6) edvv, δῦναι, dvs, Imp. δῦϑε, 
δῦτε, Subj. δύω (Il. 0, 186. Plat. Cratyl. p. 413. b) Opt. dvnv.* 
To these is still to be added a new Active form in the Present, 
δύνω, which, together with the Aor. ἔδυν, is preferred to the form — 
δύομαι, ἐδυσάμην in certain connexions and in compounds. 

‘Such is the general outline of the usage in this verb ; the modifi- 

cations arising from the different turns and shades of the signification, 
especially in the compounds, are left to the lexicon and to observa- 
tion—The Aor. Mid. ἐδυσάμην has in the epic poets the secondary 
forms ἐδύσετο, ἐδύσεο, Imperat. δύσεο, for which see § 96. n. 9. Here 
belongs also the Part. δυσύμενος with Present signification, in Od. a, 
24. Hesiod ¢, 382.—From δύνω Herodotus forms also δυγέουσι, § 112. 
n. ὅ. 


ν Coban $1 107. ΠΙ. 6. Heans ἐκδῦμεν for ἐκδύημεν, like Sein for ϑείημεν ; 
see Lexil. I. 17. 10. 


! 


᾿ 


ᾧ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 277 


E, 

ξάφϑη or ἐάφϑη, a Homeric form, only Il. ν, 543. &, 419; either from 
antw fit, adapt, (comp. ἐάγην, ἑάλω») ; or from ἕπομαν follow (see be- 
low) for sign, comm. ἕσπετο. See Lexil. 11. 87. 

ἐγείρω wake trans. is in the Active regular; Perf. ἐγήγερκα, ἐγήγερ- 
μαι. The MID. takes the immediate sense awake intrans. and 
has by syncope in the Aor. ἠγρόμην (δ 110. 4).*—The Perf. 2 

ἐγρήγορα 

whose anomalous reduplication was probably occasioned by the 
sound of ἠγρόμην, belongs, like other Perfects 2 (ὃ 113, n. 3), to 
the intransitive signification, but passes over into a new Present 


meaning ; strictly, 1 am awaked ; henOes Iam awake. Plupf. 


as Impf. ἐγρηγόρειν. 


.Forms of the Present, which have arisen out of ἐ ἐγρήγορα with like ° 


signification, are éyenyooow in Homer, ἐγρηγορέω in the later prose, 
and γρηγορέω in the New Testament, etc.—From éy@nydgate arises 

the Homeric form éye7yooFs (§ 110. n. 5); and hence a corresponding 

Infin. ἐγρηγόρϑαι, and by a new anomaly a 3 Plur. éyenyog Fact. 


ἔδω see ἐσϑίω. Ϊ ὁδοῦμαι see ἕζομαι. 


ἕξομαι, καϑέξομαι, sit, Impf. only as Aorist ἐκοθεζομην. Fut, καϑε- 


δοῦμαι. § 95. n. 16. 

The form ἐχαϑεζόμην as Aorist occurs e.g. in Plat. Meno, 26. p. 89 
extr. Xen. Anab.5. 8.14. The Pres. καϑέζομαι is thereby rendered 
suspicious, even in later writers. Comp. below ifw, and also § 108. 
II. εἷσα and ἤμαν; which forms properly all belong to one root ; 
see the Ausf. Sprachl. in ifa.—Later writers used instead of ἐκαϑε- 
Couny the Passive form ἐκαϑέσϑην. 


ἐϑέλω and ϑέλω, will, F. ἐθελήσω, ϑελήσω, etc. (δ 112.8.) Pf. ἡϑέληκα. 


ἔϑω. From this verb only the esi εἴωϑα am accustomed (§ 97. n. 2) 


is usual; Ion. ἔωϑα. pay : 
Of the Present there remains pale the Homeric Part. ἔϑων wont, 
accustomed. 


εἴδω see, an old verb, from which in this signification only εἶδον, ἰδεῖν, 
ἰδέσϑ'αι, etc. have remained in use as Aorist forms of the verb ogc, 
which see. Inthe epic language, however, there is found from «da, 
(which as Pres, Indic. occurs only in the later poets,) in the same 
signification, the Passive formation εἴδομαι, εἰσάμην (ἐεισάμην, ἐεισάμε- 


γος) for be seen and appear, videri.—See also on the signification of 


this verb § 113. n. 10; and for those forms which have the significa- 
tion to know, οἶδα, Hew, εἴσομαι, etc. see § 109. III. 

εἴκω. In this verb the Perfect ἔοικα is employed as Present, am like, 
seem, Part. ἐοικώς Att. ecxorg, especially in the Neut. εἰκός"; see 


* For the Infin. ἔγρεσϑαι (for ἐγρέσϑαιθθ6) the Ausf. Sprachl. 
| 36 


278 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


the marg: note to § 109. IIE. 5. Ion. ofxe, oixwg, οἶκός, Plupf. 
ἐῴκειν (§84.n.9), Fut. εἴξω. The verb εἴκω yield, give way, is 
entirely regular. | : ; 

In the same manner as εἰκώς, are found also in Attie writers a few 
times, for the sake of the metre, εἶκα and εἰχέναι. 

The Pres. siz nowhere occurs ; and the Impf. εἶκε (for ἐῴκει) only 
Il. σ, 520. The epic forms éixtoy, ἐΐχτην, and ἤϊκτο, fixto, are on 
more correct principles referred in the marg. note above cited 
(δ 109. III. 5. comp. §110. 9) to the syncopated forms of the Perf. 
and Pluperfect ; as also the Att. ἔοιγμεν in Sophocles and Euripi- 
des.—F or the singular form εὔξὰσιν which occurs in Attic prose 
instead of ἐοέκασι, see the same note. \ 


εἴλω or εἴλλω, roll up, press together, more commonly εἰλέω or εἱλέω, Ἐ', zo ete- 
Aor. 1 Inf. ἕλσαι, ἐέλσαι, Part. ἕλσας. Perf. Pass. ἕελμαι, Aor. Pass. 
ἐάλην Inf. ἀλῆναν or ἁλήμεναι Part. ἀλείς (all which forms fluctuate in 

_  the'editions between the rough and smooth breathings); comp. ἐστά- 
Any, σταλῆναι, from στέλλω. From the same root (E42 or EAAN) 
with the simple meaning press, impel, thrust, comes also ἐλαύγω (see 
in its place); and hénce in the special signification, beat, lash, occurs 
likewise the Aor. thoou in Homer, 6. g. Od. 2, 182.—Here belongs also 
(by ὁ 112. 9) the Pluperf. ἐόλητο was pressed, Apollon. III. 471.—See 
on all these forms, Lexil. II. 88 and 76, 7. 


εἵμαρται see MEIPOM AI. lj εἰμέ and εἶμι see § 108, IV. V. 


εἰπεῖν to say, an Aor.2. Indic. εἶπον (epic ἔξιπον), Imperat. εἶπέ 
(compound πρόειπε, see § 103. n. I. 4). This Aor. is more usual 
than the Ion. Aor. 1 ε ima ($96. n. 1), Imper. εἶπον, incorrectly 
εἶπόν, see Excurs.1 ad Plat. Meno. The Attics however use both 
εἶπας ἀπᾶ΄ εἶπες equally ; and employ the forms εἴπατε, εἰπάτω, 

etc. by preference.* 
With this Aor. 2 are closely connected in usage, the Fut. gow 
Ion. ἐρέω from «tow (which Present is employed by the poets),— 
and also from PZ, the Perf. εἴρη κα (δ 88. n.3) Perf. Pass. 
εἴρημαι, Aor. Pass. ἐ ῥὶ ὁ ἡ ϑὴν and ἐῤῥέϑην, (not Attic, εἰρή- 
ϑην, εἰρέϑην,) ῥηϑῆναι, Fut. 8 εἰρήσομαν as common Fut. Pas- 

sive.t—Verb. Adj. ῥητέος, δητός.. 

As the Present of this verb the Greeks employed φημί, as men- 


_ 


* If, as is often done, we assume a theme EIQ, we are obliged unnecessarily 
to assume at the same time the anomaly, that the augment é remains through 
all the moods. But a theme EJII2 is also compatible with the root El—, 
whence ἔπος. 

+ The Grammarians further incréase the themes of this verb with ἐρέω ; but this 
word is either a regular Fut. from éigw, or a Present in the sense ask, interrogate ; 
see ἐρέσϑαι below in its place. It has here been assumed as atheme on account 
of εἰρηκα ; and for this reason solely it is reckoned among the verbs which take 
the temp. augm. δι. But.since PEQ undeniably belongs among the themes of 
this verb, on account of ἐῤῥήϑην, ῥῆμα; so also εἴρηκα is most naturally referred 
to the same theme, after the analogy of εἴληφα; εἵμαρται (δ 83. n. 3). 


§ 114. cATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 279 


tioned above in § 109. I. 2; and in some phrases also ἀγορεύειν 
(properly to speak before an assembly), e.g. κακῶς ἀγορεύειν τι- 
νά, κακῶς εἶπον. In most compounds ἀγορεύω is always employ- 
ed; e.g. ἀπαγορεύω I forbid, ἀπεῖπον I forbade; in some λέγω, 
6. 5, ἀντιλέγω, ἀντεῖπον. : 
_ The poetic Imperat, ἔσπετε comes from a secondary form with o 
inserted. Comp. λάσκω, ἐΐσκω, μίσγω: 

Entirely anomalous is the poetic ἐ ν ἐπ or  ἐγγέπω, Synonymous 
with εἰπεῖν ; to which (jv0m0v) ἔνισπον may be referred as Aorist ; 
since a Pres. Indic. éviomw does not occur,* and the Inf. has the cir- 

_ ceumflex, ἐνισπεῖν Od. γ. 98. Fut. ἐγισπήσω or evi. t 
εἴργω shut out, exclude, F. εἴρξω, etc.—But εἵργνυμι with the rough 
breathing, shut in, include, F. εἵρξω, etc. 

The old and epic language has for both significations ἔργω. 
Hence 3 Plur. Perf. ἐέρχαται, and without augment ἔρχαται, are shut 
in. 

800, See εἰπεῖν and ἐρέσϑαι.---- τη the signification join, connect, knit,. it is a 
separate verb; Aor. 1 siga (Herod. 3. 87 ἐξείρας exserens) Pf. ἕερμαν 
Part. ἐερμένος Hom. ἐρμένος Herod. 4, 190. Ν᾿ 

εἴωθα see ἔϑω. 

ἐλαύνω drive, F. ἐλάσω (short α), etc. Pf. ἐλήλακα. Pf. Pass. ἐλήλαμαν 
Aor. ἠλάϑην, Verbal Adj. ἐλατός, in later writers ἐλήλασμαι, ἡλά- 
σϑην, élaorog. The theme ἐλάω is rare in the Present; on 
the other hand ἐλῶ, ἐλᾷς, ἐλᾷ, etc. Inf. ἐλᾷν, constitute in prose 
the Attic Future, § 95. n. 12. 

See also εἴλω, ἕλσαι s—and for ἐληλάδατο see § 103. IV. 5. marg. 

note.—For ἐληλάμεγος (proparoxyt. 6. g. Arat. 176) see § 111. ἢ. 2. 

EAETO—, EAO— see ἔρχομαι. , 

ἕλκω draw, takes the augm. εὐ (§ 84. 2). Fut. ff and ἑλκύσω. Aor. εἷλξα 
‘and εἵλκῦσα. Pass. solely εἵλκυσμαι, εἱλκύσϑην, from “EAKT2.—MID. 

ἔλπω cause to hope, ἔλπομαι hope, Perf. ἔολστα, the same with ἔλπομαι, Plupf. 
as Impf. ἐώλπειν (ὃ 84. n. 6, 9). 

EA— see silo. “EA— see αἵρέω. 

ENETK—, ENEIK—, etc. see φέρω. || ἐνέπω see εἰπεῖν. 


* Tl, 2, 839 and elsewhere ἐνίσπω is Subj. Aor. 


t The cin &/oxw is here dropped in the Fut. precisely as in διδάσκω and ἀλύ-- 
ozw. This Future consequently affords no proof that ἐνέπεω, to which as to form 
it certainly could belong, ought also to be referred hither. On the contrary, since 
the Pres. ἐνέστειν, and also the kindred forms ἡνύταπεν and ἐνίσσω in Homer 
never by themselves signify to say, but very often when standing alone signi- 
fy to chide, upbraid, they must therefore all_be separated from the radical verb 
εἰπεῖν, and exhibited separately below; see évixrw. Still a Present form svimrw 
from ἐνέπω is used by Pindar at least, Pyth. 4. 358, where éviarwy stands for 
événow.—For a minuter investigation of both verbs, see Lexilogus I. 63. p. 


279. 


280 § 114. cATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. —~ ~ 


᾿ ἐγήνοϑα, an old Perfect, which presupposes a theme ENEON, ENOL; 
ἐπενήνοϑε, κατενήνοϑε, is, sits, lies on any thing, Homer. See § 97. 
n. 2, and pone. ἀνήνοϑα above. 


ἐνϑεῖν, ἦνϑον, see ἔρχομαι. 
ἐνίπτω chide, upbraid,* has in Homer a two-fold Aorist form ; either éy- 
ἔνιπτον, more correctly éyévisoy (see Lexil. I. 63. p. 282. and comp. 


§ 85. n. 2); or, by § 85. n. 3, with the reduplication. at the end, 3 
pers. ἡγίπαπεν. 


ἐνίσπω, ἐννέπω, see εἰπεῖν. || ἕννυμι see ὃ 108. IIL. 
ἐόλητο see εἴλω. || ἐπαυρεῖν, ἐπαυρίσκομαι, ete. see ATP—. 
ἐπίσταμαι understand, 2 pers. ἐπίστασαι, poet. ἐπίστᾳ or ἐπίστη (see 
the note to Soph. Philoct. 798), Impf. ἠπιστάμην. Thus far this 
verb follows ἵσταμαι; for Subj. and Opt. see ὃ 107. IIT 5.—Fut. 
émornoouat, Aor. ἐπιστήϑην. Verbal Adj. ἐπιστητός. 
ἕπω am about something, occupied with; see Schneider’s Lexicon. 
This old verb in its simple form occurs only 1]. ¢, 321; but some 
compounds, especially διέπω, have remainedin prose. It takes the 
augm. et (διεῦπον) ; and has an Aor. ἔσπον, σπεῖν, σπών, (ἐπέσπον, 
ἐπισπεῖν, μετασπώγ, all rather poetic)—To avoid any confusion of 
forms, compare also ἔσπετε and ἐγέπω under εἰπεῖν. 
ἕπομαι follow, εἱπόμην, Zpouce.. This very common Middle has 
an Aorist which corresponds to that of the Active éw, except th a 
_in the Indic. it has the rough breathing: ἑσπόμην, σπέσϑαι, σποῦ, 
(oxé0, σπεῖο Hom.) which last forms occur chiefly in composition, 
ἐπίσπου, etc. , 


The earlier poets have likewise the é in the other moods of the Aor- 
ist ; ἕσπωμαι, ἑξσπέσϑαι, ἑσπόμενος. ἢ But the Present ἕσπεται Od. ὃ. 
826, is a false reading for égyetou.—F or ἑάφϑη see above i in its place. 


 Ell— see εἰπεῖν. 


ἐράω love, poetic ἔραμαι (decl. like ἵσταμαι), take its tenses solely from 
the Passive form ; Aor. ἠράσϑην (poet. ἠρασάμη»). A real Passive 
is the Pres. ἐρῶμαι, ἐρᾶσϑαι, πρὶ — Another regular form ἐράω 
is found only in composition, ἐξερᾶσαν pour out, κατερᾶσαι, etc. 


EPT'2 and ἔρδω, see ῥέζω ;--- ἔργω see also in εἴργω. 
ἐρείκω has the signification tear, burst, break in pieces, as transitive ; but in 
the Aor. 2 4 hak as intransitive. (ὃ 119. 2.) 


* For the difference between this verb and the forms ἐφέπτω and Fut. ἐνίψω, 
see the marg. note on the preceding page. 


t If we compare the forms ἔσπον, σπέοϑαε, and ἔσχον, σχεῖν (from ἔχω) with 
ἔπλε, ἔπλετο, ἑπτόμην, πτέσϑαι, ete. (see §.110. 4), it appears that the former 
have arisen from the same syncope as the latter. The rough breathing in ἕπω 
and ἝΧΩ (ἕξω) passed over into σ, which then connected itself with the 
following consonant; thus é-oyoy, ἔ-σπον. The aspirated ¢ in ἑσπόμην is 
anomalous. 


i Dkr tal κεν a a te “ 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 281 


éosinw cast. down, has this causative sense (§ 113. 2) i in the Fut. and Aor. 
1, etc.—Plupf. Pass. ἐρέριπτο epic, instead of ἐρήριπτο, ὃ 85. n. 1.— 
The Aor. 2 and Perf. 2, 7 ἤριπον, ἐρήρυπα, have the immediate sense, 
to fall down.—Epic Middle ἀνηρειψάμην, impelled upwards, hurried off. 


ἐρέσϑαιν ask, interrogate, an Aorist, ἠρόμην, ἔρωμαι, Imperat. ἐροῦ. 
Fut. ἐρήσομαι. 
The Tonic prose has also a Present stgoucv; but employs the 
Impf. sigouny, with εἴρεσϑαι (so accented) and the other moods, in the 
Aorist sense ; Fut. εἰρήσομαι. —The epic writers have also synony- 
mous with εὔἴρομαιν the form ἔρεσϑαν as Present, as likewise ἐρέω both 
in the Act. and Middle ; which must be carefully distinguished from 
the Fut. ἐρέω under εἰπεῖν. Subj. ἐρείομεν. epic for ἐρέωμεν.---- ἢ prose 
the parts still wanting are supplied from ἐρωτάω. 


ἐρέω see εἰπεῖν and ἐρέσϑαι. 


ἐρίζω quarrel, regular.—Perf. Pass. ἐρήρισμαι, with emphatic Present 
signification.—Another form is égidaiyw,- with which is to be con- 
nected (ὃ 112. 13) the form ἐριδήσασϑαι 1]. ψ. 792, with long ὁ on ac- 
count of the metre. 


£66 go forth, erro, génow, nodnoa. ὃ 112. 8. 
In a causative sense is usually derived from this verb the Homeric 
ἀπόερσε, forced, hurried away. See Lexilog. 11. 92. 


ἐρυϑαίνω blush, Fut. ἐρυϑήσω, etc. § 112. 195, Homer has also the 

theme ἐρεύϑω, ἐρεύσω, etc. | 
éoixw, long v, detain, impede, Aor. ἡρύκακον, Inf. ἐρυκακέειν, see § 85. n. 3. 
éovw or εἰρύω, draw, has the v short in flexion. Fut. also ἐρύω, Mid. ἐρύο-- 
poe 1]. A, 454; see § 95. n. 12. Hesiod, however, has (s, 816) the Inf. 
εἰρύμεναν (short v), after the formation in wu.—In the epic writers 
the MID. ἐρύομαν passes over into the signification rescue, deliver ; 
in which some critics, where the syllable must be long, still write the v 
with one o (stgvcato), as being’ originally long; while on the con- 
trary in the signification draw, they write it with double σ (ἐρύσσατο), 
as being originally short. But since it is also found short in the 
former meaning (e. g. Il. 6, 186. χ, 351), and the significations often 
run into one another, the lengthening of the v is in all cases more 
correctly marked by oo.—On the other hand the secondary form — 
δύεσϑαι, which signifies only to rescue, has among the Attics long v, 
ἐῤδύσατο : but in epic writers this also is short (ῥυσάμην Il. ο, 9), 
and should consequently be written, where the syllable is long, with 
σσ, ἐῤῥύσσατο, δύσσατο ; which, however, is commonly neglected.— 
Finally, there is also a secondary syncopated form ( (§ 110. 5) ἔρυσϑαι, 
εἶρυσϑαι, and ῥῦσϑαι, usually with long v, ἔρῦτο (once ἔρυτο Hes. #, 
304), stguto, εἰρύαται, δύατο, etc. This syncopated form belongs al-- 
most exclusively to the meaning rescue, guard, (except Od. x, 90 
εἴρυτο drew); and must not be confounded with the Perf. and Plupf. 
Pass. of the theme ἐρύω, viz. εἴρῦμαι, ‘have been drawn.—See further 
Lexilog. I, 18. with the additions in Vol. II. 


ἔῤχομαι go, from HAE YOR, Fut. ἐλεύσομαι, Aor. ἤλυϑον, comm. 


282 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


ἦλθον 6 110. 4), ἐλϑεῖν, Tuperat. ἐλϑέ, etc. see. οὗ 103. n. I. A; 1. 


Perf. ἐλήλυϑα. Verbal Adj. ἐλευστέον. 

The Perf. in epic writers has the form εἰλήλουθα; 1 Plur. with 

syncope εἰλήλουθϑμεν. ; 

For the Doric ἤνϑον, ἐνθεῖν, see § 16. n. 1. d. 

Further, it has already been shewn in § 108. V. that instead of the . 
other moods of the Present ἕρχομοαι, which rarely occur, those of εἶμι 
are far more usual ; so also instead of ἠρχόμην, the Impf. 7 Hew οὐ “ἤα; 
and instead of the Fut. ἐλεύσομαι, the Present form εἶμι. 


: dr 3 Ionic, ἠἡἠσϑημένος Attic; a defective Part. Perf. clothed, dressed. 


ἐσϑίω eat, from ἔδω (Hom.) Fut. ἔδομαν (ὃ 95. n. 18), Perf. ἐδήδοκα 
Perf. Pass. ἐδήδεσμαι ‘Aor. Pass. 70¢o0yv.—Aor. Act. ἔφαγον. 
from Φ AT'2.—Verbal Adj. ἐδεστὸς. 

Part of the forms from ἔδω come from the old formation with Fut. 
ἐδέσω, etc. (§ 112. π, 3); where the 8 was changed in the Perf. Act. 
into ὁ (comp. § 97. n. 1. 2), which in Homer ‘is retained in the 
Passive, ἐδήδομαι, ἐδήδοται. Homer has also Perf. ἔδηδα, and Inf. 
Pres. ἔδμεναι (§ 110. 5) for ἔδει», ἐδέμεναι. 

ἔσπετε, ἕσπον, ἑσπόμην, See εἰπεῖν and ἕπω. 

evade see ἁνδάγω. ͵ 

εὕδω, καϑεύδω, sleep, Fut. εὐδήσω, καϑευδήσω. Augm. καϑηῦδον, 
χαϑεῦδον, and ἐχαάϑευδον. ' 

εὑρίσκω find, from “EYP, Aor. εὗρον Imp. εὑρέ. Fut. εὐρήσω, etc. 
(δ 112. 10.) Aor. Pass. εὐρέϑην (§ 95. n. 4). Verbal Adj. EVQETOS. 
—Augm. § 84. n. 2.—MID. 

Writers not Attic form the Aor. Mid. as Aor. 1 εὑράμην, instead of 

εὑρόμην, ὃ 96. ἢ. 1. marg. note. 

ἔχϑω hate, only 1 in the Pres. and poetic. Hence a MID. ( ἐχϑάνομαι) 
ἀπεχϑάνομαι am hated, F. ἀπεχϑήσομαι, Aor. ἠχϑόμην, ἀπηχϑὸ- 
μην Pf. ἀπήχϑημαι am hated. See § 112. 19. 


ἔχω have, Impf. siyov, Fut. ἕξω (with the rough breathing, ὃ 18. n. 4), 
Aor. (as if from 2X82) ἔσχον, σχεῖν, Suly. σχώ, σχῆς, etc. (com- 
pound παράσχω, παράσχῃ) Opt. σχοίην (ᾧ 108. IT. 8. marg. 
note), Imperat. σχές (δ 110. n. 2), but in composition also πάρα- 
OYE, Mid. ἐσχόμην Imp. σχοῦ (sag@070v)—whence a new Fut. 
σχήσω Perf. ἔσχηκα etc.—Aor. Pass. ἐσχέϑην. —Verb. Aah EXTOS 
and σχέτθς. 


From the Aorist σχεῖν has arisen a secondary form of the Present 

ioyo, Which is preferred i in certain special meanings, hold, grasp, etc. 

* The Infin. is everywhere found thus accented, ἀπέχϑεσϑαι, notwithstanding 

the Aorist signification. But a Present ἔγϑομαι is not found in the earlier 
writers. See the 4usf. Sprachl. 


| 


a ee ee ὦ 


§ 114. caTaLoGuE oF IRREGULAR VERBS. 283 


in which case the Fut. σχήσω properly belongs to it.*—An old. Perfect 
from ἔχω is ὄχωκα ; 1]. 8, 218 cvvoywxote.t 
The following anomalous compounds of ἔχω are still to be noted: 
ἀνέχω. When the Mid. aveyeoOae has the signification endure, 
it takes the double augment in the Impf. and Aor. ἠνευχόμην, 
ἠνεσχόμην, ᾧ 86. π. 6. ( 


ἀμπέχω envelope, wrap around, Impf. ἀμπεῖχον, Fut. ἀμφέξω, 
Aor. ἤμπισχον, ouncoverv.{—MID. ἀμπέχομαν or ἀμπισχνοῦ- 
μας wear, have on, F. ἀμφέξομαν Aor. juncoyouny. 

ὑπισχνοῦμαι promise, lon. (Hom. Herod.) ὑπίσχομαι. Fut. ὑπο- 
σχήσομαι. Aor. ὑπεσχόμην Imperat. ὑπόσχου. Perf. ὑπέσχημαι. 


ἕψω boil, F. ἑψήσω etc. (Herodot. 1. 48 has Impf. Zwee.) Verb. Adj. 
ἑψητέος, ἑψητός or ἑφϑος. 
EQ and “EN, see § 108. 
| Ζ 
Com live has ζῶ, ζῆς, ζῇ, etc. (δ 105. n. 5.) Impf. ἔξων, ἔζης, ete. Inf. 
ζῆν Imperat. ζῆ. | 


We find also (after the formation in μι) ἃ 1 pers. Impf. ἔζην, and 
Imperat. ζῆϑι, to which however the preceding forms were preferred. 
This verb exists in good Attic writers only as a defective, along with 
the more complete βιόω; for the tenses ζήσω or ζήσομαι, ἔζησα, ἔζηκα, 
occur in the earlier writers either not at all, or very rarely—The 
Tonics prolonged ζῶ into ζώω by doubling the sound (§105. n. 10); 
and hence arose a new Ionic formation: fam, ζώεις, ζώετε, wor. 
δ 105. n./10. marg. note. : ῬΕΗΣ 


ξεύγνυμι yoke, unite, Fut. ξεύξω etc. (δ 112.14.) Aor. 2 Pass. ἐξύγην. 
ζώνννμι gird, Fut. ζώσω etc. Perf. Pass. ἔζωσμαν (δ 112. 14).—MID. 


Μ΄. 
ἧμαι see § 108. IL. Ι aud, av, see § 109. 1. 4. 


* For the origin of ἔσχον, σχεῖν, from ἔχω, see the marg. note to ἕπω above.— 
The ¢ in the Pres. toyw stands in the place of a reduplication like that in wiuror, 
atte, precisely like the ὁ in Yornuc, except that in ioyw the rough breathing 
went over into the smooth on account of the 4; as was often the case in the ear- 
lier language. | 


t This is sometimes derived from ΟΧΟΩ, and οἴχωκα (see οἴχομαι) from ΟἹ-- 
XO. But the true derivation appears from a comparison of the subst. ὀκωχή. 
The simplest Perf. from ἔχω is ὄχα, and with augm. ὥχα ; so also from OLXQ2— 


- χα. With the Attic reduplication both would become in the usual manner dxwya, 


οἴκωχα ; (for the « from οἴχομαι would naturally stand only once, as in δείδεκτο ;) 
but since of two aspirates, the second can likewise be changed instead of the first 


(δ 18. n. 1), there arose also the forms ὄχωκα; oiywua; and these were after- 
wards retained for the sake of perspicuity. re 


t This form is not to be divided into ἡμπ-ισχον,, ἀμπ--ἐσχεῖν, but into ἤμπε-- 
σχον, ἀμπι-σχεῖν. Τί should indeed strictly be ἀμιπ--ἔσχον (like ἀμσπ-- εἶχον); but 
the augment passed in the Aorist frorh the verb to the preposition; ἤμπε-σχον. 


284 | § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS, 


ἡμύω HOF down, sink. Hence is best derived the Homeric ὑπεμνήμυχε (I. 
z, 491); i. 6. we can assume that when a verb began with a long 
vowel, the reduplication shortened it; consequently ἐμήμυχα. 'The 
metre required the first μ to be doubled ; but instead of this, py was 
adopted, as is also the case in other words; 6. g. ἀπάλαμνος from 
παλάμη, νώνυμνος for νώγυμος. 


Θ. 

0 AN— see ϑνήσκω. 

ϑάομαι regard with admiration, behold. ‘From. this earliest principal 
theme, some forms of which are preserved in Homer and in Doric 
writers (ϑᾶσϑε, ϑήσασϑᾶι, Dor. ϑάσασϑ'αι), arose two other themes: 
(1) ϑαέομαν Doric, ϑηέομαν lonic ; (2) thé common ϑεάομαι, Fut. ϑεά- 
couct, lon. ϑεήσομαι. In Herodotus is found also the form ἐϑηῆτο 
(§ 105. n. 16. marg. note), though commonly with the various reading 
ἐθηεῖτο. As to the signification, Homer (to whom the form ϑεᾶσϑαιν 
is unknown) has only the idea of admire ; but later writers use all 
the forms in the simpler sense behold.—This verb must not be con- 
founded with OA suckle, for which see below in its place. 

Santo bury, Aor. 2 Pass. ἐσάφην (ὃ 18. 2), Perf. Pass. τέϑαμμαι, τ TE 
ϑάφϑαι. 

ΘΑ4Φ---. Perf. as Pres. τέϑηπα am astonished, where the second ae 
is changed ; on the contrary in the Aor. ἔταφον; the first ; § 18, 2 


OAM, an epic defective, from which occurs Aor, 1 Act. ϑῆσαι to a. 
‘ned the Mid. ϑῆσϑαι (§ 105. n. 5, 16), ϑήσασϑαι, to suck, to milk. — 
For ϑάομαν behold, see in its place, 


ϑεάομαι see ϑάομαι. || ϑέλω see ἐθέλω. 

ϑέρομαν warm myself, a defective, from which in prose only the Pres. 
and Impf. occur. Homer has further Fut. ri abn and Subj. Aor. 
Pass. (ἐθέρην) ϑερέω. . 

ϑέσσασϑαι to implore, ϑέσσαντο etc. a defective Aorist. Verb, Adj. ϑεστός 
(πολύϑεστος etc.) . 

ϑέω run, Ε΄. ϑεύσομαν or ϑευσοῦμαν (§95. n. 17). The other tenses 
do not occur ; see τρέχω. 

ϑηέομαι see ϑάομαι. || ϑῆσϑαν see OAN. || OHTI— see OAD~. 

ϑιγγάνω touch, from O/TR,* F. ϑίξομαι, Aor. ἔϑιγον. 

ϑνήσκω die, from OANRQ, Aor. ἔϑανον, ἀπέϑανον, Fut. ϑανοῦμαι, 
ἀποϑανοῦμαν, Perf. τέϑνηκα as if from ONAR,§ 110.11. From 
this Perfect the following syncopated forms are in common use, 
(δ 110. 10 sq.) τέϑναμεν, -ate, τεϑνᾶσιν, ἐτέϑνασαν" τεϑνάναι 
(τεϑνᾶναν see § 110. n. 6. marg. note), τεϑναίην, τέϑναϑι, Part. 
τεϑνηκώς (Ion. τεϑνηῶς), commonly Mase. and Neut. τεϑνεώς 


* The forms which occur, as yew, ϑίγων, are probably all to be accented 
as Aorists. 


eee Ἐν ee ee μα yr ae. ee = λιν μὰ] ΡΥ DS fa 4  —_— 


δ 114. caTaLoGurE ΟΕ IRREGULAR VERBS, 285 


(Hom. reOverms) Gen. ὥὦτος Fem. τεϑνεῶσα (ᾧ 110. n. 6. c.)— 
_ From τέϑνηκα has arisen also a secondary Attic form of the Fut. 
᾿ τεϑνήξω or τεϑνήξομαι.---Ὑ οὐ. Adj. ϑνητὸς mortal. 


ϑορεῖν see ϑρώσκω. || ϑράσσω see ταράσσω. 
‘OPED— see τρέφω. || OPEX— see τρέχω. 


ϑρύπτω break, Aor. 2 Pass. ἐσρύφην, § 18. 2. 

ϑρώσκω spring, leap, forms from OOPS the Aor. ἔϑορον, Fut. 90- 
oovpas Ton. ϑορέομαι. See ὁ 110. 11. 

OTd— see τύφωο |) ϑύω see $18. n. 2, § 95. ἡ. 4. 


yf 
idgow see ὁ 105. n. 6. 


ὑδρύω set, place, has in Homer (and also in the later writers, οἱ xovvot) Aor. 
1 Pass. ἱδρύνϑην, as if from “T4PTN2* 


ifm, xadilo, seat, seat myself’; Mid. seat myself ; F, χαϑιῶ (for καϑί- 
ow, ᾧ 9ὅ. 9). Mid. καϑιζήσομαι Aor. ἐκάϑεσα. Comp. ἕζομαι. 


ἱκνέομαν. come, more commonly agexveouot, Fut. %ouee Aor. ἱκόμην 
Pf. ἵγμαι, ἀφῖγμαι Inf. ἀφῖχϑαι. 

' The epic writers employ i in the Pres. and Imperf. the radical form 
ἵκω, with the-Aor. 1 ἷξον (§ 96. n. 9).—It is moreover to be noted, that 
the Pres. ixw has ὁ long; and therefore in the epic language all the 
forms which belong to this Active, and which are everywhere 
Pres. and Impf. occur only as long. The form i ayes however 
is Aor. 2, and therefore has regularly a short υ (§ 96. 2), which in the 
Indie. only ἢ is made long by the augment ; hence in the epic writers, 
who can omit the augment, it is Se PROM. sometimes. long and 
sometimes short; in the other moods (ixéoP ou, ἃ ἱκοίμην, etc.) always 
short. —The derived form ixayw on the contrary has in the Present 
short .—For ἀπέκαται see ὃ 103. IV. 3. 


ete iuas expiate, Fut. ἱλάσομαι (short a) from the less usual “hema, 
for which Homer has also ἱλάομαι. —The Active has the intransitive 
sense be propitious; hence in the poets Imperat. nde and ἱλᾶϑι, 
Subj. and Opt. Perf. (as Pres.) ἱλήκω, ἱλήκοιμι. 


ἵπταμαυ see πέτομαι. τος || ἴσημν see § 109, ΠΙ.4. 
ἵστημι see ὃ 107 with notes 11.---ἐπέσταμαν see above in its place. 
ἴσχω see ἔχω. : || 2 see εἶμι 108, V. 

K. 


KAA—. (1) κέκασμαι, κέκαδμαι, see καίνυμαι. (9) κεκαδεῖν, Fut. σειν ete. 
see κήδω and voto. 
κωϑέξομαι, καϑεύδω, κάϑημαι, καϑίζω, 566 ἕζομαι, εὕδω, ἦμαι, ἵζω. 


* Comp. ὃ 119. 12; further, ἀμπνύνθη in πνέω, and also the epic superlative 
ἐϑύντατα from ἐϑύς ὃ 115. n. 6, Pe ᾿ 
97 


286 . _ § 114. caTALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


καίνυμαν am distinguished, surpass all; here belongs the synonymous 
Perf. xéxaouot, Dor. κέκαδμαι. ἢ 

καίω burn trans. Att. κάω (long @ and without contraction), F. καύσω 
etc. §95.n.9. Pass. Aor. 1 ἐκαύϑην and Aor. 2 éxany (short 
a). Verb. Adj. καυστέος, καυστός, καυτος. 

‘The epic writers have also an Aor. 1 without o, ἔχηα (§ 96. n. 1); 
and hence by'shortening the ἡ into 8 arises the Part. xéac, which 
occurs in Attic poets, Asch, Agam. 858. Eurip. Rhes. 97. In the 
epic language this 8 is again lengthened into ἐν (comp. στεέω, βείω, ete. 
§ 107. n. IV. 9) in Imperat. κεῖον, Mid. κείαντο, etc. and the Subj. κείο- 
μὲν (for χκήωμεν ὃ 103. V. 15) which stands instead of the Fut. 1]. ἡ, 
999 ; see § 139. n. 8.—The forms of the’ Present κήω, κείω (Inf. κατα- 
κειέμεν I]. η, 408) are of doubtful authority. 

καλέω call, Fut. καλέσω Att. καλώ (ᾧ 95. n. 12) ;—éxaheou, κέχληκα, 
ἐκλήϑην, etc. (δ 110.11.) Perf. Pass. κέκλημαι am called, named, . 
Opt. nExdnuny, κέκλῃο, etc. § 98. n. 9.—MID. 

κάμνω am weary, from KAM (δ 112. 12), Aor. ἔκαμον Fut. καμοῦ- 
μαι.--- κέχμηκα (as if from KMAR, § 110. 11), epic Part. 
κεχμηώς Gen. orog and wros. : 

καυάξαις see ἄγνυμι. 

κεῖμαι see ὃ 109. IT. 


κέλομαι call, command, F. κελήσομαν etc.—Aor. ῥέρε᾽ χύνει: (§ 110. 4. 6).—But 
ἔχλέο see in κλέω. ΄ 


κεντέω prick, regular. But Homer Il. ψ, 237 has the Inf. Aor. 1 κένσαν 
from the theme KENT. (whence χοντός pole), 

κεράννυμε mix, OF κέρνᾶω, κίρνημε, old and poetic κέράω (δ 112. 14, 
15), Fut. xegaow, Aor. ἐχέρασα with short « On the other hand 
the syncope, or rather metathesis, t with long @, occurs in Perf. 
κέχρακα, Perf. Pass. κέχραμαι, ἐκράϑην, Jon. χέχρημαν ete. 
Still we find also κεχέρασμαι, ἐκεράσϑην. 

Homer has in. Aor. 1 also χρῆσαν Od. ἡ, 164.—Further, the ac- 

cent is to be noted in the Homeric Subj. κέρωνται Il. ὃ, 260.4 

κερδαίνω gain, among the Attics regular (Aor. κερδᾶναι) ; in Ionic 
and many later writers κερδήσομαι, ἐκέρδησα, etc. Perf. κεκέρδα- 

_ κα (δ 101. ἡ. 8. marg. note) and -ηκα. 


κέω See κεῖμαν and καίω. 


* That these forms belong together i is shewn not only by the signification, but 
also by the analogy of ῥαίνω, ῥάσσατε, ἐῤῥάδαται. 


t Because the ¢ is not so much dropped as united with the a; whence arose 
ἢ» and in Attic writers ἄν as is common after @. Comp. ὃ 110. 11. 


{ This implies a form xégamou after the analogy of ὃ 107. 11. ὅ. Comp. κρε-- 
μάννυμι, κρέμαμαι, Subj. κρέμωναι. 


sa 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 287 


#00 make anxious, xdouor and κέκηδα am anxious ; whence the Homeric 
Fut. κεχαδήσομαι (Ll. ὃ,, 353) with short ἃ for ἡ (like τέϑηλα, τεϑαλυϊο). 
_Imperat. Aor. Mid. μα Αδῃ for -ησαι. 


κιχάνω and κιχάγομαι, reach, attain, Jind, κίχήσομαι, ἐκιχησάμην. —Aor. 2 
ἔχιχον as if from KIXN2.—Further, it takes a secondary form of the 
Impf. and the dependent moods of the Pres. from KIXHMI, which in 
most cases leaves its unchanged ; 3; ἐκίχημεν, ἐκιχήτην --- κιχῆναι, (χυ- 

ι 9) κιχείω, κιχείην, κιχείς, κιχήμενος, ete. Fut. κιχήσομαν Aor. 1 ἐχιχη- 
σάμην.---Αοὐ. 2 ἔκιχον, κιχών, asif from KIX2.—For the quantity s see 
§ 112. n. 8. 


᾿κίχρημι See χράω. 


κίω go, occurs seldom in the Indie. Present ; but so much the oftener i in 
the poets in the Impf. éxioy and the dependent moods, 6. g. κέουμι, 
and Part. κιών, which has the accent on the last syllable without be- 
ing Aorist, just as ἰών from εἶμι ; of which verb in general the above 
are to be considered as secondary forms (1, KI). 

κλάζω sound, cry, F. xAayéw etc. (§ 92. n. 1.) Pf. κέκλαγγα, the same 
with the Present (δ 113. n. 13); hence Fut. xexAaySouou.—The poets 
have, without the nasal sound, Aor. ἔχλαγον Pf. κέχκληγα, Part. κεκλή- 
γοντες, see § 111. 2.—But ἔχλαξα see under κλείω. 


κλαίω weep, Att. κλάω (long α and without contraction), F. κλαύσομαι 
or χλαυσοῦμαν Aor. ἔκλαυσα (§ 95. n. 9).—Less frequent is the 
Fut. κλαιήσω or “Aanow.—vVerb. Adj. xAavoréos, κλαυστῦς, κλαυ- 
z0¢.—MID. 


χλάω break, κλάσω (short «), etc. ‘The Passive takes o.—Part. Aor. 2 po- 
etic “las (ἀποκλας) ὃ 110. 6. 


κλείω shut, regular.—Perf. Pass. κέχλειμαν and κέκλεισμαι. Ionic 
secondary form χληΐω (Εἰ. tow) Att. xky@ } hence also κέκλῃμαι. From 
the Fut. χληΐσω comes the Doric χλάξω (properly κλᾷάξω), ἔκλαξα. 

κλέω, κλείω, celebrate, κλέομαν am celebrated, ἐκλέο 2 pers. Impf. for ἐχλέεο 
(§ 105. n. 7).—But κέκληκα belongs to xodéw,—and κέκλετο to ἀέλομαι. 

κλύω hear, a poetic verb, of which the Impf- ἔχλυον has the signification of 

‘ the Aorist (§ 96. n. 3). Imperat. κλύε, κλύετε, and κλῦϑι, κλῦτε (δ 110. 6), 

or with the reduplication (ὃ 88, π. 7) κόκλυϑι, κέκλυτε. Part. Pass. 
κλύμενος celebrated, § 110. 8. Ἢ 


KMA— see κάμνω. || κνάω see ὃ 105. m. 5. 


nooevvume satisfy, satiate; F. κορέσω etc. (δ 112. 14. ) Perf. Pass. κεχό- 
ρέσμαι. 
Ton. κχεχκόρημαι. Epic Part. κεκορηώς (ᾧ 97. n. 7) with Pass. signifi- 


tion.— The form κορέω, ἔξις, is Ionic Future.—This verb must not be 
confounded with zooéw, jou, sweep. 


κράξω, comm. xéxoaya, cry, (see § 113. n. 189 κέχραγμεν, ati υτν 
etc. (δ 110..9.) Fut. κεκράξομαι, Aor. ἔχραγον. 

κραΐνω accomplish, admits in the epic language in all its parts the resolu- 
tion into the double sound (§ 105. n. 10); ἐκραίαινεν, κρηῆναι (Aor. 1), 


κεκράανται. : ι 
i 
᾿ 


288 ’ $114, CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


KPA— see κεράγγυμι. 


᾿χρεμάννυμι hang trans. Pass. κρεμάννυμαν am hanged, and as Mid. 
hang myself; κρέμαμαν (decl. like ἵσταμαι) hang intrans. to which 
belongs Subj. χρέμωμαι Opt. κρεμαίμην and zxgeuoiuny.*—Fut. 
Act. χρεμάσω (short α) Att. χρεμῶ, ᾧς, ᾧ, etc. The Aor. Pass. 
ἐχρεμαάσϑὴν is common to the Passive, Middle, and Intransitive 
significations; but the Fut. Pass. κρεμασϑήσομαν belongs solely 
to κρεμάννυμαε; since the intransitive signification has a Future 
of its own; κρεμήσομαν ἴ shall hang, be suspended. 

This distribution of the forms and significations will in general be 
found to hold good in the Attic writers ;*but it must not be expected, 

_ that writers kept the analogy so constantly in view, as never to devi- 
ate from it.}| Κρεμάω as Present is used only by the later writers.— 
An Attic secondary form in the Pres. and Impf. is χρήμγημι. 


my vart κρύπτασκον, see § 103. IT. 1. 


κτάομαν gain, Perf. as-Pres. κέχτημαν possess, also ἔκτημαι (§ 38. n. 


1). Subj. and Opt. see in §98n:9; as likewise the Optative 
form xexr@munv. 


κτείνω kill, slay, F. κτένω etc. § 101. As Perf. only éxrove is used 
by good writers. | 

' Homer has also a Future xtovéw; and the Mid. of this form as 

_ Passive, Il. &, 481 xataxtavésods. 

Besides these there occurs the poetical Aorist ἕκταν, as, a, 3 Plur. 
᾿ἔχταν for -ασαν, Subj. κτέω for χτῶ (§ 107, n. IV. 8), Inf: χκτάμεν, 
κτάμεναι, for κτάναι, Part. κτάς, Pass. ἐκτάμην, ἑτάμενος, κτάσϑαι. For 
all these forms see § 110. 6, 7.—Honier has also Aor. Pass. ἐχτάϑην 
and ἐχτάνϑην, ὃ 101. ῃ. 6.1 

Besides the Perf. taxa which is not Attic, there is still a form 
ἐχτόνηκα (δ 112. 9), whose Attic character is doubtful. 


κτίμενος Part. Pass. from the old form rio (i. q. χτέζω) found, build, which 
as well as the Verb. Adj. χτιτός occur in composition, ἐϊκτίμενος,, 
ἐύχτιτος. From χτέω comes also his heii See § 110. 7. 

χτυπέω, see § 96. n. 5. 


κυνέω kiss, from KVR, κύσω, ἔκυσα, with short v. The compound 
moooxvvew prostrate myself, adore, is usually regular ; but in the poets 
also προσχύσαι, etc.—Another verb xv see in its place. 

κυρέω find, hit upon, is regular 5 ; but has also a secondar y form κύρω, De- 
mom κύρομαι, Impf. ἔκυρον, F. κύρσω, Aor. ἔκυρσα. 


og Arisleph. Vesp. 298 κρέμοισϑε, see δ' 107: n. IIL. 5, and comp. magvoiuny. 
t It is just the same in English with the forms hung and hanged. 


t In the common language this tense of this verb was not employed ; but in- 


stead of it the verb ἔϑανον, ἀπέϑανον, in the Passive construction; as ἀπέθανεν" 
ὑπὶ αὐτοῦ. 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 289 


κύω OF κυέω am pregnant, κυΐσκω OF —OMaL conceive, is conjugated 
regularly after xvéw. ‘The poets have also an Aor. 1 Mid. éxvoapny.* 
—Comp. also κυγέω. 


Al. 


hayyave obtain, receive, sc. by lot or fate, from Δ ΧΙ (§ 112. 13), F. 
λήξομαν Aor. ἔλαχον Pf. εἴληχα (§ 83. n. 3), or λέλογχα as if from 
AETXS. | | | - 

The Ionics made in the Fut. λάξομαν (ὃ 27. n. 6.)—The Homeric 
Aorist λελαχεῖν has the causative sense, to impart, cause to share. 


AAK—, see λάσκω. 


λαμβάνω take, from AHBS (δ 112.18), F. λήψομαν Aor. ἔλαβον Imp. 
λάβε and λαβέ (ὃ 103. n. I. 4. c), ῬΕ εἴληφα (ὃ 83. n. 3).—MID. 
The Tonics formed λελάβηκα (ὃ 111. 3), and (from A4MBM2) λάμ- 
pout, ἐλάμφϑην, λέλαμμαι, λαμπτέος. ᾿ 
λανϑάνω, less often Χήϑω, am hid, concealed, λήσω, ἔλαϑον, λέληϑα.--- 
Mid. λανϑάνομαι, less often AjPouas, forget, λήσομαι, ἐλαϑόμην, 
λέλησμαι. Ἷ ; 
Homer has in the Aorist λελαϑεῖν, λελαϑέσϑαι; the former how- 
ever only as a regular causative of the Middle, i. e. cause to forget ; 


in which sense Homer has also the Pres. Aj%0vw.—In the Perf. Pass. 
the Ionics have short o, as λέλασμαι, ὃ 27. n. 6. ἮΝ 


λάσκω make a noise, gabble, (Ion. ληκέω Dor. λᾶκέω) from AAK, Aor. 2 
thoxov, and as Mid. λελακόμην (Hymn. Merc. 145), whence, according 
to § 111. 3, Fut. λακήσομαι, Aor. 1 éaxnoou.t—Perf. as Pres. (δ 113. ἢ. 
13), λέλακα Ion. λέληκα ; epic shortened form λελάκυϊα. 


λάω see Aw. |. AETX— see λαγχάνω. 


λέγω in the signification to say has no Perf. Active, and in the Perf. 

Passive, λέλεγμαι, ἐλέχϑην. On the other hand, in the significa- 

tion ἐο collect, in which especially several compounds occur, it has 

Perf. Act. εἴλοχα (συνείλοχα), and in the Perf. Pass. most com- 

monly εἴλεγμαν (ὃ 83. n. 3), Aor. ἐλέγην (6: g. κατελέγησαν) ; to- 

- gether with a MID.—Moreover διαλέγομαν converse with, has also 
διείλεγμαι, but in the Aor. διελέχϑην. 


_ Homer has also the syncop. Aor. ἐλέγμην joined myself, Od. 1, 835 ; - 
and λέκτο counted, Od. ὃ, 451. 

‘The old poetic λέξαν cause to lie down, λέξασϑαν to lie, rest, has 
along with this form also the syncopated Aorist (§ 110. 8) ἐλέγμην, 
λέκτο, Imperat. λέξο and by ὁ 96. n. 9 λέξεο: That this verb however 
is from an entirely different root, is shewn in Lexilog. II. 78. 9, 10. 


* The usual orthography xvocouévy rests solely on the seeming relation to 
Exvoe from κυγέω. 


t The short α is found e.g. Aristoph. Pac. 382. The passage Aristoph. Nub. 
410 (διαλάκήσασα) is different. . 


~ 


290 $114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


λελειχμότες lapping, playing with the tongue ; an old defective Participle in 

Hesiod. See Lexil, I. 1. p. 7, note. Ausfithrl. Sprachl. § 110. n. 14. 

λελίημαι strive, hasten, an epic Perf. that seems to belong to AIAN, but 
corresponds to none of the significations of that root. The sugges- 
tion is therefore very probable, that it stands for λελίλημαι, dropping 
the last 2 for the sake of the euphony, from daw, λιλαίομαι, desire, 
strive.* See Lexil. I. 21. 

AHB— see λαμβάνω. || λήϑω see λανϑάνω. 

ληκέω see λάσκω. _ || ΔῊΣ -- see λαγχάγω. 

ATA— see λελίημαι. 

λίσσομαι, rarely λέτομαι, beseech, F. λίσομαι, Aor. ἐλισάμην and ἐλιτόμην. 

λούω wash. In the Present and Imperf. of this verb, the Attics employ 
abridged forms instead of those irregular ones which have the final 

_ vowel and union-vowel short; e.g. 3 pers. Impf. ἔλου Plur. ἐλοῦ-- 

μὲν, etc. Pass. λοῦμαι, etc. λοῦσϑαι. ---- MID. 

The fuller forms are themselves contracted from the old λοέω (Hom. 
ἐλόευν, λοέσσαι) ; the shorter forms however have not arisen from syn- 
cope (e.g. λοῦμαν not like οἶμαι § 110. 5); but are in like manner 
contracted from the theme 402, whence the Homeric Aorist dos. 
This is shewn by the accentuation ἐλοῦμεν, ἐλοῦτο, (not ἕλουμεν, 
thovto, like ἔκειτο, ἔρυτο,) and by the Inf. Jovy, which is also adduced 
from Hippocrates in Galeni Gloss. although in the writings of Hip- 
pocrates himself λούειν is everywhere read. 


᾿ λύω, see ὃ 95. n. 4; and for λύτο, § 110. 7. — Opt. Perf. λέλυτο ὃ 98. n. 9. 
λῶ will, λῆς, 47, 3 Pl. λῶντι, a Doric defective. 5 


M. 

“μαίνομαι am mad, furious, F. μανοῦμαν A. ἐμάνην. Perf. μέμηνα, 
synonymous with the Present. But the Aor. Act. ἔμηνα (Aristoph. 
Thesm. 561) has the causative sense to make mad, etc. in which 
the compound ἐχμαίνω is more usual (§ 135. n. 2). 


Theocritus (10. 31) has μεμάψημαν (δ 111. 3) with the same Present 
Signification as μαΐγομαι. 


μαΐομαι see MAN. || MAK— see “μηχκάομαι. 
μανϑάνω learn, from MHOQ, Aor. ἔμαϑον F. μαϑήσομαν Pf. μεμά- 
ϑηκα, §112. 13. § 111. 3. | τῷ 


The Fut. μαϑεῦμαν see in § 95. n. 16. 
μαπέειν See μάρήτω. 
μάρναμαι strive, fight, like ἵσταμαι ; only in the Present, and in the Impf. 

2 pers. μάῤγαο, ὃ 107. IV. 4. Optat. μαρνοίμην, ὃ 107. n. ΠῚ. 5. 


* Such sacrifices of analogy for the sake of easier pronunciation are not un- 
common in the earlier formation of a language. A case similar to the above is 
the poetic word ἔχπαγλος striking, terrible, which unquestionably comes from 
ἐκπλαγῆναι ; not however by transposition, but with the ending dog (§ 119. 13. e) 
for ἔκπλαγλος. In like manner πύελος stands for πλύελος from πλύω, πλύνω. 


§ 114. cATALoGUE oF IRREGULAR VERBS. 291 


μάρπτω take hold of, seize, μάρψω, etc. Part. Perf. μεμαρπός Aor. 2 
(ἔμαρπον) μέμαρπον, and syncopated ἔμαπον, μαπέειν, 3 Pl. Opt. 
μεμάποιεν (for μάποιε»). 


μάχομαι fight, F. μαχέσομαι comm. μαχοῦμαν (ᾧ 95. n. 15, 16), Aor. 
ἐμαχεσάμην. Pf. μεμάχημαν. Verb. Adj. μαχετέος and μαχητέος. 
From the Fut. arose the Ion. Pres. μαχέομαυ ; and Homer has not 
only μαχειόμενος, but even μαχεούμενος, all as Present. 
For the sake of the metre the epic writers have Fut. μαχήσομαι, 
but Aor. ἐμαχέσσατο. 


MAL an old verb, which occurs chiefly in three forms, viz. 

ς 1) Perfect as Present, strive, (μέμαα) μεμάασι, μεμαώς (Gen, μεμαῶ-- 
tos), and with syncope μέμαμεν, μέματε, 3 Pl. Plupf. μέμασαν, ὃ 110. 
10 sq. 
, 2) Present Middle μῶμαι; desire, seek, μώμενος, contracted from 
μάομαν; but the ὦ remains predominant, and therefore e.g. Inf. 
μῶσϑαν and Imperat. μώεο (like μνώεο from μγάομαι, μνῶμαι) ; see 
ᾧ 105. n. 10. marg. note. 

3) Fut. and Aor. Mid. μάσομαι,; ἐμασάμην, belong to μαέομαν 
touch, feel after, seek, especially in compounds; thus in Homer the 
Impf. ἐπεμαΐετο Od. », 441 corresponds exactly to the Aor. ἐπιμασσά-- 
'μενος ib. 446. Comp. δαέω δάσασϑαι, ναίω νάσασϑαι. 


μεϑύω am drunk, assumes its tenses from the Passive, ἐμεϑύσθην etc. 
The other tenses of the Active, except the Imperfect, belong to με- 
ϑύσκω make drunk, as ἐμέϑυσα ete. (δ 112, n. 6.) 


er obtain, Aor. ἕμμορον, Pf. ἕμμορα ἡ ὃ 83. n.2. From the causative 
sense (ὃ 113. 2) of the Active (MEIP2) divide, distribute, (whence 
μέρος put, portion), comes the Perf. Pass. as impersonal and with the 
syllable st instead of the reduplication (§ 83. n. 3), viz. εἵμαρται ut is 
Sated, is appointed by destiny, Part. εἱμαρμένος.---- We find also μεμόρη-- 
ται and μεμορμέγος. - 


μέλλω will, am sat to, etc. F. μελλήσω ete. For the Αὐξαι.: see § 88. 
n. 5. 


uehw concern, be laid to heart, is in the Active employed mostly in the 
third person, μέλει, μέλουσι, F. uednoee etc.—Pass. wehopoe I lay 
to heart, am solicitous, cote commonly ἐπιμέλομαι,) μελήσομαι, 
ἐμελήϑην. 

The poets use the Passive in the same sense as the Active; con- 
sequently μέλεταν for μέλει. Further, they use the Perfect in the same 
sense as the Present ; thus Act. μέμηλεν, ἃη4 Pass. Senne (Hom. 
Hesiod), which is fomniod from μεμέληται by 19. n. 1, and by short- 
ening the 7; comp. μέμγεο in μιμνήσκω, and ἀρήρεμαι in ἀραρίσκω. 


* Some critics for the sake of uniformity write also ἐμαχήσατο etc. contrary 
to the text which has come down to us. 


t In the earlier epic writers there is found only the 3 pers. ἔα θὲ, and in 


most instances clearly as Perfect, like κέκτηται» 6. g. Od. ¢, 335. But in Il. α. 
278, it is ἄνω Aorist. 


᾽ 


292 § 144. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


μένω remain, has in the Perf. μέμενηκα § 101. π, 9.—Verb. Adj. weve- 
ae , 

From another MEN2, not extant in the Present, (whence μένος,) 
comes the Ionic and poetic Perf. uguove intend, purpose (comp. μενε-- 
αἰνω); which is related to μέμαα; see in MAN, and comp. γέγονα 
_yéy oo 

METI, μεμετιμένος, see ὁ 108. 1.5. . 

μηκάομαι bleat, low ; old poetic forms are Part. Aor. μάχων, Perf. μέμηκα, 

' whence the Homeric μεμακυΐα is. derived by shortening the vowel 
(§ 97. η. 8). Hence, since ithas the signification of the Present, there 
is formed another Impf. ἐμέμηκον, § 111. 2. 


μιαίνω stain, soil. The Aor. assumes ἡ. ι 
The Homeric μιάνϑην I. δ, 146, is explained as the 3 pers. PI. for 
μιάνϑησαν, μέανϑεν ; but is more probably the 3 pers. Dual of the 
syncop. Aor. (Sing. éuéay-ro) Dual ἐμιάν--σϑην, ἐμιανϑὴην, § 110. n. 3. 

ψιέγνυμε, also μίσγω, mix, F. μίξω, etc. δ 112. 14. - 
μιμνήσκω remind, from MNAR, F. μνήσω, etc.—Pass. μεμνήσχομαν - 
call to mind, recollect, mention, ἐμνήσϑην, μνησϑήσομαι, μνηστός. 
—The Perf. Pass. μέμνημαν becomes Present, call to mind, 1. 6, 
am still mindful, Subj. μέμνωμαι, ῃ, ται, etc. see ὃ 98. n. 9. 
Opt. μεμνήμην Attic μεμνοίμην, or also μεμνῴμην, μεμνῷτο, con- 
tracted from the Ionic μεμνεώμην, μεμνέῳτο (Il. w, 361).t To 
this Perfect belongs the Fut. 3 μεμνήσομαι, will remain mindful. 
-  $Syncopated forms are the Homeric péuvy (μέμνεαι) for μέμνησαι, 
and’ Imperat. μέμνεο (Herodot.) for μέμνησο. Comp. above μέμβλεταν 

in μέλω. 

The simple form (μνάομαι) μνῶμαν in the above signification is 
merely Ionic; and μγνεώμεγος, uvworto, μνώεο, etc. (δ 105. n. 10. marg. 
note) are Ionic lengthened forms. But in the meaning to court, woo, 
μνᾶσϑαν belongs also to the common language. 

μολεῖν see βλώσκω. 
μύχαομαι bellow, roar, is το be noted on account of the epic forms ἔμῦκον, 
_péudue, from ΠΥ ΚΙ. Comp. μηκάομαι. | 


N 


voiw dwell, assumes its tenses from the Pass. and Mid. of VA2 with 
short α, F. νάσομαν Aor. ἐνάσϑην or ἐνασάμην, Perf. (in later-writers) 
γένασμαι. The Act. vaca (ἔνασσα) has the causative sense, cause to 
dwell. , 


* The lyric passage, Eurip Iph. Aul. 1495, where μέμονα is Perfect of the 
common μένω, can prove nothing, isolated as it is, against the otherwise invari- 
able usage which prevails not only throughout the Attic poets, but even in the 
prose of Herodotus (v1. 84). The two verbs must be carefully distinguished, even 
if it-be thought advisable to arrange them under the same etymology. 


t For all these forms; see ὃ 98. n. 9. 


- al 


δ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 293 


veoow stuf, F. νάξω, etc.—vévaouar, vaoros. § 92. π. 2. 

véuw allot, distribute, F. νεμῶ and νεμήσω, Aor. ἔνειμα Perf. νενέμηκα, 
etc. Aor. Pass. ἐνεμήϑην and éveuedny.—MID. 

véo), 1) heap up, occurs in the Pres. and Impf. chiefly in the Ionic 
lengthened forms νήω, νηέω, vnvéw.—Fut. νήσω, Aor. ἔνησα Ion. 
ἐνήησα, etc. 

2) spin, also regular, γήσω, etc. Butinthe Pres. the vowels <0, 

éov are contracted not as usual into ov, but contrary to analogy 
into w, as νῶσι, νῶντος, etc.—A new form of the Pres. is νήϑω. 


3) swim, F. vevoouae and vevoovpar (ὃ 95.n. 17), ἔνευσα, ete. 


4) the poetic verb γνέεσϑαι, to go away, to turn back, has in the 
Indic. Pres. commonly the signification of the Future, νέομαν or vev- 
μαι, 2 pers. veto, § 105, n. 7. , ᾿ : 
vitw wash, takes its tenses from the less usual νίπτω ; thus Fut. vipa, 
etc.—MID. : | 
᾿γοέω think, is contracted and accented by the Ionics like βοάω ; e.g. γώσω, 
Ey oC, ἐνένωτο. 


νυστάζω nod, sleep, νυστάσω and νυστάξω, etc. § 92. n. 1. 
΄ ᾿ J Ἔ 4 
ὧν . 
bo 


tvgéw shave, Middle commonly ξύρομαι. 


O 


ὄξω smell, i.e: emit an odour, F. ofjow (Ion. of¢ow), etc.—Perf. ὄδωδα 
has the force of the Present. : | 

οἴγω or οἴγνυμι, open, in the epic writers separates the diphthong in the 
augmented forms, ὠΐγνυντο, wifs—The following compound is most 
used. , 


ἀνοίγω or ἀνοίγνυμι, open, has the anomalous augment men- 
. “ > 3 , ε q - 
tioned in § 84. π. 8; Impf. ἀνέῳγον, Aor. ἀνέῳξα, Inf. ἀνοῖξαι, 


etc. Perf. 1 ἀνέῳχα. The Perf. 2 ἀνέῳγα has the neuter (intrans.), 


signification, stand open. The forms ἤνουξα, ἡνοίγην belong to the 
later writers. 
οἶδα see § 109. Π. * ἢ 
οἴομαι suppose, Impf. @ounv. The 1 pers. Sing. is also ofuae, Impf. 
ounv.*—Fut. οἰήσομαν Aor. ᾿φήϑην, οἰηϑῆναιυ. 


.* According to the ancient Grammarians, the forms οἦμαι, ὥμην, were em- 
ployed only in cases of entire conviction; where however Attic urbanity avoided, 
in this way, the harshness of positive assertion. 


38 


Ὁ 


© : ees ae ta: © ~ Sale lore 
mer ; ἐξ ‘aes ἐν ena 


“ - Ὕ 
© » mie ; - ὸ 
. ; ᾿ . 
294 , § 114. caraLoGuE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


The epic writers employ also the Active folen ms, and moreover re- 
solve the diphthong: ὀΐω, δέομαι, (long ν,) whence ὠϊσάμην, ὠΐσϑην. 


οἴχομαν depart, am gone, F. οἰχήσομαι Pf. ᾧχημαν or οἴχωκα, 


see the marg. note under ἔχω, ὕχωκα. 
Homer has also ᾧχηκα, παρῴχηκα Il. x, 252.—On this whole verb, 
see the Ausf. Sprachl. 


OI— see οἴομαν and φέρω. | 
ὀλισϑάνω (comm. -αἰνω) slip, glide, ὀλισϑήσω, ὥλισϑον, § 112. 18. 
ὄλλυμι cause to perish, destroy, from OAR, Ἐ', ὁλῶ, Aor. ὥλεσα, Perf. 
Ghohexo.—MID. ὄλλυμαι perish, F. ὀλοῦμαι Aor. κι ὁ to 
‘which belongs Perf. 2 ὄλωλα. : 


The poetic Part. dAdusvoc, οὐλόμενος, passes over into an adjective, 
with the active signification destructive, fatal—The epic secondary 
form ὀλέκω arose out of the Perfect ; comp. ὃ 111. 2. 


~ 


ὄμνυμι swear, Fut. ὁμοῦμαι, εἴ, εἴται, etc. ὀμεῖσθϑαι, from OM 
(δ 112. 14). The further formation is as if from OMOS, Aor. 
ὥὦμοσα, Perf. 'ouwuoxa,—Perf. Pass. ὁμώμοσμαι, but the other — 
forms, together with the Aorist, more commonly without 6, as 
ὁμωμοταὶ, ouoOnv.—MID. 

Oudoyvupe wipe off, Fut. ὀμόρξω, etc. § 112. 14—MID. 

ὀνίνημι ἢ am of use, profit, (decl. like ἵστημι,) has no Impf. Act. (but 
for it employs ὠφέλουν, ) and takes its forms from ON_AQ, ὀνήσω, 
ὦνησα.---Μ1Ώ. ὀνίναμαι have profit, am benefited, Aor. 2 ὠνήμην 
(ησο, 770, ete.) or ὠνάμην Opt. ὀναίμην Inf. ὄνασϑαι. 

The Indic. ὠγάμην belongs to the later writers. In Homer how- 

ever it comes from ovoucr ; see the next verb. 


ὄνομαν insult, radical form ONO? ; hence the Pres. and Impf. like δίδομαι, 
viz. 2 pers. Sing. overeat δόμεναι. ὄγοσο.--ἜΠαϊ. ὀνόσομαι. Aor. ὧνό- 
σϑην and ὠγνοσάμη»ν. -—Homer has also from the simpler form ON 
2 Plur. Pres. οὔνεσϑε, Aor. wyato. 


OIT— see ou. 


Ooaw see, Impf. Ion. ὥρων, comm. ἑώρων (§ 84. n. 8) Perf. ἑωρᾶκα.ἢ 
—Aor. εἶδον, ἐδεῖν, ἰδών, ἴδε, Att. ἰδέ, etc. Mid. εἰδόμην, ἰδέ. 
oOo, ἰδοῦ, and as Interjection ἐδού lo! See εἴδω above-—Fut. 
ὄψομαι 1 shall see, from OITT2.—PASS. Perf. ἑωρᾶμαν or 


* This form comes from ΟΝ 42 by means of_a reduplication with 2, (that 
falls away in the Aor. 2, just as in ἵστημέε, etc.) by which the reduplication of 
those verbs beginning with a consonant (δίδωμι) is imitated, in the same man- 
ner as the reduplication of the Perfect is imitated by the Attic reduplication 
(δ 85). Comp. ἀτιτάλλω and ὀπιπτείω, from ἀταλός and ONT. 


t In Attic poetry the Perfect, and this only, was shortened at the beginning, 
and was either pronounced by synizesis in the Ionic manner, ὦ ὥρακα, or was both 


written and pronounced ἑόρακα. See the “Ὁ: Sprachl. Addit. to ὃ 84, n. 11. 
Edit. 2. p. 325. 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 295 


ὥμμαει, ὦψαι, ὦπται, εἰο. ὄφϑαι. Aor. ὥφϑην, opOnvav(in later 
writers also ὁραϑῆναι). Verb. Adj. ὁρατέος, ὁρατός, Ontos. 
The Perf. 2 ὕπωπα have seen, belongs to the dialects and poets.— 
For ὅρηαι (Hom. ) see § 105. n. 16. § 106. n. 10 with the marg. note. 
From ἐπόψομαυ must be carefully distinguished the antique ἐπιό- 
ψομαι choose, select, Aor. ἐπιωψάμην. 


ὄρνυμι move, excite, bring into existence, from OP2, F. ὄρσω, Aor. 1 ὦρσα, 
δ 101. n. 3.—Mid. Ogvyuow arise, come into existence, Aor. ὠρόμην, 9 
Sing. ὥρετο and ὦρτο (δ 110. 8), Inf. ὄρϑαι Part. ὄρμενος (for ὀρέσϑαι, 
ὀρόμενος), Imp. dgco and by § 96. n. 9, 6gas0.—The Perf. 2 ὄρωρα be- 
longs to this intransitive and amediate signification (§ 113. 2), have 
arisen, exist ; but the form ὥρορεν (ὃ 85. n. 2) is Aorist (6. g. Od. τ, 
201) like ἤραρεν, and has also like that form more commonly the 
transitive and causative signification, he excited, etc. —With the Perf. 
ὄρωρς coincides as to sense the Passive form ogwgetas (comp. above 
ἄρηρα, ἀρήρεμαι, in ἀραρίσκω). —Finally, Homer has also forms of the 
Pres. and Impf. from ὄρομαν and δρέομαι, hurry, move about, (Od. &, 
104. 8, 398.) which however are not without difficulty ; see the Aus/. 
Sprachl. 


ὀσφραίνομαν smell, perceive ea the smell, ὁσφρήσομαι, Aor. ὠσφρόμην 
(δ 112. 18) Ion. ὀσφράμην (Herodot. I. 80, 26) by $96. n. 1 with 
the marg. note. 

οὐλόμενος see OAAUmL. || οὔνεσϑε see ὄνομαι. 

οὐρέω void urine, F. οὐρήσομαι, has the syllabic augment, ἐούρουν etc. 
ᾧ 84. n05. — 


_ otra wound, οὑτήσω, etc. —Syncopated Aor. (οὗταν § 110. 6,7,) 3 Sing. 
outa Inf. οὑτάμεν (for οὐτάναι) Part. Pass. ᾿οὐτάμενος. —Along with 
these exist also the forms ovtofw, οὔτασε, οὑτασμένος. 


ὀφείλω, ( (1) owe 68. g. money, (2) ought, must,—F. ὀφειλήσω ete. 

The form ὥφελον, ες, ε, (comm. dgedor,) occurs only as expressive 
of a'wish ; see Syntax § 150.—In Homer we find instead of ὀφείλω also 
ὀφέλλω (Il. τ. 200), and for ὥφελον on account of the metre also ὥφελ- 

» hoy (Il. ζ. 350); which forms must not be confounded with those of 
ὀφέλλω increase, glorify. From this last verb Homer has in the ot 
Aor. 1 by anomaly, 3 pers. Sing. ὀφέλλειεν Il. π, 651. Od. 6, 334 


éqlicneven i incur, forfeit, F. opijow, Pf. aganze, Aor. ὥφλον. 


ΤΙ. 


παίζω play, jest, F. παίξομαι, παιξοῦμαι. We find after this forma- 
tion in later writers also ἔπαιξα, πέπαϊγμαν etc. but good Attic 
writers always have ἔπαισα, πέπαισμαιν ete. notwithstanding the simi 
lar tenses of the following verb. 

παίω strike, F. παίσω and παιήσω, but the remaining tenses come only 
from the first formation : ἔπαισα, πέπαικα, ἐπαίσϑην. — MID. 


TTAP—, πεπαρεῖν, see in πορεῖν. 


? OS 


296 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


πάσασϑαι acquire, ἐπασάμην, Pf. πέπαμαν possess --- different from ἐπά-- 
σάμην, πέπασμαι, 5660 πατέομαι. 
πάσχω suffer, from ITHOR, Aor. ἔπαϑον---ἰτοιὰ ITENOQ, Pf. πέπον-- 
Ga, Fut. πείσομαι according to the rule § 25. 4. — Verb. Adj. 
παϑητός. 
From ΠΉΘΩ, come also the less usual forms πήσομαι, ἔπησα 


Pf, (πέπηϑα) πεπαϑυῖα (Hom.)—For πὶ ἐπ 008 instead of πεπόνϑατε 
see ὃ 110. n. 5. 


πατάσσω see πλήσσω. 

πατέομαν taste, eat, ἐπασάμην, πέπασμαιν ; comp. δατέομαι, δόάσασϑαι, un- 
der δαΐίω. 

πείϑω peace 5 ; Pass. believe, bs ; to which signification belong also 
πείσομαι, πέπεισμαι. But Perf. 2 πέποιϑα trust. 


Poetic forms are, 1 PI. Plupf. ἐπέπνθϑιμεν belonging to πέποιϑα, Aor. 2 
ἔπιϑον, ἐπίϑομεν, πέπιϑον, etc. — New forms from this Aorist are 
mien ἐπέϑησα in the signification Obed, follow, trust. But πεπι-- 


Snow persuade. 
meine shear, comb, Fut. πέξω ete.—MID. 
πεινὴν see ὃ 105. ἡ. 5. || πείσομαι see πάσχω and mel ϑὼ: 


πελάζω, old πελάω, approach, and in the earlier language cause to approach, 
has also in the poets the Aorists formed by metathesis (πελὰ, hea, 
§ 110. 11. 2), viz. ἐπλάϑην (long a, falsely ἐπλάσϑην), and ἐπλήμην, both 

in the sense approach. — 

πέλω ΟΥ̓ πέλομαι, Iam. This Doric and poetic verb suffers a syncope 
when it takes the augment: 3 pers. Impf. ἔπλε of ἔπλετο, 2. pers. 
ἔπλεο, ἔπλευι The remaining tenses do not occur. This verb more- 
over has the peculiarity, that the Imperf. of the Middle form very 
commonly has the signification of the Present, ἔπλευ thou art, etc. — 
To the same verb in its earlier signification move about, am occupred, 
versor, belong also with the same syncope the compoutd epic parti- 
ciples ἐπιπλόμενος, περιπλύμενος. 


IENO— ‘see πάσχω. 


sit πεπορεῖν, πέπρωται, SCC πΟρΣ Ν᾽ Ϊ πέπτω see πέσσω. 


περάω pass over, cross, regular περάσω with long α (ον. περήσω). But 
the formation περᾶσω etc. with short o, in the epic poets, belongs to 
στιπράσκω sell, which see in its place. 

πέρδω, comm. πέρδομαι, Aor. ἔπαρδον Fut. παρδήσομαν Perf. πέπορδα. 


πέρϑω desolate, destroy, Aor. ἔπραϑον ὃ 96. π. 7. ---- Homer has also a 
syncopated Aor. Pass. in Inf. πέρϑαι from ἐπέρϑιμην, strictly πέρϑ--ϑαι 
(or πέρϑ-σϑαι) like δέχ-ϑαι, § 110. 8 and n. 3. 


πεσεῖν 566 πίπτω. 

πέσσω, πέττω, boil, bake, cook, ἘΝ. πέψω etc. from πέπτώ, which oc- 
curs in the Present only i in later writers. : 

πετάννυμι expand, F, πετάσω (Att. πετῶ) ete. § 112, 14. — ῬΕ Pass. 
πέπταμαν (δ 110. 4.6); but Aor. Pass. again ἐπετάσϑην. 


/ 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 297 


so ie fly. From this theme comes by syncope an Aorist suv, 
πτέσϑαι etc. § 110.4. Fut. πετήσομαν comm. πτήσομαι. Along 
with these exists also a formation in mw, viz. ἵπταμαιν, Aor. 
éntauny, πτάσϑαν etc. and from the entirely obsolete Pres., Active 
of this formation, comes another Aorist ἔπτην, πτῆναι, mas, ete. 
synonymous with the two former. 


The forms of the Pres. πέταμαι and πετάομαν with the Aor, ἐπετά- 
σϑην (e.g. Anacr. 40. 6), belong to the poets and the later prose. As 
Perfect, only πεπότημαιν seems to have been in use. The poets em- 
ployed also the Pres. ποτάομαι, πτωτάομαι. (§ 112. 9.) 

IIET— see πίπτω. || πεύϑομαι see πυνϑάνομαι. 

πέφγον, exepvoy, I killed, the reduplicated and at the same time synco- 
pated Aorist (δ 110. 4) from DEN? (whence φόνος). The participle 
of this Aorist, contrary to analogy, is accented on the penult, πέφγωνγ. 
Pass. Perf. πέφαμαν Fut. πεφήσομαν; comp. τείνω, τέταμαι, ὃ 101. 9, 
and for πεφήσομαν see particularly §99.n.1. See also ®A— below. 


πήγνυμι͵ fiz, make fast; in later writers.also πήσσω, πήττω; F.nnko 
etc. § 112. 14. Aor. Pass. ἐπάγην. — Perf. 2 πέπηγα intrans. 
stand fast, § 113. n. 3. — MID. 


niundnue fill; Infin. πεμπλάναι, is declined in Pres. and Impf. like 
dornue.—F ut. πλήσω etc. Pf. Pass. πέπλησμαι Aor. Pass. éndjodny, 
from ITAA or πλήϑω, which last form however has in the 
Pres. only the intransitive signification to be full. 
_ When in composition μ᾽ comes to stand before the initial σε, the 
μ in the reduplication falls away, 85 ἐμπίπλαμοαυ; but it reappears so 
soon as the augment intervenes, as éyswiumlacay. 

In contradiction to this rule, the poets, for the sake of the metre, 
employ the form with or without the w indiscriminately.—The form- — 
ation in aw (πιμπλᾷν, ἐμπισιλᾷ») 1 is not good Attic, except in those in- 

- stances where it occurs also in ἵστημί. 
For the Passive Aor. ἐπλήμην, Opt. aisiuny,t Imperat. πλῆσο, ete. 
see δ 110. 7., It was not unknown to the Attic language ; Ansiae 
ἐμπλήμενος, ἐμπλείμην. 

From the intrans. πλήϑω there occurs as a poetic Perfect, πέ- 

why Fa with the like meaning, am full. 


πίμπρημι burn trans. πυμπράναν, is declined in the Pres. and Impf. 
like ἵστημι. The rest comes from ΠΡ 4.2 or πρήϑω (Hom.) 
6. g. ἐπρήσϑην.---͵ ἢ éuninonuc, éveniunoaper, the case is the 
same as in πίμπλημι above; and so also with the formation in aw. 


* That πέφνων is really Aorist, is clearly evident from the connexion in the 
two passages, 11. w, 827. @, 539. 


+ The orthography πληήμην has no analogy. Instead of δύ» one might indeed 
have expected the diphthong a ; since the form πιμπλάναι presupposes a theme 
HAAQ. Butin the same manner χρή» which comes from yodém (see below), has 
also in the Opt. χρείη. 


293 § 114. cATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


The shortened form ἔπρεσε for ἔπρησε in Hesiod (3, 856) is to be 
remarked ; since the analogy of ἐπέμπραμεν would lead us to ieEpect 
here an a. 

πίνω drink, from πῶ, Fut. πίομαὲ (95.n. 18) Aor. ἔπιον, πιεῖν, ete. 
Imp. comm. aide (δ 110. n. 2).—All the other forms are from 
TIOQ, Perf. πέπωκα Perf. Pass. πέπομαν Aor. Pass. ἐπόϑην, 
Verb. Adj. ποτέος, ποτός. 


The ὁ in πίομαι is commonly long (see Athen. 10. p. 446) ; but in 
ἔπιον ete. short—The Fut. 110% μα ν belongs to the later writers, 
shee n. 16. 

The forms πίσω, ἕπισα, have the causative sense give to drink, and 
belong to the Present πιπίσκω. . 


πιπραάσχὼ, Ion. πιτιρήσκω, sell; Fut. and Aor. wanting. The forms 
in use are, πέπρᾶκα, πέπρᾶμαι, ἐπράϑην, πεπράσομαι, which 
Fut. 3 is in use instead of the Fut. 1 πραϑήσομαν, which is not 
Attic ; and ‘in like manner the Perf. πεπρᾶσϑαν very often stands - 
instead of the Aor. πραϑῆναι. The Ionics have all these forms 
with 7. , 
The common language supplied the tenses still wanting, by means of 
ἀποδώσομαι, ἀπεδόμην. The old and epic language had Fut. περάσω 
- with short o, and hence contr. περῶ, περῷν, Aor. ἐπέρασα, from περάω, 
which we have seen in its place above in a kindred signification, and 
with long ἃ in flexion. From this περάσαν arose afterwards the 
other preceding forms by the metathesis mentioned in § 110. 11. 2; 
and in the first marg. note to χεράγγυμι above. 


πίπτω fall, (long 1, hence Imperaé. πῖπτε,) forms its other tenses from 
ITTETS, δ 112.16. Fut. with Doric form πεσοῦμαι (Ion. πὲσέομαε), 


Aor. ἔπεσον ᾧ 96..n. 9.—Perf. πέπτωκα. 


Poetic syncopated forms of the Part. Perf. are Attic πεπτώς (comp. 
βεβρῶτες from βέβρωκα) and epic πεπτεώς. The latter implies an ori- 
ginal Perf. form πέπτηκα (from ZET2 like δέδμηκα from δέμω), 
whence πέπτωχοι has been formed’ by substituting a cognate vowel 
(§27. 1); see Lexil. I. 63. p. 295. 

The regular forms of the Aor. from ZZET2 also occur ; as Aor. 1 
ἔπεσα Eurip. 'Troad. 291. Alcm. 465. Aor.  ἔπετον in Doric writers, 
e. g. Pindar. 


σειτγέω fall, Aor. ἔπιτνον (ᾧ 96. n. 5).—But πιτνάω, πέτνημι, is the same with 
πετάγγυμι. 


πλάζξζω cause to wander ce Pass. wander about, rove; F. πλάγξω 
etc. § 92. n. 1. 

ILA— see πέλω. | || IZAA—, πλήϑω, see πελάζω and πέμπλημι. 

πλέω sail, F. πλεύσομαν, πλευσοῦμαιυ, --- ἔπλευσα, etc. Pass. πέπλευ- 
Cua, ἐπλεύσϑην. Verb. Adj. πλευστέος. 


; § 114. caTALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 299 


An Ionic form is πλώω, πέπλωκα, ete. Hence Verb. Adj. πλωτός, 
and the epic (syncopated) Aorist ἔπλων, ὡς, w, ὠμεν, ete. Part. πλώς, 
for which see § 110. 6. and n. 1. 


πλήσσω, πλήττω, strike; rarer form πλήγνυμι. It retains the 7 in the 
Aor. 2 Pass. ἐπλήγην, except in those compounds which signify to 
terrify, as ἐξεπλάγην, xacendayny.—tin the signification to strike 
the Attics never employ the Active of this verb, but instead of it 
πατάσσω ; which latter they never use in the Passive. 


The Perf. 2 πέπληγα has in later writers also a Passive significa- 
tion (ὃ 113. n. 4). Homer has also the Aor. 2 Act. and Mid. but with 
the reduplication, πέπληγον, mexdnyouny. 


VED blow, Ε΄, πνεύσομαι, πνευσοῦμαι, --- ἔπνευσα, etc. Aor. Pass. 
ἐπνεύσϑην. 


The Perf. Pass. πέπγυμαι (§ 98, n. 4) is merely poetic, with the 
special signification to be animated, intelligent; and after the same 
analogy occursalso the syncopated Aorist éuayvvto (Hom. for ἀγνέπνυτο 
§ 110. 7); further ἀμπνύνϑη (for ἀγεπνύϑη, comp. ἱδρύω, ἱδρύνϑην), 
and the Imperat. ἄμπνυε. 


ποϑέω see ὃ 95. n. 4. f 


πορεῖν (Hesych.) ἕπορον, gave, Part. πορών, a defective poetic Aorist. 

To the same theme, with the sense divide out, allot, belongs on the 
principle of metathesis (§ 110. 11), the Perf. Pass. πέπρωται tt as ap- 
pointed by destiny, Part. πεπρωμένος. 

The Infin, πεπαρεῖν or πεπορεῖν in Pind. Pyth. II. 105, is better 
referred to a separate theme of its own, with the meaning to shew, 
cause to see. ‘The greater number of manuscripts have the former 
orthography. ‘ 

HO— see πίνω. --- πέποσϑε see πάσχω. 
ΠΡ4--- πρήϑω, see πιπράσκω and πέμπρημι. 


πρίασϑαν buy, a defective verb, the forms of which are used only as © 


Aorist of the verb ὠνεῖσϑαι, viz. ἐπριάμην, Subj. πρίωμανι, Opt. 
πριαίμην, Imp. πρίασο, πρίω, Inf. πρίασϑαι, Part. movamevos. 
The Pres. Indic. πρέαμαν which the lexicons exhibit, is nowhere 

found. We must consequently regard ἐπριάμην as a defective 
Aor, 2 Mid, after the analogy of ἐπτάμην ; see πέτομαν above. 

IIPO— see πορεῖν. 

IMTA— ΠΤΟ--- see πετάνγυμι, πέτομαι, πτήσσω, and into. 

πτήσσω stoop down, is regular ; but has in the poets a few forms 
from JITAQ, Part. Perf. ᾿πεχτης; and 8 pers. Dual Aor. 2 πτήτην. 
§ 110. 6. 

πυνϑάνομαιυ inquire, perceive by the senses, ledrn, from the poetic πεύ- 
Sowa, Fut. πεύσομαν Aor. ἐπυϑόμην Pf. πέπυσμαι. Verb. 
Adj. πευστέος, mevoros. 


s 


! 


300 Δ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VEBRS. 


᾿ τῷ 

ῥαίνω sprinkle. For δάσσατε and ἐῤῥάδαται see § 103. n. IV. 5. 

ῥέζω and dw, do, F. ῥέξω or (from EPT'2) ἔρξω etc. Perf. ἔορχα. 

δέω flow, F. δεύσομαν A. ἔῤῥευσα. In this Active signification how- 
ever, the only genuine Attic forms are the Aor. 2 Pass. ἔθῥύην 
with the Fut. ῥυήσομαι, and a new Perf. fornied from this Aorist, 
viz. ἐρδύηκα. δ 111.2 : 

“PE— 866. εἰπεῖν. 

᾿ ῥήγνυμε tear trans. F. ῥήξω (§ 112. 14) Aor. Pass. ἐῥαγην. -- Perf. 
2 ἔῤδωγα (4 97. n. 2) with intrans. signification, am torn in pieces, 

ν᾿ ᾧ 119. n. 4. 

ὡγέω shudder, Perf. ἔῤῥιγα (§ 97. n. 4) the same with the Present. 

διγόω see § 105. n. 6. 

δίπτω and ῥιπτέω, cast ; in the Pass. and Impf. both ferhi are in use ; 
all the other parts come from the first form, as δέψω etc. The ὁ 
islong; hence ire, ῥῖψαι. Aor. Pass. ἐῤῥίφην. — For ῥίπτα- 
σχον see § 103. n. II. 1. 

δοίζασκε see § 103. n. IT. 1. 

“PT— see ῥέων δύομαι see ἐρύω. || “PAI— see ῥήγνυμι. 

δώννυμε strengthen, δώσω etc. δ112. 14. Perf. Pass. EOOwmpmat am 
strong, Imper. é¢6woo farewell. Aor. Pass. ἐθδώσϑην. 


΄ 


> 

σαλπίζω sound a trumpet, Fut. σαλπίγξω, ete. § 92, 1 n. 1. Later form 
σαλπίσω. 

σαόω see σῶώζω. 

σάω an old form for σήϑω sift, whence’ σῶσι in Herodot. I. 200. 


σβέννυμι extinguish, σβέσω etc. ἔσβεσμαι, ἐσβέσϑην. — The Perf. 
ἔσβηκα (with ἡ), and the Aor. 2 ἔσβην Pl. ἔαβημεν Infin. σβῆναι, 
have the intransitive signification to go out, be extinguished, which 
‘is elsewhere expressed by the Passive σβέννυμαιυ. 


σείω, ἀνασσείασκχε, see § 103. n. II. 1. 


σεύω move, impel, has most commonly the augment like verbs beginning 
with ¢ (§ 83. n. 2); and takes in the Aor. 1 no o, as ἔσσευα, ἐσσευά-- 
pny AS 96.n.1).. Perf. Pass. ἔσσυμαι, am moved, strive, long for, Part. 
ἐσσύμενος (proparox. ὃ 111. n. 9); Plupf. ἐσσύμην, which form i is at the 
same time syncopated Aorist ( (§ 110. 7 and n. 4), whence σύτο, σύμε-- 
vos; the 2 pers. is ἔσσυο for ἔ ἔσσυσο, for the same reason as Aor. 1 
ἔσσυα, see ὃ 103. III.2. Aor. Pass. in the same signification, ἐσσύϑην 
(Sophoc.) — Forms with a single σ᾽ (e. g. ἐσύϑην, ἐξεσύϑη) are less 
frequent; and those without any augment (e. g. ceva, σύτο) belong to 


ι 


§ 114. caTALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 301 


the Ionic-epic dialect. — We find also the Pres. Pass. syncopated 
(§ 110. 5), 6. g. σεῦταν Soph. Trach. 645; more commonly however 
with the cognate sound ov (ὃ 27.1), as cotpacrun, hasten, Im- 
perat. σοῦσο, σούσϑω, σούσϑε, a familiar call or exclamation in com- 
mon life. — Finally, here belongs also the Laconic form, (ὃ 1. n. 3) 
ἀπέσσουα he is off, gone, which is found in Xenoph. Hell. I. 1.23, and 
is explained as Aor. 2 Pass. for ἐσσύη. 

oxedavvupe scatter, disperse, F. σκεδάσω, σκεδῶ, etc. Pf. Pass. ἐσκέδα- 
omar § 112. 14. 

σλξλλω or σχελέω, dry, make dry; Pass. dry up, wither. 'To this im- 
mediate sense of the Passive belong the Active forms, Aor. ἔσκλην, 
σχλήναι, σκλαίην, (δ 110. 6,) Pf. ἔσκληκα am dried up, together 
with the Fut. σχκλήσομαι. 

The Homeric σχήλειε (Aor. 1 ἔσχηλα) implies a theme σκάλλω, which 

elsewhere has the wholly different meaning to scrape; and hence 


arise, by the metathesis >K44- (δ 110.11), the forms σκλῆναι, 
σκλαίην, etes 


σμάω rub, rub on, ours etc. (§105.n. 5.) Fut. σμήσω, etc. But the 
Aor. Pass. is always ἐσμήχϑην, from the form σμήχω, which in the . 
Present is not Attic, Verb. Adj. σμηκτός.- 


σοῦμαι etc. see σεύω. || σπεῖν, σπέσϑαι, see πω. 
σπένδω pour out, σπείσω, ἔσπεισμαυ, ὃ 25. 4. — MID. 
STA— see ἵστημι. || στήκετε see § 107. II. 2. marg. note. 


στερέω and στερίσκω bereave, deprive of, is conjugated regularly af- 
_ ter the first theme, Εἰ. στερήσω etc. Along with this the simpler 
form exists also in the Passive, στέρομαι, expressing a state 


or situation, am bereaved, deprived of, go without. 
Homer has the flexion with s, as στερέσαι. For στερηϑείς the 
poets have also an Aor. 2 Pass.-otsgsis. 


στεῦται, στεῦνται, στεῦτο, See § 110. 5. 


στοθέννυμι, στόρνυμι and στρώννυμι, spread, strew, form both στορέ- 
oo, ἐστύρεσα, and στρώσω, ἔστρωσα. Perf. Pass. ἔστρωμαι, 
Aor. 1 Pass. ἐστρώϑην and ἐστορέσϑην. Verb. Adj. σερωτός. 


It is easy to see that in the forms στρώσω, ὑτρώννυμι, a meta- 
thesis lies at the foundation. (§ 110, 11.) _ 


στυγέω fear, hate, is regular; but has in Homer still an Aor. 2 %orvyoy 
(§ 96. n. 5); and also in the causative sense render terrible, the Aor. 1 
ἔστυξα (Od. 2, 502), which however later poets use again in the first 
signification, 6. g. Apollon. IV. 512. 


σχεῖν, ἔσχον, etc. see ἔχω. 
σώζω save, has in the Perf. Pass. besides σέσωσμαν, also σέσωμαν ἴῃ 
the earlier writers ; ; and inthe Aor. 1 Pass. always ἐσώϑην, from 


the older form σαύω, éoaw9nv.—MID. pinata 
τ in 5. ERA ἘΣ" 
VA POF TH ie - 
(OHIVERSITY 
ew Α 


rye: 


o 


302 ᾧ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


From σαόω are found in epic writers: (1) The regular formation 
σαώσω, ἐσάωσα, ete. (2) Pres. and Impf. with a contraction of the 
two first vowels (cadw, cade) σ ὦ ὦ, σ LG, etc. Whence has arisen 
the common form σώζω. Epic also σόω. (3) The 3 pers. Impf. (ἐσάου) 

and the Imperat.(ccov) again contracted would form ἐσῶ, 0; but 
the epic writers resolve these last forms into the double souhd (§ 105. 
ἢ. 10); yet not as usual by means of 0, but with e, just as in γαιξ-- 
τάωσα (ὃ 105. n. 10. ult.) Consequently 3 pers. Impf ἐσ ά ὦ, oa ὦ, 
Il. φ, 238. 2, 363; Imperat. o &w, Od. », 230. ρ, 595; instead of 
ξσῶζε and σῶζε. 


T : 


TAI— see TAM. || ταλάω see TAAR. 


ταγύω stretch, takes o in the Passive, and has v short in flexion.—Fut. also 
τανύω, Od. φ, 174. (§ 95. n. 12.) Pass. epic τάγυμαι. 


͵ 


ταράσσω, tr, disturb, has contracted secondary forms, viz. (1) Among 
the Attics the Present, ϑράττω, where t becomes 9 and the vowel 
is made long; hence Part. Neut. τὸ ϑρᾶττον. (2) In the epic writers 
the Perfect, but with an intransitive signification, τέτρηχα am disturbed, 
unquiet, where the Ion. ἡ takes the place of long o.*—-MID. 

ταφεῖν and ταφῆναι, see ϑάπτω and OAD, 


TA—, the apparent stem of τείνω, τέτακα, etc. (δ 101.) To asimilar theme 
_with the meaning lay hold of, take, belongs the Imperat. τὴ take, Fr. 
tiens ; kindred with which (from TAI) is the epic Part. Aor. 2 
redupl. tetay wy, taking hold of. See Lexil. 1. 41. p. 162. 
TEK— see tixto, 


τέμνω cut, F, teu, Aor. ἔτεμον, § 112. 12.—The further formation 
15 (by $ 110. 11), τέτμηκα, τέτμημαι, ἐτμήϑην. For the Subj. 
Perf. Pass. see § 98. n. 9. ι 
Less frequent is the Aor. ἕταμον. The Ionics say also in the 
Present, τάμνω ; and Homer has further the radical form téue, as Il. 7, 
707 τέμει ; see Ausf. Sprachl. § 92. n. 13.—An epic form is τμήγω, 
Aor. ἔτμηξα and ἕτμαγον, Pass. ἐτμάγην. 
τέρπω delight, in the Passive form τέρπομαι am delighted, satisfied, has in the 
epic language a threefold Aorist Pass. ἐτέρῳφϑηγ or ἐτάρφϑην, and ἐτάρ-- 
ayy; whence by transposition, (896. n.7) Subj. τραπείω for ταρπῶ---ἃἂπά 
Aor. Mid. (ἐταρπόμην) τεταρπόμην, Subj. ταρπώμεϑα. 
‘téoooucr dry intrans. Inf. Aor. 2 Pass, τερσῆναιν and τερσήμεναι.---Βαϊ τερ- 
ο΄ σαΐγω dry trans. dry up, ἐτέρσηνα, etc. regular. 


* This long vowel arises from a metathesis (δ 110,11. 2), by which ag be- 
comes ga, and then this @ unites itself with the following one into a long sound, 
just as in μαλακός---βλάξ, Blaxds (ibid. marg. note). The change of τ into & 
is occasioned by the easy union of the rough breathing with 9 in pronunciation ; but 
it still remains an anomaly, inasmuch as it does not take place in other like 
cases ; see ὃ 17.n. 2. marg. note.—Moreover from this verb is derived the Adj. 


᾿τρᾶχύς, lon. τρηχύς; rough, uneven, and not the verb from the adjective. Lexil. 
I, 52. p. 210. 


§ 114. cavaLoavue of IRREGULAR VERBS. 303 


τέτμον, ἔτετμον, meet with, find, a defective Aorist. 
τετορήσω 566 τορέω. τετραΐνω 566 τιτράω. 


τεύχω. Two kindred verbs must be here carefully distinguished : 
1) τεύχω make, a poetic word, regular, τεύξω, ἔτευξα, τέτυγμαι, ἐτύχ- 
ony, τυκτός or τεὐχτός. 
2) τυγχάνω happen, take effect, attain, F. τεύξομαι, Aor. ἔτυ- 
you (epic érvynou) Perf. τετύχηκα, ᾧ 112. 13. § 111.8. 


The idea of τυγχάνω has arisen out of the Passive of tevyw 5 hence 
in the epic writers the Passive forms τέτυγμαι, ἐτύχϑην very nearly 
coincide in sense with τυγχάνω, ἔτυχον. And the Perf. τέτευ χα, 
whose Part. in Homer has the Passive signification of τεύχω (Od. μ, 
423. see § 113. n. 4), passes over wholly into the signification of the 
Present τυγχάνω in Herodotus (III. 14. ult.) and in the xovyoé or 
later writers. 

The Perf. Pass. τέτυγμαι has also the diphthong sv; hence in Ho- 
mer 3 Plur. τετεύχαται, and Fut. 3 only τετεύξομαι, 

To τεύχω belongs, with the Ionic change of the rough mute (ὃ 16. 
n. 1. 6), the Aor. 2 τετυκεῖν, τετυχέσϑαι, prepare. The form τόσσαυν 
for τυχεῖν see in its place. 


TIE—, τετίημαι, am afflicted, Part. τετιημένος, and also τετιηώς from the 
Active form. § 97. n. 7. 


τίχτω bear, from TEK®, Fut. τέξω, comm. τέξομαι, Aor. ἔτεκον (poet. 
ἐτεκόμην), Perf. τέτοκα. . 


In later writers we find also τέτεγμαι and étéy9yv.—For the Fut. 
, τεκεῦσϑαιν see § 95. ἡ. 16. : 


τίνω see TiO. ᾿ : ἶ 

zetoaw bore, from 1 “42, τρήσω, etc. A secondary form which is 
more used by the Attics is τετραίνω, ἐτέτρηνα. The Perfect is 
always from the usual theme, τέτρηκα, τέτρημαι. 


͵ 


τυτρώσκω wound, τρώσω, etc. § 112. 10, 16. 
The simpler form τρώω, with the more general signification wyure, 
is found in Homer. Both forms are connected with togély by means 

of the metathesis TOP, TPO. § 110. 11. 


tiw honour, is in this signification only poetical, and is conjugated regu- 
larly. Part. Perf. Pass. tet by. ἐν ος. 


In the signification to pay; atone for, it is.in the Pres. and Impf.. 
solely epic ; but furnishes in prose the other tenses for the following 


form, viz. 
, , 
tivo pay, atone for, Fut. tiow Perf. reruxa Perf. Pass. téte- 


owas Aor. 1 Pass. éciodyv, The MID. τένομαι (τίσομαι, ἐτεσά- 


μήν, ἀπετισάμην) has the signification punish, avenge. The Ionic © 


form of the Present is τίννυμι, τίννυμαι, δ᾿ 112.14. , 
The vin tiyw is in the epic writers long ; in Attic writers short, ac- 


ν᾿ ; , 


304 _ $114. caTaLoguE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


cording to §112.n.8.* The Attic poets shorten also the ΝΑ syllable 
of τένυμι. See the Ausf. Sprachl. § 112. n. 9. 

τλῆναι to bear, venture, ἔτλην, τλῆναι, τλαίην, τλῆϑε, (δ 110. 6,) Fut. 
τλήσομαν PF, τέτληκα. 

From this Perfect. are derived (by § 110. 10) the forms τέτλα- 
μὲν etc. τετλάναι, Opt. tethainy, Imperat. τέτλαϑι, and the Ionic Part. 
τετλεώς ; but all these are found only in the poets, and with a Present 
meaning.—An epic secondary form is the Aor. 1 érasocu.—The 
place of the Present is supplied by ἀγέχομαι or ὑπομένω. 

TM— see téuyw and τέτμον. Tuyo see τέμγνω. 


τορεῖν prerce, thrust through, ἕτορον (§ 96. n. 5), a defective Aorist ; comp. 
τιτρώσκω.----Τπι the kindred signification, to yield a prereing sound, 
Aristophanes has the Fut. τετορήσω and the Pres. togsiw. ‘ 


tooo an Aorist synonymous with τυχεῖν, from which there oceurs in 
Pindar the Part. τόσσας and the compounds ἐπέτοσσε, ἐπιτόσ ous. 
τραπείω see τέρπω.. 


τρέπω turn. For τέτροφα and τέτραφα see § 97. n. 1. and marg. note. 


τρέφω nourish, support, F. ϑρέψω (ὃ 18. 2), Perf. τέτροφα Perf. Pass. 
τέϑραμμαι, τεϑράφϑαι (less correctly τέτράφϑαι) Aor. Pass. 
ἐτράφην, less frequently ἐϑρέφϑην. Verb. Adj. ϑρεπτός.--- ΝΠ 1. 
In the early ἴδηρσιιασα τρέφω had the immediate signification to 
become thick, stout, large (§ 113. 2); and the Passive also adopts this 
signification, as Pass. am nourished, i.e. become stout, etc, Hence in 
Homer the Aor. 2 Act. and the Aor. 2 Pass. are used synonymously, 
6. δ. ἔτραφε the same as ἐτράφη ; τραφέμεν (τραφεῖ») the same with 
the common τραφῆναι. See the Ausf. Sprachl.—The Perf. τέτροφα 
has both significations ; see § 97. n. 1. marg. note. 
τρέχω run, forms its tenses seldom from itself, as ϑροέξομαι, ἔϑρεξα, 
ὃ 18. 2; most commonly from AZPLMR, Aor. ἔδραμον, Fut. 
| Oocuovmae, Perf. δεδράμηκα (see § 111. 3), epic δέδρομα. 
TPTO— see ϑρύπτω. 
τρύχω wear away, exhaust, consume, forms its tenses from the less fre- 
quent τρυχόω ; as ἐτρύχωσα, τετρυχωμένος, etc. 
φρώγω eat, F. rowkopat.—Aorist écgayov (from TPH). 
τυγχάνω, τετυκεῖν, See under τεύχω. 


. . . . - ' ’ . 
τύπτω strike, has in Attic writers commonly τυπτήσω, TETUATHUAL, 
τυπτητέος.---ΑοΥ. Pass. ἐτύπην.---Μ 10. 


τύφω smoke, burn, trans. F. ϑύψω etc. (§ 18. 2.\—Aor. Pass. ἐτύφην. 


* It has formerly been stated that the ¢ in the flexion τίσω, ἔτεσα, from 
tivw is also made short by the Attics. This arose from a misapprehension of the 
comic metre in Aristoph. Eccl. 45. Vesp. 1424. where the « makes an anapaest. 
See the Ausf. Sprachl. under , where this correction should be made. 


§ 114, CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 305) 


ee κ 


a 


ὑπισχνέομαν see under ἔχω. 


Φ. 

Φ41--- see ἐσϑίω. 

φαΐνω intrans. shine, emit light ; ; trans. shew, point out ;—Aor. ἔφηνα, Perf. 
1 πέφαγκα. Pass. φαένομαι, with Aor. 1 lage Seip, am pointed out, de- 
nounced.—MID. —The Pass. φαίνομαι has also the signification Seem, . 
appear, Aor. 2 ἐφάγην, Fut. - “φανοῦμαι, and with Perf. 2 πέφηνα 
(δ 118.n.3). The Homeric iterative poveoxe appeared, shewed itself, is 
formed somewhat anomalously from the Pass. épovny.—The same 
poet has φάανϑεν for ἐφάνϑησαν, in the signification to appear; 
cao κραΐνω. 

DA—, φάσκω. See φημί (§ 109. I), φαύνω and DENA. It is to be ob- 
served, that the Homeric πεφήσομαι belongs sometimes to φαέγω, and 
sometimes to DEN, I shall appear, or I shall be killed. 

DENI see πέφνον. 


φέρω bear, carry, forms its tenses from entirely different roots. Fut. 
οἴσω, with an Aorist Imperat. οἷσε, for which see § 96.n. 9.—Aor. 
1 and 2, ἤνεγκα, ἤνεγκον, from the former of which are in 
use the Indicative and those persons of the Jmperat. which have 
α in the termination; from the latter principally the Infin. and 
Participle; Perf. ἐνήνοχα (comp. ᾧ 97. n. 1, 2) Perf. Pass. év7- 
veyuot Aor. Pass. yvéy9nv.—F ut. Pass. ἐνεχϑήσομαι or οἰσϑήσο- 
μαι. Verb. Adj. οἰστέος, οἰστός, poet. pegrd¢.—MID. 

The Ionics have an Aor. ἤνεικα, ἐνεῖκαι, Pass. ἡνείχϑην. The, 
theme ἐγείκω occurs as Present in Hesiod α. 440, cuvevedxetos.—lt is 
incorrect to consider éveyzsiy as a compound with ἐν; it has arisen 
by means of a reduplication, like ἤγαγον, ἀλαλκεῖν, etc. (ὃ 85. n. 2,) 
from a theme EI‘K, from which again ENEKN, ENEIK are 
lengthened | forms, like A4K2, AAEKN; see Lexil. I. 63. 23.—Ho- 
mer has in the Jmperat. Plur. péote—F or pogsiy see § 112. 9, and n. 
1; and for gogjyor see ὃ 105. n. 16. 

Infrequent forms coming from οἴσω, are Infin. Aor.1 ἀνῷσαν and 
Verb. Adj. ἀνώϊστος in Herodotus (I. 157. VI. 66), where the w has 
no grammatical basis; and the Perf. προοῖσται in Lucian (Paras. 2), 


where the diphthong ov remains unaffected by the augment, according 
to ὃ 84. n. 9, ᾿ 


| For φρέω see below in its place. ἡ + iti, 
φεύγω flee, F. φεύξομαι and φευξοῦμαι, Aor. ἔφυγον, Perf. πέφευγα, 
Verb. Adj. φευκτέος (φυχτὸς Hom.) 
Homer has also the Part. Pf. Pass. πεφυγμένος with active sense, 
escaped ; and a Part. Perf. πεφυζότες Jugitives ; comp. pita ἢ i 
φϑάνω, απι beforehand, anticipate. For the quantity of the a, see § 112. 
n. 8. Yor. 1 ἔφϑασα and Aor. 2 epony, pio, φϑήναι, poas, 
δ᾽ 110.6. Fut. φϑήσομαν Perf. ἐφϑάκα. 


306 . § 114. caTaLocuE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


In Il x. 346, παραφϑαίησι (for --αἰὴ) is a rare instance where the - 
3 pers. Opt. takes ov; comp. § 103. V.13. § 106. n. 10. See also the 
Ausf. Sprachl, p. 537. marg.-note. 


φϑείρω corrupt, ruin, is conjugated regularly ; but the Perf. 2 ἔφϑορα, 
διέφϑορα, has in Ionic and later writers the signification am ruined ; 
Attic, have ruined, the same as ἔφϑαρκχὰ. 


Homer has Fut. pPéoow.—F ut, 2 Mid. διαφϑαρέομαν intrans. oc- 
curs in Ionic writers. 
_ gdiow, a verb which in this Present form is only Homeric, with both 
transitive and intransitive signification : consume, destroy (Il. σ, 446), 
and perish (Od. 8, 368). The other forms are more usual, but still 
on the whole more poetic. Fut. and Aor. φϑίσω, ἔφϑισα, are sim- 
ply transitive. — On the other hand the derived — 
Present φϑίνω 
is commonly intransitive, and borrows its tenses from the Mid. of 
ss gtiw, viz. Fut. φϑίσομαι Pf. ἔφϑιμαιν Plupf. ἐφϑίμην, which last 
'* form is at the same time syncopated Aorist (ὃ 110.7 and ἢ. 4), and 
therefore has the other moods, viz. Opt. φϑίμην, to, tro, (Od. x, 51. 
1, 330. see § 107. n. III. 6. note,) Infin. φϑίσϑαν Part. φϑίμενος 
Subj. φϑίωμαι, shortened φϑέομαι, φϑέεται. 

The ὁ in φϑίνω (§ 112. n. 8), as well as in φϑίέσω, ete. is in the 
epic writers always long; in Attic writers, short; ἔφϑιεμαι, ete. is 
everywhere short. 

φιλέω love. Instead of the regular Aorist from this verb, Homer has the 
Middle form ἐφίλατο, Imper. pido, with long ὦ, (a Deponent from the 
simpler theme ®L42,).where the long » comes from the nature of 
the Aorist; see § 101. 4. 


φράζω say, indicate, has in the earlier poets an Aorist πέφραδον, ἐπέφρα- 
δον, Inf. πεφραδέειν, and a Perf. Pass. πέφραδμαι. 


\ 


φρέω, used only in compounds, ἐχφοεῖν, εἰσφρεῖν, διαφρεῖν, to let out, 
in, through, F. φρήσω etc. — Imp. εἴσφρες (ἢ 110. 6).—MID. 


φρίσσω, φρίττω, shudder, F. φρίξω etc. Pf. πέφρῖκα from OP/K2 
(whence also the subst. polx etc.) See ὁ 92. 8. 2, 

@TZ— see φεύγω. 

φύρω mix, knead, old Fut. φύρσω, ἔφυρσα, common φυράσω etc. Ion. 
φυρήσω. Perf. Pass. πέφυρμαν and πεφύραμαι. ---- MID. 


φύω generate, produce, F. gvow, A. épvoo:—But the Perf. πέφυκα and 
- the Aor. 2 ἔφυν, φῦναν Subj. pow Part. φύς (δ 110. 6) have the 
Passive or intransitive signification to be produced, come into exist- 
ence, arise, for which in the Pres. and Fut. we find φύομαι, pvoo- 
μαι. 

Writers not Attic employ instead of ivan, pus, etc. an Aor, Pass. 
φυῆναι, ἱρὰ etc.—For the Homeric forms πεφύασι, πεφυώς, see 

δ 97. n. 73; and for the Opt. φύην, see ὃ 110. 6 and marg. note. 


§ 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 307 


X, 


χάζω comm. χάζομαι, yield, give way, is conjygated regularly, but has in 
Homer an Aor. 2 with the reduplication and a change of y into x ; 
κεχαδέσϑαι. Butthe Act. κεκαδεῖν (κεκαδών) with a peculiar Fut. xexo- 
δήσω, has in Homer the special transitive signification to deprive of, 
which is strictly the causative sense facio cedere.— The form κεκαδή- 
σομαῦν see in κήδω; and ἔχαδον in χανδάνω. 


χαΐίνω see χάσκω. 


χαίρω rejoice, F. χαιρήσω, hoe (from the Pass.) ἐχάρην, and from this 
again a Perfect with emphatic Present signification, ato an or 
κεχάρημαι exult, § 111. 3. 
From the regular formation there is still found in the βού Perf. 
Pass. χέχαρμαι, Aor. 1 Mid. ἐχηράμην, and Aor. 2 with redup. κεχαρό-- 
pny. — The Fut. χαρήσομαν belongs to the later writers ; Homer has 
κεχαρήσω and —ouot. 


χανδάνω grasp, contain, Aor. ἔχαδον (§ 112. 13). — Perf. χκέχανδα οἷν ᾿ 


with the Pres.) Fut. χείσομαν Od. σ. 17, as if from ΧΕΝ Δ, (comp. 
σπένδω onsiow, and πέπονθα πείσομαι). 


᾿ χάσχω open, gape, forms from the Pres. χαίνω (which is not used by 
earlier writers) Aor. éyavov, F. mepavier Pf. κέχηνα am open, 
ape. : 

χέζω, Fut. χεσοῦμαι, Aor. ἔχεσα and ἔχεσον. Perf. κέχοδα § 97. 4. a. ¢. 

zelooune see χανδάνω. 


yéw pour, Fut. also yew, χεῖς, yet, Fut. Mid. yeouoe (see § 95. n. 12. 


and Ausf. Sprachl. Addit. to yém); Aor. 1 ἔχεα (§ 96. n. 1), ἔχεας, 


ἔχεε (v), Inf. χέαν Imp. yéov, yeato, etc. Perf. xeyuna Perf. 
Pass. κέχὑμαν Aor. Pass. ἐχύϑην, § 98. n. 4.—MID. 


The forms yetow, ἔχευσα are not usual; although they were the 
original ones, as is shewn by the subst. χεῦμα, and the forms of flex- 
ion ἐχύϑην, ἔχευα etc. See ὃ 95. n. 9 and marg. note. , 

The epic language has Aor. 1 ἔχευα, whence the Subj.-vevw passes 
over into the Future signification Od. 6, 222; see § 199, n. 8. — 
Aor. Pass. syne. ἐχύμην ete. (δ 110. 7.) 


χφαισμεῖν to help, é ἔχραισμον, a defective Aorist ; bide a arose Fut.’ yoo 


σμήσω, ἐχραίσμησα. ὃ 111. 8. 


χράω. From this verb there exist five different forms of conjugation and 


flexion, with their respective significations; all with the contraction 
into 7 in the common language, Ionic into ἃ, contrary to the usual 
analogy. AN 105. η: 5.) 

1) χράω utter an oracle is regular : F. yonow etc. Pass. πέχρη-- 
σμαι, ἐχρήσϑην. The contraction into 7 see in Soph. Elect. 35. 
Oed. Col. 87. 


J 


308 § 114. CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 


2) κίχρημι. lend, is declined like ‘ornuc,— χρήσω, ἔχρησα. 
MID. κέχραμαε borrow, χρήσομαι. 

3) χράομαι use, χρῇ (2 Sing. ) χρῆται, χρῆσϑαι, etc. the rest is 
regular. Aor. ἐχρησάμην, Perf. κέχρημαι δ Verb. Adj. 
χρηστός, χρηστέον. 

The Ionic forms of the Pres. and Impf. occur partly with ἃ and 

partly with 8, see in ὃ 105. n. 8, 15. 
A) χρή impersonal, it behooves, is necessary, oportet, follows in 
part the verbs in we: Inf. yonvar Opt. χρείη Subj. yon Par- 
licip. (to) χρεών, Impf. ἐχρῆν t or χρῆν (never ἔχρη).--- αὶ. 
χρήσει. 

5) ἀπόχρη impers. it is enough, sufficient ; the form ἀποχρᾷ is 
not Attic ; Pl. ἀποχρώσιν Inf. ἀποχρῆν Part. ἀποχρῶν, wou, 
ov.—mpf. anéyon.—F. ἀποχρήσει etc. 

poprveue colour, F. χρώσω etc. (δ 112. 14.) Perf. Pass. HELOWO MEL, 


χώννυμι heap up, dam (§ 112. 14); in earlier writers we find the regu- 
lar simple form, viz. χόω, Inf. your,—Fut. ywou etc. Perf. Pass. 


, HEL OO MOL, 
This must not be confounded with the epic χώομαν am angry, 
᾿ ἐχωσάμην. 
wow see § 105. π. 5. 
ψύχω --- ἐψύγην, see § 100. n. 8. 
82. 


ὠϑέω thrust, push, has the syllabic augment (ἐώϑουν, § 84. ῃ. 5), 
and forms Fut. ὥϑήσω and (from 20) dow — ἔωσα, ὦσαι, 
ἕωσμαι, etc. 


ὠνέομαι buy, has also the syllabic augment (ἐωνούμην etc. § 84. n. 5). 
Instead of the regular Aorist of this verb (ἐωνησάμην, ὠνησαμην) 
the Attics employed the forms ἐπριάμην, πρίασϑαι, etc. which see 
above in their place. | 


m This Perf. has in epic writers the signification I need, want. 


+ See further on this Particip. ὃ 57.3. Since this Impersonal comes from yedo, 
this Part. is to be explained by the Ionic change of ao into ew (δ 27. n. 10); 
while the accent is still anomalous. And since the Ionics generally transformed 
verbs in dw into ἕω, we can thence account for the ¢ in the Opt. χρείη; comp. 
the marg. note under wurde. 


} This anomalous accentuation, instead of ἔχρην ( Ἢ Ω. ἃ. ὃ 108. n. I. 1), is 
founded on ancient usage ; comp. Eustath. ad Od. n, 6 


¢ 


~ 


ὃ 115. pREPosITIONS, ADVERBS: 309 


PARTICLES. 
§ 115. Prepositions and Adverbs. 


1. The Particles are said to be indeclinable, because they are not capa- 
ble of either declension or conjugation. ‘All therefore that relates to 
their formation and derivation, belongs properly to the sections on the 
formation of words (§§ 118, 119). Some points, however, in which 
the particles stand in close connexion with the flexion of other parts of 
speech, or in which several of their forms have a mutual relation to one 
another (as comparison and the correlatives), or finally certain minor 
changes occasioned by position or a regard to euphony,—all these, as | 
being something analogous to ordinary flexion, can be better separated 
from that general head, and ee together here under a special 
point of view. bg 

2. Under the general idea of particles we distinguish first the Prepo- | 
SITIONS, viz. the following eighteen : 


ἀμφὶ, ἀνὰ, ἀντὶ, ἀπο, διὰ, εἰς, ἐν, ἐξ, ἐπὶ, κατὰ, μετὰ, παρὰ, περὶ, 
πρὸ, πρὸς, σὺν, ὑπὲρ, ὑπό. 

These have been called by way of distinction the “ Prepositions of the 
Greek language.” We call them the primitive Prepositions. With 
these alone are verbs compounded in the simplest manner, i.e. with- 
out change (ὃ 121. 2); which is not the case with other particles, al- 
though they may be just as much prepositions, e. g. ἄνευ, ἕνεκα, ἐγγὺς, 
ὡς, etc. — Whatever relates further to these primitive prepositions in 
respect to form, will be exhibited along with the other particles, in § 117. 
For the construction of the prepositions with cases, see in the Syn- 
tax, § 147. 

3. The most common form of Apverss is the ending ὡς, which εἰὰν 
be regarded as a termination properly belonging to the formation of 
the adjective; since it is appended only to adjectives and participles. 
There are indeed few adjectives to which this form is not attached. 
The termination ὡς takes exactly the place of the case-endings, so that — 
it is only necessary to change the ending of the Nom. or Gen. og, 
into ὡς. Where the Nom. ending ος has the tone, the adverbial end- _ 
ing retains it as a circumflex. E.¢g. : 

φίλος, φίλως" σοφός, σοφῶς 
σώφρων (σωφρονος), σωφρόνως" χαρίεις, ἕντος, χαριέντως" εὐ- 
vs, ἕος, εὐθέως" Part. λυσιτελῶν useful, -ovvros, λυσιτελούν- 
τῶς 
ἀληϑής, ἐος contr. οὖς, ἀληϑέως contr. ἀληϑῶς. 
40 ͵ 


σα. 


310 ᾧ 115. apverss. 


Note 1. In strictness, all adverbs which come from adjectives in ἧς 
G. 20s, ought to have the circumflex on the ending we, as arising from 
contraction (gé#¢—@s). Nevertheless, some are paroxytones, and are 
consequently formed without contraction from the similarly accented 
Nominative, e.g. ξυήϑης, εὐήϑως 5 comp. § 121, 9. 1. § 49. n. 4.—The ad- 
verbs formed from adjectives in -voo¢, -vous, follow the same analogy as 
their primitives in declension (§ 36. note); consequently from εὔνους ---- 
_ εὑγόως εὔνως ; but better εὐνοϊκῶς, according to the next note. 


Nore 2. Adjectives of one ending, which fluctuate as it were be- 
tween substantive and adjective, in order to form the adverb in ὡς, assume 
first an ordinary adjective termination ; thus νομαδικῶς, βλακικῶς ; comp. 


§ 63. n. 3. § 66. 4. marg. note. 
4. Certain cases and forms’ of nouns, by virtue of their inherent pow- 
er which will be explained in the Syntax, and also by ellipsis, often sup- 
ply the place of adverbs; and when such a form occurs in this manner 
particularly often, it passes entirely for an adverb. E.g. the Dative : 
κομιδῇ lit. with care; hence, very, very much, 
σπουδῇ lit. with zeal, with pains-taking ; hence, hardly, scarcely. 


Further a number of feminine adjectives, in which the idea ὁδῷ from 4 
ὁδὸς way, manner, was originally implied; e. g. 
πεζῇ on foot, κοινὴ in common, ἰδίᾳ privately, δημοσίᾳ publicly, 
etc. Comp. ἄλλῃ and the like, § 116. n. 7. 
So the Accusative : ; 
ἀρχήν and τὴν ἀρχήν, lit. in the beginning, foundation, aS : 
hence, wholly, entirely. 
προῖκα gratis, from moos gift. 
μακρὰν (sc, ὁδόν) far. 
See also note 3.—The Neuter of an adjective likewise forms an adverbial! 
Accusative, when it stands, either in the Sing.or Plural, instead of an ad- 
verb. ‘This usage nevertheless, except in the comparative and superla- 
tive (see no. 5), is for the most part peculiar to the poets (§ 128. n. 4); 
though in some few. adjectives it is the common usage in prose; e. g. 
ταχύ swift, μικρόν or wixoe little. 

Nore 3. In the manner mentioned in the preceding paragraph have 
arisen many particles, whose radical form is either obsolete, or is a noun, 
or occurs only in the poets. Datives of this kind are then usually written 
without « subscript; 6. g, εἰκῆ in vain, διχὴ twofold ; comp. § 116. Here 
belong also the Genitives ἑξῆς in order, successively, ἀγχοῦ near, δμοῦ at 
the same time (epic adj. 0166) 5 the neuter forms πλησίον near (poet. adj. 


πλησίος), σήμερον to-day, αὔριον to- morrow ; and particularly many in a, 
as μάλα much, κάρτα very, δίχα in two, τάχα ‘swift, perhaps, ete. 

Nore 4. When, besides the neuter forms εὐϑύ and iv, we find also 
εὐθύς and ἰϑύς as adverbs (δ 117.'1), it is only accidentally that this ad- 
verbial form coincides with the Nom. Masc. of the adjective ; since here, 


δ 115. apverss. 911 


as well as in ἐγγύς, the ¢ belongs to the adverbial form, just as it does in 
ἀμφὶς from ἀμφί, μέχρις for μέχρι, ἀτρέμας for ἀτρέμα. 
' Nore 5. Some adverbs are real cases of nouns with a preceding prepo- 
sition ; 6. g. 
. παραχρῆμα lit. “along with the thing itself,” hence, on the spot, im- 
mediately. 
node and καϑάπερ, for καϑ' ἅ, καϑ' ἅπερ, so as, like. 
διό, for δὲ 6, on account of which, wherefore ; but διότι because comes 
from διὰ τοῦτο, ὅτι----. 
προύργου, for πρὸ ἔργου, lit. “for the good of the thing” (ὃ 147 πρό), 
i. 6. suitably, appropriately. 
Here also belong some forms, of which the noun by itself is not in use; 6, g. 
ἐξαίφνης suddenly. Some words which have thus become compounded, 
exhibit slight variations in orthography and accentuation ; as ἐχποδών out 
of the way, aside, for ἔκ ποδὼν ; ἐμποδών in the way, which is at the same 
time syntactically irregular for ἐν ποσὶν ; ἐπισχερώ successively, by turns, 
for -@, from a Nom. oysg0s. 
5. In regard to Comparison, it is the almost exclusive usage that 
the Neuter Sing. of the Comparative, and 
the Neuter Plur. of the Superlative 
of adjectives, serve at the same time as forms of comparison for the 
corresponding adverbs; e.g. σοφώτερον ποιεῖς “thou actest more 
wisely ;” αἴσχιστα διετέλεσεν “he spent his time most infamously.” — 
The degrees of the adverb are less frequently formed, by appending the 
termination ὡς to the degrees of the adjective. This last is done more 
especially, when the idea of manner is to be made conspicuous; e.g. 
καλλιόνως not simply more elegantly, but in a more elegant manner ; 
hence μεγάλως in great style, can only take the comparative μειζόνως. 
6. An older adverbial ending is w instead of ως ; hence οὕτως and 
οὕτω (δ 26.4). This ending is found particularly in some adverbs de- 
rived from obsolete adjectives, as ἄφνω suddenly, ὀπίσω behind; and 
in some formed from prepositions, as ἕξω without, ἔσω or εἴσω within, 
ἄνω, κάτω, πρόσω and πόῤῥω. These all form their degrees of com- 
parison in the same manner, i.e. in ὦ, as ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω. With 
the same ending are formed degrees from some other particles; e. g. ἄπο 
far from (δ 117. n. 8) ἀπωτάτω very far off; ἔνδον within, ἐνδοτάτω ; 
éxas far, ἑκαστέρω ; ἀγχοῦ near, ἀγχοτάτω; pwoxgay far, μακροτέρω. 
7. All particles which take the degrees of comparison, without 
being derived from adjectives in actual use, observe the analogy of 
the adjective in forming their degrees; as ἐγγύς near, ἐγγυτέρω or ἐγγύ- 
régov, etc.—or éyyiov, éyyvore. Here too the same peculiarities and 


* These two particles, with the Doric πόρσω which lies between them, are 
strictly synonymous ; but in usage πρόσω signifies forwards, and ἡτόῤῥω (πόρ-- 
ow), far. ; : 


΄ 


/ 


312 § 116. corRELATIVE PARTICLEs. 


anomalies occur as in adjectives; see note 6. Compare especially the 
following with the forms in § 67. 3, and § 68. 


ayy near, ἄσσον ἄγχιστα 
noha very, μᾶλλον μάλιστα, 
and the adverbial forms which belong to the comparative ἥσσων, viz. 


᾿ ἧσσον, ἧττον, less, ἥκιστα least, 
for which see § 68. 2. 


Note 6. As peculiarities of the forms of comparison, we ‘may notice 
also the following : 


πέρα (δ 117. 1)---περαιτέρω or περαΐτερον 
πλησίον πον πλησιαΐτερον and --ἔστερον 
γύχτωρ πον γυχτιαΐτερον 

προύργου --- προυργιαΐτερον. 


Further, from ἐθύ straight forwards, the Homeric ἰϑύντατα instead of ἰϑύ-- 
toto; comp. the marg. note to ἱδρύω in the Catal? ὃ 114.—That some such 
adverbs, in their forms of comparison, actually become adjectives, has al- 
ready been remarked, § 69, 2, and marg. note. 

Nore 7. Some forms of verbs have, in common usage, become par- 
ticles, and chiefly Interjections. We have already mentioned εἶεν, p. 
233. marg. note; ὥφελον, in the Anom. ὀφείλω, and see ὃ 150: τῆ, in 
Anom. TA—; ἰδού ἴο ! in Anom. δράω. An old Imperat. of the same 
meaning is ἡνίδε, by apoc. ἢνί and ἤν. So ἄγε, φέρε, ἴϑι, ἄγρει, all signify 
well! come on !—See also ἀμέλει § 150.—All such Imperatives retain com- 
monly the form of the Sing. even when addressed to several persons ; 
with the exception of ἴτε and ἀγρεῖτε. 

Note 8, The adverb δεῦρο hither, stands also as Imperative for come 
, hither. In this case it has a Plural when applied to several persons, δεῦτε, 
which is explained as an abbreviation from δεῦρ ize. This last phrase is 
sometimes found fully written, e. g. Aristoph. Eccles. 882. 


§ 116. Correlative Particles. 
' (Compare the correlative Adjectives, §79.) 


1. Several of the relations of place are designated by annexing sylla- 
bles or syllabic endings to words. So the following, viz. in answer to 
the question 

Whence? — ev e.g. ἄλλοϑεν from another place 


Whither?— σὲ -- ἄλλοσε to another place 
Where? — 8  —cdhode in another place. 


' The vowel before these terminations has some variations, and can 
best be learned by observation; e.g. ᾿“ϑήνηϑεν, οὐρανόϑεν, ayoode 
in the field, norégw on which of the two sides? ποτέρωσε to which of 
the two sides or places? ἑτέρωϑι on the other side. The accent is com- 
monly retained on the syllable where the radical word has it; or as 


§ 116. corrELATIVE PARTICLES. 313 


near it as possible; except that words with o before the ending, are 
chiefly paroxytone, e. g. πόντος, movro dev. 


Note 1. But those from οἶκος, πᾶς, ἄλλος, ἔνδον, ἐκτός, follow the gen- 
Y >” 3» 
eral rule ; as οἴκοϑεν, πάντοσε, ἄλλοϑι, ἔκτοϑεν. 


‘2. In answer to the question Whither? the 
Enclitic de 
is also appended ; and always upon the form of the Accusative without 
change; 68. g. οὐρανόνδε to heaven, ἅλαδε (from ag) to or into the sea, 
ἕρεβόσδε from τὸ ἔρεβος, etc. 
Nore 2. In οἴκαδε home from οἶκος, and φύγαδε to flight from φυγή, 


the « comes from metaplastic forms (ὃ 56.5) of the Accusative of Decl. 
III, like those in § 56. n. 8.---- ᾿ 


᾿᾿ϑήναζε, Θήβαζε 
the ὃ (in dz) has passed over with the o of the Acc. Plur. into ¢ (by § 22. 
n. 2). Still some words have assumed the ¢ without being in the Plural, 
as ϑύραζε," Ολυμπίαζα. 

Nore 8. Homer sometimes joins to the Accus. in this form an adjec- 
tive; e.g. Κόωνδ᾽ εὑναιομένην Il. & 255; and he even repeats this local 
ending like an ordinary case-ending in ὃνδὲ δόμονδε to his house, from ὃς 
50uog.—When however Homer in ἄϊδόσδε appends this δὲ to the Genitive, 
it arises from the fact that this Genitive commonly stands in an ellipsis; 
εἰς ἄϊδος sc. δόμον. (δ 182. n. 9.) 

3. In answer to the question Where? the ending σύν or ov is append- 
ed to many names of cities, so that it becomes σὺ after a consonant, 
and aov after a vowel; the accent of the radical word being retained ; 
6. g. 5 eel eas at eee . 

“ϑηνησι, Πλαταιᾶσιν, Ολυμπίασι 
from ᾿“49ῆναι, Ππλαταιαί, ᾿Ολυμπία." Some other words receive oz, ἃ8᾽ 
‘Tod uot, ἸΠυϑοῖ, Meyagot 
from ᾿᾿Ισϑμός, Πυϑώ, τὰ Méyaoe. This ending always has the cir- 
_cumflex, except in οἴκου at home.t 


* The ending yov very often has the ὁ subscript; and ᾿“4ϑηήνησε is then ex- 
plained as the Ion. Dative. But the ending doe shows that this orthography is 
false. Nevertheless, these endings probably come from the Dative Plural ; and 
the form in this special usage having been somewhat changed in pronunciation, 
has in this manner (as has also the ending ate) passed over to names in the Sin- 


gular. See the reverse of this in the next marg. note.— Ολυμστεάσε with short « 
is from ἡ ᾿Ολυμπιάς. : 


+ This form is the actual Dative of Πυϑώ, and in the other instances it is the - 
Dative of Dec. II, with the ending somewhat changed ; which then was appended 
to Plural names (Méyaga), and to other words, as ἐνταυϑοῖ from ἐνταῦϑα (see Text 
8). We must therefore not consider these forms as correlatives of the following 
interrogative ποῖ whither ; although this very ἐνταυϑοῖ sometimes actually stands 
in answer to the question whither (e.g. Aristoph. Lys. 568. Plut. 608); where 


314 § 116. coRRELATIVE PARTICLEs. 


4, To the three preceding relations of place, the three following com- 

mon interrogatives likewise have reference : - 

ποϑὲν; whence? moi’; whither? nov; where? 
of which however only the first coincides as to form with the endings 
exhibited in no. 1 above ; though the poets have also πόϑι and πόσε, 
see note 4. On the other hand these and some other interrogatives, of 
which the most common are 

move and πηνίχα; when? 

πῶς; how? 

πῆ ; in what direction? in what way 7 
stand with their immediate correlatives (indefinite, demonstrative, rela- 
tive) in the same analogy as we have seen above in the correlative ad- 
jectives, § 79. 


Interrog. Indefin. Demonstr. Relat. 

: all enclitic. simple. compound. 
πότε; ποτέ τοτὲ ὅτε --- ὁπότε 
ποῦ; που οὗ — ὅπου 
ποῖ; ποί NW οἷ — ὅπου 
ποϑεν; ποϑέν τοϑεν ὅϑεν — ὁπόϑεν 
πῶς; πώς TOS ὡς cas ὅπως 
siti i me τῇ : Hh ᾿ τὰ προ . 
πηνίχα; ὃ τηνίχα ἡνίκα — ὁπηνίκα 


~ 


The significations follow the analogy of § 79. Thus 6. g. ποτέ at 
some time, once; modev from some place, etc. — Further, as the post- 
positive article ὅς, besides the compound ὅστες, is also strengthened by 
πὲρ (ὅσπερ, etc.) so the same thing occurs with several of the rela- 
tives which belong here; as ὥσπερ, ἧπερ, οὗπερ. 

Note 4. Of poetic forms we further adduce the following ; viz. for 
ποῦ etc. the complete series : 

πόϑι; ποϑὶ τόϑι ὅϑι and onodt. 

So for ποῖ and ὅποι, --- πόσε, ὅὁπόσε; which forms stand in analogy with 
their more definite correlatives (ἄλλοϑεν ete.) in Text 1. ( 

5. The Demonstratives in the above table are the original simple ones, 
like 0, ἡ, τὸ among the correlative adjectives (δ 79. 5). But of 
these, only τότε then, at that time, is in common use; the others occur 
only in certain phrases, or in the poets. Moreover instead of rw¢ we 
sometimes find ὡς as a less frequent demonstrative; and as such it 
takes the acute accent, to distinguish it from the relative form we. 

6. There are some other demonstratives, which instead of having the 
initial τ, come from an entirely different root, and have a more definite 


sense. Such are 


however it is to be observed, that in common discourse the correlatives of the 
different interrogatives were very easily exchanged ; see the note to Soph. Phi- 
loct. 481. See further on ἐνταυϑοῖ the Ausf. Sprachl. § 116. n. 28. 


* For the « subscript in this series, see n. 8. 


§ 116. corrELATIVE PARTICLES. 315 


éxet (poet. ἐκεῖθι) there, ἐκεῖϑεν from thence, ἐκεῖσε thither ; 
answering - consequently to the interrogatives ποῦ; πό- 
dev; and 201;—TIonic and poetic forms are also χεῖϑι, 
— KEL EY, κεῖσε. 
δεῦρο hither, answering consequently to ποῖ; 
vuy now, answering to πότε; 
To these may be added 
ἔνϑα here, there, ἔνϑεν hence, thence, 
which have this peculiarity, that they are at the same time relatives, 
synonymous with ov and ὅϑεν. ‘They are usual in prose. 

7. Of the demonstratives hitherto adduced, five exhibit the two- 
fold strengthened form described in § 79.5. Hence arise the common 
demonstratives of prose in the following manner. For the accent 
see § 14. n. 8. . 


τηνίχα τηνικάδε τηνικαῦτα ἱ 
ἕνϑα ἐνθαδεὲ ἐνθαῦτα lon, — ἐνταῦϑα Att. 
ἔνϑεν ἐνθένδε ἐνθεῦτεν Ion. — ἐντεῦϑεν Att. 
τῇ τῇδε ταύτῃ 

ὡς δεῖ οὕτως οἵ οὕτω. 


On the two last series see note 7. 
8. Some of these demonstratives assume in addition the 
Demonstrative +. (δ 80.) 


E. g. - οὑτωσί --- (from ovrmoiy see ὃ 80. n. 3.) 
: ἐντευϑενί, ἐνθαδί, wot 
δευρὶ from δεῦρο 
-vuvi from νῦν. 
᾿βνταῦϑα forms in this manner not only ἐνταυϑί, but also more com- 
monly ἐνταυϑοῖ; comp. p. 313. marg. note. 
9. The relatives here, as in adjectives (§ 80), in order to strengthen 
the idea of generality, append the particles 
οὖν and δηποτὲ. 
E. g. ὁπουοῦν wheresoever, ὁπωσοῦν (and with τὲ inserted, oxw- 
στιοῦν), — ὁπουδήποτε, etc. 


* This demonstrative-ending δὲ is of course not to be confounded with that 
responding to the question whither (Text 2 above). ‘The two however were 
sometimes confounded even by the ancients, and in this very word ἐνϑάδε ; see 
the note to Soph. Philoct. 481. 


t For τῇδε, ὧδε, ete. see note 7. Inthe last column ταύτῃ and οὕτως are 
stronger forms for τῇ and ὥς, derived from οὗτος» just as Τῇ and ὡς are formed 
from 0. The forms tyimaira and ἐνθαῦτα however are evidently formed from 
their roots τηγνίκα, ἔνϑα, after the analogy of τά--ταῦτα, τόσα---τοσαῖτα, etc. 
and then in the Attic and common ἐνταῦϑα there is a transposition of the rough 
and smooth mutes. (δ 18.n.1.) in the same manner ἐντεῦϑεν is readily ex- 
plained; for precisely as the ending Sa becomes ϑαῦτα, so also Dev becomes 
ϑεῦτεν ; and thence by the same transposition comes ἐντεῦϑεν. Comp. ὃ 79. n. 3. 


316 δ 116. corRELATIVE PARTICLES. 


Nore 5. Just as the corresponding adjective forms (§ 79) give rise 
to still other correlatives, by appending their characteristic endings to 
words expressing general ideas (such as ἀλλοῖος, παντοῖος etc. § 79. π. 2), 
so likewise do the adverbs, e.g. ἄλλοτε another time ; ἄλλῃ (corr. to inter- 
rog. πῆ) in another way, manner ; πάντως, πάντη (to πῶς, 1H) in every way, 
wholly ; αὑτοῦ, αὐτόϑι (to ποῦ, σόϑι) in the same place, there, etc. — Very 
commonly however the adverbs derived in this manner from ἄλλος, πολύς, 


πᾶς and ἕχαστος, are lengthened by inserting the letters az; e. g. 


' ἀλλαχοῦ elsewhere, πανταχοῦ everywhere, πολλαχοῦ in many places, 


΄- 


ἑκασταχόϑεν from every quarter, ἀλλαχῆ, etc. 


Nore 6. In most of the above relations, there are also formed cor- 
responding negatives, (e. g. from πότε and πῶς,) just as from tis, mostly 
by composition : | 

᾿ οὔποτε, μήποτε, never ; οὔὕπως, μήπως, by no means. 
‘ These latter forms in Homer drop their ¢ before a consonant, οὔπω, μήπω, 
Il. y, 306. Q, 422. They | must then not be confounded with the adverb of 
time, πώ;---οὔπω, μήπω, not yet. — Most commonly however the negatives 
are formed from the old adjective οὐδαμός, μηδαμός, none: 


οὐδαμῶς by no means ; οὐδαμῇ, οὐδαμοῦ, οὐδαμόϑεν, ete. 


Nore 7. It is evident that the simple demonstrative and relative forms 
come from the prepositive and postpositive articles, of which they are in 
part actual cases, as τῇ, 7, ov, and so also οἵ for ᾧ (comp. p. 313. marg. 
notes); and that the others are adverbial derivatives from the same articles, 
formed in a particular manner. Indeed, just as ὡς, we, and τώς are ad- 
verbs of quality from ὅς, 6, τό, so ὅϑεν, ots, are likewise formed from them 
with other endings.* In like manner the forms ταύτῃ, τῇδε, οὕτως, ἄλλῃ, 
ἄλλως, come immediately from other pronouns, and οὕτω, ὧδε (from dds) 
have the adverbial form -w instead of ὡς (ὃ 115. 6). From ἐκεῖνος also, 
in answer to the questions πῇ and στῶς, the forms éxsiy yand ἐκείνως 
~ are used. The forms ποῦ, πῇ, πῶς, etc. and others of which no Nom. is 
extant, as πάντη, πανταχοῦ, etc. are formed after the analogy of the pre- 
coding! ; 

Note 8. Thee subscript under ἡ is improperly written (ὃ 115. n.3) 
in those forms of which no actual Nominative, as root, is extant; conse- 
quently πῆ, oxy, πάντη, ἀλλαχῆ ; on the other hand, ἧ, τὴ; ταύτῃ, ἄλλῃ. 
Many however, for the sake of uniformity, write the former in the same 
manner. 

Note 9. The forms τότε and ὅτε, when they stand repeated with 
μέν and δέ, (sometimes also when they stand only once,) for ποτὲ μέν — 
ποτὲ δὲ, sometimes — sometimes (§ 149 μέν), take also the accentuation of 
ποτέ; thus τοτὲ μέν, --- τοτὲ δέ, δτὲ, ete. 

Nore 10. Drazecrs, a. Epic writers double the a for the sake of 
the metre, in ὅππως, ὅππότξ, etc. ; 

δ The Ionics have x instead of π in all the above forms; 6. g. κῶς, 
χοῦ, ὅκως, δκόϑεν, οὔκω, 566 § 16. ἡ. 1. 6. 
c. The Dorics for πότε, ὅτε, etc. have πόκα, ὅκα, etc. ibid. , 


* With the ending dev compare the Genitives of some pronouns, which end in 
the same manner, ὃ 72. n. 6, 5. "ἢ 


νυ 


Says Ψ; 


§ 117. PARTICLES.—MUTATION. SFE 


d. Instead of the ending dey the poets have the shorter form de, 
e.g. ἄλλοϑε, ἔχτοσϑε. 


4. For ἣ an epic form is ἦχι ΟΥ̓ ἦχι. 
§ 117. Mutations of some other Particles. 


A. In the Letters. 


1. We have already treated of the euphonic changes in the forms ov, 
οὐκ, οὐχ, and ἐξ, ἔκ, in § 26; and have there stated that some 
particles assume for the sake of euphony, a moveable final » or ¢. We 
remark further here, that in some of these last, there occurs also by this 
means a difference of sense. So the following : 


πέραν, trans, beyond, on the other side, chiefly of rivers and other waters. 
On the other hand πέρα, ultra, over, etc. where the object is con- 
ceived as a bound, limit. Both are used as prepositions and as 
adverbs. See Lexil. 11. 69. 

ἀντικρύ and ἄντικρυς, with different accentuation. Homer uses the first 
form in all the significations. But in regard to Attic usage the 
Grammarians give the rule, that ἀντικρύ is to be employed only 
in the literal local sense, straight forward, over against, and ἄντικρυς 
only in the metaphorical sense, straightway, without hesitation, at 
once. But there are many opposing examples of both kinds. See 
the Ausf. Sprachl. , 

εὐϑύς and εὐθύ ( (5 115. n.4). In the relation of time only εὐθύ, immedi- 
ately, is used ; but in the relation of place, commonly εὐθύ straight 
to, directly to; 6. 5. εὐθὺ Avusiov, εὐθὺ ᾿Εφέσου, straight to the Ly- 
ceum, to Ephesus; and less frequently before a yowel, εὐθύς, 
Eurip. Hippol. 1197. --- The Ionic forms Ιϑύς, ϑύ, are used 
without any difference, and solely in the local sense. 

2. The following differences of form are employed without any differ- 
ence of sense; and are either in equally good use, or belong to the 
Attic poets, or as Ionisms are also in use among the Attics: 

ἐάν, ἢν, ἄν, if, (see ὃ 139.,8,)—of which ἄν is never found long: i in the 
_ tragic poets. 
"σήμερον, Att. τήμερον, | to-day ᾿--χϑὲς and ἐχϑὲς yesterday. 
σύν, old ξύν, with ;—sic, Ion. ἐς, in. 
ἐν, Ion. évi, in; see further no. 8. 2, below. 
ἀεί, lon. and poet. αὐεὖ and αἰέν, ever. 
ἕνεκα Or Evexsy (and this even before consonants, e. g. Xen. Herd ΠῚ. 
4. Υ. 1.) Ion. εἵνεκα, εἵνεκεν, on atcount of. 
ἔπειτα, Ion. ἔπειτεν, afterwards. 
OTL because, i in common language also otuj (Aristoph.) comp. ὃ 77. n. 2. 
For. ov no, not, and γναΐ yes, the Attics use for the sake of mphasis 
οὐχί (Ion. οὐκὶ), ναΐχν ὃ 11. n. 2. 
Nore 1. Other differences of dialect are the following : 
For πρός to, old προτί, Dor. ποτὲ ;—for μετά with, ABol. πεδά. 
For οὖν therefore, Dor. and Ion. wy. 
Al 


318 § 117. PaRTICLES.—MUTATION. 


For αὖϑις again, Ion, αὖτις. ' 

For κέ, κέν, an"enclitic particle used by the epic writers for ἄν (δ 139. 
7), Dor. xe. ᾿ 

For γέ at least, Dor. ye. 

For εἰ tf, Dor. ai, which form is used also by the epic writers, but 
only in av κε, ot γάρ, and αἴϑε. 

Other epic forms are ἠέ for ἢ or, as ;—éwei for ἐπειδή since, because ; 
—eiy, sivt, for ἐν or évi. 

Some prepositions, especially παρά and ὗπό, take in the earlier poet- 
ry, instead of « and 0, the ending αὐ, as παραΐ, ὑπαΐ. 

Some®other differences of dialect see in § 116. n. 10. 


Nore 2. The conjunction ἄρα, and the prepositions παρά and ava, 
often drop the final vowel among the Dorics and in the epic language, 
even before consonants, as ἄρ, πάρ, ἄν (or ay); e.g. 

οὔτ᾽ ἂρ φρένας, πὰρ Seq, ἂν δέ. 
When in this case ἄν comes to stand before a lingual, it is an old usage, 
instead of ἂν πέλαγος, ἂν μέγα, and the like, to write 
ἀμπέλαγος, ἀμμέγα. 
See ὃ 25. n.4.—The same apocope occurs also in the prep. κατά ; but 
since t cannot stand at the end of a word (§ 4. 4), this preposition con- 
nects itself in like manner with the following word. In such case the 
tT is always assimilated to the following consonant, which consequently is 
written double, or, where it is a rough mute, receives the kindred smooth 
mute before it; thus 
καττόν " καδδέ, καμμέν, καγγόνυ" ὃ καπφάλαρα, 

for κατὰ τόν, κατὰ δέ, κατὰ μέν, κατὰ γόνυ, κατὰ φάλαρα, etc. The Doric 
ποτὲ (for πρός) does the same, but only before another τ, 6. g. ποττόν for 
ποτὶ toy.t-—We add further that all these changes and modes of orthogra- 
phy occur also in compound words; and we therefore find: 

παρϑέμενοι, παρστᾶσα 

- 3 2 7 3 ' 
ἀνστάντες, ἀγννείμη" ἀλλέξαι, ἀγξηραίνω . 
κατταγύσαι, κατϑανεῖν " καββᾶς, κακκείοντες, κάλλιπον, καμμύω, καννεύ- 
σας, κάππεσε, καῤῥέζω" κακχεῦαι. So to avoid the concurrence of 
three consonants, we find κάκτανε, κάσχεϑε, for κάκκταγε, κάσσχεϑε. 

In like manner the prepositions ἀπό and tzo are also apocopated in com- 


position, though seldom, and only before kindred consonants, as ἀππέμπειν, 
ὑββάλειν. 


Β, Changes in the Accent. 


3. Several dissyllabic prepositions, which have the accent on the last 
syllable, as παρά, ἀπό, περί, etc. draw back the tone in the following 
cases : 


* In this single instance yyjis of course pronounced like gg, and not like ng. 


t Recent editors mostly prefer to write du πέλαγος, κὰδ δέ, κὰμ μέν, καγ γόνυ; 
att τόν, etc. by which means they separate in writing, that which is united in 
pronunciation. If we would be consistent, we must write ἂν médayos, just as 
we divide the EMIIYPI of the ancients into ἐν avg. But then follows of 
course κὰν δέ, which is absurd. Itis better therefore to write xaddé, καττόν;, 
etc. like ϑοϊμάτιον, ovmi, ἐγᾷ δα; etc. 


§ 118. rorMATION or worDs. 319 


1) When they stand in the figure Anastrophe,* i.e. after the noun 

which they govern; e. δ: 

τούτου πέρι for περὶ τούτου 

ϑεῶν ano for ἀπὸ ϑεῶν. , 
But from this rule are excepted ἀμφί, ἀντί, διά, and ἀνά. 

2) When they are used alone, instead of forming compounds with the 
verb εἶναι; or more accurately, when the verb is omitted, and they 
stand sine as adverbs; in which case the common language also 
adopts the Ion. ἑνί for ἐν; 8. g. 

ἐγὼ πάρα, for πάρειμιε 
ἔπι, ἔνε, ὕπο, for ἔπεστιν, etc. 
‘to which we must also reckon ἄνα for ἀνάστηϑι, up ! 

Nore 3. More exact critics accent the prepositions in the above manner, 
when in poetry they stand after their verb, e. g. λούσῃ ἄπο, for ὑπολούσῃ ; 
and when also in poetry they stand as cdeor bs, 6. g. πέρι very, before others. 
They write also ἄπο, when this preposition means not merely JSrom, but 
apart, remote from, comp. § 115. 6. But in all this, and in the exceptions 
from the preceding rules, there is no uniformity in our editions.—Another 
rule \is, that when in the first of the above cases, (the anastrophe,) the 
preposition is elided, it takes no accent, as ϑεῶν an —, not Peay ax —3; but 
not so in the second case, 6. g. ov γὰρ ἔπ᾽ ἀνήρ (for éxsotiv).—The same 
transposition of monosyllabic prepositions is mentioned § 147. n. 18. © For 
ἐξ and ἕξ, we and we, and the like, see § 13. 4. 


Nore 4. The interjection ὦ has also a twofold accent, viz. the cireum- 
flex in the sense of calling etc. i. e. before the Vocative; but the acute or 
grave, when employed as an exclamation, i i.e. before the other cases ; 6. δ. 
Soph, Ajax. 372 ἁ @ δύσμορος, ὃς μεϑῆκα, O unhappy man that Tam ! ὦ τῆς 
ἀναιδείας Ο the impudence ! ὦ μοι wo is me! and so also in the exclama- 
tion ὦ πόποι. But there is as little uniformity in respect to this word, as 
in the former examples (note 3); see the Ausf. Sprachl. 


FORMATION OF WORDS. 
§ 118. Derivation. 


1. The formation of words, in the fullest sense of this expression, lies 
beyond the limits of ordinary grammar. Since the analogies in the 
older or primitive portion of the language, are so often changed or 
obscured by time, and by the mixing together of roots, it is on the one 
hand impossible definitely to mark these analogies, especially in the 
great diversity of opinions which usually prevails : while on the other 
hand, a full understanding of them presupposes an extensive and pro- 


* This term was ambiguous even among the ancients, since they employed it 
also to designate the drawing back of m tone in both the cases here mentioned. 
See the Ausf. Sprachl. 


a 4S et —— ._- | = 
ἊΨ 


990 § 119. FORMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 


found course of study, which, under the general name of philology, is, 
for practical reasons, separated from ordinary grammar. This latter 
therefore assumes the knowledge of a certain mass of words as already 
acquired from the lexicon; and leaves it to the learner’s’own obser- 
vation to seize and comprehend, so far as he can, their more obvious 
affinities, and the analogies by which they are connected. 

2. Certain kinds and forms of derivation however,—which may for 
this reason be regarded as more recent,—have been preserved so 
complete, and lie within such definite limits, that they can with cer- 
tainty be reduced to a systematic arrangement. Such a method of 
bringing them together under a general view, facilitates and promotes 
so much the knowledge οἵ" ἃ language, that the grammar can well 
afford a place for such an exhibition; so much the more so, because 
the analogies of this kind of etymology are founded for the most part on 
the analogies of flexion. Indeed, this mode of formation can itself be 
considered as a more extended species of flexion.* 

3. Under this general division, however, we can here include only 
Verbs, Substantives, Adjectives, and Adverbs ; since the other parts of 
speech either belong to the primitive formation above referred to, or 
have been already treated of under other heads. The general sub- 
ject of the derivation of words, we may divide into two principal parts : 
(1) Derivation by Endings. (2) Derivation by Composition. 


$119. Derivation by Endings. 


1. In appending derivative or formative endings, there existed two 
principles, viz. the tendency to express like significations by the same - 
endings; and the tendency to adapt the endings as much as possible to 
the form of the primitive word. But from the collision of these two prin- 

ciples there arose a twofold confusion in the analogy: (1) The same 
species of signification is often presented by different forms; (2) 
Endings, which originally were appended only to certain forms of the 
primitive word, (e. g. verbs in aw from @, in ow from og, ov,) when some 
definite signification had become perceptible in a number of words of 
like termination, were attached also to other radical words, whose form 
was not adapted to receive them ; e. g. verbs in aw from os, etc. 


I. Verbs... 
2. Of verbs, we are to consider here chiefly those which are derived 


from nouns, either substantives or adjectives. This derivation is com- 
monly made by means of the following endings : 


* We can here give only a somewhat general sketch ; to fill out which in many 
respects must be the work of personal observation. We purposely omit several 
evident, yet minor analogies, in order not to embarrass the more simple view. 


δ 119. rorMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 321 


aw, ἕω, ow, eva, ἄζω, ἰζω, αἰνω, ὑνω: 
These endings take the place of the Nominative-ending, when the prim- 
itive word belongs to the first or second declension ; and also in words of 
the third declension, if the Nom. ends in a vowel, or in ¢ preceded by a 
vowel; e.g. τέμή τιμάω, πτερὸν ntEQ0M, Barua ϑαυμάζω, ἀληϑής 
ἀληϑεύω. In other words of Dec. III, these endings take the place of 
o¢ in the Genitive; e.g. κόλαξ κολαχεύω, πὺρ (πὺρος) πύροω. 


Nore 1. Nominatives of the third declension in a, ἂς, ts, Which as- 
sume a consonant in the Genitive, can pass over oily into kindred verbal 
endings, as « and ας into ἄζω, aive,—is into iw; e.g. ϑαῦμα ϑαυμάζω and 
ϑαυμαίνω, ἐλπίς ἐλπίζω. Every ending not thus kindred is appended to 
the consonant of the Genitive ; 6. g. φύγας φυγαδεύω, χρῆμα χφηματίζω. 


8. As to the signification of these endings, we can _ here take into 
view only general usage, and specify the fundamental idea of the 
greater number of verbs under each termination. 


a.—éw and ev. These verbs are formed from nouns of almost all 
endings, and mostly express the state or action of that which their 
primitive word signifies ; e. g. xolgavos ruler, κοιραγέω rule 3 κοινωνός 
partaker, κοινωνέω partake ; δοῦλος servant, δουλεύω serve; κόλαξ fiat- 
terer, xohaxsiw flatter ; ἀληϑής true, ἀληϑεύω speak the truth; βασιλεύς 
βασιλεύω, etc. All are most commonly employed as introusitived: . 
sometimes however as transitives, 6. g. φίλος friend, φιλέω love. 
In general these two endings are the most common ones in de- 
rivative verbs, and serve therefore to express a multitude of rela- 
‘tions, which are likewise partially included under the following "ἡ 
endings; thus especially the practice of that which the radical word 
signifies, 6. g. πολεμεῖν, ἀϑλεῖν ; πομπεύειν, χορεύειν, φογεύειν, βουλεύ- 
suv; or whatever else is in each case. the most natural relation, 6. g. 
αὐλός flute, αὐλεῖν play the flute; ἀγορά assembly, ἀγορεύειν address an 
assembly ; ἱππεύειν ride on horseback, ete.—The ending ἕω more espe- 
cially, as the simplest of all, is used for most of those derivatives 
which are first formed by composition, as svtuyéw, ἐπιχειρέω, οἰκοδο- 
μέω, ἐργολαβέω, μνησικακέω, etc.—But in all instances these endings 
are most commonly intransitive. 


b.—do. These verbs arise most naturally from words of Dec. I, in 
α and ἢ, but also from others. They express chiefly the possession 
of some thing or quality i in a special degree, and-also the performance 
of an action; 6. g. κόμη hair, κομᾷν to have long hair ; χολή bile, χολᾷν 
to have much bile, be angry ; λίπος Sat, λιπᾷν to have much fat, be fat ; 
βοή cry, γόος lamentation,—Bogy, γοᾷν ; τόλμα boldness, τολμᾷν dare. 
Hence, as transitives, they denote the performance of an action 
towards others; 6. g. τιμή honour, τιμᾷν τινὰ to honour any one.* 
See also the verbs of disease in no. 5, 1 below. 


* Here and in other similar cases it may appear strange, that the abstract 
noun should be the primitive word, from which the verb is derived. But this 
case is not rare ; if, as is very common in all languages, the substantive is first 
derived from an older and simpler verb, and then again forms from itself a verb, 


322 ᾧ 119. roRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 


c.—ow. These come mostly from words of Dec. II, and express : 
(1) The making or transforming into that which the radical word sig- 
nifies ; δουλόω make a slave, Snow make known from δῆλος known. 
(2) The working with or applying the thing signified by the root; 
Zovodw gild, μιλτόω paint with vermilion (μιλτός), πυρόω place in the 
Jire, togvow form with the τόρνος, turn, ζημιόω punish (ζημία). (3) The 
JSurnishing with or imposing the thing signified by the root; στεφαγόω 
crown, πτερύω give wing's to (πτερόν), σταυρόω crucify, etc. 

d.—ofw.and if». The first ending comes most naturally from words 
in 6, 4g, ας, etc. Sometimes also, for the sake of euphony, from other 
endings. Both comprehend so many relations, that they cannot well 
be brought under definite classes; 6. g. δικάζω, χειμάζω, προοιμιάζω, 
δρίζω, μελίζω, ϑερίζω, λακτίζω, etc. Still it deserves to be noted, that 
when they are formed from the proper names of nations or persons, 
they mark the adoption of the manners, party, or language of the 
same; e.g. μηδίέζειν to become a Mede in sentiment, ἑλληνίζειν to speak 
Greek, δωριάζειν to speak Doric, φιλιππίζειν to be of Philip’s party. 
See also below in no. 5, 2. 


ε.---αἰνω and vyw. The latter ending comes always from adjectives, 
and expresses the making or causing to be such as the adjective 
signifies ; 6. g. ἡδύνειν to make sweet, σεμνύνειν to make venerable, dig- 

_ nify. It must here be observed, that those adjectives, whose degrees 
of comparison in éwy, wotos, presuppose an obsolete positive in ve, 
form the verbs in ww from this last; e.g. αἰσχρός (αἰσχίων from 
᾿ΑΙΣΧΥΣῚ --αἰσχύνω. So μακρός, καλός---μηκύγω, καλλύνω, ete.—The 
same signification is often found in verbs in αὖνω, as λευκαΐνειν to 
make white, κοιλαΐνευν to hollow out, etc. Still several of these have a 
neuter signification, as χαλεπαίνειν, δυσχεραίνειν, become angry, etc. 
They come sometimes also from substantives, especially those in μὰ 
(σῆμα σημαίνω, δεῖμα δειμαίνω), and express various relations. 


4, A special mode of deriving verbs from nouns, is simply to change 

. the ending of the noun into w; and then the preceding syllable, accord- 

ing to its consonants, receives one of those additions which we have 
noted in § 92, as giving a strengthened form to the Present. 


Thus are formed from ποικίλος ποικίλλω, ἄγγελος ἀγγέλλω, καϑαρός 

καϑαίρω, μαλακός μαλάσσω, φάρμακον φαρμάσσω, μείλιχος μειλίσσω, πυ- 

/  Q8tdg πυρέσσω, χαλεπός χαλέπτω, etc. The relation of the sense to that 
of the root, is in every instance the most natural and obvious one. 


5. There remain still the following more limited classes of derived 
forms of verbs : το 
1) Desideratives, which mark ἃ desire, and are commonly formed by 


which supplants the first. This is manifestly the case in tiw, τιμή», τιμάω ; and 
it may therefore well be assumed in others,.as 07, νίκη, etc. Atall events 
analogy demands, that when no other reason exists, the fuller and more sonorous 
ending should be derived from the simpler ; although it can well be, that some- 
times such a word as βοάω may have existed earlier, and the simpler #07 have 
been later formed after the analogy of some other words; in which however the 
converse of this is exhibited. 


§ 119. roRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 323 
changing the Future in -ow of the verb expressive of the thing desired, 
into a Present in --σεέω ; 6. g. γελασείω I should like to laugh, πτολεμησείω 
1 long for war, etc. : 

Another class of desideratives, is formed in é or vac, derived properly 
from substantives, 6. g. ϑαγατᾷν to long for death, στρατηγιᾷν desire to 
be leader ; then also from verbs, by first forming these into substantives, 
e. g. ὠγεῖσϑαι (ὠγητής)----ὠνητιᾷν to wish to purchase ; κλαίω (κλαῦσιςγ---- 
χλαυσιᾷν to long to weep. 

This form passed over very naturally into a sort of imitative verbs, 
e.g. τυραννιᾷν to play the tyrant. But it is incorrect to reduce under 
this head the verbs of disease, as ὀφϑαλμιᾷν, ὑδεριᾷν, woody, ete. which 
are better referred to no. 3. ὃ, above. 

2) Frequentatives in -ζω, 6. g. dunralesy (from δίπτειυν) to cast hither 
and thither, Mid. to cast one’s self hither and thither, be unquiet ; στενάζειν 
(from στένειν) sigh deep and often; αἰτεῖν ask, αἰτίζευν beg ; ἕρπειν creep, 
Eomice creep slowly. | 


8) Inchoatives in -oxw, see § 112. 10 and n. 6. 


II. Substantives. 
6. We here begin with substantives derived immediately 


A. From Verbs. 


In respect to these it must be premised in general: 

1) That the endings everywhere follow the corresponding forms 
of flexion in verbs, viz. so that those endings beginning with o 
are appended after the analogy of the Fut. 1; those with « and 
τ, after that of the Perf. Passive; and those with a vowel, after 
that of the Perf. 2. This coincidence however is not a necessary 
one, except in those cases where it rests on the fundamental rules 
of the language; e.g. that between substantives in ov¢ and the Fut. 
in ow, as in ἐξετάζω -aow -ἀσις, τρίβω τρίψω τρῖψες ; between 
those in μός, μα, μη, and the 1 pers. Perf. Pass. as in πλέκω πέπλε- 
yuar πλέγμα, etc. In all other cases, where the rules are less defi- 
nitely fixed, the respective terminations of the verb and of the 
verbal. nouns present indeed a very frequent coincidence, but not a 
necessary one; and many important differences occur, which will 
be pointed out in the following pages. 

2) That the endings beginning with a vowel (as ἡ, 09, δὺς) are 
also formed from contracted verbs in ἕω and ¢w in such a manner, 
that € and α fall away ;* except however in the shorter verbs, 


* It follows of course from the marg. note to no. 3.6, above, that there must 
be some special reason, for regarding the fuller and more sonorous verb as 
earlier than the substantive. It is moreover easy to see, that where the fuller 
form of the verb is only a prolongation of an earlier one, it is indifferent, whether 
we say e.g. from KTYIIQ comes xzrvmog and thence again χτυπέω, or whether 
for the sake of brevity we prefer in such cases to treat the usual form of the 
verb as the radical word. 


᾿ Ν 
324 § 119. FoRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 


which cannot drop their vowel, as belonging to the root, but only 
change it, as δέω, 607: 


Nore 2. Before t and w the letter σ is inserted, 851 the Perf. and 
_ Aor. 1 Passive ; and this in all nouns derived from verbs whose character- 
istic is a lingual, a few poetic forms excepted (§ 102. n. 1, ϑαυματός). 
Those from verbs pure, on the contrary, sometimes take the o and some- 
times not, without reference to the flexion of the verb,—Where the σ is 
not inserted, we can in general in all the endings safely follow the analo- 
gy of the Future ; ; thus 6. g. ϑεατής, ϑέαμα, ϑῦμα, have the vowel (a, v) 
long, like ϑεάσομαι, ϑύσω; but with this limitation, that those endings 
which begin with o and t sometimes shorten the long vowel, especially 
when the verb itself shortens it in the Aor.) Pass. See § 95. ἢ. 4 and 
marg. note; and here below, notes 5; 7.—The endifgs beginning with pu, 
on‘the contrary, conform in this respect almost without exception to the 
analogy of the Fut. 1, neglecting even that of the Perf. Passive; see no. 7. a. 


7. In order to express the action or effect of the verb, the wap 
endings are principally employed : 
μος, μὴ; μα, σις, Ove, ἡ oY ας ος Masc. o¢ Neut. 


α.--κός, μὴ or μή, μα (G. τός). These endings can indeed be com- 
pared with the Perf. Passive; but nouns in wos, when a vowel pre- 
cedes in the primitive form, commonly assume o; while on the other 
hand those in both the other endings do not commonly take o, not 
always indeed even when the Perf. Pass. has it. Those which do 
᾿ not take the o, retain the long vowel of the Future, even when the 
Perf. Pass. shortens it; but nevertheless in such a way that some 
fluctuate between 9) and ¢; e. g. τύϑημι (τέϑειμαιὴ--ϑ' εσμός, ϑέμα 
or Fi woe δέω (δέδεμαι)---δὲσμό ς, δεσμή, δέμα, διάδημα; 
γιγνώσκω (ἔγνωσμαι)---Υ γ ώ μη; δύω (λέλυμαι)--- ῦ μα .---ἰπ respect 
to signification, those in μός commonly denote the proper abstract ; 
6. δ: πάλλω παλμός. α swinging, ὀδύρομαι ὀδυρμός a lamenting, οἰκτείρω 
οἰκτιθμός compassion, λύζω (λύξω) λυγμός a sobbing, hiccough, σείω 
σεισμός a shaking.—The ending μὰ on the other hand denotes rather, 
as concrete, the effect of the verb, and even the object; so that it 
mostly coincides with the JVeuter Part. Perf. Pass. e. g. πρᾶγμα that 
which is done, deed ; μίμημα the imitation, i.e. the copy; σπείρω σπέρ-- 
μα that which is sown, seed, etc.—The ending μὴ fluctuates between 
the two; e.g. μνήμη a calling to mind, recollection ; ἐπιστήμη a know- 
ng, knowledge; 3 τιμή honour shewn. On the other hand στιγμή point, 
γραμμή line, which differ only in secondary meanings from στίγμα 
puncture, thrust, γράμμα a letter, writing. 


Nore 3. Some nouns in μός from the more ancient language, have 
before w simply the vowel, without o; e.g. δειμός fear, χρυμός a being 
cold, Srost ;—or they have “instead of o a 3; e.g. ὀρχηϑμός dance from 
ὀρχέομαι, μυκηϑμός, κλαυϑμός, μηνυϑμός, etc. βαϑμός (strictly a treading 
from βαίνω, hence) a step i.e. of a stair case, etc.—So even after @, as 
σχαρϑμός from oxalow.* 


* Compare further, from IQ, sius—i9ue act of going, step, and 1 σϑμός strictly 
passage, wa hence isthmus in the geographical ¢ sense; from ἄω breathe out, 


ἄσϑμα asthma. 


» τ eae ΝΣ 
Ὗ 


§ 119. FORMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 325 


Note 4. The tive differences of signification it is necessary to 
mark as a basis; but at the same time it must not be forgotten, that both in 
the poets and in the common language, the significations especially of the 
abstract and concrete, often flowed into one another. So e.g. λαχμός (comp. 
§ 23 note) and χρησμός, mean not the act of casting lots and of prophesying, 
but the lot, the oracles On the other hand φρόνημα the understanding, ete. 


b.—ovg, σία, mark the proper abstract of the verb, from which sig- 
nification they deviate very little ; e.g. μέμησις imitation, πρᾶξις ac- 
tion, σχῆψις, ete. δοκιμασία trial, ϑυσία sacrifice, ἐξοπλισία, ete. In 
certain compounds the ending σία expresses the action more as a 
permanent quality, e.g. ὀξυβλεψία, καχεξῖα. These forms however 
imperceptibly pass over into the similar ones derived from nouns; 
comp. below in no. 10. a. 


Nore 5. Some of the forms which belong here deviate in quantity 
from the analogy of the Future of their verbs ; viz. αἵρεσις, γένεσις, ϑέσις, 
τίσις, λύσις, φύσις, δύσις, ϑυσία; see note2. For the short vowel in τίσις 
and φϑίσις;- compare tiw and φϑίω in the Catalogue, § 114. 


The following can be less definitely characterized in respect to signi- 
fication ; though the idea of the abstract predomin ates. 


c.—n and a, mostly oxytones, 8. δ. εὐχή prayer, from εὔχομαι; 
σφαγή slaughtering, from σφάττω; διδαχή teaching, from Saducorsio, 
-0f0 3 χαρὰ rejoicing, from χαίρω; —and with the vowel o for ε, 
(like the Perf. 2, §97. 4. c¢,) τομή from τέμνω, φϑορά from φϑείρω, 
ἀοιδή from ἘΕΙΣῪΝ etc. — Some assume ἃ reduplication, which cor-' 
responds to the Attic reduplication of the Perfect, and always has 
an ὦ in the second syllable ; ; eg. aywyy from ἄγω, ἐδωδή from 
ἔδω (ἔδηδα), ὁκωχή from ἔχω. °Comp. the pocorn marg. note to 
ἔχω in the Catalogue, p. 283, 

Paroxytones are e.g. βλάβη injury, from βλόπτω, βλάβω; μάχη bat- 
tle, from μάχομαι; ; γίχη victory, from »izaw.—Here too are to be refer- 
red those in 


—eia, which are formed solely from verbs in eve ἊΣ Neus Ges év 
into ἐν: e.g. παιδεία from παυδεύω. These have always the final 
o long, and therefore the acute accent on δἰ. 


Nore 6. In regard to the tone of all nouns in aa, the following are 
the general rules; compare also § 34. n. IT. 3. 

Properispomena are the feminines of oxytone eg pair in Us, 6. g. 
ἡδύς, ἡδεῖα. 

Proparoxytone are: (1) The abstract nouns in ἧς and og, 6. g. 
ἀλήϑεια (see no. 10. a), βοήϑεια from βοηϑός. (2) The feminines from 
masculines in εὖς, 6. g. ἱέρεια priestess, see 12. 3. d, below. 

Paroxytone are the abstracts from verbs in εὔω, just adduced. 


d.—o¢ Masc. The far greater part of these have Ὁ in the principal 
syllable, either by nature or as cognate for ε; 6. g. κρότος clapping - 
of hands from κροτέω; φϑόνος envy, from φϑονέω ; λόγος discourse, 
from λέγω; 600¢ (ῥοῦς) from Geo. — But also ἔλεγχος confutation, from 
ἐλέγχω; τύπος from τύπτω; πάλος from πάλλω, ete. ὃ 

To these may be added substantives in τος, which are > commonly 


42 


326 § 119. FORMATION OF WORDS.-~—DERIVATION. 


oxytone, Θ. g. ἀμητός mowing, κωκυτός howling ; ; sometimes with slight 
changes, as ὕετός rain, from ὕω ; παγετός frost, from πήγνυμι. Some 
have the tone drawn-back; e.g. βίοτος life; πότος νάνι from 
πίνω πέπομαι. 


e—og Neut. E.g. τὸ κῆδος care, from χήδω; λάχος lot, from 
λαγχάνω; πρᾶγος i. 6. πρᾶγμα, etc. ‘These verbals never have Ὁ in 
the principal syllable; hence τὸ γένος sa genus ; but ὁ γόνος pro- 
creation. 


8. The subject of the verb, as a person or man, is marked by the 
following endings : 
α.--τὴς (G. ov), tug, τωρ. The most common of these is the end- 
/ing τῆς, in Dec. 1; and the words are partly oxytone, partly par- 
oxytone. E. 8: BU ues wrestler, from ἀϑλέω ; μαϑητής scholar, from 
μαϑεῖν ; ϑεατής spectator, from ϑεάομαι; δρι νεῶν from δικάζω ; κρι-- 
τῆς from χρίνω etc. On the contrary, κυβερνήτης steersman, from 
χκυβερνάω ; πλάστης (from πλάττω, πέπλασμαι), δυνάστης, ψάλτης, etc. 
--τὴρ and two are less frequent forms, which in the dialects 
and in the poets are often in use along with τῆς ; and in many words 
are usual 1 in the common language ;, 6. g. σωτήρ Saviour, ῥήτωρ orator, 
(froni σαύω and “PE2,) ἑστιάτωρ host, etc. 


Nore 7. Some of these shorten the vowel before the ending (see 
note 2); eg. ἐπενδύτης, ϑυτήρ, ϑέτης, αἱρέτης ; and especially those from 
ἡγέομαν compounded with a substantive, as ὁδηγέτης, ἹΠουσηγέτης or 
ἹΜουσαλγ της. 


b—eve. E.g. γραφεύς writer, φϑορεύς corrupter. 

Nore 8. The endings in a and b, have in part passed over to things, 
which can be conceived of as the subject of an action; 6. g. ἀήτης wind, 
ἐπενδύτης outer garment, πρηστήρ storm, ζωστήρ girdle, ἐμβολεύς piston, 


stamp, etc. — The poetic use of such masculine forms in connexion with 
feminines, is a license of Syntax ; see § 123. n. 1. 


¢.—og, mostly in composition; e.g. ζωγράφος painter, πατρο- 
κτόγος patricide, etc. But (ὃ, 7) τροφός one who educates, ἀοιδός 
singer, etc. and some old words, as ἀρχός leader (Hom. ) 


d.—ng and ας G. ov. Only in some compounds, as μυροπώλης, 
τριηράρχης (and -ος), ὀρνυϑοϑήρας. 
‘9. The names of the instrument and other objects connected with an 
action, are formed from the foregoing names of subjects; or at least 
presuppose such in their formation. So especially : 


--τήριον, τρον, and tea, from the subject-ending TNO; 6.8." 'λου- 
τήριον bathing-tub, "λουτρόν bath, λοῦτρον water for bathing, ἀκροατή-- 
ριον lecture-room, ξύστρα curry-comb, ὀρχήστρα place for dancing. 


-εἴον, from the ending εὐς ; e.g. xovoéiov barber’s shop, from 
κουρεύς barber, and this from κείρειν to shear ; τροφεῖον wages of one 
, who educates, from τροφεύς. 


10. Another principal class of substantives is made up of those derived 


δ 119. roRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. | 327 


B. From Adjectives and words expressing Attributes.* 


These for the most part serve only to express the abstract of the adjec- 
tive, or attributive word. Here belong the following endings : 


a.—ict, always with long a (Ion. 7); e. g. σοφός wise, σοφία wisdom ; 

50 xaxto, δειλία, etc. So βλακία from διάς, εὐδαιμόνία from εὐδαίμων, 
ογος: ἀνδρία ἡ from ajo ἀνδρός; ; πενία from πένης, ητος; ἀμαϑία 
from ἀμαϑής, gos. But those in ἧς more commonly form their sub- 
Stantive in sa; see the next paragraph but one. 

Compound adjectives in τὸς often change in this formation the τ 
into σ; e.g. ἄϑανατος ἀϑανασία, δύσπεπτος δυσπεψία. 

From the ending va have risen by contraction those in 

eva and ove % 

where the « becomes short, and the accent falls upon the antepenult. 
The former (δια) comes from adjectives in ης, G. so; 9.8. choy Fever from 
ἀληϑής ; the latter (ove) from adjectives in ovs, e.g. ἄγοιοι from ὦ ἄνους. 


Nore.9. From some adjectives are formed abstract nouns in 4 or ἃ 
simply, but always as paroxytones ; e.g. from κακός (Fem. κακή) ἢ κάχη 
for κακία ; from ἐχϑρός oo ἐχϑρά) ἢ ἔχϑρα enmity. Hence’ from ad- 
jectives in 10s, 6. 8: ὅσιος, ἄξιος, αἴτιος, come the Subst. ἢ ὁσία right, duty, 
ἀξία dignity, αἰτία fault, guilt; all which forms, by accident, are not 
distinguished from the feminine adjective. 


ὃ.---τῆς G. τητος Fem. E.g. ἰσότης equality, from ἴσος, παχύτης 
from παχύς. All are paroxytones, with a few exceptions, as ταχυτής, 
δηϊοτής, G. ἢτος. 

c.— σύνη. E. g. δικαιοσύνη, δουλοσύνη, most frequently from ad- 
jectives in wy G. ovos, e. g. σωφροσύνη from σώφρων G. ογος. Those 
which have a short vowel in the syllable before the antepenult, take 
in the antepenult ὦ, like comparatives in tego¢ ; but except ἱερωσύνη 
priesthood in Demosthenes, there are very few words of this class, and 
these in the later Greek. See Fischer ad Weller. IT. p.40. 


d.—og Neut. especially from adjectives in us, 8. g. βάϑος depth, 
from βαϑύς, τάχος from ταχύς. Hence too from such, whose de- 
grees of comparison seem to presuppose an old positive in vc, e.g. 
τὸ κάλλος, τὸ αἶσχος, τὸ μῆκος, from καλός (καλλίων), αἷσχρός (αἴσχιστος), 
μακρός (μήκιστος). Comp. no. 8. 6, above. i 
11. Of the substantives which come 

C. From other Sudbstanttves, 
are first to be remarked some endings, which are formed simply after 
the analogy of verbals. Thus: 


1) Masculines in τῆς (of which all in ἑτῆς have long ¢) often de- 
note simply a person in some relation to the object designated by the 
radical word; e.g. mohitns citizen, from πόλις city ; ὁπλίτης an armed 
man, from Snley 3 ἱππότης rider, from ἵππος ; ysverntys a bearded 


*-E. g. such substantives as man, servant, priest, etc. 


| The form ἀνδρεία is a false orthography, as the above analogy shews; 
although this form frequently occurs in our editions. 


΄ 


328 $119. FORMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 


‘man, from γένειον ; φυλέτης member of a class or tribe, from φυλή- 
All these pass over occasionally into the adjective signification, § 63. n.7. 

2) In the same manner those in EUS ; e. g. ἱερεύς priest, from ἱ ἱερόν 
(or from τὰ ἱερά sacrifice) ; ,7ριπεύς and ἁλιεύς, fisher, from γρῖπος 
net and lg sea; γραμματεύς, etc. 


12. All other substantives of this kind may be brought under the fol- 
lowing subdivisions: 


1) Those which denote a place consecrated to a divinity, in cov, avov, 
Eloy, 6. δ. Διονύσιον, ᾿Αφροδίσιον, ἡ Ἥραιον, Movosioy, Ἡράκλειον. 


2) Those which denote a place where there is a plurality of certain © 
objects, in wy G. ὦγνος Mase. and we Fem. E. g. ἀμπελών vineyard, 
δοδωνιά rose-garden, ἀνδρών men’s apartment, μελετών hall for exercise. 


3) Female appellatives : 


a.—tévoa, τρία, and τρὶς G. τρίδος; strictly from masculines in 
TO and TOO, but also from those in της. E.g. σώτειρα female de- 
liverer, ὀρχήστρια female dancer, αὐλητρίὶς female player on the flute, 
from ὀρχηστής, αὐλητής. 


b.—ig G. tog is the most common ending, and comes in the place 
of the Mase. ης and ας of Dec. 1. E. g. δεσπότης master, δεσπότις mis- 
tress, ἱκέτης ἱκέτις, Σκύϑης Σκύθϑις μυροπώλης μυρύπωλις a female 
dealer in ointment. 


c.—atve., chiefly from Mase. in ὧν, e.g. ϑεράπων (οντος) ϑεραπαινα 
« female ἜΘΝΗ λέων (οντος) ἀπ τῶς lioness, τέχτων (ovoc) textos female 
artisan, Adxoy (wvos) Δάκαινα. Also from some masculines in og, 
e.g. ϑεός ϑέαινα. 


ν - . ’ . . . ’ 
d.—éva, from two masculines in εὑς, viz. iégeca priestess, from ἱερεὺς ; 
βασίλεια queen. ) 


e.—ooo from several endings of Dec. iif. Eg. βασίλισσα from 
-εὐς; πένησσα from -7¢; ἄνασσα from ἄναξ, Κίλισσα, Θρῆσσα (Attic 
Ooatta), from Κίλιξ and Θρὴξ or Θρᾷξ. 


4) Gentile nouns, or national appellatives. These are comprised in 
three classes: A. Masculine; B..Feminine; C. Possessive (adjectives). 


A. MAScuLINE. ’ 


“πτίος, and from Dec. 1,---αἷος. E. g. Kootvbvos, Τροιξήνιος, Ao- 
σύριος, Βυζάντιος (from Βυζάντιον); “Adnyeitos, Aagucoios; some- 
times with a change of the radical word, e.g. from Midytos, Midj- 
σιος,. and from names in οὖς G. ovytog not only "Οπούντιος, but.also 
from Auadovs, Φλιοῦς, Avayvgots—Auadovoros, Φλιάσιος; Avayvgaovos. 


—nvog, ἄνός, ἵνος, only from names of cities and countries out of Greece ; 
e.g. Κυζικηνός, Σαρδιανός Ion. Σαρδιηνός from Sages, ᾿Ασιανός, To 
OuyTivos. 


---ἰτης, ntns, ἄτης," εὠτης. E. g. "ABdngitns, «Χερδονησίτης, Aiywn- 
τῆς from Atyuwe. ; Πισάτης, Σπαρτιάτης (Lon. -ιήτης), Σικελιώτης. 


ΠΣ The rule, that gentile nouns in ἄτης have long a, must not be extended to 
hose which are not derived from some primitive name, asin Saguérys Sarmata. 


§ 119. roRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. - 829 


--οὐς. E.g. Aiolsic, Φωκεύς Phocian, “Ζωριεύς, Meyaoevs from 
Miyoou, ἹΜαντινεύς from Moytiveve, Πλαταιεύς from Πλαταιαί, Φωκαιεύς 
or better Φωχαεύς Phocaean from Φώκχαια, Εὐβοεύς from Εὔβοια. 


ΒΒ. Femintne.—Besides the usual change of the Masc. ending 0¢ into 
ῃ and a, e.g. ᾿Α«σιανή, 4ϑηναία, these either simply change (by no. 12. 3. 
δ) the ἧς of the Masc. endings into ες, e.g. «Σπαρτιᾶτις, Συβαρῖτις, ete. 
—or they append the endings ἐς and ας; as euphony may require, to the 
radical word itself; e.g. Atodic, Aweic, Meyuoic, Φωκίς, Φωκαΐς, Anas 
(from Ajdos). All these names, according as the sense requires γυγή 
or γῆ to be supplied, are used either of a female or of a country. 


C. Possessive gentile words (xrntixa), as they are called, are 

- adjective forms derived from gentile nouns, and express only a 
relation to these, mostly that of possession (like -ish in the words En- 
glish, Spanish, etc.) ‘They have almost exclusively the ending κός (no. 
13.c). E.g. Συβαριτικός, Κορινϑιακός, Δακεδαιμονικός. 


5) Patronymics, or names derived from ancestors. 


A. Mascuurne. The endings here are: 


—idng, «dns, ιάδης, Gen. ov. These are the most usual endings; and 
indeed the form in ἐδὴς may be considered -as the original one, which 
is derived from names of most terminations; while on the contra- 
ry, the form in ἄδης comes only from names in ag and 7g of Dec. I. 
E. g. Κέκροψ Κεκροπίδης, Κρόνος Κρονίδης, ᾿4λκαῖος ᾿Αλκαΐδης" Βορέας 
Βορεάδης, ᾿Ιππότης “Ιπποτάδης. The ending vad probably arose chief- 
ly on account of names in τος, where this form was occasioned by a 
regard to euphony ; e.g. Mevoitiog ΠΠενοιτιάδης. But the agreeable ca- 
dence of this ending (— ο ὁ --, and especially the wants of hexameter 
verse, occasioned this form to be appended also to many names, 

* which presented a long syllable before the patronymic-ending ; e. g. 
Φερητιάδης from Φέρης, ητος, Τελαμωγιάδης, ᾿Αβαντιάδης, ete. On the 
other hand the dramatic Iambic verse favoured the common form, 
which therefore also occurs from similar names, e.g. IZoAduytidyg, 
᾿Αλκμαιωνίδης, Πελοπίδης, “ Ounotdye. 

—tov G. ὠνος (rarely ovog) is. an infrequent form existing along with 
the other, but found only in the poets; e. g. Kgoviwy, “Axtogiwy. The 
quantity of the « is determined by the metre. 


Nore 10. Patronymics from names in ες and in χλῆς have originally 
éidng; and thence in the common language by contraction sédy¢; 6. g. 
Πηλείδης, Τυδείδης, from Πηλεύς, Τυδεύς ; Ἡρακλείδης from “Ππρακλῆς ;— 
and so in the ending ἐῶ», e.g. Ijdsiwy.—The Dories retained the un- 
contracted form; e.g. Κρηϑεύς Kondsidac.—From the Ionic flexion 
svc G. jos, comes the epic form Πηληϊάδης, ete. 

Nore 11. In like manner o is contracted with 0, in Zav3-oidns, Antol- 
Ong, from Πάνϑοος (Πάνϑους), “ητώ G. (όος) οὖς Latona. 

Nore 12. Not unfrequently the proper name of a man has in itself 
the patronymic form, 6. 5. Midtiadye, Σιμωνέδης, ΖΙευκαλέων. Sometimes 
the same name appears in both forms; e.g. Εὔρυτος and Evgvtiwy. This 
gave occasion to the epic writers, insuch names as did not commonly ter- 


330 § 119, rorMATION OF WoRDS.—DERIVATION. 


minate in wy, to presuppose such a form, and thence to derive a patronym- 
ic suitable to their metre ; e. g. from * Axgiovos—Axovovarvadys, from ᾿Ιαπετός 
—Tanetvovidns. But for like reasons, they sometimes omitted in the pa- 
tronymic the wy of such words as really had it; 6. g. Ζ᾿ευκαλέων---“ ευκαλέ-- 
One. 
B. Feminine. These correspond in general to the masculines,— 
viz. to those in ins, «One, the fominines 4 in ἐς and ἄς, 6. 8: Τανταλίς, 
᾿4τλαντίς, Θεστιάς ;—to those in «dy, the feminines in mis, 6. 5. Ny- 
ρηΐς ;—to those in ἔων, the feminines in vary and iy, 6. g. Axovowwrn, 
᾿Αδρηστίνη. 

6) Diminutives. Of these the termination 

a.—vov (το) is-the chief ending ; e.g. masdiov a small child, σωμά- 

τιον ὦ small body, daxvoy from τὸ ῥάκος, etc. In order to render the 
diminutive more emphatic, this ending is: often made a syllable long- 
er in the following ways,—idvoy, ἄριον, ὕλλιον, ὕδριον, ύφιον. _ E. g. 
πινακέδιον from πίναξ, παιδάριον from solic, μειρακύλλιον from μεῖραξ, 
\ μελύδριον from τὸ μέλος, ζωὔφιον from ζῶον. 

Norte 13. Of these words, all which have four or more syllables, are 
proparoxytone, (to which belong also the contracts, as βοίδιον for βοίΐδιον,) 
and likewise most of those which have three short syllables. Those of 
three syllables which form a dactyle, are with few exceptions parozytone. 


Nove 14. The ending ἴδιον is contracted with several vowels, as βοί- 
— γήδιον, strictly γήδιον. With v and 1, the contraction is into v and ὃ; 

6. g. ἰχϑύδιον, ὕδιον, from iz Ives, Us ; ἱματίδιον from sie Hence the 
first 1 becomes long from radical words'in ἐς G. swe; 6. g. ῥησείδιον from 
éjo1¢; for in many such words the orthography fluctuates between ὅδιον 
and -«id.ov.—The ending ἄριον has always short o. 

Nore 15. Many words in toy have entirely lost their diminutive sense ; 
e.g. Inoloy beast from ὃ ϑήρ, βιβλίον book from βίβλος. 

b.—ioxos, ἰσκη. KE. g. στεφανίσχος, παιδίσκη. 

c.— is (ἡ) G. ἰδος and ἴδος. E. g. ϑεραπαενίς (from ϑεραάπαινα), 


σινακίς (from 6 ὃ πίναξ), σχοινίς, toc, from σχοῖνος, etc. The ending 
idvoy above is a strengthening of this form. Baa aie 


d.—viog Doric. E.g. ᾿ρωτύλος from ”Zows. 
e.—10évs, only of the young of animals; e.g. ἀετεδεὺύς from arog. 


Some peculiar forms, as πολέχνη from πόλις, πυϑάκνη from πέϑος, 
are best learned from observation. 


lil. Adjectives. 


12. Of the adjectives which exhibit evident marks of analogous de- 
rivation, by far the greater part end in o¢. Here however the next pre- 
ceding letters must always be taken into the account. 

a.—1o¢ is one of the most usual endings; of which we can only say, 

that it is immediately derived only from nouns, and mostly from prim- 


itives ; and that it signifies what belongs or, relates to, or is derived ΄ 
JSrom, the object denoted by the noun ; 6. 9. οὐράνιος, ποτάμιος, ξένιος, 


$119. roRMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 991 


φύνιος, ἑσπέριος, etc.—This ending is also particularly used, when 
from an adjective in ος a new adjective is derived; 6. g. ἐλεύϑερος 
Sree, ἐλευϑέριος liberal ; καϑαρός clean, καϑάριος cleanly; etc. 


Nore 16. When the ending og is appended to a word which has τ, 
this is sometimes changed into σ ; 6. g. ἐγιαυτὸς year, ἐνιαύσιος yearling ; 
ἑκών, ὄντος ---- ἑκούσιος. See also above, no. 12. 4. 


From this v0¢ arise, strictly speaking, by the union of the ¢ with 
a preceding vowel, the particular endings 
OG, 106, OL0S, WS. - 


E.g. ἀγοραῖος t from ὁ ἀγορά, ᾿4ϑηναῖος from ᾿4“ϑῆγαιυ ; αἰδοῖος, ἤῷος, from 
αἰδώς -όος, ἠώς -όος:; σπονδεῖος from σπονδή (instead of σπονδήϊος). 
Still, usage has sometimes regarded one of these endings (@o¢) as more 
dette and emphatic; 6. g. πάτριος generally, “ what relates to one’s 
forefathers, native country,” etc. πατρῷος specially, “ what relates to 
one’s father ;” to which last form then the forms μητρῷος, παππῷος 
were made to correspond.—More especially is the ending 


/—€v0¢ in use, as a derivative from words denoting definite species 
or individuals among living beings ; e. g. ἀνϑρώπειος human, λύχειος 
of a wolf, ἀνδρεῖος, γυναικεῖος, etc. This is the most common form 
of derivation from proper names of persons, the ending of which in 
any way admits it; 6. g. Ὁμήρειος, ᾿Επικούρειος, Πυϑαχγόρειος, Εὐρυπί- 
δειος, ete. 

b.—eo¢ denotes chiefly the material fot which anything is made, 
ands is contracted into οὖς: see § 60. 6. 


c.—x0¢ is to be taken in a sense quite as general as ἐ0ς, and extends 
itself also to verbs, (as γραφικός belonging to painting, ἀρχικός fit to 
rule, etc.) ‘The most usual form is “πικός, and when αὖ precedes, 
there commonly arises the form ταἴχός, e.g: τροχαϊκός from τροχαῖος. 
From words in ὃς is formed -οκχός, 6. g. ϑηκυχός: ; and -ακός from 
endings which have ὁ before them, 6. g. ᾿Ολυμπία, Ἴλιος --- Ολυμπια- 
κός, ᾿Ιλιακός" σπονδεῖος, σπονδειακός. Instead of the simpler --ἰκός 
however, the ending --αχός is often preferred, on account of its better 
cadence, although it is strictly a double derivation, e.g. Κόρινϑος,-- 
Κορίνϑιος a Corinthian, Κορινϑιακός Corinthian. Comp. above the 
ending -ἰάδης. 

d. -νός an old Passive ending (like τός, τέος); hence δεινός terrible, 
σέμγνος (from σέβομαι) venerable, στυγνός hateful, etc. 


—ivog as proparoxytone, denotes almost exclusively the material, e.g. 
ξύλινος wooden, λέϑινος, etc. A single exception is ἀνθρώπινος ἢ i. q- 
ἀνϑρώπειος human, etc.—As oxytone, it forms adjectives of time, 6. δ. 
ἡμερινός, χϑεσινός of yesterday, from χϑές. Ἔ 

The word πεδὲνός and those in εὐ» ς indicate a Sulness or some- 
thing entire, etc. πεδινός entirely level, φηγὸν mountainous, εὐδιεινός 
entirely chee, etc. 


—ivog, ἄνός, nvog, belong only to pen seid see Text 12.4. A. 


* In respect to the quantity, there are in the poets only a few exceptions, 
where the ending ἐνὸς is made long ; as ὀπωρινός ἴπ Homer. 


332 § 119. FORMATION OF WORDS.—DERIVATION. 


: 


6.----λος, an old Active ending ; hence δειλόο, one who fears, timid; 
bumcory hoc one who makes others fear, formidable, see marg. note to λελέ- 
ἡμαυν in the Catalogue. The most common are the lengthened end- 
ings ηλός and wios, which indicate propensity and habit, as ἀπατηλός 
deceitful, ἁμαρτωλός accustomed to sin, etc. 


f-—ipog is confined almost wholly to verbals; it marks fitness both 
Active and Passive, and is appended after various analogies ; e. g. 
χφήσιμος useful from χράομαι, τρόφιμος nourishing, ϑανάσιμος deadly, 
πότιμος drinkable. This ending is also sometimes lengthened by 
ios, as ὑποβολιμαῖος. 


ο.----ός, ἐερός, 7008, express mostly the idea of fulness, 6. g. οἰχτρὸς 
full of grief, φϑονερός full of envy, νοσηρός and γνοσερός sickly. 

h.—aiéog signifies nearly the same ; e.g. ϑαῤδαλέος (from Pa¢éos), 
ῥωμαλέος, δειμαλέος, ψωραλέος, etc. 

ἐ.-- τὸς and τέος see ᾧ 102. 


14. Other adjective endings are the following : 


a. — εἰς G. ἐντος, with preceding ὁ, ἡ, or 0, denoting a fulness ; 
6. 5. χαρίεις full of grace, ἱλήεις full: of woods, TUQOEIS full of fire. 
That those in ἤεις and ogg admit of contraction, we have seen 
already in § 41. n. 5. and ὃ 62. n. 3. ; 


ὃ.---ης, ες, G. ous, serves for derivation only in composition (§ 121. 6); 
still there arises from it the special ending 
--ὦδης, dec, G. ους, with a shifting of the accent, from -οειδής 
(from εἶδος form, manner); 6. σ. σφηκώδης wasp-like, γυναικώδης 
womanly ; but most commonly denoting a fulness, multitude, and 
especially frequent in a sense of censure ; 6. g. ψαμμώδης, αἱματώδης, 
ἱλυώδης, full of sand, blood, mire. 


c. — μων, G. ovos, belongs to verbals after the analogy of substan- 
tives in wo, and in part first formed from these. The signification 
for the most part follows the active quality denoted by the verb. E. g. 
γοήμων intelligent, from γοεῖν ; πολυπράγμων busy, busily occupied, 
from πολύς and πρᾶγμα or πράττειν ; ἐπιλήσμων forgetful, ete. 
Finally, a multitude of adjectives arise simply through composition, of 
which we shall treat in the following section. 


IV. Adverbs. ; 
15. Besides the general mode of forming adverbs by simply changing 
the flexible ending of adjectives into ὡς, which has been treated of in 

§ 115, there are still the following adverbial endings: 

a.— δὴν. These are solely verbals, and express the manner of ap- 
plying the verbal action. The ending is appended partly in the 
manner of the endings τέος, τός ; but with the necessary change of 
the verbal characteristic, and never with o. E. g. συλλήβδην taking all 
together, i. 6. on the whole, in general ; κρύβδην secretly ; ; βάδην step for 
step, slowly ; ; ἀνέδην unrestrained, fearlessly, from avinut, ἀνετός. ---- 
Partly it is also appended in the form --δὴν to the stem itself, the rad- 
ical vowel being changed to 0; e.g. σποράδην scattered, προτροπάδην 
(pevyew— to fly) turned forwards, i. 6. without looking back. 


δ 120. FoRMATION OF WORDS.—COMPOSITION. 999 


b. — δόν, ηδὸν, come mostly from nouns, and relate chiefly to exter- 
nal form and nature; 6. g. ἀγεληδόν in droves ; Borgudoy grape-like ; 
πλιγϑηδόν (from lievoc) laid like tiles ; Ἔαρος. dog-like, — When 
they come from verbs, they coincide with those in dyv; e.g. ava- 
φανδόν visibly, before the world. — : 


c. —/ or εἰ These mark some circumstance connected with the 
action ansroreee in the sentence. Verbals especially terminate in 


- — τί or tél, which endings are appended entirely in the manner 
of the ending τός; 6.5. ὀνομαστί by name ; ἐγρηγορτί waking. So 
especially in words compounded with a negative; e. g. ἀγελαστί with- 
out laughing ; ἀγιδρωτί without sweating, without difficulty ; ἀμαχητεῖ 
without fighting ; ἀκηρυκτεὶ or --ἰ without proclamation. — Hence, and 
from what was said above in no. 3 d, of verbs in ‘fw, comes the signifi- 
cation of the adverbs in -voti, after the manner, custom, language, of a 

' nation, class, individual, etc. E. g. ἑλληνιστὶ, in the Greek manner, in the 
Greek language ; γα hac in the manner of women ; so ἀνδραποδιστί, 
Bototi, etc. 

Those formed from nouns have simply ὦ ior al in the place of the flexi- 
ble ending ; so that in éxorti willingly, ἀνατεί, without injury, from 
ἄτη, the t belongs to the radical form. 'The most are compounds ; ; 
e.g. πανδημεΐ as a whole people, with united strength, etc. αὐτονυχί im 
the same night, this very. night, from an old flexion νύξ, -χός ; ἀμαχείΐ 
without battle ; αὐτοχειρὶ unth one’s own hand; ἀμισϑὲ without wages ; 
γηποιγϑί, unpunished, with the negation γη-- § 120. n. 12, 

_ d. — &, an infrequent form, which is always oxytone, and commonly, 
though not always, includes a palatal already existing in the radical 
word ; the signification i is very general. E. g. ἀναμῖξ mixed together, 
pellmelt ; παραλλάξ alternately ; οκλάξ (from ὀκλάζω) cowering, squat- 
ting ; 0da& with the teeth, from odotc. 


§ 120. Derivation by Composition. 


1. The first component part of every compound word is either a noun, 
a verb, or an indeclinable word. ‘ 
2. When the first word is a Noun, its flexible. ending't is commonly 
changed into the union-vowel 0; which however is regularly elided, 
when the last word begins with a vowel. E.g. 
λογοποιός, παιδοτρίβης, σωματοφύλαξ, ἰχϑυοπώλης (from ἐχϑύς, 
vos), δικογράφος (from δίκη) 
νομάρχης (from νόμος and ἄρχοω), παιδαγωγὸς (from ἄγω, ἀγω-- 
yn), καχεξία (from κακός ‘and ἕξι). 
In most cases nevertheless, where the ending of the noun has v or 4, 
the Ο is not assumed. E.g. 


* This double pronunciation was determined i in particular cases by euphony, 
and perhaps in the poets by the metre, since ¢ can be used both as long and short. 
In our editions it is determined, as ‘far as possible, by the manuscripts or by 


the number of examples. 
43 


334 § 120. FoRMATION OF WORDS.—COMPOSITION. 


εὐθύδικος, πολυφάγος, πολίπορϑος, from εὐϑύς, πολύς, πόλις. 
In the same manner after ov and αὖ, 6. g. 
Bovpoofos, ναυμαχία, from βοῦς, ναῦς, 
and often after ν, e. g. 
μελαγχολία, τἀ πὶος (from μέλας, ανος), παμφάγυς (from 
πᾶς, παντος). 


Nore 1. The o remains sometimes before vowels, especially before 
those of which it can be assumed (ᾧ 6. n. 3), that i in the earlier language 
they had the digamma ; e. g. μηνοειδής, μενοεικής, ἀγαϑοεργός. But in 
compounds with ἔργον or EPI, the ὁ is commonly contracted with the 
8; as δημιουργός, λειτουργός. ‘ 

Nore 2. An ὦ as union-vowel comes either from the Attics, or from 
the contracted forms of declension ; 6. g. νεωκόρος (from γεώς), ὀρεωκόμος 
(from ὀρεύς G. ogéws), κρεωφάγος esis κρέας G. αος, ὡς). The word γῆ 
earth becomes in all compounds ges Η δ γεωγράφος, instead of γαο-, 
from the old form TAA. See ὁ 27. ἢ. 


Nore 3. Some primitives i in μα, G. ματος, simply change their @ into 
0, or cast it off; 6. g. αἱμοσταγής, στομαλγία, from αἷμα, στόμα. 


Nore 4. In some compounds, especially i in poetical ones, the form of 
the Dat. Sing. or Dat. Plur. is assumed i in composition ; 6, ὃ. πυρίπνους, 
γυχτιπόρος, γαστρίμαργος, ὀρειγόμος (from ὅρος, £06), γαυσιπόρος, ἐγχεσίμω- 
θος. --- A shortening of this-last (the Dat. Plur.) is the very common form 
in eo (from og G. 20s), τελεσφόρος, σαχκέσπαλος, from τὸ τέλος, σάκος. 


Nore 5. There are still some single peculiarities, which must be left 
to observation ; 6. 8. μεσαιπόλιος from μέσος ; ὁδοιπόρος from ὅδός ; ἀργί- 
πους from ἀργής OF ἀργός: ποδανιπτήρ from ποῦς, ποδός ; ἀκράχολος from 
ἄκρος ; Θηβαχγενής, μοιρηγενής, from Θήβη, μοῖρα ; ἐλαφηβόλος, λαμπαδηφό- 
θος, from ὅλαφος, λαμπάς ;—and the apparently retained og of the Nomina- 
tive in ϑεόσδοτος, λαοσσόος. 


3. When the first word is a Verb, its ending is commonly changed 
into € without change of the characteristic, or else into ov. E. g. 
ἀρχέκακος from ἄρχειν, δακέϑυμος from δἄᾶκνω, ἔδακον. 
λυσίπονος from. λύω, τρεψίχρως from τρέπω, ἐγερσίχορος from 
ἐγείρω. ᾿ 
Here too the vowel can be elided; e.g. φέρασπις, δίψασπις. 

Nore 6. The cases are less frequent where « stands without o, as in 
τερπικέραυνος and in many from ἄρχειν, 6. g. ἀρχυϑέωρος ; or where the verb 
takes 0, a8 φαιγομηρΐς, and almost all compounds with λείπω, 8. g. Aet- 
ποτάξιον.--- ΤῊ learner will note the forms ταμεσέχρως (from τέμγω, ἔταμον), 


λιπεσήνωρ (from λείπω, ἔλιπον), and the form (shortened from the former) 
sail for φερεσίβιος. 


* Those who. are-accustomed to reflect and compare, will readily perceive, that 
in all the above forms of composition, neither Datives nor Nominatives are to be 
sought for. The vowels and δ are the natural union-létters. Perspicuity and 
euphony determined the choice. Thus in τελεσφόρος, as also in ϑεόοδοτος, the 
o is only a strengthening sound ; ἐγχεσέμωρος exhibits a sonorous fulness, etc. 


§ 120. FORMATION OF WORDS.—COMPOSITION. 335 


4, Indeclinable words remain unchanged in composition, with the 
exception of such changes as are effected by general rules, and, in 
prepositions, by elision. E. g. ἀγχίαλος (from ἄγχε and aig), παλαιγε- 
γῆς from πάλαι" ἀναβαίνω, ἀνέρχομαι, from ava’ ἐξέρχομαι, ἐκβαίνω, 
from ἐξ.---προάγω, περιάγω. See ᾧ 30.2. The ν in compounds with 
ἐν, σύν, πάλιν, and ἄγαν, has been particularly considered in §25.— 
For δὲ-- and δισ-, roc- and reco-, see ᾧ 70. n. 2. and marg. note. 


N (OTE 7. The preposition σερό makes sometimes a crasis; 6. g. προύχω, 
“προῦπτος, for προέχω, πρόοπτος ; especially with the augment, see § 86. n. 
1 For φροῦδος and the like, see ὁ 17.—F or the shortened forms παρϑέ- 
μενος, ἀνστάντες, pyar, etc. see δ 117. n. 2. 


Nore 8. That περὶ does not lose the «in composition, follows of 
_ course from § 30. 2. But ἀμφὲ likewise often retains it; 6. g. in ἀμφίαλος, 
ἀμφίετες, from ἅλς, ἔτος. The other prepositions retain their vowel only 
in the Ionic dialect, especially the old Ionic of the epic writers, in some 
compounds, where the second word originally had the digamma. In the 
Attic dialect this takes place only in ἐπιορκεῖν, ἐπιέσασϑαν (§ 108. IIT), and 
the Adj. ἐπιεικής. 

Nore 9. In respect to the division into syllables the common rule is, 
that when the preposition by itself ends in a consonant, this consonant 
remains with the first syllable; as εἰσπτέρχομαι, προσ-άγω, %y-vdgos, ἐξ-- 
'ὄρχομαι. But when the consonant regularly begins in the preposition 
itself the second syllable, it continues to do the same in the compound, 
even when its own vowel is elided ; 6. g. πα-ράγω, ἀ-παυτεῖν. 


5. Of the inseparable particles the principal are: (1) dvo-, which 
signifies difficulty, adversity, etc. e.g. δύσβατος difficult of passage, 
Ovodatpovia adverse fate; and (2) the negative ἃ called 

a privative, 
which marks a direct negative, like the Latin in-, and the English in- 
and un-; e.g. ἄβατος impassable, ἄπαις childless. Before a vowel 
_ this & commonly assumes », 6. g. ἀναίτιος innocent, from αἰτία guilt. 


Nore 10. Many words beginning with a vowel, especially. those men- 
tioned in § 6. n. 3, as originally beginning with a digamma, take neverthe- 
less the o alone ; 6. δ΄. ἀήττητος, ἄοινος, etc. Hence the ἃ is subject to con- 
traction, as in ἄκων unwilling for ἀέκων, ἀργός unemployed from ἄεργος 
with a change of accent (ὃ 121. n. 6).—On the other hand, the y remains 

before a consonant in ἀγγέφελος, ἀμφασίη from & and φημί. 


Nore 11. When the learner finds it‘ asserted, that this ἃ has other 
significations, and even an intensiveone, he must not so understand this 
assertion, as if he were at liberty to explain the ἃ in this manner in every 
instance. It has these significations solely in some old compounds, which 
must be noted singly, and of which we therefore exhibit here the most 
important, leaving the minute details to the lexicon. It is intensive in 
ἀτεγής very intent, sharp, spoken of a look, from τεένω stretch ; ἄβρομος, 
ἀσκελής very dry, hard ; ἀχανής, ἄξυλος, spoken of a wood, very thick (Il. a, 


990 § 12], FORMATION OF WORDS.— COMPOSITION. 


105. It expresses union or unity, in ἀγάλακεις those who have been nour- 
ished with the same milk ; oy aoTwo, ἀδελφός, ἄκριτις, ἀτάλαντος lit. of the 
same weight, equal ; πῇ from λέχος, ἀκόλουϑος from χέλευϑος, ἄπεδος 
entirely level ; ἀβολεῖν to meet together, ete. In all these examples the  prob- 
ably has its origin from the aspirated & in ἁπλοῦς and ἅπας. --- There re- 
main however still some instances, where the ὦ is superfluous, or is doubt- 
ful in usage or in the mode of explanation; as ἀάσχετος, ἄβληχρος, ἄβιος, 
ἄπτερος, etc. 


Nore 12. An infrequent form of negation is the inseparable γη-- 8. δ. 


γήποιγος unpunished ; νῆστις fasting, from γη-- and 0; γώνυμος from vy— 
and ὄνομα. 


Nore 13. We may 1 further note as inseparable particles, ἀρι, ἐρι, and 
ξα, all intensive; 6, g. ἀριπρεπής very distinguished; ἐρίβρομος loud sound- 
ing ; ζαμενής very bold. ; 

6. In all compounds, where the second word begins with @, and a 
short vowel comes to stand before it, the @ is regularly « doubled (ὃ 21. 2) ; 
e. g. ἐσοῤῥεπής, from ἔσος and ῥέπω; περιρβόὅξω, ἀπόῤῥητος, ἄῤῥη- 
τος (from αὶ and ῥητός). 


s 


$121. Species of Composition. Accents of Compounds, etc. 


1. The form of the dasé part of a compound determines the character 
of the whole word, which accordingly is either a verb, a noun, or a par- 
ticle. | 

τῷ, The most usual composition with Verbs is the loose or improper 
composition ; in which the verb remains unchanged, and retains its own 
peculiar flexion with both augment and endings. But strictly speaking, 
this occurs only with the eighteen primitive prepositions (§ 115. 2), 
viz. ἀμφί, ave, ἀντί, ἀπό, Ove, εἰς, ἐν, ἐξ, ἐπί, κατά, μετά, παρά, περί, 
πρό, πρός, σύν, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, and isin fact no real composition. The prep- 
ositions in this case can properly be considered only as adverbs closely 
connected with the verb, in the sense of upwards, inwards, forwards, 
away, etc. Every similar connexion of an unaltered verb with real ad- 
verbs and other words, is always regarded as a simple juxtaposition, 
and the two are therefore for the most part separately written ; @.g. εὖ 
πράττειν, κακῶς ποιεῖν. — 

Norte 1. In the earlier poetry it was sometimes customary to write in 
one word certain verbs, especially participles, with a preceding adverb in- 
timately connected with them; 6. g. αὐέρυσαν for av ἔρυσαν they bent back, 
i. 6. the neck of the victim; παλιμπλαγχϑέντας, etc. So too even with an 


Acc. governed by the verb 5 as δαχρυχέων. See Wolf. Praef. ad Iliad. 
LXI. 


Nore 2. . For the very reason that the usual composition of verbs with 
prepositions is to be regarded in this same manner, such compounds admit 
in poetry the figure called Tmesis ; see ὃ 147. n. 11. 


§ 121. FoRMATION OF WORDS.—CoMPOSITION. 337 


3. The close or proper composition on the contrary, in which the first 
word unites itself completely with the following, (which is true also of 
the inseparable particles,) can be admitted by verbs only when they 
undergo some change in their forms. That is to say, there thus arise 
‘peculiar compound verbal forms with a derivative ending, most com- 
monly in ἕω; where, for the most part, a noun compounded in the man- 
ner shewn below (4—7) lies at the basis. E.g. from ἔργον and λαμ- 
βάνω comes ἐργολάβος, and hence ἐργολαβεῖν ; from εὖ and ἔρδω 
(EPI) comes εὐεργέτης benefactor, and hence εὐεργετεῖν to do good; 
from dvo- and agéoxw — δυσάρεστος displeased, δυσαρεστεῖν to be 
displeased, etc. So when instead of φείδεσϑαν to spare, the negative 
idea of not to spare, to neglect, was to be expressed with ἃ privative, there 
arose from the Adj. ἀφειδῆς the verb agecdety. — In the same man- 
ner there exist some instances of composition with prepositions; e.g. 
ἀντιβολεῖν (from ἀντεβολή), from ἀντί and βάλλω ; ὑπερμαχεῖν (from 
ὑπέρμαχος), from ὑπέρ and μάχομαι. 

Nore 3. When in this kind of composition the verb sometimes ap- 
pears unchanged, it arises from an accidental coincidence of the deriva- 
tive ending with that of the verbal root; 6. g. ποιέω make, μελοποιός, με-- 
λοποιέω ~make verses. So μυροπωλέω comes not from_ptgoy and πωλέω, 
but from μυροπώλης; ἀφρογέω not from o--and φρονέω, but from ἄφρων, 
etc. In like manner ἀτιμάω is not formed from τυμάω, but is a secondary 
form from ἀτιμάζω, which comes from ἄτιμος. 

4. In compound Nouns, only the close or proper composition can 
have place; although the last part is often an unaltered noun. But 
even when both parts remain unchanged, they are still regarded as ex- 
pressing a single compound idea, and are consequently never separated 
by Tmesis. It is here less usually the case, that the last noun contin- 
ues to express its principal idea, which then is modified or defined by the 
preceding part ; and the instances which do occur, are for the most part 
words compounded with prepositions ; e.g. ξένος a stranger, guest; 100- 
Eevog the public or state guest ; ὁδὸς way, a coming, σύνοδος a coming 
together ; ὁμόδουλος fellow-servant. But Adjectives not unfrequently 
have their simple signification modified by means of this kind of com- 
position; e.g. πέστός credible, ἄπεστος not to be credited; φίλος lov- 
ed, ὑπέρφιλος immoderately loved. But when e.g. an abstract sub- 
stantive, as τόμη honour, is to receive a negative form by means of ἃ 
privative (dishonour), there is first formed in this manner an adjective, 
ἄτιμος, and thence a new substantive, ἀτιμία. — In such compounds, 
adjectives in vs mostly adopt the ending 7¢; 6. g. ἡδύς pleasant, andns 
unpleasant ; βαρύς, οἰνοβαρής, etc. 

5. But in most nouns compounded in this manner, the last part does 


~ 


338 ᾧ 121. roRMATION OF WORDS.—COMPOSITION. 


not express the principal idea of the simple*word, or the ῬΡΗΝ of 
the thought which lies at the basis of the same, but only its object; 
although this last part of the compound is very often an unaltered noun. 
It is indeed always so, whenever the simple noun has an ending not in- 
compatible with the nature of the compound to be formed. ‘Thus: 
ἄποικος, δεισιδαίμων, do not express an οἶκος, a δαίμων, which are then 
rendered determinate by, the first part of the compound ; but the for- 
mer means one who is ἄπο τοῦ οἴκου absent from his house or home ; 
the latter, one δείσας τοὺς δαίμονας fearing the gods. So ἄπαις is one 
who has no child, childless ; μακρόχειρ one who has a long hand; &y- 
ϑεος inspired Jrom God; ἐπέχφιφεμανοῦ. one who ἐπιχαίρειν τοῖς κακοῖς 
rejoices in evil, malicious. 
When however the original ending of the noun is not compatible with 
the intended compound, the latter assumes the simplest kindred ending 
of declension, 1. e. consequently either a simple ¢, or some one of the 
endings 0g, ὡς G. w, ης ἃ. ous, ἐς G. δος, or of those which arise from 
the change of vowels mentioned § 63. 2, viz. ὧν and w@; e. g. 

- ἄδακρυς (from δάκρυ) tearless ; τρεχέδειτενος (from τρέχω and δεῖπνον») 
one who runs after suppers ; ἘΣ δεκορ one who exercises exact right (δίκη); 
ἄτιμος deprived of honour (τιμή), dishonoured ; φιλοχρήματος one who 
loves money (χρῆμα, χρήματα) ; εὔγεως of a good soil (γὴ, ysw-), fertile ; 
λειπεῤνεως leaving his ship (ναῦς, νεώς); κακοήϑης of evil disposition 
(Foc) ; ἄναλκις G. δος without courage (ἀλκή); σώφρων one who has 
common sense (φρήν), sensible ; εὑπάτωρ one who has noble forefathers 
(πατέρες), noble. . 

Compare for all these forms § 63. In this way arise a great portion of 
all compound adjectives or of substantives which imply an attribute. 

6. Most frequently, however, when-a compound noun is to be formed 
by the help of a verb, the verb stands last and takes the ending of a 
noun. In this case the preceding word or first part contains either the 
limitation or the object of the verbal action; e.g. ἐργολάβος one who 
undertakes a work, ἱπποτρόφος one who raises horses, etc. The simple 
ending 0¢ is the most common one in this sort of composition. Besides 
this there are, for substantives, the endings ἧς and ας of Dec. I, see the 
examples § 119. 8. d; and for adjectives the ending ἧς of Dec. III; 
e.g. εὐμαϑής Neut. ἔς, one who learns well. There are further the 
other noun-endings mentioned § 119. 8; 6. g. νομοϑέτης from νόμος and 
zidnut, etc. 

7. From all such primary compounds, there are found again other 
derivative compounds, like δεισιδαιμονία, νομοϑεσία, νομοϑετικός, 
etc. So likewise the compound verbs mentioned in no. 3 above, as 
ἱπποτροφέω from ἱπποτρόφος, εὐπαϑέω from εὐπαϑής, etc. ἱ 

8. Among the changes which sometimes occur in composition in the 
second word or last part, it is to be particularly noted, that words begin- 


§ 121. FORMATION OF WORDS.—COMPOSITION. 339 


ning with short ἃ or ηὐνΐαν, é and 0, very aiceunncelll assume ἢ or ὦ. 
This is never the case with verbs δαμηνοονδά with prepositions in the 
manner exhibited in no. 2 above; but it can have place in the words 
expressing attributes, derived from such verbs, and consequently in 
compound verbs of the second class (no. 3 above) ; e.g. 
ὑπήκοος obedient, from ὑπακούω; στρατηγός leader, commander, from 
στρατός and ἄγω; ἢ κατήγορος accuser, κατηγορέω, from κατά and 
ἀγορά; εὐήγνεμος from ἄνεμος ; δυσήλατος from ἐλαύνω; ἀγώμοτος 
. from ouyuus, ete. 
In the compounds from ὄνομα, the second o is also changed into v, 
as ἀνώνυμος, εὐώνυμος, etc. 

9. In respect to the Accent, the general rule is, that in consequence 

of composition the accent of the simple word, (according to the analogy 

- laid down in § 12.2. a,) is drawn back as‘far as the nature of the accent 
permits. Thus, 6. g. from τέκνον, θεός, come φιλότεχνος, φιλόϑεος; 
from ὁδός σύνοδος; from παῖς, παιδὸς, comes ἄπαις, ἄπαιδος ; from 
τιμή ἄτιμος ; from ἑταῖρος, παρϑένος, come φιλέταιρος, εὐπάρϑενος; 
from αἰόλος changeable, παναίολος wholly changeable; from παιδευτὸς 
come ἀπαίδευτος, δυσπαίδευτος, etc. Here however the following ex- 
ceptions are to be noted : 

1) The adjective-ending ¢, ¢¢, has more commonly in composition 

the accent upon the ending ; e.g. peAoussdng, προσφιλής, ἀπαϑής. 
Still, many of these compounds, as those with 790g, μῆκος, τεῖχος 
᾿ἀρχέω, draw back the accent, 6. g. εὐήϑης, εὔηϑες, αὐτάρκης, etc. 
“So too those in -wd7¢ § 119. 14. 6. Comp. the Ausf, Sprachi. 

2) Verbals in ἡ, &, ἧς, ήρ, evs, and ¢o¢, which in their simple form . 
have the tone on the ending, retain it there in composition ; 6. g. 
ἐπιτομή, συμφορά, οἰχοδομή, συνδικαστής, συγγραφεύς, Enetyun- 

‘zéog. So substantives in μός, as διασυρμός, παροξυσμός, etc. with 

- the exception of those in -δέσμος, as σύνδεσμος, etc.—Compound 

adjectives in tog (comp. ‘§ 60) have commonly τος, toy, (two 

endings) with the accent drawn back ; less frequently τός, τή, τόν, 

(three endings) ; where however no certain rule can be given; 6. g. 
ἀπόβλητος, ἐξαίρετος, etc. or καϑεκτός, τή, TOY, etc. 

3) Words which are not themselves compounded, but are derived 
from other compounds (παρασύνϑετα), follow in respect to accent 
the general analogy of their endings; e.g. the abstract verbals in 
7 and @, as συλλογή, προσφορά, from συλλέγω, προσφέρω.--- hus 
there is further derived from ἄδικος, aduxeiv—adunnrexos ; from πα- 


* The compounds formed in this manner from ἄγω and ἄγνυμε have some- 
times, even in the common language, a Iong ἃ ; 6. g. Aoyayds, vavayds. 


4 


340 § 121. rorMATION OF WoRDS.—COMPOSITION. 


Uy ’ ~ 
θοξυνω — nagosvouos, from προσδοκᾶν --- προσδοκητός,. But 


see note 7. So soon however as such words are again compounded, 
they draw back the accent, e. g. ἀπροσδόκητος. 

4) Those compounds, whose first part is formed from a noun or 
adverb, and the last part from a transitive verb with the simple 
ending 0¢, (not τος, νος, etc.) take the accent, in the Active signi- 


fication, regularly on the penult, if that syllable be short; but in ᾿ 


the Passive sense, on the antepenult; e. g. 

λιϑοβόλος throwing stones 

λεϑόβολος thrown at with stones. 
Orestes is a μητροκτόνος, but the children of Medea are μητρύ- 
xtover. So δικογράφος one who writES accusations, λεπτόγραφος 
WRITTEN fine; and thus throughout, even where only the Active 
signification can have place, as in οἰκονόμος, οἰνοχόος, τοιχωρύ- 
yoo from ὁρύσσω, ἀδηφάγος from ἄδην, etc. When however the 
penult is ong, the accent goes to the final syllable; 6. g. wuyomop- 
m0, oxvrodeWos, innoPooxos, λιϑουλκὸς (from ἕλκω), μελοποιός, 
δεινωπός (from ΟΠ), ὁδηγός, παιδαγωγός, ἀργυραμοιβός. 

Note 4, Compounds of this kind, which contrary to the rule here 
given are proparoxytone, with the exception of some epic adjectives (ὑππό- 
δαμος, σακέσπαλος, πτολίπορϑος), are found only from some few vérbs 
beginning with a vowel, as jriozos (from ἢ ἡνίον ἔχω), ναύαρχος, etc. This 
_ accentuation lies also at the basis in the perispomena, as δᾳδοῦχος (from 
δᾷδα ἔχω), κακοῦργος, πανοῦργος, from EPI. The other compounds 
of the same verb which fall under this head, follow the δ ae as ἀγαϑοερ- 
06, AvFovoeyos, ete. 

Nore 5. When the verb is ientiasition: the compound remains subject 
to the gener al rule. Thus we find indeed αὐτοχτόνος (from ἐμαυτὸν κτεΐ- 

yo); but αὐτόμολος (from αὐτὸς ᾿ἕμολο»), and likewise ἰσόῤῥοπος, βαρύ- 
Poopios, etc. also αἱμόῤῥοος αἱμόῤῥους, πυρίπνους, etc. because in these the 
verbs ῥεῖν, πργεῖν, are intransitive, and the nouns are to be taken only as 
Datives. 

Nore 6. Some compounds became oxytone contrary to the general 
rule, because their derivation was less obvious; e. g. ἀτραπός, ἀδελφός, 
βουλυτός. See also @ ἀργός § 120. n. 10. 

Nore 7. The few single instances, where words compounded with 
prepositions do not draw back the accent, e. g. ἀντίος, ἐναντίος, or where a 
word derived from a rece nevertheless draws back the accent, as 
especially many in τος, 6. g. ἐξαίρετος, ἐπίληπτος, ὕποπτος, περίῤῥυτος, may 
be Best learned from observation. 

4 


PART ΤΙ. 


͵ ------ -- 


SYNTAX. 


δ 122. Definition. 

1. Sywrax teaches the proper wse of those forms, the origin and deri- 
vation of which have been shewn in the preceding parts of the grammar. 
For this purpose it follows the same general division of the Parts of 
Speech, which we have given in δ 31. 

2. We shall therefore here treat of the several parts,of discourse in 
the following order: (1) The Νοῦν as independent, i.e. in itself and 
in connexion with other nouns and kindred words, as articles, “adjec- 
_ tives, pronouns, participles. (2) The Noun as dependent, i. 6. in con- 
struction, or as dependent on verbs and other words. (3) The Vers. 
(4) The Particies. (5) Various compound Phrases and Figures of 
Construction. 


THE NOUN AS INDEPENDENT. 


§ 123. General Principles. 


1. Every word joined to a substantive, in the character or quality of 
an adjective, (as adjectives, participles, pronouns, articles,) must agree 
with the noun in gender, number, and case. , 

2. From this rule there is in Greek an apparent departure, when, as 
is common among the Attics, the adjective etc. with the masculine end- 
ing, is joined with the Feminine Dual. E. g. Xen. Cyrop. 1.2. 11, zat 
μίαν ἄμφω τούτω τὼ ἡμέρα λογίξονται. Plat. Phaedr. p. 237. d, ἡμῶν 
ἐν ἑχάστῳ δύο τινὲ ἐστον ἰδέα ἄρχοντε καὶ ἄγοντε, οἷν ἑπόμεϑα. So 
often το ea) and τοῖν ϑεοῖν (Ceres and Persephone) from ἡ soc. But 
since adjectives in 0¢, especially among the Attics, are often of common 
gender (ὃ 60. 3. 4), we only need here in like manner to make the 
supposition, that in the Dual this is commonly the case with all adjec- 
tives and other similar forms. - 

_ Nortel. The poets sometimes take the liberty of connecting with 
feminine words, nouns expressing attributes, which as to form are only 
masculine AS 119. 8); 6. g. Motoou ἵστορες ᾧδῆς, ᾿Ερινύες λωβητῆρες, πάμ- 
βώτορα γαῖαν, φίλων διαφϑορεῦ addressed to a woman, Eurip. Hipp. 682. 
v. Valck. 


The mixing of Dual and Plural forms occurs for the most part only in 
the construction of the subject and predicate; see § 129.5, 


342 §§ 123, 124. synrax.—NoUNS AND ARTICLES. 


3. An adjective can stand without a substantive, not only in reference 
to a substantive expressed in the same connexion or sentence, but also 
very often without any such reference. In this latter case ἃ substan- 
tive is either actually omitted where it might stand, or at least the idea 
of such a substantive is always implied; as man, woman, thing, ete. 
Such an adjective then acquires entirely the character of a substantive. 
E. g. 6 σοφὸς the wise sc. man, 7 ἄνυδρος sc. γῆ the desert, ἡ ὀρϑή sc. 
ὁδὸς the straight way, οἱ πολλοί the many, the people, τὰ ἐμά my 
things. So also the pronouns οὗτος, ἐχεῖνος, tis, etc. 


Norte 2. In this last mode have arisen most of the substantives in all 
languages. Hence it comes, that in Greek, very many personal appella- 
tions, which denote an employment or character, as herdsman, judge, etc. 
are still always employed like adjectives, with the word ἀνήρ subjoined, so 
soon as they serve simply to designate a person. Thus e.g. ποιμήν herds- 
man stands alone only in actual reference to his herd; but ἀνὴρ ποιμήν 
stands, where we indeed commonly say a herdsman, but where the more ~ 
exact idea is, a manawho is a herdsman. So also ojo τύραννος “ ἃ man 
who belongs to a regal family,” like Hipparchus the brother of Hippias, 
the actual ruler of Athens. See further ἀνὴρ φιλός, § 132. 4.2. a. When 
spoken to more than one, this is a form of respectful address, e. g. ἄνδρες 
δικασταί ye judges. 


Norte'3. An adjective can sometimes supply the place of an adverb ; 
and several Greek adjectives occur almost solely in. such connexions. 
Such are ἐθελοντής voluntary, as ἐθελοντὴς anja “he departed voluntari- 
ly ;” ἄσμενος glad, as ἀσμένη ἐδέξατο “she received it very gladly ;” and 
many adjectives indicating time, as τριταῖον ἀφίκοντο “they arrived after 


three days ;” σκοταῖος ἤλϑεν “he came in the dark.” 


[Norse 4. Instead of an adjective, we sometimes find a substantive 
employed to express a quality or attribute belonging to another substan- 
tive. This qualifying word is then either put in the Genitive with the 
other substantive, or it takes the other with it in the Genitive. E. g. 
Eurip. Bacch. 388, ὁ. τῆς ἡσυχίας βίοτος, instead of βίοτος ἥσυχος. Aris- 
toph. Plut. 268, ὦ χρυσὸν ἀγγείλας ἐπῶν, instead of ἔπη χρυσᾶ. The former 
is the more usual construction, and is commom in the later Greek of the 
New Testament,—Tr. 

4. When an adjective in the comparative degree expresses com- 
parison with another adjective or quality, this latter stands in Greek, 
as in Latin, not in the positive, but also in the comparative ; e. g. Eu- 
rip. Med. 490, πρόϑυμος μᾶλλον ἢ σοφωτέρα. 


ὃ 124. Tue ῬΕΠΡΟΞΙΤΙΨΕ, ARTICLE. 


1. When a substantive is to be expressed as definite, it regularly 
takes before it the article 0, 7, τό, which corresponds to the English 
the, and more fully to the German der, die, das. 

2. The indefinite article of modern languages is in Greek never ex- 
pressed; and it is only when that which is indefinite is at the same 


§ 124. syNTAX OF THE PREPOS. ARTICLE. 343 


time to be expressed as an individual, that the pronoun τὶς, τὲ, in some 
measure supplies its place. E. g. ἵππος ἔτεκε λογών, “a mare brought 
forth a hare ;” γυνή τις ὄρνιν εἶχεν, “ a certain woman had a hen ;” 
ἢ κόρη ἐγένετο aoxos, “the maid became a bottle.” 

3. Proper names very often take the article; e.g. ὁ «Σωχράτης, ai 
᾿ϑῆναι. But it is often omitted; and always, when the proper name 
is followed by a more definite attribute with the article; e.g. Σωκράτης 
ὁ φιλόσοφος. 


Nore 1. As to the particular instances, where the definite article may 
be inserted or omitted, the usage of different languages varies. The 
Greek language especially inserts it before many pronouns, where the 
English omits it, or even uses the indefinite article. E. g. after a general 
description it is said in Greek, ὃ τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ οὐκ ἄν μοι ἀρέσκοι, and this 
expression then includes all such persons, where we however in English 
say, “such ὦ man cannot please me.”—Prefixed to interrogatives the article 
implies that some definite specification is expected in answer. E. g. to 
ποῖον; “which then?” τὰ ποῖα ταῦτα ; “which then are these?” In fa- 
miliar discourse we find even πάσχει δὲ ϑαυμαστόν" τὸ τί ; “something 
strange has happened to him; and that is what?”—Before the pos- 
sessives the article is essential in Greek, since-e. g. σὸς δοῦλος (like δοῦλός 
gov) can only mean a slave of thine ; but 6 σὸς δοῦλος (like ὃ δοῦλός cov) 
thy slave. 


Nore 2. Other examples, where the Greek article stands instead of 
our indefinite one,* seem capable of being reduced under two principal 
heads: (1) When an object, which in the particular instances where it is 
mentioned is or can be indefinite, is merely taken in the general idea, or 
as a whole, and appears then consequently as a definite idea. In compar; 
isons e.g. even we can say: “He is like the physician, who visited the 
sick, but understood nothing of medicine,” Xen. Oec. XV.7. So also when 
an object which is itself indefinite, in connexion with the idea of some 
certain relation becomes definite, or assumes a definite place, etc. We in- 
deed say here 6. 5. “ The matter between thee and me is still so doubtful, 
that there is need of a man who may decide it ;” but the Greek says, 
ὥστε τοῦ διακρινοῦντος ἕτι δεῖ, “there is need of the man who may decide 
it,” i. 6. of the third man in the connexion, who etc.t—(2) In quoting cur- 
rent stories, anecdotes, etc. which are thereby marked as well known, 
often related, ete. E.g. Plat. Charm. 7, σοφώτατος ὃ Κριτίας, ὃς εἶπεν, ἐπὶ 
τοῦ καλοῦ λέγων παιυδός----, “ Critias is very wise, who said (according to 


‘the well known story) in reference to a (Gr. THE) beautiful child—.” 


Note 3. In Greek prose, the article is very often omitted, where the 
English omits it; especially in all general ideas. E. g. Plat. Leg. 5, ϑεῖον 
γὰρ ἀγαϑόν mov τιμή, “honour is indeed a divine good.” Charmid. 18, 
ovr ἄρα σωφροσύγη ἂν εἴη αἰδώς ; Theaet. 23, αἴσϑησις, φὴς, ἐπιστήμη. 


* See Wolf. ad Reiz. dé Accent. p. 76, Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 7. 


t In the passage Plat. Phaedr. 4, which is also adduced, it appears to me that 
τῷ νοσοῦντι is to be taken as really definite ; since Socrates seems quite clearly 
in these words to mean himself. 


5 


944 ὃ 125. syNTAX OF THE PREPOS. ARTICLE. 


See further Schaef. Melet. p. 4.—In the common language the article is 
very often omitted before the words ϑεός, Fst, βασιλεύς or μέγας βασιλεύς 
(both spoken of the king of Ferme): ; see Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. 8. Phae- 
do. 17. and 108. 


Nore 4. As to the poets, the Attic poetry had more freedom in omit- 
ting the article than prose; but still far less than’the other kinds of po- 
etry, which in most cases could omit or insert the article at pleasure. 


In Homer moreover there exists no genuing article; as we shall see below 
in § 126. n. 7. 


at ᾧ 125. Construction of the Prepositive Article. 


1. The article is very often separated from its substantive, not only 
by an intervening adjective, (ὁ καλὸς παῖς, οἱ ὑπάρχοντες νόμον the 
existing laws,) but also by other adjuncts of the substantive, e. g. ἐμέ- 
μνητο τῆς ἐν μανίᾳ διατριβῆς “he recollected the time passed τη mad- 
ness.” In such instances a participle, as γενομένη etc. is often to be 
supplied; 6. σ. ἡ πρὸς Ϊαλάτας μάχη the battle against the Gauls; ἡ 
πρὶν ἄρξαν αὐτὸν ἀρέτη the virtue exhibited by him before he began to 
reign, Xen. Ages. I. 5. 

Nortel. The pronoun τὶς is inserted by the Ionics even between the 
Genitive which depends on it and the.article belonging to that Genitive ; 
e.g. τῶν τις ἱερέων for τῶν ἱερέων τις. 

2. When the adjunct thus inserted has also the article, it can hap- 
pen, when the euphony is not thereby injured, that two or even three 
articles may come.to stand one after another. E. g. τὸ τῆς ἀρετῆς καλ- 
λος the beauty of virtue; ὁ ta τῆς πόλεως πραγματὰ πράττων he who 
manages the affairs of the state; tov τὸ τῆς “ϑηνᾶς ἄγαλμα ἐργασά- 
μενον᾽---ἕνοχος ἔστω TH τῆς τῶν ἐλευϑέρων φϑορᾶς νόμῳ. 

3. But the adjuncts of the substantive can also, for the sake of em- 
phasis or perspicuity, be placed after it; and then the article must be 
repeated ; e.g. τὸν παῖδα τὸν σόν, thy son; ὁ χίλεαρχος ὁ τὰς ἀγγελίας 
εἰσκομίζων, the chiliarch who has to bring in the reports. On the other 
hand the first article can in such cases be omitted, 6. g. σύνειμι avdow- 
ποις τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς. 

Note ὦ. The repetition of the article is particularly necessary with © 
the participle ; because otherwise there arises the Participial Construction, 
so common in Greek, for which see § 144. —Before a following Genitive 
the article is rarely μοι δρᾶ ; as ὃ ἀνὴρ ὃ τὴς Κυϑήρης, Anacr. 


Nore 9. When an adjective without the article stands in connexion 
with a substantive which has the article, but not between the two, the ob- 
ject designated is thereby distinguished not from other objects, but from 
itself in other circumstances. E. g. ἥδετο ἐπὶ πλουσίοις τοῖς πολίταις does 
not mean, “he rejoiced on account of the wealthy citizens,” but, “ he re- 
joiced on account of the citizens, because they were wealthy ;” ἐπὶ ἄκροις 


$125. SYNTAX OF THE PREPOS. ARTICLE. 945 


τοὶς ὄρεσιν “on the mountains where they are highest,” i.e. on ha sum- 
mit of the mountains ; ὅλην τὴν νύχτα “the whole night ;” ἔχεν τὸν saclay 
ὀξύτατον, where we indeed can only translate “he has a very sharp axe,’ 
but where the more exact shape of the thought is, “ the axe which he has 
(and must have for his enterprise) is very sharp;” καλόν γέ μοι τοὔνειδος 
ἐξωγείδισας. \ Η 

4. Where the substantive is readily understood from the connexion, it 
is very commonly omitted ; and then the article stands alone before the 
adjunct; e.g. 0 ἐμὸς πατὴρ καὶ ὁ τοῦ φίλου, “my father and the 
(father) of my friend.” 

5. There are here, too, certain customary omissions of nouns, as above 
in adjectives, § 123. 3. Ἐὰ σ᾿ “λέξανδρος 0 Φιλίππου (sc. υἱὸς son); or 
also alone, e.g. 0 “Σωφρονίσκου the (son) of Sophroniscus, i.e. Socra- 
tes. Further, εἰς τὴν Φιλίππου (sc. χωραν) into the land of Philip ; 
τὰ τῆς πόλεως (sc. πράγματα, as above § 123. 3 in ra gua); 08 ἐν 
ἄστει the people in the city 5 ; τὰ κατὰ Hovoaviay that which regards 
Pausanias ; τὰ εἰς tov πόλεμον; οἱ σὺν τῷ βασιλεῖ. 

6. Every adjunct in itself indeclinable, can be rendered declin- . 
able by the aid of the article. Hence adverbs are without further 
change converted into adjectives by simply prefixing the article. E. g. 
from μεταξύ between, ὁ μεταξὺ τόπος the intervening place; from 
πέλας near, αἱ πέλας κῶμαν the neighbouring villages ; οἱ τότε ἄν- 
ϑροωποι᾿ οἱ πάλαι σοφοὶ ἄνδρες" ἡ ἄνω πόλις the upper city; εἰς 
τὸν ἀνωτάτω τόπον (see ᾧ 11. 6); 7) ἐξαίφνης μετάστασις the sud- 
den removal, etc.* Here belong also 7 οὐ διάλυσις, and the like ; 
see § 148. n. 38. — Or, the adverb with the article is placed after. the 
noun with the article; e.g. ὅταν ἐγείρησϑε éx τῆς ἀμελείας ταύτης 
τῆς ἄγαν, “ when ye awake out of this excessive carelessness.” 

7. The substantive is here often omitted, when it can easily be sup- 
plied from the context or from the idea itself; and the adverb then 
has the appearance of a substantive. E. g. from αὔρεον tomorrow comes, 
by omitting ἡμέρα day, ἡ αὔριον the nett day; ἡ “υδιστί the Lydi- 
an measure (aouovia being omitted); οὗ τότε the men then living ; ἂς 
‘tovniow (for τὸ ὀπίσω, what is behind), backwards. So Anacr. τὸ 
σήμερον μέλειν μου, to-day only troubles me, i.e. What is or occurs to- 
day ; for after the neuter of the article we cannot always specify some 
definite substantive as omitted, nor indeed is this at all necessary. 

8. From all these examples, in which various forms and whole phrases 
acquire the appearance of a substantive, merely through the remaining 
article of an omitted substantive, we must distinguish the two following 


* The Latins, who have no article, can imitate this only in some comic ex- 
pressions by a sort of composition, as hert semper lenitas in Terence. 


346 § 126. syNTAX OF THE ARTICLES. 


cases, where such words and phrases become γυμνόν.“ by 
means of an article belonging to themselves : 

1) Infinitives, e.g. to πράττειν the doing, τὸ κακώς λέγειν the 
speaking evil, 70ouce τῷ περιπατεῖν I delight in walking about. 
How much further this usage is carried in Greek than in modern 
languages, will be shewn in § 140. . 

2) Every word and every phrase, which is to be regarded as an inde- 
pendent object; e. g. τὸ λέγω i.e! the word λέγω. Plat. Protag. 
p. 345. e, περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λέγεις τοῦτο τὸ ἑκων. ---- Phaedr. 129, 
pia aiaaa dias δεῖ αὐτὸν τῷ Πώς. δ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ τοιόσδε τοιῷδε 
ἐπεχείρησα, “he must make use of this language: How could I, 
such as I am, have laid hands on such an one!” 


Nore 4. ‘ In ordinary cases every word thus regarded as an independ- 
ent object, is made neuter, In grammatical language, however, it is cus- 
tomary to give to every such word the gender which belongs to the name 
of that part of speech ; ; 9.8. because we have ἢ ἀντωνυμία the pronoun, 
we therefore find also ἢ ἐγώ i. e. the pronoun ἐγώ; and so ὃ émsi, the 
conjunction ἐπεί, because of 6 σύνδεσμος the conjunction. 

Note 5. By another peculiarity the article to with its accompaniment 
stands adverbially, and that too with the omission of some connecting 
idea ; e.g. τὸ τελευταῖον. αἱ last, τανῦν (prop. te viv) for the present, τὸ 
ἀπὸ. ‘T0008 from now on, henceforth. ; ; comp. below on the Accus. § 131. 8. 
—For the phrase ἰέναν tov i900 see the marg. note to § 132, 4. 2. c.— 
For some other phrases with the article τό or τά, see under the Neut. Adj. 
§ 128, and under the Accus. § 131. 

Nore 6. The article stands sometimes in an elliptical manner even 
before the relative. E.g. Plat. Rep. p. 510. a, τὸ ὁμοιωϑὲν πρὸς τὸ ᾧ 
ὡμοιώϑη, that which is compared, against that with which it is compared, 
where for τὸ the Pron. éxsivo could also stand. Herod. 3. 134, οὐδὲν 
τῶν ὅσα. αἰσχύνην ἐστὲ φέροντα. Xen. Hist. Gr. IL. 8. 17, τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν 
χαλεπὴ ἡ δημοχρατία, to such as we are (comp. § 143. 6) a democracy Ἢ is 
prejudicial, Plat. Phaedr. 34, τῆς (συνουσίας) ὅϑεν ἂν φρονιμώτατος εἴη. 
Pollux VII. 75, τὸ ὥσπερ κάρυον that nut-like thing.—It sometimes stands 
in like manner before other words which govern a clause ; e. g. τὸ πότε 
δεῖ λέγειν δίδασκέ μὲ, literally, teach me the “ when it is necessary to speak ;” 
ἐν ἔτι λείπεται, τὸ ἢν πείσωμεν ὑμᾶς, i.e. one thing still remains, viz. this, 
“if we could persuade you,” Plat. Rep. 1. p. 327. e. - 


§ 126. The Art. 6, 7, τὸ, as Demonstrative.-—The Art. Postpos. 
ὅς, ἢ, ὃ 


1. Both the prepositive Article 0, ἡ, τό, and the postpositive ὅς, ii, ὅ 
were in the earliest language dentonstrative pronouns for οὗτος or ἐκεῖ- 
γος. As the language became more copious and cultivated, these words 


‘gradually assumed their later and more limited usage; but still, in ma- 


/ 


§ 126. syNTAX OF THE ARTICLES. 347 


ny particular cases, they both retained, even in common prose, the 
power of real demonstratives. 


2. The most frequent case is in the distinction and distribution of ob- 
jects; where 6 μέν commonly stands first, and then o δέ follows, either 
once or oftener, as the case may require. This takes place proper- 
ly only in respect to definite objects, where in English we employ this 
—that. Still, it occurs also with indefinite objects, the one—the other, 
another ; and so through all the genders and numbers. E.g. τὸν μὲν 
ἐτίμα, τὸν δὲ ov, the one he honoured, the other not; τὸ μὲν yao avon- 
τον, TO δὲ wavexor, the one action is unadvised, the other that of a mad- 
_ man; tov πολεμίων (or also of πολέμιοι) οἱ μὲν ἐθαύμαζον ta γι- 
γνόμενα, οἱ δ᾽ ἐβόων, οἱ δὲ συνεσκευάξοντο, “of the enemies some 
were astonished at what happened, others cried out, others prepared 
themselves for retreat ; τῶν ζώων ra μὲν ἔχει πόδας, τὰ δ᾽ ἐστὲν ἄπο- 
da'— κρεῖσσον καλῶς πένεσθαι ἢ κακῶς πλουτεῖν τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἔλεον, 
τὸ δ᾽ ἐπιτίμησιν géoet.—Isocrates says of the Athenians, who had sent 
out colonies because of their overgrown population, that in this manner 
they ἔσωσαν ἀμφοτέρους, καὶ τοὺς ἀχολουϑήσαντας καὶ τοὺς ὑπο- 
μείναντας" τοῖς μὲν γὰρ ἱκανὴν τὴν οἴκου χώραν κατέλειπον, τοῖς δὲ 
πλείω τῆς ὑπαρχούσης éndoroay.—So also of μὲν αὐτῶν---οἱ dé— 
some of them—others.—For ὁ μὲν, ὁ 0 ov, see § 149 under μέν. 

3. The postpositive article ‘stands in the same manner, ὃς μὲν, ὃς 
δέ, etc. ἃ μὲν, ἃ δέ, etc. but less frequently among the genuine Attics. 
It occurs very often however in the later writers, as Plutarch. 

Nore 1. An example from Demosthenes is in pro Cofona Ρ. 248 
Reisk. πόλεις “Ελληνίδας, ἃς μὲν ἀναιρῶν, sic ἃς δὲ τοὺς φυγάδας κατάγων, 
“ destroying some of the Greek cities, and bringing back the exiles into 
others,” 

4, In the narrative style 0, ἡ, τὸ often stands only once and with δέ 
alone, in reference to an object already named; e.g. ὁ δὲ εἶπε, he (this 
one) said; τὴν δὲ ἀποχωρῆσαν (Acc. with Inf.) but that she had de- 
parted. 


5. When persons are spoken of as the subject of such a sentence, 
the proposition or clause can be connected by xaé with what pre- 
cedes. In such instances, with the Nominative, the forms of the postpo- 
sitive ὅς, 7, οἵ, αἵ, are always used; while with the Accus. (and Infin:) 
those of the prepositive, τόν, etc. are preferred. E.g. καὶ ὃς, ἀκούσας 
ταῦτα, ἕωσεν αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς τάξεως, “and he (that one) having heard 
this, thrust him out of the ranks 3? χαὶ ol, διαλυϑέντες, ἐσέβαινον ἐς 
τὰς νῆας, Herodot.—xai τὸν κελεῦσαν δοῦναι “ aid that he (that one) 
had commanded to give it him.” 


348 § 126. syNTAX OF THE ARTICLES. 


N OTE 2. Here belong also the usual formulas in Telating a conversa- 
tion: ἡ δ᾽ ὃς, said he (δ 109. I. 4); and the elliptic καὶ ὃς (sc. ἔφη) then he 
sc. replied. 


Nore 95. When a preposition belongs: to the clause, μὲν and δέ often 
stand immediately after it; e. g. ἐν μὲν τοῖς συμφωνοῦμεν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ov, “in 
some things we agree, in others not.” Isocr. Paneg. 41 εἰς μὲν τοὺς iBol- 
ζοντες, τοὺς δὲ δουλεύοντες. See Reiz. de Accent. p. 13. 69. 


Nore 4. The forms in distributive propositions of this kind, do not 
always so regularly correspond to each other, as they are above exhibited. 
Very often 6. g. of μέν is followed in the succeeding clause by τινὲς δέ, 
ἔγιου δέ, or by a name or some other mode of distinction. All this is best 
learned by personal reading ; as also the cases where οὗ μέν is not express- 
ed, but is presupposed by a following οὗ δέ, etc. 


Nove 5. From the old signification of the ayticle come also the forms 
τὸν καὶ τόν, τὰ καὶ τά, etc. which correspond precisely to our this and this, 
that and that, ete. ‘This occurs only in the forms beginning with τ, and is 
particularly frequent i in Demosthenes. 


Nore 6. Finally, in the same manner is to be explained the adver- 
bial use of the poetic Dative τῷ, on that account, therefore. 1]. ε. 815, T- 
γνώσκω σε, ϑεᾶ,---Τᾧ tor προφρονέως ἐρέω͵ ἔπος, “ Therefore will 1 frank- 
ly tell thee.” The same can also be expressed by the Accus. (§ 131. 7.) 
Il. γ. 176, "Addo. τάγ οὐκ ἐγένοντο" τὸ καὶ κλαίουσα τέτηκα, “therefore am I 
dissolved in tears.” 

Nore 7. In poetry, and especially epic poetry, the use of both articles 
as demonstrative is far more general ; and in Homer ὃ, ἢ, τό, is almost ey- 
erywhere to be so taken ; those cases excepted where τό, tov, etc. stand 
for 0, ov, etc. by § 75. ἢ. "2. In order to make this perfectly clear, one 
needs only to consider the following passages in Homer; 1]. a, 340. 
ὃ, 399. s, 715, ¢, 407. Od. s, 106. These at first view seem to present on- 
ly the ordinary article of prose; while to the attentive observer, to whom 
such an article in Homer is unknown, the context easily shews, that in all 
these and many similar passages the article is really a demonstrative ; but 
that the demonstrative force is there not absolutely essential, and is for 
this reason apparently weakened, ‘The passages are few, whare this word 
expresses an object merely as well known and distinguished, or as partic- 
ularly present to the mind of the poet ; or where the demonstrative force 
is really so much weakened, that the transition into the true Attic article 
becomes apparent; e.g. Il. o,.167. ἡ, 412. μ, 289.—LEspecially must we 
be upon our guard, not to take this form as an article, where it is Sepa- 
rated from the substantive by the verb and the whole clause, as Ἢ μὲν ao 
ὡς εἰποῦσ ἀπέβη στόδας ὥχέα *Touc. Here the ἢ), as demonstr. Pron. is to be 
taken for our she, to which the name is afterwards subjoined [by apposi- 
tion] in the poetical manner: “She then thus speaking departed, the swift- 
footed Iris.” This is rendered evident by those passages, where the sub- 
stantive is in like manner placed after the real pronoun ob (to him), 6. g. 
Od. v, 106.—From this substantive nature of 6, ἢ, τό, arises also in Homer 
the case, that an ad jective is thereby apparently converted into a substantive ; 
e.g. IL. Oy 80 τὸν “ἄριστον the bravest ; α, 33 ὃ γέρων" the old man, elder; and 
often of ἄλλοι, τάλλα. In all these instances 0, 7, τό, as Subst. has its adjec- 


cy Nii hig ΨΥ 247 27. eT TENE PR ΡΤ A - mY os ff 32 ee ot ell 


§ 127. syNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 349 


ec: dk the shape of the thought is strictly this: ‘him the bravest,’ 
“he the elder,’ ‘they the others, etc. But here too the force of the 
demonstrative is often weakened by its not being absolutely essential; and 
then the transition into the common article is not to be mistaken. 


§ 127. Pronouns.—ApsEcTIVE mas. 


1. The demonstratives οὗτος and ὅδε sometimes stand instead of 
adverbs of place ; e. δ: Plat. Rep. 1. 1ηϊϊ.---ἠἠρόμην ὅπού εἴη. Οὗτος, 
ἔφη, ὄπισϑεν προσέρχεται, “1 asked where he might be? Here he 
comes, said he, behind thee.” The demonstr. 00¢ occurs in this man- 
ner chiefly in the poets, (6. g. Od. α, 185. 7, 367,) and particularly often 
in the tragic poets ; see Schaef. Meletem. p. 77. 

2. The three principal significations of the Pron. αὐτός (ὃ 74. 2) 
must be carefully distinguished, as follows : 

I. It means self, viz. ‘ 

a. When joined to another noun so as to abet as if in apposition with 
it,*i.e. either after the noun, or before both the noun and its ar- 
ticle. E.g.uaddov τοῦτο φοβοῦμαι ἢ τὸν ϑάνατον αὐτόν, “1 
fear this more than death itself ;” αὐτὸν τὸν βασιλέα ἀποκτεῖναι 
ἐβούλετο, “he purposed to kill the king himself.” 

b. When it stands alone, the personal pronoun being omitted or im- 
plied, for I myself, he himself; etc. In such case the Nominative 
is chiefly employed; e.g. αὐτὸς ἔφη he said it himself; nageyevo- 
μὴν αὐτὸς FI went thither myself. The oblique cases are so em- 
ployed only when they begin bron construction ; e.g. αὐτὸν γὰρ 
εἶδον “ for himself have I. seen.’ 

II. It stands instead of the personal pronoun of the third per- 
son, in its simple form, but only in the oblique cases ; consequently 
like the English him, her, it, etc. Lat. eum, eam, id, etc. In this 
signification it can only stand after other words in a clause. E. g. 
ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ πῦρ he gave them the fire; --- οὐχ ἑώρακας 
αὐτὸν ; hast thou not seen him? τὸ δέρας Ainryn ἔδωκεν" ἐκεῖ: 
γος δὲ αὐτὸ καϑήλωσεν ---, “he gave the skin to Hetes, and this 
latter nailed it—.” See also no. 7 below. 

III. It means the same, when it has the article immediately be- 
fore it; e.g. 0 αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the same man; ἐκέλευσε τὸ αὐτὸ 
(or rated) ποιξῖν, he ordered him to do the same thing. For 

. the construction of ὁ αὐτός with the Dative, see § 183. 2. 


Nore. 1. It follows from the above statement that the Nom. αὐτός, 
ete. can never mean simply he; she, it. ‘To no. II, however, belong the in- 
stances, where according to the Greek construction the subject appears as 
an oblique case, viz. as Genitive absolute, or as Accus. with an Infinitive ; 
in which instances therefore the oblique cases of αὐτός may be translated 


45 


959. § 127. syNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 


by he, she, it. KE. g. ἐπικειμένων δ᾽ αὐτῶν “but as they Pressed on ;” μετὰ 
ταῦτα ἀπελϑεῖν αὐτόν “ that upon this he went away.” Soph. Philoct. Ἧι 
777 (pray) μή σοι γενέσϑαι πολύπονα αὐτά (sc. τὰ τόξα the bow), “that 
it may not become full of torment to thee.” 

Nore 2. The epic writers use αὐτός without the article for ὃ αὐτός. 
—It stands sometimes also, even in prose, for μόνος alone ; 6. 8. αὐτοὶ γάρ᾽ 
ἐσμὲν “for we are alone : αὐτὰ τὰ πρὸ τῶν ποδῶν ὁρᾷν “to see only 
what is before the feet,” Xen. Laced. III. 5. 


3. In the reflexive pronouns ἐμαυτόν, σεαυτόν, etc. (δ 74. 3,) the 
pronoun αὐτὸς loses its emphasis; αὐτὸν σέ signifies thee thyself, but 
σεαυτόν only thyself, as reflexive, e. g. ἔϑιξε σαυτὸν accustom thyself. 
So also the reflexive of the 3 pers. ἑαυτὸν or ἀὐτὸν corresponds to the 
Eng. himself. But this latter is likewise used, like the Latin se, where 
" it refers to the first subject of two connected clauses, and where we con- 
sequently employ only him, etc. E.g. νομίζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν 
ἑαυτῷ, ‘‘ he supposes that his fellow-citizens serve him.” Still in this 
last case, both the simple αὐτὸν and the simple ἕ, (οὗ ete. σφεῖς, σφᾶς, 
etc.) can also stand. Indeed this last (é),is in good Attic prose lim- 
ited solely, as reflexive, to this species of relation; see § 72. n. 1. The 
choice between these three forms, ἑαυτόν, αὐτὸν, & was determined, 


as in so many similar instances, by a regard to perspicuity, eiahi a 
and euphony. 


Nore 3. The form ἕ etc. stands in this relation in Attic writers 
principally as follows: (1) When no emphasis is to be laid upon it, and 
where in the 1 _pers. the enclitic μέ would be used. KE. g. Plat. Rep. L. init. 
κατιδὼν ἡμᾶς ὃ Πολέμαρχος ἐκέλευσε δραμόντα τὸν παῖδα περ ὑμεῖναί 
& κελεῦσαι, “he commanded the slave to tell us, that we should wait for 
him ;” so also oi, Xen. Anab. 3. 1. 5. Plat. Phaedo. p. 117. c. Protag. 
Ρ. 816. ς. ogiow, Xen. Hell. 5. 4. 11. ete. (2) But when in quoting an 
indirect discourse, the speaker himself is introduced, this pronoun is often 
employed in an antithesis etc. precisely like éué. See e.g. Plat. Rep. 10. 
p. 617. d. ὃ, where σφᾶς, ov, ἕξ, thus occur.—Further, the Singular of this 
form ( etc.) is on the whole everywhere rare in Attic writers ; and the 
Plural was more frequent in both the cases above stated. Even the 
Nominative thus occurs, when in a discourse or opinion so quoted the 
speakers or thinkers are themselves the subject ; 6. g. Xen, Anab. 7. 5. 5, 
λέγειν ἐχέλευον, ὅτι οὐδὲν ἂν ἧττον σφεῖς ἀγάγοιεν THY στρατιάν, “ they 
gave directions to say, that they could lead on the army not less well.” 
In such a case αὐτοί could indeed be used, but would mean rather they 
themselves ; while αὐτός in the Singular can stand both for he and for he 
himself. For the Nom. ¢ see ὃ 72. 2 sq. 

Nore 4. Examples of the form ἑαυτόν or αὗτόν employed in the 
same manner,.are the following: Isocr. Paneg. 12. οὗ μὲν (se. οὗ ϑεαταὶ) 
ὅταν ἴδωσι τοὺς ἀϑλητὰς ξαυτῶν ἕνεκα πονοῦντας, Where ἑαυτῶν refers 
to the spectators ; and then in the following member — οὗ δὲ (sc. οὗ ἀϑ.- 
Antat) ὅταν ἐνθυμηϑῶσιν, ὅτι πάντες ext τὴν σφετέραν ϑεωρίαν ἥκου- 


\ 


§ 127. syNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 351 


σιν — the word σφετέραν (formed from the simple & σφεῖς), which refers 
to the wrestlers, corresponds exactly to ἑαυτῶν. Further, Eurip. Hippol. 
977. Xen. Mem. 1. 2. 52. Plat. Phaedr. p. 259 a. In many such in- 
stances, however, αὑτόν can be used ; but then the proposition is stated as 


the opinion or view of the writer himself, See Excurs. X. ad Demosth. 
Mid. 


Norte 5. The reflexive of the third person acquires sometimes the 
power of a general reflexive, which may stand also for the first and second 
persons ; consequently ἑαυτοῦ or αὑτοῦ also for ἐμαυτοῦ and σαυτοῦ. This 
observation is well grounded, is recognised by the ancient Grammarians 
(vid. Tim. ὁ. not. Ruhnk. p. 92), and extends itself also to prose. But 
the prosaic passages by which it is supported, still require for the most 
part some critical investigation ; and therefore the Attic senarius may here 
serve as proof ; 6... Soph. Oed. T. 138 οὐχ ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων, AN αὑτὸς 
αὑτοῦ, τοῦϊ ἀποσκεδῶ μύσος, “on account of myself.” In other poets 
this usage goes much farther, so that e.g. σφέτερος stands without dis- 
tinction of person or number for the general idea of own; and also ὃ, οἵ, 
δός, serve 6. g. in Apollonius, partly (like the Lat. se) even for the Plural, 
and partly as reflexives for the first and second persons. See Wolf. Pro- 
leg. ad Hom. p. 247. 

4. The Indefinite pronoun τὲς stands also for our indefinite one, some 
one, Fr. on, Germ. man; e.g. ἄνϑρωπον ἀναιδέστερον οὐκ ὄν τις 
εὕροι, “a more shameless person one cannot find.” So even when a 
whole assembly is understood ; 6. g. ἤδη τις ἐπιδεικνύτω ἑαυτόν, “now 
one must shew himself,” i.e. every one’of you.—For the Neut. τὲ see 
§ 150.—T he Interrogative pronoun τίς, zi, stands likewise as in Eng- 
lish in an indirect question; e.g. ἤρῶτα μὲ tig εἴην, “he asked me 
who I might be.” 

Nore 6. Hence it comes that τίς, τί, in connexion with some verbs 
implying search, investigation, stands instead of ¢ ὅστις, ο.τι. E,g. Xen. 
Anab. III. 3. 18 ἢν οὖν ἐπισχεψώμεϑα, τίνες αὑτῶν πέπανται σφενδόνας, 
“if then we examine, who of them have slings.” 

5. “ἄλλος without the article is the Lat. alius, another; ἕτερος with- 
out the article has the same meaning with a stronger expression of dif- 
ference; 0 ἕτερος on the other hand is only used with reference to two, 
and is the Lat. alter, the other ; see ᾧ 78.4.—In the Plural, ἄλλοι is 
others, and οἱ ἄλλου the others, ceteri; οἱ ἕτερον presupposes a more 
distinct separation into two parts, the other party.—The Sing. ὁ ἄλλος 
expresses a whole, exclusive of and opposed to a definite part of the 
same, e.g. ἡ ἄλλη χώρα the whole remaining land. 

6. Most of the pronouns, and the adjectives πᾶ ς and ἅ πα ς, stand 
either before both the substantive and its article, or after the substan- 
tive. E.g. τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν of these men, ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος this man, 
Olunv ἔτινε ταύτην he suffered this punishment, πάντες οἱ “LdAnves 
all the Greeks, τῷ δήμῳ ἅπαντι to the whole people. Less fre- 


a \ 


352 § 128. sYNTAX.—NEUTER ADJECTIVES. 


quently πᾶς stands between the article and subst. and is then em-~ 
phatic; as of πάντες βόες τὲ καὶ ἵπποι, Plat.— Without the article, | 
πᾶς ἴῃ the Sing. commonly stands for ἕχαστος, e.g. πᾶς ἀνήρ each, 
every man. 

7. The Possessives of the third person (ὅς, σφέτερος) are little used; 
but instead of them the Genitives of the pronoun αὐτός, e.g. Te χρή- 
ματα αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, αὐτῶν, his, her, their property.—In the two other 
persons likewise the Genitive is often used instead of the possessive ; in 
the Singular, however, only in the enclitic form, e.g. 0 υἱός μου. 
But so soon as any emphasis is required, it is only the possessive that 
can be used (§ 124. n. 1); or where a still stronger emphasis is re- 
quired, ἐμαυτοῦ etc. e.g. Demosth. Mid. 36 bis. Still to the posses- 
sive there is often subjoined a Genitive, as if by apposition; e.g. dcag- 
πάζουσι τὰ ἐμὰ, τοῦ κακοδαίμονος, they plunder my things, me the un- 
fortunate. — But most commonly, in‘ideas which always stand in some 
necessary personal relation, such as father, son, friend, master, hand, 
foot, etc, the possessive is not expressed, and its place is supplied by the 
article alone; e.g. ὁ πατήρ for ὁ πατήρ pov ete. 


For the enclitic Genitives μου, σου, placed before their substantives, 
- see § 133. ἢ, 4. | te 


§ 128. Neuter Adjectives. . 


1. The Neuter of all adjective words stands, without a substantive, or 
as a substantive, for every object which is conceived or exhibited as 
indefinite. ΤῈ is moreover particularly the usage, to employ in many 
‘mstances the Neuter Plural, as in Latin, where in English we use the 
Singular. E.g. εἶπε ταῦτα he said this, τὰ καλὰ the beautiful, i.e. 
all that is beautiful; οὐδὲ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα δύνανται πορίζειν, * not even 
that which is necessary can they acquire.” Hence, 6. σ. τὸ ἐμά means 
not only my things, my affairs, but also still more indefinitely, what 
concerns me. 

2. The Neuter Singular on the contrary expresses more the abstract 
idea of the object; e.g. τὸ χαλὸν the beautiful, considered in itself 
alone; τὸ ϑεῖον the divinity, or every divine nature ever so obscurely 
apprehended and acknowledged; τὸ τῆς γυναικὸς δοῦλον καὶ ϑερα- 
πευτῖκόν “ the submissive and obliging nature of woman.” Hence con- 
sequently thé neuter of the participle can also stand as an abstract, e.g. 
τὸ συγκεχωρηκὸς “ that which yields,” i. 6. pliability of mind, etc. 

Nore 1. The Weuter of the Article standing alone with the Genitive is still 


more indefinite, and marks simply a relation or reference, derivation, etc. 
‘ ‘ ~ ~ , 
ἵν g. τὸ δὲ τῶν χρημάτων μάλιστα ποϑεῖτε ἀκούσαι, πόσα καὶ πόϑεν ἔσται, 


§ 129, syNTAX.—SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 353 


“as to the money, you are chiefly anxious to hear, how much it is to be, 
and whence it is to come,” Demosth.—ta τῶν Seay φέρειν δεῖ, “ what is 
from the gods must be borne.” 

Nore 2. ‘Hence arises a mode of circumlocution belonging more es- 

pecially to the Attics, in which τό and τά are used with a Genitive, and 
which will be best illustrated by examples. Thus they often say | τὰ τῆς 
τύχης, where we say simply fortune; Demosth. ΟἹ. I, ταράττει αὐτὸν τὰ 
TOY Θετταλῶν, i.e. the T'hessalians (in, whom he had no confidence) make 
him trouble ; τὰ τῶν βαρβάρων ἐστὶν ἄπιστα φύσει, i. 6. the barbarians are 
by nature distrustful ; τὸ τὴς πόλεως γενναῖον καὶ ἐλεύϑερόν ἐ ἔστι, the state is 
something noble and free, Plat. Menex. 17; and so in the description of a 
charming spot, πάντων δὲ xoupotatoy τὸ ἊΣ πόας “but the most beautiful 
of all is the grass,” Plat. Phaedr.—Hence the Neut. of the possessive with 
the article stands i in the same manner for the personal pronoun; e. δ: τὸ 
ἐμόν for ἐγώ, strictly what concerns me, my person, etc. 
- Nore 3. In like manner the Greeks can use πάντα, as we use the 
word all, to express the idea of every one; e. g. Eurip. τῶν βαρβάρων γὰρ 
δοῦλα πάντα πλὴν ἑνός, “ among the barbarians all 2 as slave, except one ;” in 
full, τὰ τῶν βαρβάρων πάντα, i.e. ob βάρβαροι πάντες. 

Nore 4. The Neuter of the adjective used instead of the into is rare 
in prose (δ 115. 4), except in the Compar. and Superlative. In the poets 
it is very frequent, e.g. δεινὸν Body, ἔχπαγλα φιλεῖν, “to cry out fearfully, 
to love immoderately.”——The adverbial significations of the pronouns and 
similar general adjectives are easy to be understood; as τὸ πᾶν wholly, τὰ 
πολλὰ καϑεύδει he sleeps much of the time, etc. We subjoin however further 
τοῦτο μὲν---τοῦτο δὲ, on the one hand—on the other hand; τὰ μὲν----τὰ δὲ, 
partly—partly ; both of which formulas are entirely adverbial ; e.g. De- 
mosth. Lept. p. 474. 25. Xen. Mem. I. 3. init. 


ε 
» 


THE NOUN IN CONSTRUCTION. 


§ 129. Supsecr anp Prepicate. 


The Subject of a proposition or sentence is that of which something is 
affirmed ; the Predicate expresses that which is affirmed of the subject ; 
the Copula shows that the subject and predicate stand thus in relation to 
each other. ‘The subject is always represented by a substantive or by 
some word standing in the place of a substantive; the predicate, when 
independent, as expressing some attribute or quality, is usually an ad- 
jective or some equivalent word ; and the simple copula is the verb to 
be, in Greek sivas, ὑπάρχειν, γίγνεσϑαι, φῦναι, xvosiv.—These three 
parts of a proposition, however, are not always found thus separated ; 

- but the idea of the predicate and that of the copula are more commonly 
united in one word. ‘This is the case in all verbs ; except those which 
, contain simply the idea of the copula, as εἶναι etc. above ; or those 
which can of themselves express no complete and definite predicate, 
6, g. verbs signifying to be called, to appear, to remain, etc. ὦ 


354 § 129. syYNTAX.—SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


The general principle of grammar is, that the subject being the most 
important part of a proposition, the other parts must correspond to it so 
far as*possible in their external form. Hence the rule: The predicate 
and copula must respectively agree with the subject in person, number, 
and gender; the predicate also in case, etc.—To this rule the following 
specifications are mostly exceptions.* 


1. The Nominative of the Neut, Plural commonly takes in Greek 
the verb in the Singular. E. g. τὰ ζῶα τρέχειν animals run, ταῦτα ἐστιν 
ἀγαϑά this is good, ‘AOnvaimy ηὔξετο τὰ πραγματα.--τἔέστι ταῦτα 
“this is,” i.e. it is true, it is so; τῶν ὄντων tu μέν ἐστεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, τὰ 
δ᾽ οὐκ ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, i.e. in our power. 

Nore 1. So soon however as the subject stands further removed from 
its verb, and when too it denotes animated beings (e. g. Xen. Ages. I. 21, 
παιδάρια), Writers prefer to put the verb in the Plural. But even without 
these circumstances, there occur instances of the natural construction, 
especially in:the poets. 

2. When the subject consists of several persons or things, singly 
specified, which follow the verb, the latter often stands in the Singular. 
E. @. ἔστε καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις πόλεσιν ἄρχοντές τὲ καὶ δῆμος, where if 
ἄρχοντες stood alone’ the verb would necessarily be ¢¢o/.—Plat. Rep. 
ΠῚ. p. 363. a, ἵνα γίγνηται αὐτῇ ἀρχαί τε καὶ γαμοὶ καὶ ὅσαπερ κ.τ.}. 

Nore 3. An example of this, when the verb follows, i is furnished by 


Homer, Il. 9. 386, Totvate ts i oui τὸ πόδες τε--ἰ χεῖρές τ᾽ ὀφϑαλμοὶ τε 
παλάσσετο. 


Note 3. Some dialects connect also a verb Singular in particular, in- 
stances with masculine and feminine Plurals which relate to things. This 
peculiarity is called from the usage of Pindar, Schema Pindaricum. The 
construction is somewhat more natural, though still always rare, when the 
/ verb precedes ; asin τῆς δ᾽ ἦν τρεῖς vepolal mentioned in the second marg. 
note to §108. IV. 4; in which form of the construction even proper 
names occur. See on this subject Lesbon. p. 184. Herm. ‘ad Pind. Ol. 
VIII. 10. and XI. 5. Valck. ad Herodot. V. 12. Here then belongs the 
conimon phrase ἔστιν of etc. see § 150, ἔστι. 


3. Collective nouns on the contrary, i.e. nouns Singular which 
express multitude, often have their verb in the Plural. E. g. ὡς φάσαν ἡ 
πληϑὺς (Hom.) thus spoke the multitude; τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀνεχώρουν 

(Thucyd. V. 60) the army retired+ 
‘4, When in Greek, as in Latin, single persons speak of ΡΩΝ 
in the Plural, (as is often the case in tragedy) it is to be observed, that 


* 'Phese two introductory paragraphs have been added by the Translator for 
the sake of younger students. 


t This construction occurs even in the Genitive absolute, τοῦ στόλου---πλεόν-- 
τῶν, Demosth, Mid. ὃ 45. 


0h SN I eae ee eT wy er Ce ee eee ee ἡ 


§ 129. SYNTAX.—SUBJECT AND PREDICATE, 355 


---- 


if a female thus speaks, the predicate always staid in the Mase Plural. 
See for this and other similar instances, Hermann ad Viger. n. 50. 

5. The Dual is not a necessary form (§ 33.2). Hence, not only can 
every proposition in which ¢wo are spoken of, be expressed in the Plural ; 
but the subject of it may be in the Dual and the verb in the Plural, and 
vice versa. In such case the different predicates and adjuncts of the. 
subject can vary between the two forms, as euphony may require. 
Examples may be left to personal observation. 

Nore 4. Those forms of nouhs, adjectives, etc. which belong imme- 
diately together, observe here the conformity required by ὁ 123; ex- * 
cept that (1) the numeral words δύο and ἄμφω sometimes have Plural 
forms connected with them, e. g. δυεῖν ἡμερῶν 3 and (2) that the construc- 
tion of the participle shares the license of the verb; e.g. Aristoph. Ran. 
573 νὼ---δείσασαι ἀνεπηδήσαμεν. Eurip. Ale. 903 δύο ψυχὰς συνέσχεν ὁμοῦ 
--διαβάντες. The rare instances where the Dual form occurs instead of 
the real Plural, have been already mentioned in § 33. n. 8. § 87. n. 6. 

6. When an adjective as predicate is separated from its substantive, it 
often stands in the neuter, where the substantive is a masculine or femi- 
nine ; and in the Singular, where the substantive is inthe Plural. That 
which the predicate expresses, is in this case considered in general, as 
a thing; and hence the idea thing or something, can always be sub- 
joined. E. σ. ἡ ἀρετή éorey ἐπαινετόν, virtue is (something) praisewor- 
thy; οὐκ ἀγαϑὸν πολυκοιρανίη Hom.—ev’d ἡδὺ, εἴτ᾽ ἀνιαρὸν παῖδες 
γίγνονται, ἀγνοεῖ"---χαλεπὸν ἀκροατῆς ἀσύνετος, where we should 
say thore fully, ‘‘a stupid hearer is a troublesome thing.” Aristoph. 
Eccl. 236, χρήματα πορίξειν εὐπορώτατον yuv7.—This usage is most 
common, when the predicate refers at the same time to several objects 
specified singly, which are all or mostly inanimate things; 6. g. τὸν 
αὐχένα καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν, φαίνει κεχρυσωμένα Herodot. ἀνὴρ Kag- 
μάνιος καὶ κύων ἀμφότερα ἀγρειώτατα, Alian. N. A. 1ΠΠ| 9, 

7. The Subject of the verb, as in Latin, wherever it is sufficiently 
obvious from the verbal-ending or from the connexion, and where no 
emphasis rests upon it, is commonly not expressed ; 1. e. in cases where 

we always insert the substantive pronouns J, thou, he, it, etc. 

Nore 5. But an adjunct can nevertheless be subjoined by apposi- 
tion to the omitted pronoun; 6. 5. ὃ δὲ Matag τῆς “Athaytos διακονοῦμαι 
αὑτοῖς, “and I, the son of Maia the daughter of Atlas, wait upon them.” 
Lucian. 

8. The word denoting the sabseict is also omitted, when the verb itself 
expresses the customary action of the subject; e. g. σαλπίζει or σημαΐ- 
yeu, “the trumpeter gives the signal with the trumpet.”’ So too in Demo- 
sthenes, ἀναγνώσεταν ὑμῖν, he shall read aloud to you, spoken of the 


‘ 


356 § 129. sYNTAX.—SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


ordinary official reader ; and so in Herodotus of other ordinary employ- 
ments in sacrifice, hunting, etc. e.g. II. 47, 70. Comp. note 6 below. 

9. The same takes place where in English we use it, and thus indi- 
cate an operation of nature or of circumstances; 6. g. vee it rains, 
where we are not to suppose an omission of Ζεύς, although the Greeks 
often said Ζεὺς ves, etc. So too προσημαίνειν it announces itself, e. g 
in the air; ἐδήλωσε δέ and so it shewed itself, etc. Xen. Mem. I. 2. 32. 

10. Impersonal Verbs, as they are usually called, i.e. such as imply 
no definite person or subject, are of another kind. In them the subject 
is not left in obscurity, as in those just mentioned (no. 9), but the action 
to which they refer, whether expressed by an Infinitive or by another 
dependent clause, is the real subject of such verbs. The peculiarity of 
them therefore consists simply in this, that their subject has not the 
form of a noun, to become which however the Infinitive needs only 
the article; e. g. ἔξεστί μοι ἀπιέναι, 1. ᾳ. τὸ ἀπιέναν ἔξεστί μοι, lit. 
“the going away is permitted to me,” i.e. it ὃς. permitted to me to de- 
part. Of this kind are δεῖ, χρή, ἀπόχρη, δοκεῖ, (all of which see in the 
Catal. of Anom. Verbs,) πρέπει it becomes, is proper, ἐνδέχεται it is 
possible, etc. 'These admit in part likewise of personal constructions, 
which require no special illustration. In like manner whole phrases, 
like ἔχεν λόγον, consentaneum est, are in this sense to be considered as 
“impersonal. 

11. The English indefinite ent one, some one, (Fr. on, Germ. 
man,) is most commonly expressed in Greek by the pronoun τὶς (ᾧ 127. 
4). In certain cases it is made by the second person, as also in Eng- 
lish, 6. g. φαίης av, you might say; or asin Latin and English by the 
third person Plural, or by the Passive, chiefly in. the phrases φασί, 
λέγεται, but also with ‘other verbs; 6. g. Thucyd. VIL. 69 ὅπερ πάσ- 
χουσιν ἐν τοῖς μεγάλοις ἀγῶσιν. 

Nore 6. The word τὸς can be omitted, and consequently the verb 
stand alone in the 3 person, when under the idea of one, some one, we un- 
derstand either (1 ) the person on whom the action is incumbent (comp. no. 
8 above), e.g. τὸν λαμπτῆρα προσενεγκάτω, “let some one bring hither the 
lantern,” Xen. Symp. V.2; or (2) the indefinite subject of a preceding 
verb, 6. g. οὐκ ἔστιν ὀρϑῶς ρα δω ἐὰν μὴ φρόνιμος ἢ, “it is not possible 
to be a good leader, unless one has capacity,” Plat. Meno. 38. 

12. When on the other hand a Nominative stands without a verb, the 
verb εἶναι is most commonly to be supplied. E.g. “ZAAny ἐγὼ Tam a 
Greek ; τὰ TOY φίλων κοινά "---Σἰμωνίδῃ ov ῥάδιον ἀπιστεῖν" σοφὸς 
γὰρ καὶ ϑεῖος ὁ ἀνήρ. 


Nore 7. Some words are not easily found construed otherwise. than 
in this elliptical manner. So especially ἕτοιμος, 6. g. κἀγὼ πάσχειν δτιοῦν 


ἃ 


§ 130. synrax.—onsxcr. 857 
ἕτοιμος, ἐὰν μὴ ταῦϑ'᾽ οὕτως ἔχῃ Demosth. So even without Κα ὁ ; are 
Catapl. 10 xot μὴν ἐγγυητὰς ὑμῖν ἕτοιμος παρασχέσϑαι. Somn. δ See 
Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. 69. Valck. ad Phoen. 976. So in Homer ἐπι- 
δευής needy, e.g. Il. s. 481. 1. 225. See φροῦδος § 150.—In like manner 
the Nominatives χρεών and ἀνάγκη necessity, ϑέμις right, are used alone as 
impersonals, ¢ ἐστὶ being omitted, it is necessary, tt is right, e.g. ov καὶ τοῦτο 
ἀνάγκη ; is not this aiso necessary ἢ See Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 68. The 
same holds good as to the use of the Neut. of verbal adjectives in téoy in 
the Nominative, 6. g. ποιητέον faciendum est, one must do; see § 134. 10. 


The Nominative .2bsolute is different ; for this see § 145. n. 1 sq. 


§130. Tue Ossect.—Osuique Caszs. 


1. That on which an action is exerted, or to which it refers, consti- 
tutes what is called the Object ; and always stands in one of the three 
cases, Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. ‘These are hence called depend- 
ent or oblique cases, casus obliqui. 

2. The immediate object, upon which the action of a transitive verb 
is directed, and without which we cannot conceive of such a verb, 
commonly stands in the Accusative ; e.g. λαμβάνω τὴν ἀσπίδα I take 
the shield. 'The remote object, which may stand along with the Accu- 
sative, or with an intransitive verb, is usually dependent on a preposi- 
tion; e.g. λαμβάνω τὴν ἀσπίδα ἀπὸ tov πασσάλου “I take the 
shield from the nail;” ἕστηκα ἐν τῷ ἐδάφει “1 stand upon the ground.” 

3. Of the relations and adjuncts which may thus constitute a remote 
object, those which occur most frequently are for the most part ex- 
pressed by a case alone, i.e. without a preposition. For this purpose, 
two cases are specially employed in those European languages which 
do this, viz. the Genitive and Dative. E.g. in German; “Ich gebe das. 
Geld dem Manne,” I give the money to the man, or I give the man the 
money. “Er versicherte mich seines Wohlwollens,” he assured me of 
his favourable disposition.* 

4. But when we come to particulars, we Gnd that languages differ 
much in this respect from one another. What is expressed in one lan- 
guage by one case, is given in another by a different one. Very often 
one language employs a preposition, where another needs merely the 
simple case; and not unfrequently both modes are usual in a language 
at the same time. E.g. he told it me or to me; I will write him a letter 
or a letter to him. 

Nore 1. All this must be constantly borne in mind, in order to form 


a correct judgment on the subject, when in Greek a relation is expressed 
by a simple case, which in English and other languages requires a prepo- 


* It is hardly necessary to observe, that the English language can in general 
mark these relations only by the help of prepositions.—Tr. 
46 


358 igs § 130. syNTAX.—oBsECT. 


sition. This has often been accounted for by the assertion, that in such 
clauses in Greek the preposition 18 omitted, which elsewhere governs the 
case in question. Such a view can * mndeed sometimes serve to ren- 
der the idea’ of such a clause or proposition clearer to our minds; but it 
by no means necessarily follows, that this preposition was formerly always 
actually employed in this connexion, and was afterwards omitted for the, 
sake of conciseness. It is often impossible to specify, in a particular ex- 
ample, what preposition would have had, in this instance, just this partic- 

“αν case. We must therefore keep in mind only the idea or relation 
expressed in such a proposition; and assume, that this idea is also in- 
cluded in the form of the case. All three of the oblique cases are used in 
this manner in Greek ; as we shall see in the following paragraphs. 


5. We may assume it as a principle in the ancient languages, than 
which nothing is more common in respect to both species of the object, 
that, so soon as a person or thing has been once mentioned, and the 
relation or reference to the same is sufficiently clear from the verb it- 
self, the object is not expressed; just as in the case of the subject and the 
possessive pronouns, § 129.7. In this way the multiplication of pro- 
nouns so common in modern languages is avoided. _ We wish here only 
to call the learner’s attention to this characteristic of the ancient lan- 
guages ; subjoining a few examples. _E.g. ἐν ἡ δ᾽ ἂν τῶν φυλῶν 
πλεῖστον ὦσιν ἀνδρικώτατοι, ἐπαινοῦσιν οἱ πολῖται, where ταύτην 
must be mentally supplied before éocvovory.—Xenoph. Hell. III. 4. 
8, ἐπαγγειλαμένου τοῦ Aynorkaov τὴν στρατείαν Agesilaus offering 
himself as leader of the expedition, διδόασιν οἱ «Πακεδαιμόνιοι (se. 
αὐτῷ) ὅσαπερ ἤτησεν. —Athen. 8. p. 339, ov ἢν ἴδῃ, TAS χεῖρας οὐκ 
ἀφέξεται (se. αὐτοῦ). It follows of course, that in these and all other | 
instances, the pronouns can be equally well inserted, whenever required 
by emphasis or euphony. 

Nore 2. Another instance of the omission of the object, is that of the | 
reflerives ἑαυτόν, ἐμαυτόν, etc. which takes place, or can be assumed as 
taking place, whenever a verb which is elsewhere always transitive, be- 
comes in certain circumstances intransitive ; as e. g. several of the com- 
pounds of ἄγειν to lead, in which the intransitive idea to go predominates, 
commonly with the accessory idea of pomp or multitude ; 6. g. ἐξεχώρη- 
σε τῆς ὁδοῦ, προσάγοντος TOU τυράννου, “ he went out of the way, because 
the tyrant was approaching (i. q. approached himself).” Such instances 
belong properly to the lexicon.—There is here a twofold caution to be 
given: (1) We must not be too ready with this mode of explanation, and 
especially must not apply it to prose writers, until we are convinced that 
the usage in the phrase in question is established by custom. (2) We 
must not regard the omission of Ewutoy as everywhere a necessary suppo- 
sition ; since in many verbs it is philosophically more correct to assume 


that the verb had originally both an immediate and causative sense (§113. 
2); 6. g. in δρμᾷν go forth and urge on. 


§ 181. sywrax.—accusaTIVE. 909 


Nore 8. ΤΏ case governed by any verb, can properly be further gov- 
erned in the same manner only by the participle of that verb. 'Thesubstan- 
tives and adjectives derived from the same verb, usually change the case into 
the Genitive or render a circumlocution necessary. We find however not 
unfrequently in Attic writers, not only the Accusative but also the Dative 
of a verb, joined with a peculiar force and conciseness to the verbal noun 
or adjective. ἘΣ. g. ἀκολουϑητικός τινι addicted to something, ἢ ἑκάστῳ δια- 
νέμησις the distributing to each, πρὸς ἐπίδειξιν tore ξένοις in order to show to 
strangers ;—ta μετέωρα φροντιστής one who meditates on things above the earth 
(Plat. Apol. 2.) from φροντίζειν τὸ meditate on any thing 3;—Plat. Alcib. IT. 
7 ἀνήκθον εἶναι ἔνιά γε χϑιζά τὸ καὶ πρωϊζὰ γεγενημένα not having heard of 
some—occurrences (elsewhere ὦ ἀνήκοον εἶναΐ tuv0s).—The adjective ἔξαρνος 
is always so construed, and in connexion with the substantive verb (εἶναι) 
signifies therefore fo deny, disown, and governs (precisely like ἀρνεῖσϑαι). 
not only the Infinitive (ἔξαρνός εἶμι ποιῆσαι), but also the Accus. 6. g. ὅπως 

μὴ ἔξαρνος ἔσει ἃ νῦν λέγεις, Plat. Euthyd. p. 283. ὁ. 

Nore 4. Many verbs can have not only a regular object, but by 
means of a conjunction can likewise be followed by another clause 
or proposition, instead of a proper object. We sometimes find both 
modes of construction at the same time in one verb ; 6. δ. καὶ χρήματα 
παρασκευάζονταν καὶ φίλους, καὶ ὅ πως ἂν ὦσιν ὡς πιϑανώτατοι λέγειν, 
Plat.G org. 77. -τῶν πολλῶν ἱκανῶς ἰδόντες τὴν μανίαν,καὶ ὅτι οὐδεὶς αὖ- 
τῶν οὐδὲν ὑγιὲς πράττει, id. Rep. 6. p. 496. c. ; 


§ 181. Accusative Case. 


1. The most natural use of the Accusative, viz. to designate the im- 
mediate object (§ 130. 2), requires no further illustration. We adduce 
here therefore only those instances, in which Greek usage differs from 
that of other languages. 


Nore 1. The particular instances of verbs which in one language take 
the object ‘as immediate in the Accusative, and in another language take 
it only as remote, i. e. either govern the Genitive or Dative or require to ~ 
be construed with a preposition, can be learned only by practice and from | 
the lexicon: Thus 6. g. the idea fo unitate takes in Greek, Latin, and En- 
glish, the person in the Accusative, but in ‘German in the Dative. E. g. 
μιμεῖται τὸν Ἡρακλέα, ‘imitatur Herculem, ‘he imitates Hercules,’ ‘ er 
ahmet dem Heracles nach.’ -Further, we say, ‘ he swore by the Gods; but 
the Greeks say τοὺς ϑεοὺς ὥμοσεν. The following examples may also be. 
noted: κολακεύειν Sawn upon, flatter, Lav Pavey (τινά) to be concealed from, 
ἀδικεῖν do wrong: to, ὠφελεῖν be useful to, ἀποδιδράσκειν (τινά) run away from, 


ete. all of which, Sunieery to our ener usage, take:in Greek the Accusa- 
tive. ‘ 


2. Verbs which properly have no transitive signification, i. e. verbs neu- 
ter or intransitive, can yet sométimes be conceived of as transitive, and 
can thus take an Accusative. E.g. from 6¢ flow, it can be said in 
Greek, ai πηγαὶ ῥέουσι γάλα καὶ μέλι, where we say, “the fountains 
flow with milk and honey.” Such instances are easily apprehended, 
and belong to the lexicon. Am 


* 


360 § 131. synTax.—accusATIVE. | 


3. It is a characteristic of the Greek language, that it often con- 
nects with a verb, the Accusative of the corresponding or kindred ab- 
‘stract substantive. This is chiefly done by way of modifying, limiting, 
or rendering definite the general idea expressed by the verb; some- 
what as in English to run.a race, to dream a dream; to die a death, etc. 
The Greek language however carries this much farther than the Eng- 
lish. E.g. on βίον ἥδιστον he lives a most pleasant life ; : γλυκὺν ἱ ὕπ-- 
νον κοιμᾶσϑαι to sleep a sweet sleep ; κινδυνεύσω τοῦτον TOY κίνδυνον 
ἊΣ χὰ Geese myself to this danger ;” φανερῶς τὸν πόλεμον πολεμή-- 
σομὲν “ we will wage the war openly ; ἡ ἀδικία ἣν ἠδίκουν oe “the 
wrong with which I have wronged. thee” (comp. no. 5 below); éupe- 
hodyras πᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν. The Greek language avoids in this way the 
enfeebling accumulation of such words as our make, do, have, etc.—For 
the same construction with the Passive, see ὁ 184. n. 2. 


Nore 2. Sometimes even a predicate with the verb sivas has such a 
kindred Accus. connected with it; 6. g. δοῦλός ἐστι τὰς μεγίστας δουλείας, 
‘he is the slave of a very great slavery.’ The advantage of this mode of ex- 
pression will be apparent, from the vain attempt to give it with equal 
force in English.—In verbs which are in themselves transitive, this con- 
struction assumes a shape not indeed strictly logical, but yet entirely per- 
spicuous ; as ἀγνοεῖν ἄγνοιαν αἰσχίστην, ‘he is ignorant with a shameless 
ignorance.’ 

4. 'The Greeks often employ the Accusative to express also that which 
in the nature of the thought and language, is the remote object. Thus the 
immediate object of ποιεῖν is the deed done, of λέγειν the words spoken ; 
the remote object, in the usual acceptation, is the person ἕο or for whom 
any thing is done or said; yet the Greeks always say xazw¢ ποιεῖν τίνα 
do evil to any one, maltreat him, κακῶς λέγειν τινά speak evil of any 
one, calumniate him. But many verbs are also of such a nature, that 
their action can be conceived of as exerted in a two-fold manner, and 
in reference to two different objects, both of which are immediate, and 
consequently to be put in the Accusative. Thus in English the verb 
to wrap; as I wrap the child (in, the cloak), and I wrap the cloak 
(around the child). ! 


5. From this two-fold verbal relation, is to be explained the usage so 
frequent among the Greeks, that such verbs very commonly exhibit 
both these relations to an object in the Accus. at the same time, 
and in the same clause. To speak more briefly, such verbs govern 
two Accusatives, one of which usually denotes the person, and the oth- 
er the thing, to which the action of the verb refers. E.g. τέ ποιήσω 
αὐτὸν ; what shall I do to him? πολλὰ ἀγαϑὰ τὴν πόλιν ἐποίησεν. So 
᾿ διδάσκουσι τοὺς παῖδας owpooovrny,—one of the few instances where 


» 


i afl ra wy ) ͵ ὄν τ ἐν 
" 


δ 131. synrax.—AcCcuSATIVE. vie 361 


the Latin, and also the German and English have the same construction ; 

*docere ‘aliquem artem,’ ‘einen die Kunst lehren,’ ‘to teach one a 
trade ; Θηβαίους χθήματα ἤτησαν.---ϑο especially the ideas of clothing 
and Pe away ; as ἐνδύυειν reve τὸν χιτώνα; ὑποδεῖν τινα καρβατίνας 
to pull on coarse shoes for any one; ὃν τὴν ψυχὴν ἀφείλετο whom he 
has deprived of life; ἕτερον παῖδα ἐκδύσας χιτῶνα, τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἐκεῖνον 
ἡμφίεσεν. --τοὺς πολεμίους τὴν ναῦν ἀπεστερήκαμεν —Further, τοῦτο 
μὴ ἀνάγκαζε με.--οὔ σε ἀποκρύψω τὰς ἐμὰς δυσπραγίας. Thus too 
the ideas of entreating, asking, etc.* 

6. The Accusative expresses further the remote object, when, as is 
very common in Greek, it is employed to specify the part, circumstance, 
or definite adjunct, by which a more general assertion is qualified. 
E.g. καλός ἔστι τὸ σώμα he is handsome as to his body, πόδας ὠκύς 
swift-footed, πονεῖν ta σκέλη to have pain in the legs, ἀλγῶ τὰς γνά- 
ϑους" ---ϑαυμαστὸς τὰ τοῦ πολέμου admirable in the things of war, 
Σύρος ἣν τὴν πατρίδα he was a Syrian as to country, «Σωκράτης 
τοὔνομα Socrates by name. In like manner the names of games and 
contests are annexed in the Accus. to the verbs expressing the different 

kinds of action in the games, etc. as δραμεῖν τὸ στάδιον, νικᾷν 
ἷ ᾿Ολύμπια, ἐστεφανώσϑαν Πυϑια. 

Nore 8. This is the well known Greek construction which the Latin 
poets so often imitate, e. g. os humerosque deo similis. In English a prepo- 
sition is necessary, viz. as to, of, by, in, etc. and likewise in Greek a prepo- 
sition, especially κατά, is sometimes employed in.such examples with 
the Accusative. Hence commentators commonly supply κατά at once in 
all such instances, asif it were omitted.” But it is better to accustom our- 
selves to regard the Accusative in itself as a case of the remote object in 
Greek; see ὃ 130. n. 1—For the same construction with the Passive, see 
δ 134. n. 2. 

7. Verbs which never take a substantive in this manner in the Ac- 
cusative, admit this case nevertheless, so soon as a pronoun or other - 
more general word takes the pling of a definite designation or circum- 
stance. E.g. τί χρῶμαι αὐτῷ ; “for what, how, shall I use it?” οὐκ 
οἶδα, ὅ,τι σον yowuae, lit. “1 Ἰοὺ not for what, how, I shall use thee,” 
i.e. what I shall do with thee, how I shall treat thee; πάντα εὐδαιμο-- 
νεῖν “to be fortunate in all things,” etc.t 


Nore 4. From these two usages (‘Text 6 and 7) are to be explained 


* It is not meant to be said, that all such verbs, or that those above adduced 
always, have this construction. We only wish here and in the following pages, 
to direct the learner's attention to such constructions as are im some degree gen- 
eral, or have some peculiarity. The usage under every  nghite gry verb must be 
learned from observation or from a good lexicon. 


| The Accus. ἀμφότερα is different; see § 150. ᾿ 


362 | § 132. synwrax.—crnitive. 


those instances of a double Accusative in which not the person, but the 
thing is the remote object. E.g. in such phrases as τὴν ἐν ἹΜαραϑῶνι 
μάχην τοὺς βαρβάρους ἐνίκησεν " --- τὰ μέγιστα ὠφελήσετε τὴν πόλιν" — 
πολλά με ἠδίκηκεν “he has offended me in many things.” —In many of 
the examples adduced above (Text 5), as διδάσκειν, ἐνδύειν, it may seem 
doubtful, whether the person or the thing is to be taken as the remote ob- 
ject; and it is most natural to assume, that in such instances, both objects 
originally presented themselves as equally near or immediate.—For the Ac- 
cusative in, construction with the Passive and with the Middle, see further 
§§ 134, 135. 

8. Under this same head falls also the Accusative which marks, as . 
with us, the length or duration of time. E.g. πολὺν χρόνον παρέμει-- 
vev “he remained with him a long time ;” καϑῆντο ἐν Manedovig 
τρεῖς ὅλους μῆνας “ they remained in Macedonia three whole months.” 
The phrase ta πολλὰ καϑεύδει, and the like, we have already ex- 
plained § 128. n. 4. — So likewise the Accusative of measure or distance ; 
e.g. ἀπέχει δέκα σταδίους he is ten stadia distant. 


Note 5. The Accusative is sometimes subjoined to a proposition or 
clause, as if in apposition with the action therein expressed; and it may 
then be resolved into the circumlocution, which is or which will be so and 
so. E.g. Il. ὦ, 795 ἢ τις ᾿Αχαιῶν ῥίψει (αὐτὸν) ἀπὸ πύργου, λυγρὸν δλε- 
ὅρον, i.e. “ which is ἃ dreadful death 3? Eurip. Orest. 1105 “Ἑλένην κτά-- 
γωμεν, Πενέλεῳ λύπην πικράν; “ Helen we will slay, to the bitter grief of 
Menelaus.” 

Nore 6. A-proverbial phrase i is usually denoted by inserting immedi- 
ately before it the words τὸ λεγόμενον. E.g. Plat. Gorg. init. add r, 
τὸ λεγόμενον, κατόπιν & ἑορτῆς ἥκομεν ; ᾿ “do we come then, as they say, after 
the feast?” So also τὸ τοῦ ποιητοῦ, “as the poet says,” before a quota- 
tion from a poet, etc. — The analogy of other similar phrases shews that 
these neuters are Accusatives, which in other languages would be ex- 
pressed by a preposition with its case; as in Eng. “according to what the 
poet says,” etc. —in like manner must we also explain the wholly adver- 
bial expressions : : τοὐναντίον on the contrary (e (e. 8: οὗτος δὲ, πᾶν τοὐναντίον, 

ἠβούλετο μὲν, οὐκ ἠδύνατο δέ); ταὐτὸ τοῦτο in the very same manner; 
and some others. 


§ 182. Genitive Case. 
1. The peculiar use of the Genitive with another substantive, belongs 
to the Greek in common with other languages. We here therefore 
adduce only its secondary uses and significations in Greek, especially 


_ those in which it is subjoined to adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. 


2. We must however premise as the basis of all our remarks, that the 
fundamental idea of the Genitive is that of separation or abstraction, of 
going forth from or out of any thing. Hence therefore the ideas of the 
prepositions or (out of) and rrom, lie primarily in the case itself. 


§ 132. syNTAx.—GENITIVE. 363 


Nore 1. For the poets this principle can hardly be extended far 
enough ; since there i is scareely a construction which in the common lan- 
guage requires ἅπό or ἐξ, that cannot be givenin poetry by means of the 
Genitive alone. E.g. Arat. 185, spoken of a line, ποδὸς ἐς πόδα τεΐνεν 
“from one foot to the other.” 


3. But although the Greek thus connects with the simple Genitive, 
several classes of words which in other languages require such a preposi- 
tion, yet it by no means follows that this preposition is. always omitted 


. in Greek. It follows only, that when such a preposition is here and’ - 


‘there actually expressed, it is rather to be regarded sumply as an addition 
for the sake of perspicuity. 
4. The Genitive consequently stands in the following connexions: 
1) With most verbs which express the ideas of freeing, restraining, 
desisting, deviating, E.g. ἀπαλλάττειν teva νόσου to free one from 
disease; εἴργειν τενὰ τῆς θαλάσσης to keep. one back from the sea; 
παύειν tive πόνων lit. to cause one to desist i.e. procure him rest from 
toils; λήγειν τῆς ϑήρας to leave of hunting ; ἁμαρτεῖν ὁδοῦ deviate 
from the way, miss the way; διαφέρειν τῶν ἄλλων to be different (de- 
viate) from others; ἄρχων ἀγαϑὸς οὐδὲν διαφέρει πατρὸς ἀγαϑοῦ. 
For this οὐδέν comp. § 191. 7. 
2) In expressions which contain the idea of selection, exception, 
- and generally of some part of a whole, viz. " : 
a) With Adjectives and Pronouns, when these serve to distin- 
_ _ guish an object from others of the same kind. E. g, μόνος ἀνϑρώ- 
πῶὼν alone of (or among) all men; οὐδεὶς ᾿Πλλήνων no one of the 
Greeks; οἱ φρόνιμον τῶν ἀνθρώπων lit. “the wise or clever 
among men,” i.e. clever persons; τῶν ἀνδρῶν τοῖς καλοῖς xa- 
γαϑοῖς αἱρετώτερόν ἐστι ϑανεῖν ἢ δουλεύειν. See also in § 180. 
5, the example ἐν ἡ δ᾽ ἂν τῶν φυλῶν “in which of the tribes,” 
_4-e. in which tribe. 
Here belong too, from their nature, al Superlatives. E. g. 
ibe: τῶν 'νόσων ἀναϊδεια" τ χτημάτων πάντων anaes 
ἐστιν ἀνὴρ φίλος συνετὸς τὲ καὶ εὔνους. 


~~ 


Nore, 2. When any thing in the Sing. is to be expressed as Ὅν. a 
part of some whole which is also in the Singular, the Greeks are accus- 
tomed to put the part in the same gender with the Gen. of the whole, i in- 

-stead of putting it in the neuter 5 just as in the Plur. phrase οὗ φρόνιμοῦ 
τῶν ἀνϑρώπων above. E. g. a “πολλὴ τῆς Πελοποννήσου the στεαΐ (great- 
est) part of the Peloponnesus ; ὃ ἥμισυς τοῦ χρόνου half of the time, So in 
superlatives, e.g. ἢ ὀρϑοτάτη τῆς σχέψεως the most correct mode of investi- 
gation, Plat. Cratyl. 18. 


Note 3. With this coincides also the phrase δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ἦσϑα 
thou surpassedst;thyself, and the like. 


\ 


' ¢@ 


’ 


wilt, 


2364 § 132. synTAx.—GENITIVE. 


6) With words which mark dime and place, when they denote 
parts of some greater time or space. E.g. τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας three 
times a day; ὁπότε tov ἕτους in what part of the year; ποῖ γῆς 
ἀφικόμην ; to what part of the earth have I come? like ubi ter- 
rarum; πανταχοῦ τῆς ἀγορᾶς everywhere in the market; πόβῥω 
τῆς ἡλικίας far advanced in years. ; 

Nore 4. Hither we may refer too the phrases: εἰς τοῦτο ἀναισχυντίας 
προβέβηκε, “to this degree of —;” πρὸς τοῦτο καιροῦ πάρεστι τὰ πράγ-- 
ματα, “to this (decisive) point of time (situation of things) have affairs 
come ;” and the like. 


c) Wherever the sense is limited to a part; e.g. μέτεστί μοι 
τῶν πραγμάτων I take part in the affairs. Hence in all phrases 
where the idea of some or a part can be supplied; e.g. ἔδω-- 
κά ool τῶν yonuatwy “Ihave given thee of my money,” i.e. 
some or. a part. Hence χατέαγα τῆς κεφαλῆς strictly “I am 
broken as to a part of my head,” i.e. I have a hole in the head.* 

d) In the same manner , with the ideas of eating, drinking, and 
generally of enjoying, profiting, etc. so soon as it is specified in 
general of what one eats, or what one enjoys, etc. E.g. ἐσθίειν 
κρεῶν, πίνειν ὕδατος, to eat some flesh, to drink some water; 

where ἐσϑίέειν τὰ κρέα would mean ἕο eat up the flesh, and πίνειν 
ὕδωρ to drink water, i.e. habitually ; — ἀπολαύειν τινὸς enjoy 
any thing, ὀνίνασϑαί τινος profit from or‘by any thing. Ὁ 


- 8) The Genitive is employed to denote the material or substance of 


which any thing consists; e.g. στέφανος ὑακίνϑων a garland of hya- 
cinths. So too when the idea of making or being made is implied; e. g. 
ἑνὸς λίϑου mav πεποίηται, “the whole is made out of one stone.” | 
4) The quality or circumstances upon which a person or thing is in a 
manner dependent, and which serve to mark the character, are put in 
the Genitive, which is then given in English by of. E.g. δένδρον πολ-- 
λῶν ἐτῶν a tree of many years, ἣν γὰρ ἀξιώματος μεγάλου for he was 
οἵ great consideration. : | 


* In this manner can be explained several instances of the Genitive, by means 
of which a verb is made to refer to an object somewhat indefinitely (see Herm. 
ad Viger. p. 881), viz. the Homeric O¢ecy στεδίοιο, as it were “to run through a 
part of the plain.”’ So also the phrase ἐέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, (as if ‘to 


_ go ὦ part of the furthers way,’) Xenoph. Anab. 1.3. 1. Soph. Aj. 731, with Lo- 


beck’s note. Some of these Homeric phrases however, as λούεσθαι ποταμοῖο, 
στρῆσαν πυρός, cannot be thus referred to the idea of a part without some violence. 
Hence in these and other similar poetical phrases, it is better to adopt the prin- 
ciple, that in the more ancient language the Genitive served-to express every 
species of general relation, where the more immediate one was obvigus of itself; 
very much as is still the case withthe prepositionzazaé and the Accusative. ἢ 


§ 182. synTAX.—GENITIVE. 365 


, 5. The following classes of words take with them in the Genitive 
case, a noun expressive of their most natural relations; viz. 


1) Adjectives derived from verbs take the object of.the verb in the- 


Genitive. E. g. from ἐπίστασϑαί τὸ understand something, comes ént- 
στήμων TLVOS acquainted with something ; from ἐξετάζειν te investigate 
something, ἐξεταστικὸς tivog fit for investigating something ; οἱ πρακ- 
τικοὶ τῶν δικαίων, from ta δίκαια. 
The exceptions to this rule, where the case governed by the verb 
_remains along with the adjective, are noted above in § 190, n. 3. 


2) All words signifying plenty or want, value or want of value. E. g. 
μεστὸς ϑορύβου full of tumult, μεστὸν ἐστι τὸ ζὴν φροντίδων ’π---δεῖ- 
σϑαι χρημάτων to want money, ἄξιος τιμῆς worthy of honour. 


From the idea of want or need we may explain how δεῖσθαι in the 
signification to ask, entreat, takes a Genitive of the person ; one has need 
. of the person for his object, 
3) Very many verbs of still other classes ; especially those of the fol- 
lowing significations, viz. 
remember and forget, μέμνημαι τοῦ χρόνου, τῆς ἀλκῆς ἐπιλανϑά- 
VETOL 
care for, contemn, admire, as ἐπιμέλεσϑαι, κήδεσϑαὶ Tivos, care for, 
take care of any one, ὀλιγωρεῖν, καταφρονεῖν, ϑαυμάζεεν, etc. 
spare, φείδεσϑαί τινος 
desire, wish for, παιδεύσεως ἐπιϑυμεῖν" 


> fix 2 ~ ~ / 
rule, surpass, overcome, ovPounwy ἄρχειν, ἡδονῆς κρατεῖν, περι- 


εἶναν tov ἐχϑροῦ 
accuse, condemn, κατηγορεῖν, καταγιγνώσκειν. 
But all this must be understood with many exceptions and limitations ; 
since many such verbs take an Accusative, in order to express the same 
relation. 

Most verbs of sense also take the Genitive, those of seeing excepted. 
E. g. ὄξεεν μύρων to have the smell. of ointment, νεκροῦ μὴ ἅπτεσϑαι 
not ἰο touch a corpse, τοὺς δούλους ἐγευσε τῆς ἐλευϑερίας "--- ἀκούω 
᾿ παιδίου κλαίοντος I hear a child weeping.t 

4) Particularly however all words in the 

Comparative Degree | 
take the Genitive of that with which the comparison is made. E, δ. 


* Here belongs the verb ἐρᾷν τινος to love, with the primary idea of desire ; 
on the contrary "φιλεῖν tive implies only good will. 


_ + The verb ἀκούω commonly governs the Accusative of the sound, sa the 
Genitive of that which produces it; but both not without exceptions. See 
Steph. Thesaur. 

47 


366 § 132. synTAX.—GENITIVE. 


usiloy ἐμοῦ greater than I, σοφώτερος gore tov διδασκάλου. he is 
wiser than his teacher, κάλλιον ἐμοὺ ἄδεις thou singest better than I; 
ἀρετῆς οὐδὲν κτῆμά ἔστι σεμνότερον. 

Nore 5. The fuller construction of the comparative is elsewhere with 
ἢ, than, quam, (see among the particles § 149,) which however is only used, 
when the construction with the Genitive cannot be applied. The Greeks 
are so fond of this latter construction, that they even putin the Genitive an 
object to which the comparison does not directly refer, 8. δ. μείξονα ἐμοῦ 
pala Aristoph. Eccl. 235, σιτία tig τῆς τεκούσης μᾶλλον ἐπιπέμψειεν 
ἄν; i.e. “who more than the mother?”—The ambiguity which may 
thus ioe: can be removed only by regarding the nature of the thing 
itself; e.g. Herodot. πυραμίδα ἀπελέπετο πολλὸν ἐλάσσω tov πατρός, 
i, @. lit “which was much smaller than his father;” but properly, 
“which was much smaller than (that left by) his father. ᾽ —The following 
construction is of another kind : μείζων τῷ εἰπόντι γίγνεταν βλάβη τοῦ πε- 
ποιηκότος, i. 6. ἢ τῷ πεποιηχότι. 


Nore 6. The words ἄλλος and ὃ ἕτερος sometimes imitate the compara- 
tive, e.g. ἄλλος ἐμοῦ another than I, ἕτερα τούτων other than these, ἀϑεῖνην 
JSrom, ete. 

6. In respect to the following and other similar remote relations, it will 
be found upon reflection, that they are all contained in the same manner. 
in the idea of the Genitive itself; although for familiar grammatical ex- 
planation it is shorter to assume the omission of some idea, commonly 
that of a preposition. 


1) The more definite quuligeation or limitation οἵ. ἃ general proposi- 
tion, where we use in respect to, etc. E. g. ἐγγύτατα αὐτῷ εἶμι γένους ᾿ 
I am very near to him in respect to race, kindred ; Herod. enas*agde- 
νων παίδων childless in respect to male, descendants ; παρϑένος ὡραία 
γάμου ripe in respect to matrimony ;. δασὺς d¢vdguv.—Here belong the 
Genitives before which it is customary to supply évexa on account of ; as 
evdatuovilm σὲ tov τρόπου 1 pronounce thee happy on account of thy 
disposition of mind; Paine os τοῦ πάϑους. Comp. for the Infin. 
ᾧ 140. η. 1. 

2) The relation of mE Sl since both the value itself and the price 
can stand in the Genitive (Genitivus pretii) 5 8. g. δραχμῆς ἀγοράξειν 
te to purchase something ror a drachma; πλείστου τοῦτο τιμώμαι I 
esteem this of the highest value.—So the goods or wares bought or sold 
(Genitivus mercis); e. 8: τρεῖς μνᾶς κατέϑηκχε τοῦ ἵππου he paid three 
minae For. the horse ; τ σία τούτων πράττεταῦ he lets himself be well 
| paid For them; see on Plat. Meno. 28, 

3) In verbs signifying to take hold of, etc. the relation of the part by 
which a whole i is taken hold of. _ E. g. λαβεῖν or more commonly λαβέ. 
σϑαι τινὰ ποδός, χειρός, to seize one BY the hand, foot, etc. τῆς χειρὸς 


§ 133. sywrax.—parive. 367 


aye to lead him wy the hand, tov λύχόν τῶν ὥτων "κρατῶ I hold the 
- wolf sy the ears. Care must be taken here not to confound the above 
with λαβεῖν trove χειρί to take hold of one wxru the hand. 

4) In answer to the question when ; but only of indefinite and contin- 
ued time (comp. ὃ 133.3. 4). E. g. νυκτὸς, ἡμέρας ποιεῖν τί, to do any 
thing By night, py day; πολλῶν ἡμερῶν. οὐ μεμελέτηκα 1 have not 
practised ror many days; éxéioe οὐκ ἀφικνεῖταν ἐτῶν μυρίων he 
comes not thither 1n ten thousand years, Plat. Phaedr. p. 248. e. 


Nore 7. In the above sense of the Genitive there is sometimes an 
omission of the preposition περί, of, concerning ; 6. g. sié δέ μοι πατρός τε 
καὶ υἱέος Od. 2,173. Τὸ explain this Genitive more exactly it will run 
thus: “this of or relating to my father ;” for the idea this need never be ex- 
pressed when the thing itself follows. See the note to Soph. Philoct. 439. 


Nore 8. Sometimes the omission of the idea on which the Genitive 
depends is very clear, at least in the train of thought ; e. g. in the follow- 
ing phrases : τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ “this is not the action of a wise 
man ;”—ov παντὸς sivas “not to be every man *s affair,” i i. e. not to be easily 
accomplished by every one ;—tay ἀδίκων ἐστίν “it is one of the unjust 
things,” i,e. more briefly, “it is unjust.” Here too may be classed the 
instances above in no. 4. 2. ¢, d. 

Nore 9. A very common omission is that of the word οἶκος house be- 
fore the Genitive of the possessor; e. g. εἰσῆμεν εἰς ᾿Αλκιβιάδου we entered 
into the House of Alcibiades. Hence the usual constructions ἐν @dov, εἰς 
ἄδου, lit. in or into the house of Hades, i.e. the infernal regions. —The in- 
stances where the arlicle of the omitted word remains (e. g. of vids, χώρα, 
etc.) are given in § 125. 5. 

Nore 10. A frequent though obscure omission is where the Genitive 
stands in exclamations of wonder or grief, sometimes with an. Interjec- 
tion, 6. g. olwor τῶν κακῶν, alas what misfortunes ! ie Ζεῦ, τῆς πανουργίας, 
O Jupiter, what cunning /—and sometimes alone, 6. g. τῆς τύχης O (gloomy) 
fortune! τῆς παχύτητος Ὁ the stupidity ! 

For the Genitives μοῦ, σοῦ, etc. before their Subst. instead of a Dat. 
commodi, see ὃ 133. n. 4.—For the Genitive of a substantive in place of an 
adjective, see ὁ 123. n. 4. 


§ 133. Dative Case. 


1. The fundamental idea of the Dative is directly subi to that of 
the Genitive ; since in the Dative the idea of approach lies at the basis. 
The Greek Dative corresponds in general to the Latin Dative, and to 
the English ¢o and for with their case ; but it includes also many rela- 
tions which with us are more clearly expressed by other prepositions, as 
by, with, towards, against, etc. which require no special illustration. 
E. g. δοῦναί rev to give to any one, ἐχϑρός τινε hostile to or towards 
any one, πείϑεσϑαι τοῖς νόμους to obey the laws, or be obedient To the 


laws, ete. 


͵ 


368 § 133. SYNTAX.—DATIVE. 


2. The Dative is employed in connexion with the following ideas, viz. 

1) Of union, coming together ; 6. g. ὁμιλεῖν tive have intercourse with 
any one, mayecdai tive fight with any one. - 

2) Of likeness ; e.g. ὅμοιός teve like, similar to, any one. Hence it 
is also put after 


c > U 
| 0 autos the same, 
ΠΣ τ Ὁ ΝΥΝ hen es ΟΝ . . ν e 
as OULOS ἔστιν ὁ αὐτὸς ἔχείνῳ this one ts the same with that. 
Nortel, We have seen above (ὃ 132. n. 5), that an object is Sometimes 

put in the Genitive after a comparative, to which the comparison does not 
directly refer. Just so here the Dative is sometimes put after 6 αὖ- 
τός, where this pronoun strictly refers only to an intermediate third object. 
E. g. τὰ αὐτὸ πάσχω σοὶ I suffer the same things with you, i.e. as you suffer } 
nivey ἀπὸ ϑηλῆς κατὰ ταὐτὰ (for τὰ αὐτὰ) τοῖς βρφέφεσιν, to suck at the br east | 
in the same manner with (for as) infants; Θησεὺς κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον 
Ἡρακλεῖ γενόμενος Theseus who lived at the same time with (as) Hercules. 
—Here likewise arise ambiguities, as τὰ αὐτὰ λέγω ἐκείνῳ I say the same 
To him, or As he. 


3) After every action which tends to the advantage or disadvantage 
of a person or thing, i. 6. Dativus Commodi et Incommodi; see notes 2, 3. 


3. The Dative expresses further the following ideas : 


1) The instrument ;* both in general, χρῆσϑαί tive to make use of a 
thing ; and also in particular, e.g. πατάσσειν ῥάβδῳ to strike with the 
rod ; σμίλῃ πεποιημένον made with the knife or graver ; τυτρώσκεταν 
βέλει ἐς τὸν ὥὦμον---. 

Kindred with the instrument is that1n which or By which one 15. ΟΥ̓ 
DOES any thing. E. g. ty μὲν ἐξουσίᾳ τυραννεῖ, ταῖς δ᾽ εὐεργεσίαις On- 
μαγωγεῖ, through his power he is a ruler, but through his benefactions 
he is a favourite of the people; πᾶσι τοῖς τοιούτοις (i.e. virtues of the , 
Lacedemonians before mentioned) walle ἂν ἡγήσαιο σαυτόν, Plat. 


Alcib. 1. 38. 


2) The manner, 6. g. ταῦτα ἐγένετο τῷδε τῷ toOnMthis occurred in 
this manner; δοόμῳ παρῆλϑεν he approached running ; μεγάλῃ σπου- 
On πάντα ἐπράττετο. 

3) The cause, e.g. φόβῳ ἔπραττον I did it from fear ; κάμνειν vo- 
σῳ τινί to be ill of some disease; ἀλγεῖν tuve to have pain from some- 
thing ; τέϑνηκεν ἀποπληξίᾳ.---οὐ yao ἀγροικίᾳ ποιῶ τοῦτο. 

4) A definite time wuEen (comp. ὃ 192. 6. 4); e. g. moony τῇ τρίτῃ 

ἡμέρᾳ he was here on the third day ; τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ τὴν βουλὴν ἐκάλουν 
on the next day they called together the senate. 


* The Latins employ for this purpose their Ablative, and call therefore Ablati- 


vus instrumenti that which in Greek must be named Dativus instrumenti or Da- 
tious ret inservientis. 


§ 133. synrax.—DATIvE. 369 

Nore 2. Under the Dative of advantage and disadvantage is included, 
first, that relation of the Dative which is common to almost all lan- 
guages ; which exists 6. g. in the Homeric ἅσσα οἵ κατὰ Κλῶϑες---γεινομένῳ 
ἔγησαν (xat-éynouyv) “what the Fates have spun for him ‘at his birth (of 
good or evil);” “Μενελάῳ τόνδε πλοῦν ἐστείλαμεν “for Menelaus (for his 
benefit) have we undertaken this voyage,” Soph.—On this is founded the 
less direct Dative of advantage or disadvantage, which is subjoined with 
reference to the purpose or wished of a person ; e.g. ἐπειδὰν. τάχιστα αὖ-- 
τοῖς οἵ παῖδες τὰ λεγόμενα ξυνιῶσιν, Where it would have been enough to 
have said, “so soon as their children—;” but the αὐτοῖς refers to the ex- 
pectation ‘of the parents. In like manner this Dative refers to the emotions 
excited by an action; 6. g. ἢ μήτηρ ἐᾷ σε ποιεῖν ὅ,τι ἂν βούλῃ, ἵν αὐτῇ μα-- 
κάριος ἧς (Plat. Lys.) where it would have been fully intelligible simply 
to have said, “in order that thou mayest be happy ;” but the αὐτῇ is add- 
ed in reference to ‘the mother’s feelings.—So also 1 in the case of disadvan- 
tage, ob πατέρες TOUS υἱεῖς παραμυϑοῦνται, ἃ ὅταν αὐτοῖς ἐξαμαρτάνωσι (Plat. 
Sophist.) where we are not to seek in αὑτοὶς the persons against whom the 
transgression is directed (to their disadvantage), but simply a minor reference 
to the feelings of the fathers.—F rom such passages we can now advance far- 
ther and easily comprehend those instances, where in a manner peculiarly 
common in Greek, the Datives wot, cot, etc. are inserted, merely in order 
to give to the discourse a touch of feeling and sentiment. A striking. ex- 
ample of this apparently superfluous Dative occurs Od. δ, 569; where it 
is said to Menelaus, that the gods, (564) would send him to Elysium, οὔ--, 
yer ἔχεις “Ελένην καί σφιν γαμβρὸς Ads ἐσσι. 

Nore 3.. Out of this same Dative of advantage, has arisen the usage of 
joining to a whole clause or proposition the Dative, instead of the Genitive 
belonging to a substantive; e.g. ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης δὲ σφι ὑχέετο ἢ μήτηρ 
(Herod. I. 31.) “upon the wagon sat to them the mother,” instead of “sat 
their mother.” Hence such a--Dative is sometimes, by a sort of negli- 
gence, followed by a‘ real Genitive; e.g. Od. 9, 231, 232.—A_ Dative 
which cannot thus be referred to the whole proposition, stands sometimes 
instead of the Genitive after words expressing relations, as kindred, friend, 
guest, etc. e. g. τοῦ ξένου ἡμῖν ἡδέως ἂν ΔΙ ον την Plat. Soph. p- 216. 
extr. 


Nore 4. ' Not unfrequently however we find the: Genitive of the per- 
sonal pronoun, which belongs to a following substantive, standing instead 
of the Dative of advantage or disadvantage ; e.g. Plat. Pheedo. sub fin. 
ἐάν σου βάρος ἐν τοῖς σχέλεσι γένηται, where gov, which belongs-to σχέλεσιν 
stands with the verb instead of cot. So also διὰ τέ μου ἀνδρίας οὗ κεῖται 
πυνϑάνονται, where μοῦ has indeed its full signification, but is thus placed 
first, because it stands at the same time for μοί, See further the Index 
to Plat. Meno. etc. under Genitivus. 


For the construction of the Dative with the Passive, see § 134. 4, © 


370 § 134. synTAxX.—vERBS PASSIVE. 


ν VERBS. 
§ 134. Tue Pa ΡΑΘΕΒΆ 


1. The construction and influence of the verb in its first and most 
simple form, the Active, have been sufficiently explained in what has been 
said upon the construction of nouns. Of the three forms of the verb 
therefore, it remains only to investigate the Passive and Middle. 

2. The Passive, from its nature, takes as its Subject in the Nomina- 
tive that which in the Active stood as immediate object in the Accusative. 
The subject or Nominative of the Active on the contrary, becomes now 
the object from, by, or through which I suffer or am affected. When 
this is subjoined to the Passive, it is most commonly done in Greek by 
means of the preposition ὑπὸ with the Genitive; e.g. Act. 6 ᾿“Ζ2χιελ-- 
λεὺς uzeiver τὸν “Exroga, Pass. ὁ “Eurwo κτείνεται ὑπὸ τοῦ “41χιλ- 
λέως, Hector is killed py Achilles. : 

3. Instead of ὑπό the preposition πρός with the Genitive is like- 
wise used; e.g. πρὸς ἁπάντων ϑεραπεύεσθαν to be honoured oF or 
ΒΥ all.—Sometimes also a0, e.g. οἶμαι γάρ μὲ παρὰ σοῦ σοφίας, 
πληρωϑήσεσϑαι Plat. Symp. Ρ. 175. ¢; and by the Ionics especially 
ἐξ, erg. εἴ τί cor κεχαρισμένον ἐξ ἐμοῦ Booien' ‘if any thing agree- 
able is presented thee Srom or by me)”, Herodot. — τὸ ποιηϑὲν ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀνδρός, id. 

4. Not unfrequently the Dative stands in the same manner with the 
Passive, without a preposition. E.g. ov yao εἰς περιουσίαν ἐπράττετο 
αὐτοῖς τὰ τῆς πόλεως (Demosth.) “the affairs of the state are not ad- 
ministered by them for their own advantage ;” μάτην ἡμῖν mavte πο- 
véitat.—This occurs most frequently with the Perfect Passive; e.g. 
καλῶς λέλεκταί σοι, it has been well said sy thee, i.e. thou hast well 
said. 

Notre 1. The Greeks often avail themselves of this Passive construction 
to supply the place of the Perf. Active, which in many verbs seldom or never 
occurs. E.g. λέλεχα, which would have been requisite in the phrase 
above given; see § 97. n. 6. — It is not to be denied, that an ambiguity 
.may sometimes arise from this idiom, e. g. πτᾶντα cou λέλεκται, i. 6. all has 
. been said sy thee, or also To thee. But this will usually disappear by a 
proper attention to the context. 

5. According to the general rule (Text 2) only the immediate object, 
which in construction with the Active stands in the Accusative, would 
become the subject of the Passive; and this rule is strictly observed by 
the English, Latin, and other languages. But since many an object, 
which in Greek is put in the Genitive or Dative, is in its nature a very 


§ 134. synrAx.—vERBS PASSIVE. 371 


near object, or can at least be so conceived, (and is in other lan- 
guages actually put as an immediate object in the Accusative,) the 
Greeks allow themselves sometimes to convert such a Genitive or Da- 
tive into the subject of the Passive. The following are examples of such 
a Gen. and Dative; Act. ἀμελεῖν τίνος to be neglectful of any one, or 
in Eng. as Acc. to neglect any one; πιστεύειν revi to trust to any one, 
or Eng. as Acc. to believe any one. Hence the Greeks say: τὰ τούτου 
πράγματα ἀμελεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν ϑεῶν are neglected by the gods; ὁ 
ψεύστης οὐ πιστεύεταν the liar is not believed. 

6. The Passive in Greek can also have an Accusative. That is, 
when the Active governs two Accusatives (ἢ 131. 5), and the Accus. of 
the person becomes the subject of the Passive, the Accus. of the thing 
remains as object of the Passive; e.g. of παῖδες διδάσκονται owpoo- 
σύνην the boys are taught a proper behaviour; ἀφαιρεϑεὶς τὴν ἀρχήν 
deprived of the government. 

7. The two constructions last mentioned are very. often found’ united 
in the same sentence. In that case the Dative of the person, which 
stood as the remote object of the Active, becomes the Nominative of the 
Passive, while the Accus. of the Active remains as object of the Passive. 
E. g. from ἐπιτρέπειν τῷ «Σωκράτει τὴν δίαιταν to entrust the decision 
to Socrates, comes ὁ ΖΣωχράτης ἐπιτρέπεται τὴν δίαιταν. --- Eurip. 
τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ χερῶν aonalouce I am robbed of this out of my very hands. 
rp Tim. p. 60: ες τὸ δὲ ὑπὸ πυρὸς τὸ νοτερὸν πᾶν ἐξαρπασϑέν, 

“this, which is deprived of all dampness by means of fire ;” δέλτος 
Bibesiaiabe ξυνϑήματα " — ὑπὸ πόλεως τὴν ἡγεμονίαν πεπίστευ- 
το" ---[Ηρομηϑεὺς ὑπ᾽ ἀετοῦ ἐκείρετο τὸ ἧπαρ (where xelgecy means 
to tear out) ; ---- ἐκκοπεὶς τοὺς ὀφϑαλμούς. 

Nore 2. In some instances belonging to no. 6, the Accus. which 
stands with the Passive can be explained as in § 131. 6, where κατά is 
commonly supplied; e.g. πλήττομαι τὴν κεφαλήν I am beaten (as to) on 
. the head. —In some other instances the verb as Passive governs an Accu- 
sative of the corresponding or kindred abstract substantive, (as in the Ac- 
tive, § 131. 3,) which then serves to qualify the verb; e.g. τύπτεται πλη-- 
γὰς πολλᾶς, i.e. ‘he is beaten with many blows.’ — Finally, the Aor. Pass. 


often ee the Accus. in consequence of its Middle signification ; see 


§ 136. 2 
*% * * 


8. Verbal adjectives in τέος and τός are in their nature Passive, 
and correspond to the Passive participles. The verbal in ré0¢ con- 
nects with this meaning the idea of necessity, and corresponds to the 
Latin participle in dus, i.e. he, she, it shall or must ; 6. 5.» φιλητέος 
one who is to be loved, must be loved. The verbal in τός, on the other 
hand, corresponds to the Latin participle in tus both in form and sense ; 


372 § 184. syNTAX.—VERBS PASSIVE. 


though not in construction, in respect to which it is merely an adjective. 
E.g. πλεχτὸς braided, στρεπτὸς turned around, ποιητὸς made (i.e. 
not natural), κατασχευαστός prepared. More commonly however it 
‘has the idea of capability or possibility, like the Latin adjectives in zlis, 
Engl. ile, ble, etc. E.g. στρεπτὸς versatilis, versatile; ὁρατὸς visi- 
bilis, visible ; axovoros audible. 

9. In consequence of their Passive nature, these verbals refer in con- . 
struction to what would be the subject of the verb in the Active; (that 
in τὸς however only in its second signification ;) and in such a man- 
ner, that this subject stands with them in the Dative, by no. 4 above. 
E.g. ἡ πόλις ὠφελητέα σοί ἔστι the state must be benefited by thee, 
i.e. “thou must be useful to the state;” τοῦτο ov ῥητὸν ἐστὶ pos, 
this must not be said by me, i.e. I must not say this. Very often how- 
ever this reference to the person or subject is omitted, and the sense left 
ἢ general; e.g. λυτέος 6 τοιοῦτος νόμος καὶ οὐκ ἐατέος κύριος εἶναι, 
“this law must be repealed, and not be suffered to remain valid.” 

10. When the Neut. in τέον stands in this manner, with or without 
ἐστίν, it corresponds to the Latin Nom. Neut. in dum, e.g. λεκτέον 
ἐστίν or simply λεκτέον “one must speak.” It takes then all the con- © 
structions and qualifications of the verb;,e.g. ἀρετὴν ἔχειν πειρατέον 
“one must strive to have virtue;” τοῖς λόγοις προσεχτέον τὸν νοῦν 
“ one must fix his attention on the words;” ταῦτα πάντα ποιητέον poe 
“al this must I do.”—The corresponding usage in respect to the Neut. 
in. τόν, (but without such verbal constructions,) occurs e.g. in βιωτόν 
gore “one can live;” τοῖς οὐκ ἐξιτὸν ἔστε “who cannot go out,” 
Hesiod. 9,,, 792. 

Nore 8. The Attics use also the Plural of the Neut. Verbal 3 in τέον 15: 
the same signification (comp. §129. 1). E.g. βαδιστέα “one must go ;” 


ouyexmots ἐστὺ τὴν τρύγα (see the Anom. πένω) “one must drink up even 
the dregs.” 


Nore 4. By another Attic peculiarity the form in téoy, as if in conse- 
quence of the idea δεῖ which lies in it, sometimes takes that which would 
be the subject of the Active, in the Accusative instead of the Dative ; e. g. 
Plat. , Gorg, 507. d, τὸν βουλόμενον εὐδαίμονα εἶναν σωφροσύνην Siesta 
καὶ ἀσκητέον. See Heind, ad Plat. Phaedr. 128. 


Nore 5. Since Deponents (§ 113) are also used passively in some of their 
forms, the verbal adjectives are formed from them in a Passive sense ; 
just as elsewhere from regular Actives. E. g. ἐργάζομαι I work, ἐργαστόν 
what can be or is accomplished by labour, ἐργαστέον one must work. Indeed, 
in certain verbs whose Passive or Middle assumes a new signification, 
which may be recognized as a new simple and Active sense, the verbal 
adjectives in some familiar instances have both. significations, viz. that 
which comes from the proper Active, and that from the Passive or Mid- 
dle. E.g. πειστέον “one must.convince” from πεύϑω, and “one must 


ᾧ 135. syNTAX.—VERBS MIDDLE. 373 


obey” from msiFoucr.—From τρέπομαν turn away, go away, is formed a 
very unusual verbal adjective to express this sense, viz. the form τραπητέον 
from the Aor. 2 Pass. ἐτράπην. 


- $135. Tue Mippte. 


1. In treating of the use of the Middle, we must distinguish ac- 
curately between the Middle as to signification and the Middle as to 
form. 'This is necessary, because usage has by no means so definitely 
and regularly separated the significations of the Passive and Middle, 
even in those tenses where a double form exists, that under the name 
Middle we can at once understand both form and signification. One 
point at least we must ‘assume as firmly established, viz. that in Syntax ~ 
that only is a real Middle, which has a Middle signification under a 
Passive form. 

Nore 1. This definition includes the Aorist Passive, which, as we 
shall see farther on, has in many verbs a Middle signification. For al- 
though its form, according to the general analogy, is not Passive, but Act- 
ive; still it has been removed from the Active by long and uninterrupted 
usage. ‘This tense therefore is to be regarded as a real Passive; which 
nevertheless, like other Passive tenses, is susceptible of the Middle signifi- 
cation. , 

2. We have already seen (ἢ 89. 1) that the fundamental signification 
of the Middle is the reflevive one; which arises very naturally out of 
the Passive signification. The full and proper reflexive sense exists, 
where the subject of the verb is at the same time its immediate ob- 
ject, and consequently stands with the Active form in the Accusative. 
Thus from λούω tive Twash some one, the Passive is λοῦμαν I am wash- 
ed, and this as Middle signifies Iwash myself, bathe. So ἀπάγχειν, dnay- 
Eas τινά to strangle, hang some one, Mid. ἀπάγχεσϑαι, ἀπάγξασϑαι, to 
hang one’s self; ἀπέχειν, anooyerv, restrain, Mid. anéyeoOae restrain 
one’s self, abstain. It is however to be observed, that this first and 
proper sense, although it seems to be the foundation of the whole doc- 
trine and use of the Middle form, actually constitutes the real Middle sig- 
nification only in a very limited number of verbs; indeed only in a few 
which occur very frequently in this wholly reflexive meaning, and which 
(besides those above adduced) express some ordinary action in refer- 
ence to one’s own person; e. g. to dress, wipe, shave, clip, adorn with 
a wreath, etc. In all other verbs, this direct reflexive sense, when 
requisite, can be expressed only by means of the reflexive pronouns 
ἐμαυτὸν, ἑαυτόν, etc. 

3. The reflexive sense is often converted into a new simple meaning, 
i.e. one which has no reflexive reference to the subject; e. g. στέλλειν 


to send, στέλλεσϑαν lit. to send one’s self Sala i. e. to travel. In 
48 


374 § 135. syNTAX.—VERBS MIDDLE. 


this way the Middle in many verbs passes over into a real intransitive. 


»- ͵ . . 
. E. g. παύειν cause to cease, παυέσϑαν lit. cause one’s self to cease, 1. 6. 


ἦι 


to cease, leave off; πλάξζευν cause to wander about, πλάζεσϑαν wander 
about, rove; εὐωχεῖν entertain, εὐωχεῖσϑαν feast, revel, etc. 

Nore 2. These Middles obviously correspond to their Actives, pre- 
cisely as immediates to their causatives. There are also some Passive- 
Middles, which in a similar simple signification appear as Deponents ; 
e. g. γεύομαι taste, σήπομαν decay, rot, ἕλπομαι hope ; of which the infre- 
quent Actives can be expressed in English only by means of a circumlo- 
cution with cause, ‘make, let, etc. as γεύω cause to taste, σήπω cause to rot, 
etc. thw cause to hope. See also the Anom. μαΐένομαι. 

4, But the Middle can also readily become a éransitive; and as 
the Passive often has with it an Accusative as object, (§ 134. 6 sq.) so 
likewise has the Middle. The simplest instance of this is when, as with 
the Passive, one of the two objects (Accusatives) of the Active remains 
with the Middle; e.g. évdvew τινὰ χιτῶνα ἴο put on one’s coat for 
him, Mid. ἐνδύσασϑαν χιτῶνα to put on one’s own coat. But the 
Middle can also take an object of its own, whenever there arises (in the 
manner mentioned in no. 3 above) out of the reflexive action a new 
simple sense which can be regarded as transitive. E.g. περαιοῦν τινὰ 
to set one over sc. a river, Mid. περαιοῦσϑαι lit. to set one’s self over, 
i.e. to pass over, and then it takes the river in the Accusative, περαύ- 
οὔσϑαν τὸν Τίγριν to pass over the Tigris; φοβεῖν to frighten anoth- 
er, φοβεῖσϑαε]ϊι. to frighten one’s self, i. 6. to fear, and then φοβεῖσϑαι 
τοὺς ϑεούς to fear the gods; τίλλειν to pluck, τίλλεσϑαν to pluck 
one’s self, i.e. pull out one’s own hair,—and as this is an action of 
lamentation, hence τἰλλεσϑαί teva means to bewail any one by pulling 
out the hair. 

5. In all the preceding instances, the Mid. sense arises out of the usual 
transitive construction of the Active with the Accusative, viz. φοβοῦμαι 


for ἐγὼ φοβῶ με. But as the subject of the Passive (ὃ 134. 5, 7) some-_ 


_times comes from the construction with the remote object, viz. the Dative, 


so this is sometimes the case with the Middle ; and then the other object, 
which stood with the Active in. the Accusative, stands in the same 
manner with the Middle. E. g. προσποιῆσαί τινὶ τι to adjoin something 
to any one, i.e. make it his own, (as a territory to a state, etc.) προσ- 
ποιήσασϑαί τι to appropriate something to one’s. self 3 so also λύσασϑαι 
τὴν ζώνην to loose one’s own girdle; λούσασϑαι τὴν κεφαλήν to wash 
one’s own head, or for one’s self—Among Middle verbs of this kind, 
there are some again, which for us at least assume a new, simple, and 
transitive sense ; 8. 5. πορίξζεσϑαί tv to procure something for one’s self, 
i. ©. fo acquire. 


§ 135. SYNTAX.—VERBS MIDDLE. 375 | 


Nore 3. Hence arises the difference between ϑεῖναι νόμους, to make 
laws, spoken properly only of a legislator who is not himself subject to 
his own laws, and ϑέσθαι νόμους, also to make laws, spoken of a state 
which gives itself laws, or of a legislator who subjects himself to his own 
_laws. Writers however do not always strictly observe this distinction. 


6. In this manner, then, has the most usual signification of the Mid- 
dle arisen, viz. from the Active with the addition myself or for myself. 
In this way a verb which in the Active has two Accusatives, can retain 
both in the Middle. E.g. αἰτῶ os τοῦτο I ask this of you, leaving it 
indefinite whether for myself or for another; but αἰτοῦμαν σὲ τοῦτο 
means definitely F ask this of you for myself. 

7. We may now advance farther and shew, that every species of 
more remote reference of the action to the subject, can also be ex- 
pressed by the Middle. E. g. ἐποχετεύω I lead up or into by pipes sc. 
‘water etc. ἐποχετεύομαν I draw into myself; κλαίειν τὰ πάϑη τενὸς to 
bewail the sorrows of another, ἐκλαυσάμην τὰ πάϑη ‘ I bewailed my sor- 
rows;” σύμμαχον ποιεῖσϑαί τίνα to make one one’s ally, and the like ;— 
καταστήσασϑαν φύλακας to place guards, viz. over one’s own property ; 
αἴρειν vv to lift or take up anything, αἴρεσϑιαί te also to take up, but only 
for one’s own use; evoloxw 1 find, εὐρίσκομαν I find for my own use, 
i.e. [ acquire, nanciscor. | 

8. Another kind of reflexive action is expressed, when anything is 
said to take place about my person by my order, which we express in 
English by cause, let, etc. ‘Thus κείρομαν means I cut my own hair, 
but also I let another cut it; while the Passive καρῆναν is used only of 

“an entirely Passive relation, 6. g. of the shearing of sheep.—Here too 
the more remote reference has place; e.g. παρατίϑεμαν τράπεζαν “T 
cause a table to be spread for me;”? μισϑόω 1 let out, μεσϑοῦμαί τε I 
cause to let out to myself, i.e. I hire; διδάξασϑαν υἱὸν to let one’s son 
be taught; noradimaoas τινά to condemn any one, κατεδικασάμην αὐ- 
tov, as it were, “I have caused him to be condemned for my own 
advantage,” i.e. I have gained a process against him.—We find also 
the Middle in this manner without any apparent reference whatever to 
the subject, and it is then consequently to be translated simply by the 
Infin. Act. with cause; e.g. Xen. Cyrop. I. 4. 18, where it is said that 
young Cyrus put on the arms ἃ ὁ πάππος ἐπεποίητο “ which his grand- 
father had caused to be made.” Hence πρεσβεύω “1 go as ambassa- 
dor,” πρεσβεύομαιν “1 send (cause to go as) ambassador.” 

Nore 4. The foregoing examples are sufficient to give a general idea 
of the reflexive power of the Middle, and to shew that the species of ref- 
erence and relation to the subject, is in every instance determined by the 
nature of the context. ΑἹ] this will easily be learned by practice and fre- 
quent comparison. It must however be observed, that this reference to 


͵ 


376 § 136. SyYNTAX.—PERF. AND AOR. PASS. AS MIDDLE. 


the subject is often very remote and feeble ; so that it might remain unex- 
pressed without any injury to the sense, especially when it is implied 
from the nature of the verb itself. — Fimally, in many verbs and particu- 
lar instances such a reference has entirely vanished ; 6. g. ἰδεῖν and the 
poetic ἰδέσϑαι are entirely the same ; and so in prose ἀποφαΐνειν and ἅπο- 
φαΐνεσϑαι, to demonstrate, παρέχειν and παρέχεσϑαιυ, to present. Very often 
too the Middle is used only in certain secondary shades or turns of signi- 
fication, or in other connexions; as in αἱρεῖν to take, αἱρεῖσϑαν to choose ; 
λαβεῖν and λαβέσϑαι, etc. But such instances must be learned by obser- 
vation and practice, like other peculiarities and anomalies of idiom. 'The 
learner must nevertheless here be particularly upon his guard; because a 
reference may very easily be imperceptible to us, whieh the Greeks in- 
stantly perceived and felt. . 2 

Nore 5. On the other hand, the learner must not suppose, that the 
Middle of all verbs really exists, where, as to the sense, it really could ex- 
ist. An attentive observation of usage, and a good lexicon, will in every 
instance shew whether a verb has the.Middle, and also whether this has a 
definite sense, and if so, what it is. 

Nore 6. Where a remoter reference to the subject, for the sake of em- 
phasis or perspicuity, is expressed by means of a pronoun, as ἐμαυτοῦ, 
ἐμός, etc. the form of the Middle still remains (where it can have place), 
although this is then not requisite. Thus Demosthenes says (in Mid.) γέ- 
γραμμαι ἐμαυτῷ ταῦτα, I have written this down for myself. 

Nore 7.- In the reflexive sense is included the strictly reciprocal (mu- 
tual) action. Thus βουλεύειν means to take counsel, resolve,—Sovisteo Dan, to 
consult together, or as a common Middle, to consult one’s self, reflect ; 
διαλύειν to reconcile others, Svadver Go to become reconciled with one another. 

Nore 8. From the proper Middle must be excluded all those Middle 
forms, of which no Active form exists, and which are therefore to be re- 
garded as Deponents of the old Passive form. Such are δέχομαι take, 
ἐδεξάμην ; αἰσϑάνομαιν perceive, ἡσϑόμην. 


§ 136. Perfect and Aorist Passive as Middle. 


1. We have already seen (ᾧ 89), that the forms which constitute the 
real Middle are: The Present and Imperfect, the Perfect and Pluper- 
fect of the Passive form; and the Future and Aorist with a peculiar 
Middle form. 

2. The whole Middle form has no connexion whatever with the signifi- 
cation of the real Passive ; while on the other hand, in many verbs, the 
Aor. Pass. has at the same time the signification of the Middle. E.¢g. 
κατακλίνεσθαι lay one’s self down, κατεκλίϑην᾽" ἀπαλλαττεσϑαι re- 
move one’s self, go away, ἀπηλλάγην. Further ἀσκηϑῆναι, πλαγχϑῆ- 
vat (from πλαζεσϑαι), εὐωχηϑῆναι, περανωϑῆναι, φοβηϑῆναι, πει-- 
σϑῆναι, ἐναντιωϑῆναι, κοἰμηϑῆναι, ὀρεχϑῆναι, καταπλαγῆναι, etc. 
E. g. λύσας τὴν πολιορκίαν ἀπηλλάγη having raised the siege he re- 
tired ; κουμήϑητι lay thyself down to sleep; ἡσκήϑην τέχνην I exer- 
cised myself in the art; κατεπλάγη τὸν (Φίλιππον he dreaded Philip. 


§ 137. synraAx.—THE TENSES. * 3 37 οὶ 


Nore 1. The regular Middle form of the Aorist in such verbs is un- 
usual or dbsolete. In some it has a special signification ; e.g. στέλ-- 
λεσϑαι travel, Aor. σταλῆναι; but στέλλεσϑαν dress one’s self, also send 
for, cause to come, Aor. στείλασϑαι. 


Nore 2. Several of these verbs, whose signification has more of the 
Passive nature, as φοβεῖσϑαι, καταπλήττεσϑαι, could also be explained as 
Passives which govern an Accusative (§ 134. 6).. But .such Passives al- 
ways have some third object in the Accusative ; while these verbs on the 
contrary take as Accus. the subject of; the Active; e.g. ὃ Φίλιππος κατέ-- 
πληττεν (terrified) αὐτόν. “Were now κατεπλάγην in the sense he was ter- 
rifted, he feared, purely Passive, the example in no. 2 above must read xa- 
τεπλάγη ὑπὸ tot Φιλίππου. 


Nore 3. When the Aor. Mid. is in use, the Aor. Pass. can also be 
used as Passive of a special signification of the Middle; e.g. γραφείς writ- 
ten, from γράφειν, but also sued at law, from γράφεσϑαι, γράψασϑαι, to sue 
at law. 


Nore 4. The use of the Future Middle, and in some few cases even 
of the Aorist Middle, instead of the Passive, has been treated of in § 113. 5. 


3. That the Perf. and Plupf. Pass. are at the same time (like the 
Present Pass.) the real Perf. and Plupf. Middle, is placed beyond doubt 
by many examples. We have already adduced two, in the preceding sec- 
tion (§ 135), viz. in no. 8 ἐπεποίητο, and in note 6 γέγραμμαν. Xen. 
Cyrop. 7. 3. 14, ἀκινάκην πάλαι παρεσκευασμένη σφάττειν ἑαυτήν 
“having long before furnished herself with a sword, she stabbed her- 
self ;”’ ibid. 7. 2. 12, διαπέπραγμαν 1 have effected ; Isocr. ἐπιδεδει- 
γμένος τὴν πονηρίαν having manifested openly his wickedness; Xen. 
Symp. 8. 25 μεμισϑωμένος χώρον having hired a piece of land, etc. 

For the Perf. 2, formerly called the Perf. Middle, see ὃ 113. n. 3, 4, 
compared with § 97. 5, and n. ὅ. 


§ 157. Of tue TENsEs. 


1. Among the Greek tenses, the Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Plu- 
perfect, and Future, correspond essentially to the tenses of the like 
name in our own language. Hence it is here necessary to subject only 
the Aorist and the Fut. 3 to a more particular investigation. , 

2. In order fully to comprehend the Aorist, we must compare the 
other Preterites. The Prerrecr never narrates; but represents that 
which has taken place, as past, in connexion with the present time. 
E.g. “I know it, for I have seen it.” This connexion is not indeed 
always expressed, but the Perfect of itself suggests it tothe mind: J 
have seen it, 1.e. am one who saw it,—now, while I am speaking, it has 
already taken place.* 'The Aorist leaves the present time entirely out 


* It will always be found, that the true Perfect, especially as it has maintain- 
ed itself in Greek, is only used, when a consequence of the completed action or of 


378 . » § 137. syNTAX.—THE TENSES. 


of view, transports us into the past, and so narrates successively that 
which took place ;* e.g. Πύῤῥος ὃ βασιλεὺς ὁδεύων Evéetvye κυνὶ 
φοουροῦντε vexgov—nai ἐκέλευσε μεϑ' ἑαυτοῦ xomilecr, etc. But 
in the midst of a narrative, the circumstances under which the thing 
took place at that time must be mentioned ; and this is done by means 
of the Imperrect; 8. g. ὀλίγαις δὲ ὕστερον ἡμέραις ἐξέτασις ἦν καὶ 
παρῆν O κύων" ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς φονέας éeJoaue,—Aorist again, etc. 
— And when that which αὐ that time was already past, is to be men- 
tioned in the narrative, this takes place through the PLupERFEcT. 

3. The three other Preterites then all presuppose a definite reference 
to time, viz. the Perfect to the present time, the Imperfect and Pluperfect 
to the time of the facts narrated. The Aorist relates the past, without any 
such presupposition or reference. When however such a reference is suffi- 
ciently clear from the context, the Aorist can be employed instead of 
the Perfect, and in narration instead of the Pluperfect. It stands 
most frequently instead of the Perfect. E.g. Xen. Mem. I. 6. 14, Soc- 
rates says, τοὺς ϑησαυροὺς τῶν πάλαι σοφῶν, οὺς ἐκεῖνον HOT EAL 
πον ἐν βιβλίοις γράψαντες, διέρχομαν, where the sense manifestly 
requires the Perfect, “‘ which they have left to us in books.” But in eve- , 
ry discourse where the past is often mentioned, and so mentioned that 
the mind always remains in the present, the Aorist is nevertheless most 
commonly employed in Greek, contrary to the usage of our language, 
where the Perfect alone would in such acase be used. It is indeed, for 
the most part, only when the speaker wishes particularly to express the 
exact relations of time, that the Perfect, and in narration the Pluperfect, 
are employed ; where nevertheless a regard to euphony has always great 
influence on the choice.—T he indefiniteness therefore, which has given 
to the Aorist its name, is limited solely to time past. | 

Nore 1. The Aorist stands instead of the Pluperfect, e.g. Xen. Cyr. 
V. 1. init. “her husband was ambassador in Bactria, ἔπεμψε δὲ αὐτὸν ὃ 
᾿Ασσύριος περὶ συμμαχίας, i.e. had sent him. Thucyd. οὗ Adyvetor εὐθὺς 
ἐπειδὴ ἀνεχώρησαν — ξύμμαχον ἐγένοντο. In the poets this Aorist is far 
more common than the Pluperf. itself. . 


4, 'That which was contemporary, and which is adduced in a narration 
by way of qualification, must necessarily have had some duration; thus 


the cessation of that action still continues. Whoever says in Greek I have 
known it, says at the same time that he now no longer knows it. Whoever says 
οἶκον ὠκοδόμηκα, conceives this house to be still standing ; if he says @xoddunoo., 
he leaves this at least undecided; but he says the same when he definitely 
knows, that the house is no longer standing. 

* The Greek Aorist thus seems to express alone that which less copious lan- 
guages refer to other tenses, e. g. the Latin to the Perfect, the English and Ger- 

_ man to the Imperfect. 


§ 137. syNTAX.—THE TENSES, 379 


“all slept; then arose a cry.” Even when it is something in itself 

momentary, ( e.g. “1 opened my mouth in order to call him, as he enter- 

ed,”) we cannot well conceive of it otherwise, than as having com- 

menced a moment previous. Thus the idea of duration connects it- 

self naturally with the Imperfect ; and in opposition to this, the idea 

of something momentary, is connected with the Aorist. Hence arises 

a second idiom of the language, in consequence of which the Im- 

perfect is employed in the progress of the narration, not merely to express 

a contemporary qualification of the Aorist, but alternately with the Aor- 

ist, whenever the fact narrated is to be represented as having had some 

duration. E.g. Xen: Anab. V. 4. 24 τοὺς μὲν οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο 

oi βάρβαροι (they received them, momentary) καὶ ἐμάχοντο (and 

fought with them, continued) ; ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἦσαν οἵ ὁπλῖται (as they’ 
approached, natural Imperfect) érganovto (they turned to flight, mo- 

mentary); καὶ of πελτασταὶ εὐθὺς εἵποντο (pursued them, continued). 

—This often causes a difference of sense, which is easily overlooked ; 

6. g. when it is said ὁ κύων ἐξέδραμε, καὶ χκαϑυλάχτει αὐτούς, we must 
necessarily understand a continued barking; if it were καϑυλάχτησε, it 

would mean but a single bark, as momentary as the ἐξεδράμεν.--- Απά 

thus it comes, that the Imperfect is always used, when anything past is 

to be represented as customary, or as having often occurred; e.g. M/i- 
λων ὃ Κροτωνιάτης 4001 ε μνᾶς κρεῶν εἴκοσι, “ Milo the Crotonian 

ate twenty minae of meat” i.e. was accustomed to eat so much. 

5. In what has been said above, we have ascertained the use of the 
Aorist to be the expression of that which is momentary in time past, 
‘principally in narration. It follows of course, that this is not limited to 
that which is literally and strictly momentary ; but that the speaker or 
writer employs this tense, in all cases, where, along with the fact, he has 
also the completion of it before his mind,—he employs it for every thing 
that he wishes to represent as momentary or transient. But this dis- 
tinction between that which is momentary and that which is continu- 
ed, exists also in reference both to present and future time. For these 
however, the language has in the Indicative no double form to mark the 
distinction ; while in the dependent moods the Greek can always mark 
it in both these periods. ‘These moods in Greek. may be regarded in 
respect to time, in a two-fold manner. (1) Each mood has the definite 
time of its Indicative. (2) In the Present and Aorist however, the de- 
pendent moods in-themselves mark no time whatever, (like the Present 
Infinitive in English,) and are only rendered definite in respect to time, 
when and so far as it is necessary, by means of the Indicative on which 
they depend in the discourse or in the thought. In this way arises 


\ 


380 § 197. SYNTAX.—THE TENSES. 


therefore a double and (in respect to time) equivalent form, ετὐπτεὺν or 

τύψαι, φιλῇς or φιλήσῃς, etc. of which the Greek language avails it- 

self in such a manner, that it employs the Moods of the Present to mark 

a continued action, and the Moods of the Aorist to mark ἃ momentary 

one. E.g. where Demosthenes says, (Phil. I. p. 44. Reisk.) τριή- 

ρὲις πεντήκοντα παρασκευάσασϑαί φημι δεῖν, εἶτ αὐτοὺς 
οὕτω τὰς γνώμας ἔχειν----, he wishes to have the galleys fitted out cmme- 

diately, and hence the momentary Aorist ; but the disposition of mind 

which he recommends by γνώμας éyecv should have duration. And 

when he says further, p. 45, iv ἢ διὰ τὸν φόβον --- ἡσυχίαν ἔχη, ἢ 

παριδὼν ταῦτα ἀφύλακτος ληφϑῆς it is obvious that here ἔχη express- 
es duration, and ληφϑῇ is momentary. So also with the Imperative, 

ibid. p. 44. init. ἐπειδὰν ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, καὶ μὴ πρό- 
τέρον προλαμβάνετε. Here the moment of κρίνατε is clearly 

marked; the formation of a preconceived opinion however is in itself 
something gradual, and the orator had marked for it no particular 

moment in his own mind; hence προλαμβαάνετε. See Hermann ad’ 
Viger. num. 165. b. It is however easy to perceive, that this differ- 

ence in many respects depends entirely upon the view of the speaker or 

writer ; and that therefore, in innumerable instances, it is really indif- 

ferent, whether λέγεον or λέξαι, λέγε or “λέξον, is written; since the re- 

ality of the distinction would not be thus at all affected. 

Nore 2. An action of longer duration can also in the dependent moods 
be expressed by the Aorist, when at the same time the final completion 
of it is not only before the ‘mind, but is regarded as the end and purpose 
of the action. LE. g. Plat. Crit. 15, τῶν παΐδων ἕ ἕνεχα βούλει ζῆν, ἵνα αὐτοὺς 
ἐχϑρέψῃς καὶ παιδεύσης. 

6. The Participle of the Aorist always has the express signification 
of the past, and sometimes coincides entirely with the signification of 
the Part. Perfect. E.g. ἀποβαλὼν having lost and consequently now 
possessing nothing; μαϑὼν having learned and therefore knowing ; 
ϑανῶων, τελευτήσας, having died, dead; οἱ πεσόντες the fallen, the dead. 

Nore 3. Thus 6. g. Demosthenes says, (Mid. 52. Reisk, p- 576. 23,) 
Ἢ of a discourse fall of merited reproaches, the true author is ὃ παρεσχηκὼς 
τὰ ἔργα, —ovy ὃ ἐσκεμμένος οὐδ᾽ ὃ μεριμνήσας τὰ δίκαια λέγειν, i. 6. he who 
has afforded the facts, not he who with consideration and care has pre- 
pared himself to speak that. which is right.” Consequently μεριμγήσας is 
entirely parallel with the two Participles Perf. and is manifestly used in 
order τὸ avoid the less agreeable μεμεριμγνηκώς. 

Notre 4. We have hitherto spoken chiefly of the Attic dialect. In Ho- 
mer the Aorist, like many other forms, appears only in the commencement 


of its exiatendo; i. e. the other tenses had not yet become so definitely separa- 
ted from it. ‘The Imperfect especially cannot yet in him be distinguished 


᾿ ᾧ 187. synrax.—rne Tenses. 381 


from the Aorist. We leave the examples to the learner’s own observa- | 
tion.*—In Herodotus also, andgperhaps in the lonic. dialect generally, the 
Imperfect, especially in continued narration, is often employed as Aorist, 
at least according to our notions, i. 6, it is used to narrate actions or tran- 

. Sient events, the occurrence of which as contemporary with other events 
does not necessarily appear. from the context.’ E. g. III. 28 ἐκάλεε, ἐχέλευε, 
and very often ἠρώτα, ἀμείβετο, etc. 1. 31, 35, 36, etc. 

Note 5. Whenever anything customary, or of ordinary occurrence 
in the world, is mentioned elsewhere than in narration, instead of the 
Present by which this is expressed in other languages and usually in Greek, 
we often find bya special Grecism the 4orist, which is then in the fullest 
sense indefinite. ἘΠ. g. Demosth. Olynth. ΤΙ, μικρὸν πταῖσμα ἀνεχαΐτισε καὶ 
διέλυσε πάντα “a slight mistake often disturbs and destroys all again.” Id. 
Mid. 21 οὗ γὰρ ἢ πληγὴ παρέστησε τὴν ὀργὴν, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἀτιμία" οὐδὲ τὸ τὔπτε- 
σϑαι---ἐστὶ δεινὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει, Where the ἐστί shews how the pre- 
ceding παρέστησε is to be understood. Isocr. Paneg. 12, speaking of the 
great games and assemblies of the Greeks, in opposition to the constant 
concourse at Athens, says, αὖ μὲν ἄλλαν πανηγύρεις διὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου συλ- 
λεγεῖσαι ταχέως διελύϑησαν, ἢ δὲ κιτι}. See also Heindorf. ad Plat. 
Phaedo. 49. ᾿ 

Nore 6. Another case, where the Aorist seems to stand instead of the 
' Present, is the Indic. Aorist after the question τί οὔ; E. g. τί οὐκ ἐποιή- 
σαμεν ; lit. “why have we not done it?” 1. 6, let us do it; τὸ οὐκ ἔφρασας, 
- i.e. ‘tell me now.’——See Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. 126. P gee 
Nore 7. The Greeks further enjoyed a great freedom in the choice 
of tenses from this circumstance, that in a narration, where the real 
time was obvious from the context, they could everywhere introduce the 
Present. This they did not merely in whole sentences, as we also sometimes 
do in animated discourse, but in the midst of a sentence or construction,— 
and even the Pres. Indicative in the midst of citing another person’s 
thoughts in sermone’ obliquo. E.g. Xen. Anab. I. 8, 14 εἷς δὲ εἶπ ε-ττ, 
στρατηγοὺς ἑλέσϑιαιν ἄλλους ὡς τάχιστα, εἶ μὴ βούλεταν Κλέαρχος 
ἀπάγειν. Ibid. 1.7. 16, where it is related, that the army of Cyrus came to” 
a trench; then follows immediately ταύτην δὲ τὴν τάφρον βασιλεὺς μέγας 
ποιεὶ ἀντὶ ἐρύματος, ἐπειδὴ πυν ϑάνεταιν Κῦρον προσελαύνοντα. Ἐΐν- 
ery other language must here in both instances have employed the 
Pluperfect. 


Nore 8. Some verbs however are of a nature which seems to 


* We adduce here some passages, in which the Imperfect stands in the same 
connexion with the Aorist, where however there is no such difference visible 
in the action as to imply any difference in the two tenses; Il. α, 437, 438, 465. 
6, 43-45. Here it would be absurd to assume, that the disembarking of the mari- 
ners, the cutting up of the flesh, the throwing on of the large cloak, must have 
been present to the mind of the poet as actions implying duration and requiring 
time; while the leading out of the (many) victims, the fixing upon the spits of the 
Amany) pieces of flesh, the girding on of the sword, appeared to the same mind as mo- 
mentary. Still more decisive is λεῖπε, 8. 107, comp. 106.—On the other hand it will 
be of great use in reading Homer to observe, how the far greater number of deci- 
ded Imperfects which are intermingled in the narration, mark a necessarily and 
manifestly continued and repeated action. Besides, it will not be easy to find in 
Homer the converse of this exchange, viz. the Aorist to express a contemporary 
circumstance or a repeated action. 


49 


382 § 137. SYNTAX.—THE TENSES. 


disturb the regular succession of the tenses. Thus especially ἥχω ἢ 
come is always to be regarded as ἃ Preterite, I have come, i.e. 1 am here ; 
e.g. Plat. Crito init. ἄρτι ἥκεις ἢ πάλαι; So οἴχομαι, lit. I 80 away, 
stands commonly for Iam gone; by which means the Impf. ὥχετο ac- 
quires the appearance of a Pluperfect. See the Ausf. Sprachl. in the 
Catalogue of Anom. Verbs. Further τέχτειν τινά, besides the signification 
to beget, bear, has also that of to be the father, mother, of any one; and 
hence it is often to be taken entirely as a Perfect: πολλοῦ σε ϑνητοῖς ἄξιον 
τίχτει πατήρ. 


Nore 9. In every language, especially in familiar discourse, there 
arise certain phrases which seem to contradict the general laws of the 
language, because their origin has become obscure. In like manner there 
are phrases in Greek, which eannot be reduced to the rules here 
given for the use of the tenses; and which ‘therefore the learner must 
note, without being led into. doubt as to the principles which flow 
from the coincidence of the great body of examples. Here belongs espe- 
cially the phrase ἢν ἄρα instead of the Present, in drawing certain infer- 
ences ; (see Heindorf. ad Plat. Phaedr. 35 ;) originally perhaps: “it was 
then always (and is still) — — and I remarked it not,” where however 
only the general tone hasremained in this phrase.. Further, certain Jorists of 
the first person, as ἤσϑην, ἐπήνεσα, are used in. conversation instead of the 
Present, in order to express a decided emotion or disposition of mind in any 
action ; see Herm. ad Viger. not. 162, and the author’s note to Soph. Phi- 
loct. 1289. 1814. See also the epic ἔπλετο. under the Anom. πέλω. 

Note 10. From the circumstance that the Present and Imperfect 
_ always imply duration, and consequently not completion, arises the usage, 
that several verbs, whose action ean strictly be expressed as complete only 
by the accession of another verb, (e. g. to give completed by to receive, to 
send away by to go away,) are used in these tenses merely to express this 
partial (incomplete) action, or as it is called, de conatu, i.e. an endeavour or 
purpose, though these expressions are not exact. E. 8: Herodot. VII. 221 
Asowidns φανερός ἐστι (here for ἢν by note 7) τὸν μάγτιν ἀποπέμπων; 
ἵνα μὴ συναπόληταϊ σφι" ὃ δὲ ἃ ἀποπεμπόμενος αὑτὸς μὲν οὐκ ἀπέλιπε (did not 
leave him, did not go away), τὸν δὲ παῖΐδα---ἀπέπεμψε, where the last Ao- 
rist constitutes an antithesis to the preceding Present. So δέδωσι, ἐδίδου, 
are very often to be translated by tooffer; and πεύίϑει is strictly only swadet, 
not persuadet. See also the examples referred to in the Index to Demosth. 
Mid. under Praesens. 

Nore 11, The Perfect has also a Subjunctive and Optative, and the 
Future an Optative, which are actually employed, when the species of 
uncertainty peculiar to these moods _ (see § 139), coincides with the time 
marked by these tenses. E. g. εἴϑε ὃ υἱὸς νενικήκον O that my son might 
have conquered ! ! si τινὲς εἰσεληλύϑοιεν uf perhaps some had entered ; εἶπεν 
ore ἤξοι ἡμέρᾳ τρίτῃ he said that he would come the third day. But since 
in such instances the moods of the Present and Aorist, with the help 
of the context, are generally sufficient ;, and since also the Indicative is very 
common in sermone obliquo (comp. note 7 above); the forms in question 
are used only when they serve particularly to promote perspicuity. ‘They 
require therefore here no further illustration. But even then, instead of 
the proper Subj. and Opt. of the Perfect, writers prefer to use in most 
verbs the periphrastic form, e.g. πεφιλοριὼς ὦ and siny.—The Imperative of 


§ 138. synrax.—rurure 3. 383 


the Perfect occurs in its principal form, i. 6. in the second person, for the 
most part only in verbs whose Perfect has the signification of the 
Present; as χέχραχϑι, κεχήνετε (see the Anom. χάσκο), μέμνησο. The third 
"person fine, however, chiefly in the Perf. Passive, a definitive final sense, 
“let it be done, finished ;” and often affords an energetic mode of expres- 
sion; e.g. γῦν δὲ τοῦτο τετολμήσϑω εἰπεῖν, let it be ventured.—Arist. Vesp. 
1129 πεπειράσϑω let it be tried, i. 6. try it then. 


Some further peculiarities of usage in the Aorist, Imperfect, and Fu- 
ture, see Pee under the Moods, § 139. 


ὁ 198. The third Future. 


1. The Future 3, not only in form but in signification, is properly 
compounded from the Perfect and Future. It transposes that which is 

past or completed into a time future. ‘E. g. Plat. Rep. 6 ἡ πολιτεία 
τελέως κεκοσμήσεταυι, ἐὰν ὁ τοιοῦτος αὐτὴν ἐπισκοπῇ φύλαξ, “the 
commonwealth will be in a state of perfect order, (not will come 
into such a state,—adornata erit, not adornabitur ,) if such a guardian 
administers it.” Aristoph. Nub. 1436 μάτην ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσεταν (comp. 
§ 134. 4), “in vain I shall have wept.” As further the Perfect always 
denotes a state or situation which still continues, e.g. ἐγγέγραμμαε not 
merely I have been inscribed, but I am inscribed, I stand on the list ; 
so also this remains in the Fut.3; e,g. Οὐδεὶς κατὰ σπουδὰς merey- 
γραφήσεταυ, did ὥσπερ ἦν τὸ πρῶτον, ἐγγεγράψεται, “no one will 
be otherwise enrolled through favour ; but as he was at first (inscribed), 
so will he remain inscribed,” Arist. Eq. 1371. 

2. Hence this is the appropriate Future of those Perfects that take 
a special signification, which may be regarded as a new Present. E.g. 
λέλειπταν it remains sc. over and above, Achetweras tt will remain (but 
λειφϑήσεταν it will be left behind) ; — κέχτημαι possess, μέμνημαν 
call to mind, nextrnoomat, μεμνήσομαι. 

3. The Attics, in many verbs in the Passive, employ the Fut.3 asa 
simple Future Passive. Besides the verbs δέω and πέπράσκω (see the 
Catal.) this is chiefly the case with πεπαύσομαι, κεκοψομαν, which 
must never by any forced explanation be referred to the original Fut. 3. 
So in other verbs, where this Future is employed by the Attics 
alternately with the ordinary Fut. Pass. and in the same signification ; 
e.g. βεβλήσομαι, λελέξομαι, and others, which are left to the learner’s 
observation. ὶ 


Nore.’ In some verbs the Fut. 3 has a particular emphasis; and im- 
plies either {) it shall, I will ; 6. 8. Soph. Aj. 1141, where to the words of 
Menelaus, ἕν σου φράσω" εἰν ἐστίν οὐχὶ ϑαπτέον --- it is answered, σὺ 
δ᾽ ἀντακούσει τοῦτον ὡς τεϑάψεται (comp. ὃ 151. I. 6), where the common 
ταφήσεται would be far less forcible ; or (2) immediate aetion, haste, etc. 6. g. 


384 § 139. SYNTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 


φράζε, καὶ πεπράξεταν (Arist. Plut. 1127. ef. 1200) lit. speak, and it shalt 
be done, i.e. immediately. From such passages the former name of this 
Future, viz. the Paulo-post Future, seems to have been derived. 


4 


Tue Moops. 


§ 139. Optative and Subjunctive. 6. 5 See 


1. At first view the Greeks seem to have the Optative in addition to 
the moods of our modern languages. But if we compare the use 
of it with the remark made in § 88. 3, viz. that in conjugation this 
mood conforms to the historical tenses, just as the Subjunctive to 
the primary tenses; it will be found that the Optative corresponds very 
nearly to that which in Latin and also in English is the Subjunctive of 
the Imperfect and Pluperfect, which on the other hand is wanting in 
Greek. We say e.g. in the expression of ἃ wish, ‘O that I had —!” 
although the true time is the Present. So in narration, “he inquired 
into every thing in order that he might know.” . In these and similar 
cases the Greeks use the Optative; while their Subjunctive stands 
where we often say if he be, that he has, that he says, ete. 

2. The Optative therefore constantly accompanies the historical 
tenses; so that. the relatives and particles (those compounded with ἄν 
excepted, see’ no. 7 sq.) which in connexion with the Present and Fu- 
ture require with them the Subjunctive, in connexion with the historic 
tenses take the Optative. E.g.ovx ἔχω or οὐκ οἶδα ὅποι τράπω- 
μαι (non habeo, quo me vertam) “T know not whither I can turn my- 
self; οὐκ εἶχον, οὐκ ἤδειν ὅποι τραποίμην (quo me verterem non ha- 
bebam) “I knew not whither I could turn myself;” πάρειμι, ἵνα ἴδω 
“T am present that I may see;” παρῆν, ἵνα ἴδοιμι “1 was present 
that I might see.” | 

Nore 1. For the exceptions which this rule admits, see Hermann ad 
Viger. num. 350. Heind. ad Plat. Protag. 29. But the general and fun- 
damental rule cannot thereby be shaken. The same animation of man- 
ner, which, as we we haye seen above, often introduces the Present into a 
narration of the past, can easily be the oecasion, that a speaker or writer 
should sometimes forget the dependence of his construction on the past. 

3. For the same reason the particles and pronouns, which in sermone 
recto require the Indicative, take in sermone obliquo in narration 
regularly the Optative. E.g. ἤρετο, εἰ οὕτως ἔχον “he. askéd 
whether it were so;” ἔλεξέ μοι, ὅτε ἢ ὁδὸς φέροι εἰς τὴν πόλιν, 
ἥνπερ ὁρῴην, etc. The exception to this is found in § 137. n. 7. 

4. The conjunction ὅπως (§ 149), when it refers to a Future tense, 
is followed either by the Subjunctive or by the Fut. Indicative ;* and 


* Comp. the marg, note to note 8 below. 


$139. syNTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 385 


retains these even in connexion with the past. E.g. Thucyd. II. 3, 
ξυνελέγοντο --- ὅπως μὴ διὰ τῶν ὁδῶν φανεροὶ cow ἰόντες. III. 4, 
ἔπρασσον, ὅπως τίς βοήϑεια ἥξεν “ they urged, that some help should 
come;” id. 1. 65 ξυνεβούλευεν οὕτω ποιεῖν, ὅπως ὁ σῖτος ἀντίσχη, 
“ἢ6 counselled to do thus, in order that the provision might hold out.” 
— The same holds true of the strengthened negation, ov μή, in every 
sense (δ 148. n. 6); e.g. in entreaty, Eurip. Med. 1151 οὐ uy dvo- 
μενὴς ἔσῃ φίλοις “be not thus disinclined towards thy friends.” Soph. 
El. 1035 ἀλλ᾽ οὔποτ᾽ ἐξ ἐμοῦγε μὴ μάϑης τόδε “but never from 
me shalt thou learn {Π15.᾿ ἢ 

Nore 2. The Subjunctive can nevertheless in narration pass over into 
the Optative, as with ba; e.g. Xen. Laced. 2. 2 ἔδωχεν αὐτῷ μαστι-- 
yopogous, ὕπως τιμωροίη (τοὺς sodas), ote δέοι. See also the example 
in note 3 below. 

5. In order to understand fully the further use of these moods, 
an accurate knowledge of the two particles ¢¢ and ἄν is necessary. 
These are employed in a great variety of ways, partly in their simple 
form, and partly in composition. | 

6. The conjunction εἰ has two principal significations, if and whether. 
In both these meanings it is followed, in more accurate writers, only by 
the Indicative or the Optative, not by the Subjunctive. Epic writers 
nevertheless, and others not Attic, are excepted. 

7. The particle ἄν, for which the epic writers use the fully synony- 
mous enclitic κέν or %é, can sometimes be rendered by our perhaps. 
Commonly however it cannot be expressed by any corresponding parti- 
cle in other languages; but only gives to a proposition or sentence a 
stamp of uncertainty and mere possibility. 'This serves either to mod- 
. ify or to strengthen the Subjunctive and Optative ; while it can also be 
imparted to the Indicative, (the Present and Perfect excepted,) and 
other verbal forms. This particle commonly stands after one or more 


* Dawes, in consequence of too limited observation, proposed the rule, that in 
good Attic writers the Particles ὅπως and od μή never have the Subjunctive of 
the first Aor. Act. and Mid. but always instead of this the Fut. Indicative. This 
rule was found to be often confirmed by manuscripts; and on this ground in 
modern editions a multitude of passages have been altered even without the au- 
thority of manuscripts ; since for the most part this réquired only small changes 
like σῆς into cscs, σώμεν into cowev, etc. But it was soon found that there 
would be no end of such corrections; and also that some passages occur which 
cannot be so easily corrected. Hermann and others have raised important doubts 
against the rule of Dawes. It is certain at least that only the necessary expres- 
sion of completeness determined the choice of the Subjunctive Aorist: Eurip. 
Troad. 445 ὅπως γημώμεϑα. Plat. Repub. p. 609. ὃ. ov γὰρ τόγε ἀγαϑὸν μή-- 
- ποτέ τι ἀπολέσῃ. I assent to the opinion of Dawes thus far, viz. that the second 
Aor. Subj. was used by preference ; and that where no Aor. 2 existed, the Fut. 
Indic. was more usual than the Subj. Aor. 1. 


᾿ 


Fa 
ann J ͵Ἃ "Wt a 
ee DD te Moe ye 
᾿ »" Ye vy ane > > 
i AS Os . 
er. r 7 = & , 
ῖ ΤΊ : ἥ 3 Vy bc εἰ 
Hwat a V ὁ 
\ , 
δ tf» ee Wc: ἜΝ, 


386 § 139. sYNTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 


stirs in a clause, and is thus distinguished from the ay whi is 
contracted from ἐάν. See the next paragraph. 

8. The particle ἄν is subjoined to all relatives and to certain particles, 

with some of which it flows together into one word; so especially ore— 
ὅταν, ἐπειδή---ἐπειδᾶν. - With εἶ it forms ἐάν or ἤν or ἄν" Epic 
writers combine all these words in like manner with κέ, as ὅτε xev, etc. 
and for ἐὰν they have εἴ xev or ai κεν. ΑἹ] these classes of words 
receive, through this addition of av, the idea of mere possibility, and 
thus are regularly followed by the Subjunctive ; and then such clauses, 
if they come to stand in connexion with the past or with a clause in 
“sermone obliquo, either remain unchanged, or else the simple words 
(εἰ, ὅτε, ἐπειδή, ὅς, ὅστις, ὅσος, etc.) with the Optative come in their 
place ; e.g. παρέσομαι, ἐάν τὸ δέῃ, ---- ἔφη παρέσεσϑαν εἴ te δέον oF 
δεήσοι. So in the example in note 2 above, ὅτε δέον stands for the 
ὅταν δέῃ which would be required in direct discourse. 

Nore 9. Epic writers employ both the Subjunctive with εἰ, and 
the Optative with the particles compounded with ἄν or κέ, e.g. Od. ἡ, 
315. There are likewise examples in Attic writers, where the relative 
and particles combined with ἂν have the Optative in a dependent propo- 
sition, without casting off their ἄν; e. g. Xen, Cyrop. 5. 5. init. ἐπέστελ-- 
λὲν αὑτῷ ἥκειν, ὅπως σύμβουλος γίγνοιτο, ὅ,τι ἂν δοκοίη πράττειν, “he 

' sent for him to come, that he might advise that (whatever it might -be) 
which might seem best to be done.” See also Demosth. Mid. 5. note 2. 
So ὅταν in Aischyl. Pers. 448. Such passages are nevertheless rare ; and 
we must mark in all of them, whether the Optative does not stand in 
one of the significations peculiar to it, viz. (1) With the idea of an action | 
repeated in time past (see note 6 below), for this Optative is not altered by 
the ἄν; see the examples in Matthiae’s Grammar § 521. n. 1; (2) When 
the Optative with ἂν forms the conditional Future (see no. 13 below) ; 
e.g. in Plat. Euthyd. 9 ὑμεῖς ἐστε, παρ ὧν ἂν κάλλιστά τις αὐτὸ μάϑοι, 
where μάϑον ἄν belongs together, might or could learn. 

9. The Greek language has a peculiar variety of expression for hypo- 
thetical or conditional propositions ; in respect to which the following are 
‘the most essential points. In every conditional proposition, the condition 
is either possible or impossible. 'The possible cases either express at the 
same time uncertainty, or not; and in the uncertain cases the speaker 
either holds out the prospect of future Hecian, ornot. Hence arise the 
following cases : 

1) Possibility without the expression of uncertainty ; «¢ with the Jn- 

᾿ dicative. ἘΣ. ο. εἰ ἐβρόντησε, καὶ ἤστραψεν “if it has thundered, 

it has also lightened ;” εἴ τὸ ἔχεις, δὸς, “if thou hast anything, 
give it me.” | 


* See § 117.2. This contracted ἄν, like ἐάν, usually begins a proposition or 
clause, and is thus distinguished from the radical form ἄν. See no. 7 above. 


§ 139. synTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. ‘ 387 


------ .- 


2) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision ;* ἐάν with the Sub- 
junctive. E. g. ἐάν te ἔχωμεν, δώσομεν, “if we should have any 
thing, we will give it thee ; ἐάν τίς teva τῶν ὑπαρχόντων vo- 
μὼν μὴ καλὼς ἔχειν ἡγῆται, γραφέσϑω, “if a person should 
consider any one of the existing laws unsuitable, let him petition 
against it.”—Here the protasis implies, “ and that will shew itself,” 
or “ and we shall see that,” etc 

3) Uncertainty without any such subordinate idea; εὐ with the Op- 
tative, and in the apodosis the Opt. with av. E.g. εἴ τις ταῦτα 
πράττοι, μέγα μ᾽ av ὠφελήσειε, “if any one should do this, he 
would render me a great service ;” εἴ τὸς ταῦτα xad αὐτὰ ἐξετά- 
oétev, εὕροι dv—, “if any one should investigate this, he would 
jfind—.” Here nothing further is implied than perhaps, “but I 
know not whether any one will do it.” 

4) Impossibility or disbelief, or generally when one will indicate, that 
the thing zs not so. In this case Attic usage almost without 
exception employs the Imperfect for the present or an indefinite 
time, and then in the apodosis uses the same with av; e.g. εἴ 
te εἶχεν, ἐδίδου av, “if he had any thing, he would give it thee.” 
—Here is necessarily implied, ‘‘ but he has nothing.” 

10. When in this last case both clauses refer to the past, the Aorist 

must stand instead of the Imperfect, at least in the apodosis: 


εἴ te ἔσχεν, ἔδωκεν ἄν, “if he had had anything, he would have 
given it thee.” 


The two clauses can however refer to different times; 6. g. é¢ ἐπείσθην, 
οὐχ ἂν ἠῤῥωώστουν “had I obeyed, I should not (now) be ill.’”—It is al- 
so a matter of course, that when a proposition not conditional would stand 
in the Perfect, it passes over as conditional into the Pluperfect, just as 
the Present into the Imperfect ; e.g. & γὰρ αὐτάρκη τὰ ψηρίαμδεα 
ἦν, οὐχ ἂν Φίλιππος τοσοῦτον ὑβρίκεξ χρόνον. 

When the apodosis (in 4) refers to the past, but at the same time 
expresses duration, it stands in the _linperfect with 6 ἄν. E. g. Herodot. 
VII. 139 χαὶ οὕτω ἂν ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ἡ “Ἑλλὰς ἐ ἐγίνετο ὑπὸ Πέρσῃσι. De- 
mosth. Mid. p. 523. Reisk. πάντ᾽ ἂν ἔλεγεν οὗτος τότε. 

11. All these cases are modified by being put in connexion witlr 
a Preterite, according to the principles above laid down, and by 
which they must be judged’; e.g. καὶ, εἴ re ἔχοι, ἐκέλευσε δοῦναι, 
“and, if one had any thing, he ordered him to give it up.” Here ἐκέ- 
Aevoe does not belong to the apodosis, but to the preceding context ; 


* See Hermann’s acute exhibition of this subject, ad Viger. n. 312. 


388 ὁ § 189. syNTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 


the Optative stands solely on account of the connexion with the Prete- 
rite (Ὁ γ πο. 2 above), and dovyae contains the apodosis; as if it stood 
καὶ ἐχέλευσε, EL TL ἔχου, δοῦναι. ! 

12. When the particles ἀπά ‘phrases to which ἄν is subjoined, are fol-. 

lowed by the Subjunctive of the Aorist, this constitutes a Preterite by sup- 
position or anticipation, and consequently, when the connexion refers to 
future time, it formsa Future Preterite, Lat. Futurum exactum. E. g. χρὴ 
δὲ ὅταν μὲν τίϑησϑε τοὺς νόμους, ὁποῖοί τινές εἶσι σκοπεῖν" ἐπειδὰν δὲ 
ϑῆσϑε, φυλάττειν καὶ χρῆσϑαι, “when however ye (shall) have once 
given them—;” ἐπειδὰν ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, “when ye shall 
have heard all, then judge ; αὕτη ἡ παρασκευὴ διαμεῖναι δυνήσεται, 
ἕως ἂν περιγενώμεϑα τῶν ἐχϑρῶν, i.e. “until we shall have van- 
quished the enemy ;” διαφϑερεῖ ὅ,τε ἂν λάβη. In this construction 
the sense of the Future lies in the whole connexion; and the Aorist has 
only its own peculiar sense of time past. 

13. The Optative with ἄν (no. 9.3 above) is only the apodosis of a 
supposition. This supposition however may Θ᾽ suppressed, and then | 
the Optative with ἂν can stand alone. It is therefore thus used, in 
every simple proposition which is to be expressed merely as posszble, 
and where in English we say can, could, might, would, should, etc. 
E. g. τὸ σωματοειδὲς ἔστιν οὗ τις ἂν ἅψαιτο, “ the corporeal is that 
which one can touch,” i.e. if he will; γένοιτο δ᾽ ἂν πᾶν ἔν τῷ μακρῷ 
χρόνῳ, “ all can happen in the course of time ; ἡδέως ἂν ϑεασαίμην 
ταῦτα, “gladly would I see this ;” ad’ οὖν, εἴποι tug ἄν, “ but then, 
might some one say—;” ἴοώς ἂν οὖν τινὲς ἐπιτιμήσειαν τοῖς εἰρημέ- 
γοὺς “perhaps some might censure what has been said.”—Hence it 
comes, further, that this mode of expression, in consequence of the tone 
of moderation peculiar to the Attics (ᾧ 1. π. 1), takes the place of 
certain and positive affirmations. E.g. οὐ γὰρ ἂν τάγε ἤδη γεγε- 
νημένα τῇ νυνὶ βοηϑείᾳ κωλῦσαι ᾿δυνηϑείημεν, “for that which has 
already taken place we cannot by any present assistance well hinder ;”’ 
οὐκ ἂν puyovg ‘thou wouldst not escape ;’ which mode of expression very 
commonly stands for the ordinary Future. So also λέγοις av for the 
Imperat. λέγε." 

14. The Greek language can further change every conditional or 
uncertain proposition, or every one which is so expressed, so far as the 
construction is concerned, either into the Infinitive or into the Participle, 
—only leaving the ἄν in its place. In this way the Greek has an advan- 
tage over every known language, viz. that of being able to give the 
force of an Optative or Subjunctive to both the Participle and the Infin- 
itive. E.g. οἴονταν ἀναμαχέσασϑαν av συμμάχους προσλαβόν- 


§ 139. synrax.—opTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 389 


vec “they suppose they would again be able to carry on the war, if they 
should obtain allies,” (from ᾿ἀναμαχέσαιντ᾽ ἄν, εἰ λαβοιεν); αἰ δλλὰ 
σιωπῶ, πόλλ᾽ ἂν ἔ χων εἰπεῖν, i.e. though I ould still say much. He- 
rod. VII. 1389 νῦν δὲ ᾿.2ϑηναίους av τις λ ἕγω ν (one who should say) 
σωτῆρας γενέσϑαν τῆς “Ελλάδος οὐχ av ἐξαμάρτοι. Plat. Crito 9 of 
ῥᾳδίως ἀποχτιννύντες καὶ ἀναβεωσκοόμενοί γ᾽ ἄν, εἰ οἵοίτ᾽ 
ἦσαν, “who lightly kill, and would also perhaps bring back again to 
life, if they could,” (from ἀνεβιεωσκοντ᾽., ἄν). In this way is often 
produced the sense of an Jnfin. and Part. Future ; e.g. Demosth: Phil. 
I. οὐκ ἔστιν ἕνα ἄνδρα ἂν δυνη Oval ποτε ἅπαντα ταῦτα πρᾶξαι, 
“it is not possible that one man should ever be able to accomplish all 
this,” where duyyj97vai ποτε without ἄν would have expressed a past. 
See also the example from Isocrates in § 144. 4. a.—After οἴεσϑαι, ἐλπί- 
ζειν, etc, this is the usual mode of expressing the Future. 


Nore 4. The position of ἄν depends wholly on euphony ; or perhaps 
also on the need of making the uncertainty expressed by it, éarlier or 
later perceptible. This must. be noted, in order that, with reference 
also to the connexion, we may readily refer ἄν to the word to which 
it belongs. E.g. Plat. Phaedo. 116 oiuas ἂν, ὡς ἐγὼ λέγω, ποιοῖς, where 
ay belongs to the Opt. TLOLOTS, thus : οἴομαι, ποιοῖς ἂν, ὡς ἐγὼ λέγω. 
So also in ἐδόκεν ἂν ἡμῖν ἡδέως πάντα διαπρᾶξαι, the ἄν belongs to the 
Infin. “it seemed to us that he would gladly execute all (διαπράξειεν. 
ἂν). Demosth. Olynth. I. 13 Τί οὖν ἄν τὶς εἴποι ταῦτα λέγεις ἡμῖν νῦν; 
for Τί ovy, εἴποι τις ἂν, ταῦτα J. - ἢ. γ, where consequently, if the strictly 
requisite comma stood after οὖν, the ἄν would appear to stand for ἐ ἐάν: 
which however cannot govern the Optative. Plat. Tim. p. 26. ὃ, οὐκ ἂν 
οἶδ᾽ εἰ ὃ υναίμην ἅπαντα ἐν μνήμῃ πάλιν λαβεῖν, “whether I could,” εὖ δυναΐ- 
μην ἄν, i.e. if I were to be asked. Demosth. 6. Aristocr. 680. 26 ἐ ἐκ τούτου΄ 
τοῦ ψηφίσματος κυρωϑέντος ὃ ἂν, εἶ μὴ δι᾿ ἡμᾶς, ἡδίκηντο οἵ βασιλεῖς, i i. 6. εἰ 
τὸ ψήφισμα ἐκυρώϑη (without 6 ἄν, comp. no. 10 above), οὗ βασιλεῖς ἡδίκηντ᾽ ἂν 
(would have been offended), εἰ μὴ δι᾿ ἡμᾶς (i.e. had it not been for us, 
see § 150).—In a sentence somewhat involved, ἄν is often found two or 
even three times repeated, without any further addition to the sense, 
than that the limitation of the proposition is rendered more perceptible, 
because several parts of the assertion are thus affected at the same time. 
See Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. 138. Herm, ad. Vig. num. 283. 


Nore 5. The particle ἄν often gives to the Indicative the sense of a 
customary action ; 6. g. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 301. Reisk. “no one of the 
earlier orators has acted in so many capacities at the same time, ἀλλ ὃ 
μὲν γράφων ovx ἂν ἐπρέσβευεν, ὃ δὲ πρεσβεύων ovx ἂν ἔγραφε “ whoever pro- 
~ posed. Jaws did not usually go as ambassador, and vice versa.”* 

Nore 6. A further and special use of the Optative, is when it stands 
in the protasis, instead of the Indicative of past time, to express 
something which took place repeatedly c or customarily. E. g. ovs μὲν ἔδοι 


Ἶ Comp. further Soph, Philoct. 290—92. ea Pax 640. 41. Xenoph. 
Anab. I. 5. 2. Schneid. . 
50 


390 § 139, SYNTAX.—OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 


+ 


εὐτάκτως καὶ σιωπῇ ἰόντας, προσελαύνων αὐτοῖς οἵτινες εἶεν ἠρώτα, καὶ ἐπεὶ 
πύϑιοιτο--ἐπήνει, “ whoever he saw,” i.e. so often as he saw any ; where 
then ἐπεὶ πύϑοιτο must necessarily follow i inthe Opt. Hom. I. 8, 198 ὃν δ΄ 
αὖ δήμου τ᾽ τ᾽ ἄνδρα ἴδοι,---βοόωντά τ΄ ἐφεύροι, * whatever man of the aes 
he saw,” i.e. so often as he saw, οἵο.---ἔπραττεν ὃ δόξειεν αὐτῷ. “he did that 
which ¢ in every case seemed to him right.” Xen. Cyrop. I. 4.3 ὅσα ἐπερωτῷτο, 
ταχὺ ἀπεκρίνατο, € whateyer he was asked, he answered always quickly ;” 
ὑπερῷον εἶχεν ὁπότ᾽ ἐν ἄστει διατρίβοι, “he had an upper chamber whenever 
he spent his time in the city” (Antiphon.) See also note 3 above. The 
uncertainty of the Optative serves, in such instances, merely to prevent 
them from being understood as referring to particular definite cases, 
For the same reason, when such a relation exists at the. present time, 
the Subjunctive is used in similar instances. See the parallel examples 
of both in Hermann ad_Vig. p. 900. , 


Nore 7. The Subjunctive stands alone and independent in Greek, only 
in the following circumstances: (1) In inciting phrases in the first person, as 
ἴωμεν let us go ; to which in the second and third persons the Opt. corre- 
sponds.’ Also in the Singular ; where however φέρε, well ! come on! yea: 
ally precedes it, as Eurip. Hippol. 865 φέρε---ἴδω “well then, let me see—.” 
(2) In questions expressing doubt, sometimes with and sometimes without a 
preceding βούλει or ϑέλεις, wilt thou? e.g ai οὖν σκοπῶμεν; “ wilt 
thou that we examine?” πόϑεν βούλει ἄρξωμαν; “where wilt thou 
that I begin?” Anacr, τί cor ϑέλεις ποιήσω; ; “what wilt thou that I do 
to thee °—zi ποιῶ; “ what can I do ?” mi, Ba ; mot τράπωμαι; “whither 
can I go? whither can I turn?” εἴπω οὖν σον τὸ αἴτιον ; “shall 1 then 
tell thee the cause?” Plat. Theaet. 17.---ῦν ἀκούσω αὖϑις---; ; “shall ἢ 
then again hear?” Luc. Dial. Mort. 30. 1—These examples may serve 
at the same time to put. the learner on his guard, not to confound the 
instances of the first person Subjunctive which occur, with the Future, to 
which such phrases certainly have a resemblance even in sense; for 
which reason the two tenses are sometimes found united, e. g. Eurip. 
Ion. 758 εὔτωμεν ἢ σιγῶμεν ; ἢ τὶ δράσομεν ;—In the second and third 
persons, instances like those above will not easily be found, except in 
some common phrases, as ποῖ τις ἔλϑη; ; “whither can one go: Ὁ» Demosth. 
Mid. 10. extr. ὃ τοιοῦτος πότερα μὴ δῷ δίκην ; “shall then such an one not 
be punished ?” 


Nore 8. In Homer there prevails a still closer relation .between the 
Subjunctive Aorist and the Future; so that in him the former stands en- 
tirely independent for the real Future; e. g. Il. α, 262 Ov γάρ πὼ τοίους 
ἔδον͵ ἀνέρας, οὐδὲ ὕδωμαι. In many such instances we can indeed 
᾿ regard this Subjunctive as a Future still expressing doubt (“I cannot well 
expect to see more”); and in this way the origin of such a usage can be 
accounted for. But in many passages this Subjunctive is found in the 
midst of the clearest Futures, e. g. Od. u, 383 δύσο μαι εἰς Aidao, καὶ 
ἐν νεκύεσσι φαείνω. So also with the shortening of the long vowel 
(§ 103. V. 15); whence arises sometimes a form coinciding with the Indic. 
Fut. and Present; e. g. Il. .9,'529—31 ἀλλ᾽ ἤτοι ἐπὶ vuxtl φυλάξομεν-τ, 
icin δὲ--ἐγεῖρομεν ὀξὺν “Aone..* 


* I would on this occasion express my assent to Hermann’s acute sugg estion, 
that the Future in the Greek verb comes from the Aorist, rather than vice versa ; 


1 


§ 140. synrax.—THE INFINITIVE. 391 


N OTE 9. Some other peculiarities of usage can here only be noted, in 
the following general remarks: 


1) That ἄν is very often omitted; by which means a mood sometimes 
falls into an unusual: construction; and especially the Optative 
comes to stand alone for the conditional Future, and the Imperfect 
for the supposed Present; see Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 37. Schafer 
Melet. p. 55. Index in Plat. Meno. ete. v.. ἄν. 


2) That in Homer and in the epic writers, the Subj. and Opt. are not 
definitely distinguished, but in several of the above constructions 
are confounded; e.g. the Subj. with ἄν stands instead of the Opt. 
with ἄν for the conditional and unconditional Future; Il. α, 184. 


Tue INFINITIVE. 


§ 140. General Construction. 


1. The Greek Infinitive is employed in all those cases where the In- 
finitive is used in Latin, or in English with or without the Particle to, 
and often also where we make use of the conjunction that ; consequent- 
ly after all verbs signifying to say, believe, promise, permit, entreat, etc. 

2. It often stands too where the Latins employ ad with the Gerund, 
or the Participle in dus, to mark an object or purpose,—and which in 
English is expressed by to, i.e. in order to. E.g. ἔδωκεν αὐτὸ δούλῳ 
goonoa “he gave it to a servant to carry;” ὁ dvOownos πέφυχε qe- 
λεῖν “man is born to love;” παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτῷν “1 present my- 
self to be questioned ;” ἵππον παρεῖχε τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἀναβῆναι"---ἦλϑον 
ἰδεῖν os. Xen. Anab. 9, 2. 3, ἐμοὲ ϑυομένῳ ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέα οὐκ 
évyiyvero ta ἱερά, ‘as I sacrificed in order to march against the king, 
the omens were not propitious to me,” i. e. as I performed the customa- 
ry sacrifice before a military expedition ; and further on, éévas δὲ παρὰ 
τοὺς Κύρου φίλους, πάνυ καλὰ ἡμῖν τὰ ἱερὰ ἦν, “but in order to 
march to the friends of Cyrus the omens were very propitious to us ;”’ 


and I find in the above-mentioned Homeric usage the obvious course of this tran- 
sition. Without doubt the common Greek Future is nothing more than the 
Subjunctive of the Aorist, which it so closely resembles in both forms. Out ΄ 
of the doubtful question, affirmation, or prediction, which is ever the most natural, 
arose by degrees a definite one ; on which occasion this Subjunctive passed over 
into the form of the Indicative. One further trace of this original identity, seems to 
me to be the double construction of the particles ὅπως and μη with the Subj. and 
with the Future. The Latin language algo gives support to this theory in the 
near correspondence of the Fut. of the third Goindg. with the Subjunctive. Still, 
these remarks do not stand in the way of the grammatical derivation of the Aorist 
from the Future; since this has in its favour a greater facility and symmetry ; 
and moreover, as we have already often remarked, all grammatical derivations 
are, in general, merely practical. 


392 ὃ 140. syNTAX.—THE INFINITIVE, 


taken from the common phrase, ἐχαλλέέρεν ταῦτα mOLElY, 6. g. Herod. 
VI. 76. 

3. Kindred to this, is the Infinitive which is put after an adjective (or 
substantive) to qualify it. E.g. ἐπιτήδειος ποιεῖν τι, skilful, dextrous 
to do any thing ; οὐ δεινός ἐστι λέγειν, ἀλλ᾽ sities ovyay, “he is not 
distinguished ἐπ Speanrn, but is unable ἐο be silent.” Eurip. δειναὶ yu- 
vaines εὑρίσκειν τέχνας “ women are very skilful to get up quarrels.” 
—Or the Infinitive is here of a Passive nature, although the Active 
form is more commonly used, as in English, while the Latins employ the 
Supine in wu. E.g. ῥᾷδιος νοῆσαι easy to observe; πόλις χαλεπὴ λα- 
Béiv'—ov ἀκούειν pleasant to hear, sauve,auditu; Hom. ϑαῦμα ἰδέ- 
σϑαιδ a wonder to behold, mirabile visu. Still inthis case the Inf. Pas- 
sive is not infrequent; 6. g. ϑηλυφανὴς ὀφϑῆναιν feminine to behold, 
i.e. of a feminine appearance. So in Horace niveus videri. 


4. When an Infinitive which thus serves to qualify the preceding dis- 
course, does not stand in a sufficiently obvious connexion with that 
which it qualifies, especially in consequence of other intervening words, 
it is commonly introduced by the particle wore, less frequently by ὡς, in 
English as, so as. This conjunction then, if the sentence be com- 
plete, refers back to a preceding demonstrative. E. g. ἦν δὲ πεπαιδευ-- 
μένος οὕτως, ὥστε πάνυ ῥᾳδίως ἔχειν ἀρκοῦντα, “he was 50 educa- 
ted as very easily to have what satisfied him ;” φιλοτιμότατος ἦν, ὥστε 
πᾶντα ὑπομεῖναν τοῦ ἐπαινεῖσθαι ἕνεκα, “he was exceedingly ambi- 
tious, so as to endure all things in order to be praised ;” vewregod εἶσιν 
ἢ ὥστε εἰδέναι οἵων πατέρων ἐστέρηνται “ they are too young to know 
of what fathers they are bereaved ;” wg μικρὸν μεγάλῳ εἰκάσαι (a pa-, 
renthesis) “* to compare small with great.” | 

5. The Infinitive is used further as a neuter substantive (§ 125. 8), 
like the Infinitive in English. ‘The Greeks however employ this form 
with far greater freedom than we; since they furnish not only single 
Infinitives but also long clauses with the Article, and-then employ them 
in all the constructions which occur with real substantives, in order 
to bring them into connexion with the rest of the discourse. E. g. 
τὸ φυλάξαι ταγαϑὰ τοῦ κτήσασϑαι χαλεπώτερον “ to keep 
wealth is more difficult than to gain it;” τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπίορκον καλεῖν 
τίνα ἄνευτοῦ τὰ πεπραγμένα δεικνὺν αἷς λοιδορία ἐστίν (De- 
mosth.) “to call any one a perjurer, without showing what he has done, 
is acalumny ;” τὸ λέγειν, ὡς δεῖ, μέγιστόν ἐστε σημεῖον τοῦ φρονεῖν 
εὖ'"--κτὸ πλουτεῖν ἐστὸν ἐν τῷ χρῆσϑαν μᾶλλον ἢ ἐν τῷ κεχκτῆσϑαι. 


* This Aor. Mid. is in-the epic usage simply Active ; gee § 135. n. 4. 


§ 141. synrax.—rue INFINITIVE. - 393 


In ‘his: manner the Greeks can employ a preposition, was eidharitine 
a conjunction would be necessary; e.g. 4Onva ἔῤῥιψε τοὺς αὐλοὺς 
διὰ τὸ τὴν ὄψιν αὐτῆς ποιεῖν ἄμορφον, “ Minerva threw the flute 
away, because it distorted her countenance.” 

- 6. Further, between the Infinitive and its article, other subordinate 
clauses can be inserted. E.g. τὸ δὲ, ὅσα γ᾽ ἡδέως ἡ ψυχὴ δέχεται, 
ταῦτα ἱκανῶς ἐκπονεῖν ἐδοκίμαξζε, “ but this he recommended, to 
work off properly whatever.nature gladly receives.’ 

Nore 1. The Infin. with the article in the Genitive, sometimes ex- 
presses a purpose, but commonly only in entire phrases. E.g. ov 
ἀπῆλϑε, τοῦ μὴ δοκεῖν ἀμελεῖν, 1. e. “in order not to have the appearance 


of being neglectful.” Here it is usual to assume an omission of ἕγεχα. 
See Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 30, and comp. § 182. 6. 1. 


_ Nore 2. The Infinitive of some short parenthetical phrases can be 
referred to the preceding constructions; e.g. ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν to speak 
briefly, i. 6. in short; comp. no. 2 above. So guot δοκεῖν means, as it seems 
to me, in my opinion, where the Infin. although without τό, takes the place - 
of an Accusative (comp. § 131. 6. and n. 6.) — So ἀχοῦσαι μὲν οὑτωσὶ, 
σταγκαλῶς ἔχει, “thus to hear, is most excellent.” All these phrases 
can more or less be introduced by ἐς, as ὥς ye οὑτωσὶ ἀκοῦσαι, etc. 


§141. Infinitive with its Subject. 


1. When the Infinitive has a subject of its own, the fundamental rule 
is, that the subject stands in the Accusative. Thus the Infin. with 
τὸ, 6.σ. TO ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους ὄντας οὐ ϑαυμαστόν, 
“ that men should err, is nothing wonderful ;” οὐδὲν ἐπράχϑη, διὰ τὸ 
ἐχεῖνον μὴ παρεῖναι, i.e. “ because that person was not present ;” 
οὐδέποτε ὀρϑῶς ἔχεν (see ὃ 150, ἔχειν) τὸ κακῶς πάσχοντα ἀμῦ- 
γεσϑαι ἀντιδρῶντα κακῶς “it is never right, that he who has suf- 
fered evil, should avenge himself by requiting evil.” 

2. In Greek, as in Latin, we find especially.what is called the con- 
struction of the 


Accusative with the Infinitive. 


This occurs when, after verbs on which another clause immediately 
depends,—especially after verbs with the general signification to say, be- 
lieve, etc.—the subject of the dependent clause is put in the Accusative, 
and then takes its own verb in the Infinitive. In such-cases in English 
we either imitate the Greek construction; or we put the subject in 
the Nominative and the verb in the Indicative, and then introduce the . 
dependent clause by the conjunction that: E. g. οἱ μυϑολόγοι φασὶ, 
τὸν Οὐρανὸν δυναστεῦσαν πρῶτον τοῦ παντὸς, “the mythologists 
say, that Uranus first ruled over the universe.” | 


394 ο § 142. synvrax.—rne INFINITIVE. 


3. Very frequently however the subject of the Infinitive is not ez- 
_ pressed, when it already stands in connexion with the preceding verb. 
This takes place not merely as in other languages ; (as in English with 
to; e.g. δέομαί σου παραμένειν “1 entreat thee to remain ;” ovver~ 
πεῖν ὁμολογῶ “1 confess to have assented ;’”’?) but generally speaking, 
almost always when the subject of the Infinitive is the same as that of 
the preceding clause. E. g. ἔφη σπουδάζειν ‘he said he was in haste ;” 
where even the Latins prefer to repeat the pronoun of the subject, diaz 
se festinare. 

Nore. In the use of the Infinitive for quoting the language of another, 
or in any other dependent discourse, the Greeks likewise go farther than 
the Latins in this respect, viz. that they more frequently employ this con- 
struction with the relatives and also in the protasis. E. g. Plat. Alcib. I. 
40 ἔφη παρελϑεῖν yoouy — ἣν καλεῖν τοὺς ἐπιχωρίους ξώνην — “he said 
he had: passed by a country which the inhabitants call the zone — πὰ 
Herodot. ὡς δὲ ἄρα μὲν προστῆναν τοῦτο, ἀναστενάξαντα ἐς τρὶς ὀνομά-- 
σαν ΣΌΛΩΝ, “as this presented itself to his mind, he groaned three times 
and pronounced the name of Solon.” — Plat. Phaedr. 84 συγεύχομαί σοι 
(Lentreat with thee), εὔπερ ἄμεινον Tadd ἡμῖν é iy ot, ταῦτα γίγνεσϑαι. 
-- Xenoph. Mem. 1. 1. 13, “Σωκράτης ἐθαύμασεν, εἶ μὴ φανερὸν αὐτοῖς 
ἐστιν, ὅτι ταῦτα ou δυνατόν ἐστιν ἀνϑρώποις εὑρεῖν " ἐπεὶ καὶ ποὺς μέ- 
γιστον φρονοῦντας ἐπὶ τῷ περὶ τούτων λέγειν ov ταὐτὰ δοξάζειν. 
Here the protasis with ἐπεί, since, is put last, as is common in such con- 
structions. ‘The apodosis lies in the whole of the preceding sentence. 
This the writer had delivered in his own person; the protasis he gives 
afterwards in the person of Socrates, and indicates this by the Infinitive of 
quotation. See also Plat. Alcib. 1. 55. not. 7. 


§ 142. Infinitive with Cases.—Attraction. 


1. When the subject of the Infinitive has other adjuncts, either attri- 
butes or predicates, in the form either of substantives or of adjectives, it 
follows of course, that where the Accusative of the subject is expressed, 
these adjuncts are also put in the Accusative. E.g. ᾧμην σὲ παρεῖ-- 
vol μόνον" ἅπαντες νομίζομεν, τὴν γῆν σφαῖραν εἶναι. 

2. But whenever the subject of the Infinitive is not expressed, there 


occurs a species of 
: Attraction 


which is peculiar to the Greek language, viz. these adjuncts are put not 
in the Accusative, but in the same case in which the implied subject 
of the Infin. is expressed in the preceding clause. Consequently, in 
the absence of the regular subject, they are in a certain measure at- 
tracted by the next preceding verb. ‘There are two modes of this at- 
traction : 

1) When the omitted subject of the Infinitive is at the same time the 


§ 142. synTAX.—THE INFINITIVE. 395 


ee 


subject (Nominative) of the preceding finite verb on which the 
Infin. depends, the adjuncts connected with the Infin. must in 
like manner stand in the Nominative. E. Ὁ. 


0 ᾿4λέξανδρος ἔφασκεν εἶναι Διὸς υἱός, 
Lat. dicebat sx esse Jovis filium. 'This holds true also when the 
᾿ subject is not expressed even with the first verb. E. g. 
ἔφασκες Elvar δεσπότης 
ἔπεισα αὐτοὺς, εἶναι θεὸς, “I persuaded them, that I was 
a god.” © 
ἐνομίζοντο οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ σωϑήσεσϑαν “they supposed, that 
they themselves would not be saved.” 
Il. 6, 101 εὔχεο ᾿“πόλλωνε, ῥέξειν ἑκατόμβην οἴχαδε νοστήσας, 
“γον to Apollo to bring him ἃ hecatomb, when thou shalt have re- 
turned home.” Here νοστήσας in connexion with ῥέξειν stands 
in the Nom. because of the pronoun ov implied in εὔχεο. 

2) When the omitted subject of the: Infin. stands with the preceding 
verb only as immediate or remote olyect, the adjuncts connected 
with the Infinitive must in like manner stand in that oblique case 
in which their subject thus stands as object. Thus in the Geni- 
tive : ; | 

ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ, εἶναι προϑύμου, “they besought him to be 
of good courage.” 
Or in the Dative. E.g. 
ἔξεστί μοι, γενέσϑαν εὐδαίμονι, ᾿ 
as also in Latin, licet illis esse beatis; ἀπεῖπεν αὐτοῖς ναύταις 
εἶναν ‘he forbade them to be sailors ; ταῖς πόλεσι τοῦτο μᾶλ- 
λον λυσιτελεῖ, ἢ δούλαις ὀφϑῆναν γιγνομέναις. ---- Or finally in 
~ the Accusative, where it again coincides with the rule. E. g. 
κελεύω σὲ εἶναι πρόϑυμον. 
See further on this Attraction § 151. 1. 


3. The same attraction takes place, when the clause with the In- 
finitive has the article τό before it. E.g. πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον ζῶσι 
διὰ τὸ φίλαυτοι εἶναι “they live only for profit, because they are 
selfish ;” AnuoodEevns σεμνύνεται τῷ γραφεὶς ἀποφυγεῖν, “ Demos- 
thenes is proud that being accused he was acquitted ;” ov yao éxngu- ἡ 
movrar ἐπὶ τῷ δοῦλοι, GAA ἐπὶ τῷ ὅμοιοι τοῖς λειπομένοις 
εἶναι (of colonists) “they are not sent out to be slaves, but to be the 
equals of those who remain at home ;” ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔστε τὸ ἐπιεικέσι 
καὶ φαύλοις eivav “ it depends on us to be respectable or worthless.” 
—.When on the other hand the subject of the Infinitive stands in 
the preceding clause as Accusative, the Infinitive has as usual its ad- 


‘ 


396 : δ 142. ΒΥΝΤΑΧ.- ΤΗΝ INFINITIVE. 


juncts in the Accusative. E.g. ἐπέδειξε rag πολιτείας προεχούσας 
τῷ δικαιοτέρας εἶναι, “he shewed that states were more power- 
ful than others by being more just.” 

4, In like manner in the construction with ὥστε, the Nominative 
stands with the Infinitive, when the preceding clause requires it. E. g. 
οὐδεὶς τηλιχοῦτος ἔστω παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, ὥστε τοὺς νόμους παραβὰς, 
μὴ δοῦναι δίκην, “let no one among you.be so powerful, that hav- 
ing transgressed the laws, he cannot be punished.” 


Nore 1. From the above illustrations it is sufficiently evident, that it 
is incorrect, in such phrases as ὕπέσχετο αὑτὸς ποιήσειν, to suppose the 
subject of the Infin. to be a Nominative. In all such cases, on the con- 

_trary,'the subject is not expressed with the: Infinitive ; but that which 
stands in the Nom. is only a qualification of the subject; as here αὐτός. 
The real subject is solely the omitted noun, and its place can only be sup- 
plied by a personal pronoun, which however is also omitted. 


Notre 9. When therefore a writer thinks proper to insert the personal 
pronoun, this is put of course in the Accusative, notwithstanding the cor- 
responding Nominative of the preceding verb; e.g. οἶμαι usr ληρεῖν μὲ, 
Plat. Charm. 45. (See Heind. ad Euthyd. 79.) This usage however is as 
rare in Greek, as it is common in Latin.—In general it is to be remarked, 
that what we have already said, or may hereafter say, of this attraction, as 
well as of the other peculiarities of the Greek language, is every,where 
subject to the requisitions of euphony, emphasis, and perspicuity. Thus 
for the sake of perspicuity, we sometimes find the Accusative inserted 
after a Genitive expressed, as in this sentence: δέομαν ὕμ ay, ἀκοῦσαι 
τῶν λεγομένων, ἐγθυμηϑέντας ott, Isocr. — Xen. Anab. 3. 2. A; 
ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς προφύλακας καταστήσαντας συγκαλεῖν τοὺς στρατιώτας. 
Xen. Mem. 1. 1. 9 ἔφη δεῖν, ἃ μὲν μαϑόντας ποιεῖν ἔδωκαν οἵ 
ϑεοὶ, μανϑάγνειν. Here with ἔδωκαν we must supply τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, but 
yet the Acc. μαϑόντας is not changed ; comp. however the similar clause 
from the same passage in § 144. n. 5, where ἀνϑρώποις is expressed, and 
the attraction is effected. 

Norte 3. On the other hand, the attraction is sometimes so strong, that 
the personal pronoun, when actually expressed with the Infinitive, stands 
in the Nominative. Yet I know no other example of this, than the case 
where two Infinitives with different subjects are dependent on the 

same verb, of which one only has the same subject with ihe first verb. 
Dem. Mid. 55. (p. 579. Reisk.) ἐμὲ οἴεσθ᾽ ὑμῖν εἰσοίσειν,  μ εἷς δὲ veust- 
oto; (here οἴεσϑε in construing must first be taken separately, and then 
it has the same subject with the second Infinitive ;) “do ye suppose, that 
Tam always to contribute, and ye always to consume: ?” and further on: 
γομίζεις---ἡμᾶς μὲν ἀποψηφιεῖσϑαι, σὺ δὲ ov παύσεσϑαι ;—Such examples 
belong strictly to the numerous instances in Attic writers, where an idiom 
of the language, in consequence of a seeming analogy, is carried much 
farther than its own nature properly admits. Comp. Schaef. ad Soph. 
Oed. R. 958. 

Nore 4. When after the verbs πιστεύειν τινί, πείϑεσϑαΐ τινι, a clause 
follows, whose subject is the object of those preceding verbs, this also is 


; 


/ 


ᾧ 149, SYNTAX.—CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE. 397 


put in the Infinitive, the pronoun αὐτός being omitted ; e. g. Plat. Charm. 
18 Ὁμήρῳ πιστεύεις καλῶς λέγειν. Phaedr. 124 μὴ rare buat αὐτοῖς, τέχνῃ 
γράφειν. Whatever belongs to the omitted subject, is also included in the 
attraction ; 6. g. Xen. Cyrop. III. 3. 24 οὐδ᾽ ἂν τούτοις ἐπίστευον ἐμμόνοις 
εἶναι. 

Nore ὅ. ἼΠ6 Infinitive stands sometimes entirely independent, to ex- 
press wish, entreaty, command, and then it is of the third person, viz. (1) With 
’ the subject in the Accus. 6. g. I. γ, 285 Τρῶας --ἀποδοῦναι “ then shall the 
Trojans—testore.” Hes. γυμγὸν σπείρειν, γυμνὸν δὲ βοωτεῖν, where the 
- indefinite 3 pers. (τὶς) must be assumed as the subject, although Virgil has 
translated the same expression in the second person, nudus ara, sere nu- 

dus. (2) As impersonal, 6. g. Herodot. V.105 ὦ Ζεῦ, éxyevéo Fou μοι ᾽49η- 
vaious τίσασϑαι, “let me be permitted.”—Still more frequently we find the 

Infinitive instead of the Imperative 

of the second person; and in this case the subject, when expressed, and. all 
that belongs to it, stands in the Nominative ; 6. g. 1]. 9, 692° Ala ot γ᾽ ody" 
᾿Αχιλῆϊ, ϑ' ἑ ων ἐπὶ νῆας ᾿Αχαίων, Εἰπ sty —. Plat. Soph. p. 218. a, ἂν δ᾽ 
ἄρα τι τῷ μήκεν πονῶν ἄχϑῃ, μὴ ἐμὲ αἰτιᾶσϑαν τούτων, “then accuse 
me not of these things.” It is usual to supply here δεῖ, μέμνησο, etc. but 
this is superfluous. See Dorv. Vann. p. 341. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 18. 
Matthiae’s Gram. § 544 sq. 

Notre 6. The Infinitive with and without τό sometimes serves as an 
exclamation of wonder or surprise ; 3 as σὲ ταῦτα δρᾶσαι, “thou to have 
done these things!” τὸ Jia νομίζειν, ovta tydixovtori, “thou, at thy years, 
believe on Jove!” Aristoph. Nub. 816. 


§ 143. Construction wit THE RELATIVE. 


1. The construction with the relatives ὅς, ὅσος, οἷος, etc. of which 
the construction with the participle is only an abridged form, is not al- 
ways employed by the Greeks merely to effect a connexion; but the 
relative sometimes implies also a cause, reason, occasion, motive, or some- 
thing else, which would Properly be ies aN by a conjunction. E. g. 
ϑαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως “ thou.behavest strangely, who 
givest us nothing,” i. 6. that or in that thou givest us nothing. Herodot. 
ai ᾿4ργεῖαν ἐμακάριζον τὴν μητέρα, οἵων τέκνων ἐκύρησε, i. 6. OTL TOL 
οὕτων τ. δ. ‘the women of Argos pronounced the mother fortunate, 
that she had obtained such children.” So particularly with the Subjunc- 
tive of the Future (as elsewhere ἕνα) in order to jeapreea a purpose or 
olyect of utility. ἘΝ. δ. ἡ ναῦς πρέσβεις ἄγει, οἵπερ τὰ σφέτερα 
φραάσωσιν -:-ὅπλα κτῶνται οἷς ἂμυνοῦνταυν τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας. 


Note 1. The use of the relative, where it stands, as in Latin, instead 
of the corresponding demonstrative, in connexion with what precedes, 
_is less frequent in Greek; and expresses perhaps always a shade of 
emotion, like the ov ἐμοὶ ὐκοῦοὶν αἰσχύνην τῇ πόλει περιάπτειν in Plat. 
Apol. p. 35. a. and in other examples adduced Hg. Matthiae § 477. On 
the other hand, such passages as Apollodor. I. 1. 3 Κρόνος πρώτην μὲν 

51 


΄ 


; : ς . 
398 § 149. synTAX.—CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE. 


“Eotioy κατέπιεν, εἶτα Δήμητραν καὶ Ἥραν, ped” ἃς Πλούτωνα καὶ Ποσειδὼῶ- 
γα, (ued? ἃς for καὶ μετὰ ταύτας, Where this form serves merely for a change 
in the ordinary simple connexion,) belong to the less pure period of the 
| language. —Somewhat different are such examples as τρία τάλαντα ἔδωκεν, 
ὕσαπερ ἤτησατο αὑτόν, Where we say, “as being what or so muchas he 
had demanded of him,” 
2. The nature of the construction with the relative properly requires, 
that with the first verb there should stand a noun (the antecedent), and 
with the second the corresponding relative, each in that case which 
its own clause demands. E. g. οὗτός ἔστεν 6 ἀνὴρ, ὃν εἶδες "-μετέδω- 
κεν ἡμῖν πάντων, ὅσα παρῆν "--αἰλον οὐκ ἔχω, ᾧτενν MLOTEVOUL ἂν 
| δυναίμην. Very frequently, however, the antecedent i 15 omitted in its 
own clause, and is then subjoined to the other clause and put in the 
same case with the relative; e.g. 
οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα Sie | et 
οὐκ ἔστιν, ἥντινα οὐκ ἦρξεν ἀρχήν, “ there is no-civil office, 
which he has not administered.” 
Not unfrequently also, for the sake of emphasis, the latter clause, so 
constituted, is placed first; 6. g. , 
Ov εἶδες ἄνδρα, οὗτός ἐστιν. 
3. Here in like manner there occurs an ~ 
Attraction 
similar to that in the construction with the Infinitive (ὃ 142.2). When » 
the relative, in respect to its own verb, would stand in the Accusative, 
but the antecedent stands in the Genitive or Dative, and has with it no 
demonstrative pronoun, (as οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος.) the relative is then attracted 
by the antecedent, and takes the same case, instead of the Accusative. 
E. g 
μεταδίδως αὐτῷ τοὺ σίτου, οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις, “thou sharest 
with him the food, which thou thyself hast ;” 
where οὗπερ, because of the Gen. σίτου to which it refers, stands also 
in the Genitive, instead of the Accus. ὅνπερ which the verb ἔχειν re- 
quires. So likewise 
εὖ προσφέρεται τοῖς φίλοις, οἷς ἔχει, “he meets with kindness 
the friends, which he has.” 
—Xen. Anab. 1.3. 16 τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν, ᾧ ἂν Κῦρος δῷ, for 
ὃν ἂν K. 0.—éxoarnos μεγάλων χρημάτων, ὧν 0 Τέλων ἐπετράπετο 
αὐτῷ. 80 when the requisite Accusative would strictly express only ἃ re- 
mote object; 6. g. Dem. Mid. 35 yas ὧν ἂν ἀδικηϑὴ τις λαμβάνειν, 
from the expression ἃ αδικοῦμαι, “in which I am offended.” 


Nore 2. The ear having once become accustomed to this construc- 
tion, it became usual, even where the corresponding demonstrative was 


§ 148. synTAX.—CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE. 5. 399 


expressed in the first clause, to let the relative still follow in the same 
case ; 6. g. Plat. Gorg. p. 452. a, οἵ δημιουργοὶ τούτων, ὧν ἐπήνεσεν ὃ τὸ 
σκολιὸν, ποιήσας. Xen. Occ. 2 ὕπό γε τούτων, ὧν σὺ δεσποινῶν καλεῖς, οὐ. 
κωλύομαι, This last is at the same time an example, where the Accu-. 
sative which is dependent on the second clause (δεσποίνας), is also drawn 
into the attraction. 

4. In case of attraction, the antecedent or noun of the first clause is 
frequently removed from that clause to the second in such a way, that, 
together with the relative, it remains in the case required by the word 
on which it depends : : 

μεταδίδως αὐτῷ, οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις σίτου" 
εὖ͵ προσφέρεται, οἷς ἔχει φίλοις" 
ἀπολαύω, ὧν ἔχω ἀγαϑὼν"---χρώμενοι οἷς εἶπον προστάταις, εὐδαίμο- 
veg ἦσαν (from yonodue προστάτῃ to have a director or superior), 
“having those superiors, whom I have mentioned, they were happy.”— 
It sounds still more strangely to us, when to all this is added the znver- 
sion of the clauses : | ae 
οἷς ἔχεν φίλοις εὖ προσφέρεται “the friends which he has, he 
meets with kindness.” : 


- 


5. When the antecedent would express no definite idea, or has been 
already once mentioned, it is often omitted ; and then the relative stands 
alone in a case not properly belonging to it; e.g. wed 

μεμνημένος ὧν ἔπραξε 
for μεμνημένος τῶν πραγμάτων, ὧν ἔπραξεν, and this for ἃ 
ἔπραξεν "---δεἰνοτερα ἐστιν, ἃ μέλλω λέγειν, ὧν εἴρηκα, for δεινότερα 
ἐκείνων, ἃ εἴρηκα" ---μετεπέμπετο ἄλλο στράτευμα πρὸς ᾧ πρόσϑεν 
εἶχε, for πρὸς τῷ στρατεύματι, O π. €.—And with the inversion: 
οἷς, ἔχω χρῶμαι 
for ἃ ἔχω, τούτοις χρῶμαι. 

6. In one instance the Nominative of the relative also suffers this at- 
traction ; viz. where in a complete sentence, the Nominative of the 
relative οἷος would stand with the verb εἶναι, as πάνυ ἡδέως χαρί- 
ζονται ἀνδρὶ τοιούτῳ, οἷος συ εἶ, “very gladly do they gratify such a 
man, as thou art.” Here not only the demonstrative, but also the verb 
εἶναι is omitted, and the relative οἷος is then so attracted by the prin- 


‘ 


* Itis usual to make this form of the sentence,as being the most complete, the ba- 
sis of the doctrine of attraction ; but improperly, at least according to my convic- 
tion, after having examined the whole subject; see ὃ 151. I. Only the omission 
of the demonstrative could cause the relative to be construed with (i.e. at- 
tracted to) the antecedent substantive, and thus the whole to be rounded off. 
But when the Attic writer or speaker, in using this mode of connexion now 
become familiar to him, for the sake of emphasis added further the demonstra- 
tive, it is easy to conceive, that he would not therefore be obliged necessarily to 
return again to the original mode of construction, i. e. without the attraction. 


400 § 144. synTAX.—cCONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 


cipal clause, that together with its adjuncts it assumes the case of its 
antecedent, and is even inserted before the same ; 6. g. πάνυ ἡδέως χαρί- 
Covrac οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρί. In such instances too the noun itself often falls 
away; 6. 5. χαλεπὸν 7 ἤρου, καὶ οἵῳ γε ἐμοὶ ἄπορον, “ what thou ask- 
est is difficult and not to be answered, at least by such an one ας I’’—The 
construction where the article of the omitted noun still remains before 
such relatives,—ro1¢ οἵοις 2juiv—we have already seen in § 125. n. 6. 

7. When a relative by means of verbs like to be, to name, to believe, 
etc. is followed by another noun in the same case, it usually conforms 
in gender and number to this noun, and not to its proper antecedent. 
E. g. πάρεστιν αὐτῷ φόβος, ἣν αἰδῶ καλοῦμεν “he is haunted by a 
timidity, which we call shame ;” Plat. Cratyl. 48 τὸν οὐρανὸν ove δὴ 
mohous καλοῦσιν. So also with the omission of 186 proper antecedent, 
e.g. εἰσὶν ἐν ἡμῖν, ag ἐλπίδας ὀνομάζομεν, “there are (τυρόν) 
in us, which we call hopes.” 


An instance where the relative governs two clauses, which strictly re- 
quire different cases, see below in § 151. II. 4. 


§ 144. Construction wits THE Particrpie. 


1. The Greeks have Partictples in most of the tenses, and avail 
‘themselves of them far more frequently than our modern languages. 
Hence they have the great advantage, that, by combining this construc- 
tion with thatof the relative and Infinitive, they can interweave several pro- 
‘positions or clauses in one sentence without confusion; e.g. ἐκεῖνα μόνον 
διεξήει, ἃ τοὺς ἰδόντας ἡγεῖτο τεϑνηκέναι, In this sentence & is the ob- 
ject of ἰδόντας, this again is the subject of τεϑνηκέναι, and this latter is 
dependent on ἡγεῖτο. Here we can only say, “ he related only those 
things, as to which he supposed those to be dead who had seen them.” 
Demosth. tyuare αὐτῷ οὐκ ἐλάσσονος ἢ ὅσον καταϑεὶς παύσεται τῆς 
ὕβρεως, “appoint him no milder punishment than such as shall cause 
him, having once suffered it, to desist from his pride.” 


2. Besides this, the Greeks can change into participles, not pails all 
verbs which are connected with others by means of the relatives, but 
also almost every verb which is introduced by the particles as, be- 
cause, according to, that, so that, etc. and whose subject has already 
been expressed in connexion with the preceding verb ; those particles be- 
ing then dropped, and the participle taking the case of its subject. In- 
deed, such achange usually takes place, whenever it can be introduced 
without affecting the perspicuity. E.g. éneoxewauny' τὸν ἑταῖρον 
νοσοῦντα, can mean, according as the context may determine, not only 


§ 144. synrax.—consTRucTION ΨΙΤῊ THE PaRTICIPLE. 40] 


“1 visited my friend who was ill,” but also “when he—, or because he was 
11;».--τῷ μεγάλῳ βασιλεῖ ov πάτριόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὸς ἀκροᾶσϑαι μὴ 
προσχυνήσαντος, ‘ the custom of the country forbids the Persian king to 
listen to a person who does not (or if he does not) prostrate himself,”— 
Xen. Mem. I. 4.8 τὸ σῶμα συνήρμοσταί σοι, μικρὸν pegos La Bov- 
tL ἕχαστου, “thy body is so composed, that thou hast received a little 
of every thing.” 

Nore 1. The participles which have thus arisen from the relations ac- 
cording as, in that, etc. are in translating (from the Greek as well as from 
the Latin) often to be placed before the verb which they accompany, and 
then connected with it by and. E.g. Demosth. οὕτω δεῖ τὰς γνώμας ἔχειν 
ὡς ἐὰν δέῃ, πλευστέον sig τὰς ναῦς αὑτοῖς ἐμβᾶσιν. Here, as usual, the 
personal Pron. ἡμῖν is omitted after πλευστέον ; for autor here means our- 
selves and belongs to the participle, and with this’ to the omitted ἡμῖν : 
“We must make up our minds, that if it should be necessary, we must 
ourselves embark and set sail.” In English the participle could indeed be 
retained, but not so well: “that we ourselves, having embarked, must set 


sail.” 

3. The Greeks employ the Participle of the Future especially to ex- 
press a purpose, where we employ a clause beginning with that, in or- 
der that, or the Infinitive with to, in order to. E.g. ταῦτα podwvo 
Kvoos ἔπεμψε τὸν Γωώβρυαν Enowouevov— “ peasy Ot learnt this, 
sent Gobryas to see, or that he might see—;” tov ἀδικοῦντα παρὰ 
τοὺς δικαστὰς ἄγειν δεῖ δίκην δώσοντα, in order that he may be pun- 
ished; Demosth. rove συμμάχους δεῖ σώζειν, nai τοὺς τοῦτο που- 
NOOVTAS στρατιώτας ἐχπέμπειν, where the article stands with an 
indefinite noun (ᾧ 124. n. 2. 1), “and to send out soldiers in order to 
accomplish this.” ᾿ 


4. Certain verbs, the most important of which appear in the examples 
below, govern or take with them in Greek a participle, where we em- 
ploy the simple conjunction that, with its clause. Here, as in the other 
participial constructions, such a participle, considered as a verb, either 
has the same subject with the preceding verb, and consequently stands 
in the Nominative; or it hasa different subject, which is connected 
with the preceding verb as an immediate or remote object, and then it 
stands with this in one of the oblique cases. 

a. Examples, of the Nominative ; where as usual the proper subject 
can be omitted: αἰσχύνομαι ταῦτα ποιῶν or ποιήσας, “1 am asHaMED that 
I do or have done this,” i. 6. of doing or of having done; on the contrary 
αἰσχύνομαι ποιεῖν means, “I am ashamed to do τὲ, and have therefore 
seruples still 3” μέμνησο ἄνϑρωπος WY, REMEMBER that thou art a man; ov 
συνίεσαν μάτην πονοῦντες, “they PERCEIVED not that they laboured in vain.” 
—Herodot. III. 1, διαβεβλημένος ov μανϑάνεις ; “KNowEsT thou not that 


492 δ 144. SYNTAX.—CONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE, 


tow art deceived 2” Demosth. Mid. 18. f, ἐν ἣ γὰρ αὐτὸς εὐδαίμων ἤδει 
γεγονὼς πολιτείᾳ---, “i in which state he was conscious of having become 
happy—, és (οἶδα γεγονώς I κνὸν that I have become) ; ;—Isocr. σχοπούμεγος 
εὕρισχον οὐδαμῶς ἂν ἄλλως τοῦτο διὰπ ραξἕ Os μενος, “on reflecting I 
Founp that [ could in no other way accomplish this” (comp. § 139. 14).— 
Hence also especially i in Passives arising out of the following construc- 
tion (b), ἐξελήλεγκταν ἡμᾶς ἀπατῶν “he is convicteD of deceiving us ;” ἀπ-- 
ηγγέλϑη ὃ Φίλιππος τὴν Ὄλυνθον πολιορκῶν, “ it was ANNOUNCED that Phil- 
ip was besieging Olynthus.” 

b. Examples of the Accusative : ot Πέρσαι δι ῥνημοῤεύνιμὲ τὸν Κῦρον 
ἔχοντα pvow— “the Persians RELATE that Cyrus had—, ” jit. “ they retain 
him i in memory as one who had ;” hence passively, 6 Κῦρος διαμνημονεύεται 
ἔχων, see the preceding construction (a) near the end;—oida σὺν οἵ -- 
σον τῷ τὰ βέλτιστα εἰπόντι “1 KNOW that it will be of advantage to him 
- who shall have given the best Leek. ” from the impersonal construction 

with συμφέρει ut “profits. 

Wes x Examples of the Genitive and Dative: ἠσϑόμην αὐτῶν οἰομένων 
εἶναι σοφωτάτων 7 ῬΕΒΟΕΙΨΕΡ that they thought themselves very wise,” 
(σοφωτάτων for -ovs, on account of the attraction, § 142, 2. 2); — οὐδέ-- 
MOTs μετεμέλησέ μοι σιγήσαντι, φϑεγξαμένῳ δὲ πολλάκις (from μεταμέλει 
μοι I repent) “1 have never REPENTED that I have been silent, but often 
that I have spoken,” (a sentinient of Simonides) ;— Plat. de Leg.-p. 857. 
ὃ, οὐδὲν διαφέρει τῷ κλέπτοντι, μέγα ἢ σμικρὸν ὕὑφελομένῳ “it 
MAKES NO DIFFERENCE to the thief (i. 6. in his punishment) that he has 
taken much or little ;’? where we could also translate “ whether he has 
taken much or little.” 


Note 2. In verbs which have with them a reflerive pronoun, e.g. 
σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ Tam conscious to myself, this participle can stand in either 
of the two cases connected with the verb: σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὧν 
- (Plat.) and σαυτῷ συνήδεις ἀδικοῦντι (Demosth.) — “Ξαυτὸν οὐδεὶς ὅμο-- 
λογεῖ κακοῦργος ὧν (Gnom. ) where it could also be χαχοῦργον ὄντα. 


Nore 3. There are still other verbs which, contrary to the usage of 
most other languages, take the dependent clause in the participial form 
in both the ways above mentioned (3 and 4). Particularly deserving of 
notice in this respect are those verbs, in which the Greek construction cor- 
responds entirely to the English, but i is most widely removed from that of 
other modern languages. ‘E. g. ἐπαύσατε αὑτὸν στρατηγοῦντα, lit. “ye 
have caused him to cease being general, ” i.e. “ye have dismissed mn 
from the office of general; ov λήξω χαίρων “I will not cease rejoicing.” 

Nore 4. The participles of those verbs which are followed by ἃ Nomina- 
tive, as εἶναι, καλεῖσϑ'αι, commonly change this Nominative into the case in 
which they themselves stand. E. g. ὑμῖν δὲ οὖσιν Adny alors ov 
πρέπει “but for you, being Athenians, it is not proper 3” ἐπορεύοντο διὰ 
τῶν Mehwopay oy καλουμένων, Θρᾳκῶν, where in the resolution of the 
Part. into the finite verb, Θρᾷκες is the subject of καλεῖσϑαι, “who are 
called Thracians.” 

Note 5. A more complex participial construction takes place, when 
such a compound clause or proposition depends, by means of the Infini- 
tive, upon a verb in such a way, that the participle suffers altraction. E. g. 


‘ 


§ 144. syNTAX.—CONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 403 


εἴρηται αὑτοῖς ἀπαντᾷν ἐνθάδε βουλευσομένοις “it has been notified to 
them to come together here in order to hold a consultation,” Aristoph. 
Lys. 13. Here the Part. stands with the Infin. ἀπαντᾷν in the Dative 
because of αὐτοῖς, instead of the Accusative ; while ἀπαντῶσι βουλευσόμενοι 
is to be explained by Text 3 above. Xen. Mem. I. 1. 9 (comp. ὃ 142. n. 2) 
ἃ τοῖς ἀνθρώπρις ἔδωκαν ob sot μαϑοῦσι διακρίνειν “what the gods 
have permitted to men to decide by their own learning.” Here μαϑοῦσι 
does not belong immediately to ἀνϑρώποις, but to ἀνα τρια though it 
stands in the Dative on account of ἀγϑρώποις. 


Nore 6. Sometimes for the sake of emphasis, when the participle is 
placed before the other verb on which it depends, the particle ovtw¢, or 
ἔπειτ @, or also 8 iT Of is inserted between the two. E.g. ἐχρὴν αὑτὸν, 
τὰ ὄντα ἀναλίσκοντα, ὥσπερ ἐγὼ, οὕτω μὲ ἀφαιρεῖσϑαι τὴν γίχην, “it 
was necessary for him, in that he expended what he had, like myself, so 
(i. e. through this expenditure) to deprive me of the vietory,” Dem. Mid. 
20. ὃ. — oray of ἄνϑρωποι εὐεργετεῖσϑοαι πρός τινος ἡγησάμενοι, ἔπειτα 
τοῦτον ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχωσιν ἐπαινοῦντες, “when men, supposing themselves 


to have received benefits from any one, then (i.e. in consequence of this 


their belief) have him always on their tongue _ with praises, ” Xen. Hier. 
VIL. 9; — ov δυνάμενοι εὑρεῖν τὰς ὁδοὺς, εἶτα πλαγώμενου ἀπώλοντο, 
“ not being able to find the way, they thus perished i in wandering about,” 
Xen. Anab. 1. 2.25. — For the particles ἔπειτα and εἶτα in this and 
other constructions, see further § 149. 


Nore 7. In all participial constructions, there strictly lies at the basis 
a relation of time ; 1. 6. the action of the participle, in whatever connexion 
it may stand with that of the other verb, is almost always to be regarded 
either as antecedent, contemporary, or future, in respect to that other; 
and is put accordingly in the requisite tense. But in viewing this relation, 
a mode of conception is often possible, different from that which is familiar 
to ourselves; and hence it happens that we often find in writers the Part. 
Aor. where we should expect the Part. Pres. and vice versa. E. g. in the 
Homeric Ὡς εἰπὼν ὦτρυνε μένος καὶ ϑυμὸν ἑχάστου, we should expect the 
Present λέγων ; for ΙΝ THAT he so speaks, By his discourse, the leader en- 


_courages his troops ; but he must also aLREaDyY have said something per- 


suasive, when they become moved. So also in Xen. Mem. III. 6. 2, 
τοιάδε λέξας κατέσχεν αὑτόν. --- But the Part. Pres. can stand when both 
actions are conceived of as continued or constantly repeated ; e. g. Xen. 
Mem. I. 2. 61 (of Socrates) βελτίους γὰρ ποιῶν τοὺς συγγιγνομένους 
ἀπέπεμπεν. Here Ποιήσας would refer only ἴο ἃ single instance ; but the 
meaning is, “he made (customarily, every time) those who came to him 
better, and then sent-them away.”— The Part. Pres. stands also for many 
actions which are necessarily connected with, or presupposed by, the follow- 
‘ing one, and must almost be conceived of as one with them, as to go, run, 
lead, bring, ete. E. 8. 0 txad ἰὼν Mvouidorecow ἄνασσε (Il. α, 179) “go home 
and rule — ;” στῆ δὲ ϑέων (Il. e, 707) “running he placed himself — ;” 
ἔγχος ἕστησε φέρων πρὸς χίονα (Od. a, 127) “ “ bearing the spear away 
he placed it by the column ;” καί μὲ καϑίζει ἄγων (Plat. Charm. 2) “he 
leads and seats me—;” Herodot. VIII. 118, τοὺς δὲ προσκυγέοντας 
ἐχπηδέειν ----, because the genuflexion is conceived of as inseparable from 
the act of quitting the royal person. — Other instances nevertheless are 


404. § 145. synrAx.—CASE ABSOLUTE. 


~ 


real deviations from any logical relation of time; and arose, perhaps, 
from negligence, or partly also from some necessity ; 6. g. στρατηγήσας, 
ἄρξας ἐποίει, i.e. AS commander, as archon, while on the contrary the Part. ' 
Pres. would here denote the proper action of the verb. Other examples ' 
are left to observation. See further especially the examples of the not 
infrequent anomaly of a contemporary Part. Aor. subjoined to an Aorist, in 
Herm. ad Viger. not. 224, and also p. 343. See too λαγνϑάγειν in the fol- 
lowing note. : 


Note 8. The Greeks sometimes put as a participle that which, ac- 
cording to the sense, would be the principal verb, and then make this de- — 
pend on another verb, which in this way supplies’the place ‘of an adverb ; 
see Gregor. Cor. in Att. § 36. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 86. Such subordi- 
nate verbs are the following : 


τυγχάνει», and in the poets κυρεῖν, happen, come to pass: ὡς δὲ ἢλ- 
Soy, ἔτυχεν ἀπιών, “as I came, he was by chance going pa ἊΝ 


λανϑάνειν be hid, concealed: ταῦτα ποιήσας ἔλαϑεν ὑπεκφυγών, “having 
done this he fled secr etly, unpercewved, ” Or the reference may be to 
the subject itself: τὸν φογέα Loy Sever βόσκων “he Hour uncon- 
sciously his murderer ;” ἔλαϑε πεσών “ he fell unawares,” which 
phrase belongs to the anomaly mentioned in the preceding note, 
because the Part. stands in the Aorist, while the verb itself is also an 
Aorist. So also λάϑε βιώσας “live unnoticed.” 

φϑάνειν anticipate, come before: ἔφϑην ἀφελών “1 took it away just 
before.” See further among the phrases in ὃ 150. ‘ 


διατελεῖν continue: διατελεῖ παρών, “he is continually present.” So 
᾿ διάγειν and διαγίγνεσϑαι. 


χαΐρειν rejoice: χαίρουσιν ἐπαινοῦντες “ they gladly praise.” 
Compare the similar instance of ἐθέλω with an Infin. § 150. 


§ 145. Case Asso.ure. 


1. In the constructions described in the preceding section, the par- 
ticiple is everywhere dependent on some noun as its subject, which is 
connected with the principal verb; and it therefore stands in the same 
case with that noun. If now some other person or thing is intro- 
duced as a new subject, this is put with the participle in a case inde- 
pendent of the principal verb. This is called the Case Absolute. 

2. The Genitive is more commonly employed in this construction, 
and these ‘ 

Genitives Absolute 
are precisely the same as the Latin Ablativi consequentiae. 'Their ori- 
ginal signification refers to time; since (by § 182. 6, 4) the Genitive 
serves to mark a period of time, As then νυχτὸς means by night, at 
the time of night; so ἐμοῦ καϑεύδοντος ταῦτα ἐγένετο means “ at the 
time when I slept, this took place ;” πάντων οὖν σιωπώντων εἶπε; τοια- 
δὲ" ---μετὼ ταῦτα κυμαίνοντος ἤδη τοῦ Πελοποννησιακοῦ oh 


§ 145. synTAX.—CASE ABSOLUTE. 405 


ἔπεισε τὸν δῆμον, Κερκυραίοις ἀποστεῖλαν Bon evav.—When this 
period of time is definitely marked by some historical person, the prepo- 
sition ἐπί is often put before these Genitives ; e. g. én’ Kugov βασιλεύ- 
οντος, Cyro regnante, 1N the reign of Cyrus. Hence generally, when 
_ this case absolute actually refers to time, it is usual-to regard ἐπί as 
omitted ; see note 2 below. 

3. But this construction is extended still further, and serves to ex- 
press many other relations or connexions, such as wé express in English 
by if, when, since, because, in that, etc. or by our Nominative absolute. 
E. g. ἐπικειμένων δὲ τῶν πολεμίων τῇ πόλει λιμὸς ἥπτετο τῶν Po 
μαίων “the enemy ‘pressing, or As the enemy pressed the siege of the city, 
famine attacked the Romans ;” τεϑνηκότος τοῦ βασιλέως τῷ υἱῷ av- 
τοῦ ἐνέτυχε “the king being dead he addressed himself to his son ;” 
ϑεοῦ διδόντος, οὐδὲν ἰσχύει φϑόνος, “ when a god grants favours, envy 
is powerless ; τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων, βέλτιον ἔσταν περεμένεεν “these 
_ things being so, it is better to wait.” nih | 

4, When the subject is obvious from the context, the participle can 
stand alone in the Genitive.. E.g. παρόντα τὸν ἡγεμόνα ἠδοῦντο, 
ἀπόντος δὲ ἠσέλγαινον, where αὐτοῦ is omitted before ἀπόντος, 
“but he being absent—.” So likewise verbs used impersonally, i. 8. 
without a subject expressed, pass over in this construction into a simple 
participle standing as a case absolute ; for which see more particularly 
notes 6 and 7 below. : 
5. The Dative absolute is used: (1) In specifications of time; e.g. 
Xen. Hist. Gr. 3. 2. 18 megevovre τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ πάλιν φαίνουσι φρουρὰν 
ἐπὶ τὴν Haw “the year drawing to a close, they again announced an 
expedition against Elis.’ (2) In a mode of construction arising out of 
the Dat. Instrumenti; e. g: Xen. Agesil. I. 2 ἔτε καὶ νῦν τοῖς προγό- 
νοις ὀνομαζομένοις ἀπομνημονεύεται ὁποστὸς ap “Πρακλέους ἐγένετο 
“by naming his ancestors.” . 

6. Finally we may bring under this head those Datives, which, arising 
out of the Dat. Commodi, are dependent on the verb εἶναι or γίγνεσϑαι. 
E. g. in such phrases as εἴ σὸν ἡδομένῳ ἐστί “if it be to thy satisfac- 
tion ; εἴ oo βουλομένῳ ἐστί, “if it he with thy consent ;” and some 
other similar instances ; see note 3 below. 

Nore 1. A case absolute in the strict sense of the word, can only be 
the Nominative absolute ; for since the Nominative, in respect to the verb, 
can be only subject or predicate, it follows, that when a Nominative, in 
‘respect to the verb with which it stands, ‘is neither of these, it must stand 
for itself alone, or absolutely. This however can take place only by an 


interruption of the sense ; and all Nominatives absolute therefore belong 
more or less to the Anacolutha, § 151. 1I. But there is ‘no fixed 
52 


406 § 145. sYNTAX.—CASE ABSOLUTE. ’ 


general usage in regard to them ; and the particular examples are suscep- 
tible of easy explanation, E. δ: Xen. Hell. II. 3, 54 ἐκεῖνον δὲ (οὗ ἕνδε- 
καὶ εἰσελϑόντες σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις, ἡγουμένου αὑτῶν Σατύρου" εἶπεν ὃ 
ἹΚριτίας----, where this construction is preferred, on account of the Genitive 
which immediately follows. ΤῸ poetry especially such constructions im- 
part a peculiar charm, as the expression of unrestrained and vigorous 
nature ; so the Homeric ὃ ὃ δ᾽ ἀγλαΐηφι πεποιϑὼς ἹῬίμφα & γοῦνα φέρει μετά 
τ΄ ἤϑεα καὶ νομὸν ἵππων. 


Nore 2, The three other cases can never in this sense become cases 
absolute, In all the above instances they are rather, strictly considered, 
only remoter objects and relations of the verb_ with which they staid: 
We have already seen (§,130. ἡ. 1), that the oblique cases,’ in certain con- 
nexions, stand alone instead of a preposition with its case ; not because 
the preposition is actually omitted, but because the form or ending of the 
case itself expresses the idea or relation of such a preposition. Thus the 
Greeks say γυχτός, ἡμέρας, where in English we can only say by night, by 
day. Now such Genitives as Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, ἐμοῦ παρόντος, stand 
in just the same connexion. But as other designations of time passed 
over to the expression of casual and other relations, so likewise these 
Genitives have thus passed over; and therefore stand for all the relations 
expressed in English by as, since, mn that, while (because), etc. — parti- 
eles which in like manner all strictly designate time. It was therefore 

very natural, in certain instances where the relation of time was to be 
made specially perceptible, to adjoin the preposition ἐπέ by way of distinc- 

tion from these tropical constructions ; as ἐπὶ K. βασιλεύοντος. 

Nore 3. But that which is common to all the preceding constructions, , 
is, that. the participle is not merely an adjunct qualifying the idea of 
the substantive, but is itself an essential constituent part of the thought ; 
and the verb in this form, in connexion with its subject, expresses a collec- 
tive total idea, which we therefore in English express by the abstract of the 
verb: ‘during Cyrus’s reign, ‘in my presence.’ Here then belong also 
all the above Datives, which if one will not call them cases absolute, yet 
in this essential point coincide with those Genitives, ete. Thus τοῦτό ἐστί 
gov ἡδομένῳ does not mean, “this is for thee being pleased or when thou 
art pleased,” but “this serves for thy pleasure ;” so also περιιόντι ἐνιαυτῷ is 
not “in the year when it was about to close,” but “ atthe close of the year.” 


Nore 4. Sometimes an adjunct or supplementary qualification is ex- 
pressed by means of an Accusative or Nominative absolute. FE. g. Herod. 
11. 41 τοὺς βοῦς ϑάπτουσι, τὰ κέρατα ὑπερέχοντα (with) the horns projecting ’ 
ib. 138 i ἵγα of (to him) δυώδεχα ἕτεα ἀντὶ EE ἐτέων γένηται, Ob γύκτες ἡμέραι 
ποιεύμεναι, “the nights being made days.” ‘The comparison of such in- 
stances shews, that there is here a partial apposition ; for ἡμέραι stands in 
the Nom. on account of γένηται, and κέρατα is to be regarded as Accusa- 
tive because of ϑάπτουσι. 


Nore 5. When we assign or suggest some reason in the mind of an- 
other person why he does any thing, it is usually done by means of the 
conjunction ὡς because, or ὥσπερ as if, and an Accusative or Genitive abso- 
lute. In order to seize the full sense ‘of this concise mode of expres- 
sion, we must in translation insert some clause; e.g. ἐσιώπα, ὡς 


ΟΝ 146. synrax.—apverss. 407 


πάντας εἰδότας OF πάντων εἰδότων, “Πρ was silent, because ia he supposed) 
all knew, ete, aT πατέρες εἴργουσι τοὺς isis ἀπὸ τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνϑρώπων, 
ὡς τὴν τούτων ὁμιλίαν διάλυσιν ὀὖσαν ἀρετῆς “fathers restrain their sons 
from bad men, because (as they are convinced) their intercourse is the 
destruction of virtue ;” ἐπικελεύει μουσικὴν ποιεῖν, ὡς φιλοσοφίας μεγίστης 
οὔσης μουσικῆς, Plat. Phaed.—tay ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν, ὥσπερ ἐκ τούτων οὗ 
γιγνομένους φίλους “as if from these there were wont to be no friends,” 
Xen. Mem. II. 3. 3. 


Nore 6. Every impersonal verb, properly so called, i.e. one which 
has only an indefinite subject unexpressed (ὃ 129. 8, 9), passes over, as,a 
case absolute, into the Genitive Sing. of the participle. E. g. σαλπίζοντος 
“the trumpeter sounding ;” ὕοντος πολλῷ (from Ve πολλῷ sc. ὄμβρῳ) “ it 
raming heavily,” Xen. 


Nore 7. Those impersonals or impersonal constructions, where in 
strictness the clause dependent on the verb, (commonly an Infinitive or 
clause with ὅτι, ete.) is the real subject of the verb (δ 129. 10), are treated 
as cases absolute in two different ways: 

1) When the mere relation of time is to be expressed, the Genitive 
is employed. This occurs chiefly with the Passives of verbs signifying to 
say, announce, etc. and then it is usually the Genitive Plural, where τῶνδε 
from τάδε can be mentally supplied. E. g. ὃ Περικλῆς ᾧχετο ἐπὶ Καύνου, 
ἐσαγγελϑέντων, ὃ ὅτι Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπιπλέουσιν, “it having been announ- 
ced,” from ἐσηγγέλϑη, Thue. I. 116. 

2) In all other connexions the Accusative Neuter is employed. E. g. 
εἰρημένον αὑτοῖς παρεῖναι, οὐχ ἥκουσι “ἐξ having been notified (εἴρηται) to 
them to be present, they yet do not come. ” And this occurs with all 
Inpersonals ; 3 e.g. διὰ τί μένεις, ἐξὸν ἀπιέναι; “ wherefore dost thou 
remain, ,it being permitted thee to depart 2?” (ἔξεστι») 5 ἄπειμι πάλιν, 
ἐχείνῳ δοκοῦν (sc. ἐμὲ ἀπιέναι) “I will go away again, since he thinks it 
proper” (δοκεῖ). Plat. Phaedr. 23 δὲς καὶ τρὶς TO αὑτὰ εἴρηκεν, ὡς Ov 
πάνυ εὐπορῶν --- ---, ἢ ἴσως οὐδὲν αὐτῷ μέλον τοῦ τοιούτου. Hence ἢ 
comes, that the participle τυχόν, (from 2 ἔτυχεν it happened) stands as an 
adverb, lit. as it happened, i.e. by chance, incidentally, and hence also 
perhaps.—Even the adjective Suvatoy,” the Part. ὃν being omitted, is 
thus found, Plat. Rep. 7. p. 519. d, ποιήσομεν χεῖρον ζῆν, δυνατὸν αὑτοῖς 
ἄμεινον (sc. tiv) “we shall make them live worse, ἐξ being possible for 
them to live better.”. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. not. 214, : 


THE Stade 


§ 146. Apverss, ETC. 


1. Some Adverbs, like the adjectives to which they correspond, take 
the noun to which they ey refer, in some particular case. 
E. g. ἀξίως ἡμῶν πολεμήσομεν, “ we will make war in a manner wor- 
thy of ourselves (ὃ 132. 5.2). So also the Comparatives and Superla- 
tives of adverbs: μάλιστα πάντων most of all; οἱ πένητες τῶν εὐδαι- 
μόνων μᾶλλον δύνανταν ἐσϑίειν te καὶ καϑεύδειν, i.e. better than the 
rich. See ὃ 182. ὅ, 4. 


΄ 


408 § 146. synTAX.—ADVERBS. P 


2. In like manner all Prepositions are properly adverbs ; which how- 
ever always refer to some noun or other (while ordinary adverbs do so 
only occasionally) ; and which, without any emphasis of their own, 
express merely a certain relation. Hence there are cértain particles, 
which are sometimes merely adverbs, and sometimes real prepositions. 
E. g. ὁμοῦ and ἅμα as adverbs both mean together ; but they very often 
(like the kindred preposition σύν) govern a Dative, and then mean 

together with. Others, especially adverbs of place and of time, govern 
the Genitive: ἐγγύς near, ἐγγύς τινὸς near to; χωρίς apart, χωρίς 
τινὸς apart from, without ; δίχα twofold, divided, diya τινός divided 
from, i.e. without ; εὐθύ straight forwards, directly, εὐθύ τινος di- 
rectly towards, obviam (δ 117. 1), etc.—The word ὡς constitutes two 
different particles, according as it is employed, either (1) as an Adverb of 
time and Conjunction, with the signification as, that, etc. for which see 
δ149 ; or (2) as a Preposition with the signification to, in answer to 
the question whither ? and always referring to persons ;* e. g. εἰσῆλθεν 
ὡς ἐμέ “he entered to me;” ἀνήχϑησαν οἷς τὸν βασιλέα “ they jour- 
neyed to the king.” Ἶ 

9. Other adverbs refer directly to verbs or to whole clauses, and in 
this way serve to connect together two clauses. So especially the rela- 
tive adverbs; e.g. παρέσομαν ὁπότε κελεύσεις “1 will -be present 
whenever you shall order.” This is the origin of Conjunctions ; and in 
strictness all such connecting particles should be so called. Especially, 
where they have an influence upon the verb, (like prepositions upon 
nouns,) and cause it to stand in one of the dependent moods, according 
to the circumstances. Thus ἄχρι or μέχρι, ἕως and ἔστε, (in both the 
significations until and so long as,) when the thing is uncertain, govern 
the Subjunctive or Optative; but when certain, the Indicative; e. g. 
περιμενῶ, EWS ἂν or μέχρις. ἂν ἔλϑη “till he comes ; ποίησον τοῦτο 
ξως ἔτι ἔξεστι “do this so long as it is yet allowable;” αἵ τοιαῦται 
“δέσποιναν οὔποτε λήγουσιν αἰκιζόμεναν τὰς ψυχὰς ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἄρχωσιν 
αὐτῶν, Xen. Occ. 1. extr. 

Nore 1. “Ayou and μέχρι signify properly continuedly ; in connexion 
with verbs they mean so long as, until, usque dum; in connexion with 
the Genitive they mean continuedly until, or simply until, unto, usque ad. 
- Πλήν means except, and can be connected with clauses, 6. g. πλὴν εἰ ex- 


cept if, except that—; but also with the Genitive, e-g. πλὴν πάνυ ὀλίγων 
except a very few. 


* The instances where we'does not refer to persons, when such passages occur 
in good writers, are, as has been shewn by modern criticism, most probably cor- 
rupt; and instead of it, δἰς should everywhere be read. Bat this οἷς must not in 
any case be separated from the strictly primitive prepositions treated of in the next 
section; especially too because no verbs are ever compounded with it; see 


§ 115.2. 


δ 147. syNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS. 409 


Nore 2. According to what is said above, strictly speaking, we must 
distinguish as Adverbs simply those particles which most commonly stand 
alone and express no relation; as Prepositions, those which commonly 
govern a case; and as Conjunetions; those which serve to connect whole 
clauses with one another. Real prepositions; governing the Genitive, are 
therefore, 6. g. ἄνευ and ἄτερ, without, ἐνώπιον before (in later writers), and 
χάριν on account of, etc. This last, like the Latin gratia, almost always 
stands after its Genitive; as does also commonly é ἕνεχα. It is true that 
χάριν is strictly a substantive,* as is also δίκην in the manner of, like, instar, 
6. g. δίκην ποταμῶν, etc. but such words are not so much adverbial sub-— 
stantives, as they are substantives which at once become prepositions. All 
those just named never occur without a case. They may therefore 
be called prepositions with more propriety, than some of those which are 
exclusively so ‘called, but’ which nevertheless are sometimes used with- 
out a case, and therefore adverbially. ὁ 147. n. 8, 

4. Some adverbs serve at the same time as adjectives E. g. πλησί- 
ov ἐστί, σῖγα ἐστι, “ he is near, he is still; Hom. ἀκὴν ἐγένοντο “they _ 
were silent.” That the particles, by prefixing the article, become adjec- 


tives and substantives, has already been remarked in ᾧ 125. 6, 7. 


§ 147. Prepositions. 


1. Besides the prepositions’mentioned in the preceding section, the 
following are the ordinary primitive prepositions (§ 115.2) with their 
cases, expressing originally the most pple and general relations of 
place : 

ἀντί, ao, ἐξ (éx), πρό, govern the Genitive ; ; 

ἕν, σύν, the Dative ; 

ἀνά, εἰς, t the Accusative ; 

διά, κατώ, ὑπέρ, the Genitive and Accusative ; ; 

ἀμφί, ἐπί, μετὰ, Maga, περί, πρός, ὑπὸ, the Genitive, Dative and 

Accusative. : 

2. Those which govern more than one case, with the Accusative refer 
mostly to the question whither; and with the Dative to where. The 
Genitive adapts itself to most of the significations of the different ~prep- 
ositions, yet principally coincides with the idea of separation, removal, 
—i.e. of, from, out of, etc. 

Note 1. Of the above prepositions the simplest and easiest in respect 
to their significations are the following: 

᾿ ἀπὸ from ἐξ out of 
εἰς to, into, in answer to whither ? 
ἐν in, in answer to where ? 
πρὸ before σὺν with. 


* Hence the ‘poets, instead of ἐμοῦ, σοῦ χάριν, say also ἐμυὴν, σὴν χάρεν, on my, 
thine account. 


t For the Prep. ws, see ὃ 146. 2. 


* 


410 § 147. synrAx.—PREPosITIONS. 


or idihiopish they servealso to express various secondary relations yet these 
are all of them easily developed from the radical idea ; some peculiarities 
excepted, which will be readily learned by further study and practice. 
Thus e. Ε.: when ἐκ refers to the cause and is to be translated on account of, 
as ἐχ τούτου on this account, therefore ; ; or when it implies simply succession 
of time, 6. g. γῦν γελῶμεν ἐκ τῶν πρόσϑεν δακρύων. Further when εἷς, like 
‘the Lat. in, has the sense of against, or when it expresses ἃ simple refer- 

ence, im respect to, 6. 5. τῶν εἰς πόλεμον ἐπιστήμων ἐστίν. Or finally, when 
πρό | takes the meaning of the Lat. pro, and of our for, in behalf of; (but only 
in the sense of protection or advantage), θ. δ. διακινδυνεύειν πρὸ τοῦ βασι-- 
λέως. Xen. Cyrop. 4. 5. 44, Οὐκ ἀρκχέσω πράττων πρὸ ὑμῶν, ὅ,τι ἂν δέῃ “1 
shall not be able to do for you (for your benefit) that which i is necessary.” 
Comp. προύργου ᾧ 115. τ. 5.—A special signification of εἰς see in note 5. 


Nore 2. The significations of the following prepositions should also 
be familiarly impressed upon the memory. 

ἀνα means originally on, upon, (comp. ἄνω and the compounds.) 
and in this signification governs also the Dative in the poets, Tl. α, 15. 
Od. 1, 128. But the most usual signification i in prose is in, on, through, 
spoken of a center. space or time. Ἐ, 8: ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν “throughout 
the whole land ; >a φήμη ἦλϑεν ἀνὰ τὴν πόλιν “the report went ANE 
the city it οὗ ἀνὰ τὸ πεδίον “ those scattered about in or on the plain ;” 
ἄνα πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν “through the whole day.” In this last _ Phrase it 
is to be observed, that when the article does not stand with ἡμέρα ete. 
and consequently πᾶς is equivalent to ἕκαστος (§ 127. 6), the expression . 
refers to a plurality of days, Years, etc. as ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day, 
daily, Cyrop. 1, 2.8; ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος every year, yearly, Herodot. V. 114. 


ἀντί asa simple preposition, has lost its original signification, against, 
contrary to, (for the compounds see note 9 below,) and signifies most 
commonly sustead of; for, in the relations of change, aire rennet’, 
value, ete. 


᾿ διὰ τοῦ through, spoken of space and of the means ; — διὰ tov 
on account of, e.g. διὰ AaxsSaovious ἐ ἔφυγον “they were banished on 
account of the Lacedemonians ;” διὰ σὲ ἡλϑὸν “1 am come on ‘thine ac- 
count ;” — but also through, denoting the en e.g. διὰ τοὺς ϑεοὺς εὖ 
πράττω ff through the gods I am prosperous.” 


μετὰ τὸν, after, post ; ---- μετὰ τοῦ, with; --μετὰ τῷ only in 
the ‘Poets, emneons, inter. 

ἀμφὶ tov and περὲ τόν, about, around, in answer to both the ques- 
tions whither and where ; for ‘the Dative in answer to where, is less frequent 
with these prepositions. From this signification comes the idea of inde- 
terminate nearness. E.g. ἀμφὶ τὰ don ἐγένετο “he was about the moun- 
tains,” i. e. in the vicinity of them. Hence also the idea ἀμφὶ or περΐ τι 
or τιγὰ ἔχειν ΟΥ̓ εἶναι, ἰο be about any person or thing, i. e. to belong to, 
be: occupied with, etc. (See § 150 under ἔχειν.) ---- περὲ τῷ with the 
idea of care, anxiety about any thing, Js subjoined to verbs signifying to 
Sear, have’ confidence, strive, etc. — ἀμφὶ tov and περὶ τοῦ signify of, con- 
cerning, de, e.g. to speak oF any thing ; ; further φοβεῖσϑαι, φιλονεικεῖν 
περ τιγος, and the like. Still &ugé is less frequent in this sense than περί. 


ὑπὲρ τὸν over, supra, ultra, in answer to whither ; Herod. IV. 188, 


» 


ΝᾺ, 


§ 149, SYNTAX.—PREPOSITIONS. 41 


διπτέουσι ὑπὲρ τὸν δόμον, over the house. — ὑπὲρ τοῦ over, αϑουε,ῖπ an- 
swer to where. But this last takes also the idea of for, in behalf of, instead 
of, chiefly’ in the sense of protection, care, etc. E.g. πράττειν, εἰπεῖν ὑπὲρ͵ 
τοῦ κοινοῦ “to act or speak for the commonwéalth, defend it,” ete. ἄπο-- 
ϑανεῖν ὑπὲρ tov φίλου “to die for or instead of one’s friend.” 


; 


Nore 3. That the Genitive prefers the idea of going forth, departure, 
separation, (δ 182. 2,) is particularly evident in these three prepositions — 
παρά, πρός, ὑπό. "These retain with the Accus. and Dative their peculiar 
significations ; but with the Genitive they are all most commonly to be 
translated bY from, of. In respect to these the following is to be observed : 


παρὰ tov, to, towards; but in answer to the question where, only 
by, by the side of. Besides this it has the signification of the Lat. _ praeter, 
i.e. besides, above (more than), against; e. 8. ἔχειν ὄψον παρὰ τὸν ἄρτον 
“besides bread to have vegetables ” ἐπόνει παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους “he 
labours more than others;” ταῦτα ἐστι παρὰ τοὺς τῶν ϑεῶν ϑεσμούς 
“that is against the divine laws ;” παρὰ δόξαν contrary to expectation, 
praeter opinionem. — παρὰ τῷ means solely by, by the side of. — παρὰ 
τοῦ means of, from, by, after ‘the ideas to come, bring’, receive, learn, ete. 
‘and sometimes also after the Passive (§ 134. 3). 


πρὸς to, at, by, has the Accus. more in reference to the question 
whither, and the Dative more in reference to where; πρὸς τόν means be- 
sides this, towards, in reference to a disposition of mind as friendly or un-, 
friendly, etc. — πρὸς τοῦ, of, from, by, on the part of, after the ideas to 
hear, recewe praise or censure, and often also after the Passive (δ 134. 3). 
It is moreover the usual form of swearing, like our by, 6. 5. πρὸς τῶν 
| Seay by the gods. 


ὑπὸ τὸν under, in answer both to whither ἘΣ to where; —vn0 τῷ 
under, in answer to where ; — ὑπὸ τοῦ of,.from, by, most commonly ‘after 
Passives (§ 184. 2); but also after Actives which have a Passive sense, 
as πάσχειν itself; likewise ϑανεῖν ὕπό τινος “to be killed by any one ;” 
a ὑπ' ἀνάγκης τ ἴο be taught by necessity. ” Demosth. Cherson. p. 94 
ν δ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶν πγευμάτων μὴ ὃ υγώμεϑα, i.e. hindered by the winds. » 
Even actions, can in this way assume a , passive shape ; 6. 5. ἐποίησε τοῦτο 
ὑπὸ δέους “ from or out of fear ;” tx ἀρετῆς ποιεῖν τι, “from a principle 
of virtue,” Herodot. VIII. 1; or when the passive relation of their object 
is particularly prominent | to ‘the mind, e. g. Soph. Philoct. 1117, ov σέγε 
δόλος ἔσχε ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἐμᾶς, the same with σύγε ἐσχέϑης δόλῳ. — With 
the Genitive also ὕπό sometimes retains its primitive signification under, 
e.g. ὑπὸ ποδῶν Plat. Protag. p. 321. ὁ. 


Note 4. The prepositions éxi and κατά require the most attention ; 
but still observation and practice must do the greater part. In ‘respect 
to these, however, the following remarks may afford the learner some aid. 


ἐπὶ has certainly as its fundamental signification the idea on, upon; 
most commonly in answer to where, with the Genitive, sometimes also 
with the Dative, e. g. ἐφ᾽ ἵππου ὀχεῖσϑαι and Κῦρος. ἐφ ἵππῳ ἐπορεύετο : : 
and in answer to whither, with the Accusative, e. δ. ἐπὲ λόφον τινὰ καταφεύ-- 
ye “he takes refuge upon a hill,” i.e, flies to it. But atthe same time ἐπέ 
is employed more generally, | pai stands for at or in; and in answer 
to the question whither, also for to, towards, for; and this wherever 


si Νὴ § 147. sywTAx.—PREPosITIONS. 


the context renders obyions the more exact sense of these expres- 


sions; With the Accusative it stands especially for the definite direction 


upon or towards any thing. Examples of all these significations will readily 
be found in reading. Weremark only further, that with the Genitive it like- 
wise stands in answer to the question whither, i in the sense of fo, towards, for, 
etc. 8. g. ἐπορεύοντο ἐπὶ Σάρδεων" -- ἀνήγοντο (μον set sail) ἐπὶ τῆς 
Χίου" — ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπὶ οἴχου. --- Further, ἐπὶ τοῦ often specifies a 
time by means of something contemporary, especially persons ; 6. δ. ἐφ᾽ 
ἡμῶν in our time (comp. δ᾽ 145, 2); éxi τῶν ἡμετέρων προγόνων. --- The 
Dat. ἐπὶ τῷ ἴῃ a local sense expresses particularly the idea of close by, 
e.g. ἐπὶ τῇ τάφρῳ on the margin of the trench ; πύργους ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ 
φκοδόμει. δ expresses also, like πρός, the idea in addition to, besides ; 
e.g. ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις πληγὰς ἐνέτεινε “μοι. Very often it marks the 
olject and condition of an action, 6. g. παρασχευάζεσϑαι ἐπί tit “ to pre- 
pare for something ;” ἐπὶ ἐπαίνῳ πάντα πόνον ὑπεδύετο * — ἐπὶ τούτοις 
εἰρήνην ἐποιήσαντο “on these conditions they made peace,” comp. 3 150 
& ᾧ. Finally ἐπὶ τῷ expresses also power, in such phrases as ἐφ ἡμῖν 
ἐστι “it is in our power ;” see examples in ὃ 129. 1. § 142. 3. — So too the 
Accus. ἐπὶ τὸν often expresses the object of an action, but most commonly 
with the following difference : ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τούτῳ (Dat.) i. 8. in order to effect 
it, ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τοῦτο (Acc.) i. 6. in order to fetch it. 


κατά. The fundamental signification of this preposition, as appears from 
the comparison of κάτω and the compounds, i is down from, followed by the 
Genitive. E. g. κατὰ τῶν πετρῶν, ῥίπτειν tive “to cast one down Jrom the 
rocks 5” ἥλλοντο: κατὰ τοῦ τείχους ;—also under, in such connexions as ἀφα- 
vit aes κατὰ τῆς ϑαλάσσης “ to disappear under the waters,” Herod. VII. 
6. More frequently nevertheless κατὰ tov occurs in the signification to- 
wards, e.g. for or against, chiefly in relation to language, thoughts, ete. 
6. g. εἰπεῖν τὸ ἀληϑὲς κατά τινος “ to speak the truth against any one ;” less 
frequently of praise, 6. g. ἔπαινος κατὰ τοῦ ovov, Plato Phaedr. p. 260. ὃ. 

κατὰ tov in a local sense expresses in the most general manner the 
being at or in some place, where the more definite significations (whether 


above, below, within, upon, ete.) either are not meant to be or cannot: be- 


given, or are understood of themselves ; ; 9. δ. κατὰ γῆν: καὶ κατὰ ϑάλατταν 
“by land and by sea ;” οἵ κατὰ τὴν clas ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ovtec “those in Asia 
who are under the king. ” Hence generally it expresses every relation of 
place, time, and circumstances, which naturally arises out of the ideas 
themselves : 6. 5. οἰκοῦσι κατὰ κώμας “they live in villages, vicatim ;” ἐσχή- 
vouy. κατὰ τάξεις i they encamped in ranks ;” hence κατὰ δύο two by two; 
ταῦτα μὲν ἐγένετο κατὰ τὴν. γόσον “this took place during the disease ;” 
κατὰ ταύτην τὴν διαφορὰν ovtay «Δακεδαιμονίων πρὸς AInvaiovs “the Lace- 
demonians being engaged in this quarrel with the Athenians ;” αἱ κατὰ τὸ 
σῶμα ἡδοναὶ “the physical pleasures ;” κατὰ πάντα sexpivownes “they are 
wearied in every limb ;” and in like manner a multitude of other relations, 
which practice will easily teach. Very commonly it corresponds to the 
Lat. secundum, according to, 6. g. κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν λόγον ὦ ἄμεινόν ἐστιν ὧδε 
“according to this representation it is better so;” χατὰ Πλάτωνα “according 
to Plato,” i.e, as Plato Says 5 κατὰ τὴν ἰὐϑυξον “according to the plumb- 
line; ποιήσω κατὰ τὰ TOU βασιλέως γράμματα enh shall act according to the 
letters of the king ;” δέομαν αὐτοῦ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον “1 have need of him 
in every way.” 


͵ 


, 


§ 147. synTAX.-—PREPOSITIONS. 413 


Nore 5. The Prep. εἰς referring to persons means to, but always with 
the accessory idea of their dwelling ; 6. g. Hom. εἷς ᾿᾿γαμέμνονα “to Aga- 
memnon,” i. e. into his tent; καλέει τέ μὲν εἰς ἕ ExuoTOS “each invites him 
to himself,” i.e. to his own dwelling ; Lys. εἰσελϑὼν εἰς τὸν πατέρα τὸν ἐμόν 
“entering the house to my father.” But εἰς with the elliptic Genitive 
(§ 132. n. 9) is more general, “ into the house of Alcibiades,” etc. 


Nore 6. The Dorics employ the Prep. ἐν instead of εἷς, with the Ac- 
cusative ; Pind. Pyth. 2, 21. 5,50. See Greg. Cor. Dor. 159 with the 
notes.— Ano apparently for é éy seé below in § 151. i. ὃ; 


Nore 7. That the prepositions are sometimes separated from their 
cases by some intervening word or words, we shall see in § 151. III. 1, 6. 
—Sometimes also the object of the preposition is apparently wanting, viz. 
when its place is _Supplied by a relative clause. E. g. Soph. Philoct. 469 
σρὸς πατρὸς, πρὸς εἴ τί oot ἐστιν φίλον, Where εἴ τι stands for ὅ,τι (δ 149, 
under εἰ), and consequently the proper Genitive of πρός (παντός) is want- 
ing; “by thy father (I conjure thee), by—if™ anything i is dear to thee,” 1. 9. 
by all that is dear to thee. 


Note 8. Sometimes however the object of the preposition is really 
not expressed, because it would only be an unpleasant repetition of a 
word already once given. In such instances most languages employ an 
adverb, (e. g. thereby, therefor, therein, etc.) and when the prepositions them- 
selves are so used, they stand adverbially. In Greek this commonly takes 
place in prose only With πρός ; e.g. καὶ πρός, πρὸς ᾿δέ, and thereto, and further, 
besides, moreover, etc. In Tonic and later writers we find too μετά thus 
used ; as μετὰ δέ, but afterwards.—The poets say also παρά, therewith, there- 

‘by ; ἕν, therein, etc. and the Prep. περί (or πέρι) in the epic writers takes as 
an adverb the signification very, especially. § 117. n. 3. 


Nore’9. In this manner have arisen all] the instances of composition with 
prepositions. ‘They all consist of the radical word with a preposition taken 
adverbially ; as διαβαίνω “1 go throughout, etc. § 121. 2. The signification of 
such compounds is in general easily deduced from the particular sense of 
each preposition. We only remark here in confirmation of the above, 
that the compounds with ἀντὶ commonly receive the signification over 
against, contrary to ; θ. δ. ἀντιτάττειν to-place over against ; ἀντιλέγειν to 
contradict ; those with ἀνά, up; and those with zara, down; 6. g. ἀναβαΐνειν, 
ραν ΠΕ νὴ to go up, to go down.—In respect to secondary significations, 
or those compounds whose sense is not obvious from the simple preposi- 
tions, we note here the following: 


ἄμφι-- with the idea of two sides; 6. g. ἀμφίβολος ambiguous. 

ἀνα-- often means back, e. g. ἀναπλεῖν to sail back. 

δια-- takes the sense of the Lat. and Eng. dis-, in two, 6. g. διασπᾷν to 
pull in two, in pieces ; διαζευγνύναι disjungere, to disjoin, to separate. 

éy— often stands in answer to the question whither, e. g. ἐγχεῖν to pour 
into. 


κατα-- most commonly expresses the idea of completion ; 6. 5. κατα- 
᾿ πράττειν perficere, to finish ; στρέφειν turn, καταστρέφειν turn around ; 
πιμπράγαν burn, καταπιμπράναν. burn up.—Hence arises then the 
idea to make an end of, destroy, e. δ. κατακυβεύειν τὴν οὐσίαν ἰο 


414 § 147. syNTax.—PREPOSITIONS. 


gamble away one’s fortune.—In both instances it corresponds to the 
. Latin per- and to the Germ. ver-. 

μετα-- takes the sense of transposition, change, Lat. trans-; 6. g. μετα- ~ 
βιβάζειν to carry to another place, transport ; μετανοεῖν to change 
one’s mind. 

παρα-- ἴὰ some compounds derives from the sense praeter, that of to 
miss, fail φῇ, ete.ue, σ. παραβαίνειν to miss or mistake (purposely} 
the laws, i.e. transgress ; παρορὰν not to see perfectly, overlook ; 
παράσπονδος truce-breaker, from σπονδαΐ, 


Nore 10. From the circumstance that the prepositions, as above men- 
tioned, are in composition to be regarded strictly as adverbs, the poets are 
able so frequently to separate the preposition from its verb by means of oth- 
er intervening words, This is called Tmesis. E. g. διά τε ῥήξασϑαι ἐπάλ- 

ἕξεις for καὶ διαῤῥήξασϑαι ; also i ἴῃ the Ionic prose, especially by means of 
ay for οὖν ; e.g. Herodot. Π..39 ἀπ᾽ ὧν orto for ἀπέδοντο οὖν. Homer 
separates the preposition entirely from the verb, and even places it after 
the verb; so that the preposition sometimes comes to stand before a case — 
which is not dependent on it. E. 8: πόλεμον περὶ τόνδε φυγόντες, for περι- 
φυγόντες τύνδε τὸν πόλεμον" —éx ϑυμὸν ἑλέσϑαι for é ἐξ ξἐλέσϑαι ϑυμόν" -- κατὰ 
βοῦς “Ὑπερίονος ᾿Ηελίοιο Ἤσ DF ιο»ν"----ὀνάριζον ἀπ᾽ ἔντεα (more accurately 
ἄπο § 117. n.3) for ἀπενάριζον é EVTEO, etc.—The perusal of Homer therefore 
is very much facilitated, by assuming that he has properly no compound 
verbs, but merely simple verbs with adverbial prepositions standing either 
near or remote from, before or after, the verbs. Hence comes the usage 
in Tonic prose, that in those emphatic repetitions to be mentioned in 
§ 149 under μέν, instead of the compound verb, the preposition only is 
repeated ; e. g. Herodot. IIL. 126 ὃ δὲ κατὰ μὲν ἔκτεινε MitooBatea—, κατὰ 
δὲ toy ἹΠιτροβάτεω mutdc.—Even in Attic prose we must refer to the same 
usage the insertion of the qualifying ti, somewhat, between an adjective and 
the preposition ὑπό (sub, a little), which ‘serves to diminish the signification 
of the adjective; e.g. ὕπό τι ἀσεβὲς somewhat impious, ὕπό τι ἄτοπον, etc. 
Heind. ad Plat. Phaedr. 43. 

Nore 11. But in ordinary prose, likewise, there are some prepositions, ἡ 
which, though standing in compounds, are still to be regarded asseparate. So 
especially πρός ἀπ σύν. Every verb, whetheralready compound or not, could 
always be again compounded by the Greeks, chiefly with one of these two” 
prepositions, merely in order to shew that the thing took place besides or 
in addition to something else (πρός), or in connexion with some other per- 
son (σύν τινι). E. g. συστρατεύομαΐ cov “I make a campaign with thee ;” 
συγεξαιρεῖ avtois Σελλασίαν “he assists. them to conquer Sellasia,” Xen. 
Hell. VII. 4.12; ἀλλὰ καὶ προσδιέβαλέ μὲ “ but also in addition to this he 
has caluraniated me.” More rarely we find other prepositions used in 
the same manner. Εις. ἐμμελετᾷν, éyyuuvaler das, “to exer- 
cise one’s self in any thing,” Plat. Phaedr. 5.—0 Φειδίας εἰργάσατο thy Adn- 
vay ἐνεργολαβεῖν καὶ ἐγεπιορκεῖν ΖΦημοσϑένεν “ Phidias has sculptured his 
Athena for Demosthenes, in order that the latter may have his , profit by 
her and perjure himself by her,’ A®schines c. Ctes. So also awomo- 
λὲεμεῖν, a compound which probably occurs nowhere else, means in 
Plato, on occasion of mentioning a horse, (Phaedr. p. 260. b,) io fight from 
sc. the horse, i.e. on horseback ; so ἃ πο ζῇ» to live from (see § 150 under 


~ 


* 


§ 148. syNTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 415 


ὅσον»). Further, προαναρπάξειυν Demosth. Mid. 35; προοφεΐλειν, προα- 
δικεῖν, ibid. 23.—All other compounds with prepositions and other classes 
of words, were employed for the most part only so far as the usage of 
language had rendered them fixed, or when some special necessity requir- 
ed a new compound to express some particular sense. 

Nore 12. Not only in the compounds just mentioned, but in many 
others, the preposition, in certain constructions, still governs its own separate 
case; 6. g. ἐνεῖναἷ τινι to be 1n something, ἀφεστάναι τινός to be distant FRom 
something, ἀπεπήδησαν Σωκράτους they sprang away rrom Socrates, ete. 
Elsewhere, in the full construction, the preposition is usually repeated be- 
fore the case. This occurs more frequently in Homer, and confirms the 
remark made above, that in him every compound must be regarded as 
separate ; since in him the prepositions sometimes, as we have seen, remain 
in compounds what they really are, adverbs ; and sometimes become actual 
prepositions: Il. ψ, 121 ἔχδεον ἡμιόνων “they boutid (the wood) so, that it 
hung from the mules.” ; 

‘Nore 13. That the prepositions with a change of accent sometimes 
stand after their cases by anastrophe, and sometimes also for their com- 
pounds with εἶναι, has been mentioned in ὁ 117.3. With this is to be 
connected the like transposition of monosyllabic prepositions, as ξξ § 13. 4. 


᾿Αρτέμιδι, ξύν, Hom. 


§ 148. Partic.tes or NEGATION. 


1. The Greeks have two simple negative particles, οὐκ and μή, from 
which all more definite negative words are formed by composition. 
Every proposition, in which one or more of these definite negatives 
occur, is for the most part rendered negative in precisely the same 
manner, as if the simple negative with which it is compounded stood 
alone in the proposition. Consequently, all that we may here say of ov, 
holds good also for οὐδέ, οὐδείς, οὐδαμῶς, etc. and the same is also 
true in regard to μή, μηδείς, ete. , 

2. But between ov and μή, and their respective compounds, there 
is an entire difference of usage, running through the whole language ; 
to comprehend which fully a course of accurate study is necessary, for 
which we can here give only an outline of the general principles.* 


* It is particularly recommended to compare here the views of Hermann, 
which he has so acutely developed, ad Viger. num. 267. He there lays down 
the principle, that οὐκ always denies the thing itself, and 7 only the idea of the 
thing ; or that ov denies objectively and ux subjectively. Lacknowledge, that by 
assuming this theory, we can bring under it most of the actual appearances ; and 
at all events nothing is more useful or more strengthening for the critical judg- 
ment and tact, than to follow out such a philosophical principle with all possible 
impartiality, or even to take some pains in order to find it confirmed. With all this 
however, I cannot deny, that I have not yet been able so to reduce under this 
theory all which occurs, that I could not in the same manner have brought un- 
der it much which does not occur. It will easily be seen on comparison, that I 
have made use of Hermann’s views. A better principle of unity than his, 1 


416 : ᾧ 148. syNTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES, 


a. Οὖκ is the direct and full negation, which expresses the negative 
judgment independently and absolutely; e.g. οὐκ ἐθέλω, οὐ φιλῶ, “1 
will not, I love not ;” οὐκ ἀγαϑόν ἐστιν, οὐδεὶς παρῆν, etc., Such a com- 
plete and direct proposition can never be denied by μή, μηδείς, ete. — 
But a proposition with ov can also be uncertain, e. g. οὐκ ἂν βουλοίμην, 
I should not wish; or it can also directly interrogate, e.g. τὲ γὰρ ov πά-- 
geott ; why then is he not here? 


b. My on the other hand is everywhere only a dependent negative. 
Hence it stands in all propositions, which represent the negation not as a 
fact, but as something dependent on the idea or thoughts of some subject. 
Thus it is, first of all, the necessary particle in all negative conditions and 
suppositions, 6. 5. ov λήψομαι, εἰ μὴ σὺ κελεύεις᾽ ---- εἴ τι τῶν τότε νῦν μὴ 
ἀξιόχρεων δοκεῖ εἶναι, ἐῶμεν “if any of those former things appear now not 
to be important, we will let them go.” Here μή always stands with εἰ if, 
ἐάν, ἢν, ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, ἕως ἄν, etc. because all these serve to express ἃ 
thing not as fact, but as supposition ; and it stands also with ὅτε, ὅπότε, 
etc. so often as these are in the same circumstances. On the other hand, 
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, since, inasmuch as, have.ov, because these always refer to 
actual facts; e.g. Il. p, 95 μή us κχτεῖν, ἐπεὶ οὐ χ ὅμογάστριος “Extogos 
etyu.* : 

c. ‘To that which exists only in idea belongs also purpose ; and hence 
μή stands in like manner everywhere with the particles iva, ws, ὅπως, ὥστε, 


could not give; but yet I did not wish to bring under a theory by force, that 
which according to my conviction could not come under it without force. Let 
my theory therefore stand as it may, by the side of his; or let it be thrown into 
the shade. 


* There occur some passages, where δἰ is construed with ov. Such of these 
as are found in epic writers, e.g. Il. 0. 162. Od. β, 274, I would not by any 
explanation endeavour to refer to the common usage; because in my opinion 
they are sufficiently accounted for by the remark, that at that period the more 
particular grammatical rules were not settled with perfect consistency. The 
case is different with the examples in Attic writers. Hermann (ad Vig. not. 309. 
and p. 890. and ad Eurip. Med. p- 344, 361) considers them as sufficiently ex- 
plained by the remark, that in such cases ov does not stand for itself separately, 
but forms with the following word one idea. I acknowledge this in such pas- 
sages as Soph. Ajax 1131, Ev τοὺς ϑανόντας οὐκ ἐᾷς ϑάπτειν παρών, 1. 6. 
forbiddest. Lysias in Argoratum p. 135,27, Εἰ μὲν οὐ πολλοὶ ἦσαν καϑ' 
ἕκαστον ἂν περὶ αὐτῶν ἠκδύετε, ‘ if there were few ;” where also belongs the οὐκ 
εἶναι in the comic-philosophic passage in Athen. 3. p. 99. a. ButI regard 
this explanation as admissible only in instances, where the use of the negative 
for the opposite idea is as well established by usage as in the foregoing examples; 
so that ov may be considered as forming a sort of compound with the following 
word. In ov gnut,; ov φάσκειν, this seems to have become an established rule ; so 
that even ἐών is used in connexion with them; see below in §148. n. 2. In oth- 
er cases we must seek in the context some perceptible ground for the choice of” 
the unconditional ov instead of μή. Thus in the example from Andocides de 
Mysteriis p. 5, εἰ δὲ οὐδὲν ἡμάρτηταί μοι, καὶ τοῦτο ὑμῖν ἀποδείκνυμε σαφῶς, δέ-- 
ομαι ὑμῶν αὐτὸ φανερὸν τοῖς “Ἔλλησι πᾶσι ποιῆσαι, the purpose of the orator to 
express his innocence in the most positive manner, is evident: “but since (if) 
I have committed no fault at all, and this I have shown you clearly—-.” In 
Eurip. Med. 87, Ev τούσδε (his children) 7 εὐνῆς οὕνεκ, od στέργει ware, the 
form ov στέργει expresses this circumstance as notorious, and the δἰ refers solely 
to the specified cause, εὐνῆς οὕνεκα. The case is different with the three exam- 
ples in Herm. ad Medeam p. 344, 361. All these three belong to the construc- 
tion with μέν and δέ (see ὃ 149), of which the last half only is the proper ob- 


. 


§ 148. syNTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 417 


whenever these actually denote a purpose. In the same manner therefore 
it necessarily stands with all expressions which imply wish, entreaty, prohi- 
bition. In all these instances it corresponds to the Latin ne; and it stands 
also, like this particle, at the beginning of a clause,—the idea of wishing, 
etc. being not expressed, but retained in the thought ; e.g. μὴ γένουτο, let 
it not be! i.e. I wish that it may not be! halt 


d.‘ Further, the appearance of dependence belongs also to whatever is 
exhibited in sermone obliquo as the opinion, conclusion, conjecture, etc. of 
any one. Nevertheless, as this species of discourse differs only in exter- 
nal form from the judgment which is directly expressed, usage has here 
in most cases preferred the direct and independent ov, and we therefore 
find νομίζειν ov καλὸν sivon* — οὐκ ἐθέλειν φησίν. In many such cases 
however μή can also stand, e.g. Xen. Hell. 3. 2. 19, ἐνόμισαν αὐτὸν μὴ 
βούλεσϑαν μᾶλλον, ἢ μὴ δύνασϑαι. --- The dependent or indirect ques- 
tion, with εἰ whether, commonly has μή. 

e. 'To the conditions and suppositions (in Ὁ) belong also all relatives, 
whenever they refer not to definite antecedents, but to such as are merely 
implied in the thought. Thus e.g. οὐδεὶς λήψεταν χρήματα, ὅστις 
μὴ παρέσται “no one will receive money who is not present,” indefinite ; 
on the other hand οὗτοί εἰσιν, οἵ οὗ δ᾽ δτιοῦν τοὺς πολεμίους βλάπτουσι 
(Xen. Cyrop. 6. 1. 28), definite, “these are they, who do not injure the 
enemy at all.” | 


Jj. Hence all those shorter phrases, which can be referred back to 
one of the dependent constructions, have always uy. Thus the preposi- 
tive article as an ellipsis of the relative with the verb εἶναι, e.g. τὰ μὴ 
καλά, for ἅτινα μὴ καλά ἐστιν, whatever i.e. all which is’ not handsome. 


ject of the thought, while the first is merely the antithesis of the second. We give 
here the passage from Thucyd. I. 121, literally : 

ἢ δεινὸν ἂν sin, εἰ οἱ μὲν ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι ἐπὶ δουλείᾳ τῇ αὐτῶν φέροντες 
οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἐπὶ τῷ τιμωρούμενοι τοὺς ἐχϑροὺς καὶ αὐτοὶ ἅμα σύώ-- 


ἕεσϑαι οὐκ ἄρα δαπανήσομεν. 


Here the οὐκ in the first clause is necessary and natural, because a notorious 
fact is expressed. But in the second, the οὐκ appears so much the more strange, 
because the matter is even represented as impossible ; in which case consequently 
μιῇ would seem to be just as necessary, as in the similar example in §149 under 
μέν, (αἰσχρόν ἔστιν st —— μηδὲ τοὺς λόγους --- --- ). The case is the same with 
the two passages adduced by Hermann p. 361, from entirely different writers, 
where similar double propositions are introduced by δεινὸν δἰ, and οὐ stands with 
equal strangeness in the second half. All this seems to point to some common 
cause; which I find in the circumstance, that from δεινὸν δὲ which expresses 
surprize, after the insertion of the first clause the proposition passes impercepti- 
bly over, by means of ov, into the interrogative tone of surprize and censure, 
Consequently, the above sentence from Thucyd. closes with the interrogation, οὐκ 
ἄρα δαπανήσομεν ; in like manner in Herod. VII. 9, by “Ἕλληνας δὲ--- οὐ τιμω-- 
ρησόμεϑα; and in Andocides de Myster. p. 13, & ὑμῖν δὲ --- —ov σωθήσομαι ; 
which seems to me to be a very natural turn of the thought. In this way also 
other passages, which may still remain, can probably be explained by further 
criticism. In Herod. VI. 9 εἰ — ov ποιήσουσι, the manuscripts give μή. In 
Eurip. Cyclop. 428 εἴτ᾽ ov yontere, the εἰ has the signification of whether, 
which is susceptible of both constructions. See the note to Plat. Meno. 23, and 
Herm. ad Eurip. Med. p. 344, where in the passage cited from Plat. Protag. 77, 
εἶ οὐκ αἰσχίνομαν “ whether Γ am not ashamed,” the οὐκ is occasioned by the 
transition from the direct question, ove αἰσχύνει ; * art not thou ashamed 2” 


448 * § 143, syNTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


~ 


So. Xenophon says (Anab, IV. 4. 15) of a man of veracity, that he had 
constantly stated τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς οὔκ ὄντα. Here τὰ μὴ ὄντα is the el- 
liptical form of the dependent proposition ἅτινα μὴ ἢν, whatever was not, 
i.e. ‘the untruth’; but οὐκ ὄντα is the participle of the definite and di- 
rect negation οὐκ ἔστι; for with the finite verb it must necessarily stand 
thus: τὰ μὴ Ovte οὐκ ἔστιν, ‘what is not, is not.” So further the Par- 
ticiples without the article, when they stand elliptically for one of the 
above constructions, e.g. ἥδιον ἂν ἐχρώμην τῷ ᾿Αλκυβιάδῃ μηδὲν κεχτη-- 
μένῳ “I would rather have intercourse with Alcibiades possessing noth- 
ing,” i.e. st μηδὲν ἐχέχτητο “even if he possessed nothing ;” but οὐδὲν 
κεχτημένῳ “rather with Alcibiades who possesses nothing.” 

g. But every negation is likewise dependent, which is governed by anoth- 
erverb. Hence with all Infinitives, (those excepted which are mentioned 
in d, as belonging in sermone obliquo,) μή is-by far most frequently em- 
ployed. The ground of this is partly to be sought in what is said above ; 
since most Infinitives can be referred back to such propositions as those 
already described, e.g. τὸ μὴ τιμᾷν γέροντας ἀνόσιόν ἐστι, ‘i.e. if one 
does not honour—,’ consequently a supposition. But even when the ne- 
gation in question is a fact, the Infinitive still retains μή, e.g. τὸ μὴ πει- 
σϑῆναί μοι αἴτιόν σοι τῶν κακῶν, i.e. the fact that thou hast not believed 
me. In this manner μή stands not only after δέομαι, κελεύω, ὑπισχνοῦ-- 
μαι, etc. but also after δεῖ, ἀνάγκη, and the like; even when these words 
do not imply a necessity founded on the will of a person, but a physical 
necessity. ἡ 

h. 'To this general principle can also be referred most of those instances, 

according to which some Grammarians assert that ov serves to render neg- 
ative entire propositions, and μή only parts; e.g. τίς οὖν τρόπος τοῦ 
, καλῶς τε, καὶ μὴ γράφειν ; Here certainly μή only renders negative the κα- 
λῶς, which is to be supplied after it. But even if it stood alone it must 
also read, τίς οὖν τρόπος TOU μὴ καλῶς γράφειν ; and the μή has consequently 
its. ground in the dependence of the ‘Infinitive yeapayr,—fully, τίς οὖν 
Toomos, εἴ τις βούλεται μὴ καλῶς γράφειν; See further the similar 
phrases § 151. 1V.3. Soin the question ἀρὰ δεῖ μὲ παραγενέσϑαι, 1) μή; 
this last means “or shall I not?” and the μή then renders negative 
merely the dependent Infinitive παρεγενέσϑαι. The force of δεῖ is not 
thereby destroyed ; it means “am “I compelled not to be present?” Were 
it ἢ ov—then the δεῖ would become negative, ἢ οὐ δεῖ; “or is it not ne- 
cessary 3" ---τούτοις ἔξεστι μὲν πείϑεσθαι, ἔξεστι δὲ μή, Plat. Phaedr. 70. 


Nore 1. It is however easy to be conceived, that it very often de- 
pends solely on the will of the speaker or writer, in the case of a negation 
in itself dependent, to treat it nevertheless, either for the sake of perspi- 
cuity, or of some distinction or emphasis, as a direct negation and only, 
interwoven in the construction; and that vice versa many a negation 
which is founded on complete reality, but is nevertheless interwoven with 
the participial construction, is for the same reason given with μή. An 
example of this last is Demosth. pro Cor. p. 276. 6, ἣν δὲ (6 Φίλιππος) 
οὔ ἐν τῇ ϑαλάττῃ τότε κρείττων ὑμῶν οὔτ sig τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐλϑεῖν dv- 
᾿ ψατὸς, μήτε Θετταλῶν ἀκολουϑούγτων, μήτε Θηβαίων διιέντων. Here the 
last part means, “since the Thessalians neither followed him, nor did the 
Thebans suffer him to pass through.” This refers to actual facts, and the 


ἄν. 


_§ 148. ΞΥΝΤΑΧ.--- ΝΕΘΑΤΙΥΕ PARTICLES. 419 
negation is not that of any idea or supposition, nor of any thing dependent ; 
and therefore in every other such case οὔτε would stand with these partici- 
ples. But here οὔτε had already been employed ; and since in Greek (‘Text 6 
below), when after ‘a negation the same form of hegation is again repeated, 
this last always refers back to the same thing which is made negative by 
the first, if now’ οὔτε had stood here instead of μήτε, it would necessarily 
have expressed the meaning, “Philip could not enter Attica, neither if the 
Thessalians followed him, nor if the Thebans let him pass through.” 
Consequently μήτε stands here, in a negation not indeed dependent, but 


still subordinate, simply for the sake of distinction from the preceding 
οὔτε. : 


Note 2. The particle ov has with some words the power, not merely 
of rendering them negative, but of giving them the directly contrary 
sense. Thus especially ov may is to be translated not by not wholly, but 
by not at all, ὃν no means; οὔ φημι means not τ Ι do not say,” but I deny ; ; 


᾿ οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναν “they refused to go;” οὐκ ὑπισχνοῦντο συγνδειπνήσειν 


“they declined the invitation,” ‘Xen. Symp. I. 7; οὐχ ὑπεδέκετο refused, 
Herod. III. ὅθ. That μή has the same power in dependent propositions, 
seems to be true only in later writers; 6. g. Plat. Gryll. 1 ἂν δὲ μὴ φῶσιν. 
In Plat. Apol. Soer. p. 25. (δ 12.) instead of ἐάν ts — μὴ φῆτε, Bekker has 
adopted ov φῆτε out of the best manuscripts ; so that ov stands even af- 
ter ἐάν (compare the marg. note to no. 2. ὃ, above); and in Lysias in Agor. 
Ρ. 137. 3, ἐὰν δ᾽ ov φάσκῃ has always stood. 

Nore 3. Both οὐκ and μή are, placed immediately before substan- 


_ tives, in order to render these alone negative, and thus form with them a 


species of compounds ; 3 comp. the same practice with the adverbs, § 125. 


6. E.g. ἢ οὐκ ἀπόδειξ sts, ἢ οὐ διάλυσις, “ the ποῖ. showing, the not 


destroying,” etc. to μὴ εἴδεα “the non-species;” ἢ μὴ ἐμπειρία “the 
not knowing, i ignorance. ” Both of these are elliptical forms of propositions 
in which either ov or μή occurs; e.g. ἢ οὐ διάλυσις τῶν γεφυρῶν the 
not breaking down of the bridges, i. e. “the cireumstance, that the bridges 
are not broken down,”’ a direct and real negation with ov ;— δεινόν ἐστιν 
ἢ μὴ ἐμπειρία “ it is a great evil, if one has no experience,” a mere as- 
sumption with μή. 


3. We have seen (no. 2. 6) that μή stands particularly in enincniicne 
implying wish, entreaty, command. Whenever it appears as wish, it is 
always followed by the Optative; e.g. μὴ γένοιτο,---μὴ ἴδοις τοῦτο 
mayst thou never behold this! In negative entreaties and ‘commands, 
according as the required action is to be expressed as continued or as 
momentary, (which is often arbitrary,) it takes the Present or the Aor- 
ist (§ 137. 5); but with this limitation, viz. that it is followed 


in the Present only by the Imperative, in the Aorist only by the 
Subjunctive. 


Thus, μή μὲ βάλλε, or μή ws βάλῃς. To the extremely rare exceptions 
from this rule belong | some Homeric passages, as 1]. 0,410. Od. π, 301. 
ω, 248. 


420 § 148. syNTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


A, The expression of fear or anxiety, which we make positive, ins τῇ J 
fear that something will happen to him,”) is introduced by the Greeks, 
as also by the Latins, with a negative: δέδοικα μή τὸ πάϑῃ, vereor ne 
quid illi accidat.—That in connexion with past time, and in depend- 
ent propositions, this Sajenctive passes over into the Optative, appears 
from § 139. 2. 

Nore 4. After words expressive of fear or foresight we often find 


also the Future; e.g. Plat. Phileb. Ῥ. 13. a, φοβοῦμαν μὴ εὑρήσομεν. Ari- 
stoph. Eccl. 486, περισχοπουμένη μὴ γενήσεται. 


_ Nore 5. Sometimes also in the sense of fear or anxiety μή constitutes 
a proposition by itself; e. g. My τοῦτο ἄλλως ἔχη. The greater part of such 
propositions can be explained by supplying -before them φοβοῦμαι I fear, 
or ὅρα see to it, take care; as “I am afraid this is otherwise,” or “take 
care that this Be not otherwise.” \ Often however this assumption would 
be too unnatural ; and therefore it is perhaps better to say, that the Greek 
language by means of this_u7 with the Subjunctive and a certain tone of 
emphasis, formed an independent proposition expressing care or foresight, 
just as the same μή forms also independent propositions to express wish, 
entreaty, etc. 
5. Often also μή is merely an emphatic interrogative particle, which 
has lost its negative power, and corresponds mostly to the Latin num, 
being somewhat stronger than μῶν; e.g. μὴ δοκεῖ σον τοῦτο εἶναν 
εὔηϑες; “does this then seem to thee to be foolish ?’—On the other 
hand, ov is the negative epterensaenes which is employed instead of a 
direct affirmation ; e.g. οὐ καὶ καλόν ἐστε τὸ ἀγαϑόν; “is not the 
_ good also beautiful?” This question presupposes the answer yes; that 
with μή on the contrary, commonly no. 


6. When to a sentence already made negative, other qualifications of 
a more general kind are to be added, such as sometimes, some one, some- 
where, etc. these are all commonly subjoined in the form of words com- 
pounded with the same negative particles. E.g. οὐκ ἐποίησε τοῦτο 
οὐδαμοῦ οὐδεὶς “no one has any where done this;” Plat. Parmen. 
extr. τἄλλα τῶν μὴ ὄντων οὐδενὶ οὐδαμῇ οὐδαμῶς οὐδεμίαν κοινωνίαν 
ἔχει. And in the same manner, to the negation of the whole is sub- 
joined the negation of the parts; e.g. οὐ δύναται οὔ τ᾽ εὖ λέγειν OUT εὖ 
ποιεῖν. τοὺς φίλους, where we must say “he can neither—nor—.” 
Consequently, these double or accumulated negatives in Greek do not 
(like the Latin non nunquam, etc. and as in modern languages) serve 
to destroy each other, but to strengthen the negation. Comp. note 7 

Nore 6. In some phrases both the particles ov and μή, are united for 
the sake of emphasis, viz. Ε 


1) ov μή in assurances which refer to a future time, (hence the con- 
struction in § 139. 4,) and in the confiding entreaty arising from them. 


§ 148. synTAX.—NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 421 


The two connected particles can also be separated by other words, 
and instead of ov, its compounds (οὐδέ, οὐδείς, etc.) can also stand ; 
see the examples in § 139. 4. , 


2) μὴ ov, but only in the simple form of both, and not separated ; most 
commonly before Infinitives instead of μή alone, e. g. ποῖον παραμύϑι- 
OY ποιήσεις αὑτῷ, μὴ οὐχὶ ἀπειπεῖν ; “ What consolation wilt thou give 
him, that he may not despair?” αἰσχύνομαι μὴ ov ποιεῖν τοῦτο “1 am 
ashamed not to do this.” Sometimes also before participles, instead 
of εἰ μή with the verb. Schaefer Melet. p. 108. 


Nore 7. But from this and also from the general rule, that two or more 
negatives only strengthen each other, there are two principal exceptions, 
where the negatives actually destroy each other, as in Latin and in the 
modern languages: 

a) When μή has one of its more special senses (no. 2. c) implying pur- 
pose, fear, anxiety, etc. E. g. Il. a, 28, where Chryses is ordered to de- 
part, with the threat μὴ νύ tov ov χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον καὶ στέμμα ϑεοῖο 
“lest the sceptre and fillet of the god afford thee no aid.” _So very 
commonly with the idea of fear, e. 5. φοβοῦμαι μὴ ov καλὸν ἢ “vereor 
ne non honestum sit.” Here μή retains its power, although we in this 
case must translate it, like the Latin ne, simply by that or lest, and 
consequently leave the following negative to stand alone: “I fear 
that this may not be proper.” 


ὃ) When the two negatives belong to two different verbs, even where 
one is a participle ; e.g. Hom. οὐδ᾽ οὐκ ἐθέλοντα payseoFou. Com- 
monly however, for the sake of perspicuity, one of the negatives is 
then made by the strengthened μὴ ov; 6. g. μὴ οὐχὶ μισεῖν αὐτὸν οὗ κ 
ἂν δυναίμην, “1 should not’ be able not to hate him,” i, 6. I must hate 
him. 


- 


Nore 8. ‘T'wo negatives destroy one another also in the phrase οὐδεὶς 
ὅστις ov, nemo non; because strictly the verb εἶναι is always omitted after 
the first negative,—that is to say, if fully written, it would be οὐδεὶς (se. 
ἔστιν) ὅστις μὴ ποιήσει, “there is no one, who will not do this,” i. e. every - 
one will do it. But this omission of ἔστι is so entirely forgotten, that not 
only has μή gone over into ov; but also in construction, except in the 
Nominative, οὐδείς (by a form of attraction to be explained in § 151. I. 4) 
is entirely attracted to the following principal verb ; so that it stands thus: 
οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀρέσκει, nemini non placet, it pleases every one.-—Demosth. c. 
Aristocr. ὑμεῖς μὲν, ὦ α. A. οὐδένα προυδώκατε τῶν φίλων, Θετταλοὶ δὲ οὐδέ- 
να πώποϑ'᾽ ὅντινα οὔ (sc. προύδωκαν), i.e. “they have betrayed all their 
friends.” * | 

Nove 9. But as the Greeks were in general so accustomed to the rule, 
that one negative only strengthens another, it often happens that a verb, 
which in itself implies a negative, is still construed with another negative. — 
E. g. ἠναντιώϑην αὑτῷ μηδὲν ποιεῖν παρὰ τοὺς νόμους “1 opposed myself to 
him, i.e. I hindered him from doing anything against the laws;” Xen. 
‘Anab. 1. 3. 2 μικρὸν ἐξέφυγε τοῦ μὴ καταπετρωθῆναν “he but just escaped 


* The omission of ὅστις in this phrase in the passage Xen. Symp. I. 9, is 
doubtful (see Schnéider’s note) ; but it is certain in the oracle in Herod. V. 56. 
54 


‘422 $149. syNTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. ; 


being stoned.” See the Index to Plat. Meno. v. μή. Exc. XI. ad Demosth. 
Mid. ‘ 


Note 10. The formula εἰ δὲ ih, but if not, would properly be employed 
only after affirmative propositions. It serves so generally however to an- — 
nul the preceding proposition, that it also stands even after negatives, and 
then consequently affirms; 6. g. Anab. IV. 3. 6. See Heind.ad Plat. Hipp. 
p- 134. 


For οὐδὲ and μηδέ, see the following section. 


§ 149. Various Particies.—ExPLeTIveEs. 


1. The use of the particles in Greek is so various, and in some re- 
spects so difficult, that we select here several of the most important for 
particular illustration. 


ὡς as a relative adverb has the fbowine ‘significations : δ 
(1) as, so as; hence (2) spoken of time, as ; ὡς δὲ ἤλϑον, οὗ παρῆν, 
as I came, he was not there. (3) It strengthens the Superlative, chiefly 
‘with adverbs, 6. g. ὡς τάχιστα as swiftly as possible; and with some 
adverbs also the Positive, especially in ὡς ἀληϑῶς really, most certainly, 
ὡς ἑτέρως, and some other examples in Heindorf ad Plat. ᾿Αρο]. Socr. 
Ρ. 23. Praef. The instances where it stands after the adverb, ϑαυ- 
μαστῶς ὡς, ὑπερφυῶς wc, are explained in § 151. I. 5. (4) About, 
nearly, ὡς πεντήκοντα about Jifty. (5 ) To the prepositions ἐπί, εἰς, 
πρός, in answer to the question ‘whither, e. 8. in ἐπορεύετο ὡς ἐπὶ τὸν 
᾿ φοταμόν, it gives the signification towards, in the direction of, versus ; ; 
lit. as if he would go to the river. Thucyd. VI. 61 ἀπέπλεον μετὰ 
τῆς Σαλαμινίας ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας ὡς ἐς ᾿4ϑήνας. This mode of expres- 
sion points out strictly only the direction which one takes; and 
therefore leaves undetermined, whether one arrives at the place or 
not. Hence it can ear ἐεξβι be used of a journey not yet com- 
pleted ; e.g. Soph. Philoct. 58 πλεῖς δ᾽ ὡς πρὸς οἶκον, “thou sailest 
for home.” 

As a conjunction it signifies (1) that, e. g. miegn ὁμολογοῦμεν, ὡς ἢ 
ἀρετὴ χράτιστόν ἐστι. (2) That, in order that, with the Subj. Opt. or 
Fut. Indic. (8) So that, so as to, with the Infin. (more commonly 
ὥστε), see δ140. 4. (4) Because (§ 145. n. 5); and hence also (5) 
quippe, for, 6. g. κράτιστον ἔσται συγχωρῆσαι, ὡς σὺ δοκεῖς οὐκ ἀφήσειν 
pe, “it will be best to yield, for thou seemest not willing to-let me go.” 

For ὡς as a preposition, see eh 9; 


ὥς (with the accent ὁ 116.5) for οὕτως is very common in the poets, 
especially the Ionic poets. In prose however it is used only in the 
phrases καὶ ὥς and so, i. 6. under these circumstances, and in the oppo- 
site sense οὐδ᾽ ὥς not so indeed, nevertheless not. ᾿ 


ὅπως signifies as an adverb as, and as a conjunction, in order that. Its 

construction we have already seen in ᾧ 139. 4; and only remark fur- 

ther here, that it also supplies the place of an emphatic. Imperative, 

. ὅπως ἔσεσϑε (Xen. Anab. I. 7. 3) be ye then—! more fully, see then 
that ye be—! : 


§ 149. SYNTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 423 


ἵνα asan adverb where ; asa Comjesiiqeyott (δ 139. 2) also in order that ;—ive 
ti, wherefore ? as if it were—‘in order that what 2 should take place? 


ὥστε 80 Us, 80 that, commonly with the Infinitive (§ 140. 4. § 142. 4). With 
the Indicative it signifies the same 5 but can also’be translated con- 
‘sequently, ttaque. 

Ove that, instead of the Accus. with the Infin. as in English. Here 
however the peculiarity is to be. noted, that it stands also before 
words quoted without change, e.g. ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι “Βασιλείαν οὐκ ἂν δε- 
Eaiuny, “he answered: I will not, etc.” where oz is simply a mark 
of quotation. 

It means also because, cy ellipsis for διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, or for διότι 
contracted from this ( 115. n. 5).—But in later writers διότν often 
stands also for ὅτι, that. 

It strengthens all superlatives (comp. ὧς), e.g. ote μέγιστος the 
greatest possible, ὅτι μάλιστα, etc. : 

τούνεκα (only epic) on this account ; | 

οὕνεκα (1) on which account ; (2) as a conjunction, because—, for tov 
ἕνεκα, ov ἕνεχα. -But i in the poets οὕγεκα stands also ) for ἕνεχα on 
account of ; (2) for ὅτι, that. 

δϑούνεκα (δ 29. n. 10) in the tragic poets is the same as οὕγεχα, 

1 because, that. ὁ 

εἶ (1) if, si; (2) im indirect questions, whether. See § 189. 5 sq. § 148. 

2. ὃ. 


When εἰ follows Forpctloa and some other verbs expressing emo- 
tions of the mind, it ought strictly to monty if, when, and to be used 
mer ely of things which are υποογϊαϊη, 6. g. ‘if or when thou dost not 
‘perceive this, I wonder at it. The Attic custom however of avoid- 
ing a tone of decision in discourse, has been the occasion, that εὖ is 
used of things not only highly probable, but even entirely certain ; 
and consequently stands for ὅτι, etc, See the example in § 141 note. 
—Demosth. Mid. 29 οὐκ ῃσχύνϑη εἶ τοιοῦτο κακὸν ἐπάγει to “he was- 
not ashamed to bring upon one such a misfortune.” Ausch. c. Ctes. 
p. 537, Reisk. οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην ἔδωκεν “he is not contented, that 
he was not punished. 

— εἰ καὶ with the Indic. although. On the contrary καὶ εἰ ἜΣ κἂν εἶ, 
even if, even supposing that ; which last formula, notwithstanding the 
ἄν, takes the Indicative. See the note to Demosth. Mid. 15. a. Heind. 
ad Plat. Bophist, 69. 

— εἴτις, εἴτε, lit. if any one, if any thing ; but this expression is used to 
supply the place of the relative pronoun « ὕστις, With greater empha- 
sis; 6. 5. ἔφϑειρον εἴτι χρήσιμὸν ἦν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ---εὐϊιαίουεν, all that—. 
Comp. δ 147. n. 7. 

— εἰ yao is also an exclamation of wishing, O that! for which we 
find elsewhere ede. 

ἐπεὶ (1) after, postquam ; (2) since, because, quoniam, Fr. puisque. 

— Before questions and before Imperatives it means for, e. δ: ἐπεὶ πῶς 
ἂν διακρίνοιμεν αὐτό; “for how then could we distinguish it ?”—ést 
_ Saco αὗὑτός, “ for see then thyself.” 


424 


͵ 4 
§ 149. syNTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 


ὅπου (1) where (there where) ; (2) as a conjunction, since, siquidem, 
ὁπότε stands often in like manner for since, like the Lat. quandoquidem. 
ἄν kguatie κέ, net see in § 139. 7 Βα. 

ἐαν, ἤν, ἄν, and ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, see in § 139. 7 sq. 

--- ἐάν especially after verbs signifying to search, 866, has the power of the 


Latin an, whether. E. g. σκόπει ἐάν cou ἱκανὸν δοκῇ “see whether it 
seems to thee sufficient.” Often however such a verb is not ex- 
pressed, but retained in the mind; e. g. μηδὲ τοῦτο ἄῤῥητον ἔστω μοι, 
ἐάν σὲ πως σεείσω “ this also will I not leave unsaid, (that I may see) 
whether I can persuade thee.” See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. etc. 
Schneid. ad Xen. Mem. IV. 4. 12.—Precisely in the same manner 
stands the Homeric αἴκε (§ 139. 8); e.g. Il. α, 420. 


or 3--which signification it always retains in interrogations also ; 6. g- 
οὕτως ἐστίν" ἢ οὔκ οἴξι; “thus it is; or dost thou not chink so Ὁ 
πόϑεν ἥκει; ἢ δῆλον ὅτι ἐξ ἀγορᾶς ; “whence does he come ? or is it 
plain (and therefore the question unnecessary) that he comes from 
the market ?” See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. in voce. 


— In comparisons it means than, quam ; 6, g.-col τοῦτο μᾶλλον ἀρέ- 


σκει, ἢ ἐμοὶ, “this pleases thee more than me.”—When the compara- 
tive refers toa relation or proportion, it is followed by ἢ πρὸς--- or ἢ 
κατὰ----; 3 9. Be μείξων ἢ κατ᾽ ᾿ἄνϑρωπον “sreater than according to 
man ; :? ἢ δόξα ἐστὶν ἐλάττων ἢ πρὸς TO κατόρϑωμοα “ the renown is less 
than in proportion to the merit.” Lat. quam pro, 

Wholly different is 


ἢ, which originally means certainly, but is most commonly merely an 


interrogative particle, num ? 


καί and τέ correspond entirely to the Lat. et and que ; and καί has also 


the significations also, even, ete. When τὲ precedes καί, the former 
means not only, the latter but also, 6. 5. αὐτός ts τύραννος ἐγένετο, καὶ 
τοῖς παισὶ τὴν τυραννίδα κατέλιπεν. In other cases, both—and. Still 
this double connexion is often used in Greek, where we employ a 
single and. 

τέ moreover in epic poetry is very often “entirely superflu- 
ous. This arises from the circumstance, that in the most ancient 
language -this particle lent to many classes of words that connecting 
power, which afterwards, as the language became more cultivated, 
they retained for themselves alone without the τέ. Hence in the epic 
poets we find so often μέν τε, δέ τε, γάρ τε, and even χαΐ τὲ (also), for 
μέν, δέ, γάρ, καί, alone. Most commonly however the particle τό fol- 
lows the pathsioes of all kinds, because all these in the ancient lan- 
guage were already forms of the demonstrative, which by means of 
this τέ acquired a connective power (and this), and so became relatives 
(who, which). Butso soon as thé relative sense was exclusively allotted 
to these forms, the τὸ fell away as superfluous. Hence in Homer so 
frequently still ὅς τε, ὅσον τε, etc. for ὅς, ὅσον, and the like. In the 
common language are further derived from this ancient usage the 


§ 149. synrax.—vaRIOUS PARTICLES. 425 
particles ὥστε and ἅτε, and the phrases οἷός te and ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, for which 
see § 150.*—For τ᾽ ἄρα see below under toi. 7 
καὶ alone, in the signification also, is likewise in familiar dis- 

course very often apparently superfluous; e.g. Plat. Alcib. I. 6 “I 
permit all thy questions iva καὶ εἰδῶ, ὅ,τι καὶ ἐρεῖς," (where we should 
use some other particle,) “only that I may know, what thou wilt 
say.” 

Before μάλα and πάνυ it has a peculiar emphasis; e. g. τοῦτο γὰρ 
καὶ μάλα ἀκριβῶς οἶδα, i. 6. “1 know this, and indeed very accurately.” 

καὶ in comparisons, like the Lat. atque, for as, see in Ind, ad Plat. 
Meno. cet. 

xai—dé—, see under δέ. 


δὲ but, is far from always having an adversative signification ; in most 
cases it is simply a particle of transition and conversion, in order to 
introduce something else, where we either employ the conjunction 
and, or often also put nothing. The Greeks, whose best writers do 

- not admit the Asyndeton, (i.e. a proposition beginning in the midst 
of discourse and not connected with what precedes,) unless some 
rhetorical purpose is thus to be accomplished, always employ the 
particle δέ wherever the discourse is in itself nearly connected, with- 
out however requiring one of the other more specific modes of con- 
nexion or construction, In the more ancient language δέ supplied 
also the place of other connecting particles, viz. of γάρ for, 6. g. Od. 
δ, 369. In Homer therefore it is necessary always to observe the 
context, in order to determine which of the three principal significa-. 
tions 


and, but, for, 


it has in each instance. Often too in the same writer, a specification 
of time, which is elsewhere connected by ὡς, ὅτε, etc. is merely put 
in juxtaposition by means of δέ; e.g. Od. β, 313. 

— When zai and δέ come together in one sentence, καί can only 
have the sense of also ; e.g. καὶ οὗτος δὲ παρὴν “ but he also was pre- 
sent.” But very often this union occurs where we say and also ; for 
since in Greek one cannot say καὶ καί, in such cases the looser con- 
nective δέ supplies the place of xoé or our and. E.g. νῦν περὶ 
ψυχῶν τῶν ὑμετέρων ἐστὶν ὃ ἀγὼν, καὶ περὶ γυναικῶν δὲ καὶ τέκνων. 
If how we should here translate x«i:—dé— literally “ but also for your 
wives and children,” this would give an entirely false emphasis to the 
construction. The course of thought is simply this: “the contest is 
now for your own lives, and also (and in addition) for your wives 
and children.” In the common language this union of xaé and δέ 

᾿ς occurs only in such a way, that the principal word to which καέ re- 
fers always stands before δέ; while in the epic language on the con- 


* By this hypothesis the above epic modes of expression are in my opinion best 
explained. Still I am willing to believe, that there are other hypotheses which 
can attain the same object. But I cannot satisfy myself with Hermann’s mode 
of proceeding ; who derives the whole doctrine respecting these particles from 
the arbitrary assumption, that καί and τέ; et and que, were originally different,— 
lending at the same time to τέ the signification forte. 


7 


426 § 149. synTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 


trary the two particles always stand close together, καὶ δὲ---: Ὰ 5. Π,, 
ε, 700, Καρπαλίμως πρὸ γεῶν ἐχέμεν λᾶον τε καὶ ἵππους ᾿Οτῥύνων͵ 
καὶ δ᾽ αὐτὸς ἐγὲ προμάχοισι. μάχεσϑαι.. 


μέν and δέ are two particles belonging together, which κανῷ nearly 
the same character as δέ alone. They serve to form a connexion, 
like our indeed—but ; but are far more frequently employed than 
these English particles, which usually require a strong antithesis ; 
while μέν and δὲ only place two propositions or clauses in a connex- 
ion, which with us is either not expressed at all, or at most by but 
alone. Thus very frequently a chapter or longer division of a 
book ends in this way: καὶ ταῦτα μὲν οὕτως ἐγένετο, “ these things 
then were so ;” and then the following chapter, etc. must necessa- 
rily begin somnething 4 in this way ; ; τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ — “ but on the fol- 
lowing day—.”. Méy must be given by” indeed, only when the con- 
text vi Sige requires it. 


But μέν and δὲ are often employéd also to connect two proposi- 
tions or clauses, of which only the second properly belongs in the 
connexion ; while the other is merely inserted in order to heighten 
by contrast the effect of the second. E.g. Demosth. Olynth. II. 
ἀλλ ἐκεῖνο ϑαυμάξω, &b ἐ (that) Aanedurpoviors μέν ποτε ὑπὲρ τῶν Ἕλληνι- 
κῶν δικαίων ἃ ἀγτήρατε, καὶ, ἵνα οἵ ἄλλοι ἐύχωσι τῶν δικαίων, τὰ ὑμέτερα 
αὐτῶν ἀνηλέσκετε εἰσφέροντες " νυνὶ δ᾽ ὀκνεῖτε “ἐξιέναι, καὶ μέλλετε (ye de- - 
lay) εἰσφέρειν ὑπὲρ τῶν ὑμετέρων αὑτῶν κτημάτων. Here it is not the first 
conduct that Demosthenes wonders at, that the Athenians once defended 
the rights of all the Greeks against the Spartans; but the second, viz. 
that they who once did this, should not now be ready to defend even 

their own possessions j—ainzgoy ἐστιν, et ἐγὼ μὲν TOUS πόνους, ὑμεῖς δὲ 
μηδὲ τοὺς λόγους αὐτῶν ἀνέξεσϑε id. pro Cor. 281. Here one easily 
sees that the first part is praiseworthy, and only the second shameful ; 
though not in itself, but from the contrast with the first. How atten- 
tive one must be to this form of connexion, may be seen in the fol- 
lowing example, wrich has been misunderstood by most ; Eurip. App 
Taur.’ 115. 


Οὔτοι μακρὸν μὲν ἤλϑομεν κώπῃ πόρον 
Ἔκ τερμάτων δὲ νόστον ἀροῦμεν πάλιν: 


Here the negative belongs strictly only to the second clause, a the 
first can be made to follow as the antithesis: ‘ We will not again 
turn back from the goal, after we have once made so long a voyage ;” 
but the sense is stronger and more emphatic, when both clauses are 
united into one negation: “It shall not be said of us, that we have 
made so long a voyage, and at the very goal have again turned 
back.” The same sense remains if -we regard the whole as a 
question indicating displ easure. SeeSeidler.* 


Thisuwéy—oé— furnishes also an emphatic manner of connecting 
two ideas belonging to the same proposition, instead of the more 


* The Latins also have this mode of expression sometimes, but, in accordance 
with their Syntax, without such particles. Hor. Sat 1. 2. 84, Quod venale ha- 
bet ostendit, nec, si quid honesti est, Jactat habetque palam, quacrit, quo turpia ce- 
let. 


͵ 


§ 149. SYNTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 421 


usual té—xou, viz. in such a way that some ὁ word of the iia is re- 
peated ; e.g. Xen. Mem. II. 1. 32, ἐγὼ δὲ σύγειμι μὲν “ϑεοῖς, σύνειμι 
δ᾽ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς, instead of the feebler σύνειμι ϑεοῖς τε καὶ 
ay. τ. α. And inthe same manner also without μέν in the first part, 

' when the ordinary form of connexion would be with καί only. See 
on Soph. Philoct. 827.—The repetition, in such phrases, of the prepo- 
sition alone of compound verbs, see in § 147. n. 10. 

In general, μέν can strictly never be employed, unless δέ, or at 
least some other particle of a similar meaning, correspond to it in the 
succeeding clause. But nevertheless, (1) on rhetorical grounds the 
apodosis is sometimes omitted, or otherwise expressed ; (2) in some 

- common expressions, where the apodosis is to be regarded as entire- 
ly obliterated, μέν is employed (like quidem) merely to insulate some 
person or thing, and thus to exclude every thing, which one perhaps 

‘ might otherwise expect ; so especially ἐγὼ μέν (equidem), ete. See 
Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 36. Theaet.49.—It is however also to be noted, 
that in the epic poets μέν often stands for μήν, for which see below. 

From μὲν---δὲ, come the forms 0 μὲν----ὖ δὲ--- or ὃς wév—os de—, 
which we have already seen in ὃ 126. Similar distributives are formed 
with the help of the same particles, for the various adverbial relations ; 
and indeed not only the demonstrative and relative forms, but also the 
indefinite forms are so employed : ποτὲ μὲν --- ποτὲ δὲ ---- sometimes— 
somelimes—, or once—again— ; ; and so also with τοτὲ and ore (§ 116. 
n. 9). So further τῇ μὲν --- τῇ δὲ ἜΡΩΣ πὴ μὲν --- πὴ δὲ ----, in 
one way—in another way, etc. ἔνϑα μὲν --- teva δὲ —, ete. In re- 
spect to all such distributives it is to be’ remarked, that sometimes 
such a formula stands without a verb in reference to a preceding 
‘proposition; where consequently μέν in itself alone seems to have 
an affirmative sense, something like our indeed, forsooth; e.g. πάν-- 
Tas φιλητέον, ἀλλ οὐ τὸν μὲν, τὸν δ᾽ ov, “one must love all, and 
not the one indeed, but the other not ;” παρῆσαν οὐχ ὃ μὲν ὃ δ᾽ οὔ" 
ἀλλὰ πάντες, “ they-were present, not ‘the one forsooth, and the other 
not; but all.” : | 

οὔτε and μήτε, 

οὐδέ and μηδέ. Both these forms express a negative connexion, and cor- 

respond to the Latin neque, and not. There is between them, how- 
ever, this difference, that οὔτε, μήτε, affect parts of propositions, or 
represent that which is denied as belonging to that with which they 
connect it; while οὐδέ, μηδέ, on the contrary, rather connect whole 
propositions and sentences, partly by way of strong contrast, and 
partly by way of transition and in the regular progress of discourse. 
Οὔτε and μήτε are more copulative, like the affirmative καί; οὐδὲ 
and μηδὲ more disjunctive, corresponding to dé. When now oits or 
μήτε is repeated, these negatives refer to one another like the Lat. ne- 
que — neque, neither — ror; but when οὐδέ or pydé is repeated, 
this is only acontinued negation, the same as οὐδέ alone. 

Besides this simple connective power moreover, the forms οὐδέ, 
μηδέ, correspond to the special significations of the particle xaé ; 
for as this in affirmation denotes 1) also, 2) even; so these denote 


428 \§ 149. s¥nNTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 


in negation 1) also not, 2) not even ; which last signification these 
particles always have when they stand-in the middle of a clause. 


Primarily οὐδέ and μηδέ signify but not ; and so we must frequently 
still understand them in epic poetry; where also they are often 
written separately ov δέ, μὴ δέ In the common language this ’ 
concurrence of δέ with the negative was avoided, either by placing 
the words differently, or by using ἀλλά or ἀτάρ. 


ἀλλά has the strengthened sense of δέ, and corresponds at the same time 
to the Germ. sondern. — Besides this, it has in animated style a 
great variety of uses, which can be learned only by practice. It 
stands especially in an abrupt manner at the beginning of paragraphs 
or of whole books; where it is sometimes to be translated by well ! 
sometimes by indeed, truly ; but often also not at all. 


--ἀλλὰ γάρ, see the notes to Soph. Philoct. 81 and 874. 


yao, for, always stands in a sentence after some other words, like the Lat- 
in enim. — The use of this particle is very various and elliptical, 
especially in dialogues, where we must commonly supply before 
it in thought small phrases, like “I believe it,’—“ no wonder,” and 
others, which attention to the context will readily suggest. Here 
belongs too its use in questions ; where we nevertheless in English 
very commonly use then ; as who then? is then —2 ete. 
We must be particularly on our guard not to be led astray by this 
particle, when it stands, so far as ‘we can ‘see, superfluously, in a 
clause which has been announced by a preceding demonstrative. 
E. g. Xen. Mem. 1.1.6, Alaa μὴν ἐποίει καὶ τά δε πρὸς τοὺς ἐπιτη-- 
δείους" τὰ piv γὰρ ἀναγκαῖα συνεβούλευε πράττειν, etc. Here we 
merely say: “He did for his friends all this, or the following, viz. 
that which was necessary he advised them, etc.” See also Plat. Lys. 
14. Heind. In these cases γάρ simply takes up the preceding an- 
nunciation ; just as in many instances our namely. 


οὖν therefore, consequently, stands only after other words in a clause.—For 
the οὖν appended to other words (ὁστισοῦν, etc.) see § 80.1. ὃ 116.9. 
— Hence are derived 


οὐχοῦν, οὔκουν. The particles οὐκ and οὖν express in the tone of as- 
sertion an illative negation, consequently not, therefore not. Hence 
arose in daily language a manifold use of these particles, which is 
in general obvious from the connexion, and is in part also indicated 
by the accentuation. (1) Placed interrogatively they express the 
- thing denied as being, in the opinion of the speaker, affirmative. Eu- 
rip. Orest. 1238, Οὐκοῦν ὀνείδη τάδε κλύων ῥύσει τέχνα; “ wilt 
thou then, hearing these reproaches, not save thy children?” Plat. 
Phaedr. p. 258, Οὐκοῦν, ἐὰν μὲν οὗτος ἐμμένῃ, γεγηθὼς ἀπέρχεται ἐκ 
τοῦ ϑεάτρου; “does he not therefore, if this (his work) remains good, de- 
part from the theatre rejoicing?”— (2) This interrogative form, through 
the habit of hearing it from those whose opinion affirmed that which 
was therein denied, became itself an affirmative form without inter- 


* Also-even in Ionic prose: Herod. 5. 35, πολλὰς εἶχε ἐλπίδας μετήσεσϑαι (of 
being dismissed) ἐπὶ ϑάλασσαν" μὴ δὲ νεώτερόν τε ποιεύοης τῆς Μιλήτου (but 
Miletus making no new movement), οὐδαμᾷ x. τ. A. . 


᾿ § 149, synTax.—vaARIoUS PARTICLES. 429 


rogation.’ Soph. Antig. 91, Οὐκοῦν, ὅταν δὴ μὴ σϑένω, πεπαύσομαι, 
“therefore I will cease, when I have no longer strength.” Plat. Phaed. 
p- 274. b, Οὐκοῦν τὸ μὲν τέχνης te καὶ ἀτεχνίας λόγων πέρι ἱκανῶς 
ἐχέτω, “let this therefore be enough said on art and want of art.” — 
{3) Wholly different from these is οὔκουν, when, without implying 
an inference, it expresses simply an emphatic negation ; Soph. Ajax 
1336, ᾿4λλ΄ αὐτὸν ἔμπας ovt ἐγὼ τοιόνδε μοι Οὔκουν ἀτιμάσαιμ ἄν, 
“ But although he was wholly such towards me, yet I would not, 
by any means, dishonour him.” Soph. Philoct. 872, Οὔκουν Args- 
Joe τοῦτ ἔτλησαν εὐπόρως Οὕτως ἐνεγκεῖν, ὡγαϑοὶ στρατηλάται, 
“Not lightly did the Atridae bring themselves to bear this.”——This 
sameness of the accent in the forms under 1 and 2 (οὐκοῦν), in 
distinction from that in 3 (οὔκουν), is given by general tradition in 


‘all the editions. With this coincides the testimony of the ancient 


Grammarians; see in Hermann ad Vig. not. 261; to which may be 
added Apollon. de Conjunctione p. 496. 9. Phrynich. Bekkeri p. 57 ;, 
all of whom assume this difference only between the dlative and the 
negative words.* From the form in 3 it is not usual to distinguish 
the direct and illative négation, consequently not, if the accentuation 
οὔκουν. Since however it is an established custom, to distinguish such 
compound particles as retain their original signification unchanged, by 
writing them separately, it seems to me that this is also the most 
natural here, and also no violation of the tradition ; e.g. Plat. Phaedr. 
Ρ. 275. a, where Thamus, after saying to Theuth that men would become 


᾿ forgetful through this security, continues: Οὔκουν or better Οὐκ οὖν 


εἶτα 


μνήμης ἀλλ ὑπομνήσεως φάρμακον εὗρες, “ therefore not for the mem- 
ory but for the recollection hast thou found a medicine.” Eurip. 
Orest. v. 1640: Men. Ὅστις δὲ τιμᾷ μητέρ᾽ — Or. Evdaiuay ἔφυ. 
Men. Οὔκουν or better Οὐκ οὖν σύγε, “consequently thou not.” 

and ἔπειτα bothmean 1) after, afterwards; 2) then, see Herm. ad 
Vig. n. 239. Both often assume “ἃ tone of censure and reproach: 
(1) The ground of the indignation or surprize being first stated, e. g. 
ταῦτα δὴ τολμᾷς λέγειν —, sit ἐγώ σου φείσομαι; “thou art so bold 
as to say this, and then (after all this, notwithstanding) shall I still 
spare thee?” (2) When itstands at the beginning of a sentence, with 
reference to the discourse of another; where we alsocansay: “thou 
wilt then consequently —,” or more briefly, therefore, itane; 6. g. 
εἶτα τολμήσεις τὸν υἱὸν ἀποθϑνήσκοντα εἰσορᾷν; “wilt thou 
therefore (or then) bring thyself to see thy son die 3" --Χρη, Mem. 
1. 4, 11 ἔπειτε οὐκ oie φροντίζειν (sc. τοὺς ϑεοὺς τῶν ἀνϑρώπω») ; 
οὗ πρῶτον μὲν — i.e. since they nevertheless first — ete. In all 
these relations both particles are also construed with participles, as 
we have seen in § 144. n. 6. The instances however, where «ita 


* In some recent editions, Hermann and others have first begun to distinguish 
the illative interrogation by the accentuation οὔκουν ; which I cannot approve. 
The forms under 1 and 2 have essentially one and the same affirmative significa- 
tion. The tone of interrogation itself is a rhetorical accent, to distinguish which 
by a grammatical accent, is what can be prescribed to no language. oth species 
of tradition are here against it; for the Grammarians, in all the passages above 
referred to, do not mention the interrogative meaning in this connexion. 


55 


. \ 


439 § 149. synTAX.—VARIOUS PARTICLES. 


and ἕπειτα are supposed to be dependent on the following participle 
(Herm. ad Vig. not. 219), all admit of being referred also to the pre- 
ceding one; which is to be preferred as being the more natural con- 
struction. 


αὖ _ 1) again, another time; 2) on the other hand, vice versa; 3) further, 
and then also. 


πρίν before, sooner, is in its signification a comparative, and takes there- 
fore, when it refers to another clause, the particle 7, than, commonly 
with the Infinitive ; ; 6.5. mol i ἐλϑεῖν μὲ before I came. Often 
however ἢ. is omitted, and πρίν becomes itself ἃ conjunction : - 
πρίν ἐλϑεῖν us. But πρὶν ἂν ἔλϑω refers to future time. 

γὺν δή Just now, this moment ; and especially with the preterites, just now, 
a moment since, before. 


ao) and πώποτε. In these particles the idea till now, hitherto, lies at 
the foundation ; yet they are never subjoined to direct affirmative 
propositions in this sense. Their usage is limited to the following | 
cases : 4 é 
Most commonly they are appended in this sense to negative particles, 
and then express the English yet, still, Lat. dum; οὔπω, μήπω, not 
- yet, nondum}; where however they must not be confounded with the 
similar epic forms, for which see § 116. n. 6. The form πώποτε 
however is seldom appended to the simple ov or uy; but we find 
οὐδεπώποτε, μηδεπώποτε, never yet ; and indeed, in reference to the 
past, this form is almost solely in-use, so that the form without sa (i. e. 
οὐδέποτε never) is mostly used only in general, or in relation to the 
future. See Wolf ad Demosth. Lept. 76. Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 458. 
Moreover both πώ and σεώποτε can be separated from the negative 
particle, by the intervention of other words. _ , 
Except with a negative these particles stand only occasionally, and 
indeed emphatically, with tnterrogatives, with relatives, and with 
participles used instead of the construction with the relative. 'Thuc. 


Til. 45 τίς πω —; Dem. Phil. I. ὅσα πώποτε ἠλπίσαμεν “what we 
always hoped, ” Plat. Phaedo. p. 116. ὁ, ἄριστος τῶν πώποτε δεῦρο 
ἀφικομένων. 


Touche see in § 150. 

érv alone means yet, still, yet further ; apd with a negative ovxét, μηκέτι, 
no mer, no further. 

pa and v7 are particles of swearing, which are always followed by the 
object by which one swears, in the Accusative ; e. g. νὴ Δία by Jove ! 
— The oath with »7 is always affirmative ; that with wa on the con- 
trary is subjoined both to affirmations and negations; e.g. val μὰ 
Δία and ov μὰ Δία; but when it stands alone, it serves merely as a 
negative ; μὰ ia, no, certainly not ; nothing less. 

2. These and some other particles have in Greek various other 
uses, which require a more accurate’ acquaintance with them than 
can be given here. This is especially true of several particles, which 
have formerly been called expletives, Particulae expletivae. Wecan in- 
deed talk about a usus expletivus ; but must not misapprehend it. In 


- 


§ 149. synTAX.—EXPLETIVE PARTICLES. 431 


all languages there are particles, which are often employed only for the 
sake of completeness, or in order to produce a well-sounding fulness, 
yet never without their own peculiar sense ; although they could also be 
omitted, since that which they express is often understood of itself. In, 
estimating these particles in Greek, peculiar caution is necessary. ‘Their 
full and original meaning has in most cases become partially lost; and 
they: now give to the discourse only a slight colouring, which we can- 
not properly feel except after long acquaintance and practice. For 
this purpose, however, a knowledge of the fundamental significations of 
these particles is necessary ; for which the following may in part serve. 
γέ (enclitic) properly, at least, for which however γοῦν is more usual ; 
while γέ is almost always used wherever a single object or a 
part is named with reference to the whole or to a greater number. 
Hence it is so often appended to ἐγώ (ἔγωγε); by which means one 
always places himself as it were over against all other men ; strictly, 
I at least, I for my part. Not unfrequently it can also be translated 
by certainly, truly, certe. _ ; 
ἄρα (epic ἄρ and ῥά, of which the last is enclitic) always stands after 
other words,* and means (1) most commonly therefore; (2) where 
it seems to be without any power, there lies at the basis the idea 
conformably to nature or custom, properly, ex ordine, rite; hence it 
serves as a transition to a proposition which may be anticipated.— 
(3) After εἰ, ἐάν, etc. it means perhaps. 
The interrogative particle ἄρα, nwm? which stands at the begin- 
ning of a sentence, is different.t 


τοὶ (enclitic) is strictly an ancient Dative for τῷ, and means in conse- 
quence of, therefore, certainly ; which significations however are in toé 
itself extinct, and therefore τοιγάρ, τοιγάρτοι, τοιγαροῦν, are found as 
strengthened forms of them ;---τοίγυν is used when one proceeds with 
an inference etc. as it were, “now I further say,” but now.—The parti- 
cle τοῦ by itself, retains only a sort of confirmatory sense, something 
like our words indeed, forsooth, just, also, yet, etc. 
καιτοί, (1) and truly ; (2) and yet truly, and yet ; (3) although. 
μέντου, (1) indeed, truly, certainly;{ hence (2) but indeed, neverthe- 
less, a more emphatic form for δέ. Υ 
t ἄρα, t ἄρ, (§ 39. η. 8,) are ἄρα strengthened by τοῦ in the poets. 
δή strictly now, at present ; (for which ἤδη is more usual ;) hence it 
serves in various ways to increase the vivacity of discourse ; e.g. aye 
δή come on now ; ti δή ; what then 2—It means also certainly, in truth. 


* When sometimes ἄρα or ἄρ᾽ οὖν stands at the beginning of a clause or sen- 
tence, it is in prose always to be changed to ἄρα», which in such’ cases is an 
interrogative supplying the place of a direct assertion. See Heind. ad Plat. 
Gorg. 27. | 

+ The Attic poets can nevertheless change the quantity, and use aga for 
therefore and ἄρα as an interrogative ; but their position in a sentence remains 
the same. 


t This particle has come from μήν (epic μέν) and ro; comp. § 150. 1. 


432 -  §149. syNTAX.—EXPLETIVE PARTICLES. 


After relatives, e. g. ὅστις δή, ὅπου δή," it serves to render them 
more general, whoever now it may be, wherever now it may be, ete. or 
also some one or other, somewhere or other, I know not where, etc. 

μήν, (Doric μάν, epic μέν and μάν,) a confirmatory particle ; (1) in truth, 
assuredly ; ; (2) but certainly, nevertheless ; e.g. Plat. Soph. 1 χαΐ joe 
Ooxst ϑεὸς μὲν οὐδαμῶς εἶναι, ϑεῖος μήν. : 


γὲ μὴν (epic γὲ μέν) yet certainly, but truly ; a hence it is likewise a 
stronger δέ, See Excurs. I. ad Arat.—xol μήν immo, yea! and in 
contradictions atqut, but yet, nevertheless. 

So in questions which follow a negative of another speaker, 
8. 5. πότε μὴν ; when then? tic μήν; who then? (i.e. when, who else 
then Ne, Hence τἐμήν ; equivalent to why not ?, 


ἦ μήν (Ionic and epic ἢ μέν) is the usual_ formula of oaths and 
affirmations ; sometimes with the Indicative, 7 μὴν ἐγὼ ἔπαϑον τοῦτο 
“1 swear, that I have suffered this ;” and sometimes with the Infini- © 
tive, dependent from other verbs, as ouvuue 9) μὴν δώσειν 6 swear to 
give.” Also in the third person: ὕπεδέξατο ἢ μὴν μὴ ἀπορεῖν αὐτοὺς 
τροφὴς “he undertook, solemnly promised, that they should not want 

- for food.” 


ov μήν, (1) yet not, assuredly 1 not ; (2) as anegative assertion corre- 
sponding to the effirmative 4 ἢ μήν. in dependent clauses, μὴ μήν. 


ϑήν, (enclitic, and peculiar to the Ionic and Doric poets,) also ἃ con- 
firmatory particle, which however gives to the discourse much the 
same tone, as when we say, I thought though ; hence especially in a 
contemptuous and sarcastic sense: ἢ M77, οὔ Dp, but yet though, but 
not thonigh. 


γυ, νῦν, (short and enclitic; only in the Tonic dialect and in the po- 
ets,) strictly the same with vty, for which it also sometimes stands ; 
(2) for ovy therefore, now ; (3) like our expletive now, then, etc. e. g. 
. ϑγητὸς δέ νυ καὶ ov τέτυξαι “ and thou too now art born mortal,” I]. 
π, 622, 
πέρ, (enclitic, and probably derived from zsgé in the sense of very, — 
§ 147. τι. 8,) wholly, entirely ;—hence womeg lit. entirely as,—xaisee 
so very much too, however much, i.e. although; in which sense πέρ 
stands also alone. - 


πότε (enclitic) once, some time or other. In interrogatives it expresses 
surprize, 6. g. Tig ποτὲ ἐστιν οὗτος ; who now can this be? 


mov (enclitic) somewhere ; (2) perhaps; (8) in conversation, when one 
says anything half interrogatively, in order to found something 
upon the answer, yet, but yet, yet Ae See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. 
in voce. 

The same with greater emphasis is δήπου; and when to this 
is joined a tone of half contemptuous defiance, so that the opposite as- 
sertion is represented as inconceivable, this particle becomes δήπου- 
Sev. Dem. Mid. 26 ἑστάναι γὰρ ἐξέσται δήπουϑεν αὑτῷ “for there, I 
think, he is likely to be allowed to stand.” . 


* These are usually written separately ; but so soon as the strengthening ποτέ 
is ep kaads (ἢ 80. n. 1. ὃ 116, 9), they are more commonly all written in one 
word. 


§ 150. syNTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 433 


ᾧ 150. Parricutar Worps anv Purases. 


οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ or ov μέντον ἀλλὰ (comp. ὁ 149. 2) means properly : yet 
no! rather—j; commonly however it stands.for nevertheless, mean- 
while ; sometimes also for rather. 


οὐχ Ore and οὐχ ὅπως. These two forms of expression are often re- 
garded as synonymous, though they are in reality opposed to each oth- 
er. Before each of them some verb like λέγω is to be supplied. When 
the form οὐχ ὅτι then follows, the proposition is affirmative ; 6. g. 
Xen. Mem. I. 9. 8 καὶ οὐχ ὅτι μόνος ὃ Κρίτων ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ jy, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
οἵ φίλοι αὐτοῦ (where μόνος belongs only to Κρίτων). Theophr. οὐχ 
ὅτι ἀνέφυ ἂν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐναυξεστέρας καὶ καλλίους ἐποίησε, “it. would 
not only have sprung up, but also, ete.” Dio. Cass. 42. p. 285 Ζίανειζό- 
μενος οὐχ ὅτι παρὰ τῶν ἰδιωτῶν, ἀλλὰ καὶ παρὰ τῶν πόλεων, “not only 
from private persons, but also from cities.” When this phrase is to 
introduce a negation, this must be already implied in the proposition 
itself; and then it can be rendered still stronger by ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ. De- 
mosth. ο. Timoer. p. 702. 2 οὐχ ὅτι τῶν ὄντων ἀπεστερήμην ἂν, ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἔζην. Thucyd. II. 97 ταύτῃ δὲ (Scytharum potentiae) ἀδύνα- 
τα ἐξισοῦσϑαιν οὐχ ὅτι τὰ ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ ἔϑνος ἕν 
πρὸς ἕν οὐκ ἔστιν x.t.4.—More commonly, when the negative is to 
be expressed, οὐχ ὅπως is used, where consequently ὅπως as, becomes 
equivalent to that not. E.g. Demosth. c. Polyel. 1225. 12 ἡ δὲ γῆ 
οὐχ ὕπως τινὰ καρπὸν ἤνεγκεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ --- — ἐκ τῶν φρεώτων 
ἐπέλιπεν, “not only the earth no fruit,” ete. Xen. Hellen. V. 4. 34 
ἐδίδασκον τὸν δῆμον, ὡς οἵ Aaxsdoudrior οὐχ ὅπως τιμωρήσαιντο, ἀλλὰ 
καὶ ἐπαινέσαιεν τὸν Σφοδρίαν, “ that the Lacedemonians not only would 
not punish,” etc. ib. IL. 4. 14 οὐχ ὅπως ἀδικοῦντες ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐπιδη- 
_ μοῦντες épuyadsvousdo, “having not only not done them any wrong, 
but not having even entered the land, we were banished.” Ovzovy 
(i. 6. οὐκ οὖν see p.429) ὅπως μνησϑῆναι ἄν τις ἐτόλμησε----φλαῦρόν τι, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐν ὀφϑαλμοῖς----β ασιλέως---ἕχαστος διέκειτο. 

Less frequent in the same sense, were οὐχ ὅσον and οὐχ οἷον. 
The former stands for οὐχ ot1,—at least Thucydides uses it with a 
second ov subjoined for the negation, IV. 62 οἵ μὲν οὐχ ὅσον ove 
ἠμύναντο, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐσώϑησαν.---Οὐχ οἷον stands for οὐχ ὅπως. Polyb. 
οὐχ oioy ὠφελεῖν δύναιτ᾽ ἂν τοὺς φίλους, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὺς σώζειν. 

Preceded by μή, both ὅτι and ὅπως must have ὑπολάβῃ τις or the 
like supplied ; or they are to be taken like the Lat. ne dicam. They 
are in this way stronger than with οὐχ, and both have a negative sense. 
Xen. Cyrop. 1.3.10 μὴ ὅπως ὀρχεῖσϑαι ἐν δυϑμῷ ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ὀρϑοῦσϑαι 
ἐδύνασϑε. ib. IIL. 2. 21 οὐκ ἂν ἡμεῖς ἀσφαλῶς ἐργαζοίμεϑα, μὴ ὅτι τὴν 


‘* The example adduced by Viger. VII. 10.5, without citation of the place 
where it-is to be found, οὐχ ὅπως τοὺς wodsuiovs x. τ. Δ. where οὐχ ὅπως stands 
affirmatively for not only, is without doubt spurious. On the other hand the 
example cited by Budaeus (p. 911) from Athenaeus without specification, where 
οὐχ ὅτε is negative (οὐχ ὅτε ἡμῶν τινα προσβλέποντες ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ἀλλήλους) comes 
from an uncertain age. ; 


434 § 150. synNrAx.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 


dé. 


τούτων, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν τὴν. ἡμετέραν. Mem. I. 6. 11 καίτοι τόγε ἱμά- 
τιον ἢ τὴν οἰκίαν οὐδενὶ ἂν μὴ ὅτι προῖκα δοίης, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἔλαττον 
τῆς ἀξίας λαβών. All these constructions are easy to fill out and 
explain. 

When μὴ ὅτι follows, the mode of expression becomes still more 
emphatic, and is then to be given by the Latin nedum, much less, not 
to say. Plat. Cratyl. p. 427 δοκεῖ σου ὑάδιον εἶναι οὕτω ταχὺ μαϑεῖν 
ὁτιοῦν πρᾶγμα, μὴ ὅτι τοσοῦτον ὃ δὴ δοκξϊ ἐν τοῖς μεγίστοις μέγιστον 
εἶναι. Phaedr. p. 240. d, ἃ καὶ λόγῳ ἐστὶν ἀκούειν οὐκ ἐπιτερπὲς μὴ 

. ὅτι δὴ ἔργῳ. Xenoph. Hellen. II. 3. 35 οὐδὲ πλεῖν, μὴ ὅτι ἀναιρεῖ- 
σϑαι τοὺς ἄνδρας δυνατὸν ἢν. In the same sense Lucian uses οὐχ 
ὅπως, e.g. Diall. Mort. 27.5 οὐδ᾽ ἑστάναν χαμαὶ οὐχ ὅπως βαδίζειν 
ἐδύνατο. 

Sometimes a seeming objection is introduced by οὐχ ὅτι, which is 
then immediately (commonly by means of ἀλλα) refuted ; fully : : # not 
that it troubles me—, but—.” If no refutation follows, οὐχ ὅτι can 
be rendered by although, etc. See Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 37. Protag. 66. 


ὅτι μή after negatives, except. 


τὸ δὲ---, an elliptical phrase which it is hard to fill out, and which 
serves to introduce a proposition contrary to what has been before 
said, something like our since nevertheless, but since. See the illus- 
tration in Heind. ad Plat. Theaet. 37. and also mine ad Menonem 37. 


τὸ pi —, more commonly τὸ μὴ οὖ---, with the Infin. equivalent to 
ὥστε μή so as not, that not, quo manus, quin ; see Excurs. 11 ad De- 
᾿ mosth. Mid. p. 142 sq. Comp. also τοῦ μή § 148. n. 9. 


ti often passes over into a modifying, or also into a generalizing parti- 
cle, in some measure, or also in something or other. Hence οὔτι, μήτι, 
not at all; which compounds however can be again separated ; e. g. 
οὔτε τι ἔργα Il. α, 115.—For the Tmesis with this τὶ ne τι) see 
gids n. 10. 


μήτι γε not to say then, much less then, nediusn, probably delved pow 
μὴ ott, Which see above. 


οὐ περί, 6. 5. OU περὸὲ τοῦ τιμωρήσασϑαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τό τιοῦ to speak of 
vengeance (i.e. this is out of the question), but we shall even—” 
Thuc. IV. 63. 


ὅσον. οὐ, ΟΥ̓ ὁσονού, tantum non, only not, i. 6. almosi, 6. 5. TOY μέλλοντα 
καὶ ὁσονοὺ παρόντα πόλεμον “ the impending and only not yet present 
war.” ‘To fill out this mode of expression, we must conceive’ it 
thus: ‘only so much is wanting, as is necessary to make it not a pres- 
~ ent war.’ 


ὅσον by itself stands elliptically with the Infin. in the following manner : 
διένειμεν ἑκάστῳ ὅσον ἀποζὴν “he distributed to each just so much as 
he could: live from.” More fully Thucyd. iit. 49 ἢ προτέρα ναῦς 
ἔφϑασε τοσοῦτον, ὅσον Πάχητα ἀνεγνωχέναι τὸ ψήφισμα “the first 
ship arrived just so much once, that Pachetas had read the decree.” 
ὅσος, ἡ, ον, stands in ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον and similar phrases, as in Lat. mi- 
rum quantum, “so much that it is wonderful,” i. 6. wncommonly much. 
In a similar manner it stands before or after superlatives of quantity, 


§ 150. syNTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 435 


“6.6. πλεῖστα ὅσα, or ὅσα πλεῖστα, quam plurima, exceedingly many. 
See § 151. I. 5. 

ὅσαι ἡμέραν every day, daily, (6. g. Plat. Charm 51. extr.) and so also 

᾿ς ὅσος with other specifications of time. ‘The foregoing is also con- 
tracted, into ὁσημέραι. ; 

ave ὧν stands (δ 143. 5) for ἀντὶ ἐκείνων E—; e.g. λαβὲ τοῦτο ἀνϑ᾽ 
ὧν ἔδωκᾶς μοι, as in English, “take this for what you have given me, " 
instead of for that which. But it is also further used for ἀντὶ τούτου, 
ὅτι---, on this account that, because that; e.g. χάριν σοι οἶδα, ἀνϑ' ὧν 
ἤλϑες, “1 thank thee Avante thou hast come.” 

In the same manner stands 


ἐφ᾽ ᾧ strictly for ἐπὲ τούτῳ, o—, but commonly for ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὡς---: 
and since ἐπί with the Dat. implies a condition, ἐφ᾽. @ means on con- 
dition that—; e.g. λέξω cou ἐφ᾽ ᾧ σιγήσεν “1 will tell it thee on 
condition that thou wilt be silent.” 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε has the same meaning, for é ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ὥστε---, but common- 
ly takes the Infinitive ; 6. g. ἠρέϑησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε συγγράψαι γόμους “ they 
were chosen on condition or with the commission to make laws.” 


ἔστε, (not ἔς τὲ, for it stands for ἐς ors: Dor. στε,) till, so long as; see 
§ 146. 3. 


οἷος before an Infinitive means such that, so constituted that; e. g. οἵ 
πρόσϑεν ὀδόντες πᾶσι ζώοις οἷοι τέμνειν εἰσίν, οἱ δὲ γόμφιοι οἷον παρὰ 
τούτων δεξάμενοι λεαίνειν, “are so arranged that they cut,—that they 
receive from the former and crush ;”—or with the negative, 6. g. ov 
γὰρ ἢν οἷος ἀπὸ παντὸς κερδαίνειν, “he was not such an one as to 
do ting thing for the sake of gain.” 


οἷος τὲ, οἷόστε, means, when Spoken of persons, able; of things, possi- 
ble ; e.g. οἷός τὲ ἐστι πάντ ἀποδεῖξαι “he is able to accomplish all ;” 
ἀλλ οὐχ οἱόντε τοῦτο “but this is not possible.” This form of ex- 
pression differs i in usage very slightly from the preceding one 3 since 
οἷος and οἷός ts are strictly entirely synonymous ; see τό in § 149. 


οἷον εἶκός, as is natural, as one can suppose. , 


’ 


᾿οὐδὲν οἷον, nothing such, i.e. “there is nothing ‘comparable, if— ;” 
French, «il Ll n’y a rien de tel ;” hence e.g. οὐδὲν οἷον ἀκοῦσαι μῶν; 
λόγων αὐτοῦ, 1. 6. “ it is best to hear what he says.” 


ἄλλο, else, is used with a negative or interrogatively in order to strength- 
en assertions ; where commonly there is the omission of some verb- 
al idea. E.g. Xen. Cyrop. I. 4. 24 éxeivos οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ τοὺς πεπτω-- 
κότας περιελαύνων ἐθεᾶτο. Mem. 9. 8. 17 τί γὰρ ὄλλο ἢ κινδυγεύσεις 
ἐπιδεῖξαι, σὺ μὲν χρηστὸς --εἶναι z.T 2. In such connexions, if ἄλλο: 
takes the apostrophe, it commonly also loses its accent; 6. g. Plat. 
Apol. p. 20 δὲ οὐδὲν ἀλλ ἢ) διὰ σοφίαν τινὰ τοῦτο τὸ ὄνομα ἔσχη-- 
κα. Phaedr. Ρ. 231 ὥστε οὐδὲν ὑπολείπεται ἀλλ ἢ ποιεῖν προϑύμως 
ὅ,τι ἂν κι τ.λ. Meno. 9 Ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀλλ ἢ ἐπιτάττεις, “ because thou 
dost nothing else but command. ” Eschin. c. Timarch. ὥστε μηδὲν 
ἀλλ ἢ τὰς αἰσχύνας αὐτῷ περιεῖναι. In this shape this ἀλλ has the 
appearance of the apostrophized form from ἀλλά ; and hence many 
in such cases write ἄλλ. 


436 § 150. synTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 


‘ 


To these same forms of expression belongs also the interrogative 
ἄλλο τι, lit. “is there any thing else than—?” E.g. Plat. Gorg. 81 
εἰ μὲν γὰρ τυγχάνει ταῦτα ἀληϑὴ ὄντα, ἃ λέγεις, ἄλλο τι ἢ ἡμῶν ὃ βίος 
ἀνατετραμμένος ἂν sin; “if this were true, would not then our life be 

destroyed?” In this form of interrogation the particle ἢ is very 
commonly omitted, e.g. Plat. Rep. p. 369, ἀλλο tu γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, 
ὃ δὲ οἰκοδόμος ; “is it not so then—one isa husbandman, the other a 
builder ? : 

From such constructions it arose, that ἀλλ᾽ 7 was used for nist, 
unless, except; e.g. Aristoph. Ran. 1105, Οὐκ ἡπίστανή ἀλλ ἢ μάζαν 
καλέσαι καὶ ῥυππαπαὶ εἰπεῖν. In most cases however there occurs. 
before this ἀλλ 7 an ellipsis of the thought, which cannot well be 
supplied by words; 6. g. Isaeus de Aristarch. Hered. p. 261, 6 νόμος 
οὐκ ἐᾷ THY τῆς ἐπιχλήρου κύριον εἶναι, ἀλλ 4) τοὺς παῖδας --- κρατεῖν τῶν 
χρημάτων. Plat. Phaedr. 89, τέγος μὲν οὖν ἕνεκα κὰν τις, ὡς εἰπεῖν, 
ζῴη, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ τῶν τοιούτων ἡδονῶν ἕνεκα. See also Aristoph. Acharn. 
1119.» 

τἄλλα for τὰ ἄλλα, in other respects, otherwise; e.g. ἔστιν ἄπαις, τἄλλα 
εὐδαιμονεῖ, “ he is childless; in other respects, happy.”—Hence 

ra τὲ adhe —, followed by κα in the next clause, as in other respects,— 
so also especially; 6. 5. τά τε ἄλλα εὐδαιμονεῖ, καὶ παῖδας ἔχει κατηκόους 
αὑτῷ, comp. καί and τέ in § 149.—Hence comes too the elliptic- 
al mode of expression τά te ἄλλα xol—, lit. among other things ; but 
inasmuch as we render thus prominent only that which is distin- 
guished, it is always to be translated particularly, especially. 

ἄλλως τὲ καί — means also especially, and has arisen in the same 
manner as the preceding. 

ἀμφότερον is used by the poets adverbially (or elliptically) where 
we say both; e.g. χώσατο δ᾽ αἰνῶς ᾿Αμφότερον νίχης te καὶ ἔγχεος, 
ὃ ξυνέαξεν. --- With this coincides the case in prose, where the 
Accus. ἀμφότερα comprehends two preceding adjuncts which 
stand in a different case; e.g. διαφέροντες 7] σοφίᾳ 2) κάλλει 1) ἀμφό-- 
tego (Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 3); and so likewise in the correspond- 
ing case with ϑάτερα; e.g. Plat. Leg. 6. p. 765. ε, ἔστω πείϑων 
γνήσιον πατὴρ μάλιστα μὲν υἱέων καὶ ϑυγατέρων, εἰ δὲ μὴ, ϑάτερα, “ or 
if not, yet at least one of the two.” 

ταὐτὸ τοῦτο, τοὐναντίον, τὸ λεγόμενον, and similar parenthetical 

_ words, see in ᾧ 191. η. ὁ. - 
οὗτος, αὕτη, as an exclamation, see in § 76. n. 3. 
nal ταῦτα and that too, and that indeed; e.g. τηλικαύτην παρϑένον ἐν 


* The examples thus collected, shew manifestly, that all these forms of ex- 
pression belong together. The accent should consequently, according to gen- 
eral custom, remain on ἀλλ᾽ unchanged. But the form ἀλλ 4 for nisi is quite ab- 
rupt; especially as in some passages the word ἄλλος occurs just before it; so 
that consequently the ellipsis before ἀλλ᾽ 7 is not clear; e.g. Plat. Apol. p. 34, 
Τίνα ἄλλον λόγον ἔχουσι βοηϑοῦντες ἐμοὶ, ἀλλ᾿ ἢ ὀρϑόν τε “καὶ δίκαιον. For 
this reason the ancient Grammarians seem to have derived ἀλλ 7 from ἀλλώ, 
Since then it has lost the accent here, it is also usual to omit it in such other 
of the above phrases as are connected with this. ; 


§ 150. syNTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 437 


nee eae 


beats ἔϑρεψας, καὶ ταῦτα ἔνοπλον, “so great a maiden (Pallas) hast 
‘thou nourished in thy head, and that too armed !” | 


τοῦτο μέν, τοῦτο δέ, adverbially, § 128. n. 4. 


αὐτῷ, αὐτῇ, etc. with the omission of σύν, always stand for together 
‘with ; so even in Homer, δύω ἵππον αὐτοῖσιν ὕχεσφιν “two horses 
together with the chariot fa and so in all following poets and prose 
writers; e.g. ἀπώλοντο αἵ νῆες αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν “together with 
the men on board.” 


αὐτὸ δείξει, αὐτὸ σημανεῖ, “ the thing itself will shew,” etc. 


πρὸ τοῦ, better προτοῦ, before now, sooner, already, (πρὸ τούτου or ἐκεί-- 
vou τοῦ χρόνου,) see on. Plat. Alcib. I. 14. 


τοῦ λοιποῦ (sc. χρόνου) in future, for the future, comp. ὃ 182. 6, 4. — 
τὸ λοιπόν, or simply λοιπόν, from now on, henceforth. § 131.8. 


πολλοῦ δεῖ Impers. it wants much, it is far from. So also personally, 

πολλοῦ δέω, 1am far from, 6. 5. λέγειν τοῦτο, see the marg. note to 

§ 151. 1.7. Very commonly also we find the Infin. absolutely (§ 140. 

n. 2), πολλοῦ δεῖν, as if “so that much is wanting,” i. 6. not by a great 

deal, assuredly not; e.g. τοῦτο γὰρ πολλοῦ δεῖν εἴποι τις ἄν “for 
this most certainly no one would say.” 

In the same manner, for the contrar ys stands μικροῦ or ὀλίγοῦ δεῖ, 

' δέω, δεῖν, for non multum abest quin, i.e. almost, nearly ; ὀλέγου δέω 

εἰπεῖν “I could almost say.” — Often also ὀλέγου or μικροῦ ones 

alone in this sense. 


περὶ πολλοῦ ἐστί μου, or περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦμαν oF ἡγοῦμαι, T prize 
highly, I make much of, I wish much; so also περὲ πλείονος, περὸὺ 
πλείστου, and for the contrary, περὶ μικροῦ, etc. , 


μᾶλλον δέ, when standing alone,.is to be translated or rather. 


μάλιστα μέν, (with reference to a following εἰ δὲ μή,) before all things, 
best of all, if possible, strictly ‘indeed ; 6. 8. καταγιγνώσκετε αὑτοῦ 
μάλιστα μὲν ϑάνατον, εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἀειφυγίαν, “condemn hini, best of 
all, to death ; but if not, to perpetual banishment.” 

With this eoincides the use of μάλιστα when connected with in- 
terrogatives, where it demands a specific answer: πόσοι μάλιστα; 
“how many then strictly?” With actual numbers however it ex- 
presses their amount (6. g. ἐν tsccaguxorta μάλιστα ἡμέραις) with the 

. conviction indeed that they are correct, probably, surely, certainly ; but 
yet so as toimply that it is not entirely decided; hence therefore πή, 
mov, etc. are frequently subjoined. See Ind. ad Plat. Meno. in v. 
Wessel. ad Herod. 8. 65. 


πώμαλα originally but how then ? *_hence, by no means. 


ἄληϑες, with the accent drawn ‘back, an ironical interrogative reply: 
itane2 really? is it then 803 See-Brunck. ad Aristoph. Ran. 840. 


ὥφελον (non-Attic ὄφελον) strictly, I ought : hence it takes the significa- 
tion of wishing, partly alone, e.g. μήπσε ὥφελον ποιεῖν “had I never 


* Itis far more natural to consider this form as softened down from πῶς 
μάλα, than with the ancient Grammarians to derive it from the unusual Doric πὰ 


for πόϑεν. 
56 


438  ἜἈᾧ 150. synrAx.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 


done this” and partly with ὡς or with εἴϑε or εἶ γάρ, O that, utinam ; 
e.g. ὡς ὥφελες παρεῖναν “ O that thou hadst been present! " εἴ γὰρ 
ὥφελον ϑανεῖν “Ὁ that I had died!” In later writers only it be- 
came an indeclinable interjection. 


ἀμέλει, be unconcerned; hence 1) as anassurance, without. doubt, positively, 
certainly ; 2) in confirmation of a general proposition by a particular 
‘one, and really —. 


οἶσϑα knowest thow? has after it, in formulas of advising and wishing, 
the Imperative with the relative pronoun ; e.g. οἶσϑ' οὖν ὃ δρᾶσον, 
knowest thou then what thou must do 3 


ἔστι stands before relatives of all kinds in the following manner: ἔστιν 
ὅτε est cum, i.e. sometimes ; ἔστιν ὃς est qui, 1.6. some one. So 
even before the Plural, e. g. wat ἔστιν οἵ αὐτῶν ἐτιτρώσκοντο “and 
some of them were wounded ἢ ἔστιν οἷς οὐχ οὕτως ἔδοξεν “ to some 
it did not appear so.” (Still one can also say εἰσὶν οἵ) Xen. Anab, 1. 
ὅ. 7, ny δὲ τῶν σταϑμῶν. οὗς πάνυ μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν, “there were 
some of these day’s-journies which he made very long.” — This ex- 
pression came afterwards to be regarded as. one word, and was even 
- interwoven in the midst of a clause ; 6. g. εἰ γὰρ ὃ τρόπος ἔστιν οἷς 
δυσαρεστεῖ “for if the manner displeases some ;” xéntery δὲ ἐφῆκεν 
ἔστιν ἃ “but he permitted to steal certain things,” Xen. Laced. 2. 
η.---οἵσπερ εἶδον ἔστιν ὕπου “ which 1 have seen somewhere or other.” 
— So also interrogatively, ἔστιν οὕστινας ἀγϑρώπους τεϑαύμακας 
ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ ; “ hast thou perhaps admired certain men for their wis- 
dom?” Xen. Mem. I. 4. 2. ; 


οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως w is impossible, inconceivable, that ; ἡ φιλοπραγμοσύνη, 
Up ἧς οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ἡσυχίαν σχήσει, “the re of strife, on account 
of which it is not possible for him to remain quiet.” Comp. for tq 
ἧς § 147. n. 3. : 


ἔστιν, ἔξεστιν, ἔνεστι, πάρεστι πράττειν, (absolutely or with a Dative 
of the person, ) all signify, one can. But ἔνεστι refers to the physical 
possibility, it is possible ; ἔξεστιν to the moral, it is lawful, permitted, 
one may; ἔστι stands indefinite between the two, tt may be done ;. and. 
likewise πάρεστιν, except that this includes the ideaof facility, ἐξ lies 
with him, i.e. “he can at once, without hindrance.” When ἕξεστιν 
and ἔνεστι are interchanged, this takes place simply on rhetorical 
grounds ; as we also say for the sake of strength, “it is not possible 
for me” instead of “I may not ;’ and “I am permitted” instead of 
“10 is possible for me.” 


εἷς ἔνι. In this phrase ἔνι. stands (by § 117, 8) for ἔνεστι it is possible ; 
hence before superlatives, ὡς ἔνι Loca the most possible, in the 
agent degree. 

ὡς ἕπος ᾿εἰπεῖν, so to ΡΝ, See Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. maj, 1. 


ὡς συνελόντι (se. λόγῳ) εἰπεῖν, or without ὡς (comp. § 140. n. 2), also 
merely συνελόντι, to speak concisely, to say in one word. 


ἐν τοῖς. When these words stand before a superlative, they signify 
omnium, of all, among all, e.g. ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι παρῆσαν οἱ ᾿Αϑηναῖοι 
“the Athenians were the first of all present ;” τοῦτο ἐγὼ ἐν τοῖς βα- 
θύτατα ἂν ἐνέγκαιμυ “1 should bear that the heaviest of or among all.” 


ὃ 150. syNTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PARASES. 439 


—If one would resolve this construction, some participle must 
always be supplied after ἐν τοῖς, such as the context suggests ; 
thus in the first example above, ἐν τοὺς παροῦσιν, in the second ἐν τοῖς 
βαρέως φέρουσιν αὐτός. We must therefore be upon our guard, in 
cases where the superlative is an adverb, as here in the second ex- 
ample, not to construe thus : ἐγὼ τοῦτο ἂν ἐνέγκαιμι ἐν τοῖς βαρύτατα 
φέρουσιν αὐτό, which would give a feebler sense (“I should be one 
of them who bear it most hardly”), and is incorrect, as those instances 
shew, where this cannot be applied; asin ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι.---- ΤῊ 15 ἐν 
τοῖς stands even before the Feminine, e. . 5. ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσταν νῆες παρ᾽ 
αὑτοῖς ἐγένοντο, Thuc. ἢ στάσις ἐν τοῖς πρώτῃ sical id. 
oi ἀμφί, or οἱ περί, with an Accusative, e. g. οὗ ἀμφὶ “Avutoy, usually 
means not merely “those who are with or about him,” but: “ Anytus 
with those about him, his companions,” etc. οὗ ἀμφὲ Θαλῆν, “Thales 
and other wise men of his sect,” Plat. Hipp. maj. 2. The Attics 
especially avail themselves-of this indefinite expression, even where 
they wish to speak chiefly only of the one person, leaving it from 
some cause or other doubtful, whether it really concerns only this one 
or not. Thus of ἀμφὲ Εὐϑύφρονα (Plat. Cratyl. 36) means indeed 
Euthyphron, but still with the implication that there may perhaps 
also be others belonging to his party and opinion ; οὗ aug Θεμιστο- 
κλέα (Plat. Meno. sub fin.) “the Themistocles” (Plural); further οὗ 


ΠΝ 


περὶ Κέκροπα (Xen. Mem. III. 5. 10) only Cecrops, where however . 


the obscurity of the ancient fable seems to be alluded to. 
εἰ μὴ Ova—, with the Accusative, lit. yf not on account of, i. 6. were tt not 


for; hence e.g. xai ἀπέϑανεν ἂν εἰ μὴ διὰ tov κύνα “he would have 


died, had it not been for his dog.” See also the example in § 139. 
n. 4. 


μεταξύ between, in the midst of. This gta usually stands as an adverb 
before a participle in this manner: μεταξὺ περιπατῶν, as he was walk- 
ing ; μεταξὺ δειπνοῦντα ἐφόνευσεν αὐτόν, he murdered. him wHiLE he 
was at supper; inter ambulandum, inter coenandum. 


ἕνεκα very often has the meaning 80 far as it concerns, 80 far as a de- 
pends on; 6. 5. ἄνευ τοῦ ἡλίου, ἕνεκα τῶν ἑτέρων ἄστρων νὺξ ἂν ἣν asi 

᾿ “without the sun, so far as the other stars are concerned, it would be 
always night.” Hence, ἀργυρίου ἕνεκα “if only money is con- 
cerned ;” τούτου ys ἕνεκα, “if it concerns only that, if there is 
nothing further ;” see Heind. ad Plat. Charm. 14. 


ἅμα, and in the _apodosis καί, 80 soon as, when,—then, etc. 6. g. ἅμα 
ἀκηχόαμέν TL καὶ τριηράρχους καϑίσταμεν “SO soon as we have heard 
anything (sc. of the enemy), we will then appoint captains of the 
ships.”—Also construed like μεταξύ, 6. 8: ἅμα ταῦτ᾽ εἰπὼν ἀνέστη “as 
he said this he stood up.” 


πολλάκις has in suppositions and questions the meaning perhaps, forte ; 
fully, “as it often happens,” Heind. ad Plat. Phaedo. 11. Ind. ad 
‘ Plat. Meno. ete. 

6 ἀεί. When this phrase stands before ranean ie sé Means in every 
time, in every case, always; 6. δ. 6 ast ἠδικημένος, “he who in every 


440 © § 150. syNTAX.-—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 


instance (i. 6. so often as the: supposition has place) suffers injustice ;” οὗ 
ast ἄρχων “the archon for the time being.” 


φοοῦδος has no other construction whatever, than that of being con- 
strued as a verb, with the omission of εἶναι : he is gone, has disap- 
peared ; 8. 8. φροῦδος γὰρ ὃ ἀνήρ for the’ man is off; φροῦδα πάντα all 
is over! Comp. § 129. ΡΒ ΚΑ 

ἀρξάμενος, e.g. ἀπὸ σοῦ ἀρξάμενος lit: beginning from (or with) thee ; 
hence and thou first of all, thou before all. In this mode of expression 
the participle is always connected with the principal object spoken 
of. E. g. ἔστιν ὅστις ᾿᾿ϑηναίων, ἀττὸ σοῦ ἀρξάμενος, μᾶλλον δέξαιτ᾽ 
ἂν δοῦλος γενέσθαι ἢ δεσπότης ; “is there a single one of the Atheni- 
ans, and | thou most of all, who would rather be slave than master ?” 
πᾶντες οὗτοι ἀπὸ τῶν ἡρώων, ἀρξάμενον οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἔψεξεν ἀδικίαν. 
See Ind. ad Meno. etc. in ν. Heind. ad Plat. Gorg. 60. 


μέλλειν, to be about to do, to be on the point of; aGreek auxiliary verb 
before the Infinitive, by means of which the action, regarded from the 
time indicated by the verb, is placed in the future. Thus μέλλω ποιεῖν 
Iam about to do, leaving it undetermined whether this.comes from 
my own will (I intend), or not (shall, am destined); ἤμελλον πάσχειν 
“1 was (then) about to suffer.” The difference between the Present 
and the Aorist of the subjoined Infinitive, lies here again in the dura- 
tion or transientness of the action. ‘But very commonly, by a sort of 
pleorhane usage, the Fut. Infin. is employed ; 6. g. Dem. Mid. 21 
“and all this he did in presence of persons οὗ αὑτὸν ἐπαινέσεσϑαι 
μετὰ ταῦτα ἤμελλον, qui eum erant laudaturi,” where we must say more 
Siroustansially, “of whom he could presume, that they would praise 
-him.”—Out of this natural signification of the verb arise two others, 
which must not be confounded : (1) the hypothetical, conjectural, e. g. 
Hom. οὕτω που Au μέλλει---φἷλον εἶναι, Where we also make use of our 
auxiliary will, “thus then will it be agreeable to Jove ;” (2) the signi- 
fication to delan y, i.e. to be always about to do, always intend. 


τὶ δ᾽ ov μέλλει; τὶ δ᾽ οὐκ ἔμελλε; why shall he not 2 why should he 
not? i. 6. most certainly, asswredly.—But also without the negative the 
signification comes to the same thing: ti μέλλει ; lit. what (then) shall 
be 2 hence, sake not? certainly. Heind. ad Plat. Hipp. maj. 17., 
ἔρχεσϑανι and cevoe with the Part. Fut. to be about to, to intend, like our 
Eng. to go; hence e. g. ὅπερ 7a ἐρῶν, ce que jallois dire, what I was 
going to say. , % 
ἐϑέλευν (but never Sélew) when followed by‘an Infin. must very’ often’ 
- ἀνθ ed as an adverb before a finite verb, willingly, voluntarily ; 


P g. δωρεῖσϑαι ἐθέλουσι, lit. “they are willing to make presents” i. 6.- 


x3 «they willingly make presents,” Xen. Hier. VII. 9; Κύρῳ ἴσμεν 
- ἐθελήσαντας πείϑεσθαι τοὺς usv—Cyrop. 1. 1. 3, where the Part. 
stands merely on account of ἴσμεν by § 144. 4. ὃ —consequently 3 ἴσμεν 
ὅτι ἠϑέλησαν πείϑεσϑαι, that they voluntarily obeyed—Comp. the 


similar case with the verb τ Sables etc. construed with a Participle, 
, §144. Ἢ; 8. 


φϑάνειν to come before, anticipate. This verb, besides its simple use, 


§ 150. syNTAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 441 


has a threefold construction and signification, which must first of all 

. be clearly distinguished. ͵ 
1) In a positive proposition with the participle of the principal 
verb (ὃ 144. n. 8), it means to do before, sooner than, another ; or be- 
fore something else can take place ; ; 6. 5. ἔφϑασα αὐτὸν mugehbey “J 
arrived earlier than he ;” ἔφϑην ἀπιών “1 went away before.” Hence 

to do in haste, e. g. Barna: LIE 78 φϑάνγεν τὰ τόξα κατελόμενος. 


2) In a negative proposition with a participle, and connect- 
ed by καὶ with the following clause, it means no sooner — than; 
6. δ. om ἔφϑημεν Portes καὶ νόσοις ἐλήφϑημεν (Isocr.) “we had no 
sooner arrived, than we were seized by illness ;” i. e. in one and the 
same moment we arrived and were taken ill; ; οὐκ ἔφϑησαν ὑμᾶς 
καταδουλωσάμενονι καὶ πρώτου αὐτοῦ φυγὴν κατέγνωσαν (id.) “they 
had no sooner subdued you, than they ἀνπνήνῦσο him first.” Comp. 
ὅμα above. é 

3) In a negative sentence with the participle expressed or implied, 
but without any further necessary connexion, ov φϑάνγειν is used 
for to be ready, not to fail ; and thus imparts to the verbal action ex- 
pressed by the participle the accessory idea of certainty and ye dpaateanie 
In this sense it never occurs except in the Optative with ἄν ;* and (1) 
instead of the Imperative: οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις λέγων “be ready, fail not, 
to tell us,” 1, 6. tell us at once; (2) as confident prediction, promise, 
etc. 6. 5. οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοιμι (in answer to a challenge) “I will not fat, 
Tam ready ;” οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοι ἀποϑήσκων “he will not fail to die,” i. e. 
will not escape death ; 3 εὖ οὖν μὴ τιμωρήσεσϑε τούτους, οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοι 
τὸ πλῆϑος τούτοις τοῖς ϑηρίοις δουλεῦον “if then ye do not punish 
these, the multitude will inevitably be in slavery to these beasts.”— 
It is as obvious as it is singular, that this negative form of expression 
coincides with the affirmative one, in (1) above. In order to explain 
this contradiction, we may probably best assume, that οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις 
is strictly an interrogative phrase, which was used instead of an ani- 
mated Imperative (wilt thou not instantly— 3), and thus in daily usage 
by ak id lost its interrogative tone ; whence also i in the poets the. 
ov stands | ast, 6. g. Eurip. Heracl. 721 φϑόάγοις δ᾽ ἂν ov—. So soon 
now as οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις became equivalent to a direct Imperative, it 
was very natural to say in the same sense οὐχ. ἂν φϑάνοιμν and ovx 
ἂν φϑάνοι. In this way the sense became indeed imperceptibly in- 
verted ; but we find the same fact in all inferences beginning with 
οὐκοῦν, where this is not interrogative ; ; for precisely as οὐκοῦν ἄπειμι 
“is synonymous with ἄπειμι. οὖν, so also is οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοιμι ποιῶν κέ ἐν 
nonymous with φϑάνοιμ᾽ ἂν ποιῶν. 


εἶναι. This Infinitive seems to be superfluous in some ἜΝ in 
Attic writers, especially in ἑχὼν εἶναν (originally probably a fuller 
phrase, “so that I am unconstrained”), if it depends on me, of my own 
accord, etc. ovx ἂν ἑχὼν εἶναι wevdoiuny “I would not intentionally 
116," - 


Different from this is εἶναν in τὸ yur εἶναι, for now, for the present ; 


* The single instance adduced by mony without the ini isa muti- 
lated example belonging under 2. 


ᾷ - 


‘ 


442° δ 150. syNrAX.—PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES. 


τὸ τήμερον sive yonooued” αὐτῷ for to-day we will use, etc. See on 
the phrases which belong here, Reiz. ad Viger. n. 178. ed. Herm. 
ἔχειν with an adverb means lit. to have one’s self, i.e. to find one’s self, be 
circumstanced ; but can generally be translated by the verb to be, e.g. 
καλῶς ἔχει tt is well; ὡς size as he was (i 6. undressed), Often with 
a L qualifying Genitive, e.g. ὡς εἶχε μορφῆς (in or asto shape); ὡς τάχους 
εἶχον, εἵποντο, lit. “they followed as they were as to swiftness,” 1. 6. 
they followed. as speedily as their nature admitted.- So also before 
prepositions, 6. g. ἀμφὲ τὴν κάμινον ἔχει τὰ πολλά “he is commonly 
about the fireplace 3” ob ἀμφὶ γὴν ἔχοντες the husbandmen; πυϑόμενον 
τὸν περὶ τὸ ἱρὸν ἔχοντα γόμον “the law respecting the temple,” Herod. 
II. 113.—In the poets ἔχειν stands sometimes in like manner be- 
fore adjectives and pronouns, Θ. ὃ. ἔχεν ταὺτόν it is the same thing 
pute: Orest. 308 § ἔχ᾽ ἥσυχος id. Med. 550. 


ἔχειν forms also sometimes with the participle of the ἜΝ 
an emphatic circumlocution ; 6. g. πάλαι ϑαυμάσας ἢ ἔχω (for ϑαυμάξω) 
I have long wondered—; Soph. El. 590 τοὺς παΐδας ἐκβαλοῦσ᾽ ἔχεις 
thow hast cast off thy children s ; Plat. Alc. II. 5 διειληφότες ἔχουσι. See 
Valck. ad Phoeniss. 712. Herm. ad Viger. num. 183. Here ἔχειν 
corresponds in a certain measure to the Eng. auxiliary have. 


ἔχων is subjoined to the second person of some verbs, as [ληρεῖν, φλυ- 
αρεῖν, παΐζειν, in order as it. were to bring them home more to the 
, feelings ; much as we would say: “thou wilt but have thy jest,” 
παίζεις ἔχων :—“thou only makest thyself sport,” ληρεῖς Ἑ ἔχων. ‘The 
origin of this is easily recognized in the interrogative form, 6. g. τὸ 
ἔχων JvortgiBec; lit. “what hast thou then that 1 thou so delayest ?” 
‘shorter, “why delayest thou so then ?” Comp. Ruhnk. ad Tim. 257. 
Brunck. ad Arist. Thesm. 473, Herm. ad Vig. num. 228. 


ti παϑὼν and ti wadwy are both expressions of displeasure and cen- 
sure, instead of the feebler τί (why?) alone. _The former is to be 
explained by the phrase in Aristophanes, οὗτος, τέ πάσχεις ; thou 
there, what has come over thee, what has got into thee? So then also. 
e.g. ti παϑὼν ἐλευϑέρους τύπτεις; “what has got into thee, to 
beat those who are free ?” This rather coarse expression therefore 
refers originally to fits of passion approaching even to insanity. — In 
an analogous manner is the other also to be explained, which is more 
ironical: τί μαϑὼν —, “what hast thou learnt so wise ?” i. 6. what 
hast thou taken into thy head ? — what has got into thy head? see 
Wolf ad Demosth. Lept. p. 348. Further, as we have just seen above 
that from the interrogative τὐ ἔχων has come the direct ἔχων, so 
likewise we here find μαϑών without interrogation, but only with ὅτι; 
6.8. Plat. Apol. 26, τί ἄξιός εἰμι ἀποτίσαι, ὅτι μαϑὼν ἐν τῷ Big 
οὐχ ἡσυχίαν εἶχον ; where in μαϑών there clearly lies the idea of 
considerate purpose: “what punishment do I merit, who 80 inten- 
tionally, in my whole life, had no rest.” If now one would supply the 
object omitted after μαϑών, it would perhaps be something thus : 
ὅτι, μαϑὼν οὐκ oid ὅ,τι, ἡσυχίαν οὐκ εἶχον. But it is by no means 
to be supposed, that the full sense of μαϑών, as here developed, 
was in every single instance present to the mind of the speaker ; 


- 2 


΄ 


§ 151. synrax.—ATTRACTION. 443 


this or something similar was only the origin of the expression, and 
ὅτι μαϑών became then only a more emphatic ὅτι. Comp. the 
other examples in Heind. ad Plat. Euthyd. 30. Compare also in 
Herodot. III. 119, tive ἔχουσα yrouny— εἵλευ x. τ. 2. which is noth- 
ing more than a softer ti μαϑοῦσα; how comest thou —? ete.* 


φέρων seems also to be superfluous in some phrases; but it always 
expresses a free and decided propensity connected with an action, not 
however without censure; e.g. ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις 
“he delivered himself up at once to the Thebans,” A®schin. p. 482. 
-Reisk. εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα “to this state he 
has unceasingly brought affairs,” id. p. 474. Comp. Herm. ad Vig. 
num. 228, 


ᾧ 151. Ipromaric Forms or Construction. 


I. Attraction. 


1. Although we have already particularly treated of the two principal 
cases of attraction (δὲ 142, 143), they nevertheless deserve to be here 
brought together under one point of view; since both of them, together 
with some other instances occurring in single phrases, have manifestly a 
common principle as the basis. -'There existed, especially among the At- 
tics, a strong propensity, to which indeed they often sacrificed the strict 
rules of logic, for introducing everywhere a rounded conciseness. For this 
end they sought as much as possible, where two clauses or propositions 
were closely connected, not merely to let them immediately follow one an- 
other, but to concentrate both into one. Hence the frequent use of partici- 
ples, even in cases where the nature of the sentence seems to require a dif- 
ferent construction ; see § 144, 2. ᾿ 


2. But participles could not everywhere be employed. The construc- 
tion with the relative was also necessary, which consists of two proposi- 
tions following one another. In order now to give to these the shape of 
one proposition, the pronoun of the last was made common to both, by 
attaching it, as to form, to the first, while in its nature it remained a part of 
the second. E.g. in the sentence μεταδίδως τοῦ σίτου οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις, 
the Genitive οὗπερ causes the whole of the second clause to become a sort 
of adjective qualifying oftov; and it is only an indulgence of our own 
habits and preconceived notions, when we separate such clauses by a 
comma, which the Greeks so evidently drew together into one. 


* Since it is apparent, that the three phrases of censure, τέ ἔχων, τί παϑών, TE 
pod, are essentially the same, and are to be explained in the same manner, 
we may therefore regard that as the most natural explanation of ὅτε μαϑών 
which, without robbing ozz of its natural connective power, regards μαϑών thus 
left standing alone, in the same manner as ἔχων standing alone. For this rea- 
-son I cannot alter the above paragraph, notwithstanding all that has since been 
said upon this phrase; all of which I have well considered. Were I disposed 
to change anything, it would be merely so far as not to be at the pains of sup- 
plying the omission after wadviv, but simply to represent the matter thus; viz. 
that in the phrases τί ἔχων διατρίβεις ; τί μωϑὼν προσέγραψας τοῦτο ; only the 
general-sense of the participle was felt, without a clear consciousness of its 
grammatical construction ; and therefore it was transferred also to other construc- 
tions, where it does not indeed stand with grammatical accuracy, but was em- 
. ployed in order to impart the same tone which exists in these interrogatives. 


‘ 


444 Y § 16]. SYNTAX.—ATTRACTION. 


3. Whenever further, the subject of the Infinitive has already been 
mentioned with the preceding verb, there thus arises a connexion in the 
sense, which the Greek endeavoured to rendered perceptible also in the 
Jorm. He melted down, therefore, as it were, both verbs, so far as the 
thought is concerned, into one compound (ὑπέσχετο “ποιήσειν, ἔξεστι γενγέ-- 
oSat) ; and by causing all that belonged to the subject of the Infinitive 
to be attracted to the subject of the first verb, he produced the appear- 
ance of a single proposition ; ;as ὃ ἀγὴρ ὑπέσχετο ποιήσειν τοῦτο αὐτός, 
-τἕξεστι wou γενέσϑαι εὑ 6 aiuovt,—which we in like manner most in- 
appropriately separate by a comma. 


4. If now this principle of attraction be rightly comprehended, it will 
be found that many other modes of expression have their origin in it. Of 
these we will adduce the most important. First of all, the instances 
where the preceding word or antecedent, is attracted by the following 
relative; e.g. Xen. Ven. I. 10, Meléayoos δὲ τὰς τ ιμὰς ἃ ς ἔλαβε, 
φανεραί. Here the proposition is: αἵ τιμαὶ, ἃς" M. ἔλαβε, φανεραί (εἰσιν). 
But since in consequence of the antithesis it was necessary to place - 
the one subject (1. δὲ) first, this occasioned the other subject through the 
attraction of the relative ἃς to be put in the Accusative. ᾿ Plato. Meno. 
80, ” Byswe εἰπεῖν ἄλλου ὁτουοῦν πράγματος, οὗ οἵ φάσκοντες 
διδάρκαλοι εἰ εἶναν ὁμολογοῦνται οὐκ ἐπίστασϑαι τὸ πρᾶγμα; Here it would 
strictly stand, ἔχεις εἰπεῖν ἄλλο ὅτιοῦν πρᾶγμα, οἱ x. τ. λ. “Canst thou 
name to me any other thing whatever, the professed teachers of which 
are generally acknowledged not to understand it?” But the relative οὗ, 
draws all the preceding Accusatives along with it into the Genitive. See 
further ad Plat. Meno. 41. Heind. ad Plat. Lys. 40. To this neglect of the 
true construction the Greek ear had become accustomed, through those 
instances where merely a pronoun ‘or some general idea like ἄλλος or 
ἕτερος comes before the relative, and where therefore this attraction is 
more easily. comprehended ; e.g. Xen. Hier. VII. 2, ταῦτα ποιοῦσι τυράν-- 
yor καὶ ἄλλον OVTLY O τιμῶσι, Where hated of ἄλλον the Dative 
ought to stand, “and to every other whom ;” Demosth. pro Cor. p. 230, 
16 ἑτέρῳ δ᾽ rip κακόν τι δώσομεν ζητεῖν, i.e. ἕτερον δὲ ζητεῖν, pried 
These instances could indeed be explained by a slight inversion : ζητεῖ», 
ὅτῳ ἑτέρῳ κακόν τι δώσομεν, ---- ποιοῦσι τυράννοις καὶ (ἑκάστῳ), ὃ γ-- 
τινα ἄλλον τιμῶσιν... But the analogy of other instances requires us to 
explain these by attraction,— especially of those where the attracted word is 
πᾶς, e.g. Xen. Hell. I. 4.2, «Ἰακεδαιμόνιοι πάντων ὧν δέονται πεπραγότες εἰσίν. 
| Here the explanation by inversion could be admitted only with unnatu- 
ral harshness, and the attraction (instead of 4. πεπραγότες siot πάντα ὧν 
δέονται) is consequently clear.—T'o the same attraction belongs also the 
phrase ovdevt ὅτῳ οὔ, cited above in § 148. n. 8. — The same attraction 
acts likewise on wilterts, inasmuch as it exchanges the correlatives of th 


different columns (§ 116), with one another 5 8. δ. Plat. Crito. 4 πολλαχοῦ. ‘ 


μὲν γὰρ καὶ ἄλλοσε ὅποι ἂν ἀφίκῃ, ᾿ἀγαπήσουσί σε, for πολλαχοῦ 
— ἀλλαχοῦ, ὅποι ---, or πολλαχοῦ —, ὅπον ἄλλοσε ἂν ἀφίκῃ. 

5. Hence it clearly appears, that all those phrases where an.expres- 
sion of surprize or amplification seems to be strengthened by means of a 
subjoined relative, are to be explained solely through this attraction. 


Thus when it is said (comp. § 150) ϑαυμαατὸν ὅσον προυχώρησε, this is, 


: 


- § 151. syNTAX.—ATTRACTION. 445 


strictly to be so taken: ϑαυμαστὸν (éotiv), ὅσον προυχώρησεν, “ it is won- 
derful how far he is advancéd.” But when the relative stands in 
any other form, the preceding word also passes over into the same ; as 
the Neut. ϑαυμαστόν into the Fem, e.g. ϑαυμαστὴ oon 7 προχώρησις. αὖ- 
τοῦ, where the proposition can also be inverted : ἦν δὲ ἢ προχώρησις αὐτοῦ 
ϑαυμαστὴ ὅση. From this the form was adopted also into other ee ae 
which can no longer be 50 well, nor even at all, resolved ; 6, 8. ἀλλ᾽ 
περὶ αὐτὸν ὄχλος ὑπερφυὴς ὅσος, Aristoph. Plut. 760. --ἴδωκεν αὐτῷ aya 
ὅσα, etc. But when the relative word is the adverb ὡς, the same adj ectives 
are attracted by it even into the adverbial form; 6. g. from ϑαυμάσιον 
(gotiy), ὡς ἄϑλιος γέγονε, comes ϑαυμασίως ὡς ἄϑλιος γέγονεν, and in the 
Same manner ὑπερφυῶς we, and the like. And this representation is con- 
firmed by the actual occurrence of the unchanged form; e. g. Herod. 
Til. 113, ἀπόζει-----ὡἡεδσπέσιον ὡς ἡδύ. 


6. It is an attraction of a different kind, when to such words as οἶδα, 
ἀκούω, λέγω, not. followed by an Accus. with the Infinitive, the subject 
of the following verb is subjoined asan object in the Accusative; e. g. οἶδα 
γῆν, ὁπόση ἐστί, for οἶδα, ὃ ὅπόση ἐστὶ γῆ, | lit. “T know the earth how great 
it is. .”—Aristoph. Pac. 603, εἰ Bovisod’ ἀκοῦσαι τήνδ᾽ , δπὼς ἀπώλετο, for 
ἀκοῦσαι, ὅπως ἥδε ἀπώλετο. See also an example i in § 138 note. Compare 
ad Plat. Meno. 27.—This species of attraction is indeed wholly different 
from the preceding ones, since there remain two clauses; and instead of 
the proper case in its natural connexion we only find a new one, after 
which, however, we must again supply the original word in thought. But 
nevertheless the γῆ is manifestly attracted by the οἶδα ; and thus it is ef- 
fected, that out of two propositions which merely stood in juxtaposition, are 
formed two propositions interwoven with éach other, and therefore approach- 
_ ing nearer to unity ; especially when they are arranged in the following 
. manner : γὴν ὁπόση ἐστὸν εἰδέναι (Xenoph.) “to know how great the earth 
is ;” τοῦτον οὐδ᾽ εἰ γέγονεν ἤδειν (Demosth. Mid.) “as to this person I did 
not even know whether he existed.” 


7. It is further to be reckoned as attraction, when certain adjectives 
with ἐστίν, instead of standing in the Neuter, take in like manner the sub- 
ject of the following verb as their own subject. This is most striking in 
the case of δίκαιος. From δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ἐμὲ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, comes 
δίκαιός εἶμι τοῦτο ποιεῖν, lit. “1 am right to do this,” for “it is ight, for 
me, or my duty, to do this ;’ Demosth. pro Cor. τούτου τὴν αἰτίαν οὗτός 
ἐστι δίκαιος ἔχειν, “it is right, that the fault of this should lie on him ;” 
. Xen. Cyrop. IV. 1. 20 δίκαιος εἶ ἀντιχαρίζεσϑαι ἡμῖν, “it is right that thou 
ρηβφαρ, be again complaisant towards us.” The same is the case with 
ἄ Fvoc. Cyrop. V. 4.20 "Akvol ye μέντοι ἐσμὲν τοῦ γεγενημένου πράγματος 
τούτου (of a misfortune which happened through inconsiderateness) ἂπο- 
᾿“λαῦσαί τι ἀγαϑὸν, τὸ μαϑεῖν κιτ..}. not “ we deserve,” but for ἄξιόν ἐστιν “it 
is proper.”*—Such adjectives as δῆλος, φανερός, take then after them the suc- 
ceeding verb as a participle ; 8. δ. Dem. Mid. 9, ἔστι δὲ ἐκεῖνο οὐκ ἄδηλος 
ἐρῶν, for οὐκ ἄδηλόν ἐ ἐστιν, αὐτὸν ἐρεῖν ἐκεῖνο, “it is manifest, that he will 


* Precisely in the ‘same manner arose out of πολλοῦ δεῖ, & ἐμὲ ποιεῖν, * it wants 
much that [ do it,’ the more common στολλοῦ δέω ποιεῖν, “1 am far from do- 
ing it.” 

57 


446 § 151. SYNTAX.—ANACOLUTHON. 


say this ;” or also with ὅτι, see Sturz Lex. Xenoph. in δῆλος, p. 660. b. extr. 
In all these instances, in order to form one proposition, the subject of the 
principal proposition attracts the general adjective to itself. 


8. Finally, it belongs also to attraction, when an adjunct or relation 
properly belonging to the noun, is so. attracted by the verb, as to be 


changed into one belonging to the latter; thus the local relation where — 


into that of whence, e.g. 6 @xet Fev mbdoiles; δεῦρο ἥξει, “ the war which 
is now there (thence) will come hither.” In Thuc. V. 35, the Lacedemo- 
nians démand, that the Athenians shall draw off their ‘adherents from 
Pylos, ὥσπερ px αὐτοὶ τοὺς ἀπ ὸ Θρῴᾷκης “50 as they also their troops ὑπ 
(from) Thrace.” Theophr. Char. 11. 4, ἄρας τι τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης. 
So also into the relation whither ; Herod. VIL. 33, ἐς τοῦ ,“Πρωτεσίλεω τὸ 
ἱρὸν, τὸ ἐς ᾿Ελαιοῦντα (for τὸ ἐν ᾿Ελαιδῦντι), ἀγινεομένας. See Heind. ad 
Plat. Gorg. 61. ad Phaedon. 2 et 57; where also other relations (with 
ὑπέρ, sot) are pointed out in the same connexion. 


II. Anacohithon. 


1. The Anacoluthon (ἀνακόλουϑον) is a construction, of which the end 
does not grammatically correspond to the beginning; and which is never- 
theless intentionally employed by writers. Here, however, the learner 
must be cautioned, not too lightly to explain a passage, as is often done, 
by means of the anacoluthon, so soon as it is only somewhat unusual, or 
where perhaps it has been corrupted by transcribers. Every anacolu- 
thon must be regarded as suspicious, the origin of which cannot be nat- 
urally accounted for in the fact, that the speaker gains by it, either in 
conciseness, or in perspicuity and smoothness, or in emphasis. 


2. The usual form of the anacoluthon appears, where the speaker 
commences a period in the manner naturally required by the preceding 
discourse ; but afterwards, especially after parenthetical clauses, through 
which the hearer may easily have forgotten the commencement of the 
construction, passes over into a new construction. E. g. Plat. Apol. 
Ρ. 19. e, τούτων ἕκαστος οἱόστ ἐστὶν, iwy εἰς ἑκάστην τῶν πόλεων, τοὺς νέους, 
οἷς ἔξεστι τῶν ἑαυτῶν πολιτῶν προῖκα ξυνεῖναι ᾧ ἂν βούλωνται, τούτους πείϑου- 
συ--- σφίσι ξυνεῖναι. Here τούτων at the beginning refers to several pre- 
ceding names of Sophists; and both the progress of the discourse and 
emphasis required that the new period should thus commence: “ Each of 
these has it in his power to persuade the young men, ete.” In this way 
consequently after oioct ἐστίν the Infinitive πείϑειν would have been re- 
quisite. But farther on, since the mention of the youth intervenes with 
circumstances which the contrast made necessary, (“the youth to whom 


it was permitted to have free intercourse with such of their fellow citizens 


as they chose,”) the writer forsakes the first construction, the grammatical 
connexion of which has now become obscure, and finds it more natural to 
refer back with another τούτους to the γέους, and so begin a new construc- 
tion : τούτους πείϑουσιυ--- i.e. those Sophists persuade the young men. 

3. Another example is Plat. Phaedr. 17. (p. 207. Heind.) τοιαῦτα “γὰρ ὃ 
ἔρως ἐπιδείκνυται" δυστυχοῦντας μὲν ἃ μὴ λύπην τοῖς ἄλλοις παρέχει, ἀνιαρὰ 
ποιεῖ »ομέζειν" εὐτυχοῦντας δὲ καὶ τὰ μὴ ἡδονῆς ἄξια παρ᾽ ἐκείνων ἐπαίΐγου 
᾿ ἀναγκάζειν τυγχάνειν. “Such things are wrought by love: the unfortu- 


f 


§ 151. synrax.—anacouurnon. 447 


nate it makes regard as griévous that which causes no pain to others ; 
the fortunate—” (but here the writer will express the antithesis forcibly) 
“it necessitates that even indifferent objects should receive from 
them praise.” Strict logic, however, demanded that the second clause 
should be given thus: mag εὐτυχούντων dé—, but this would have de- 
stroyed the symmetry: δυστυχοῦντας μὲν---, παρ᾿ εὐτυχούντων δὲ---. But 
"neither symmetry nor emphasis does the Greek writer sacrifice so lightly 
to logic; he leaves the Accus. εὐτυχοῦντας, which the analogy of the first 
clause required, standing as an Accus. absolute, and then refers back 
through zag ἐκείνων to the same object, in order to bring out the forcible 
conclusion ἐπαίνου ἀναγκάζει τυγχάνειν. Want of perspicuity can be oc- 
casidned in this way only for us, who are not accustomed to such transi- 
tions from one construction to another. 


4. Still more apparent is the cause of the shorter anacoluthon, in ca- 
ses like the following: Plat. Alcib. I. p. 134. e, ᾧ γὰρ ἂν ἐξουσία μὲν ἡ ποι-- 
εἴν 0 βούλεται, νοῦν δὲ μὴ ἔχῃ, th εἰκὸς συμβαίνειν ; Here two propositions 
depend on one relative, and each of them requires it to be in a different case ; 
but actually to write it twice (@ μὲν---ὃς δὲ--- would injure both the symmetry 
and perspicuity. ‘The period is rendered far more close and solid by meansof 
the anacoluthon, in which the writer subjoins the second proposition in the | 
Same manner, as if the relative had preceded in the Nominative; which 
every one immediately sees from the nature of the second clause: μοῦν δὲ 
μὴ ἔχη. So also Plat. Phaedo. p. 22. d, ἐκεῖνου οἷς τι μέλεν τῆς ἑαυτῶν ψυχῆς, 
ἀλλὰ μὴ σώματα πλάττοντες Caowv.—When the second clause presupposes 
the relative in an oblique case, (6. g. Hom. ‘Qu ἔπι πόλλ᾽ ἐμόγησα, δόσαν δὲ 
μοι υἷες ᾿Αχαιῶν" Plat. Protag. p. 313. ὃ, Πρωταγόρας ὃν οὔτε γιγνώσλεις 
οὔτε διείλεξαι οὐδεπώποτε,) we can also explain it through an omission of 
the object, αὐτόν, αὐτῷ, etc. Hom. &, οἵ, μέν. This is sometimes actu- 
ally expressed, 6. g. in the following instances: Il. α, 79 ὃς μέγα πάντων 
᾿Αργείων κρατέει, καὶ of met Portas Ayavot. Plat. Meno. 27 παρὰ τούτων, οἵ 
μήτε προσποιοῦνται διδάσκαλοι εἶναι, μήτ ἔστιν αὐτῶν μαϑητὴς οὐδείς... 
But even in this way the anacoluthon is not entirely avoided. See 
Herm. ad Vig. 28. § 707... . 

5. A very common anacoluthon is, when a_period begins with the 
Nominative and afterwards passes over into another case ; 6. g. Plat. de Leg. 
3. p. 686. ὦ, ἀποβλέψας γὰρ πρὸς τοῦτον τὸν στόλον, οὗ πέρι διαλεγόμε- 
Sa, ἔδοξέ wor πάγκαλος εἶναι. Here the speaker at first has himself in 
mind as the subject, and his thought is, J believe ; therefore he puts the parti- 
ciple in the Nominative. This however does not prevent him from using af- 
terwards the more appropriate expression, ἔδοξέ μοι, tf seems to me; by 
which the former Nom. becomes now a Nom. absolute (comp. § 145. n. 
1).—The converse of this is found in the following example: Thucyd. 
τοὺς Συρακουσίοις κατάπληξις οὐκ ὀλίγη ἐγένετο, δρῶντες---- Somewhat dif- 
ferent from this is the Nom. absolute, which stands alone at the beginning 
of a proposition for the sake of emphasis, e. g. ἐκεῖνοξ δὲ, ov δώσω αὑτῷ 
οὐδέν, which we must translate thus, “ as to that one, I will give him noth- 
ing.”—Finally, the instance where the noun has πὸ verb of its own, be- 
cause it has assumed the case of the following relative, we have already 
treated of under Attraction, in I. 4 above. 

6. We can hardly consider it as a case of anacoluthon, when to the 


/ 


448 § 151. sywrax,—inveRsIon. 


Plural a Singular is immediately subjoined by way of nearer qualifica- 
tion; e.g. οὗ ὃ ὲ οὐδεὶς αὑτῷ προσεῖχον, “they none of them gave at- 
tention to him.” This is more emphatic than τῶν δὲ ovdels—moooeizs. 


INI. Inversion. 


1. Inversions and misplaced constructions (Hyperbata) are in general 
far less common in Greek writers, even in the poets, than among the 
Latins. In particular cases however, the Greek inversions, even in 
prose writers, are stronger and more forced than the Latin. A very 
frequent cause of inversion was the propensity which prevailed espec- 
ially among the Attics, to place together those words in a clause or in two 
clauses, which either resemble each other, or are opposed to each other, or 


in any other way have a special mutual reference. Thus one would say e. g- 


πάντων γὰρ πᾶσι πάντες ἔχϑιστοί εἰσι Καρχηδόνιοι “Ῥωμαίοις, for πάντες 
TK, πάντων ἔχϑιστοί εἰσι πᾶσι “P.—Plat. Phaedr. § 141 ποικίλῃ μὲν ποιυκί-- 
λους ψυχῇ καὶ παναρμονίους διδοὺς λόγους, ἁπλοῦς δὲ ἅπλῇ.---ἰὰ conse- 
quence of this propensity, they even separated the article from the noun, 
6. 5. αἰσχύνει πόλιν τὴν αὑτὸς αὑτοῦ,---ἂπ ἃ prepositions from their cases, 


- e.g. ἐν ἄλλοτε ἄλλῃ, for ἄλλοτε ἐν ἄλλη; παρ οὐκ ἐθέλων ἐθελούσῃ Od. 8, 


155. » 


2. The natural tendency, moreover, to express as early as possible in a 
sentence the part on which the emphasis rests, also gives occasion for 
transpositions ; 8. 8. Demosth. Olynth. HI. (p. 36. ‘infr. Reisk.) τὸ μὲν 

᾿πρῶτον--- ἀγαπητὸν ny παρὰ ‘TOU δήμου τῶν ἄλλων ἑχάστῳ καὶ τιμῆς καὶ ἂρ- 
' χῆς καὶ ἀγαϑοῦ τινος μεταλαβεῖν" γῦν δὲ tovvaytiov—. Here the Dative 
ἑχάστῳ depends on ἀγαπητὸν ἢν, “formerly, it was pleasant to every one 
of the’ other citizens, when he received honour from the people; but now 
just the contrary— ;” but the παρὰ τοῦ δήμου which is dependent on μετα- 
λαβεῖν has the-greatest emphasis, and therefore stands before that Dative. 


.3. In the same manner the emphasis sometimes removes an adverb 
which should stand after a relative, and causes it to stand before it; e. g. 
yvby δὴ ἃ theyov’“ what I said before,” Plat. Euthyd. p- 288. 6. Hence 
ambiguity can sometimes arise, as in Theocr. 10, 17 ἔχεις πάλαι ὧν ἐπεϑύ- 
μξις, Where πάλαι belongs not to ἔχεις, but to ἐπεϑύμεις. Comp. Spald. ad 
Demosth. Mid. § 30. 


᾿ 4, In the following example a want of eae soya is avoided by means 
of j inversion : Demosth. Olynth. ΠῚ. extr. ἀξιῶ ὑμᾶς---μὴ παραχωρεῖν τῆς 
τάξεως, ἣν διὴν οἵ πρόγονοι τῆς ἀρετῆς μετὰ πολλῶν καὶ καλῶν κινδύνων χκτη- 
σάμενοι κατέλιπον. Here the Genitive τῆς ἀρετῆς depends on the other 
Genitive τάξεως (τάξις τῆς ἀρετὴς series or degrees of virtue); but both 
standing together would have occasioned confusion. 


5. [tis often apparent, however, that a writer has gained by inversion, al- 
though it cannot be explained i in the above ways. Thus in the fine pas- 
sage of Plato (Phaedr. 10): ὥσπερ γὰρ ob τὰ πεινῶντα ϑρέμματα ϑαλλὸν ἢ 
τινα καρπὸν προσείοντες ἄγουσι, σὺ ἐμοὶ λόγους οὕτω προτείνων---φαίνει περι- 
ἄξειν x..t. 4. where οὗ is the article belonging to προσείοντες, and τὰ πεινῶντα 


S 151. synTAX.—ELLIPSIS. 449 


(3 ϑρέμματαϊ is dependent on ἄγουσιν." Xenoph. Cyr. VI. 4.8 ἥξειν αὐτῷ σὲ 


πολὺ ᾿ἀράσπου ἄνδρα καὶ πιστότερον καὶ ἀμείνονα, where the πολύ strength- 
ens the comparative, and the Gen. ᾿Αράσπου is governed by this latter ; : 
precisely as in Demosth. Mid. 49 οἵ δὲ ἡ ἠτιμωμένοι διὰ πολλῷ τούτων εἰσὶν 
ἐλάττω πράγματα, instead of arco εἰσὶ διὰ πράγματα πολλῷ ἐλάττω 
τούτων. 

6. In the formulas of bidiiensints; etc. πρὸς ϑεῶν, πρὸς γονάτων, etc. the 
expression of emotion draws back the personal pronoun σέ, without how- 
ever causing it to stand before the preposition ; because this orthotone 
emphasis would announce an antithesis, which does not occur. . For this 
reason the σέ is inserted between the prepositions and their cases: ὦ πρός 
σε γονάτων" πρός σε sav" sc. ἱκετεύω, which however i is usually omitted. 
Soph. Oed. Col. 1333 πρός νύν σε κρηνῶν, πρὸς ϑεῶν ὁμογνίων Αἰτῶ πι- 
ϑέσϑαι ἡ 


᾿ «LV. Ellipsis. 


1. Ellipsis, or the omission of a word or words, opens a wide field, 
especially in the’ Greek Syntax, upon which we can enter only in a very 
general manner. ‘This figure is used, for the most part, only when that 
which is omitted is already obvious font the nature of the proposition or 
from the connexion ; as θ. 8. in all such expressions as κοιμᾶσϑιαι βαϑὺν 
(se. ὕπνο»" TLOTEQ OLY Ἰρυσθήϑῃ (sc. δδόν); ἐτύπτετο πολλὰς (sc. πληγάς). 

‘2. It is also easy to supply those cases of ellipsis, where in the second 
half of a period one or more words are to be repeated out of the first 
half. ‘The Greeks go farther here than most other languages, inasmuch 
as they sometimes express only the particle or the pronoun which intro- 
duces such a.clause. Thus especiall Υ εἴπερ or εἴπερ ἄρα, vf perhaps, stands 
instead of if it be so, etc. E.g. in Plato Euthyd. p. 296. ὁ » in answer to 
the conjecture, that something might mislead, it is said: ative ἡμᾶς γε, 
ἀλλ᾽, εἴπερ, o8,i. 6. not us; but, if indeed (it can mislead), thee.—In the same 
manner stands the relative in Plat. de Leg. IV. p. 710. d, πάντα σχεδὸν 
ἀπείργασται τῷ ϑεῷ, ἅπερ ὅταν βουληϑῇ διαφερόντως εὖ πρᾶξαξ τινὰ πό- 


λιν, “all has been done by the divinity, tekscle (it is wont to do), when it - 


will render a city particularly prosperous.” Further, s δή τῳ σοφώτερος 
φαΐην εἶναι, τούτῳ ἂν (sc. φαίην sivas), “if in any thing (tq) I thought I was 
wiser, (I thought to be so) in this.” 


3. In the same manner, the negative particles also stand without the 


word or clause which they render negative, and which is then to be supplied 
out of the preceding discourse. Thus especially)7) often in the middle of a 
_ clause (δ 148. 2.2), so that it then comes to stand before other words to which 
it does not belong, and thus occasions perplexity to the learner. E. g. τὸν ἐρῶν- 
τά τε καὶ μὴ κρινοῦμεν, Where καὶ μή stands for zat μὴ ἐρῶντα----τίς οὖν τρόπος 


* I leave however to the learner the option between this explanation and that 
by means of an anacoluthon, viz. that the writer began with oc with the purpose 
of afterwards using the participle ἄγοντες ; but then, in consequence of the disa- 
greeable concurrence of two participles (οὗ — προσείοντες ἄγοντες, ers a qui— 
porrigendo ducunt) passed over to the verb ἄγουσιν. 


t See Matthiae Gr. § 465. 3. Porson Adv. p. 220.—The necessity of leaving 
the σέ in such connexions enclitic, is apparent feeds the clear relation of the sense. 
It is however neglected by very accurate editors. 


450 § 151. ΒΥΝΤΑΧ.-- ΕἸ ΙΡΒΙΒ. 


ἀν 
τοῦ πν λῶν καὶ μὴ γράφειν ; where καλῶς is omitted after whe -ἀγαϑοὶ ἢ μὴ 
ἄνδρες “ good men or not good men :)---καὶ ὁπότε, καὶ μή, for καὶ ὁπότε μή, 
Plat. Alcib. I. 13. 

4, A very striking and common ellipsis with the Attics is, when of two 
contrary conditional propositions, the first remains without apodosis. This 
takes place only when the first proposition is in its nature a matter of 
course, and the speaker therefore hurries to the second as alone being of 
importance. E. g. Plat. Protag. p. 325. d, (after the exertions of a father 
to educate his son have been related,) καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ἑχὼν πείϑηταν" εἰ δὲ μὴ, 
ὥσπερ ξύλον διαστρεφόμενον εὐθύγουσιν ἀπειλαῖς καὶ πληγαΐς, “and if he 
-obeys voluntarily —(here the apodosis is a matter of course, good, it is well, 
it needs nothing further, or the like;) but if not, they make him, like a: - 
crooked stick, by means of threats and blows, straight.” 

5. It is also common, after a clause beginning with the postpositive 
article 0, a, to omit the corresponding τοῦτό ἐστιν or ταῦτα ἐστιν, which. 
refer to it; e.g. καὶ ὃ μάλιστα ἠἡνίασέ με, ὅτι καὶ ὠνείδιζξέν μὲ “and what 
most vexed me (was), that he also reproached. me.” Or also without 070; 
see e. g. Dem. Mid. 2. ὃ, where after ἃ δ᾽ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν ὑπόλοιπα, We must 
supply ταῦτά ἐστιν, and then the clause begins again.—I{n this kind of 
ellipsis the instances with the superlative are the most frequent, sometimes 
with, and sometimes without ὅτι, e. g. 

ὃ δὲ πάντων δεινότατον, ὅτι πρὸς τοὺς βαρβάρους συμμαχίαν ἐποιήσατο, 
(where first ἐστί, and then τοῦτό ἐστιν is omitted,) “ what (is) most of 
all (is this), that he has made an alliance with the barbarians.” 

καὶ ὃ πάντων γελοιότατον, καὶ TOY κύνα τῆς Hovyorns ἀνήγαγεν, “ but what 

(ts) most ridiculous of all, he has also brought up hither the dog of 
Erigone,” Lucian. Deor. Cone. 5. 


Commonly after this ellipsis the particle γάρ is inserted, which for us is 
superfluous, 6. g. 0 δὲ uaaron, ov γὰρ ἤϑελεν, etc. Comp. γάρ in § 149. 
6. The oie τοῦτό ἐστιν ὅτι alone are also omitted, when such a pre- 
ceding adjective has the prepositive article ; @. δ. τ ὁ δὲ μέγέστον, πᾶν- 
τα ταῦτα μόνος κατειργάσατο. .«--Καὶ τὸ πάντων αἴσχιστον, προσεψηφίσασϑε. 
The same takes place in the familiar formulas of proof, tex μ ἤριον δὲ 
or σημεῖον dé (se. τούτων ἐστὶ τοῦτο) “the proof of it is this,” ete. 
E. g. σημεῖον δὲ, τοῖς πονηροῖς ξυνουσιάξει, | . 6. “and as a proof, he associates 
. with bad men.”—This form of expression also usually takes γάρ ; e.g. 
Demosth. Androt. near the end: “the people of Athens have ever 
prized honour more than money, τεκμὴ ριον ὃ ἐ, χρήματα μὲν γὰρ 
WELT τῶν "Εἰλήνων ποτὲ σχὼν τὰ πάνϑ'᾽ ὑπὲρ φιλοτιμίας ἀνήλωσεν." 


The expressions τὸ λεγόμενον, τοὐναντίον, and the like, see in § 131. n. 6. 


APPENDIX A. 


------- - 


On VERSIFICATION.* 


1. For the full understanding of what follows, it is necessary to pre- 
mise some remarks on the different kinds of Greek poetry, and their con- 
nexion with the dialects. All the species of Greek poetry have their ori- 
gin in three principal classes of poetical diction, viz. 


The Epic, or poetry of narrative, 
The Lyric, or poetry of song, 
The Dramatic, or poetry of action. 


2.’ Each of these classes of poetry, in its most complete form, became 
_ appropriated among the Greeks to particular tribes. The Epic was 
formed and cultivated among the Ionics ; the Lyric among the Dorics and 
fEolics ; and lastly the Dramatic among the Attics. Hence it arose, that 
each of these classes, in language, metre, and adaptation to music and 
song, united the character and more or less of the dialect of the tribe in~ 
which it was chiefly cultivated, to the ya asa of its own nature. 
Comp. § 1. 10 sq. 


Nore 1. It must here be noted, that in speaking of dramatic and 
Attic poetry, we mean chiefly the iambic and trochaic parts of the 
drama generally, and the anapaestic parts of comedy, in which the 
strictly dramatic dialogue is contained. The other parts belong 
more or less to lyric poetry, and the choruses wholly so. 


3. The chief influence which is hence exerted upon the metre and 
poetic quantity, is, that the epic diction has more softness, and, in order to 
bring the narration more into the restraints of metre, more license in the 
forms of words and in the’ pronunciation. Dramatic poetry, on the other 
hand, and particularly comedy, being derived from the language of ordi- 
nary life, confined itself more strictly to the customary forms; and of 
course more particularly to the language and pronunciation of the Attic 
people, of which it sacrificed very little to the metre. The lyric diction 
approached in this respect more nearly to the epic; from which, as the 
mother of all Greek poesy, it derived the greater part of its poetical lan- 
guage and forms; while with these it mingled also the harsher and rougher 
peculiarities of the Doric dialect, and thus exempted the melody of song 
from the monotony of,narrative recitation. 


ι 


4, The alternation of long and short syllables in discourse is called), 
from its impression on the ear, Rhythm. So far as this alternation fol- 
lows certain laws, which limit it by a certain measure, it is called Metre. 
Single parts of such discourse, which can be embraced and recognized by 
the ear as a metrical whole, are called Verses. — 


* In order to render this work complete in itself, the following treatise on 
Greek Versification is here subjoined from the author’s Tape ain tava. Ber- 
lin, 1826. 8th Edition.—Tr. 


452 


_ APPENDIX A.—VERSIFICATION. 


5. Verses are subdivided into smaller sections of a few syllables each, 
which are called Feet. The most usual feet are the following; viz. 


Spondee ~- e.g. δούλους 
Trochee -—--v» e.g. δοῦλος 
Tambus -—- @g. λόγους 
Pyrrhic , “τ΄ eg. λόγος 

Dactyle  -- ““ e.g. τύπτετε 
Anapaest -~ ~— e.g. λέγεται 
Tribrach “ +» e.g. λέγετε 


Nore 2. In the examples here adduced, each foot consists of a 
single word. All verses however are measured by feet, of which 
the beginning and end fall in the middle of the words. 


6. 'To determine the measure of the feet and verses, a short syllable is 
assumed as unity, and a long syllable as the double of this, or two. Every 
such unit is called a time or interval; mora. 


Nore 8, Consequently the tribrach is equal in time ,to the tro- 
chee and iambus ; and the spondee to the dactyle and anapaest. 


7. The length and shortness of syllables, or their quantity, is deter- 
mined by the rules and principles given in § 7. For the use of the Miatus 
and Synizests in poetry, see § 6. n. 3. ὃ 29. and § 28. ἢ. 6. ὃ 29. n. 11.— 
It is here only necessary to remark further, that in most species of poetry 
the last syllable of every verse is common, i.e. a short syllable can stand 
instead of a long one, or a long syllable instead of a short one. 


8. In some kinds of verse, and likewise in sections of verses, there re- 
mains, after dividing them into their feet, a single syllable over and above. 
This is called the eatalectic syllable. A verse whose symmetry requires 
that this syllable should be counted instead of a full foot, is called a cata- 
lectic verse ; while if the syllable is regarded as supernumerary, it is a 
‘hypercatalectic verse. 'The principles by which this is to be pad tart 
must be sought in more extended treatises. 


9. The most common kinds of verse are those, which consist, in the 
repetition of one and the same foot. Among these the aaa aie si 
trochaic, and anapaestic, are the most frequent. τ 

10. The most usual dactylic verse is the Herameter, which is ὁ ἘΠ sachet 
in epic and heroic poetry in uninterrupted succession, without the mixture 
of any other species. It consists of five dactyles and a spondee. 


-vv|[-ee|[-ee]ere |e [-- 


But instead of each of the Jirst four feet a spondee may stand; and as thé 
last syllable of every verse is common (no. 7), instead of the sirth, a 


trochee, 6. g. 
. Κλῦϑι μευ, ἀλλα οι » ὃς Χρύσην. ἀμφιβέβηκας, 
. Κίλλαν te ζαϑέην, Τενέδοιο τε ἶφι ἀνάσσεις, F 


Pane (0 Ὁ μὲσ 


Σμινϑεῦ, εἰποτὲ τοι χαρίεντ᾽ ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα, 


᾿ ΜΑζῚ [4 ’ - τ ’ > » 
. ἢ εἰ On ποτέ TOL κατὰ πίονα μηρί ἕκηα 
[4 > > ed 4 a i 
. ταύρων NO αἰχῶν, τόδε μου κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ" 
' ] ἥντιν ἐδ , ~ ' 
. τίσειαν Δαναοὶ ἐμὰ δάκρυα σοῖσι Béhecow. 


AprpeNpDIx A.—VERSIFICATION. δ 453 


‘ -- | -- | 


.Φ 
I 

% 
¢ 


~~ vw 


. 
I 
ς 
ς 


ΠΥ ἢ 


me 0 oO καὶ 
Ι 
| 
J 
ς 
ς 


τι 
| 
ἱ 


sy rane ἡ ΠΩ πος 


<a Ragtime? al aaa Εἰ τῷ 
peg 


δα ἀρ ψυ ψο σιν We, 0 Swed 


5 
| 
J 
δῶ. 


Norte. 4. Sometimes also we find ἃ spondee inserted in the fifth 
place instead of the dactyle. Such a verse is called a spondaic 
Hexameter. E.g. 

ἀκροτάτῃ κορυφῇ πολυδείραδος Οὐλύμποιο 

τον} τυ ν}τυν} τνν]-τ]ον, 
or 

87 δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων ἀΐξασα 


AN: ἄπορα Stettler vee 
! 


11. The (dactylic) Pentameter is composed of two parts or halves, sep- 
, arated by a close or cadence; each of which parts consists of two dactyles 
and a catalectic syllable. 
Se SI as, Bie πον τ 
For the first two dactyles, and for them alone, spondees may be substituted. 
The middle syllable is always long ; the last, as the final syllable, may be also 
short. This kind of verse is commonly found only in connexion with 
the Hexameter; so that one Hexameter and one Pentameter follow each 
‘other alternately. A poem of this kind was called “Eisyou, Elegi; for 
which at a later period the Sing. Elegia became usual. Hence an 
apothegm or inscription in one such double verse (δίστιχο») is called ἐλε-- 
εἴο». “ 
? 1. ᾿Ελπὶς ἐν ἀνϑρώποισι μόνη ϑεὸς ἐσϑλὴ ἔνεστιν, 
ἄλλου δ᾽ Οὔλυμπόνδ᾽ ἐκπρολιπόντες ἔβαν. . 
~ 2. ᾧχετο μὲν Πίστις, μεγάλη ϑεὺς, ᾧχετο δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν 
: “Ζωφροσύνη, Χάριτές. τ΄, ὦ φίλε, γὴν ἕλιπον. 
9. ὅρκοι δ᾽ οὐκέτι πιστοὶ ἐν ἀνϑρώποισι δίκαιοι, 
οὐδὲ ϑεοὺς οὐδεὶς ὃ ἅξεται ἀϑανάτους. 
4, εὐσεβέων δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν γένος ἔφϑιτο, οὐδὲ ϑέμιστας 
οὐχέτι γιγνώσκουσ᾽ οὐδὲ μὲν εὐσεβίας. 
haa ΠΝ ΚΝ A CoN 
Dwele Sie tes eee 


. 


4. dy. ee | es ae | Dee ey | et | eg Tan | τ ν 
12. The iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, is measured by dipodes, 


i. 6. double feet or pairs of feet. In accordance with this, verses of four 
feet are called dimeter, those of six feet, trimeter, etc. ‘The Latin names 


58 


454 APPENDIX A.—VERSIFICATION. 


on the contrary, quaternius, senarius, etc. refer to the number of single 
feet. 


13. Every iambic dipode, instead of the ‘a iambus, may also have ἃ 
spondee; thus ; 


i Pg aeiaeali 2 ea Pala Ν 


Hence it follows that in every iambic verse εἶθ spondee can stand in 
every odd place, in sede impart, 1, 3, 5, 7. 


14, In every foot also a long syllable can be resolved into two short 
ones. Consequently the tribrach may stand instead of the iambus in 
every place except the last. Inasmuch, however, as the last syllable is 
common, the, last place can be occupied by a pyrrhic; and in all the 
odd places, instead of a ‘spondee, the anapaest and dactyle may be sub- 
stituted. ‘ 

Note 5. Of the feet of four units or times, hasan the ana- . 
paest can also stand in the even places. Still this does not hold 
of tragedy ; which does not easily admit the anapaest even in the . 
‘third and fifth places. 


15. Hence arises for the famine trimeter or Senarius the following 
_ scheme. 


~vwv -_wv _—-v Vv 


But the other kinds of feet, especially those of three syllables, must not 
be so frequent as to obscure the iambic metre. 


ΤΓλώσσης μάλιστα πανταχοῦ πειρῶ χρατεῖν" 
ὃ καὶ γέροντι καὶ γέῳ τιμὴν φέρει, 
ἡ γλῶσσα σιγὴν καιρίαν κεκτημένη, 


ἀκοῦν σας Owe ὡ «ὦ ὦ “ὦ -- Ae 

ον 

νψ--ν om ey «-- --- -- -- -- 
ἢ | Εν | et 

i Rem SS χὰ om cate hat Sais cide! ὡς Se κου 
; ᾿ aa 


Εἰ τὸ ᾿συγεχῶς καὶ πολλὰ καὶ παχέως λαλεῖν 
ἣν τοῦ φρονεῖν παράσημον, αἵ χελιδόνες 
ἐλέγοντ ἂν ἡμῶν σωφρονέστεραι πάνυ. 


J ὦ ΩΣ ὦ -ο -|[ π΄» - 


? ᾽ 


rane i: We 
? 3 


ὡς" ὟΣ 


? 


Spree = | Vas. eee 


9 
πλοῦτος δὲ βάσανγός ἐ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπου τρόπων». 
1 
ὃς ἂν | εὐπορῶν γὰρ αἰσχρὰ πράττῃ πράγματα, 
τί τοῦτον ἀπορήσαντ' ἂν οὐκ οἴει ποιεῖν : 


a = ww. ὦ Vim am Slee 
’ | Fh ae | fe 
ων .- v | we WY .- -. “νυ ὦ 
3 ? 3 
v se ay Saas } Sig iM le | pels AO tae ε 


* See § 7. n. 19. 


, 


ΑΡΡΕΝΡΙΧ A.—VERSIFICATION. ο΄. 


Aéonow , ὅταν τις ὀμνύοντος καταφρονῇ, 
ᾧ ) μὴ Εὐχρεὰς πρότερον ἐπιωρκηκότι, 

οὗτος καταφρονεῖν τῶν ϑεῶν ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, 
καὶ πρότερον OMOTUS αὑτὸς ἐπιωρκηκέναι. 


—— Vv ῳ Vv = mV VV = 

? | τ | ’ - 
--- yam Jve~ wwyvw -_ -_ ων 

3 ? 3 

3 ᾽ ᾽ 
“σ΄ υ --“ψυνυ -- --͵ν = 

3 3 ? 


16. Besides the senarius, the most common species of tanibie verse is 
the catalectic tetrameter (no. 8 above). E. ὅ- 


Ei’ μου γένοιτο παρϑένος καλή τε καὶ τέρεινα 


Re a eres [Malay 


? 


The rules and licenses are essentially the same in this verse as in the 


senarius ; 


17. The trochaic dipode, instead of the second trochee, may have a . 


spondee: 


and the catalectic syllable is common, 


Sg TOF eS yoree 


Hence it follows, that in trochaic verse a spondee can stand in every even 
place, in sede part, 2, 4, 6, 8.—The rule holds also here, that in every foot 
a long syllable can be resolved into two short ones. The tribrach can 


therefore stand in all the places; and the dactyle and anapaest (instead of 
the spondee) in all the even places. 


Nore 6. Among the feet of four units,thowever, the dactyle, though 
very seldom, is found also in the odd places. 


18, The most usual trochaic verse is the catalectic tetrameter. E. δ. 


3 1 - 
Ἰγοὺς δρᾷ, καὶ νοῦς ἀκούει " τάλλα κωφὰ καὶ τυφλά 


Ἃ 


er > ~ » » Ps 
"Ité0y * ὥς ἄνανδρον ἀκλεῶς κατϑανεῖν. Avo τάδε. 


νυ, πα} πολ ef ee 
2 3 ᾽ 


--|-4- 


? 


The catalectic syllable is common. 


19. In the anapaestic verse, the spondee can stand instead of the ana- 
paest, by uniting the two short syllables into one long one; and then 


again, by 


resolving the second long syllable of the spondee into two short 


ones, a dactyle can be introduced. As an example we give the catalectic 
tetrameter so common in the comic poets. ἘΣ g. 


“Or ἐγὼ τὰ δίκαια λέγων ἤνϑουν καὶ σωφροσύνη νεγόμιστο 


> ? - 


Φανερὸν μὲν ἔγωγ οἶμαι γνῶναι τοῦτ εἶναι πᾶσιν ὁμοίως 
ὅτι τοὺς χφηστοὺς τῶν ἀνϑρώπων εὖ πράττειν ἐστὲ δίκαιον, 
τοὺς δὲ πονηροὺς καὶ τοὺς ἀϑέους τούτων τἀναντία δήπου 


ὑπο - | oe 
9 
τ πέρ πιἰπ'ὶ|π-π- π- - | 


-νν,- = leaner el eance- pees 


χαίρετε, δαίμονες, ot «Δεβάδειαν, Βοιώτιον οὔϑαρ ἀρούρας 


-~vynovy ler yeep envy veiw «-- 


» 3 ; ᾽ 


456 APPENDIX A.—VERSIFICATION. 


20. Arsis or elevation is that part of a foot on which the emphasis of 
the rhythm or the Ictus, beat, falls’ In order to mark’ it, the ordinary 
acute accent (7) is commonly employed, the regular accents being then 
omitted. The remaining part of a foot is called, Thesis, depression. 
The natural arsis. is on the long syllable of a foot ; and consequent- 
ly the spondee (— -- and tribrach (v ~ -), considered in themselves, 
leave the arsis undetermined. But in every verse, the original or funda- 
mental foot (as the iambus in iambie verse, the dactyle in dactylic 
verse, etc.) determines the arsis for all the other feet which are substituted 
for it. Consequently the spondee in iambic and anapaestic verses reads 
thus, --; in trochaic and dactylic thus,- -. Thus tovtov, (without 
reference to its accent in prose,) when it stands instead of an iambus or 
anapaest, isread tovrov; instead of a trochee or dactyle, τούτου. Further, 
since the ictus on a long syllable necessarily lies on the first of the two 
units or times contained in the same, it therefore, when the long syllable 
is resolved into two short ones, necessarily falls, in like manner, on the 


first of these short ones. Hence the tribrach, when it stands instead of an - 


iambus, is read thus τ “ », instead of a trochee thus ~“ ~ ~; and 
the dactyle intead ofa spondee with the arsis on the last syllable (- ~'); is 
read thus -- “ τ; but the anapaest where it stands for the contrary 
spondee (- ~), thus~’ ἡ —. Consequently we must read λέγετε, λέγεται, 
when these words stand as trochaic or dactylic feet ; and on the contrary 
λεγέτε, Asyétot, when these words stand as iambic or anapaestic feet. In do- 
ing this, however, the learner must be on his guard. not to prolong in 


pronunciation the short syllables which have the arsis; sinee by. this 
* means they would become long, and thus destroy the metre.* 


' Note 7. The learner will do well first to exercise himself, by 


marking with the ictus all the preceding schemes of verse, and then ~ 


pronouncing the verses themselves accordingly. ΤῸ facilitate his 
progress we subjoin here some examples not there adduced, with 
their ictus, > 


Hexameter.—Ground-Scheme. 
vw fame payee [om ee fees] = 
Example. 
soya νεών, βουλὰξ δὲ μεσών, ευχαΐ δε γερόντων 


, 4 4 , [2 La 
J~vef--|--el--l-¢--|-- 


Pentameter.—Ground-Scheme. 
- ον τυ νυν -ὶ | vv level 
Example. 
μή petgely σχοινῷ Πέρσιδι τήν σοφιήν 


΄ 
om] ape eee lee 


* Compare on the mode of effecting this, the marginal notes to § 9 note. 
We at least cannot make this ictus audible in any other way than we do the ac-' 
cent; and consequently can only make it perceptible when we scan, i.e. pro- 
nounce the verse according to the potent without reference to the grammatical 
accent. See p. 37, 38. 


ApreNpix A.—VERSIFICATION. 457 


{ = 


Senarius.—Ground-Scheme. 


a ΄ , 7 ͵ 7 
ῳ = v— | vm Ym v= vw 
᾿ > 


Examples. 
φυσίν πονήραν μέταβαλείν ov ὁάδιόν 


Ld 7 L4 7 4 [4 
 -- Μ͵ — _—_ Ss YY oe - νὑ΄- vv 


? 3 3 
didi ἀρῆς ἐστι σώφροσυνή μονή 


dy ’ 7 
vv “yew vl τον Sly rye - 


2 


----.--- 


‘ ! 


lamb. tetram. catalect—Ground-Scheme. 


7 77 a ¢ , , 
eevee 1} υπν oe [rye tye-,y 


Examples. 
αλλ αὐτο πέρι Tov πρότερος εἰπειν πρώτα δίαμαχούμαι 


’ lA , 7 7 
Sa gh SC TP Nes AE Sa ἢ a Cw Von ἀπὸ 


? 3 3 2 
- ϑυγνεία ϑέ “ταφαγών. καὶ ἐπιπιών ἀκρά 
υγγεία. ϑέρμα κάταφαγών. κατ ἐπιπιών ἀκράτον 
’ 7 ia [ 


4 , 
-- — Vv a νυ, νυ} ποι,» -π| τ -τῷν 


2 3 


A 


Troch. tetram. catalect—Ground-Scheme. , 


EXamples. 
'πέριορᾷς μ᾽ οὕτώς Un patos Hee χειροίμενόν 


7 
δυν" ae | oe — [ss Sef wy 


3 


ἄλλα μά Ae ov ῥέδιώς οὗὑτώς αν αὐτους δίεφυγές 
εἶπερ ἔτυχον τών μελών των Φίλοκλεούς βεβρώκοτές 


| — , Ι — 
— Os pees τε σον See I ey τα 


3 


4 4 
Vv VM me “Ἐν 


Anapaest. tetram. catalect—Ground-Scheme. 


[4 [4 τ δ 
vv = Vm Ye . Vv ve ew 


? 3 


¢ ΄ r 
eR eh denn Ue it, 


2 
Examples. 


αλλ ohodvgats φαινόμενῃσίν ταις ἀρχαιαΐσιν ϑήναις 
xov ϑαύμασταίς και πόλυυμνοίς ἵν᾿ ὃ aa δήμος ενοΐκει 


[4 [4 , [4 ’ 
a Ome Ye SOMONE net oe | a ee Sy powie Ὁ «ἃ 
? . 3 
, ‘ 
- -- Ι -- vo « «- [“ν.π- - -- νυ. oe 


᾽ 3 3 


21. The Caesura is properly the division or separation, by means of the 
ending of a word, of something which rhythmically or metrically belongs 
together. Hence there arises a Caesura 1) of the Foot; 2) of the Rhythm, 
8) of the Verse ; all of which must be carefully distinguished, since the 
word caesura is very commonly used without addition for each of the 
three. 


458 . Aprenp1x A.—VERSIFICATION. 


- 


22. The Caesura of the Foot is where a word ends in the middle of ἃ 
foot ; e.g. in the first (dactyle) of | Myjyw ἄ-- | sds, and in the second 
(spondee) of | Οὐλομέ-- [ νην ἢ | -. This is the least important of all, and is 
without any influence of its own on the metre; since the division into 
feet is in a great measure arbitrary. - | 


23. The Caesura of the Rhythm is where a word ends with the arsis, i. e. 
where the arsis falls on the last syllable of a word; by which means the 
arsis is separated from the thesis. Such a final syllable receives from the 
ictus a special emphasis; so that not unfrequently the poets place here 
a short final syllable, which.by this means alone is made long, and fills 
out of itself the arsis; comp. § 7.n. 16 sq. Of this prolongation by the 
caesura, the epic poets particularly avail themselves; e. g. 

Τηλέμαχε | ποῖόν os ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος. ὀδόντων ; 
Αὐτὰρ ἔπειξ αὐτοῖσι βέλος | ἐχεπευκὲς ἐφιείς." 

24. The Verse-Caesura is where the final syllables of words fall into 
such places in the verse, that a Rhythm which by this means is made 
full and pleasant to the ear, closes, and another begins. To judge of this 
requires a deeper knowledge of versification, than can be imparted here. 
— In a narrower sense that is called a verse-caesura, which occurs in 
certain determinate places, and of which every verse must have at least one, 
when it is not faulty.. In this sense the name is understood, when we 
say of a verse, that if has no caesura. This point also we cannot here ex- 
haust ; and therefore subjoin further only the following remarks : 


a) Several kinds of verse have their cacsura in one fixed place. Such are, 
‘of the above kinds, the following: (1) 'The pentameter, in which a 
‘word must end at the division mentioned above. This caesura is 
never neglected. (2) The iambic, anapaestic, and trochaic catalectic 
tetrameter ; all of which have their natural caesura at the end of the 
fourth foot. This caesura is sometimes neglected. 


δὴ Other kinds of verse have more than one place for the caesura; and 

the choice is here left to the discretion of the poet. Still some one 
‘eaesura is commonly the principal one. In hexameter the predomi- 
nant caesura is that in the middle of the third foot; either directly 
after the arsis, e. g. , : 

Miyw ἄειδε, ϑεὼ, | Πηληϊάδεω ᾿Αχιλῆος 

Οὐκ ἄρα μοῦνον ἔην | ἐρίδων γένος, ἀλλ᾿ ἐπὶ γαῖαν 
or in the middle of the thesis of ἃ dactyle, 6. g. 

| ‘Avion μοι ἔννεπε, Motu, | πολύτροπον, ὃς μάλα πολλά. 

The first species is called, by a modern expression, the masculine 
caesura; the second the feminine (or trochaic). It rarely happens 
that both are wholly wanting in this verse. In such case, however, 
they are replaced by a caesura in the second or in the fourth foot, 


* This usage is most known from epic writers; and since, in hexameter 
verse, which always has the arsis at the beginning of the foot, this caesura and the 
caesura of the foot fall together, this circumstance has often occasioned the errone- 
ous supposition that this prolongation is effected by the caesura of the foot (no. 22). 
With this was connected another erroneous idea; for the name caesura was 
also given to the case, where a word was cut in two in the division into feet. But 
it is easy to see, that in all cases where any effect is produced by a caesura, it has 
respect alone to the ending of a word; which therefore may be a monosyllable. 


΄ 


Appenpix B.—creek ALPHABET. 7 _ 459 


which are then usually masculine, _ produce the best effect When 
both occur together ; e. g. 


ἀλλὰ νέον | συνορινόμενοι | κίνυντο φάλαγγες. 


Nore 8. In order to guard against misapprehension and confu- 
sion, we remark here further, that writers on metre, when they speak 
of the caesuras of the hexameter, often understand, in a wider sense, 
only those which occur in every place of the hexameter, and by the 
choice and alternation of which, depending as they do solely on the 
poet, the positive euphony not only of single verses, but also of the 
whole series of verses, is produced. But on account of the many 
final syllables in every verse, the mere ending of a word is_ not 
enough to mark a verse-caesura in this sense; but it must be con- 
nected with some perceptible break in the sense, or with some strik- 
ing position of the words. In this way the verse-caesura then forces 
itself upon the ear, even over those indispensable caesuras, which, as 
well as these optional ones, must not be wanting, but which also 
very commonly comprehend the latter in themselves. 


APPENDIX B. 


History or THE GreEK ALPHABET. p. 21.* 


It may not be superfluous to give here a short view of the history of the 
Greek alphabet, as derived from the ancient accounts and internal evidence. 

The ancient tradition was, that Cadmus brought sixteen letters from 
Phenicia to Greece, to which -Palamedes afterwards added four more, 
viz. 9, & gz, and Simonides still later four others, viz. ¢ ἡ, y, w; 
Plin. VII. 56. On comparing however the Phenician alphabet, as it has 
come down to us in the Hebrew, it is very apparent that this story must 
be thus understood ; viz. that the Phenician alphabet was introduced into 
these western countries in a more or less perfect shape ; that some tribes, 
perhaps those in Greece Proper, were satisfied with sixteen letters; that 
they were not however unacquainted with the more perfect system of 
other tribes, but adopted by degrees such other letters as they found conve- 
nient ; and this, according to the tradition, occurred at two different epochs. 

Taking away now the letters ascribed by Pliny to Palamedes and Si- 
monides, there remain the following as the sixteen ancient letters, viz. 

apy dstr_unapevonwe gt δὰ 

The same letters are also given in Schol. ad Dionys. Thr. p, 781. 1. 
But since this alphabet certainly ended, like the oriental one, with τ, 
there can be no doubt that the v was transferred to its present place 
from later alphabets ; since it was originally the same with the Bai i.e. 
Fav. Marius Victorinus, 2468. 


If now we restore this F' or 7, which was used at a later period pat 


* From the author’s Ausfithrliche Sprachlehre, Bd. II. Abth. ii. p. 375, Berlin 
1827 ; or Edit. 2. Bd. I. p. 9 sq. Berlin 1830. 


s 


bei Appenpix B.—cGrREeEK ALPHABET. z 


as a numeral, the traditional alphabet of Cadmus was s unquestionably the 
following: 


ABT ALB BAI-K Aw N.0°m BR-2 Ἢ 


and the names were “Alpe, Βῆτα, Τάμμα, Δέλτα, Ei, Ῥαῦ, late, Keane, 
«Αάμβδα, Mi, Nv, Ov, Wi, “Pa, Σίγμα, Ταῦ. The letters: which were 
afterwards adopted, so far as they belonged to the original Phenician 
‘alphabet and were in use among other tribes, viz. ¢ ἡ, ὃ, ἕξ, assumed 
their original places. ‘The others, which were added later, and were 
formed either by a change of the old ones or in some other way, were 
annexed after the 1, In this way T became the nineteenth letter ; since 
the 7, which was formed from the Fav by splitting its upper part, was 
already placed after the T, while the F' itself was omitted. Indeed the F' 
was employed as a regular letter of the alphabet only by a, few tribes ; in 
the others it was afterwards used, along with the Kozzea, only in the sys- 
tem of numerals, and was dropped in the alphabet. If now we count. 
these two (Fait and Kona), and also reckon Siyuo and dy as two, 
which they were originally, we obtain from 4 to T inclusive just the 
twenty two Phenician-Hebrew letters; and, as we shall see, also the very 
same letters. 

The oriental alphabet contained four sibilants, Zain, Samech, Tsade, Siz ; 
and there were likewise four in the Greek alphabet before 7, viz. Z, 7, =; 
and Sav. The names Samech, T’sade, Sin, correspond clearly to the 
names Σέίγμα, Ζῆτα, Sey; and the name Zain is consequently merged in 
=i. Just as clearly however can we recognize in the forms of the Greek 
letters ζ, o, ἕξ, the common forms of the Hebrew T'sade, Samech, and Zain 
(x, Ὁ, 7). We see then evidently, that the four sibilants in their wander- 
ings from tribe to tribe became confounded, and exchanged their places in 
the alphabet. But this took place in such a way, that a sibilant came to 
stand in the Greek alphabet in the place. sonreeponding to each Phenician 
sibilant; as is evident of itself in the case of , & o. The place of 
the old Sty consequently was between JZand Konze. The Zain (dsain), 
which along with ¢ was as superfluous as Zoey by the side of o, was 
not however dropped like the latter; but common usage employed it as a 
double sound or letter; or perhaps it was retained because the original 
dialectic sound dsi passed over, among the Greeks, into ksi. 


In the oriental alphabet, several of the soft or gently aspirated conso- 
“nants ‘were at the same time employed as vowel letters. ‘This continued 
to be the case in Greek (including the Latin dialect) with “Iéro ;and 
with Fut or 7, the Latin V. The ἄλφα was considered in Greek sim- 
' ply asa vowels inasmuch as the consonant power of the oriental Aleph 
was regarded by the Greeks merely as an affection of the vowel sound, or 
the spiritus lenis. ‘The Phenician Hé and Hhéth were sounded alike by 
the Greeks, (because they could not easily make the distinction between 
these two aspirates,) and furnished therefore two forms of the spiritus as- 
per. Of these the one (E) still maintains its place in manuscripts in the 
form of the breathing placed over a letter € or F; while the other (H) is 
often found on coins and in inscriptions. In the Latin alphabet this H 
has retained its original power, and occupies nearly the same place as 
the ἡ in the Greek alphabet, viz. immediately before the J,—the Θ᾽ having 
been dropped by the Latins, like all other aspirates. At the same time 


Apprrenpix B.—GREEK ALPHABET. 461 


this double form (E and H) furnished also two forms for the vowel E, and 
in this shape alone they remained in the alphabet, and were early em- 
ployed to distinguish the quantity. This was afterwards imitated also in 
the case of O, by writing a double ο, which still appears in the cursive ὦ, 
and had precisely the same form in the ancient cursive alphabet, as 
we still find itin Egyptian Papyrus manuscripts.* The Greek O corre- 
sponds of course to the oriental Jin, and has the same place in the alpha- 
bet. 

Of the five letters then which were annexed after the T, the origin of 
f and 2 has been already shewn. i and ¥7 are simply modifications 
of ΠῚ, as is evident from their names and value. ΧΥ in like manner is a 
modification of £7; since this latter in the Italic-Greek and Latin alpha- 
bets was written X, and corresponds to Χὺ both as to name and value, pre- 
cisely as ¥ to @i. Moreover its réal transition in the dialects into the 
guttural sound ch, has its parallel in the Spanish language. 

Of the remaining letters of the Tonic-Attic alphabet, viz. those which 
were ultimately employed only as numerals, the F retained the same posi- 
tion in the Latin alphabet, with a more strongly aspirated pronunciation ; 
hence the V stands there likewise after 7', and in its double capacity of 
vowel and consonant. The Κόππα (Latin Q) has in all the ancient 
alphabets, the Phenician included, the same name with Κάππα, except 
that it was pronounced with the deeper vowel u oro. We see therefore 
that the sound u, which it exhibits in Latin, was also originally connected 
with it. In the Greek dialects which are most known, the Kozma appears 
to have early lost this peculiarity, and become, as in some of the modern 
European languages, equivalent to a simple k, and consequently to Κάπ- 
so; While it preferred nevertheless a connexion with wu or 0, as is still to 
be seen on coins and in inscriptions. See Boeckh’s Corpus Inscript. 
Graec. I. n. 166, with the note; where too may be seen the old form of 


the Konno (Ὁ) corresponding to the Hebrew and Latin Jetter ; its form 
in the numeral system ( b) being merely simplified for the convenience of 


writing. - The Σιν, in consequence of the above-mentioned exchange of 
places among the sibilants, assumed the place of the oriental T'sade, and 
stood accordingly between Zand Κόππα. It is therefore singular, that 
in the numerical system it does not stand in the same place; at any rate, 
we may hence draw the conclusion, that this system did not become fixed 
until a long time after the difference between Yay and Σέγμα had vanished. 
In order to complete the numerical-system the letters last adopted were 
also employed ; but with these the system, reached only to 800; and 
therefore to mark 900 the sign 2uyunt was added, by an arbitrary proce- 
dure, quite at the end. In doing this, however, some reference was 
probably had to the usage of other tribes, who, like the orientals, used 
the ancient alphabet in a complete form as a series of numerical signs, and 
consequently ‘with the 2éy in its ancient place. The abbreviation Sampi 
> was without doubt similar to the letter Sa», (which was everywhere 
conspicuous as a brand upon horses,) if not entirely the same. See Sca- 
Jiger ad Euseb. p. 115. ‘Indeed it seems to me probable, that this numer- 


* The form @ seems to have been derived from ὦ by shortening the side 
strokes and swelling out the middle. 


59 


462 ApreNnpDIx B.—GREEK ALPHABET. 
, . 


΄ 


ical sign received the name Σἀμπῆ, as well as this. more modern form of 
. abbreviation, only at a later period ; and that earlier it had merely the name 
of Sey, and was the simple ancient letter ;* which however had probably 
long since lost its original place in the alphabet, and received this new 
one by arbitrary convention. 

Ἵ 


[For the sake of illustration, the Hebrew alphabet, with the correspond- 
ing Greek letters, is here subjoined: 


πον ee. a) Be Pp ΚΝ 
‘ABE AEE ZH OLKAMN Ε Ὁ DQ oP. Σ 
a By 8 2 Sn Pew h pw ἔ(σ)ο x Q ot 


It must however be borne in mind, that the present Hebrew square char- 
acter is not the proper one, with which to compare the Greek letters. The 
_ latter were derived from the Phenician alphabet, the characters of which 

are for the most part extant in the ancient Hebrew letters as found on 
coins. ΤῸ these the Greek letters bear a close resemblance ; particularly 
I, 4, E (Phen. 7), H, A, O, H, Σ, etc. 
_ As to the four sibilants, the ancient Hebrew or Phenician forms of 
Zain and Samech are unknown ; the power and place of the former at 
least have passed over to the Greek Z. Samech and Sin appear early to 
have been confounded by the Greeks, who finally retained the name of, 
_ the former in the place and with the form of the latter; perhaps also the 
form of Samech (σ) was also retained in the small alphabet. The place of 
Samech was afterwards filled by the double letter 7, the small form of 
which (£) bears a strong resemblance to the old Hebrew T'sade. The 
place of T’sade remained vacant in the Greek alphabet; though probably 
it was not so originally, but was filled by the ancient Say, as supposed by 
the author above. 

If this last hypothesis be well founded, we can perhaps easily explain 
the origin and name of the later numeral sign Souat. In order to find a 
sign for 900, the old letter Σ᾽ ἄν was adopted ; but as both its name and 
form had long since been confounded with those of Σίγμα, it became ne- 
cessary to distinguish it by marking its ancient place in the alphabet, viz. 
“the Zay which stood next to 177.” This was done by appending the 17% 
to its name, and combining the forms of both letters. 

On the relation of the Greek letters to the oriental alphabets, see Hug’s 
Geschichte der .Buchstabenschrift ; Fischer ad Weller. T. I. p. 147. Gese- 
nius Geschichte der Heb. Sprache und Schrift, § 44. 

The ancient Hebrew coin-letter may be seen in Beyer de Nummis Hebr. 
Samaritanis, p. 224. Eckhel Doctr. Nummorum vett. 'T. III. p. 404. Also 
in the alphabets of Gesenius’ Lehrgebdude der Heb. Sprache, and Stuart’s 
Hebrew Grammar.—Tr. . 


' 


* Ina Greek sentence upon an Egyptian Papyrus of nearly two thousand 
years before Christ, the Sampt appears with only one stroke in the middle, and 
is therefore the same as an inverted Sin. See the explanation of this papyrus by 
the author, p. 20. δ 


ΑΡΡΕΝΡῚΙΧ C.—TABLES FOR DECLENSION ETC. 463 


APPENDIX C. 


Tastes oF Worps ror DecLEension Anp ConJUGATION. | 


‘ 
my 


£ 


FIRST DECLENSION. p. 68.* 


ἀγορά market ; μέριμνα solicitude 
᾿Αγχίσης (long +) Anchises | Midas (short ἡ) Midas 
ἀδολέσχης prattler μοῖρα portion 
᾿4ϑηνὰ Minerva γίκη (long 4) victory 
Αἰνείας AEneas γύμφη bride 
oxovdo thorn ooyn wrath 
oka. combat ὀρνιϑοϑήρας G. a, birdcatcher 
ἄρουρα ploughed land Πέρσης a Persian 
ἀσχολία business πλευρά side 
γαλῆ weasel πύχτης boxer 
yn earth , πύλη (short'v) gate 
γλῶσσα tongue δίζα root 
δόξα opinion ᾿ς σλιά shadow 
ἔχιδνα adders Σχύϑης (short v) a Scythian 
ζώνη zone as στέγη roof | 
ἡμέρα day στοά porch 
ϑάλασσα sea σφαῖρα sphere 
ϑύρα (short v) door _ σφῦρα hammer 
Kexgonidys (short 1) Cecropides σχολή leisure 
—uspadn head , ες σωτηρία deliverance 
, κλέπτης thief ταμίας steward 
«κόρη maiden τεχνίτης artisan 
κριτής judge ὕλη (long v) forest , 
χτιστής founder φιλία friendship 
λαύρα lane χαρά joy 
λύπη (long v) grief. ; χλαῖνα outer-garment rs 
μαϑητής scholar χώρα country 
μέλισσα bee ψυχή soul 


SECOND DECLENSION. p. 70. 


Feminines in og. ᾿ 


1, Besides trees (ὃ 32. 3) also the following plants: j 
ἡ βίβλος or βύβλος and 
7, ὃ πάπῦρος, the papyrus-plant 
ἢ κόκκος the scarlet oak; but ὃ κόκκος a berry, and especially the 
scarlet berry | 
σχοῖνος bulrush γάρδος spikenard ~- §dapavog cabbage 
* These Tables of Words for Practice are arranged simply in alphabetical or- 
der, that the learner may be exercised in judging which of the rules ‘given in 
the grammar is to be applied in each instance. 


464 


ApprpeNp1Ix C.—TABLES FOR DECLENSION ETC. 


With these connect 
βύσσος fine linen 
βίβλος and δέλτος book 
δοκός beam ῥάβδος rod 
βάλανος and ἄκυλος acorn. 


2. ‘The following stones and earths : 
ὃ, ἡ λέϑος, as Fem. chiefly of rare and precious stones. 


ἄργιλος clay 
ἄσφαλτος asphaltus 
βάσανος touchstone, trial 
γύψος gypsum 
,, ἤλεκτρος (also τὸ ἤλεκτρον) am- 
ber 
ν With these connect 


κρύσταλλος crystal ; but 6 κρύσταλλος 
1ce. 

μίλτος Re ee 

σάπφειρος sapphire 

σμάραγδος smaragdus 

titavos lime. 


ἄμμος, ψάμμος, ἄμαϑος, ψάμαϑος, sand 


ψῆφος pebble, vote 
ὕαλος glass 
κόπρος filth 
σποδός ashes 


σιλίνϑος tile 
βῶλος clod 

ὄνϑος dung . 
ἄσβολος soot 


3. Belonging to the idea of vessel, receptacle, etc. 


κιβωτός ark 
χηλός chest 
sods coffin “ 

| ἄῤῥιχος basket: 
κάρδοπος kneading-trough 
ἀσάμινϑος and i 
πύελος bathing-tub. 


4, Belonging to the idea of way: 
ὅδός and κέλευϑος way 
οἶμος (ὃ, ἢ) path 


5. The following single words: 
χέρσος" and ἤπειρος continent. 
γῆσος island 

᾿ ψόσος disease 
δρόσος dew 
γνάϑος jawbone 
κέρκος tail 
δινός (ἢ, 0) hide 
ψίαϑος (ἢ, 0) mat 


ληνός wine-press 
ἄκατος (ἢ, ὃ δ) kind of ship 


᾿ στάμνος (4, 6) jug 


᾿ς λήκυϑος oil- flask 

πρόχοος, πρόχους, watering-pot 
κάμινος stove 

ϑόλος (4, δὴ cupola 


ἄτραπος and τρίβος footpath 
τάφρος and χάπετος trench 


μήρινϑος iwine 


᾿τήβενγος toga 


'βάρβιτος (ἢ, δ) Lyre 
τάμισος runnet - 

᾿ γέρανος crane 

κόρυδος, κορυδαλός, lark 
κόχλος (0, ἢ) snail 


and with a difference of meaning 


ἡ λέκυϑος yolk 


0 λέκιϑος pea-soup. 


Words for Practice. 


ἄγγελος messenger 
ἀετός eagle 

ἄϑλος combat, struggle 
ἄϑλον prize of combat 


ἡ ἄμπελος vine 
ἄνϑρωπος man 
ἄργυρος and 

ἀργύριον silver 


Apprenpix C.—TABLES FOR DECLENSION ETC. 465 


ἔργον work ξύλον wood 
εὖρος east-wind οἶκος house 
ζέφυρος west-wind 'σαιδίον child 
ἱμάτιον over-garment ᾿ς ῥόδον rose , 
ἴον violet σίδηρος iron 
καρκίνος crab 2 σπασμός spasm 
κασσίτερος tin στρατός army 
ὃ κέρασος cherry-tree ταῦρος bull 
ὃ κότινος wild olive-tree φάρμακον medicine 
μῆλον apple 7 φηγός beech-tree 
ἢ μῆλος apple-tree φορτίον burden 
μόλιβος or μόλυβδος lead χαλκός copper 

᾿ μόριον part : χρυσός and 
γότος south-wind χουσίον gold 


4 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


ΙΓ 


Catalogue of words which have the syllable before the case-ending 
long.* p. 77. 


Nouns in ἐς and ve which in flexion have 6; all Feminines, 


awis vault κληΐς (Ion. for κλείς) key 
βαλβίς goal κγημίὶς greave 
καρίς sea-crab ἼΩΝ κρηπὶς stand, base 
κηκίς sap | ῥαφανίς radish 
κηλὶς spot, stain ψηφίς pebble 
δαγύς aii 
or which in flexion have 3 _: 
ἡ ἄγλις kernel of garlick ὃ, ἢ ὕρνις bird 
ἢ μέρμις string ἣ κώμυς bunch, tuft 
In wg and υς which in flexion have ν 
ἢ ig sinew ἡ δίς nose ὃ, ἢ ϑίς heap, shore 
7 ἀκτίς ray ὃ δελφίς dolphin 
a γλωχίς point ἢ ὠδίς throe 
“Ehsvais Σαλαμίς Touyis 
Τόρτυς Φόρκυς ' 
In αν, UY, O10 
ὃ παιάν paean Πάν 
ὃ μόσυν wooden tower 
6 wag starling ὃ Kao a Carian 
In ag G. τος ᾿ 
τὸ φρέαρ well. 3 τὸ στέαρ tallow 
In & 6. κος 
βλάξ Blonds stupid 6 ϑώραξ breastplate 


* The learner must here pay particular regard to the accent, in respect both to 
its position and form, according to the general rules, and also the special ones 
referred to in § 37. ἢ. 4. 


ta Sere ia =. 


466 Aprenpix C.—TABLES FOR DECLENSION ETC. 
ὃ ἱέραξ kite- ὃ σύρφαξ filth 
ὃ κόρδαξ sort of dance φέναξ deceiver 
ὃ λάβραξ shark Φαίαξ a Phaeacian , 
ὃ otak rudder . ; 
0 i& (an insect) ἡ pis sphina: ἢ pots shudder 
7 ἀϊξ crowd, press 7 Gadus branch 
ἢ βέμβιξ child’s top ὃ σχάνδιξ chervil 
Moe πέρδιξ partridge ἢ σπάδιξ palm-branch 


ὃ Φοίνιξ Phenician Ἔκ redness 
ὃ βόμβυξ silkworm 6 κηὺξ (a sea-bird) 
ὃ δοίδυξ pestle κήρυξ herald 
In & G. γός 
ἢ ῥάξ grape - 
ἧ μάστιξ scourge 
ὃ κόχκυξ cuckoo 


ἡ πέμφιξ bubble, blister ὃ τέττιξ cricket 
In ξ G. yoo: 4 wit crumb. 
_Iny G. πος 
ὃ iy, κνίψ, Foip, names of insects 
ὃ δίῳ bulrush 


ὃ γύψ vulture ὃ γρύψ griffin, condor 


Words for Practice. p. 79. 


The, letters before the case-endings, which cannot be determined by 
the general rules given in the grammar, are subjoined in parentheses. 
All the following words have the vowels α, 1, υ, before the case-endings 


short. Those which have them long are given in the preceding 
Table. 


ἣν Φῇ Words having a consonant before the case-ending. 


- ὃ ἀγκών. elbow ἡ ἔρις (0) strife - 
ἡ ἀηδών (0) nightingale 


Δ 


ο 


ἀήρ (ε) air 


ὃ ϑεράπων (ovt)-servant 


ὃ ἵμάς (yt) thong 


ὃ αἰϑήρ (s) ether ἡ κατῆλιψ (φ) ladder 
ἡ αἷξ (7) goat : ὃ κλών bough 

ὃ ἀνδριάς (yt) statue ἢ κόρυς (9) helmet 

ὃ ἄξων (0) axle ὃ κτέις (sv) comb 

ἡ αὖλαξ (x) furrow 7) κύλιξ (x) cup 


ῆ 
Oo 


c 


Ὁ 


ῇ 
μ 
0 


c 


δ 


A 


δ 


nN 


- 


Buk (x) cough . 

γέρων (ovr) old man 
γρύψ (x) griffin (v long) 
dais (τ) feast 
δᾷς (δ) torch 

δράχων (ovr) dragon 
“Ἑλλὰς (δὴ Greece 

ὃ Ἕλλην a Greek 


ἢ ἐλσεὶς (5) hope 


τὸ κῦμα wave 


,. ἢ hothow (x) storm 


ὃ Aux 

ὃ λάρυγξ (γ) larynx 
ὃ λιμήν (ε) haven 

ἡ λύίγξ (x) lynx 

ὃ μὴν month 

τὸ νέχταρ nectar. 


ὃ Ὀνυξ (χ) nail, claw 


ἡ ἈΑΡΡΕΝΌΙΧ C.—TABLES FOR DECLENSION ETC. 467 


ὃ ὄρτυξ (vy) quail . 

τὸ οὖϑαρ (τ) udder. 
ὃ πένης (x) poor man 
ὃ πίναξ (x) tablet 

ὃ ποιμήν (8) shepherd 
ἧ a * (vy) wing 
ἡ πτύξ (χ) fold 

ἡ σάρξ (x ) flesh 
ἢ σειρὴν siren 

τὸ στόμα mouth 

ἡ Στύξ (7) 

ἢ Σφίγξ (7) 

ἢ Tiguys (3) 


Af 


2. Words having a vowel before the case-endings, and more or less 
contracted. p. 84, 


τὸ ἄνϑος flower ' 
ὃ βότρυς bunch of eee 
τὸ γένος race 

ἣ )ένυς jaw-bone 

τὸ σχέπὰς cover 

ἢ δρῦς oak 

ὃ ἱππεύς rider 

τὸ κόμμι gum 

ἢ Ante Latona 

ὃ μάντις seer 

ὃ μῦς mouse 


i φλόξ (γ) ie 
0 φώρ thie} 


δ 


τὸ φῶς (τ) light 


ὃ ὃ χάλυψ (8) steel | 

ὃ χειμὼν tempest, winter 

ἡ χελιδών (0) swallow a 
ὃ χήν goose 

ἡ χϑών (ο) earth 

ἢ χιών (0) snow 

ἢ χλαμύς (δ) war-garment 

ἢ wy countenance 


/ 


=) ogets mule 


τὸ ὄρος mountain 

7 ὄψις face 

7 πειϑώ persuasion 
ὃ πέλεκυς axe (δ 51) 
τὸ πέπερι pepper 

7 πίτυς pine 

7) ποίησις poetry 

ἢ πρὰ χξις action 

ὃ στάχυς ear of grain 
% φύσις nature 


ADJECTIVES. p. 103. 


Examples of adjectives i in ος of two and three endings, for applying the 


rules in § 60. 2 and 4. 


All are to be considered as having three endings, which are not limited 


to two by some definite rule. 


ἀγαπητός beloved 

. ἄδικος unjust 
ἄϑλιος unhappy 
Guanes invincible 

ἄξιος worthy 

ἀριστερός left 
βαρύτονος barytone 
βασιλικός royal 

\ γεωργικός agricultural 
γυμνός naked 
δεξιός right (dexter) 
δῆλος manifest 
διάλυιϑος set with stones 
διάφορος difference 


δίχαιος just 

δυνατός possible 
ἐλαφρός easy 
ἐρυϑρός red 

εὔκαιρος opportune 
ζηλότυπος jealous 
ἡμίγυμνος half-naked 
Savucorog wonderful 
ϑεῖος divine 

ϑερμός warm 
yntog mortal 

ἴδιος own 

ἵερός holy 

καϑαρός clean, pure 


ae 


468 Appenp1x D.—cATALOGUE OF REGULAR VERBS. 
κοινός common πρόϑυμος ready, willing 
λάλος talkative . σεμνός venerable 
λεῖος smooth =~ ἡ σχληρός hard 
λευκός white : σοφός wise 
μαλακός soft σπάνιος rare 
μόνος alone ν᾿ στεγός narrow 
ξένος strange ταλαίπωρος miserable 
. ὀξύϑυμος wrathful τυφλός blind 
ὀρϑός right, straight | φιλότεκγος loving children 
πολυφάγος gluttonous χωλός lame 


APPENDIX D. - 


CatTaLoGue or Reeurar VErRBs. p. 196. 


A 


Preliminary Notes. 


1. In this Catalogue, it is to be assumed of every verb in respect to 
which nothing is specified, that it has the Aorist and the Perfect after 
the first form ; and that its whole conjugation is sufficiently obvious from — 
the rules given in the grammar. ‘This is also the case in respect to every 
particular tense, which is not expressly specified. Consequently, when 
8. g. under any verb there stands simply 4or. 2, in order to shew that this 
verb has this form of the Aorist, it refers solely to the or. Act. (and Mid.) 
while the Aor. Pass. and Perf. Act. are to be made according to the first 
form. 

2. Where the 4or. 2 Pass. is specified, the Aor. 1 Pass. must neverthe- 
less be always formed ; since it very often exists as a less frequent form 
together with the Aor. 2; and the verbs in which it was not used at all 
cannot with certainty be specified. 

3. The Perf. Act. ina multitude of verbs is indeed not in use ; but still 
this can rarely be affirmed with certainty ; and therefore it is to be formed 
in every verb according to the appropriate analogy, and then the Perf. 
Pass. derived from it. 

4. The formation of the Passive can also be admitted without scruple 
even in intransitive verbs; since there are examples where the 3 per. Pass. 
of intransitives is employed. : 

5. To form the Middle, however, from verbs in which it is not in use, 
would be an exercise in barbarisms, without utility. In order, therefore, 
. to be able to practise here with certainty and profit, the Mid. is specified 
under all verbs in which it is found. It must however be noted, that in 
many such verbs it occurs only in certain compounds, which must be 
learned from the lexicon. For practice in formation, however, the sim- 
ple verbs can be used without scruple—When nothing further stands 
than MID. the Aorist and Fut. Mid. conform to the same tenses in the 
Active. 


Aprrenpix D.—CATALOGUE OF BARYTONE VERBS. 


469 


<= 


6. All verbs are regarded as regular, of which the several forms accord 
with the rules given in the grammar, without reference to their signification 


or its anomalies. 


Hence not only Deponents both of the Passive and Middle 


form (δ 118. 8) stand in the catalogue ; but also those verbs in which sin- 
gle tenses deviate from the appropriate signification of their form. This, 
however, is marked in all important cases. 

7. The name—Fut. Mid.—immediately after the Active, shews, that 
such a verb (by § 113. 4) assumes the Future from the Middle form, 
though with a fully Active signification. . 

8. The expression—Pass. takes o—refers everywhere to the Perf. and 
Aor. 1; but stands only with verbsin which this does not follow as a mat- 


ter of course. §§ 98, 100. 


I. Baryrone Verss. p. 196. 


ἀγάλλω adorn. MID. be oxteistailease: 

ἀγγέλλω annownce.—MID.—Aor. 2 
Act. and Mid. are less usual. 

aysion assemble-—-Att. redupl.— 
MID. 

ἄγχω strangle trans. MID. intrans. 

ἄδω contr. from ἀείδω sing. Fut. 

᾿ς Mid., 

ἀϑροίζω assemble 

ἀϑύρω play 2 

αἰκίζω abuse 

αἰνίσσομαι, ττομαι, Dep. Mid. clothe 
in riddles. 

αἴρω raise. See ὃ 10]. n. 2, and 
comp. Anom. Catal.—MID. 

ἀΐσσω Act. and Pass. Depon. spring, 
hasten. Att. ἄττω or ἄττω.. 

aicyiye shame. ‘Pass, am ashamed, 
See ὃ 101..n. 8. 

aiw hear, only Pres. and Impf.— 
Augm. § 84. n. 2. 

ἀκούω hear, Fut. Mid.—Perf. ἀκήκοα, 
Plup. ἡκηκόειν § 85. 2, 3.—Pass. 
takes o; Perf. Pass. erithout re- 
dupl. b 

ἀλαχάζω shout for joy, F. ξω. § 92. 
Ὡς & 

ἀλείφω anoint.—Perf. § 85. 2. _MID. 

‘ ἄλλάσσω, tro, change.—Pass. Aor. 2. 

ἅλλομαν Dep. Mid, leap, § 101. n. 2. 
and comp. Anom. Catal. - 

ἀμβλύνω blunt. 

ἀμείβω change-—MID. ὦ 


} 


ἀμέλγω milk 
ἀμύνω ward off. —Pert. wholly want- 
ing. —MID. 


᾿ἀνύω complete, ὃ 95. n. 3.—Pass. 


takes o.—MID. 


ἅπτω kindle. 

ἅπτω fasten to. MID. seize, touch. 

ἄρδω water. Pass. only Pres. and - 
Impf. 


ἁρμόττω and ἁρμόζω αὐαρί.---Μ10. 

ἀρύω draw water, forms its tenses 
like &viw:—MID. ; 

ἄρχω rule.—MID. begin. 

ἅἁσπάζομαι Dep. Mid. embrace, sa- 
lute 

ἀσπαίρω palpitate 

aotoanta lighten, glisten 

βαδίζω go. Fut. Mid. 

Santo dip. Characteristic ¢.—Pass. 
Aor. 2. 

βδάλλω milk 

βήσσω, tro, cough 

βιάζομαι Dep. Mid. force. 
§ 113. n. 6. 

βλάπτω injure. Charact. β.---Ρ 88. 
Σ Aor. 2. 

βλέπω see. Pass. Aor. 2. § 100. n. 7. 

βλύζω spring up (as water). 

βουλεύω counsel.— MID. 

βράξω ΟΥ̓ βύασσα, tro, boil, ferment, 
winnow., Fut, ow. 

βρέμω murmur, roar. No Aor. and 
no Perf. 


Pass. 


- 


470 


' 
Apprenpix D.—cATALOGUE OF BARYTONE VERBS. 


βοέχω, wet, soak.—Pass. with Aor. 
2, am wet. — 

γέμω am full. No Aor. and no Perf. 

γεύω cause to taste. MID. taste. 

γλύφω carve. Augm. of the Perf. 
§ 83. n. 1. 
γνωρίζω recognize 

γράφω write—Pass. Aor. 2. § 100, 
n. 6.—MID. ; 

δακρύω weep. 


δανείζω lend on interest.—MID. bor- 


row on interest. 

déow flay.—Pass.. Aor. 2. 

δεσπόζω rule 

δεύω moisten 

δέχομαι Dep. Mid.. receive, take.— 

- Pass. see § 113. n. 6. 

Sima lw judge—MID. 

διώκω (not a compound) pursue 

δουλεύω serve 

δρέπω pluck.—MID, 

ἐθίζω accustom. Augm. si, § 84. 2. 

εἰκάζω conjecture. Augm. § 84, n. 9. 

εἴκω yield. Augm. ὃ 84. n. 2 and 4. 
Not to be confounded with the 
Anom, six, 

svoyw exclude. Augm, ὃ 84. n. 2 
and 4. See also Anom. Catal. 

ἐλέγχω confute.—Att.. redupl. —Perf. 
Pass. § 98. n. 7. 

δλίσσω, tw, wind. Augm. e&.—Perf. 
Act. does not occur. Perf. Pass. 
εἵλιγμαι and ἐλήλιγμαι.---Μ ID. 

ἕλκω, see Anom, Catal. 

“ ἐλπίζω hope.—étirw see Anom. Catal. 

ἑορτάζω celebrate. Augm. § 84, n, 9. 

ἐπείγω (not a compound) ampel ; 
Pass. hasten 

ἐπιτηδεύω be diligent. 
n. 5: 

ἐργάζομαι Dep. Mid. work. Augm, 
él.—Pass, see ὃ 113. n. 6. 

ἐρείδω prop.—Att, redup].— MID. 

ἐρέσσω, tro, row. Fut. ow. 

ἐρεύγω spit out.—Aor. 2.—MID. 

ἐρίξω strive, emulate.—Att. redupl. 

ἑρμηνεύω interpret 

tomw.creep. Augm., εἰ, 


Augm. ὃ 86. 


ἐτάξω, comm. ἐξετάζω, examine 

sitive make straight 

εὔχομαι Dep. Mid. pray. See ὃ 84.n.2. 

7000 delight 

ἥκω come, am here. 
Perf. 

ϑάλλω sprout.—Perf. 2, 

ϑαάλπω warm , 

ϑαυμάξω wonder αἱ. Fut. Mid. 

ϑέλγω enchant 

ϑερίζω harvest - 

ϑήγω whet 

ϑλίβῳ crush. — Pass. Aor. 2. § 100. 
n. 6. 


No Aor. and no 


: Soave break in pieces.—Pass. takes o- 


iw, see Anom. Catal. 

ἱδρύω set. — MID, 

ἰϑύνῳ make straight 

ἱκετεύω supplicate 

ἱμείρω Act. and Pass. Depon. desire 

ἱππεύω ride 

ἰσχύω am able 

κοαϑαίρω (not a compound) purify. 
— Aor. 1 takes ἡ. — MID. 

naive kill. — Aor. 2. — Perf. whol- 
ly wanting. — Pass. only Pres. 
and Impf. 

καλύπτω wrap up. — MID. 

κάμπτω bend.—Pass. Perf. § 98. n. 8. 

κείρω shear. — Pass. Aor, 2,—MID. 

κελεύω command. — Pass, takes o. 

κέλλω land. Ἐ', χέλσω, ὃ 101. πῃ. 8. 

κηρύσσω, ττω, proclaim ' 

κιγδυγεύω be in danger 

κλείω, see Anom. Catal. 

κλέπτω steal, Fut. Mid. — Perf. § 97. 
n. 1. — Pass. Aor. 2. 

κλίνω incline, ὃ 101. 9. — Pass. Aor. 

- Land 2, — MID. rarely.. 

κλύζῳ rinse r 

κγίζω rich, burn 

κολάζω punish. Fut. Mid. 

κολούω mutilate. — Pass. with and. 
without σ. 

κομίζω bring. MID. receive. 

xoviw bedust (xoviow, xsxoviuow) 

κόπτω cut.— Perf. 1. (epic Perf. 2.) 
— Pass. Aor.2.— MID. ᾿ 


Apprnpix’ D.—cATALOGUE OF BARYTONE VERBS. 


471 


Ἡραΐνω accomplish 

κρίνω judge, ὃ 101. 9. — MID. 

-xoovw strike—Pass. takes ¢.—MID. 

κρύπτω conceal. Charact. 8. — Pass. 
Aor. 1 and 2. — MID. 

tics found 

xviio roll, — Pass. takes o. 

“ωλύω hinder 

«λέγω say. — MID.—See this verb in 
Anom. Catal. on account of some 
compounds. 

λείβω pour out 

«λείπω leave. — Aor. 2. — Perf. 2. — 
MID. 

λέπω shell. — Pass. Aor. 2 by § 100. 
n. 7. 

Any leave off 

λογίζομαι. Dep. Mid. compute, con- 
clude 

λυμαΐνω spoil. Aor. 1 takes η.--- 1}. 

λύω, see Anom. Catal. 

μαΐνομαι, see Anom. Catal. 

᾿“μαλάσσω, ττω, soften 

᾿μαραΐνω cause to wither.—Aor. | takes 
a. — Pass. wither. 

μέμφομαν Dep. Mid. censure 

“μένω, see Anom. Catal. 

μερίζω divide out. — MID. 

μηνύω pornt at 

μιαΐίνω soil. — Aor. 1 takes 9. 

polive stain, soil 

γέμω, see Anom. Catal. 

veto nod 

_ ψήχομαν Dep. Mid. swim 

γίφω snow 

γομίξζω suppose 

ὀδύρομαι Dep. Mid. lament 

"οἰκτείρω bemoan 


 oiuato wail, ὃ 92. ἢ. 1. — Fut. 
Mid 


_ ὀκέλλω land, trans. and intrans. 

ὀξύνω sharpen, irritate 

ovedilw reproach, revile 

ὀνομάζω name 

ὁπλίζω arm. — MID. i 

ὀρέγω reach out. — Att. redupl. — 
MID. 

δρίζω bound. -- MID. 


ὑρύσσω, ttm, dig. — Att. redupl. — 
MID. 

παιδεύω educate 

παλαΐω wrestle. —- Pass. takes o. 

πάλλω brandish. — Pass. Aor. 2. 

πάσσω bestrew. F. ow. — MID. 

πατάσσω, see Anom. Catal. 

“παύω cause to cease. — Pass. Aor. 1. 

» § 100. n. 1. — MID. 

σεεΐίϑω, see Anom. Catal. 

πείρω pierce. — Pass. Aor, 2.: 

πέμπω send. Perf. ὃ 97. ἢ. 1.—Perf. 
Pass. § 98, η. 8. --- MID. ΄ 

πέγομαι .am poor; only Pres. and 
Impf. 

σεραΐνω accomplish. — Aor. 1, § 101. 
4,— MID. 

melo press 

πιστεύω believe 

πλάσσω, ττω, form. F. ow. — MID. 

σελέχω braid. — Pass, Aor. 2.—MID. 

πλύνω wash, ὃ 101. 9. 

aviyo suffocate trans. Fut. Mid. -- 
Pass. suffocate, intrans. Aor. 2. 
§ 100. n. 6. 

πορεύω bring, conduct. — Pass. jour- 
ney 

πορέζω procure. —MID. gain, acquire 

πράσσω, tra, do, find myself {well or 
ill). Has always long a, ὃ 7. n.4. 
— Perf. 1 have done. Perf. 2 πέ- 
πρᾶγα have been well or ill. (But _ 
see the Ausfihrl. Sprachl. in the 
Catal. of Anom. Verbs.) — MID. 

σπρέπω become ; only Active. 

πρίω saw. — Pass. takes o. 

stain stumble. — Pass. takes o. 

πτήσσω stoop down 

πτίσσω stamp. Fut. oo. 

σπτύσσω fold. — MID. 

πτύω spit. — Pass, takes σ΄ 

πύϑω (long v) cause to rot. — Pass. 
am rotten. 

dant sew, ὃ 92. n. 5. 

δέπω sink 

Ginter, see Anom. Catal. 


» 


“σαΐνω wag, flatter; only Active, — 


Aor. 1 takes 7. 


= 
ys 
hay 


ΝᾺ 


472 


AprenpDIx D.—cATALOGUE OF BARYTONE VERBS. 


σαΐρω sweep. — Aor. 1 takes 7. — 
Perf. 2 has the special signification | 
grin, as Present. 

σέβομαι Dep. Pass. venerate 

σείω shake. — Pass. takes o. — MID. 

σημαΐνω mark, — Aor. 1 takes Ne — 
MID. 

σήπω cause to rot, — Pass. am rot- 
ten, has Aor. 2, to which also 
Perf. 2 belongs. 

σίνομαι injure 

σχάζω limp 

σκάπτω excavate, 
Pass. Aor. 2. 

oxémw cover 

σπέπτομαι Dep. Mid. look about. 

, σκευάζω prepare. — MID. 

σχήπτω Act. and Mid. lean upon, 
support myself. 

σχώπτω scoff 

σπείρω sow. ---- Pass. Aor. 2.— MID, 

σπένδω, see Anom. Catal. 

σπεύδω hasten 

σπουδάζω do with zeal. — Fut. Mid. 

στάζω drop, trickle. ὃ 92. n. 1. 

στέγω cover 

στείβω tread upon.—Pass. Aor. 2. 

στείχω stride, proceed, Aor. 1 and 2. 

στέλλω send. ---- Pass. Aor. 1 and 2, — 
“MID. | 

στένω sigh; only Pres. and Impf. 

στεγάξζω groan. § 92. ἡ. 1. 

στέργω" love, am contented. — Perf. 2. 

στέφω stuff, crown. — MID. 

ee prop, support, ξ 92. n dee 


Charact.. g. — 


Bleed Dep. Mid. conjecture. 

στρατεύω Act. and Mid. take the field 

στρέφω turn, § 98. n. 3. ὃ 100. n. 9.-- 
Pass. Aor.’ 1 and 2.-- MID. _ 

συρίζω pipe, whistle. 

σύρω draw, drag. -- Pass. Aor. 2. -- 
MID. 

σφάλλω deceive. -- Pass. Aor. 2. 

σφάττω slaughter. ---- Pass. Aor. 2. 

σφίγγω fasten, bind fast. -- Pass. 
Perf. § 98. n. 7. 

opit beat, palpitate, § 92. τι. Ἂν 

σχίζω split 


σχολάζω have leisure 

ταράσσω, Tro, see Anom. Catal. 

τάσσω, Tt, arrange.—Pass. Aor. Ἐ 
and 2.—MID. 

τέγγω moisten, wet © 

τείνω extend, δ 101. 9. 

τεχμαίρω fix, limit—Aor. 1 takes - 
—MID. prove. : 

textaive work as carpenter, etc.—Aor. 
1 takes η. 

τέλλω an old word, which occurs 
chiefly in compounds, 6. g. ἐπευτέλ- 
Aw order, give commission, ὃ 101. 
8.—MID. 

τεύχω, see Anom. Catal. 

τήχω soften, melt.—Pass. melt intrans. 
has Aor, 2, to which also the Perf. 
2 belongs. 

τίλλω pluck, pull, § 101. 4.—MID. 

τίω, see Anom. Catal. | 

τινάσσω shake vehemently.—MID. 

τρέμω tremble; has no Aor. and no 
Perf. 

toexw turn, §97.n. 1. § 98, n. 8. δ 100. 
n. 3.—Aor. 2 is the most usual in 
Act. Pass. and MID. 

τρέφω nourish, see Anom. Catal.— 
MID. 

τρίβω rub.—Pass. Aor. 2, § 100. n. 6. 

τρίζω chirp, Fut. ξω. —Perf. TETQLY Oe 

ὑβρίζω insult, abuse. 

ὑφαΐίνω weave. Aor. 1 takes 7. 

ὕω rain. Pass. takes o. 

φαΐνω, see Anom. Catal. 

φαρμάσσω, tt, treat with medicine. 

φείδομαι Dep. Mid. spare 

giéiyyouat Dep. Mid. sound.—Perf. 

BG. αι, 7. 


Ξ 


φϑείρω, see Anom. Catal. 

φλέγω burn trans.—Pass. Aor. 2, § 
100. n. 7. 

φράζω say, inform.—MID. 

φράσσω, tt, shut in, inclose.—Pass. 
Aor. 2.—MID. . 

φρίσσω, tr, shudder.—Charact. #.— 
Perf. 2. 


. φροντίζω take interest in 


φρύχγω roast.—Pass. Aor. 2, § 100. ἢ. 
6. 


» 


3 ’ 5 
_ ayvosa know not. 


/ 


APPENDIX D.— CATALOGUE OF CONTRACTED VERBS. | 


φυλάσσω, ττω, suard,——MID. 

φύρω, see Anom. Catal. 

φυτεύω plant 

χαρίζομαι Dep. Mia. gratify, oblige. 

χορεύω dance 

χρήζω need, require ; only Pres. ‘and 
Impf- —Comp. the Anom. χράω. 

zolw anoint.—Pass. takes o.—MID. 


IJ. Conrractrep 


ἀγαπάω love 

Fut. Mid. 

ἀδιχέω do wrong 

αἰδέομαι Dep. Pass. and Mid. am a-. 
shamed.—F ut. ἐσομαι.---Ῥ 55, Perf. 
and Aor. take o. 

aiuotow make bloody 

αἵρέω, see Anom. Catal. 

αἰτέω ask, demand.—MID. 

αἰτιάομαν Dep. Mid. accuse 

ἀκέομαν. Dep.) Mid. heal.—Fut. too- 
joou.—Perf. takes σ 

ἀχολουϑέω follow 

ἀχριβόω know accurately. —MID. 

ἀκροάομαι Dep. Mid. hear 

ἁλάομαν Dep. Pass. wander about 

ἀλγέω suffer pain 

ἀλοάω thresh, § 95. ὃ 

ἅμάω mow.—MID. 

ἀμφισβητέω strive, am of a different 
opinion. Augm. at the beginning. 

ova (nota compound) afflict.—Pass. 
with Fut. Mid. afflict myself, grieve. 

ἀξιόω esteem worthy 

ἀπαντάω meet. Fut. Mid.—Augm. 

’ in the Iniddle. 

ὅπατάω (not a compound) deceive 

ἀπειλέω (not a compound) threaten 

ἀράομαν Dep. Mid. pray 

ἀρυϑμέω number.—MID. | 

ἀρκέω suffice, retains «in flexion.— 
Pass. with the same signification 
takes o. 

aovéoua Dep. Pass. deny 

ἀρόω till, plough, retains o in flexion. 
—Att. redupl.—Pass. without o. 

ἀρτάω hang up, fasten. —MID. 

ἀσκέω exercise 


ψάλλω play the harp, sing 
ψαὔύω touch. Pass. takes o 


i ψέγω censure 


ψεύδω delude.—MID. deceive, lie 

ψηφίζω count, reckon.—MID. decide 
by vote : 

ψύχω, see Anom. Catal. 


ὠδίνω be in travail. ἡ 


Vergs. p. 215. 


ἀυλέω play the flute 

βιόω, see Anom. Catal. 

βοάω cry out, ὃ 95. 5.—Fut. Mid. 

βουκολέω pasture trans. 

βροοντάω thunder 

γελάω laugh, Fut. Mid.—Has o short 
in flexion. Pass, takes σ. 

γεννάω, beget.—MID. 

δαπανάω Act. and Dep. Pass. expend, 
lay out 

δεξιόομαν Dep. Mid. salute with the 
right hand. 

δέω, see Anom. Catal. 

δηλέω tryjure.—MID. 

δηλόω make known. 

διαιτάω (not a compound) am arbi- 
trator. Pass. live, sojourn. Racca 
§ 86. n. 6. 

διακογέω (not a compound) minister 
to, serve-——-Augm. § 86. n. 6.— 
MID. with the same signif. 

διψάω am thirsty, ὃ 105. n. 5. 

δουλόω enslave.——-MID. 

δράω do.—Different from the Anom. 
διδράσκω. 

δυστυχέω am unhappy 

ἐάω let, permit.—Augm. ev. 


_ ἐγγυάω give as pledge, pawn.—-MID. 


pledge myself. 

ἐγχειρέω put into one’s hands, deliver. 
Augm. § 86. n. 5. ) 

ἐλεέω compassionate 

ἐμέω vomit, retains 8 in flexion.— 
Att. redupl.—Pass takes o. 

ἐναντιῥομαν Dep. Pass. am opposed. 
—Augm. at the beginning. 

ἐνϑυμέομαν Dep. Pass. have in mind, 
think upon.—Augm. §86.n.5. 


474 /Avpexprx D.—cATALOGUE OF CONTRACTED VERBS. 


évoyléw burden, molest. —Augm. § 86. 
n. 6. 

ἐπυιϑυμέω desire.—Augm. § 86. n. 5. 

ἐπιχειρέω undertake.—Augm. S 86. 
n. 5. 

ἐράω, see ἀλλοῖα: Catal. 

ἐρευνάω Act. and Mid. search out, 
investigate 

ἐρημόω make desert 

ἐρυϑριάω blush 

ἐρωτάω ask, question 

ἑστιάω ‘entertain.--Augm. &. 

εὐεργετέω do good to.—Augm: ὃ 86. 2. 

εὐσεβέω am pious. —-Augm. § 86. 2. 

εὐωχέω entertain. Pass. feast, revel. 
-—-Augm. § 86. 2. 

Caw, see Anom, Catal.—§ 105. n. 5. 

ζέω boil intrans. retains 8 in flexion. 

ζηλόω emulate, rival 

ξημιόω punish 

ζητέω seek 
ζωγραφέω paint 

} ἡβάω am young 

ἡγέομαι Dep. Mid. suppose 

ἡμερόω tame 

ἡττάομαν only Pass. am inferior, am 

_ overcome 

ἠχέω sound 

ϑαῤῥέω, ϑαρσέω, have confidence 

ϑεάομαν Dep. Mid. behold, view 

Inoaw hunt, Fut. Mid. 

S100 crush, has α short in flexion.-- 
Pass. takes o. 

ϑρηγέω lament, bewail 

᾿ (ϑυμιάω burn incense 

ϑυμόω become angry 

ἰάομαν Dep. Mid. heal 

ἱδρόω sweat 

ἑμάω draw sc. water.—MID. 

ὑστορέω search into, inquire 

πακόω injure, weaken 

παυχάομαι Dep. Mid. boast 

uevtéw prick, sting 

uLveod Move 

xléw break, has α short in flexion.— 
Pass. takes o.—Must not be con- 
founded with χλάω, χλαΐω, see 
Anom. Catal. 

acs choose by lot. MID. cast ἘΝ 


κγάω scrape, § 105. n. 5. 

κοιμάω put to sleep. Pass. (epic Mid.) 
sleep 

zovvow Act. and Mid. make common, 
share 

κοινωγέω participate 

κολλάω glue 

κολυμβάω swim 

κορέω sweep; diff. from Anom. xo- 
θέννυμι 

κοσμέω adorn 

κοτέω Act. and Mid. excite a grudge, 
‘arritate ;. retains ¢ in flexion ὁ 

κρατέω have power, hold fast 

κροτέω beat, clap 

κτυπέω resound, make a noise 

nuBeovaw steer, guide 

λαλέω speak 

λιπαρέω implore 

λοιδορέω Act. Pass. and Mid. re- 


- _ proach, revile 


λυπέω grieve, mortify 

λωβάομαι Dep. Mid. misuse 

λωφάω relax, yield 

μαρτυρέω testify 

μειδιάο smile 

ψμετρέω measure.——M 110. 

μηχανάομαν Dep. Mid. produce by 
art, contrive. ἡ 

μεμόρμαι Dep. Mid. imitate 

μισέω hate 

γέω, see Anom. Catal. ’ 

vinee conquer 

γοέω think 

voud stew admonish 

tw scrape, polish; retains ¢ in flex- 
ion. Pass. takes o. 


_ oinéw inhabit 


οἰκοδομέω build.--MID. 

oxvéw am slothful, will not 

ὁμολογέω agree, confess 

ὀπτάω roast 

ὀρϑόω. set upright, erect. —MID.— 
Compound ἀνορϑόω, Augm. § 86. 
n. 6. 

ooueéw Act. and Pass. press forward, 
endeavour 

δρμέω lie at anchor 

δρχέομαν Dep. Mid. dance 


| 


AppENbDIX E.—TECHNICAL EXPRESSIONS. A75 


ὀχέω drive trans,—Pass. drive intrans. 
παροινέω am sabia ges —Augm. ὃ 86. 


n. 6. 

πατέω tread 

πεινάω am hungry, ὃ 105. n, 5. 

σειράω tempt, ργουε.-ττστειρ ἄομαν With 
Fut. Mid. and Aor. Pass. attempt, 
undertake 

περάω, see Anom Catal. 

πηδάω leap. Fut. Mid. 

πλανάω cause to wander. 
der 

σελεογεχτέω am covetous 

πληρόω Jill 

πονέω Act, and Mid. labour. Fut. 
ἤσω and éow 

στερόω furnish with wings: 

στωλέω sell © 

διζόω cause to take root. 
root 

σημειόω mark.—MID. 

σιγάω am silent. Fut. Mid, 

ovtéoua Dep. Mid. eat 

σιώπάω am silent. Fut. Mid. 

σκιρτάω͵ leap about, spring 

σμάω, see Anom. Catal. 


Pass. wan- 


Pie take 


σπάω draw, has « short in flexion.— 
Pass. takes o.—MID. 

στεφαγόω crown.—Mid. 

συλάω plunder 

σφριγάω swell from fulness 

τελέω finish ; retains ¢ in flexion.— 
Pass. takes-o.—MID. 

τηρέω watch 


: τιμάω honouwr.—MID. 


τιμωρέω help, avenge.—MID. 

τολμάω dare 

τρέω tremble, § 105. n. 2. Retains 8 
in flexion. 

τρυπάω bore 

τρυφάω am effeminate, revel 


᾿φϑονέω envy 


φιλέω love - 

φοβέομαι Dep. Pass. fear 

φοιτάω visit 

φυσάω blow 

χαλάω relax, remit, yield ; has o short 
in flexion. Pass. takes o. 

χειρόω Act. more: comm. Mid. sub- 

ες due, subject to myself 

χωρέω vo away, yield. Fut. Mid. 

ψάω rub, § 105. π, 5.—MID. 


APPENDIX E. 


TrecHNICAL GRAMMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. 


I. Greek. 


A: Lerrers. στοιχεῖα letters ; φωγήεντο; καὶ σύμφωνα vowels and conso- 
nants ; ἄφωνα mutes, ἡμίφωνα semivowels, voya* liquids ; δασέα, ψιλά, μέ-- 
σα, rough smooth, middle.—énionuoy, an old letter used only as a numeral, 
p. 22. 


2. AccENTS, ETC» προσῳδίαν accents; but under this name are also 
commonly included quantity, breathing, apostrophe, and hypodiastole (§ 15.. 
2. comp. § 7. 1); ὀξεῖα, βαρεῖα, περισπωμένη, grave, acute, circumflexr.— 
πνεύματα breathing's ; δασεῖα καὶ ψιλή (se. προσῳδία) rough and, smooth,—. 
στιγμή, τελεία στιγμή, point, period, μέση στιγμή colon, ὕποστιγμή comma.— 
χρόνος quantity, συλλαβὴ δίχρονος (anceps) doubtful syllable —yacuwdia t 
hiatus, ᾿ 


etn “These are also called. ἀμετάβολα, because they are not changed 1 in declen- 
sion and conjugation. 
+ The form χασμῳ δία, as it is sometimes written, is false ; for there is nothing 
of ἄδω in this word, which comes from χασμώδης having gaps. 


ee - 


a. τ τὰ tae 


476 Aprrenpix E.—TECHNICAL EXPRESSIONS. 


τς 3. Parts oF SPEECH. ὄνομα noun (Ὀγομα προσηγορικόν substantive, 
ἐπιϑετικόν adjective, κύριον proper name) ; ἀντωνυμία pronoun, ἄρϑρον ar- 
ticle (προτασσόμενον, v ὑποτασσόμενον, Or -αχτικόν, prepositive, postpositive) ; 
μετοχή participle, ῥῆμα verb, ἐπίῤῥ inua adverb, πρόϑεσις preposition, σύν-- 
δεσμος conjunction. ‘The interjections are included under adverbs. 


4. AccIDENTS OF Nowns, ETC. γένος ἀρσενικόν, ϑηλυχόν, οὐδέτερον, Mase: 
Fem. Neut. --ἀριϑμὸς ὃ ἑγικός, δυϊκός, πληϑυντικός, Sing. Dual, Plural. —xh- 
σις declension, πτώσεις CASES ; ; ὀρϑή or εὐϑεῖα, or talso ὀγομαστική, Nom. 
γενική Gen. δοτική Dat. αἰτιατική Acc, χλητική Voc. πτώσεις πλάγιασι 
onlay cases. 


ὄνομα ἀπολελυμένον or ἀπόλυέτον, also ἁπλοῦν and Sasiiiy, positive ; 3 συγ- 
κριτικόν comparative, ὑπερϑετικόν superlative. 


5. ACCIDENTS oF VERBS,ETC. συζυγία conjugation, under which how- 
ever the Greeks understand different classes of verbs which are conjuga- 
ted alike, e.g. the verbs, 1, u, v, ρ. What we mean by the verb conjugate, 
as also by declension, is called in Greek xdivew, κλίσις, inflect, decline ; in- 
Jlection, declension. ee theme ὃ 92. 6.---πρόσωπα persons. 

αὔξησις συλλαβικὴ καὶ χρονική, Augm. syllab. et temp. — ᾿ἀναδιπλασιασμός 
reduplication. 

διάϑεσις character of the verb, according to which it is ἃ bine éveg- 
γητικόν, παϑητικόν, μέσον, Active, Panic. Middle.—avtomatés intransitive, 
ἀλλοπαϑὲς transitive. 

: ἐγκλίσεις Moods ; ; δριστική Indic. ὑποτακτική Subj. εὐχτική Opt. προστα-- 
χτική ΠΆΡΟΣ; ἀπαρέμφατος Infinitive. 

χρόνοι Fenses ; ἐνεστώς Present, παρῳχημένος Preterite, μέλλων Future’ ; 
τ᾿ παρακείμενος Perfect, παρατατικός Imperfect, ὕπερσυντελικός Pluperf. 
ἀόριστος Αουϊδί.--[ἰ(παράτασις duration, συντέλεια completion, momentary ac- 
tion.) 

σύνϑεσις proper composition ; ; παράϑεσις loose somsineiiin, i. 6. arising 
from mere juxtaposition ; παρασύνϑετα words derived from compound words. 


Π. English.* 


Prosody, see § 7. 1. | Position, §7. 8. 
Pure vowels, § 28. 1 Hiatus, § 29. 1. 


Synaeresis, the contraction of yowels. 
Diaeresis, the separation of two vowels, § 15. 3. 
Resolution into a double sound, 105. n. 10. 


Synalephe, the union of two syllables in one, chiefly in two words follow- 
ing one another. It includes both 


Elision, § 28 3. and Crasis, § 29. 2. 
Synizesis or Synecphonesis, § 28. n. 6. Append. A. 7. 


* From the Author’s Schul-Grammatik, 8th Ed. p. 383. 


Apprnp1x K.—TECHNICAL EXPRESSIONS. , A477 


Aphaeresis, the taking away of one or more letters from the beginning of 
the usual form of a word; e.g. εἴβω poetic for λεΐβω, ἡ for φῇ or 
ἔφη, ὁ 109. I. 4. 

Syncope, the same in the middle of a word; 6. g. τέραος for τέρατος, πατρός 
for matégos, § 47. 

lpocope, the same at the end of a word, e. g. πάρ for παρά, § 117. n. 2. 

Prosthesis, the addition of one or more letters vat the beginning of the 
usual form of a word, 6. g. σμικρός for μικρός. 

; Epenthesis, the same in the middle of a word, e. Ee πτόλεμος poetic for 
πόλεμος. ἡ 

Paragoge, the same at the aid of a word ; e. g. évé for ἐν. 

Metathesis, the transposition of letters, § 19. ἢ. 2. § 110. 11. 

Diastole and Hypodiastole, ὃ 15. 2. 

Metaplasm, § 56. 5. | Heteroclite, § 56. 5. 

Abundans, ὃ 56, 4. | Genus ens § 32. n. 3. 

Characteristic, δ 91. 2. shes § 92. 6. 
_Union-vowel, § 87. n. 1. 
Anastrophe, § 117. 3. ΣᾺ, 
T'mesis, the separation of the preposition ‘ofa compound verb from the 

verb, 6. σ. a” ὧν ἔδοντο Tonic for ἀπέδοντο οὖν, ὃ 147. n. 10. 


τι Correlatives, § 78. § 116. 


Verbs’ Transitive, those which take an immediate object in the Accus. 
upon which the action passes over. 

—— Iniransitive or Neuter, those which take no immediate object, 
8 3§181-2. 

reflexwe and reciprocal, § 89. 1. comp. § 74. 3, 4-and marg. note. 


—— causative 
—— immediate § 119, 2. 


- impersonal, § 129, 10. 

Apposition, when one noun is joined to another in the same case, for the 
sake of explanation or further description ; 6. g. Κῦρος Bao "λεύς, Cyrus 
the king ; ἐμοὶ σῷ πατρί, to me thy father. 

Hypothetical Construction, § 189. 9. 

Altraction, § 142. 2. § 143, 3. § 151. I. 

Asyndeton, § 149 under δέ, p. 425. ᾿ 

Hyperbaton, when one or more words are placed out of their natural order; 
6. g. ἐν “ἄλλοτε ἄλλῳ, for ἄλλοτε ἐν ἄλλῳ, “ another time in another—;” 
§151. TIT. 1. 

Ellipsis, the omission of one or more words, § 151. IV. 


Pleonasm, when one-or more words, strictly taken, stand superfiuously, 
inasmuch as their sense is already contained in the context. Comp. 
᾿ς § 133. n. 2 towards the end. 


Anacoluthon, § 151. 11. 
, at 


ᾧ 


wae 


478 AprrenpiIx F'.—aABBREVIATIONS. 


΄ 


APPENDIX F. 


CHARACTERS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN WRITING. 


1. Besides the Abbreviations given in § 2. n. 2, which are still found in 
modern printing, it is necessary, in order to read the early editions, to be- 
come acquainted with a multitude of,other characters. 'This object how- 
ever would be less completely effected by giving a full catalogue of all 
the characters employed, which would only serve to confuse the eye, than 
by a selection of such as we here subjoin in a tabular view, where they 
can easily be committed to memory, or readily referred to. 'The method here 
adopted is, first, to give certain simple elements which everywhere occur 
in the compound characters; and then also certain compounds, by the 
analogy of which other compound characters may be recognized, wherever 
they are met with. 


2. In this Table therefore, Series I contains only forms of single letters 
which are no longer used in ordinary printing ; and even not in the ear- 
lier, except as elements of more complicated characters. Thus, 6. g. the 
twofold form of 8, which is found in the characters for ἐν and ἐπό in 
Col. [IV ; and the form of co, found in like manner in the characters for oa, 
go, ow, in Col. V. Both these letters, however, serve also as elements in 
characters not here given. 


3. The unusual figure of the x in Series I, must not be confounded (1) with 
the ἡ; as an element of yy in Series I1; nor (2) with the character for τὸ 
at the end of the same series; especially when the upper part of this char- 
acter is not bent far enough back, as is the case with some kinds of type. 

4, Of the three forms of ν in Series I, the first was formerly very com- 
mon, and the second is the same furnished with the stroke of union on . 
the right. It is obvious, that the letter in this shape stands in the same 
relation to the common p, as Nto M. The third form of the y was used 
as a final letter, and is common in many current editions, especially those 


printed at Bale, e.g. of Eustathius; and must not be confounded with 
the very similar character for oo in Col. V. - 


5. Series [I contains several characters, the elements of which would not 
at first sight be obvious; and which are therefore separated from the 
alphabetical Columns III—VI. This might indeed have been done also - 
with some of those beginning with ἐπὶ in Col. IV; but it was thought 


preferable to leave these latter all standing together, for the sake of easier 
comparison. 


6. The columns III--VI contain therefore only such characters, whose 
initial letter, with the help of Series I, may be easily ascertained. They 
all stand in alphabetical order. ‘ 


AprENpIx F'.—ABBREVIATIONS. 479 


TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 


i ee δ ee 1, 
a Fo MEN 6 é x γ γ γ σ 
II. 
by a 
Soa N . 4 ¢ § Wo ed ὃ. ὃ ἃ 
_ ov yao yao ée δὶ ἐλ ἣν Ov τῷ ὺ δὲ καὶ τὸ 
IIT. Iv. Vv. Vi. 
ag, ane é1) εἶναι μὰ μετὰ ὍΣ, ταῦϑα 
se ow ἐν AF ue τὴν 
dy αλ a ge πδ μῶν . 
ὄπ" ἐπειδὴ oF εὐ Τὴ της 
wm done eS ae 
. 5 9 3 
πριν ἀγα, ἐγ δεν τον" 
ἀβιθ ὦ ὥδοις gy 
fi un ἐπὲ Wired 0d =. tre ee 
~ os ΔΩ ΔΗ͂Σ oP LEQ ΩΝ oe, 
Ns yes by ev 7° πο a 70 
‘ie sth <a, κατὰ 89 ρὸ ΟΦ τρο 
2 ΠῚ ΧΕ x κεφάλαιον G εν ζὸ τῶ 
ν᾿ γίνεται μ᾿ o@ “σὲ το: 
pa μάτων A ot ee 
‘al pa ped of ‘ at τῶν 
x γρι a iis G © picid 
RI EO δὴ μὲν a ὅπ nu. νὰ 
pee PW μεν ses Naw ὑπ 
XG δευ 3 Θ | 
fied μὲν ai 88. 8 
aE δια ὥ μένος ω ἘΝ ne 0 
Sy δια we eta Ἔ ταῖς gg 


‘ 


— 


Γ 
| 

: 

af 


GREEK INDEX. 


Norte. 


This Index is not intended to supersede the necessity of con- 


stant reference to the Alphabetical Catalogues of Irregular Nouns and Verbs 
in § 58 and § 114, where all such words and their various forms are particu~ _ 
larly to be sought; although a few of them may ‘also stand here. 


A 


a Dor. for η 14, 55, 69, 
155.—Ion. for ¢ 55, 
213.--After 0, 67,102, 
153.—after ¢, 1, 9, 153. 


ἃ Ion. for ἡ 55.—aand ᾿ 


o before a vowel go 
into αὖ and ov 55. 
a- privative 335.—be- 


fore Adjectives 103. 


— intensive 335.— 
doubtful 336. 


-o, quantity of 68, 80.—. 


in Att. Acc. Sing. 88. 
— in fem. Adj. 102.- 
as adverbial ending 
310. 

ἄάατος 264. 

ἄατος 269. 

ἄγαν in composit. 52. 
n. 3. 

ἄγε δή 431. 

ἀγχοτάτω 311. 

ἀδικεῖν c. Accus. 359.— 
c. 2 Accus. 362. n. 4. 

ἀεί, αἰεί, 317.--0 a8 439. 


-ato, flexion 148.--de- 


rivat. and signif. 204, 
322. 


ἀηδών 93. 


᾿αϑάνατος 95. 

"Adve 68. : 

-αϑον, τάϑειν (Verbs) 
254. - 


/ 


αὖ pronunciation of, 26. 

παν elided, 63. n. ὅ.-- 
three like forms in αὖ 
198.— -o1 and -ov 
short 39, 40. 

ἄϊδος, ἀΐδου, 93. 

αἰνέω 154. 

-αἰνω (Verbs) flexion, 
172. n. 2.--deriv. and 
significat. 204, 322. 


. 7 
from verbs in ao, 


255. 
αἱρέω 154, 265. 
-αίρω (Verbs) 172. n. 2. 
αἴρω Aor. 172. n. 2. 265. 
aio, Augm. 133. 
ἀκήκοα 165. n. 3. 
ἀκούειν, constr. 365. ἢ. 
ἀχροάομαι, flexion, 155. 
n. 
ἄχαλήεν, ἃ οἷ. 2160. n. 3. 
ἄληϑες, 437. 
ἀλήλιφα 165. n. 3. 
ἀλλά, ἀλλὰ veo, and oth- 
er like phrases with 
ἀλλά, 428, 433. 
ἅλλομαι, Aor. 101. n. 2. 
ἄλλος, ἕτερος, 901.---Ο. 
Gen. 866. n. θ.---ἄλλο 
ἤ, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ 485.--ἄλλο 
ti ἢ; 490.---ἀλλως" τε 
καὶ 436.-- 
als 76. n. 


᾿ ἄλφι 96. 


ἀλώπηξ 75. 


. ἅμα 408.---ἅμα (---καὶ) 


Synt. 439. 

ἀμέλει 438. 

ἀμπέχω 48, π. 8. 

ἀμφί, ἀμφίς, 911 η.4..---- 
οὗ ἀμφί 439. 

ἀμφότερον 125.--Synt. 
436. ---ἄμφω 125, 

ἄν, ἐάν, ἢν 317. --Synt. 
385, 386.--ay ce. Inf. 
and Particip. 388.— 
c. Indicat. 389. n. 5. - 
--éy omitted, 391. 

ἀνά apocop. 318. 

ἄνα up! 319. 

ἄνα Vocat. 82. n. 5. 

ἀνάγκη Synt. 357. 

ἐν Augm. 134. n. - 


ἀνήρ 35, .-τ-ἄγερ θ1, ἩΞῚ. 
---ἀνήρ With pers. ap- 
pellat. Syné. 342. n, Pd 

ἄνϑ' ὧν 485. 

ἄντα 33. n. 10. 

-avog quantit. 77. n. 1. 

ἀνύω, ἀνύτω, 154, marg. 

-ἄνω (Verbs) quantity 
255. 

ἀνώϊστος 305. 

ἀνώτερος 112. marg.— 
ἀνωτέρω 311. 

ἄνωχϑε 246. n. 5. 

ἄξετε 162. πη; 9. 

ao changed into sw 55. 
n. 10. 70. ἢ. 5. 

-ao 2 pers. Pass. 199. 


4 


GREEK INDEX. 


48} 


M06, πεῶς, 5D marg. 

ἅπας Synt. 351. 

ἀπεῖργε Augm. 134. n. 
4, 


ἀπεφϑός 48. n. 3. 

ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν 393. n. 2. 

ἀπό apocop. 819.--ἄπο 
319.--in composition 

"415. nil. 

ἀποδιδράσκειν ὁ. Accus. 
Ἧς ἐξ 

᾿Δπόλλων Voc. 89, n. 8. 
--with long α 35.-- 
Accus. 90. 

ἀπονέεσϑαι (long a) 35. 

ἀπωτάτω 311. 

ἄρ, ἄρα, 318, 431 «τἄρα 
and aga 431.--αρ᾽ 
ouy 431. 

"ἄρά (ἀρή) and ἀρή 84. 
marg. 

ἀρετή and "Ἄρης 111 τη. 

“Aons (ἃ) 35. 

ἀρξάμενος Synt. 440. 

ἀρύω, ἀρύτω, 154. m. 

ἀρχήν Adverb 310. 

-ας quantity 69. n. 5. 

ἀσϑμα 324, τη. 

-aot local form 313. 

τασχον iterative 198. 

ἄσσα, ἅσσα, 123, 194, 

ἄσσον 312. 

-παται, --ατο, 3 Pl. 200. 

ἅτερος 61. n. 5. 

ἅτος. 264, 269. 

ἀτρέμα and ἀτρέμας ae 
n. 2. Ὶ-. 

ἄττα, ἅττα, 123, 124. 

αὖ 430. 

αὐτάρκης Gen. Pl. 85. 
n. 4. 

αὐτός 119, 123.-—Synt. 
349, 350. -- oblique 
cases, 349, n. 1.-- 
αὐτὸς ἴῃ composit. 
(wv) 55. n. 11.--Dat. 
without σύν 438. 
Phrases with αὐτός 
436, 487.--0 αὐτός 
constr. 368. 


‘ 


ἀφαιρεῖσϑαι τινά T1361. 


ἀφέωνται 231. m. 


᾿ ἀφύη, ἡ, 69. IIT. 1. 


ἀχέων, ουσα, 265. 

-ayn, -αχοῦ, 316. n. 5. 

ἄχρι and ἄχρις 53.-- 
Synt. 408. 

-ἄω, With cognate ε, 

' 213. n. 8.—derivat. 
and signif, 204, 321. 
~—desiderative 323. 

-awy into -swy (Dec. I) 
70. n. 5 


4 


B \ 


β inserted, 49. n. 1. 248. 

Bi arising aia μ᾽ 248. 

Barto flexion 149. n. 5. 

βασιλεύτερος. 113. τ. 2. 

Bai, numeral letter, 22, 
460 sq. 

βήσεο 162. n. 9. 


᾿βλάπτειν ec. Accus, 351. 


nL 
βλάξ 109. m. 948, m. 
βόλεσϑε 55. n. 8. 
βορέας, βοῤῥᾶς 68. 
βοίλομαι Augm. 132. n, 
ὅ.--βούλει 200, 
βοῦς 85. 
Bas, βῶν, 85. 


I 


y nasal, 23, 25, 168. m. 

γάρ 428, 450. 

yy for win Perf. Pass. 
168. n. 7. 


ye 431. ye μέν, ye μήν 
432. 

γεγᾶκειν 272. 

-yélwg compound sins 


106. n. 5. 
γέρας 89.--- γέρα, τὰ, 60, 
89. n. 3. 


γεω-- 334. n. 2. 
γὴ 68, 334. n. 2. 


γῆρας 89. 
γλάφυ 96. 
γλύφω 32. 
γραῦς 86. 


A 


6 characterist. 147, 148. 

ὃ inserted, 49. n. 1. 

δᾶερ 81. n. 1. 

doit’ (i) 60, 92. n. 5. 

-δὲ 44. n. 2. 313. 

δέ Synt. 425, 426. 

δείδεγμαι, δείδεκτο, 274. 

δεῖν (in phrase) 437. 

δεῖσϑαι ο. Gen. of pers. 
365. 

δέσποτα 69. ΠῚ. 2. 

δεῦρο, δεῦτε, 312, 315. 

δεύτατος 115. marg. 

δέχϑαι 245. 

δέω 154. n. 4. 437, 

δή Synt. 431. 

δῆλός εἰμι Synt. 445. 

-δὴν, -δον, adverb. end- 
ing 332, 999. 

δήποτε appended 315. 

δήπου, δήπουϑεν, 432. 

δῖα (a) 102. n. 1. 

διά prepos. 409, 410. 

διάγειν, διαγέγνεσϑαι, 
διατελεῖν, c. Part. as 
adverbs, 404. 


δίκαιός εἶμι πράττειν etc. 


δίκην Synt. 409. n. 2. 

διό, διότι, 311, 423. ᾿ 

διψὴν 213. n. 5. 

dow, δοιοί, 113. 

δοκοῦν absol. Synt. 407. 
n. 7, 2. 

δορυξέ 71. m. 

δύναμαι Augm. 132. n. 
5. 


δυνατόν Syint. 407. n. 
roy S 

ΤΡ in compos. 136, 
335. 

δύσεο 162. n. 9. 

δῶ 96. 


! 


482 


ἄς 


GREEK INDEX. 


- 


4" 

8 for α before liquids 
59. η. 9. 

ε in verbs in aw 2138. 
n. 8. 

8 inserted 58. n. 3. 119. 
n. 1. 123. n. 2, 

€as union-vowel. 138. 

e for 55. ἢ. 3. 

é changed into et 52, 54. 

τ 8 for ἡ in ἘΝ 203. n. 
15. 

ξ Synt. 350. 

-se for -ν 229. n. 7. 

—8ol, £0, 2 pers. Pass. 
199. comp. 213. 

ἐάν, ἤν, ἄν, 385, 386. 
comp. 424. 

-éato 3 Pl. 200, 213. 

ἑαυτόν Synt. 350, 351.---- 
omitted, 308. n. 2. ° 


. éaw retains α 155. ἢ. 7. 


ἐβήσετο 162. n. 9. 

evonyogds 246. n. 5. 

ἐγῷδα, ἐγῷμαιυ, 62. n. 9. 

ἔδομαι 158. n. 18. 

ἑδοῦμαι 158. n. 16. 

ἐδύσετο 162. n. 9. 

ἕερμαι, -μένος, 279. 

ἐέσσατο 232. 

ἔην from stud 294. m. 

ξῆος 97. τη. 

ἐθέλειν Synt. 394, 440, 

ἐθηῆτο 215. m. 

et diphth. 26.--resolved 
into 9 55, n. 8.--in 
dissyl. verbs. contr. 
212. n. 2. 

εἶ-- Augm. temp. 133. 

-st 2 pers. Pass. 200. 

εἰ c. Indic. and Opt. 
85, 423. --εῖ μή 416. 
τε δὲ μή 422. --εἰ 
μὴ διά 439..---εἰ γάρ, 
εἰ καί, 423. 

“ἕνα (nouns in) 69, 325, 
327, 

“δια, εἰας, etc. Opt. 199. 
n. 4. 


εἴδω signif. 261. 


εἶεν 233. m. 

εἴην from εἶμι go, 235. 8. 

evs 39. n. 2. 

εἰκάξω Augm. 133, n. 2. 

εἴκοσι, σιν, 58. 

εἰκών 93. 

εἷλον Augm. 133. n. 1. 

-εἰν instead οἵ--ην 231.3. 

εἶναι verb omitted 356. 
--sivet Infin. Synt. 
441.---ἔστι and ἐστὶ 
233. 3.--totw οἵ 354. 
n.3. 488.---ἔστι, phra- 
ses with, 438. 

eusteg elliptic 449. 

εἷς With person 413. ἢ. 
5.—c. Gen. 367. n. 9. 

εἶσϑα Hom. 985. 8. 

εἶτα 409, 429. 

εἶτα, ἔπειτα, after Parti- 
cip. 403. 

εἴτις 423. 

stato Augm. 133. ἡ. 1. 
165. n. 2. 

ἐκ see ἐξ.---- ἐκ-- un- 
changed before all 
consonants 50. 

ἑκάτερος, ἕκαστος, 125. 

ἑκαστέρω 511. 

ἐχδῦμεν 276. τη. 

ἐχεῖ, ἐκεῦϑεν, ἐκεῖσε, 515. 

ἐκείγῃ, ἐκείνως, 316. n. 7. 

ἐχεχειρέα 48. τι. 3. 

ἔχπαγλος 290. n. 

ἐλήλυϑα 165. n. 3. 

ἕλμινς 52. n. 2. 

ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν 393. n. 2. 

éy- unchanged before 
o and ζ, 52. n. 3. 


ἐν for εἰς Synt. 413.-—éy . 


tog 438. 

ἐνδότατος 112. τη. ἐνδο- 
τάτω 311. 

ἐνδύω τινά τι 361. 

ἕνεχα 317, 439.--omit- 
ted 393..n. 1. See 
Prepositions. 


ἕνεκεν before consonants 
317. 


ἔνι, ἔνεστι, 319, 438.-- 
See ὡς ty. 

ἔνϑα, ἔνϑεν, 315. 

ἐξ (#¢) 42. -- ἐξ and ἐκ 
58, 54, 317. -- with 
the Passive 370. 3. 

eEagvos 309. n. 3. 
ἔξεστι 438. -- ἐξόν 407. 
he’ Ty ee 

ξούκα, Polite, ete. 134. 
-- ἔοικα, οἶκα, 241.m. 

ἐόλητο 278 

ἕξός, ἅ, ov 119. n. 7. 

ἐπαφή 48. n. 3. 

ἐπεὶ, 423. --- ἐπειή 518. 

ἔπειτα, ἕπειτεν, 917. --- 
after. Particip. 409. 
n. 6. comp. 429. 

ἔπεσον 162. n. 9. 

ἔπι for, ἔπεστι, 319. -- 
ἐφ ᾧ, ép ᾧτε, 435. 

ἐπιδευής 557. 

ἔπλων 244. n. 1. 

ἐρᾷν and φιλεῖν 365. m. 

Ἕρμέας, “Ἑρμῆς, 68. 

ἐρμένος 279. 

ἐῤῥάδαται 201, ὅ. 

ἐρύομαν 154. m. 

ἔρχεσϑαν 6. Particip. 
Fut. 440. 

τεσι(») -εσσι(») 82. n. 2. 

ἕστασαν and ἔστασαν 


ἔστι See εἶναν 

ἔσχατος 112. 

ἑτεροῖος 197. 

ἕτερος 125. -— Synt. 351. 
c. Genit. 366. n. 6. 

ἐτησίαι, οἵ, 09. IIT. 1. 
δτυ 490. 

πολ Synt. 356, 357. 

-sv and -o2, Vocat. 39. 

ev for co ὅθ. n. 5, 158. 
n.17. 172.n.1. 200. 
Til. 4. 214. n. 13. 

εὖ for ἡ) in Fut. 155. n. 9. 

ev in compos. 136. 

εὔαδον 267. 


GREEK INDEX. 


εὐθύ and esvdve 810, 
317. 

ἐύΐς 58. τη. 

-svw (Verbs) 204, 321. 

ἔχεα 212. m.. 

ἔχειν, ἔχων, Synt. 442, 

ἔφην, preterite 238. 

ἐφ ᾧ, see ἐπὸ and ὅς. 

ἐχρῆν Accent 808. m. 

ἐψύγην 171.0. 8... 

ew ὅ5. η..10. 70. n. 5. 
308. m. 

-éw (Verbs) 204, 321.-- 
dissyllab. not contr. 

— 212.n.2.—-for - 253. 

ἐῴκειν etc. 134. τ. 9. 
241. m. 

ἕως Synt. 408. 


Z. 


ξζ 23, 51, 52. -- 
characteristic, 148. 

-—s 51, 313. n. 2. 

ζῇν 213. n. 5. 

-ζω characteristic 148. 
- frequentat. 323. 


as 


rs 


ῃ pronune, 24. : 

ῃ for ἃ 55. πη. 7. - in 
Crasis 61.--in Dec. I, 
69. -- in Verbs 155. 
n.7. -- in Verbs in aw 
213. n. 5, 

ῃ for ἃ 69, ΤΥ. 1. 

η for ε, δῦ. ἢ. 8. 

a he said, 239. 

ἤ and ἡ Synt. 424. -- 
432. 

τῆαν 2 pers. Pass. 199. 

ἡ δ᾽ ὃς 239, comp. 348. 
Vi, 2: ; 

ἠὲ for 7, ἢ 318. 


ῆϑος in comp. 85. n. 4. 


310. n. 1. 
mt for εν 50. ἢ. 8. 
ἤϊα, no, Impf. 236, 237. 
ἥκιστα 312. 


ἥκω Synt. 382. 

mde Vocat. 97. 

ἦμι-, 115. m. 

ἣν ἄρα 382. n. 9. --- ἦν 
for ἡνίδε 312. n. 7. 

ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ 239. ͵ 

᾿ἢνί, ἡνῖδε, 312. n. 7. 

ἤπαφον 160. n. 3. 

-ς heterocl. 92. n. 4. 

jo dny for Pres. 382. n. 9, 

-ησι 3 pers. Sing. 220. 

or any BG, 

-nov local form 313. 


ἥσσων 111. — ἧσσον. 
(rr) 312. 

ἤτοι 40. n. 3. ---- in Cra- 
sis 61. ἢ. 8. 


qv diphth. 26. 
ἧχι, ἧχι, 317. 


Θ. 


9 in Crasis 61. 
9 for o before μ, 324. 
n. 2. 


9a see -͵σϑα 


Santo charact.149, n.5. 

ϑάσσων 48, 110. 

ϑατέρου, etc. 61. ϑάτε.-- 
ga Synt. 436. 


| ϑαῦμα, ϑωΐῦμα, 50.1.11, 


ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον 434. 

ϑεῖναν and ϑύειν 48. 

ϑείομεν 208. m. 

ϑέμις Synt. 357. 

-ϑὃὲεν and -#s 53, 312. 

ϑέραπα, ϑέραπες, 93. ἢ. 
“8 


Inv 432. 

ϑῆσϑαι 215. m. 

_$1 Imper.202,216,242, 
240. ---- Adv. 312. 

ϑοιμάτιον 47. τι. 2. 

ϑράσσω 47. τὰ. 

ϑρύπτω characteristic 
149, n. 5. 

Sissy see Siva. 

- ϑὼ (Verbs) 254. 


1λ 


. and v long in the pe- 
nult of verbs in ὦ, 
32. -- Augment 133. 

ν elided 63. n. 8. 

i pron. 116, 

-v adv. ending, 333. 

ce demonstrat. 53, 127. 
315. 

υ subscript, in Crasis 60. 
-- in the local end- 
ing you 313. τη. — 
in πῆ; etc. 316.—false 
in Perf. and Aor. 
of Verbs 1, μ, », @ 
164. τη. 172.m. comp. 
215. m. 


Ἐν quantity 80 n. 3. 


πιὰ, Loy, τος, forms of 
nouns, short, 33.n.10. 
-- long, 327. 

-ταίνω (Verbs) 172. n, 2. 

-άω desiderat. 323. 

idgow contr. 213. 

ἰέναν Synt. 440. ---- ἐέγαν 
τοῦ πρόσω 364. τη. 

-ἰζω deriv. and signif. 
204, 322, -- flexion 
148. 

ἰϑύ, ἰϑύς, 310. n. 4. 

ὑϑύντατα 312. n. 6. 

ἵλεως 55. mM. 

ἔμεν, ἔμεναι, 235. 3. 

ἔν pron. 118. n. 6. 

-w Nom. ending 75. m. 

ἵνα, ἵνα τέ; 423. 

-wog quantity 77. , 

πίνω (Verbs) quantity 
254. n. 8. - from —éos 
255. 

ἵξον 162. n. 9. 

ἴομεν 203. n. 15. 

ἵππος, Thy 65. n. 3. 

ἱρός, ἱερός, ὅ9. n. ὅ. 

io Duds 324.m. Σ 

ioay 241. τη. 

-toxw (Verbs) from -éo 
254, | 

ἔσος and ἶσος 34. n, 14. | 


484 


GREEK INDEX. 


-ἰω (Verbs) quantity 
33. n. 10. 
-ιὦ from Verbs in. ifw 

156. n. 14, 


AS 


x of Perf. 1 falls out 

' 166. n. 7. 

κ for πὶ (x01) 316, n. 10. 

καϑαά 811. n. 5. 

καὶ (Crasis) 61. n. 7. -- 
Synt. 494. ---- καὶ μά-- 
λα, καὶ πάνυ, 425. ---- 
καὶ ὃς 347, 548, n. 2. 
-- χαὶ εἰ, κἂν εἰ 428. 
καὶ δὲ 425. --- χαὶ 
ταῦτα 436. --- καὶ μήν 
432. -- καίπερ 432. 
—- καὶ we 422, 

χαίω flexion 155. n..9. 

καλέω flexion 156. ἢ. 
12. 248. 


τς 33. n, 10. 


κἂλός 34. n. 14. 


‘note apoc. 318, -- sup- 


"plied, 371, 

κατασχέσθϑαν Pass. 260. 
n. 9. 

κατέαγα τῆς κεφαλῆς 
864. ¢. 


. κέ, κέν, 53, 318. 


κέχλοφα 165, n. 1. 

κέχτημαν 131. -- signif. 
261. 

κεχτῴμην 169, 

κέλαινος, κὸ- ὦ n. 2. 

χέρας 89. 

κερδᾶγαι 172. n. 2. 

χῆνος 119. n. 2. 

-αῦ and --κις 59. ἢ. 5. 

κλαδί, 93. n. 8. 

κλαέίω flexion 155. η.9. 


—uhéng, κλῆς, 88. 


KiéoBv 60. 

κλίνω 174. 

κλῦϑυ 244. 

#00), κνῇν, 218. n. 5. 
κοιλᾶναι 172. n. 2, 
πολακεύευν c. Acc. 359. 


novia. 33. n. 10. 

Koxna, num. letter 22, 
460 sq. 

κορύσσω flexion 149. 
n. ὅ. 

κρέας 89 and n.3. 

κρῖ 95. 

κρίνον, τὰ κρίνεα, 98. 

κρίνω 174. 

κρόκην, κρόκα, 93. 

κρύπτω flexion 149. n. 


χτείγω 174. 
χυχεών 90. 
κύντερος 113. 


κυρεῖν ὁ. Particip. 404. 


A. 


24 dropped 290. 

λᾶας, λᾶς, 81. n. 1. 99. 

λανϑάνειν ο. Accus.359. 
-- ο. Particip. 404. 

λέχτο 245. 


λέλυτο Hom. 109. n. 9. . 


λέξεο 162. n. 9. 

λεοντέα, -τὴ, 68. 

λευκᾶναν 172. n. 2, 

λήγω see παύεσϑαι. 

λίπα, λίπᾳ, 99. 

λίσσομαι flexion 149. 
n. ὅ. --- Aor. 2. 160. 
m. 

λοιποῦ, τοῦ, 497. -- λοι- 
πόν 457. 


M. 


μ inserted 49. ἡ. 1. -- 


omitted in reduplic. 
297. 

μά Synt. 430, 

μαϑεῦμαι, 1δ8. 

μαϑών, τί, 442. 

μακράν Adverb 310, 

μάλιστα 312. --- μάλι-- 
στα μὲν 457. 

μᾶλλον 312. --- μᾶλλον 
δὲ 437. 

μάν see μήν. 


— boy for -μὴν 202. n. γ 

μάστι, μάστιν, 98. 

μαστίζω flexion 148, 
neal. 

μαχοῦμαν 157. 

μέλε (Vocat.) 90 and m. 

μέλλειν Augm. 132. -- 
Synt. 440. 

μέμνημαι 191, 

μεμνῴμην 169, 


μέν, μὲν --- δὲ, ete. 426. 


‘sq. -- μέν for μῆν, 
see μήν. 

-μὲν, -μεναι (Infin.) 202. 
n. 9. 229. 

μέντον (Crasis) 61. -- 
vend 431. -- μεντᾶν 


Bi “for -μὲν 202. n. 8, 


° -usoda, -μέσϑον, 202. 
n. 8. + 


μέσατος 112. n. 

μεταξύ 489...“ 

μέχρι, μέχρις, 58, 3H. 
Synt. 408. : 

μή constr. 415 sq. -- 
Ὑ ‘Subj. vor Optat. . - 
419, --- μή interrog- 
ative 490, --- inde- . 
pendent 422, n. 10. 
— μή hefore Sub- 
stant. 419, n. 3, — 
μὴ ov 420, n. 6. comp. 
421. τ. 7. -- - μὴ μήν 
432. -- μή ellipt. 
Synt. 449. -- μὴ ὅτι 
Synt. 433. ---- τὸ μή ὃ. 
Infin, 434. --- τοῦ μή 
393. n. 1. 

“μη Subst. see τμος 

μηδὲ 427. μηδὲ εἷς 113. 

μηδείς, "μηϑείς, 118. 

μηκέτι Synt. 480. 

μήν Synt. (482. 


μήποτε, μήπως, 516. 


μήπω 316. Synt. 430. 

μήτε Synt. 427. 

μήτι; μήτι γε, 486. - 

-μι Dor. for -ὦ 220. n. 
10. 


στο τ υὐἷν.υε:ςε.-----: 


GREEK INDEX, 


485 


pice 68. η. 2. 

μιῆναν 172, n. 2, 
μιμεῖσθαι ο. Accus.359. 
μέν, viv, 45, 118, n. 12, 
py for μμ 284, 

μνάα, μνᾶ, 68. 

μόγις, μόλις, 46. 

πμος, σμος, Subst. 324. 
povotiy, μούδωκεν, 62. 


Ν. 


y final and moveable 
52, 127, 317. -- in 
Verbs contr. in Im- 
perf. 212. n. 3. -- » 
changed in pronunc. 
52. n. 4. -—- y inserted 
284 ἡμύω. — before 
the ending of verbs 
in ὦ 255. -- in ow 
256. -- in Perf. Pass. 
of Verbs 1; μι», @ 
174. -- v before μ 
174. n. 8. -- with α 
‘privat. 335. 

γαΐχι 99. n.2. 317. 

ysatoc, νείατος, 112. ἢ. 

γη-- 336. n. 12. 

yy 430. 

γήτη 112. n. 

γίσσομαν 153. τη. 

γίφα, τήν, 98. 


-ytt 3 Plur, 201. n. 4. 

γύ, νύν, 53. -- Synt. 
432. 

-γῦμι from -@ 255. 

γύγ, νῦν, 43. τὰ. — voy 


δή Synt, 430. 


= 
—e 


ξ and w pronun. 50. n. 1. 
-- origin 459 sq. 


& for o in Fut. and Aor. 


153. 
t adverb. ending 333. 


-§ and -y Nom. Subst. 


75. 
62 


ξύν, in compos. 414. n. 


O. 


o cognate in Perf. 164 
and ἢ. 1. 

ο into ov 82, 54,” 

o for w 55. n. 4, 10. 
See o. 

o and « before a vowel, 
see ἃ. 

ὅ ellipt. Synt. 450. 

ὃ article 120 sq. — τὸν 

καὶ τόν 848, ---- ὃ μὲν 

--ὁ δέ, 347, 427. -- οὗ 
ἀμφὶ, περί, 439, --- οἵ 
τότε 345. 

ὃδὲ adverbial 349. 

oy contr. into ὦ 271. 

ὀϑούγεκα 62, 423. 

ot diphth. 26. 

ot for o and ov, 55. n. 4. 

-o and -au.short 39, 40. 

-ov local form 313. 

-οὗ and sv, Vocat. 39. 

οἶδα, 239 sq. 

oie, 200. 

ποίην 199. n. 3. 

-ouw 71. ἃ. 79. n. 2. 

οἶκα 241, τη. 

οἴκαδε 313. π. 2. 

οἴκοϊ and οἶκοι es n. 3. 
313. 

οἶκος omitted 367. n. 9. 

οἴμοι 40, n. 3. 

ποιὸ Gen. 71. n. 4. 

οἷος before Infin. 435.-- 
in attraction (οἵῳ vs) 
399. -- οἵον sixoc 435. 

οἷός te Synt. 435. 

δὶς 86. n. 6. 


_ -otoa and.—stvoo 215. τη. 


ποισὰ for πουσα, -o1ot 
for -ουσι, 201. 

οἷσε 162. n. 9. 

οἶσϑα ὁ. Imper. 438. 

οἴχομαι Synt. 382. 

ολέκω 294. 

ὀλιγοστός 115. m. 

δλοπαϑῆ 66. --- of Dec. 


I, 68, -- of Dec. III, 
84, 

ὄμνυμι c. Accus. 359. 

ὅου 122. n. 1. 

ὁποδαπός 127. 

omote 424, 

ὅπου 424, 

ὅπως constr. 384, 422, 

ὀργᾶναν 172. τι. 2. 

og7o 215. m. 220. τη. 

ὄρσεο 162. n. 9. 

-ος for πους 71. ἡ. 4, — 
in Nom. Sing. 72. m. 

og pure 77, 82, 83. 

og 120 sq. 347, 397. See 
also 6 0. -- ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ 
ᾧτε, ἀνϑ' ὧν, Synt. 
435. 52} δὲ μέν --- ὃς 
δὲ 347, 427. ---- ὃ δὲ 
πάντων δεινότατον, 
etc. 450. 

ὅσος 434. --- ὅσον ov 
434, -- ὅσον ellipt. 
434, 

ὅταν c. Optat. 386, n. 3, 

ὅτε, δτὲ, 316. n. 9. -- δ. 
Optat. 386. — 

ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι, 124. n. 4, 

ὅτι, ὁτιή, 317, 423, — 
ὅτι μή 434. 

ου diphth. 26, 27. 

οὗ, OUx, οὗχ, 42. Synt. 
‘415 sq. -- ov before 
Subst. 410; nesta 
ov μή 385, 420. π, 6. 
-- οὗ my 432. -- ov 
μὴν ἀλλά 433. — οὗ 
πάᾶγυ, οὔ οφήμι, 419. 

n. 2. -= οὗ megé Synt. 

434, 


ra 


οὗ see é, 

οὐδὲ Synt. 427. —- οὐδὲ 
εἷς 113. -- οὐδ᾽ ὥς 
422, 


οὐδείς, οὐϑεῖς, 118. -- 


οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 421. 
n. 8. -- οὐδὲν οἷον 
435. ---- οὐδὲν ἄλλ ἢ 
485. 

οὐκέτι Synt. 480. 


486 


GREEK INDEX. 


οὔκουν, οὐκοῦν, Synt.428, 

οὖν 428. 

᾿ς-οὖν 315. 

οὕνεχα 62. Synt. 423. 

οὔποτε, οὔπως, 316. 

οὔπω 316. Synt. 480. 

-οὗς, οὔντος, 77. τι. 5. 

-ovcou,names of places, 
from όεσσα, ὅθ. n. 17, 

οὔτε Synt. 427. 

οὔτι past 434, | 

οὗτος heus! 123. n. 3. 
-- Synt. (as Adverb) 


349. -- in phrases, . 


436, 437. 
οὕτως after Particip. 
403. n. 6. 


9. a 32 a 
οὐχ OTL, οὐχ OGOY, etc. 


οὐχὲ 817. 

owes 200. 

ow doubling of vowel in 
Verbs in ow 214.n.11. 

_-6@ (Verbs) 204, 322. 

--not contr. in 1 pers. 

212. 


IT. 


παϑών, τί; 442, 

πάλιν before conson. 
52. ἢ. 3. 

παρά apocop. 318. — 
with Pass. 370. -- 
πάρα 819. --- παραΐ 
918... 

παραχρῆμα 911, 

πάρεστι Synt, 438. 

πᾶς Synt. 551. ---- πάντα 

. every one, 909, n. 9." 

πάτερ 81. n. 1. 

παύεσϑαι c. Particip. 
402. n. 3. 

πεδά for μετά 319. 

πεινὴν 213. τ. 5. 

πεπᾶναιν 172, τ. 2. 


πέπομφα 164. n. 1. 165. 


πέποσϑε 246, n. 5. 
πέπταμαι, πεπτηώς, πέ- 
πτωκα, 191. 


még Synt. 482. 
122, 314. 
πέρα, πέραν, 312, 317. 
περὶ omitted, see Prep. 
—— οὗ περί Synt. 439. 
— ov megs 434, —- 
περὶ πολλοῦ 437. 
mide 244, 
πίομαι 158. πιοῦμαν 158. 
σελέες for “πολέες 112, τη. 
πλήν, πλὴν εἶ, Synt. 408. 


-περ 


πλώς 944. 

ποδαπός 127, 

ποϑέω 154. ᾿ 

ποιεῖν τινά τυ 800. 

(πολλα) τὰ πολλά 362. 
-- πολλοῦ δεῖ, δεῖν, 

. 437. 

πολλάκις Synt, 439. 

πολλοστός 115. τη. 

Ποσειδῶν Accus. 90. 

ποστός, ποσταῖος, 127. 

ποτὲ and πού Synt. 432. 


sott 317, 318. -- apo- 


cop. 318. 

πότγια (ἃ γ102, 108. 

πρᾷος 107. 

πρίν Synt. 430. 

πρό (Crasis) 136. ἢ. 1. 

προῖκα adv. 910. 

πρός with-Pass. 970. -- 
in compos. 414. "ἢ 
11. -- πρός σὲ ϑεῶν 
449. 

προσῆκον aoe ) 134. 
ἢ, 4, 

πρόσω, πόῤῥω, 311. --- 
τοῦ πρόσω (ϊέναι)804. 
m. 

moott 317. 

προτοῦ Synt. 437. 

προύργου, TOOVALY OV, 62. 


-- Adverb. 311. — 


προυργιαΐτερον 312, 
at characteristic 147, 
149. 
πύελος 290. m. 


πυρός and (πῦρ) ᾿πυρός 
32. 


mo and πώποτε Synt. 


430. 
πώμαλα 437. 


ἜΣ 


9 prefers α after it 
67, 102, 172. n. 2. 
244. m. -- @ doub- 
led 50. 

6, 66, 27, 50, 336. --- ἐδ 
and oo 46. 

-oaivw, (Verbs) 172. n. | 
9 


δέα, δεία, 112. : 
διγόω contr. 213. 
δίπτω flexion 149. ἢ. 5. 


=. 


o prefixed 49. ἢ. 4. --- 
¢ added: 53. ---- with 
change of sense 317. 
— o in Perf. Pass.168. 
n. 6. -- in Aor. 1 
Pass. 170.n.1. —-o¢ for 
strength 254. ἢ. 7. ---- 
σ᾽ in compos. 334. m. 
- in derivat. of sub- 
stant. 324, ---- doub- 
led in Aor. 1, 154. 
n. 5. — dropped in 
Pass.endings199,229,. 
245. n. 3. 

-σαι, G0, 2 p. Pass. 199, 
217, 229. 

Σαμπὶ, 22, 461, 462. 

od for £,46.n.4. 147. 

-os adv. 312. 

-σείω (Verbs) 323. 

σήμερον, τήμερον, 317. 

-σϑα 108. 12. 

-σι, -σιν, On names of 
cities, 53, 313. 

-o1, cw, 3 Pl. changed 
201. 

-o1, σιν, 3 Sing. 202, 
220. n. 10. 


GREEK INDEX. 


-σις, -σια, Subst. abstr. 
325. 

σκάπτω 149. τ. 5. 

-σχον, -σκόμην, itera- 
tive, 198, 214, 229. 

-oxw, Verbs in, 254, 

σμάω, σμὴν, 213. n. 5. 

πσμος, -μος, Substant. 
324 


00, τε, 46, 147, 148. n.2. * 


149, 

στάγες, στίχες, 93. 

στάζω, στηρίζω, στίζω, 
148, n. 1. 

σύν see ξύνγ.------ συν-- 51, 
52. ---- in compos.414. 
n. 11. 

συνελόντι, 438. - 

συνήϑης Gen. Pl. 85. n. 
4 , 


“Συράκουσαι, Σμρακόσι-- 
ος, 57. 

συσχέσϑαι Passive 260. 
n. 9. 

σφ-- enclitic forms 43. 


σφεῖς with the same ° 


subject 350. 
σφέτερος 352. --- pecu- 

liar use of, 351, n. 5. 
σφύζω flexion 148.n.1. 
σχές 244, 
σχοίην 199. τη. 
Σώχρατες Voc. 82. n. 8. 
σῶς 107. 


L. 


᾿ τά See TO 

ταλλα Synt. 436. 

τἄν 61. n. 8. 

τάν, ὦ THY, 100. 

τ aga and tage 61, 62. 
δὶ ynt. 431. 

ταὐτὸ τοῦτο, the very 
same, 362. n. 6. 

τέ 424, 

τεϑνάναν 166. comp. § 
110. 9. rs 

τέϑριππος 47. n. 2. . 

tély, τίν, 118. n. 6. 


τεΐνω 174, 


τεχεύσϑαν 158. 

τέο, τοῦ, 124. n.3. - 

-τέος verbal 175, 371 sq. 

-τεός, a, ov, 119. n. 7. 

τέρας 89. 

τέτλαμεν ete. 247. 

τέτραφα 165. τη. 

τετρῆναν 172. n. 2. 

τέτροφα 165. n. 1. m. 

tev 124. n. 3. 

τέων 124, n. 4. 

τήμερον 917. 

τῆνος 119. n. 2. 

-τῆς, TO, THQ, Subst. 
326. 


τὸ Synt. 434. -- τί μήν 
432, ..- ti ov with 
Aor, 981. n. 6. -= τό 
χρῶμαι αὐτῷ 361. 
τί παϑών; τί | μαϑών; 
442, 

τίκτειν Synt. 382. 

tig Synt. 351, 356.--be- 
tween the article and 
Subst. 344. -- omit- 
ted 356. n. 6. 

tic, ti, Accent 42. — 
quantity 77..n. 3. -- 
indirect interrog.351. 

τό, τά, Synt. 346 sq. 
351. n. 1. -- adverbi- 
ally 346. n. 5. 353. 
n.4. ---- with the Gen- 
itive 353. n. 2. -- τὸ 
μή, τοῦ μή, 416 sq. 


--- χὸ μή, τὸ μὴ οὗ 
454. — τὸ δὲ 434. .-- 


τὸ δὲ μέγιστον 450. -- 
τὸ ἐμόν for ἐ ἐγώ 959. 
n. 2, -- τὸ λεγόμενον, 
τὸ τοῦ ποιητοῦ,362.η. 
6. -- with the Anfin, 
392. --- τὰ καὶ τά 
948, n. ὅ. 

tot (Crasis) 61. Synt. 

1. — τοί, toiyuy, 

etc. 431. 

τοῖο 124. n. 3. 

τοίσδεσσι 123. n. 2. 


τὸν καὶ τόν, 848. 
-τός verbal 175, 371 sq. 
tote ---- ὅτέ, 316. n. 9. 


_ τοῦ for τιγός 124. n. 3. 


τοὐναντίον on the con- 
trary, 362. n. 6. 

τοῦτο with Genit. 364. 
n. 4. 

τραῦμα, τρωῦμα,55...11. 

τρίήρης Gen. Pl. 85. η.4. 

Tt See OO. 

τυγχάνω ¢. Particip.404. 

τύννος, τυγγνοῦτος, 127. 

τυπῶ 157. m. 

τυχόν Synt. 407. n. 7. 

τῷ for τινὲ 124. τ. 8. 


7: 


υ in Augm. 133. 

v for ‘sv in Perf. Pass. 
168. n. 4. 

vw diphth. 26. 

-υμι Subj. and. Optat. 
228. 

—uvos quantity 77. n. 1. 

-tyw Verbs 204, 322. -- 
from verbs in vw 255. 


-- quantity 255. n. 8. 
ὑπαὶ 318: 
ὑπό apoc. 318, — with 
Passive 370. -—- uno 


for ὕπεστι 319. 
-vgog Adject. (v) 32. 
-ὑω (Verbs) . quantity 
33. n. 10. 153, 154. 


Φ. 


φάναι as preterite 238. 


φανερός εἶμι Synt. 445. 

φέρτερος, φέριστος, 113. 

φέρω, οἴσω, etc. 256, 

φέρων Synt. 448, 

φϑάνειν Synt. 440. ---- α. 
Particip. 404. 

-φι, pw, 94. 

φοΐνιξ 77. ἢ. 2. 

φρές imper. 944. 


488 


GREEK INDEX. 


φρίσσω 149. n. 5. 

φροίμιον 47. m. 

φροῦδος 47, 107. Synt. 
440. 


zx before p 51, 325. 
n. 4. 

χαίρειν c. Particip. 404. 

᾿ χαμαΐ and χϑαμαλός 49. 
9 


n. 3. 

χάριν Synt. 409. n. 2 
and m. 

χελιδών 93. ἡ. 7. 

. χερείων 111. 

χϑαμαλός 49. n. 3. 

χράω flexion 155, n. 

’ 6 -- contr, 213. n. 
5. 

χρεών indecl. 95, 308. 
Synt. 357. n. 7. 

χρέως Genit. 101 τ. 

χφήστης 69. 


, ἃ ry 


ψ, ἕξ, origin 50, 51, 459, 
461. 
yoo, why, 213. n. 5. 


ψύχω flexion 171. n. 8.” 


$2. 
w in the Attic ending 
short, 40. -- com- 


pared with Dec. III, 
93. m. 
ὦ for o 55. n. 10.-- for 
oand ov 55..n.4. - 
w in Particip. Perf. 202. 
n. 6. 3 
ὦ contr. from oy, 271. 
ὦ in compounds, 334. 


πω for -we Adverbial | 


ending, 311. 
-0, wy, we, ὡς, Nouns, 
_ 92, 93. x 
ὦ and ὦ 319. n. 4. -- ὦ 
μέλε see μέλε. --- α 
τὰν See THY. 


ὥλλοι 61. 

πων Nouns (Decl.) 90,. 

_ 92, 93, 828. . 

ὠναξ ete. 62. 

ὧντινων (Accent) 44. n. 
2, 

-«o (Dec. If) 72. n. 3. 

ὦ πόποι 319.n.4. 

-ὡς, -ῶς (Adverb.) 309. . 

-wo Nouns 92, 93. 

ws, ὥς, 42. —— Synt. 422. 
-- Prépos. 408. — 
with case absol. 406. 
n. 5. -- we 1, ais 
ἔπος εἰπεῖν, 488. --- 
ὥσπερ 432.-— ὥστε 
392, 396, 423. . 

-wow shortened and 
contr. 156. ἢ. 18, 

wv diphth. 26, 120. n. 4. 

witog 56. n. 11. 

ὠφελεῖν c. Accus, 359.. 
-- with double Ac- 
cus. 362. 

ὥφελον 312. Synt. 437. 


a ea 


ENGLISH INDEX. - 


s 


al 


Norr. The following Index embraces only some of the more important prin- | 
ciples and particular examples, which are scattered throughout the work. The 
general division and arrangement of the subjects must be sought in the Table 


of Contents, after the Preface.—Tr. 
A. 

Abbreviations 22.—Table of, 478, 479. - 

Abstract changed for the concrete 325. 
—as Acc. after verbs 359, 360. 

Accents 36 sq.—Tendency to be drawn 
forward or back 41 sq.—in verbs 196 
sq.—in compounds of ϑές and dds 
223. n. 13. comp. 225. n. 19.—of 
Gen. and Dat. 67. n. 9.—drawn back 
41, 82. n. 3. 197.—shifted in contrac- 
tion 59.—in composition 339 sq. See 
also Anastrophe. 

Accusative in v 80.—Acc. with the 
Pass. 371.—with the Mid. 474.— 
with εὖ v. κακῶς λέγειν v. ποιεῖν 
360.—after ofda, ἀκούω, λέγω, in- 
stead of the subject of the dependent 
verb, 445.—in apposition to a whole 
clause 362.—as remote object 361 
and n. 4.—of time 362.—double Acc. 
360.—Ace. c. Infin. 393.—Acc. absol. 
406. n. 4. 409. n. 7.—as form of ad- 
verbs 310. . 

Adjectives 330 sq.—instead of Subst. 
342.—instead of Ady. 342.—as predi- 
cate 255.—without a verb 356. n. 7. 
—before a Gen. 363 sq.—Masc. re- 
ferring to persons instead of Neut. to 
things 445.—Verbal. Adj. in τέος and 

_ τός 170.---ϑ τέ. of do. 371.—from De- 
pon. verbs 372. ‘ 

Adverbs 332 sq.—instead of Adj. and 
Subst. 345.—adverbial phrases with 
the article 346. n. 5.—verbs or parti- 
ciples as adverbs 394, 440. 

Alexandrine dialect 18. See Aorist. 

Alphabet, history of, 459'sq. . 

Ampliative nouns 328. 12, 2. 

Anacoluthon 446. 

Anastrophe 319. 

Animals, see Names. 

Aorist, Synt. 377. sq.—implying what is 


΄ 


customary 381.—in hypothet. constr. 
388.—Aor. and Impf. in Homer 380. 
n. 4.—See also Particip. Aor. 

Alexandrine Aor. in α 158, 286.— 
Aor. in σὰ in verbs Awve 173. 
n. 3. 

Aor. 2, accentuation 197.-Synco- 
pated Act. in 7, wy, etc. 162. n. 8. 
and m.—Syne. Pass. λύτο, δέκτο, etc. 
244, 245.—Aor. 2 with redup. 132. n. 
7. 135, 136.—Aor. 2 gives rise to new 
themes 249.—wanting in contract. 
verbs, etc. 159.—Aor. 2 in σον, σό-- 
μην, 162. n. 9.—Aor. 2 Pass. more 
usual than Aor. 1, 170. n. 4. 

Aor. Pass. as Mid.376: Aor. Mid. 

‘as Pass. 9200. ἢ. 9. : 

Aphaeresis 477. 

Apposition 477. 

Apocope 318, 319.—apocopated forms of 
nouns, etc. 93, 95, 96. 

Apodosis omitted 450. 

Apostrophe 62.—hinders inclination of 
the accent 44. 

Arsis 35, 456. 

Article prepositive, in Crasis 60, 61.— 
its signif. and power 120 and m.— 
Synt. 342. sq. 348, 349.—separated 
from Subst. 344.—repeated 344.—be- 
fore the Infin. 346.—adverbial con- 
structions 346. n.5.—before relatives 
345. n. 6.—omitted with αὐτός 350.— . 
with πᾶς and ἅπας, 351, 352. 

Aspirates 47, 49, 50.—changed for 
smooth 45.—neglect of the aspiration 
47. n. 1. 232.3. 266 under ἅλλομαι. 

Asyndeton 425, 477. 

Atona 42. 

Attraction 394, 443.—with the relative 

98 sq.—with participles 402. n. 5. 

Augment 129 sq.—before a vowel 134. 
n. 5.—before the Prep. of a comp. 
verb 136. n. 2. 137. n. 4.—before and 


~ 


490 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


—- 


after prepositions 137. n. 6.—Syllabic 
Augm. neglected 132. n. 6—Tempo- 
ral Augm. 132.—syllabic prefixed to 
a temporal 134.—Augm. in tory 


Authority in prosody 31. 


B. 
Barytone. verbs etc. 38, 42, 176.—Cata- 
logue of, 469. 


Breathings, see Spiritus. 
Byzantine dialect 18. 


C. 


Caesura, 457, 458.—lengthens a short 
vowel 35. ἢ. 16sq. 458. 

Canon Dawesianus 385. τη. 

pe of verbs with verbal derivatives. 

Catalectic syllable 452. 

Causative signification 256. 

Characters in writing 22,478 sq. 

Characteristic of verbs, 144.—different 
from that of their derivatives 149. 

Circumlocution, see Periphrastic. 

Cities, names of, Masc. and Fem. 65. 

Cognate vowels 54,—in Aor. 2, 159, 

- 160, 162. n. 7.—in Perf, 2. 164.—in 
Perf. 1.164. n.1.—in Perf. Pass. 167. 
n. 3.—cognate o in the first syll. of 
dissyl. Barytones 253. 

Commutation of consonants in the dia- 
lects, 45 sq.—of forms in declension 
90. 


Comparative governs the Gen. Synt. 
365. 


Composition 333 sq. —Species of com- 
posit. 336.—of verbs 336 sq. —Apo- 
cope in compos. 318, 335. 

. Concrete, see Abstract. 

Conditional propositions, 386, 387. 

‘Consonants, see Aspirates and Tenues. 

sae 50. n. 2.—Insertion of, 49. 

n 


Correlatives, 124, 312.—in attraction © 
444, 


Contraction, laws of 57. —neglected 50, 
85. n. 3. 86. n. 3.—changes the ac- 
cent in verbs 197.—contr..of 07 into 
w 271.—contracted vowels etc. made 
short 59. n. 11.—Contracted verbs 
205 sq. 473. 

Copula 353. 

Coronis 60. = 


Ὁ. 


Dative, with the Passive 370.—after 
Subst. 359. n. 3.—instead of a Gen: 
369. n. 3.—Dat. commodi et incom- 
modi 368, 369. —pleonastic 369.— 
Dat. with Particip. εἴ σον ἡδομένῳ 
ἐστί, 405.—Dat. absol. 405.—Dat. 
as form of adverbs 310. 

Dawes’ Canon 385. m. 

Declensions, original identity of them 
93. m.—distinctive marks 66. 

Demonstratives 122, 126, 314 sq.—how 
strengthened 126 sq. 815. 

Deponents 259.—form tenses with Pass. 
significat. 259. n. 6.—Verbals from, 
372. 

Derivation 320.—of verbs from nouns 
320 sq.—of substantives 323 sq.—of 
adjectives 330.—of adverbs 332. 

Desideratives 322. ; 

Diaeresis 45. 

Dialects 13—20, 45, 54 a3 58 sq. 69, 71, 
316, 317, etc. 

Diastole 45. 

Digamma 28, 35 _—examples Whe m. 
267. m.—origin 459, 460, 461. 

Dimeter 453. 

Diminutives 330. 

- Diphthongs and long vowels used as 
short 36.—improper diphth. 26, 57.— 
separated 58.—swallowed up in Cra- 
sis 61._-See also Mized Sound. 

Dipode 453. 

Double letters 50 sq.—origin of 459, 461. 
—interchanged with kindred single 
ones 46. g. a 

Double Themes and Forms 90, 91, 
110, 111, 145.sq. 249, 250. 
Double Sound, see the next art. 

Doubling of Conson. 50, 56, 154. n. 5. 
264. n. 2. 274, 316. n. 10.—after long 
vowels 56. —Doubling of Vowels, 
etc. 58. n. 3. 212. n. 10. 287 χραΐνω. 

Dropping of a consonant 58. n. 4,—of 
a vowel 59. ἢ. 7.-of a vowel from 
the verbal root 243. 

Dual for Plur. 93. n. 8.—with verbs 
139. n. 5, 6.2 pers. for 3d, 201. n. 3. 
—Synt. 355.—Subst. Fem. Dual with 
Masc. Adj. 341. 


E. 


Elision 57,59, 60, 62, 70.5. 88, 89, 213. 
—not admitted in v, περί, etc. 63.— 


Oe Meyer Σ 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


491 


removes the accent of Prep. 319.— 
Elision of words in χλῆς 88.—in suc- 
cessive words 62. (δ 29. n. 10. ὃ 30.) 

Ellipsis 449. See Omission. 

Enclitics 42. ΄ 

Epic language and writers 15, 19, 263. 
See also Dialects. 

Epicene Gender, Genus epicoenum, 65. 
n..3. 

Etacism 23. 

Expletives 430. 


F. 


Feminine constr. with Masc. see Dual. 
Final moveable letters 52 sq. 
. Forms, double 90.—simple of Subst. 
93.—various of Adj. 107, 108.—old 
Tonic in verbs 212. 
Frequentatives 323. | 
Future derived from the Subj. Aor. 390. 
m.—retains the short vowel. of the 
Pres. 154. n. 3.—Synt. 384, 385.-- 
with μη 420 n. 4. 
Fut. Attic, 155.—-Dorie 158. 
: Fut. 2. 156, 273. m. 
_ & Fut. 3. 169.---Synt. 383. " 
sane Mid. for Act: 259.—For Pass. 
0. ᾿ 


α. 


Gender 64.—of the whole in specifying - 
the parts (6 ἥμισυς τοῦ χρόνου) 363. 
n. 2.—Genus epicoenum 69.'n. 3. 

Genitive, Attic 86, 87.—with τό and τὰ 
353. n. 2.—Gen. of pers. Pron. In; 
stead of Dat. 369. n. 4. Gen. of time 
and place 364, 367.—with Pron. és 
τοῦτο 364. n. 4.—Gen. of a part (πε- 
δίοιο ϑέειν) 364. m.—with δεῖσϑαν 
365.—with ἐρᾷν 365. m.—Gen 8050]. 
404, 406.—Gen. as a form of adverbs 
310. n. 3.—Thessalian Gen. 71. n. 4. 

Gentile nouns 328 sq. 

Grammatical expressions 475. 

Ground-form 74. m. 145 and m. 147. m. 


Η. 
Heteroclites 91. 
Hexameter 452. 
Hiatus 60.—with the Homeric Digam- 
ma 28.—after ri, ore, etc. 60. τ. 1. 


comp. 63. n. 3. 
Hyperbaton 477. 


Hypercatalectic verse 452. 
Hypodiastole 45. 
Hypothetical constructions 386, 387. 


1. 

Ictus 35, 456. 

Imitative verbs 323. 

Immediate signification 256. 

Imperative in O¢ 202.—Imper. 3 pers. 
Plur. 199.—Imp. Pres. with μή 419. 
—Imper. Aor. 380.—Fut. 162. n. 9.— 
Perf. 382, 383. 

Imperfect, Synt. 378, 380. n. 4. 381. m. 
—in hypothet. constr. 387. 

Impersonals, Synt. 356.—Particip. 407. 
n. 6. 


Inchoative verbs 254, 323. 

Inclination of the Accent 41, 42. 

Indicative Pres. in sermone obliquo, 
Synt. 381. n. 7. 

Infinitive in νὰν (Accent) 197.—Aor. 1 
Act. (Accent) 198.—Aor.2, 197. m.— 
Infin. in wey, μεναι» 202.—in ev, nv, 
202.—Inf. with ἄν, Synt. 388.—Inf. 
as Neut. Subst. 392.—Inf. with relat. 
394.—for entreaty, command, etc. 
397.—absolutely, 393. n. 2. 437. 

Inseparable Particles 390. 

Insertion of Conson. 49. n. 1.—of the 
vowel εν 58. n. 3.—in αὐτός 119. n. 1. 
123. ἢ. 2.—insertion of the union- 
vowel 138. oe. 

Interchange, see Commutation. 

Interjections, 312. n. 7. 

Intransitive and Transitive, see Verbs. 

Inversion 162. n. 7. 448.—of the ante- 
cedent in relat. construct. 399. 

Ionic forms in contr. verbs 212. 

Ttacism 23. 

Iterative forms 198, 229. 


L. 


Labials changed into w 51. 

Lengthening of vowels 35, 56, 57, 58, 
89. n.2.—of the stem-vowel in verbs 
in we 219. n. 7. 230. 

Linguals before liquids 51. 

Local endings, ot, σεν» 53.—gt, pu, 94. 

Long vowels by Caesura 35. n, 16sq.— 
before consonants doubled 56. 


M. 
Macedonian dialect 18. 


_ Masculine Adj. with Subst. Fem. 341, 


a a ὦ 


i i i Fy 


4G2 ENGLISH INDEX. 


see also Dual.—-Masc. Plur. with 
Fem. Sing. 354. 

Metaplasm 91. 

Metathesis 248 sq. 286,302.n. See also 
Transposition. 

Middle 141, 142 sq. 373 sq.—becomes 
intransitive 374.---transitive 374. 

Mixed Sound or diphthong of contrac- 
tion in contr. verbs 215. τ. 15.---in 
verbs in we 217. n. 5.---short 59. 
ἢν 1. 

Moods, see Subjunctive, Optative, etc. 

Moveable final letters 52 sq. . 


_ Mutations of the consonants 45 sq. 51, 


52.---of the vowels 54 sq. 

Mutes before liquids, whether position ? 
30, 34. n. 12 sq.---in reduplicat. 131. 
---See also Aspirates and Tenues. 


N. 


Names, proper, their declension, § 56 
and notes, and the Anom. Catal. § 58. 
---in vog from -yovg 72. m.---names of 
cities 65.---of animals 65---of trees 65. 

Nasal sounds 25.---inserted 255. 

Negatives -415 sq.---accumulated 420.--- 
after negative verbs 421. n. 5. 

Neuter Adj. Synt. 352.---as adv. 310, 
353. n. 4.---Neut. of the Compar. and 
Superl. as adv. 311,---Neut. of the 
Hig 352.---of the Adj. as predicate 


Nominative with ‘the Infin. 395, 397.-~ + 


‘Nom. absol. 405, 406. See Anacolw- 
thon. ὃ 
Numeral signs 22. < ‘ 


O. 


Object not expressed 358. gi 

‘Omission, see also Ellipsis.---Omission 
of the Subst. with the Art. and Gen. 
345, 367. n. 8.---in the construction 
with relat. 398.---with Adject. 342.--- 
Omission of the verb 365.---of the 
demonstrat. 398.---of the object 358. 
---of the subject in the construct. 
of Acc. c. Infin. 394.---of the Apo- 
dosis 450.---of the Preposit. 367. n. 
7. see also Prepositions.---Omission 
of o in 2 pers. Sing. 199, 229.---of 
A 290. ; 

Optative, formation 140.---3 pers. In ov 
and av (Accent) 198.---Opt. in oy, 
wmv, 199. n. 3. comp. 212. n, 4.---in 
wv, ὑμὴν, 228, 244.---Opt. Aor. in 


eva 199, n. 4.---Opt. Perf. 168. n. 9. 
199. π. 3.---Opt. Synt. 382. n. 11.--- 
with μη 419.---Opt. implying repeti- 
tion 389. n. 6.---Opt. with ἄν 385. sq. 
re for the Indic. and Imper. 


P. 


Participles, form 141.----in ὡς and εἰς 
» (Accent) 198.---in ἕως 248.---Particip. 
Pres. oxytone 236.---Part. Pres. fem. 
in oa 247. 
Participle Aor. Synt. 380, 400, 403. 
n. 7,.---Part. Pres. Synt. 403./n. 7.--- 
Part. with ἄν 388.---Neut. Part. 407. 
n. 7.---instead of the abstract 352.--- 
Part. used adverbially 404. 

Particles, inseparable 335.---expletive 
430 sq.---negative 415 sq. “ 

Parts of speech 64. 

Passive tenses in Deponents 259. n. 6. 
---Pass. construction 370.---do. in in- 
transitive verbs 371.---Pass. signific. 
with Act. form 258. n. 4. 291. 

Patronymics 329. 

Paulopost Fut. see Future 3. 

Pentameter 453. ἢ π᾿" 

Perfect 377.---with signif. of the Pres. 
261, 292.---syncopated 166, 226, 246 - 
sq.---gives rise to new themes 249.--- 
Perf. without reduplicat. 132. n. 6. 

Perfect 2 from verbs in éw, dw, 
165. n. 4.---goes over into the form of 
the Pres. 258. comp. 249. n. 1, 2. 

'246.---Perf. 2 or Mid. 258. 

Perfect Pass. shifts its accent 197 
sq.---without redupl. 134. n.3.comp. 
245. m.---Perf. Pass. as Mid. 377. 

Periphrastic form of Opt. and Subj. 
Perf. 168, 382. n. 11. 

Person, second of Pass..199, 213, 220. 
n. 10. 260. m.---second Sing. and 
third Plur. for indefin. 356.---third 
Plur. Pass. in erac, aro, 200.---third 
Sing. in 70+, 220. 

Personal pronouns, omitted as subject 
305.---adjunct may remain 395. n. 5. 

Pleonasm 477. 

Plural forSing. with pronouns, 118, 354. 
---with collectives 354.---Plur. Masc. 
with Fem. Sing. 354, 355. 

Pluperfect Act. Ion. and Att. forms in 
ea 198.---3 Plur. Pass. 200.---has in 
Pass. same form as the Aor. 245. 
n. 4.---Plupf. with signif. of Impf. 
261. 

Position 30, 34.---by middle mutes be- 


=. 


* 


ENGLISH 


493 


INDEX. 


fore Aw v 9 31.---by the rough breath- 
ing 28. 

Poseasuaiag 352. comp. 351. n. 5.--- 
Neut. of Possessive for pers. Pron. 
909. ἢ. 2. 

Predicate 353 sq. ᾿ 

Prepositions, Synt. 409.---Accent of 
Prep. 318, 319.---without their case 
413. ἢ. 8.---adverbially 413. n. 9.--- 
Prep. before pers. Pron. 117.---omit- 
ted? 357, 358, 361. n. 3. 363. n. 1. 
366. 6. 371.---apocope 318.---in com- 
position 418. n. 10,11. 415. n. 12. 

Present, strengthened form, 250, 251.--- 
Synon. with Perf. 261.---Pres. Indic. 
Synt. 381. n. 7. 

Prolongation, see Lengthening. 

Proper names, see Vames. 

Prosthesis 477. : 

Protasis with Infin. 394. n. 

Punctuation 44. 

Pure vowels 57.---Pure verbs 145. n. 1. 


Q. 
Quantity 29.---by authority 31. 


R. 


Reciprocal Pron. 120.---recipr. signif. of 
the Mid. 376. n. 7. 

Reduplication 130. sq.---of the Pres. 256, 
217, 283. m. 294. m.---Special exam- 
ples 131, 132, 135, 136.---in verbs in 
pe 217.---Attic redupl. 135.---do. in 
Subst. 325. 


Reflexives 120.---Synt. of reflex. Pron. 


350.---of third pers. for the first 351. 
n. 5.---omitted 358. n. 2.---reflex. sig- 
nif. of Act. forms 257 sq. 358. n. 2. 

Relative, in Crasis 61.---construction 
397 sq. 443.-:-relat. with the article 
346. n. 6.---with the Infin. 394. 

Resolution of long sounds 58.---in the 
Infin. in εἶν and the Subj. Aor. Pass. 
203.---in Subj. of verbs in μὴν 229. n.8. 
---in δέω 275. 


Resolution into the double sound 58, - 


89. πῃ. 2.---of α, 0, ὦ» in verbs in dw 
214. See Doubling. 

Rhythm 451. 

Root 74. m. 145 and m. 147. m. \ 


Ss. 


Sampi, num. fig. 22.---history 461. 
Schema Pindaricum 354. n. 3. 
63 


s 


Secondary or simpler forms of nouns, 
κρῖ, δῶ, etc. 95, 

Semivowels 25. 

Senarius 454. comp. 19, 35. 

Shortening of vowels after the Att. re- 
dupl. 135, 165. n. 3.---in the Sub- 
junct. 203, 230.---of the stem-vowel 
in verbs in ww 229.---of contracted 
vowels, etc. 59. ἢ. 11. 

Simple forms, see Apocope and Seconda- 


ry. 

ie tulon for Plur. 354, 355. 

Smooth mutes, see Tenues. 

Spiritus asper 27.---changed in Crasis 
61.---causes position 23.---goes over 
into o 280. τη. 

Stem in verbs 145 and m. Comp. 74. m. 
147. m.---Stem-vowel ὁ in verbs in yc 
235. n. 3. ! 

Strengthened forms of derivatives 322. 
comp. 147,148. See Present. 

Subject omitted 355.---Subj. of the fol- 
lowing verb as obj. of the preceding 
445. 6. 

Subjunctive, formation 140.---instead of 
the Indic. 203.---instead of the Fut. 
390.---in my 202. n. 13.---Subj. Aor. 
Pass. 197. m. 203.---Subj. Perf. Pass. 
168, -169.---Subj. Perf. Act. by cir- 
cumlocut. 168, 382. n. 11. 

Subj. Aor. 1 Act. 385. τι, 388.--in 
Homer for Fut. 390.---with μη 419. 

Subj. for incitement and doubt 390. 
n. 7.---confounded with Opt. 391. n.9. 

Substantives, derivation 323 sq.---with 

’ Gen. or Acc. of their verbs 359, n. 3. 

Swallowing up of diphthongs in Crasis 
61.---of o in contr. verbs 215, n. 14. 

Syllables, division into, 335. 

Synaeresis 476. 

Synaloephe 476. 

Syncope 83.---in conjugat. 239—241.--- 
basis of the formation in we 219. 
Comp. Elision. 

Synizesis 59. ἢ. 6. 62. 


py 


Technical expressions 475. 

Tenses, primary and historical, 129 sq. 
138, 142, 143, 144, 150 sq.---usual and 
unusual 203 sq. 

Tenues for Aspirates 47. n.1. 50. 

Themes 147.---double 145 sq.---unusual 
146.---new 249.---difference of themes 
250.---Verbs made up from different 
themes 256. 

Thesis 35, 456. 


- 


m immed. and causat. 256 sq.---in- 


subj. and vice Ania! 304 Bah eke 
Pura, 145. n. 1. : Ἣν 
Versification 451 sq ᾿ 
Vocative 66.---of tes III, 81. 
btful, jancipites, 29.---long 
_ dip 320 Dou made short 


ee Beading, δ πὸ 


Ve 8. Verio,t n and inirang, distinguished, 
0 


trans. govern theirsabstr. in .Accus. © 
359, 390.---Plur. .verbs with Sing. 


2: 
, 


Ἢ ὩΣ BELOW. 
AN INITIAL FINE x 25 CENTS Ἢ 
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 


WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 


OVERDUE. 


oct 4 1938 


9 Nov'49MB 


* 


pL YApr’50€ ¢ 


ε- 6 Apr’54M¢ 


MAR2 3 1954 Ly 


SENT ON ILL 
U. C. BERKELEY 
εὐ 
ee 
v4 we 
A“: Δ " δῇ ‘ 
ee *, ; 
ar = 3 | 
ι͵ 


a Mata ΞῸ ὙᾺ oS 


a ὦ ria as 


ILLUSTRATIVE OF 


GREEK INFLECTION. 


\ 


By ALPHEUS CROSBY, 


_ PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. AND LITERATURE IN 
DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, 


ae τ 
pe EES mw es Lt exit 
δ: a mec το τστσν 


BOSTON: 
JAMES MUNROE AND ΘΟ ΑΝ, 


“The LanauaGEe or THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it was 
conformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. * * * * Tur 
Greek Toneve, from its propriety and universality, is for all 
that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, onder every 


- Form of writing.’ — Harris’s eines, Bk. II. Ch. 5. 


“ Greek, — the shrine of the genius of the old world; as universal 
as our race, as individual as ourselves; of infinite flexibility, of inde- 


fatigable strength, with the ara lioation and the distinctness of nature 
herself ; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exclud- fi 


ed; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English 5 
with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the sum- 


smer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and 


the intensity of ASschylus; not compressed to the closest by Thucydi- 
des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun- 
ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch of 
Demosthenes!” — Coleridge’s Study of the Greek Classic Poets, Gen. 


Introd. 4 δ τ e 


&: 
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1841, by de 


CROCKER AND BREWSTER, 
in the Clerk’s office of the District Court for the District of Massachusetts. 


~ 
- 


. '  GAMBRIDGE: 
FOLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON, | 
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY. 


PEER ACE TO THE TABLES. 


" 


ἢ 


μ ὌΝ es 
i es 
᾿ ΑΣΑ ψ ean * ~ 


ἘΠ 
a 


Tux following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek 
Grammar. They are published separately in two forms; in duo- 
decimo, for the convenience and economy of beginners in learning 
the Greek paradigms, and in large quarto, for the convenience of 

os more advanced students in consulting and comparing them. ΤῸ 
| avoid confusion, and the disturbance of those local associations which 
“a are so important in learning the grammar of a language, every duo- 
* ᾿ς decimo page of the tables, whether in the duodecimo or in the quarto 
ad edition, presents, with a single exception, precisely the same appear- 
--*-ance.as in the larger work to which it belongs. Even the numbers 6 
ο΄ ὗν denoting the book, chapter, section, and page, are throughout the ae 7 
ἐν ᾿βΆΤΩΘ ; and, indeed, in the duodecimo edition of the tables, every ay 

pening, with a single exception, is simply an opening in the gram- 

ar. 
inte The principles upon which these tables have been constructed, are 
as Sen phe following ; 


_ 1. To avoid iveiliees repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in 
. Wheat tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only 
the material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which 
assists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student 
er has. learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that 
_ he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of 
» nine forms instead. of three? why, in his daily exercises in declen- 
_ sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and ™more than triple the wea- 
= rixess of the teacher’s ear? To relieve, so far as possible, both ine Ὁ ὁ 
_  Structor. and pupil of that mechanical. i ee » which μὺ with- 
3 b - 


i. 5 τῷ 


THIS BOOK Is. DUE ΟΝ THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELO ted 


; AN INITIAL FINE oF 25 CENTS 


WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN tae 
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY | 
WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH | es 


DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
ΧΙ ; PREFAUK LU THE ff5LES. = 


eee "» 


out profit, the time, strength, and spirit, which should be devoted 
to higher effort, these tables have been constructed with the fol- 
lowing ellipses, which the student will supply at once from general 
rules. 

1. In the. paradigms of peciEension, the vocative singular is 
omitted whenever it has the same form with the τὰ and the 
following cases are omitted throughout ; 

_ @ The vocative ΜΌΝ, μβοθθθ8 it is alwaye the same vith en nom- 
inative. ὲ 

8. The dative dual, because it is always the same with the gen- 
itive. } 
y. The accusative and vocative dual, because they are > always the . 


same with the nominative. 

>. The neuter accusative and vocative, in all the numba (need 
they are always the same with the nominative. 

2. In the paradigms of apsecrives, and of words: similarly in- 
flected, the columns of the masculine and neuter genders are united 
in the genitive and dative of all the numbers, and in the nominative 
dual ; because in these cases the two genders never differ. | 

3. In the paradigms of consucarion, the first person dual is 
omitted throughout, as having the same form with the first person 
plural, and the third person dual is omitted, whenever it has the 4 
same form with the second person dual, that is, in the primary tenses 
_Of the indicative, and in the subjunctive. The form in μεϑον, though 
perhaps too hastily pronounced by Elmsley an invention of the Alex- τ΄ 
andrine grammarians, is yet, at most, only an exceedingly rare va-» 
riety of the first person dual. The teacher who meets with it in wl 


recitation room, may pretty safely call his class, as the erier called 
the Roman people upon the celebration of the Secular games, ‘‘ to, — 
gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would never’ 

see again.”” In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the | 
optative, this form does not occur at all; and, in the remaining 
t tenses, there have been found only five examples, two of which are 
quoted by Athenzus from a word-hunter (ὀνοματοϑήρας), whose affecta- 
tion he is ridiculing, while the three classical examples are all poetic, ) 
occurring, one in Homer (Il. Ψ', 485), and the other two in Sopho- ϊ 
cles (ΕἸ. 950 and Phil. 1079). And yet, in the single paradigm of : 
rirrw, as I learned it in my boyhood, this ‘‘ needless Alexandrine,” — 


“ Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along,” 


af. o-e1” 


~ occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, that is, almost nine times as 
often as in the whole range of the Greek classies. 


aint. μῶν 
; 


ee νον 
ς 
. 


4. The compound forms of the PERFECT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
and opTATIvE are omitted, as belonging rather to FR than to 


meee ig ag ΤῊ ΤΕΥ 


IL To gwe the forms just as Fe Sain upon the Greek ‘page, that 
is, without abbreviation and without hyphens. A dissected and abbre- 
viated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young. student to 


mistake, and familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, with frag-- 


ments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were separ- 
ated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less; but they are 
usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so that 
they contain, sometimes a part of the termination, sometimes the 
whole termination, and sometimes the termination with a part of the 
root. Hyphens are useful in the analysis of forms, but a table of 
paradigms seems not to be the most appropriate place for them. In 
the following tables, the terminations are given by themselves, and 
the paradigms are so arranged in columns, that the eye of the stu- 
dent will usually separate, at a glance, the root from the termina- 
tion. | 


ΠΙ. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not 
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine 
grammarians. Hence, for example, 
1. The purely i ἐπη ΘΊΒΘΥ Jirst perfect active imperative has been dis- 
earded. 
, 2. For the imaginary precaser aie ἥσταϑι, τίϑετι, 3009, δείκνυϑι, 
jhave been substituted the actual forms ἵστη, τίϑει, δίδου, δείκνυ. Ὁ 
3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the 
usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions 
r dialectic peculiarities. .Thus, βουλενέσωσαν and βουλευόντων, βουλεύσαις 
and βουλεύσειας, ἐβεβουλεύκεισαν and ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν (§ 284) ;. BovasvicSwray 


“and βουλευίσϑων, βουλευϑείησαν and βουλευϑεῖεν (ᾧ 285) ; ἐσίϑην and ἐφί- 
τ ϑόὺν (§ 300) ; ἧς and ἦσϑα, ἔσεται, and ἔσται (ᾧ 305). 


4. The second future active and middle, which, except, as a eupho- 
nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly re- 
jected. aren 


IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What 
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres- 
sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluperfect, 
the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly 
to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name; when, 


in ‘point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic ‘usage, pre- 
sents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and plu- 
perfect ; eighty-five, which have the second aorist active ; fifty, which 
have the second aorist and future passive; and forty, which have 
‘the second aorist middle? The gleanings of ‘all the other dialects 
will not double these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most 
fully the statisties of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all 
praise, has gathered, from all the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight 
verbs which have ‘the ‘second perfect, one hundred and forty-five 
‘which have the second aorist active, eighty-four which have ‘the sec- 
ond aorist passive, and ‘fifty-eight which ‘have 'the second aorist ‘mid- 
dle. And, of his catalogue of nearly eight hundred verbs, embrac- 
‘ing the most ‘common ‘verbs of the language, only ‘fifty-five ‘have the 
third future, and, in the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight. 

To ‘some there ‘may appear to be an impiety in ‘attacking the ‘ven- 
‘rable shade of σύσφω- but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, 
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, Tam forced, 
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 


"Ayal φιλτάτης -ς 


“Μορφῆς, σποδόν te καὶ σκιὰν ἀνωφελῆ; 


and to ask why, in ‘an age characterized by its devotion to truth, ἃ 
false representation of an irregular verb should ‘be still ‘set forth ‘as 
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes’ -bed, 


to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned. The actual ; 


‘future of σύστω is not σύψω, but rvrriew, the perfect passive is bo 
σέτυμμαι and σετύστημαι, the second aorist ἔσυσον is a rare poetic form, 
the first and second perfect and pluperfect active are not found in 
‘classic Greek, if, indeed, found at all, afid the second future acti 
‘and middle are the mere figments of grammatical fancy. And 

all the regular verbs in the language must be gravely ‘pronounced 
defective, because they do not’conform to this imaginary model. 

In the following tables, ‘the example of the learned Kiihner -has 
‘been followed, in ‘selecting βουλεύω as the paradigm of regular conju- 
gation. This verb is strictly regular, it glides smoothly ‘over ‘the 
tongue, is not Jiable to be mispronounced, and presents, to the ‘eye, 
the prefixes, root, and terminations, with entire distinctness through- 
out. This is followed by shorter paradigms, in part merely synopti- 
cal, which exhibit the different classes of verbs, with their varieties 
of formation. It is scarcely ‘necessary to remark, that, in the table 
‘of translation ᾿(ᾧ 589), the form of the verb must be adapted to the 
number and person of the ‘pronoun; thus, J am planning, thou art 


scnstt 


Ἢ 


ἕν 


Ὧν ee ee) ey 


forms of ‘ plan.” are to be changed: into the. corresponding forms. of 
v3 deliber 
ing forms of ‘‘ be planned.”’ 


V. To arrange the whole. in the most convenient manner for: study 
and reference, The inflection of each word is exhibited upon a sin- 
gle page, or, if this is, not possible, except in the case of βουλεύω, at 
a single opening. Words which the student may wish to compare, 
are presented, as far as possible, at the same. opening. ‘Thus a sin- 
gle opening exhibits all the nouns of the first and second declension, 


another, the declension of the numerals, article, and pronouns, anoth-. 


er, the verbs inus, εἰμοί,. and. εἶμι, &c. In the quarto edition, a single 
opening presents all the tables of declension; another, the whole reg- 
ular conjugation of the verb, including its terminations, paradigm, 
and translation ; a third, all the verbs in zs, &c. 

With respect to the manner in which these, tables should be used, 
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that 


no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly 


modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 

1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse, but gradu- 
ally, in connexion with the study of the principles and rules of the 
grammar, and with other exercises. 

2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for refer- 

ence, than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, 
that some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibit- 
ing differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. 
_ 3. That in adjectives and words similarly inflected, each gender 
should be repeated by itself. The association of forms which is fixed 
in learning the nouns, will not then be broken up in passing to the 
adjectives. ‘The order in which the genders are repeated, seems to 
be indifferent. In the tables, the neuter is placed next to the mas- 
culine, because it is of the same declension, and has, in part, the 
same forms. 

4, That in the first learning, and common repetition of the para- 
digms, the dual should be omitted. It is little more than a mere va- 
riety of the plural, of comparatively rare occurrence, and, from its 
regular simplicity of structure, may always be supplied with perfect 
ease from the tables of terminations, or from general rules. That 
it may be omitted or repeated at pleasure, it is placed last in the fol- 
lowing tables. If any should object to this arrangement, as inter- 
fering with old associations, let them remember, that the book is de- 


: Ἶ a a x ν 

᾽ ΄“ νὰ é > 

= ij ‘ 

καὶ. ν ν τῶ ἢ » αὶ 

ΝΩ͂Ν Ν Ὁ &/ WP ee 
: Oe ae . os ‘ a bee - , 

ὯΔ ΠΥ ἧς Ὁ τὸ 


planning, &c.;, or that, in the translation of the middle voice, the. 


»’?; and, in that of the passive. voice, into the correspond-. 


signed for those whose only grammatical associations connect the 
plural immediately with the singular. I have no desire to change the 
habits of those who have already learned the Greek paradigms, but 
to discover, if possible, the best method for those who are yet to learn 


them. 
5. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student 


should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of 


terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. 

6. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, 
till the paradigms are impressed upon ‘the tablets of the memory as 
legibly as upon the printed page, —till they have become so familiar 


to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, ‘‘ the 


words,”’ in the expressive language of Milton, “like so many nimble 
and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- 
ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places.” 


‘Hanover, N. H., Aug. 10th, 1841. 190 : 


co 


ΙΝ... - Ls Da 
que A re 1 .- 


we 
aay 


INFRODUCTORY TABLES. 


Page.| Page.. 
ALPHABET, . ὁ okt, ee aE ‘ τ ote Σ 
VowELs, ἐς : Ρ' 27|Gneex INFLECTION, . ᾿ 72 


TABLES OF DECLENSION. 
I. ΤΕΚΜΙΝΑΤΙΟΝΒ oF THE THREE Deciensrons, 80 


11. Parapiems or Nouns. 


First Decrension. B. Liquid, 
A. Masculine, rapias, προφήτης» Daipoorn, “«'οιμεήν, piss Ἢ oe 
᾿Αφρείδης, βορέας, " 80 χείρ», 3 83 
B. Feminine, οἰκία, ϑύρα, γλῶσ- Syncopated, πατήρ, re ater, ; 
᾿ς σαν TIAN, μνάαν . . i) ἀρνός, . 83 
ϑεσον" ΠΕΟΙΈΝΒΙΟΝ. ; ΟΣ Double Consonant, "ἢ 
“A. Masculine and Feminine, Me PS λω Bods, γίγας, φάλαγξ, f ΤΣ 
fos, λόγος, ds, νόος, γαός, 81 ἄναξ, «νύξ, " 2 83 » 
B. Neuter, σῦκον, ἱμάτιον, ὀστέον, _D. Pure. 
ἀνώγεων, ε . -, $1}- a. Masculine and Feminine, 
. ΤΉ Decrension. _ Sas, ἥ ἥρως, xis, εἷς, ἰχϑύς», 
A. Mute. πῆχυς, ἱπαεύς, πόλις, τρις 
1. Labial, γύψ, "Ag arp, . 82) ἥρης, βοῦς, γραῦς, ναῦς, 84 
ΡῈ Palatal, κόραξ, “a ae we αἰδώς, ἡ ἠχώ, Πειραιεύς, Zam 
τς γυνή, ἡ ὦ . 84 κράτης, Heaxrins, . - 85 
8. Lingual. ᾿ β. Neuter, σεῖχος, ἄσευ, vn 
a. Masculine and Feminine, ees κ ; 85 
TAs, πούς, κλείς, gus 82 Miscentanzous pert 
B. Neuter, cape, φῶς, ἧ- υἱός, Οἰδίπους, Ζεύς, Τλοῦς, γόνυ, 
πὰρ, κέρας» oe . 82 ὕδωρ, μέλι, γάλα, « . 85 


ν Iff. Parapiems or ADJECTIVES. ‘ 
: OF Two TERMINATIONS. A. Second and First Declensions, 


A. Second ‘Declension, ἄδικος, φίλιος, ropes, i ᾽ 87 
ἀγήραος, se Fad 86) Contracted, χρύσεος, diwrbos, 87 
Β. Third Déskoagica,s ἄῤῥην, εὖ- B. Third and First Declensions, 
S| xemgis, δίπους, aagns, μεί- πᾶς, χαρίεις, μέλας, ἡδύ, 88 
: ζω νος . . 86 (Ἃ΄ The Three Deelensions, μέ- 
Or Taner Takmmarions, yes, πολύς, . 5 88 


ΠΥ. Parapioms or ΡΑΚΤΙΟΙΡΙΕΒ, 


ἫΝ Present Active, ἄγων, ξ 894, Aorist Passive, φανείς, . . 89 
2. Present Active Contracted, λυπῶν, 89|5, Perfect Active, εἰδώς, ο. 89 
3. cases Active, ἄρας, - . 89,6, From Verbs in με, διδούς, 89 


Sa ὅς : νὴ ὶ oe ‘= ὃς, 


VA Noumerats. 


+ @. 
Page. Page. 
Is εἷς, οὐδείς» . its o 90\3. TZ sis . . e Φ 90 
2. δύο, ἄμφω, ° . - 90 i 4. =F Tapes, 4 e Φ ϑ 


VI. Tue ArTIcLE AND 115 CompounDs. 
ὁ, ὅδε; . e . 5 ἔὰι 90] od ros, ° 4 e Φ e 90 “it J 
’ VII. Pronouns. 
Personal, ἐγώ, σύ, οὗ, . " 90 |\Definite, δεῖνα, ° ° 91 


Emphatic, αὐσός, - Σ - 90 Interrogative, vis, - δ ay) | 
Reflexive, —* σεαυτοῦ, tav- Relative, ὅς» a 91 
Tov, ‘ 4 91 |Relative Indefinite, ae - oor 
Reciprocal, ἀλλήλων, . ὖὃθΡἩ 91|1ηἀεῇηϊίο, cis,  . ‘ Ἂ 91 | 
‘ TABLE OF NUMERALS. a 
1. Apsecrives, . ᾿ 4. Multiple, é ἘΠ... 


1. Cardin, τς 2, 120| 5. Proportional, . . 
2. Ordinal, . . . 120\II. Apverss, 9 ne 
᾿ 8. Temporal, - « .. 121ΠΠ|. Sussrantives, τ ἢ asta 


TABLES OF CONJUGATION. 


I, Formation or tHe Tenses, 196) XII. Ὁ, Purr Verzs 
ΤΙ. Frexiste Envines, 136 1. Contract, 
III. Terminations or Vzrzs 1. σικάω, . : 
IN i; ee 137 2. φιλῶν νι. τοις 
IV. Recurar Vesti ction oF 8. δηλόω, raged Ἢ ; 
tue Active VoIcE, 138 u. Verbsin ws © “i i 
V. Recutar TERMINATIONS OF 1. iornus, ΝΑ: 164 | 
' wor Mippie anv Passive 2. weiaaSal, . - 166 + 
Voices, - . 140 πῶ το ΡΥ . : 166 i 
VI. Active Vorce oF “Bourse 4. δίδωμι, 4 . 168 t , 
TRANSLATED, τὴς 142 δ. δείκνυμι; se 170° 
VIL. Active Voice or Bovasiw, , 144 6... φημ, 3 o 8271 
VIII. Mipprx anv Passive Voices PL) ‘ 172. 
\OF βουλεύω, |. 2 £46 8. εἰμί, 9. εἶμι, ow 1178 
Ix. A. Mute Verss... uu. Second Aorists, 2 
.1. Labial, ... γράφω, «Ὁ 149 1. ἔβην, ° soi 174 
ΓΙ ( 2. λείπω; «Ὁ 150 Qe ἀπέδραν, ὙΠ ἢν 74 
11. “Palatal, πράσσω, .. 151 3. ἔγνων, ᾿- Ἢ 174 
Ii. Lingual, | 1. πείθω, 152 4, ἔδυν, - 174 
2. κομίζω, 158 XIIL E. Prereririve Viens, Y= 
X. B. Liquip VERBS, 1. oda, ; 175 
1, ἀγγίλλω, terry ad. 154 2. δέδοικα and δίδια, » 175 
} 2. φαίνω, Ἢ ; 156 3. ἧμαι, am ° 175 
XI. C. Doustz Consonant ‘Venrzs, 4, κάϑημαι, 4 - 176 
1. αὔξω or αὐξάν, 6 157 “5. κεῖμαι» > > 176 
2. κίκαμραι, ἐλήλεγμᾶι, 157) alge: 


= TT ae 
wi - 
A - 
ar 
' νὰ ἣν 
᾿ , an λυ | 
a φ, 5 lie 


rae 
bes : nee: 


[F244 A Pt ee {i 4): ΤΡ ᾿ {11 tf intr τ. Ὁ 


+o. ‘Taste, OF THE : ας 


cys ae 
Clss 1. oi. ΠῚ 


Sa tiecins L Te As. 5 ἀνψιοΥνς Ὁ Ayn) BE, oO. 

ὩΣ Orders. Sounds: Sounds. Sounds. So 

Simple Vowels ; Short, 1. Page. 
ienene 2. ἃ tm ὦ 


Diphthongs in « { Brapeyn. ὃ. ἀξ. εἰ οἱ 
"οὶ Improper, 4. φ @ 
DiphtRongs in v. Tinpropees. ax" 9b: a! 


Proper, .. 5. ἄν ev ov. 


a i 


§ 60. THE Consonants. (Table I.) 


A. Associated Siouicome: 


ἊΜ 


: Class I. Ὁ Class ΠΡ Class III. 
Orders. Labials. Palatals. _ Linguals. _ 
1. Smooth Mutes, | π x tT 
| 2. Middle Mutes, ee ae ΟΝ 
3. Rough Mutes, φ x ig OV. 
4. Nasals, aye’ whey ostthne- 7 
5. Double Consonants, wi § § = 
B. Unassociated Consonants. _ τ 
THe Consonants. ᾿ iets Π.) 
Paes εἰν ον ἶεν ; Smooth, IE, ΨΚ, Σ ΓΝ 
ι i {i ἃ, γ διχονὼν we 
es ek Single, _ Rough, φ, z ϑ. Wey, 
Consonants, ὁ Semivowels, Silent, ἢ by » 9. ae 
Double, wy ἃ. GP 


Φ 174. NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. | 


ve 
bua f 


A. Mute. ae 
1. Lazrar, . 2. Pavarar. 
ὃ, vulture. δ, Arab, 6, raven, 6,%, goat. 4, hair. 4, woman. 
5. Ν. yoy “Agay κόραξ ἈἈοαἷἵξ ϑρίξ γυνή 
. 7υπός ᾿Αραβος κόρακος αἷγός τριχός γυναιιός 
. ζγυπί Ἄἄραβι κόρακι αἷγέ τριχί γυναικί 
A. γῦπα Ἄραβα κόρακα αἶχα τρίχα γυναῖκα 
Υ. ᾿ς χύναι. 
P. N. γῦπες ἴάραβες κόρακες αἶχες τρίχες γυναῖκες 
G. γυπῶν ᾿Αἀράβως κοράκων αἰγῶν τριχῶν γυναικῶν 
D. γυψὲ ἤάφαψι κόραξι asi ϑριξί γυναιξί, 
A. γῦπας ᾽άραβας κόρακας αἶχας τρίχας γυναῖκας 
D.N. γῦπε ἔἌραβε ᾿κόραχκε αἷγε τρίχε γυναῖκε 
G. γυποῖν “AgdéBow κοράκοιν αἰγοῖν τριχοῖν γυναικοῖν 
8. Lineuat, 
a. Masculine and Feminine, 
ὃ, ἡ, child. ὃ, foot. ἡ, key. 6, ἡ, bird. 
| S. N. παῖς πούς κλείς ὄρνις 
᾿ G. παιδός ποδός χλειδός — ὄρντϑος 
q D. παιδὶ ποδὶ κλειδί ὄρνιϑιυ 
t A. παῖδα πόδα κλεῖδα, κλεῖν ὄρνιϑα, ὄρνιν 
Υ͂. παὶ . t 
i P. N. aaidec Ἀῴπόδες κλεῖδες, κλεὶς ὄρνιϑες, ὄρνεις 
- G. παΐδ᾽ν᾽ ποδὼν κλειδῶν ὀρνίϑων, ὄρνεων 
Ὦ. παισί ποσὶ κλεισί ὄρνισι 
Α. παῖδας πόδας κλεῖδας, κλεῖς ὄρνιϑας, ὄρνεις, doris 
D. N. παῖδε πόδε κλεῖδε ὄρνιϑε 
G. παίδον ποδοῖν κλειδοῖν ὀρνίϑοιν 
β. Neuter. 
τὸ, body. τὸ, light..xb, liver. τὸ; horn. 
S. N. σῶμα φῶς ἧπαρ κέρας 
G. σώματος φωτός ἥπατος κέρᾶτος, κέραος, κέρως 
D. σώματι φωτὲ ἥπατι κέρατι,  κέραϊ, κέρᾳ 
P. Ν. σώματα τ φῶτα ἥπατα κέρατα, κέραα, κέρα 
G. σωμάτων φώτων ἡπάτων κεράτων, κεράων, κερῶν 
; D. σώμασι φωσὶ NACL κέρασι 
᾿ D. Ν. σώματε φῶτε ἥπατε κέρατε, κέραε, κέρα 
᾿ G. σωμάτοιν φώτοιν ἥπάτοιν κεράτοιν, κεράοιν, κερῷν 


an 8 278. I. ForMATION OF THE. TENSES. 


PReFIXxEs. TENSES. TERMINATIONS. 
ὙΡΉΘ ΟῚ Active. Middle. '~ ve. 
PRESENT, ~—_, pus ὁμαι, μαι 96: 
Augm. ImperFEcT, ov, » “Ou, μὴν 
wee” Porerey λον σὰ | σομαῖν" "Ὁ ϑήσομαι 
mn 2 Furore, οἷ ἘΝ ἤσομαι 
Augm. Aorist, . ty Be σα σάμην ny 
_Augm. 2 Aorist, ον,» όμην, μὴν nv 
Redupl. Perrecr, κα μαι 
Redupl. 2 ῬΕΒΡΕΟΥ, α . i 
Augm. Redupl. Puuperrecr, xe pny 
Augm. Redupl. 2 PLUPERFECT, δι» 
_Redupl. 3 Fourure, oF Ἢ ᾿ 
{ 
§ 279. Il. ΕἼΜΕΧΙΒΙΕ Ewpinas.. Ἔ 
Cuass I. ΞΌΒΙΕΟΤΙΨΕ, ἡ. 
Orders. 1. Prim. 42, Second. 8, Imp. 4. Inf. 5. Part. 
S. 1 w γ, μὲ | vot, y,t N. γτς 
ς ς ϑι πο νον pen με οὖν 
9. σι * τῶ chatedh 1 Ὁ at 
Ρ.1 μὲν μεν τ ΑΕ. γτος 
Vrowgasvoh χε τε YTONS 
3 vv oar, ¥, ὃν); τῶσαν, γτων Ῥ 
Ώ.1 μὲν μεν ᾿ς ἀχὸ 
2 τὸν τον τον 
9. τὸν τὴν τῶν 


Cuass II. Ossective. 


Orders. 1. Prim. 2. Second. 3. Imp. 4. Inf. 
S. 1 po μην oto 
2 oa, αἱ 00, 0 00, 0 ; 
ὅν ταῖΐ -" ες τὸ σϑω 
P. 1 μεϑα, μεσϑα peda 
σϑε σϑε σϑε 
3 »ται γτο σϑωσαν, σϑὼν 


D. 1 μεϑα, μεϑον μεϑα 
2 σϑον σϑον σϑον 
9. odor σϑην σϑων 


VI. Active Voice oF THE ΕἸ 


δ 284. 
Present. Imperfect. Future. 
Ind. 5. 1 βουλεύω ἐβούλευον βουλεύσω 
2 βουλεύεις éBovlevsg βουλεύσεις a 
ὶ .8 βουλεύει ἐβούλευε βουλεύσει ΕΝ 
᾿ Ρ. 1 βουλεύομεν ἐβουλεύομεν βουλεύσομεν iq ’ 
2 βουλεύετε. ἐβουλεύετε βουλεύσετε μῆνις. 
9 βουλούδααν ἐβούλευον βουλεύσουσι — 
΄ 434 ; 7 ; ἢ 
Ὦ. 2 βουλεύετον ἐβουλεύετον ᾿ βουλεύσετον ie 
; πο a ἐβουλευέτην ' 4 
Subj. 8. 1 βουλεύω τὰ a 
2 βουλεύῃς be 
3 βουλεύῃ ” 7) 
oes | fovietapa 7 
. 2 βουλεύητε cee 
᾿ 9 βουλεύωσι : ἽΝ 
4 D. 2 βουλεύητον τ 
ΕἾΕΝ ΡΟΣ ‘i 1 βουλεύοιμι βουλεύσοιμι 
ἶ ote Ὁ) ᾿βουλεύοις βουλεύσοις. 
| ο 9 βουλεύοι βουλεύσοι᾽ ; 
| we. i βουλεύοιμεν βουλεύσοιμεν a 
| 2 βουλεύοιτε βουλεύσοιτε ; 
3 βουλεύοιεν βουλεύσοιεν φ ἢ 
. D. 2 βουλεύοιτον Bovkevoortoy ὦ 
4 3 βουλευοίτην βουλευσοίτην ἐ ΗΝ 
a 
~ Imp.Su 2 Bovievs 
| ᾿ 3 βουλευέτω ; 
νι 2 βουλεύετε - 
. δ 3 βουλευέτωσαν, 
᾿ τος ΠΡ βουλευόντων 
ΡΒ, ᾿βουλεύετον 
: pPovlevérew 0 4 
Infin. Bovlevew | βουλεύσειν 
Part. βουλεύων βουλεύσων 
ba Ry 
fake te ee 


Aorist, Ὁ — Rerfeet. 
éBovkevow ὃ βεβούλευκα 
ἐβούλευσας | βεβούλευκας 
éBovleves ᾿ς βεβούλευκε 
ἐβουλεύσαμεν ee 
ἐβουλεύσατε λογὴν 
ἐβούλευσαν 3 ay ἐβουλεύκᾶσι 
ἐβουλεύσατον | Ca. 
ἐβουλευσάτην na pret 
βουλεύσω oF: 
βουλεύσῃς ; 
βουλεύσῃ - : * 
βουλεύσωμεν 
βουλεύσητε 

᾿ βουλεύσωσι 
᾿ βουλεύσητον 
βουλεύσαιμι 


βουλεύσαις, βουλεύσειας 
βουλεύσαι, βουλεύσειε 


βουλεύσαιμεν 
βουλεύσαιτε 
βουλεύσαιεν, βουλεύσειαν ; 


βουλεύσαιτον. 
βουλευσαίτην 


βούλευσον 
βουλευσάτω 


βουλεύσατε 
βουλευσάτωσαν, 
βουλευσάντων 


βουλεύσατον ἀ 
βουλευσάτων 


βουλεῦσαι βεβουλευκέναι 


βουλεύσᾶς ᾿βεβουλευκώς 


REGULAR ‘Vero Bovievo, to plan, to ‘counsel. 


᾿ἐβεβουλευκείτην 


Pluperfect. 
ἐβεβουλεύκει» 
ἐβεβουλεύκεις 
ἐβεβουλεύκεν ὁ 


ἐβεβουλεύκειμεν 

ἐβεβουλεύκειτε, 

ἐβεβουλεύκεισαν, 
ἐβεβουλεύκεσαν 


ἐβεβουλεύκειτον 


2" 7 t ey 
Bas a 


> 


Nasi. Lapras. . 2, Asinw, to leave wah 


sonFaerat hs ct Active Voice. 
ὡς εἴ Present. τς, Imperfect.” Future, 2 Perfect, 2 Pluperfect. 
Ind... λείπω ““ Σἔλειποφ λείψω. λέλοιπα ἐλελοίπειν. 


Subj. λείπω : fi πὲς ᾿ ἮΝ 
Ορί. λείποιμι -λείψοιμι πὰ 
Imp. λεῖπε ον on 
Inf. λείπειν τς λείψειν λελοιπέναι 
Part. λείπων. ' τ λείψων λελοιπώς 
ἐκ: ᾿ἀοτί πον τοῦδι Tie Aonist IL SL 
- «τὶν μα, 50% αὐ Subj. Opt. Imp. wep Daath doll 
| S. 1 ἔλιπον λίπω λίποιμι λιπεῖν 
Q ἔλιπες λίπῃς λίπος λίπε θαδλυσας, 
3 ἔλιπε λίπῃ λίποι λιπέτω Part. 
P. 1 ἐλίπομεν λίπωμεν λίποιμεν λιπών 
2 ἐλίπετε λίπητε λίποιτε λίπετε λιποῦσα 
᾿ 9. ἔλιπον λίπωσν λίποιεν λιπέτωσαν, λιπόντων λιπόν 
; D. - ἐλίπετον λίπητον λίποιτον λίπετον λιπόντος _ 


ἐλιπέτην λιποίτην λιπέτων ; λιπούσης 


Mippie AND -Passive VOoIcEs. 


4 


Present. Future Mid.” Perfect, _ Aorist Pass, 
λείπομαν λείψομαι λέλειμμαι.. hip qv © 
1. λείπωμαι ; λειφϑὼῶ 
.. λειποίμην λειψοίμην λειφϑ είην 
- λείπου λέλειψο. λείφϑητι 
λείπεσϑαι λείψεσϑαι  λελεῖφϑαν λειρϑῆναι 
. λειπόμενος λειψόμενος λελειμμένος λειφϑ εἰς 
Imperfect. : 3 Future. Pluperfect, Future Pass. 


ἐλειπόμην λελείψομαι ἐλελείμμην λειφϑήσομαι 


Aorist II, Mrpptz. 


ee Ind. Subj. ~ Opt. Imp. Inf. 
S. 1 ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαν λιποίμην dante So 
f 2 ἐλίπου λίπῃ λίποιο λιποῦ ὸ 
ᾧ 9. ἐλίπετο λίπηται λίποιτο λιπέσθϑω, Part. 
P. 1 ἐλιπόμεϑα λιπώμεϑα λιποίμεϑα λιπόμενος 


2 ἐλίπεσϑε λίπησϑθε λίποισϑε λίπεσϑε 

3 ἐλίποντο λίπωνταν δλίποιτο λιπέσθωσαν, λιπέσϑων 
D. 2 ἐλίπεσϑον λίπησϑον λίποισϑον λίπεσϑον 
3 ἐλιπέσϑην “λιποίσϑην λιπέσϑων 


15 


ie 
+ 


Pe 


ΑΞ οὐ 


at  ὅ “Φ ἀῤθ- 


